iat be ot
Sees Oo eaeeaiee
: Sreaeeet
eee tar ee
7
‘
ay
beigeat
PROCKEDINGS
OF THE
SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS
OF THE
ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY
OF LONDON
FOR THE YEAR
PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY,
AND SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE.
LONDON :
MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO,
PATERNOSTER ROW.
i Es ats aes
OF THE
“COUNCIL AND OFFICERS
OF THE
ZOOLOGICAL
SOCIETY OF LONDON.
1886.
COUNCIL.
(lected April 29, 1886.)
Prorgessorn W. H. Frowrr, LL.D., F.R.S., President.
Liror.-Gen, Tae Lorp ABIncer,
Cap}
Wittram T. Branrorp, Esq.,
F.R.S.
Masor-Gun. Henry Crerx, R.A.,
F.R.S.
Henry E. Dresser, Esq.
Cuartes Drummonp, Esq., T'rea-
sure’.
F. DuCanr Gopmay, Esq.
Lievr.-Cot. H. H. Gopwry-Atvs-
TEN, F.R.S., Vice-President.
Artnur Grote, Ese., Vice-Presi-
dent.
JD reg ANE Cw ise Ce
F.R.S.,
GUNTHER,
Dr. Eywarp Hamirron.
E. W. H. Hotpsworrn, Esq.
Pxorussor Mrvarz, F.R.S., Vice-
President.
Prorrssor H. N. Mosetey, M.A.,
F.R.S.
Hewry Pottocr, Esq.
Tur Lorp Artuyr Russet.
Osprrt Satyin, Esq., F.BS.,
Vice-President.
W. Aysurorp Sanrorp, Esq.
Howarp Saunpers, Hsq., F.L.S.
Purp Luriny Scrater, Esq.,
M.A.,Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary.
Sureron-Gen. L. C. Srewarr.
PRINCIPAL OFFICERS.
P. L. Scrarer, Esq., M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary.
Franx E. Bepparp, Esq., M.A., Prosector.
Mr. A. D. Barrrurr, Superintendent of the Gardens.
Mr. F. H. Waternovuse, Librarian.
_Mr. Joun Barrow, Accountant.
Mr. W. J. Witxiams, Chief Clerk.
LIST
CON TE inB UG OURS,
With References to the several Articles contributed by euch.
g :
ANbeRSON, R. J., M.D., ‘M A., Professor of Natural History,
Queen’s College, Galway.
On the so-called Pelvisternum of certain Vertebrates... .. 163
Bepparp, Frank E., M.A., F.R.S.E., F.ZS., Prosector to
the Society.
Preliminary Notice of the Isopoda collected during the
Voyage of H.M.S. ‘ Challenger.’ —Part III. ............ 97
Note on the Air-sacs of the Cassowary.... .. 145
On the Syrinx and othcr Points in the Anatomy of the
Caprimulgidze 147
Note on the Structure of a large Species of Earthworm
from New Caledonia. (Plate XIX.) .......... 168
On some Points in the Anatomy of Ohauna chavaria.... 178
Observations on the Ovarian Ovum of Lepidosiren ( Pro-
topterus). (Plates XXVIII. & XXIX.Y. 22.0.0... 272
Descriptions of some new or little-known Earthworms,
together with an Account of the Variations in Structure
exhibited by Perionyx excavatus, E. P. .............40- 298
Notes on the Convoluted Trachea of a Curassow (Notho-
crax urumutum), aud on the Syrinx in certain Storks...... 321
Observations on the Development and Structure of the
Ovum in the Dipnoi. , (Plates LII.—LIV.) .. .... ececli on. BOR
lv
Page
Bewt, F. Jerrrey, M.A., Sec. R.MS., F.Z.S., Professor of
Comparative Anatomy in King’s College, London.
Remarks upon the Species of Balanoglossus exhibited to
the Society on November 17th last year ...........-++-- 154
Note on Bipalium kewense, and the Generic Characters of
Land-Planarians; (Plate XVIIL.) ...0.....0--00sen0e ae
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, an object made from some
portion of the skin of a Mammal ...... .... 0... - se eees 420
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Tenia nana 503
Buanrorp, Witit1iam Tuomas, F.R.S., F.Z.S., &c.
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a stuffed skin of Para-
COXUFUS J TAONA. 5 5 yao do G2 -0u oes «son 6 Dale eckoselays og Be AMctete wae
Boutencer, G. A., F.Z.S.
Description of a new Iguanoid Lizard living in the Society’s
Gardens: (Plate KAIIL.) ... 25 pewipeieees Pee ee 241
Remarks on Specimens of Rana arvalis exhibited in the
Society’s Menagerie. (Plate XXIV.) ........02 + eeeeee 242
First Report on Additions to the Batrachian Collection in
the Natural History Museum. (Plate XXXIX.) ........ 411
On two European Species of Bombinator. (Plate L.).... 499
On the South-African Tortoises allied to Testudo geome-
drica. 4 (Plates LVL Lee L VINE.) 0... cite s.c ee eee 540
Remarks on Prof. W. K. Parker’s paper on the Skull of
the Chameleons........... ia a's Seals Pea ote oa en
Bourne, Atrrep Grsps, D.Sc. (Lond.), F.L.S., Fell. Univ.
Coll. Lond., Fell. Madras Univ., Professor of Biology in
the Presidency College, Madras.
On Indian Earthworms.—Part I. Preliminary Notice of
Earthworms from the Nilgiris and Shevaroys............ 662
Bourne, Giusert C., B.A., New College, Oxford.
General Observations on the Fauna of Diego Garcia,
GRaSee MTOM: .\.ereta news 3 tit stele ee ee bette eke eee 331
¥
Page
Brapy, Georcr Stewarpson, M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., Professor
of Natural History in the Durham College of Science,
Newcastle-upon-Tyne.
Notes on Freshwater Entomostraca from South Australia.
Pete AN EE Ria Wate, Be in AS sg he a brakta Coates Sea pyre 82
Butter, Artuur G., F.L.S., F.Z.S., &e.
DRO He GN APOE METAR: oan ic nse wns g she banter cas see y's ER 80
On Lepidoptera collected by Major Yerbury in Western
Poe GCP RON YM waiciare « pias «Weer O95
CocKkERELL, T. D.
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a living specimen of a
Variety of Parmacella valenciennesi...........00.+0++++ 137
Couett, Rosert, C.M.Z.S.
Notice of a Memoir containing an Account of the External
Characters of the Northern Fin-whale...............00 82
On a new Pediculate Fish from the Sea off Madeira.
PLO ORV) 4 aya areca eet ade is Seater xia crate eaiaes, LOS
On the Hybrid between Zagopus albus and Tetrao tetriz.
(Plates XXI. & XXII.) . es ee 2
On the External Characters of of Rudolph? S Donan (Bale-
noptera borealis). (Plates XXV. & XXVI.)............ 243
On Phascologale virginia, a rare Pouched Mouse from
Northern Queensland. (Plate LX.) ............-+ alvaepoae
Corné ty, J. M., C.M.ZS.
Letter from, respecting the breeding of Michie’s Deer in
PAN GMEHARONEG, “Sn spatels's 0 gas sot we're toe sews pero Cenieerd | OLO
Crane, AGNES.
On a Brachiopod of the Genus Atretia, named in MS. by
Palate Del: Davidedis, oc). 2s iazeniosgs .cekeesnsa- 18h
e Page
Crow ey, Puiip, F.Z.S.
Exhibition of some Pupz of Nocturnal Lepidoptera from
Watale ce. oe ci occas daak. cic 0 Uh eee ea eee
Cunnincuam, J. T., B.A., F.R.S.E., Fellow of University
College, Oxford, and Superintendent of the Scottish
Marine Station.
On the Mode of Attachment of the Ovum of Osmerus
eaerigma.. (Plite: SEM) ions sb a's ape- was ons min Se
Dosis, W. H.
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Sabine’s
Gull (Yema sabinii), shot at Mostyn, on the coast of Flint-
shires NOLEDAW ALES fispc orstyeya sie’ o oh oreysima eee Dic ASE oe ee
Druce, Hersert, F.L.S., F.R.GS., F.Z.S.
Descriptions of some new Species of Heterocera from
Tropical Africa. (Plates XXXVITI. & XXXVIII.)........ 409
Exwes, Henry Joun, F.Z:S.
On Butterflies of the Genus Parnassius. (Plates 1.-IV.). 6
Emin-Bey, Dr.
Letter from, containing remarks upon the presence of an
Anthropoid Ape in Eastern Equatorial Africa............ 418
Finsca, Dr. Orro, C.M.Z.S. &e.
On a new Species of Wild Pig from New Guinea... .... 217
Fiower, Witt1am Henry, LL.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., President
of the Society, Superintendent of the Natural History
Collection, British Museum.
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a rare species of Armadillo
belonging to the Museum of the Scarborough Philosophical
I a ain ae Oe cee te ae cee a eo
Gerrarp, Epwarp, Jun.
Exhibition of specimens of the heads and skulls of two
African Rhinoceroses (Rhinoceros bicornis and R. simus) .. 125
vii
Gopman, Freverick DuCang, F.R.S., F.LS., F.Z.S.
Exhibition of a series of examples of Danais plexippus
from various localities ....
Gooncuixp, J. G., F.Z.S., F.G.S., H.M. Geological Survey.
Observations on the Disposition of the Cubital Coverts in
154
TLE ee ae Penn See» ee ae I ge 184
Goruaw, Rev. H. S., F.Z.S., F.E.S.
On new Genera and Species of Endomychide. (Plate
“a er ee Me eee ene eee Oe ere 154
GintHerR, Atsert C.L.G., M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S.,
F.Z.S., Keeper of the Zoological Department, British
Museum.
Second Note on tle Melanotic Variety of the South-
IRE WCU DRE: . or.5367, Stniees See vic sihe is Sunil Ghee Siete < SENS 203
Exhibition of a specimen of a small Fish of the genus
Fierasfer imbedded in a Pearl-Oyster ...............455 318
Kirpy, W. F., Assistant in Zoological Department, Brirish
Museum (S. Kensington).
Remarks on four rare Species of Moths of tze Family
ppeegier) SCL ate Oe WELL ee Sos ed. SS ee ee 269
Cn asmall Collection cf Dragonilies from Murree and
Campbellpore (N.W. India), received from was J. WW.
Merbury, i. AS “(Plate Deer ye ae ales Oa. 325
Lankester, E. Ray, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., Jodreli Professor
of Zoology in University Coiiege, London.
Exhibition of a drawing of a restoration of Archaeopteryx. 125
Layarp, EpGar Leropotp, F.Z.S., H.B.M. Consul, New
Caledonia.
Exhibition of a rare Beetle, and of a series of Shells of the
genus Bulimus . 267
Vill
Page
Lrecu, Joun Henry, F.L.S., F.Z.S.
On a Variety of Anthocharis eupheno, from Mogador.... 122
LEeNDENFELD, R. v., Ph.D., F.L.S., Assistant in the Biological
Laboratory of University College, London.
On the Systematic Position and Classification of Sponges. 558
LurKen, Dr. Curistian F., F.M.Z.S. &e.
Letter from, containing a notice of the habitat of Chiropo-
dona: penicilattis accom 2a 56 cb been ss «ne 2c ns eee
LypEkkeER, R., B.A., F.G.S., F.Z.S., &e.
Description of three Species of Scelidotherium. (Plates
REVI. RETR eee caves or ee Seen Toe ace tee
Martn, J. B., F.Z.S.
Exhibition of a large Tusk of the Indian Elephant ...... 176
Maruew, Gervase F., Staff-Paymaster Royal Navy, F.L.S.,
F.Z.S., &e.
Descriptions of some new Species of Rhopalocera from the
Solomon Islands. (Plate XXXIV.)............42 -+ +02. B43
Meyer, Dr. Apotr Bernuarp, C.M.Z.S., Director Royal
Zoological Museum of Dresden.
On a fourth Male Specimen of King William the Third’s
Paradise birds. on oo.ck Peale 2 pe. dene <3 2.9.25 ab ae ee
Letter from, communicating remarks by Mr. K. G. Henke
on a specimen of Hybrid Grouse in the Dresden Museum .. 419
Mituais, Joun G., F.Z.S.
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, specimens of the Ivory
Gull (Larus eburneus), shot in Scotland ........++...+-- 137
Minot Dr. C.S.
Letter from, calling attention to the Elizabeth Thompson
Science UNE ceca cc ac 6 GN @ eicfoulsiandie cls o's aie eee hels beeatet: 6
Page
Monticetty, Fr. S., D.Sc.
Contribution to a Knowledge of the South-Italian Chiro-
RCCL A areey fetter tpaNete tale octave atta Mammon oct chet weete" iol al obs ocd 93
Ocixsy, J. Doucias, Department of Fishes, Australian Mu-
seum, Sydney.
On an undescribed Pimelepterus from Port Jackson .... 539
Ramsay, R. G. Warpuaw, F.Z.S., F.L.S.
On a new Species of Bird of the Genus Copsychus ...... 123
Rosset, C. W.
Exhibition of Photographs taken in the Maldive Islands,
and remarks on his Zoological Collections ........... omen 290
Satvin, Ossert, F.R.S., F.Z.S., &e.
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a living specimen of
Bipalium kewense, found at Hawksfold, Sussex .......... 205
Saunpers, Howarp, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &e.
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, an adult specimen of the
Sooty Tern (Sterna fuliginosa) caught near Bath ........ 6
On the Birds obtained by Mr. G. C. Bourne on the Island
ei@hers Garcia, Chases Growpit iis) «6 <6 «leied oes wos 3% 25885
Exhibition of, on behalf of Mr. R. J. Howard, and re-
marks upon, a specimen of a hybrid between the Tufted
Weakened PNeNROCHATA ts ac co 8s set athe tan aiae's oe olan 550
Sciater, Paiwie Lutwey, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to
the Society.
Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
BCE HEED OG De! on .\c (cf Pah mc kl) ap opine aegesineea te al
Exhibition of Lepidopterous Insects bred in the Insect-
house durmig the part SeasAN .<<6+.e<e, ce enieeinds ma ewl| 2
x
Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
RRA SO io afuisiswat mca wiaye = sara tients Sioa a icicles
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of a newly
described Paradise Bird (Paradisornis rudolphi)..........
Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
Beuraary TES6° cis eb oS ee © ow ie eee
Note on the External Characters of Rhinoceros simus.
‘SUL. oy IR) naan Peace Pe re agro
Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
March; 1886es ewes Aone otieh Sie zie oc homage yet aes
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, the Heads and Horns of
two Species of Antelopes from Lamoo, East Africa (Strepsi-
ceros imberbis and Damalis senegalensis) ..
Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
PES SBE: ectk Sate cian .
6» R/C Mme Te im hd eo eile. 10 ess \0)\aye) ole .e6 yal a wine
Remarks on the various Species of Wild Goats. (Plates
XXXI. & XXXII.)
eis) (s e.p elm lel eis wiv wate alates Miele aia ee ekatalte
Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
May 1886
Sep lalatelel eels) /eiiatelze fale. rey eka” eV) le eel wth eksc « is) e of pirel ele) ktere
Remarks on interesting animals observed during a visit to
the Zoological Gardens of Rotterdam, Amsterdam, Mees
Antwerp, and Ghent .
Exhibition, on behalf of Mr. J. Brazier, C.M.Z.S., of a
series of 55 eggs laid by a Pacific Porphyrio ...........
List of a Collection of Birds from the Province of Tara-
paca, Northern Chili. (Plate XXXVI.)..........
Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
June, July, August, September, and October 1886
On two Species of Antelopes from Somali-Land. (Plate
LL)
On an apparently new Parrot of the Genus Conurus living
in the Society’s Gardens. (Plate LVI.) ..
Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in
November 1886
naa" 81d OMS EMCO O Se Ow Ne Teele wel We we ine sla ee er a cee
266
314
318
. 320
. 330
xi
Scuater, W.L., B.A., F.Z.S., Assistant to the Jodrell Professor
of Zoology, University College, London.
On a new Madreporarian Coral of the Genus Stephano-
trochus from the British Seas, with Notes on its Anatomy.
(Plates XII.-XIV.) ........
Sresoum, Henry, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &e.
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Ross’s
Gull (Larus rossi), shot near Christianshaab, in Greenland. .
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of the Lesser
White-fronted Goose (Anser albifrons minutus), shot near
Holy Island
Suarpr, R. Bowpter, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &c., Department of
Zoology, British Museum.
Notes on Specimens in the Hume Collection of Birds.—
No. 1. On the Hawfinch from Attock .. ..........
Notes on some Birds from Perak..-.....
Notes on Specimens in the Hume Collection of Birds.—
No. 2. On some Rose-Finches. No. 3. On Lalage melano-
thorax. No. 4. On some Flycatchers of the Genus Stphia.
SHuFELDT, R. W., M.D., C.M.Z.S.
Contributions to the Anatomy of Geococcyx californianus.
WE rates) se Ve) oh. «, sfoie samp tetas & SRAM O AN.
Additional Notes upon the Anatomy of the Trochili,
Caprimulgi, and Cypselid@ ................ Geli aes
Sressine, Rev. T. R. R.
Notice and Abstract of a Memoir on some new Amphi-
podcus Crustaceans from Singapore and New Zealand .....
STERNDALE, R. A., F.Z.S.
Extract from a letter addressed to Sir Victor Brooke, con-
cerning a case of Hybridism between Ovis hodgsoni and
UNO i Ae ee aa a ae
Page
128
. 420
96
. d00
353
466
xii
Sryan, F. W., F.Z.S.
Letter from, respecting some Chinese animals ..........
Sutton, J. Buanp, F.R.C.S., Lecturer on Comparative
Anatomy, Middlesex Hospital, Erasmus Wilson Lecturer
on Pathology, Royal College of Surgeons.
On some Specimens of Disease from Mammals in the
Nactetyce Gardens: ct..4. axuteatohrtecee\e (ees ee. cacckls eats
On the Intervertebral Disk between the Odontoid Process
and the Centrum of the Axis in Man ....
On Atavism. A Critical and Analytical Study ........
Swinnog, Colonel-C., F.L.S., F.Z.S.
On the Lepidoptera of Mhow, in Central India. (Plates
Taczanowskl, L., C.M.ZS.
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a skin of an Owl (Budo
blakistoni) from the Ussuri country on the frontiers of Corea
TEGETMEIER, W. B., F.Z.S.
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a skin of a Pheasant
from the Persian borders of Transcaucasia .............
Tuomas, OLDFIELD, F.Z.S.
On the Mammals presented by Allan O. Hume, Esq., C.B.,
to the Natural History Museum. (Plates V. & VI.)......
Notes on a striking instance of Cranial Variation due to
Age. “(Plate Skis): ieee ees
On the Wallaby commonly known as Lagorchestes fasciatus.
(Celt LIC cnen ener
Tuomson, ARTHUR.
Report on the Insect-house in the Society’s Gardens for
USSD... sya, MME ee ee cittee aan Mice ges < » eee ae ee
Page
267
206
337
551
. 421
125
81
54
125
xiil
Page
Tristram, Rey. Canon H. B., M.A. (Oxon.}, D.D., F.R.S.,
C.M.Z.S.
On an apparently new Species of Duck (Dafila) from the
Crom peeilions (Pinte WEE. Mein na nghinictnicedeercere sa JD
Vipan, Capt. J. A. M., F.Z.S.
Letter from, on the mode of Nesting of a South-American
Siluroid Fish (Callichthys littoralis) ........-....+.00.. 330
WHITAKER, Joserpu, F.Z.S.
Exhibition of a specimen of Wilson’s Phalarope shot in
BIBI a Saray. «meet Ae 6 Ane e ee hae aa eens: « os See 297
Woopwarp, A. Smiru, F.G.S., British Museum (Natural
History).
On the Relations of the Mandibular and Hyoid Arches in a
Cretaceous Shark (Hybodus dubrisiensis, Mackie). (PlateXX.) 218
Note on the Presence of a Columella (Epipterygoid) in the
Pa FMC ha OSPR ici 2 5 nk 0) AMA Sichnod wien ss RDS Ss Oe 405
On the Anatomy and Systematic Position of the Liassic
Selachian, Sgualoraja polyspondyla, Agassiz. (Plate LV.).. 527
Woopwaxp, Henry, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., F.Z.S., &e.
Exhibition of, and remarks upon, specimens of animals
commensal or parasitic in the shell of Meleagrina margaritifera 176
Wrieut, Cuarces A., F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.
Exhibition of a specimen of a Dove from Malta
Wricut, Professor R. Ramsay, F.Z.S.
Note on an Ectoparasite of the Menobranch............ 343
EE REE Peet Hine
~~ “cine Sel abs
- i , =
: Si
iS AL: Tacit dae
LIST OF PLATES.
1886.
Plate Page
BS > a
Il. ( Structure and Development of Parnassius .......... 6
IV. ‘
MMe ES IS woe Seo BO SE ADO Orolo cae SCO ae 54
WA se SCIRTOPLETUS CRUSOE 6 oa a.6s vse alee see owes fomeee so
VT ee) file, MOWeST rast Sete Cie ha reae afofele) siejntatolehensy aielielde ac pe 79
VDI
IX. | New Australian Entomostraca ....,.00eseeeeereces 82
X.
XI. Skulls of Mustela pennanti oo... eevee tcveee neni 125
XII.
xin. Stephanotrochus moseleyanus .,....++..>+ 128
XIV.
MV mme LEO IIE TLUCH CR: ale « -fayategtiierotatolel ae este) « 0 s1s eho «= 138
XVI. Fig. 1. Head of Rhinoceros simus. Fig. 2. R. bicornis. 143
XVII. New Coleoptera of the Family Endomychide ........ 154
XVIII. Bipalium kewense, in various stages of contraction . 166
RIX. Acanthodrilus layardi.. 000 sve ccseaens . 168
KX. Hyhodus dubrisiensis, Mackie... 2... 0006 20000. .se0ee 218
heen Hybrid Grouse between Lagopus albus and Tetrao tetriz. 224
PONCE NGFenosawr a CryeenOnuel aS 0 sleinye,si(s\ cists) els alels| oe) ole) eel ne «yo = 241
SONG STOUT ier’ os eta ond an tae ne babe oC aa oouoe mar 242
XXV. : F
XXVL OLERODLEN GA OGTEMUSI oars iateleleree ollcielehstaicls vel» © = eve 243
XXVII. New or rare Sphingide............. Sonioncentpacen 269
XXVIII. f Pr 979
XXIX. Ovyarols Proto ptertisitey.c at -\eter nice vere xts)e\ vsleelel a eltelsvellete = 72
XXX. Ovum of Osmerus.......... 292
ert PERETTI SNE cco: ated. acca ME RE 314
XXXII.) Capra sinaitica, 3 a
XXXIII. Dragonflies from N.W. India...... 0... eee c eee eee -. 325
XXXIV. New Butterflies from the Solomon Islands .......... 343
XXXV. New Lepidoptera from Western India.............. 355
Xvi
Plate Page
EONONGVI SPL OCNICOMLETUS AMES fore = =o < vious ce oils sisal eee 395
CLOG = al GTC PO" Ser Ce DMIB eID CAO PO ARO ROC Ae coe 409
XXXVIII 1. Bunea pygela. 2. Antherea dolabella ae 409
3. Chrysopoloma rosea. 4. Chrysopoloma citrina..
XXXIX. 1. Ivalus asper. 2. Geomolge fischeri .............. 411
Sr New Indian Lepidoptera®?: cae arta ac sneer 42]
XLII
see: Anatomy of Geococcyzx californianus........+. +++. 466
XLV.
XLVI. Scelidotherium leptocephalum............+.+++++. )
XEVIE Scelidothertumbravardt.. 2. ...2....00ccscas os |
XUEVUL Seelidothermmchtlense. . scree’. + «2 oe ace eine totes » 4%)
XLIX. Fig. 1. Scelidotherium bravardi. Fig. 2. S. chilense. |
Fig. 3. S. leptocephalum. Fig. 4. ?'S. bravardi.. |
L. Fig. 1. Bombinator bombinus. Fig. 2. B.igneus .. 499
Wile siGacellamasOnncs Ao oh get See ee noe ee 504
LII.
LIII. + Structure of Ovum in the Dipnoi ..........-....... 505
LIV.
UaV.c1Squaloraydon<). Rast eee cele neers stone oat 527
ANE Conus UTIL OT GUIS toe ele lanoleielalelefeeeio ite tera 538
VES 05 Lesindo vtvaments.;< 2220s ws Seen ce tte stains | 540
DL VEDE » Wes ittedos Gish. sain. wien ogee bien eee Ge {
LIX. Figs. 1-7. Lagostrophus fasciatus. Figs. 8-12. Lagor-
EhestEes bepOrOrdes ar oro «|= lavoro nate lee aiokes helo elo eee 544
EX? “Phascologale cig vince crore ernie sees ine ee 548
LIST OF WOODCUTS.
1886.
Page
Co eS REE MELE PST A nS a SAHOO Sele
Estheria lutraria ...... + (EROS iNOS DER ORCOG OoOINe Foc Ola hit Oimesk es
PR MEIA POLK UES TP Sei es Scag a tess sce ea tise yee: Sic OTE Whe tele,
PR MUARGGUE TEDOEMGE OS. 1. Le teeta ae vs See oases SF OMEN Bitideat ese
PIADNSIN OMCUILUDE Ea aia sivle olive ic lttce Dees Va teehee NSS ory teks.
Diagrams of the arrangement of the septa in the five different species
OLUSCMNUNUOCIUBSO Sa ialtstconia Sar oe cee cae ee ke det God:
Syrinx of Nyctidromus albicollis ..... ccc. cece ue eenees Shiva 49
Syrinx of Afyotheles nove-hollandi@ ...........45 PS eetts .. 149
Pyne Or Harrachomanuis Ope ee Ye ales averitettestarromeLOO
Cen Of Charen chem 1.55 wine fc aba scis's ess eek eed eae e's 180
UCnubital Region in the’Golden Plover ........6.5 Ze sccceeesvees 186
Cubital coverts in Turdus merula, Corvus, and Alauda arvensis ..., 187
Cubital coverts in Hirundo, Cypselus, Trochilus, Chasmorhynchus,
Disc el ora Udo eMepNGsloa” ear tatinsts ile <\cistelets aleiststolersserite s Mee he 188
Cubital coverts in Psittacus, Melopsittacus, and Calopsitta ........ 189
Cubital coverts in Falco and Phalacrocorar.......cececccvccucee 190
Cubital coverts in Wycticorax, Querquedula, and Meleagris ........ 191
Cubital coverts in Crax, Talegalla, Columba, and Goura ..,....... 192
Cubital coverts in Tetrao, Luplocamus, and Columba ........eeeees 194
simbiial coverts in, Peerocles. (0 him ajereiaisn: mele eniete sa. « Papcieinat es can: 195
Cubital coverts in Carpococcyx, Cuculus, and Coccystes ............ 196
FoTiDital COVES Mi, CHhOMmMim te chnes cence ce cele cota.e os i tele ets es 197
Cubital coverts in Gallinago, Scolopax, Rallus, and Sterna ........ 198
Cubital coverts in Alea, Diomedea, Sula, Fregata, and Plotus ...... 199
Cubital coverts in Disswa, Mycteria, and Leptoptilus ......0..0ee 200
(nbital coverts in WSarcorvRapnus. .. ccc ss ccecrccase sere ervey ». 201
Cubital coverts in Grus, Gypogeranus, and Pandion...........0005 202
Flat skin of Felis leopardus, var. melanoticd.......0.c ee caeee scans 204
The right funicular pouch of peritoneum of Macacus sinicus ....,, 208
Perforating ulcers in an early stage affecting the feet of a Paradoxure,
INET NUD GET ETT re ROPER OOO EI PEI OIC OIEOXCICIONS DIO.) Oyo Danycir 209
Examples of symmetrical exostoses in the skeleton of a Monkey..., 210
A Cockateel, Calopsitta nove-hollandie, with symmetrical sebaceous
CATS OM TCRE WALES Us lar cnecareilahets iulg rid oo atelacg OTRanmei yl uiearatone, ehstetn| b's 211
A follicular cyst from a Prehensile-tail Porcupine, Sphingurus
FERLCET OLE Bie 5 le eo OOD IO GONE | toi Ce GTO. aoa eO Doak 212
XVii
Page
The tunica vaginalis and testis of a Lamb affected with a con-
genital parenchymatous hydrocele ........e:eee sees rere eeaee 213
The occiput of an Ichneumon, with dislocation of the atlas and
subsequent ankylosis of that bone to the occiput ............ 214
The marsupium of a Short-headed Phalanger, Belideus breviceps,
opened in order to show a scirrhous cancer growing from the
mammary gland ......sceseeereceeeteeceeteecereeneenees 216
Tleo-czecal intussusception in a Lemur .......-..eee cece eee eee 217
Balenopterus unisetus .. 0... ccccccecceeeeeceennecneeneceeenes OE
Echinorhynchus ruber... 00sec cece eee net ence eee e ee ee eens 258
Calanus firmarchicus 0.0.0 cece crete cern eee eee neneeesceee 202
Generative organs Of Fudrilus .......ccccce sense eee e een nc tenes 803
Generative organs of Eudrilus, with bursa copulatrix laid open ..,. 805
Varieties of Pertony® eXCQVAtUS... 2.6.1 cree neste renee asnencces 310
A small Fish of the genus Fierasfer imbedded in a Pearl-Oyster...,. 319
Trachea of Nothocrax urumutum, SG ces cccccccecccecessccsssesss OE
Syrinx of Abdimia sphenorhyncha.... cc. cccevee ec eeneeeeenneeas 323
Syrinx of Xenorhynchus senegalensts... 0.60.6 c cre ee reeves neeenes B24
A vertical section through the body of the axis to show the lenticular-
shaped piece of cartilage in Man .........seseeececeeeceeee 338
A diagram of the axis vertebra to show the various nuclei in Man.. 339
A section through the human sacrum, showing the epiphysial plates
uniting with each other peripherally before fusing with their
CONLTA tania meses Meee eee cit eis Grie iaiistess Biersl> oeanee 340
Axis vertebra of a young Seal in section, showing the epiphysial
plates of the true centrum of the axis .......... Soncesoueon: 341
Map of the vicinity of Tarapaca, Chili.......-..... sess eeeeneeee 396
Bill of Pheenicopterus ANdinus oo 2csreveevevesecrsccsecascesees 400
Bill of Phoentcoptercs. JAMest .. 0%. cece ccawet essere csrsesssrecns 400
Right columella of Ichthyosaurus ...0. cee ce eee cece neenenneens 407
Lower portion of right columella of eee sg psobsoo nace 407
Lower portion of left columella of Ichthyosaurus intermedius ...... 407
Waeft columella of Hatierzn gincbata ea. 6010 20 vin duun aici) als 2m) siotooe 407
Muscles at the outer side of the elbow of the right wing of
Caprimuligus CUnOp@Us oe e oisc05 6 a 0in ajsinin e's 8s av enone omen ea 471
Muscles at the outer side of the elbow of the ieft wing of Steatornis. 471
Anconal aspect of the left humerus of Tachycineta thalassina ...... 502
Palmar aspect of the left humerus of Tachycineta thalassina ...... 502
Anconal aspect of the left humerus of Micropus melanoleucus ...... 502
Palmar aspect of the left humerus of Micropus melanoleucus ...... 502
Anconal aspect of the left humerus of Trochilus alexandri ........ 502
Palmar aspect of the left humerus of Trochilus alevandri ......++4. 502
ERRATA,
Page 164, 5th line from top, for “ Subilium” read ‘ Suprabilium,” and for
”
“ Subscapula ” read “ Suprascapula.”
164, 14th line from top, for ‘‘ Preomosterna” read “ Preomosternum.”
164, 15th line from top, for ‘‘ Hemi-pelvisterna” read “‘ Hemi-prepelvi-
sterna.”
164, 16th line from top, for ‘‘ Substernal” read “ Suprasternal.”
257. For Balenopterus read Balenophilus.
262. After Calanus finmarchicus, add “length 2 millim.”
265. Last line for “ enlarged” read “ diminished.”
28. 19th line froin the bottom for “ N.-American” read “ N,-Indian.”
Myel the samy webs: A, Ay Say }
(Mia ip Bt Ye aa} *bensan WAL SA that A
—
2
F s
A
Friall>, JO Wh Sted ei) oboe aendt iettly FG
i.
mall
r
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS
OF THE
ZOOLOGICAL SO Y OF LONDON.
a Sy.
January 19, 1836.
Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair.
The Secretary read the following report on the additions to the
Society’s Menagerie during the month of December 1885 :—
The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
erie during the month cf December was 157. Of these 2 were by
birth, 137 by presentation, 2 by purchase, 2 by exchange, and 14 on
deposit. The total number of departures during the same period,
by death and removals, was 116.
The most noticeable additions during the month were :—
1. A male Cheetah (Cynelurus jubatus), received December 8th,
presented to the Society by Nawab Mirza Hassim Ali Khan, of the
Afghan Frontier Survey. A pair of feline avimals captured, in
November 1884, near the Istoi Pass on the Perso-Afghan frontier,
when quite young, after the mother had been shot, by some of the
members of the Afghan Boundary Commission, were believed at the
time to be Snow-Leopards (Felis uncia)', and were forwarded to
Pisheen, where they were kindly kept through last summer by Mr.
H. J. Barnes, Political Agent at Quetta. The survivor of them,
having arrived in this country, proves to be not a Snow-Leopard, but
a fine young male Cheetah (Cynclurus jubatus).
The Cheetah was well known to occur in Persia (see Blanford’s
‘Kastern Persia,’ vol. ii. p. 35), but I am not aware that its occurrence
so near the frontiers of Afghanistan has been actually recorded.
2. A young female Tiger, deposited by J. E. T. Aitchison, Esq.,
1 See Sir Peter Lumsden’s letter, P. Z.8. 1885, p. GLO.
Proc. Zoo, Soc.—1886, No. I. ]
2 MR. A. THOMSON’S REPORT ON THE INSECT-HOUSE. [Jan. 19,
M.D., Naturalist to the Afghan Boundary Commission, This
specimen seems to belong to the small and densely furred form of
Felis tigris prevalent in northern latitudes. This animal is stated
to have been captured on the Hari-rud, between Sarakhs and Pul-i-
Katim.
3. Four young Gazelles obtained during the survey of the
boundary of Northern Afghanistan, and deposited by the same
gentleman. These Gazelles are probably referable to Gazel/a sub-
gutturosa, but seem to differ somewhat from our previously received
specimens of the same species.
4. Two curious hybrid Ducks bred in 1884, at Cannes, between
the Ruddy Sheldrake (Tadorna rutila) and the Egyptian Goose
(Chenalopex egyptiaca). This pair of hybrids was presented to Dr.
T. E. Charles, of Cannes, by Madame de la Blanchetain, of the same
place. Dr. Charles presented them to Sir Joseph Fayrer, who has
kindly transferred them to the Society’s Collection.
The Secretary laid upon the table a series of specimens of
Lepidopterous insects which had been bred in the Insect-House
during the past season, and read the following report upon the
subject drawn up by Mr. A. Thomson :—
The following species of insects have been exhibited in the
Insect-House during the past season :—
Silk-producing Bombyces.
Indian.
Attacus atlas. Attacus pernyt.
cynthia. Actias selene.
ricini. Antherea mylitta.
American.
Samia cecropia. Actias luna.
i ceanothi. Hypochera io.
Telea polyphemus.
African.
*Gynanisa maia. * Bunea caffraria.
* Anthereea cytherea. * Cirina forda.
sf tyrrhea.
Diurnal Lepidoptera.
Papilio podalirius.
alexanor.
machaon.
asterias.
Thais polyxena.
Parnassius apollo.
Aporia hippia.
crategi.
* Exhibited for the first time.
Huchloe cardamines.
Lycena corydon.
*Timenttis disippus.
Vanessa antiopa.
atalanta.
levana.
, Var. prorsa,
Melitcea cinvia,
1886.] MR. A. THOMSON’S REPORT ON THE INSECT-HOUSE. 3
Nocturni.
Smerinthus ocellatus. Bombyx quercus.
popult. * Hemileuca maia.
tilie. Lasiocampa quercifolia.
Sphinx ligustri. * Dipthera ludifica.
Deilephila euphorbic. Endromis versicolor.
* Hemaris marginalis. Saturnia carpini.
Euchelia jacobee. Dicranura vinula,
Callimorpha hera. *Clostera anachoreta.
Aretia caja. Notodonta ziczac.
Chelonia villica. Catocala fraxini.
Liparis chrysorrhea.
It will be noticed from the preceding list, that the three species of
European Papilio, viz. :—P. podalirius, P. alewanor, and P. machaon,
have been exhibited, and that specimens of Pupilio asterias, from
N. America, were exhibited for the. first time. Together with the
pupee of this last-named species, I obtained some very small larve
(hybernating) of Limenitis disippus. They had spun up in small
leaves, but after being in the warm Insect-House for a few days,
they came out and commenced to feed very freely upon weeping
willow ; they grew rapidly and ultimately produced some very fine
imagos, some of which I have the honour to exhibit this evening.
I again obtained by exchange some larvee of Aporia hippia, and I
took the opportunity to get a coloured drawing made of the larve,
pupa, and imago of this little-known insect, which I now exhibit’.
Of the American silk-producing Bombyces, Samia ceanothi was
exhibited for the first time, and I succeeded in obtaining fertile ova
from one pairing, and in due course the larve ; but I regret to say
that they all died. Of the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th stages, I exhibit
coloured drawings which Mr. F. W. Frohawk was good enough to
make from the living larve. The larve in the first stage were
black, similar to those of Samiu cecropia.
Although the pure-bred larve died, some hybrids which I
obtained from a pairing of a male Samia cecropia with a female
S. ceanothi, throve remarkably well, and there are over 60 cocoons
now in the Insect-House, from which the insects may be expected
to emerge early in the coming spring.
Early in the past season, I purchased about four dozen large pupz
from South Africa, which had been stripped of whatever cocoon or
other covering they had possessed, so that it was not possible to
determine to what species they belonged; it could only be seen
that they were Bombyces of some kind. As will be seen by the list,
examples of five species were obtained from them. They were very
irregular in their appearance, the first emerging on May 7th, and
the last on September 29th. I obtained a pairing of Gynanisa
maia, but the larvee, I am sorry to say, died, although one fed, till it
reached its third stage, on Laburnum. Good specimens of
Antherea tyrrhea, Fabr., ave, I believe, rather scarce in collections.
* See Mr. Butler's paper, iv/fra, p. 80.
l *
4 REV. T. R. R. STEBBING ON CRUSTACEANS FROM [Jan. 19,
Young larvee were obtained of the following species:—Atétacus atlas,
A. mylitta, A. pernyi, and some hybrids said to be hybrids between
Attacus pernyi and A. mylitta, and between A. perny? and A, roylei,
Actias selene, Samia ceanothi, aud hybrid Samia cecropia and S, cea-
nothi. Of these, Attacus pernyi and the hybrids only were reared,
the other specimens all died. Every attention was given to them, and
I regret to have to express my opinion that the present Insect-House
is not a suitable building for rearing young larvee. At the same time,
it must be borne in mind that the past season was, in consequence of
the long drought, bad for rearing larve, as the leaves of the food-
plants became hard and dry early in the summer. Apart from this,
the leaves of all trees growing in or near the Gardens get very dirty
with smoke, and although the precaution is always taken to wash
the food before using it, the leaves are not so fresh and good for
feeding as those obtained from the open country.
The larve of dttacus pernyi were reared upon the English Oak
when the leaves were young and succulent, and they grew very
rapidly and did well.
The so-called hybrids of Attacus pernyi and Attacus roylei were
reared, and a good number of cocoons obtained. The hybrids (?)
of Attacus pernyi and Aldacus mylitta did not do so well, and only
three cocoons were obtained. One insect from each of these cocoons
has emerged up to the present, and these are, in my opinion, dftacus
pernyi pure. I tried to obtain pairings of A. pernyi with females
of A. mylitta, but did not succeed, although the insects were in the
finest condition, and the males of A. pernyi were most energetic in
their endeavours to pair with the females of A. mylitta. I had no
opportunity of trying this experiment with Attacus roylei, as I had
not any of that species.
I am sorry to have to record the death, in November, of the very
fine Mygale fasciata, which was presented to the Society by Mr. H.
R. P. Carter, in January 1885, and of which a life-sized figure was
published in the ‘ Field’ of April 25, 1885, together with some
notes by Mr. W. B. Tegetmeier, F.Z.S.
The colours of this Spider during life were very beautiful.
A communication was read from the Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing,
containing descriptions of some new Amphipodous Crustaceans from
Singapore and New Zealand. The species were shortly described
as follows :—
1. ByBLIS KALLARTHRUS, Sp. nov.
This new Amphipod was brought from Singapore by Brigade-
Surgeon 8. Archer.
The most striking peculiarities are the doubly sinuate lower margins
of the fourth pair of side-plates, the branchie carrying on their
surfaces rows of overlapping secondary vesicles, and the third
uropods, in which the inner margin of the outer branch and the
outer margin of the inner branch are much ornamented. The head
-
1886. } SINGAPORE AND NEW ZEALAND. a
in this species is long, very much narrowed distally ; the telson is
divided beyond the centre.
The following accounts of Talorchestia tumida and Amphithopsis
cerulea, from New Zealand, were sent along with the specimens by
Mr. G. M. Thomson, their discoverer. His remark that in
Amphithopsis (Pherusa?) cerulea the 4th coxa is broader than the
preceding three together, applies to the appearance in the undis-
sected specimen, not to the coxee or side-plates when drawn apart.
“©2, TALORCHESTIA TUMIDA, 0. Sp.
General form of body, when seen from above, much inflated. Eyes
large (in living specimen of a turquoise-blue colour).
Anterior antenne very short, reaching a little past the extremity
of the penultimate joint of the peduncle of the posterior pair ;
flagellum 7-8-jointed, subequal with peduncle. Posterior antenne
as long as cephalon and first two segments of pereion, last joint of
peduncle much the longest ; flagellum 12-14-jointed, slightly shorter
than peduncle.
Males apparently of two forms :—
First Form.—First gnathopod with the propodos somewhat
curved, its inferior margin distally produced and rounded ; dactylos
curved and much longer than the palm ; carpus and propodos with
numerous spines. Second gnathopod with the carpus small and
triangular ; propodos ovoid and smooth, palm very oblique and
furnished with two rows of minute teeth; dactylos two thirds as
long as propodos, with its point lying over the edge of the palm.
Third pereiopod short, fourth and fifth very long, former with the
bases not dilated.
Second Form.—Second gnathopod with the propodos broadening
towards the distal margin, palm nearly transverse with a blunt tooth
between the middle and hinge of the dactylos ; latter furnished with
a large tooth impinging outside of the tooth of the palm. Third
and fifth pereiopoda normal: fourth with the the carpus nearly
quadrate and broadly dilated.
Telson nearly as broad as long, quite round at the apex and
fringed above with a submarginal row of minute spines. Colour,
when alive, ivory-white.
Hab. In sandbanks, Purakanui near Dunedin, among roots of
littoral plants, many yards from high-water mark. Each specimen
inhabiting a hole of its own. When taken out they leap with great
vigour.
“3, Puerusa (?) CARULEA, n. Sp.
Colour of body a deep indigo-blue, appearing black when alive.
Length about 5 mm. Superior antenne about 4 mm. long, and
considerably longer than the inferior ; last joint of the peduncle with
a secondary appendage consisting of a single joint and a terminal
seta; flagellum about three times as long as peduncle and very-many-
jointed. Inferior antenne about two thirds as long as superior, and
with the peduncle reaching slightly beyond the extremity of peduncle
6 _ MR. H.J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. [Jan. 19,
of the first pair. The mandibles have an appendage. The gnatho-
poda are small and subchelate; the dactylos of the second pair is
guite peculiar; it does not end in a claw, but in a finger-like setiform
process. Pereiopoda very similar in form, the basa being progres-
sively dilated ; fourth pair the longest. Telson entire. Coxz of
the first four segments very deep, the 4th broader than the preceding
three together.
Hab. Several specimens of this species were taken in a runnel of
water on the Obelisk (or Old Man) Range in the interior of Otago,
at a height of about 3000 feet. The stream was a little thing that
one could have dammed with the hand, and running at such a slope
that I can hardly imagine how the crustacea are not washed away
by every shower of rain. The Old Man range is about 80 miles
from the sea. The only other fresh-water amphipod found in New
Zealand (excluding the subterranean forms found by Chilton) is
Calliope fluviatilis, mihi, which is very common.”
This paper will be published entire, with illustrations, in the
Society’s Transactions.
A letter was read from Dr. C. S. Minot, of 25 Mount Vernon
Street, Boston, Mass., U.S.A., calling attention to the Elizabeth
Thompson Science Fund, for the advancement and prosecution of
Scientific Research, and inviting applications for assistance fiom it.
Mr. Howard Saunders exhibited an adult specimen of the Sooty
Tern (Sterna fuliginosa) sent to him by Mr. A. C. Foot, of Bath,
with the statement that the bird was caught alive about three
miles from that city, on the 4th or 5th October, 1885, the
weather being windy and the floods extending over the meadows.
It was brought to Bath on the 6th October, and seen in the flesh by
the Rev. Leonard Blomefield and the Librarian of the Bath Museum.
Only two examples of this species had as yet occurred in Great
Britain. Its habitat was principally intertropical, but it bred as far
north as the Florida Cays, and straggled northwards, generally in
autumn, to the coasts of New England. Under the name of ‘* Wide-
awake Fair”’ its breeding-colony at Ascension was well known.
The following papers were read :—
1. On Butterflies of the Genus Parnassius.
By H. J. Exwss, F.Z.S.
[Received January 19, 1886.]
(Plates I-IV.)
Notwithstanding that the Butterflies of this genus have for years
been especial favourites among entomologists, and that their countless
variations have caused many pages of unprofitable descriptions to be
written on them, yet our actual knowledge of their life-history is, with
1886.] MR. Hu. J. ELWES GN THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 7
the exception of two or three species, so slight that it would be
quite premature to write a monograph of the genus. But, partly
through the numerous scientific explorations which have been carried
on in Russian Asia of late years, and partly owing to the high value
placed on these Butterflies having encouraged the efforts of profes-
sional collectors in remote parts of Turkestan, so large a number of
specimens have reached Europe during the last five or six years that
a review of the genus is both possible and useful. The principal
object, however, in my work has been to investigate the functions
and structure of the horny poluch-like appendage which is found in
the female sex of the genus, and which seems to have been almost
entirely overlooked by most of those who have classified and described
the species.
I had not appreciated the immense importance of this structure,
as a specific and generic character, until I received two years ago,
through the kindness of my friend M. Charles Oberthir, of Rennes,
a specimen of the magnificent Parnassius imperator from East Tibet ;
but when I saw how strongly it resembled P. charltonius of West
Tibet in everything but the form of the pouch, whilst this organ
was remarkably different, I saw what appeared to me a structural
character of the highest value, and was led to an examination of the
whole genus, which, on account of the extreme tendency to variation
in size, and in the number and colour of the ocelli and markings—
which had previously been considered as the principal characters by
which to distinguish the species—was in a most unsatisfactory state
of confusion.
The result of my examination is here given; and I may say that,
however faulty and incomplete it may be, I have taken every pains
to bring it up to date, and have personally examined the principal
collections, both public and private, in Germany, France, Russia, and
England. I have thus been able to see, and to a certain extent
compare, large numbers of almost all the known species, and though
my conclusions may not be accepted by those whose interest and
pleasure it is to multiply synonyms, and thus to increase the diffi-
culty of the study of Lepidoptera, yet 1 believe that as far as it goes
it is based upon facts alone.
My own collection, a part of which is now shown, contains about
400 specimens of the 23 species which I recognize in the genus,
and includes both sexes of every described species except two.
Though this number may seem large, yet I believe that it is not
more than half of what would be required to illustrate perfectly such
variable species as are most of the Parnassii, and though I have
a long series of many, I have kept no specimens which are not
necessary to illustrate some fact either of geographical distribution,
of variation, or of range of altitude and season. Andsuch I imagine
should be the object of every scientific collector in any branch of
natural history. We too often see, in British collections at least, a
fixed number of specimens exhibited in order to complete a row ;
but it is evident that whereas in some species of restricted habitat
and little or no tendency to variation, two or three pairs may be
8 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNassius. (Jan. 19,
ample, in another 100 pairs may be insufficient to illustrate all the
points in the history of a species.
With respect to the development and function of the pouch in this
genus, which appears to me interesting not only to lepidopterists but
to all pissisnis of Biology, I must here acknowledge the assistance I
have received from Mr. afin Thomson, of the Society’ s Gardens—who
undertook and carried out in a most painstaking manner the ecbser-
vations on living insects, of which an account is given below—
and especially to Mr. Salvin and to Prof. Howes, of the Biological
Laboratory, South Kensington, who undertook the difficult an
delicate task of dissecting and examining the specimens preserved
by Mr. Thomson at the Gandena
And though much remains to be done before we can say that we
fully understand this intricate question, yet a distinct advance has
been made on our previous knowledge, and certain facts which were
previously doubtful or obscure have been proved. The first writer
who seems to have paid much attention to this organ was Von Siebold,
who published in the ‘ Zeitung fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie,’ 1850,
iii. pp. 54—61, and reprinted in the ‘Stettiner entomologische Zeitung’
1851, pp. 176-185, a long and most valuable paper on the subject,
a précis of which, from an English translation kindly lent me by Mr.
Gosse, I am here able to give :—
The first part is historical, and shows that though Linnzeus,
Latreille, and Schiffer had mentioned the existence of the pouch and
described its form more or less incompletely in P. apollo and P. mne-
mosyne, Do one had carried these observations any further. Ochsen-
heimen accepts its existence in the female as a generic character of
Doritis, and Boisduval separates Doritis apollinus from Parnassius
because it has no pouch.
Siebold doubted whether the organ really formed part of the
body, as he found that he could easily separate it in P. mnemosyne,
and, with more difficulty, in P. apollo, as in this species it is glued
more strongly by its base to the underside of the abdomen.
He then suggests that it originates during copulation, in these
words :—‘‘ Probably from the male or female individual, at the anal
region there is secreted a clammy coagulable fluid, poured forth
during the close association of the genital organ of the male with
that of the female, which, by coagulating and hardening, produces a
firm and long-enduring union of both sexes. After the end of the
copulative act, and after the complete severance of the sexes, there
remains this coagulated substance as a sort of cast or impress of the
hinder parts of the male in the vicinity of the sexual orifice of the
female, a witness of the accomplished coitus.’ He then states that
virgin females fresh from the pupa have no pouch, and says that
Hoger was mistaken when he suggested that the pouch was after-
wards protruded from the body for the purpose of oviposition. He
then goes on to state that a chemical examination of the substance of
the pouch by Dr. Baumert showed that it had no affinity with the
chitinous substance of the body of the insect, which was insoluble
when treated with caustic alkali; whereas the pouch of both P. apollo
1886. ] MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 9
and P. mnemosyne dissolved when boiled in the same chemical,
leaving only brown oily drops. The alkali was then saturated
with mineral acid, but nothing organie was separated from it,
whence we must conclude that the originally dissolved substance
was destroyed.
Siebold compares the pouch of P. hardwicket, which he saw in
the Vienna collection, with that of P. mnemosyne, from which, how-
ever, as I have afterwards shown, it is very different. He also
compares the pouch of P. delins with that of P. apollo, and says that
it agrees in colour, texture, and shape, wanting only the sharp keel.
In this, however, he was mistaken, as I have never seen a specimen
of P. delius, or of any species of this group, in which the keel was
absent, though in P. jacquemonti, which Siebold could hardly have
seen, it is so.
He then describes the observations of Herr Reutti, of Freiburg,
who undertook the rearing of P. apollo from the larva in order to
prove the correctness of Siebold’s views. On May 29 he collected
fifty larvee, which had mostly undergone their last moult, on Sedum
album. He describes them as being very troublesome to rear,
because the larvee, though feeding greedily when placed on the
plants, would not return to the food of their own will, owing to the
want of sunshine in a room of north aspect.
He succeeded, however, in rearing 11 larvae, which went into pupee
under plants or stones, and in one case in an angle of the cover of
the cage in a slight web of spun threads; “within this the larva
hung by the hind feet in the manner of a Vanessa; the pupa, how-
ever, lay free in the web.” Reutti succeeded in rearing four pairs
of the butterfly, one of which, on July 17 at 1 p.m, united, and
remained in coitu until late at night; next morning they were
separate, and the female had a perfect pouch; but no observation
was made of its formation.
Siebold thinks that the keel in the pouch of P. apoélo is produced
as follows: “ By observing the male genital organs of P. apollo, it
seems to me that the coagulating secretion is poured out under the
two lateral valves, which, on the end of the abdomen of the male
beneath, keep the proper genitals embraced, so that these latter,
after coagulation of the pouch-forming secretion, are found in the
interior of the pouch, whilst the valves are pressed against the out-
side of the vault of the pouch, and part of the coagulated matter
stands out between them as the above-mentioned keel.”
Lastly, Siebold quotes Kollar for an extraordinary story about
the larve of P. mnemosyne, which are preserved in the Imperial
Collection at Vienna, resembling those of P. apollo in habit, colours,
markings, and which are ‘not seldom found on recently dead horses
in the lower mountain valleys of Austria and Hungary”’!!!
On the same evening that this paper was read, I had hoped that
Prof. Howes would have been able to give us the result of his exami-
nation of the specimens preserved at the Society’s Gardens as here-
after mentioned ; but Prof. Howes having been delayed by illuess and
press of other work, his observations will form the subject of a later
10 MR. H. J, ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNassivs. {[Jan. 19,
communication from him, and he is only able at present to supply
the following note :—
‘*The assumption that the pouch of the female Parnassius performs
a definite function after copulation, appears in all cases to have been,
without doubt, suggested mainly by its scoop-like shape, no less
than by its constant characters and relations and its persistence after
coition. This assumption originated with Héger, who believed the
pouch to have been concerned in oviposition, describing it, in fact,
as a veritable ovipositor, ‘zuerst im Hinterleibe dieser Schmetter-
linge fertig verborgen.’ V. Siebold’ first successfully disposed of
this view, and showed that the structure in question was a secretion,
believed by him to be derived from the male, and to be functional
in prolonging the coitus*. I cannot agree with him that this is
the case, the adhesion of the copulating individuals being assured
by the hook-like claspers of the male. The pouch is densest in the
vicinity of the female genital orifice, and its detailed structure
conforms internally to the ventro-lateral parts of the male genital
funnel. In view of this, the fact that it is impossible, in dissection
of specimens procured during copulation, to remove the pouch
without bringing away the internal generative apparatus of the
female, points, to my mind, to a direct connection between that
apparatus and the pouch itself. It suggests the probability of an
origin of the same from the body of the female, and not of the male
as is generally supposed. I cannot accept the view ‘that the
pouch is composed of hardened cases of adherent spermatophores,’ *
and the only supposition which seems to me thus far possible is that
it represents a viscid secretion, poured out most probably by the
female during copulation, which—instead of slowly disintegrating or
otherwise disappearing, as do similar coagulable and non-coagulable
secretions functional among other animals as accessories to the conju-
gative act—is hardened on exposure to the atmosphere. It persists
as a cast of the male genital apparatus, which may be carried by the
female until the day of her death, a token of the consummation of
her existence *.
**The above remarks apply to P. apollo, one pair of which species,
preserved during a copulation of 75 minutes’ duration, I have alone
examined. My best thanks are due to Mr. Elwes for these speci-
mens and others, upon which I hope shortly to be engaged.”
But though to Von Siebold the eredit is principally due of calling
attention to this organ, yet no one seems to have carried his obser-
vations any further, though Mr. W. H. Edwards, with Dr. Hagen’s
assistance, gave a summary of Von Siebold’s paper in the ‘ Butter-
flies of North America’ several years ago, and Dr. Burmeister has
* Zeitschr. f. Wissensch. Zoologie, vol. iii. 1851; also ‘ Entomolog. Zeitung,’
same year.
2 Loc. cit. p. 55.
% Macalister, ‘Introduction to Animal Morphology,’ vol. i. p. 412, 1876.
Prof. Macalister informs me by letter that his material was in a “ very dilapi-
dated state.”
4 Conf. y. Siebold, /. ¢. p. 56.
1886.] MR. H.J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 1]
in the allied genus Zuryades proved Von Siebold’s ideas to be in the
main correct.
Burmeister, in his ‘ Atlas de la République Argentine,’ Livr. J,
p- 10, pl. 3, figures and describes the structure of the abdomen in
Euryades duponcheli and E. corethrus, which is analogous to that
in Parnassius.
He says that the copulation in Zuryades is very protracted, and
though he gives no details of the manner in which the appendages
of the female are formed, yet he states that the secretion forming
them proceeds from the male, in the same manner as in Parnassius.
He does not, however, suggest any use for the appendages nor state
whether there is any variation in them. From the figures it is clear
that they are almost identical in the two species comprising the
genus.
Dr. Hagen, in the ‘Comptes Rendus Ent. Soc. Belgique,’ vol. 18,
p- lvi, says that he is convinced that the appendage of Furyades is
an analogous structure with the pouch of Purnassius, and that the
only difference is one of form, which may be easily understood if one
allows that the fluid which composes it is emitted on the two sides
during copulation.
Burmeister, in Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 427, says of Huryades,
that he is convinced that the female appendages of this genus are
not developed before copulation, and that the substance of which
the apparatus is composed is completely homogeneous with that of
Parnassius. He suggests that the secretion flows from the male
during the act of copulation, and hardens-afterwards in the form
which it took during its exudation from the male’s body.
Though there was every reason to believe that Reutti’s observa-
tions, as far as they went, were accurate, yet wishing not only to un-
derstand more fully the manner in which the ponch was formed, but
also its function in the life of the insect, I went in 1884 and 1885
to the Alps to study the question, where the insects are abundant ;
but owing to various difficulties, which are detailed in my account
of the life-history of P. apollo, delius, and mnemosyne, I failed in
observing for myself the necessary details. I was, however, fortunate
in procuring through Herr Heine, of Leipzig, a number of pupz of P.
apollo, which were sent to the Insectarium of the Zoological Gardens,
and have afforded ample details as to this species. Mr. Thomson’s
notes are here printed verbatim, but I was able to gather some further
details which are worthy of note.
He found that Parnassius apollo requires about an hour after
emerging from the pupa, in order to perfect and harden the wings,
and that the colour of these is at first of a yellowish tinge, but soon
fades to white when exposed to the sun. This yellowish tinge I
may add is found in some very fresh examples of almost all the
species, and may be taken as an indication that the insect is only
just out of the pupa.
He found that the copulation of the sexes takes place immediately
after the complete development of the insects, provided that the
sun is bright and warm, but that on dull days the insects remain
12 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNAssIvs. (Jan. 19,
torpid without flying; that the duration of the act is from 33
to 63 hours, but the pouch is developed in a much shorter time,
thirty minutes in one ease sufficing to make it visible to the naked
eye. But my observations of P. mnemosyne makeit evident that
either that species differs from P. apollo in this respect, or that
instances of imperfect copulation, not followed by the appearance of
a pouch, may occur.
Mr. Thomson also proves: —That eggs may be and are sometimes
laid before the completion of the act, and that they may be laid by
pouchless females of P. apollo, as I found was also the case with
P. mnemosyne. That laying continues for several days at intervals,
the life of the female extending to at least a week, whilst the males
appear completely exhausted by the act of copulation, and die in one
or two days after it without flying much, though they remain lively
and strong for several days before the act takes place. No attempt
was made by virgin males observed by Mr. Thomson to mate with an
already mated female, but my own observations in nature show that
this is not the case in a natural state. The date of emergence from
the pupa is usually two or three days earlier in the male than the
female, and the proportion of males not much greater than of females.
But in a wild state the proportion of males of both P. apollo and
P. delius always seems to be much greater ; and from the compara-
tive rarity of the females in almost all the species of the P. apollo
group this seems to be the case in other countries. But in the
P. mnemosyne and P. delphius groups females, though occurring
somewhat later, seem usually to be nearly as abundant as males.
Notes on the Copulation of Parnassius apollo.
By Artuur THomson.
“On the 18th of June, 1885, I received forty pupz of Parnassius
apollo, which had been sent to the Gardens by order of Mr. H. J.
Elwes, F.Z.S., for the purpose of watching the perfect insects when
copulating, and to endeavour, as far as possible, to throw some
light upon the development of the ‘horny pouch’ with which the
female is provided after copulation.
‘«* How far I have been successful I must leave others to judge, but
I wish to say that the fact of the female Parnassius developing
such a ‘pouch’ after emerging from the chrysalis was quite new
to me, so that I had no preconceived ideas upon the subject, and I
have noted the facts just as they occurred.
“{ first had a large gauze cage made, and placed in it six plants of
Sedum telephium, the food of this species, and put in the insects
as soon as they were ready, after emerging from the pupe.
“The first and second copulations took place on June 27; the
first pairing lasted from 11.10 a.m. to 2.25 p.M.=3 hours 15 minutes,
and the second pairing lasted from 11.30 a.m. to 3.0 p.m.=3 hours
30 minutes. The ‘ pouches’ in each case were perfectly developed,
and the females began to deposit their eggs upon the gauze within
five minutes of their separation from the males.
1886.) MR. H.J, ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 13
* Whilst the first pair were in copulation I made a sketch (as well
as I was able) of the ‘pouch’ as it then appeared (fig. 1), a side
view of the ‘pouch’ immediately after separation (fig. 2), a side
view of the position of the female whilst laying her eggs (fig. 3), and
a back view of the same (fig. 4)’. The ‘pouch,’ as then seen
through a magnifying glass, appeared to be about 7%; of an inch
long and not quite an eighth of an inch broad, with a very slight
central depression the whole length, of adark green colour, and with
very minute transverse corrugations. ‘his I found, during the time
I was watching them, to be a membranous covering attached to
the abdomen of the ma/e, containing a dark green fluid. This mem-
brane entirely covered the true pouch of the female, as I observed
that the male appeared to be able to contract it, and did several
times, so as to expose the ‘pouch’ of the female, which was then
quite white; and it has since occurred to me, that this exposure of
the ‘ pouch’ might be for the purpose of hardening it a little, as
the ‘pouches’ of the females are quite soft during copulation, but
soon harden after separation and exposure to the atmosphere, and
this leads me to think that this membranous covering of the male
is the mould in which the ‘pouch’ is formed during copulation.
One thing, however, is certain, that the ‘ pouch’ is developed entirely
during copulation.
“The third copulation took place on the 28th of June, and lasted
from 10.23 a.m. till 12.48 p.m.=2 hours 25 minutes. The pouch
was developed. These specimens were dropped into spirits of wine
‘in cop.’; the membrane of the male then began to contract by the
action of the spirit, but the insects did not separate.
“The fourth copulation took place on the 28th of June, and lasted
from 1.15 a.m. till 2.30 p.m.=1 hour 15 minutes; these specimens
were then dropped into spirits. The ‘ pouch’ was developed; and
I may here mention as a proof that the ‘pouch’ has nothing what-
ever to do with oviposition, that the female of this pair laid an egg
whilst ‘in cop.’
“The fifth copulation took place on the 4th of July, and after the
insects had been in copulation 30 minutes they were put in spirit.
The ‘ pouch’ was apparently developed.
** The sixth copulation took place on the same day ; after being in
copulation ¢en minutes the pair were put in a cyanide bottle and
killed. They separated after death, but no sign of a ‘pouch’ was
visible. These specimens were afterwards put in spirits.
‘<The seventh copulation took place on July 6, and after the insects
had been in copulation about three hours, I separated them forcibly.
The ‘pouch’ of the female was quite soft, and I pressed the keel
gently with a pin to see if the impression would remain when the
‘pouch’ had hardened, and it has done so. I then examined the
membrane of the male, and found that by squeezing the abdomen of
the male, and holding up the membrane with a pin, a white opaque
gelatinous substance issued from that part of the abdomen of the male
where the point of the pouch of the female would be during copu-
1 These drawings are not now published.
14 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASsIUS. [Jan. 19,
lation. Some of this substance I was able to pull out with a pin,
but it began to harden immediately on exposure to the atmosphere,
and became quite brittle, and of a yellowish colour. From this I
am led to think that the male supplies the material of which the
‘pouch’ is made, and that the female has really very little to do
with making the ‘pouch’ at all.
“Besides the copulations before mentioned, three others took
place, two being remarkable for the time they lasted, viz. 6 hours 30
minutes, and 6 hours 25 minutes.
‘So far as I have been able to see, the ‘ pouch’ of the female is
of no use whatever after copulation.
‘«* Although the food-plant of this species was in the gauze cage,
not one egg was laid upon it but all were laid upon the gauze.”
Partly owing to the fact that nearly all the species were happily
unknown to the older authors, and partly because no one has yet
attempted to divide the genus, its synonymy and literature is much
more simple than in some genera. Herrich-Schaffer, Oberthir,
Felder, and Staudinger have all published more or less complete cata-
logues of Purnassius, of which the last is the most accurate and valu-
able for the European species known to him. ‘The principal authors
who have described the various species are Ménétries, Eversmann, and
Gray ; but I need not refer here to their various writings, which are
cited under the various species they described. The characters
upon which most, if not all, previous writers have principally relied
for the definition of the various species, namely, the pattern of the
markings and the number and position of the black or red spots and
ocelli, are, however, far too variable in most cases to be trustworthy.
A very uniform style of coloration and pattern prevails throughout
the genus, and though the affinities of most of the species to each
other are more or less traceable by these characters, yet I have pre-
ferred myself to trust to the much more permanent, invariable, and
important characters of the antennee, fringes, and pouches of the
females. Though these characters are not absolutely invariable,
yet, as far as I can see from the examination of large series, they are
much more so than colours or markings ; and the pouch alone is so
good a structural character, as to be invaluable for the purpose of
classification.
But I have not described the form of these pouches in words,
because the illustrations make it unnecessary ; and though I have
not, as I should have wished, been able to figure the pouch in every
individual species, with the corresponding organs of the male, on
account of the excessive number of plates that would have been
required, yet all the most characteristic aud remarkable have been
accurately drawn by Mr. E. Wilson, of Cambridge, on a uniform
scale of 2.
As far as I have observed, the difference between the clasping
organs of the male in different species is trifling compared with the
difference between the pouches of the female; and it will be a most
1 Gf. note by Prof. Howes, above, p. 10.
1886.] MR. H.J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 15
interesting problem for the future to discover how the organs of
such curious species as P. acco, P. charltonius, P. imperator, or
P. tenedius are produced, and why insects so very similar in appearance
as P. jacquemonti and actius, or P. charltonius and imperator, have
such very differently shaped pouches.
The distribution of this genus is entirely confined to the Pale-
arctic region, and in this respect it is peculiar, among large and
important genera, with Melitea and Eredia, which have an almost
exactly similar distribution, though Hreéia is more arctic than either
of them. Inthe Nearctic region, which, as I have before mentioned,
can hardly be separated from the Palearctic region on the ground
of any peculiarity among the Lepidoptera, it is confined, as is
Erebia, and, with trifling exceptions, MJelitea, to the Rocky
Mountains and country west of them. It is most numerously
represented in the mountain-ranges of Turkestan, Southern Siberia,
and the Himalaya, having only three species out of 23 in Europe ;
none in North Africa; none witiin the Arctic Circle, though
P. mnemosyne and P. eversmanni come within a few degrees of it.
Of all the sections into which I have divided the genus, only two,
namely the apollo and mnemosyne groups, have a wide range, and
only these two have developed any marked specific differences ; all
the rest of the groups, most of which are monotypic, being confined
to limited areas in Central Asia. It is almost certain that several
species remain to be discovered in the mountainous regions of
Mongolia, Tibet, and North-western China; but many years must
elapse before we cau have any complete knowledge of the natural
productions of these extremely distant, inhospitable, and elevated
regions.
Parnassius in one respect is unique among Rhopalocera, namely,
that though in a great part of its range a genus most characteristic
of mountain-ranges, and most abundantly represented where, as in
Ladak and the mountains of Khokand, the climate is of an almost
Arctic character, yet it does not occur anywhere in the Arctic
Regions. Colias, Argynnis, Erebia, and Chionobas, with which
Parnassius is generally associated in Europe, Asia, and America, are
all typically Arctic genera. Why, then, is Parnassius, which finds a
home at as great an elevation as any other known butterfly, absent ?
Though in Europe generally looked on as mountain butterflies,
several of the species, as P. apollo, mnemosyne, bremeri, eversmanni,
and nomion, are also found in low and wooded districts. Hversmanni is
said to be an inhabitant of deep bogs. Mnemosyne, though ascending
the Alps to 5000 feet ur more in Western Central Europe, in Eastern
Europe is found commonly in the steppes. Apollonius also occurs
both in saline steppes and high mountains.
The following Table shows the general distribution of the species,
but it must be understood that almost everywhere the species are
found in somewhat restricted localities, and not generally through
the country.
MR. H. J. ELWES ON TIE GENUS PARNASSIUS. [Jan. 19,
) : reas | & |
i hats Sit! a :
eo | s | 8 }ja.3 3) 2) 4.8 . 8]
| : & | 2) @ le-fie-S\Sm/8sla-e
| Name of Species. o. | 8 S29 s\S5(sq|\857 8
/ 5/3/34 PSASlesisaip s
<3 Oo | & | | 2 lr = = 4)
SSS Se HS Ra
| SiboaFs apollosscs..22. 2158 jx | * | | # |
Var. hesebolus ......... inti] Sepa Sui | | |
| 2. BP. Aeltus......--0eeee- x | x? | \ |
Var. intermedius ...... rit (Peel Re | pe hl by £2 |
| War. ? corybas............ [eee | nee [ees een | Oe
| Var. smintheus ...... .. Ey i Ness
| Var. hermodur ......... oe eee rnd. od Leelee. SR Sc ae
|. dicks MOU da on: «waned ee ee ae Ee eee Lah | *
FE ROCTUUS cian cata eee eens AEB Riri (RE RN aes ee Po a 2
Var. discobolus ......... 8 wees Be
Var. ? rhodius............ Sad SES are Ye a oe
Var. himalayensis ...... ed arceial Graal adres cecal (eal
bP hon att a iscs<odeeecbalinnos lvoe: KX || )
(PRR A 07 1 ne eee eS icc aLe vacua | saci ae aia ea ceall eae
nD: OTEMEN EY ee nce see cpeses Fase MZ! hed Shae camera bees |
8. P. apollonius ............ ltteers al ) |
| : | |
t |
O25 PavQero a. A. RAR eee Wace al) sstigl Ecboks |e, cel hes /
NO) te SUG. er tatters Rie or leper lien ih eee taeda a (el
11. P. jacquemonti ........- = 5 lmserae) eSeay perce br eae Pm
Var. sikkimensis......... ee ler cl i te We AN ee *
TOP. delphius sccse.<c0see-s- eae era Pee
Var. staudingeri......... Hac lnal asiee | ea
13. P. stoliczkanus ......... | 1 *
|
14. P. hardwickei............ ree *
15. P. charlionius..........- liga | *
| Prd ligg
16. P. tmperator ............ cael Het: Cand | en | li
| | | |
| | |
17 RP tenedinsye, Steak. vechdasee:| Sees see Ge
| |
18. P. mnemosyne..........+. |x|] *]
Var. stubbendorfi ...... ab hac ce | <5 5 Hie fsa
19. P. glacialis............... eee Nicci ioc Nate Mee eS boccy sl ens
20. P. eversmanmni............ Sieh Se WTA Re. Se
? War. felderi ............ | bedtos®.|) Best iacien | ee
2) esting UEC Wine t oeepecree ccs Beer eee Mere ian |e fs bray hts
ON P CLODTUS. cs snanckn« anno wes. | ans fo gece ule tees amelie acca ie
DPE VCIOPVUS. \cctecvace cect Fics | Vel aes Ta re 3
23. P. nordmanni ......... ieee ee
Europe has three species belonging to two groups.
Caucasus has three or four species belonging to two groups.
Turkestan has seven species belonging to three groups.
West Siberia has three or four species belonging to three groups.
East Siberia has six species belonging to three groups.
The Himalayas and Tibet have eight species belonging to seyen groups.
Japan and China have two species belonging to two groups.
U.S. America haye four species belonging to two groups.
1886.] MR. H.J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 17
Though the genus Parnassius has hitherto been included in the
family of Papilionide, yet it seems to me worthy to constitute a
separate family, comprising the genera Lurycus, which is confined to
North Australia and New Guinea, Huryades, which is found in the
‘Argentine States, and Liihdorfia, which is an inhabitant of the
southern coasts of Amurland and probably North Japan. In making
this proposal, I do so on the ground that the extraordinary appendages
of the female abdomen, which are found in these four genera alone
among the Rhopalocera, and which, though very different in structure,
are apparently analogous, afford a character of at least as much, if
not of greater, value in classification than the characters drawn from
* legs, venation, antennee, or larval structure.
And though my ignorance of larval characters among Lepidoptera
generally, makes me unable to form an opinion as to their value for
purposes of classification, yet they apparently lead to the grouping
of very dissimilar forms. Mr. W. H. Edwards remarks on the
subject in ‘ Papilio,’ vol. iii. p. 159 :—*I do not think, judging from
the egg and young larva as I know them, and by the mature larva
and pupa as figured in books, that Parnassius has any right among
the Papilionidze. Under a system in which the preparatory stages
were considered—and in the future we shall have to come to that—it
would stand a long way from the Papilionide. The egg of smin-
theus is like Lycena; of baldur like Chrysophanus ; the young larva
is like some Nymphalidze (and perhaps Erycinidze), the mature larva
more like a Heterocerous moth (in all but the tentacles), and the
chrysalis like a Hesperian, or also perhaps some moths.”’
In 1870 the late Edward Newman published in the ‘ Entomo-
logist ’ a system of classification for Butterflies, in which he places
Parnassius in the second division of the Rhopalocera, which he
called Celantes, forming with Doritis the Group A, Bombyciformes.
The division is defined as follows :—‘“‘ Celantes, or those in which
the larve, prior to changing to pupz, envelope themselves in a
silken follicle or cocoon more or less compact; the pupz are
generally without angles, like those of the genus Chelonia among the
Sessiliventres.” The Bombyciformes are those in which the head
of the larva “is smaller than the second segment, and the body is
altogether that of the Bombyces. 'The Capitati, which form the
second section of this division, are the Hesperidze, in which the head
of the larva is larger than the second segment.
Now, without expressing any opinion on the propriety of such a
classification, it is clear that any arrangement which depends on
larval characters must in the case of very many genera be con-
jectural. Newman criticizes the classification of Kirby’s catalogue
very unfavourably, saying that his subfamily Papilionine is entirely
opposed to his own idea of natural arrangement. The genera
Kirby included are Mesapia, Calinaga, Hypermnestra, Ismene,
Doritis, Parnassius, Eurycus, Euryades, Sericinus, Thais, Teinopalpus,
Papilio, and Leptocircus.
Staudinger includes Parnassius with Papilio, Thais, Ismene, and
Doritis, in his family Papilionide, which comes at the head of the
Proc. Zoou. Soc.— 1886, No. II. 2
18 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. \Jan. 19,
class, instead of last but one as in Kirby’s catalogue, whilst Herrich-
Schiffer places Parnassius as the second section of the genus
Doritis.
Synopsis of the Genus.
Fam. PARNASSIIDA.
Imago imagini Papilionidarum similis quoad alarum structuram,
sed foe 1 nina nupta sacculo corneo ad ventrem extremum instructa.
Pupa haud suspensa. Larva distincta, larvis Heteroceror um affinis.
Gen. 1. Parwnassrus, Latr.
SECT. I.
dy pAponnioy Wninn:ye.c.cecseesest ssc ssees es Europe (excl. reg. pol. et Anglia) ;
Armenia; Caucasus.
a. Var. hesebolus, Nordm............- Siberia, Altai, Alatau, Ural, Caucasus.
vy. major, dalbidior, 9 obscurior.
transitus ad hesebolus .......0.0.204- Tarbagatai (fide Stgr.), Cauc. Arm.
(fide Rom.).
DE MMITURS Heaps S),. dakcbsetes tees tee Alps Eur. cent., Caucasus ?
a. Var. intermedius, Mén. ........- Altai, Sib. cent. et or. (Irkutsk).
sedakovii, Mén.
6. ? Var. corybas, Fisch. de Wald. Kamschatka; ? Sib. s. or.
c. Var. smintheus, Doubl. ......... Rocky Mts. U.S. Am.; Colorado, &e.
d,? Var. Behrii, Edw.
e. Var. 9 hermodur, H. Edw.......... Rocky Mts., Brit. Columbia,Montana,
major obscurior. &e.
? transitus ad discobolus.
Os NOMIONS PIS ss sect cece sack eoce acces Prov. Amur, Alaska.
G. Var CNN. eee eheee ee eee Brit. Columbia.
(transitus ad smintheus?)
AS KORIUS,) TVS | dees ctenc beens teehee tact Alps of Turkestan.
a. Var. discobolus, Stgr. ........-++- Alatau, &c., Alps of Khokand.
major obscurior (an delius refe-
rendus ?)
b. Var. rhodius, Honrath............ Proy. Ladak, Alai, Khokand.
?=epaphus, Oberthiir.
(minor, al. post. punct. bas. coc-
cineis. )
c. Var. himalayensis, Elwes......... Prov. Lahoul, &.; N.W. Himalaya,
jacquemonti, Blanch. et Alps, 11000-16,000 ped. alt.
Moore in part.
(? an delius referendus.)
5. HONRATHT, Stgr......... RT eae Alps of Samarkand, Bokhara, &e.
corybas, Ersch.
6: payamts, Oberthiir™ <2: 5.c..5...se0-= Mountains of N. China.
( Qmihi natura ignota incertz sedis.)
(qj BREAUGRI, SBremn:.¢-5 0.4 s<ceosdse ees ace Prov. Amur,
8, APOULONDUS, Hive a.noe eee ce ee ecnees Prov. Kuldja, Khokand, steppes and
mountains.
SECT, I.
9. "A0CO! Gray Seka nero ees Proy. Ladak, Tibet.
TLO: sro; \Grays teaser ape cere eea ce Proy. Ladak.
(? ignota incertz sedis.) :
SECT, III.
11. sacquemontt, Boisd. ............ ... Prov. Ladak, N. W. Himalaya, supra
?=epaphus, Oberthiir. 14,000 ped. alt.
Var. ? a. sikkimensis, Elwes......... Alps of Sikkim, Tibet.
(minor, orientalis).
1886.]
SECT. IV.
Er TPB ITU EIU crepider ve aac ues ah seuivices
Var. ? a. staudingeri, Bang-Haas...,
18. stoticzKanus, Feld. ...............
SECT. V.
14, HARDWICcKEI, Gray
MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS.
Mont. Tarbagatai, Altai, &c.
Mont. Bokhara, Khokand, &e.
Prov. Lahoul, N.W, Himalaya, La-
dak,
Himalaya 6000-14,000 ped. alt.
Proy. Ladak.
Ab et var.Qvix nom. consery.
charino, Gray (obscurior).
SECT, VI.
15. cHARLTONIUS, Gray..............:... Proy. Lahoul, N.W. Himalaya.
Prov. Ladak, supra 11,000 ped. alt.
SECT. VIL.
16. twpeRaror, Oberthiir....... ........ Ta-tsien-lo, Tibet or.
SECT. VIII.
Wife, WENO TOS 150s vac tanpekeg ss st--aen0 Sib. cent. mer., prov. Amur sup.
SECT. LX.
18. mnemosyng, Linn. ..............606. Europe (excl. reg. pol. et Anglia),
Asia occ. et cent.
Var. @. Pnubilosus, Chr., ............ Armenia, Persia bor.
Var. vel transitus ad stubbendorfi. Prov. Amur sup.
Var. 4.? an bona sp. stubbendorfii, Prov. Amer. sup. et inf.
Mén.
Var. c. vel trans. ad glacialis ...... Corea
Ms GUACIATISD MSTEL. | osbeduasennuectesusa Japan
citrinarius, Motsch.
20. EVERSMANNI, Mén. ............08 «.» Prov. Transbaikal, Amur sup.,
Proy. Alaska.
a. Var.? felderi, Brem. ............ Proy. Amur cent.
Goan ye thor Sl. Eiders.) s..scecuree. Yukon River, N.W. America.
PLA CEODIUBy LGUs dsevasts ston se-aseaetcus Mont. et litt., N.W. America.
a. Var.? menetriesi, H. Edw. ...... Mont. Sierra Nevada, California.
Pe MOHABIUE: HIVs 0 scsstesctasuencassuves so Mont. Altai ?, Tarbagatai.
De MNORIMAMNT 1560s! da. cbican tes oe duvedes Mont. S.W. Caucasus, Daghestan.
The two species marked + are only provisionally placed in the
sections of the genus, as the female pouches are unknown. The
varieties marked with a ? are those which do not seem from my
present knowledge to be sufficiently well marked to be always recog-
nizable.
PARNASSIUS APOLLO, Linn.
This is the best known and one of the most widely distributed
species of the genus, and is found in almost all the mountain districts
of Central and Southern Europe, from about 1000 up to nearly 6000
feet in the Alps, and in many parts of Northern and Eastern Europe
at quite low elevations ; in the Caucasus according to Wagner up to
8000-9000 feet, in Southern Sweden and Norway, in Finland close to
the sea-coast, in the hilly sandy pine-forests of the Lower Ural and
Central Russia, in the higher mountains of Spain, Greece, and Asia
Minor, and in some of the mountain-ranges of Northern Turkestan
and the Altai, though its distribution in Asia is not yet perfectly
known.
In some parts of Germany it has become extinct of late years,
Q*
20 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. [Jan. 19,
probably owing to the number of collectors, but in most of its
habitats it is a common, and in many of them a very abundant
insect.
It commences to fly in some of the warmer valleys of the Alps in
May; I have taken it myself on May 25th on the Canton Wallis at
about 2500 feet, but this is a local occurrence, as Meyer-Diir gives
June 17 as the earliest date of its appearance, and on the same day
I found half-grown larvee at the same elevation. It continues to fly
for six weeks or two months, and fresh specimens may sometimes be
met with up to the first week in August. I think that elevation
has not so much to do with the time of its appearance as other
circumstances. I found fresh specimens in the Lower Bregalia
Valley near Chiavenna at 1200 feet in the end of June ; and six days
later I found it close to Pontresina, in the Engadine, at nearly 6000
feet. It prefers warm rocky slopes facing south and west, and is
rarely found in Switzerland on a north exposure, or in woods.
Meyer-Diir says that it seems to be wanting on the ‘‘ Urgebirge,”’
and is ouly local on the ‘ Molasse”’ formation.
The flight of the insect is strong and sailing, but not rapid, and is
continued from eight or nine in the morning till four or five in the
afternoon. The females always appear in much smaller numbers
than the male, fly less, and settle more often; with practice they
may be distinguished on the wing. I am not aware that the insect
has been bred in confinement from the egg, nor can I say with
certainty whether the eggs are hatched in autumn or spring; but I
believe that some part of the larval stage is passed in autumn’.
The larvee feed up in spring on the young leaves of Sedum telephium
and Sedum album, and go into the pupa stage about fourteen days
previous to the appearance of the perfect insect. According to
Reutti they feed only during sunshine, and I found them generally
two or three together on hot rocks where the food-plant was
abundant. When touched they curl up and unroll with strong
convulsions, and if well grown and healthy will live two or three
days in a closed box, as the larva and pupa were drawn by Miss
F. Woolward from specimens which I sent alive by post from
Brieg in Switzerland to England. I believe that the females in
this species, as in others, are almost invariably mated very soon
after their emergence from the pupa, as specimens in which the
pouch is not developed are but seldom found. I am not able to
say whether in a state of nature the eggs are laid on the food-plant
or not, but, according to Mr. Thomson, this is not the case in
confinement.
The Rev. A. E. Eaton, in Ent. Mon. Mag. xix. p. 89, gives the
following note on stridulation in the female of P. apollo :—* In
the evening of July 23rd, whilst reclining on the grass near Bannio,
Val Anzasca, a rustling as of a lizard or snake close to the back of
1 W. H. Edwards in ‘ Papilio,’ vol. iii. p. 159, says: —** But G. M. Mollinger
writes me that the eggs of P. apollo, in Switzerland, hatch late in the fall, and
the young larve hybernate ; awaking in early spring, and eating the leayes of
Sedum, not the flowers.”
1886.] MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 21
my head made it desirable to look round to see what was going on
there ; an apparently drowsy P. apollo, hanging by her fore feet to
a composite flower, was slowly flapping her wings, and scraping the
hinder pair with her four posterior legs, which were thrust back-
wards simultaneously each time that the wings opened. Obstruction
to the movement of the fore wings caused no hindrance to the
production of the sound, but when the hind wings also were held
firmly between the finger and thumb, the noise ceased. The insect
became so wide awake at this stage of the proceedings, that no
_ further observations could be made, but it seemed probable that
friction of the spines of the tibize and tarsus over the wing-veins
largely contributed to the vibration of the wing-membrane.”
The usual manner of pupation of P. apollo is described as being
in a slight silken web among leaves, and this is confirmed by
Miss F. Woolward, to whom I sent living larvee to be figured. She
says: ‘ The larva did not hang itself up in any way, and the pupa is
too fat and heavy for this to be likely. The way in which the
larval skin was slipped off would seem to make it impossible. ‘The
larva had a very scanty supply of silk, which it spread about at the
bottom of the box, making no attempt to enclose itself closely.”’
Tachler, however, in ‘Bericht der St. Gallischen Gesellschaft,’
1869-70, p. 87, says that “two larvee of this species, instead of
pupating in a light web among leaves, as is generally said to be the
case, went into pupa hanging to the gauze of the cage in which
they were confined.” He thinks that this is a most abnormal
occurrence, and perhaps the observation requires confirmation.
These two larvee remained seventeen days in pupa, and took two
hours after emerging before the wings were fully formed.
The variation which exists in this species is very great, both in
size and in the number and colour of the ocelli.
The largest female that I have is of the variety hesebolus, Nord-
mann, from the Transili mountains, which measures 3°5 1n. across the
wings. Another, from the Thian Shan, resembles it in size and colour.
These females and those from the Ural are much more overlaid with
black scales on both fore and hind wings than ordinary European
specimens, but I have a female from the Jura almost as dark. A
male from the Ural of the same variety measures 3°6, whilst eight
males from the Altai measure from 3°1 to 3:3 across. These males
are all more creamy in the ground-colour of their wings and less over-
laid with black scales than Swiss specimens, showing that the causes
which have induced the change of colour have acted on the sexes in
opposite direetions. Seven specimens from Eperies in North Hungary
vary from 2°8 to 3°2; seven specimens from Norway and Sweden are
from 3°2 to 3°3. The largest Swiss specimens I have are from Brieg
and measure 3 to 31, whilst those from other parts of the Alps and
Jura do not exceed 2°8, and I have one from Dourbes only 2:1
across the wings.
Specimens from the Sierra Nevada of Andalusia have the ocelli
yellowish instead of red, and this occurs rarely elsewhere. One or
two red spots beyond the cell of the fore wing as in P. delius occur
22 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. [Jan. 19,
as arare aberration in P. apollo, and the large ocelli on the hind wing
are sometimes all red without white in the centre.
The variety named P. hesebolus by Nordmann, according to Alphe-
raky’s notes on the Butterflies of Kuldja and the Thian Shan, is
found from the end of May to about the 7th of August, between
3500 and 9000 feet. The difference between this form and P. apollo
of the Alps consists in the greater size of both sexes, and the
whiter colour of the wings in the male, whilst in the female the
reverse is the case, so that the difference in colour between the
sexes is greater in this variety than in the typical P. apollo. LP. hese-
bolus appears to be the prevailing form from the Ural Mountains
eastwards, though in the Tarbagatai Haberhauer found a form
more like the Swiss one. In the Caucasian province the Grand
Duke Nicholas says that “the var. hesedolus is found in the same
places as P. apollo and many specimens show the transition from the
type to the variety.” In the Carpathians, near Eperies, the form
found is more like P. hesedolus ; whilst in the Jura, according to
Meyer-Diir, the P. apollo can always be distinguished from those of
the Alps by their duller, more yellowish ground colour of the
wings.
Though P. apollo is sometimes found flying at the same place and
time as P. delius, I have never seen a specimen which could be
certainly looked upon as a hybrid. Dr. Christ of Basle has one
which may be such; but the antennz seemed to me to resemble
those of P. apollo. Meyer-Diir quotes Meissner to the effect that
a hermaphrodite of this species was taken on Oct. 10, 1816, on
the hill of Tourbillon, near Sion in Wallis. He describes it as
follows :—
“The right-hand side is female, the left male; the two wings of
the female side are longer and broader, the red ocellus larger than
on the male side, the right antenna is also longer and stronger.
The abdomen has ouly in the middle somewhat longer hairs. But
what proves the hermaphroditism most remarkably is the apex of
the body, which not only has the horny pouch peculiar to the female
in this family, but also the male organ clearly projecting.”
I have seen in the collection of Herr Roder, at Wiesbaden, a
hermaphrodite of P. delius, obtained from the late Dr. Settari of
Meran, which has the left-hand wings perfectly female, and the
right male; the left side of the body is also less hairy than the
right, and though there is no clearly developed pouch, there are
indications of hermaphroditism.
The distinguishing characters between P. apollo and P. delius are in
typical specimens clear enough and are enumerated by Meyer-Diir
on page 18 of his ‘ Butterflies of Switzerland ;’ but the only points
which seem to be in all cases absolutely reliable are the hairs of the
body and the antennz, which on comparison show well-marked
and constant difference.
P. DELIUS.
Parnassius delius, Esp. pl. 115, fig. 5 (1790 ?).
1886. ] MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 23
P. pheebus, Prun. Lep. Ped. p. 69 (1798).
Var. intermedius, Mén. Enum. i. p. 72 (1855); Stgr. Stett. Ent.
Zeit. 1881, p. 256.
P. sedakovii, Mén. 1. c. p. 71, pl. i. fig. 1.
Var. corybas, Fisch. Ent. Russ. p. 11, pl. vi. figs. 1, 2 (1822).
Var. smintheus, Doubl. Gen. Lep. pl. iv. (1847).
P. sayi, W. H. Edw. Proc. Ent. Soe. Phil. ii. p. 78 (1863) ; Edw.
Butt. N. Am. i. pl. vi. (1872).
Var. behrii, W. H. Edw. Trans. Am. Ent. Soc; Butt. N. Am.
vi. fig. 3 (1870).
’ Var. 2. hermodur, H. Edw. Papilio, i. p. 4 (1881).
If this species is considered in a narrow sense as a purely European
insect, its range of distribution is somewhat limited; but if the
innumerable forms and varieties which occur in Asia and in the
Rocky Mountains of North America—and which, as far as I am at
present able to judge, have no constant structural characters differing
from each other or from P. delius—are treated, as I think they should
be, as forms of P. delius, then it is the most widely distributed species
of the whole genus.
For the present, however, I will only give what I have been able
to discover with regard to its life-history in Europe, where it is
confined to the higher Alps of Switzerland, Tyrol, and Styria.
According to Nordmann, it is also found in the mountains of Adshara
inthe Caucasus; but as neither Lederer nor the Grand Duke Nicholas
Romanoff include it in their lists, I can say nothing as to this
habitat. The species seems to be found more locally in the Alps
than P. apollo, but is in many places abundant. I have always found
it commonest in localities between 4500 and 7500 feet elevation,
where a mountain stream had spread out into wide channels and
formed rapid shallow brooks, bordered by a luxuriant growth of
Saaifraga aizoides, which, according to Zeller’s, Anderegg’s, and my
own observations, is the fae -plant of its larva. Zeller, in Stett. ent.
Zeit. 1877, }. 279, describes the larva as being in every way
extremely like that of P. apollo, but as having yellowish, not orange
antennee ; the pupa also resembles that of P. apollo.
It has been supposed that the larva and pupa of this species are
able to exist under water, for a short time at Jeast, and this, accord-
ing to Zeller, must certainly be the case; the plant on which the
larva feeds is always close to the water, and the sudden rise of a
mountain stream, which must often occur, would drown them if they
were unable to endure the bath. I have seen, near Bergun, a
freshly emerged male, the wings of which were not yet dry, sitting
ona plant of Saxifraga aizoides within a few inches of the water,
and I have never seen the female settle on any other plant, though
the male will on dull days rest on grasses and flower-heads.
Zeller says that he found the larva creeping over slimy wet ground
without being in the least smeared or wetted ; and Herr Anderegg,
who takes the insects abundantly in Wallis, hae assured me that he
never saw it on any other plant but Sax. aizoides.
I visited a favourite haunt of this species with his son on July Ist,
24 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASsIus. [Jan. 19,
1884, in hopes of being able to find larvee or pups, but was dis-
appointed in this, as on other occasions, though I took many males
and several freshly emerged females. One pair were taken in copula
at about 11.30 a.m., but separated in the net, and the female pouch
was developed and hard, leading me to suppose that it was not
the copulation of a virgin female, or that the act was already complete
when I found them. The males flew backwards and forwards over
a space of about 200 yards by 40, where their food-plant was most
abundant ; but unless chased flew at a slow pace, and frequently
settled ; the females flew but seldom, and settled for several minutes
at a time on the plants of Saxifraga. I did not observe them in the
act of laying, though eggs were visible externally in one or more
specimen. ‘The egg appears identical with that of P. smintheus,
figured by Edwards in the ‘ Butterflies of North America.’
I returned to Brieg in May 1885, hoping to find the larva in the
same place ; but in this season the snow was still unmelted on May
26th, and lay two feet deep over the place where the butterfly had
been common on July Ist in the previous season. This leads me to
think that P. delius, like P. apollo and probably P. mnemosyne, passes
some parts of its larval existence in the autumn, and remains
dormant under the snow during 6 to 8 months, according to the
elevation. I have found the butterfly as early as the end of June,
both near Bergun and at Pontresina, and it may be found at
higher altitudes up to 7000 or 8000 feet throughout July and
August.
The variation to which this species is subject consists principally
in the number and size of the red ocelli. ‘he male has sometimes
one, but usually two, red spots on the fore wing beyond the cell:
the one on the costa is almost always present, and there is sometimes
a black, and very rarely a red spot as well, near the middle of the
hind margin of the fore wing. The fringe of the wings is sometimes
plain white, and sometimes more or less distinetly marked with
black at the end of the veins.
In the variety intermedius, from the Altai Mountains, these black
markings on the fringe are much more regular and constant. In
female specimens, as in the American form smintheus, there are
generally two, sometimes one, and rarely three, red spots beyond the
cell. In one specimen in my collection, and in one figured by
Meyer-Diur, these three spots are almost confluent, forming a short
bar edged with black.
The size of Swiss specimens varies from 2°50 to 1°80 inches ; the
Altai specimens average abont 2°25; in American specimens the
largest I have are of the so-called var. hermodur, from the Rocky
Mountains of British Columbia, which are 2°40 to 2°50 inches across
the wings, and the smallest, from Colorado, measure 2°10 to 1:80
inches. ;
With regard to the American form smintheus, such a full and
excellent account of its habits has been given by Mr. W. H. Edwards
in Butt. N. A. vol. i. pp. 21-26, that I need say but little; a
further account of its habits as observed in the Judith Mountains,
1886.] MR. H.J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 25
Montana, by Mr. Courtis, is so interesting that I copy it from
* Papilio,’ vol. in. p. 158.
Mr. W. H. Edwards is here speaking of P. smintheus, var.
hermodur, H. Edw., and says :—‘ These Montana examples of both
sexes are very large, considerably beyond the average of smintheus
from Colorado, some males and females reaching 2°70 inches.
Several of the females are very black, there being little of the yellow-
white ground left, and that principally in cells of primaries and on
disks of secondaries. ‘The red spots are of extraordinary size. I
should have taken the female for a distinct species had not the male
been so like and often indistinguishable from the Colorado males of
smintheus, though larger. Some of them have the spots orange as
in var. behrit.
* Several of both sexes I cannot distinguish from a pair of P. inter-
medius sené me by Dr. Staudinger as Ménétries’ species from Siberia.
These are the examples which are not melanic, and in which the
marginal borders of both wings are transparent. I have a female
of the same form taken on Mt. Bradley, California, by Mr. James
Behrens’.
«Mr. Courtis at my suggestion shut up some females with Sedum,
on which smintheus has been known to lay, and obtained 140 eggs.
Mr. Courtis says, ‘Most of these eggs came from females that mated
after I caught them. ‘Tbe others would not lay, although I kept
them shut up with several males until they nearly starved,’ ”
This is a most curious fact, as 1 found that P. mnemosyne, and
Mr. Thompson found that P. apollo, mated freely in captivity ; but
Mr. Edwards says this is the first instance he has heard of in which
butterflies have mated in captivity.
‘*Mr. Courtis goes on to say:—‘ The virgin females seemed to have
the end of abdomen a light green horn instead of black, but after
mating I noticed they turned black.’ This seems to throw doubt
on either Mr. Courtis’s accuracy of observation, or to prove that the
development of the pouch is not as inP. apollo. He goes on to say :—
‘I think they lay on the roots of plants, as the females always drop
to the ground, climb up astalk, and fly away. Those in confinement
climbed sticks and window frames, laying eggs as they went. They
curved their bodies round and put an egg on whatever they touched,
except the Sedum ; I made one lay on it by keeping her moving from
one piece to another, but she seemed much excited, and as soon as I
put her on grass and sticks she laid every few minutes.’ In a later
letter, 5th of August, Mr. Courtis writes, ‘I noticed a female
Parnassius alight on a piece of Sedum, drop to the ground, climb up
and lay an egg either on the leaves or roots or on the ground. I
could not find the egg, though I saw her go through the motion of
laying.’”
Mr. W. H. Edwards has tried without success to breed P.
1 J have received a pair from this locality, through the kindness of Mr. H.
Edwards, and can only say of the female that I can hardly distinguish it from
small examples of discobolus from Turkestan. The difference between the two
sexes 1s ost marked, the male being very like those from the Altai Mountains.
26 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNAssIvs. [Jan. 19,
smintheus from the egg in Virginia. He states that the eggs hatched
in the last days of winter, but will not eat Sedum leaves. He is
certain that the eggs of this species do not hatch naturally till spring.
He says that the newly hatched larvee are most singular creatures,
bearing no resemblance to any members of the Papilionide which
he has seen. They are thickly studded with small tubercles in rows,
and each of these gives out several short curved black hairs. They
look something like caterpillars of Argynnis, but are different from
these also.
Reakirt, in Proc. Phil. Ent. Soe. vi. p. 129, describes “ eight very
closely allied, but perfectly distinct and seemingly constant forms ”’
of P. smintheus. He says :-—‘‘I think it highly probable that both
P. smintheus and P. nomion are derivatives from the same parent stem,
the former being yet in process of segregation, while the latter, most
probably the older form, has passed through its transitional stages,
and now presents only constant specific diagnostics. The chain of
closely linked varieties of P. smintheus, of which the highest (sayz)
approximates to nomion, would seem to corroborate this supposition.”
He goes on to describe a remarkable female form, and says that
the only apparently constant diagnostic which he has detected in the
species is the seemingly regular situation and form of the four basal
spots on the under surface of the hind wings, in which it differs
strongly from nomion, the only species he knows which closely
approximates certain forms of the male and female.
«« Mr. Ridings captured this fine species in July, solely within the
mountain districts, usually when settled on the flowers of some tree,
and always near the edge of a watercourse. It is abundant, but of
difficult capture, not only from the natural obstacles interposed, but
also from its very high and quick flight, this commonly ranging
from four to eight yards above the head.”
The form figured and described by Méné¢tries as sedakovi (Men.
Enum. p. 71, t.1. fig. 1), from Irkutsk, of which I have seen the type,
is very like some of the Altai specimens, as are some of those from
Kamschatka ; whilst what was described as corybas by Fischer, from
the same country, which I have also seen in the St. Petersburg
Museum, are more like European specimens. I also possess a speci-
men which I can only refer to this species, from Kodiak in the North
Pacific. There is evidently much to learn as to its distribution and
variation in Eastern Asia, cf. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1881, p. 275.
Zeller, reviewing Edwards’s ‘ Butterflies of North America’ in Stett.
ent. Zeit. 1874, pp. 433, 434, says that smintheus certainly belongs
as well as intermedius to P. delius, and quotes Zincken to the effect
that a beautiful drawing of female P. de/ius taken near St. Peter and
Paul in Kamschatka by Dr. Langsdorf in 1804, does not show the
least difference from Swiss specimens.
Zeller, in the same journal for 1872, p. 119, quotes Dietze to the
effect that the eggs of fresh specimens of P. delius found on the
Splugen pass on August 14, hatched in 14 days under the heat of an
Italian sun. This seems to prove what I have before suggested, that
P.delius must pass a considerable part of its larval existence in autumn.
1886.] MR. H.J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 27
P. NOMION.
Parnassius nomion, Fisch. de Waldh. Ent. Russ. ii. p. 242, pl. 6
(1823-4).
This species, though at first sight very like P. apollo, may be cer-
tainly and constantly distinguished by the fringes of the wings, which
are conspicuously chequered black and white ; whilst in P. apollo this
is never the case to the same extent, though some specimens have
a tendency to it. The pouch also (though of the same general form)
is black, more lengthened behind, and set on at the end, and not
underneath the abdomen; the antenne, the clothing of the body,
and the general pattern of the markings are very similar.
I am not aware that the geographical range of the two species any-
where meets, P. nomion first appearing in the mountains of Dahuria,
whilst P. apollo seems to go no farther east than the Altai Mountains ;
but these ranges on the Siberian frontier are but little known.
P. nomion appears to be common in the valley of the Amur, at
Raddefskaia and Khabarofka, and Christoph found the larva feeding
ona yellow-flowered Sedum near Vladivostock. According to Méné-
tries P. nomion is found near Irkutsk and at Kiachta, and I have
seen a specimen from this locality in Dr. Fixen’s collection.
Bremer says that it is found on the north side of Lake Baikal on
the Onon river, and on the Ussuri between Noor and the Ema; the
largest and finest specimens are from the Bureija Mountains, and
farther west they become smaller.
M. Charles Oberthiir says in a letter that he has received P. nomion
from the Abbé David, who found it in the mountains of North China ;
he has also very curious specimens from Sidemiin Mantchuria taken
by Jankowsky, which resemble the P. nomion of California, of which
he has also an authentic specimen from the collection of Boisduval.
This is probably the one mentioned by Boisduval in his list of the
Butterflies of California. With regard to the occurrence of the species
in N.W. America, there is, however, some doubt, for though Mr. H.
Edwards says it has been taken in Alaska, and that he has seen a
specimen in a collection from the Cariboo mining district in British
Columbia, whilst Mr. W. H. Edwards includes it in his catalogue
as from Alaska and Sitka (coll. Behr), yet I have never seen or
heard of any true P. nomion in the numerous collections made in the
Rocky Mountains of late years.
I have, however, a female specimen of P. smintheus, var. sayi,
which might very well be considered as a small form of nomion, and
I am not able to find any good character by which to separate it.
Indeed, it is quite possible that P. nomion represents P. smintheus
on the North-western coasts of America, and that Mr. Reakirt’s idea,
cf. supra, that they have sprung from the same stock, is a
correct view, though it would be a very curious fact in distribution if
it was found that the two species come together in N.W. America,
whilst in North-east Asia, as far as one can judge, from the very
scanty materials which exist, P. nomion and P, delius remain distinct.
P. nomion varies considerably, but not so much as some species of
28 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. [Jan. 19,
the genus: a fine female specimen from Dahuria in the St. Petersburg
Museum has the fore wings almost free from white scales and the
cell yellowish. I possess two females from the Amur which have a
faint yellow tinge all over the white parts of the wings, as is some-
times seen in very fresh Alpine and Himalayan specimens. I think
this fades very soon after the insect emerges from the chrysalis.
Some specimens have two or three of the black spots on fore wing
pupilled with red, as in typical P. delius. The ocelli of the hind wing
are sometimes with and sometimes without white pupils, but I have
seen no specimen which cannot be at once recognized as P. nomion.
Of the habits and life-history of this species we know nothing at
present ; but it does not seem to be a high-mountain insect, but rather
an inhabitant of wooded hilly regions, here it flies in July.
Schaufuss, in a publication called ‘Numquam Otiosus,’ ‘published
at Dresden in 1877, on pp. 417-424, after describing two varieties of
P. nomion under the names of venusi and virgo, attempts to make an
analytical table of the genus Parnassius ; but this, depending alone
on such variable characters as the colours and pattern of the wings,
results in an unnatural and unreliable arrangement of the genus, in
which no attention whatever is given to structural characters.
The publication of such papers is in my opinion of no advantage
to science. As the number of recognized entomological journals is
already too great, and the difficulty of reference to such a one as
this almost insuperable to foreigners, one has at least a right to
expect that after so much trouble as these references give, some-
thing worth notice should be found. Short papers of no value are
becoming too numerous.
P. actius.
Parnassius actius, Eversmann, Bull. Mosc. 1843, iii. p. 540, t. ix.
figs. 2a, 6; Staudinger, Stett. ent. Zeit. 1881, p. 278; Alpheraky,
Lep. Kuldja, p. 23 (1881).
Var. rhodius, Honrath, Berl. ent. Zeit. 1882, p. 178, t. ii. fig. 6
1885, p. 274.
This is a very puzzling species to assign to its proper position in
the classification of the genus ; for though it undoubtedly appears
to have minor characters which entitle it to be recognized as a species
in the high mountains of Northern and Eastern Turkestan, yet I
cannot specify any by which it can be constantly distinguished from
P. discobolus ; and the form which has been described as rhodius is
so like the corresponding sex of P. jacquemonti, that I am unable to
distinguish between them in the male sex, and do not know for certain
whether P. actius exists at all in Ladak or the Himalayas, whence no
female corresponding to it with a keeled pouch has yet come under my
notice. Itis, however, distinct from the form I have called himalay-
ensis, of which a large series constantly differs in the greater blackness
of the antenne, which, though ringed, are in many cases almost
entirely black, whilst in P. aetius from Turkestan, in P. yacquemonii,
and P. discobolus they are, as far as my specimens go, always
distinctly ringed with white. On the underside it perfectly agrees
1886.] MR. H.J.ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 29
with P. discobolus, jacquemonti, and rhodius, and differs from hima-
layensis in having the red markings much more strongly ringed with
black. The pouch of the one fresh female I possess is quite like
that of P. delius, small and much more covered with hair than in
P. apollo, and the abdomen of this female is as hairy as that of the
male, a character which seems very unusual in the genus.
The type, as figured by Eversmann, like those from the mountains
of Khokand, is an insect with much fewer black scales on the wings
than those from the Alatau, which are also less marked with red
ocelli. The spot at the base of the hind wing above, a character
which is principally relied on by Honrath to separate P. rhodius, is
variable, as in other species of the genus, but does not appear in
P. discobolus. In P. himalayensis it is often found, but more often
is not visible on the upper side.
P. actius was discovered with delphius and elarius probably in the
Tarbagatai (or, as Dr. Staudinger thinks, in the Alatau) by Schrenck,
and remained almost unknown until a few years ago, when it was
collected in some quantity by Haberhauer in the Alatau, near Lepsa.
Later he also found it in the Sultan Hazret Mountains south-east of
Samarkand, and in greater abundance on the northern slopes of the
Alai Pamir, south of Osch, in Khokand.
Alpheraky also found it uncommon in the Thian Shan, at from
9000 to 13,000 feet elevation; and Grumm-Grshimailo found it
near Katta-Karamuk, and at Karasu on the north side of the Ters-
agar Pass, which crossess the Trans-alai Mountains of Karategin at
an elevation of 10,000 feet. In the former place, which seems a
wonderfully rich collecting-ground, P. discobolus, mnemosyne, and
romanovi also occurred ; in the latter P. staudingeri, romanovi, and
another. This region seems to be more rich in species of Parnassius
and Colias than any other in the world; for at Kizil-art, on the
western Pamir, which the same energetic collector also visited, he
obtained, along with P. actius, a new one, which he ealls P. cesar, a
form of P. delius?, and another, thus obtaining no less than nine
species of this genus in a single journey, besides six or seven of
Colias, and many new and interesting Lycenide, Erebie, and others.
P. ACTIUS, Var. DISCOBOLUS.
Parnassius discobolus, Stgr. Berl. ent. Zeit. 1882, p. 182, t. i.
figs. 1-3.
°P. corybas, var. discobolus, Alph. Lep. Kuldja, p. 16 (1881).
P. (corybas, Fisch. ?, var.?) discobolus minor, Stgr. Stett. ent. Zeit.
1881, p. 275.
This form was first found in great numbers by Haberhauer in the
Alatau, and later also very abundantly by Alpheraky in the Thian Shan
range. Both Staudinger and Alpheraky in their descriptions go into
many details of the markings, number of ocelli, and other peculiarities
of this insect (which is extremely variable both in size and colour)
in their endeavours to show that it is distinct from the somewhat
mythical species P. coryhas, Fischer; but neither of them gives any
constant characters by which it may be separated from P. actius aud
30 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. [Jan. 19,
the Siberian form of P. apollo known as hesebolus. In fact Staudinger
says he received some specimens which are intermediate between
discobolus and actius, and may be hybrids of them in his opinion ;
while Alpheraky describes a form which he thinks is a hybrid
between hesebolus and discobolus, and states in confirmation of this
theory that he found a male of the former in copula with a female
of the latter.
I confess that after careful examination of Dr. Staudinger’s series,
as well as of those I have received from him and M. Alpheraky, I
can find no constant characters; forthe absence of the red spot at’ base
of hind wings is not constant, as Schilde, in Ent. Nachrichten, 1884,
p- 334, observes; and even if it was in some species, it is certainly
not in discobolus or actius. I see nothing in the pouch, fringe, or
antenne to make this form worthy of separation, though it is almost
impossible, on the other hand, to say to what it should be joined,
unless it is P. actius ; and some of the American specimens of P. smin-
theus are also exceedingly close.
Alpheraky found it in all parts of the Thian Shan which he
visited, at elevations of 3500 to 11,000 feet, from the 15th of May
throughout the summer, the specimens found at high elevations
being smaller, less richly coloured, and more like those of the
Alatau Mountains, which Staudinger has separated as var. minor.
What Staudinger describes as ab. 2 nigricans seems, according to
Alpheraky, to be a not uncommon form of the female at low eleva-
tions. It is simply a form in which the wings are very diaphanous
and covered with black scales to such an extent that when on the
wing they seem black.
The yellowish tint which very fresh specimens of Parnassius
(especially females) often show is found in discobolus; and I noted
in one specimen in Dr. Staudinger’s collection that the fringes of
the fore wings are blackish, whilst others had a very strong resem-
blance to nomion, but could apparently be certainly distinguished by
the fringes of the hind wings, which are never so distinctly chequered
as in that species.
P. ACTIUS, var. HIMALAYENSIS.
Parnassius jacquemonti, Blanch. Jacquemont’s Voy. p. 16, t. i.
figs. 3,4; Moore, P. Z. 8. 1882, p. 257; Oberthir, Et. Ent. liv.
iv. 1879, p. 23, t. ii. fig.5; Honrath, Berl. ent. Zeit. 1885, p. 274.
Though it is very difficult to say what this species may be, I
think it certain that it is not the P. jacguemonti of Boisduval, on
account of the remarkable difference in the pouch, which I have
pointed out in alluding to that species. Neither Moore, Gray,
Blanchard, Honrath, nor Oberthiir seems, however, to have paid any
attention to Boisduval’s description of the pouch, or, if they did,
failed to understand the importance of this character. The extreme
rarity of female specimens of the true P. jacquemonti in museums has
doubtless prevented other writers from distinguishing the form now
under notice from the much rarer and more inaccessible species
1886. | MR. H, J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 3]
which Jacquemont seems to have found on some part of the Kash-
mir territory.
The species now under notice might very fairly be said to be the
Himalayan representative of P. delius ; but though I cannot specify
any structural character by which it differs from that species, yet it
has far more general resemblance to P. actius. It differs from that
species (which perhaps also occurs in Ladak) in the fringes of the
wings, which in P. actius are almost always distinctly marked with
black’ at the end of the nerves, and in the darker antenne less
ringed with white, and the ocelli of the underside, which are much
less ringed with black.
I have received such a large number of specimens of this species
from Lahoul, that Iam able to say with some certainty that the
pouch of the female is always keeled; and though there is, as I
show below, very great variation in specimens from one locality, yet
I think I could say that none of those from this one locality could
be mistaken by one who really knew the species for any other Par-
nassius.
After examination of a large series from Lahoul, taken between
July 15 and Aug. 28, 1884, at various elevations between 11,500
and 15,000 feet, I find the following principal variations :—
As regards the ground-colour of the wings, from a pure creamy
white to a yellowish white, only seen in very fresh specimens and
most’ pronounced in females; the black scales in some cases almost
covering the interspaces of the wings and giving the insect a very
dark appearance, whilst in some others, mostly males, they are almost
confined to the costal and basal areas and to the line of the nerves.
Asa rule the females have a greater abundance of these black scales
than the males.
As regards the fringes, I find in some specimens, usually those
least marked with red, an almost unbroken white fringe, whilst in
others it is more or less broken by black at the ends of the veins,
but never so distinctly alternated with black and white as in jacque-
montt or actius ; and this is one of the best means of distinguishing
the males from these species.
As regards the red ocelli, they vary in number from noue to three
on the fore wing above, of which two are near together between the
cell and apex, and one about the middle of the space, between the
third median nervule and the submedian nervure, and in size from a
mere dot of a few red scales surrounded by black to an ocellus
about 2 lines in diameter.
On the hind wing above they vary in number from two to six, of
which one is at the base of the costa (usually, but not always, con-
spicuous, and sometimes quite absent), one halfway along the costa,
and one extending from the second subcostal nervule to and beyond
the discoidal nervule: these two are always present, and sometimes
large and pupilled with white; one, and in females often two, at
the anal angle, and rarely one showing through the black scales at
the base of the cell.
On the underside the full number of xed ocelli (namely three on
32 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNAssius. [Jan. 19,
the fore wing and four on the hind wing), together with the four basal
ones, are almost always present, corresponding to those on the upper
surface, in which the red is often absent. The pattern of the under-
side is very characteristic, and would, I think, alone be enough to
distinguish all the specimens from Lahoul from any other species.
The antenne are decidedly blacker than in any of the allied
forms, and though ringed faintly with whitish in some specimens,
are never so much so as in all the forms of P. delius, or in P. actius,
discobolus, and jacquemonti. They vary so little in 100 specimens
that I have examined, that should series from other localities besides
Lahoul be found to present the same constant differences in antennze
and markings from P. actius that these do, I think it might be allowed
specific rank with as much or more justice as other so-called species
of Parnassius. Of the habits we know but little. It begins to fly
about the middle of July or earlier, according to the season and ele-
vation, and continues to be found in a fresh condition till the end of
August.
i think that the figures of Blanchard and that given by Oberthir,
which is taken from a male specimen from Boisduval’s collection,
supposed by him to be the type of Boisduval’s description, represent
this species and not the true P. jacquemonti. :
Whether this species ever occurs in the same region with that
insect I am not at present able to say; but I think it does not occur
at so high an elevation, and I doubt whether it extends to Ladak.
I have never seen specimens from any locality east of the Ganges
valley in Upper Gurwhal, where Mr. Duthie found it at elevations of
about 11,000—13,000 feet near Phuladaru.
P. HONRATHI.
Parnassius honrathi, Stgr. Berl. ent. Zeit. xxvi. 1882, p. 161,
t. i. figs. 4, 5, 5a.
P. corybas, Ersch. Fedtschenko’s Reise, p. 2, t. i. figs. 1, 2 (1874)
(nec Fischer).
This little-known species seems to have been first discovered by
Fedtschenko at Kulbasin, near Sangi Djuman, on May 25, and
Kuli Kalan on June 25, in Zarafshan, about 7000 feet high, but
being mistaken by Erschoff, who described the Lepidoptera of the
collection, for P. corybas of Fischer, remained unknown until Haber-
hauer sent from the Hazret Sultan Mountains south of Samarkand a
number of specimens (about 20 males and 5 females), which he took
at about 6000-7000 feet in July 1881. These were described by Dr.
Staudinger, who considers the species quite distinct from P. corybas
of Fischer, which comes from Kamschatka, and is probably only a
form of P. delivs.
It differs from all other Parnassius of this group in having black
antenne, black fringes, and black legs and feet ; the clothing of the
body beneath is also black.
The pouch of the female is of the apollo type, though this is not
shown either in Erschoff’s or Staudinger’s plates; and Staudinger
says that in one specimen it has a rather produced peint.
1886.] MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 33
I have seen Erschoff’s type in the museum at St. Petersburg, and
have little doubt that it is identical with Haberhauer’s, of which I
possess one example ; but the fringes of the former are not so black
and do not seem to be correctly represented in the figure.
In general appearance the species is extremely similar to P disco-
bolus, and, no doubt, varies in the usual manner.
Though I cannot find Fedtschenko’s locality in a large-scale map
of Turkestan, yet it cannot be very far from the mountains where
Haberhauer found the species; and neither he nor other explorers
seem to have met with it further north or east, whilst to the south
and west are no mountains at all connected with this range’.
P. pavipis.
Parnassius davidis, Oberthiir, Et. Ent. liv. iv. p. 23, t. ii. fig. 2
(1880).
Beyond the single specimen which M. Oberthiir has described,
nothing is known of the species, which seems to differ in nothing
from P. nomion, excepting that the fringes of the wing are entirely
black. It has also, as M. Oberthiir informs me, grey antennz
ringed with black, and the club black, the legs grey, with the last
articulation only black. It was discovered by the distinguished
naturalist, Abbé David, in the Jehol Mountains north of Pekin, and
must be either very local or rare, as no other specimen was ever
procured by him in his numerous journeys in the north of China.
P. BREMERI.
Parnassius bremeri, Feld. MSS. ; Brem. Lep. Ost Sib. p. 6, t. i.
figs. 3, 4 (1864); Feld. Reise Novara, i. p. 133, t. 21. e-g (1865).
Var. graeseri, Honrath, Berl. ent. Zeit. 1885, p. 272, t. viii.
figs. 1, la, 4, ¢.
This species, sent by Bremer to Felder as P. delius, is undoubt-
edly a good and distinct species, very variable in colour, but always
to be recognized by its black antenne, plain black-and-white-edged
fringe,and black pouch of the apollo type; but like those of its
countryman, P. nomion, the pouch is more prominent and less
covered by hairs. The veins are always covered with black scales,
as in the mnemosyne group. In the number and colour of the ocelli
it is extremely variable, some specimens having no red markings on
either wing ; but the majority have three or four on the hind wing,
and some have two, or even three, on the fore wing as well. ‘I'wo
fresh females from Khabarofka, one of which is without a pouch,
have the fore wings (which are without any red) strongly tinged
with yellow; but out of nine males and nine females in my col-
lection, not one presents the slightest deviation from the characters
of the species, excepting that the antennz of some pale-coloured
males from the Amur are faintly ringed with whitish.
1 Since this was in print, I have received aspecimen of P. honrathi from the
Grand Duke Nicholas, collected by M. Grumm Grshimailo at Agwas Potasuk,
which I believe to be in the mountains of Karategin,
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. III. 3
34 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GUNUS PARNASSIUS. [Jan. 19,
This species was discovered by Radde in Amurland, where it
seems common in many places from the middle of May till the
beginning of July. Christoph discovered the larva on a slope above
a swampy valley near Raddefskaia, but gives no details as to its
food plant, or the habits of the insect. Its range extends from the
Upper Amur to the Ussuri, but not apparently to the coast; and
as far as I ean learn, it is an inhabitant of mountains as well as of
low-lying wooded districts.
The form described by Honrath as var. graeseri has red spots on
the fore wing beyond the cell, which are rarely found in the typical
bremeri; this form appears to be common, and is perhaps the pre-
valent one near Pochrofka in the Jablotschnoi Gora (Apfelgebirge)
in Transbaikalia, near the watershed of the Amur region, at about
4500 feet elevation. Unless, however, it is proved to be constant
and peculiar to this locality, I do not see any reason for separating it.
P. APOLLONIUS.
Parnassius apollonius, Eversm. Bull. Mose. 1847, iii. p. 71, t. iii.
figs. 1, 2; Alph. Lep. Kuldja, 1881, p. 20.
This distinct species was only known from Eversmann’s descrip-
tion and figure in the Bulletin of the Moscow Academy for 1847, until
quite recently, when it has been taken in large numbers by Alphe-
raky at Sibo, near Kuldja, and by Haberhauer in Ferghana.
According to Alpheraky’s account, it is an inhabitant of saline
steppes about 2000 feet above sea-level, and flies at the end of
March and beginning of April, laying its eggs on a species of Salsola
which is abundant here, and which is probably the food-plant of the
larva. Eversmann, however, says that it flies in the mountains of
Soongaria in June; and Erschoff says that it was taken by Fedt-
schenko’s expedition between 8000 and 12,000 feet in July. These
statements appear almost irreconcilable (cf. Alpheraky, . c. p. 21);
and if the latter is correct, the vertical range of this species is greater
than that of any other Parnassius. Grumm-Grshimailo found it
near Woadjili, south of Osch, at the beginning of June, but gives
no particulars of its habits, save that the locality is bare, rocky, and
very hot; it is about 3000 feet above the sea, according to the
Russian Staff-map of Turkestan. The same explorer found it after-
wards near Karamuk, in the north-east corner of Karategin, at about
7500 feet. Alpheraky further states that whereas the fringe of the
wings in Kuldja specimens is alternately white and black, it is, in
those from Ferghana, almost entirely white; but in nine specimens
in my collection, of which four are from Kuldja, four from Margilan,
and one from Samareand, I do not find this remark confirmed, as
the fringes are more or less marked with black in all the examples.
The antenne of this species are deep black, the hairs of the neck,
thorax, and abdomen white. The number and size of the red spots
vary as in other species. The pouch is of /the same form, but
perhaps rather larger than in P. apollo, black in eolour, and
somewhat prominent as in P. nomion.
1886.] MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 35
P, acco, Gray.
Parnassius acco, Gray, Cat. Lep. Brit. Mus. i. pe 76, t. 12.
figs. 5, 6 (1852).
P. acco, Elwes, P. Z. 8. 1882, p. 400.
Of this rare and very curious species we know hardly anything. It
seems to be confined to the elevated desert regions of Ladak, and
not more than six or seven specimens are known to exist in collec-
tions, viz. two in the British Museum (the types), two in Messrs.
Godman and Salvin’s collection, one in my own, which I owe to
their kindness, and one, which I have also examined, in Baron
Felder’s. The two first of these were collected along with the types
of P. charltonius and P. simo in Ladak many years ago by Major
Charlton, at about 16,000 feet. The next three were taken by the
late Mr. Shaw on his journey to Yarkand, at Lapsang, south of the
Karakoram pass, about 17,000 feet above the sea, and were given by
him to Mr. Bates, whose collection of Lepidoptera passed into
Messrs. Godman and Salvin’s hands. The last was taken by the
late Dr. Stoliczka on the Samanda pass, 17,000 feet, near Lake
Tsomoriri in Ladak.
I have also a single small specimen, which came, along with
P. sikkimensis, from the Tibetan frontier, north of Sikkim, and which
I cannot separate from P. acco, though in size and colour it is more
like P. simo, and led me at first to consider those two species as one
when I first received it.
They all agree very well in the important characters, having black
antenne and whitish fringes; but the most remarkable character is
the pouch, which in this species develops a keel of such extra-
ordinary depth, that when sitting on level ground the abdomen of
the insect must be elevated at a considerable angle. This remark-
able pouch is similar in two perfect specimens, the one figured
(Plate II. fig. 3) being from Mr. Godman’s collection.
A more minute examination of them shows that the fringes of the
wings of P. simo are very different, and though neither the British
Museum nor Hewitson’s specimen has the pouch in a perfect
condition, yet I have little doubt that the pouch of P. simo will
be also found to be different from that of P. acco.
Since 1881 I have had several collections from the same part of
Tibet, and obtained a few more specimens of P. sikkimensis, but this
single one of P. acco remains unique from that region, and none of
the numerous collections made at Darjiling, which sometimes contain
specimens from high elevations, have, as far as I know, ever included
any Parnassius except P. hardwicket.
P. stmo.
Parnassius simo, Gray, Cat. Lep. Brit. Mus. p. 76, t. 12. figs. 3, 4.
Of this species almost nothingis known; there exist in all museums,
to my knowlenge, but four specimens—two in the British Museum,
collected by Major Charlton in Ladak, and two others, of which one
is in the Hewitson and one in M. Oberthiir’s Be as and both
36 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. (Jan. 19,
from their flattened appearance and age seem to have come from the
same source.
I have been able to find out the route which Major Charlton
followed in Ladak, or Chinese Tartary as it was called in those days,
and among the few scientific travellers who have been to that remote
and inhospitable region, none seem to have again found this curious
little insect. It may, however, be distinguished from P. acco and
P. sikkimensis by the fringes of the wings, which are black in the fore
wing and greyish white in the hind, whilst in P. acco they are all
whitish. The antenne are black, the pouch is unknown; and the
position of the species in the genus must therefore remain doubtful,
though I should imagine that it will be found nearly allied to P. acco.
P. SACQUEMONTI.
Parnassius jacquemonti, Boisduval, Sp. Gen. p. 400 (1836) (in
part).
? P. jacquemonti, Gray, Cat. Lep. Brit. Mus. p. 76, t. xii. figs. 1, 2
(1852), 3.
? P. jacquemonti, Moore, P. Z.S. 1865, p. 488.
P. epaphus, Oberthiir, Et. Ent. liv. iv. p. 23 (1879).
? P. actius, var. rhodius, Honrath, Berl. ent. Zeit. 1882, p. 178,
t. ii. fig. 6, ¢.
P. epaphus, vay. sikkimensis, Elwes, P. Z.S. 1882, p. 399, t. xxv.
figs. 4, 5,6, 2. -
The synonymy of this species is the only one which has given me
any trouble to clear up, and this arises principally from the fact that
Boisduval probably used examples of two species in writing his de-
scription, and that his female type is not now to be found either in the
Paris Museum, where the other specimens collected by Jacquemont
which Boisduval described are preserved, or in his own collection, now
in the possession of M. Oberthiir. The point on which the whole
question turns, is the fact that Boisduval says in describing the
male that the fringes are entirely white, which is not the case in
this species; and of the female he says that it is like the male, “ La
poche de l’extrémité de Vabdomen assez développée, plissée en
travers et sans caréne longitudinale.’ As no other species is known
to exist in which a pouch of the apollo type is without a keel,
this fixes Boisduval’s female with certainty ; and though the name
jacquemonti might perhaps be applied to the species of which
he described the male—my actius, var. himaiayensis—using Obei-
thiir’s name of epaphus for the species now in question, yet,
as Oberthiir’s name was applied to Gray’s insect of which he
had only seen a plate, of which he did not know the female, and
which, after having seen the specimens figured by Gray, I cannot
distinguish from actius, I think it is more correct to apply Bois-
duval’s name to a species of which there can be no possible doubt
he described one sex. With regard to the insect described by
Honrath, from specimens collected by Stoliczka, as actius, var.
rnodivs, I cannot distinguish the male sex from that of P. jacque-
monti. Charlton’s specimens figured by Gray may be one or the
1886.] MR. H.J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 37
other, and the same may be said of those which I possess from
Tibet, collected by Lang, and from Murghi, Ladak, 17,000 feet, both
of which are males, like those in the British Museum. I have, in
fact, of this species only one doubtful female, which was taken near
the Shigri glacier in Lahoul, at 13,000 feet, on August 25, 1884,
the abdomen of which is too much damaged for determination; a
single pair from Ladak lent me from the Indian Museum, Calcutta ;
and three pairs of the small variety sithimensis, which I received
through native collectors from the Chumbi valley on the Tibetan
frontier of Sikkim, and which agree absolutely with the Shigri speci-
men in fringes and antennee. All the females from the Sikkim
locality, of which I have received several, agree perfectly in the pouch
of the female, which is without a keel, like the one figured here
(Plate II. fig. 1), and seem to differ only in being of a smaller
size than those from Tibet, Ladak, and the north-west.
I cannot hear of any variation in the pouch of P. actius, which is
keeled and indistinguishable in form from that of P. discobolus ; and
am certain that the female of the species figured by Oberthiir as Bois-
duval’stype also has a keel, so that the following points seem clear :—
Ist, that Boisduval confounded two species in his description, of
which one (my actius, var. himalayensis) has a keeled pouch, and
the other, jacquemonti verus, has not.
2nd, that actius, var. rhodius, of Honrath,=epaphus, Oberthiir,
may be either P. actius or P. jacquemonti, as no reference to the
female is made by either author, and the figures of the male cannot
be distinguished from P. jacquemonti.
The habits of the insect are little known, but the notes of Capt.
Lang quoted by Moore may be applicable to the true P. jacquemontt.
He says, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 488 :—“‘It replaces P. hardwickei on the
high passes of Upper Kunawur, Spiti, and Tibet. I first saw it on
the Kongma pass, leading from Kunawur into the Chinese province
of Gughe in Tibet, at an altitude of 18,000 feet. This pass is 16,000
feet, but I ascended its flank another 2000 feet to enjoy the far view
over the distant Tibetan ranges, brown and treeless, closed to Euro-
pean foot, and backward among the sharp icy pinnacles of our own more
familar Himalayan ranges ; and here [ saw this Parnassius coursing
rapidly up and down the frozen snow-beds, where beaches as it were
of boulders and stones cropped out. What could tempt Parnassius
there I know not, for I saw not a Sedum, nor a Saaifraga, nor any
other vegetation. I met this Parnassius again at high elevations, in
similar situations along the confines of Kunawur and Tibet. It
does not occur apparently with the next” (P. hardwickei).
In Sikkim it also occurs at great elevations and flies in August
and September. I took myself, on the 20th September, 1870, a pair
of this species in copuld, on an unnamed pass above 18,000 feet
elevation, by which I crossed from the Upper Lachoong valley in
Sikkim to the Cholamoo lake in Tibet. These specimens were given
to the late Mr. Atkinson, and now stand in the Hewitson Collection
as P. simo, along with one genuine example of that very distinct
species from Ladak,
38 MR. H, J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. [Jan. 19,
In describing the Sikkim form of this species (P. Z.S. 1882,
p- 399) I said that it might be distinguished by the smaller size, and
by the more distinct alternation of the black and white in the fringes.
I am still unable to compare these with a series from Ladak, as no
specimens except the few 1 have mentioned exist to my knowledge
in collections; but the smaller size seems to me now not a sufficient
distinction, and the spotting of the fringes is almost, if not quite, as
marked in the specimen from Shigri. The name skimensis had
better therefore be dropped until a constant and more marked
distinction than that of size is shown to exist.
P. HARDWICKII.
Parnassius hardwickei, Gray, Lep. Nepal, t. 4 (1846); Cat. Lep.
Brit. Mus. p. 76, t. 12. figs. 8-11 (1852); Moore, P.Z.S. 1865,
p. 488.
Var. charino, Gray, J. c. t. 12. fig. 12.
P. jacquemonti, Koll. (nec Boisduval), Hiigel’s Kashm. p. 407,
t. 2. figs. 3, 4.
This distinct and pretty species occurs at very various elevations,
in most parts of the North-west Himalaya from Kashmir to Sikkim,
at elevations varying from 6000 to 12,000 feet and probably higher,
but in the north-west it occurs at much lower elevations than in
Sikkim. It seems to fly at almost all times of the year in various
localities, and varies very much in coloration, and especially in the
number of the red and blue ocelli, at almost all the places where it
is found. The five bluish ocelli on the hind wing, generally pupilled
with white, but in some cases reduced to mere specks, are, however,
present in all the specimens I have seen ; and as a rule the greater
the amount of black scales, which in some female specimens almost
cover the wings, whilst in others of the male sex they are entirely
wanting, the larger and more numerous are the red ocelli.
The variety charino, Gray, is the darkest form, but does not seem
to be either a local or a seasonal variety, as I have it .from Simla,
taken in May, from Gulmurg in Kashmir in August, and from the
Chumbi valley in September.
The red spot at the base of the hind wing above is more or less
well marked in four out of twelve females in my collection, and
convinces me that it cannot be looked on as a specific character in
this genus.
Of the life-history of this species we know something, and, strange
as it may seem to European naturalists, I have little doubt that the
species is double-brooded. Capt. Lang (P. Z.S. 1865, p. 488), says,
* There appear to be two broods, early spring and late autumn.
have seen it in December and February on bright days, succeeding
weeks of snow storms.” Hocking took 16 specimens, of which one
was a female, flying over snow in March, at 8000 feet elevation.
Capt. Graham Young, writing from Kulu, says :—‘‘ Undoubtedly
P. hardwickei is double-brooded ; the second brood appears in August
and September, and a few even in October in favourable seasons ;
some of these hybernate, reappearing in March along with the spring
1886.] MR. 4H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 39
brood, which has hybernated in the pupa: of this fact I have no
manner of doubt.” In another letter he says, “ When coming over
the Rhotang pass about October 10, 1874, I saw numbers of the larvze
of P. hardwickei on the low herbage, and have no doubt myself but
that some of this species hybernate as butterflies, but by far the
greater number in the pupa; that this insect is double-brooded no
one who knows its habits disputes; the larva feeds on various
species of Saxifrage.”” In another letter Capt. Young says, “ In the
outer Himalaya (I speak of Kulu only) P. hardwickez does not vary ;
but in the interior it varies from typical Aardwickei, through light
and dark grey, to the high-level form charino.”
Capt. Lang says, in P. Z.S. 1865, p. 488, that this species in
Kunawur commences at the Runang pass, becoming commoner as
we travel south and west towards Lower Kunawur and Simla, not
extending nearer the plains than Simla, however. It is tolerably abun-
dant on the Mahasoo ridge, near Simla, on bare grassy hilltops, just
clear of oak-woods; grassy open downs it certainly affects, and at
high elevation, 8000 feet. It has a strong but slow flight, somewhat
like that of Pieris, keeping low over the rocks which crop up
amongst the grass.”
The form of the pouch in this species separates it widely from
any other of the genus (see Plate II. fig. 5). The fringes of the
wings are white and long, the antenne black.
P. DELPHIUS.
Parnassius delphius, Evers. Bull. Mose. 1843, iii. p. 540, t. 7.
fig. la, 6.
Var. namagana, Stgr. MSS.
P. staudingeri, Haas, Berl. ent. Zeit. 1882, p. 163, t. 11. figs. 7,
8,8 a.
Var. infernalis, Stgr. MSS.
I think there can be little doubt that P. delphius and P. staudingeri
are one species, and time will show whether the Himalayan ally,
P. stoliczkanus, can be separated from them; but from whatever
point of view they are regarded, these three form a very natural group,
differing widely from all other species in the form of the pouch,
which, though it has some analogy with that of P. hardwickii in
being divided into two lobes, is, as the plate shows, quite unique in
form.
P. delphius was first described from the Tarbagatai range by
Eversmann with P. clarius and P. actius ; and it should be noted that
though he says these species came from the southern slopes of the
Altai Mountains, yet Kindermann, who collected in the true Altai
Mountains, is quoted by Lederer in Zool.-Bot. Ver. Wien, 1853,
p- 353, as follows :—“ It will perhaps be wondered that I did not
find in the district I explored (which lies on the upper Irtisch
between Ust Kamenogorsk and Ust-buchtarminsk) the species de-
scribed by Eversmann in the Moscow Bulletin as from the Altai.
These, however, do not inhabit the Altai, but are only indigenous
700-1000 versts to the south, and were collected by Herr Schrenck,
40 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. [Jan. 19,
a botanist of St. Petersburg, in the Tarbagatai and A//akan Moun-
tains.’ * It has since been taken abundantly by Alpheraky in the
Thian Shan Mountains, above 9000 feet elevation, in July and
August. It frequents steep stony mountains up to 12,000 feet,
where there are great abundance of Saxifrages. Haberhauer also
took it in the Alatau, and in the Sultan Hazret mountains, south of
Samarkand, which form the western termination of the Alatau, in
great quantity between the 10th June and the beginning of August.
This last was described by Herr Bang-Haas as P. staudingeri, but
after having seen large numbers of the two forms, three pairs of
each of which are in my collection, I fail to find any difference by
which they may be distinguished. Both are very variable, but both
have the antennze, fringes of the wing, pouch of the female, and all
important characters absolutely identical.
Bang-Haas relies principally on the supposed broader fore wings,
and the purer yellowish white ground-colour with much sharper
blacker markings ; but when he wrote he had not yet received the
specimens of P. delphius, collected in Ferghana by Haberhauer, which
vary extremely. Some of these (? var. namagana) have blue ocelli on
the hind wing, as in stoliczkanus. Some of the females of P. stau-
dingeri (var. infernalis, Stgr.) are very dark, almost black in their
ground colour,
The antenne in this species are in the male sex black, but in all
my six females the lower part is more or less grey, not distinctly
ringed. The fringes are very narrow, whitish in colour, but some-
times darker ; and, as Bang-Haas points out, the horny substance of
the pouch forms a complete ring round the hinder segment of the
body.
Dr. Staudinger says it varies from a uniform grey colour with
feebly marked blackish spots to a very dark colour with reddish-
yellow, red, or yellow ocelli on the hind wings, and in one specimen
two small red spots on the costal margin. The bluish scales of the
two black round ocelli on the hind wing also seem to be often want-
ing in the freshest specimens. I noted in his collection a very curious
looking organ protruding from the abdomen of a male specimen of
P. staudingeri, which, having some analogy in’shape to the pouch of
the female, led Dr. Staudinger to think it was a hermaphrodite. This
organ, however, which, owing to his kind loan of the specimen, I
am able to figure (Plate II. fig. 14), is I believe only the ordinary
male claspers protruded from the body, perhaps owing to forcible
separation from the female.
P. sTOLICZKANUS.
Parnassius stoliczkanus, Feld. Reise Novara, Lep. ii. p. 138
(1865), iil. t. 67. figs. 2, 3 (1867).
With regard to P. stoliczkanus we know but little, as it is an
inhabitant of remote and inaccessible districts in Ladak and the
northern frontier of the North-west Himalaya. The late Dr. Stoliezka
* Perhaps this is a misprint for Alatau, as I can find no such name in the
best modern maps,
1886.] MR. H.J.ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 41
took a single pair at Narka, in the province of Rupshu, which were
described and figured by Felder. Two females in the Hewitson col-
lection are marked Darjeeling, but there is no evidence that they
came from Sikkim ; and though both have larger red ocelli on the
hind wing than the Ladak specimens I have seen, yet they are pro-
bably from Atkinson’s collection, which was made at many places
in the Himalaya as well as at Darjeeling. M. L. de Nicéville,
who is the only living entomologist who has seen this species alive,
took three specimens (of which a pair are now before me) on July
18, 1879, on the Baralacha pass, north of Lahoul, at 18,000 feet.
Both of these have small ocelli on the margin of the hind wing, three
of which in the 9, and one in the ¢ have bluish pupils. The male
has no red markings at all, whilst the 9 has two ocelli in the usual
place on the hind wing ; none that I have seen have the red ocellus
on the costal margin of hind wing, which is found in all specimens
of P. delphius and P. siaudingert. The fringes and antennze, however,
agree perfectly with those of P. delphius, excepting that the antennee
ofthe Q P. stoliczkanus are all black ; and though I hardly consider
that the few specimens of this species existing show any structural
characters of sufficient importance to separate them certainly from P.
delphius, yet the absence of the costal ocellus on the hind wing would
if constant be a good secondary character of distinction ; and there
appears to be some difference in the internal structure of the pouch,
though its external appearance is nearly the same as that of P. delphius.
In a very interesting account of his journey through the Alai
Mountains in the southern part of Khokand, M. Grumm Grshimailo
describes a new species of Parnassius shortly, under the name
of P. romanovi, which, though I have not yet been able to
see a specimen, is possibly a form of this, but more probably
allied to P. charltonius. He says :—‘‘The fore wings like delphius,
the hind wings show a great red patch of 1 centimetre in
diameter, a second of much smaller dimensions, and a band which is
formed of three red marks; behind this red band, nearer the outer
margin, are five beautiful blue ocelli surrounded by black shining
scales.”
This splendid insect was found near Katta-Karamuk, and also at
Karasu, on the north side of the Tersagar pass, 10,000 feet, in com-
pany with P. actius, P. staudingeri, var. nova, Parnassius sp., and
many splendid species of Colias and other insects.
Another new form, named, but not described, by the same explorer,
is Parnassius cesar, which was found at Kizil Art, on the Alai
Pamir plateau, at a great elevation, and said to be a splendid, quite
unique species of great variability, and will no doubt be soon pub-
lished in the Grand Duke Nicholas’s ‘ Mémoires sur les Lépidopteres,’
which have already added so much to our knowledge of Russian
Lepidoptera.
It will be impossible to say where these species belong in the
genus, until they are fully described and figured *.
1 After this paper was read I received, through the kindness of the Grand
Duke Nicholas Mikhailovitch of Russia, two pairs of P. romanovi, which is
42 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNassivs. [.Jan. 19,
P. TENEDIUS.
Parnassius tenedius, Eversm. Bull. Mosc. 1851, ii. p. 631; Mén.
in Schrenk’s Amurl. vol. ii. Lep. p. 14, t. 1. fig. 3, 2.
Of this remarkable species but little is known, though it has a
wide range in Eastern Asia, and has been collected recently in some
numbers by Herr Tancré’s collector in some parts of the southern
Altai Mountains, in April and May. Eversmann received it first
from Irkutsk. I have a female specimen collected by Puzilo at Albasin
on the Zeya river in upper Amurland. Ménétries describes and
figures a female from Olekminsk on the Lena river. I have seen speci-
mens in the St. Petersburg Museum, collected by Czernakowsky on
July 14, 1873, on the lower Tunguska. Major von Hedemann also
collected this species at the Schilka, in the upper Amur region, in
May.
P. tenedius has a pouch-like appendage unlike that of any other
of the genus, though it has some analogy to that of P. imperator.
It is very delicate and wax-like in substance, open at the bottom and
difficult to examine, but the figure I have given will explain its
structure better than words. Ina female collected by Maack, which I
saw in the St. Petersburg Museum, the pouch is not developed, but
eggs of apparently full size are visible inside the abdomen, and I possess
another in which it is only partially developed; but the two perfect
females in my collection, together with at least five others which I
have examined, all agree in the general form and substance of this
curious appendage. See Plate II. fig. 9.
The antenne are black, the fringes of the wings show a narrow
black line distinctly edged with white. The hairy covering of the
body is less abundant in the males of this species than in most
other Parnassius; the number and size of the red markings vary
just as in other species, but those from Amurland appear generally
to have them most abundantly.
Nothing is published as to the habits of this species, which is
very scarce in collections at present.
P. IMPERATOR.
Parnassius imperator, Oberthiir, Bull. Soc. Ent. France, 1883,
p- 79; Et. Ent. ix. p. 11, t. 1. fig. 4, 9.
This splendid species at first sight presents the most remarkable
resemblance to P. charltonius, but as soon as one examines the abdo-
minal appendage, which in this case cannot be called a pouch, it is
evident that a more different and peculiar structure cannot exist. I
must refer my readers to the drawing (Plate III. fig. 4), as a de-
scription alone would give no true idea of its form, which, though in
evidently very nearly allied to P. discobolus, and indeed hardly separable from
it. These specimens do not agree with the description above given, which
makes me think that the name has probably been transferred from the original
insect described above to what is now sent as P.romanovi. I have to thank
the Grand Duke also for a pair of P. muzaffir, Gr. Grsh., which also appears
to be a form of P. actius, and Herr Christoph informs me that P. charltonius
was also included in M, Grumm Grshimailo’s collection from the same region,
1886.] MR. H.J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 43
some degree analogous to that of P. tenedius, is utterly unlike that
of any known Parnassius. It is very curious that though M. Ober-
thiir has received many examples of the female, he has as yet no
male, as it will be most interesting to examine the clasping organs, in
order to see whether they differ from those of P. charltonius, which
I have figured, in as marked a manner as the female appendage
does; M. Oberthiir, who figures this organ well, says that he has
two virgin females in which it is not developed.
There is some variation in the number of the large blue ocelli on
the hind wing of this grand insect ; normally they are two in num-
ber, but one specimen figured by M. Oberthiir has two additional small
ones above, which gives it even a stronger resemblance to P. charl-
tonius, in which five is the usual number. The antenne are black, the
fringes of the fore wings black, edged with white, and of the hind
wings plain white.
This grand species was discovered by the French missionary
bishop of Tibet, M. Félix Biet, at Ta-tsien-lo, a town near the
frontiers of China and Tibet, at about 7500 feet elevation, where
it flies all the summer, and may probably extend throughout that
very inaccessible tract of mountains which have yielded so many
zoological and botanical treasures to the researches of Abbé David,
and from whence so many new butterflies have recently been
described by M. Charles Oberthiir.
P. CHARLTONIUS.
Parnassius charltonius, Gray, Cat. Lep. Brit. Mus. p. 77, t. xii.
fig. 7, ¢ (1852); Moore, Yarkand Mission, Lep. p. 5, t. 1.
fig. 3, 2.
This splendid species must be considered, with P. imperator, as the
grandest of the whole genus. The superficial resemblance which it
bears to P. imperator first led me to study the question of the pouches
in this genus, which have been so much neglected, and which in this
species is so remarkable.
First discovered by Major Charlton at Lapsang, in his journey in
Ladak, so memorable in the history of the genus, and figured by Gray,
along with P. acco, simo, jacquemonti, and hardwickei, P. charitonius
remains one of the rarest and least known of the genus. Dr. Sto-
liczka found it again at Kharbu, 13,000 feet, in the same province,
and the same naturalist during the Yarkand expedition obtained a
female.
M. Lionel de Nicéville and Capt. Young have both found it at
Koksir, below the Baralacha pass, in the province of Lahoul, from
12,000 to 14,000 feet elevation, where in some seasons it is not
uncommon from the middle of July to the middle of August, when
the females are still fresh.
Having had the whole of the specimens collected by these gen-
tlemen under comparison, I find that, in this locality at least, they
vary less than most species. None have any red in the usual spots
on the fore wing, but on the hind wing is a small red ocellus ringed
with black, and sometimes nearly obsolete, near the costa; a large
44 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNasSIvs. [Jan. 19,
central ocellus usually with white pupil, and in the female sex a red
oblong patch at the anal angle. Near the outer margin is a series
of five large bluish-grey ocelli, broadly edged with black on the
outside.
The fringe of the wings is white, broader and more distinct on
the hind wings than on the fore, but never spotted; the antenne
are shining black ; the thorax and abdomen in the male are black,
thickly covered with short downy hairs on the thorax, and with
longer paler ones on the abdomen, which extend over the base of
the fore wing and the inner margin of the hind wings, as far as the
anal angle.
The abdomen of the female is black with a few pale hairs down
the centre of the upper surface, and divided into eight segments by
distinct rings of a greyish colour ; the terminal segment in the female
is furnished with a tuft of short grey hairs, which, when the pouch
becomes developed, turn up almost at right angles to the body. The
pouch is a remarkably shaped one, different from that of any other
species of Parnassius (see Plate III. fig. 5).
P. MNEMOSYNE.
Parnassius mnemosyne, Linn. 8. N. x. p. 465.
Var. nubilosus, Christoph, Hor. Ent. Ross. x. p. 19 (1873).
This is the type of a large and widely distributed section of the
genus. Some form of the group is found in almost every region where
Parnassius occurs, and P. mnemosyne itself is of very wide distri-
bution in Europe and Western Asia, but replaced in Eastern Asia
and N.W. America by allied forms differing from it in minor cha-
racters, but preserving a very strong general resemblance in all
important ones.
It is found in the Pyrenees at Cauterets (Oberthiir), in thousands
on meadows on the Spanish slopes near Gavarnie, at 6600 feet
(Pierret fide Speyer), in the Neapolitan and Sicilian mountains, in
Auvergne (Sand), in many parts of the French, Swiss, Styrian,
and Italian Alps, from about 2300 to 5000 feet ; but apparently of
very local distribution, as Meyer-Dur had never seen it himself, and
Dr. Staudinger told me that he had been equally unfortunate, whilst I
have taken it abundantly in three different places. In many parts
of N.E. Prussia, in Bavaria, the Hartz, in many parts of Austria,
it is more or less common, and often at quite low elevations. I have
taken it at Médling, close to Vienna, ona low rocky hill among bushes.
In the south of Russia, and in the north of Europe, it seems to be an
insect of the steppes and forests rather than of the mountains. It
occurs locally in Denmark, Scandinavia, Finland, and as far north
as Archangel. In Asia Minor and the Caucasus, it isin many places
abundant, and aceording to Lederer always at a considerable eleva-
tion up to 8000 feet, developing a smaller darker variety (nudilosus,
Christoph) in Armenia and North Persia. In Asia it is found in
the mountains of N. Persia, in various parts of Turkestan, and
as far south as the Alai Mountains of Khokand, but not apparently
in the Thian Shan or Altai, where it is replaced by P. clarius.
1886.] MR. H.J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 45
As far as I have personally observed, it is found in meadows where
vegetation is rather rank ; and at Berisal, on the Simplon pass, where
it is most abundant at 4500 feet, the meadows where it flies have a
north aspect, while P. apollo confines itself to the hot slopes on the
other side of the ravine. '
With regard to its life-history little is known. Meyer-Dir says
that Kindermann discovered the apollo-like larva in April and
beginning of May on Corydalis halleri, and that it pupates under
fallen leaves in a strong web, the pupa being yellowish and like that
of the Zygenidee. I have made several endeavours to discover the
larva myself without success, but I have strong doubts that Corydalis
is the only, if even it is the usual food-plant, for this reason, that it
is a spring flowering plant of very short duration ; whilst P. mnemo-
syne must be an autumn-feeding larva, as the insect flies in spring
or early summer very soon after the melting of the snow, and there
could be no time for the larvee to feed up after it melted.
From observations made in Wallis, in June 1884, and again in
May 1885, I believe that the larva more probably feeds on an um-
belliferous plant (? Heracleum, sp.), which was very abundant in the
places where the insect was numerous, and on which the females
often sat, whilst Corydalis was either absent or withered at the
same date. Herr Bang-Haas thinks that in Dénmark the larva is
a night-feeder, but knows nothing certainly about it. I was very
anxious to investigate the development of the pouch in this species as
well as in P. apollo, and with this object visited Wallis in May 1885.
On May 24, 1 found the males abundant at about 3000 feet on the
south side of the valley, near Brieg, and caught several males and
fresh females, all of which had the pouch perfect. In the previous
year I found, a month later, at Berisal, that the males were worn,
and the females, though they were in two or three cases taken in
copula, had apparently been flying for some time, and had a perfect
pouch. After a good deal of searching I found a female fresh from
the pupa, at about 11 A.M., sitting on an umbelliferous plant, either
Aithusa or Heracleum. took her home and put her in a birdcage
covered with gauze at about 2 p.m., and at 2.30 one of the males
which had been fluttering round her for some time commenced
copulation. The female held on to a grass stem with the head up-
wards and the male hung to her with head down. At 2.45 the female
crawled up to the top of the cage, carrying the male with her; he made
no attempts to use his feet or hold on, and was supported entirely
by the abdomen. At intervals of a few minutes there were slight
movements of the abdomen of the male, but otherwise he remained
quite torpid till about 4 p.m., when the pair suddenly separated
without any appearance of a pouch on the female, whose abdomen
remained large and swollen as at first. At 6 p.m. there was not
the least change in her appearance ; she remained quietly holding on
to the gauze, whilst the male crawled about the cage. In the even-
ing I put another fresh caught male in, and on the following morn-
ing put the cage in the hot sunshine at 7.30 a.m. All three insects
fluttered and crawled about the cage for some time, but showed no
46 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASsIvS. [Jan. 19,
inclination to come together. I watched the cage till 3 p.m., when
the insects appeared as before, but the males much less active. On
the following morning I found one of them dead, and after waiting
for some hours to see if anything would happen, went out. When I
returned I found the female had escaped, some one having probably
opened the gauze from curiosity. Several eggs were lying loose at
the bottom of the cage, but these were lost in travelling. From
these experiments I can form no conclusion as to whether the copu-
lation had been incomplete, owing to the male having previously
mated with another female, or whether the duration of the act was
insufficient ; but the fact remains that eggs were laid by a female
without a pouch, and that three days after emergence from the pupa,
she remained healthy, though no pouch was formed. It seems to
me that on account of the larger size of the pouch in this species it
would be a better one for anatomical observation than that of P. apollo;
and I hope that any entomologist who can assist me in making further
investigations by supplying me with larve or pupz of this species
will do so. As to whether the pouch is ever shed by this or other
species of Parnassius, as asserted by some observers, 1 can only say
that I never saw one without it, except specimens which from their
extreme freshness I suppose to be unmated females, and of these
I have numerous specimens belonging to 8 or 10 species.
One fact seems hard to explain, and that is the copulation of spe-
cimens which, from their appearance, were evidently not freshly
hatched, which I have noticed both in mnemosyne and in delius, but
which always separated when caught. Is it the case that, contrary
to the usual rule, the male only mates once and dies afterwards,
whilst the female, after having laid, is still attractive to males which
have not found a mate previously? If Mr. Watson’s observations on
P. apollo are correct, and the pouch is formed by a secretion exuded
from the male and not the female, this seems likely ; connection
of the pouch with the abdomen in all species of the mnemosyne
group seems to be only at the hinder end, as at the forward end
it is often quite separate from the body, and the edges more or less
recurved.
The variation of markings and size in this speciesis slight. Some
specimens show a tendency to transition into P. stubbendorfi by the
partial disappearance of the discal black blotches, and some females
are almost devoid of the milky white scales which cover the greater
part of the wings, but unless the var. nudilosus, of which I have
seen but few, is a constant variety, I know of none which are worthy
of especial notice, though Honrath describes a female melanic
aberration from Carinthia as melania.
P. sTUBBENDORFI.
Parnassius stubbendorfi, Mén. Desc. Ins. Lehm. p. 57, t. vi. fig. 2
(1848).
P. mnemosyne, var. immaculata, Mén. Bull. de la classe phys.-
math. de l’Acad. vol. v. n. 17. ‘
1886.) MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 47
P. stubbendorfi ab Q melanophia, Honrath, Berl. ent. Zeit. 1885,
p- 274.
This species appears to have been first discovered by Lehmann
near Kansk in Central Siberia, and has since been found in Dahuria
by Radde, and in many parts of the Amur region down to the coast
by Christoph, Graeser, aud others, where it appears to be abundant in
many places, and flies from the 19th of May to the end of June or later.
On the island of Askold it is not rare, four males in my collection
from this place being larger than those from the Amur, and showing
traces of the black patches on the cell of fore wing, which are con-
spicuous in mnemosyne. In Corea a form occurs which seems inter-
mediate between this species and P. glacialis, but has not the yellow
body of the latter; and though I have seen no specimens from the
western limit of its distribution, I should expect to find a similar
transition to P. mnemosyne. Graeser, however, in Verh. Ver. Hamburg,
1879, p. 201,says that when all the specimens sent by Consul Lihdorf
and Dorries from various parts of the Amur are compared, he doubts
the distinctness of this species from P. mnemosyne, as they show great
variation in the amount and distinctness of the black markings,
which sometimes are so distinct as to form a complete transition to
P. mnemosyne.
The pouch of the female is similar to that of the last-named species,
and in five females in my collection varies only in length, and is
sometimes more produced behind than is usual in P. mnemosyne
and generally darker in colour.
P. GLACIALIS.
Parnassius glacialis, Butler, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool. ix. p. 50
(1866).
? P. eitrinarius, Motsch. Bull. Mosc. 1866, i. p. 189.
This form, which appears to be found localiy in some of the higher
mountains of Japan, is undoubtedly very nearly allied to P. stubbendorfi.
It differs from that species in its larger size and in the well-marked
yellow hairs of the neck and breast, which in P. stubbendorfi and
mnemosyne are found in the female only. The ground colour of
the males is also of a much yellower tint than in P. stwbbendorfi.
The two females in my collection, which are all that I have seen, have
a blackish pouch resembling that of P. clodius in being considerably
shorter than the pouch of P. mnemosyne or stubbendorfi.
Mr. Pryer says of this species, in his Catalogue of the Lepido-
ptera of Japan :—“ I have taken this abundantly at Nikko in June
and July, and received many from Yesso. It varies considerably in
size, colour, and markings. I have eleven specimens in my cabinet,
no two of which are exactly alike. Yesso specimens are generally
whiter than those from Nikko, from whence I have a specimen
almost black. Some are without the dark patch on disk of fore
wing, others have one and two patches, and a dark band on the
outer margin of the fore wing, which sometimes extends to the hind
wing. The female has sometimes a peculiar horny sheath attached
to the underside of the abdomen.” Mr. Strecker says he has re-
48 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNassIus. ([Jan. 19,
ceived P. glacialis from Corea, but some from that country in Mr.
Godman’s collection are more like P. stubbendorfi, which is also
found in the island of Askold.
There is little or no doubt that Motschulsky’s name of citrinarius
was applied to this species, and would certainly be preferable to
Butler’s, which is without signification, there being nothing whatever
glacial in the habitat of the insect. As, however, the priority of
publication is doubtful, and Butler’s name is in common use, it may
be retained for the sake of convenience.
The law of priority is no doubt an excellent one, but may be
carried too far, and in all cases where the type of an insect is unknown,
or where, as isso often the case, in old descriptions, or in variable species,
itis impossible to fix it with certainty to a known and sufficiently de-
fined form, it is better to ignore it than to run the risk of confusion by
altering the accepted name. I must say, however, that many of the
names applied to Lepidoptera by some modern authors, among whom
Messrs. Butler and Moore are conspicuous, seem to be most faulty. A
specific name should, I think, always be given with regard either to
some peculiarity of size, colour, form, or structure of the species, or
should give some clue either to the locality, or to a person in some
way connected with the insect. If, however, nonsensical or bar-
barous names such as nicconicolens, Butler, rabdia, Butler, rikuchina,
Butler, or misleading names such as glacialis in this case, or Terias
hybrida, Butl., or names derived from Hindoo mythology, often
incorrect, as Sabbaria peeroza, Moore= Papilio polyctor, and nume-
rous others of the same character, then it becomes much more
difficult to remember the name at all, and to remember to which
species it belong. And I have personally found this difficulty to be
much greater among the Lepidoptera than it is among birds or plants,
which are, as a rule, much more rationally and sensibly named than
butterflies.
P. EVERSMANNI.
Parnassius eversmanni, Mén. Enum. part 1, p. 73, t. 1. fig. 2¢
(1855) ; W. H. Edwards, Butt. N. A. p. 27, t. 7. figs. 6, 7.
P. wosnesenshii, Mén. 1. ¢. p. 74, t. 1. fig. 3, 2.
? P. felderi, Brem. Lep. Ost-Sibiriens, p. 6, t. 1. fig. 5.
? P. thor, H. Edw. Papilio, vol. i. p. 2 (1881).
Whether I am right in uniting the above species time alone will
show, but I can see no difference except that of colour between some of
the varieties of P. eversmanniand P. felderi ; and though the males
appear very different, yet it would be perhaps impossible to say to
which species some of the females belong. The examples which I have
seen, however, in the collections of Messrs. Dieckmann, Honrath,
Staudinger, Fixen, the Hewitson and Godman collections, and that of
the St. Petersburg Museum, though somewhat numerous, have never
been all compared together, and it is possible that some characters
may exist which would serve to separate them.
This species was first made known by a single specimen sent from
Kansk, in Siberia, by Dr. Stubbendorf, and figured by Ménétries,
1886.] MR. H.J, ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 49
It is a bright yellow male, and resembles those afterwards collected
in some parts of the upper Amur region, which are in Hewitson’s
and Godman’s collections, and also the single male from the Yukon
river, Alaska, figured by Edwards. The specimen figured as type of
P. felderi by Bremer, and which appears to be a female, though
nothing is said as to sex, was taken by Dr. Radde in the Bureija
Mountains north of the Amur river; and the dark and apparently
worn female figured by Ménétries as P. wosnesenskii was brought
from Ochotsk in N.E. Asia. Since then it has remained a rare
species, but some examples of P. felderi were taken by Christoph at
Raddefskaia, on the Amur; and I have seen others in Dr. Fixen’s
collection, taken at Starikova, on the Amur, and at Raddefskaia, on
the 7th and 29th of July. Besides these, a small number of P. evers-
manni have been recently collected near Nikolaievsk, on the lower
Amur, by Herr Graeser, and sent to Herr Dieckmann of Hamburg,
and others I believe have since been taken in Alaska. It is said by
Christoph to be local, and hard to catch, flying over deep bogs.
Dr. Staudinger has a male from the Yenesei river, and others from
Nikolaievsk at the mouth of the Amur.
In most specimens of P. felderi the yellow colour fails almost en-
tirely, and the red ocelli are often absent in the male sex ; the yellow
hairs of the body and costz are, however, the same in both forms,
though not so abundant in P. felderi as in P. eversmanni. The
pouches, which are quite of the same form and size as in P. mnemosyne,
are alike in both species, and until we know more about them it will
be difficult to separate them. The variety named thor by Mr. H.
Edwards was described from a single male specimen taken in June
1877, 800 miles up the Yukon river, in Alaska, not far from the
place where the specimen of P. eversmanni figured in the ‘ Butterflies
of North America’ came. It is described as differing not only in the
ground colour, which is sordid white as in P. clarius, but in the broader
black base of the fore wings, the wider bands, and the much larger
proportion of black on both wings. The red spots also are more
numerous. The description seems to correspond very fairly with
the plate of P. felderi given by Bremer. Mr. Edwards hesitated long
before describing this as a distinct species, and says that it may
ultimately prove to be an extreme variety of P. eversmanni. In
this I quite agree with him, but the propriety of separating any
species in so difficult a genus as this on a single specimen of one
sex is in my mind most questionable.
Ménétries says that the pouch of P. wosnesenskii is very large,
nearly like that of P. mnemosyne, of a dirty white, with a longi-
tudinal groove below, and another on each side; but on examining
his type specimen, which is in very bad order, I noted that the pouch
seemed rather like that of P. clodius (of which, however, no speci-
men was available for comparison) than like that of P. mnemosyne.
P. cLopivs.
Parnassius clodius, Mén. Enum. p. 73 (1855); W. H. Edw.
Butt. N. A. i. p. 18, t. 4. figs. 5, 6.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. IV. 4
50 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASsIUS. ([Jan. 19,
P. clarius, Boisd. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. 2nd sér. vol. x. p. 283.
P. baldur, W. H. Edw. Can. Ent. xi. p. 142 (1879).
P. clarius, W. H. Edw. Butt. N. A. i. p. 17, t. 4. figs. 1-4.
P. menetriesii, H. Edw. Proc. Cal. Acad. Dec. 18, 1876.
This species, which was described by Meénétries from a specimen
brought by Wosnesensky from California, is confined to the Western
United States, from California northwards at least to British Columbia,
and probably further. For an account of its variations, I cannot do
better than quote Mr. H. Edwards’s notes on the genus Parnassius in
Proc. Cal. Acad. July 15, 1878. He says :—‘‘Our most common
species is P. clodius, Mén., which has a wide range and varies much
in different individuals. The typical form of this species, which has
the red spots very large and distinct, and the wings nearly opaque,
occurs sometimes nearly at sea-level, having been taken by Mr.
Behrens at Bodega about 500 feet above the sea, and more recently
in large numbers at Tomales in Marin Co. As it approaches the
mountains it becomes smaller in size, with the wings more transparent
and the spots smaller. It is now known as baldur, Edw.=clarius,
Bdv. nec Eversmann. This form is abundant in some portions of
the Sierra Nevada, particularly from about Emigrant Gap to the
summit of the Central Pacific Railway, 4500 to 8000 feet. Another
form, still more distinct, in which the spots are nearly obliterated,
the female closely resembling the male of the clodius type, I have
ventured to describe as P. menetriesii. This is to be taken also at
high elevations, my specimens coming from Lake Tahoe and neigh-
bourhood, 4000-5600 feet, and one female from the Wahsatch
Mountains, Utah, where it was captured by Mr. J. D. Putnam.
Mr. Mead took a grand female recently in the Yosemite Valley, at
4200 feet, and induced her to lay eggs on a plant of Sedum, and so
we may reasonably hope to know something of the transformations
of this exquisite species.”
Mr. Edwards says further:—‘‘I have no doubt these are all
forms of one species, subject to certain variations from change of
food, temperature, and other conditions.”
In Mr. Edwards’s ‘ Butterflies of North America, what he now
calls P. baldur was described and figured as clarius, and he still
cousiders it distinct from clodius ; but there is little doubt that, as
Mr. Henry Edwards says, they are varieties of the same species. The
form which I have from Washington Territory is the larger one, and
some from Plumas Co., California, are intermediate in size. Mr.
Crotch took the larger form in Vancouver’s Island; but I do not
know how far north it extends, or whether it meets with P. evers-
manni on the coast of British America, which is not improbable.
The principal character in which it differs from the true Siberian
P. clarius is the form of the pouch, which in five specimens in my col-
lection is always shorter and broader than in other forms of this group
(see Pl. IV. fig. 1); but the yellow hairs of the body and neck
and breast will also serve to distinguish it, as these parts are black
or grey in P. clarius.
Mr. H. Edwards says that P. clodius flies with a short jerky
1886.) MR. #H.J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 51
motion, not unlike that of many Hesperide, taking short flights,
settling frequently, and being very easy to capture.
In ‘Canadian Entomologist’ Mr. Edwards describes the eggs of this
species as a little larger than those of P. smintheus, of the same shape,
covered in the same way with a crust of hexagons ; colour pale coffee-
brown: laid on species of Sedum. The young larva is not distin-
guishable in shape, markings, or colour from those of P. smintheus.
Some of the eggs brought by Mr. Mead in September from Nevada
hatched in a warm room in February, but the larve, though fed on
Sedum, which some eat pretty well, soon died.
P, cLaRtivs.
Parnassius clarius, Eversm. Bull. Mose. 1843, iii. p. 539, t. ix.
f. a-c; Stgr. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1881, p. 258.
This species was discovered by Schrenck, in the Tarbagatai
Mountains, and described by Eversmann, and has since been found by
Kindermann between Ustkamenogorsk and Ustbuchtarmnisk in the
Altai, and by Haberhauer at moderate elevations near Dschemine near
Saisan, in Central Asia. Dr. Staudinger says of the specimens from
this place that they are not so strongly marked as those from the
Altai, and that the yellow spot on the inner border of the hind wing is
wanting, and in one female the yellow ocelli of the hind wing are
entirely wanting. The blackish band on the fore wing beyond the cell
is also absent, giving the specimen quite the appearance of P. mne-
mosyne, which is found neither in the Tarbagatai, Altai, or Alatau
Mountains, but appears again in the mountains of Samarkand.
Dr. Staudinger thinks that P. clarius is very close to the North-
American P. clodius, but that the yellowish instead of red ocelli well
distinguish it. I would, however, remark that some Altai specimens
of P. clarius, which I received from Herr Tancré, have the ocelli
rather red than yellow, and that the best character by which the two
species may be separated is the form of the pouch, which in P. cla-
rius, though quite of the same character, is much longer than in any
specimens of P. clodius I have seen.
Little or nothing is known about the habits of this species, and
its range does not seem to extend far to the east or west.
A variety named dentatus in some German collections does not
appear to have any marked characters, and the name was perhaps
given rather for commercial than scientific purposes. Names of this
class which have been largely adopted by professional horticulturists,
seem likely to become also prevalent among mercantile lepidopterists,
and should be treated as they deserve, when discovered. Scientific
collectors owe so much to commercial enterprise both in plants
* and insects, that we must not criticize these practices too severely ;
but as soon as the love of science becomes obscured by the love
of gain, and species-making becomes profitable to the pocket,
naturalists must be doubly careful before they accept novelties of
this nature.
4*
52 MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIvusS. [Jan. 19,
P. NORDMANNI.
Parnassiusnordmanni, Mén., Nordmann, Bull. Mose. 1851, p. 423,
t. xiii. figs. 1-3.
Var. minima, Honrath, Berl. ent. Zeit. 1885, p. 272, t. vill.
figs. 2, 2 a.
P. clarius, Herr.-Schiff. Pap. Eur. t. liv. figs. 257, 258.
This species appears to have a limited range, being confined to
certain districts north and south of the Caucasus, where it seems to
represent its near ally, P. clarius.
The two species have, in fact, little to distinguish them except
colour; but in the type specimens of P. nordmanni which I have
examined I find the neck is covered with yellow hairs, whilst the
palpi and hair of the head, legs, and feet are black, and this is the
case in other specimens which I have seen. In one specimen in the
St. Petersburg Museum, collected by Haberhauer, and in another
which I possess, and which from their small size I believe to be from
Daghestan (var. minima), the palpi and hair of the head and neck
are white. In P. clarius the body and legs are greyish ; but perhaps
the pouch affords the best distinction, as in P. clarius it is very long
behind, and opens rather upwards ; whilst in P. nordmanni it is much
shorter behind, and cut off in a different way at the opening,
Nordmann says of this species that it flies with P. delius in the
highest mountains of Adshara in July. He took it in some numbers
on the road from Osurgeti in Georgia direct over the Somlia Moun-
tains to Achalzich, on the slope of the peak called Dshuaruto.
Since then no one except Haberhauer seems to have taken it south
of the Caucasus, ard we have no details of his captures ; but Chris-
toph, in his account of his explorations in Daghestan, Hor. Ent.
Ross. xii. p. 17, says that it flew on the bare stone-covered slopes of
the mountain Bazardjusi, at 13,000 feet elevation. The specimens
I have seen from here are all much smaller than those from Georgia,
and have been separated by Honrath as ‘‘ var. minima.” Ménétries,
in his Catalogue, gives Akbasia as a locality, and the Grand Duke
Nicholas, in his Catalogue of the Lepidoptera of the Caucasus, says
it is found at Kourouch in Daghestan. It remains, however, a rare
insect in collections, and its distribution is obscure.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
All the objects are magnified 5 times, except the eggs.
Prats I
. Side view of pouch of a female P. apollo, from Eperies, Hungary.
. The same, from behind.
. Side view of clasping-organs of male P. apollo, from Brunnen, Lucerne,
taken June 27, 1884. Denuded of hair whilst fresh.
End view of same when exposed.
. Claspers detached from their position.
. Valves seen from below, when detached.
es of one of the valves, seen from above.
. Penis.
MaDe cme
i ns el) A le a . ‘ 7
% i +
P.Z.8. 1886. PL, .
Pee ee
a One
Y pian
THE CAMBRIOGE SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENT COMPANY. 4
»
STRUCTURE & DEVELOPMENT OF PARNASSIUS. e
- e f P. Z.$.1886. Pl 0.
=
i)
wre
+
'
writs
Le em
WE a8? 0
ry
i
‘eas:
THE CAMBRIDGE SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENT COMPANY.
is
ane ey ie
eae ;
- STRUCTURE & DEVELOPMENT OF PARNASSIUS
bas = Vers tS °C 7
Poe) 1bOGs Lay
THE CAMBRIDGE SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENT COMPANY
|Win WILSON, del.
DEVELOPMENT OF PARNASSIUS. :
4
Pa. ». L6eG1 Eien
THE CAMBRIDGE “SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENT
TURE & DEVELOPMENT OF PARNASSIUS.
7
4
COMPANY
1886. ] MR. H. J. ELWES ON THE GENUS PARNASSIUS. 53
Fig. 9.
10.
11.
12.
Side view of female P. delius, taken in Gantherthal, Valais, July 1, 1884.
The same, from behind.
Side view of organs of male P. delius, exposed by remoyal of external
covering on one side.
Egg of P. delius from fresh specimen, highly magnified.
13 a. Side view of female P. smintheus, from Colorado, U.S.A.
14 a. End view of same.
13 5. Side view of female P. dremeri, from Amur.
144, End view of same.
Fig. 1.
_
SOM Ampere
Puate II.
Side view of female P. jacguemonti, from Ladak.
. End view of the same.
. Side view of female P. acco, from Lapsang, Ladak.
. End view of the same.
. Side view of female P. hardwickei, from Mandi.
End view of same.
Side view of male P. hardwickii, the organs exposed by removal of the
outer covering.
. The same, as seen from above.
. Side view of female P. tenedius, from Albasin, Amur.
. The same, viewed from behind.
. Egg found adhering to the same, highly magnified.
. Side view of pouch of female P. staudingeri, from Turkestan.
. End view of the same.
. Male organs of P. staudingeri as seen protruded in a specimen lent by
Dr. Staudinger, which appears to have been forcibly separated from
the female during copulation.
Puate III.
. Side view of female of P. stoliczkanus, from Baralacha Pass, Himalaya.
. End view of the same.
. Side view of female P. 7mperator, from Ta-tsien-lo, Tibet.
. End view of the same.
Side view of female P. charltonius, from Lahoul.
End view of the same.
Side view of male organs of P. charltonius, exposed by removal of side
plates.
Side view of female P. mnemosyne, from Berisal, Valais, July 2, 1884.
. End view of the same.
End view of male organs of P. mnemosyne when opened by artificial
means, from a specimen in spirit, to show their probable position
during copulation.
The same, as they appear in their natural position.
. Side view of male organs of P. mnemosyne when exposed by remoyal of
side plate.
12a. Ege of P. mnemosyne, highly magnified.
Fig. 1.
2.
3.
4,
5.
6.
Prats IV.
Side view of female P. clodius, from Washington Territory.
End view of same.
Side view of female P. eversmanni, from Amurland, in mus, F. D.
Godman.
End view of the same.
Side view of P. clarius, from Altai Mountains.
End view of the same.
54 MR. 0. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF [Jan. 19,
2. On the Mammals presented by Allan O. Hume, Esq.,
C.B., to the Natural History Museum. By Oxpriexp
Tuomas, F.Z.S.
[Received November 16, 1885.]
(Plates V. & VI.)
ConTENTs.
Introductory remarks, p. 54. III. The Tenasserim Collection.
I. The Sambhar Collection, p. 55, p. 65.
II. The Manipur Collection, p. 57. | IV. The Malay Peninsula Collec-
tion, p. 72.
Accompanying the magnificent donation of Indian birds recently
made to the National Museum by Mr. A. O. Hume, there is a
collection of nearly 400 mammals, which, although appearing of
small account beside the enormous ornithological series, is yet, viewed
on its own merit, one of the finest collections of mammals ever
received by the Museum. This is due not only to the large number
of the specimens and the exeellence of the skins, which are both in
preparation and conservation very far above the average, but also to
the careful manner in which they have been labelled, nearly all of
them having their exact localities and dates recorded. Thus of the
371 specimens retained in the Museum, only 59 are undated, and only
some 10 or 12 are without exact localities, while such large series of
perfect skins, especially of the Squirrels and other small mammals,
have probably never before been brought together.
The collection consists of a few specimens respectively from Simla,
Delhi, the Nilghiris, and the Andaman and Nicobar Islands, but the
great mass of it came from four separate localities, viz. Sambhar,
in Rajpootana, Manipur, Tenasserim, and the Malay peninsula, and
I have thought it better not to give one list of the whole, thereby
confusing the localities and destroying any use the list might have
for faunistic purposes, but to give four separate lists, each of which
forms a distinct contribution to the fauna of a well-defined locality.
The total number of species represented in the collection is 106, of
which 19 are from Sambhar, 19 from Manipur, 25 from Tenasserim,
and 28 from the Malay peninsula, the remainder being from the
other localities above mentioned.
Before commencing the detailed lists, I must express my obligations
to Mr. W. T. Blanford for the assistance he has given me in working
out this collection, an assistance the more valuable as he is himself
preparing a work on the mammals of India, and has therefore the
whole subject at his fingers’ ends. For help also in making out
details of localities, dates, &c. I must thank my colleague Mr. R.
Bowdler Sharpe, who himself fetched the collection from Simla, and
to whose careful packing the excellent condition in which the
specimens now are is partly due.
OQ.
E
ith
eulemans |
K
v.U
PA. 8S 18866,PLV1
J.GKeulemans Lth. Hanhart imp
er
L
oe
MiIROPT ERS DAVISON
g
hens
wore BG ie
4s
1886.] THE HUME COLLECTION. 55
I. Tue SamBuar CoLLecrion.
The collection from Sambhar, Rajpootana, was formed in the
winter of 1877-78 by Mr. R. M. Adam, to whom ornithologists are
indebted for the “Notes on the Birds of the Sambhar Lake,”
published in 1873.
The interest possessed by such a series as the present consists in the
aid it gives in fixing the north-westerly distribution of the commoner
Indian mammals, a point on which we are as yet exceedingly
ignorant, and for which authentic lists of the mammals of different
localities are much needed. For this purpose Sambhar is an
especially useful locality, as it is in this region that the fauna begins
to lose its ordinary Indian character and to show signs of the desert
influences so marked further west in Sind and the Punjaub.
The collection consists of 42 skins referable to 19 species. The
skulls have all been cleaned and sent separately, and too much
credit cannot be given to Mr. Adam for the care and trouble he has
taken in preparing this valuable part of his mammal collection.
1. Fexis cnavus, Gild.
a. 3. Sambhar, 2/2/78. 6. 3. Kishungurh, 26/12/77.
2. Fexis rorquata, F. Cuv.
a. 2. Sambhar, 17/12/77.
3. FELIS ORNATA, Gr. m .
a-e, 4 ¢ and 1 9.Sambhar, 12/77 and 1/78. f. 2. Kishun-
gurh, 28/12/77.
Mr. Adam obtained no less than six specimens of this rare and
beautiful species, which has been hitherto represented in the national
collection by only a single half-grown individual collected by Capt.
Boys, and by askull from the Salt Range, obtained by Mr. Theobald.
Mr. Adam/’s series is particularly valuable, as it proves incontestably
the validity of the species, which has been confounded by Blyth,
Jerdon, and others with F. torquata.
4. VIvVERRICULA MALACCENSIS, F, Cuy.
a. 3. Sambhar, 17/12/77.
This seems tobe the most westerly Indian locality from which the
Lesser Civet has been recorded, but the species turns up again on
the other side of the Indian Ocean in Socotra, the Comoro Islands,
and Madagascar, to all ef which it has probably been introduced by
natives.
5. PARADOXURUs NIGER, Desm.
a-c. Sambhar, 8 and 9/77.
' Stray Feathers, i. p. 361, 1873,
56 MR. 0. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF [Jan. 19,
6. Herpestes Griseus, Geoffr.'
a—c. Sambhar, J, 3, and 4/78.
a |
. HEeRPEsTEs sMITHII, Gray.
a. 6. Sambhar, 13/1/78.
8. Hy2na striata, L.
a. Sambhar, 17/1/78.
9. CANIS PALLIPES, Sykes.
a. Sambhar, 23/1/78.
10. Canis aurzEvs, L.
a. &. Jodhpur, 28/1/78. 6. ¢g. Nawa, Sambhar Lake,
23/12/77. ¢. 2. Goodha, Sambhar, 26/12/77. d. Sambhar.
11. VuLPES BENGALENSIS, Shaw.
a. &.Sambhar, 17/1/78.
12. Vures Leucopvs, Bly.
a-c. d. and 2 9.Sambhar, 9 and 12/77. d. &. Jodhpur.
26/1/78.
13. Mextiivora 1npica, Bodd.
a. 2. Sambhar, 14/1/78.
14. Scrurus PALMARUM, L.
a. 3. Sambhar.
15. Nrsoxra BANDICOTA, Bechst.
a. 3. Sambhar, 13/3/78.
16. NEsOKIA HARDWICKEI, Gr.
a-e.3 g.and 2 2. Sambhar, 6/77 and 1/78.
1 There has been considerable diversity of opinion as to the name the
common Indian Mungoose should bear, some authorities thinking the early
name of Jiverra mungo (Gmelin, Linn. 8. N. i. p. 84, 1789) is applicable to it,
and others that the /chnewmon griseus of Geoffroy (Descr. Egypte, Hist. Nat. ii.
p- 138, 1812) includes an African as well as an Indian species, and is therefore
not tenable. As to the first point, V. muwngo was based by Gmelin primarily on
the “ Viverra ichnewmon B” of Schreber (Saug. iii. p. 430, pls. exvi. and cxyi.
B). But the latter is made up of a conglomeration of different animals from
yarious localities, the two plates representing, the first H. griseus and the
second the South-African Crossarchus fasciatus (see P. Z. 8. 1882, p. 91). In
addition Viverra mungo includes Herpestes persicus, Gay. (=H. awropunctatus,
Hodg.) as Mr. Blanford has pointed out (Zool. Hast Persia, p. 42, 1876). In
my opinion therefore the only rational method of treating Viverra mungo is
simply to ignore it altogether.
Passing to the second point, as to the applicability of Geoffroy’s Jchnewmon
griseus to this species, I find that although Geoffroy quoted Buffon’s “ Nems”
said to be Hast African, as identical with his animal, yet his description agrees
in every respect with the Indian Mungoose, and he distinctly states that his
species came from the “ Indes Orientales,” so that there is no valid reason why
the time-honoured name of Herpestes griseus should be superseded.
1886.] THE HUME COLLECTION. 57
17. Mus RATTUS RUFESCENS, Gr,
a. Sambhar.
Being now quite convinced of the specific identity of Mus rattus
and alewandrinus, I use the Linnean name rattus in preference to
that of alexandrinus provisionally employed in my review of the
Indian Rats and Mice’.
18. Hysrrix Leucura, Sykes.
a. g. Sambhar, 27/1/78.
19, Lepus RUFICAUDATUS, Geof.
a-c. Sambhar, 12/77 and 1/78.
II. Tae Manipur Couvecrion.
The series from Manipur contains some of the rarest and most
interesting of all the mammals presented by Mr. Hume, as was,
indeed, to be expected, that country being as yet but little explored,
and its mammal fauna being practically unknown. The collection
consists of 61 specimens, belonging to 19 species, of which the greater
part are decidedly Himalayan in character, the others being either
peculiar to Manipur or only otherwise known from Burma. One
species and one variety only are new to science, but many are rare
and obscure, and all are of the greatest value as filling up an impor-
tant gap in our knowledge of the fauna of Further India.
With regard to the smaller mammals also, collections from this
region are of especial value, owing to the large number of Burmese
species described by Blyth that still require proper identification.
Notably is this the case among the Rodents, and it is with the
greatest satisfaction that I am able to identify several of his species
in the present and the Tenasserim collections.
The most important contributions to our knowledge of the
mammal fauna of the Manipur region are :— ;
1. Blyth’s posthumous “ List of the Mammalsof Burma” published
as an extra part of J. A. S. B. xliii. 1875, which contains references
to all the species then known to inhabit Burma, and in which the
greater part of the species represented in Mr. Hume’s collection are
mentioned; and
2. Dr. Anderson’s ‘ Zoological Results of the two expeditions to
Western Yunnan,’ 1878, which is less a list of the specimens obtained
by the expeditions than a series of monographs of the chief Indian
genera of mammals. These monographs, especially those of the
Sciuride, have been of great value to me in working out the Hume
collection, and I have made constant references to them throughout.
Mr. Hume has not as yet published his intended account of the
Birds of Manipur, but when he does, he will no doubt give full
particulars about the localities at which the mammals were obtained.
1 P.Z.8. 1881, p. 533.
58 MR. O. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF (Jan. 19,
1, HERPESTES AUROPUNCTATUS BIRMANICUS ’, var. nov.”
a. Boori bazar, 11/3/81.
This specimen belongs to a race which for some time both Mr.
Blanford and I have thought to be new, and of which the Museum
possesses two other specimens, one from “Burma” (probably Tonghu)
. presented by Mr. R. G. Wardlaw-Ramsay and exhibited to this
Society as H. awropunctatus by Mr. Alston in 1879°; and the other
from Pegu (10/4/81) presented and collected by Mr. Eugene Oates.
Mr. Blanford has also in his own collection a specimen of it from
Cachar.
These four specimens are all nearly precisely alike and differ from
ordinary Nepalese H. auropunctatus by their larger size, heavier
build and slightly darker coloration, their superiority in size being
especially well marked in their skulls and dentition.
The following are the comparative measurements of Mr. Oates’s
Pegu specimen, which I will consider as the type of the variety, and
of the type of H. auropunctatus from Nepal, a fully adult male :—
Head Hind
and body. Tail, foot.
mm, mm, mm.
H. auropunctatus, type*,d.. 320 212 48
Var. birmanicus, d......-- 392 214 55°
Incisors Basi-
Skulls :— Palate- Palate- to eranial
Length. Breadth. length. breadth. cross-line. axis®.
HT. auropunctatus, 59-0)! 9130:0. -33°O. 1995 ~23:0 «29°80
Var. birmanicus, 62: 7ere 34:0. 553430 121586 23:0% ase
F ; Greatest breadth
Teeth.—Greatest diameter of of pm‘ at right
angles to greatest
pm* m! m? diameter.
H. auropunctatus, ...... 70 59 3:0 3°2
Var. birmanicus, ........ 8:0 6°4 Bhi 3°6
It is possible that this variety will hereafter have to be raised to
1 The question as to whether this should be “ dirmanicus” or “ burmanus”’
has given rise to much doubt. Roma makes romanus and therefore Burma
should make burmanus, especially as Burma is undoubtedly the correct, and the
French Birmanie an incorrect and corrupt form of the name. Unfortunately,
however, not only have the French corrupted the word into Birmanie, but the
Italians, to whom we must look as the representatives of the ancient Romans,
have also made the same change, calling it “ Birmania,” whence “ dirmanicus,”
which I think we must accept as the nearest to the proper Latin for Burmese.
2 Preliminary diagnosis in Ann. Mag. N. H. (5) xvii. p. 4, Jan. 1886.
3 P. Z.8. 1879, p. 665.
+ Measurements taken as explained, P. Z. 8. 1882, p. 65, except that in
deference to what is now becoming the common practice, I take the ‘length of
skull” from the front of the premaxille to the basion, instead of to the back of
the condyles.
5 In the Manipur specimen 58 mm.
6 Combined lengths of basioccipital and basisphenoid, not including pre-
phenoid as accidentally stated before.
1886. ] THE HUME COLLECTION. 59
the rank of a species; but until series from intermediate localities are
collected it would be unsafe to presume that the differences between
the typical H. awropunctatus and this variety will not be bridged
over.
Some of Dr. Anderson’s specimens of H. auropunctatus } no doubt
also belong to this Burmese race.
2. Hexictis personata, Geof.
a. b. Manipur, 28/2 and 6/3/81.
Dr. Anderson ® places this species as a synonym of H. moschata,
Gray; but the most cursory examination either of the original figure
or of that given by De Blainville, both referred to by him, would
have shown him that it was really different, as the teeth are depicted
of a size even larger than is found in either H. nepalensis or
orientalis, the two usually recognized representatives of the large-
toothed group, while H. moschata is the type of the small-toothed
section of the genus.
The very large size of the teeth seems to be a character of the
continental lowland race, in contrast to the comparatively small-
toothed Nepalese and Javan forms, these having in their turn far
larger teeth than the Chinese H. moschata. Whether now H. nepa-
lensis and orientalis are even varietally distinct from each other I am
very doubtful, but in any case H. personata, although coming from a
more or less intermediate locality, is sufficiently distinct from both
by its larger teeth and greyer colour, to merit specific separation.
The distribution and relations of these three races, H. nepalensis,
orientalis, and personata, form an interesting comment on Mr.
Wallace’s remarks on the Himalayan, Javanese, and Malay faunas *.
3. TUPAIA BELANGERI, Wagn.
a. Aimole 11/4/81. 6. Machi 1/5/81.
4. Preropus MEpDIvs, Temm.
a. &. Kotschim-kooleh, 7/4/81.
5. VesPERuUGO (VESPERUS) PACHYPUS, Temm.
a. Aimole, 14/4/81.
This somewhat rare species has been found at isolated localities
over nearly the whole of the Oriental Region.
6. VESPERUGO ABRAMUS, Temm.
a. Aimole, 14/4/81.
7. ScIUROPTERUS ALBONIGER, Hodgs.
a.-d. Machi, 4—-10/5/81.
This species differs much more from S. fimbriatus, Gray, than is
generally recognized. The shape and proportions of its skull and
the colour of its incisors are markedly different, and it has no trace
of the minute extra hind foot-pad characteristic of S. fimbriatus.
1 Op. cit, p. 173. 2 Op. cit. p. 198.
8 Island Life, p. 358 (1880).
60 MR. 0. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF [Jan. 19,
I cannot agree with Dr. Anderson as to the identity of the
genera Pteromys and Sciuropterus, which he has united on the plea
that the dentition is much the same in both, and that the distichous
arrangementis not purely distinctive of the smaller species, but is found
partially in some of the larger, while, on the other hand, some of the
so-called Sciuropteri really have bushy tails. He goes on to say,
“The wing-parachute in all the members of the group is the same,
although some naturalists have described it in sagitta as having an
expansion in front of the fore limb which does not exist in the other
species ; but this is unquestionably an error.”
In order to settle the question, I have examined specimens in spirit
both of Pteromys and Sciuropterus, and I find that not only do both
have an antebrachial membrane, arising from the back of the cheek
and inserted in the front of the carpus, but that there really are im-
portant differences in the development and insertion of the parachutes,
comparable in some respects to those observable in the wing-
membranes of the Chiroptera, differences which, as in the case of the
antebrachial membrane, Dr. Anderson must have overlooked through
examining dried skins only.
In Pteromys there is a broad well-defined interfemoral membrane,
inserted externally at the point where the tendo achillis is attached
to the caleaneum, and internally to the tail from two to three inches
from its base, and there is in some of the larger species nearly three
inches depth of membrane clear of the hind limb.
On the other hand, in Sciuropterus there is either no interfemoral
membrane at all, or what there is merely consists of a slight expan-
sion of skin behind the knee, attached externally to the tendo achillis,
about halfway down, and internally to the hinder side of the hips
and never involving any part of the tail.
The lateral membrane also is distinctly narrower, especially below
the knee, in Sciuropterus than in Pteromys, although the longer
fringes of hair in the former hide this fact in dried specimens.
Adding to these differences the well-known one in the arrange-
ment of the hairs of the tail, to which I am unable to see the
exceptions mentioned by Dr. Andersen, and also those in the den-
tition described by various authors, I think that it will be admitted
that two such natural groups as Pteromys and Sciuropterus should
be allowed to stand as distinct genera.
8. ScrUROPTERUS PEARSONI. Gray.
a. Machi, 7/5/81.
This rare species would be naturally expected to occur in Mani-
pur. It has previously been recorded from Sikkim, Assam, and
Yunnan.
9. Scrurus rnpicus, Erxl.
a. ¢. Gurung R. 8/2/81.
The present is by far the most easterly locality as yet recorded
for this species, and extends its known range very considerably, the
Terai region of Nepal (Hodgson) and Cuttack (Anderson) having
1886. | THE HUME COLLECTION. 61°
been hitherto its most easterly localities recorded. I am altogether
unable to perceive on what grounds Dr. Anderson keeps S. maximus,
Gm., separate from this, as although he gives detailed descriptions of
both, he omits any comparison between the two. In my opinion
the two are certainly specifically identical, and Dr. Jentink is also of
the same opinion’.
10. Scrurus ERYTHRzEUS, Pall.
a-c. Noong-zai-bau, 2/2/81. d. Koomberong, 6/2/81.
e-i. Aimole, 13 to 19/4/81. 7, &. Machi, 30/4 and 1/5/81.
Of these specimens all those from Noong-zai-bau and Koomberong
are comparatively darker, both above and below, and more finely
punctulated than any of those from Aimole and Machi, and more
nearly approach the “ 8. punctatissimus”’ of Gray.
As all the first set were taken in February, and all the second in
March, the difference, judging from Mr. Hume’s series only,
might have been suspected to depend on date and not on locality ;
but this idea is dispelled both by the absence of any patchiness or
other sign of change in the skins, and by the fact that a specimen of
S. punctatissimus in the Museum, from Cachar,is dated June, whereas,
were the change seasonal only, this form should, on the evidence of
the Manipur specimens, represent the winter and not the summer
dress of S. erythreus.
The species seems, in fact, to be peculiarly susceptible to local
influences, as every locality represented in the combined Museum
and Hume collections has a more or less different race. Thus
Bhotan and Western-Assam specimens are dark with a rafous
tinging, an Eastern-Assam one pale with a yellowish wash, this
leading naturally into the pale Aimole and Machi Manipur specimens.
After these, again, comes the darker Noong-zai-bau and Koomberong
race, which finally grades into the extremely dark, finely punctulated
S. punctatissimus from Dilkoosha, Cachar.
11. Scrurus LoxrriorpEs, Hodgs.
a-d. Machi, Aimole, and Phalel, 4/81. ¢, Jherighat, 1/2/81.
12. Scrurus toxrian, Hodgs.
a, b, Aimole, 4/81.
13. ScruRuS MACCLELLANDI, Horsf.
a-g. Aimole, 13-25/4/81. hk. Machi, 7/5/81. 7. Loanglol,
13/2/81.
These specimens are interesting as being almost precisely inter-
mediate between the S. macclellandi typicus of Nepal and Assam,
and the Tenasserim S. macclellandi barbei, Bly. S. macelellandi
swinhoei, M.-Edw., of Moupin, Thibet*, seems also to be arecognizable
race of the present species.
S. macclellandi possesses six mammee, one lateral and two inguinal
airs.
r Notes Leyd. Mus. 1883, p. 106.
? Rech. Mamm. i. p. 308 (1868-1874),
62 MR. 0. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF [Jan. 19,
14. Mus powers, Anders.!
a.9. Machi, 8/5/81.
There is nothing in Dr. Anderson’s description of his Mus bowersi
absolutely to prevent the present specimen belonging to it; but the
differential characters of these Muride@, obvious enough on actual
comparison, are often so difficult of description that I should not be
suprised if the present were to turn out to be distinct from M. bowersi,
especially as the figure of that animal is by no means identical with
Mr. Hume’s specimen, but is more similar to the species of the
group to which M. germaini, M.-Edw., belongs. However, there
can be no question that for the present the Manipur Rat should
rather be referred to M. dowersi than be described as new. Dr.
Anderson’s type was obtained at Hotha, Yunnan, at an elevation of
4500 feet.
15. Mus BERDMOREI, Bly.
a, b. Kopum Thall, 11/2/81.
These two specimens agree so closely with Blyth’s short descrip-
tion? that I have no hesitation in referring them to his species,
even though Blyth himself afterwards placed M. berdmorei asa
synonym of MW. robustulus, Bly. (=M. ratius rufescens, Gr.), and
though the locality of Blyth’s specimen, Mergui, Tenasserim, is so
distant and has so different a fauna from Menipur.
The following description, based on Mr. Hume’s two skins, will
serve to supplement the short and unsatisfactory one given by
Blyth :—
eel colour clear slaty grey, the tips of some of the hairs
brown and of others white, the mixture giving a very finely grizzled
appearance to the back, in which no trace of yellow or fawn is present ;
chin, chest, and belly pure white. Ears outside brown, inside silvery ;
feet white ; tail bicolor, black above and white beneath for half its
length, the terminal half white all round ; the tip not pencilled.
Fur of only one sort, stiff and hispid, but with no trace of spines.
Tail about the length of the head and body combined, or a little
shorter. [Ears large and evenly rounded ; fifth hind toe reaching to
the middle of the first phalanx of the fourth. Foot-pads large and
prominent.
Skull with its facial portion unusually long, nasals long and
narrow, surpassing in length the ascending premaxillary processes ;
supraorbital ridges well defined; anterior plate of zygoma well
developed, very convex forward. Palate very long, the interval
between the back of the incisors and the molars very much longer
than usual ; palatine foramina rather short, terminating about 1mm.
in front of m'; posterior nares opening at the level of the hinder
edge of m’*.
Incisors pale yellow, lightening to white at their tips, directed
1 Zool. Yunn. Exp. p. 304, pl. xvii. (1878).
2 J.A.S8. B. xx. p. 173 (1852).
1886. ] THE HUME COLLECTION. 63
much more forward than usual. Molars very small in proportien to
the size of the animal, their pattern as usual.
Measurements. Head and body 174 mm.; tail 172; hind foot
36; fore arm and hand 44; ear (above crown) 16; heel to front
of last foot-pad 17°4.
Skull. Bregma to tip of nasals 35:0; greatest breadth 21°5 ;
nasals, length 16-0; interorbital breadth 7°0 ; length of face 21°8;
palate, length 22-4 ; incisors to m’ 14:1; palatine foramina 7°8 ;
molar series 6°1 ; anterior zygoma-root 4°7; lower jaw, bone only,
25°1 ; to incisor tips 30°6.
This species is allied to Mus blanfordi, Thos., and Mus con-
fSucianus, M.-Edw., but differs from both by its clear grey colour,
without any trace of yellow in it, by its shorter tail, forwardly di-
rected and paler-coloured incisors, longer palate, and smaller molars.
16. Mus Hume, sp.n.’ (Plate V.)
af. 2gdand 49. Moirang, 23/3/81.
The collection contains six specimens of this striking new species,
which I have much pleasure in dedicating to the donor of the present
magnificent addition to the National Collection of mammals.
General colour above exceedingly like that of Golunda ellioti, Gr.,
viz. coarsely grizzled grey, lightest on the head and gradually turn-
ing to deep rufous on the rump, the tips of the great majority of
the hairs being white or yellowish white on the head and fore
quarters, and gradually becoming rich rufous on the hind quarters,
their bases in all cases deep slaty-blue. The other hairs are black
throughout, and form the black element in the general grizzling.
Sides like the fore quarters. Belly yellow or orange, mixed with the
slate of the hair-bases; no black-tipped hairs below. ‘The inner
sides of the thighs and all round the base of the tail rich rufous.
The fur throughout is soft, and unmixed with flattened or spinous
bristles.
Feet grizzled yellowish white. Ears thinly covered outside with
black hairs, and inside with black and yellow or red ones; an
indistinct tuft of orange-tipped hairs in front of the basal notch.
Tail well haired, but not pencilled, markedly bicolor, the hairs black
above and white below, but the scales, even of the lower side, are
uniformly brown.
Ears large and evenly rounded, with a small projection in the
middle of their inner margins ; laid forward they reach to the pos-
terior corner of the eye. Tail about as long as the body without
the head. Fifth front toe unusually short, its claw barely reaching
to the bottom of the division between the 2nd and 3rd _ toes, giving
the foot, at first sight, the appearance of being only provided with
three toes. Fifth hind toe reaching just to the base of the fourth.
Foot-pads 5-6. Mammee 8, 2 pectoral and 2 inguinal pairs.
Skull, both in size and shape, almost identical with that of Golunda
ellioti*, Gr., with the two following exceptions :—(1) The front
* Preliminary diagnosis published Ann. Mag. N. H. (5) xvii. p. 84, Jan. 1886,
* Figured by Blanford, J. A. S. B. xly. pl. x. (1876).
64 MR. 0. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF (Jan. 19,
edge of the anterior zygoma-root is concave, with an overhanging
point ’ instead of being convex, (2) the palate is produced to behind
the edge of the last molar, instead of ending opposite its centre.
The first of these characters, although fairly common among the
Australian Muride, is, to the best of my knowledge, not found in any
of the other Muride either of Asia or Africa. In all other characters,
in the development and direction of the supraorbital ridges, the
length and shape of the nasals, the angles formed by the sutures on
the brain-case, the length of the palatine foramina, &c., the two skulls
are absolutely identical.
Teeth Jarge and powerful ; incisors short and stout, the lower ones
projecting only about 3 mm. beyond the bone, smooth, rounded, and
ungrooved in front, dark orange-yellow above, rather lighter below ;
molars broad and heavy, their structure as in Mus, and with no
resemblance to those of Golunda; last molar nearly as large as the
second, consisting both above and below of two well-defined equal-
sized laminze.
Measurements of the largest skin, a female. Head and body
125 mm. ; tail 106; hind foot 25:0. Of a specimen softened and
placed in spirit, head and body 118°0: hind-foot 26°5; heel to
front of last foot-pad 12°0; forearm and hand 31°5; ear, above
crown, 12:0.
Skull, Length, bregma to nasal-tip 26°0; greatest breadth 15:0 ;
length of face 14°5 ; nasals, length 10°0 ; interorbital breadth 4:5;
palate, length 16-0 ; incisors to m* 8°3 ; palatine foramina 5:1 ; molar
series 58: length of anterior zygoma-root 4:0; lower jaw, length
(bone only) 18°3; to incisor-tips 19°2 ; projection of incisors
(behind) 4°5.
The general appearance of this species is infinitely more like that
of the Gulandi (Golunda ellioti) than that of any of the other Indian
members of the genus Mus. So like Golundu is it, indeed, in colour,
proportions, and even in the general shape of its skull, that it might
easily be mistaken for this animal, were it not for its slightly longer
tail, less spiny fur, ungrooved incisors, and a few other little prominent
characters which might easily be overlooked by a superficial observer.
It thus seems to bear the same interesting relationship to the Gulandi
that Sigmodon hispidus, 8. and O., does to Rheithrodon alstoni,
Thos.”
The only species to be referred to in describing M. humei as new
is Mus erythrotis, Blyth *, from the Khasia hills, the colours of which
agree very closely with those of this species, but which is stated to
be only 57 mm. in length, with a tail 60 mm. long, and a hind foot,
including the claws, only 1774 mm. long, a difference in size far too
great to admit of any question as to the specific distinction of the
two animals.
1 This type of zygoma-root is figured Ann. Mag. N. H. (5) ix. p. 414, fig. 3
(1882).
2 See P.Z. 8. 1880, p. 693.
8 J. A.8.B. xxiy. p. 721 (1855).
1886. ] THE HUME COLLECTION. 65
17. Mus cervicotor, Hodgs.
a. Boori-bazar, 11/3/81.
This is evidently Blyth’s M. cunicularis’ described from the
Khasia hills, and bears out my suspicion that that is merely a
synomym of M. cervicolor’.
18. VANDELEURIA OLERACEA, Bean.
a, b. Boori-bazar, 11/3/81.
Dr. Anderson (Zool. Yunn. Exp. p. 313, 1878) has already noted
the presence of this interesting little species in Burma and the
neighbouring countries. It seems probable that Mus dadius, Blyth
(J. A. S. B. xxviii. p. 295), described from the valley of the Sitang,
should be added to the synonyms of V. oleracea.
19, Ruizomys Baptus, Hodgs.
a—f. 4 adult and 2 young. Boori-bazar, 11 and 12/3/81. g, h.
2 young, Moirang, 22/3/81.
The young specimens are interesting as showing that this species
only assumes its rich chestnut-colour in adult age, as they are all
of a hue more resembling that of Rh. pruinosus, Bly., than that of
the adult animals along with which they were caught, and of which
they are presumably the young.
III. Tae Tenasserim CoLueEcrion.
Next in interest to the Manipur mammals come those from
Tenasserim, collected nearly entirely by Mr. Davison in 1877 and
1878, at the time when Mr. Hume was bringing together materials
for the valuable paper on the Birds of Tenasserim published in
1878°. In this paper may be found a description (p. 522) of all
the localities at which Mr. Davison worked, and at which therefore
these mammals were obtained. It was on this collection that Mr.
Blanford’s paper “On some Mammals from Tenasserim’’* was
based, and in the present account there are therefore no novelties to
be described, that author having then named, described, and figured
the two remarkable species Prionodon maculosus and Sciurus rujigenis,
the typical specimens of which are in Mr. Hume’s collection. As
Mr. Blanford’s paper is not, however, a full account of the collection,
but merely consists of notes on the rarer and more interesting
species, I have considered it advisable, notwithstanding his paper, to
write a list of the Tenasserim as well as of the other mammals of
the Hume collection.
Tenasserim mammals are of interest chiefly on account of the
passage that takes place in that country from the Burmese to the
Malay fauna, as we find that the South Tenasserim species, those
from Bankasun, are more or less Malay in character, and add several
species to the list of the mammals of British India, while on the
1 J. A. S. B. xxiv. p. 721 (1855). 2 P. Z.S. 1881, p. 548.
5 «Stray Feathers,’ vol. vi. 1878. * J. A.S. B, xlvii. p. 150 (1878).
Proc. Zoor. Soc.—1886, No. V. 5
66 MR. O. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF [Jan. 19,
other hand those of North Tenasserim are nearly entirely Burmese,
although but few of them, again, are the same as the species found
still further north in Manipur.
The careful and conscientious manner in which Mr. Davison’s
collecting and labelling is done is nowhere more conspicuous than in
the beautiful series obtained by him in Tenasserim, so that the
number and excellence of the skins, and above all, the careful
preservation of the dates of capture, have been to me, and I hope
will be to others, of the greatest possible service in making out the
problems of distribution, and of local, sexual, and seasonal
variation.
The collection contains 86 specimens, referable to 25 species.
1. Hyzosartes xar, L.
a, b. Myawadi'. e. Kankaryit, 13/1/77. d-g. Bankasun,
4-6/77.
2. SEMNOPITHECUS FEMORALIS, Horsf.
a. Bankasun, 15/4/77.
This rare species forms an addition to the fauna of Tenasserim,
the few localities as yet recorded for it being all either in the south
of the Malay peninsula or in Sumatra. Mr. Davison’s specimens
precisely agree with Horsfield’s type preserved in the Natural His-
tory Museum.
3. SEMNOPITHECUS OBSCURUS, Reid.
a, 6. 5000', Mt. Mooleyit, 30/1/77. c. Foot of Mt. Nwa-la-
boo, Tavoy, 10/4/78. d. Bankasun, 25/5/77.
Specimen d is a very remarkably coloured individual differing from
all others that I have seen in having its crest, nape, arms and legs,
and tail yellow, contrasting markedly with the dark hues of the face,
body, and feet. It is, however, led up to by a specimen in the
Museum from Malacca, collected by Dr. Cantor *, which has its
crest yellow and its limbs and tail lighter than usual. I am therefore
indisposed at present to look upon the Bankasun ‘specimen as more
than an individual variety. It must, however, be mentioned that its
auditory bulle are larger and more projecting, and its teeth smaller than
is usually the case ; but with only a single specimen, these characters
are not sufficiently tangible to found a new species upon.
4. Macacus cynomo.eus, L.
a. Wimpong, Thatone.
5. PrroNODON MACULOSsUS, Blanf.
a. Bankasun (co-type of species. Figured J. A. S. B. xlvii.
pl. vi. 1878).
This is the original skin described and figured by Mr. Blanford,
1 Specimens to which no collector’s name is attached were obtained by Mr.
Davison.
2 No. 79. 11. 21. 596.
1886. ] THE HUME COLLECTION. 67
while the spirit specimen from Moulmein, mentioned at the same
time, has already been generously presented to the National
Collection by him.
6. ParapoxuRUS HERMAPHRODITUS, Pall.
a. Wimpong, Thatone.
As Mr. Blanford has shown (P. Z.S. 1885, p. 794), Pallas’s P.
hermaphroditus should be referred to the common Malay Palm-civet,
which has hitherto been known either as P. musanga, Raff., or
P. fasciatus, Gr.
7. MusreLa FLAVIGULA, Bodd.
a. Mt. Nwa-la-boo, Tavoy, 7/4/78. 6. Bankasun, 20/6/77.
8. GyMNURA RAFFLEsI, Vig. and Horsf.
a. Bankasun (Blanford, tom. cit. p. 150).
Its only known occurrence within British India.
9. TUPAIA BELANGERI, Wagn.
a—h. various localities, Tenasserim.
This is the 7’. peguana, of Mr. Blanford’s list. It may generally
be distinguished from the next species by the presence of a well-
developed internal cusp on its second upper premolar.
10. TUPAIA FERRUGINEA, Raff.
a. Bankasun, 27/4/77. 6, ce. Tenasserim.
11. Preropus Mepivus, Temm.
a. Amherst, near Moulmein.
This appears to be about as far south-eastwards as this species has
been recorded, its place further south being taken by Pé. edulis,
Geoffr.
12. RutnoLoruus TRIFOLIATUS, Temm.
a, 6. Mergui (Hume).
It is important to have additional localities for this rare species,
of which the exact range is by no means satisfactorily settled.
13. Preromys CINERACEUS, Bly.
a, Wimpong, Thatone, 21/12/76. 6. Kankaryit.
This species seems to be hardly more than a geographical race of
the well-known Indian Flying-squirrel (P. petaurista, L.). The
measurements of a were puvlished by Mr. Blanford (1. ce. p. 165).
14. Scrurus Bicotor, Sparrm.
a, 6, Thoungyah, 26 and 30/9/78 (Darling). c. Mergui,
10/1/79. d, e. Bankasun, 18/3/77 and 3/6/77.
No seasonal change is appreciable among the large series of this
species in the Tenasserim and Malayan collections.
5*
68 MR. 0. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF [Jan. 19,
15. Scrurus caniceps, Gray.
a, 6b. Moulmein. ec. Kankaryit, 13/1/77. d, e. Thoungyeen
River, 9 and 10/77 (Bingham). f, g. Thoungyah, 16/1/77
(Davison), 10/10/78 (Darling). h. Myawadi, 2/10/77
(Bingham). i. Tavoy, 16/3/78. j-l. Bankasun, 6/77
(S. phayrii, Bly.). m, n. Pahpoon, W. Tenasserim. 0.
Thatone, 23/11/77.
This fine series, with the seven Malayan specimens from Kussoom,
(27/5/79), Taroar (12/2/79), Poongah (8/79), and Salanga (2 and
3/79), collected by Darling, form an invaluable addition to the
material for making out the relations, variation, and distribution of
this troublesome species and its allies. fl
Dr. Anderson, although he gives separate headingsin his monograph
to S. pygerythrus, caniceps, phayret, blanfordi, and griseimanus,
states that he believes that they are all closely related to one another
and should not perhaps be specifically separated.
On Jaying out, arranged as it were on an imaginary map, the
whole available series of skins, 70 in number’, belonging to the above
species, one is able to make out five recognizable forms grading into
each other in various degrees, of which two occur in North Tenas-
serim, one in Peou and Upper Burma, another in Cambodja and
Cochin China, and the fifth in S. Tenasserim and N. Malaysia; but
anything more complicated than their inter-relations it is hard to
conceive, and they seem to be only definable by a free use of trino-
mial nomenclature.
As the easiest method of explaining their relationships I will
attempt to trace out the history of S. caniceps, which appears to
have been something as follows :—
The original of the species, occurring about the centre of the
present range, would be such an animal as summer non-breeding
specimens of the true S. caniceps of N. Tenasserim now are, viz.
grizzled yellowish grey above and grey below, the sides of the neck
and the sides of the belly being more or less tinged with yellow (85.
8. 1.1777). The struggle for existence then necessitated a richer
ornamentation, at least in the breeding-season, and this was accom-
plished in various ways in different parts of the animals’ range.
North-western specimens, those of Burma and Pegu, became rich
yellow underneath (S. pygerythrus, 81. 12. 2. 7), and eastern ones,
in Cambodja &e., a duller yellow below, with whitish feet (S. grisei-
manus, 78. 6. 17, 29), both forms having occasionally, presumably
by atavism, ordinary grey-bellied specimens, e. g. 81. 12. 2. 9 from
Pegu and 62. 8. 16.4 from Laos, Southwards, beginning about
at Tavoy, and reaching down to Malacca, the yellow tinge of
the sides of the neck and belly were replaced by rich orange-red,
1 Of these, 22 belong to the Hume, 25 to the old Museum collection, and 23
have been kindly lent to me by Mr. Blanford out of his own collection.
2 These numbers are those of the registers in the Natural History Museum,
and will always identify the particular phase of fur referred to.
1886.] THE HUME COLLECTION. 69
forming a very handsome ornamentation (82. 3. 9. 5, Junkceylon).
This race represents S. concolor, Bly.’
These three forms are all without any marked seasonal change of
colour ; but in the next race, which is the original stock living in N.
Tenasserim, an entirely different sort of ornamentation has been set
up in the form of the assumption, during the rutting-season only, ofa
brilliant orange-yellow back, the sides and belly still remaining dull
grey (S. caniceps typicus, 85. 8. 1. 178).
Further to complicate matters, the north-western yellow-bellied
race (S. caniceps pygerythrus) has again spread southwards and
overlapped the range of S. caniceps typicus, which, being now pro-
vided with a highly specialized seasonal change of colour, has driven
it to adopt a still further-development of its own form of ornamenta-
tion, namely, the production of a dark brown stripe between the
upper grey and the lower yellow, which shows up the latter in the
most brilliant manner possible (S. phayrei, 85. 8. 1. 175, Thatone).
The original grey 8. caniceps has thus, except in the unorna-
mented summer race of var. typicus, become eutirely extinct, and
has been replaced by its variously decorated offshoots.
With regard to nomenclature I think it is impossible to express
the present state of things in a binomial manner, but by using the
following trinomials we may perhaps approach more closely to the
truth :—
S. CANICEPS PYGERYTHRUS’, Geof. *
(S. blanfordi', Bly.)
No seasonal change ; belly yellow.
Burma and Pegu.
S. CANICEPS PHAYRH, Bly.
No seasonal change ; belly rich orange, with brown lateral stripes.
Pegu and N. Tenasserim.
S. CANICEPS GRISEIMANUs, M.-Edw.
(S. tnornatus, Gr., S. leucopus, Gr.)
No seasonal change. Belly pale yellow. Feet white. Black tail-
tip nearly obsolete.
Cambodja &e.
2 J. A.S. B. (xxiy. p. 474, 1855), apud Blanford (J. A. 8. B. xlvii. p. 161,
1878), who in describing the present series of Bankasun specimens belonging to
this form says, ‘These dark olivaceous forms may perhaps be sufliciently
distinct to constitute a local race for which Blyth’s name S. concolor may be
retained, but they are not, I think, really separable from S. caniceps.” Anderson,
ou the other hand, places S. concolor as a synonym of S. modestus, without any
remark ; but pending a renewed examination of the type, I prefer to take Mr.
Blanford’s authority, as this course enables me to ayoid giving the southern
race a new name.
? The full references to all these names will be found in Dr. Anderson’s
‘Monograph,’ pp. 227-253.
70 MR. 0. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF [Jan. 19,
S. CANICEPS TYPICUS.
(S. chrysonotus, Bly.)
A seasonal change. In summer all grey, in winter back brilliant
orange-yellow.
N. Tenasserim.
S. CANICEPS CONCOLOR, Bly.
No seasonal change. Sides of neck and of belly rufous, dull in
northern, brilliant in southern specimens.
S. Tenasserim to Malacca.
The alternatives, under the binomial system, of either splitting
this species into five, or of lumping all the varieties under one head,
are both too unsatisfactory for adoption. For the first there are far
too many intermediate specimens and gradations, and for the second
the differences between fully ornamented specimens of S. phayret, of
S. concolor, and of breeding specimens of S. caniceps typicus, are
infinitely too striking.
The manner and dates of the seasonal change in S. caniceps typicus
are well illustrated by the series from N.Tenasserim. In October the
yellow begins to appear in small patches on the back among the
grizzled grey (85. 8. 1. 184). By November the whole of the back
is rich yellow (85. 8. 1. 182), and this remains at its best until
January’, and then gradually becomes duller and dirtier-looking
(77. 10. 25. 2), until about March the summer grizzled grey hairs
begin again to appear in patches in the midst of the yellow (77. 10.
25. 1), and soon entirely supersede it. Males and females alike go
through this change.
16. Scrurus aTRopoRSALIs, Gray.
a. Kankaryit, near Moulmein, 10/1/77. 6. Doonsa, near
Moulmein, 8/3/77. _¢e, d. Lathorge, near Myawadi, 19 and
22/1/77. e. Maitho, Thoungyeen R. 29/10/77 (Bingham).
St, g- Mt. Nwa-la-boo, Tavoy, 5/4/78.
The evidence of the fine series before me, consisting of 40 speci-
mens’, tends to show that the variation in the colour of this species is
not so much a sign of season as of locality, southern specimens being,
as a rule, more rufous and generally without the black back.
It unfortunately happens, however, that nearly all the dated
specimens that I have seen were obtained in the winter, when the
black back is certainly present in most cases. However, Capt.
Beavan® has described a July specimen as having a black back, and
1 One specimen in Mr. Blanford’s collection, labelled as from Thatone,
January, has no yellow on its back as might be expected, and forms therefore a
striking exception to the general rule. It should be noticed, however, that this
is the very specimen of which Mr. Blanford wrote in 1878 (J. A. 8. B. xlvii.
p. 162), “The skin so precisely resembles the peculiarly dark olive specimens
from Bankasun, that I am inelined to suspect the label must have been changed
by accident.”
? Many of these were kindly lent to me by Mr. Blanford.
5 P. Z. 8. 1866, p. 428.
1886. ] THE HUME COLLECTION. 71
therefore this character cannot be merely a sign of the rutting-
season, as I had originally suspected.
17. Scrurus RUFIGENIS, Blanf.
a. 5500!, b. 6300', Mt. Mooleyit, 1/2/77 and 31/1/77 (Co-
types of species).
I have nothing to add to Mr. Blanford’s excellent description of
this species. There can be no doubt that it is, as he suggests, nearly
allied to S. pernyi, M.-Edw., but it may easily be distinguished by
its brilliant red cheeks, that species having them grey like the back.
The unusual length of the muzzle is equally found in both, and
together they seem to lead from the ordinary Squirrels towards the stiil
longer-nosed Rhinosciurus of Gray. It is, of course, quite natural
that if the Tibetan S. perny? were represented in Tenasserim, it would
be by a species living at the considerable altitudes at which alone
S. rufigenis has been found.
18. Scrurus BerpMoREI, Blyth.
a,b. 9. Myawadi, 18 and 20/1/77.
I cannot share the doubts expressed by Mr. Blanford’ as to the
identity of these specimens with the true S. derdmorei. Although
the markings differ in their intensity, their general plan and dispo-
sition is precisely the same in the two forms represented by the
names S. berdmorei and S. mouhoti, Gr. It has also a remarkably
long and narrow muzzle, very nearly as much as in S. rufigenis, a
point which has apparently never been noticed before.
19. ScruRUS MACCLELLANDI BARBEI, Bly.
a. &. 9/2/77 (Bingham). 6, e. Thoungyah, 11/10/78 (Dar-
ling). d. Myawadi, 18/1/77. e. Kankaryit, 12/1/77. f-1.
Tavoy, 3 and 4/78. j. Bankasun, 1/6/77.
20. Mus RATTUS RUFESCENS, Gray.
a. Moulmein, 8/3/78.
The Mus robustulus of Blyth, as Mr. Blanford has suggested, is
identical with this, the common Tree-rat of the whole of India.
21. Rurzomys Baptius, Hodgs.
a. Thatone.
This seems to be the first recorded occurrence of R. badius in
Tenasserim, though Blyth’s specimens of the so-called “ R. casta-
neus’’ came from Arrakan and Pegu.
22. ATHERURA MACRURA, L.
a. Thoungyah, 3/10/78 (Darling).
23. TRAGULUS NAPU, Raff.
a-d. Bankasun, 5 and 6/77.
1 J. A. 8. B. xlvii. p. 162 (1878).
72 MR. 0. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF [Jan. 19,
24, TRAGULUS KANCHIL, Raff.
a-c. Bankasun, 5 and 6/77.
Mr. Blanford’ has fully described the differences between the two
Tenasserim species of Chevrotain.
25. Manis JAVANICA, Desm.
a. Bankasun, 1/75.
IV. Tue Matay Peninsuta CoLuEcrION.
The mammals from the Malay Peninsula are 105 in number, and
belong to 28 species, of which no less than 13 are Sciuridz, a group
always well represented in collections made by ornithologists. As
in the case of the other series, the greater part of this set were
collected by Mr. Davison, although some few were obtained by
Mr. J. Darling at Salanga and on the mainland adjoining, and by
Mr. Syers in Salangore.
As might be expected, these specimens, while of considerable value
in fixing the northward and southward distribution of the species
along the narrow Malay peninsula, belong for the most part to
common species. There is, however, among them a specimea
representing a beautiful new species of Sciuropterus, which I have
dedicated to its discoverer, Mr. Davison, and there are many which
render important service in contributiug additional information as to
the exact localities and other particulars about the species to which
they belong.
The only previous paper of any importance on the mammals of
this district is that published by Dr. Theodore Cantor in 1846’,
which gives a complete list of the species then known to occur in the
‘* Malay Peninsula and Islands,’ but which, excellent asit is for the
date at which it was written, is now, of course, somewhat obsolete,
and would well bear the addition of such information as may be
gleaned from Mr. Hume’s valuable collection.
Many of the localities at which the collection was obtained are
referred to or described in the two following papers :—
A.O. Hume. “A First Tentative List of the Birds of the
Western Half of the Malay Peninsula,” ‘Stray Feathers,’
vill. p. 37, 1879.
A.O. Hume. “The Birds of the Western Half of the Malay
Peninsula, Second Notice, tom. cit. p. 151.
1. SEMNOPITHECUS FEMORALIS, Horsf.
a. Klang, Salangore, 25/7/79 °.
2. SEMNOPITHECUS SIAMENSIS, Mill. & Schl.
a. “ Interior of Malay peninsula, beyond Klang.” 4/79.
A curious whitish specimen, far paler than usual, but apparently
1 Tom. cit. p. 166.
2 J. A. 8. B. xv. pp. 171 and 241.
5 As in the last list, all specimens to which no name is appended were
collected by Mr. Davison.
1886. ] THE HUME COLLECTION, 73
not specifically different from Cantor’s specimens of S. albocinereus,
which Dr. Anderson has shown to be identical with S. siamensis.
3. NycTICEBUS TARDIGRADUS, L.
a. Salanga, Junkceylon, 19/2/79 (Darling). 6. Malacca, 7/77.
4. HemicaLe HARDWICKEI, Gray.
a. &. Jaffaria, Johore, 20/3/80.
5. PARADOXURUS HERMAPHRODITUS, Pall.
a. Salanga, 27/2/79 (Darling). 6. 2. Klang, 4/3/79.
6. ARCTOGALE LEUCOTIs, Blyth.
a. 3. Salangore, 2/11/79 (Syers).
7. Purorius nupiprs, F. Cuv.
a. dg. Klang, 18/4/79.
8. GALEoPITHECUS voLans, L.
a, 6, Ding-ding Islands, S. of Pinang, 3/79. c. Malacca, 9/75.
9. CrociptraA murina, L.
a. Singapore, 7/77.
10. TUPAIA FERRUGINEA, Raff.
a,6. Malacca, 9/75. ec. 3. Jelang, Salangore, 24/6/79.
11. Tupara sAvanica, Horsf.
a. Salangore, 17/11/79 (Syers). 6. Johore, 8/75.
12. Prrropus EDULIS, Geof.
a, 6, Klang, 3 and 8/79.
13. CyNopreRUS MARGINATUS, Geof.
a. Jerome, Salangore, 12/8/79. 4. Singapore island, 3/2/79.
14, PHyLLoruina piaDEMA, Geof.
a. Gunnong Pulai, Johore, 7/3/80.
15, Paytioruina BIcotor, Temm. (?).
a. 3. Klang, Salangore, 13/7/79.
This specimen has more pointed ears, a broader horizontal
nose-leaf, and a much more largely developed projection between the
nostrils than is usually the case in this species; but without seeing
specimens properly preserved in spirit I do not care to describe it as
new.
16. Preromys nitipus, Desm.
a. 3. Klang, Salangore. 6. ¢. Malacca, 7/77. c. Gunnong
Pulai, Johore, 7/3/80.
These specimens all belong to the so-called species Pt. melanotis,
74 MR. 0. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF [Jan. 19,
Gr., which Dr. Anderson, in his Monograph of the genus ', keeps
separate from Pt. nitidus, although he described an intermediate
specimen seen by him in the Leyden Museum. As the two forms
are not geographically separate, and their skulls are quite identical,
I do not think there is sufficient difference in their colour to distin-
guish them from one another, even as varieties.
17. PreroMys TEPHROMELAS, Giinth.
a. 3. Klang, Salangore, 27/8/79. 6. 92. Jaffaria, Johore,
18/3/80.
These two specimens are of value as showing that the characters
of the fully adult animal are practically the same as those of the
young specimen described by Dr. Giinther. The colours and pro-
portions are almost identical, the only difference I can see being that
the shining black hairs on the back are somewhat longer and more
prominent in the adult, thus giving a less woolly appearance to
the whole animal. The skull of the adult also shows that the
species is distinguished by the very small relative size of its molars.
The measurements of the male specimen are as follows :—Head and
body 330 mm., tail 365, hairs at tip 50, hind foot 73, forearm and
hand 148, ear, above crown (shrunk) (c) 25:0.
Skull :—Occiput to tip of nasals (c) 64, length of face 30°7;
greatest breadth 42; nasals, length 18°6, breadth 11:4; interorbital
breadth 15:0; palate, length 32-8, breadth outside m? 16-0, inside m?
8:0; diastema 16:0; palatine foramen 5:0; molar series (exclusive
of pm’) 12:0; lower jaw, bone only, 41°5; to tip of incisors 45:0.
18. ScruROPTERUS DAVISONI, sp. n.” (Plate VI.)
a. Malacca’, 7/77.
General colour above much as in S. pearsoni, Gr., viz. :—dark slaty
grey, with the tips of the hairs bright rufous orange. Parachute
similar to back, its edges, especially along the supporting cartilage,
rich orange. Below the belly is pale orange, the orange becoming
deeper and richer to the edges of the parachute; no intermixture of
slate except on the parachute just above the hips. Feet and ears
brown. Tail markedly distichous, dark brown above, rich rufous
orange below, the latter colour showing somewhat on the upper
surface between and beyond the brown hairs.
Ears large, naked, triangular, obtusely pointed, their greatest
breadth nearly or quite equal to their height above the crown of the
head. Hind feet slender, unfringed, their soles provided with one
proximal and four distal well-defined foot-pads.
The skull of the type is unfortunately very imperfect, but there
is enough to show that it is distinguished from that of S. pearsoni
by its broader interorbital space, more heavily built muzzle, broader
' Zool. Yunn. Exp. p. 292.
? Preliminary Diagnosis, Ann. & Mag. N. H. (5) xvii. p. 84, Jan. 1886.
3 The following note is written on the back of the label of this specimen :—
‘‘This species occurs also in Tenasserim. Seen near Myawadi by Davison.”
1886. ] THE HUME COLLECTION. 75
and darker-coloured incisors, and longer and narrower molars.
From that of S. lepidus it differs by its much larger size in every way,
and its stouter and more powerful teeth. From both also it differs
by not possessing any trace of the minute first upper premolar
generally present in the genus, a character usually fairly constant in
the true Squirrels, but on which too much stress must not be laid on
the evidence of a single specimen only.
Measurements (of a skin and therefore merely approximate) :—
Head and body 142, tail 172, hairs at end 23; hind foot 36; heel
to front of last foot-pad 16; ear (above crown) 18°5.
Skull. Length of face! 23-0, greatest breadth (¢) 30:0, interorbital
breadth 11-2, tip to tip of postorbital processes 18:0 ; nasals, length
14:1, breadth 7-0; diastema 11°5; palate, length 23-8, length of
molar series 9:5, breadth across palate outside m' 9-7, inside 5:1.
This beautiful little species reminds one superficially both of
S. pearsoni, Gr., and S. lepidus, Horsf., with the latter of which I
consider S. spadiceus, Bly., should be amalgamated. From 8S. pear-
soni it differs in its broader, naked, and untufted ears, and its longer
and more distinctly distichous tail, while from S. Jepidus it is
distinguished by its larger size, much larger and broader ears, orange
instead of brown parachute, clear instead of slate-mixed belly, and
by the brilliant orange of the underside of its tail.
S. sagitta, Linn., which Dr. Anderson was unable to identify,
seems to me to be unquestionably the species commonly known as
S. horsfieldi, Waterh., the original description agreeing in almost
every respect, and the locality being the same. The differences
between S. sagitta and S. davisoni are too obvious to need pointing
out.
It is with the greatest pleasure that I take the opportunity of
naming this beautiful species after my friend Mr. W. Davison, the
collector of the greater part of the Hume mammals, and to whose
powers of observation and collection, the sciences of ornithology and
mammalogy are so largely indebted. Mr. Davison obtained himself
for Mr. Hume nearly the whole of the Tenasserim and Malay
peninsula collections, and also the whole of the specimens from
Simla and from S. India presented with them.
19. Scrurus Bicotor, Sparrm.
a, 6. Salanga, Junkceylon, 2 and 3/79 (Darling). c¢. Dingding R.
24/2/79. d-g. Klang. h. Malacca, 9/75. i. Jaffaria,
Johore, 17/3/80. j-1. Gunnong Pulai, Johore, 7 & 8/79.
With the exception of three or four of the cream-coloured
examples so common in this species, all these specimens represent
the typical black and yellow 8. dicolor. This Squirrel has six
mamme, all in the inguinal region.
* From the tip of nasals to a point on the forehead above the constriction
between the cerebral and olfactory chambers. The “length of brain-case,” when
given, is from the same point backwards to the most posterior point of the inter-
parietal bone.
76 MR. 0. THOMAS ON THE MAMMALS OF [Jan. 19,
20. SciuRUS CANICEPS CONCOLOR, Bly.
a to g. Kussoom, Taroar, Poongah, and Salanga, Junkceylon
(Darling).
This very uniform series has already been referred to in the
Tenasserim list (supra p. 70).
21. Scrurus uippruRus, Geof.
a-c. Klang, 2, 3, and 4/79.
This species seems to be the Malay representation of S. erythreus,
Pall., which does not, however, extend further south than Manipur,
while Klang seems to be about as far north as S. hippurus has been
found.
[Scrurvus ATRODORSALIS, Gray.
a. 3. Klang, 5/77.
There is possibly some mistake in the labelling of this specimen,
as the species is not otherwise known to occur south of Tavoy,
Tenasserim, and the specimen exactly matches some of Mr. Davison’s
Moulmein skins. |
22. Scrurvus TENuIs, Horsf.
a-d. Salangore, 11/79 and 1/80 (Syers). e-g. Klang. A.
Ulu Langhat, Salangore, 6/4/79. 7%. Malacca. j. Gunnong
Pulai, Johore, 3/3/80. &. Singapore, 10/2/79.
These specimens are all very similar and precisely agree with
Horsfield’s type. This species has six mamme, one lateral and
two inguinal pairs.
23. Scrurus PREvostT!, Desm.
a. Salangore, 5/11/79 (Syers). 6-7. Klang, Salangore, 2—-4/79
(Davison). &, 1. Malacea, 9/75.
24. Scrurus BApcInG, Kerr’.
a. Lumut, Ding-ding Islands, 24/2/79. &-d. Jerome, Salan-
gore, 12 and 14/8/79. e-o. Klang, Salangore, 2, 3, and 7/79.
Ps Birman, Salangore, 28/7/79 (Syers). 7. Salangore,
24/11/79 (Syers). 8, t. Malacea, 9/75. u-a’. Gunnong
Pulai, Johore, 7-9/79 and 3/80. 46’, c'. Singapore, 2/79.
d', Acheen, Sumatra, 1/2/73.
By the help of this magnificent addition to the Museum series
one is able to prove the specific identity of the Squirrels to which the
names of S. badging (=S. plantam), S. vittatus, Raff., and S.
nigrovittatus, Horst., have been given.
On laying out our series geographically, one is struck at once by
1 Linn. Anim. Kined. p. 269, 1792. Iregret to have to use this barbarous
name for the well-known Plantain Squirrel (S. plantani, Liung, 1801); but
the evidence is too clear to be disputed. Both Ljung and Kerr founded their
names on the “Plantain Squirrel” of Pennant, and therefore the identifica-
tion that has always been admitted for the one must unfortunately apply
equally to the other.
1886. ] THE HUME COLLECTION. 77
the greater prevalence and greater intensity of the red colour of the
belly in the northern Malay specimens as compared with the southern
ones, and by the absence of white-and-yellow bellied specimens
among the mainland series as compared with those from Sumatra,
Java, and Borneo. Blue-bellied specimens seem to be proportionately
most numerous in the Johore region, our series of seven from there
having no less than five of that tint, while of nineteen from Salangore
only one single specimen is blue-bellied, the others all having the
rich rufous bellies characteristic of most mainland specimens. On
the other hand, in insular specimens, the red, when present, is
generally paler and poorer in tone, and is commonly replaced either
by yellow, white, or, as in the mainland series, by blue. No definable
varieties, however, can be made out, as in any given locality specimens
are found belonging to several of the different forms; intermediate
ones also are by no means rare; thus the Museum specimen No.
49. 1. 8. 5, from Java, is marked with mingled patches of blue ant
white on the belly, and the white of others is led up to from the
deepest rufous through various shades of red and yellow. Red-
bellied specimens have in all cases red-tipped tails, while white-and
yellow-bellied ones have the tip annulated like the rest of the tail.
With regard to the influences that cause these very remarkable
variations, it would seem as if there were some property in mammals
tending occasionally to the production of red-tinted varieties in a
somewhat erratic manner, comparable to the way in which albinistic
and melanistic varieties are produced. The striking fact that all the
red-bellied specimens of S. badging, and the red-bellied specimens
only, have red-tipped tails, is by itselfa sign that the red is produced
by something which affects the whole animal, and is not merely. a
colour put on to a particular part for sexual or protective purposes,
as is usually the case. Albinistic and melanistic varieties are well
kuown to occur much more frequently in some localities than in
others’; and in the same way what may be termed “erythrism ”
seems in some places to succeed to such an extent that red specimens
are in the majority, although a tendency still remains for the pro-
duction of such atavistic non-rufous individuals as the blue-bellied
specimens to which the name of S. nigrovittatus has been applied.
This theory of “‘ erythrism ”’ is not suggested to account for the
present case only, there being many other instances in which the
presence of red colour has turned out to be exceedingly deceptive as
a specific character, and in which the red of usually red-marked
species has been found to have a way of disappearing unaccountably,
while more or less red-tinted individuals of grey species are by no
means unknown. Erythrism is particularly common among the
Mungooses, and is responsible for a large number of the untenable
species which have been formed in that group.
I can find no reliable evidence of the occurrence of S. badging
? Notably in the case of the black specimens of Arvicola amphibius from
Scotland, or, in this very region and group, in the remarkable case of Sewrus
ferrugineus germaini, M.-Edw., a permanently black geographical race inhabitin
the island of Pulo Condor. (See Milne-Edwards, Rev. Mag. Zool. 1867, p. 193.)
78 ON THE MAMMALS OF THE HUME COLLECTION. [Jan. 19,
north of Pinang, although in his list of the magnificent series in the
Leyden Museum, Dr. Jentink mentions one specimen from Canton?
and two from Nepal’, but my reasons for doubting the testimony of
these are in the subjoined footnote.
S. badging possesses four inguinal mamme only.
25. Scrurus rnsiGnis, F. Cuy.
a. Klang, Salangore. 6. Salangore (Syers), 18/11/79. ce. Jaffaria,
Johore, 20/3/80.
This species, like 8. berdmorei, has six mamme, viz. :—one lateral
and two inguinal pairs.
26. Scrurus (Ruinoscrurus) LATIcCAUDATUS, Mill. & Schl.
a. 9. Klang, Salangore, 5/5/79.
This seems to be the most northern locality as yet recorded for
the Long-nosed Squirrel.
27. CHIROPODOMYs GLIROIDES, Bly. (?).
a. Jaram, Salangore, 23/12/79 (Darling).
This specimen belongs to the rare and interesting genus Chiro-
podomys, described by Peters in 1868 °*, but afterwards* erroneously
identified by him with Pithecochirus, F. Cuv.°, a very different and
much larger animal. The specific name, however, to be applied to
this specimen is a matter of some doubt. Blyth’s description of
Mus gliroides from the Khasia hills *, based on a specimen with an
imperfect tail, seems to agree very closely with the present animal,
and his Mus peguensis’ is also possibly the same thing; but
unfortunately we have no evidence as to whether C. penicillatus, as
it was called by Peters, ascends as far north as Assam or Pegu, or is
a purely Malay species, and pending an examination of Blyth’s type,
it is therefore difficult to decide what its proper specific name
should be.
So far as I know, the only examples of this genus that have as
yet come to Europe are two specimens in the Museum collection
obtained by Mr. Wallace at Sadong, Borneo; Peters’s type in the
Berlin Museum, unfortunately without locality ; two spirit-specimens
1 Tt is suspicious that two Squirrels so peculiarly characteristic of the Malay
region as S. ¢enwisand S. badging should have been referred by Miller and Schlegel
to Canton (ef. Jentink, ‘Notes Mus. Leyd.’ 1883, pp. 126 and 134). Probably
they were deceived as to the locality of the collection containing the specimens,
* The great mass of Mr. Hodgson’s Nepal collection is in the Natural History
Museum, a few duplicates merely having been given to the Leyden and other
Museums, and it is therefore unlikely that if he really obtained this species in
Nepal, no specimens should be in our National Museum, and no reference to it
made in his published lists of Nepal mammals.
3 MB. Ak. Berl. 1868, p. 448, pl. i.
4 Apud Trouessart.
5 H. M. Mamm. livr. Ixvi. 1833.
® J. A. 8. B. xxiv. p. 721, 1855.
7 J.A.S. B. xxviii. p. 295, 1859.
se
Poly SHeont V 1lav a
UNIT 4PeS ps
1886.] REV. CANON TRISTRAM ON A NEW DUCK. 79
with several young, also without locality, in the Leyden Museum ;
and the present individual from Salangore.
28. TRAGULUS KANCHIL, Raff.
a. Salanga, Junkceylon, 16/2/79 (Darling). 6. Tavoar, 4/2/79
(Darling). c—e. Klang, Salangore, 5 and 10/79, and 2/80.
JS, g- Singapore island, 8/2/79.
3. On an apparently new Species of Duck (Dafila) from the
Central Pacific. By H. B. Tristram, D.D., F.R.S.
[Received November 14, 1885.]
(Plate VII.)
I lately received a small parcel of birds collected by Mr. J. V.
Arundel, at Sidney Island, Phoenix Group, lat. 4° 30'S., long 171° 20!
W. The island, which is a mere coral-lagoon island, has never, so far
as I know, been visited by any naturalist. But, alas, Mr. Arundel
was not able to discover any land birds whatever, beyond Charadrius
JSulvus and Totanus incanus. He has, however, sent three specimens,
one male and two females, of a Duck which appears to be hitherto
undescribed. The only note I have respecting it is, that there were
no Ducks on the island on Mr. Arundel’s arrival, but that afterwards
they appeared, and were tolerably numerous for a time. I gather
from this remark that it is probably a migrant from one island to
another; and a glance at the position of Sidney Island on the map
will show that a Duck may enjoy a considerable range of migration
in those regions, without necessarily coming under the eye of a col-
lector. It is now nine years since Dr. Streets described a new
Gadwall from Washington Island (Bull. Nuttall Club, i. p. 46), and
yet the species has not since that time been met with,
The bird before us is a plain-coloured Pintail of diminutive size.
The male specimen is just discarding the young or summer dress,
and assuming the delicately vermiculated and pencilled plumage of the
flanks and back which characterize our own Pintail in breeding-dress.
On the flanks only two or three young feathers remain.
I propose to name it, from its extreme simplicity of plumage,
DaFILa MODESTA, sp. nov.
3. Supra cinerea, lineis albidis spissis vermiculata: pileo
brunneo nigro et subfusco minute striato, gula rufescente, collo
postico brunneo, albido minute striato, subtus albido, brunneo
minutissime penicillato ; remigibus cineraceis, intus pallidiori-
bus, scapis albis ; secundariis cinereis, extus metallice viridi-
bus, late albo terminatis ; tectricibus alarum cinereis, castaneo
terminatis: cauda brunnea, acuta, supracaudalibus brunneis,
albo marginatis : corpore toto subtus fulvo, indistincte maculato :
lateribus transfasciatis et sicut dorsum vermiculatis : axilla-
80 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON APORIA HIPPIA. (Jan. 19,
ribus albidis; rostro et pedibus nigricantibus. Long. tot.
in. 20°5, rostri, 2, ale 10°6, caude 4, tarsi 1°4.
Q. capite et collo mari similibus, nee gula rufescente: dorso
brunneo, plumis albo et castaneo arcte marginatis: alis sicut
in mare coloratis: secundariis viridescentibus albo terminatis :
cetera ut in mare.
If this bird be correctly discriminated, it adds a fourth to the three
recognized species of Dajila, the others being D. acuta, extending over
the whole northern hemisphere; D. spinicauda, and D. bahamensis,
both neotropical species.
4. Note on Aporia hippia. By A. G. Burtzr., F.L.S.,
F.Z.8., &e.
[Received January 18, 1886.]
The British Museum has received specimens of the imago, larva,
and pupa of Aporia hippia, reared in the Society’s Gardens under
the care of Mr. A. Thomson during the past season (see his report,
above, p. 3). I beg leave to offer a few remarks on them.
APORIA HIPPIA.
Pieris hippia, Bremer, Bull. de Acad. St. Pétersb. ili. p. 464
(1861); Lep. Ost-Sibiriens, p. 7, nu. 12, pl. 3. fig. 1 (1864).
Leuconeéa crategioides, Lucas, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, 4° sér.
t. 5, p. 503, pl. 11. fig. 11 (1865).
Although, as appears from the above, this species has been twice
figured, neither figure can be called a characteristic one; both are
too pale and fail to show the grey expansion at the extremity of the
nervures ; nothing is said of the earlier stages in either Bremer’s or
Lucas’s descriptions, indeed the latter author evidently imagined it to
be a “ pretty variety” of A. crategi, although he described it as if
a distinct species ; he did not, however, call it “‘ Leuconea crategi,
var. crategoides” (sic) as quoted by Kirby.
Staudinger failed to quote the original description; but this sort
of omission is of frequent occurrence in his Catalogue, and leads to
errors innumerable; thus, in the case of Chrysophanus dido of
Gerhardt’s ‘Monograph of Lyceenide,’ Staudinger (who appears
entirely to have overlooked the work) quoted Herrich-Schaffer’s
figure of the male “ asabinus, H. 8S. 527.8” only, and subsequently
Kirby, in his Catalogue, referred the figure of the female to C. chry-
seis, and regarded it as a variety of the C. hippothoe of Linneus.
To return, however, to 4. Azppia, it is undoubtedly nearly allied
to A. crategi, but is as certainly distinct ; the blackish veins and
yellow under-surface of the secondaries and apex of primaries readily
serve to distinguish it.
Among the specimens in the Museum, all of them reared and
presented by the Society, is a female which shows an interesting
aberration of vein-structure, the radial vein of the right-hand hind
1886. ] MR. P. L. SCLATER ON XEMA SABINII. 81
wing being forked beyond the middle. Ina paper in the ‘ Proceed-
ings,’ for 1870, pp. 777-8, I recorded similar modifications of the first
subcostal branch in the hind wings of Acrea andromacha, and in
‘ Lepidoptera Exotica’ I described and figured modifications of the
upper radial in the front wings of Morpho sulkowskyi (p. 113a,
pl. xlii, figs. 1, la): the ease of A. hippia, however, is more inter-
esting, as it exhibits, in a partial manner, a low type of venation in
which two radial veins are present in place of one, and thus tends
(so far as this character is concerned) to support Mr. Bates’s view of
the affinity of the Papilionide to the Heterocera: it would be still
more interesting if it could be shown that the Hesperiide showed a
greater tendency to reproduce the same vein.
The larva of A. hippia, judging froma nearly full-grown specimen
preserved in spirit, presented by the Society to the Museum, has
rather the aspect of some of the shorter-haired larvee of the Arctiide
than of what one would expect in the caterpillar of a butterfly ; this,
again, seems to point toa nearer relationship between the Papilionide
and the Heterocera than one sees in the Nymphalide: the larva
above referred to is of a dull flesh-colour, with lateral and dorsal
series of conspicuous black spouts, the head, first dorsal segment, and
anal claspers black *, the third, fourth, and twelfth segments clothed
with dense rust-red hair down to the lateral series of black spots,
the second segment (first dorsal) and head clothed with stiff, porrected,
greyish hairs, and the remaining segments with pale testaceous hair :
the pupa is either bright gamboge-yellow or cream-coloured, mottled
and spotted with black, in some specimens differing in no respect
from that of A. crategi in pattern, but frequently with the black
markings united into bands and patches.
February 2, 1886.
Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair.
Mr. W. B. Tegetmeier, F.Z.S., exhibited and made remarks upon
a skin of a Pheasant from the Persian borders of Transcaucasia,
which appeared to be referable to the true Phasianus colchicus.
Mr. C. A. Wright exhibited a specimen of a Dove from Malta,
which seemed to be a semi-albino variety of Turtur auritus.
Mr. Sclater exhibited, on behalf of Mr. W. H. Dobie, 22 Upper
Northgate Street, Chester, a young specimen of Sabine’s Gull
(Xema sabinii). Mr. Dobie stated that the bird had been shot at
Mostyn on the coast of Flintshire, North Wales, in a field adjoining
the shore, by Mr. John Williams, who watched it for some hours
before he was able to obtain a shot. It was quite alone and did not
* In a beautiful coloured drawing submitted to me by Mr. Thomson, the
claspers are represented as flesh-tinted at the sides, a probable variation.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. VI. 6
82 DR. G. S. BRADY ON FRESHWATER [Feb. 2,
accompany any other gulls; Mr. Williams indeed did not take it for
a gull at all.
The date of its capture was not noted ; it came into Mr. Thompson’s
hands November Ist, 1884, and had been then some days dead. It
was therefore probably shot at the beginning of the last week in
October. The sex was not ascertained.
Mr. Henry Seebohm exhibited a fully adult male of Ross’s Gull
(Larus rossi) which had been shot on the 15th of June, 1885, in the
neighbourhvod of Christianshaab on the south shore of Disco Bay in
Greenland, about latitude 69°. It was shot at the nest, and both bird
and egg were sent by Mr. Paul Miiller to Copenhagen. The egg is
of exactly the same character as that of Sabine’s Gull (Larus sabiniz),
but is rather larger, measuring 1°9 by 1°3 inch. Mr. Seebohm
exhibited a coloured photograph of the egg, which has never been
obtained before. The bird is so rare that the British Museum
‘does not possess an example, though there is one in Edinburgh and
one in Liverpool, from Melville Peninsula, and one in Cambridge,
besides three in Copenhagen, the last four from Disco Bay. In the
fully adult breeding bird the delicate salmon-colour of the head, rump,
and under-parts, contrasting with the black ring round the neck, make
it an exceptionally beautiful object. ‘The bill is black, the legs and
feet coral-red with black nails, and the orbits deep orange or pale
vermilion.
A communication was read from Prof. R. Collett, C.M.Z.S., con-
taining an account of the external characters of the Northern Fin-
whale (Balenoptera borealis). This memcir had been based upon
the examination of numerous specimens of this Whale killed on the
coast of Norway during the past summer.
This paper will be published, with illustrations, in the Society’s
c
The following papers were read :—
1. Notes on Freshwater Entomostraca from South Aus-
tralia. By Grorce Stewarpson Brapy, M.D., F.R.S.,
F.L.S., Professor of Natural History in the Durham
College of Science, Newcastle-upon-Tyne.
[Received January 5, 1886. ]
(Plates VIII.—X.)
The Entomostraca here described were collected by Professor
Ralph Tate, of the University of Adelaide, South Australia, and by
Mr. T. Steel. Prof. Tate’s specimens were sent by him to Prof. T.
Rupert Jones, F.R.S., to whose kindness I am indebted for the
1886.] ENTOMOSTRACA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA, 83
opportunity of describing them. Those collected by Mr. Steel were
submitted to me by Messrs. James Steel, of Glasgow, and Thomas
Scott, of Greenock, to whom, as well as to Prof. Rupert Jones, my
best thanks are due. I have had no opportunity of comparing these
specimens with authenticated types of the species to which they are
in some cases referred, but have had to depend entirely upon the
published descriptions. The general likeness of these Australian
Ostracoda to European freshwater forms is no more than might be
expected ; it is, indeed, rather remarkable that in no case do they
come so near to any known European species as to be difficult of
discrimination.
As the literature of the subject is not easily accessible, I give here
a list of all the Australian freshwater Entomostraca which have
been described up to the present time :-—
PHYLLOPODA.
Lepidurus viridis, Baird, P.Z. 8. 1850. Van Diemen’s Land.
Lepidurus angasii, Baird, P. Z. 8. 1866. Adelaide, South Australia.
Lepidurus viridulus, Tate, Proc. Roy. Soc. Austr. 1878-9. Adelaide, South
Australia.
Limnadia stanleyana, King, Papers & Proc. Roy. Soc. Van Diemen’s Land,
vol. ili. pt. i. 1855. New South Wales.
Limnadia sordida, King, ibidem. New South Wales.
Linnetis macleayana, King, ibidem. New South Wales.
Artemia proxima, King, ibidem. New South Wales.
Estheria birchii, Baird, P. Z. 8. 1860. Wanoi River, Australia.
It may be well to note that two New-Zealand Phyllopoda (Lepi-
durus kirki and L. compressus) have been described by Prof. Thom-
son in the Transactions of the New Zealand Institute, vol. xi. p- 260,
pl. ii. fig. E, 4, 5. s
The following Cladocera, found living in New South Wales, are
described and figured by the Rev. R. L. King in the ‘ Papers and
Proceedings of the Royal Society of Van Diemen’s Land,’ vol. ii.
pt. 2, 1853, and vol. iii. pt. 1, 1855 :—
Daphnia carinata, King.
elizabeth, King.
honorata, King.
mucronata, Miiller.
Macrothrix spinosa, King.
Moina lemne, King.
macleayii, King.
Eurycercus spinosa, King.
— cookii, King.
—— cunninghami, King.
Chydorus leonardi, King.
angustus, King.
Alona bairdii, King.
pulchella, King.
diaphana, King.
karua, King.
mascula, King.
Dunhevedia crassa, King.
podagra, King.
Also by the same writer the following Copepoda, from South
Australia, are mentioned or briefly described, idid. vol. iii. pt. 1,
1855 :—
Cyclops australis, King.
Diaptomus pollux, King.
uxorius, King.
maria, King.
cookii, King.
6*
84 DR. G. S. BRADY ON FRESHWATER [ Feb. 2,
And, in the same work, vol. iii. pt. 1, 1855, the following South-
Australian Ostracoda are described and figured :—
Cypris carinata, King. Cypris candonoides, King.
stobarti, King. yarrovillia, King.
bennelong, King. Candona stanleyana, King.
elarkii, King. lutea, King.
scottii, King. Newnhamia (Notodromas)
minna, King. fenestrata, King.
lateraria, King. —— gulielmi (?), King.
sydneia, King.
The species now described and figured are the following :—
limnetis tatei, nov. Cypris mytiloides, noy.
Eulimnadia rivolensis, nov. Chlamydotheca australis, nov.
Lepidurus viridulus, Tate. Cypridopsis minna, King.
Estheria lutraria, nov. funebris, nov.
packardi, nov. Notodromas fuscatus, nov.
Cypris viridula, nov. Candona lutea, King.
stanleyana, King. tenuis, nov.
—— tatei, nov.
Order PHYLLOPODA.
Family Ltmnaprap &, Baird.
Subfamily Limnetin#, Packard.
Genus Limnetis, Lovén.
LIMNETIS TATEI, n. sp. (Fig. A.)
Shell smooth, subspherical. Seen from the side it is broad and
Fig. A.
Limnetis tatet.
subtruncate in front, narrower and rounded behind; the dorsal
margin is but slightly arched; ventral convex, with a considerable
protuberance toward the front ; seen dorsally, the outline is broadly
1886. ] ENTOMOSTRACA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA, 8h
oval, the width equal to more than half the length, broadly rounded
behind, subacuminate in front. ‘The shell is granular in structure,
without any concentric ridges. Length + of an inch, height 4,
width 3.
Hab. Freshwater pools, Rivoli Bay, South Australia (Prof. Jip
Tate).
Subfamily Esrpertan#, Packard.
Genus Esruerta, Riippell.
1. EstaeriaA LuTRARIA, n. sp. (Fig. B.)
Valves oblong, compressed, membranous; beak near the anterior
extremity, lines of growth about twelve; seen laterally, the dorsal
line is quite straight, ventral convex, anterior extremity broadly
rounded, posterior narrowed and somewhat oblique ; seen from above
it is much compressed behind the middle, and sharply pointed at the
extremity; broadly rounded in front. Colour yellowish brown.
Length ,4, of an inch ; height ;%.
> Hab. Cooper Creek, at Innaminka, Central Australia (Prof. Rk,
ate).
Fig. B.
Estheria lutraria.
Prof. Tate’s specimens include only a single example of this species
—a dried empty shell ; apparently somewhat shrunk and distorted.
The specific name refers to the Molluscan genus Lutraria, which it
rather closely resembles.
2. EsTHERIA PACKARDI, n. sp. (Fig. C.)
Valves, seen laterally, subelliptical, beak prominent and situated
near the anterior extremity, extremities rounded, the anterior much
the wider of the two, dorsal margin straight in the middle, ventral
convex ; lines of growth 12-15, not sharply marked. Shell rather
86 DR. G. S. BRADY ON FRESHWATER [Feb. 2,
Estheria packardi.
Fig. D.
Eulimnadia rivolensis.
1886. ] ENTOMOSTRACA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA. 87
hard and dense, dark brown (one of the specimens has a broad
white marginal band). Length ;°; of an inch; height ,,.
Hab. Lake Bonney, River Murray, South Australia; also Fowler
Bay, Great Australian Bight (Prof. R. Tate).
Genus Evtrmnapta, Packard.
(Limnadia, Brongniart, in part.)
EULIMNADIA RIVOLENSIS, n. sp. (Fig. D.)
Shell membranous, without any lines of growth; seen from the
side, subovate, highest toward the front ; anterior extremity broadly
rounded, posterior narrow, very slightly rounded ; dorsal margin well
arched, almost gibbous, ventral slightly convex ; the dorsal aspect is
compressed, ovate, more than thrice as long as broad, tapered and
acuminate behind, somewhat more obtuse in front. Length 3,8, of
an inch ; height ;?2;, width ,1°,.
Very similar to Limnadia antillarum, Baird, but much larger ;
differs also in having the eye near the middle of the anterior margin
instead of near the dorsal angle, in being without any distinct lines
of growth, and in having an evenly rounded (not angulated) anterior
margin. This species was found by Prof. R. Tate in company with
Limnetis tatei.
Inside the valves of a specimen of this Hulimnadia I found on
dissection a large colony of a protozoon, possibly Arcella dentata,
Ehrenberg, at any rate very closely resembling that species, as
figured by Professor Leidy.
Family Arpop1p 4, Burmeister.
Genus Leripurvs, Leach.
LepipuRus viripuLus. (Fig. E, p. 88.)
Lepidurus viridulus, Tate, Trans. & Proc. Philosoph. Soc. Ade-
laide (1879), p. 136.
* Animal, including flap of tail-segment, about an inch long, carapace
rounded, elongate-oval, of a brownish-green colour, covering the whole
abdomen excepting flap of tail-segment ; keeled toward the extremity,
ending in an acute point, lunately notched posteriorly, and sharply
and conspicuously hooked on its margin. Front and lateral margins
of the carapace smooth and thickened. The rings of the abdominal
segments, dark brown, are beset with stout spines equidistantly
placed all round and directed backwards. The flap of the tail-
segment has a blunt keel along its whole length, with blunt promi-
nences, and its edges are ciliately serrated. The filaments of the tail
are about half the length of the body, and are clothed with fine
cilia.
*« Hab. Collected by Thomas Tate, October 1878, in the floodwaters
of the ‘ Reedbeds,’ near Adelaide.
**Two Australian species of the genus have been described. LZ. vi-
ridis, so called from its colour, inhabits Tasmania, and was diagnosed
88 DR. G. S. BRADY ON FRESHWATER [Feb. 2,
by Dr. Baird (Proc. Zool. Soe. 1850, p. 254); and L. angasi of the
same author, 1866, which is of a pale horny colour, and is common in
the rain-pools about Adelaide. ZL. viridis is characterized by its fine
green colour, by its oval carapace covering less of the body than in
LL. angasi, and the edges of the lower half of its length being serrated ;
L. angasi is distinguished by its horny colour, its rounded carapace
Fig. E.
Lepidurus viridulus.
covering nearly two thirds of the body, and by the smooth edges of
the sides of the carapace.
“ L. viridulus differs from Z. angasi in colour, in the carapace
covering more of the abdomen, its keel limited to the hinder part
and in the narrower and more spathulate tail-flap.” —Trans. & Proc.
& Report of the Philosophical Society of Adelaide, South Australia,
for 1878-9, p. 136 (published 1879), afterwards called the Royal
Society of South Australia.
Order OSTRACODA.
Family Cypripip4.
Genus Cypris, Miiller.
1. Cypris virn1puLA, n. sp. (Plate VIII. figs. 1, 2.)
“ Carapace oblong, compressed, reniform, greatest height situated
in the middle, and somewhat less than half the length; seen from
the side the extremities are well rounded, the anterior somewhat the
narrower of the two, dorsal margin almost flat or very slightly arched,
ventral sinuated in the middle ; seen from above, compressed, ovate,
twice as long as broad, widest in the middle, gradually tapered
towards the anterior extremity, which is subacuminate, posterior
extremity narrowed and rounded ; surface smooth and polished, the
1886.] ENTOMOSTRACA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA. 89
anterior half marked with a fine reticulated sculpture, colour greenish,
clouded with bands of a darker shade. Length 5); of an inch.
Collected by Mr. Thomas Steel at Condong, on the Tweed River,
near Sydney, New South Wales,
2. Cypris sTANLEYANA (King). (Plate VIII. figs. 3, 4.)
Candona stanleyana, King, 1855, Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Van Die-
men’s Land, vol. iii. pt. 1, p. 66, pl. x. H.
This is very much like C. viridula, but the height is somewhat
less, the dorsum is more decidedly arched, and the extremities are
less obliquely rounded. The surface is marked everywhere with fine,
very closely set, and deep longitudinal grooves. Colour light green,
slightly clouded. Length 51, of an inch.
Taken in the same gathering as the preceding species. Mr. King
refers this to the genus Candona ; but the lower antenna is provided
with a brush of sete reaching about to the extremity of the terminal
claws.
3. Cypris TATEI, n. sp. (Plate VIII. figs. 5, 6.)
Shell, seen from the side, broadly reniform, greatest height in the
middle, and equal to more than half the length; extremities rounded,
dorsal margin boldly arched, sloping abruptly behind, more gradually
towards the front, ventral deeply sinuated in the middle; seen from
above, the outline is ovate, somewhat compressed in front, widest
behind the middle, anterior extremity subacuminate ; posterior wide
and rounded; valves unequal, that of the right side the larger.
Surface smooth, colour yellowish brown, with darker clouded
markings. Length = of an inch.
Taken by Prof. R. Tate in “brackish pools in a dry creek at
Adelaide.”
This species, though considerably more tumid, has very much the
general character of C. prasina, Fischer (fretensis, Brady & Robert-
son), and of C. incongruens, Ramdohr, especially as to the curiously
compressed anterior extremity. It is remarkable, too, that all of
these are inhabitants, almost exclusively, of brackish water. I have
pleasure in naming the species after Prof. Ralph Tate, by whom it
was found, and to whose kindness I am indebted for the opportunity
of describing it.
4, Cypris MYTILOIDES, n. sp. (Plate IX. figs. 1-3.)
Shell, seen laterally, elongated, siliquose, highest in front, pro-
duced behind into a very acute, tapering beak ; height equal to less
than one half the length; anterior extremity broad and boldly
rounded, dorsal margin boldly arched, highest near the front, thence
sloping at first with a gentle curve, but more abruptly towards the
posterior extremity, in front of which it is deeply sinuated ; ventral
margin almost straight, with a slight median sinuation; seen from
above, compressed, oblong, widest near the middle, about thrice and
a half as long as broad; extremities acute, the posterior the more
90 DR. G. S. BRADY ON FRESHWATER [Feb. 2,
slender of the two. The right valve is the smaller of the two, and
has the dorsal margin less arched. The inner aspect of the valves
shows a large shelf-like flange fore and aft. The terminal claws of
the second pair of antennz are slender and finely pectinated on the
inner margin. Postabdominal rami slender, with one long terminal
claw, one short seta at the base of the claw, and one a little removed
on the margin of the ramus. Margins of claws and ramus minutely
pectinated. Shell thin, horny, of a smoky hue. (“Colour in life
light-brown, with darker zebra-like markings.’ Prof. 2. Tate.)
Length J of an inch. ;
Collected by Prof. R. Tate in fresh water, at Kangaroo Island,
Australia.
Though quite abnormal in shape of shell, the soft parts of the
animal agree in every important respect with those of the genus
Cypris.
Genus CHLAMYDOTHECA, de Saussure’.
‘Testa undique pilosa, antice posticeque rotundata, appendice
anteriore cum margine valvulz dorsali sensim coalescente, cum mar-
gine ventrali autem angulum manifestum efficiente; appendice
posteriore minima. Altitudo maxima pone medium et propius
ventralem quam dorsalem marginem sita, exinde pars postica crassior
quam antica. Margo ventralis vix sinuata, dorsalis valde armata.
Impressio muscularis paulo ante medium sita.”
The anatomical structure agrees exactly with Cypris. The author
(de Saussure) refers to a paper by Sir John Lubbock, in which a
similar species, Cypris brasiliensis, is described *.
The genus Cypridea, Bosquet’, if not identical with, is at least
very nearly allied to, the forms now under discussion. No undoubted
recent specimens of Cypridea have, however, as yet been seen, and
Prof. Rupert Jones, in a recent paper “ On the Ostracoda of the
Purbeck Formation,’ * says that the “hinder margin is definitely
straight along the middle third or more of the dorsal edge, with the
hinge-angles more or less defined, and is oblique to the main axis
of the valve. The left valve is the largest, and receives the dorsal
edge and a straight ridge of the other valve in grooves on its dorsal
and ventral contact-margins.”” These characters are not to be found
in Chlamydotheca. Moreover, from the figures given by Prof.
Rupert Jones, it seems that both valves of Cypridea are provided
with the notch and hatchet-like anterior process, whereas in Chlamy-
dotheca only the left valve is so formed.
1 “ Mémoire sur divers Crustacés nonveaux des Antilles et du Mexique,” par
M. Henri de Saussure. (Mémoires de la Société de Physique et d'Histoire Natu-
relle de Genéve, 1856.)
2 “On the freshwater Entomostraca of South America.” (Trans. Entom.
Soe. Lond. new series, vol. iii. part vi. 1855.)
3 “Hntom. fossil. des Terrains tertiaires de la France et de la Belgique.”
(Mém. couronnés Acad. Royal de Belgique, vol. xxiv. 1852.)
4 “ Ostracoda of the Purbeck Formation, with notes on the Wealden species.”
(Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, August 1885.)
1886. ] ENTOMOSTRACA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA. 91
CHLAMYDOTHECA AUSTRALIS, 0. sp. (Plate IX. figs. 4-8.)
Shell, seen from the side, subovate, greatest height equal to rather
more than half the length, and situated in the middle, anterior
extremity rounded, produced at the inferior angle so as to forma
ventral beak, posterior extremity narrower, rounded, dorsal margin
boldly arched, ventral slightly sinuated in the middle, more deeply
in front, behind the beak ; seen from above, the outline is ovate,
twice as long as broad, anterior extremity forming a large, broad,
obtusely-pointed, and twisted prominence, posterior slightly narrowed
and produced, but rounded off. The valves are unequal, the left
being the larger, overlapping on the ventral, and less distinctly on
the dorsal margin. The outline of the right valve is more evenly
rounded than that of the left, presenting no ventral beak nor sinua-
tion, nor are the margins, either ventral or dorsal, so much incurved ;
the inner aspect of the valves shows shelving flanges both before and
behind, and in that of the left side there is a curious twisted ridge
separating the anterior beaked portion from the body of the shell.
The substance of the shell is rather thick ; surface closely marked
with small circular impressions ; colour fuscous. Length +1, of an
inch. The specimens are all empty shells, so that the structure of
the soft parts is as yet unknown.
Penola (Prof. R. Tate).
Genus Cypripopsis, Brady.
1. Cypripopsis minna (King). (Plate X. figs. 1-3.)
Cypris minna, King, 1855, Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Van Diemen’s Land,
vol. ili. pt. i. p. 64, pl. x. B.
Shell very tumid; width and height about equal, length about
one fourth greater. Seen from the side, subcircular, highest in the
middle, extremities broadly rounded, dorsal margin excessively
arched, ventral nearly straight in the middle; seen from above very
broadly ovate, obtusely pointed in front, the hinder part forming
almost a complete circle; end view subcircular, obscurely pointed
above, slightly keeled and emarginate below. Surface smooth, beset
with small impressed circular puncta; colour olivaceous, clouded
irregularly with darker patches. Anterior margins of the valves
slightly crenulated. Length ;\ of an inch.
flab. Condong River, Australia (Mr. T. Steel). ‘« Ponds, every-
where” (Rev. R. L. King).
2. CYPRIDOPSIS FUNEBRIS, n. sp. (Plate VIII. figs. 7-9.)
Shell, seen from the side, subtriangular ; greatest height a little in
front of the middle and equal to nearly two thirds of the length;
extremities rounded, the anterior wide, posterior narrower and not so
well rounded, dorsal margin elevated and almost gibbous near the
middle, thence sloping almost in a straight line backwards, and with
a gentle curve towards the front, ventral almost straight ; seen from
above, ovate, widest in the middle, width equal to two thirds of the
92 DR. G.S. BRADY ON FRESHWATER ENTOMOSTRACA. [Feb. 2,
length, anterior extremity obtuse, scarcely rounded, posterior rounded
off and rather wider than the front. End view subcircular. Surface
smooth, cream-coloured, with transverse black bands after the
manner of C. vidua. Length =\, of an inch.
Hab. Condong, Tweed River, New South Wales (Mr. T. Steel).
Genus Noropromas, Lilljeborg.
(Newnhamia, King, 1855, Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Van Diemen’s Land,
vol. ili. pt. 1, p. 67.)
NoToDROMAs FUSCATUS, n. sp. (Plate X. figs. 4-6.)
Shell, seen laterally, subtriangular, height equal to three fourths
of the length, extremities very broadly rounded, the anterior some-
what the narrower of the two, dorsal margin excessively arched,
highest a little behind the middle ; ventral nearly straight ; seen from
above, the outline is ovate, scarcely twice as long as broad, tapered
and acuminate in front, rounded off behind. Surface of the valves
somewhat rough and furfuraceous, colour brownish, with darker
cloudings. The ventral aspect of the shell is ribbed almost exactly
asin N. monachus; the “ ocular”’ tubercle is large and distinct ; by
transmitted light the shell is seen to have a polygonal reticulated
structure, and the reticulations are visible also by reflected light on
the anterior portion of the valves.
Hab. At Condong, with the foregoing species.
This is very much less tumid and less angular in outline than
Newnhamia fenestrata, King, and its lateral outline differs in the
same way from Notodromas monachus, Miiller.
Genus Canpona, Baird.
1, Canpona LuTEA, King. (Plate X. figs. 7, 8; &? Plate VIII.
figs. 10, 11.)
Candona lutea, King, 1855, Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Van Diemen’s
Land, vol. iii. pt. i. p. 67 pl. x. kK.
Male. Shell, seen from the side, subreniform, depressed in front,
greatest height near the posterior extremity and equal to half the
length ; anterior extremity narrow and well rounded, posterior wide,
obliquely rounded ; dorsal margin forming a flattened arch, sloping
with a gentle curve to the front, and abruptly backwards, ventral
sinuated in the middle ; seen from above, compressed, ovate, about
thrice as long as broad, gently tapered towards the front, which is
subacuminate, rounded off behind. Shell smooth and _ polished,
pellucid, white or straw-coloured. Length > of an inch.
Hab. Condong, with the foregoing species.
The shell figured in Plate VIII. figs. 10, 11, occurred in the same
gathering, and possibly may be the young of C. lutea.
2. CANDONA TENUIS, n. sp. (Plate X. figs. 9, 10.)
Shell elongated, compressed, reniform ; seen from the side it is at
least twice as long as broad, the greatest height being a little behind
the middle, extremities rounded, dorsal margin boldly arched, ventral
P. Z.5.1886. PL VII.
/ |
10 4
Geo West & Sons, hth etimp.
NEW AUSTRALIAN ENTOMOSTRACA.
G.S.B. del.
PZ.S, 1886. PLT:
Geo West & Sons, lith et imp.
NEW AUSTRALIAN ENTOMOSTRACA.
i =o Ago Pelt} | Yan al DG
Geo.West & Sons lith etimp.
G.S.B. del.
NEW AUSTRALIAN ENTOMOSTRACA.
1885.] DR. MONTICELLI ON SOUTH ITALIAN CHIROPTERA. 93
deeply sinuated in the middle ; the dorsal view is elongated, ovate,
quite thrice as long as broad, widest in the middle; extremities
narrowed, the anterior subacuminate, posterior rounded off; left
valve rather larger than the right. Shell smooth, pellucid, cream-
coloured, with opaque cloudings. Length 35 of an inch.
Taken in company with the preceding species.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Pzarr VIII.
Fig. 1. Cypris viridula (p. 88), seen from left side.
thy VER ” seen from above. x 40
3. ,, stanleyana (p. 89), seen from left side. <
ow ics i seen from above.
5. ,, tate? (p. 89), seen from left side. x 20
Ga* ts; ,, seen from below. +
7. Cypridopsis funebris (p. 91), seen from left side.
8. 4 45 seen from above. x 40.
9. 5 e seen from front. }
10. Candona lutea, jun. ? (p. 92), seen from left side. \ x 80
Lal , “s seen from above. j =
Prats IX.
Fig. 1. Cypris mytiloides (p. 89), seen from left side. “6
2. A 3 seen from above. ;
o. br fs postabdominal ramus. x 40.
4. Chlamydotheca australis (p. 91), seen from left side.
5. a PA seen from below.
6. 6 5 seen from front. * 28.
ic MY 55 left valve seen from inside.
8. 3 : right valve seen from inside. )
Puate X.
Fig. 1. Cypridopsis minna (p. 91), seen from right side.
2. +s », seen from below. x 40.
3. 5 », seen from front.
4, Notodromas fuscatus (p. 92), seen from left side. 40
5. “A Ay seen from below. pe
6. he 5 shell structure. x 400.
7. Candona lutea, male (p. 92), seen from left side.
8. A 3 seen from above. 40
9. _ tenuis (p. 92), seen from left side. —
10. F » seen from above.
2. Contribution to a Knowledge of the South-Italian
Chiroptera. By Fr. 8. Monricexur, D.Sc. (Commu-
nicated by Dr. H. Woopwarp, F.R.S., F.G.S.)
[Received January 5, 1886.]
Bonaparte’ was the first naturalist who wrote upon Italian
Chiroptera; but his researches are tvo general, and there are
no indications of southern localities contained in his work.
Later on, Prof. C. G. Costa gave in 1839* a catalogue of
1 «Teonografia della Fauna Italica’: Roma, 1832-41.
* *Flenco dei Mammiferi e Supplemento.’ (Fauna del Regno di Napoli.)
94 DR. MONTICELLI ON SOUTH ITALIAN CHIROPTERA. [Feb. 2
Chiroptera of the kingdom of Naples; but after him, excepting
Major ', who announced the discovery of Vesperugo Jeisleri in South
Italy, no one else has written about the Chiroptera of this country.
Quite recently, however, Camerano and Lessona* have given notices
of some of the Southern species. Prof. Costa’s work in 1839
enumerates the following species:—hinolophus bihastatus,
Vesperugo serotinus, Vespertilio bechsteinii, Vespertilio murinus,
Dysopes cestoni, Plecotus auritus, and Myopterus daubentoni. From
this catalogue of Costa must be excepted V. bechsteini, which I have
not yet met with, and Myopterus daubentoni, which is not a European
species ; but there are to be added thirteen other species, so that the
number of Chiroptera of South Italy now consists of at least eighteen
species. Amongst the thirteen species to be added to the catalogue of
Costa there are many very important as regards the geographical
distribution of the different species in Italy ; such as Synotus barba-
stellus, which so far has only been found in Northern Italy ; and also
a species altogether new to Italy, which I have recently described as
Vespertilio oxygnathus.
I am preparing descriptions, carefully compiled, of all the South-
Italian Chiroptera ; but for the present I give this preliminary cata-
logue of them, with indications of the localities where they are found.
1. Nycrrnomus CESTONI, Savi.
This species does not seem to be common in the South, but it is
not rare at Naples. I have not been able to procure specimens
from other points of the Mediterranean side of Italy, but it is
possible that it may be found on the Adriatic side, where so far
no researches have been made.
2. RHINOLOPHUS FERRUM-EQUINUM, Schr.
This species is very common, and easy to find anywhere.
3. RHINOLOPHUS EURYALE, Blas.
Although Camerano and Lessona say this species is less common
than the preceding, and is found particularly in North Italy, I have
also found it equally distributed in South Italy.
4. RHINOLOPHUS HIPPOSIDEROS, Bechst.
Less common than the preceding, but not rare. I have not met
with R. blasii, Peters, although Blasius says that he found it in
Middle and Southern Italy and Sicily, and Camerano obtained it in
Sardinia.
5. MINIOPTERUS SCHREIBERSI, Natt.
Very common throughout the whole of South Italy.
1 “Vertebrati Italiani nuovi o poco noti”: Atti Soc. Tose. Natur. Pisa,
vol. iii. 1876.
2 *Compendio della Fauna Italiana’: Torino, Loescher, 1885.
1886.] DR. MONTICELLI ON SOUTH ITALIAN CHIROPTERA. 95
6. PLecorus auritus, Linn.
This Bat seems to be more common on the Adriatic than on the
Mediterranean side of Italy.
7. SYNOTUS BARBASTELLUS, Schreb.
This species has been hitherto said to be found only in North
Italy. It occurs also in South Italy.
8. VESPERUGO (VESPERUS) SEROTINUS, Schr.
This species is not very frequently observed, but is found
everywhere,
9. VESPERUGO NocruULA, Schr.
Not common in South Italy, but not rare. Up to the present
time it has been found only on the Adriatic side.
10. VEspERUGO LEISLERI, Kuhl.
A very rare speciesin Italy. There are only two specimens in the
Museum of Florence, which were obtained in the province of Lecce.
11. VespervuGo savu, Bp.
This Bat is very common everywhere.
12. VesPERUGO KUALI, Natt.
Very common everywhere; found both in town and country.
There are many variations in the colour and size of specimens; I
have found some all white, and others black. These may be con-
sidered as two distinct varieties: the former I call “ var. albicans,”
the latter “ var. pudlatus.”’
13. VESPERUGO PIPISTRELLUS, Schreb.
A species common everywhere. In some places it is met with in
great numbers.
14. VEsPERTILIO BLASII, Major.
Vespertilio majori, Ninni, Fauna Venet.'
Up to the present time a very rare species. I have seen only one
specimen, which is in the collection of the Zoological Museum of
Naples.
15. VESPERTILIO MURINUs, Linn.
Generally distributed over the whole of Southern Italy.
16. VESPERTILIO OxYGNATHUS, Mont.?
I have founded this new species on specimens found at Matera
(province of Basilicata). It is very closely allied to V. murinus,
but is at once distinguished by the ears, which are as long as the
head, the great development of the glands of the muzzle, by the
' «Materiali per una Fauna Veneta’: Venezia, 1878; Atti R. It, Venet.
* Ann. Ace. Or. Costa d. Asp. Natur. Era 3, vol. i., con tayola.
96 MR. SHARPE ON BIRDS IN THE HUME COLLECTION. [Feb. 2,
acutely pointed muzzle, and the prominent nostrils, which open
sublaterally, as also by the small upper premolar, the form of the
ear, the tragus with a distinct lobe at the base of outer margin, and
by its small feet.
The wing-membrane does not extend so far outwards along the
foot, and its colour is darker.
This new species has also many characters common with V. afri-
canus, Dobson, V. dobsoni (murinoides), and V. chinensis.
17. VESPERTILIO EMARGINATUS, Geoffr.
In the Museum of Florence there are many specimens of this
species found in different localities of South Italy, but I have not
succeeded in procuring other specimens.
18. VESPERUGO NATTERERI, Kuhl.
This species does not seem to be very common. I know of only
two specimens from the South.
The following Italian species of Chiroptera I have not yet found
in the South :—
. Rhinolophus blasii, Blas.
. Vesperugo nathusii.
. Vesperugo discolor.
. Vesperugo leucippe.
. Vespertilio daubentoni.
Vespertilio mystucinus.
. Vespertilio bechsteinit.
NEO OB CoN
Naples, Noy. 1885.
3. Notes on Specimens in the Hume Collection of Birds.
By R. Bowpier Suarrg, F.L.S. &e.
No. 1. On the Hawfinch from Attock.
[Received January 14, 1886.]
Three specimens of a Hawfinch were collected at Attock in the
Punjab, in March 1869, and in February 1870, by Colonel Delmé-
Radcliffe. They are mentioned by Mr. Hume in ‘ The Ibis’ for 1869,
p- 456, and again in ‘Stray Feathers’ for 1877, vol. vii. pp. 413, 462,
and are there referred to C. vulgaris, i. e. C. coccothraustes (Linn.).
In the Hume Collection there were no specimens of true C. cocco-
thraustes from Europe ; and the comparison of these specimens was
therefore doubtless made with plates of the European bird; but on
comparing the three birds with a series of true C. coccothraustes,
it seems to me certain that they are distinct from the European Haw-
finch.
The female differs from the corresponding sex of C. coccothraustes
in being ochreous brown above, pale ashy ochreous on the lower
1886.] ON ISOPODA COLLECTED BY H.M.S. ‘CHALLENGER.’ 97
back, rump, and upper tail-coverts, while the crown of the head is
ashy grey like the hind neck ; sides of face also ashy grey washed
with ochreous; breast and sides of the body ochreous buff, instead
of vinaceous brown; centre of breast and abdomen white. Total
length 6°75 inches, culmen 0°75, wing 3°9, tail 2°35, tarsus 0°8.
The male differs less from C. coccothraustes than the female, but
it is distinguished by its paler coloration, and by the breast and sides
of the body being light orange-brown instead of vinaceous. Total
length 6°9 inches, culmen 0°8, wing 3°8, tail 2-1, tarsus 0°8.
I may add that the Attock bird is not CO. japonicus, for it has a
greater extent of pure white on the wing-coverts than in even true
C. coccothraustes. C. japonicus is scarcely to be distinguished from
the European bird; and differs only in having the median and
greater wing-coverts pale drab at the ends instead of white. I
propose to call the Coccothraustes from Attock after my friend Mr.
Hume, C. humii. Whether it is the Hawfinch recorded by Lieut.
Barnes as a permanent resident at Chaman in Southern Afghanistan
(Str. F. ix. p. 456) must remain a question to be decided by an
examination of specimens, which I have not yet had the opportunity
of doing.
4, Preliminary Notice of the Isopoda collected during the
Voyage of H.M.S. ‘Challenger.’—Part III. By
Frank E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., F.Z.S., Prosector
to the Society.
[Received January 25, 1886.]
The present paper completes the preliminary description of the
new species of Isopoda collected during the voyage of the ‘ Challenger.’
This paper includes the families Munnide, Asellide, Arcturide,
Cymothoide, Spheromide, Tanaide, Anceide, and Anthuride, of
all of which there are specimens in the ‘ Challenger’ collection,
representing about 45 new species, besides a number of others
previously known. Among the shallow-water species the largest
number of new forms are from Kerguelen, in spite of the investigations
into the marine fauna of that region carried out by the British
‘Transit of Venus Expedition,’ and the exploring voyage of the
German S.S. ‘Gazelle.’ I have to add quite as many new species
as those previously known to the fauna of Kerguelen and the adjacent
islands (Prince Edward’s Island, &c.).
Among the deep-sea species the most remarkable and interesting
is undoubtedly a new genus of Cymothoade, which is described below
under the name of dAnuropus branchiatus; there are also numerous
representatives of other deep-sea forms, as might be expected from
the nature of the explorations carrried out by the ‘ Challenger
* Published by permission of the Lords Commissioners of the Treasury.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. VII. 7
98 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED [Feb. 2,
Fam. MuNNID2.
Genus Munna, Kroyer.
1. MuNNA MACULATA, 0. sp.
A single male example of this species was dredged in shallow water
at Kerguelen. It measures about 4 millim.inlength. The body is
smooth, and the integument has numerous black pigment-spots. The
shape of the body is characteristically that of a female, being broader
anteriorly than posteriorly ; the head is about as long as the first
two segments of the thorax; the anterior margin is straight and
fringed with a row of stiff hairs; the eye-stalks are well developed.
The four anterior segments of the thorax are subequal ; the three
posterior are narrower ; the thoracic segments have short rounded
epimera. The antennules consist of a four-jointed peduncle, the
two distal joints of which are much shorter than the proximal joint ;
the flagellum consists of four joints, which are elongated and narrow.
The antennz are very long, about twice the length of the body; the
flagellum is shorter than the peduncle: the last two joints of the
peduncle are elongated and subequal.
Kerguelen, 25 fathoms.
2. MUNNA PALLIDA, 0. sp.
This species, like the last, is represented by a single male specimen,
measuring rather lessthan 3 millim. Like other species, the male is
of approximately uniform diameter throughout. ‘The species is pale
and transparent, without any trace of pigment. The head terminates
in a truncated anterior margin; the eyes are sessile—not stalked.
The first segment of the thorax is longer than any of the three
following, which are subequal; their margins are rounded and
furnished with small rounded epimera; the three posterior
segments are curved backwards ; the first is very short, the rest
increase slightly in length progressively. ‘The abdominal shield
is oval, ending in an obtusely rounded extremity. The antennules
are like those of the last species, but the flagellum is only three-
jointed.
Kerguelen, 30 fathoms.
Genus IscuNosoma, Sars.
1. IsCHNOSOMA BACILLUS, 0. sp.
This species is only represented by a single fragment, including the
abdomen and four last thoracic segments, which is, however, sufficient
to determine with at least probability its systematic position ; it
measures | millim. The fourth and fifth segments of the thorax, as
in Sars’s species, are closely connected and form an hourglass-shaped
structure, the two pairs of appendages belonging to these segments
being placed at each extreme of the conjoined segments. The
fourth and fifth segments are each provided with long spine-like
epimera. The presence of spines upon the fifth segment of the thorax
distinguishes this species from both I. dispinosum and I. quadri-
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S. ‘CHALLENGER.’ 99
spinosum, and from the next species I. bacilloides. The specimen is
a female.
Station 158; 1800 fathoms.
2. IsCHNOSOMA BACILLOIDES, 0. sp.
This species is closely allied to the preceding, but presents certain
differences which appear to necessitate its separation as a distinct
species. The single specimen is a fragment consisting of the same
segments as J. bacillus, save for the fact that the fourth segment of
the thorax is incomplete; unlike the foregoing species, it is a male ;
hence the supposed specific difference may be sexual. This species
is to be distinguished from J. bacillus by the fact that the sixth
segment of the thorax as well as the fifth has a pair of lateral spines.
In both species the uropoda are simple, each consisting of two joints.
Station 302; 1450 fathoms.
3. IscHNOSOMA SPINOSUM, N. sp.
This species is more closely allied than either of the foregoing to
Sars’s two species Ischnosoma bispinosum and Ischnosoma quadri-
spinosum, and, like them, comes from the Northern Hemisphere.
The single specimen measures 6 millim. in length. The general
shape of the body is similar to J. guadrispinosum; the head is
narrower and shorter than the first segment of the thorax ; there is
no trace of eyes. The first segment of the thorax is larger than
either of the two succeeding, which are subequal ; the fourth segment
is much longer and broader anteriorly than posteriorly, where it is
closely applied to the fifth segment, which is the longest of all; the
sixth and seventh segments are short. The whole of the dorsal
surface of the thorax is roughened and tubercular; the lateral
margins of the first three segments are furnished with two or three
longish stout spines, of which one on each side is particularly long ;
the dorsal region of these segments is not only tubercular but furnished
with a few longish spines; tbe fourth segment has no long lateral
spines like those of the preceding segment; the remaining thoracic
segments have likewise no lateral spines. Between the thorax and
abdominal shield is a single free abdominal segment; the anterior
half of the latter is oval; there is a deep notch behind this, just in
front of the articulation of the uropoda, which are borne upon a
short truncated process ; the extremity of the abdominal shield is
prolonged for some way behind the uropoda, and terminates abruptly
in a straight margin. The abdomen is roughened and tubercular
like the rest of the body ; there is a row of short spines on either side
of the dorsal median line.
Station 78; 1000 fathoms.
ASTRURUS, Nov. gen.
This genus comes near to Pleurogoniun, Sars, but may be distin-
guished by the spiny body, the long bifid rostrum, and the long
epimeral spines, which are themselves covered with shorter spines ;
7*
100 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED [Feb. 2,
the thoracic appendages are slender and not greatly elongated ; they
terminate in a single claw; the first pair are subcheliform. The
uropoda are rudimentary, consisting of only a single conical setose
joint.
1. ASTRURUS CRUCICAUDA, N. sp.
This species is represented by a large number of individuals
dredged in shallow water off Kerguelen ; the largest individuals only
measure 4 or 5 millim. in length.
The body is more or less pear-shaped, the anterior region of the
thorax being wider than the posterior. The head is narrower than the
succeeding segment of the thorax ; it is prolonged anteriorly into two
long slightly divergent processes, each of which is as long as the
head itself ; laterally is a longish process on either side, which
terminates in a slightly swollen extremity ; ; these processes resemble
the eye-stalks in Munna, and they contained some orange-coloured
pigment in the interior, but no recognizable trace of lenses ; the
surface, moreover, is covered with numerous short spines like the rest
of the body. The four anterior thoracic segments are of nearly
equal length, but they increase in width up to the third; the median
region of these segments is convex and densely covered with short
spines; the lateral margins are prolonged into long stout spines,
which are themselves covered with short spines like the thoracic
segments and the rest of the body. The three posterior segments
are all much shorter than the fourth segment, and decrease gradually
in length; their lateral margins are without the greatly elongated
spines of the anterior segments ; only on the fifth and sixth segments
oue of the spines which fringe the body is rather more elongated than
the rest. The abdominal shield is oval, tapering posteriorly ; it termi-
nates in four somewhat flattened spines arranged in the form of a
cross. The antennules consist of a two-jointed peduncle and a five-
or six-jointed flagellum ; the proximal joint of the peduncle is
broader and shorter than the succeeding joint. The antenne are
not so long as the body but considerably longer than the antennules ;
the two proximal joints of the peduncle are elongated, the flagellum
is shorter than either of these. The mandibles have a three-jointed
palp. The first pair of thoracic appendages are modified into a
prehensile limb; the remaining thoracic appendages are slender and
elongated, particularly the three posterior pairs. The wropoda are
rudimentary as in Munna.
Kerguelen, 120 fathoms.
Neraseuuus, F. E. B.
Neusellus, F. E. Beddard, Narr. Chall. Exp. vol. i. p. 882.
fir. 326.
This new genus is represented by a single species from Kerguelen.
It comes near to Pleurogonium and Leptaspidia, but is distinguished
by the great horizontal elongation of the head, which is as wide
as the following segment and bears the antennary organs at the
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S. ‘CHALLENGER.’ 101
extreme lateral margin; eyes are absent. The thoracic segments
are separated by deep incisions; the first segment is much the
largest, and is fused mesially with the following segment; the
margins of the segments are rounded ; and the whole body is fringed
with numerous leaf-like flattened spines.
1. NEASELLUS KERGUELENENSIS, F. E. B., loc. cit.
The extreme length of the single individual of this species is
2 millim.
The body is extremely flattened and depressed, pear-shaped
in general outline, being much broader anteriorly than pos-
teriorly. The head is immensely extended laterally, being as wide
as the following segment of the thorax, from which, however, it is
separated by deep lateral incisions. The central region is convex ;
the anterior and lateral margins are fringed with peculiar flattened
spines, which also border the body throughout. The two first segments .
of thethorax are together about equalin length to the headin its middle
region ; the line of suture separating these two segments is obliterated
except laterally ; the remaining segments are short and subequal, each
is about 1 of the length of the conjoined anterior segments ; the third,
fifth, and sixth segments have lateral processes, fringed with the
peculiar spines referred to, which are absent from the fourth and
seventh segments. The shape of the abdominal shield, which is,
as in Pleurogonium &c., separated from the last segment of the
thorax by a single free abdominal segment, is rhomboidal; it is
notched posteriorly and laterally where the uropoda articulate.
The antennules and antenne arise from the extreme lateral margin
of the head ; in the antennules the basal joint is short and stout, the
second rather elongated, the third and fourth narrower and shorter
than the second, the flagellum has two joints. The antenne are
more than half the length of the body, the peduncle has six joints,
the flagellum is a little longer than the distal joint. The mandibles
are furnished with a palp. The first thoracic appendages are
cheliform, the remaining thoracic appendages are not greatly
elongate. The uropoda are as in Pleurogonium.
Kerguelen, Christmas Harbour, 120 fathoms.
Genus PLEUROGONIUM, Sars.
1. PLEUROGONIUM ALBIDUM, 0. sp.
This species is represented by a single female example measuring
3 millim.
The general shape of the body is like the other species de-
scribed by Sars; the epimera of the first four thoracic segments
are prolonged into spines, which are of equal size upon all the
segments; the three posterior segments of the thorax are separated
from each other and from the fourth by deep lateral incisions ; their
epimera are prolonged into stout spiny processes, which are shorter
than in the anterior segments; the dorsal surface of each of these
three segments is traversed by a narrow ridge. Between the
102 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED [Feb. 2,
seventh thoracic segment and the abdominal shield is a narrow
free abdominal segment, which is ridged like the posterior segments
of the thorax. The abdominal shield is almost circular in its
outline anteriorly ; posteriorly it terminates in a triangular-pointed
extremity ; the posterior region is slightly serrated.
Kerguelen, 120 fathoms.
2, PLEUROGONIUM SERRATUM, N. sp.
This species, like the last, is represented by a single female example
measuring 3 millim. in length.
The head is small and almost enclosed by the following segment
of the thorax; the frontal margin is straighter than in the last
species, and the articulation of the antenne is not so near to the
posterior boundary of the head; the hinder margin of the semi-
circular notch which lodges the antenne is prolonged outwards into
a longish pointed process, which extends laterally nearly as far as
the epimeron of the first thoracic segment. The thoracic segments
are so like the last species that no special description is needed. The
most characteristic and obvious difference between the two species is in
the abdominal shield, which has, however, the same general shape in
P. serratum as in P. albidum; in the former species the lateral
margin as far back as the articulation of the uropoda is strongly
serrated ; there is no trace of any such serrations in P. albidum
except along the posterior extremity of the caudal shield behind the
uropoda, in which situation they are absent in P. serratum.
Kerguelen, 120 fathoms.
3. PLEUROGONIUM MINUTUM, 0. sp.
The third new species of this genus is represented by a single
female example, dredged off Tristan da Cunha. It measures about
1 millim. in length.
The general shape of the body is like that of the other species.
The epimera of the thoracic segments are not prolonged into spines
as in the last two species, but are rounded in the four most anterior
segments and truncated in the posterior thoracic segments. The
abdominal shield is oval, tapering posteriorly ; anteriorly the margins
of the abdominal shield are serrated, but the serrations are not nearly
so marked, nor do they extend over so great an area as in P. serratum.
In the two last species the antennz are twice the length of the
antennules; in the present species they are longer, but only half
as long again: in this respect therefore Pleurogontum minutum is
more typical, that is to say it agrees more closely with the northern
forms described by Sars.
Off Tristan da Cunha, 100-150 fathoms.
ACANTHOMUNNA, nov. gen. *
This genus is like Munna in outward form, and is furnished with
a pair of eyes elevated on stalks as in that genus ; the thoracic limbs
are entirely like those of Munna except that they terminate in a
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S, ‘CHALLENGER.’ 103
single elongated claw ; the antennule has a four-jointed peduncle
and a long multiarticulate flagellum ; the uropoda are defective but
evidently are of considerable size, judging from the socket of articu-
lation. The whole body is covered with short slender spines of
varying size, but nowhere very long.
1, ACANTHOMUNNA PROTEUS, 0. sp.
This species, the only one referable to the genus, is represented
by two individuals, both males, dredged off New Zealand in 700 and
1000 fathoms respectively. The larger specimen measures 7 millim.
in length. ‘The general shape of the body is as in Munna, but differs
in being covered with innumerable spines, many of which are
branched ; the spines are nowhere of very great length. The head
is furnished with a pair of eyes situated laterally ; these are elevated
upon short stalks ; the abdominal shield is preceded by a short tree
abdominal segment; it is extremely convex anteriorly, and the
point of articulation of the uropoda is upon the dorsal surface,
though near to the lateral margin; behind the articulation of their
appendages, the abdominal shield is flattened and terminates in
a truncated, slightly concave extremity. The antennules have a
four-jointed peduncle, the third joint being the longest, and a
multiarticulate flagellum longer than the peduncle. The mandibles
havea palp. ‘The first pair of thoracic appendages are shorter than
the rest and subcheliform; the remaining thoracic appendages are
very long, owing to the elongation of the fourth and fifth joints; they
terminate in a single claw ; these appendages are covered with slender
unbranched spines, which arise from tubercles. The uropoda are
defective, but appear to have been larger than those of Munna, &c.,
and possibly more fully developed.
Station 168; 1100 fathoms. Station 169; 700 fathoms.
Fam. ASELLID &,
Genus STeNETRIUM, Haswell.
1, STENETRIUM HASWELLI, 0. sp.
A single species of this genus, the only known deep-water species,
was dredged off the coast of S. America in 600 fathoms. ‘The
specimen is a male, and measures 16 millim. in length.
The diameter of the body is everywhere much the same except the
head and the terminal region of the abdominal shield. The head is
prolonged into a short rostrum; eyes are present of narrow linear shape,
and set obliquely. ‘The thoracic segments are subequal in length as
well as breadth, and the dorsal surface is quite smooth ; the margins
of the first thoracic segment are prolonged into a triangular spiny
process ; in the second segment the margin is furnished with a
smaller spine-like process; in the two following segments there is
in addition a smaller posterior spine; in the fifth segment the
antero-lateral spine is much wider, occupying nearly the whole of
the lateral margin; in the two remaining segments, the lateral
104 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED [ Feb. 2,
region is straight. The epimera are fused with the tergum in the
first thoracic segment, elsewhere distinct but small. The abdominal
shield is as long as the three last segments of the thorax ; it is
subquadrangular in outline. The antennules have four basal joints
and a long flagellum, longer than the peduncle. ‘The antenne are
furnished with a rudimentary exopodite. The mandibles have a palp.
The first pair of thoracic limbs are extremely long and prehensile ;
the remaining thoracic limbs are slender and short, they terminate in
twoclaws. The wropoda are biramose, the endopodite and exopodite
being equal.
Station 320; 600 fathoms.
IOLANTHE, nov. gen.
This genus appears to be closely allied to Acanthoniscus, Sars,
with which it agrees in the absence of eyes and in the presence of long
spiny epimera and long dorsal spines, and in the shape of the uropoda.
It differs in that the thoracic appendages are biunguiculate and in a
number of other points, which may be gathered from the following
description of the single species referable to the genus.
1. IoLANTHE ACANTHONOTUS, 0. sp.
This species is founded on a single female dredged in deep water
in the Antarctic Ocean. It measures 24 millim. in length.
The head is as wide as the succeeding segment of the thorax ; its
margins are prolonged on either side into two spines, of which the
anterior is much the longest; the anterior margin of the head is
produced into a long rostral spine, which is curved slightly upwards.
There is no trace of eyes. The thoracic segments are subequal in
antero-posterior diameter; in the dorsal-median line of all the
segments is a stout long vertical spine ; the lateral margin of the
first segment is furnished with a long spiny process; on each of the
three succeeding segments are two such spines, the anterior being
the longer; in the remaining segments only the anterior spine is
present. These spines are not outgrowths of the epimera, which are
small and lie beneath them. The abdominal shield is almost circular
in form ; on either side are three spines arranged at equal distances,
which are much shorter than the lateral spines of the thorax. The
antennules have a four-jointed peduncle, of which the second joint is
the longest. The flagellum consists of 24 joints, and is about as long as
the three distal joints of the peduncle. The antenne are half the
length of the body ; the second joint of the peduncle has a spiny
process on the outer side as in Janthe, which corresponds (?) to the
exopodite ; the flagellum is nearly as long-as the peduncle. The
mandibles have a palp. The thoracic appendages are all similar to
each other and terminate in two claws. The wropoda have a very
long proximal joint ; the endepodite is extremely short, though larger
than the minute exopodite.
Station 153; 1675 fathoms. ~
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S. ‘CHALLENGER. 105
Genus Jantra, Leach.
1, JANIRA ABYSSICOLA, N. sp.
The present species is represented by a single female example,
dredged off Fiji in very deep water.
The head has a rounded anterior margin ; the eyes are completely
absent. The first three segments of the thorax are of about equal
length ; the next two segments are much shorter, being about one half
the length of the anterior segments; the sixth segment has an
antero-posterior diameter about equal to that of either of the anterior
segments, while the seventh segment is longer than any. The
antenne are longer than the body of the animal; the flagellum is
much longer than the peduncle. The mandibles have a palp. The
thoracic limbs are all similar to one another. The uropoda are as
long as the abdominal shield ; they are biramose; the endopodite is
stouter and longer than the exopodite.
Station, 1350 fathoms.
2. JANIRA TRISTANT, N. sp.
The head is broader than long, with very large, laterally placed
eyes ; it is prolonged into a long stout rostrum with a rounded
extremity. The first two segments are of about equal length; the
three succeeding segments progressively diminish in length; the
last two are again somewhat longer. The abdominal shield is sub-
pentagonal and terminates in ashort blunt process. The antennules
have a long flagellum ; the peduncle is composed of four joints, all of
which are short. The mandible has a three-jointed palp. The
thoracic appendages are all similar to each other.
Off Tristan da Cunha, 100-150 fathoms.
Genus Ja@ropsis, Kohler.
1. J@ROPSIS MARIONIS, N. sp.
The only previously known species of this genus was described by
M. Kohler, from the island of Sark; the present species was
dredged off Marion Island in 100 fathoms. The single specimen
measures 4 millim. in length.
The head is roughly quadrangular in outline ; the anterior margin
is prolonged between the antenne into a rostrum, which is deeply
notched at the extremity; the eyes are of fair size, and dorsal in
position ; the lateral margins of the head are-serrated. The head is
about as long as the first two segments of the thorax taken together ;
the latter are subequal, the third is slightly shorter, the fourth and
fifth subequal and very much shorter again; the last two segments
are quite as long as the two first ; the segments are separated by deep
lateral incisions; the lateral margins of the segments are feebly
serrated. The abdominal shield is somewhat triangular in outline,
and terminates posteriorly in a three-jointed process; in the two
notches separating these processes lie the uropoda; the Jateral
margins are serrate. ‘The antennules are very short; the flagellum
106 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED [ Feb. 2,
has two joints, the distal one being very minute. The antenne have
a five-jointed peduncle and four- or five-jointed flagellum ; the third
joint of the peduncle is longer than the two basal joints, the fourth
joint is shorter than the third, the fifth longer. The thoracic
appendages are all similar and biunguiculate.
Off Marion Island, 100 fathoms.
Genus TRICHOPLEON, nov. gen.
A single specimen of a deep-sea Isopod dredged at Station 215
does not fall very conveniently within any known genus of the
Asellide.
The general shape of the body is like that of Asellus, with which
it also agrees in the uniunguiculate thoracic appendages ; eyes are
completely absent ; the first four thoracic segments are furnished on
either side with a forwardly-directed lateral spine. The antenne
have a movable scale attached to the second joint, as in Janira and
Stenetrium. The surface of the body is quite smooth.
1. TRICHOPLEON RAMOSUM, 0. Sp.
The specimen is an immature female, measuring 5 millim. in length.
The head is narrower, but longer than the succeeding segment of
the thorax; it is prolonged into a short wide process anteriorly.
There is no trace of eyes. The three first segments of the thorax are
subequal in length; the fourth segment is shorter; the three
posterior seginents gradually increase in length but diminish in
breadth ; the antero-lateral margin of the first four segments is
furnished with a short, acute, forwardly-directed spine. The abdomi-
nal shield is oval, but wider anteriorly than posteriorly ; it terminates
behind in the middle line in a short spiny process. The antennules
are about as long as the head and first two segments of the thorax
together ; the peduncle has four joints, of which the second joint is
the longest; the flagellum consists of about fifteen joints. The
antenne are about equal in length to the bedy; the flagellum is
longer than the peduncle ; the two basal joints of the peduncle are
very short, the third a trifle longer, with an articulated scale on the
outer side ; the two distal joints are long and subequal. The mandi-
bles havea palp. The thoracic appendages are similar to each other,
terminating in a single claw. Uropoda moderately long, biramose,
each ramus one-jointed.
Station 214; 500 fathoms.
Fam. ARCTURID&,
Genus Arcturus, Latreille.
1. ARCTURUS MYOPS, N. sp.
The present species differs from any other Arcturus at present
known by the fact that the eyes are entirely or almost entirely
aborted. The only trace of eyes left are a pair of rounded tubercles,
which appear to contain no pigment and are not faceted. The largest
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S, ‘CHALLENGER.’ 107
individual measures about 9 millim. The first four thoracic segments
are subequal in length ; each is ridged posteriorly, the ridge widening
out laterally to occupy the whole of the segment, it is covered with
fine granulations ; in the fourth segment the ridge is higher than in
the preceding segments; auteriorly between the ridge and the
anterior margin of the segment is a shorter ridge, likewise covered
with numerous minute tubercles ; on the first thoracic segment is a
third ridge; of the three posterior segments the first is the longest ;
on each is a posterior ridge-like elevation beset with numerous
tubercles. The abdominal shield is oval, tapering towards its extremity,
which is slightly upturned; like the thorax, it is tuberculate. The
proximal joints of the antennze and of all the thoracic limbs are beset
with tubercles.
Station 169; 700 fathoms.
2. ARCTURUS ANNA, 0. sp.
This single specimen of this large species measures 37 millim. ;
the antenne are nearly twice the length of the body. The head is
excavated in front ; the antero-lateral margin of the head is notched
ventrally. The first four segments of the thorax are subequal ; each
is traversed by a ridge, which dorsally is narrow and only occupies
the posterior portion of the segment, laterally it is widened out and
occupies the whole of the segment ; in front is another shorter ridge,
which does not reach the lateral region of the segment ; at the extreme
lateral margin is a stout spine, inclined nearly at right angles to the
longitudinal axis, which overlies the epimeron; behind are one or
two shorter spines along the postero-lateral border of the tergum.
The epimera, which are short, are likewise furnished with one or two
short spines ; these are only conspicuously developed upon the last two
of the segments, especially upon the last, where one of the spines
equals in length the tergal spine which it directly underlies. Of the
three posterior segments the first is decidedly the largest ; they are
ridged like the anterior segments, the ridge widening out laterally ;
each segment has a short lateral spine corresponding to those on the
anterior segments ; the epimera are also furnished with a stout spine,
that of the fifth segment with an additional spine directed forwards.
There are two completely free abdominal segments, the third being
to a large extent fused with the abdominal shield; on the ventral
side of the first abdominal segment is a short spine on either side
anteriorly and another pair of longer spines posteriorly ; this segment
as well as the next has a short lateral spine; the third abdominal
segment has on either side a long curved spine at the postero-lateral
margin. The abdominal shield has a central convexity occupying
nearly the whole of its extent and bordered by a flattened rim, which
is serrated, and terminates posteriorly in a pair of pointed processes
projecting behind the central area, which terminates posteriorly ina
short pointed spine. The thoracic limbs of the second, third, and
fourth pairs have one or two longish spines on the three proximal
joints.
Station 320; 600 fathoms.
108 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED [Feb. 2,
3. ARCTURUS CORNUTUS, 0. sp.
This species, like the last, is represented by a single female ex-
ample, measuring 36 millim. ; the length of the antennz is 64 millim.
The margin of the head is excavated dorsally and anteriorly ; the
antero-lateral margin of the head below and in front of the eyes is
notched ; between the eyes are a pair of long, forwardly-directed
spines, and behind the eyes a pair of blunt tubercles. The first
three thoracic segments are subequal, and each is a little longer than
the fourth. Each of the segments is ridged as in the last species ;
the lateral margin of the tergum has a long spine in each of their
segments, and there is another spine of equal length placed halfway
between the dorsal median line and the lateral margin of the seg-
ment; on the fourth segment there is an additional lateral spine
placed behind the principal spine; there are indications of a corre-
sponding spine in the anterior segments. The epimera of segments
2-4 have a single spine near to their posterior margin, the lengths of
which increase progressively from before backwards ; in front of the
posterior tergal ridge are a pair of blunt tubercles united by a slight
elevation ; the first segment has also a single tubercle placed in front
of this. Each of the three posterior segments is ridged as in A.
anna ; laterally is a long spine which overlies a similar spine upon
the epimeron ; the first of these segments has also a somewhat longer
epimeral spine directed forwards. Each of the three free abdominal
segments has along lateral spine ; the first segment has ventral spines
as in the last species. The abdominal shield has the same shape as
in A. anna, but there is a distinct longitudinal keel terminating in a
sharp upturned point ; on either side is a single row of curved hook-
like spines. The 2nd, 3rd, and 4th pairs of thoracic limbs have
spines similar to those of the last species.
Station 214; 500 fathoms.
4. ARCTURUS BRUNNEUS, N. sp.
This species measures 19 millim. in length, the antenne being of
about the same length. The head is furnished with a pair of long
spines between the eyes, and a pair of shorter spines behind these,
which are, however, longer in the female. The first four thoracic
segments are subequal, ridged as in the last two species ; on this ridge
are implanted a number of long, straight, slender spines. In the
male the first segment has four equidistant spines and a minute
epimeral spine at the extreme lateral margin; on the second
segment the epimeral spine is longer, and there is a minute tubercle
between it and the lateral tergal spine; in the third and fourth seg-
ments the lateral tubercle is developed into.a spine, and there is also
a short median dorsal spine ; on the second, third, and fourth seg-
ments there is a transverse row of longish spines near to the anterior
margin of the segment in both sexes; in the female the spines are
longer. Each of the three posterior thoracic segments bears a ridge,
with a single row of long spines arranged at equidistant intervals ;
there are three pairs of these spines, one pair epimeral; in the
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S. ‘CHALLENGER.’ 109
female there are several shorter ones in addition. The first abdo-
minal segment has a single row of comparatively short backwardly-
directed spines ; on the second and third segments these spines get
to be considerably longer, especially the lateral spine on either side,
which marks the commencement of the abdominal shield. The
abdominal shield in both sexes is covered with longish curved
spines ; just above and near to the termination of its lateral margins
are an extremely long pair of spines directed outwards and slightly
upwards. ‘The proximal joints of the antenne and of the thoracic
appendages are furnished with spines. The uropoda are tuberculate
in the male and spiny in the female.
Station 147 ; 1600 fathoms.
5. ARCTURUS PURPUREUS, l. sp.
This species is represented by a single female, which is of a
purplish colour, It measures 18 millim., the length of the antennee
is 31 millim.
On the head between the eyes are a pair of long forwardly curved
spines; the hinder portion of the head is occupied by a rounded
median convexity; on the antero-lateral margin is a very short
forwardly directed spine, beneath which the margin is excavated by a
semicircular notch. Of the first four thoracic segments, the fourth
is rather the shortest; each of the segments bears an outwardly
directed spine on each side of the body, corresponding in position to
those upon the head; close to the lateral margin of each segment
and projecting over the epimeron is another long spine; the first
segment differs from the succeeding in having no free epimera, and
the lateral margin has two spines instead of one, of which the
anterior is the longer; the fourth segment has also a second spine
at its postero-lateral margin. Of the three posterior thoracic seg-
ments the first is the largest; the epimera of all have a long out-
wardly directed spine ; the first of these segments has in addition a
tergal spine on either side exactly overlying the epimeral spine. The
first abdominal segment has a pair of long lateral spines and a pair
of short ventral spines; the third segment has a pair of lateral
spines. The abdominal shield is oval, with a faintly marked central
keel, terminating posteriorly in a long spine; its lateral margins are
flattened and unite posteriorly ; on either side are two flattened
spines situated at equidistant intervals. The antennz and anterior
thoracic limbs have a few spines upon the proximal joints; the
uropoda are granulated, but bear no spines.
Station 23; 450 fathoms.
6. ARCTURUS SPINIFRONS, 0. sp.
This species reaches to a length of 13 millim., the antenne
measuring 20 millim. The body is extremely tuberculate, but there
are no spines except a single pair upon the head ; the lateral margin
of the head, as in A. anna, is notched ventrally. The four anterior
thoracic segments are subequal, each has a posterior ridge which
110 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED [Feb. 2,
widens out laterally ; the ridge is concave forwards, dorsally, and
closely embraces a median oval convexity which lies in front of it ;
the fourth thoracic segment has a row of short tubercles, arranged
in a semicircle with the concavity directed forward, on the ventral
surface. Of the three posterior thoracic segments the first is the
largest, the second and third being smaller and subequal; each of
the segments is traversed dorsally by a strong ridge, which is tuber-
culate ; the first of these segments has a number of short tubercles
scattered over the ventral surface, and the two succeeding segments
are ridged in the same region. The segments of the abdomen are
comparatively smooth, being only slightly roughened laterally.
The abdominal shield is smooth with the exception of the lateral
margins, which are serrate ; it terminates in a short median spine.
The thoracic appendages are tuberculate on the proximal joints ;
the uropoda bear a single median longitudinal row of tubercles.
Station 174; 600 fathoms.
7. ARCTURUS SPINOSUS, N. sp.
This is the largest of the deep-sea species, measuring up to 48
millim., the antenne measure 60 millim. The males differ slightly
from the females, the latter being wider in the thoracic region and more
spiny. The anterior margin of the head is exeavated ; between and
a little in front of the eyes are a pair of long spines, behind these
are a pair of shorter spines; in the female there is an additional
pair of spines situated outside these latter. Of the first four
thoracic segments, the fourth is slightly the longest in the male; in
the female all four are subequal. On the first three thoracic seg-
ments, the posterior ridge bears three pairs of long spines situated at
equidistant intervals; the fourth thoracic segment has only two
pairs, but the epimera have each a long spine, wanting in the anterior
segments. In the female the first thoracic segment has four pairs of
spines, the other segments being as in the male; between these
principal spines there are, however (in the female), numerous smaller
spines, and the margins of the epimera are furnished with short
spines; each of these segments has in both sexes an anterior ridge
covered in the male with blunt tubercles, in the female these tuber-
cles are pointed. Of the three posterior thoracic segments the first
is the longest ; the posterior ridge is tuberculate, the tubercles being
more strongly marked in the female ; the epimera of these segments
have a large lateral spine. The three first abdominal segments are
distinct ; the last free segment has a long lateral spine on either
side in the female. The abdominal shield terminates in a single
median spine, and in two longer upwardly curved lateral spines.
The surface of the abdominal shield is tuberculate in the male and
covered with short spines in the female ; in this sex there are in addi-
tion a pair of moderately long lateral spines, situated just in front of
the posterior lateral spine. The thoracic appendages in the female
have a few short spines; in the male only the three last pairs are
thus provided ; the uropoda are tuberculate.
Station 146; 1375 fathoms.
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S. ‘CHALLENGER.’ 111
8. ARCTURUS GLACIALIS, n. sp.
This new species comes near to the last, but may readily be
distinguished by the fact that the spines are more numerous,
shorter, and more slender. The single example, a female, measures
32 millim. The dorsal surface is densely covered with short slender
spines, which extend on to the thoracic appendages and uropoda;
the spines are of uniform length. The anterior margin of the head
is excavated by a shallow semicircular notch ; between and in front
of the eyes are a pair of long spines, inclined somewhat away from
each other ; the spines on the thoracic segments are disposed in the
following way :—each of the first four segments has a posterior and
anterior ridge as in other species; both these are covered with
spines, as are also the epimera; between the two ridges in all but
the first segment are a pair of short spines; each of the three
posterior thoracic segments is ridged, the ridge being beset with
spines except in the median dorsal line. The abdominal shield is
beset with spines, except in the dorsal median line, where it is
grooved longitudinally.
Station 153; 1675 fathoms.
9. ARCTURUS ABYSSICOLA, 0. Sp.
This species was obtained from two stations in the Pacific Ocean,
but near to each other.
The length is about 20 millim., the length of the antenne 42
millim. Of the first four thoracic segments the second and third
are equal in size and rather longer than the first and fourth; each
of these segments is ridged posteriorly as in other species ; laterally
the tergum is produced into a short tubercle and there is a similar
tubercle upon the epimera; on the first segment this tubercle is
prolonged into a spine ; on the inferior surface of the fifth segment
is a short median transverse ridge ; the first abdominal segment has
a pair of ventral tubercles ; the abdominal shield is keeled and
terminates in a blunt spine, it is covered with a few low scattered
tubercles. The anterior thoracic appendages are furnished with one
or two spines upon the proximal joints; as in 4. anna the posterior
thoracic appendages have not these spines.
Station 184; 1400 fathoms. Station 281 ; 2385 fathoms.
10. ARCTURUS STUDERI, N. sp.
The extreme length of this species is 28 millim., length of antenne
30 millim. The head has two pairs of long spines situated one
behind the other, behind these again is a ridge bearing a few short
spines ; the antero-lateral region of the head is notched ventrally
as in A. purpureus, &c. The four anterior thoracic segments are
subequal ; on the posterior ridge of the first Segment are a pair of
minute tubercles on either side of the median dorsal line; laterally
are two long spines equidistant from each other and the dorsal
tubercles ; the lateral margin of the tergum is prolonged into two
outwardly directed spinous processes ; in front of the posterior ridge
are four minute tubercles arranged transversely ; the second segment
112 MR, F. E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED [ Feb. 2;
is similar ; the third and fourth segments have in addition another spine
upon each side, placed between and behind the two lateral spines ;
the margins of the epimera are prolonged into three short spines.
Each of the three posterior thoracic segments has two or three long
spines on either side; the epimera are large and terminate in two
stout spines. The two anterior abdominal segments each consist of
two portions—a narrower anterior and a smaller posterior portion ; the
former is smooth, the latter beset with spines and tubercles ; on the
first segment are two particularly long spines, one situated close to
the ventral margin of the tergum, exactly above this is the other,
which is of equal length; on the second segment is a lateral spine
of great length, but situated more dorsally ; the third segment has
also a pair of lateral spines. The abdominal shield has a dorsal keel
which is prolonged posteriorly into a curved spine. The whole of the
dorsal surface is covered with minute pointed tubercles; the lateral
region of the abdominal shield is flattened as in A. anna, &c., and
terminates posteriorly on either side in a flattened triangular spine.
Kerguelen, Royal Sound ; 28 fathoms. '
11. ARCTURUS OCULATUS, 0. sp.
Five specimens of this small species were dredged in shallow
water off Melbourne, South Australia. The largest measures no
more than 7 millim. The most remarkable point about this species,
and one which serves at a glance to distinguish it from any other
recorded species of the genus, is the elevation of the eyes on to
stalks as in the genus Munna. The frontal margin of the head is
broad and truncated ; it is not excavated as in so many other species.
The first four thoracic segments are subequal in length, they
are convex posteriorly and flatter anteriorly ; the surface of these
segments is quite smooth and free from tubercles or spines ; in the
last three of these segments the epimera are furnished with a long
spine. The posterior thoracic segments, like the anterior, possess
an epimeral spine ; each of these segments has also a lateral tergal
spine. Of the three tree abdominal segments the first and third
are furnished with a lateral spine on either side, which is absent from
the middle segment. ‘The abdominal shield is very convex, and
terminates in a median dorsal spine as in so many other species ; the
lateral margin of the caudal shield is beset with a series of somewhat
curved spines situated at equidistant intervals, the lateral margin
terminates in a longish flattened spine as in A. anna. On either
side of the dorsal median line is another row of spines, which run
from end to end of the caudal shield.
Station 161 ; 38 fathoms.
Family CyMorHoOIpDs#,
ANUROPUS, Rov. gen.
Among the Isopoda dredged during the cruise of the ‘ Challenger,’
there are not many deep-sea species which present any striking
differences from the Isopoda of shallow water. One of these species
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S. ‘CHALLENGER.’ 113
is represented by a single specimen, which was dredged in the Pacific
Ocean at Station 218, in 1070 fathoms of water. It isa large
Isopod, measuring upwards of two inches in length, and agrees in
most particulars with such genera of the Cymothoide as Aga; but
at the same time it presents certain remarkable peculiarities analo-
gous to those exhibited by the aberrant genus Bathynomus lately
described by Prof. A. Milne-Edwards from deep water in the North
Atlantic. M. Milne-Edwards’s preliminary account of Bathynomus
was communicated to the French Academy’, and a translation
of his note has appeared in the Ann. & Mag. of Nat. Hist.?
Apart from its huge size, the most remarkable feature in the
organization of Bathynomus is the great development of branchial
organs : ‘‘ it appears,” says M. Milne-Edwards, ‘‘ that the respiratory
apparatus of an ordinary Isopod is insufficient to supply the physio-
logical needs of Bathynomus, and that the development of special
organs of a greater functional power has been rendered necessary.
The abdominal limbs, which usually in this group constitute the
sole branchial apparatus, in Bathynomus only serve the function of
a covering to the gills which lie beneath them.” The gills of this
Crustacean are in fact represented by a series of complicated branched
outgrowths of the body-wall in the ventral region of the abdomen.
The same end is attained by the Crustacean, which forms the sub-
ject of the present remarks, in a different manner. Instead of a
development of accessory respiratory organs, Anwropus (as I may term
the genus from its chief structural peculiarity) exemplifies one
extreme of the Isopodan type, in that all the abdominal appendages
are converted into respiratory organs; the increase of respiratory
surface is thus attained by an exaggeration of a structural character,
which is common to all the members of the family, and which indeed
is an important basis of distinction from other families of Crustacea.
In all the members of this group more or fewer of the abdominal
limbs are soft foliaceous appendages, which permit of an easy
exchange of gases between the contained blood and the sea-water.
There is no instance, however, among the Isopoda in which all the
abdominal appendages are similar, functioning as respiratory organs,
except in this deep-sea genus Anuropus. Bathynomus, as regards
the uropoda, is quite a typical Isopod; these appendages form a
pair of swimming-feet as they do in the other Cymothoide ®*.
The modifications of the terminal pair of abdominal appendages or
uropoda serve to divide the Isopoda into natural families, which
prove to be allied in other particulars ; and some stress, therefore,
from a classificatory point of view, should perhaps be laid upon the
fact of their modification in Anuropus, though it is always open to
question how far a purely adaptive character is of value. Since the
present genus agrees with the Cymothoide in the general form of
the body, in the number of free abdominal segments, and in fact in
all essentials, it would perhaps be hardly permissible to remove it
1 ‘Comptes Rendus,’ Jan. 1879.
? Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1879 (vol. iii.), p. 241..
® There is a figure of Bathynomus in an interesting work recently published
by M. Filbol and entitled ‘La vie au fond des mers,’ Paris, 1885.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. VIII.
114 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED __[ Feb. 2,
from that family on account of the branchiate uropoda; but Anuropus
should at least be regarded as the type of a special subfamily
equivalent to any of the other four, viz. Cymothoadiens errants,
C. raviseurs, C. branchiferes, and C. parasites, into which MM. H.
and A. Milne-Edwards have divided the family. Anuropus has a
further ‘‘abyssal character” in the absence of eyes, and it is
also remarkable for the abortive antennules, which are only repre-
sented by two joints—a stout basal joint, and a longer stout curved
distal joint, which is possibly the equivalent of a metamorphosed
flagellum. The single species I may term
1, ANUROPUS BRANCHIATUS, 0. sp.
The extreme length of the specimen, which is a female, is 70 millim.
The head is small, and entirely without eyes; the body is extremely
convex ; the thoracic segments are subequal, the six posterior are
furnished with distinct epimera; the abdominal segments are all
smaller than the thoracic segments and subequal ; the fifth segment is
fused with the telson and forms a caudal shield, which is rounded and
flattened in shape. ‘There is no trace of eyes; the antennules are
short and thick, consisting of a thick basal joint and a longer, some-
what curved distal joint. The antenne are longer and more slender,
and quite normal in structure; the mandibles have a three-jointed
palp. The abdominal appendages are all similar to each other,
consisting of a short, stout, basal joint, and two equal rami flattened
and rounded in form.
Station 218; 1070 fathoms.
Fam. SPH ZROMIDS.
Genus Cymopocea, Leach.
1, CYMODOCEA ABYSSORUM, 0. sp.
This species is the only representative of the family at present
known from deep water ; it is represented by two individuals, one a
male, the other a female. The body in both is flattened, and is
evidently incapable of being rolled into a ball. The eyes are small
and whitish from the absence of pigment ; the first thoracic segment is
broader than the head, the following segments are subequal, and with
well-acveloped sickle-shaped epimera, absent in the last of the seg-
ments. Abdominal shield with two bluat conical spines on the dorsal
surface, one behind theother ; posterior extremity obtuse and rounded.
Uropoda with the rami subequal in the female, the outer being
slightly the longer; in the male the outer ramus is very much longer
than the inner and curved inwards.
Station 218 ; 1070 fathoms.
Fam. APSEUDID2&.
Genus ApseupEs, Leach.
1. APSEUDES ANTARCTICA, 0. sp.
The largest specimen of this small species measures 4 millim. in
length. The cephalothorax is nearly as long as the first four segments
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S. ‘CHALLENGER.’ 115
of the thorax ; it terminates in the middle line anteriorly in a sharp
rostral prolongation. The free thoracic segments increase in length,
but decrease in width up to the fourth, but there is less difference
between the first three than between the third and fourth; the
fourth and fifth segments are subequal ; the sixth is shorter, but not
perceptibly narrower than the fifth ; in the first segment the epimera
are prolonged into a spine; on the fourth and fifth segments are two
knob-like projections on either side, equidistant from each other, and
from the epimeron; on the terminal segment there is a single
process; the five anterior abdominal segments are subequal, and
furnished laterally with sharp spiny epimera. The caudal shield is
hourglass-shaped, being constricted in the middle, it narrows rapidly
to the obtusely pointed extremity. The outer flagellum of the
antennules has eight joints, the inner only three. ‘The uropoda are
extremely elongated ; the endopodite has two joints, the exopodite
six.
Kerguelen ; 120 fathoms.
TYPHLAPSEUDES, nov. gen.
This genus is distinguished from Apseudes by the almost complete
disappearance of the ocular lobes, which are represented by a small
triangular process without any trace of ocular structures; by the
absence of an exopodite to the chelipeds and fossorial limbs; and by
the fact that the exopodite of the abdominal appendage is distinctly bi-
articulate. In the last character this genus agrees with Sphyrapus.
1. TyPHLAPSEUDES NEREUS, 0. Sp.
This species attains to a length of about 10 millim. The body is
somewhat flattened and depressed, very much wider anteriorly than
posteriorly ; the cephalothorax terminates in front in a sharp rostrum;
to the outside of the antennules is the triangular pointed ocular lobe,
which contains no optic structures; some way below this is a
pointed lateral process. The free thoracic segments diminish in
breadth, but increase in length up to the fifth; the sixth is narrower
but shorter than the fifth; the epimera of the first thoracic segment
project as a spiny process; the lateral margins of all but the first
two segments are furnished with a short spine placed halfway
between the epimera and the anterior margin of the segment ;
on the ventral median line of the thoracic segments is a spiny
process ; similar minute spines exist upon the abdominal segments.
The abdominal segments with the exception of the last are furnished
with small pointed epimera; the last segment is as long as four
of the anterior segments, it terminates in a straight truncated
extremity, in the middle of which is a short knob-like process.
The antenne have a rudimentary exopodite. The chelipeds and
fossorial limbs are normal in structure, but possess no exopodite.
The uropoda are extremely long, as in Apseudes.
Station 23; 450 fathoms.
8?
116 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED _[Feb. 2,
LEIOPUS, nov. gen.
This genus is closely allied to the last, but differs in that the
chelipeds and fossorial limbs have an exopodite. The chelipeds are
extremely slender and delicate in their structure, and this, together
with the characters of the abdominal appendages, serves to distinguish
the genus from Apseudes.
1. LEIOPUS LEPTODACTYLUS, 2. sp.
This species attains to a length of 13 millim.
The cephalothorax is prolonged in front into a long rostrum ; the
ocular lobes are large and pointed anteriorly ; there is no trace of
any optic structures; behind the ocular lobes are two long spiny
processes, one on either side. The first free segment of the thorax is
as wide as the cephalothorax; the following segments decrease in
width, the first suddenly, the rest more gradually; the length of
these segments increases up to the fourth; the fifth is of equal
length with the fourth, the sixth rather shorter ; the first segment
has well-developed spiny epimera; the last three segments of the
thorax have also short spines upon the epimera, which are wanting
in the intermediate segments; upon all the free thoracic segments,
with the exception of the first, are a pair of long lateral spines like
those of Typhlapseudes, but longer. On the ventral surface of both
the thoracic and abdominal segments, with the exception of the last,
is a median spine. The abdomen is much as in the last-described
species. The outer flagellum of the antennules has twenty-seven
joints, the inner only six. The antenne have a rudimentary exopodite.
The chelipeds are very slender and delicate. The uropoda are as in
Apseudes.
Station 78; 1000 fathoms.
Fam. TANAIDS.
Genus Tanaris, Audouin & Milne-Edwards.
1. TANAIS HIRSUTUS, D. sp.
The extreme length of this species is 9 millim.
The body is elongated, the anterior region is wider than that which
follows; the last thoracic segment and the first three abdominal
segments are again wider, after which the body narrows towards the
termination. The cephalothorax has a short obtuse rostrum; the
two first segments of the thorax are short and subequal, the third
segment is narrower but longer; the two following segments increase
progressively in length, the first is about twice the length of the
preceding segment; the last thoracic segment is wider than the
preceding, but shorter. The first three segments of the abdomen
are wider as well as longer than the following ; the terminal segment
ends in a blunt, rounded extremity. The antennules have a three-
jointed peduncle anda two- or three-jointed palp ; the extremities of
the joints of the peduncle are surrounded by a circle of fine delicate
plumose hairs of great length. The antenne are similarly beset
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S. ‘CHALLENGER.’ 117
with fine hairs. The uropoda are uniramous and consist of twelve
joints.
Off Prince Edward’s Island ; 50-150 fathoms.
Genus TypaHiotanats, G. O. Sars.
1. TYPHLOTANAIS KERGUELENENSIS, 0. sp.
The individuals of this species measure up to 3 millim. in length.
The cephalothorax is short and wide; it is prolonged between the
antennz into a short pointed triangular process ; eyes completely
aborted. The first segment of the thorax is shorter than the rest
which are subequal, diminishing slightly towards the posterior
extremity of the body ; the first segment has a compressed forwardly-
directed spine arising from the median ventral surface ; there is a
trace of a similar process on the second segment. The first pair of
thoracic appendages arise close to the anterior border of their
segment, the second pair further back, the third pair from about
the middle of the segment; the three posterior pairs of thoracic
appendages arise close to the posterior boundary of their segments.
The antennules are about as long as the cephalothorax. The
chelipeds are rather slender. The wropoda are biramose, the outer
ramus one-jointed, the inner two-jointed.
Kerguelen, Christmas Harbour ; 120 fathoms.
2. TYPHLOTANAIS BRACHYURUS, 0. sp.
The length of this species is 8 millim. The cephalothorax is hardly
longer than the first free thoracic segment; the first thoracic segment
is one third less than either of the two following, which are sub-
equal; the fourth segment is hardly shorter than the third, the fifth
and sixth decrease progressively. The first pair of appendages is
attached close to the anterior border of the segment; the two following
pairs are moved a little way back, but are still quite close to the
anterior extremity of their segments; the three posterior pairs are
attached close to the posterior border of their segments. There is
no ventral spine on the first free segment. The abdomen is short,
and not so long as the last two segments of the thorax. The
antennules are rather shorter than the cephalothorax. The chelipeds
are short and stout. As in the last species, the three following pairs
of appendages are more slender than the three posterior pairs. The
uropoda are as in the last species.
Station 246 ; 2050 fathoms.
NEOTANAIS, noy. gen.
This genus comes nearest to Heterotanais, but differs in the great
length of the endopodite of the uropoda, and in the fact that the
chel are fully developed and of the normal structure in the male ;
a well-marked character of this genus is the specialization of the
thoracic appendages into an anterior and posterior series; in the
first three pairs the distal joint of the limbis a single, somewhat curved
118 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED [Feb. 2,
claw ; in the posterior appendages this terminal joint is furnished
at its distal extremity with a circlet of slender spines and a long,
mesial, slender hair.
1. NEOTANAIS AMERICANUS, N. Sp.
The species is represented by two specimens, both males, mea-
suring about 7 millim. The body is elongated and everywhere of
approximately the same diameter. The cephalothorax has a convex
anterior margin ; on either side of the antennules are the minute,
but separate, ocular lobes, which, however, show no traces of ocular
structures. The thoracic segments increase in length up to the
fourth, after which they diminish. The five anterior abdominal
segments are subequal, the terminal segment is of course longer, it
terminates in a minute, median, triangular process. The antennules
consist of a three-jointed peduncle, and a four-jointed flagellum, the
joints of which are very minute. In the antenne the peduncle is
tive-jointed, and the flagellum consists of four joints. The chelipeds
are short and stout. ‘There is no difference in size between any of
the succeeding thoracic appendages, only the difference in the
terminal joint referred to above. All the abdominal appendages are
present ; the wropoda consist of a very stout basal joint, with which
are articulated the long eight-jointed endopodite and the small two-
jointed exopodite.
Station 45; 1250 fathoms. Station 323; 1900 fathoms.
Genus LerroGnatuiA, G. O. Sars.
1, LeproGNATHIA AUSTRALIS, 0. sp.
A single female example of this species was dredged in shallow
water at Kerguelen, it measures 4 millim. The body is extremely
narrow and elongated. The cephalothorax is longer than the first
segment of the thorax, but not so long as the first two segments ;
the eyes are completely absent ; the first segment of the thorax is
shorter than any of the three following, which are subequal, and each
about half as long again as the first segment; the fifth segment is
shorter than the fourth, but a trifle longer than the first; the last
segment of the thorax equals the first in length; the first pair of
thoracic appendages are articulated close to the anterior margin of
their segment ; the second, third, and fourth pairs at about the
middle of their respective segments ; the last two pairs are articulated
a very little nearer to the posterior margin. The abdomen is
altogether as long as the last two segments of the thorax and one
half of the fourth. The antennules are not so long as the cephalo-
thorax, they are four-jointed. The chelipeds are stout and robust,
all the joints are smooth, the distal joints are not serrated as in
L. longiremis, the three anterior pairs of thoracic appendages are
more slender than the posterior pairs. The rami of the uropoda are
both biarticulate, but the endopodite is much longer and stouter than
the exopodite.
Kerguelen, Christmas Harbour, 120 fathoms.
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S. ‘CHALLENGER.’ 119
Genus Pararanats, Dana.
1. PARATANAIS BATHYBROTIS, 0. sp.
The single specimen measures 4 millim. The cephalothoracic
shield is about as long as the following two segments of the thorax ;
it is prolonged anteriorly into a wide obtusely pointed rostrum. Eyes
are present and well developed. The first segment of the thorax is
rather shorter than the rest, which are subequal. The length of the
abdomen is about one fourth of that of the entire body. The
antennules have a very characteristic form; they are composed of
four joints ; the basal joint is as long as the rest of the appendage,
and is extremely wide and flattened ; the following joint is short and
wide ; the third joint is no longer, but is narrower ; the terminal joint,
which represents the flagellum, is short and conical in form. The
antenne are shorter than the autennules, but, like them, consist of
four joints ; the first joint is wide and flattened, the second joint bas
the same shape, but is shorter, the third joint is narrow and cylin-
drical ; the distal joint is short and narrows towards its termination,
Station 246; 2050 fathoms.
2. PARATANAIS DIMORPHUS, 0. sp.
A very considerable number of individuals of a small species of
Paratanais were dredged in shallow water at Kerguelen, which are to
be distinguished by a very pronounced sexual dimorphism. The
female is like many other species of the genus; but the male is
remarkable on account of the more slender body and the great
difference in the structure of the chelipeds. Both males and females
measure, in most cases, 3 mm.in length. In the male the cephalo-
thorax is rather long and narrow, and equals in length the first three
segments of the body together with half of the fourth; the first free
segment of the thorax is the shortest; the second is twice the
length of the first; the third ‘segment is half as long again as the
second ; the fourth and fifth are subequal and about half as long
again as the third ; the last segment is about equal in length to the
third. The abdomen equals in length the last two thoracic segments.
The antennules consist of five joints; the antenne of six. In the
female the antennary organs are shorter, the antennules being three-
jointed and the antennze five. The chelipeds are long; both the
moveable and the fixed ‘ finger’ are of great length; the latter is,
however, not as in other Tanaids a mere prolongation of the penulti-
mate joint, but is freely moveable, being articulated with it. In the
female the chelipeds are quite normal in structure. The wropoda
are biramose, each ramus being two-jointed.
Kerguelen, Christmas Harbour, 120 fathoms.
Fam. ANCEIDS.
Genus Anceus (PraAn1za), Risso.
1. ANCEUS BATHYBIUS, D. sp.
Only a single fragment of this species was obtained from deep-
water ; the abdomen was entirely wanting. The specimen is a male
120 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON ISOPODA COLLECTED [Feb. 2,
and measures 10 millim. The head terminates anteriorly in a very
long obtusely pointed rostrum. Eyes are completely absent. The
first three segments of the thorax are, as usual, much shorter than
the two following. The surface of the body is smooth. The first
pair of thoracie appendages are operculiform and consist of five
joints, the second being much the most important; the two following
pairs of appendages differ from the two last in being very much more
slender, otherwise their structure is much the same.
Station 76; 900 fathoms.
2. ANCEUS GIGAS, N. sp.
This large species is represented by a number of individuals both
male and female; the largest specimens measure as much as 16
millim., the females being hardly smaller than the males. In the
male the anterior margin of the head is almost straight, being only
broken by three minute processes, one of which is median. The
thoracic segments are quite like those of other species; the lateral
regions of these segments are roughened, the dorsal smoother. The
abdominal segments are furnished with well-developed sickle-shaped
epimera, which instead of projecting outwards from the body are bent
down. ‘The first thoracic appendages agree with those of the last
species in having six joints; the remaining thoracic appendages are
all similar to each other.
Kerguelen, Christmas Harbour, 120 fathoms.
3. ANCEUS TUBERCULOSUS, N. sp.
A second species of Anceus was obtained at Kerguelen, which
cannot be confounded with the preceding; it is represented by a
considerable number of specimens, both males and females. The
largest male measures only 5 millim. in length. The head is pro-
longed in the middle line into a short rostrum, which is squarish in
outline and has a semicircular notch at its extremity. The dorsal
surface of the head is very convex, and is covered with numerous
tubercles, which are especially abundant posteriorly and laterally.
The three anterior segments (including the rudimentary first free
segment) are similarly beset with tubercles ; the remaining segments
are smooth. The segments of the abdomen gradually increase in
length, they are furnished with well-developed sickle-shaped epimera,
which project outwards. The ambulatory limbs are all similar to
each other; the five anterior abdominal appendages are flattened and
smooth, without any hairs.
Kerguelen, Christmas Harbour, 120 fathoms. Kerguelen, Royal
Sound, 30 fathoms.
4, ANCEUS LATIDENS, n. sp.
A single male specimen of this species measures 2°5mm. The
anterior margin of the head is prolonged into three short, blunt pro-
tuberances, of which the median one is the largest. The head and
1886.] DURING THE VOYAGE OF H.M.S. ‘ CHALLENGER.’ 121
the first four segments of the thorax are tuberculate, the two remain-
ing segments and the rudimentary terminal segment being smooth.
The abdominal appendages have epimera, which are directed down-
wards as in A. gigas. The operculiform first pair of thoracic
appendages are like those of the majority of species in consisting of
a single large basal joint, a small second joint, and a minute rudi-
mentary third joint. The remaining thoracic appendages are similar
to each other; the proximal joints are stout and bent, with short
stout spines. The abdominal appendages differ from those of the
last species in that both rami are setose, the outer perhaps more so
than the inner.
Flinder’s Passage, North Australia, 7 fathoms.
The forty-four species which have been briefly described in the
foregoing pages do not include all the novelties in the ‘ Challenger’
collection; there are a few other species which I have not yet
examined with sufficient care to report upon, but which, so far as I
am aware at present, are undescribed forms. These include one
species of Arcturus, one of the allied genus Astacilla; two species,
one from deep water, the other from Kerguelen, which are represen-
tatives of the genus Paranthura. The total number of new species
of Isopoda obtained during the voyage of the ‘Challenger’ is
therefore about 70, comprising 10 new genera.
Geographical and Bathymetrical Distribution.—It is interesting to
note that all the existing families of Isopoda without a single
exception * are to be found in the deeper waters of the ocean; but
the number of deep-sea species differs very considerably in the
different families ; the most characteristic are evidently the Mun-
nopsidze and Arcturidz, and, in a somewhat less degree, the Tanaids,
Asellids, and Serolidze ; the occurrence of a single species each of the
Anceide, Cymothoidee, Anthuride, and Spheeromide may perhaps be
taken as an indication that these families are not largely represented
in the deep-sea fauna.
In most cases the deep-sea species are distinct from the shallow-
water species ; only one or two (e. g. Arcturus furcatus, Studer) are
known, which are common to shallow water and the great depths.
In many eases the deep-sea genera are distinct, and this is particularly
so in the Asellids ; of this group, Acanthoniscus, Sars, Acanthomunna,
Trichopleon, Iolanthe, are absolutely confined to deep water, while
Ischnosoma has four deep-sea species and only one which is an
inhabitant of shallow water in the extreme north, where the con-
ditions of temperature are much the same. Very frequently the
deep-sea Isopoda are distinguished by the extremely spiny character
of the body; this is largely the case with the deep-sea Arcturi,
and there are other instances. The great development of spines upon
the body is not, however, confined to the deep-sea Isopoda, but
is also found in many species from the colder regions, at Kerguelen,
* Sars has described a species of Idotheide, Glyptonotus megalurus, which
enables me therefore to enunciate the general statement,
122 ON A VARIETY OF ANTHOCHARIS EUPHENO. [Feb. 2,
and in the Arctic Ocean; it appears therefore to be correlated in
some way which is not understood with a low temperature of the
water.
The majority of the deep-sea Isopoda are entirely blind, or have,
at most, rudimentary eyes devoid of pigment ; of the deep-sea species
obtained by the ‘ Challenger ’ only 25 p.c. have well-developed eyes,
and all these species but three belong to the Arcturidz, which form
avery striking exception to the general rule. In every instance
but one the genera which are confined to the deeper waters are blind ;
and it is just possible that the presence or absence of eyes may he
an indication of the time which the species has inhabited the deep
sea.
It is commonly believed that the deep-sea species are larger than
their shallow-water allies; the examination of the ‘ Challenger’
Isopoda lends some support to this view. Of the families Serolide,
Munnopside, Areturide, Asellidee, and Munnide the deep-sea
species are certainly the larger.
With regard to the range in depth, the greatest depth at which
any species has been met with is 2740 fathoms; the species
obtained at this great depth is Hurycope intermedia. Only a few
species descend below the 2000-fathom line, indeed only three to any
extent. The majority of the deep-sea forms were dredged in the
intermediate zone of 1000-2000 fathoms—twenty-three species out of
a total of forty-four, and this does not include five species which
were dredged just below the 1000-fathom limit, viz. in 1000-1070
fathoms. I hope to discuss more fully the distribution of the deep-sea
Isopoda in my forthcoming Report.
5. On a Variety of Anthocharis eupheno, from Mogador.
By J. H. Lescu, F.Z.S.
[Received January 18, 1886.]
During a recent excursion to Mogador I obtained examples of a
new form of orange-tip Butterfly, which I propose to call
ANTHOCHARIS EUPHENO, var. ANDROGYNE.
The male of this variety differs from the typical A. eupheno in its
larger size, and in the fainter markings of the underside of the hind
wings, which are rarely strong enough to be discerned from the upper
side.
The female is much larger than typical specimens of 4. eupheno,
agreeing with the male in markings and in the shape and greater
depth of the fore wings. The orange blotch, instead of being con-
fined to the tip of the fore wing in the usual manner, extends as far
asthe discoidal spot and is bounded (usually) on its inner margin by a
black band, which sometimes suffuses the whole tip of the wing.
The ground colour of the fore wing varies from pure white to pale
1886.) CAPT. R. G. W. RAMSAY ON A NEW COPSYCHUS. 123
lemon ; the hind wings are always yellower than in the typical form,
in some specimens being nearly as dark as in the males. The markings
of the underside of the hind wings are very indistinct, they are
usually of a greyish-green tint, but sometimes approach a rusty-red
colour which is found in the typical form, although both forms
occur in Algeria.
This distinct local form I took at Mogador in March 1885. It
was somewhat common at a little distance from the town; the
females, as is always the case in this genus, being much scarcer
than the males.
I have only been deterred from describing this variety as a new
species by the kindness of M. C. Oberthiir in forwarding me a
specimen of 4. eupheno from Central Algeria, which is intermediate
between the above-described variety and the type.
Similar cases of the two sexes (usually very different) approaching
the same form of colouring are not uncommon ; for example—Lycena
alexis, in many localities; Hepialis humuli, in Shetland ; Odones-
tris potatoria, in which it is not unusual to find males with the
paler colouring of the females, and females possessed of the darker
tint of the males.
6. On a new Species of Bird of the genus Copsychus.
By R. G. Warptaw Ramsay, F.Z.S., F.L.S.
[Received February 2, 1886.]
Among a few birds which I obtained some months ago out of a
collection made by Mr. Harry Pryer at Elopura, in N.E. Borneo,
are examples of a very interesting and hitherto undescribed species
of the genus Copsychus.
Mr. R. B. Sharpe, in his ‘Catalogue of the Birds in the
British Museum,’ has recognized three good species of Copsychus,
viz, :—
1, C. mindanensis.
2. (. seychellarum.
3. C. saularis.
Under the latter he treats as local races C. musicus and C. ameenus.
Iam inclined to doubt the propriety of uniting C. amenus to
C. saularis, and prefer to keep it distinct.
The new species, which I propose to name Copsychus niger, is of
about the same size as C. amenus, from which it differs in having a
much smaller amount of white on the wing-coverts and none on the
secondaries and in having the tail entirely black.
In its general appearance it more resembles C. seychellarum, which,
however, has its black plumage glossed with green instead of blue as
in C, niger and the other species of the genus. Length 9-2, wing
4°35, tarsus 1°25, tail 4°5, bill from gape 1°25 inches.
124 THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. [Feb. 16,
The five species may be easily distinguished as follows :—
1. C. seychellarum. \ )
(Seychelles.) |
} Belly black.
2. C. niger. |
(N.E. Borneo.) ) ¢ Tail entirely black.
3. C. mindanensis. Belly white.
(Philippine Islands.) )
/
4, C. amenus. Belly black.
(Jaya, Borneo.)
|
5. C. saularis. Belly white. : :
(Ceylon, India, Assam, ee tail-feathers white.
I
)
to Malay Peninsula, and
China, Andaman Islands,
Sumatra, Java, Borneo.)
February 16, 1886.
Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair.
The Secretary read the following report on the additions to the
Society’s Menagerie during the month of January 1886 :—
The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of January was 97. Of these 9 were by
birth, 64 by presentation, 12 by purchase, 8 by exchange, and 4 were
received on deposit. The total number of departures during the
same period, by death and removals, was 118.
‘The most noticeable additions during the month were :—
1. A Many-marked Snake (hagerrhis multimaculata), presented
by the Rev. G. H.R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S., and received January 1, 1886.
Amongst several collections of the Snakes of the Cape Colony lately
received from our excellent correspondent is a single small example,
about a foot long, of this species, as kindly determined for us by
Dr. Giinther. It is the Coronella multimaculata of Smith (Illust.
Zool. of South Africa, pl. 61), but properly referable to the genus
Rhagerrhis of Peters (Monatsb. k. Preuss. Ak. Wissen. Berlin, 1862,
. 274).
‘ 2: ight Tree-Snakes, born alive in the Society’s Reptile House,
on the 9th of January. The mother, a fine example of Dryophis
prasina, presented by Dr. F. H. Bauer, C.M.Z.S., of Buitenzorg,
Java, was received on the 15th of August last, so that she must
have been for upwards of five months without any possibility of
intercourse with a male of the same species. The young ones were
all born on the same day at irregular intervals between 11 a.m. and
4.30 p.m. They were removed to another case, where they quickly
Ca rt pie Ri tet Pee ee NN pias Fine Meth ia
‘Qpn'g -wbhoy "TINVNNAd VISLISAW 4oSTInNNS Ar AN Verona Pr
“UL PP testy BuO Y 2
‘dum sougq wue pry]
1886. | MR. O. THOMAS ON CRANIAL VARIATION. 125
took refuge amongst the leaves of a fresh plant. Although they have
not fed, they seem to be lively and doing well’.
Mr. Sclater exhibited a specimen of the new Paradise Bird,
Paradisornis rudolphi, lately discovered in the Owen Stanley
Mountains of New Guinea by Mr. Hunstein, and described and
figured by Drs. Finsch and Meyer in a recent number of the
‘Zeitschrift fiir die Gesammte Ornithologie’ (1885, p. 385), and
pointed out the characters in which it differs from typical Paradisea.
The Secretary exhibited on behalf of Mr. L. Taczanowski, C.M.Z.S.,
the skin of an Owl from the south-east of the Ussuri country, on the
frontiers of Corea, which appeared to be referable to Budo blakistoni,
Seebohm, P.Z.S. 1883, p. 466, and Ibis, 1884, p. 42 et p. 183,
1. vi.
: Two adult females of this Owl had been obtained by Mr. J.
Kalinowsky, during his recent stay in Kamtschatka, from the
environs of the river Sidemi in Russian Mantchuria, on the frontiers
of Corea, where they were collected in the latter part of May 1885.
They appeared to agree with Japanese specimens of B. blakistoni in
the National Collection, where Mr. Sharpe had kindly made the
comparisons.
Mr. Edward Gerrard, Juu., exhibited specimens of the heads and
skulls of two African Rhinoceroses (Rhinoceros bicornis and R. simus),
obtained by Mr. Selons in Mashuna-land, and mounted for the
South-African Museum, Capetown.
Prof. Ray Lankester exhibited and made remarks on a drawing
of a restoration of Archeopteryx.
The following papers were read :—
1. Notes on a striking instance of Cranial Variation due to
Age. By Oxprietp Tuomas, Natural History Museum,
[Received February 16, 1886. ]
(Plate XI.)
Dr. Gulliver, of St. Thomas’s Hospital, has recently submitted to
me for determination three skulls from Canada, collected by Mr.
Hayden. The skulls turn out to be referable to the fairly common
Canadian Marten or Pekan (Mustela pennanti, Erxl.), but they
show to such a remarkable extent the cranial changes that occur in
* See Miss Hopley’s account of this event in ‘Nature,’ vol. xxxiii, p. 295.
126 MR. 0. THOMAS ON CRANIAL VARIATION. __[Feb. 16,
later life among this group of animals, that I have thought it worth
while to have them figured, and to make a few notes on the causes
and extent of the changes presented by them. This is the more
called for owing to Mammalogists who have not access to large
series of specimens being as a rule far too ignorant of these changes
to judge by the numerous so-called “new species’? which are
constantly being described on variations of a corresponding nature.
These changes have been pointed out at various times, as for example
by Berthold’, Nathusius*, Hensel *, and others; and the object of
the present paper is therefore merely to give further publicity to a
fact which has a very considerable bearing on the value of the cranial
differences brought forward as characteristics of freshly-described
species.
The three skulls, which I will speak of as A, B, and C, consist
evidently of two males and one female, the latter being far smaller
and lighter than the other two. Of their specific identity there can
be absolutely no question, although I have found it difficult to make
most people to whom I have shown them believe in that fact.
B (Plate XT. fig. B) is a skull of the ordinary type, showing
no special peculiarities ; it is fully adult, as is proved by the basilar,
sphenoid, and other cranial sutures being closed, although some of
the facial ones are still visible, and by the teeth showing signs of
commencing wear. Compared to such a skull as this, the aged skull
A (fig. A) shows the changes that take place in later life to a most
remarkable extent, well worthy of some special notice.
All the changes are connected with an increase in the power of
biting, and the consequent development of the biting muscles, but
the connection of some of the changes with the biting muscles is not
so obvious at first sight as to be readily perceived by any one not
specially on the look-out for it.
To commence with, the canines of A are apparently very much
longer and more powerful than those of B, a difference not due to
individual variation, but to the fact that they are as a whole pushed
further outwards as time goes on and additional dentiné is deposited
round their bases ; the absolute length of the enamel-covered portion
from the cingulum to the tip being precisely the same in both.
The next difference is one too commonly recognized to need much
remark, viz. the development of the occipital crest; but it is here
carried to a relative extent greater than in any other skull I know
of, not even excepting the Hyzenas and Sea-lions. In B the crest
has scarcely commenced to grow at all, while in A it is no less than
20 millim. (nearly an inch) in vertical height above the brain-case.
The temporal muscles, passing from these enormous crests down
through the zygomata to the lower jaw, have then by their constant
pressure on the bone caused it to absorb in certain places, and have
thus induced three remarkable changes in the skull that might easily
be, and have in fact often been, taken as marks of specific distinction.
Firstly, they have pressed against and bowed outwards the zygomata,
1 Tsis, 1830, p. 570. 2 Arch, f. Nat. iv. p. 130 (1838).
3 “ Craniologische Studien,” N. Act. Ac. Nat. Cur. xlii. p. 127 (1881).
1886. ] MR. O. THOMAS ON CRANIAL VARIATION. 127
until the zygomatic spread in A is no less than 74 per cent. of the
length of the skull, as compared to 59 per cent. in B, the actual breadth
being nearly one third greater. Secondly, they have pressed upon
the inner walls of the temporal fossee, and have thereby reduced the
breadth of the skull at the interorbital constriction to such a degree
that in A its least width is only 16 millim. (36 per cent. of the basi-
cranial axis) as compared to 23°5 millim. (57 per cent.) in B. That
the width at this constriction grows absolutely, as well as relatively,
less in many mammals has been observed by several authors, but it
is, I think, by no means sufficiently realized. Thirdly, the great
biting ‘muscles have pressed upon and thereby constricted the
posterior narial passage, its outside breadth being only 10°5 millim.
in A as against 11°9 in Bt Inside the brain-case again, the con-
striction of its anterior part has reduced the cranial capacity from
40 c.cm., as it is in B, to 35 in A, the smaller capacity being
therefore found in the larger and older skull.
These various differences are shown in the drawing (Pl. XI.)
better than they can be explained by any amount of description.
Finally, I would again lay special stress on the fact that B is
absolutely adult, so far as any definition of adult age can be drawn
up, and has therefore no sign whatever of immaturity, such as
would put the species-maker on his guard, and yet that in a skull
so adult as this such changes may take place in advanced life as to
alter its whole appearance and proportions, and even its cranial
capacity.
To disprove the natural suggestion that the differences above
noted are due to sex, there comes fortunately the skull C, collected
at the same time and place, which in its age-characters is intermediate
between A and B, but is far smaller and more lightly built, and is
quite obviously the female form corresponding to the other two.
The following are the measurements of the three skulls for
comparison :—
A. d. 1 Ay alll aye
Peneth*... .. ... STS. RE SEAMPT H ip 107 93
Greatest breadth . ........ AP RB: 63 56
Beate, Tent oa. ws ae. 63 60 52
mee teadth 2.4. tes ace OO 34 ok
Interorbital constriction... ...... 16 23°5 19
RASICIAMIAL AXIS? «.... 0. os «0..< 45 4] 35
Capacity (in cubic centimetres)... 35 40 31
* Basion to front of premaxillx.
* Basion to anterior edge of basisphenoid.
128 MR. W. L. SCLATER ON A NEW [Feb. 16,
2. On a new Madreporarian Coral of the Genus Stephanotro-
chus from the British Seas, with Notes on its Anatomy.
By W. L. Scuater, B.A., F.Z.S., Assistant to the
Jodrell Professor of Zoology, University College, London.
[Received February 15, 1886.]
(Plates XII.—XIV.)
I. Introductory remarks, p. 128. | IV. Distribution of the genus Ste-
II. Description of the Corallum, phanotrochus, p. 182.
p- 128. V. Anatomy of S. moseleyanus,
TII, Comparison of S. moseleyanus . 182.
with other species of the VI. List of publications on the sub-
genus, p. 180. ject, p. 135.
I. Introductory.
Professor Moseley has kindly placed in my hands for examination
and description a specimen of a Madreporarian coral, which I have
now the pleasure of exhibiting to the Society. The coral is of much
interest, as being the finest and largest of the genus Stephanotrochus,
lately instituted by Professor Moseley (1)* (‘ Challenger’ Report on
Corals, p. 151), and also as being the first example of this form that
has been dredged in British seas.
The coral is a solitary form; it was procured on the expedition of
H.M.S. ‘Triton’ in the summer of 1882: “station 13; August
31st, 1882, lat. 59° 51’ 2" N., long. 8° 18’ W.; depth 570 fathoms ;
bottom, ooze ; bottom temperature, 45°7 F.(7°°7C.). Trawl.”
Station 13 is situated almost in a straight line and about halfway
between the Farée Isles and the northeru point of the Hebrides ;
it lies to the south-west of the Wyville-Thomson ridge, so that it is
well within the warm area described by Murray and Tizard (2).
The coral is interesting, since it is by far the largest solitary form
that has yet been discovered in British seas ; its nearest allies were
dredged off the Azores and Pernambuco during the ‘Challenger ’
Expedition. The coral was well preserved in absolute alcohol, so that
Ihave been able to make a fairly satisfactory investigation of its
anatomy by means of sections and other microscopical preparations.
It is to the kindness of Professor Moseley that I am indebted for this
coral ; and since the genus and the other four species belonging to it
were all described by him in his report on the ‘ Challenger’ Corals,
I propose to dedicate this new British species to him under the
name of SrEPHANOTROCHUS MOSELEYANUS.
II. Description of the Corallum.
The corallum is white where covered by the soft tissues; the base
is of a bluish-grey colour ; it is saucer-shaped, the base being very
nearly flat, but forming a very low cone; and from this base the
side-walls of the theca rise, making an angle of about 60°.
In the centre of the base is a very small pedicel of attachment ;
1 The numbers refer to the List of Publications at the end of the paper.
1886. | MADREPORARIAN CORAL. 129
there was no trace of any shell or other foreign body to be detected
as was the case with two other species of the same genus as described
by Prof. Moseley (1, page 154). From the pedicel radiate cost corre-
sponding to the primary, secondary, and tertiary septa. The cost
are formed by ridges along which are a series of blunt points.
Between the basal costze the corallum is granulated, the granules
running in lines and corresponding, not to the septa, but to the
interstices between them.
On the side-wall of the corallum, however, the ridges and points
become much sharper, and there arise costee corresponding to the
quaternary and quinary septa; these are smooth and do not bear
the points with which the primary, secondary, and tertiary coste
are provided.
The single specimen from which this species is described has
unfortunately been broken and has re-mended itself, so that it is
malformed, for there are only nine larger septa (7. e. primary and
secondary) ; no doubt had the specimen been an uninjured one it
would have possessed the typical Madreporarian number of twelve
(i. e. six primary and six secondary ).
The coral will therefore be described on this assumption. There
are five cycles of septa—six primary, six secondary, twelve tertiary,
and forty-eight quinary, in all ninety-six.
The secondary septa are distinguished from the primary by
bearing large stout pallial elevations, each septum bearing two, the
smaller one being the more central; the primary septa also bear
pali, but they are not so large or distinct as those of the secondary
septa. The tertiary septa are also slightly thickened at their inner
ends.
The ends of the primary, secondary, and tertiary septa are all
fused with avery thick up-rising of calcareous matter, the columella,
which bears five or six rounded projections resembling the true pali,
but much lower, showing how the columella has been formed by
the central ends of the septa and their pali. This knobby top of
the columella forms a floor to the central part of the enteron of the
polype, and it is much shallower than the surrounding chambers
between the septa, where the floor is formed by the true base of the
corallum.
The quaternary septa do not quite reach the columella, but they
are bent inwards so as to touch the tertiaries ; those lying to the
immediate left of the tertiary septum being shorter and joining the
tertiary septum at a point nearer the circumference than those on
the right, as is best seen in the figure (Plate XII. fig. 1).
The quinary septa are much shorter than the others, only reaching
halfway along the base of the theca and ending in two small
upgrowths which seem to represent two rudimentary pali; no
rudiments of pali could be seen on the quaternaries.
All the septa are extremely exsert, the primary and secondary
septa more especially so, so that in the specimen the tissues did not
cover their sharp edges; but this is probably due to the contraction
caused by the spirit.
It is only the outer halves of the primary and secondary septa
Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1886, No. IX.
130 MR. W. L. SCLATER ON A NEW (Feb. 16,
that are so prominent, the edge towards the columella dips down so
that the septum has a strongly concave upper margin, as is shown in
the figure (Plate XIII. fig. 5).
The quinaries resemble the primaries and secondaries in shape, but
are of course much smaller; those quinaries which are adjacent to
the primaries and secondaries being much larger and more promi-
nent than those adjacent to the tertiaries, and joined to the primaries
and secondaries by an upgrowth of the wall. The tertiaries and
quaternaries resemble one another, since they both have a straight
upper margin, not concave as is that of the primaries, secondaries,
and quinaries. All these details with regard to the arrangement of
the septa will be best understood by the examination of the drawing
(Plate XII. fig. 1), which gives a diagrammatic representation of the
septa, tentacles, and mesenteries.
All the septa are covered with granules arranged in lines showing
the lines of growth.
The measurements are as follows :—longer diameter 5 centims. ;
shorter diameter 44 centims. ; height of the corallum from the base
to the tip of the highest septum 2 centims.; height of the edge of
the cup | centim.
III. Comparison of Stephanotrochus moseleyanus with other Species
of the Genus.
In comparing S. moseleyanus with other species of the genus
Stephanotrochus, which are four in number, all described by Mose-
ley, from the deep sea, the first point that is noticed is the much
greater development of the pali, which in all the other species are
merely slight thickenings of the internal ends of the septa, but which
in S. moseleyanus form a crown of stout upgrowths, supporting the
internal edge of the oval disk.
Again, compared with all the other species of the genus, the
primary and secondary septa are very much stouter and more
exsert, the line between the palus and the other end of the septum
is very much more concave (see Plate XII. fig. 5). The septa form
five complete cycles, and are remarkable for their regularity ; this is
also the case in §. diadema, but not in the other species of the genus.
There is no plain distinction of size between the primary and second-
ary septa in S. moseleyanus as there is in S. platypus, diadema, and
discoides ; but the primary and secondary septa are equal in size, and
can only be distinguished by their position with regard to the long
axis of the coral, as in S. nobilis.
On the other hand, S. moseleyanus agrees best in general shape with
S. diadema and platypus, and differs from S. nobilis, in which the
corallum is deep and cup-shaped, whereas that of S. mosleyanus is
flat and saucer-shaped.
The differences between the five species are shown by the accom-
panying diagrams (p. 131), which illustrate the arrangement of the
septa in each species of the genus ; it will be seen that S. moseleyanus
agrees best with S. platypus in this matter, from which it differs
only in having the internal ends of the quaternaries turned in on to
the tertiaries, “while in S. platypus all the septa are quite straight.
1886. ] MADREPORARIAN CORAL. 131
Fig. 4 Fig. 5.
Diagrams of the arrangement of the septa in the five different species of
Stephanotrochus. The septa are numbered.
1. S. nobilis. 2. S. platypus. 3. S.diadema. 4, S. discoides. 5. S.moseleyanu
132 MR. W. L. SCLATER ON A NEW [ Feb. 16,
The genus Stephanotrochus belongs to the section of the Madre-
poraria known as the Madreporaria aporosa, to the family Turbi-
nolidze of Milne-Edwards and Haime, and to thesection Discocyathoida
of Martin Duncan (3), which is characterized as follows :—“ Simple -
Turbinolidze, discoid in shape, not increasing much in height with
growth. Free or not. With or without pali in one crown. Colu-
mella variable; epitheca also.” Stephanotrochus moseleyanus agrees
in every way with the above definition except in the point about the
pali, since in S. moseleyanus there are distinctly two crowns of pali.
IV. Distribution of the Genus Stephanotrochus.
All the species of Stephanotrochus hitherto described are deep-sea
forms, the depths from which they come varying from 410 to 1009
fathoms ; S. moseleyanus comes from a depth of 570 fathoms.
The geographical distribution, considering the fewness of the
specimens dredged, is extraordinary ; seven specimens have been
obtained belonging to five different species, procured from such
distantly separated places as Pernambuco, the Azores, Sydney,
N.S.W., and the Faroe Channel.
As was mentioned above, S. moseleyanus was dredged in the warm -
area of the Faroe Channel, where the bottom temperature is very
high, 46°5 F.
V. Anatomy of Stephanotrochus moseleyanus.
The soft tissues of the polype extend from the edge of the cup
some distance down the outside wall of the corallum, gradually
thinning out; the line of the extension of the soft parts is marked in
the dry corallum by the change of colour from a glistening white to
a greyish blue, the colour of the basal parts uncovered by soft
tissues.
As far as I was able to observe, the enteric cavity does extend
round the edge of the theca to the outer side, so that the tops of
the smaller septa would probably stand up free in the enteron; the
primary and secondary septa are so extremely exsert that the tissues
are abnormally stretched to cover them, and so have by the action
of the alcohol been split.
This would rather seem to confirm Koch’s theory (5) that the
theca is formed from the fused peripheral ends of the septa.
The oral disk, the tentacles, except at their tips, and the outer soft
wall of the coral are all of a dark madder-colour ; this colour is due
to a substance called by Prof. Moseley (6) Polyperythrin ; it is distin-
guished by peculiar properties: it is insoluble in water, glycerine, al-
cohol, ether, ammonia, potash, or picric acid, but is soluble in strong
hydrochloric acid ; it is also distinguished by a peculiar absorption
spectrum, a broad black line including the line D. Prof. Moseley
found it in Stephanotrochus diadema, in Flabellum, Fungia, and Ste-
planophyllia, and many other Ccelenterata.
The soft wall of the coral is divided up by a series of longi-
tudinal furrows, which correspond to the insertions of the mesenteries ;
the ridges between the furrows are further crossed by a number of
transverse ridges, so that the whole wall assumes a very wrinkled
1886. | MADREPORARIAN CORAL. 133
appearance, doubtless exaggerated by the action of the alcohol in
which the coral is preserved.
The tentacles are in four cycles ; the innermost cycle are of the
largest size, and correspond in position to the primary aud secondary
septa, and are therefore tweive in number. The second cycle
correspond to the tertiary septa, and are also twelve in number.
The third cycle correspond to the quaternaries, and are twenty-four
innumber. These differences between the three cycles are very slight,
consisting only of small differences in size. The fourth cycle, placed
considerably nearer the circumference of the coral, are very much
shorter and more stumpy than the other three cycles; they correspond
to the quinary septa, and, as will be seen below, are evaginations of
intermesenterial spaces [exoccelic, Fowler, (4)], not of the inéra-
mesenterial chambers [entoccelic, Fowler (4) | as are the others ; they
are forty-eight in number ; so that there are altogether ninety-six
tentacles.
' The mesenterial chambers are forty-eight in number; there are
two cycles of mesenteries, larger and smaller, forming larger and
smaller chambers ; the larger chambers contain septa of the first,
second, and third order; the smaller chambers septa of the fourth
order. From these chambers the tentacles of the first three cycles are
evaginated ; the fifth cycle of septa, on the other hand, are placed in
the spaces between the mesenterial chambers, 7. e. exosepta, Fowler ;
and the fourth cycle of tentacles are in the same way evaginated from
these exoccelic spaces. The whole arrangement will best be under-
stood by reference to the diagram (Plate XII.).
In all the chambers, with the exception of those in which are
placed the primary septa situated at the long ends of oval mouth-
opening, the longitudinal muscles are placed, facing one another ;
but in the chambers above mentioned, the muscles are placed on the
outer faces of the mesenteries; these therefore are the directive
mesenteries. So that in the arrangement of the muscles on the
mesenteries, Stephanotrochus exactly corresponds to the Hexactinian
type, as do all other Madreporarian corals that have been hitherto
examined.
The tentacles are all of one shape, they are simple conical evagina-
tions of the ccelenteron ; they end in a knob separated from the rest
of the tentacle by a narrow neck; the knob contains no pigment, and
is of a white colour; the main part of the tentacle is madder-coloured
like the rest of the polype.
A section of the knob and part of the conical part of the tentacle is
figured (Plate XIII. fig. 6); the knob is packed full of nematocysts,
and in fact isa single immense battery of thread-cells. The ectoderm
consists of a series of very long and very narrow cells, which are
nucleated ; there are also gland-cells present, but the elements are
difficult to distinguish ; the endoderm cells of the knob are much
longer than those lining the other parts of the ccelomic cavity of the
tentacle. I was unable to distinguish any muscular elements in the
knob; it is perhaps in consequence of this that the outline of the
knob appears straight, since it apparently has not been contracted
by the action of the spirit, as has been the rest of the tentacle.
134 MR. W. L. SCLATER ON A NEW [Feb. 16,
The ectoderm of the tentacle (Plate XIII. fig. 6) also contains a
series of nematocyst batteries; the cells, however, differ from those
of the knob in the following points: they are very much smaller,
they are pigmented, from them are developed the longitudinal muscle-
fibres ; in the endoderm of the main part of the tentacle the elements
are not nearly so high as are those of the knob, and at their bases
are found the circular muscle-fibres.
The tentacle therefore differs little in structure from the actinian
type as deseribed by Hertwig (7).
The muscles are very weli developed on both sides of the mesen-
teries ; the arrangement is shown in figures 8 and 9 of Plate XIV.,
where figure 8 represents the arrangement on the ectoccelic face,
figure 9 the arrangement on the entoccelic face. The edge of the
mesentery is occupied by a thick packed mass of mesenteric filaments
above, and by the ova, also packed thick, below ; ova and mesenteric
filaments seem to be well developed in all the mesenteries, except on
the directives, where I have been unable to detect any sign of ova,
but I have only been able to examine two directives, one of which
was malformed, so that I am unable to make sure of this point.
Plate XIII. fig. 7 represents a small portion of a section of a
mesentery highly magnified, showing the folding of the surface on
one side in order to increase the surface for the muscle-slips, but in
no case have I detected the inclusion of masses of muscles in the
mesoderm, as has been figured by Hertwig (7) m Aetinolobia and
Tealia, and other Actiniz.
The only example of this Coral I have been able to examine con-
tained ova; no spermatozoa could be detected, so that the Coral may
be considered dicecious.
The development of the ova differs slightly from that described in
the Actinians by Hertwig ; in Stephanotrochus the mesodermal lamella
in which the ova lie is reduced to a thin string (Plate XIV. fig. 10),
and the entodermal cells on either side have become very long and thin,
resembling, perhaps, the ‘‘ Cambium Zellen” described by Weissman
in certain Hydroids which nourish the ova at their own expense. In.
the figure there will be seen several ovarian cells which have not yet
entered the mesodermal lamella, but which are still lying in the
endoderm ; and in one case there is an ovarian cell figured lying half
in the endoderm and half in the mesodermal lamella; the ripe ovum
is full of deutoplasm, and the germinal vesicle and germinal spot are
very clearly seen.
Besides the ovarian string, the mesenteric filaments can be seen in
section ( Plate XIV. fig. 10), consisting of a mesodermal string and
high endodermal cells, with many pigment-cells scattered among
them ; they are cut in section in different planes.
Beyond the ova the mesoderm again thickens slightly up to the
end of the mesentery, where it splits to line the hard septal walls,
since this section is from part of the mesentery low down where the
mesentery is inserted between the columella and the two adjacent
septa, all of which are lined by the mesodermal lamella with a layer
of calycoblastic cells interposed.
Calycoblastic cells were first detected by Heider (8), who showed
1886. ] MADREPURARIAN CORAL. 135
that all the hard parts of the coral are laid down by these cells,
which can be always found between the mesodermal lamella and
the hard parts. Koch (9) showed that the calycoblasts were really
the remains of the basal ectoderm-cells of the embryo, so that the
whole of the corallum is laid down by ectoderm, and is really, mor-
phologically, outside the coral. This of course corrects the old view
which regarded the basal ectoderm of a coral as having disappeared
from the outside of the corallum, since what remains of the basal
ectoderm is really within the corallum, and is the very means of
forming the corallum. Koch (9, plate xx. fig. 9) gives a repre-
sentation of three calycoblastic cells, which seem to be merely ordinary
high epithelial cells, nucleated and filled with granules.
I have found everywhere between the corallum and the mesoderm
lamella a tissue or series of cells, represented in Plate XIV. figs. 10-13,
cal. ; these I believe to be the calycoblasts described by Heider and
Koch. That these cells must be calycoblasts is, I think, evident
from their position, since they are everywhere found between the
corallum and the mesoderm lamella. But in form they are very
different from the calycoblasts figured by Koch, for, whereas Koch’s
calycoblasts are, as was said above, ordinary granulated epidermic
cells, the cells which I have found in Stephanotrochus are not
quadrangular but of irregular shape, and separated from one another
by intervals, so that they seldom form a definite layer; also they are
striated in a most extraordinary way, as is shown in figure 12.
Whether these cells are the calycoblasts of Koch I cannot with
certainty say; it may be that the difference of appearance is due to
the fact that Koch’s figure represents these cells in a very young state,
when they are doubtless more active than in the adult coral; or,
again, the calycoblasts of Koch’s form <Asteroides may differ essen-
tially from those of Stephanotrochus. The fact is, however, that
until more is known of the anatomy of other corals, it is impossible
to decide on the nature of these cells.
In conclusion I must thank Prof. Moseley for kindly allowing me
to examine this coral, also for his advice and assistance; so, too, I
must record my obligations to Prof. Ray Lankester, and my friend
Mr. Fowler, for much help.
I append a list of the principal publications referred to; I have
abstained from quoting the views and discoveries of the last few
years with regard to Madreporarian corals, since a very complete
history of recent researches on the subject will be found in Mr.
Fowler’s paper (4).
VI. List of Publications on the subject.
1. Moserey, H.N. Report on certain Hydroid, Alcyonarian, and
Madreporarian Corals, procured during the voyage of H.M.S.
‘Challenger. —Report of the Voyage of H.M.S. ‘Challenger,’
Zoology, vol.ii. 1881. (Description of Stephanotrochus, p. 151.)
2. Tizarp and Murray. Exploration of the Farée Channel during
the summer of 1880 in H.M’s hired ship ‘ Knight Errant.’—
Proc. Royal Soc. Edinburgh, no. 111. p. 638.
3. Martin Duncan, P. A Revision of the Families and Genera of
136 ON A NEW MADREPORARIAN CORAL. [Feb. 16,
the Sclerodermic Zoantharia, Ed. and H., or Madreporaria.—
Journ. Linn. Soe., Zool. vol. xviii. p. 1.
4. Fowier, G. H. The Anatomy of the Madreporaria, I.—Quart.
Journ. Microse. Science, vol. xxv. p. 577.
5. Kocu, G.v. Bemerkungen iiber das Skelet der Korallen.—Mor-
phol. Jahrbuch, vol. v. p. 316.
6. Mosrtry, H.N. On the Colouring Matters of various Animals.
—Quart. Journ. Microse. Science, vol. xvii. p. 1, 1877.
7. Hertwic, O. und R. Die Actinien. Jena, 1879.
8. Heiner, A. v. Die Gattung Cladocora, Ehrenb.—S. B. Acad.
Wien, vol. Ixxxiv. p. 634.
9. Kocu, G.v. Ueber die Entwicklung des Kalkskeletes von Aste-
roides calycularis und dessen morphologischen Bedeutung.—
Mitt. Zool. St. Neapel, vol. ii. p. 284.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Puate XII.
Fig. 1. Diagram of Stephanotrochus to show the arrangement of tentacles,
mesenteries, and septa; on the left-hand side are shown the tentacles,
arranged in four cycles, @, 4, c, and d; on the right side above are
seen the mesenteries, shaded, in pairs of two sizes /' and /", with
longitudinal muscles facing one another; at D is seen the directive
mesentery, with its longitudinal muscle facing outwards; the septa in
five cycles are numbered from 1 to 5; p' and p" denote the pali, C the
columella.
Priate XIII,
Fig. 2. Oral view of Stephanotrochus moseleyanus, with the soft parts removed
from all except the left upper corner of the coral (nat. size).
. Aboral view, the tissues being left in the right upper corner.
. Side view of the coral.
. View of a secondary and quinary septum, seen from the side: p’, palus
of secondary ; p'’, palus of quinary septum; 4, costz, with blunt points.
. Section of the end of the knob of a tentacle: He, ectoderm; J/, meso-
derm; En, entoderm; Th.c, thread-cells; Lm, longitudinal muscle-
fibres; Om, circular muscle-fibres.
. Part of a longitudinal section of a mesentery, showing—En", entoccelic
endoderm; Hn', ectoccelic endoderm; mm’, longitudinal muscle-fibres
of the entoccelie face; m', oblique muscles of the ectoccelic face ;
MM, mesoderm lamella.
D> OPC
bas |
Puate XIV.
Fig. 8. Ectoccelic face of a larger mesentery, showing arrangement of muscle-
fibre lines: m/f. mesenterial filaments; 0, ova.
9, Entoccelie face of the same mesentery, showing the longitudinal muscle-
fibre lines.
10, Longitudinal section of the ventral end of a mesentery: cal, calyco-
blasts which lay down the columella; M, mesoderm; ov, ova in all
stages of development; Ln, endoderm; .f, mesenterial filaments with
pigment-cells, p.
11. Central end of a mesentery, with calycoblasts scattered all along the
corallum-facing side of the mesoderm; the mesodermal Jamella of the
mesentery splits to line the columella on each side, and then twmns
back to line the septum.
12. Shows two isolated calycoblastie cells.
13. Drawn from a flat preparation of ealycoblastie cells.
a
‘|
: roe is
WL del P Smit th.
Mintern Bros. xmp
STEPHANOTROCHUS MOSELEYANUS
\
\\
!
\
i
\
N
\
USE (|
Mintern Bros.imp.
STEPHANOTROCHUS MOSELEYANUS
ce a. . :x | = = ~* ¢« e € — 1 =
» “> q
. i a « 5
/
. 7—
3 > = = . ‘
al a A
7 > oe
- ‘et
a = a
- 9 a a
. —.' “fe «-*
- * S
— - ™— ”
=r ‘
+ a >
<— . ae .
- '
— 7
-
’
4 ra
= j
’ ~ ad
~
’ —" :
.
. ‘ . 3
: -
~ Km i
= =
“ 2 :
‘ e *
a » a4 “ ~ - *
~~ 4 = Pooky =
<, « - a2
tS . * 3 *
« :
s ~~ * -
. F -
» ae
rf ., y
Pind ~, o «
| 4
Py ee ‘
- = * x - “4 ‘ ‘
PF * ¢ = na
4 a ’
. . * La >»
; . “A eT a a oo * d
~ < Se, ie oS
; a > fA ad
« * 7
» 3 .* *
a ‘ »
oN -
i a ewe
> ’ 2 «
Py 2
P.Z.S. 1866. P1. xiv.
cal ;
@ e@gaee”
Ya
in
a
a
tthe
QZ
=>
IIS
MANEATIS 24
pal iy
Oh
Ym.
Mintern Bros. imp.
STEPHANOTROCHUS MOSELEYANUS.
1886.] MR. COCKERELL ON PARMACELLA VALENCIENNESI. 137
March 2, 1886.
Dr. St. George Mivart, F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair.
The Secretary read the following report on the additions made to
the Society’s Menagerie during the month of February 1886 :—
The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of February was 79, of which 3 were by
birth, 40 by presentation, 14 by purchase, 1 by exchange, and 21
* were received on deposit. The total number of departures during
the same period, by death and removals, was 99.
Amongst the additions during the month attention may be called
to :—
1. Five examples of a large Batrachian of the Argentine Republic,
there called ‘‘ Escuerzo”’ (Ceratophrys ornata), presented by Dr.
Frederick C. Strutt, and received February 13th.
2. A Mantled Buzzard (Leucopternis palliata) from Brazil, pur-
chased February 15th, being the first example of this fine bird of prey
received by the Society.
Mr. John G. Millais, F.Z.S., exhibited an adult male specimen of
the Ivory Gull (Larus eburneus), which he had shot himself at Thurso,
Caithness, on December 30, 1885, during a severe snowstorm from
the north. The base of the bill to the end of the nostril in living
specimen was light blue, and the point of the same orange-yellow ;
feet black, and eye surrounded by a ring of orange; the rest of the
plumage being entirely white.
Mr. Millais also exhibited an immature specimen of the same
species killed at East Haven, Forfar, in January 1879.
Mr. T. D. Cockerell exhibited a living specimen of a variety of
Parmacella valenciennesi, Webb and Van Beneden, collected by J. H.
Ponsonby, Ksq., at Tangier, and made the following remarks :—The
specimen differs from the typical P. valenciennesi in that it is marked
with black, the original figure of the species being quite uniform.
It may possibly prove to be distinct, but until further details are
ascertained it is best classed merely as a variety of P. valenciennest.
A precisely similar form is found at Gibraltar, of which there are
details in {he ‘Journal of Couchology ’ for January 1886.
The following papers were read :—
Proc, Zoox, Soc.—1886, No. x. 10
Zau\SH, Migs
CLAN ae D)
138 PROF. R. COLLETT ON A . [Mar. 2,
1. On a new Pediculate Fish from the Sea off Madeira.
By Rosert Cotzerr, C.M.ZS.
[Received February 12, 1886.]
(Plate XV.)
Fam. CERATIID.
LINOPHRYNE, 0. gen.
Head enormous ; the body slender, compressed, mouth oblique.
Spinous dorsal reduced to a single cephalic tentacle, the basal part
of which is erect, not procumbent. Teeth in the jaws, on the vomer,
and the upper pharyngeals. Gill-openings exceedingly narrow,
situated a little below the root of the pectorals. Soft dorsal and
anal very short; ventrals none. Abdominal cavity forming a sac,
suspended from ‘the trunk. Skin smooth; a long tentacle on the
throat.
LINOPHRYNE LUCIFER, Sp. noy. (Plate XV.)
The head tetrahedral, with a supraorbital spine ; its length is to
the total length as 1 to 2:7. Eyes small, situated high up on the
side of the head. Teeth of the jaws uniserial, very long; 7 to 9 on
each side in each jaw; one or two in front longer than the others ;
all are movable inwards and covered with skin. Gill-openings
narrower than the diameter of the eye. Length of the intermaxillary
bone is contained three times in the total length. Cephalic tentacle
thick, with a large bulb; the guttural tentacle long, with the end
cleft and provided with small papille. Colour uniformly black, the
top of the cephalic tentacle and the papille of the guttural tentacle
white (phosphorescent ?). Total length of the single specimen
49 millim.
iD: lL; 2-D.3;-A. 2; P.14-15; C. 9:
Habitat. One ‘specimen, total length 49 millim., from the sea off
Madeira (36° N. lat., 20° W. long.), May 1877; preserved in the
Zoological Museum at Christiania.
Measurements.
millim
Total length to the end of the caudal fin .............. 49
Length to the root of the caudal fin ...... 35
Length of the head to the hind margin of the operculum. . 18
35 to the end of its spine ba hE ra 22
Length from the snout to the hinder margin of the eye. . 9
Length to the edge of the distended abdominal sac ...... 39
Length of intermaxillary ee CR A wih. ka os eis. eae 16
Length offlawerqawig — opis cs ee sou ins vas vo ae ee
Breadth of thetswergaw..)i05 02... juntas <5 22 eka 4°5
The greatest depth of the head ...-.. 0.00.5 c0-- 6s-s 0s 19
The depth of the head from the base of the orbital spine . 10
1886.] NEW PEDICULATE FISH. 139
millim
Breadth of the head across the jaws .................. 16
a fe across the base of the orbital spine .. 10
Length of the body to the commencement of the second
UTC Seer Nr es ee Oneal one einen aes 26
abe dine of. the second dorsal + ...).0) <<. )sie's a, see die, vive « O
Depth of the root of the tail), 2.0% 0< 4 osu0s nis bee he Oe
PUREED OES ORE fio fac ciehic, ‘as finds ands re detente sda ve 2°5
Length of the cephalic tentacle (first dorsal)........ ... 9
Length of the guttural tentacle ...............-.. 0005 23
Renetn othe! Sandal fie.) 251. poghi winters alhiares al4O
Length of the pectorals (with the pseudobrachium) .. .... 5
Length from the snout to the pectorals (to the root of pseudo-
DCRG eh dete etey Fs tndrstais 4 b.<45. oxiumssubi tev heaanen dG
The structure of the body in its natural state can hardly be
correctly described from this specimen, in which the whole of the
belly exhibits an abnormal distension in consequence of the fish
having swallowed a Scopeloid fish, the total length of which is one
half longer than itself.
The head is very large, with an enormous mouth and long teeth.
The body itself is short and slender, compressed, and with the heavy
dependent abdominal cavity, of which the hindermost part extends
far beyond the end of the vertebral column.
The greatest depth of the body is at the back of the head, and is
precisely the same as the length of the head. The body itself is
apparently much lower, and the root of the tail narrow and low.
A thick cephalic spine is to be found on the snout; and under
the throat a long tentacle divided at the end, which undoubtedly is
phosphorescent, as well as the end of the cephalic spine.
The gill-openings are so narrow that they can only be distinguished
with difficulty ; their openings are not much larger than the head
of a pin.
Lhe head.—Its appearance when viewed from the front is nearly
tetrahedral, somewhat compressed, and broadest downwards. Its
greatest width is across the angle of the mouth, and is about equal
to the length of the intermaxillary bones. The upper profile of
the head exhibits a somewhat projecting and slightly outwardly
inclined spine above each eye. The breadth of the head across the
base of these spines (which form the upper corners of the square
when the head is seen from the front) is one third less than the breadth
across the angles of the mouth (or the lower corners of the square).
The forehead in front of the orbital spines is concave, with a deep
furrow leading to the end of the snout, bounded on each side by a
ridge, on which also the orbital spines are projecting ; the concavity
is somewhat broader downwards than it is above.
There are altogether three spines on each side of the head. One
orbital spine is directed upwards and slightly forwards. One spine
at the back of the operculum is directed backwards ; also a small
spine at the back of the lower jaw sloping inwards and downwards ;
10*
140 PROF. R. COLLETT ON A [Mar. 2,
the last is, however, in the uninjured specimen scarcely perceptible
beyond the common skin which covers the head.
The length of the head from the end of the lower jaw to the base
of the spine on the operculum is to the total length as 1 to 2°7, this
measured to the end of the caudal fin, but only 1:9 in the length
to the root of the caudal. Thus the head is about the same as the
rest of the body without the caudal fin.
The highest part of the skull is indicated by a protuberance at
the back of the head, probably formed by the point in which the
os mastoideum (occipit. posterius) adjoins to the shoulder-girdle.
The mouth is enormously large, with the cleft oblique; the lower
jaw is slightly longer than the intermaxillary, and has backwards a
considerable width (or about 7 of its length).
The length of the jaws is to the total length (to the end of caudal
fin) as 1 to 2°8-3°0. At the back of the lower jaw there is a spine
slanting inwards and downwards, the length of which scarcely equals
the orbital spines.
The eyes are well developed, although small on the whole; the
lens is particularly small (about 1 millim.). The diameter of the
eye is about 2°5 millim. ; it is placed somewhat far forward, or a little
more than two orbital diameters from the margin of the upper jaw.
The gill-covers are but incompletely ossified, but their construction
cannot be properly examined in this single specimen. The operculum
is present as a long styliform bone, which towards its lowest end sends
out a backward-directed spine the length of which is 3 millim.
(which, however, is completely enveloped in the common skin of the
head).
tthe preoperculum appears to be unossified.
The gill-openings are extremely small, and are situated at a
distance of about half an eye’s diameter below the pectoral fins; they
form a crescent-formed slit, the height of which is only 2:2 millim.
The gills are 24 pairs, as the second and third branchial arches
have a double series, the fourth a uniserial gill. Pseudobranchie
are wanting.
The branchial arches are smooth on their inner surface, without
a trace of protuberance or teeth.
The branchiostegals appear to be but five in number; and I cannot,
in this little and frail specimen, discover a sixth, which may possibly
exist.
The feeth are placed in a single row in each half jaw, with a
distinct space between each tooth, and consist of long and slender
teeth, some of which are very long, while the rest are somewhat
shorter. They are finely streaked throughout their length, pointed
like awls, and movable inwards, so that the long front teeth lie
backwards, the side teeth inwards.
All of them are covered with a jet-black skin, the extension of
which cannot with certainty be determined in this specimen ; a few
of the shorter teeth are still completely covered with it; but the
points of long teeth have probably always been bare.
The number of teeth in each half of the jaw is 7-9, to which
1886. ] NEW PEDICULATE FISH. 141
should be added one or more accessory teeth, which are quite short,
and are situated immediately at the base of the longest teeth ; pro-
bably these accessory teeth are meant to supplant the others
when these are shed or lost, which may often happen when devouring
the huge prey.
In the intermaxillary, the longest teeth in front have a length of
6 millim., and are quite straight (on the left side it is not fully
developed) ; the other teeth are shorter, not more than 3 millim.
long. The total number of teeth in each intermaxillary is 8 or 9,
to which must be added 2-3 accessory teeth situated at the base of
the longest.
In the lower jaw the two foremost teeth (and the 4th) are parti-
cularly long, the others somewhat shorter. In each half jaw there
are seven teeth, to which must be added the two accessory teeth
situated at the base of the longest. The innermost tooth in the jaw
is quite small.
Of the two long front teeth, the first is somewhat shorter than the
second, considerably curved ; its length is 4°5 millim. The second
is the longest of all the teeth ; itis 8 millim. in length, and is also a
little curved. It is placed a little inside of the row of other teeth,
and has a short tooth at its base. The fourth has a length of 5
millim., and it also has an accessory tooth; the others are shorter.
The upper pharyngeal bones have each a group of about six teeth
forming two long irregular rows. The lower pharyngeals do not
appear to have teeth.
The vomer has a single tooth, which, like the pharyngeal teeth,
is about the length of the shorter teeth in the jaws, and is slightly
curved.
Cephalic spine.—The first dorsal appears as a single tentacle on
the forehead (the cephalic spine). Its basal element is not sub-
cutaneous and procumbent, but erect and continuous with its distal
part. When laid back its bulb reaches to the hind margin of the eyes,
or just between the two orbital spines, in which position it fills up
the concavity on the forehead. It is situated at the front margin of
the snout. Its length is 10 millim., of which half comprises the
peduncle, which is rather thick, especially towards its base, the other
half the head, which forms an oblong bulb, the breadth of which is
3 millim., or about the same as the diameter of the eye.
The bulb ends in a pair of exceedingly short and slender threads,
which, in a good light, can be seen to have small papilla-shaped
bodies on one side, of the same kind as the papille on the guttural
tentacle, but much smaller (probably answering to the “scales”
which, according to Liitken, cover the threads of the tentacles of the
Himantolophoids). The colour of this cephalic spine is jet-black as
far as the middle of the bulb; its other half is white (perhaps silvery
in the living specimen), as in most or all the other species of the
Ceratiidee.
The jfins.—The second dorsal is situated far behind, close into the
caudal fin, although separated from it by a distinct space. It has
three single rays, which at their base are enveloped with a thick
142 PROF. COLLETT ON A NEW PEDICULATE FisH. [Mar. 2,
skin, a continuation of that of the body. It is directed backwards,
and the point of the fin extends a little beyond the root of the caudal
fin (about an eye’s length).
The anal fin is much like the second dorsal, and is placed right
beneath it ; it has two rays, which also are single.
The caudal fin consists of nine rays, four in the upper, five in the
lower half. Of these the outermost are somewhat shorter than the
middle ones; thus the fin is somewhat pointed. The four middle
rays are bifid from below the centre; the others are simple.
The ventral fins are wanting.
The pectorals are small and rounded; the pseudobrachia very
short. On the right side there are 14, on the left side 15 rays,
most of which are simple, and only the middle ones seem to be
bifid at the ends. The length of the pectoral (including the
pseudobrachium) is only 5 millim., or the length of the bulb of the
cephalic spine.
The guttural tentacle is nearly 34 times as long as the tentacle on
the snout (23 millim.), or has about the same length as the distance
from the front of the eye to the root of the tail. It is placed on the
throat, at a distance from the symphysis about equal to half the
length of the jaw.
It is thinner than the cephalic spine, and divides itself at the end
into two short pointed blades, the length of each being 6 millim.
Whilst the tentacle otherwise is black, the inner edges of these
blades are white, like the upper half of the snout tentacle, and
are furnished with a row of round papille, about 30 on each,
resembling a chain of pearls. These small bodies undoubtedly have
a use, either as organs of sense or as the source of the phosphorescent
light *.
The abdominal cavity is greatly distended, somewhat flattened un-
derneath, which is in consequence of the position the swallowed fish
has taken up. This fish, which undoubtedly is a Scopeloid, has a
length of about 70 millim., and is therefore not far from being half
a length longer than the specimen itself. It lies with the head and
the caudal fin bent backwards and the belly turned down.
Anus. Its position cannot be given with certainty.
The skin is smooth throughout, and covers all the spines on the
head as well as the teeth. Lateral line or mucous glands cannot be
detected.
The colour everywhere is jet-black, with the exception of the
upper half of the bulb of the tentacle on the snout, and the inner
margins of the ends of the guttural tentacle, which (in the preserved
specimen) are white, but which in the living fish have probably been
silvery and phosphorescent.
The fin-rays are also black, the membrane blackish. The mouth
is also black, as well as the covering of the teeth.
* A similar phosphorescent guttural tentacle is mentioned in Hustomias
obscurus, captured from enormous depths during the voyage of the ‘ Talisman ’
(‘La noun 1884, p. 184; Day, ‘Fishes of Great Britain and Iveland,’
p- xxvii).
ps
“HMHATIONT ANAYHAONIT
dunt - s0ag ase TUT
W377 Pp yuug Pp
a |
M Id 988l°'S'°Z/d
1886. | ON THE CHARACTERS OF RHINOCEROS SIMUS. 143
Affinities.—Linophryne lucifer belongs to the family: Ceratiida,
and resembles Melanocetus johnsonii, Giinth. (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1864,
p- 301) in several particulars, viz. that only one single spine in the
first dorsal is developed (the nasal tentacle), in the enormous mouth,
the almost square head, as well as in its small size, its black and
smooth skin, and pendent abdominal cavity, besides in its having
2 pairs of gills and unarmed branchial arches; but it differs from this
species by the formation of its teeth, the oblique mouth, its
rudimentary gill-openings, its short and thick nasal tentacle, in
the number of its fin-rays, the spiny armature of its head, and its
comparatively well-developed eye.
Tt differs from all the Ceratiide in its having a long guttural
tentacle, also in the low number of rays in its second dorsal and
anal fins.
Locality.—A single specimen, with a total length of 49 millim.,
was caught by Capt. P. Andresen in May 1877 floating in the sea
(about 36° north latitude, 20° west longitude) 3° N.W. of Madeira,
and was presented to the Museum of the Christiania University.
During several years it remained unnoticed in the private house of
the late Director of the Museum, Prof. Esmark, but after his death
it was returned to the Museum (December 1885).
Mr. Andresen, who is now residing in Christiania, reports to me
that on the day mentioned he was on a voyage to the West Indies.
He was capturing turtle in his boat; there was a heavy sweil, but
the water was smooth. After a time he caught sight of this little
black fish, which lay on the surface quite alive, but almost motion-
less, which was not surprising when it was discovered that it had
just swallowed a fish longer than itself. It did not lie on its side,
but was apparently unable to swim away. By getting the bailer
under it, he lifted it out with ease, and in order to keep it fresh he
gave up his search for turtle and rowed back to the ship, where it
was placed in spirit for preservation.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV.
Fig. 1. Full view of Linophryne lucifer, 2.
2. Front view of head, showing open mouth.
3. Guttural tentacle, }.
2. Note on the External Characters of Rhinoceros simus.
By P. L. Scuarer, M.A., F.R.S., Secretary to the
Society.
[Received February 24, 1886.]
(Plate XVI.)
The heads of the two African Rhinoceroses exhibited by Mr. E.
Gerrard, Jun., at the last meeting of the Society, and again placed
on the table this night by Mr. Gerrard’s kind permission, have
144 . ON THE CHARACTERS OF RHINOCEROS stmus. [Mar. 2,
enabled me to make a comparison between Rhinoceros bicornis and
Rhinoceros simus, which I have never before had an opportunity of
doing. Indeed, as is well known, such specimens of the latter
species, with the exception of a single immature example in the
British Museum, are almost unknown in Europe.
On looking at the two heads now before us side by side, the
points by which this part of the two animals may be distinguished
present themselves very appreciably. In the first place, as is already
well known, the “ White” or ‘ Square-nosed”” Rhinoceros, as it is
much better called, is distinguished by its short upper lip, which is
quite apparent in the example now before us. In R. bicornis the
central portion of the upper lip is far extended, and forms a quasi-
prehensile organ. This is sufficiently manifest in the specimen now
on the table, but is still better seen in the living example of the
same animal in the Society’s Gardens.
A second point in which the heads of the two African Rhinoceroses
differ materially is in the size and shape of the ears. In R. bicornis
(Plate XVI. fig. 2) the ear-conch is much rounded at its extremity
and edged by a fringe of short black hairs which spring from the
margin. In R. simus (Plate XVI. fig. 1) the ear-conch is appa-
rently much more elongated and sharply pointed at its upper
extremity ', where the hairs which clothe its margin constitute a
slight tuft. While the upper portion of the ear-conch is much
more expanded in #. simus than in R. bicornis, in the lower portion
the two margins are united together for a much greater extent, and
form a closed cylinder, which in the present specimen rises about
3 inches above the base. The total’ length of the ears in the
present specimens is, in R. simus, 12°5 inches and in R. bicornis
about 9°5 inches.
A third point in which the two species appear to differ is in the
shape of the nostrils, which, judging from the present specimens, are,
in Lt. simus, elongated in a direction parallel with the mouth, while
in R. bicornis they are more nearly of a circular shape. Again the
eye in &. simus appears to be placed further back in the head than
in R. bicornis.
A regards the well-known differences in the skulls of these two
Rhinoceroses, which are obvious enough on a glance at the specimens
on the table, I will say nothing on the present occasion, but simply
refer to De Blainville’s figures (Ostéographie, Rhinoceros, pl. iii. and
iv.), and to Prof. Flower’s remarks on this subject in the ‘ Pro-
ceedings’ of this Society for 1876 (p. 452).
* This peculiar feature is well shown in the figures of R. simus given by
Smith (Ill. S. Afr. Zool. Mamm. t, xix.), and Harris (Portraits, &e. pl. 19).
PZ.S. 1886. Pl. XVI.
Hanhact imp.
DS OF RHINOCEROS SIMUS (Fig.1) AND R.BICORNTS. (Fig.2)
14 ph i
1886. ] ON THE AIR-SACS OF THE CASSOWARY. 145
3. Note on the Air-sacs of the Cassowary. By Franx E.
Brepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., Prosector to the Society.
[Received March 1, 1886.]
The following note refers to a male Casuarius uniappendiculatus
which died in the Society’s Gardens on February 15th of the
present year.
Since no description of the respiratory organs of this bird has, so
far as I know, been published, I have thought it worth while to bring
a note upon the subject before the Society, to supplement Prof.
Huxley’s paper upon the respiratory organs of Apéeryx' and Prof.
W. N. Parker’s ‘ Note’ upon the same structures in Rhea *.
As regards its air-sacs the Cassowary appears to resemble Apteryx
much more closely than Rhea, though differing slightly from the
former. In dpteryx the main difference in the air-sacs from those
of Carinate Birds is in the small extent of the abdominal air-sac.
“In Apteryx the whole of this sac is enclosed between the oblique
septum and the pulmonary aponeurosis, the dissepiment between
its loculus and that of the posterior intermediate sac being situated
almost midway between the second dissepiment and the posterior
extremity of the pneumatic chamber. In the Duck, on the con-
trary, the dorsal end of this dissepiment~is attached close to the
posterior extremity of the lung, and thence slopes very obliquely
backwards. ‘The capacity of the posterior intermediate air-sac thus
becomes greatly increased. But, as the capacity of the posterior
air-sac is also vastly greater than in dpéeryz, its posterior wall has
been, apparently, driven out, like a hernial sac, between the peri-
toneum and the parietes, and projects into the abdominal cavity.”
(Loe. cit. p. 566.)
In Rhea “ the anterior and posterior intermediate and the posterior
air-sacs are almost precisely similar to those of the Duck. The
dorsal end of the dissepiment between the posterior intermediate and
the posterior sac slopes backward; and the posterior wall of the
latter has been, as Prof. Huxley describes it, ‘ apparently driven out
like a hernial sac, between the peritoneum and the parietes’ projecting
almost to the posterior end of the abdomen.” (Parker, loc. cit.)
In Casuarius uniappendiculatus the anterior and posterior inter-
mediate air-sacs are of about the same size and are separated from each
other and from the posterior sac by erect, almost vertical dissepiments,
which are entirely parallel with each other ; the dissepiment which
separates the posterior air-sac from the one in front does not slope
backwards any more than does the dissepiment in front of it. The
posterior air-sac is entirely shut off from the abdominal cavity by
the oblique septum ; there was no trace whatever of any prolongation
of its walls among the coils of the intestines ; the whole of the sac,
as in Apteryz, is enclosed between the oblique septum and the
* P.Z.S. 1882, p. 560. ? P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 141.
146 ON THE AIR-SACS OF THE CASSOWARY. [Mar. 2,
pulmonary aponeurosis. The shape of the posterior air-sac’ is,
however, rather different from that of the corresponding air-sac in
Apteryx. Inthe latter bird, according to Prof. Huxley’s figure (oc.
cit. figs. 1 and 2, v.), the posterior air-sac is rather smaller than the
preceding posterior intermediate air-sac, and does not extend further
back than the lung. In Casuarius the posterior air-sac forms ante-
riorly a rounded capacious cavity, which pretty nearly corresponds in
size to that of the posterior intermediate sac ; the cavity is, however,
prolonged for some way backwards as a narrow interspace between
the oblique septum and the parietes, but this posterior region is
altogether outside the abdominal cavity and does not in the least
resemble the condition of the posterior air-sac which is characteristic
of the Carinatee.
The pulmonary aponeurosis is thick, and costo-pulmonary muscles
arising from the ribs are spread out over its surface; the oblique
septum itself is stout and thick.
Each lobe of the liver is contained in a separate compartment as
in so many other birds (see P.Z.S. 1885, p. 836); the gizzard is
enveloped in a special coat of peritoneum, while the intestines are
covered below by a stout horizontal septum which laterally becomes
indistinguishably fused with the oblique septum; in this respect
therefore the Cassowary agrees with the Emu and with many
Carinatee. Between the horizontal septum and the ventral peri-
toneum wasa large mass of fat.
The special resemblance between Casuarius and Apteryzx in the
structure of the respiratory organs is not altogether in accord with
the results obtained from the study of the structure of other organs.
Prof. Garrod ! divides the Struthiones into three families, Apterya
being the type of one ; Casuarius and Dromeus, Struthio and Rhea
form the two other families. A study of the osteology has led Prof.
Mivart® to a similar conclusion. The results contained in the
present Note confirm the opinion expressed by these two authors
that Casuarius and Rhea should be separated. I have not had the
opportunity of examing the air-sacs of the Ostrich, but, judging from
a sketch left by the late W. A. Forbes, they appear to be like those
of Rhea. In Dromeus the air-sacs are not similar to those of
Casuarius, but agree with Rhea in the extension of the posterior
air-sac into the abdominal cavity. At the end of his paper *‘ On the
Axial Skeleton of the Struthionide ” Prof. Mivart represents the
affinities of the Struthious birds in a phylogenetic scheme. Removing
Dromeus from Casuarius and placing it nearer to Rhea and Struthio,
that scheme will exactly represent the position of the different genera
of Struthiones as indicated by the structure of their respiratory
organs.
* Coll. Papers, p. 219. ? Trans. Zool. Soc, vol. x. p. 21.
1886.] ON THE SYRINX ETC. OF CAPRIMULGID. 147
4, On the Syrinx and other Points in the Anatomy of the
Caprimulgide. By Franx E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E.,
Prosector to the Society.
[Received March 1, 1886.]
It has been known for a long time, and the fact is recorded in most
text-books of comparative anatomy’, that Steatornis among the
Caprimulgidz and Crotophaga among the Cuculide are distinguished
from the other genera of their respective families, as well as from all
other birds, by the possession of a bronchial syrinx. The voice-organ
of these two birds, instead of being situated at the junction of the
trachea with the bronchi, as in the vast majority, or being formed by
a modification of the lower portion of the trachea, as in the tracheo-
phone Passeres, is produced by a modification of certain of the bron-
chial rings some way from the bifurcation of the bronchi. The
structure of the syrinx of the Guacharo was first made known by
Johannes Miiller*, and subsequently described and figured by Garrod’.
I am unacquainted with any exact description of the syrinx of Croto-
phaga, which, as I have myself indicated*, presents the following
resemblances to, and differences from, the syrinx of Steatornis. In
both types the bifurcation of the trachea to form the bronchi takes
place precisely as it does in the Mammalia ;- that is to say, the ante-
rior bronchial rings are complete rings, and in no way different from
the rings of the trachea. The membrana tympaniformis does not com-
mence until about the tenth (Crotophaga) or thirteenth (Steatornis)
bronchial rings; at this point the rings not only cease to be complete
rings but alter in their character, being narrower and softer than the
anterior bronchial rings, and separated from each other by wider inter-
vals of fibrous tissue; the single intrinsic muscle is inserted on to the
first of these modified bronchial rings ; the last two or three rings
before that on which the muscle is inserted are semirings, the mem-
branous intervals between their inner extremities, which constitute the
upper part of the membrana tympaniformis, becoming gradually less
and less, until it disappears entirely and the rings are complete rings.
These, however, although they support the anterior part of the mem-
brana tympaniformis, agree in their structure with the tracheal and
anterior bronchial rings; like them they are placed close together
and ossified ; there is no transition between the anterior and posterior
bronchial semirings ; their character abruptly changes at the semiring
on to which the intrinsic muscle is attached. In Cvofophaga the
menbrana tympaniformis extends back unto the entrance of the
bronchus into the lung ; in Séeatornis the membrana tympaniformis
1 Huxley, ‘The Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals,’ London, 1871, p. 315;
Gegenbaur's * Comparative Anatomy,’ French Trans. by O. Vogt, p. 776.
* Bericht d. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1841, p. 172; Mill. Arch. 1842, pu;
Stimmorg. d. Passerinen, Berlin, 1847, p. 9. .
3 Coll. Papers, p. 188. 4 P.Z.8. 1885, p. 173.
148 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE SYRINX AND OTHER [Mar. 2,
is of less extent, and there is an interval between it and the lung
occupied by complete bronchial rings.
In the paper referred to I have described the syringes of other
genera of the Cuculide: in some genera (e.g. Cuculus) the syrinx
is tracheo-bronchial; in others (e.g. Centropus) the syrinx presents
a very close approximation in its structure to the bronchial syrinx of
Crotophaga. In these Cuckoos the intrinsic muscles of the syrinx are,
as in Crotophaga, attached a long way down the bronchus, but the
bronchial rings anterior to the attachment of these muscles are not
complete rings as in Crotophaga, but are very nearly so, inasmuch as
their free extremities are separated by a very short extent of mem-
brane, which widens out below the attachment of the syringeal
muscles to form the membrana tympaniformis; there is, moreover, a
similar change in the nature of the bronchial semirings at the point
where the syringeal muscles are inserted.
In the Caprimulgide there is a variation in the structure of the
syrinx which is closely parallel to that of the Cuculide.
Three types of syrinx can be recognized in this group, in the genera
which I have myself been able to examine, which are:
Caprimulgus. Batrachostomus.
Chordeiles. Podargus.
Nyctidromus. Steatornis.
Aigotheles.
In the first four genera the syrinx is tracheo-bronchial ; in Batra-
chostomus and Podargus the syrinx approximates in structure to the
purely bronchial syrinx of Steatornis.
I need not redescribe the syringes of Caprimulgus and Chordeiles,
which are already known from the investigations of Cuvier, Nitzsch,
and Audubon. The remaining genus which possesses a tracheo-
branchial syrinx, viz. Nyctidromus, has not, I believe, been described.
In Nyetidromus (fig. 1) the syrinx is not widely dissimilar from
that of Caprimulgus. The tracheal rings are separated mesially, both
on the anterior and posterior aspect, by considerable membra-
nous intervals; the last four are, however, closely applied, as
shown in the accompanying drawing (fig. 1), which represents the
syrinx viewed from in front; the terminal rings of the trachea are
much more slender than the bronchial semirings, and the last appears
to be defective laterally, or is covered by the succeeding first bron-
chial semiring. The last two rings of the trachea, as well as the
first five bronchial semirings, are ossified; the ossification has also
extended on to the sixth bronchial semiring and the antepenultimate
tracheal ring. The intrinsic muscles are attached on to the first
bronchial semiring. Posteriorly is a rhomboidal ossified plate, to
which the pessulus is attached ; it represents the middle portion of
the last four or five tracheal rings, but is separated from them com-
pletely.
The syrinx of Zgotheles is displayed in the accompanying drawing
(fig. 2). The syringeal muscles are inserted on to the third bron-
1886.] POINTS IN THE ANATOMY OF CAPRIMULGIDE. 149
chial semiring, which differs from the two preceding in being more
slender; the two first bronchial semirings are stout and closely
applied. The terminal ring of the trachea is pointed downwards
anteriorly, as shown in the figure; posteriorly it is incomplete ;
the penultimate, antepenultimate, and the next tracheal rings are
Fig. 1.
Syrinx of Nyctidromus albicollis.
Fig. 2.
Syrinx of Agotheles nove-hollandie.
separate anteriorly, but posteriorly are fused for a short space in the
middle line, and are continuous with the pessulus, which arises ante-
riorly from the last tracheal ring.
Batrachostomus.—I am indebted to the kindness of Mr. R. Bowdler
150 MR. ¥F.E. BEDDARD ON THE SYRINX AND OTHER [Mar. 2,
Sharpe for the opportunity of examining a syrinx of this bird. The
accompanying drawing (fig. 3) illustrates the syrinx as seen from
behind.
The last ring of the trachea is complete in front and incomplete
behind. The intrinsic muscles are attached to the middle of the sixth
bronchial semiring, though, when viewed from behind, it would appear
that the seventh bronchial semiring served for the attachment of these
muscles ; this appearance is caused by the incomplete terminal tra-
cheal ring. The six anterior bronchial semirings are ossified and firmly
united to each other and to the trachea; both the anterior and poste-
rior extremities of the successive semirings are united by a continuous
bar of cartilage. The remaining bronchial semirings differ to a very
Fig. 3.
Syrinx of Batrachostomus.
marked degree from the anterior ones ; they are slender and unossified,
and separated by widish membranous intervals; there are about ten
of these rings in either bronchus. The membrana tympaniformis,
which unites together the opposite sides of each bronchus, forming
its inner wall, is of equal diameter both in the posterior and anterior
regions of the bronchus; there is a marked constriction, however, at
the point which divides the anterior from the posterior region of the
bronchus.
Podargus cuvieri.—The syrinx of this Goatsucker appears to be
formed upon the same type as that of Batrachostomus, and to show
the same characters even to a greater degree. I have not been able
to examine the organ itself; the following remarks are based upon
a sketch made by the late Prof. Garrod’.
! There is a brief description, unaccompanied by any figure, in Stannius’
‘Lehrbuch der Vergleichenden Anatomie,’ Bd. ii. p. 321.
1886.] POINTS IN THE ANATOMY OF CAPRIMULGIDZ. 151
The intrinsic muscles of the syrinx are inserted on to the fifteenth
or sixteenth bronchial ring, much lower down therefore than in
Batrachostomus; the first two bronchial rings are complete; the
following fourteen are semirings, but are wide, firmly united to each
other, and ossified ; the membrana tympaniformis forms the inner
wall of this and of the following section of the bronchus. The
posterior section of each bronchus, as in Batrachostomus, is formed
of slender cartilaginous semirings separated by wide membranous
intervals.
As far as the structure of the syrinx is concerned Steatornis stands
alone; Podaryus and Batrachostomus are closely similar to each
other, and are transitional between such genera as Caprimulgus and
Steatornis ; the insertion of the intrinsic muscles so far down the
bronchus, and the similarity between the anterior rings of the bron-
chus and those of the trachea, is evidently an approach in structure
to the bronchial syrinx of Steatornis. gotheles resembles Batra-
chostomus more closely than it does Caprimulgus, but the number
of bronchial semirings which intervene between the trachea and the
insertion of the syringeal muscles is still further reduced. Capri-
mulgus, Chordeiles, and Nyctidromus are very closely allied in the
structure of their syrinx, which is tracheo-bronchial, and shows no
approach to the bronchial syrinx of Steatornis, as do the syringes of
Podargus, Batrachostomus, and (to a very much less extent) dgo-
theles.
The arrangement of the genera of Caprimulgide, as indicated
above by the structure of their syrinx, is, I believe, in accord with
the opinion of most ornithologists. With regard to other structural
characters, the foliowing notes upon certain of the viscera and muscles
appear to be worth recording.
Visceral Anatomy.
The intestines of the Caprimulgide are furnished with ceca, with
the exception of those of gotheles. Mr. Forbes has left a MS.
note to this effect, and I cannot find any trace of ceca in the spirit-
preserved specimen of the last-mentioned form. In all the genera
the left lobe of the liver is rather the smaller, and a gall-bladder is
present save in Chordeiles’.
The air-sacs in one specimen of Steatornis were rather peculiar
in structure. The pcints in which they were found to differ from
other birds are in the posterior intermediate air-sac. This sac
on both sides of the body is considerably larger than the preceding
anterior intermediate sac, and is furnished with two principal ostia
placed near to the external border of the lung. These: pertures have
a different position in relation to each other on either side of the
body ; in the right lung these apertures do not both open into the
posterior intermediate air-sac as they do on the left side of the body ;
the most anterior of the two ostia opens into a small wedge-shaped atr-
cell, which is completely separated by septa both from the posterior
2 Garrod MS.
152 MR. F. E, BEDDARD ON THE SYRINX AND OTHER [ Mar. 2,
and anterior air-sacs ; towards the median line, however, its limiting
septa coalesce, and here the anterior and posterior intermediate air-
sacs follow each other directly ; this supplementary air-sac therefore
is placed upon the outer margin of the lung and does not extend to
the middle line. The other specimen of Steatornis unfortunately had
the lungs destroyed, so that I cannot positively state whether the
above-described peculiarity is merely a variation or characteristic of
the bird, though on one side there were certainly two ostia to the
posterior intermediate sac.
Myology.
The disposition of the tensores patagii varies characteristically in
the different genera. In Caprimulgus, Nyctidromus, and Chordeiles
there is a biceps-slip, which is absent in Steatornis, Podargus, and
4Egotheles. Prof. Garrod has figured the patagial muscles of Steat-
ornis (loc. cit.), and I find them to be exactly similar in Podargus.
Aigotheles is a little different from either of these genera; there is no
anterior branch to the tendon, or only just a trace of one, close to the
insertion on to the extensor muscle. In Caprimulgus, Chordeiles,
and WVyctidromus there is an absolute similarity in respect of these
muscles; since Caprimulgus has been already figured by Garrod
(Joc. cit. p. 185), there is no necessity to illustrate the two remaining
genera, as it would be merely a repetition of his figure. ;
A peculiarity in the myology of Steatornis is not referred to by
Prof. Garrod in his account of the anatomy of that species; that is
the presence of an expansor secundariorum. In a later paper, where
a list is given of those families that are characterized by having an
expansor secundariorum muscle, he states that the Coractidee are the
only Anomalogonatous birds which are thus provided. In the speci-
men of Steatornis before me there is a well-developed expansor
secundariorum arising in the usual way and attached to the ¢eres
near to its insertion. The termination of the expansor secundariorum
in Steatornis is therefore similar to that which has been recorded by
Garrod in Ortyx, Numida, &e. Since noting this fact I see that
Mr. Forbes’ has already mentioned it.
The diceps muscle is split about halfway down into two distinct
tendons of insertion, which are severally attached to the radius
and ulna. In Podargus, Zgotheles, and Nyctidromus the biceps is
similarly divided into two, the division passing for a certain distance
into the substance of the muscle itself, and not being merely restricted
to its tendon of attachment. This structural feature is not peculiar
to the Caprimulgidze, but is found in other families of birds.
In all the Caprimulgidee that I have dissected, the anconeus longus
has a tendinous humeral head. ,
The peroneal muscles vary in the different genera of Caprimulgide :
in Steatornis and digotheles only the peroneus brevis is present ;
in Podargus both peroneals are present with the usual attachments ;
in Myctidromus 1 could only find the peroneus longus.
' Coll. Papers, p. 346.
1886.] POINTS IN THE ANATOMY OF THE CAPRIMULGIDE. 153
Dr. Gadow, in Bronn’s ‘ Thierreichs’ (Bd. vi. Abth. iv. p. 177), has
referred to the double condition of the tendon of the tibialis anticus
in Podargus ; this statement I am able to confirm from my own dis-
section of that bird; but in the other genera this muscle has a more
normal arrangement, being undivided at its extremity. The only other
birds in which I have found a similar disposition of the tibialis
anticus are the Owls (Strix pratincola); but Dr. Gadow has men-
tioned Ohrysotis as another instance.
Steatornis differs from the other genera in having no femoro-
caudal muscle ; in the remaining genera the formula on Garrod’s
system is AXY’.
Steatornis therefore agrees with Podargus and Aigotheles in the
absence of a biceps slip to the patagium; while those genera which
agree with each other in the possession of a tracheo-bronchial syrinx,
viz. Caprimulgus, Nyctidromus, and Chordeiles, have a biceps slip ;
Steatornis is peculiar in the absence of the femoro-caudal muscle,
and in the presence of an expansor secundariorum ; while go-
theles appears to differ from its allies in having no ceca, and also
in the structure of the patagial tendons.
I am unfortunately unable to give any account of the visceral
anatomy and myology of Batrachostomus, which I should imagine
will be found to agree pretty closely with Podargus.
All these facts lend additional confirmation to the generally
accepted view that Steatornis is a peculiar type of Goatsucker and
needs a special subfamily to itself. It evidently, however, comes
nearest to Podargus, Batrachostomus, and gotheles ; and the fact
that all these genera lay white eggs* is so far confirmatory of the
anatomical resemblances; in the other Goatsuckers the eggs are
coloured. A second subfamily will include Podargus and Batracho-
stomus, while 4gotheles ought perhaps to be regarded as the type
of a third subfamily. The remaining genera, Caprimulgus, Chor-
deiles, and Nyctidromus, belong to the fourth subfamily.
The Steatornithine are at one extreme, and the Caprimulgine at
the other; Podargus, Batrachostomus, and digotheles are much
nearer to Steatornis than to Oaprimulgus, but should be placed in
an intermediate position.
This view of the affinities of the different genera of Caprimulgidee
almost entirely bears out the scheme of classification proposed by
Mr. Sclater (Joc. cit.).
1 Coll. Papers, p. 346.
2 Cf. P. L. Sclater, P. Z.8. 1866, p. 127.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XI. 1l
154 REV. H. S, GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. [Mar. 16,
March 16, 1886.
Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair.
Mr. F. D. Godman, F.R.S., exhibited a series of examples of a
Butterfly, Danais plexippus, from various localities, and made remarks
on its distribution, which seemed to be gradually extending itself all
over the world.
Professor Bell stated that the species of Balanoglossus, an imperfect
example of which he had exhibited to the Society on November the
17th of last year, had been described and named by M. R. Koehler,
who had called it B. sarniensis’ ; the specimen on which his descrip-
tion was based had also come from the island of Herm. Since the read-
ing of that description, M. G. Pouchet * had reported to the Academy
of Sciences that the species in question had been found at various
localities on the northern and north-western coasts of France.
The following papers were read :—
1. On new Genera and Species of Endomychide.
By the Rev. H. 8. Gorsam, F.ZS., F.E.S.
{Received March 5, 1886. |
(Plate XVII.)
The object of the following descriptions is to make known several
most interesting and beautiful Coleoptera of the family Endomychide
from various sources, but which are chiefly due to Mr. George
Lewis’s collections made in Ceylon in 1882-3. A portion, however,
are species that have been long known to me, as they are based on
specimens collected by Mr. Bates on the Amazons. Of these there
were mostly but one or two of each species, and it would no doubt
have been satisfactory to have seen more examples ; of this, however,
there seems but slender hope, while if left undescribed the specimens
are practically lost. Two or three most interesting species, forming
a new genus, are from examples in Mr. Cowan’s Madagascar collec-
tion ; for the opportunity of describing these my thanks are due to
Dr. Sharp.
SPATHOMELES.
1. SPATHOMELES INFLATUS. (Plate XVII. fig. 5.)
Oblongus, niger, nitidus ; elytris piceo-purpurascentibus, marginibus
nigris, humeris calloso-inflatis. Long. 10 millim. 92?
Hab. Ceylon.
Head, antennze, legs, prothorax, and underside shining black.
' Comptes Rendus, cii. (25 Jan. 1886) p. 224.
2. es pnata:
1886.] REV. H. S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. 155
Head with a few scattered but distinct punctures; club of the
antennee rather lax and dull. Thorax shining, not punctured, but
with the surface uneven; anterior margin deeply excavated for the
head, and with the anterior angles turned inwards; the sides much
rounded in front; the disk with a short central elongate impression,
and a round one on each side; the sides much puckered. Elytra
smooth and waxy, impunctate ; all the disk of a pitchy-purple tint,
which in life was, as Mr. Lewis informs me, of a most beautiful
violaceous colour. They have a double, not much elevated, tumidity
each side of the scutellum. The humeral callus is much inflated,
to the extent of about a quarter of the length of the elytra; this
tumidity is scarcely carinate and not spinose; the reflexed margin of
the elytra is complete, running as a fine line beneath the callus up
to the basal angle; the epipleural fold is black and shining. The
anterior tibize are very faintly incurved, and compressed into a shallow
spoon-shaped hollow at their apices, and the middle pair are more
strongly incurved at their tips, the hind pair slightly so; all the
tibie have the apices pubescent inwardly; the hair at the tips is
golden.
Of this very singular and beautiful Spathomeles a pair were beaten
off a dead branch in the jungle by Mr. Lewis at Dickoya, at 5000
feet elevation.
2. SPATHOMELES ORNATUS.
S. decorato valde affinis, oblongus, niger, nitidus; elytris sub-
violaceis, maculis tribus elevatis, una basilari rotundata, una
ante medium transversa in medio constricta, una subapicali sub-
lunulata, luteis. Long. 13-15 millim. ¢ @.
Mas. Zlytris spina dorsali brevi obtusa, femoribus anticis, tibiis
mediis ante apicem dentatis, tibiis posticis ante medium angu-
lariter late dentatis.
Hab. Assam.
Very closely allied to S. decoratus, Gerst., and perhaps not more
than a geographical form; the evident toothing of the hind tibiz is,
however, very important, and the union of the two middle yellow
spots, which in S. decoratus are, so far as I have observed, always
separate, seems to point to a permanent specific difference. The
spots are all rather more developed than in S. decoratus ; the basal
one is round.
One male and two female specimens.
STICTOMELA, gen. nov.
Corpus ovatum. Elytris convexis, maris haud spinulosis. Pro-
thorax antice ampliato-rotundus. Prosternum apice truncatum,
coxas anticas superans. Mandibule apice bidentate. Palpi
mazillares articulo ultimo conoideo apice minute truncato.
A genus very nearly approaching Spathomeles; the points in
which it principally differs are, that in the males the elytra are not
armed with a spine, and the prothorax is differently shaped, resem-
bling more that of the Amphisterni of the second aceon without
11
156 REV. H. S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. [ Mar. 16,
spines. The apex of the prosternum is not so widely rounded but sub-
mucronate. The apex of the jaws is notched, much as in EZncymon
and Hngonius, the teeth being of equal length and the exterior one
not bifid. The front tibiz of the males have a very small tooth
near their apex. Engonius, to which this genus approaches in some
of its characters, has the apex of the elytra obliquely truncate, so
that they are open at the sutural angle; in the present genus the
elytra are together uniformly rounded.
1. SticTOMELA CHRYSOMELOIDES. (Plate XVII. fig. 6.)
Oblonga, elytris apice equaliter rotundatis, nigro-enea, nitida ;
capite prothoraceque inequalibus, crebre sat fortiter punctatis,
hoc profunde canaliculato ; elytris crebrius subtiliter punctatis,
perobsolete subsulcatis, callo humerali modice elevato, obtuse
carinato, punctisque quatuor aurantiacis, duobus basalibus, duobus
subapicalibus, oblique positis. Long. 9 millim. 3 9.
Mas. Tibiis anticis ad apicem intus excisis, intermediis leviter cur-
_ vatis, apice mucronatis.
Hab. Dickoya, Ceylon.
Head brassy black, a little shining ; epistoma thickly and strongly
punctured, posterior part less thickly ; antennee as in Spathomeles,
but the club rather lax, apical joint obliquely compressed at the tips.
Thorax with the surface shining but uneven, the principal impression
being a central channel with a punctiform pit on each side in the
middle, a basal transverse line, and the ordinary basal sulci; the
sides are, however, wrinkled; the lateral margins are much rounded
in front, and the front margin rather deeply excavated and bisinuate,
the front angles being acute. The humeral callus is raised into a
blunt carina, terminating in the external one of two basal, orange, round
spots; the two apical ones are placed somewhat obliquely, that
nearest the suture being furthest from the apex, and oblong but
irregular in shape. The femora are clavate and distinctly punctured ;
the tibiz are bent a little in both sexes, but more strongly so in the
male, and in that sex terminate inwardly in a short mucro; they are
pubescent at the tips. The tarsi and claws are pitchy, clothed with
golden pile beneath. The intercoxal plate of the basal ventral seg-
ment is sparsely but deeply punctate.
Four specimens, three males and one female, of this beautiful
species were captured by Mr. Lewis.
2. STICTOMELA OPULENTA.
Oblonga, nitida, nigra ; elytris confertim crebrius punctatis, singulis
maculis sex rubris, tribus basalibus, tribus subapicalibus irregu-
laribus, quasi fasciam formantibus. Long. 10 millim. 6.
Mas. Tibiis anticis dente parvo adjacente, juxta apicem infra dentem
excisis ; segmento apicali ventrali, tuberculo instructo.
Hab. Ceylon.
Head strongly and deeply punctured, the epistoma especially so,
with fewer and more scattered punctures; antennee as in Engonius,
but with the club a little more lax. Thorax uneven but shining,
1886.] REV. H. S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. 157
with a marginal line round the entire edge uniting with the central
channel in front ; front margin deeply bisinuate ; sides hardly so much
rounded in front asin S. chrysomeloides. Elytra longer than in that
species, thickly and distinctly punctured, hardly any trace of sulcation
or striation ; shoulders with a callus well raised, ending in a deep red
spot, another spot near the scutellum, and a third between these two ;
posteriorly are two small oblong spots (united in the specimen
described) near the suture about one third from the apex, and another
between these and the margin. There is a fine sutural stria for the
whole length of the elytra, and the margin is narrowly reflexed. Legs
and underside shining black ; femora punctate, but more finely than in
S. chrysomeloides; anterior pair in the male compressed at the tip
and with a very small fine calear above the spatulate compression.
The tubercle on the apical ventral segment is squarish and impressed
on its top so as to seem faintly bidentate.
A single male specimen is all that Mr. Lewis secured of this
species.
CyMOoNES.
Characteres plerumque ut in genere Encymon ; differt mesosterno
haud transverso, prothoracis basi medio vix marginato, sulco
transverso nullo, antennarum clava elongata, laze articulata,
articulis nono et decimo viz latioribus, maris tibiarum anticarum
dente lato.
I have no doubt that the species for which I propose this new
genus is the Madagascar representative of Encymon, with which it
is associated in the form of the mandibles. It has, however, a
different facies, principally owing to the form of the pronotum,
which is more convex, with its margins even and scarcely at all
reflexed. The longitudinal basal sulci are present, but the transverse
one is quite obsolete. The mode of toothing of the front tibia of
the male is, moreover, quite different to that of Encymon; in the
only species of that genus in which I have seen it take place, and
which is figured by me (Endom. Recitati, tab. f. 10), the tooth is
small and close to the apex ; here it is wide and strong and near the
middle of the tibia.
1. Cymones sHarpi. (Plate XVII. fig. 4.)
Piceus ; prothorace elytrorumque apicibus flavis, illo guttis duabus
magnis oblongis, punctisque tribus parvis nigris, capite femori-
busque saturutius nigro-piceis ; trochanteribus, femoribus basi,
tibiis tarsisque ferrugineo-flavis. Long. 9 millim. 6.
Mas. Tibiis anticis dente basi latissimo, apice acuto infra medium,
tibiis intermediis et posticis apice leviter incurvatis.
Hab. Madagascar, Betsileo (Cowan).
Head black, mouth and palpi testaceous, epistoma with a
few indistinct punctures, crown smooth, antennal orbits raised.
Antenne piceous, rufo-piceous at the base; the proportion of the joints
as in Hncymon till the ninth, which with the tenth and apical joints
are elongate, only rather longer and more widened at their tips than
ad
158 REV. H.S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. [Matr. 16,
those preceding them. Thorax about as long as wide if the projecting
front angles are taken in, widest a little below the front ; basal
angles right angles, sides a little sinuate not angular, front margin
rounded and a little prominent, basal margin nearly straight ; on
the disk, which is very even and smooth, are two large inky-black
oblong marks a little obliquely placed, a small dot on each side
where the thorax is widest, and one in the middle, near the base.
Elytra pitchy, inclining to brown, the apex is yellow, and this
colour returns some way up the suture and the margins ; they are
convex, evenly ovate, and rounded at the apex, narrower at the base,
and with a very obsolete sutural stria and scarcely at all widened
margin; the epipleural fold is yellow. There is no visible
punctuation on their surface ; but it is not glabrous as in Encymon
angulatus, but very finely alutaceous, though the sculpture is
hardly visible at all.
Only two specimens of this insect have come under my notice ;
both are males. One is in Mr. Lewis’s collection, and the other in
Dr. Sharp’s, by whom they were obtained from Mr. Cowan.
2. Cymones cowani. (Plate XVII. fig. 1.)
Nigro-subviolaceus ; capite, prothorace, antennis (clava excepta)
pedibusque rufis, abdomine rufo-piceo. Long. 63 millim. 3 Q.
Mas. Tibiis anticis dente acuto distantemediano, apicibus intermediis
etiam leviter incurvatis.
Hab. Madagascar (Cowan).
More parallel than C. sharpi, and with the thorax not so convex
above, and more quadrate, smaller, and differently coloured. The
head and thorax are rusty red, very little shining, and without
punctuation; palpi red ; antennze of moderate length, and with the
club, which is black, abrupt, and with its two first joints transversely
heart-shaped. The thorax is transversely quadrate, with the front
angles a little prominent, the sides a little sinuate, nearly straight, base
obsoletely margined, and the sulcidistinct but not deep. Elytra dark
blackish purple, their apex ferruginous, slightly shining but not bright.
Legs in the male example pitchy, in the female clear rusty red.
Although this species and the following one differ in several
particulars of their structure from C. sharpi, I have not been able
to find any characters of sufficient importance to warrant their
separation generically. In the abruptly formed club of the antennze
and in the form of the thorax these two species are nearer to
Encymon, but the strongly toothed tibiz in the male, and the form
of the body, less swollen, and with its sides more parallel than in any
eastern species of that genus, indicate a radical divergence from that
type.
Only two specimens have come under my notice; they were
obligingly placed in my hands by Dr. Sharp for description.
3. CyMONES HELOPIOIDES. (Plate XVII. fig. 3, ¢.)
Niger ; parum nitidus ; prothorace transversim quadrato, cum elytris
subopacis. Long. 64-7 millim. 3S.
1886. ] REV. H. S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. 159
Mas. Tibiis anticis dente acuto, adjacente, infra medium ; intermediis
apice incurvato, posticis leviter sinuatis.
Hab, Madagascar (Cowan).
Entirely black, subopaque above, body beneath shining. Antenne
rather short, a little longer in the male than in the female, their
club not very wide nor abrupt; head rather uneven, with a few
seattered obsolete punctures. Thorax half as wide again as long,
opaque ; punctuation very obsolete, minute and scarcely visible,
basal sulci distinct ; front angles very little produced, scarcely at all
in the female, sides nearly straight, base finely margined. Elytra
half as wide again as the thorax and slightly widened behind, callus
only faintly raised. The male specimen has two minute red dots
near the apex of the elytra, in the female they are wanting. Meta-
sternum (in male) depressed between the hind coxe, and first ven-
tral segment with scattered small punctures.
Two specimens from Dr. Sharp’s collection.
AnrprytTvs, Gerst.
1. ANIDRYTUS QUADRIPUNCTATUS.
Oblongus, parum ovatus, rufo-piceus, nitidus, crebre subobsolete
punctatus, cupreo-pubescens ; antennis nigris, articulis quatuor
basalibus et apice summo rufis; prothorace punctis quatuor
discoidalibus nigris. Long. 8 millim. 2.
Hab. Brazil, Blumenau.
Head finely punctured, a little rugulose between the eyes; basal
and three following joints of the antennz pale ferruginous, the
fourth joint being deeper in colour, and at its articulation with the
third nearly black. Thorax just twice as long as wide, from the
front angles the sides are very evenly rounded to near the base, where
they become straight. The basal furrows are two distinctly
impressed, converging, linear channels; within them, where they end
on the front of the disk, halfway between the base and the front
margins, are two round black points (as in A. bipunctatus) ; more in
front and more widely apart are two other black points. The disk
and sides of the thorax are evenly, thickly, not confluently punctured,
but the surface of the black spots is smooth, or in the external spots
with one or two punctures only. The elytra are somewhat parallel,
not strongly convex, evenly and more thickly punctured ; the punc-
tures are (as is usual where they give rise to hairs) not pricked in,
but irregular, somewhat linear, and flat-bottomed. Legs clear red,
only a very little darkened at the base of the tibize. The underside
wholly ferruginous red.
Although this appears to be a species very nearly allied to A,
bipunctatus, Gerst. (a species also from Brazil), the description
given above will show that it differs not only by the four black spots
of the thorax, but by the colour of the underside and legs as well.
I have only seen one specimen, a female, which was sent to me by
Herr Reitter, with other Coleoptera collected in the same district,
160 REV. H.S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. [ Mar. 16
2. ANIDRYTUS LIQUEFACTUS, Gorh. Endom. Rec. p. 47.
I have received specimens of both sexes of what I consider
identical with this species, of which the type is now in Mr. Lewis’s
possession from Peru, and one male from New Granada (?) ; but these
have only three joints at the base of the antenne red, and the apical
joint is quite black. The size is from 73-83 millim.
3. AnIpRyTUS HUMILIS, Gorh. Endom. Ree. p. 48.
Further specimens were taken by Mr. Belt at Chontales,
Nicaragua, and will be noticed in the ‘ Biologia Centr.-Amer.’ in due
course.
EPoprrteRvs.
1. Epopterus EGANus. (Plate XVII. fig. 9.)
Ovatus, rufo-brunneus, nitidus ; antennis nigris, articulis tribus
basalibus testaceis; elytris singulis maculis tribus sat magnis
eburneo-albidis nigro-cinctis, duabus basalibus oblique sitis, una
subapicali. Long. 5-53 millim. 3 Q.
Mas. ibiis anticis leviter curvatis, ad apices compressis.
Hab. Amazon, Ega (H. W. Bates).
Head and thorax rather pale castaneous red, not perceptibly
punctured, very finely and very sparsely pubescent at the sides of
the latter, narrowed to the front angles, and very narrowly margined ;
basal sulci short, linear. Scutellum black. Elytra wider than the
thorax, commencing to widen from the base to about one third from
the base, whence they are evenly and ovally contracted to the apex ;
each with three large yellowish-white spots edged with black. The
underside is brownish red, the tibiee darker at their bases than the
rest of the leg, as are also (but only very finely) the inner epipleural
margins of the elytra.
Two examples from Mr. Bates’s collection are now in Mr. Lewis’s.
2. EpopTeRvs EPHIPPIGER. (Plate XVII. fig. 8.)
Ovatus, rufo-piceus, nitidus ; elytris flavis macula magna discoidali
communi nigra; antennis nigris, articulis tribus basalibus flavis ;
prothorace crebre, elytris parcius leviter punctatis. Long. 6
millim. 3.
Mas. Tibiis anticis ad apices interne compressis, leviter incurvatis.
Hab. Amazon (H. W. Bates).
Nearly of the same oval form and of the size of EH. eganus, but
distinctly punctured. Head red, nearly smooth; thorax twice as
wide as long, not so wide as the elytra at their base, thickly and
distinctly punctured ; basal sulci straight, a little converging, sides
narrowing, slightly curved, margin distinct and faintly raised.
Seutellum rufous, punctured. Elytra paler yellow than the thorax,
punctures distinct, only a few scattered hairs at the sides ; epipleurze
yellow, only very narrowly darker at their margins. Underside and
legs uniformly pitchy red.
I have only seen one example of this species, a male. It is very
distinct from any Epopterus yet described.
1886.] REV. H.S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. 161
3. Epoprervs LINEOGUTTATUS. (Plate XVII. fig. 7.)
Ovatus, rufo-piceus, nitidus ; elytris pallide flavis,sutura margin ibus-
que lateralibus piceis, puncto humerali, lineolisque septem in
singulis, 3, 3, 1, saturate piceis ; antennis nigris, articulis tribus
basalibus rufis. Long. 6 millim. 3.
Mas. Tibiis anticis interne sat fortiter incurvatis, ad apicem com-
pressis.
Hab. Amazon (H. W. Bates).
Head, thorax, underside, and margins of the elytra rather light
pitchy red ; punctuation of the thorax and elytra as in Z. ephippiger,
distinct. The curious marking of the elytra consists of a humeral
small dot, two elongate dashes near the suture, two shorter ones in
the middle of the disk, two still smaller near the margin above the
middle, and one small one near the apex. These dashes are not
placed regularly, but the three near the base form a sort of fascia,
as do the three below the middle. The scutellum is pitchy black.
One small example.
Sau, Gerst.
1. SauLa niGRIPEs, Gerst. Mon. p. 224,.t. 3. f. 2.
Several specimens met with by Mr. Lewis, two of which were
found in copula, present no appreciable distinction between the
sexes.
STENOTARSUS.
1. SteNnoTaRsus VALLATUs, Gerst. Mon. p. 342.
Four specimens which I identify with this species were obtained
by Mr. Lewis in Ceylon at Dickoya. The antenne are clear red;
the series of punctures are more regular and not so coarse as in
S. russatus.
2. STENOTARSUS RUsSATUs, Gorh. Trans. Ent. Soc. 1874, p- 446.
One specimen met with by Mr. Lewis fully confirms my opinion
as to the distinctness of this species, and I would only remark, in
addition to the characters already given, that the raised thoracic
margin has its surface distinctly flat in both species, indeed the edges
of this margin are themselves raised, so that concave is the correct
term. The dark, stout, and gradually thickened antenne will easily
prevent this being confounded with S. vallatus.
3. STENOTARSUS SICARIUS.
Ater, valde convexus, pubescens ; elytris basi thorace latioribus,
distincte punctato-striatis ; thoracis margine laterali deplanato,
haud bene elevato, antrorsum subito latiore. Long. 3 millim.
Hab. Ceylon (Lewis).
At once distinguished from any other Stenotarsus known to me
by its entirely black colour. It is allied to S. vallatus and 8S. rus-
satus; but the form is different, the elytra suddenly widening from
162 REV. H.S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. [Mar. 16,
the shoulder, and the thorax having the base narrower with the
hind angles right angles, so that the insect is not so uniformly round
as in its allies. The antenne are formed much as in VS. vallatus, the
second to eighth joints being short and bead-shaped, but longer
than wide, the club strong but laxly jointed, the apical joint quad-
rate and much (fully twice) wider than the ninth. The thorax is
wider than long, narrowed to the front angles, but with its sides
nearly straight in the basal two thirds ; its fattened margin has its
internal edge deeply impressed in front, where the flat part is widest,
and it appears raised at the base only, where the disk is widely
suleate ; the disk is convex, minutely but distinctly covered with
small points, but the puncturing is much obscured by coarse floccose
pubescence.
Only one specimen of this interesting species was obtained.
PANOM@A.
1. Panoma@a CINGALENs!Is. (Plate XVII. fig. 2.)
Rufo-testacea; capite et thorace basi piceis ; antennarum clava,
articulo basali externe, scutello, sutura elytrisque maculis quinque
sat magnis nigris ; antennis articulis decem. Long. 5 millim.
Hab. Ceylon, Hadley (Lewis).
Antenne ten-jointed, the basal joint is stout, a little curved, the
second is scarcely longer than broad, and the third is apparently
longer than usual, and is possibly really composed of the third and
fourth joints together, but I can see no suture; the fourth to the
seventh very short, club lax, the eighth and ninth joints rather
trigonal. Head pitchy, smooth; eyes coarsely granulate (as in
typical Panomea). Thorax as in P. pardalina, but anterior angles
rather more prominent, scarcely punctured, but a little uneven at
the sides, finely margined, except at the middle of the base. Elytra
more cordate than in other species, and viewed sideways rising to a
point so as to appear more gibbous than in its allies, finely but
closely punctured, with five largish black spots—one humeral, two
near the suture, one marginal (larger than the others), one subapical ;
this last in one example connected with the marginal one ; the under-
side and legs are deep ferruginous red.
Five or six examples were obtained.
ENDOCa@LUS, N. g.
Mr. Lewis has met with a very curious small beetle in Ceylon,
which apparently comes very near Panomea, which itself is synony-
mous with Cyclotoma of Mulsant, and of which a short description
will be sufficient to render its identification certain. The antenne,
however, appear to me to be ten-jointed, and the two basal joints to
be stout, the third to the seventh to be very short, the three last
forming an elongate lax club.
The tarsi are four-jointed, almost linear, very similar to those of
Rhymbus.
Hanhart imp
NEW COLEOPTERA OF THE FAMILY ENDOMYCHIDE
1886. ] ON THE SO-CALLED PELVISTERNUM. 163
1. ENDOCG@LUS ORBICULARIS.
Rotundatus, ferrugineus ; elytris convewis, fortiter parce punctatis,
setulosis, marginibus latius eaxplanatis, apice subacuminato ;
thoracis margine elevato deplanato, basi sulcis duobus puncti-
Sormibus. Antennarum clava fusca. Long. 14 millim.
Hab. Ceylon (Lewis).
Orbicular, elytra subglobularly convex, with their lateral margin
much expanded in the middle, but the widened rim vanishing in the
apex, where they are conjointly deflexed and acuminate ; their disk
is evenly and strongly punctured, the margins less distinctly ; the
extreme limb of the expanded margin is itself finely reflexed. The
head is exserted, with small prominent coarsely granulated eyes.
The maxillary palpi have their apical joint subulate. The thorax is
short, narrowed in front, with the margin raised, thickened and
flattened as in Stenotarsus, the front angles being rounded in to
form the emarginate opening for the head, than which it is much
wider ; the base is narrower than the elytra at their base, and is
furnished with two very deeply impressed punctiform sulci, which
are about halfway between the centre and the hind angle, on each
side. One specimen, taken at Dickoya.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII.
Fig. 1. Cymones cowani, p. 158.
2. Panomea cingalensis, p. 162.
. Cymones helopioides, p. 158.
sharpi, p. 157.
. Spathomeles? inflatus, p. 154.
. Stictomela chrysomeloides, p. 156
. Epopterus lineoguttatus, p. 161.
ephippiger, p. 160.
eganus, p. 160.
OMAR OP coh
2. On the so-called Pelyisternum of certain Vertebrates. By
R. J. Anprrson, M.D., M.A., Professor of Natural
History, Queen’s College, Galway.
[Received March 1, 1886.]
Prof. Paul Albrecht in 1883 described! an interpubic bone
which he found present in Dasypus sewcinctus, Bradypus cuculliger,
and Cholepus didactylus. He compares the symphysial cartilage
found in many animals and this bone with the parts of the sternum,
shoulder-girdle, and os hyoides, and gives several very instructive
and clear figures of specimens in the museums at Berlin and KGnigs-
berg. The figures of the Lacertilian pelves are copied from the papers
of Profs. Huxley and Wiedersheim, and the scheme of homology he
represents in a table at the end of his note.
* Bull, d. l’Académie royale de Belgique, nos, 9-10.
164 DR. R. J. ANDERSON ON THE [Mar. 16,
PELYIC GIRDLE, SHOULDER-GIRDLE,
1. Pubis. 1, Procoracoid.
2. Ischium. 2. Coracoid.
3. Ilium. 3. Scapula.
4, Subilium. 4, Subscapula.
5. Wanting. 5. Clavicle.
6. Wanting. 6. Interclavicle.
7. Pelvisternum. 7. Omosternum.
(Ischio-pubic symphysial carti- Coraco-procoracoid symphysial
lage. Osseous pelvisternum of cartilage.
Edentates. )
8. Hemi-pelvisternum. 8. Hemi-omosternum.
9. Ischio-pubic symphysis. 9. Symphysis coraco-procoracoid.
10. Prepelvisternum. 10, Preomosternum.
Preomosterna of Anoura.
11. Hemi-pelvisterna. 11. Hemi-preomosterna.
Epipelvic ossicles of Ohame- Substernal bones of mammals.
leons.
Marsupial bones of Monotremes
and Marsupials.
12. Post-pelvisternum, 12. Post-omosternum,
Os cloace of Lacertilians.
The pelvis of Lacerta muralis is figured by Prof. Hoffmann in
Bronn’s ‘ Thierreichs,’ and Brihl also gives figures of the Amphibian
forms. In a specimen of Iguana tuberculata in this museum
the pubis is a separate bone, and contains a preacetabular foramen
as well as a well-marked supra- or prepubic notch. A copula (bone)
teaches from the anterior part of the ischium to the pubis, wider
behind than in front. The os cloacze fits into the ischial symphysis
behind, and the ischial symphysis still shows the marks of union-with
the tuberosities. The ilia articulate each with two transverse pro-
cesses, and the traces of union with the ischium are obliterated.
In the Australian Monitor gouldii which we have, a prepubic
nodule fits in between the pubes in front ; all traces of union between
the parts of the ossa innominata are obliterated. A small nodule is
situated in front of the ischial symphysis, and a distinct os cloacee is
present behind, and, as in the Iguana, fits in between the ischia. A
prominent ischial spine behind is situated at the junction of the
middle and outer third of the posterior border of that bone. In
Lacerta viridis a prepubic nodule and a postischial are present. In
the West-Australian Moloch horridus (marked 1845 in the catalogue)
the postischial bone is quite evident, and a large copula runs forwards
to the pelvis. In our Chameleon the three pelvic bones are short,
and the os cloacee seems to be cartilaginous ; the ischio-pubic copula
is reduced to a thread-like structure. The os cloace and prepubic
bone are thin in our specimen of Ameiva, but they are very distinct.
Prof. Owen, in his ‘Anatomy,’ says that in the Potoroo there is
a triangular ossicle developed at an early period, which is wedged
into the posterior interspace of the ischio-pubic symphysis; and in
his paper in this Society’s ‘Transactions’ he figures the posterior
epiphysial bone. In the skeleton of a Kangaroo in our museum
the following measurements were made :—
1886.] SO-CALLED PELVISTERNUM. 165
millim,
enatiynh nbn ft 0G ae as OPS as 140
Wrenhray dnc. eit eth ey ile on arigizistnalSints 20
Breadth opposite the acetabulum ............ 35
Length of pubis ...... ee
Interpubic bone, antero-posterior diameter .... 15
i. », breadth of one side ........ 35
In Phacocherus the bone occupies the position of the triangular
ligament in man, and is three-cornered and wedge-like. The following
measurements were made :—
millim
Length of os innominatum ................ 250
Crestisee: AS f6) p Pt 120
Breadth of lium above acetabulum LR RWAE BOSS 32
i tebat acetabulum. soe 87
» below acetabulum.......... 34
Arch of Paws: Hee I sie HO Wen fo
Interpubic bone, breadth .......00.05.. 00.0 24
a jt superior depth’ 22.) 0) Ate a 15
iz sy tinferior depth i) ey Ai g.s8 30
BS >, thickness at base ..7....... 20
In the skeleton of the Beaver the bone is not so distinct as in
Phacocherus. The following are the measurements :—
millim
_Length of os innominatum ................ 160
Cresta. ty 2K eat, 5 AW RI Oe In SAREE EOP SO
Breadth opposite acetabulum .............. 35
PEC OGL DUIS IN SL Su PSOE ee eh AD
Plept eb pubic Hone, 5.260. 8eU Es eg
Breadth-otoneshalfrogs:.) 20h stein ae. 25
I do not find the bone present in any other mammalian skeletons
that I have examined. The bone occupies the position of the
triangular ligament and the os cloacze of Lacertilians. Ligaments and
fascize are so often the seat of ossifications, and bones in one set of
animals are so often represented by ligaments in another set, that
one is almost tempted to regard the bones above referred to as, in
whole or in part, homologous with the triangular ligament of the
urethra found in the higher animals.
The interpubic bone in Bradypus is mentioned by Prof. Flower in
his ‘ Osteology.’
166 PROF. F. J. BELL ON BIPALIUM KEWENSE. __ [ Mar. 16,
3. Note on Bipalium kewense, and the Generic Characters
of Land-Planarians. By Professor F. Jurrrey Bett,
M.A., Sec. R.M.S:
[Received March 16, 1886.]
(Plate XVIII.)
In the descriptions given by writers on Land-Planarians especial
attention is always directed to the form of the head or, as more
than one author has called it, the tail. This, no doubt, is partly due
to the fact that in a number of the species the head is often seen to
have a remarkable hammer-shaped or cheese-knife form, which has
three times led to the institution of a genus for the reception of such
species. In other cases, where the worm has been assigned to other
genera, the head is described as obtusely rounded, or as not sharply
distinguished from the body.
Having lately received from Mr. Osbert Salvin, F.R.S., a specimen
of a Land-Planarian (apparently Bipalium kewense, Moseley), found
by him among broken fiower-pots in his garden in Sussex, of the
origin of which nothing definite is known, I have been enabled to
watch the creature exhibiting its activity. I had not long been study-
ing it when I noted that the head varied considerably and almost
constantly in form, so that I thought it well to at once enlist the
skilful pencil of Mr. C. Berjeau to represent its various appearances.
Figure A represents the worm, not indeed at its greatest length,
but in a position which it is apt to assume when in full activity ; the
head is carried a litile higher than the rest of the body, its edges are
sharp, its contour convex, and it is well marked off from the rest of
the body. Figure B, on the other hand, shows the animal in a state
of torpid quiescence ; the head is now contracted, obtusely pointed,
only separated by a shallow depression on either side from the sur-
rounding region of the body. Fig. C shows an intermediate condition
between A and B. Figs. D-G show various stages in the form of
the head ’\—hammer-shaped, knob-like, tongue-shaped, or altogether
irregular. The body may be not more than 2 inches long, when
the creature looks like a leech or a slug, or it may extend itself to
6 inches and even more, when it has rather the appearance of a
thread-worm. In fact, as one looks at it extended on a white dish,
it calls to mind the Ameba more than any other animal known to
the zoologist.
I insist on the variations in the form of the body, and especially
of the head, because all writers (even those who, like M. Humbert,
Prof. Moseley, or, the latest of all, Dr. J. C. C. Loman, have had the
opportunity of examining these forms alive or under natural condi-
tions) direct, in their descriptions, especial attention to the form of
the head ; indeed, land-planarians with cheese-cutter or hammer-
shaped heads (ef. figs. A and D) have been by all naturalists
’ All the figures are of the natural size.
1886. ] PROF. F. J. BELL ON BIPALIUM KEWENSE. 167
assigned to the genus Bipalium’. The only writer who seems to
have remarked the variability in the form of the head is M. Hum-
bert, who figures* the head of Bipalium diana, as living and when
it is greatly contracted ; the differences are, however, quite slight as
compared with those in the figures now given (Plate XVIII.). More-
over, M. Humbert continues to use the form of the head as a distinctive
character, and seems to have only incompletely appreciated the moral
of what he saw. Referring to the paper of Prof. Perceval Wright,
M. Humbert says:—‘Il donne une figure .... qui représente
Pextrémité antérieure semilunaire et a du evidemment étre faite
daprés un individu conservé dans l’alcool, tandis que celle de la
D. grayia a été dessinée d’aprés le vivant. C’est sans doute 4 ces
deux maniéres d’observer, encore plus qu’A des particularités
spécifiques qu’il faut attribuer les différences profondes que l’on
remarque dans la forme des extrémités antérieures de ces deux
espéces.”” But the differences shown in Prof. Wright’s woodcuts
of the two species are not as “ profound” as those seen in the
figures of the single living specimen here reproduced. So that,
though M. Humbert recognized the difference between living heads
and heads preserved in spirit, he does not seem to have recognized
what is much more important—that the form of the head varies
constantly during life.
Ifa Planarian in a torpid condition (Pl. XVIII. fig. I) be then and
there seized and put into spirit, it will be found, no doubt, to have an
obtusely blunted head, hardly wider than the body*; on the other hand,
some, at any rate, if killed while in full activity, will be found to have
heads shaped like a cheese- cutter or some modification thereof.
Hab. Mr. Salvin has lately received orchids from 8. America and
S. Mexico, and from Burmah ; but he has also had specimens from
Kew Gardens, whence the originals came to Mr. Moseley.
In 1883 Dr. Giinther received some specimens from Welbeck
Abbey*, where they had been known for three or four years pre-
viously ; Mr. Thiselton Dyer tells me that there is no history of any
communication between the gardens at that place and Kew, and adds
“‘ we have probably therefore been stocked from a common source.”
A specimen found in a greenhouse in Clapham Park was sent to Dr.
W. M. Ord, and is now in the possession of Prof. Ray Lankester ;
the early history of this specimen is unknown. In the hope of being
able to extend our knowledge of this worm, I have written a note to
the editor of the ‘ Gardener’s Chronicle’ °, which may result in some
further information, and perhaps in the discovery of fresh examples
* The French translator of the latest authoritative work on General Zoology
by converting “ Kopftheil durch Lappen-Vorsatze halbmondformig” into “ Région
céphalique en croissant par la présence de deux appendices lobés,” shows that he
too regards the lateral parts of the head as being constant in form and position;
nevertheless they are not so.
* Mém. Soc. Genéve, xvi. p. 303, figs. 1, 1a.
* Fig. H in Plate XVIII. shows the form of the head in the specimen under
description, now that it is dead and preserved in spirit.
* See his letter in the ‘Gardener’s Chronicle,’ xix, (1883) p. 415.
® Published on March 13th, 1886.
168 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. [ Mar. 16,
and new localities’. I am inclined to think that such information will
support Dr. Giinther’s supposition that the worm has become
acclimatized in this country ; Mr. Dyer tells me that it is still to be
found in the Kew hothouses, where it has now lived since at any rate
the beginning of 1878. k
Prof. Moseley was able to observe in Ceylon that Bipalium
suspends itself by the tough slime which it secretes. My specimen had
no opportunity of showing if it could so support itself; but I noticed
that minute offending objects could be got rid of by being entangled
in the slime which it secreted, and which, being gradually secreted
from a point, say, one inch behind the head forwards, was as a
continuous sheet of mucus thrown off from the anterior end. A
small earthworm which was placed near it, but which was not attacked,
had the same mucous sheet thrown over it, to its obvious embar-
rassment.
There can be-no doubt as to the sensitiveness of Bipalium to light.
The specimen now under notice was sent by Mr. Salvin on February
7th, lived and was more or less active till February 26th; for this
interval of time the town was either enveloped in fog, or surrounded
by a darkness which needed not to be called back to our recollection.
But on the 26th of February the sun shone, and though the
room in which the Planarian had been placed was not illuminated
by its rays, yet the exposure to diffuse light, which on other and
earlier days had been harmless, was on this day fatal; the worm
broke transversely into three pieces, and on being teuched fell into
four. Had it been kept in darkness it is possible it might have lived
longer. The temperature of the room varied from about 50° to 64° F.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XVIII.
Tllustrating the various forms assumed by Bipalium kewense.
A. Extended and moving freely. B, ©. In various states of contraction.
D-G. Some of the various forms taken by the head. H. Head and anterior
end after contraction in spirit. I. The worm coiled and at rest.
All the figures are of the natural size.
4, Note on the Structure of a large Species of Earthworm
from New Caledonia. By Frank E: Bepparp, M.A.,
F.R.S.E., Prosector to the Society.
[Received March 15, 1886.]
(Plate XIX.)
Among a number of Earthworms forwarded to me from New
Caledonia, through the kindness of Mr. E. L. Layard, F.Z.S., H.B.M.
Consul at Noumea, were six specimens of a large worm several of
which measured some 28 inches in length. All these specimens are
referable to the same species, which belongs to the genus Acantho-
1 Specimens have been found in the Zoological Society’s Gardens, which
have, and in gardens at Liverpool which have not had direct relations with Kew.
FP. 2.5. 1886... Pl. XViL
Berjeau & Highley del et lith Mintern Bros . imp.
BIPALIUM KEWENSE..
IN VARIOUS STAGES OF CONTRACTION.
he aoe ey ah ‘
ee eh
. > é
a
“4 : A: . . ’ 7 ta ‘ ¥ si eres ¥ : , t oe he ee Ae
nt ve AL ee Pi BE te ‘ ie ite at of ‘ ha Sy
a ry x -
we
1886.] MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. 169
drilus’. This genus is already known to inhabit New Caledonia ;
M. Perrier bas des¢ribed two distinct species from that region. The
species which forms the subject of the present communication may
be identical with one or other of these. The descriptions given by
M. Perrier of Acanthodrilus obtusus and A. angulatus are necessarily
insufficient, owing to the poor condition and immaturity of the
specimens at his disposal ; but certain facts, such as the position of
the generative apertures and of the clitellum, could hardly be
mistaken even in specimens greatly injured through bad preservation ;
in these points the present species differs from both of those de-
scribed by Perrier, as will be apparent from the following notes on
its structure.
External Characters.—I have sketched (Plate XIX. fig. 1) the
anterior segments of the body from the dorsal aspect to indicate the
main external features which are visible upon that surface. The
buccal lobe divides the first segment *, as also in A. dissimilis and
A, nove zelundie, two species recently described by myself *. Ofa
fourth species of the genus, viz. 4. verticillatus, M. Perrier writes * :—
** La lobe céphalique n’entame pas le premier anneau et parait au
contraire s’elargir asa base de maniére aressembler a la partiesupérieure
d’un tréfle ; mais cette apparence tient peut-€tre a un état particulier
de conservation.” J mention these facts because the genus Lumbricus
has been split up into other genera mainly on this account. It does
not appear to me advisable, while there = so many internal structural
differences, to make use of so small an external character for
classificatory purposes ; but in the case of the genus Acanthodrilus
this mark of difference between species appears to be correlated with
other differences of structure, inasmuch as M. Perrier hesitates to
include A. verticillatus in the same genus with A. odbtusus; the
male generative pores in the former species are upon the 17th
and 18th segments and are not separated by an intercalated segment
as in the Jatter and all the other species of the genus at present
known. On either’side of the buccal lobe, and consequently between
the first and second segments of the body, is a single pore; these
may perhaps correspond to the single median dorsal pore which is
the only orifice of the kind found in the Oligocheta limicole.
The celitellum was fully developed in several specimens, and
extended from the 13th to the 17th segments inclusive, with the
exception of a portion of the 13th segment; the glandular tissue
composing the clitellum was only visible on the posterior half of that
segment ; the clitellum extends occasionally for a short distance on
to the 18th segment. The anterior region of the clitellum down to
the 15th segment completely encircles the body ; the 17th and 18th
segments, on the contrary, have a very considerable median area upon
which there is no glandular development ; the lateral margins of this
? Perrier, “Recherches pour servir alhistoire des Lombriciens terrestres,”
Nouy. Arch. d. Muséum, t. viii. (1872) p. 85.
* I have reckoned the first seta-bearing segment as the second segment of the
body, in common with the majority of naturalists who have studied this group.
* P.Z.S. 1885, p. 813. * Loe. cit. p. 93.
Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1886, No. XII. 12
170 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. [ Mar. 16,
area are bounded by the ventral pair of setz; this area, which is
distinguished by its very pale colour, surrounds the male genital
apertures, which are upon the 17th and 19th segments respectively
(see fig. 2). In A. ungulatus the clitellum extends from 14-17
inclusive and the male genital apertures are upon the 18th and
20th segments ; in A. obfusus the clitellum is unknown, the male
genital pores are upon the 19th and 21st segments.
Dorsal pores are stated by Perrier to be present in his two species ;
in my species they are present and commence apparently at the 13th
or 14th segment ; in one specimen the first dorsal pore was visible
between the 12th and 13th segments, in a second specimen this pore
was a segment further back. I have figured these apertures as
extending over the clitellum, since they were visible on these
segments in immature examples without a clitellum; when the
clitellum was present they were apparently absent or, rather, perhaps
rendered invisible by the swollen glandular integument.
In Acanthodrilus multiporus (see P. Z.8. 1885, pt. iv. p. 810) I
observed dorsal pores commencing after the clitellum, the first pore
marking the posterior boundary of that region of the integument.
In Acanthodrilus dissimilis and A. nove zelandie they appear to be
present though very inconspicuous; I only noted them after the
clitellum.
In the furrows separating segments 7-8 and 8-9 were a pair of
distinct rounded apertures corresponding to the inferior pairs of
sete ; these are the apertures of the copulatory pouches. The pair
of setee on segment 8 were in most instances greatly modified,
being much larger and more conspicuous than the other sete of the
body ; their appearance is very like that of the genital sete on
segments 17 and 19.
In describing the structure of the genital organs I shall call
attention to those setze which correspond to internal structures entirely
novel in this genus.
The ordinary setz of the body are distributed in pairs as in other
species of the genus.
The apertures of the nephridia are very conspicuous and correspoud
in every case to the more dorsal pair of sete.
The female generative pores are displayed in fig. 2; they are a
pair of very minute pores situated on the 14th segment in front
of and to the inside of the ventral pair of sete; their position is
nearly similar to the corresponding pores of A. nove zelandie ; they
are on the same segment as in that species, where, however, the pores
are placed in front of the outermost of the two ventral sete. In
Acanthodrilus capensis I find the female generative pores are upon
the 14th segment and the ovaries in the 13th segment, and not,
as erroneously stated in my paper on that species’, in the segment
anterior to these; in the present species, however, the pores are
placed in front of the innermost of the two ventral setz.
Vascular System.—In fig. 7 of Plate XIX. isillustrated the main
vascular trunks of the anterior region of the body. The dorsal vessel
1 Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. 1885-6, p. 369.
1856.] MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. 171
(d), which is a single tube, and not composed of two separate or
incompletely fused halves as in A. multiporus* and other Earthworms,
communicates with the ventral vessel by seven transverse hearts (/)
situated in segments 8-14 inclusive—a pair to each segment. The
first three pairs are of less calibre than the following four, and appear
to arise simply from the dorsal vessel; the four posterior pairs of
hearts communicate also with a small supra-intestinal vessel, which,
as shown in the figure (sz), lies beneath the dorsal vessel but above
the intestine ; in the anterior part of the body a pair of lateral vessels
(/) supply the body-wall; in the 11th or 12th segment these vessels
pass beneath the intestine and unite to form a single subintestinal
vessel. This vessel appears to be continuous posteriorly with a
vascular space within the walls of the alimentary canal. Each of
the two anterior pairs of hearts supplies the spermatheca of its
own segment; a strong branch arises from the vessel just before
it unites with the ventral vessel, and a corresponding branch from the
latter is also distributed to the spermatheca.
Body-cavity.—The body-cavity, as in all other Earthworms, is
divided into segments by mesenteries which extend from side to side
of the body ; in the six anterior segments the mesenteries are more
or less distinct, but there are in addition a number of muscular
bands and tendinous-looking threads which bend the pharynx down
to the body-wall, often passing through the mesenteries on their
way; the gizzard and a portion of the anterior region of the
cesophagus are only attached to the body-wall by a very few slight
threads, mesenteries being absent in this region of the body. The
mesentery which bounds the tenth segment behind and the succeeding
four mesentries are specially thickened and muscular.
Nephridia.—TYhere is a very considerable variation in the cha-
racters of the nephridia in this genus, and I have already* referred
to what has been written on the subject. In the present species
the nephridia (fig. 6, 2) are very conspicucus, especially in the anterior
region of the body as far back as the 19th segment or thereabouts ;
in the posterior segments they are present but appear to differ
slightly, principally in size, from the anteriorly placed nephridia.
The external apertures are plainly visible in front of the dorsal pair
of setz in all the seta-bearing segments of the body ; that is to say,
the first segment of the body appears to be without nephridia and
cnly this segment. The glandular portion of the nephridium forms
a closely packed tuft of tubules which has much the appearance
of the nepbridia in those species of Pericheta* in which these
organs have been described ; this glandular tuft lies in the region
of the ventral pair of setze and close to the mesentery which forms
the anterior wall of its segment ; the nephridium communicates with
the exterior by a long, widish, thin-walled duct.
bord
1 See F. E. Beddard “On the paired Dorsal Vessel of certain Earthworms.”
Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. 1884-5, p. 424.
2 P. Z.S. 1885, p. 822.
* E. g. Pericheta indica, Horst, Niederl. Arch. f. Zool. Bd. iv. (1879),
pl. viii. fig. 3, x.
12*
172 MR. ¥F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. [Mar. 16,
Generative System.—In the 12th segment are a pair of glands
attached firmly to the mesentery which separates this segment from
the one anterior to it; in two specimens these glands were paired,
while in a third only the left-hand one of the two was present; in
one specimen these glands have a racemose structure, and although
a microscopic examination did not reveal any structure, I have
little doubt that these glands are testes. Out of the seven examples
at my disposal one specimen possessed a similar pair of glands in
the 11th segment in addition to those found in the 12th segment ;
in all the remaining specimens save one, which was small and
immature, the 10th segment (that which follows the segment con-
taining the posterior pair of spermathecz) has a pair of glandular-
looking bodies which are very similar in general appearance to the
structures which I have regarded as the testes; they are attached,
however, to the posterior wall of their segment, which, as in other
Earthworms, is not separated by a mesentery from the 9th segment;
these two segments, which are thus fused, contain the gizzard.
The fact that these glands are attached to the posterior and not
to the anterior wall of their segment is perhaps against the view
that they represent an anterior pair of testes; at the same time it
happens that the segment in which they occur has no anterior wall,
being fused with the preceding 9th segment; these glands were
not present in the only specimen that had two pairs of testes. In
Acanthodrilus capensis’ there are three pairs of testes situated in
segments 10, 11, and 12; but out of a number of examples that
I dissected only one had the three pairs developed. There is therefore
nothing unusual in supposing that the present species, like 4. capensis,
has three pairs of testes, although all the other species that are known
appear to have only two pairs. On the other hand, the gland in
segment 10 is very similar to a curious structure which exists in 4.
capensis ina similar position, 7. e. attached to the posterior wall of the
segment. In this species, however, the gizzard happens to be placed
in front of the copulatory pouches, and not in the segment which
contains them; so that the two pairs of pouches are separated from
each other and from the following segments by fully developed
mesenteries, which, as already stated, is not the case with the species
that forms the subject of the present communication ; in this species
the gizzard lies in the 9th and 10th segments. If, however, these
structures correspond to those recorded by me in A. capensis, it is
no explanation of their nature ; in neither case is their function at all
evident.
The vasa deferentia were not visible. Each of the four male genital
apertures are furnished with a long sac containing a number of
penial sete which open on to the exterior in common with the duct
of along coiled prostate gland, which appears to be similar in structure
to the prostates of A. obtusus*; on the other hand, the characters
1 Proc. Roy. Phys. Soe. loc. cit. p. 3875. I have written 11, 12, and 13 in
error ; the oyaries,as I have been able to assure myself by a subsequent examin-
ation, are in segment 13, and so presumably the testes are in the three segments
anterior to that which contains the ovaries, viz. in segments 10, 11, 12.
2 Perrier, loc, cit. p. 88.
1886.] MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. 173
of the penial setae agree with those of A. ungulatus as described by
Perrier '.
The ovaries and oviducts I have been unable to find.
There are two pairs of spermathece situated in segments 8 and 9 ;
each consists of a spherical thin-walled sac communicating with the
exterior by a long stout-walled duct which is often curved (see
figs. 5 and 6, cp); at the upper extremity of the duct, where it unites
with the sac, it becomes somewhat bulged out on one side, though
there is hardly so marked a diverticulum as is figured by Perrier
in A. ungulatus”.
A very characteristic and remarkable series of structures now
remain to be described, before concluding the account of the genera-
tive system. In describing the external characters attention was drawn
to the modification of the lowermost pair of sete in segment 8; the
ordinary sete, at any rate on one side of the bedy, have disappeared
and are replaced by a conspicuous orifice through which protrude
one or more stout long set, which appear on a naked-eye inspection
to be very similar to those which project through the male genera-
tive pores. Fig. 5 of Pl. XIX. represents the internal structures
which correspond to these peculiarly modified setz; the latter are con-
tained in a thin-walled transparent sac (s) precisely as are the genital
sete ; on either side of this sac is a long somewhat sausage-shaped
glandular body (g.4), which communicates by a slender duct with
the orifice through which the sete project on to the exterior. The
presence of these glands renders the whole structure more similar
still to the male generative pore, except that the “ prostates” are
paired. These structures were only present on the left side of the
body in one specimen; in two others they were only developed on
the right side; in two other specimens both immature, without a
clitellum, these structures were entirely absent on both sides of
the body; ina sixth specimen, which was also immature, with the
elitetum undeveloped and with very minute spermathecee, the bundle
of modified setze was plainly visible on both sides of the body, but
without its accessory glands; in the seventh specimen, also imma-
ture, there was no vestige whatever of these structures ; wherever
they were absent the setze of the segment were perfectly nurmal.
I am not aware that any structures of this kind have been
described in any other species of the genus or in any other Earth-
worm; they appear to be novel to the group. At the same time
Perrier figures some structures in A. uxgulatus* which may be
identical, though the figure and his description are insufficient ; the
description (p. 92) is as follows :—‘ Les poches copulatrices sont
situées aux anneaux huit et dix. Chacune est munie d’un lobe
postérieur, assez petit, et n’a pas d’autre appendice. Dans le neuviéme
anneau se voient plusieurs sacs glandulaires, séparés par une glande
multifide”’ The details are evidently different from the structures
that I have just described, but the similarity of position, between
the two spermathecze, renders it possible that they are identical ; in
1 Los, cit. p. 90, pL ii. figs. 21, 22.
* Loe. cit. pl. ii. fig. 20. 3 Loe, eit. pl. it fig. 18, x.
174 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. [Mar. 16,
my spec‘es, however, these structures are in the same segment as that
which contains the anterior spermatheca and are not in a segment
intercalated between those which contain the anterior.and posterior
pairs of spermathece respectively. One of the sete is displayed
in the drawing (fig. 3), and the lower extremity, more highly
magnified, in another drawing (fig. 4); the general aspect of these
setee is very similar to that of the penial setee. The seta is curved
slightly towards the extremity; its thickness diminishes gradually
until near to the distal extremity, where it becomes again thicker
and terminates in a swollen brush-like extremity, the exact shape
of which can be gathered from an inspection of the figure. The
distal extremity of the seta is ornamented with delicate transverse
ridges projecting like the edges of scales and denticulated.
In Luméricus Hering’ has described, and Vejdovsky * confirmed
for other species, the modification of certain of the sete in the
neighbourhood of the genital orifices ; those of the ventral pair in
“the 10th, 15th, orone of the neighbouring segments, and furthermore
in the region of the 26th segment and on the clitellum from segment
31 to segment 38 ”: these sete are more slender than, and double the
length of, the ordinary sete of the body. In the work referred to
Vejdovsky goes on to point out that the penial setee in Aeanthodrilus
and other genera probably correspond to these and differ from the
genital setze of Chetogaster &c., which are developed during the
breeding-season in the neighbourhood of the ordinary locomotor
set, and in addition to them ; the penial setee of Acanthodrilus
replace the ordinary locomotor sete. Since in Lumbricus the
modified setze developed in the generative segments are not confined
to a single segment. or even to the segments bordering upon the
male generative pores, it is perhaps not surprising to find that in the
present species of Acanthodrilus there are additional sacs of penial
setee besides those normally found in the 17th and 19th segments
of the body. The modified sete of Lumbricus are also furnished
with a gland which projects into the body-cavity; these are appar-
ently the capsulogenous glands of D’Udekem and Lankester, which
are the equivalents of the setigerous glands, being simply enlarged in
order to assist in the generative function. In Acanthodrilus multi-
porus I have figured a pair of glands * corresponding to the setz
which are probably the homologues of these glands, and I imagine
that in the species of which the present note treats the two large
glands related to the modified setee of segment 8 are in all proba-
bility to be referred to the same category and are not special
structures.
After the foregoing notes.on the structure of this Earthworm I
may briefly refer to those points which seem to indicate that it is
a distinct species differing from both the other two Acanthodrili
which inhabit New Caledonia. With regard to external characters
it appears to agree with A. ungulatus in the segments occupied
1 Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. viii. p. 418.
? System und Morphologie der Oligochxten (Prag, 1884), pp. 156-7.
Ann. Se. Nat. 7° série, t. xix. pl. i. fig. 6 4.
wo
P. 2:9. 3886, Fl aie
Mintern Bros. imp.
ACANTHODRILUS LAYARDI1.
1886.] MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. 175
by the clitellum, but to differ from both this and A. odtusus in
the position of the male generative pores. The genital sete of
the 17th and 19th segments are almost exactly like those of
A. ungulatus, but the prostate glands, asin A. obtusus, are cylindrical
coiled tubes and not multilobate glands as in A. ungulatus ; at the
same time the prostate glands in several examples of my species are
so closely coiled that they present an appearance which might easily
be mistaken for that which has been stated by M. Perrier to be
characteristic of A. ungulatus ; it is just possible that the condition of
the specimen dissected by M. Perrier may be responsible for the lobed
appearance of the prostate glands. Another difference between my
species and A, ungulatus is in the spermathecee, which can hardly
be said to have a diverticulum, and are in segments 8 and 9, not 8
and 10. The structures lying between the two spermathece of
each side may, as I have already suggested, be identical with that
described above, but evidently differ in detail. The most important
difference between the species described here by myself and those of
M. Perrier is undoubtedly in the position of the male generative
pores ; in so many species—in fact in all except A. obtusus, A. verti-
eillatus, and A. ungulatus—the male generative pores are upon the
17th and 19th segments’.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIX.
Fig. 1. Acanthodrilus layardi; anterior region of body, dorsal aspect.
2. Segments 13-20, from ventral side, to show position of female generative
pores upon 14th, and the male generative pores upon 17th and 19th
segments. The clitellum is indicated by shading.
3. Genital spicule from segment 8, magnified.
4. The lower extremity of the same, more highly magnified.
5, Spermathece and accessory genital glands: cp, spermathece ; v, ventral
blood-vessels giving off branch to the spermatheca ; a corresponding
branch is also given off from lateral heart; s, sac containing modified
setae (figs. 5, 4); g.6, glandular bodies opening in common with seta
sac; 7, glandular tufts of nephridium ; 2’, duct of nephridium.
. Anterior region of body dissected : cp, spermathece ; 7, nephridia.
. Principal vascular trunks of anterior region: d, dorsal vessel ; s7, supra-
intestinal; v, ventral ; 7, lateral; , ‘ hearts.”
bee Or)
' Referring to my paper already quoted upon the New-Zealand species of
the genus, I find that the male generative pores are there stated to be upon the
16th and 18th segments. A reexamination of the specimens has convinced me
that that statement is wrong, and that they are, as in the present species, upon
the 17th and 19th segments, while the spermathecs are in the 8th and 9th seg-
ments as indicated in the woodcut (P. Z. S. 1885, fig. 1, p. 815).
Should the specimens to which the present note relates prove to belong to a
distinct species from either of those described by Perrier, I propose to term the
species Acanthodrilus layardt.
176 ANIMALS COMMENSAL OR PARASITIC [Apr. 6,
April 6, 1886.
Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair.
The Secretary read the following report on the additions to the
Society’s Menagerie during the month of March 1886 :—
_ The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of March was 121. Of these 6 were by
birth, 58 by presentation, 11 by purchase, 1 by exchange and 45 were
received on deposit. The total number of departures during the same
period, by death and removals, was 127.
The most noticeable additions during the month were :—
1. A second specimen of the Rough-billed Pelican of North
America (Pelecanus trachyrhynchus)', purchased March 2nd.
2. An example of the White-tailed Ichneumon (Herpestes albi-
cauda) from Lamoo, East Africa, presented by F. J. Jackson, Esq.,
F.Z.S., March 4th.
The Secretary exhibited, on behalf of J. B. Martin, Esq., F.Z.S.,
a large tusk of the Indian Elephant (E/ephas indicus) belonging to
the executors of the late Charles Reade, of which the length was
stated to be 6 feet, and the weight over 100 pounds. The tusk
was stated to have belonged to a ‘‘ rogue Elephant” which had ouly
one tusk, and which had been killed at Goruckpore in 1836, when
the late Charles Reade was magistrate there.
Mr. Sclater exhibited the heads and horns of two species of
Antelopes received by Lord Walsingham from Mr, F. J. Jackson,
F.Z.8., having been obtained in the vicinity of Lamoo, East Africa.
One of these belong to an adult specimen of Strepsiceros imberbis,
Blyth; the two others to Damalis senegalensis, which, so far as
Mr. Sclater knew, had not been previously obtained in this district.
Strepsiceros imberbis had been already met with as far south as the
Juba River on this coast *.
Dr. H. Woodward exhibited specimens of animals commensal
or parasitic in the shell of Meleagrina margaritifera, the Pearl-
mussel, from the north coast of Australia, and read the following
notes :—
« The Pearl-shell fishery is now a recognized and important branch
of the commerce of Western Australia, and also of Queensland and
South Australia, which Colonies own the rights of the northern
shores of that vast continent.
“Mr. Thomas Harry Haynes has given me much interesting
information regarding the pearl-shell fishery carried on by him and
? For uotice of previous specimen see P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 4638, plate xlyi.
2 See P. Z. 8S. 1884, p. 45.
1886.] IN MELEAGRINA MARGARITIFERA. 177
his partners on the N.W. coast of Australia, and has submitted
many shells to me which had been attacked by lithodomous Mol-
lusea, or by worms and the burrows of Cliona.
“Some of these I have now the pleasure toexhibit. I have, more-
over, to-day been permitted by Prof. Flower to examine a still more
interesting specimen which he has just received from Henry Willett,
Esq., F.G.S., of Arnold House, Brighton.
“Tt is that of aspecimen of Pinnxotheres which has been entombed
in a cyst of pearl by a living pearl-mussel, into the shell of which
he had ventured to intrude.
**Tt seems extraordinary and beyond belief that the Meleagrina
should of all the Conchifera be the one to resent the commensalism
of the Pea-crab, which has been known since the days of Cicero,
Pliny, Oppian, and Aristotle to inhabit the shell of the Pinna and
the Oyster, and has been recorded from Astarte, Pectunculus, and at
least some half-dozen other bivalves, with whom it appears to live on
the most friendly terms.
“Tt is the females, however, which constantly reside within the
shells of the Conchifera, whilst the males are said to avail them-
selves of favourable opportunities to visit the females in their
retirement.
‘** Whether or not in this case the unlucky male intruded himself
upon Meleagrina at an unfavourable period, and finding no female
Pinnotheres, penetrated so far beneath the mantle of the Pearl-mussel
as to be unable to retreat, one thing is quite clear, namely that the
Meleagrina entombed the intruder in a cyst of pearl from which the
clever pearl-button maker alone liberated him.
“ There is alargeseries of Pinnotheresin the Museum: the one from
Australia is referred to P. orientalis, but as these are all females
comparison is useless. These are from shells of Pinna, Donax, and
Pectunculus. ‘There are others from Broken Bay.
“ Prof. Dana, U.S. Expl. Expedition, 1852, part i. text, pp. 380—
381, and Atlas, pl. 24. fig. 3, describes a species under the name of
P, obesa from Fiji Islands. The male, however, is said to be slightly
broader than long, and the eyes (which in the adult female are quite
hidden beneath the overreaching and protuberant carapace) can be
seen in the upper view, and the front of the carapace is emarginated
by the orbits. (Size 4? lines long, and 63 broad.)
“Mr. Willett’s specimen is slightly longer than broad, and in size
agrees very nearly with the male of P. pisum, which was formerly
deseribed by Leach as P. latreillei.”
The following papers were read :—
178 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [Apr. 6,
1. On some Points in the Anatomy of Chauna chavaiia. By
Frank E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., F.Z.S., Prosector
to the Society.
[Received March 15, 1886.]
Prof. Garrod has contributed to the ‘ Proceedings’ of this Society
some notes upon the anatomy, more particularly of the soft parts, of
Chauna derbiana'. The recent death of one of the Society’s specimens
of Chauna chavaria has enabled me to sapplement Prof. Garrod’s
observations by some notes on the structure of the second species of
Chauna. As might have been expected, there are no great differences
between the ia) species; and with the exception of the colic caeca
and the distribution of the tracheal muscles, all the statements made
by Garrod apply equally well to the present species ; with regard to
the visceral anatomy I am not able to institute a detailed compari-
son between the two species, since certain of the facts which I
shall describe in the present paper have not been referred to by
Garrod in his account of Chauna derbiana. To these facts I have
paid particular attention in order to render more complete our know-
ledge of this interesting bird.
dir-sacs, §e—On opening the body-cavity it was seen to be
completely separated into a right and left half by a vertical septum
attached above to the sternum and the ventral wall of the abdomen,
and below to a horizontal fibrous septum which will be presently
described. ‘This vertical septum anteriorly separates the two lobes
of the liver and runs as far forward as the pericardium; _ it
corresponds to the umbilical ligament, a structure which has not
usually so great an extent in birds; more generally the umbilical
ligament only extends as far back as the gizzard and terminates in a
semicircular free posterior margin. In Chauna this vertical ligament
bears a blood-vessel which joins the portal system anteriorly and
posteriorly divides into two trunks, one of which passes further
back than the other; this vessel is situated near the dorsal attach-
ment of the septum. The horizontal septum is an extremely thick
brown-coloured membrane which passes across the abdominal cavity
from side to side, and completely covers the coils of the intestine,
being attached laterally to the walls of the abdomen. This tough
brown membrane corresponds to a structure described by Weldon
(P. Z.S8. 1883, p. 640) in the Storks, and by myself (P. Z.S. 1885,
p- 841) in the Cranes and other birds. This horizontal membrane
when it reaches the gizzard splits into two layers which form a
complete covering to that organ ; between it and the gizzard, on the
inferior surface of the latter, are numerons air-spaces which were
easily distended by inflating the air-sacs.
The relations of the abdominal viscera are therefore, so far as the
presence of this horizontal septum is concerned, indicative of an
affinity with the Storks and Cranes, and more particularly with the
* «Collected Papers,’ p. 318.
1886. ] ANATOMY OF CHAUNA CHAVARIA. 179
former group, since the lobes of the liver are not shut off by septa
from the space which lies between the horizontal membrane and the
ventral abdominal walls. In the Cranes, as in the Struthious birds,
the lobes of the liver are enclosed in separate compartments distinct
from that underlying the horizontal membrane (cf. P. Z.S. 1885,
p. 836).
There are other points in which Chauna approaches the Storks,
In the paper already referred tc, Weldon has drawn attention to a
peculiarity in the air-sacs of the Storks which appears to be
characteristic of this group, and is at any rate not to be found in
the Ducks. The prebronchial air-sacs (in the Storks and Pheeni-
copterus) are divided by a complicated arrangement of transverse
septa into smaller chambers.
In Chauna chavaria this subdivision of the preebronchial air-sacs
is very much more marked, and the subbronchial air-sacs, which in the
Storks and many other birds are fused into a single cavity, are in the
same way divided up into an immense number of extremely small
chambers, so that the whole air-sac presents the appearance of a
crowd of air-bubbles closely pressed together of various sizes. It
was quite impossible on this account to distinguish the prebronchial
from the postbranchial sacs, that is to say at the points where they
come into contact.
The prolongations of the subbronchial air-sacs into the axilla and
into the space between the two pectoral muscles were similarly sub-
divided by innumerable septa.
There appeared to be nothing remarkable in the disposition of the
abdominal air-sacs, and there were no indications of any subdivision
of these charmbers; the anterior intermediate air-sac cominunicates
with the bronchus by two apertures placed side by side and at some
distance from each other near the anterior end of the. chamber;
in the posterior intermediate sac, which was considerably the larger
of the two, there was only a single pulmonary orifice.
The abdominal air-sacs present the usual character—the right
being considerably larger than the left.
It appears to be the general rule that the thoracico-abdominal air-
sacs are not divided up in the way that the cervical air-sacs are in
Chauna and in the Storks; but I have met with occasional variations
in the structure of their air-sacs in some few out of the numerous
birds which I have had the opportunity of dissecting. In Steatornis
I have already (supra, p. 151) called attention to the fact that
the posterior intermediate air-sac was either completely separated
into two distinct compartments or had indications of such a division ;
in a specimen of Striv flammea there was a similar division of the
posterior air-sac, at least on one side of the body. The third instance
is Platalea leucorodia ; in a specimen of this bird, on both sides of the
body there were three ‘intermediate ”’ air-sacs, the third being very
small and interpolated between the anterior and posterior intermediate
sacs. This may of course be an abnormality’; but the air-sacs of
birds differ so little that any fact seems worth recording ; and the
* A second specimen had the normal number of abdominal air-sacs.
(o2)
ON THE ANATOMY OF CHAUNA CHAVARIA.
[Apr. 6,
Will, I} i} 1)
Mi LL
Crea of Chauna chavaria.
ee Or eee fas of i,
1886. | ON A BRACHIOPOD OF THE GENUS ATRETIA. 181
fact that the modification of the posterior air-sacs in Platalea was
carried out on doth sides of the body perhaps shows it to be a
characteristic of the bird.
Alimentary Canal.—The ceca of Chauna chavaria appear to differ
slightly from those of Chauna derbiana, the most noticeable difference
being that they are not symmetrical in the former species ; the right
cecum is slightly longer than the left, and is of a uniform conical
shape, tapering slightly to the free extremity ; it measured 33 inches
from the tip to the junction with the ilium ; the left cecum measured
as nearly as possible 3 inches. The left czecum also differs in its shape,
as may be seen by an inspection of the accompanying drawing
(p. 180); its proximal half is about equal in diameter to that of the
right caecum, but instead of tapering gradually it narrows abruptly
into the distal half, which is of about the thickness of the little
finger.
In the /iver the right lobe is larger than the left lobe, and, as in
the other species, there is a large gall-bladder the duct of which
opens into the duodenum below the hepatic duct ; the pancreatic
duct is the most anterior of the three.
Trachea.—The extrinsic muscles of the syrinx are somewhat
differently disposed from those of Chauna derbiana; as in that
species, there are two pairs ; the most anterior spreads out in a fau-like
manner upon a tough membrane which connects the coracoid and
clavicle; this muscle is therefore attached exactly as is its homologue
in Ch. derbiana. The posterior pair of muscles are, however, not
attached to the costal process of the sternum as in Ch. derbiana, but
terminate upon the aponeurosis of the lung just behind the exit of
the pulmonary vein. The syrinx itself does not appear to me to be
worth a special description or figure, as it agrees in every particular
with that of Ch. derbiana.
2. On a Brachiopod of the Genus Afretia, named in MS.
by the late Dr. T. Davidson. By Miss Acnrs Crane.
(Communicated by Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S.)
[Received March 15, 1886. ]
In July last the late Dr. Thomas Davidson, F.R.S., received from
Mr. John Brazier, of Sydney, a gift of an interesting series of
Brachiopoda dredged by him in the waters of Port Stephens and
Port Jackson, New South Wales. When, in January 1886, it became
my duty to select the remaining specimens from the Davidson
collection necessary for the illustration of Parts 2 and 3 of Dr.
Davidson’s forthcoming Monograph on Recent Brachiopoda, these
Australian specimens were not found incorporated with his collection
of living species. Possibly it was Dr. Davidson’s intention to describe
them in aseparate paper. In February, when the collection of recent
and fossil Brachiopoda (which, in accordance with Dr. Davidson’s
182 MISS A. CRANE ON A BRACHIOPOD [Apr. 6,
desire, were presented to the nation) were removed to the Geological
Department of the Natural History Branch of the British Museum
at South Kensington, where he wished them to be deposited, Mr.
Brazier’s series was found apart from the recent specimens with the
fossil collection. Each species had been placed ina separate box
with a number inside, and this number was found to correspond with
Mr. Brazier’s list, which Dr. Davidson had copied into bis letter-
book with his remarks appended. The executor instructed me
temporarily to retain the series for examination.
One very interesting new species of the remarkable genus Aéretia
was discovered. This Dr. Davidson had named after his friend
and correspondent Mr. John Brazier, of Sydney, who has dredged
so extensively in Australian waters. The name 4Aéretia brazieri
was attached in Dr. Davidson’s handwriting. The specimens
are so excellent that there can be no possibility of generic error
on my part, and I have therefore thought it my duty to publish
a short description of Afretia brazier’, Dav., n. sp. MS., to secure
priority for his last species, which should be figured in Part IT. of
the Davidson Monograph of Recent Brachiopoda which I am now
engaged in editing for the Transactions of the Linnean Society.
Alretia, as its name implies, is an imperforate genus. It may be
as well briefly to recapitulate the history of the type species, first
published by Dr. Gwyn Jeffreys under the name Cryptopora gnomon
in ‘Nature’ for Dec. 1869. In the ‘Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.’
1876, Jeffreys gave the earliest description of the species, substituting
the generic name Atretia for Cryplopora; Dr. Davidson gave the first
figures in his Supplement to the “ Recent and Tertiary British
Brachiopoda” (Pal. Soc. 1874), and again illustrated the species in one
of the two plates he contributed to Dr. Jeffreys’s paper on “ The Mol-
lusca (Brachiopoda) of the ‘ Lightning’ and ‘Porcupine’ Expeditions,”
published in the Proc. Zool. Suc., April 1878. Atretia gnomon
was dredged off the west coast of Ireland in from 1380-1443 fws. ;
during the ‘Valorous’ expedition, 1100-1750 fms., in Davis Straits.
It was found by Dr. Friele (during the Norwegian Arctic expedition)
about 30 miles W. of Tromsé, in 650 fms., ‘‘on the slope of the
banks cold area.”’? It was dredged off Marocco and the Canaries at
depths of 50-65 fms., by the‘ Talisman’ and French expeditions. In
all more than fifty examples of the European representative of this
well-marked Rhynchonelloid have been obtained by Jeffreys, Friele,
and the Marquis de Folin.
M. Eugéne Deslongchamps, in his ‘ Etudes Critiques sur des
Brachiopodes nouveaux ou peu connus,’ p. 242 (Caen, 1884),
expresses an opinion that déretia gnomon, Jeffr., is probably only a
very young stage of R. psittacea, Chemn. But the recent discovery
by Mr. Brazier of eleven good specimens of the genus Atrefia in
the Southern Pacific Ocean, off the coast of New South Wales, tends
to invalidate that assumption, the only Rhynchonelle in the
Australian and Novo-Zelandian region being the deeply ribbed
or furrowed RA. nigricans and its variety, 2. pyxidata, Boog- Watson.
To these well-characterized forms Atretia braziert, smooth, flat,
1886. | OF THE GENUS ATRETIA. 183
and compressed, bears no resemblance whatever, and exhibits at all
ages definite generic characters *.
ATRETIA BRAZIERI, Sp. nov.
Description.—This pretty little Brachiopod presents all the well-
marked characteristics of the genus, two short curved slender
processes, denticulated at their extremities, descend from the small
narrow hinge-plate of the smaller dorsal valve, and an elevated wedge-
shaped projection rises abruptly from the central mesial septum of
the same valve. The presence of this septum is indicated by a dark
line visible from the exterior of the shell. The shell is small,
generally longer than wide, triangular in shape, especially in the
younger specimens. Dorsal valve rounder and not so large as the
ventral one, slightly flexucus towards the centre at the margins of
the valves. The ventral valve, owing to the prolongation of the
beak area, is longer and more triangular than the dorsal one raised
towards the beak, which is slightly produced and incurved, with a
triangular foramen commencing beneath its pointed extremity. Two
elevated ridges extend from the shoulder of the shell nearly to the
margins of the valves, and there seems to be a slight elevation
corresponding with the well-marked exterior depression and sur-
rounded by muscular scars (?) in the exteriors of the ventral valves
of two specimens I have examined under magnifying-powers. The
shell is shallow towards the margins, but rounded and deeper near
the beak. Shell-substance imperforate ; surface smooth, glossy, and
gleaming, marked with fine concentric lines of growth ; semitrans-
parent. Horn-coloured or light grey.
Length 27 lines; width 14 line; depth about 1 line. Another
specimen measured 2 lines in length by 2} in width; this was more
flattened and depressed, and the external mesial sinus in the ventral
valve was less marked. Other specimens were about | line in length.
Station and Depth.—Eleven specimens and odd valves were
dredged in twenty-five fathoms in sandy mud off Cabbage-Tree
Island, Port Stephens, N.S.W., by Mr. John Brazier, who sent five
specimens to Dr. Davidson, with the remark that they differed from
all other known Brachiopoda from Australian waters.
Obs.—Dr. Davidson commemorated Mr. Brazier’s discovery by
naming the species after him, and I have deemed it my duty to my old
and valued friend to describe the species under the name he desired
to give it, as well as I am able. In so doing I wish to call the
attention of qualified conchologists thereto, and to place on record
the wide geographical distribution of the genus Afretia, which we
now know to range in from 25-1750 fathoms, from nearly 70° N.
? Norr.—I communicated the discovery of the Australian A/retia to the Nor-
Wegian naturalist, Herr Herman Friele, whu replied, April 19th, that my
description of the skeleton of A. brazieri is quite typical of the genus Afretia,
which he cannot consider to be the young of Rhynchonella. He adds the im-
portant fact that he obtained some fifty specimens of the Atretia gnomon, Jetffr.,
during the Norwegian North-Atlantic Expedition, but no Rhynchonella occurred
on the same station or in corresponding depths.—Agnes Crane, April 26th.
184 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6,
lat., in the Arctic Ocean to the Canaries in the South Atlantic, and
as far as lat. 32° south of the Equator in the Southern Pacific
Ocean. The specimens will eventually be placed in the Davidson
Collection in the British Museum.
P.S.—Since my paper on Atretia brazieri was writtten, I have
submitted with my friend Mr. J. E. Haselwood, F. R. Mier. Soc.,
all the specimens of Afrefia to microscopic examination. Under a
ten-inch power the beak-area deltidial plates present some imma-
ture features similar to those figured by Morse in his ‘ Embryology
of Terebratulina. The scaly structure of the shell is very apparent ;
there are no perforations. We observed two long slender narrow
muscular sears, with a diamond-shaped central one in the interior of
a ventral valve. The marginal borders of the largest specimen seemed
raised or swollen. The most puzzling appearance occurs on some
brown patches on the shell, consisting of circular and elongated sac-~
like aggregations. If these bodies are a feature of the shell-structure,
it seems strange they should be visible in portions of the surface
only’. 1 hope further to investigate the matter.
3. Observations on the Disposition of the Cubital Coverts in
Birds. By J. G. Goopncuitp, F.Z.S., F.G.S., H.M.
Geological Survey.
[Received March 16, 1886.]
The prominent position occupied by the cubital coverts in most
living birds renders their correct delineation a point of so much
importance in any figure intended for zoological purposes that it is
perhaps hardly necessary to offer any apology for submitting a few
observations upon that subject for the consideration of the Fellows
of this Society. Both ornithologists and zoological artists have, of
course, long been aware of the existence of considerable diversity both
in the relative proportions and in the mode of arrangement of these
feathers in various groups of birds; but it seems never to have
occurred to any one that these variations are of such a nature as to
admit of their being reduced to any system of classification. This
oversight may be due to the fact that the specimens made use of for
scientific purposes have necessarily been either spirit-specimens or
else skins flat or mounted. In the case of the skins especially, such
specimens cannot, as a rule, be at all depended upon as repre-
senting the natural order of the feathers in a living state; and
consequently ornithologists have been led to believe that the subject
under notice was not worth any serious attention. But a careful
1 Norz.—More prolonged examination by daylight with different powersp
showed these appearances to result from the partial overlapping of the cycloidal
scales of the shell-structure. The presence of parallel rows of spicular pro-
jections was clearly revealed in the interior of the valves; these occur at
regular distances from each other, running-from the beak towards the margins
of the valves.—Aeners Crane, April 26th.
1886. ] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 185
comparison of the features presented by a large series of living birds,
in good health, or of freshly-killed wild birds, leads to a different
conclusion. These show that a particular mode of arrangement, or
a particular order of overlap, of the median cubital coverts is
practically constant for all the individuals of the same species. More
extended observations show that the same general mode of disposition
is as a rule characteristic of all the species of a genus, and may even
be found throughout all the members of groups larger than that.
A reference to the wing of the Golden Plover, a central type, and
one that in itself represents all the leading modifications (see
fig. 1, p. 186), may help to make the nomenclature herein used
more intelligible. [In drawing up this scheme I have availed myself
of several suggestions made to me by Prof. Flower, and by my
colleague Mr. E. T. Newton, after the paper was read before the
Society.] The terms used refer mainly to the relations of various
parts of the wing to each other and to the body axis, when the wing
is extended and is viewed from the dorsal or upper surface. The
wing-surface is primarily divided into the manual (primary) region
and the cubital (secondary) region, this last embracing all the
feathers that originate from any part of the forearm or cubitus. Of
the manual region I have nothing that need now be discussed. In the
cubital region the Remiges, and the Greater Coverts that come on
next above them, are uniform in disposition in all Carinate birds.
In these feathers the overlap is uniformly distal ; that is to say, the
several feathers are disposed in such a manner that the outer free
edges of those nearer the vertebral axis overlap the inner edges of
those originating nearer the distal extremity of the wing. The same
observation applies also (but with some minor modifications of detail
that will not now be taken into consideration) to the Lesser Coverts,
or those feathers that mainly originate in the Patagium, and that
extend along the anterior border of the wing from the humeral fold
to the carpal joint. The remaining feathers, which are generally
comprehended under the term Median Coverts, vary considerably in
both their direction of imbrication and in the number of rows that
run parallel to the greater coverts in each case. The present paper
is devoted to a consideration of the nature and the extent of the
variation referred to, without regard to morphological details of any
other kind soever. Many of the facts have either not been noticed,
or else, if they have been noticed, their significance appears to have
been missed. For convenience of description the tract occupied by
the Median Coverts may be divided into three areas by lines parallel
to the main direction of the cubital quills. The area nearest the
vertebral axis will be referred to as the Proximal area, the next the
Middle area, and the remaining third, up to the distal border next
the manual region, the Distal area. The rows of feathers composing
the median eoverts range, in a general way, parallel with the greater
coverts. The number of rows varies from one to six, or even more,
in different forms of birds; and the row nearest the greater coverts
is the one most subject to variation in the disposition of the feathers
composing it.
Proc. Zooxu. Soc.—1886, No. XIII. 13
186 MR. Jp G. GOODCHILD ON THE (Apr. 6,
In dealing with the various modifications, I propose to take the
birds as nearly as possible in the order adopted by Dr. Sclater in the
Eighth Edition of the ‘ List of Vertebrated Animals now or lately
living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London.’
Fig. 1.
Illustrations of the terms used in the following description, as shown by the
feathers of the Cubital Region in the Golden Plover.
1 to 1’. Posterior Border. 2 to 2’. Anterior Border. 2' to 1’. Proximal End.
2 to 1. Distal Edge of the Cubital Region (shown by the thicker line).
A. Cubital Remiges. B. Greater Wing-coverts. C. Supplementary
row of Median Coverts, or Upper Wing-coverts. D. Posterior row of
Median Wing-coverts. HE. Second row. F. Third row. The Posterior
row of Median Coverts from D, near the Carpal joint, shows Proximal
Overlap as far as the point marked with a small cross. Distal Overlap
is shown by the mode of imbrication of the Greater Wing-coverts.
The Passerine style of imbrication represents one extreme of the
range of modification observable, and is well exemplified by the wing
of Zurdus merula (fig. 2). In this the median ecoverts consist of a
single uninterrupted row of feathers, whose free edges are regularly
directed backwards along a curve extending from near the carpal
joint towards a point near the elbow. The same figure shows also
one of the simplest arrangements of the Lesser Cubital Coverts.
Such an arrangement as obtains in the Blackbird may be traced, with
modifications of only minor importance, through some thousands of
1886.] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 187
species of Passerine birds, and will probably, on further examination,
be found to characterize the whole of the birds that are correctly
referred to that Order.
In the Corvidze an approach towards a somewhat different mode of
arrangement is made (fig. 3): another minor modification is seen in
the Alaudidee (fig. 3a). The Swallows (fig. 5a, p. 188) all appear to
follow the normal passerine type. That of the Swifts and the Cotingas
appears to me to be essentially different. There is some doubt also
in regard to the Bower-birds and the Birds of Paradise in this
respect.
Following Dr. Sclater’s arrangement, the Swifts and the Humming-
Turdus merula. Corvus. Alauda arvensis.
birds fall next to be deseribed. Living Humming-birds can very
rarely be examined closely ; I have therefore been compelled to rely
entirely upon the examination of museum specimens. After exa-
mining the whole of the Gould Collection, and checking the results by
comparing them with those made ona large series of other specimens,
I am convinced that one general type of wing-pattern characterizes
the whole of these birds; it is of a very simple character, and is
represented in figure 4, p.188. By this it will be seen that the proxi-
mal lapping row of median coverts found throughout all the Passeres
is absent entirely in this. The Humming-birds might, indeed, be
described as possessing no median coverts at all, the place of these
being taken up by feathers having the same mode of imbrication as
the Lesser Coverts. All the feathers of each series overlap outwards
and backwards from the vertebral axis towards the distal end of the
wing in these birds.
Observations on the order of overlap in the wing of freshly-killed
specimens of Cypselus apus, afterwards extended by an examination
of the whole series of Swifts in the National Collection, showed that
in these, as in the Humming-birds, no one series of feathers overlaps
backwards. in fact the wing-pattern in the genera Cypselus,
Acanthylis, Chetura, and Collocalia seems to me to differ in no
essential respect from that found throughout the Trochilide. So
far as the disposition of the wing-coverts is concerned, the Swifts and
Humming-birds agree amongst themselves, and differ from all of the
Passeriform birds, with the possible exception of the Birds of Paradise.
Fig. 5, p. 188, taken from a freshiy-killed specimen of Cypselus apus,
will serve to make this point clear. A wing of Hirundo rustica is
figured alongside for comparison (fig. 5 a).
Ia
188 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6,
Following the normal Macrochires come the Caprimulgide. Of
these, in the living state, I have examined only Caprimulgus
europeus and Podargus cuvieri. The disposition of the cubital
coverts in these is certainly not at all like that seen in the Swifts ;
but it closely follows the arrangement seen in the Picarian birds.
In these at least two series of the feathers next above the Greater
Coverts show proximal overlap. An examination of the specimens
Fig. 5 a.
Hirundo. Cypselus. Trochilus.
ot Podargus, Batrachostomus, Agotheles, and Caprimulgus in the
National Collection, as well as of specimens of the same family else-
where, confirms this view. The soft and downy nature of the
feathers prevents satisfactory observation upon any feathers above
the two lower rows of median coverts; but I have satisfied myself
in regard to the point in question. While Caprimulgus and its allies
seem to agree in this particular with Podargus, Steatornis (so far as
one can judge by the unsatisfactory data furnished by skins) presents
yet another type, which seems to follow that of the true Cuckoos
rather than that of Podargus or its allies. In all the remaining
Fig. 6. Fig. 6 a. Fig. 6.
ERR
(WOON AK CLAS . / CE t=
NWG ,
Ss
My
Chasmorhynchus. Dacelo. Tthamphastos.
Picarian families enumerated in the List (except Cuculide, Muso-
phagide, and Indicatoride), at least the two rows of feathers next
1886. ] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 189
above the greater coverts, and often more, show uniform and uninter-
rupted proximal overlap. This arrangement can be very conveniently
studied in the Toucans (fig. 64), which are nearly always well
represented in the Parrot House in the Society’s Gardens. The
Cuckoos are associated with the Picarian birds in the List; but as
their wing-pattern differs in some essential respects from that of the
typical forms, they will be referred to in connection with another
series.
The transition from the Picarian type to the Psittacine is gradual ;
indeed some of the smaller Parrots, especially Melopsittacus, might,
so far as the wing-pattern is concerned, well stand within the confines
of the Picarian group. The chief difference in the case of Melo-
psittacus lies in the further increase in the number of rows of back-
ward-lapping feathers on the eubital area. Fig. 7 shows this form
of wing, which can be easily compared with the living form in the
case of so common a cage-bird. In the type of wing-pattern
prevailing throughout all, or nearly all, the rest of the Psittacidz, an
additional modification may be observed. The row of feathers
coming on next above the Greater Coverts, indicated by the letter
C in the following diagrams, is seen to consist of a series numbering
generally five or six, which are confined tothe distal area of the
cubital region, and form a distinct and separate series from the
feathers that extend across the median area. They correspond in
relative position to the Upper Wing-coverts (tectrices superiores)
in the manual region of the wing; and it might be convenient for
the present to refer to those extending over the distal area of the
cubital region under the same term, as is done in the specimens
Ulustrative of the structure of birds’ wings that Prof. Flower has
arranged at the Natural-History Museum. The feathers referred
Fig. 8a. Fig. 7.
Psitiacus. Melopsittacus. Calopsitta.
to often form a conspicuous feature on the wing of the living
bird, as they are frequently arranged in such a manner that the
shafts of three or more of the feathers are in a line. The proximal
edges of these feathers are generally as firm as those on the opposite
side, and, as a consequence, the whole series slides between the
feathers next them on the proximal side in much the same way as the
190 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6,
blade of a lancet closes into its sheath. The feature referred to can
be better understood by reference to C, figure 8, taken from a living
specimen of Calopsitta nove-hollandie, which represents the style
prevailing throughout probably the whole of the Psittaci.
Essentially the same pattern as is found in the Psittaci prevails
also throughout the whole of the Striges, and also throughout the
whole of the Accipitres, with the exception of Pernis, Pandion,
Gypogeranus, and the Cathartidee. These exceptional forms will be
referred to again in their proper places. Fig. 9, representing the wing
Falco. Phalacrocorax.
of a Merlin, well illustrates the whole of the normal Accipitrine forms.
Mr. Wolf’s beautiful figures of the Birds of Prey all afford excellent
illustrations of the same point, while, from a part,of the world
where experience has led us to expect minute accuracy of detail, we
have the Japanese figure in metal of a species of Spizaetus, now
amongst the choicest. treasures at South Kensington Museum, which
affords a correct illustration of the Accipitrine style of cubital coverts.
Of the Pelicans, in the present connection, nothing satisfactory can
be made out, on account of the lax and drooping condition of their
feathers, even in health. But Phalacrocorar (fig. 9a) gives us a
style hardly distinguishable in any noticeable respect from that of
the Accipitrines. On the other hand, Fregata, Sula, Plotus, and
some other forms associated with them are widely removed, ptero-
graphically, from the Cormorants.
All the Herons and their immediate allies, Nycticorax (fig. 10),
Botaurus, and, I believe, also Cancroma, closely follow the
Accipitrine mode of imbrication. The principal difference lies
in the reduced prominence of the supplementary row of lancet-like
feathers (upper wing-coverts) so characteristic of the Birds of Prey
and the Parrots. Healthy Night-Herons in immature plumage
exhibit the Ardeine style of median cubital coverts remarkably well.
The Ciconiide, in regard to the point under notice, will fall to be
described in another part of this paper.
1886. | CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 191
The remarks made in connection with the Pelicans apply also to
the Odontoglossz.
Passing over the Palamedez for the present, the last group whose
style of cubital coverts brings them under notice here is the Anseres.
Here, again, we have a group with nearly uniform pterographic
Nyctieorax. Querquedula.
eharacters ; these, as will be seen by reference to figure 11, repre-
senting Querquedula crecea, so closely follow the style seen in the
Accipitres and the others mentioned as possessing the accessory row
of median coverts, or upper wing-coverts (C), that it is difficult to
point to any one charaeter that would serve to distinguish them.
It will be notieed that the birds characterized by possessing more
than two rows of median cubital coverts with proximal overlap,
together with a single supplementary row of upper wing-coverts also
with proximal overlap, are further characterized by the Desmo-
gnathous palate, are Homalogonate, and possess in addition several
other deep-seated points of structure is common.
Near to the Accipitrine birds, and perhaps leading away from
them somewhere near the Polyborine birds, a kind of transition may
be traced in the direction of the Gallinze. In the case of Meleagris
(fig. 12) proximal overlap characterizes nearly all the median cubital
coverts, as in the Accipitrines, and in this respect these birds stand
192 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6,
alone amongst the Gallinze ; but neither in Meleagris nor in any of
the Alectoropods do any traces of the upper wing-coverts exist. In
some respects the Peristeropod Gallinee, represented by Yalegalla
(fig. 13 a) and by Craz (fig. 13), stand nearest of the Gallinze to the
Accipitres; while Numida is hardly more removed.
. Fig. 13. Fig. 13 a.
CEA ve <=
COMER EES
GAUSS SERRE
Sea TER
Craxz, Talegalla.
In the Peristeropods we find the commencement of a modification
that is carried to a much greater length in other Galline birds, as well
as in a large number of forms that have yet to be noticed. This
consists in the increased prominence of distal overlap in the proximal.
third of the cubital area. In Craw (fig. 13), for instance, it will be
noticed that the distal overlap, whose commencement is indicated by
the small cross, extends into the middle area in the case of the lowest
tow. The distal overlap at C is another noteworthy feature, as it
has not yet been observed in any of the Gallinz except the Peri-
steropods. ]
Taking the evidence afforded by the mode of imbrication of the
wing-coverts alone, it is near to the Peristeropods, and not near to
;
Fig. 14.
Columba
the Pigeons, that Goura should be placed. The pattern is shown
in fig. 14, which should be compared with Craz on the one hand and
1886.] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 193
with any conspicuously-marked Pigeon of the normal type (Columba
guinea, for example, fig. 14 a) on the other. The difference, to me,
appears both striking and significant. Perhaps I. may be allowed
to remark that the characteristic differences between Goura and the
normal Pigeons are represented in the very useful series of coloured
illustrations now. posted up outside the Western Aviary in the
Society’s Gardens.
In addition to the difference already noted between the true
Pigeons and Goura, the following points of agreement and of
difference between the two groups may be considered :—
In the normal Pigeons an oil-gland is present; but is absent in
Goura.
In the normal Pigeons the tail-feathers are 12 in number ; while
there are 16 in Goura.
In the normal Pigeons the pterylosis is columbine ; and is galline
in Goura.
In the normal Pigeons ceca are present; but are absent in
Goura.
In the normal Pigeons a gall-bladder is present: no gall-bladder
in Goura.
- In the normal Pigeons incubation lasts 16 days; but extends to
28 days in Goura.
_ In addition to these peculiarities reference may be made to the
bird’s pheasant-like habits, to certain peculiarities of the urosacral
and of the caudal vertebree, to the number of the cervical vertebre,
to the absence of pterygoid processes, and to other features referred
to by Prof. Huxley (P.Z.S. 1868, p. 302) and by Prof. Parker
(Tf. Z. S. v. p. 151, 1863). Dr. Sclater (Ibis, 1880, p. 407) refers
to certain peculiarities of the tarsus, in addition to the differences
just noted, as evidence in favour of separating Goura from the
Pigeons.
The main differences that distinguish the wing of the Peristeropod
Gallinze from that of the Birds of Prey have already been pointed out.
It remains to add that the prominence of distal overlap introduced
by Zalegalla, Crax and its allies, becomes more accentuated in
Numida, and thence, through the Tetraonide (fig. 15, p. 194), reaches
its greatest development amongst the Gallinz in the typical Pheasants.
A progressive increase of distal imbrication can be traced, in the first
stages, only in the first, or posterior, row of median coverts, then in the
second, and the third, and so on, until in Polyplectron all the more
conspicuous feathers in the closed wing of the living bird seem to lap
from the proximal towards the distal side of the wing. Excellent
examples of the features referred to may be easily observed in the
Society’s Pheasant Aviary, where Lophophorus impeyanus, Huplocamus
swinhoti, Phasianus reevesi, and Polyplectron chinquis well display
the feature referred to. A reference to the annexed figure of
Luplocamus swinhoii (fig. 16, p. 194) will serve to make the general
disposition clear.
Pavo follows a slightly different pattern; and it is a point worth
194 MR. J, G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6,
notice that there seems a constant difference of small amount between
the individuals of P. eristatus and P. nigripennis now living in the
collection. In P. nigripennis all the feathers of the posterior row
of median coverts appear to lap distally. ‘The Common Peacock is
Fig. 16.
Euplocamus.
well represented in the particular feature under notice by one of the
fine pieces of Japanese metal-work at South Kensington already re-
ferred to under the head of Accipitres.
In the pterographie characters of both the Hemipodii and the
Crypturi, I have hitherto failed to discover any marked charac-
teristic connected with the point under consideration that would serve
to distinguish these birds from the Gallinze. In the case of the
Tinamous, especially, the structural characteristics of the palate had
led me to expect a wing-pattern of a much lower type.
With the exception of Goura, already noticed, the pterographic
characters of the Columbe are remarkably uniform throughout.
These characters are well displayed in the case of the Domestic
Pigeon (fig. 17). Here it will be noticed that the proportion of
feathers showing distal overlap, at the proximal end of the median
coverts, remains much the same as in the Galline ; but that in place
of the well-marked, uniform, and uninterrupted proximal overlap of
1886. ] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 195
the posterior, 2nd, and 3rd rows of median coverts in the distal
area, which is nearly always seen in the Galline, the corresponding
features of the Pigeon show a different and much more complex
arrangement. In all the birds previously passed under notice
(except the Birds of Paradise amongst the Passeres, and the Macro-
chires) the feathers of both the middle and the distal area of the
median coverts maintain a proximal imbrication from near the carpus
backwards, various distances according to the zoological position of
the bird under notice. In all the remaining birds, inclusive of the
Columbe, the distal area of the median coverts is composed of
feathers arranged in the opposite direction. It is somewhat difficult
to reduce the facts to anything like an intelligible description ; but
a study of the figures may help to make the mode of arrangement
clear. It will be seen by this that several feathers on the distal
area of each row overlap from behind forwards, or from the proximal
towards the distal margin of the wing. The feature referred to can
be easily studied in the case of Domestic Pigeons ; although the
general Columbine pattern can, perhaps, best be studied in the case
of such conspicuously-marked exotic Pigeons as Columba guinea,
Peristera geoffroii, Leucosarcia picata, and others commonly living
in the Western Aviary. :
Pterocles arenarius, now (1885) living in the Western Aviary,
shows an arrangement of the wing-feathers somewhat like that of the
Pigeons, especially so far as the proximal and the distal areas of
Péerocles.
the cubital region are concerned. But the distal imbrication of all
the feathers next the manual region is, in the Pterocletes, carried to
excess. In this respect the Pterocletes stand as far removed from
the Pigeons as these are from the Gallinee. Inthe stuffed specimens
of Pterocles alchata in the National Collection this feature is
remarkably well displayed (see fig. 18). Another point to be
noticed in these birds is that the posterior row of median coverts show
distal overlap throughout their entire length—an arrangement of
196 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE + [Apr. 6;
these feathers that is characteristic of a large number of the birds
remaining to be described.
Still following the plan of tracing out the various modifications
of wing-pattern without reference to any other characteristics, however
important, the place of the Coccyges should be somewhere near the
confines of the Columbe.
Carpococcyx. Cuculus. Coecystes.
In passing in review a number of species belonging to the Coceyges,
they seem to be naturally divisible into the Cuckoos proper, well
represented by Cuculus canorus (fig. 19), and the Centropodine,
represented by Carpococcyx radiatus (fig. 20). The Cuckoos proper
somewhat resemble the Pigeons, and where they differ from the
Pigeons they seem to approach the Picarian birds. The Ground
Cuckoos seem to make some approach to the Peristeropods; in
other respects they remind one of the Musophagide. Judging from
stuffed specimens alone, the wing of Opisthocomus closely resembles
that of the Cuckoos.
In the living Rustards, so far as I can judge, there seems again to
be another variation on the general pattern of the Columbe ; but I
have hitherto failed to obtain a satisfactory sketch of the wing-pattern
in this bird. Ofthe remaining families of the Order Alectorides given
in the List, I have also, so far, failed to obtain any good evidence,
except in the case of the Gruidee, which will be referred to in more
detail presently. It is especially desirable to obtain good observations
upon the point specially under notice in the case of the Cariamas ;
but the lax texture of their wing-feathers renders any such observation
a matter of considerable difficulty. So far as I can judge at present,
the style of coverts in the Cariamas agrees with that of the Bustards,
and differs frem that of Serpentarius.
The specimens of Chauna chavaria living at the Gardens present a
style of imbrication that seems to approach the Columbine type
very closely. The disposition shown in fig. 21 is practically the
same as Wolf has drawn in Ch. nigricollis (=derbiana), P. Z.S. 1864,
pl. xi. Whether the feathers of the distal tract of the cubital
region follow exactly the same disposition as do those of the Pigeons
1886. ] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 197
I am at present unable to state definitely, but they appear to do so,
judging from stuffed specimens.
The pterographical characters of the Limicole, if we start with
the Plovers as the representative of the Order, nearly approach those
of the Pigeons. The principal difference lies in the fact that the
proximal or backward overlap that characterizes the lowest two, or
three, rows of median coverts in all the Desmognathz, and that is so
nearly absent in the Pigeons, is again represented more or less
perfectly in the majority of the Limicole. ‘The distal overlap of all
the feathers next the manual region of the wing, that serves to dis-
tinguish the Pigeons from the Galline, is a well-marked and
constant feature in all the Limicole. There is one group‘of feathers,
firm on each edge, that extends backwards from the carpal joint
down to the greater wing-coverts ; on the distal side of this the
median coverts all overlap towards the margin of the wings on
that side, up to the alula, while on the proximal side of the same
firm-edged feathers the median coverts overlap in the opposite
direction as far as the point where they are met by that of the
proximal area, which, again, lap forward. It is difficult to convey
an exact idea of this somewhat complex arrangement except by
means of a diagram, such as that of the wing of Gallinago celestis,
fig. 22, p. 198, which well exemplifies the style current throughout
not only all the Limicolz, but throughout nearly all birds with a
Schizognathous palate.
Variations of a minor character occur within the limits of this
Order. Even in the case of two birds so closely related as the Common
Snipe and the Woodcock (figs. 22, 23), such differences may be
detected. The Snipe follows the normal Limicoline style, while that
of the Woodcock more resembles aberrant forms such as @dicnemus,
which comes nearer to the Bustards. I was so much struck with
the difference alluded to, that I sought for evidence of a deeper-seated
and more reliable nature, with a view to getting further information
upon this point. Such differences do exist, notably in the structure
of the skull; but I have not yet had an opportunity of following
198 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE * (Apr. 6,
the subject far enough to speak with confidence in regard tu other
differences noticed.
Fig. 22. Fig. 23.
Gallinago, Scolopax,
From the central forms of the Limicolz nearly all the modifi-
cations of style observable in the Carinatz could be traced without
difficulty ; and the forms now remaining to be considered join on
naturally enough to such types as that represented by the Plovers.
In one direction, and at no remote distance from the Plovers, we
come to the Rails, represented in fig. 24. In another direction,
Rallus. Sterna.
gradations equally gentle conduct us to the Gulls and the Terns
(fig. 25). Along another line of modification we arrive at the
Cranes. The Storks again stand at no great distance. Each of the
forms here mentioned, in turn, leads to others more distantly
removed from the central type. Beyond the Gaviz lie the Pygopods,
represented by Alca (fig. 26). These in turn graduate easily into the
Tubinares, as represented by Puffinus and by Diomedea (fig. 27).
Closely resembling these last in style of wing-coverts follows Sula
(fig. 28) and Fregata (fig. 29), which lead the way to one of the
extreme modifications of style observable in this particular, ex-
emplified by Plotus (fig. 30). Starting from another point, the
CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS.
sang
Se cul
SS SESS
SUAS RE
ae
« ae
THN et
GOL Abe yh SS <—
CUL GCE C US RS = OC
RCS Se CURLS Vy we ee
‘ ae ~
SX
199
200 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE * [Apr. 6,
normal Ciconiine pattern, represented by that of Dissura maguari
(fig. 31), leads the way through Mycteria (fig. 32), to Leptoptilus
Disswra. Mycteria,
(fig. 33), whieh, in respect of the feature under consideration, stands
midway between the Ciconiine birds and the Tubinares. Between
the style of the median cubital coverts in Leptoptilus and that of
Fig. 33.
LUGE a \
ACRES Brera, 1}
rit WLS t poe
SNE CREST So eaa
SORA ae
Leptoptilus.
the Cathartide (fig. 34), I have hitherto failed to detect any difference
of importance in respect of the feature specially under notice. So
far as the imbrication of the wing-coverts is concerned, Leptoptilus
and the Cathartidee might even stand im the same family. How far
the purely superficial feature at present speciaily under notice can
be regarded as affording data of any value in corroborating the view
advocated by Messrs. Garrod and Forbes that there is a close genetic
affinity between the Storks and Petrels on the one hand and the
Cathartide on the other, must be left to competent zoologists to judge.
After a careful examination of living specimens of Diomedea, Ossi-
Sraga, Puffinus, Fregata, Leptoptilus, Cathartes, Sarcorhamphus, and
1886. ] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 201
Gypagus, I have been so much impressed with the uniform style
of wing-coverts prevailing amongst this group, that it seems to me
difficult to believe that their genetic relationship amongst them-
selves is more remote than Forbes regarded it. I cannot, after many
years’ observation of the facts referred to in this paper, help re-
garding this similarity of style of wing-coverts in birds so different,
both in outward form and in their mode of life, as presenting us
Fig. 34.
Sarcorhamphus.
with a certain amount of evidence of the transmitted survival, in an
unmodified form, of a mode of imbrication of epidermic structures
that at some remote period in the genetic history of the common
Sauropsidan ancestors of these birds played some really important
part in the economy of the wearer. During the differentiation of
such parts of the creature’s organization as were directly affected by
the struggle for existence, other parts, not so affected, either
changed at a slower rate, or else were transmitted from generation to
generation hardly modified at all. Habit, or mode of life, as birds
now live, can at the most have played but a minor part in bringing
about these diversities of style. We have but to compare the
Swallows with the Swifts, the Sun-birds with the Humming-birds,
and many other parallel cases, and we at once perceive that mode
of life has had little or nothing to do with the origin of the features
in question. The real cause lies deeper than that, and dates back
far into the remote history of the Sauropsida.
Reverting to the normal Ciconiine style of coverts, we find Platalea,
with Jdis and its allied genera, differing but little from each other
and from Ciconia.
Tantalus, in this respect, stands nearer to the Limicole.
The Cranes, again (fig. 35, p. 202), present another variation little
removed from the central Pluvialine type.
Somewhere near to the Cranes and the Storks, but connected in
some way with the Gallinaceous style of coverts, stands the wing of
the Secretary Bird (fig. 36, p. 202); it is quite unlike the true
Accipitrine type.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XIV. 14
202 ON THE CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. « [Apr. 6;
Lastly, come two birds whose wings I cannot refer satisfactorily to
any one of the groups above described. One is the Osprey
Fig. 35.
No te SS AN
eR ee
Gk
x
v\
ys
Grus. Gypogeranus,
(fig. 37), whose wing seems to occupy an outlying position some-
where between the style of the Pygopodes and that of the Accipitres.
The other is represented by Pernis apivorus: several stuffed speci-
mens of this bird showed the posterior row of cubital coverts lapping
distally, somewhat as in the Ciconiine birds, and there were in
addition some minor differences of less importance. Stuffed birds,
at the best, afford data of a very untrustworthy character in this
Pandion.
particular ; but on laying my difficulty before Mr. Gurney, who had
some Honey-Buzzards alive, he courteously replied by sending me
from the Norwich collection a skin that showed the feathers disposed
as they were in his own living birds. This agreed exactly with the
style observable in the stuffed birds, and differed from all the other
Accipitrine birds as herein limited. Perhaps the nearest repre-
sentative style is that presented by some of the Peristeropods, as,
for example, Craw.
In regard to any conclusions connected with taxonomy that may
be drawn from a study of the facts herein referred to there will
probably be much difference of opinion. The facts themselves ma
be, in general, easily verified by a careful study of healthy living
1886.] DR. GUNTHER ON A VARIETY OF FELIS LEOPARDUS. 203
birds, and most of the views admit, I believe, of no reasonable
doubt. There can be little doubt, also, that up to a certain point
there is a remarkable correlation of particular styles of imbrication of
the cubital coverts with certain structural cnaracteristics—osteological,
myological, visceral, and pterographical; so that, within certain
limits, the disposition of the cubital coverts may be taken as a kind
of index to the presence, or the absence, of deeper-seated characters
whose importance in relation to taxonomy is generally recognized.
Nevertheless, until the facts here called attention to have been in-
dependently considered by other observers, I feel sure that it would
be premature to press the importance of the bearing that any of these
may seem to me to have upon taxonomic questions: for the present
it will probably be generally deemed advisable to lay more stress
upon the bearing of the facts upon the correct delineation of birds
tor zoological purposes, than upon their value as furnishing addl-
tional data as subordinate factors in any scheme of classification.”
4. Second Note on the Melanotic Variety of the South-
African Leopard. By Dr. A. GUnruer, F.Z.S,
{Received March 26, 1886.]
By the last South-African mail I have received from Mr. N.
Abraham, President of the Graham’s-town Natural History Society,
a letter with photograph enclosed, which gives more positive infor-
mation about the variety of the Leopard of the district of Albany,
mentioned by Mr. Trimen in Proc. Zool. Soc. 1883, p. 535, and
described by myself, ébid. 1885, p. 243, pl. xvi. The skin in Mr.
Abraham’s possession leaves hardly any doubt that we have before
us a case of incipient melanism, which, if the family in which the
melanotic tendency showed itself had been left undisturbed, might
have been developed into as complete a condition of melanism as is
occasionally found in the Asiatic Leopard. Mr. Abraham writes as
follows :—
“ Graham’s-town, 8. A.,
March Ist, 1886.
“To Dr. A. Ginther, F.Z.S8.
« Dear Srr,
“Knowing that you are interested in the black variety of
Leopard found in the district of Albany, I write to tell you of a
beautiful skin which I have in my possession and also to send you a
photograph of the same. I had the flat skin photographed on
purpose that I might send you a copy, as I thought a photo would
convey'a good description and save many words. It will, however,’
be necessary for me to say that the blackness of the skin is more
dense than appears in the photo. The gloss upon the skin prevented
the photographer from giving a true idea of the beautiful black, which
is dense in many parts. here are no rosettes or spots at all on the
larger portion of the skin ; in this the photograph is quite correct.
14*
204 DR. GUNTHER ON A VARIETY OF FELIS LEOPARDUS. [ Apr. 6,
The spots do not even show through the black as in the black
Leopard of Java. The tail has had its point taken off; this accounts
for its shortness.
“The measurements of the flat skin are as follows :—Head and
Flat skin of Felis leopardus, var. melanotica.
body 4 feet 1 inch; portion of tail 1 foot 4 inches; distance
from fore toes to central line of back 2 feet 3 inches. On
the black portion of the skin the hair is short with a very thick
underfur. The tail is not black, but very dark, and has a somewhat
remarkable appearance. The markings on the front legs differ very
much from the markings on the hind legs, being very tawny with
1886.] ON OVIS HODGSONI AND OVIS VIGNEI. 205
scarcely any dense black, while the hind legs are slightly tawny with
elear markings of black and white. The whole skin is very handsome
and remarkable. The specimen was caught by a native in a trap and
then shot. The native took the tip of the tail and the claws for
trophies. It was caught about twenty miles from Graham’s-town.
I have made many inquiries respecting this peculiar variety with the
hope of forming some good theory explaining this deviation from
the ordinary type. I ean only trace four specimens, viz. :—The skin
in the Graham’s-town Museum (this is a good specimen, but not
nearly so black as the one in my possession); another was taken
to England by Mr. Bowker, and is in the British Museum; a
third was sold some time ago at a Church bazaar, but I cannot trace
it; and the fourth I have. I do not know of any other for certain.
All these have been shot in, or about the same district. The one I
have came from Collingham near to Graham’s-town. I am told that
there are two living specimens still in the district, and there may be
more, but these two have been seén, but not captured. I am still
on the trail for more information ; at present I cannot give any
certain or probable account of the origin of this variety, but I write
this to you and shall be glad to forward you further information when
I have completed my investigation.
*T yemain, dear Sir,
Yours sincerely,
(Signed) Nenpick ABRAHAM,
Pres. Graham's-town Natural History Society.”
Apnil 20, 1886.
Prof. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair.
Mr. O. Salvin, F.R.S., exhibited a living specimen of an exotic
Worm—Bipalium kewense (Moseley, Ann. & Mag. N.H. ser. 5, vol. i.
p- 238), found at Hawksfold, Fernhurst, April 19, 186, amongst
the broken tiles at the bottom of a pot of Calceolarta, which had
been in a cold frame the whole winter. This fact suggested that
the true home of B. kewense was some temperate region.
The following extract was read from a letter addressed by Mr.
R. A. Sterndale, F.Z.S., to Sir Victor Brooke, concerning a case of
hybridism between Ovis hodgsoni and O. vignei :—
‘In the mountain-range south of the Indus, near Lanskar (the
precise locality being for obvious reasons withheld from publication),
a herd of Ovis vignet were observed for some years to contain a large
ram of Ovis hodgsoni, who drove out the weaker Shapoo rams and
appropriated the ewes of the herd. The ram was ultimately, one
winter, killed and eaten. by Chankos or Tibetan wolves; but
during his stay he produced a family of hybrids possessing greater
size of horn and head, with characteristic colouring combining traits
206 MR. J, B, SUTTON ON DISEASES OF “Apr. 20,
of both animals. In course of time these hybrids were crossed again
with Ovis vignei, and the third generation shows signs of degene-
ration from the larger sheep and of reversion to the type of
O. vignei.
«The skull of the half-bred animals, which the Tartars called Nyan
Shapoo, the former being the name of the Ovis hodgsoni or Ammon,
and the latter that of the Ovis vignei, is nearer in size to Ovis
hodgsoni, which is double that of the other. The horns of these
hybrids are rounded in front, resembling what has been figured of
Ovis brookei, but hollowed out behind like those of O. vignetz. The
horns of the quarter-bred animal are square in front and hollowed
behind like the true Shapoo-type, but are more massive than the pure-
bred Shapoo.
“* Now as regards the colour of the skin, the Nyan or Ovis hodgsoni
has no black beard or throat-stripe, which O. vignei has. The half-
bred animal shows no black, but the quarter-bred does in a modified
but decided degree. The half-bred turns also in summer to the
colour of O. hodgsoni, having more of a blue-grey or lavender tint
and less of the fawn colour of O. vignei; with the white throat of
O. hodgsoni, it also gets the dark patch at the side of the neck.
The skin of a quarter-bred specimen before me is of a bright fawn
above, sides and rump white, and a black stripe down the middle of
the throat.”
Sir Victor Brooke was of opinion that Ovis brookei, Ward, P. Z.S.
1874, p. 143, was probably established on a somewhat similar
hybrid.
The following papers were read :—
1. On some Specimens of Disease from Mammals in the
Society’s.Gardens. By J. Buanp Surron, F.R.CS.,
Erasmus Wilson Lecturer on Pathology, Royal College
of Surgeons, Lecturer and Assistant Surgeon to the
Middlesex Hospital.
[Received March 30, 1886.]
During the past twelve months several specimens illustrating
diseases of mammals in the Society’s Gardens have come to hand.
Some of them present features of such exceptional interest that it is
desirable they should be placed on record. Of the value of the
systematic examination of the bodies of wild animals dying in the
Scciety’s Gardens there can be no doubt whatever—not in the sense
that it will enable us to deal with diseases occurring in them, but in
the amount of light likely to accrue to pathological science in
general if the investigation be carried on with the diligence and care
its importance demands. The specimens to be described in this
paper are of value, inasmuch as many of them are somewhat rare in
1886.] MAMMALS IN THE SOCIETY'S GARDENS. 207
their nature, whilst others illustrate pathological conditions not
before described in wild animals.
In 1877 Mr. Garrod read a short paper before this Society ‘‘ On
the Mechanism of the Intervertebral Substance, and on some Effects
of the Erect Position of Man” (P. Z. 8. 1877, P. 50) from which
the following extract has been taken :—
“The assumption of a vertical attitude by a creature originally
differentiated for a horizontal position of its body, has produced but
marvellously slight inconvenience. If it had resulted in many, man
could scarcely have survived. There are one or two, however, which
are most clearly traceable to this cause, including the painful tendency
to prolapse, antiflexion, and retroflexion of the uterus in women, as
well as crural hernia in both sexes, and inguinal hernia in the
male,”
At the time the preceding paragraph was written, little was
known, and far less recorded, concerning the abnormal conditions
referred to by Mr. Garrod. The unusual opportunities which have
occurred to me during the past five years of investigating diseases
of wild animals will render necessary a reconsideration of this
opinion.
In the first place prolapse of the uterus occurs with tolerable
frequency, not only in domesticated mammals, but in the lioness,
tapir, Cape hunting-dog, the pygmy hog, deer, antelope, and others.
These examples are sufficient to show that it is not entirely attribu-
table to the erect position.
With regard to flexions of the uterus, it is a remarkable fact that
no fewer than one fourth of all the female Monkeys dying during
the past two years presented extreme examples of this abnormal con-
dition of the organ. In many the displacement far exceeded any-
thing that I have seen in the human female. Well marked speci-
mens of flexion of the uterus occur also in Deer. (For a detailed
account of these cases and their etiology consult Path. Soc. Trans.
vol. xxxvi. p. 502.) The frequency and severity of the cases show
that the flexion is due to causes in addition to the erect position.
Concerning hernia, it has always seemed to me strange that
Man, whose inguinal canals are, in the ordinary course of events,
more or less obliterated, should be so liable to visceral protrusions
at these spots, whilst Monkeys, in whom the inguinal canals in
most species remain more or less patent, should escape. It is
certain that Horses are liable to inguinal ruptures; and I have long
known that the same defect occurs with tolerable frequeney in Sheep.
During the past two months I have been so fortunate as to meet with
two cases of inguinal hernia in Monkeys. In the first, Macacus
cyclopis, a large | plug of omentum occupied the funicular pouch of the
left side ; the second occurred on the right side in a Macacus sinicus,
The details of the condition may be gathered from fig. 1, p. 208.
This Monkey had also a large varicocele on the lett side. These.
specimens are sufficient to show that such abnormalities are not
peculiar to Man.
Probably most individuals among the civilized races of mankind
208 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON DISEASES OF fApr. 20,
suffer at some period of their life from those troublesome thickenings
of the skin of the feet and toes known as corns. Structurally a
corn consists of thickening of the epidermis, due to pressure of an
intermittent character, often the result of badly fitting boots. In
many cases a small sac containing fluid may be detected between
the thickened epidermis and the deeper tissues ; this sac is techni-
cally termed a bursa. In others the bursa is replaced by loose
connective tissue which allows the corn to glide freely over the
underlying structures. We find excellent examples of corns in the
ischial callosities of the Cynomorpha and in the callous pads found
on the feet of Carnivora.
The right funicular pouch of peritoneum of Macacus sinicus, occupied by a
plug of omentum, 0; the testis, 7.
Of late years the attention of surgeons has been directed to corns,
in consequence of a very remarkable affection to which they are
able. Under certain abnormal conditions of the spinal cord and
peripheral nerves, such as locomotor ataxy, sclerosis, and peripheral
neuritis, the corus ulcerate, and at last the ulceration perforates not
merely the corn, but the whole thickness of the foot; hence it is now
familiar as the “ perforating ulcer.”
It was to me a matter of no small interest to find the callous pad
on the foot of a Civet Cat the seat of a perforating ulcer; the
interest was considerably heightened when, on opening the spinal
OL ee |
1886. ] MAMMALS IN THE SOCIETY'S GARDENS. 209
canal, the cord was found soft and almost diffluent. By careful
hardening and manipulation, sections were obtained from the cord
and submitted to the microscope. It exhibited a most marked
degree of sclerosis. This was also seen in the nerves of the affected
limb. The animal was supposed to be about seven years of age,
and had been paralyzed for some time before it died. The specimen
was shown to a number of experts, who were unanimous as to the
nature of the affection, viz. perforating ulcer, with sclerosis of the
cord and nerves. I then ventured the opinion that more cases would
come to hand, A few weeks later a second specimen came under
my observation, also in a Civet Cat; and, lastly, a most interesting
example in the Two-spotted Paradoxure (Nandinia binotata). In
the case of the Paradoxure the affection of the callous pads is in an
early stage, for the ulcers, one on each foot, are as yet shallow (fig. 2).
Perforating ulcers (w) in an early stage affecting the feet of a Paradoxure, Nan-
dinia binotata, secondary to sclerosis of the spinal cord. The ulcers
were perfectly symmetrical on the fore and hind feet.
F, the fore, and H, the hind foot.
The most remarkable feature in the specimen is the perfect symmetry
observed in the ulcers; in each fore foot the position and shape of
the sores correspond exactly, and this is also to be observed in the
hind feet. In this case only the lumbar and anterior portion of the
spinal cord could be examined ; for, after the animal died, its com-
panion, much to my annoyance, had eaten the middle portion of its
210 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON DISEASES OF FApr. 20,
back. However, an examination of such pieces of the cord as
remained showed well-marked and indisputable sclerotic changes.
In 1842 Sir James Paget and Dr. William Budd’ almost simul-
taneously directed attention to the frequent symmetry exhibited by
disease of the tissues of the body. For example, an eruption on
the skin of one leg is occasionally imitated by an eruption on the
opposite leg, symmetrical, not only in position, but often in the
shape of the patch, in the grouping, and even in the number of
spots in each group. This symmetry is not merely confined to skin
eruptions, but to diseases of the joints, sense-organs, nerves, bones,
tumours, &c. Examples of symmetry occur very frequently in
animals as a result of disease; and the following cases will serve as
striking instances.
In the accompanying drawings (fig. 3) will be seen the scapula
Fig. 3.
Examples of symmetrical exostoses (c) in the skeleton of a Monkey, affecting the
scapula, great trochanter, and coracoid process. The tumours on the
opposite side were exactly similar in shape and situation, and nearly
equal in size. :
and femur of a Bonnet-Monkey that died of bronchitis complicating
rickets. The inferior angle of the scapula is occupied by an osseous
tumour containing tracts of cartilage. The base of the coracoid
process presents a rounded projection, which would probably have
grown into a tumour had the Monkey lived. The great trochanter
of the femur presents also a rounded tumour similar to that of the
scapula, but containing less cartilage. Each humerus presented a
1 Med.-Chir. Trans. vol. xxv.
—y es
I Re |
é
Perincl x:
1886. ] MAMMALS IN T'1E SOCIETY’S GARDENS. 212
curious deformity, for at the junction of the upper and middle third
the shaft was bent almost at a right angle. The corresponding
bones of the opposite side presented precisely similar lesions.
The sebaceous glands of the skin very frqeuently in the human
subject suffer obstruction of their excretory duct. The result is
that the gland continues to secrete, but the outlet being closed, the
sebaceous matter accumulates until at last a definite swelling results,
which may remain of insignificant proportions, or attain a diameter
of two or three inches in exceptional cases. Technically such
swellings form one of a group known as “ retention cysts.”
The museum of the Royal College of Surgeons possesses some
specimens of symmetrical sebaceous cysts growing from the wings of
Wood-Pigeons. The specimens were presented by Mr. Tegetmeier.
It appears that in certain seasons a large number of birds are found
with swellings such as these on the wings, legs, and feet.
A Cockateel, Culopsitta nove-holiandie, with symmetrical sebaceous cysts
on its wings,
An excellent example of this affection has recently come under
my notice in a Cockateel, Calopsitta nove-hollandie. In this pretty
bird there has developed on the inner surface of each wing a seba-
ceous cyst. The position, size, and shape of the ‘‘ swelling’ in the
two cases exactly correspond, as may be seen on reference to the
drawing (fig. 4). The specimen serves as an excellent illustration
of symmetrical disease.
Malformations are frequently as symmetrical as tumours and skin
eruptions. Mr. Forbes has recorded in the ‘ Proceedings’ of this
Society (1882, p. 442) an example of webbed fingers in a Pitheci«
satanas. ‘*The third and fourth digits of the manus on each side
were completely connected down to their tips by a fold of nude skin,
with their nails closely apposed, though not connected, along their
212 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON DISEASES OF [-Apr. 20,
contiguous margins; the remaining digits were normal.” I[ re-
member examining the specimen, at the time Mr. Forbes noticed it,
in the Prosector’s room, and was impressed with the perfect sym-
metry of the malformation.
Since then one other example of malformation in the manus of a
Monkey has occurred. A Gibbon (Hylobates leuciscus), which lived
in the Gardens a few months, was found to have a supernumerary
finger on each hand. In this case the additional fingers possess a
metacarpal bone which was attached to the ulnar side of the meta-
carpal of the fifth digit, and it seems as though the supernumerary
bone was formed as a result of bifurcation of the distal end of the
fifth one. The carpal bones do not present any abnormality. So
few examples of polydactyly in Quadrumana have been noticed that
the case before us is worthy of record.
Fig. 5.
A follicular cyst from a Prehensile-tail Porcupine, Sphingurus prehensilis.
The upper figure represents the jaw after the remoyal of the cyst.
w, the inferior dental nerve. The lower drawing is the cyst with the teeth
projecting into it. The arrow marks the position of the mental foramen.
As an additional illustration of symmetry in disease, the following
ease is of value. A Prehensile-tailed Porcupine died from the
effects of a large abscess on each side of the mouth. These had
burst externally, giving rise to deep sinuses. A probe passed into
each gave evidence of necrosed bone; and at first sight the case
seemed to be one of alveolar abscess consequent upon diseased teeth,
a condition of things exceedingly common in animals. On examining
the mouth I failed to find the lower incisors; this was very sin-
gular, because the bone at the symphysis was quite normal. On
tracing one of the sinuses by dissection, it was found to lead into
the mental foramen, and thence into a cavity occupying the body of
1886. ] MAMMALS IN THE SOCIETY'S GARDENS. 213
the inferior maxilla. This cavity was filled with pus, but the abscess
was limited by fibrous walls of considerable thickness. Feeling con-
vinced that this was something more than a simple abscess, the
bony walls were dissected and the sac removed and examined in
detail.
This cyst is represented of natural size in fig. 5. Projecting
into its posterior aspect are portions of the fangs of two undeveloped
teeth. This is sufficient evidence to show that we have to deal with
a follicular cyst—that is, the walls of this sac are constituted b
* the greatly distended follicle of one of the teeth, probably the
incisor. From some cause or other suppuration had occurred, and
led to the necrosis of the maxilla and absorption of the fangs of the
The tunica vaginalis and testis of a Lamb affected with a congenital
parenchymatous hydrocele.
c, cremaster; d, tunica albuginea; e, epididymis; ¢, secreting-tissue of
the testis.
molar teeth: a remnant of one may be seen projecting into the cyst.
The inferior dental nerve, as a mere thread, was closely embedded
in the walls of the jaw on the outer side of the sac. The opposite
maxilla was affected in a precisely similar manner.
The last example of symmetrical disease I shall describe in this
communication is a singular affection of the testes of a Lamb,
which, so far as my knowledge of testicular disease extends, is unique.
The lamb was thought to be ruptured on both sides, but on cutting
into the supposed hernial sac a large quantity of fluid escaped, but
no gut or omentum were found. The remaining testis was removed
entire with its coverings and sent to me. The enormously dis-
t ended outer covering (fig. 6) is the tunica vaginalis and testis cut off
214 MR, J. B. SUTTON ON DISEASES OF [Apr. 20,
from its connection with the peritoneal cavity. A few fibres of the
cremaster muscle are spread over its upper limits. Inside this, and
in close apposition with its walls, is the tunica albuginea, greatly
distended, with the epididymis stretched over it like a strap. On
. cutting into it, a pint of straw-coloured fluid escaped. This liquid
was alkaline in reaction (sp. gr. 1020), and contained one half its
volume of albumen.
The substance of the testicle presented a very remarkable appear-
ance, for it looked like the roots of a tree in. miniature. There was a
central main stem, and from it slender rounded rootlets composed of -
testicular substance, 7. e. seminiferous tubules and connective tissue,
passed outwards to the sac-walls. ‘The appearances were the same
in both testes. The condition is best expressed by saying that it
resembled a hydrocele, except that the fluid was within the tunica
albuginea instead of in the cavity of the tunica vaginalis.
The occiput of an Ichneumon, with dislocation of the atlas and subsequent
; ankylosis of that-bone to the occiput.
The specimen has been brought before the notice of the Society,
with the hope of inducing others who have opportunities of seeing
similar cases to place a description of them on record.
In 1879 Prof. Flower gave an account of a very remarkable con-
dition presented by the occiput of a Beluga. In this Whale the
atlas had become dislocated from the occipital condyles, and dis-
placed in such a manner that the passage for the spinal cord at the
foramen magnum had become reduced to a very narrow chink, only
three quarters of an inch in transverse measurement. The Whale
had survived the accident some considerable time, for the displaced
ee a oe a a a
ao a ee
1886. MAMMALS IN THE SOCIETY'S GARDENS. 215
atlas had become firmly ankylosed to the occiput, and it is very
curious that the animal could have survived so serious an accident.
A somewhat similar case came under observation in an Ichneu-
mon. In this instance the atlas had been dislocated from its rela-
tions to the occiput and axis, so as to occupy the situation shown in
the accompanying drawing (fig. 7). In this instance the animal
must have survived the injury a long time, because the occiput and
atlas are firmly united by new bone.
Concretions formed of insoluble or indigestible matters are of
frequent occurrence in the alimentary canal of Horses and Cattle, and
at times may attain to very large size without causing any incon-
venience. ‘This is more particularly the case when these zgropiles,
as they are termed, occur in the ceecum of horses. In this situation
they have been known to weigh more than fifty pounds. These
heavier masses are composed of magnesium phosphates ; the lighter
ones consist of hair which the animal licks from its body. This
forin is fairly frequent in calves, and I have met with a specimen in
a Hyena. Concretions of insoluble substances, such as magnesia,
pins, seeds, &c., occur also in the human subject. Recently a Tiger
died in the Gardens, and its bowels were found empty until the
rectum was reached. Here a large mass of solid material was found
about two inches from the anus, measuring six inches in length and
eight inches in girth, covered with mucus. The lower end was
bluntly pointed, and had caused by its pressure ulceration of the
mucous membrane. The rectum was much dilated. On breaking
into the mass it was found to be composed entirely of sawdust,
which the animal had licked from the floor of the eage. A cast of the
abnormal mass was taken at the time by the assistant, Mr. Ockenden.
During the past four or five years there is one fact more than any
other which has impressed me in the course of my work at the
Gardens, and that is the infrequency of neoplasms. In the many
hundreds of animals coming under observation, a tumour has been
a rarity, and this applies with still greater force to cancers. The
only example of this terrible malady I have seen in wild animals
was a medullary cancer in the viscera of a Python. ‘The infrequency
of these growths makes the following case additionally interesting.
A Short-headed Phalanger, Belideus breviceps, was found to have
a large, hard nodular mass in its marsupium. On slitting open the
pouch a tumour presented itself, having the appearance represented in
fig. 8, p. 216. Microscopically it presented all the characters peculiar
to scirrhous cancer as seen in the human subject—that is, there were
alveolar spaces enclosing masses of cells. ‘The alveolar walls were
composed of dense fibrous tissue. The structural details of the
growth coincided with that of the gland from which it originated,
except that the cells, instead of clothing the walls of the alveoli in a
regular manner, were tumbled in confusion into the interior. This
case is, so far as I know, the first authentic example of cancer in a
marsupial.
The last specimen on my list is perhaps as interesting as any. It
is an intussusception of the ileum into the cecum, through, but not
216 MR. J.B. SUTTON ON DISEASES IN MAMMALS. [Apr. 20,
carrying with it, the ileo-czecal valve (see fig. 9, p.217). The
invaginated portion measures two and a half inches. The portion
of gut above the constricted portion was very congested and almost
gangrenous. ‘The intussusception was very acute, and probably killed
the animal, a Lemur, very quickly. The case is further interesting,
for the intussusception occurred at that part of the intestine which
Fig. 8.
p>
pos!
O00)
oe
2
Ay
2,
o,
4
mr
The marsupium of a Short-headed Phalanger, Belideus breviceps, opened
order to show a scirrhous cancer growing from the mammary gland.
n
The microscopic characters of the growth are shown in figure B.
is most frequently affected in this way in the human subject; but
it is an example of the rarer form that occurs in this situation, viz.
the ileo-czecal variety.
The investigation into disease, structural aberrations, and mal-
formations of animals is of considerable importance apart from its
intrinsic interest. Darwin, in his ‘ Descent of Man,’ 2nd ed., 1874,
page 6, writes :—‘ Man is liable to receive from the lower animals,
and to communicate to them, certain diseases, as hydrophobia,
variola, glanders, syphilis, cholera, herpes, etc. ; and this fact proves
the close similarity of their tissues and blood, both in minute
structure and composition, far more plainly than does their com-
parison under the best microscope or by the aid of the best chemical
analysis.” He then quotes Rengger to the effect that the Cebus
azare in its native land is liable to catarrh, apoplexy, inflammation
of the bowels, and cataract.
This quotation seems to indicate beyond doubt that, had sufficient
evidence been forthcoming regarding diseases of animals, Darwin
1886.] DR. O. FINSCH ON A NEW WILD PIG. 217
would most certainly have taken them into account as arguments in
favour of his doctrine of Evolution.
So far as my own observations have extended, and each month
adds new facts, there seem to be few forms of disease peculiar to
Fig. 9.
Tleo-cecal intussusception in a Lemur. ¢, colon; 7, ileum.
Man. On the other hand, certain affections occur in some animals
with much greater frequency than in him, whilst a few diseases are
entirely confined to them; many are also modified by peculiarity in
structure, mode of life, and environment of the affected animal.
2. On a new Species of Wild Pig from New Guinea.
By Dr. O. Finscu, C.M.Z.S. &c.
[Received March 22, 1886.]
The second species of true Sus from New Guinea is a very distinct
one, and may be separated at once from the well-known Sus papuensis
by the following characters :—
Sus NIGER, sp. nov.
Uniform blackish, even when young.
These characters are sufficient, in all ages, to separate the present
species from Sus papuensis, which is quite different, being in the
adult brown, with a very distinct light-coloured mystacal stripe and
legs, while the young is rusty brown with light rusty-yellow stripes,
as inour Wild Boar.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XV. 15
218 MR. A. S. WOODWARD ON THE MANDIBULAR [Apr. 20,
I was fortunate enough to bring home living examples of both
these species, which are now deposited in the Zoological Gardens at
Berlin. The specimen of Sus papuensis was obtained in the month of
May, on the north coast of New Guinea, near the place noted on the
charts “ Passir Point,” a point, however, which does not really exist ;
it was then striped, but has now changed to the coloration of the
adult animal. The Black Pig (Sus niger) I purchased at Hihiaura, a
village some miles east of Bentley Bay; it was then very young
(perhaps six weeks old), and of a uniform black colour, which it
still retains.
Sus niger is scarcer than Sus papuensis, but lives in the same
localities ; it is of a more slender figure, higher on its legs and has
a much longer head. It grows to a considerable size, and I have
seen very huge animals of this species.
I have observed Sus niger in a domesticated or semidomesticated
state everywhere I have been in New Guinea along the south-east
coast, and on the north-east coast from Milne Bay to Humboldt Bay,
but always less common than Sus papuensis. The natives catch the
young ones and feed them; they are pets of the women and often
nursed at their breasts, and get very tame. This is the reason why
it is so difficult to get them. I have seen some very large specimens
in Hood-Bay district (village Kerapuno). Along the north-east
coast I saw this species in all the native villages, especially in Chads
Bay, in Village Island west of Fortification Point, in Astrolabe
Bay, and in Humboldt Bay. It may be mentioned that along this
coast I never saw any imported domestic pigs, but such pigs have
been introduced into the Port-Moresby district and other piaces
where missionaries have been sent.
The only specimen of Sus niger in a Museum that I know of is a
young one in the Museum of the Hon. William MacLeay of Sydney.
3. On the Relations of the Mandibular and Byoid Arches
in a Cretaceous Shark (Hybodus dubrisiensis, Mackie).
By A. Smita Woopwarp, F’.G.S., of the British Museum
(Natural History). (Communicated by the Secretary.)
[Received March 23, 1886.]
(Plate XX.)
Exactly as in all other divisions of the Animal Kingdom, the rapid
accumulation of morphological facts regarding the Selachian order
is providing a sure basis for distinguishing the more archaic from
the decidedly modern types. There can be no longer any doubt,
for example, that among living Selachians the most primitive and
ancient ferms are the Notidanide, the Cestraciontide, and the
Chlamydoselachidee. And of all the characters by which these
groups are definitely marked off from the remaining members of the
Order, none are of greater interest and importance than those relating
1886.] AND HYOID ARCHES IN A CRETACEOUS SHARK. 219
to the cranium and the cartilages of the visceral arches. Employing
the terminology of Prof. Huxley, published in this Society’s ‘ Pro-
ceedings’ for 1876 ', it may be said that the skull in each of the three
families just mentioned exhibits a nearer approach to the primitive
amphistylic type than does that of any other adult living vertebrate,
the hyomandibular taking very little share in the support of the
mandibular arch, and the union of that arch by direct articulation
with the cranium being only slight and sometimes almost wanting.
The superinduced modifications in the Notidanide and Cestraciontidee
are very evidently in the direction of an autostylic arrangement—
the former having a postorbital articulation of the pterygo-
quadrate, and the latter a more extensive preorbital connection ; and
in the Chlamydoselachidee there are somewhat similar tendencies,
although the great extension of the pterygo-quadrate cartilage
beyond the chondrocranium has apparently rendered the hyoman-
dibular support of some importance. It would seem, in fact, that
the oldest representatives of the Selachian order had skulls which
were neither hyostylic nor autostylic, though their least altered
descendants incline rather to the latter type; and that Notidanus
and Cestracion especially, with Chlamydoselachus in a less degree,
afford some slight glimpse into the early condition of the mandibular
and hyoid arches from which the two later modifications have
developed.
Such being the conclusions based upon a study of living
Selachians, it becomes of especial interest to determine to what
extent they are confirmed or otherwise by the evidence of fossils.
The remaius of Sharks, Rays, and Chimeroids are abundantly
scattered throughout most marine formations, from the Devonian to
the latest Tertiary, and the biologist might thus be led to expect
considerable information from this field of research. Unfortunately,
however, “ the imperfection of the geological record”’ presents its
accustomed difficulties, and almost all the facts hitherto discovered
relate merely to such hard structures as spines and teeth. There
are also a few instances in which the entire fish has been described
in a general way; but Prof. Cope’s elaborate account~ of some
cranial fossils from the Permian of Texas appears to be the only
contribution of importance that has yet been made to the morpholog
of the skull. Under such circumstances, I venture to offer to the
Zoological Society a brief description of a Cretaceous fossil in the
British Museum, which is particularly remarkable from the simi-
larity of the archaic features it presents to those of the existing types
already mentioned.
The fossil in question (no. 41675 of the B.M. register) was
‘1, H. Huxley, “On the Ceratodus forsteri, with observations on the
Classification of Fishes,” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1876, pp. 40-45.
2 B. D. Cope, “On the Structure of the Skull in the Hlasmobranch genus
Didymodus,’ Proc. Amer. Phil. Soe. vol. xxi. (1884), pp. 572-590, with plate.
See also further remarks by 8. Garman, “ Chlamydoselachus anguineus, Garm.,
a living species of Cladodont Shark,” Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll
vol. xii. no. 1 (1885), pp. 28, 29. -
15
220 MR. A. S. WOODWARD ON THE MANDIBULAR — [ Apr. 20,
obtained from the Chalk of Kent, and is in an excellent state of
preservation. It agrees in all important respects with a less perfect
specimen in the same collection, which forms the type of Hybodus
dubrisiensis, Mackie '—this fossil having been placed with the
Hybodents in the- Museum series by Mr. William Davies, and
subsequently figured by the editor of the ‘ Geologist’ under the
name just quoted. And it may be added that the teeth are undis-
tinguishable in general character from those of the typical species
of Hybodus of earlier date. The specimen (Plate XX.) exhibits the
pterygo-quadrate and Meckelian cartilages of each side,"those on the
right, however, being broken away for about the hinder third ; on the
lett side, the two elements of the hyoid arch are well shown in their
natural position, and less complete remains of the corresponding
cartilages are also seen on the right. Teeth and shagreen granules
are abundant, and three well-calcified vertebree appear at the back.
The pterygo-quadrate cartilage (figs. 1, 2, pg) measures 0°073 m.
in length, and varies considerably in depth at different points. At
the anterior end it is comparatively low and somewhat folded
inwards above, but it soon begins to deepen by the rising of the
upper border, which rapidly ascends to form a pterygo-trabecular
process (p); this is placed at about one third of the distance from
the fore to the hinder extremity. The process is almost pointed,
and posteriorly the upper contour at once fa!ls again to some extent,
though soon re-ascending in the form of a gentle curve to a still
higher prominence (0¢), which exhibits in front a very distinct,
relatively broad articular facette. This occurs at about the end of
the second third of the cartilage, and thus far the characters are
shown on both the left and right sides of the fossil; but the
hindermost third is only preserved to the left. A little beyond the
summit of the facette, the upper border becomes thickened and
turned outwards, and its edge forms a regular gentle curve down to
the articulation of the lower jaw. The inferior border of the car-
tilage is almost straight for its anterior two thirds, the dentigerous
portion, and then there follows a curved hollowing ; next is a minute
process, marking the commencement of the articular portion, which
shows two small hollowings and a terminal convex condyle.
The Meckelian cartilage, or lower jaw (mk), is preserved on both
sides of the fossil, but is only perfect on the left. “It measures
0:0685 m. in total length, being thus somewhat shorter than
the pterygo-quadrate. The upper contour is almost straight from
end to end, only a slight hollowing being perceptible immediately
beyond the termination of the tooth-bearing portion ; and this is
sueceeded by a short, wavy articular edge, fitting into the corre-
sponding irregularities at the hinder end of the pterygo-quadrate,
and finally presenting a distinct concavity for the reception of the
upper condyle. The cartilage is deepest just beneath the end of the
dentigerous portion, from which point the lower border curves
upwards both in frent and behind ; posteriorly the curve is at first
1 §. J. Mackie, “‘ On a new Species of Hybodus from the Lower Chalk,”
‘ The Geologist,’ vol. vi. (1868), pp. 241-246, pl. xiii.
1886.] AND HYOID ARCHES IN A CRETACEOUS SHARK. 221
gradual, but then very abrupt, while anteriorly the rise is much
more uniform and produces a markedly tapering outline. Quite at
the front, the cartilage has the appearance of being more robust than
is the case further back; but this is perhaps chiefly due to the
infolding of the lower edge for the production of a trough for the
membrane bearing the undeveloped teeth.
On comparing this form of mandibular arch with the various
modifications observed among living Selachians, it is at once
evident that none agrees so closely as that of the two genera of
Notidanide. Heptanchus and Hexanchus', indeed, exhibit an
arrangement that differs in no essential particular from that just
described in the Cretaceous Hybodont. In both cases there is not
only a well-developed pterygo-trabecular process—homologous (as
shown by Prof. Huxley *) with the pedicle of the tadpole’s suspen-
sorium,—but also a distinct postorbital prominence and articulation,
corresponding to the otic process in the tadpole*. The mode of
articulation of the lower jaw is also nearly identical in each case ;
and though the fossil is at present much crushed, it requires very
little careful study to discover that the hollows for the muscles for
raising the mandible were quite as deep in the Cretaceous Shark as
they are in the living genera under comparison; the upper border
of the quadrate region, however, is much less thickened than in the
Notidanida and agrees more closely with that of ordinary Selachians.
Tn the hyoid arch, the upper or hyomandibular element (figs. 1,
2, hm, and fig. 4) is comparatively small and slender. Its length is
0°037 m., and the cartilage is considerably arched and flattened
in what appears to have been an antero-posterior direction. The
proximal extremity is imperfect, but was evidently somewhat
expanded at its articulation with the cranium; this end is also
slightly twisted with respect to the axis of the rest of the element.
Just below the bend, the cartilage appears contracted a little when
viewed from behind, but soon expands again, forming a_ blunt
tuberosity (¢) on the side nearest the pterygo-quadrate ; and from
this point it finally becomes gradually narrowed until its termination
in the imperfectly-displayed articulation for the cerato-hyal.
The cerato-hyal (figs. 1,2, ch) is 0°048 m. in length, and is com-
pletely shown on the left side of the fossil, though somewhat mutilated
at the distal end ; the lower part, however, is well preserved on the
right. The cartilage is considerably arched in the ordinary manner,
and is much Jess robust towards its upper end than in the rest of its
length. Compared with the hyomandibular, it is remarkably stout.
A little below the proximal end it becomes comparatively large and
' See figures by C. Gegenbaur, ‘“ Untersuchungen zur vergleichenden
Anatomie der Wirbelthiere.—U1. Das Kopfskelet der Selachier,” pl. x. I am
also indebted to the kindness of Mr. Howes and Mr. Martin Woodward for
every facility for studying the beautiful preparations of Heptanchus, Cestracion,
&e. in the Biological Laboratory of the Normal School of Science.
* 1. H. Huxley, loc. cit. p. 40.
* It is interesting to note that Prof. Cope’s Permian Selachian skulls already
referred to also exhibit this character,
222 MR. A. S. WOODWARD ON THE MANDIBULAR [Apr. 20,
is much compressed from side to side, the superior edge thus formed
being well marked and sharp, but the lower appearing thicker
(fig. 2a). About two thirds of the distance from the upper extremity
a gradual twist in the cartilage renders the remaining portion com-
pressed almost from above downwards, and it ends distally in a
triangular expansion, well shown on the right. The terminal edge
was evidently articulated to a basihyal of considerable size, but of
this no trace has been preserved.
At one third of its length from the proximal end, the cerato-hyal
exhibits a prominent tuberosity on the lower border (fig. 2, fu).
This appears to be situated opposite a point corresponding to the
attachment of the mandibulo-hyoid ligament of living Selachiaus’:
but Ihave failed to discover indications of any similar prominence either
in Heptanchus or the other specimens and figures to which I have
been able to refer. It evidently represents a muscular insertion, and
one of no small importance. In Teleostean fishes, the well-developed
genio-hyoideus arises from an equivalent point in the hyoid arch, and
by its insertion at the symphysis acts as the main depressor of the
mandible *. In the Selachii, however, the function is undertaken
chiefly by the coraco-mandibulares arising from the pectoral arch,
and a differentiated genio-hyoid appears to be wanting. The elabo-
rate researches of Vetter * in regard to the myology of the jaws and
branchial arches in Heptanchus and Acanthias can leave no doubt
that the tuberosity in question is that deep insertion of the great
constrictor superficialis muscle which becomes the origin of the
genio-hyoid in higher fishes ; and its marked character in the Creta-
ceous Hybodont may perhaps indicate that in this form the differen-
tiation had already taken place to a certain extent.
On the whole, the form of hyoid arch just described bears a
greater resemblance to that of the Notidanide than to that of any
other living family. It agrees in the fact that the hyomandibular
and cerato-hyal are most contracted at their point of union, but the
elements are somewhat stouter than those both of Heptanchus and
Hezanchus.
The type specimen of Hybodus dubrisiensis (B.M. 36908) is of
somewhat smaller size than the fossil here described, and as its
cartilages are apparently less calcified, it probably represents a
younger individual. It is comparatively imperfect, and except in
the characters of the teeth and the upper border of the pterygo-
quadrate, it does not admit of any detailed comparison with the
foregoing descriptive account. There are, however, unmistakable
indications of an articular otic process, besides a well-marked pterygo-
trabecular eminence ; and a small fracture shows the slight thickening
of the overturned edge of the quadrate region (fig. 6).
1 W. K. Parker, ‘On the Structure and Development of the Skull in Sharks
and Skates,” Trans. Zool. Soe. vol. x. p. 210, pl. xxviii. fig. 2.
* R. Owen, * Anatomy of Vertebrates,’ vol. i. p. 206, fig. 155.
* B. Vetter, “ Untersuchungen zur vergleichenden Anatomie der Kiemen-
und Kiefermusculatur der Fische.—I ,” Jenaische Zeitschrift, vol. vii. (1874),
pp. 403-458, pls. xiv., xv.
Si... Te, see tee
1886.] AND HYOID ARCHES IN A CRETACEOUS SHARK. 223
A third fossil in the National Collection (no. 49032) also belongs
to the same species, and exhibits the remains of the anterior portion
of what was evidently a complete fish at the time of its entombment.
It agrees in size with the specimen here described, and exhibits
traces of the articular facette on the otic process, in addition to part
of the left cerato-hyal with its characteristic lower tuberosity.
Fragments of the shoulder-girdle are also preserved, and a portion
of the base of the chondrocranium; and the vertebral column is
shown for a length of 0°16 m., comprising about 33 well-calcified
asterospondylic centra. Unfortunately, all indications of dorsal
spines are wanting.
As the typical Hybodonts range throughout the whole of the
Mesozoic strata, from the Muschelkalk to the Upper Cretaceous
inclusive }, and as it has teen found impossible hitherto to recognize
more than one generic type—Hybodus—on the evidence of spines
and teeth, it would be interesting to compare the modifications in
the skull of H. dubrisiensis with the corresponding structures in
earlier species. As yet, however, no information in regard to these
has been published, and the only deposits that have yielded
satisfactory specimens are the Lower Lias of Lyme Regis and the
Wealden of Pevensey Bay, Sussex. Of such fossils the British
Museum contains an unrivalled series, and I hope to attempt the
elucidation of the more important of these on a future occasion. It
must suffice at present to add that, though there are well-preserved
pterygo-quadrates from both the formations mentioned, there
appears to be none but the most uncertain evidence of an articular
facette on the otic process in any; aud if this observation can he
confirmed it will become of considerable interest when taken in
connection with the fact, pointed out by Prof. Huxley *, that the
postorbital articulation in the living Heptanchus is only acquired
comparatively late in the development of the foetus. It is also inter-
esting to note that one of the Liassic specimens (Brit. Mus. no. p340)
exhibits traces of a persistent notochord, with the arches alone
calcified, whereas in the Cretaceous torm it has just been shown that
there are well-differentiated centra. The differences between the
anterior and posterior teeth are likewise more marked in H.dubrisiensis
than in any of the earlier species of which satisfactory remains are
known. It would appear, indeed, that there is distinct evidence of
specialization as the Hybodonts are traced through the Mesozoic
period, and it is almost certain that future research in regard to
structures other than teeth will lead to the subdivision of the multi-
tudinous forms hitherto grouped under one generic name.
! Teeth indistinguishable from Hybodus, and originally described under this
name, occur in the Carboniferous, but they have been proved to belong to a
distinct genus, T'ristychius (IT. Stock, “ On the Structure and Affinities of the
genus Tristychius, Agass.,’ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) xii. 1885, pp. 177-190,
pl. vii.). There are also other Palseozoic Hybodontide, e. g. Crenacanthus,
* Loe. cit. p. 44, fig. 9.
224 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. ._ [Apr. 20,
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XX.
Fig. 1. Side view of jaws of Hybodus dubrisiensis, Mackie. pg, pterygo-
quadrate; mk, Meckelian cartilage; p, pterygo-trabecular process ;
ot, otic process ; Am, hyomandibular ; ch, cerato-hyal. (B.M. 41675.)
. Under view of the same: ¢wv, tuberosity on cerato-hyal. 24, natural
transverse section of right cerato-hyal.
. Teeth of the same, twice nat. size. 4, anterior tooth; b, hinder tooth.
. Hyomandibular of the same, back view. 7, tuberosity.
. Restoration of mandibular and hyoid arches of Hybodus dubrisiensis.
. Section of the upper border of quadrate region of pterygo-quadrate of
type specimen of Hybodus dubrisiensis, showing thickening.
Figs. 1, 2, 4-6 are of the natural size.
bo
Soe co
4, On the Hybrid between Lagopus albus and Tetrao tetrix,
By Rozsert Corrert, C.M.Z.S.
[Received April 1, 1886.]
(Plates XXI., XXII.)
Introduction, p. 224. Young plumage, p. 251.
Distribution, p. 225. Sex, p. 232.
Propagation in Norway, p. 226. Supposed parentage, p. 232.
Diagnosis and Configuration, p. 227. | Other Hybrids of Lagopus, p. 256.
Measurements of ¢ & Q, p. 228. Habits, p. 238.
Colouring, p. 228. Food, p. 239.
Winter plumage, p. 229. | Skeleton, p. 240.
Summer plumage, p. 230.
Introductory Remarks.
The existence in Northern Europe of two kinds of natural hybrids
amongst the Tetraonide was already known in the last century,
and one form of these is rather common in the forests of Norway and
Sweden, as well as in some other parts of Europe, being met with
annually in many districts, where its hybrid character is, as a rule,
well known tothe inhabitants. This is the “ Rakkelfugl,” the cross
between the male of Tefrao tetrix aud the female of T'etrao urogallus.
The male of this hybrid, which has been known since 1744", in colour
more nearly resembles the cock of Yetrao tetrir than that of
Tetrao urogallus, whilst the female in this respect is less charac-
teristic and resembles the hens of both species. In shape its
hybrid nature is indicated by the form of the tail; in size it is
intermediate between both parents, so that both sexes are larger than
the father, and the male is even larger than the mother.
The other hybrid, the result of a connection between Tetrao tetrix
and Lagopus albus, which is called in Norway and Sweden “ Rype-
Orre,” is much rarer, and specimens are still desiderata in most
museums. The origin of this hybrid, its habits, and its places of
resort are as yet partially, if not wholly, obscure. Its winter plumage
is the only one which is generally known, whilst the spring or
summer plumage is all but unrecorded.
1 Kel. Vet.-Akad. Handl. Stockholm, 1744, p. 181.
P.Smit lth.
HYBODUS DUBRISIENSIS,
Mackie
7 30
re)
1886. Pl XX
1886. ] MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 225
I will therefore endeavour to recount the most important features
which have hitherto been noticed concerning this hybrid, which, on
account of its rarity, as well as its pretty and peculiar external
appearance, is well suited to attract the attention of naturalists.
The earliest account of this hybrid dates from the year 1788,
as Sparrman at that time gave an illustration of it and briefly men-
tioned it as ‘‘ Vetrao tetrix, mas, varietas” in the third issue of
the ‘Museum Carlsonianum’ (pl. 65), without, apparently, having
suspected its hybrid character. In 1795 this was first noticed
by Sommerfelt (‘ Topographisk Journal for Norge,’ 14 Hefte, p. 50,
Christiania, 1795), who described two specimens from the districts
about Mjdsen in Southern Norway, which he regarded as a hybrid
between Tetrao tetriv and Lagopus albus. From the description,
which is comparatively detailed (see below), it is evident that the
Specimens were males in winter plumage.
Subsequently a male shot in Wermeland in Sweden in 1808 was
mentioned and figured by Thunberg (Vet.-Akad. Handl. Stockholm,
1808, p. 195), and he also recognized its hybrid character.
The first who gave a more detailed and elaborated description of it
was Nilsson in his ‘ Ornithologia Suecica’ in 1817, and subsequently
in his various editions of his ‘Skandinavisk Fauna.’ Since then it
has been occasionally treated of in different works on the fauna of
Scandinavia, and here its winter plumage has also been given on
plates, as in Nilsson, ‘ I]luminerade Figurer till Skandinavisk Fauna’
(plate 5); Lindblad, ‘Svenska Jiigareforbundets nya tidskrift,’ vol. xi.
plate 4 (1873); Sundevall, ‘ Svenska Foglarna,’ plate 34 ; and Lloyd,
‘Game Birds and Wild Fowl of Sweden and Norway’ (London,
1867), &e.?
Distribution.
The “‘ Rype-Orre”’ has hitherto only been found in Northern and
North-eastern Europe, and is known from Norway, Sweden, and
Northern Russia.
According to a report which I have just received from Dr. Pleske
(of St. Petersburg), these hybrids in Russia are not very unusual.
Most of them are obtained in the game market; therefore no special
information can be given concerning the localities in which they were
procured. He believes that about eight specimens are at present
preserved in the Museum at St. Petersburg, most of which are
males in winter plumage. Dr. Meves, of Stockholm, informs me
that in 1872 he saw two specimens in winter plumage in the Museum
at Moscow, both males; whilst others, said to be females, were
only partial albinos of the female Tetrao éetrix. Dr. Kolthoff, of
Upsala, has also seen two male and one female Russian specimens.
It is remarkable enough that as yet there is no proof of their
occurrence in Finland ; for Mela says, “It has not been recognized
‘In the ‘ Zeitschr. fiir die gesammte Ornithologie, 2 Jahrg. 1885, p. 47,
tab. iii. (Budapest, 1885), Herr Henke has figured and treated of a specimen
from Archangel under the name of Tetrao albo-tetrix hybridus, fem. This
specimen is clearly only a partial albino of 7. feria, fem.
226 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. ._ [Apr. 20,
with certainty in our land, but it must surely be found if more care-
fully sought after” (‘ Vertebrata Fennica,’ p. 164, Helsingfors,
1882).
In Sweden several specimens have been captured, most of them
in the northern counties (Helsingland, Jemtland, Norr- and Wester-
botten), but a few as far south as Dalarne and Wermeland—as
a rule amongst the mountain-ridges of the districts adjoining
Norway. Dr. Kolthoff has informed me ia a letter, dated Upsala,
7th March 1886, that, according to his knowledge, twelve specimens
of this hybrid have been preserved in Sweden, of which the Upsala
Museum possesses four (one male, three females). The Museum
in Stockholm owns four, of which one is a female. Almost all
were found, it may be said, accidentally, amongst the game which
is forwarded during the winter from the northern counties to the
towns for sale.
Propagation in Norway.
The first specimen preserved in any Norwegian collection was a
male in winter plumage, forwarded from Rorés in 1837 to the late
Prof. Esmark. Until 1870, hardly more than halfa dozen specimens
were found or preserved in Norway, all of which were males obtained
from the mountain districts in the southern part of the country
(the provinces of Christianssand, Bergen, and Hamar); but during
the years subsequent to 1870, 15 additional specimens have been
obtained.
Thus at least 22 specimens of this hybrid have been preserved in
Norway during the last 50 years, among which only two were
females. Almost all these have been obtained by the University at
Christiania ; at present there are eleven specimens ‘mounted (amongst
which are the two females), one skeleton, and two skins. A few
specimens have been sent abroad, and two are preserved in the
museum of Bergen. Of these 22 specimens I have personally
examined 13 in the flesh, having myself found some in the game-
dealers’ shops, while the others have during the last few years been
presented to or bought for the museum. All the specimens were found
in the southern districts of the country, with the exception of one,
which was obtained in Saltdalen near Bodo, thus just within the
Arctic Circle (65° N. lat.). The most southern specimen was caught
in Sande, near the Christiania fjord (59° 35’ N. lat.).
The greater number of the preserved specimens, both in Norway
and Sweden, have been in their winter plumage. One reason for
this is that the greatest capture of the Tetraonidze takes place during
the winter months, for during the summer they are protected by
the game-laws ; and another is that the hybrids previous to the
assumption of their winter plumage so nearly resemble the young
males and the hens of the Teérao tetriv that they are easily passed
over unnoticed. In the winter, however, their plumage is so marked
and peculiar, that this very seldom happens; but it is very probable
that the greater number of individuals do not fall into the hands of
naturalists,
1886. ] MR. R, COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 227
In giving the following account of the “ Rype-Orre”’ I have had
an opportunity of examining, besides the Norwegian specimens, the
four specimens which at present (March 1886) are preserved in the
Museum at Upsala, and which, by the kindness of Prof. Tullberg
and Dr. Kolthoff, have been forwarded to me for examination. Of
these specimens one is a male, namely Thunberg’s individual of 1808
(see above), the other three are females.
Besides these I have examined a fine male specimen in winter
dress, captured in Wermeland (Sweden) in the middle of January
1886, which I found myself in the game-market at Christiania in
February last.
Diagnosis and Configuration,
Tail slightly forked ; number of rectrices 18 ; toes semiclothed, the
outermost joints bare ; claws longand broad; bill stout ; eyebrows
covered with warts, and pectinated above.
Colour of male in winter dress: white underneath, with black
feathers on the breast and flanks; blackish above, with whitish
edges on all the feathers. A white band through the eye, and a
blackish beneath it. Tail-feathers black, tipped with white.
The female in winter dress more or less whitish underneath ; the
back, breast, and flanks (sometimes the entire lower surface) trans-
versely banded with reddish brown and black, all the feathers with
whitish edges. Tail black, faintly speckled with brown and
whitish.
Bill rather like that of Tetrao tetrix, strongly built, but the culmen
is not so plainly ridged as in that species; its size in the male is
nearly double of that of Lagopus albus. The side branch of the
mandible strongly developed.
Eyebrows covered with numerous small red warts, and with a fine-
toothed ridge above. The height of the eyebrows is about half the
diameter of the eye; the comb im winter specimens is not very
high.
[oie shaped like those of Lagopus, long and broad, and very
slightly oblique, the immer edge being a trifle broader than the
outer. They are less curved than in 7’. ¢etrix, and their colour is not
so dark as in that species.
Toes semiclothed with hair-like feathers, densely in winter ; the
innermost joint entirely feathered, the middle one naked above, but
clothed on the sides, the outermost quite bare. The bare portions
covered with horny rings, on the sides with one or two series of
rounded scales ; under these there is a toothed comb (as in Zetrao,
unlike Lagopus).
Hind toe short, as in Lagopus (proportionally much longer in
Tetrao).
Tail slightly forked, the outermost feathers very slightly bent
outwards at the end, and (in the male) 12 to 24 millim. longer than
the centralones. Its length is proportionally longer than in 7’, ¢etriz,
and more like that of Lagopus.
Under tail-coverts slightly shorter than the central rectrices (or
228 MR. R. COLLETY ON HYBRID GROUSE.“ _—_[Apr. 20,
about one diameter of the eye). In ZLagopus they are still shorter,
or one diameter and a half, in 7’. tetrix one or two diameters longer
than the central rectrices.
Male and Female.—Besides the markings and size the following
differences occur between the two sexes—the tail of the female is
nearly square, the side branches of the upper mandible are more
developed, and the comb-like scales of the toes and the ridge of the
eyebrows are considerably longer in the male than in the female.
Measurements.
Male.
Total ’ Outer tail- Centre tail-
length. Wane feather. feather.
mm. mm. mm. mm.
1.... 470 242, 142 122 Gudbrandsdalen, 7 Dec. 1870.
2.... 480 238 147 ey. Saltdalen, Nordland, 30 Dec. 1871.
eit 237 138 106 Gudbrandsdalen, 8 Oct. 1872.
4,... 508 255 142 125 Osterdalen, 5 Nov. 1872.
5.... 480 252 140 2 Gudbrandsdalen, (?) Noy. 1872.
6.... 499 245 2 130 Gudbrandsdalen, 28 Feb. 1875.
Ufpere 0s: 232 146 124 Hadeland, 27 Dee. 1879.
8.... 480 235 135 115 Tolgen, 3 Nov. 1881.
Cease eesele 235 140 118 Sande Pred, 9 Noy. 1881.
10.... 530 235 150 125 Roros, 10 Oct. 1882.
Female.
11.... 423 205 127 97 Gudbrandsdalen, Jan. 1875.
12.... 425 205 118 100 Roros, 7 Oct. 1876.
It will be seen from these measurements that the male has an
average length of 490 millim., about equal to that of the female Tetrao
tetrix (but with slightly longer outer tail-feathers). ‘The total
length of the female is about 424 millim., being thus considerably
less than the male; it is, however, somewhat larger than the male
Lagopus albus.
Colouring.
Of the fourteen specimens of this hybrid at present preserved in
the Museum at Christiania, one is a young bird of the year, on
which the brown plumage almost entirely remains; four are young
birds changing to winter plumage, the latter being predominant ;
finally, are eight in full winter plumage, and amongst these are two
females. Besides these there is one specimen (a male in winter
plumage) exhibited as a skeleton,
In winter plumage are also the specimens in the Bergen and
Upsala Museums. The specimens at Stockholm are likewise, so
far as is known, in winter plumage, or in the changing from autumn
to winter. A long link in the series is entirely wanting in all
these collections, namely—the spring plumage, which is probably
unknown ; the summer plumage, which is in all cases known from
1886. } MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 229
the description of a single specimen in an old treatise (see below) ;
and finally the young in down, which is also unknown’.
Winter Plumage.
The winter plumage develops itself in Norway during October, and
as a rule is completed by the latter half of the month. Whilst one
or two of the males had not moulted the last autumnal feathers in
the beginning of November, one of the females was in full winter
plumage on the 7th of October. This, however, was not an
accidental circumstance, but has its analogy in Lagopus albus, in
which the change to winter plumage takes place more rapidly in the
females, although they begin to change later than the males.
The tarsus and toes are then fully clothed, and the naked outer
half of the toes is completely hidden by the overlying hair-like
feathers.
The male in winter (Plate XXI. fig. 1) has the upper parts black
with greyish-white, finely freckled edges to the feathers; the under
surface is white, with an irregular black pateh on the breast which
may be of greater or less extent, occasionally parted in the middle,
or so small that there only remain a few black feathers. On the
flanks a few black feathers are always present, but sometimes hidden
by the white ones. The wing-coverts are chiefly white, speckled
with brown. The wing-feathers are brownish black, finely speckled
with grey ; the outer web of the primariesis white. A more or less
conspicuous white band passes through the eye, and under this a
similar black one (including in most cases, but not always, the chin),
with narrow white edges to the feathers. The upper tail-coverts are
black with broad white edges; under tail-coverts white. The tail-
feathers are black with narrow white tips, which almost disappear on
the outermost ones. The front of the tarsus is greyish.
The eyebrows are bright red; their height 11 millim., of which the
upper toothed ridge is 43 millim.
Although the winter garb is remarkably similar in its general
appearance in the different individuals, a slight variation in some
details will always be found. In some the unspotted white parts are
more extended than in others, while in others the black feathers are
predominant on the flanks and abdomen. One of the specimens
in the University Museum (Nov. 1881) was unusually dark, with a
very large patch on its breast, nearly black scapulars, and numerous
black feathers on the abdomen.
The female in winter (Plate XXI. fig. 2) has the upper parts
banded with black and yellowish brown, and whitish freckled edges
to the feathers. The ground-colouring of the lower parts is white,
each feather blackish at base ; the breast and flanks barred with yel-
lowish brown and black, and edged with white. The wing-coverts are
speckled with white, greyish brown, and rusty yellow; the wing-
‘A more detailed account of the different plumages I have given in
* Videnskabs-Selskabets Forhandlinger, Christiania,’ 1872 (p. 238); and ‘ Nyt
= ee for Naturvidenskaberne,’ vol. xxiii. 1877, p. 159, and vol. xxyi. 1881,
p. 324,
230 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. (Apr. 20,
feathers are brownish black, finely speckled with grey. A whitish
stripe passes through the eye, under this a brown one. The upper
tail-coverts irregularly barred with black, greyish brown, and yellowish
brown, with broad white edges. The under tail-coverts white,
sometimes a few feathers banded with rusty. The tail-feathers are
black, with the outer web speckled brownish grey or whitish, and
white-tipped ; the centre pair entirely mottled. The front of the
tarsus as in the male.
Thus in winter plumage there exists this difference between
the sexes, that those parts which in the male are black with white
edgings to the feathers, are more or less mottled brown in the female,
and instead of the male’s black spot on the breast the female has the
breast barred with yellowish brown. Of the three females from
Sweden which at present,are preserved in the Upsala Museum, two
(Jemtland, Feb. 1886 ; Angermanland, Jan. 1861) are normal, and
on the whole similar to the before-mentioned Norwegian specimens.
The last is, however, rather light-coloured: thus the barred feathers
on the flanks are quite covered with white ones, so that these
portions seem to be unspotted; the throat likewise is snowy white.
Both are young individuals; this is seen by their slender and unworn
beaks.
The third female (Jemtland, January 1885) was somewhat
different, and very dark in colour, without any part of its abdomen
being entirely white. This was an old bird, the beak coarse and
well-worn on the edges and point. The ovary was (according to
Dr. Kolthoff) plainly visible. On the rump several well-worn
autumnal feathers with brown cross lines remained amongst the
white winter feathers. Its essential peculiarities were as follows :—
On the upper parts, wings, and tail normal, though intermingled
with a somewhat stronger reddish-brown colour. The whole of
the lower half from the beak to the rump evenly furnished with
broad brown and black cross bands; a few feathers quite white,
others had white edges. In other respects like the former ones.
Size normal.
Although this specimen was decidedly more darkly coloured under-
neath than the others, its general characteristics in markings and
shape were otherwise quite in conformity with them.
Summer Plumage.
The period in the spring at which the individuals begin to change
their winter plumage is unknown. All the specimens which i have
examined were captured in the months October to February ; and on
a specimen in the Museum at Bergen, shot in Voss (Bergen Stift)
about the Ist March 1868, there is yet no trace of spring plumage
visible.
Whilst the spring plumage of the Rype-Orre is as yet unknown,
there exists one account of a specimen in its summer garb. In
1823 Mr. Sommerfelt, jun.', in ‘ Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne,’
1 A son of the Mr, Sommerfelt who is mentioned above (p. 225) as haying
for the first time brought to notice its hybrid character.
1886. | MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 231
1 Aarg. 2 B. p. 71 (Christiania, 1823), described a specimen in summer
plumage which he obtained from Thoten (near the lake Mjésen in
Norway). From the size of this specimen it appears to have been
amale. The statement is as follows :—
(Male? in summer (July)). ‘‘Caput, collum, dorsum, pectus
Tetraonis tetricis famine. Remiges primores et secundarie albe,
plurium tectricum albe. Rhachis remigis 1"° fusca. Rectrices
nigre apicibus albis, duabus mediis nigris ferrugineo-undulatis ea-
ceptis. Cauda non forficata. Abdomen et femora ut in T. tetrice
femina, modo pennis singulis albis ornata, Digiti sublanati. Mag-
nitudo T’, tetricis feemine.”
The colouring of the summer plumage thus generally resembles
that of the Greyhen, but is distinguished by a few white feathers
on the abdomen. The tail-feathers also differ from the winter garb
in that the central pair are transversely banded with brown, Au
inaccuracy has probably been made in describing the wings as white
instead of “ whitish,” as in summer it is not likely that the white
colour would be more extended than in winter; (and the description
“ digiti sublanati”” contradicts the possibility of the specimen being
a partial albino of the female Tetrao tetrix).
Young Plumage.
The plumage of the young is, as one might expect, mottled brown
like both parents, but the upper parts remind one more of Lagopus
albus, the lower parts of Tetrao tetriv. I found a single spe-
cimen, a male, in this garb amongst a parcel of game from Oster-
dalen (South-eastern Norway) in the autumn of 1880; it had been
probably shot or captured at the end of September. The plumage
of the young on the whole is still retained, but a few winter feathers
have already appeared amongst the brown ; the wings and the outer
tail-feathers are also new, and belong to the winter plumage, and
thus present a striking contrast to the other mottled brown feathers.
Young male in autumn (Plate XXII. fig. 1).—The upper parts
mottled and banded by rusty yellow and black, almost the same as
in the young of Lagopus albus, the cross bands being narrower and
closer than in the young of TZeérao tetriz. In the longer wing-
coverts there is a discernible light elongated patch along the quills.
The tail-feathers, as in Lagopus albus, jun., are transversely banded
with black and reddish brown.
On its lower parts the breast and sides, as in the young of the
Tetrao tetriz, are closely and evenly banded with black and rusty
yellow, and both colours are about the same extent. In this respect
they more nearly approach the last species than Lagopus albus, as the
young birds of Willow-Grouse have the rusty brown colour much
more developed (so that the breast can be said to be a rusty yellow
with irregular black patches or broken cross bands). The under
tail-coverts are barred by greyish white and brown as in Te¢rao
tetrix. The throat is barred, but not so manifestly as the breast.
232 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20.
The covering of the feet is still thin and incomplete, and the hair-
like feathers have only appeared on the innermost toe-joint ; the
claws are brown horn-colour, resembling those of the Blackgame, but
their form is more like those of the Willow-Grouse.
The change of the young to winter plumage (Pl. XXII. fig. 2)
proceeds in about the same manner as in the Willow-Grouse; and,
analogously with what takes place in them, the first plumage has not
always time for development all over before it is dislodged by the winter
garb. As already mentioned, the remiges with their longer coverts, the
abdomen, and after them the tail-feathers, are the first parts which
moult into the winter garb. In the beginning of October the young
plumage of the male is half lost, and the winter plumage completed
on the tail and belly, and partially on the back, whilst the head,
neck, and upper breast are still mottled brown; one or two brown
autumnal feathers are also long retained on the flanks. The covering
of the toes is still scanty. The Christiania Museum possesses several
such specimens.
Sea.
As previously mentioned, amongst the twenty-two known specimens
from Norway there are but two females. This may partly be for the
reason that the hens even in winter plumage have on the whole
a less attractive plumage than the males, and therefore might be
more easily overlooked, or pass for a white-speckled Greyhen. But
the main cause may probably be a different one. It is a well-known
fact, confirmed by a majority of instances, that amongst hybrids an
unusually large percentage of males are produced. If compared with
the other and better known hybrid of the Tetraonide, the “ Rakkel-
fugl” (Tetrao tetriv male + Tetrao urogallus female), it will appear
that there are perhaps ten males to one female.
However, it must be remembered that the female Rakkelfugl is
even to a greater extent more likely to be overlooked than the hen
of the Rype-Orre, as it exactly resembles a small female Tetrao
urogallus, so that this proportion cannot be computed with accu-
racy.
a all the males dissected (in winter) the ¢estes have been found
to be small, although not rudimentary or abnormally formed.
Their colour was greyish white; the left was generally larger than
the right, and measured in one specimen 5 millim. in length, the
breadth about 3 millim. In another, and this towards the spring
(28th February), they were unusually small, barely 2 millim. long.
In the hens, which were also shot in winter, the ovary was visible
on the left side like asmall whitish patch; the eggs were hardly
discernible.
Supposed Parentage.
Which species contributes the father and which the mother to
this peculiar hybrid is as yet unknown. Only exceptionally has it
fallen to the lot of an intelligent sportsman to see it in its living
state, and then only for the few seconds in which it rises, to fall
1886. } MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 233
again to his gun. The knowledge of its life and habits therefore
amounts to almost nothing, and no observations have been made in
Norway which can give any information concerning its origin.
The existence of this hybrid arises from the fact that both parents
not unfrequently inhabit the same localities. Thus Tetrao tetrix in
the southern valleys of the land, where most of these liybrids are met
with, regularly ascends to the elevated birch-forests on the mountains,
and establishes itself in the regions where Lagopus albus has its
proper home. On the other hand, but more rarely, Lagopus albus
descends and breeds in the upper portions of the conifer-woods,
where the other species is still to be met with in numbers.
In the northern portions of the country, however, where both
species live almost at the same elevation above the sea, and still more
commonly share the same place of residence, the Tetrao tetrix on the
whole appears in much lesser numbers than the other species, and
the hybrids are here apparently more rare.
It is not easy to understand the true reason for the pairing between
two species so different in their habits, appearance, and nature. One
of the specimens obtained in Norway was shot at a place (Saltdalen
in Nordland) where no want of mates of either species could be
observed in the neighbourhood. Connections of this kind are _
repugnant to nature, and in many cases the only feasible explanation
is to be found in imagining a violent and irresistible desire to breed
out of the species.
Concerning the question of the origin, it is first of all necessary to
find out whether one or two sorts of such hybrids exist—the one
bred between the male Lagopus albus and female Vetrao tetriz, the
other between the male Z'etrao tetriv and female Lagopus albus’.
But as it is an established fact that all individuals hitherto found
(with us) of the Rype-Orre, if obtained at the same season of the year,
are on the whole singularly alike both in size and the colouring of
their plumage, their origin cannot be ascribed to more than one of
the two possible connections.
When Prof. Nilsson in 1817, in his ‘ Ornithologia Suecica,’ treated
of its descent for the first time, he mentions it (p. 303) as
“ Hybridus a Tetrice patre et Tetr. subalpino femina”*. This
assumption that it is the male of Tetrao tetriz which has formed
an illegitimate connection with the female of Lagopus albus (as
it is also the Blackcock that with the female of Vetrao wrogallus
produces the ‘“ Rakkelfugl”), has always been and is still gene-
rally accepted by most naturalists. Upon this theory it has
received the names :—Tetrao lagopoides, Nilss. Skand. Fauna, 1st
ed. (1828), and 7'etrao lagopides, 2nd ed. (1855); Yetrao lagopodite-
tricides, Sundev. Svenska Fogl. p. 255 (186-2), (being the descendant
of Tetrao tetriz, mas, it had to bear its generic name) ; and, finally,
1 A hybrid between Lagopus mutus and Tetrao tetrix is rather improbable,
on account of the very different haunts of these species.
2 * Qui vero videt (illas) varietates, non diutius dubitare potest de libidine
Tetricis ad furtivos amores cum congeneribus instituendos semper paratissima.’’
(Nilss. 7. c.)
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XVI. 16
234 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20,
Lagopotetrix layopoides, Malm, @fv. Kgl. Vet.-Akad. Férh. 1880,
. 30.
¥ In opposition to this assumption respecting its paternity, in 1872,
in a treatise “‘ Remarks onthe Ornithology of Northern Norway ’”’
(Forhandl.Vidensk. Selskabet i Christiania, 1572, p. 238), I advanced
the opinion that the Rype-Orre was an offspring of the male
Lagopus albus and female Tetrao tetriv, a theory which, singularly
enough (although without any proof), was started by Sommerfelt so
early as 1823 in his descriptions of the specimen in summer plumage’
(cf. above). Insupport of this theory I certainly could not produce
direct observations or positive proofs, but I stated some circum-
stances which, according to my views, caused the descent from the
male Lagopus albus to be more probable than from that of the
Blackeock. In conclusion, I expressed the hope that intelligent
sportsmen or naturalists might soon be fortunate enough to insti-
tute observations by which this question might be clearly solved.
Although this was written fourteen years ago, nothing has as yet
appeared in northern literature to throw a light on the subject.
I shall not here set forth at length the reasons which caused me
to advance this hypothesis ; they will be found given in Dresser’s
‘ History of the Birds of Europe,’ vol. vii. p. 213. They are chiefly
derived from a comparison with the second and _ better-known
hybrid, the “ Rakkelfugl,”’ concerning which it is an undoubted fact
that it is descended from the male Yetrao tetrir and the female
Tetraourogallus. In this case, too, the father belongs to the smaller,
the mother to the larger species; and the offspring is a hybrid in
which the male is of about. the same size as its mother.
It is also a well-known fact that the male Willow Grouse is often
found in the breeding-haunts of the Tetrao tetriz, and undoubtedly
frequents them more often than is generally known. | Every sports-
man is aware that amongst the Willow-Grouse (and the Ptarmigan)
an excess of males is to be met with, which throughout the summer
ramble about on the mountains, and these are probably willing to
form connections whenever an opportunity offers. My friend Prof.
Friis has witnessed a remarkable proof of the eagerness of the male
Willow-Grouse’s desire to mate. In the spring of 1857 he observed
at one of the most elevated farms in Nordmore (Bergen stift) a male
Willow-Grouse which for several succeeding days kept near the
house and endeavoured to form a connection with a white speckled
domestic hen.
Finally it is worth recording that two young male Rype-Orre,
shot in October 1845, in Hedemora, Sweden, were accompanied by
a female bird, apparently their mother, which was supposed to be a
Greyhen*. This observation would have been of great weight in
1 “Af denne Slegts (Tetrao) hybride Yngel forekom mig paa Toten i Juli
Maaneds Begyndelse folgende, som s¥gnes at vere en Affodning of Aarhénen
og Rype-Hannen ” [From the hybrid brood of this genus I obtained the following
in the beginning of July, which appears to be an offspring of the Greyhen and
the male Willow-Grouse] (Nyt Mag. f. Natury. 1st ser. vol. ii. Christiania, 1823,
p- vl):
2 (fy. Kgl. Vet.-Akad. Forh. 1847, p. 201.
1886. ] MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 235
supporting the theory, if it had only been clearly proved, as probably
the young hybrids continue to follow their mother for long.
I again remark that for the theory of parentage here advanced
there is indeed no positive proof, and that it is an hypothesis
which may be wrong, but that it appears to me to have at least as
much reason in it as the older one (which is also without proof) of
the descent from the male Blackeock. On the whole it is remarkable
enough that up to the present not one direct observation has been
made (such as an observation of the two species in copuld in their
wild state, or of the two species pairing in captivity), That such
observations will not be wanting hereafter, is a matter of course.
I have just received a fresh contribution to this question in a letter
from Dr. Pleske, dated St. Petersburg, 16th March, 1886, in which
he directs my attention to a communication from Mr. A. Rasin in
‘Journal fiir Jagd und Pferdezucht’ (‘Journal Ochoty i Konnosa-
wodstwa), 1869, pp. 340-341, with the title “ Eine Siindenfall des
Schneehuhnes.” From this it would appear to be proved that the
Tetrao tetriz is the father, Lagopus albus the mother. This report,
the original of which I cannot peruse, is referred to in the following
terms by Dr. Pleske :—
‘‘Im Kreise Nowgorod, auf dem sogenannten Konewschen Moos-
moraste, wurde eine Kette Hiihner gefunden, die von einem 9 des
Lagopus albus, welches erlegt wurde, gefiihrt wurde. Von den zwei
erbeuteten Jungen hatte beide einen vollstandigen Habitus junger
Birkhiihner, waren auch grésser als die Mutter, und unterschieden
sich von echten Birkhthnern nur dadurch, dass beim einen 4 Steuer-
federn und zwei Schwungfedern des rechten Fliigels weiss waren,
beim anderen der linke Fliigel vollstiindig wie bei Lagopus albus
gezeichnet war, nicht allein in Betriff der weissen Schwungfedern,
sondern auch der rostrothen Deckfedern.” If the original commu-
nication gives no further information upon the subject than the
words cited above, no proof is given, in my opinion, that these two
specimens were really hybrids.
In the first place there is no description of the covering of the toes,
which is the only feature in its diagnosis that is reliable at every age
and in every plumage ; and, secondly, the true Rype-Orre has never,
so far as I am aware, been known to have white feathers in the wing
(even the young Lagopus albus, before they assume their autumn
dress, have brown wing-feathers), and it is still less likely to have them
on the tail. The fact that the two young specimens were not even
similarly coloured, speaks also for the probability of their being only
partial albinos of 7. te¢riz, which in so many instances have been
and still are taken for the Rype-Orre.
It may be open to question whether, upon the whole, it is necessary
to designate a hybrid by a scientific appellation, even if, like those
of the ‘Tetraonide, it arises spontaneously, and, as it were, normally.
The “ Rakkelfugl” has, as is known, received from Nilsson the name
Tetrao urogalloides (1828) or urogallides (1835), which was altered
by Sundevall to Tetrao urogallo-tetricides (186—!), and by me to
Tetrao urogallo-tetrix (1872). In accordance with this, as I have
16*
236 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20,
pointed out in my previously mentioned article of 1872, the “ Rype-
Orre” should receive the name of Lagopus tetrici-albus, assuming
that the descent is as above supposed.
Other Hybrids of the Genus Lagopus.
1. Lagopus scoticus and Tetrao tetriz.—In the spring of 1877 I
had the opportunity of examining a specimen in Mr. Dresser’s
collection in London which was considered to be a hybrid between
Tetrao tetrix and Lagopus scoticus. This specimen was a male,
shot in Scotland on the 12th of September, 1876. Its hybrid
nature was discernible at first glance from the formation of the tail
and the covering of the toes, which were exactly like the northern
‘Rype-Orre. The colour was brownish black, the back was
finely mottled with brown on an almost black ground; the breast
was black, the head and throat black with fine brown spots ; the
abdomen had reddish-brown cross lines, the lower tail-coverts white
edges, as also had several of the feathers on the sides of the rump.
In conformity with the name which above is given to the North-
European Rype-Orre, the Scotch specimen, provided the mother in
both instances is Tetyao tetriz, has been named Lagopus tetrici-scoticus
(Nyt Magazin for Naturv., Christiania, 1877, vol. xxiii. p. 163).
Another specimen of the same hybrid, also a male, was described by
Malm, from Gothenburg, in Sweden. This was found in December
1877, at a spot where Lagopus scoticus had been introduced in 1861
and 1862 (Cifv. Kgl. Vetensk.-Akad. Forh. 1880, p. 17). This bird
was called by Malm Lagopotetrix dicksonii.
2. Lagopus albus and Lagopus mutus.—As in the previous notes
it has been supposed possible that the male Lagopus albus may be
as desirous of forming an illegitimate connection as the male Tetrao
tetriz, I shall touch upon another question affecting the same
subject. It has probably appeared to be strange that, notwithstanding
that Lagopus albus and Lagopus mutus often appear in considerable
numbers in the same districts in Northern Europe, and generally
share each other’s haunts, no evidence of a cross between them, so far
as is known, has ever appeared. It is not probable that the cause of
this should have its origin in a true repugnance in the two closely-
allied species to form hybrids. Probably these hybrids are less rare
than one imagines, as it requires an accustomed eye to discern them
in the multitudinous garbs in which these two species appear from
spring-time until the approach of winter. Even I myself have but
once found one, which is now mounted in the University Museum at
Christiania. It was shot at Roros in the middle of September 1883.
This specimen is an old male in autumnal plumage, and is thus
at a stage when the contrast between the plumage of the two
parents is most marked and striking. At this time the old Lagopus
mutus obtains its peculiar bluish-grey autumnal dress, in which
each feather on a light ashy-grey ground is finely freckled with
black, without forming distinct cross lines, whilst in Lagopus albus
each feather has reddish-brown spots and cross lines on a black
1886. } MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 237
ground. In the hybrid specimen the colour and markings of the
feathers are a complete mixture of the two species. The upper
plumage most resembles Lagopus mutus, as the feathers there and on
the flanks are finely speckled with black, but on a somewhat reddish
ground, though this is not of so strong a colour as in Lagopus albus.
The pattern on the feathers is almost similar to Lagopus mutus, and
the long feathers on the flanks and the upper tail-coverts, which are
wanting in distinct cross lines, especially differ from the corre-
sponding parts of Lagopus albus. One or two feathers, however,
resemble the last species. The cross bands on the head are also
much the same as in Lagopus mutus, and thus more dense than in
L. albus, but rather indistinct and irregular. The lores are speckled
with traces of the black colour which is peculiar to Lagopus mutus.
The under-plumage is borrowed most from Lagopus albus,
especially in colour. Tie feathers are transversely barred as in
Lagopus mutus, but the colour is red, almost similar to that of
Lagopus albus. The fine cross lines are particularly sharply defined
and numerous from the bill to the vent, an unknown feature in
Lagopus albus.
This hybrid has, on the whole, adopted the pattern of its feathers
from Zagopus mutus, and the colouring (especially underneath) from
Lagopus albus. The bill in size was intermediate.
It is naturally impossible to state which of the two species supplies
the father and which the mother.
3. Bonasa bonasia and Lagopus albus,—Amongst the specimens
belonging to the Upsala Museum sent to me for examination there
was a fifth specimen which appeared to be an example of quite a new
combination. It was stated by Dr. Kolthoff to have been captured in
Jemtland (Sweden) in November or December 1884. The covering
of the tees is just the same as that of the normal Rype-Orre. The
colour is lighter than any of them, the whole upper parts, and
especially the tail-coverts, having broad white (not whitish) edges.
The inner hidden parts of the back-feathers are particularly dark and
somewhat mixed with brown. The tail-feathers, especially at the
root, are much mottled with whitish grey, and the outer feathers
edged with white on their inner halves. The underside is white, with
the throat biack, and with dark-coloured but not cross-lined feathers
on the flanks hidden under the white. The head is unusually
white, with small dark edgings on the feathers of the forehead, and
greyish ear-coverts. The inner half of the under tail-coverts is
blackish.
Although the specimen was a male bird with well-defined ¢esées,
its size was even less than a female Rype-Urre (wing 181 millim.),
and was about the same size as Lagopus albus. It is therefore
impossible that this specimen could have been the produce of a
cross between Willow-Grouse and Blackcock, Neither is its tail
forked, but somewhat rounded (the outer tail-feathers 115 millim.,
the centre ones 118 millim.) and contains but 16 feathers.
It is therefore more reasonable to suppose this individual to be a
cross between Bonasa bonasia and Lagopus albus, even if one must
238 MR. R, COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20,
recognize the fact that these two species but seldom meet; but such
is by no means an impossibility.
4. Lagopus scoticus and Lagopus mutus.—A supposed hybrid
between the Red Grouse and the Ptarmigan was exhibited at the
meeting of this Society, November 5, 1878, by Prof. Newton. The
bird was shot in September, 1873, in Sutherland. ‘As will be
seen, it bears some considerable resemblance, above, to a hen Ptar-
migan in summer plumage; but its general appearance is much
darker. Beneath, there is a greater resemblance to the young of
the Red Grouse ; and the primaries are much as in that bird, being,
however, partially edged with white to a much greater extent than is
commonly found in the latter.” (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1878, p. 793.)
Habits.
Concerning the habits of the Rype-Orre very little is known.
Almost all the specimens which hitherto have been discovered have
been brought to the towns with other game snared or shot in the
autumn or winter by peasants, without attracting any notice. The
peasants themselves, as a rule, regard them as a peculiar kind of
Willow-Grouse. In the following instances only have I heard of its
being shot by true sportsmen who well knew what it was they had
brought down.
On the 30th of November, 1871, a male bird was shot by my
friend Herr Berbom, Inspector of Forests, in Saltdalen (within the
Arctic Circle), the most northern spot in which this hybrid is
known. The locality was a low hill covered with birch-woods, some
tarns and marshes ; it was occupied by both Blackgame and Willow-
Grouse. Mr. Berbom has just informed me, in reply to my in-
quiries, that this specimen appeared to be solitary, keeping company
with neither one uor the other species.
The other case does not either throw any particular light on its
habits. On the 7th of October, 1876, another friend, Engineer
Oxaal, while shooting ‘‘ Li-Rype” (Willow-Grouse) at Roros, shot
one (a female) in the usual haunts of the ‘“‘ Rype,” about 2700 to
3000 feet above the sea. It was on the ground, and ran forward
from behind a tuft of grass after the dog had pointed. It was
therefore shot whilst running, and in this respect it appeared to Mr.
Oxaal to differ from a Willow-Grouse, which at such a time would in
all probability not have exposed itself. It was alone, and no Willow-
Grouse or Blackgame were met with in the neighbourhood. Not-
withstanding that the season was but little advanced, this bird had
completely adopted its winter dress, and scarcely a feather remained
of its summer plumage.
An older account from Sweden gives a little more information
concerning its habits. In October 1846 two young birds were shot
in Dalarne which were accompanied by a hen, supposed to be their
mother, and which appeared to be a female Zeérao tetriz. On this
occasion one of the two young birds perched in the trees (unlike a
Willow-Grouse, but like a Blackcock). They had a harsh cackling
1886.] MR. R, COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 239
ery, “ which resembled that of the Capercailzie.”” (Levin, Gfv. Kgl.
Vet.-Akad. Forh. Stockholm, 1847, p. 201.)
Most of the specimens which have come into my hands in a fresh
state had no gun-shot wounds, and probably had been snared; but
whether these were taken in snares together with Rype in districts
frequented by the latter, namely in the regio alpina (the upper
limits of the birch-region on the mountains), or with Zetrao urogallus
and 7’. tetriz in the forest-regions, cannot be stated with any certainty.
If remains of their food are examined it will probably be found that
they more usually share the quarters of the Willow-Grouse than
those of the other species.
One of the specimens sent to the University Museum (from Sande
Sogn, Nov. 9, 1881) was shot not far from the Christiania Fjord, in
a district where the Lagopus albus certainly breeds, but in very few
numbers, and this is hardly an annual occurrence, the locality being
comparatively low. The sender of this bird, who regularly received
game from that place, deemed it certain that it had been captured
along with Blackgame, as it was forwarded to him in a bunch of
these birds, and he never received Willow-Grouse from there.
Food.
In some of the individuals opened by me the food was still
partially or wholly entire, and consisted of the following :—
1. Male, Dec. 7, 1870: a number of fragments of a Salix (15
millim. in length), fragments and numerous berries of Myrtillus
nigra, tops of Calluna vulgaris (about 30 millim. in length), and a
few leaves of Arctostaphylos alpina.
2. Male, Dec. 6, 1872: tops and seeds of Carex stellulata, a few
berries of Oxycoccus palustris and Juniperus communis, some of the
latter in an unripe state.
3. Male, Feb. 28, 1873: leaves of Vaccinium vitis idea, fragments
and buds of a Salix and of Myrtillus nigra.
4, Female, Jan. 1875: a number of ripe and unripe berries of
Juniperus, also a number of the peculiar bunchy leaves of that
bush, in which Cecidomyia juniperina had formed their capsules; a
large number of stalks of the Myrtillus nigra (about 12 millim. in
length), some leaves of Vaccinium vitis idea, some old female and
many young male catkins of Betula glutinosa (the mountain form,
alpigena), and, lastly, the twigs of a haired Salix (S. glauca’).
5. Female, Oct. 7, 1876: some berries of Empetrum nigrum, also
stalks of Myrtillus nigra.
6. Male, Dec. 27, 1879: leaves and berries of Oxycoccus
palustris.
7. Young male, autumn, 1880: berries of Oxycoccus palustris,
also the top of a Carez.
From these examples it will be seen that this hybrid both in
winter and summer derives nourishment from about the same
sources as the Willow-Grouse, namely stalks of willows and bilberries,
240 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. (Apr. 20,
also leaves and twigs of different plants, procured principally on the
marshes, and occasionally (like Arctostaphylos alpina) from the true
alpine district ; likewise from various berries, and occasionally from
birch-catkins. Several of these articles of nourishment form the
food of Blackgame; nevertheless it is certain that most of them
come from marshy places, from which it must be assumed that its
diet most resembles that of the Willow-Grouse,
Skeleton.
In a skeleton of a male from Saltdalen (Nordland) the measure-
ments are as follows :—
rillim.
Length of the skull (bill included) .......... 63
Greatest breadth of the skull .............. 28
Lenpth of Seapula.. a.m. aan» shay =. iS gee ee
Diemer Ge OL, ENMMIEE US ona dn ne 1s > eo ce
NSN UR GE PRUNES coos owen sn cna ia acne ED
Length of ulna... .....2..--20 a: suena aA
Length of os coracoideum .............--- 55
Length of metacarpus Il. .... Ae.
Length of the two phalanges of digitus 11 Eloy ispape Se
Length of furcula (to the aoe of the flee 66
Leneth of sternum..... A Ss iy 2) ae
Greatest height of crista tee 34
Length of pelvis (to the first caudal ek aie << aged
Greatest breadth of pelvis (across ossa ischii). . 57
DEE Ge Ce ga A ee Te eee PA eh!
Length of fibia” . .. 2.5. - 2s puto AR Ae 21
Length OUGHT STS: oct fom nicl eho i total ek ta ae ener ee 45
Length of middle toe (claw not included) ...... 45
As the skeletons of the two parents, Lagopus albus and Tetrao
tetriz, resemble each other so nearly that, apart from their difference
cf size, it would be difficult to find out the most trifling characteristic,
this hybrid hardly has one distinctive feature in the structure of its
skeleton beyond its difference in size.
Christiania, March 1886.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Puate XXI.
Hybrid between Lagopus albus and Tetrao tetriz.
Fig. 1. Male in winter dress.
Fig. 2. Female in winter dress.
Prate XXII.
Hybrid between Lagopus albus and Tetrao tetriz.
Fig. 1. Young male in early autumn dress.
Fig. 2. Young male in late autumn dress.
durt jaPyuey
“XIYLEL OVALSAL GNV sNdTv SndOdVT N4AMIAG ASNOUD CldaAH
> a
SWTANOUHLAYA VHENVSONALO —— .
‘dun: soug wrepatyy , wT PR MYO Md
TIXX ‘Id “9861 °S
N
A,
1886.] MR. BOULENGER ON A NEW IGUANOID LIZARD. 241
5. Description of a new Iguanoid Lizard living in the
Society’s Gardens. By G. A. Bouteneer., F.ZS8.
[Received April 6, 1886.]
(Plate XXIII.)
Amongst the recent additions to the Society’s living collection of
Reptiles is an example of Lizard of the genus Ctenosawra, which
the Secretary has requested me to determine. It belongs to an
undescribed species, which I propose to call
CTENOSAURA ERYTHROMELAS, sp.n. (Plate XXIII.)
Body a little depressed. A slight indication of a dorso-nuchal
crest. Scales on posterior part of back a little larger than ventrals,
rhomboidal, indistinctly keeled. Upper surface of hind limbs with
large spinose scales. ‘Tail shorter than head and body, much de-
pressed, except quite at the end; its upper surface with transverse
series of very large, subequal spines, directed wpwards and back-
wards, alternating with series of very small scales; the series of
small scales inconspicuous, at first glance, on the anterior half of
the tail» lower surface of tail with smaller pointed keeled scales,
the number of transverse series being the same as on the upper
surface. ight femoral pores on each side. Blackish olive above,
with a large patch of vermilion-red on each side of the body, and
variegations of the same colour on the sides of the head and neck ;
lower surfaces grey, throat marbled with red; three oblique black
bands on each side behind the fore limb; two black bands across
the humerus. Tympanum yellowish. Iris golden.
Length from snout to vent 100 millim., head 24, tail 88.
The locality of the single specimen, acquired by purchase of Mr.
W. Cross of Liverpool on the 3rd inst., is not known.
This new species again lessens the gap between the genera Cteno-
saura and Cachryx. I therefore propose to unite the two genera.
In connection with this subject I must draw attention to an extra-
ordinary statement to be found in one of Prof. Cope’s latest papers’.
He remarks :—“ This genus (Cachryz, Cope) is of the type of Cteno-
saura, differing only in the characters of its tail. It lacks the ter-
minal portion, which is in that and other genera free from spinous
seales. It is not in my opinion allied to Urocentron or Hoplocercus,
as suggested by Bocourt, genera which belong to the terrestrial
division of the family, or Humivage.”’ Mr. Cope not only omits
to add that I was the first to assign his genus to the correct place in
the system, but forgets that he is himself responsible for the error
now corrected, and not M. Bocourt, who simply endorsed his
views; for on referring to Cope’s original (and unique) account
of Cachryx* we read, ‘This genus is allied to Urocentrum and
Hoplurus, ut differs in the possession of femoral pores.”
1 Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1885 (1886), p. 270.
2 Proc. Acad. Philad. 1866, p. 124.
242 MR. G. A. BOULENGER ON RANA ARVALIS. __[Apr. 20,
6. Remarks on Specimens of Rana arvalis exhibited in the
Society’s Menagerie. By G. A. Boutenesr, F.Z.S.
[Received April 14, 1886.]
(Plate XXIV.)
An interesting addition has recently been made to the series
of Batrachians in the Society’s menagerie—the Oxyrrhine Frog,
Rana arvalis, Nilsson, so often described and its specific validity
discussed. It is, with the exception of Rana iberica, Blgr., the
only European Batrachian as yet never figured. The accompanying
illustration (Plate XXIV.) is intended to supply this desideratum.
My friend Professor Born, of Breslau, favoured me this spring
with about 50 breeding specimens of the Frog in question, some
of which have been presented to the Society. Two years ago, I
also received a number of these Frogs from the same gentleman,
which have afforded me an opportunity of verifying the additional
observations on the characters of the species recently made by
Pfliiger and Smith’. These authors have shown that some of the
characters hitherto regarded as diagnostic comparatively to R. tem-
poraria are not constant. Thus the shape of the snout, often
given as the principal distinctive character of the two species, is
not absolutely constant ; and specimens of &. arvalis may be found
with the snout less pointed than certain specimens of R. temporaria.
Also breeding males of the former species possess black rugosities
on the thumb in every respect similar to those of A. temporaria.
This statement I have been able to verify not only on the Breslau
specimens, but on a Swedish one, for which I am indebted to Dr.
Westerlund. However, the breeding specimens from Copenhagen,
in M. Lataste’s collection, which I described in my monograph of
the Rane temporaria, have grey, not black, asperities. It is therefore
a question whether the colour of the copulatory asperities does not
vary according to localities. Besides, the web between the toes is
longer in the Copenhagen specimens. The character derived from
the vomerine dentition has also been shown by these authors to be
an unreliable one. I may add that the remark is not only true in this
case, but applies to European species of Rana generally ; among the
hundreds of specimens of Rana esculenta which have been examined
by me, not a few have the vomerine teeth inserted behind the line
of the choane, and would as regards this character fall in the
section 2. temporarie! Differences in the dentition exist which
may often assist in the discrimination of species, but are not
sufficiently constant to be regarded as good characters. The
criterion for the easy distinction of R. arvalis from R. temporaria
is the metatarsal tubercle ; this character is an infallible one, and will
remove any hesitation in the determination. Of greater importance
still, but less easily ascertainable, is the character of the spermatozoa.
Should any one still entertain doubts as to the specific validity of
1 Arch. f. ges. Physiol. xxxii. 1883, p. 525.
a de! a oe
af
a
1886.] MR. R.COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIs.. 243
R. arvalis, let him read Pfliiger’s account of experiments on the
crossing of the German frogs. Dissidents from the modern views on
the specific distinctions of the forms of /. temporaria have of late
become very few. That there should be at the present day a
naturalist to express the opinion that R. arvalis is the male and
R. temporaria the female of the same species, and a herpetologist, who
professes to know European Frogs, to reproduce such nonsense with
the remark “ should this discovery be confirmed it will afford an
uneapected solution to the controversy,” may appear incredible, but
is unfortunately true.
APPENDIX.
The following paper, originally intended for the ‘Transactions,’
has been ordered by the Committee of Publications (at the request of
the Author) to be printed in this part of the * Proceedings ’:—
On the External Characters of Rudolphi’s Rorqual. (Baleno-
ptera borealis). By Rosurr Coxiert, C.M.Z.S.*
[Received January 4, 1886: read February 2, 1886.]
(Plates XXV., XXVI.)
Contents.
I. Introductory Remarks, p. 243. X. Parasites, p. 255.
If. General Characters, p. 246. XI. Time of capture, p. 259.
III. Measurements, p. 248. XII. Fetus, p. 260.
IV. Structure of the Body, p. 248. XIII. Food, p. 261.
V. Colour, p. 249. XIV. Habits, p. 263,
VI. Flippers and other external XV. Value, p. 263.
characters, p. 252. XVI. Monstrosities, p. 264.
VII. Baleen, p. 253. XVII. Synopsis of the four northern
VIII. Blow-holes and furrows, p.255. species of Balenoptera,
IX. Hairy covering, p. 255. p. 264.
I. Introductory Remarks.
Although our knowledge of Balenoptera borealis has been con-
siderably increased during the last few years, still almost all researches
have been confined to its anatomical structure, and no complete
description has hitherto been given of its external characters.
Even up to the year 1882 the species was only known from a small
number of stranded specimens, the skeletons of which had found
their way into different museums ; but of the external characters of
* (Mr. A. Heneage Cocks, F.Z.S., has kindly added some footnotes, which
are designated by his initials. —Ep. |
244 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. [Feb. 2,
these examples either no particulars were obtained, or at most a few
scanty remarks by casual observers *.
In 1882 a whaling-factory was established at Sodrver near
Hammerfest (West Finmark) for the purpose of catching the Blue-
Whale (B. sibbaldi), wnder the management of Capt. Bull. It
was soon seen that the greater number of the whales caught here
were the so-called ‘‘ Sejhval,” a species with which Capt. Bull was
acquainted through his former whaling-expeditions in the Varanger-
fjord, but in this Fjord, as well as along the whole of the East
Finmarken coast, it had only appeared casually. Eight specimens of
this “ Sejhval”? were caught at Sdrveer the first year, 1882, and in
the ensuing years it was also taken, though in varying numbers. In
1883 40 specimens * were caught, in 1884 only 3, this year (1885)
44. By gradually collecting together the scattered accounts respect-
ing this whale it soon became evident that it was a species distinct
from the three other Balenoptere ; and both Prof. Sars and I soon
came to the conclusion that it might be ‘‘ B. laticeps,’ Gray=B.
borealis, Lesson, or the same species to which the skeletons just
referred to belonged, two or three of which (among the few hitherto
known) had been brought from precisely the same region.
Last year (1884) Dr. Guldberg, in a paper published in Bull.
Acad. Roy. de Belg.’, finally proved by the researches he had been
able to make, at Sdrver, upon some parts of the skeleton (now
1 These specimens are as follows :—
1811. One stranded in the Zuyder-Zee, Aug. 1811 (Hschricht, Kgl. D. Vid.
Selsk. Skr.5 R.1B.). Length 382’, The skeleton is preserved in the
Leyden Museum.
1819. One stranded on the coast of Holstein in Feb. 1819, and described by
Rudolphi as B. rostrata (Abh. konig]. Acad. Wiss. Berl. 1820-21, p. 27).
Length 323’. The skeleton is preserved in the Berlin Museum.
1861. A skeleton sent to the museum at Brussels from East Finmarken
(Norway) through Eschricht (V. Beneden et Gervais, Ostéographie des
Cét. viy. et foss. p. 201). Length 32’.
1861. One stranded, June 1861, in Altenfjord, West Finmarken (Norway).
Length of the skeleton 30' 1" (Swed.) [about 29 feet 34 in, English.—
A. H.C.]. Described by Lilljeborg (Ups. Univ. Aarsskr. 1862, p. 25,
Sver. och Norg. Ryggr.-djiir, B. ii. p. 943, 1874). The skeleton is in the
Bergen Museum.
1863. One stranded in Skogsvaag, near Bergen (Norway), July 1863. The
skeleton not preserved. (Dr. Koren in a letter to Prof. Lilljeborg, dated
Bergen, Jan. 24, 1864.)
1872. One caught in the Firth of Forth, September 1872, described by Turner
(Journ. Anat. Phys. April 1882, p. 471). Length 38’ (English). The
skeleton is in the Anatomical Museum at Edinburgh.
1874. One stranded in July 1874, at Biarritz (Basses Pyrénées). Length
7830 mm. (25' Rhen.), and described by Fischer (Compt. Rend. 1876,
tom. 83, p. 1298, &e.). The skeleton is in the Bayonne Museum,
1883. One caught on the coast of Essex, England ; described by Flower (Proc.
Zool. Soe. Lond. 1883, p. 513). Length about 29' (Engl.). Skeleton
prepared for the Sydney Museum.
1884. One taken at Goole, Lincolnshire. Skeleton in British Museum.
? [I fancy there is some mistake about this number, and that 15 was the total
of this species taken by Capt. Bull in 1883, and that 40 was his total take of
all species during that season. —A. H. C.]
1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALEZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 245
preserved in the University Museum at Christiania), and a foetus from
the same locality, that the Finmark “ Sejhval ’’ is identical with
B. borealis.
Thus, whilst B. borealis, as has been stated, is a constant summer
visitor on the coasts of West Finmark, where it has annually,
although in varying numbers, occurred off Soréen, near Hammerfest,
probably to gorge upon the ‘Aate,” or the shoals of Crustacea which
constitute its food, it has, as mentioned above, only exceptionally
visited East Finmark, and on the coast east of the North Cape
only a few specimens had been caught, and not every year.
It does not, however, appear to have been altogether unknown
even on this part of the coast. During a stay in Finmark in 1878
I received information that a shoal of 13 whales, of about 40 feet in
length, had stranded in a bay of the Porsangerfjord to the east of
the North Cape. I did not have an opportunity of visiting the
place ; but as the baleen-plates of these Whales were described as
being black, it seems very probable that they belonged to this
species”.
In the same month 5 similar small whales were stranded at Sorveer,
near Hammerfest (where the above-mentioned factory had not then
been established). Moreover, several whalers have informed me
that this species visited the Varangerfjord-in 1879 and 1880, but
was not caught; they also noticed that whenever this species came
in, B. sibbaldi left the coast and went out to sea®*.
During the past summer, 1885, the Sejhval (B. borealis) came
quite unexpectediy under land along the whole coast of Finmark, not
singly or solitarily, but in such large numbers that, during the whole
summer, most of the whales caught both in West and East Fin-
mark consisted of this species. Of the other species, B. sibbaldi,
B. musculus, and Megaptera boops, which in former years had
formed the majority, only a comparatively small number were
caught’.
Of B. borealis 724 specimens were caught by 18 companies
stationed in Finmark, and 47 specimens by 3 companies, ou the
Murman coast, making together a total of 771 specimens.
In fact they were caught by all the companies along the whole
1 “Sur lexistence d’une 4me espece du genre Balenoptera dans les mers
septentrionales de l’Europe” (Bull. Acad. Roy. Belg. 3° sér. tome vii. no. 4,
Ayril 1884). This paper is translated (with a few additions) in Journ. of Anat.
and Phys. 1885, p. 293.
2 Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. 27 B. p. 260 (1885).
® Tt was therefore said this year in Finmark that as B. borealis was under
land, B. sibbaldi would not come, and this presumption proved to a great
extent correct. 2B. sibbaldi was this year almost absent from the Norwegian
coast as compared with the preceding years; but it was more common further
east, as 5 whalers on the Murman coast killed almost exactly the same number
of that species as all the 31 Norwegian whalers did together.
* [Of Megaptera boops rather more examples were caught than in any previous
year; this does not necessarily show that they were more numerous than in
other years, but, in the absence of the two larger species, they were hunted in
preference to B. horealis, as yielding three times the quantity of oil.— A. H. C.]
246 MR. R. COLLETT ON BAL NOPTERA BOREALIS. [ Feb. 2,
coast from Sérden, near Hammerfest, to Jarfjord in Syd Varanger,
and on the Murman coast at least to Kildin.
When, during a stay in the Varangerfjord in the month of July,
I ascertained that specimens of B. dorealis were daily brought into
the factories at Vardé, I at once proceeded to that place, and in the
course of a couple of days I had an opportunity of examining the
external characters of six specimens, three males and three females,
whilst I saw double that number towed in, but want of time prevented
my examining them.
Two drawings of this species have previously been produced.
According to Van Beneden and Gervais (Ostéogr. des Cét. p. 201) the
first known specimen of this whale (Zuyder-Zee, 1811) was figured,
but these authors are unable to explain the fate of this figure, which
never seems to have been published.
Another figure was given of Rudolphi’s specimen (Holstein, 1819)
in a lithograph published in Hamburg, 1819; this figure is copied
in Brandt and Ratzeburg’s ‘ Medicinische Zoologie’ (B. 1. tab. xv.
fig. 3); it is, however, very imperfect and confusing '.
As our knowledge of this species is thus still very meagre, I have
thought it right to give the principal results of my researches at the
factories at Vardé and Mehayn this year, although I am well
aware that my observations, based as they are upon only two days’
studies on the spot, are very incomplete. I am also indebted to
Messrs. Castberg, Bull, Bruun, Bryde, Ellevsen, and Sérensen, all
managers of the different factories, for communications chiefly relating
to their life-history as observed during their “ fishing’’ this year *.
II. General Characters.
Compared with the three other northern Rorquals, B. borealis
belongs to the smaller group, its length being somewhere between
that of B. rostrata and B. musculus, or about 44 feet.
Its body is less robust than B. rostrata, more like B. sibbaldi,
and much better proportioned than B. musculus.
The colour on the upper part of the body is dark grey-blue,
something like B. sibbaldi. The belly is more or less white as far
as the genitalia, but the remainder of the undersurface and also the
flippers are of the same colour as the back.
The flippers are small, smaller relatively than in the other species;
the dorsal fin is large, curved, and situated far forward.
The baleen-plates are black; the bristles are white and much
curled, and comparatively long. In the sea the B. borealis may be
recognized at the first glance by its large, high, dorsal fin, which
most nearly resembles that of B. rostrata, also by its head being
more slender, and its snout more rounded than are those of the other
Arctic species.
1 The colour is especially wrong, which is easily explained, as the animal
was probably drawn a long time after death.
2 T have to offer my best thanks to my friend Mr. Alfred Heneage Cocks for
the kind assistance he has rendered me by looking over the paper before it was
printed.
1886.]
|
MUU GPPEL pees snap Jo «oqournrgy
“ut OTT eects Sosa Be ae coat - aynB youa Jo yypLoag,
“wut OZ8T Soe “CLE ERT wage sai ‘sete TE Jo OTN, YOUG
lige, Ltsaows “Mt OT, “ULUL ()Y8 seeeee specs stereeeeeeee Tvy JO 4oOd OY} YL qy Sey
(Cor nae! te Pease Garg me. sare > oasnie (‘wut [1FT) ag sacsee *[ve] JO aTppitu eq] 4B Apoq Jo qqseyyT
(cum Q96L) 79 (‘wut e0gT) ee (urea $71) FG (mum $11) FG | (wut FZyT) ‘fg Ug [estop Jo e8eq wo. Apog Jo yy sLO TL
(cece 6062) 8 ( WLU SPR) holy eeecee G fitheed GETS) EL ( wut ZG61z) uf i Saavnbodes > tne sayy cru gy ewies sa saoddyy
Jo apprux oytsoddo Apoq jo 4ysteyT
) nm gge — |(-w) “erat Oge-("T) O¢E “ert OLE |(y) “wet QLE-('T) OSE “wut Qeg |wUIQGE-OGE |" "=" goddry jo yypueaq 4s9yv019
| “TUL EET seeces . ceeees eeeeee ‘mum O6ZT| 7" seeseeceses eecees (vy Tpexe wo.) sod yyy
“WLU OL “wor OS EOL (TS “UIUr OL |’ srrereee="* UB TesdOp JO FSO HT
“MM OETT Veeereis pavedigns avsaee “WU O08 “uu OPQ | UY [esUop Jo asuq Jo yysuery
Vareng(gyeyi iene 2S? “89-* MATA JO PUP LOLI}UL OF 4A
“TAU OG ceeees “wit (99 ceenns 1 —|enteerereunccessesaneves ss29 90+ 389 09 GATT
ue UUL (OT s[lqsou 0} wel aoddn jo yur0g
| “TUT ERT seeeee (“uot FCLT) iG (‘rout GOST) EE teense seeeee wee cee Nery wae coe at eaec OTTERS 0} oAGE
| (scot QOLB) 21 seven sieiesel sees SoNNT OF UR [BSLOp JO JUOAT
‘mt 80) 26] ws pees (‘uur ggFe) F)T Se ‘aoddry yo pua oy wel zomoy jo FULOg
(eat 6162) 26 | Corer 6162) .F6 ("wim GTZ) TOT) (MH 6166) £6 YjNoW Jo o[3uv 07 vv! aomoy Jo quod
(mu G0GZ) /8 Spore (wud GEES) EL qyjnour Jo epFuv oj avel aoddn jo yutog
(at fa) 9G ovanes (‘un 9) £9z sesees nace es shesereosseene® SOUT Of seddiy jo puny
(cu +5) wide = coe . (ur tp) AGT seeeee ty wt ewer essence eerecneces soddiyg 0} noug
(ru £6) 1 (ui $6) 08 (Cut 6) 6% (Wt OT) Ze ae (‘ur $8) 8g | UR Tesxop 07 yuoug
(uw $cT) oF (ut TPL) AGF (FT) FF (ut Epq) 26) © Cor Bet) er | (Co ESL) eh [°° sereeees BUST [BIOT,
me) “Pp “Pp . 4 . RS . ro
‘Q°ON ‘GON ‘? ON '§ ON G ON ao
“SPUIUWIANSDA JT
248 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALENOPTERA BOREALIS. _[Feb. 2,
Ill. Measurements.
Most of the examples caught were between 40 and 50 feet
in length. The usual length was 44-45 feet or thereabouts. The
largest specimens measured 52 feet’ (16°3 metres). The 6 specimens
which I examined thoroughly were 43 to 493 feet in length (see
p- 247). ‘The last of these (a male) was considered to be one of the
largest caught ; so that it may be laid down as a rule that they
rarely exceed 50 feet (15°6 metres).
The smallest specimens this summer that I know of were 35-37
feet, but these were exceptional. A single specimen was caught in
July at Mehavn (by Foyn), the length of which was said at the place
to be 323 feet (10°1 metres).
Both sexes seem to attain about the same size; the largest
female specimen that I examined was 47 feet long (14:7 metres).
One of the managers stated that if there were any difference, the
female was the largest and fattest, at any rate during the whaling-
season.
The size appeared the same throughout the season, and it was
remarkable to notice how uniform it was, and how evidently the
whales were all of about the same age.
IV. Structure of the Body.
The Structure of the body seems to correspond with that of B. sib-
baldi, which it on the whole resembles in its mode of living.
The body is highest across the middle of the flippers, where, in
the case of the living animal, the height is to the total length about
as 1 to 53 (as in the case of B. sibbaldi). In the stranded animal,
when the belly is compressed by the ground, the proportion is as
about 1 to 6. The height of the body is thus not so great as in
B. rostrata, which is at that point relatively the largest of all the
four species.
The form of the hinder part of the body does not differ essentially
from that of the other species. Immediately under the dorsal fin the
height is one eighth of the total length, and halfway between the dorsal
fin and the root of the tail one tenth. From these proportions it
will be seen that in this respect it also correspouds most nearly with
B. sibbaldi, and is neither of the exceedingly slender ‘‘ emaciated ”
form of B. musculus, nor of the comparatively stout form of B.
rostrata.
The breadth of the body can only be given approximately, and
would seem across the flippers to be not very different from the
height. From the vent to the root of the tail the body is strongly
compressed, and the caudal part forms, as in the other species of
Balenoptera, a thin ridge above and below, which is particularly
sharp along the dorsal line. The breadth at the root of the tail at
? [About 54 feet English, and so with the other measurements; the Norwegian
foot almost = 123 inches English.—A. H. C.]
1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALHZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 249
the narrowest point (just where the flukes commence) was in the
Jargest specimen 390 mm., or about 15 inches.
V. Colour.
The colour of the back is bluish black or occasionally some-
what brown, much resembling the colour in B. sibbaldi, although
the blue colour asa rule is less pronounced than in that species.
The colour after death is darker than in the living animal. On the
side of the body the colour becomes somewhat lighter; the belly is
dark steel-grey with a white area running along the centre; the
white colour begins at the symphysis of the lower jaw, and termi-
nates at the genitalia, but occasionally it is interrupted or imper-
ceptible on the middle portion of the belly.
Considerable variations occur in the breadth, size, and form of this
white part of the belly. The throat is always white, occasionally
throughout its entire breadth. scmetimes only for a couple of feet.
On the breast the white becomes narrower, and in many indi-
viduals is completely cut off by the bluish-grey colour of the sides,
but it then reappears on the belly, and continues in a somewhat
irregular width to the genitalia. Behind the vent the whole under-
side of the tail is light bluish grey, about the same as the back.
The white colour is not always symmetrical, but is occasionally
broader on one side of the middle line than on the other; also the
extent of it on the belly may be rather irregular. On the throat
similarly the white colour is sometimes broader on one side than on
the other. ;
The white patch on the belly was never absent in any of the
specimens examined; and this observation is confirmed by all the
managers of the whaling companies, who state that it is always to
be found, though it is sometimes only slightly developed.
The white colour, especially on the throat, is pure and sharply
defined. On the belly and in front of the genitalia there are, on
the contrary, a large number of very fine bluish-grey lines, which
are quite short and run parallel to each other; these lines, which
can only be distinguished when you are near to the animal, some-
times, when they are very numerous and closely set, detract from the
whiteness of these portions.
The flippers are coloured on the outer side like the back ; on the
inner side they are a trifle lighter, especially along the lower edge: a
few individuals (such as No. 2 of the specimens examined) have large
whitish spots on the inner side ; these are never, however, absolutely
white. The flukes of the tail are also bluish grey underneath ; the
dorsal fin is exactly the colour of the back.
Distributed over the dark parts of all the specimens examined
were a greater or less number of whitish oblong spots of peculiar
form and colour, their length being about 100 mm., and breadth
about 30 (Plate XXVI. fig. 2). Their outer edges are not always
sharply defined ; their colour is in general whitish grey, occasionally
almost white, and more rarely dark grey. Along the centre of the
Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1886, No. XVII. i7
250 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. _ [ Feb. 2
long axis there runs a dark line, from which to both sides and both
ends run fine radii of similar lines '.
These patches are most frequent on the sides of the body some-
what below the middle, and occur also on the tail, but may be found,
when they occur to any great extent, distributed singly right up the
centre of the back, and extending as far as the end of the lower jaw.
They occur on all examples, although they may not be equally
apparent in all. They evidently are due to a peculiar matter in
the skin, as they become more perceptible after the animal has
dried for a time. Single small white spots of a normal form occur
less frequently in the black portion of the sides, especially up to-
wards the back.
Among the markings of less constant occurrence may be
noticed :—-On one of the specimens examined there was a slightly
lighter patch behind the ear-opening, which began just at its pos-
terior margin, and extended backwards in a pyramidal form for
about a foot.
In order to show the variations of the white colour on the belly, I
shall briefly explain its extent in the individuals examined by myself.
No. 1. A female.—Throat entirely white ; on the breast the white
area became narrower, though without being completely broken
off. A larger white patch “occurred at the end of the furrows,
forming here an extension of the central stripe. On the belly the
white colour was partly covered over by the fine light bluish-grey
lines, which terminated as single white stains at the mamme.
No. 2. dA female.—The white area symmetrical and ample;
throat white, about ten furrows on each side being included, though
the upper ones were spotted with black.
The patch became narrower backwards, so that between the
flippers only three furrows on each side were included, while behind
the flippers it spread out in an anchor-like form, the arms of which
extended rather high up on the sides (and to about half a flipper’s
length from the end of the flipper).
Behind the furrows the white area was almost interrupted by the
grey colour of the sides, but widened out again in front of the
mammee, where it was whitish and not sharply defined. The fine
bluish-grey lines were most frequent towards the dark portions of
the sides.
In this specimen the oblong whitish marks on the sides were com-
paratively few and indistinct, “although some of them were perfectly
white.
No.3. 4d female.—Throat white, the white commencing just
behind the symphysis of the jaw, and including the eight furrows on
each side of the central line; this white portion cvacished as it
passed backwards. Almost exactly under the distal end of the
flipper, when lying parallel to the body, it was broken off by the
colour of the sides} but it recommenced at the navel, and thence
extended unbroken to the mamme.
? The general form and design reminds one of the septa ina Fungia or
Herpetolithus.
1386.] MR. R, COLLETT ON BALHNOPTERA BOREALIS. 251
The oblong whitish marks occurred all over the animal, from the
beginning of the flippers to the root of the tail, but did not, generally
speaking, extend much higher than the middle of the sides ; several
small spots, however, of normal form occurred up towards the back.
In this specimen the underside of the flippers had large whitish
spots.
at 4. A male.—Unusually dark. The white colour was com-
paratively little extended, as in front it embraced only four furrows
on each side, and even here was mixed with black. Backwards the
white colour widened somewhat, so that six furrows on either side
were included, though with black stripes from the sides extending
obliquely into them. Behind the furrows the central patch was ter-
minated by the colour of the sides, and there was but little white in
the portion in front of the genitalia.
In this specimen were noticed a large number of the peculiar oblong
marks, some quite white, most of them, however, darker in hue,
spread over all the dark parts of the belly, extending both downwards
to the white stripe and upwards on to the back. They were most
numerous about the middle of the sides and on the posterior portion
of the body.
No. 5. A male.—Throat white, extending over eight furrows
on each side, from the front to between the ends of the flippers.
Above these, six furrows on each side were mottled with white.
Further back the white part was interrupted, so that the belly
behind the furrows was, for a short distance, of a uniform blue-grey
tint like the sides, but again became whitish, sprinkled over with the
narrow bluish lines as far as the genitalia. The oblong whitish
marks were present, especially on the sides.
No. 6. 4 male.—Colour almost similar to that of No. 2, the white
having almost exactly the same extent. Here also the white patch be-
tween the flippers extended in a somewhat irregular anchor-like form.
Behind the furrows the white was almost terminated by the bluish-
grey colour of the sides; it recommenced at the navel and extended
to the genitalia, but was pencilled over evenly by fine short grey
lineolee. The oblong whitish marks were numerous, tolerably light-
coloured, but none quite white, and extended almost to the end of
the lower jaw.
In a 7th specimen, which lay secured in the water with the belly
exposed, the white colour was more decidedly asymmetrical than in
any of the others. On the breast the white included six furrows on
the right side, whilst the whole of its left side was black ’.
The white area extended as usual to behind the end of the flippers,
where it became narrow or disappeared, but extended again back-
wards to the genitals, and at this point it was symmetrical on the
two sides.
' A similar asymmetry of colour (left side dark, right side white) has been
noted on two occasions by Professor Sars as pervading the lower jaws in B. mus-
culus (Forh. Vid.-Selsk. Christiania, 1878, no. 15, p. 9; 1880, no. 12, p.3), [A
imi pinke was recorded by me in the ‘ Zoologist,’ April 1885, p. 138.—
iz
252 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALH/NOPTERA BOREALIS. — [Feb. 2,
VI. Flippers and other External Characters.
The Flippers are relatively shorter than in any of the other species,
somewhat slender and pointed. Their length, measured from the
axilla, is about one eleventh of the total length, occasionally a little over
and sometimes under this measurement. In form they do not differ
materially from those of the other species. A little beyond the
middle they present on the ulnar side a slight extension, an indication
of the commencement of the manus. At this point the flippers have
their greatest breadth, which is, compared to their length (reckoned
to the axilla), as 1 to 3°5 or 3-6 (or to caput humeri as 1 to 4°7).
Thus in its small flippers B. borealis differs essentially from B. stb-
baldi, which it otherwise resembles in so many points, and approaches
nearer to B. musculus. Their colour, as previously mentioned, is
essentially the same on the outer and inner sides, and in this respect
they differ from all the other species, in which the inner side is more
or less white.
The Dorsal Fin is situated far forward and is high. The front
margin is convex, with a slightly curved apex ; its hinder margin
is deeply concave. In form and position it is quite unlike that of
B. sibbaldi and B. musculus, and is most like that of B. rostrata,
but it lies further forward than in any of them. The following
are the proportions between the total length of the body and the
distance from the end of the snout to the beginning of the dorsal fin
in five of the specimens examined by me :—
No. 1.. As 1 to 0°65.
No. 3.. As 1 to 0°68.
No. 4.. As 1 to 0°65.
No. 5 . As 1 to 0°65.
No. 6.. As 1 to 061.
The dorsal fin is thus constantly placed anterior to the com-
mencement of the last third of the body, whilst that of B. rostrata
(according to Sars) is placed at the beginning of this third; it is
even further back in B. musculus, and furthest back in B. sibbaldi.
Its height and size is on the whole considerable, especially in
comparison with the length of the flippers. The height is in fact
more than 13 times the greatest breadth of the flippers, and is to
their length as 1 to barely 24. The dorsal fin is possibly higher in
the male than in the female, although the difference cannot be
great.
The length of the anterior margin is about the same as that of
the base.
The Flukes, in a couple of specimens examined by me, were, com-
pared to the total length of the body, as 1 to 4:2.
Thus they were relatively somewhat smaller than in B. rostrata
(3°4), but larger than in B. musculus (4°1-5:1).
Their colour is, as in B. sibbaldi, about the same on the upper
and lower sides.
The Anus is situated directly under the apex and posterior margin
1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALEZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 253
of the dorsal fin. The genital opening lies almost immediately in
front of the anterior edge.
The Inferior Maxilla.—Yhe length of the lower jaw-bones (mea-
sured to the angle of the mouth in the non-skeletonized animal) is,
compared to the total length, as 1 to 43, viz :— ;
INOsp2eekeae
No. 3.. 4:5.
No. 5..4°7,
No. 6..4°4.
In this last specimen the lower jaw-bones, probably on account of
their weight, were displaced, which is often the case. ‘The jaws have
the same relative length as B. sibbaldi, and are longer than in the
other two species. In these three species the proportions (according
to Sars) are as follows :—
B. sibbaldi, 4-5.
B. musculus, 5:0.
B. rostrata, 5°5.
)
Their greatest breadth (measured between the eyes) is, compared to
their length, as 1 to 1°7. ‘This was somewhat less ina skeleton in the
Bergen Museum (total length 307; feet), where the breadth across
the temporal bones (according to Lilljeborg) was, compared to the
length of the skull, as 1 to 2°0.
VII. Baleen.
The colour of the baleen is usually black and the bristles white ; in
some individuals, however, a small number of the foremost rows were
white, or mottled with white, but not symmetrically in each ramus.
Besides the baleen in the six specially examined specimens, I examined
a considerable quantity of whalebone which lay heaped up on the
beach at the different establishments. Amongst all this, I only
found two specimens which differed from the others in having some
white mottled plates; in all the others it was entirely black. Of
these two individuals, one had on the right side 58, and on the left
53 of the foremost baleen-plates mottled ',
The second specimen had on the right side 52 white plates, on
the left only 5°.
The number of the plates was about 330 in each jaw, in some
? Namely in the following manner :—On the right side the foremost 27 were
white in their outer half, and the next 15 quite white, after which came 3 grey
plates. Then came 10 completely black, and finally 3 which were white with
black edges. Total 58. The remainder were black.
On the left side the colouring was somewhat similar. The first 31 were
semi-white, and the next 9 quite white, then followed 3 blackish grey, after
which came 3 white, then 2 greyish black, and finally 5 white. Total 53. The
rest were black.
* In this specimen on the left side the 5 foremost ones were white, all the
others black ; on the right side the first 86 plates were mottled with white, after
which came 16 quite white, the remainder being black.
254 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZ NOPTERA BOREALIS. — [Feb. 2,
individuals 320, in others as many as 340. No. 2 for instance had
on its right side only 318, on its left 328.. The number appears to
be rarely the same in the two jaws of the same individual.
The front .plates were smal!, almost rudimentary, and formed
double rows; these were difficult to count. The greatest length was
attained at the commencement of the latter third of the series, where
as a rule they measured 550 to 600 millim.’
From these measurements it appears that the length and number
of the plates are not constantly greater in the right than in the left
jaw, also that there is no constant difference between the plates in
the two sexes.
The hair-like bristles in which each plate terminates, and which
form the most effective part of the straining-apparatus, are in this
species unusually fine, somewhat resembling silky wool, and white
* I give here the measurements of the baleen-plates of 4 examples, viz. those,
of specimens Nos. 1, 3, and 5, and those of a fourth individual, the jaw of which
lay on the beach. They are reckoned fr om behind forwards, so that No. 50 lies
near the angle of the mouth, No. 250 nearest the symphysis of the jaw. They are
measured from their base (in the freshly killed specimen) to the outermost
point where the plates terminate and the bristles commence.
No. 1. Female. Left all black; on the right side, the first
slightly lighter colour.
Left side 328 plates. Right side 324 plates.
millim. millim.
Hensthof no: D0. sc2cc.ss<e- 460 ING. CBO) ae: Hides. SERPs 430
Pe NOS LOO wre 590 PT LOO ccaceuscchatvoess ates 560
55 TOs Us o coe gees 520 | Pare 5) 0 op peomes Meee ieee eT 510
* M10. 200 sess ADOSER - BID 035.0. c ona cues Pee 420
= 10 Sige. A 240 ae RAD OF ene te ee eee 240
No. 3. Female. All black.
_ Left side 534 plates. Right side 328 plates.
millim millim
Length of no. 50 ............ 430 NOB OE rs cons cetnscns se sens tei 450
A HMOs LOU eee cee NE We LOOM lescensct aide noeeeesee 540
* noMlBOPAaeAN. 490 a ES OME iris tek ee 470
© TIO ZOO 962325. 0tetlk 380 | ght (BOO se Seals HAGE 370
. B10 S200 og Saterer ext 180 | Af 250 fs cc ce adatas tans pee reeee 210
No. 5. Male. All black.
Left side 318 plates. Right side 321 plates.
millim. | - millim
Length of no. 50 ............ 490 |. INO.g100 “steko ee ee 480
+ mp: MOOS erect 640 94g LOO a, cee c thee hereeaeee 630
OE, Seay ee Bae at BAe age eae 590
- NO: 200K cee -gssaas 420 ! Si UD aztec tenceter sp sacee 440
- TOs 200 raertntaten 250 5y DO a saeenus de cns ace Re
Another example (sex unknown). All black.
Left side 333 plates. Right side 539 plates.
millim. | millim.
Wo. 502 per geez ee DPT: igi gs ie aia se ae pa 500
97 LOO! set ecees. sccaementee 570 SP ULOOA ~ HSikes wc Saedekeeeas 600
hy LEO cere tees =a anee-ecenee 520 Be) a1 epee euer cee 560
5 LUO stop tees teres ean ees 400 Fa | 9 ee eae eee een ay EEE E 450
37. AOU guavevanawata este cote 250 5" | Pe aR Ree eee 240
1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS, 255
in colour. They form on the inner edges of the baleen-plates a
dense, rather curly covering, which appears to indicate that the food
of this species consists of only very small animals.
VIII. Blowholes and Furrows.
The Blowholes lie in two long furrows somewhat converging
anteriorly ; their distance from the end of the snout, in a specimen
having a total length of 43 feet, was somewhat over 63 feet (2100
millim.). The length of the furrows was from 370 to 410 millim.,
between these ran a shorter central furrow.
The Furrows.—These run, as in the other species, along the whole
length of the lower jaw, from the symphysis to the angle of the
mouth, and extend to the middle of the belly. The upper 8 to 10
are short and terminate in the axilla, and are about 2 feet in length.
The others, about 20 in number (from 15 to 34) on each side, are
long and extend backwards to the centre of the belly about one foot
beyond the end of the flippers. One or more short furrows wedge
themselves in between the long ones.
The total number of long furrows is thus from 30 to 44, to which
must be added the 8-10 shorter upper ones; altogether 38 to 58.
In addition, the eye is surrounded by two very short horizontal
furrows, and in some examples there were also found (as in No. 4)
traces of from 20 to 30 short, oblique furrows anteriorto the dorsal fin.
The furrows permit the body to expand to nearly double its normal
girth.
IX. Hairy Covering.
This consisted in an adult female of 11 hairs on each side of the
lower jaw, each about 10 millim. long, and two other hairs on each
side, situated somewhat behind these ; altogether 26 hairs.
In the foetus the covering of hair was more plentiful. On the
smallest of the foetuses described further on (No. 1), the total length
of which was 1} metres, the hairs were visible, but quite short.
In feetus No. 3, the total length of which was not quite 24 metres,
they were arranged on the lower jaw in three rows, comprising 3 hairs
in the upper and lower rows respectively and 11 in the central row ;
altogether on each side 17 hairs.
On the upper jaw there were only 7 hairs situated ina single row,
the two first rather further from each other than the rest. Alto-
gether this specimen was provided with 34 hairs on the lower and
14 hairs on the upper jaw.
X. Parasites.
Parasites of three different sorts have been up to the present
time found living upon or in B. dorealis; one of these (not yet
examined nor preserved) is a true ecto-parasite, one (Balenophilus
unisetus) is an epizoon, aud two Echinorhynchi are ento-parasites.
I could find no trace of ecto-parasites on the specimens examined
256 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPIERA BOREALIS. — [Feb. 2,
by myself; and upon inquiry amongst the whalers, I was in-
formed that only Capt. Bryde has noticed such parasites on a
single individual captured off Vardé in July. As no specimen has
been preserved, it cannot be stated whether they were Crustaceans
(Pennellidee?), Discophora, or other forms. ‘They were worm-like
animals, about 50 millim. long, and were attached to the edges of both
flukes (caudal lobes), where they formed a row of tree hanging threads.
Some were also attached to the upper surface of the flukes.
In a set of baleen-plates belonging to one specimen, and brought
to the University Museum in Christiania from Sorver (Hammerfest)
in 1883 by Dr. Guldberg, most of the plates are infested on both
sides with innumerable specimens of Balenophilus unisetus (figs. A,
B, C, D), a Copepodous crustacean of the subfamily Harpacticine,
described by Aurivillius ina pamphlet published in Stockholm in 1879,
and discovered by him on the baleen-plates of a specimen of Bale-
noptera sibhbaldi caught at Vadso in July 1877. In 1884, Mr. A.
Heneage Cocks found this parasite on a specimen of the same whale
at Sérveer, near Hammerfest (‘ Zoologist,’ 1885, p. 135). So far as
I know, it has never been found by other observers. Its occurrence on
Balenoptera borealis is therefore of interest’. The fully developed
specimens (figs. A, B) can only with difficulty be recognized in
their dry state; but the larve in their Nawplius-stage (figs. C, D),
which are attached to the plates in myriads, still retain most of their
original form and appearance.
These two parasites appear therefore to be of very rare occurrence.
However, the intestines of all the specimens that 1 examined, inclu-
ding those which 1 found on the beach, were, without exception,
filled with thousands of Echinorhynchi, belonging to twe different
species.
One of these, which was very much less numerous than the other,
seemed to resemble very closely . porrigens, Rud. Its length was
100 millim. The rostellum was unarmed, the neck long, and the
body formed an even continuation of the neck. As I unfortunately
only brought one perfect specimen away with me, and as this has
the proboscis half retracted, it cannot be decided with certainty
whether the species is actually identical with 4. porrigens.
The other species appeared in all the specimens examined, and in
such vast numbers that in some places there were three or four upon
each square inch, and they moreover thickly covered the inner coating
of the intestines wherever an incision was made. The smallest speci-
mens were thin, semi-transparent, and immature; their length wasabout
10 millim., the breadth 2 millim. From these up to the full-grown
specimens, the length of which was about 25 millim., there were all
gradations of size. While the majority of the specimens were of a
white colour, the fully adult were of an intense red, as if their
integument were impregnated with the colour of the red Crustaceans,
which are the principal food of their hosts. ‘The species to which
it approaches nearest is LZ. brevicollis, deseribed by Malm in 1867,
1 T sent some of the specimens to Dr. Aurivillius, and he has confirmed
their identification with the species found on the Blue Whale (B. sibbaldi).
a ie i oe,
1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 257
Balenopteys unisetus.
Fig. A. Female (nat. size 3°5 mu.).
B. Abdominal segment of female, seen from above.
C, D. Nauplius of female, second stage (nat. size 0°25 mm.).
258 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALEZNOPTERA BOREALIS. — [Feb. 2,
from B. sibbaldi!; but as it differs in several respects (thus the
neck is reduced to a short and quite thin peduncle, from which the
body expands rather abruptly to its full size without any gradual
transition), I think that the species has not been previously de-
scribed, and I propose for it the name £. ruber (figs. KE, E’).
E. ruber bas on its proboscis about four rows of very thin, pointed,
and quite transparent spines.
The rostellum, the length of which (including the proboscis) is 2
millim., is pointed in front, and has, as a rule, a more or less distinct
constriction a little in front of its centre, whence the anterior part
narrows regularly towards the proboscis. The rostellum has about
Fig. B. Hehinorhynchus ruber, sp. noy. (nat. size 25 mm,).
h', Front part, magnified,
10 rows of spines, the concentric arrangement of which is not
always plain. ;
The. collum is thick anteriorly, and still somewhat narrower
than the rostellum, but rapidly narrows off to a_thread-like
peduncle ; the neck is, however, quite short, and the total length
from the rostellum to corpus is only 3 millim., and is thus evea
shorter than the breadth of the body.
1 ‘Monogr. illustr. Baleinopt..... cote oce. de Suéde’ (fol, Stockhoim, 1867),
p- 95.
1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALANUPTERA BOREALIS. 259
The corpus emerges almost without any transition from the neck,
and hasa length of about 19 millim., making the animal’s total length
about 25 millim. It is perfectly cylindrical, and has a regular
breadth of about 34 to 43 millim., which is thus to the total length
as 1 to about 63.
Males and females were intermixed and seemed to be present in
equal numbers. The two sexes do not appear to differ in length,
colour, or general appearance ; though the males were at the first
glance distinguishable on account of the two projecting folds in the
skin encircling the outer orifice of the genitalia.
The females were all full of myriads of eggs : these were of normal
structure, and measured about 0°135 millim. in length; no trace of
the row of spines which appears on the head of the embryo of the
other species could be found when magnified 600 times. Neither
were spiral threads to be seen, as described in Echinorhynchus proteus
(Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. xiii. p. 418).
It cannot of course at present be stated whence B. borealis
obtains the larvee of FE. ruber. As the species is decidedly different
from L. brevicollis, described by Malm from B. sibbald?, it is not
probable that both species get their parasites from the same crus-
tacean. We know that Luphausia inermis (a Thysanopod) is the
species from which B. sibbaldi probably exclusively obtains its food
in the summer months, and it is therefore not improbable that Echino-
rhynchus brevicollis passes through its first stages with this species.
Whether Calanus finmarchicus is the first host of EZ. ruber can
only be conjectured as a possibility. It seems, however, more
probable that a somewhat larger crustacean, which perhaps consti-
tutes the food of this Whale at other seasons of the year, is the true
transporter of this parasite.
Its diagnosis will be as follows :—
E. ruBER, n. sp. Total length 25 millim.; proboscis with about 4
rows of spines, rostellum with 10-12 rows. Neck shorter than the
transverse diameter of the body, thread-like. Corpus short, emerging
abruptly from the neck. Colour in adult brick-red. -
XI. Time of Capture.
It has been previously stated, that in 1882 B. borealis first
became the object of general capture, especially at the newly founded
establishment at Séréen, near Hammerfest, and it appears to “ close
the land” about there every year, although in varying numbers.
In previous years the first specimen, according to Capt. Bull,
was captured in the beginning of June. The 24th of June was about
the best period for catching them, while after the 8th July they
gradually disappeared, when other species generally appeared (B.
musculus and B, sibbaldi).
This year (1885) B. borealis coasted the land along the whole
of Finmark, and formed such a considerable portion of the
“ Fishery,” that it surpassed the number of all other species com-
bined.
260 MR. R. COLLELT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. [Feb. 2,
The first specimens observed in shore in 1885 were captured near
the establishments on Sdrden, near Hammerfest, on the west coast
of Finmark, the first on the 14th May, by one of the steamers
belonging to Bole (Capt. Foyn) ; the second on the 18th by one of the
Sérver steamers (Capt. Bull). These two factories together obtained
during May five specimens. Whales were under the land the whole
time, but the fishery was hindered by bad weather. In the previous
year this whale had never approached land so early.
The first one captured by the whalers in East Finmark was
killed on the 18th June off Nordkyn.
Many were seen the same day, and they proceeded in an E.S.E.
direction, keeping at about 4 Norwegian (over 28 English) miles
from land. It was, however, some time before they appeared in any
considerable numbers. First, towards the end of June, they began
to be captured by several of the whalers, and even then only in small
numbers. In the begiuning of July, however, the numbers were
greater; and during an entire month some were caught daily along
the whole coast of Finmark by all the companies; and occasionally
several individuals were captured in a day by the same company.
The best period was the latter half of July. In the course of August
their numbers diminished, but even towards the end of the month
several were caught, but the “schools” appeared then to be more
under the Murman coast or further out at sea. The last one ob-
tained was by Capt. Sdérensen on the 28th August’, but others were
seen during the first week in September (the last time beiug the 8th
September).
XII. Fetus.
All the managers agree that about an equal number of each
sex were captured. ‘The six specimens examined by me were
three males and three females. One of the whalers believes from his
observations that at the beginning of the fishing-season most of those
captured were females.
Most of the females were gravid. At the commencement of the
season (in the beginning of July) most of the foetuses were 3 or 4
feet long, in the middle of the month they were often 6 or 7 feet
(1:8-2°2 m.), and towards the end of the season, in August, some
were seen of from 8 to 10 or 12 feetin length. Although there was
thus a somewhat regular increase in the size of the foetus as summer
advanced, their growth increased apparently but slowly, and there
were several instances of irregularities. Thus a foetus taken out at
one of the factories at Vardd, on the 15th July, had a length of
8 feet (23 m.); whilst at the same place, on the 18th July, one was
obtained which measured only 2 feet (0°6 m). Some whalers con-
_ sider it difficult to lay down any fixed rule for the size, having often
' [The last specimen of this species killed during the season of 1885 was
brought in to Capt. Sdrensen’s factory early on the morning of August 25. It
was a male measuring 45 feet (English) along the curves, and was taxen off
Kildin Island on the Murman coast.—A. H. C.]
1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 261
obtained on the same day both large and small foetuses. So far as
my knowledge goes, a foetus has never been met with under 2 feet
in length.
The four foetuses examined by me were taken out between the
16th and 19th July, and were from 5 to 9 feet (1:5 to 2°8 m.) in
length, as will be seen by the following measurements :—
16 July. 18 July. 19 July. | 18 July.
|No. 1, 9.\No. 2, 3.| No. 3, g.) No. 4, ¢.
millim. millim. | millim. | millim. |
FeO PUN ee fechaG co csnc ontoaiezes coe 1550 1830 2410 2830
Snout to angle of mouth ............... 250 320 410 460
Angle of mouth to flipper............... 220 250 350 360
Length of the flipper...........-....:.++ 240 | 250 370 410
Width of the flipper ........ ..........0. 50 54 ia =
Snout to the dorsal fin .................. 1030 | 1180 1550 1810
Dorsal fin to end of the tail ............ 520 | 650 860 1020
Snout, to the navel)... 0<.s:)s<c++062.--002 760 940 1230 1340
| Greatest height of the body ............ 240 300 330 390
Height at the beginning of the dorsal
| cl gg ese ce Ber Con Ones @ eRe Remene maree 5 170 230 | 310 320
Height at the middle of the tail ...... | 140 160 220 25-0
The least height of the tail ............ | 100 $20 ie) Sea a TO]
|
Length of each fluke ..........,.......--- ft cm20O ie hi: ~ 250 af i | 340
The colour of these foetuses was homogeneous, a reddish-brown
on the upper and under sides, without any appearance of white on
the belly. It was only in the largest ones that there was any indi-
cation of the baleen. Their covering of hair, on the contrary, as
previously stated, was considerable.
Twins.—On the 27th July, Capt. Bruun captured at the entrance
to the Varangerfjord a female 43 feet long, which contained two young
ones, each six feet seven inches long. So far as I know, twins have
never been observed by others.
XIIL. Food.
In all the examples I examined in the middle of July the stomach
and intestines were filled with a fine gritty mass, which consisted
entirely of Calanus finmarchicus' (figs. F, G, p. 262). These were
half digested, but among the hairs of the baleen-plates they
occurred in great numbers and in a tolerable state of preservation.
The feeces had the same intensely red colour as the contents of the
intestines and stomach. Calanus finmarchicus is known to occur in
two forms, one large, the other small. The form here met with was
the latter. How far this Copepod formed the only nourishment of
this species during the time they remained under the Finmark
coast is doubtful. In East Finmark it probably formed their only
' Monoculus finmarchicus, Gunnerius, 1765; Cyclops finmarchicus, Mill. (ex
Gunn.) Zool. Dan. Prodr. p. 201 (1776).
262 MR, R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPLERA BOREALIS. [Feb. 2, y :
Fig.eF.
AWA RAS
YS SSN AL |,
SSS SSS ee
SS = SS SS
Calanus finmarchicus.
1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 263
food; but Capt. Bull, from West Finmark, asserts that not
only this summer, but in the previous ones, he found that the
stomach contained the so-called ‘* Kril,’’ which forms the chief
nourishment of the B. sibbaldi. This “Kril” is Euphausia
inermis, a Thysanopod Crustacean, about 13 inch in length and
semi-transparent. It is therefore certain that the B. borealis is not
confined to the Copepoda for its nourishment, although the unusually
fine and curly, almost woolly bristles on the inner side of the baleen-
plates clearly show that their food consists of minute animals, and
hardly ever of fish.
XIV. Hahits.
B. borealis appeared off the coast sometimes singly, but as a rule
in schools of different size, which might number as many as 50
individuals. Towards the end of the fishing-season they appeared
to be more broken up, after having been terrified and scattered by
the whaling-boats for months.
Concerning their method of swimming, the whalers have noticed
some small peculiarities. During their wanderings, or when they are
not amongst the “ Aate”’ (7. e. the shoals of crustaceans on which
they feed), they swim fast, and do not require to blow so often as the
other species. Asa rule they blow only once or twice, whilst the
other kinds blow as often as five or six times during each visit to the
surface, and they swim for a considerable distance before they again
appear. ‘Their course under the water can be traced by the bubbles
of air which appear on the surface. When in amongst a shoal of
Calanus finmarchicus, and on the feed, they swim quite slowly, with
their snout and half of their back above water. The B. musculus
and the 2B. sibbaldi under such circumstances often turn on
their side whilst swimming, with their mouths open to take the
crustaceans.
In its temper B. borealis is inoffensive and avoids the boats.
But it has sometimes happened that in its death-agonies it has struck
the boats, and on several occasions has injured their sides or pro-
pellers. Such conduct has, however, probably been unintentional, or
committed in its agony, and cannot be considered, as it has often
been called, natural ferocity.
All the whalers are unanimous in opinion that B. borealis (as well
as B. musculus and B. sibéaldi) can remain under water for a far
greater time than is generally supposed. he duration of this time
is estimated to be from 8 to 12 hours. Such periods of rest often
occur at particular hours of the day. These animals are never
heard to make any sound.
XV. Value.
The quantity of blubber as a rule is but little in this species. An
average-sized individual yields from 15 to 20 Norw. barrels (17 to 23
hectolitres) of oil; they appear this year to have been as a rule
264 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALEZNOPTERA BOREALIS. _[Feb. 2,
thinner than usual. Capt. Bull told me that during the previous
year at Sorveer he got 25 to 30 barrels off each example (30 to 35
hectolitres). The blubber is thickest about the flippers and on the
back, where it is from 3 to 6 inches thick (80 to 130 millim.).
The value is estimated by the whalers as being about half that of
B. musculus. and averages about 500 to 600 kroners (£27 to £33).
The baleen is considered more valuable than that of the other kinds.
Finally, it may be mentioned that it is from this species, and from
none of the others, that the flesh is prepared on a large scale for
human consumption. A factory has been at work during the past
year at Sérver, near Hammerfest, hermetically preserving the flesh
of this species, the flesh of the other species of the Balzenopteridz
not being considered fit for such a purpose.
XVI. Monstrosities.
During my stay at Capt. Castberg’s factory at Vardo I was shown
an individual which lay moored to the shore, eanght on the 16th
July. It wanted both “flippers” from the shoulder- -joints. As
this deficiency appeared to be symmetrical, it is probable that the
specimen was born without flippers (however I could not be sure
of this, as I could not stop until the blubber was removed).
XVII. Synopsis of the four Northern Species of Balenoptera.
I conclude my remarks by giving a brief summary of the external
characters of the four northern species of Balenoptera :—
Balenoptera rostrata (Fabr. 1780). Norwegian Vaagehval
(‘“‘ Bay Whale ”).—Length 25 to 30 feet, seldom exceeding 33 feet.
Form of the body rather robust or plump; the greatest height is to
the total length as 1 to 5. Colour greyish black above ; the under-
side white, including the whole of the lower side of the tail; the
flippers with a broad band of white across the outer side ; the inner
side quite white. Dorsal fin high, evenly curved, and deeply
emarginated behind; it is placed somewhat far forward, at the
commencement of the last third of the body. Vent placed just
under (or a trifle beyond) the hindermost edge of the dorsal fin.
Flippers moderately long, measuring about one eighth of the total
iength of the body. Baleen with the bristles of a yellowish-white
colour. The number of plates about 325; their greatest length
about 200 millim., not including the bristles. Jaws short, being to
the total length to 1 to 53.
Balenoptera borealis, Less. 1828. Norwegian Sejhval (“ Coal-
fish Whale” ).—Length 40 to 48 feet, rarely as much as 52 feet.
Form of the body less robust; the greatest height is to the total
length nearly as 1 to 53. Colour bluish black abov e, with oblong
light-coloured spots ; the underside as far as the genitalia more or less
white, The whole of the tail, with the flukes and the flippers on
both sides, is exactly similar to the back in colour. Dorsal fin high,
evenly curved and deeply emarginated behind ; it is placed far forward,
'STIVEMOd VYTIGONPFIVE :
WAT FUG‘
duit qareyuey
Weld VSL os 7 a
“SITVANOE VEALIONY IVE i= te arpa
dint qaeqaey a SL
TAX, Id SS8L Sez.
1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 265
as a rule a little in advance of the last third of the body. Vent
placed exactly under hindermost edge of the dorsal fin. Flippers
unusually small, measuring about ;/; of the total length of the body.
Baléen black ; the bristles fine, white, and curling. The number of
plates about 330 ; their greatest length 650 millim., not including the
bristles. Jaws long, being to the total length about as 1 to 43.
Balenoptera musculus, Comp. 1828. Norwegian Finhval
(‘ Finner Whale ”).—Length 60 to 65 feet, seldom exceeding 70
feet. Form of the body very elongate; the greatest height is to the
total length as 1 to 63 or 63. Colour greyish slate above, also the
left lower jaw ; the whole underside, the right lower jaw, the inner
side of the flippers, and the underside of the flukes white. Dorsal
fin rather low, with almost straight margins; it is placed some-
what forward, or very slightly in front of the last fourth of the body.
Vent placed just beneath the anterior edge of the dorsal fin.
Flippers rather small, measuring about { of the total length of the
body. Baleen with the bristles dark bluish black or slate-colour ;
on the right side, the first rows are white or whitish. The number
of the plates between 350 and 370; their greatest length about
950 millim., not including the bristles. Jaws of moderate length,
being to the total length as 1 to 5.
Balenoptera sibbaldi, Gray, 1847. Norwegian Blaahval (‘ Blue
Whale’’).—Length about 70 to 80 feet, seldom exceeding 85 feet.
Form of the body more robust than the last species, the greatest
height is to the total length as 1 to 53. Colour dark bluish grey,
with small whitish spots on the breast; the lower edge of the
flippers and their inner sides white. Dorsal fin particularly low
and small, with straight margins ; it is placed far back, close to the
commencement of the last quarter of the body. Vent placed in
front of the vertical line from the anterior edge of the dorsal fin.
Flippers large, measuring about + of the total length of the body.
Baleen with the bristles black. |The number of the plates up to 400
(according to Dr. Guldberg); their greatest length (according to Dr.
Nansen) 930 millim., not including the bristles. Jaws long, being
to the total length as 1 to 43.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Prats XXV.
Fig. 1. Side view of Balenoptera borealis, male.
2. Lower surface of ditto,
Piatt XXVI,
Fig. 1. Lower surface of Balenoptera borealis, female.
2. One of the pile pues 2 the skin ; enlarged.
ARS. Mus
BANS = SAN
¥ ? . Ze r3 kG
2) al Se . <4
{Up cy
UBAL So
Proc. Zooxu. Soc.—1886, No. XVIII. 18
266 THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. [May 4,
May 4, 1886.
Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair.
The Secretary read the following report on the additions to the
Society’s Menagerie during April 1886 :—
The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of April was 170, of which 83 were by
presentation, 23 by purchase, 11 by birth, 11 were received in ex-
change, and 42 on deposit. The total number of departures during
the same period, by death and removals, was 119.
Amongst these special attention was called to :—
1. A fine example of a Lizard belonging to a new species of the
genus Ctenosaura, which Mr. Boulenger described at the last meeting
of the Society as Ctenosaura erythromelas (see above, p. 241),
obtained by purchase April 3rd.
The exact locality of the specimen, which was purchased of a
dealer at Liverpool, could not unfortunately be ascertained ; but
it is believed to be from some part of Central America.
2. A fine male example of the Lesser Koodoo, Strepsiceros im-
berbis, received in exchange from M. Cornély, of Tours, on April 7th.
Having lost the female, M. Cornély was good enough to part
with the male of this rare Antelope in our favour. The specimen in
question was originally obtained by one of Mr. Hagenbeck’s collectors
in Somali-land (see P. Z.S. 1884, pp. 45, 539).
3. A young male two-horned Rhinoceros, received in exchange
from the Zoological Gardens, Calcutta, April 27th, and apparently
referable to R. lasiotis, if this species is really distinct from R. suma-
trensis. Dr. John Anderson, F.Z.S., has kindly favoured me with
the subjoined note upon this interesting acquisition :—
‘*The young male Rhinoceros, lately received from the Calcutta
Zoological Gardens, was brought into Rangoon on the 27th of
March, 1884, while I happened to be there on my way to Japan.
The animal had been captured a day or two before in the Bassein
district, close to the sea, and, when first seen by its captors, it was
in the company of its mother. The mother, however, escaped, I
was told, by plunging into the sea and swimming away, leaving her
young one behind. I at once secured it for the Calcutta Zoological
Gardens. When I saw it in Rangoon it was only about 2 feet high
at the shoulder, and was evidently quite a baby. Its skin was
smooth and pinkish, and thickly covered with pale yellowish-grey
hairs, somewhat curly, and as soft as wool, except on the front of the
legs, where it was blackish-brown and much coarser than elsewhere.
The positions of the two horns were well-defined, although these
structures were only feebly developed. From its general appearance
I concluded at the time that it was R. dasiotis.”’
1886. ] MR. F. W. STYAN ON CERVULUS CRINIFRONS. 267
Mr. E. L. Layard, F.Z.S., exhibited a rare Beetle of the family
Cerambycidee (Macrotoma heros), obtained in one of the islands of
the Fiji group.
This species was originally described and figured by Graeffe (Reis.
Ins. Viti, 1868, p. 47, Taf. i.; see also the Stettin. entom. Zeitung,
1868, Taf. ii.). It was said to live in hollow trees. The specimen
was intended for the National Museun.
Mr. Layard also exhibited a series of specimens of the genus
Bulimus from New Caledonia and the adjacent islands, and some
other interesting shells.
The following letter, addressed to the Secretary by Mr. F. W.
Styan, F.Z.S., relating to some Chinese animals, was read :—
Shanghai,
12th March, 1886,
**T have lately procured from Ningpo the skin of a Hairy-fronted
Muntjac, Cervulus crinifrons, the species described by you before
the Society on the 20th January last. My specimen is a female,
and as I believe the male in the Gardens of the Society is the only
individual of the species that has yet been met with, a description
of the skin may be interesting.
“The following are the measurements of the dry skin :—
inches.
“From nose to root of tail ................ 46 (appa-
rently stretched)
Pailsfaiend iof hotie-jiatsies jaiivel. Lael iee 168
Eealasostap Obdhnir yGegh 22 nels taal ce 18h
Heel to base of hoof ater ee feel
Shoulder to base of hoof .................. i
Nose to forehead between base of ears ...... 9
Parse tsts bile Qian cemrtetad bal Gantt. RI ORT
“‘ Upper parts rich dark glossy brown, mixed with black, darkest
along the middle of the back. Belly and inner sides of thighs pure
white, the line of demarcation very distinct except in the lower part of
the thighs, where it merges gradually into dark brown. Tail above
black, below pure white; a pale patch under the forearm; rest of
the underparts dark brown. The brown of the neck gradually
pales into reddish brown on the sides of the head; the nose-ridge
dark brown; the longitudinal slits form a black Y, the colour
between them is a bright reddish brown, which turns into a fiery
orange-brown in the tuft of bristly hair, rather more than two inches
long, which rises from the tip of the forehead. On each side of
this is a very small bony pedicle surmounted by short tufts of hair
of the same colour. Lars at the base of the same hue, but not quite
so bright, and fading into brown on the upper parts.
“In general appearance it much resembles both Elaphodus michi-
anus and Cervulus lacryman s, having the dark-coloured mony tufted
18
268 MR. F. W. STYAN ON CERVULUS CRINIFRONS. _[ May 4,
forehead, and slender build of the former, and the yellow head and
black slits along the face of the latter. It is, however, much larger
than either, and apparently longer in the legs, compared with the size
of body. Its fur is of a similar hard texture to that of Hlaphodus
michianus, but the colour is much richer and more glossy. The
skull is attached to the skin, but I have not taken it out to examine.
This species appears to be very rare; ever since the description of it
first appeared, the man I employed to hunt has been specially
looking for it, but has only procured this single specimen. When I
first gave him a description of it he was quite incredulous, and
said no such animal was known, nor would he believe in it until he
actually came across this one.
‘Last summer he procured for me two young of the Hlaphodus,
which I am not aware have been described before. They are
apparently not more than two or three weeks old, but are almost
exact miniatures of the adult, similar in colour, with a very
pronounced frontal tuft, but no pale eyebrow, ears marked with
white as in adult. On each side of the back is a row of not very
distinctly marked white spots, and outside that again just the faintest
suspicion of another row.
‘*T have also to record an interesting addition to the avifauna of
China in the shape of Hirundo savignyi. Two birds, which I
believe to be of this species, were killed at Pekin last October, one
of which is now in the Shanghai Museum. David records having
seen Swallows with reddish-yellow underparts in Upper Mongolia,
which doubtless were of the same species, but no record of its
occurrence in China exists. Both are males, one an immature bird,
and measure respectively 73 and 7 inches—the tail in the former being
4 inches, in the latter 34, not fully developed. In the adult the
forehead and throat are deep chestnut, the lower parts uniform rich
chestnut-buff; the nuchal collar is broad and complete, but a little
mixed with chestnut. In the younger bird the colour of the forehead
and throat is similar to that of the lower parts in the adult, while
its lower parts are again paler, a bright buff, and the nuchal collar
is broken in the centre.
“ Whether H. savignyi is now admitted as a distinct species or is
regarded as only a variety of H. rustica I do not know; but if the
latter, its range is remarkably wide, and it is.strange to find it where
the parent form is unknown and replaced by a distinct species,
H. gutturalis.
“T am, Si,
* Yours faithfully,
«F, W. Sryan, F.Z.S.
“ P.S.—A friend tells me that when in Pekin in 1883 he saw
Swallows with uniform brick-red underparts, but did not obtain
specimens. It is probable the species is not uncommon there.”
The following papers were read :—
1886. ] MR. W. F. KIRBY ON RARE SPHINGIDZ. 269
1. Remarks on four rare Species of Moths of the Family
Sphingide. By W.F. Kirgsy, Assistant in Zoological
Department, British Museum (S. Kensington).
[Received April 16, 1886.]
(Plate XXVIT.)
I am indebted to Prof. V. Ball and Mr. Nichols, of the Dublin
Museum of Science and Art, in which most of the species noticed in
this paper are contained, for an opportunity of carefully examining
and figuring some of the more interesting Sphingide in the collec-
tion under their charge.
1. CH#RocaMpA MAcuLATOR, Boisd. Lép. Hét. i. p. 274
(1874).
CO. meschleri, Ersch. Trudy Russk. Ent. x. p. 64, t. i. f. 1
(1876).
The identity of these supposed species has been suggested from
the first. There is a specimen in the Dublin Museum which agrees
with Erschoff’s figure, except that it is not quite so dark, and the pale
band of the hind wings is rather broader and has a slight pinkish
tinge. This specimen was, I believe, received from Herr Moschler,
labelled ‘* C. maculator, Boisd., Colombia.’ Boisduval’s type was
from ‘ Venezuela,” and Erschoff’s from “ Colombia,” the latter
having been also received from Moéschler. Boisduval’s description
agrees well with the Dublin specimen, except that he calls the pale
band of the hind wings ‘‘ jaune terreux,” and seems to imply that
the dark blotch on the fore wings is nearer the centre than is
actually the case. But I am not disposed to attach too much
importance to these trifling discrepancies.
2. AmBuLyx Eos, Burm. (Plate XXVII. fig. 1.)
Philampelus eos, Burm. Desc. Rep. Arg. v. p. 350 (1878), Atlas,
pl. 10. fig. 1 (1880).
The British Museum possesses a male from Buenos Ayres, pre-
sented by Walter de Rothschild, Esq., which differs so much from
Burmeister’s figure of the female that I have thought it worth while
to figure it. The vertex, thorax, and fore wings are of a dull green,
slightly inclining to olive above; the face and under surface of the
thorax are greenish yellow, the base of the labrum and the knees
being narrowly white. The antenne are white behind, and reddish
in front. The sides of the thorax above are of a much darker green
than the centre, and are marked behind with a small white triangu-
lar spot ; the first segment of the abdomen is also of a dark green,
somewhat yellowish, the remainder being of a yellowish grey. The
270 MR. W. F. KIRBY ON RARE SPHINGIDZ. [May 4,
fore wings are whitish at the base, this colour being narrowest at
the costa; and rather below the costa is a small dark green spot
near the base. On the inner margin, a dark green oblong mark
curves upwards from the base, ceasing at one third of the distance
from the costa, and rather beyond it is an oblong white spot with a
dark-green centre. Below this, and beyond the oblong mark, the
wing is obscurely marked with blackish, and from the upper curve
of the oblong a dark obsolete mark curves towards the anal angle,
before which it becomes more distinct, and is bounded outside by some
whitish markings in the form of a W. In the middle of the wing
are three obsolete transverse lines, ceasing at the subcostal nervure—
the basal one dull green, the second obscurely blackish, and having
an oblong black spot within its upper portion, and the outer one much
waved, marked rather broadly with blackish above ; beyond it, just
below the subcostal nervure, is another blackish mark, like a broad
V. The hind wings are reddish tawny, the hind margin being olive-
yellow, most broadly so at the anal angle, above which it is sur-
mounted by an irregular blackish blotch enclosing two white dots.
Wings beneath yellowish green or greenish yellow, the fore wings
being pale orange-yellow at the base to beyond the cell, and brighter
orange along the costa; at the extremity of the cell is a blackish
spot. The outer portions of the fore wings are marked with three
obsolete green lines, converging towards a blackish spot at the anal
angle, and the hind wings with three similar lines, which do not
quite meet ; the outer ones terminate in blackish blotches, between
which stand two white dots.
The obscure shades and markings of the fore wings of this and
the next species render them difficult to describe satisfactorily.
The fore wings are strongly falcate, and the anal angle is very
strongly marked. The hind margin of the hind wings is bidentate
beyond the anal angle.
3. AMBULYX TITHONUS, sp.n. (Plate XXVII. fig. 2.)
Very similar to A. eos, but the upper surface is of a much duller
olive-brown ; markings of the head and thorax nearly similar, Fore
wings hardly white at the base and with a yellowish-olive band,
slightly edged with white, running less obliquely from the inner
margin just beyond the base to the median nervure, at which point
it is broader than in A. eos; its outline is also more sinuous. Above
the median nervure, and beyond it, is an obscure olive-green spot,
flecked with white ; at the end of the cell is a black spot, beyond
which is a sinuous black line (double above) curving down to the
inner margin; beyond it are two more waved blackish lines (the
first double) running from the subcostal nervure half across the
wing ; the hind margin and anal angle are shaded into olive.
Hind wings orange-tawny, paler at the anal angle, above which is a
black blotch marked with two white dots, from which runs an ill-
defined submarginal blackish stripe ; the hind margin is also narrowly
blackish. Wings beneath of a more uniform yellowish green than
eS ee Thal
idaud Horman Rsher del & hth Mintern Bros. imp.
1886. ] MR. W. F. KIRBY ON RARE SPHINGID. 271
in A. eos and the fore wings paler yellow at the base; the black
discoidal spot is less strongly marked, and is followed by three short
dusky lines on the costa; the hind margin is grey in the middle,
bordered by a suffused blackish line running from the tip to the
anal angle; on the inner margin, within the anal angle, is a short
curved blackish line ; nearer the base the inner margin is reddish.
Hind wings beneath with a black spot at the end of the cell, and
three obsolete greenish lines beyond (the middle most obscure),
terminating in a black blotch, on which stands a yellowish-white
spot, the two seen above having become united beneath.
The wings are rather less falcate than in A. eos, and the hind wings
have only one tooth within the anal angle.
The example of this species was received by the Dublin Museum
as “ Ambulyx lycidas, Brazil;”’ but M. C. Oberthiir of Rennes,
who has kindly compared the figure with the type of that species
(described by Boisduval, Lép. Hét. i. p. 191) from Brazil, informs
me that the outline of the wings (which I have reproduced here from
his sketch, Plate XX VII. fig. A) is very different.
4. PROTOPARCE ABADONNA. (Plate XXVII. fig. 3.)
Sphinx abadonna, Fabr. Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 435 (1798).
Protoparce abadonna, Kirby, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 238.
Sphinw godarti, Macl. King’s Survey of Coasts of Australia, ii.
p- 463 (1827).
I am glad to have an opportunity of figuring this species, from a
specimen from Queensland in the Dublin Museum ; it is singular that
it has not yet been obtained for the British Museum. It is quite
distinct from the common Australian P. distans, Butl. Macleay’s
description is so good as to render it unnecessary to redescribe the
species here. I believe it to be P. abadonna, described by
Fabricius from the East Indies, and I therefore retain his name
provisionally, though I do not feel quite so certain of the correctness
of this identification.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVII.
Fig. 1. Ambulyx eos, 3, p. 269.
2. —— tithonus, sp. n., p. 270.
3. Protoparce abadonna, p. 271.
A. Outline of wing of Ambulyx lycidas, p. 271.
272 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4,
2, Observations on the Ovarian Ovum of Lepidosiren (Pro-
topterus). By Franx E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E.,
Prosector to the Society.
[Received May 3, 1886.]
(Plates XXVIII. & XXIX.)
I. Introduction, p. 272.
II. Ege-membranes, p. 273.
III. Germinal Vesicle, p. 276.
IV. Follicular Epithelium and Development of Yolk, p. 279.
Y. Postembryonic Origin of Ova, p. 288.
VI. Résumé, p. 291.
I. Introduction.
A recent memoir on the anatomy of the Dipnoi by Howard
Ayers‘ contains some account of the ovaries and the ova in Lepido-
siren”, illustrated by several figures. The description of these organs
is, however, mainly anatomical ; and though in the figures some
histological details of the ovary and the contained ova are to be
found, their structure is not described. The author contents
himself with remarking upon the similarity to the Amphibia, and
all that I can find in his paper about the minute structure of the
ovaries and ova is the following paragraph * :—“ Die Structur der
Eiersticke ist direkt vergleichbar mit der der Urodelen. Die ver-
schiedenen Stadien in der Entwickelung der Hier aus dem Keimepithel
sind, soweit bei dem in Alcohol konservirten Material festgestellt
werden konnte, wesentlich dieselben, wie sie fiir niedere Wirbelthiere
constatirt sind. Wenn die Eier vollig entwickelt sind, so ist eine
Hilfte ihrer Oberflache pigmentirt (diejenige, welche gegen die
freie Hialfte des Eierstockes gerichtet ist), wihrend die andere
Hiilfte farblos bleibt” *. Furthermore, in describing the anatomical
relations of the different parts of the genital system, Dr. Ayers
takes occasion to remark that the sexual cells (both ovaries and
testes) are inclosed in two delicate saes—an outer peritoneal, and an
inner formed by the connective-tissue stroma.
I shall refer more particularly to the appearances depicted in
Ayers’s figures in considering the structure of the ovaries and ova
as I interpret them from my own preparations.
1 « Beitrage zur Anatomie und Physiologie der Dipnoér,” Jenaische Zeitschr.
vol. xviii. (1885), pp. 479-527, 3 plates.
2 The specimen studied by myself is from the Nile, and would therefore,
according to some authors, be more properly termed Protopterus. Dr. Ayers
shows reasons for assuming that there is really no generic distinction between
the American Lepidosiren and the African Protopterus ; the former name should
therefore, on grounds of priority, be retained.
3 Loe. cit. p. 508.
4 This is a curious point of similarity to the ova of the Frog (see Balfour,
Comp. Embr. vol. ii. p. 99; Pfliiger, Arch. f. d. ges. Physiol. Bd. xxxi. 1883),
not remarked upon by Ayers in his paper.
1886.] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 273
Concerning the origin of the ova I have no observations to offer.
I shall therefore at once proceed to the discussion of the different
parts of the ovum and its follicular epithelium.
II. Lgg-membranes.
The question of the origin of the different egg-membranes and
their homologies throughout the Vertebrate series has always been
one of interest ; but the opinions held with regard to these points
differ very much. Balfour considers it tolerably certain’ that in
most Vertebrata there are two egg-membranes present—(1) an outer
structureless vitelline membrane, and (2) an inner perpendicularly
striate zona radiata, both of which are formed as a differentiation of
the ege-protoplasm. Of these two membranes the vitelline is obviously
the first to appear ; the zona radiata subsequently makes its appear-
ance, but is reabsorbed into the ovum some time before the latter
is mature; the vitelline membrane persists for a longer period, but
eventually disappears. In the youngest ova of Protopterus I could
detect no trace of any membrane ; as development proceeds a very
delicate homogeneous membrane encircles the ovum. This membrane
probably corresponds to the vitelline membrane, but I have no
exact observations to offer on its origin; judging from analogy it is
a product of the egg-protoplasm, which at this stage (Plate XXIX.
fig. 8) is of uniform granular appearance. At the same time the
membrane was not at all firmly adherent to the ovum, but seemed
to have a much more intimate relation to the follicular epithelium ;
in sections that were less perfect than others this membrane was
detached from the surface of the ovum.
In more mature ova---of the stage represented in Plate XXVIII.
fig. 1—there was present, in addition to the vitelline membrane, a
thick membrane lying beneath it, and evidently formed as a
specialization of the peripheral layer of the ovum. For the most
part this membrane was as distinct from the subjacent protoplasm
of the ovum as is shown in Plate XXIX. fig. 2. Here and there it
appeared to pass gradually and without any break into the substance
of the protoplasm. This membrane shows radial striations (Plate
XXIX. fig. 2), and appears to me in all probability to correspond to
the zona radiata of other Vertebrata. ‘The extreme thinness of the
vitelline membrane as compared with the zona radiata is illustrated
in Plate XXIX. fig. 2. In this stage there was no trace of any
formation of yolk except that the egg-protoplasm has taken on a
reticulate arrangement (see Plate XXIX. fig. 2) in preparation for
the yolk-formation soon to commence.
In the next stage, in which yolk-formation has already commenced,
the conditions of the egg-membranes are slightly different, the dif-
ference principally relating to the outer vitelline membrane. The
vitelline membrane in this stage is very markedly thicker than in
the previous stage ; it is also much more intimately connected with
the follicular epithelium than with the zona radiata. The latter
‘ Comp, Embr, vol. i. p. 50.
274 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4,
membrane shows signs of its subsequent reabsorption into the ovum,
the lower margin being rather less distinct than in the earlier stage.
At no time is the zona radiata so distinctly ‘‘ membranous” as the
vitelline membrane; it always has a granular appearance, and if it
were not for the fine vertical strie, which are presumably the expres-
sion of pores, would be regarded as merely a superficial layer of the
protoplasm appearing more deeply stained because of its firmer tex-
ture. If the vertical striation be really due to protoplasmic processes
traversing the zona radiata, this latter must be regarded as a distinct
metamorphosis of the superficial layer of the ovum; otherwise, if it
really has retained its protoplasmic character, there would be no
necessity for special protoplasmic filaments to pass through its
substance: the whole layer would serve equally well as a conductor
of nutritive material. The disappearance of this membrane, which
commences with the commencing formation of yolk, is complete in
the later stages of the maturation of the ovum ; and the disappearance
is easier to understand on the assumption that the zona radiata is
only but little changed from its original protoplasmic condition, its
reabsorption being therefore a kind of solution. On the other hand,
the thinning of the vitelline membrane in the later stages of egg-
development is possibly purely mechanical, being due to the exten-
sion of an elastic membrane through the increasing bulk of the egg-
contents.
The pores in the zona radiata are very generally believed to admit
processes of the follicular epithelium, and where no imperforate
membrane exists between the zona radiata and the follicular epithe-
lium, as in Mammals, it has been actually demonstrated that such is
the case.
In Elasmobranchs Balfour * has described an enlargement of some
of the follicular cells as the ovum approaches maturity ; these are
doubtless concerned with the nutrition of the ovum, but they
cannot (?) come into actual contact with it because the vitelline
membrane divides them. It is a significant fact, however, that at
this period the vitelline membrane becomes extremely thin, so that
it would evidently favour osmosis. In this case the perforations of
the zona radiata may still be the expression of pores which contain
prolongations, not of the follicular cells, but of the egg-protoplasm,
which thus takes an active part in its own nutrition, as in the lower
forms, and is not merely passively fed by the follicular epithelium.
This may well be the case with Lepidosiren, though I have
been unable actually to demonstrate the protoplasmic contents of the
pores in the zona.
During this second stage of the egg-development, while the yolk
is in process of formation, and there is therefore a special need of
extra nutrition, not merely are these pores in the zona radiata, but
in the more highly refracting membrane outside of this (Plate
XXIX. fig. 5), which I believe to be the thickened vitelline mem-
brane of earlier stages.
These pores are very obvious indeed, and impossible to be over-
1 Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci, 1878, p. 405.
1886. ] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 275
looked in good sections. The vitelline membrane in earlier stages is
so thin that I have found it impossible to detect any pores ; it may
be that they are present, or that the nutrition of the ovum in the
earlier stages is carried on, as suggested above, by osmosis, while
during the later stages, when the formation of yolk is going on and
the need for nutrition increased, direct contact between the follicular
cells and the ovum is necessary to convey adequate nourishment.
In the stage represented in Plate XXVIII. fig. 3, which is charac-
terized by the extraordinary proliferation of the follicular cells and
their migration into the interior of the ovum, there was no trace
whatever of any membrane. The ovum lies within the follicular
epithelium, and in actual contact with its cells. Indeed the very
migration of the follicular cells into the ovum would necessitate the
absence of such a membrane, and there were, at any rate, no traces of
it except in the well-marked limiting membranes (see Plate XXIX.
fig. 7) of the follicular cells, which, however, I never observed to be
separated from the cells themselves, and were continuous all round
them. The absence of any such membrane round the ova of this
stage is one of the strongest arguments against regarding them as a
stage intercalated between the last and the next to be described.
Into this question I shall enter later.
In the latest stages, in which the ovum is entirely occupied by
yolk, the follicular epithelium is separated from the contents of the
ova by an extremely fine and delicate homogeneous membrane (Plate
XXIX. fig. 6); this membrane probably corresponds, in some ova at
least, to the vitelline membrane which has persisted after the disap-
pearance of the internal zona radiata. In some ova belonging to this
stage, the occurrence of a few scattered cells through the substance of
the yolk appears to indicate that they have been derived from ova
belonging to the stage just referred to; in these also a thin delicate
membrane lay between the ovum and the surrounding follicular
epithelium. In this case the membrane must be regarded as a new
formation, though perhaps still homologous with the vitelline mem-
brane.
In the number and structure of its membranes the ovum of
Lepidosiren appears to be related much more nearly to the Elasmo-
branchs than to the Amphibia, with which group the general
anatomical structure of the reproductive organs more closely
corresponds. In the Amphibia in fact, according to Waldeyer and
Kolessnikow, there is only a single delicate membrane, developed
comparatively late, and showing a radial striation, Gdtte’s obser-
vations on Bombinator ’ point to the existence of a single membrane,
clear and structureless, which arises by a metamorphosis of the
external layer of the ovum. In Triton Iwakawa? describes and
figures a single structureless membrane surrounding the ovum. In
these cases the single membrane evidently represents the membrane
in Lepidosiren which I have termed vitelline. The discrepancies in
the observations of these authors on ie structure of the membrane,
1 Entwickelungsgeschichte der Unke, p p-
* Quart. Journ, Mier. Sci. vol. xxii. ‘iBs2), p. 274, pl. xxiv. figs. 2, 4-26.
276 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4,
whether it is really structureless or radiately striate, are possibly
to be explained by supposing that, as in Lepidosiren, it is structure-
less at one time and striate at another.
So also with the observations of Brock upon the Teleostean ovum.
This anatomist figures (Joc. cit. pl. xxviii. tig. 7 f, pl. xxix. fig. 6 Be)
two ova, both of which are provided with two egg-membranes: in
the one the outer egg-membrane is striate, while in the other it is
unstriate ; in the latter case it is considerably thinner than in the
former, and the processes of the follicular cells, whether by acci-
dent or design, are drawn as if stopping short at the outside of
the membrane. Brock’s figures seem to me to point to the con-
clusion that the outer egg-membrane (vitelline membrane) arises, as
in Lepidosiren, as a differentiation of the outer layer of the egg-
protoplasm, and is subsequently perforated by processes of the
follicular cells as the ovura approaches maturity. On the other
hand, the perforations in the zona radiata would seem in this case to
be caused, as suggested above, by protoplasmic strands radiating
outwards from the ovum. ‘The observations of Owsiannikow appear
to contradict this explanation. Owsiannikow has figured (Joc. cit.
pl. i. fig. 3) the branching of the processes of the follicular cells
after they have passed through the outer membrane, in which the
pores are wider apart, to fit into the more closely arranged pores of
the inner membrane.
III. History of the Germinal Vesicle.
My observations on the development of the germinal vesicle are
unfortunately rather meagre. I have been unable to trace it con-
tinuously from the youngest to the most mature ova. The principal
lacuna in the history of the germinal vesicle is the very interesting
stage characterized by the immigration of the follicular cells into
the substance of the ovum. In this stage I could observe no
appearance whatever of a germinal vesicle, which is much to be
regretted, as it would be interesting to know what are its relations to
the immigrating follicular cells *.
1 observed two distinct stages in the development of the germinal
vesicle which will now be described. The first stage is found in
young ova, in which the yolk-formation has not yet begun. The
germinal vesicle is of an oval form, and lies excentrically within the
ovum; it is bounded externally by a very fine membrane in
Ceratodus, according to Ayers’s figure (Joc. cit. pl. xviii. fig. 76).
In my own preparations (Plate XXIX. figs. 3, 4) the limiting
' Dr. Balbiani has described in the egg of Geophilus (Zool. Anzeig. Nos. 155,
156) a formation of cells from the germinal yesicle which pass through the
substance of the ovum, and ultimately range themselves round its periphery to
forma follicular epithelium. These stages are depicted in aseries of woodcuts,
some of which bear not a little resemblance to the stage in the maturation of
the ovum of Lepidosiren described above. It is possible that the appearances
described by Balbiani may ultimately be reconciled with those described by
myself in the present paper. Balbiani’s observations have not, however, been
confirmed by the recent researches of Heathcote (Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. 1886),
though in many insects’ ova other observers have noted similar processes.
1886.] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 277
membrane of the germinal vesicle is not always very obvious ;
but as-there is a sharp contrast between the protoplasm of the
germinal vesicle and the surrounding substance of the ovum (indi-
cated by the much deeper staining of the former by borax carmine),
there comes to be an appearance of a delicate membrane surrounding
the germinal vesicle ; this membrane has not a double contour.
In younger ova there is a very distinct membrane bounding the
germinal vesicle externally ; this membrane is more easily to be
distinguished in my preparations from the fact that it is very deeply
stained.
Although the boundaries of the germinal vesicle are distinct
enough, there is no cavity dividing it from the egg-protoplasm ; the
granules of the latter are everywhere in contact with the germinal
vesicle. In several preparations the germinal vesicle had shrunk ;
but in every case observed by me the wall of the germinal vesicle
was covered with egg-protoplasm granules, thus showing that the
spaces surrounding the germinal vesicle in that figure are not
natural, but due to alterations caused by the contraction of the ger-
minal vesicle.
The interior of the germinal vesicle is occupied by a finely-
granular matter, which is almost homogeneous throughout. In
certain tracts, however, the granules are more deeply stained and
often larger; these granules form a reticulum (Plate XXIX. fig. 3).
In the ovum of Triton, Iwakawa illustrates (loc. cit. pl. xxiv. fig. 27)
a very similar condition of the nucleoplasm. The germinal spots
are very numerous, and form a layer surrounding the germinal
vesicle ; the latter is shown on a superficial view in fig. 3, and in
transverse section in Plate XXIX. fig. 4. The germinal spots are
of very varying size, and usually oval or circular in form ; borax
carmine stains them more deeply than the surrounding nucleoplasm ;
they are evidently not homogeneous, but appear to consist of an
outer sheath of stout consistency, and very deeply stained by the
reagent, and within this an apparently more fluid core which is not
deeply stained.
The presence of numerous germinal spots is figured by Ayers
for both Ceratodus (plate xviii. fig. 76) and Lepidosiren (plate xvii.
fig. 27).
It is also characteristic of the Teleostean ovum *, and is mentioned
by Messrs. Balfour and Parker * in Lepidosteus. Among Amphibia
Triton shows the same condition of the germinal spots. In ova of
the stage represented in Plate XXVIII. fig. 2, the substance of the
ovum which immediately surrounds the germinal vesicle differs from
the rest in being more loosely compacted.
In ova which are distinguished by the enormously increased
functional activity of the follicular epithelium, the germinal vesicle
could not be found. In all probability, however, my failure to find
the germinal vesicle is not due to its absence.
* Brock, “ Beitrage z. Anatomie und Histologie der Geschlechtsorgane der
Knochenfische,” Morphol. Jahrb. Bd. iv. (1878) p. 505, pl. xxviii. figs. 8, 11.
* “On the Anatomy and Development of Lepidosteus,” Phil. Trans. 1884.
278 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4,
In older ova the germinal vesicle has altered somewhat from the
characters which it presents in the earlier stages of the matu-
ration of the ovum. In Plate XXIX. fig. 1, I have sketched a
germinal vesicle precisely as it appeared in transverse section. It
will be noticed, in the first place, that the germinal vesicle is very
sharply marked off from the surrounding substance of the ovum,
and in the section figured has become separated from it throughout
a considerable area ; this separation is no doubt due to shrinkage,
but serves to show the very trenchant line of division which separates
germinal vesicle and ovum, since no yolk-spherules were found to
remain adherent to the germinal vesicle.
The substance of the germinal vesicle in ova of this stage of develop-
ment has become specialized into an outer peripheral portion and a
central core. These two areas of the germinal vesicle are almost as
sharply marked off from each other as is the outer layer of the ger-
minal vesicle from the surrounding egg-protoplasm and yolk. This is
clearly shown in the same figure (Plate XXIX. fig. 1), and, as in the
first case, is probably due to shrinking of the germinal vesicle when
plunged into the preservative reagent. Along the upper side of the
preparation illustrated in the figure already referred to, the central
core of the germinal vesicle has shrunk away from the external
sheath ; along the lower margin of the germinal vesicle the con-
traction has not caused a separation of the two constituents, but a
split in the outer layer, which I have not indicated in the figure.
The outer coat of the germinal vesicle is very easily distinguish-
able from the inner core; it is much more finely granular in
structure, appearing occasionally almost homogeneous, and has
become stained a pale pink. The inner core is more coarsely
granular, and has a yellowish tinge, hardly owing to the non-
penetration of the staiming reagent, since the imbedded nucleoli
were deeply stained.
The substance of the internal core contained elliptical spaces here
and there, which are possibly themselves due to contraction. The
boundary line between the central core and the peripheral layer is
also marked by the nucleoli, which are for the most part situated in
a single layer at the extreme periphery of the central core. <A few,
however, as indicated in the figure, are to be found in the more
central regions of the core. The nucleoli were extremely conspicuous
owing to their vivid staining with the reagent, and appeared to be
solid, being uniformly stained throughout. In the earlier stages of
the germinal vesicle mention has already been made of the annular
appearance of the germinal spots. The germinal spots were very
unevenly distributed and of varying size, but were never found in
the peripheral layer of the germinal vesicle.
In Triton, Iwakawa has described what appear to be very
similar changes in the germinal vesicle, though there is some little
difference in detail; as the egg approaches maturity the germinal
spots move in towards the centre of the germinal vesicle, leaving a
homogeneous, more deeply stained peripheral area.
1886.] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 279
IV. The Follicular Epithelium and the Formation of Yolk.
In the youngest ova (Plate XXIX. fig. 8) the protoplasm is dense
and solid, staining deeply with borax carmine; the uniform appear-
ance of the egg-contents indicates that no formation of yolk has at
present commenced.
In the next stage, where the zona radiata is well developed
(Plate XXVIII. fig. 1), the protoplasm of the ovum is less dense and
has acquired here and there a reticulate arrangement, which is well
shown in the figure referred to.
In ova slightly more mature (Plate XVIII. fig. 2) the formation of
the yolk is in active progress, though for the present confined to
limited areas of the egg-protoplasm. None of my sections display
any ova which show the first beginning of yolk-formation. In
Plate XXVIII. fig. 2, it will be noted that the yolk appears in
patches usually spherical in shape and larger or smaller; the yolk
has the form of minute spherules and aggregations of spherules, which
are easily distinguishable from the surrounding protoplasm, which is
also granular, by their more coarsely granular appearance. They
have also been stained much more darkly by the borax carmine.
The yolk-spherules invariably make their appearance in the inter-
spaces between the reticulations of the egg-protoplasm. There is
thus no doubt that the yolk is actually formed in the interior of
the ovum at the expense of the egg-protoplasm ; the reticulation of
the egg-protoplasm, invisible in earlier stages, but completed before
the appearance of yolk, is probably a preparation for the formation
of the latter, which is received when formed into the interspaces
between the protoplasmic strands.
Ova of the next stage (Plate XXVIII. fig. 4) show the yolk-
spherules well developed and filling up the entire ovum; the sphe-
rules themselves are small and of varying size ; occasionally numbers
of yolk-spherules had run together to form irregular shaped masses ;
these yolk-masses, owing to their size and impenetrability, were in-
variably left unstained.
The yolk at this period entirely fills the ovum, and is spread
throughout it in a perfectly uniform fashion ; there was no indication
of any peripheral layer free, or nearly free, from yolk.
The ovum displayed in Plate XXVIII. fig. 4 is remarkable for the
fact that the yolk is distinctly differentiated into two layers—a thin
peripheral layer, and a central mass ; the boundary between the two
was perfectly distinct, there being an absolute break, a narrow line
perfectly free from yolk-spherules ; the outer layer was also rendered
more conspicuous by the lighter staining of the reagent. I have
noticed several ova among my sections which displayed this curious
differentiation.
Throughout its whole development the ovum is surrounded by a
single layer of follicular epithelium-cells ; these cells are flattened as
in the Amphibia, and have a large deeply staining nucleus. In most
aii a membrana propria folliculi could be detected outside these
cells.
280 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4,
It seems to me to be fairly certain that the ova represented in Plate
XXVIII. figs. 1, 2, 4, are progressive stages in egg-development :
there is a gradual increase of size accompanied by various changes
in the egg-contents, the germinal vesicle, and the egg-membranes,
which all tend to prove the truth of this supposition. All these
different stages were frequently to be observed in a single section.
In the same sections were a number of very peculiar ova, displayed
in Plate XXVIII. fig. 3; these were for the most part intermediate
in size between ova of the third stage (fig. 2) and the more mature
ova (fig. 4); in a few cases, however, they were distinctly smaller
than ova of the third stage. This last fact would be hardly sufficient
of itself to prove that these ova do not form a stage intercalated
between Stages 3 and 4, because there is often some irregularity in
size ; larger ova, particularly if they are not much larger, could not
be positively regarded as more mature than smaller ova. In the first
place, however, the structure of these ova and the conditions of the
follicular epithelium are so markedly different from ova of any other
stage, that it scems difficult to assign them to the same series ; and,
in the second place, I have been able to observe no transitional stages
between these ova and those belonging to Stages 2 or 3. On the
other hand, these ova eventually acquire the same appearance as ova
that have evidently passed through Stages 2 and 3; to this point I
shall return later. I must for the present leave it an open question
as to whether these ova form part of the same series as those dis-
played in Plate XXVIII. figs. 1, 2, 4, or whether the ovary of Pro-
topterus contains ova of two kinds which follow a different course
of development though they ultimately eome to be identical in
appearance.
These ova (Plate XXVIII. fig. 3) are surrounded by a follicular
epithelium which, like that of the other ova, consists of a single layer
of cells; these cells are long and somewhat columnar in form (Plate
XXIX. fig. 7) ; they are limited by a distinct membrane and contain
a darkly stained nucleus as well as a number of highly refracting
round particles which resemble in every respect the yolk-spherules of
the contained ovum. These follicular cells rest upon the surface of
the ovum, and there is no trace whatever of any membrane separating
them from the ovum.
The connective-tissue sheath of the follicle was very distinctly
marked off from the surrounding ovarian stroma; near to the peri-
phery of the ovum were an immense number of blood-capillaries of
large size and gorged with blood. These capillaries, although probably
belonging to the stroma-sheath, were in many cases pressed down
among the epithelial cells of the follicle, appearing as if they were
actually lying between the cells; this remarkable appearance of the
blood-vessels is illustrated in Plate XXIX. fig. 7, which represents
a portion of the periphery of such an ovum very highly magnified.
The interior of the ovum contained abundant yolk ; but in no case
did I succeed in finding any trace of a germinal vesicle. The yolk
consisted of highly refracting spherules which were for the most part
of small size, but here and there were very much larger: spherules,
1886. | OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 281
The structure of these ova and the surrounding follicle is extremely
remarkable, and quite unlike any other ova that I have seen in trans-
verse sections of the ovary of Protopéerus. But the peculiarities of
these ova do not end here.
Scattered throughout the substance of the yolk are an immense
number of cells more or less spherical in form (Plate XXVIII.
fig. 3, c).
These cells were limited in most cases by a very distinct external
membrane ; their contents are a mass of rounded bodies which are
quite indistinguishable from the yolk-spherules of the ovum, and
strands of granular protoplasmic substance ; furthermore there is a
distinct and large nucleus deeply stained by borax carmine, and
within this a number of nucleoli and granules.
These cells appeared to be in a condition of active multiplication,
the various stages of which are indicated in Plate XXIX. figs. 9-20.
In fig. 10 the nucleus is constricted in the middle; in fig. 11 the
nucleus has divided; in fig. 12 the two cells have become distinct
but lie close together ; in fig. 18 cell-division has evidently gone on
very rapidly, as there is a nest of four cells pressed closely together
and occupying a common cavity in the yolk. In some cells the
amount of yolk-granules present was considerably less than in others.
Occasionally (figs. 19, 20) the yolk-particles had run together to
form a single large droplet.
In a few cases I observed (fig. 15) the nucleus to be thrust
altogether without the cells ; and here and there within the substance
of the ovum were apparently nuclei without any cells. I am not
inclined, however, to lay too much stress upon the last mentioned
fact, because it would be rather difficult in any case to detect the
boundaries of one of these cells if it were packed quite full of yolk-
spherules.
In other cases (fig. 13) the nucleus had become paler in colour
(less acted upon by the staining reagent) as well as more homogeneous.
Nuclei of this kind might easily be mistaken for larger yolk-
spherules ; indeed my only reasons for believing them to be altered
nuclei are their similiarity in size and shape to the more normal
nuclei, their occurrence in cells that have become emptied of their
contents, and the fact that they are rather more deeply stained than
the surrounding yolk.
Concerning the nature of these bodies there appears to me to be
three possibilities :—either (1) they are similar to the white yolk-
spherules of the Fowl’s egg; or (2) they are follicular cells which
have migrated into the interior of the ovum; or (3) they are cells
which have been formed anew within the substance of the ovum.
The first alternative, that the structures in question correspond to
the white yolk-spheres of birds, seems at first sight to be a likely
explanation of their occurrence, especially since they are only to be
seen in comparatively young ova. The white yolk-spheres of birds '
are rounded bodies containing one or more highly refractive nucleus-
like bodies in their interior; but these apparent nuclei are really
* Foster and Balfour’s ‘Elements of Embryology,’ p. 16.
Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1886, No. XIX. 19
282 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4,
very dissimilar to true nuclei, and the sphere has no limiting mem-
brane. It is doubtful therefore whether they can be regarded as
cells, though it is probable that, as the segmentation of the ovum
advances, the white yolk is directly converted into cells. Now in
the cell-like bodies which I have described in the immature ovum of
Lepidosiren there is a very distinct and obvious nucleus (figs. 9-20),
which is in fact entirely similar to a nucleus of one of the follicular
cells ; it is deeply stained by borax carmine and unevenly stained,
so that it has the appearance of being formed of a meshwork of
condensed protoplasm, the interspaces of which are filled by a
homogeneous substance which is less acted upon by the reagent.
In some instances there was more than a single nucleus to each of
these cells, but it is quite impossible to confound these nuclei with
the surrounding particles of yolk. Furthermore, in many cases the
limiting membrane of the cells was distinctly visible (figs. 9 &c.) ;
and the fact that the cell-contents were hardly acted upon by the
staining fluid rendered the perception of this membrane easier.
There seems to he but little doubt that these structures are veritable
cells, and are not in any way comparable to the white yolk-spheres.
The question then arises, What is the origin of these cells? Are they
formed anew within the substance of the ovum, or have they migrated
from the follicle into the interior of the ovum?
The former supposition is supported by no facts that I have been
able to note, and it is distinctly negatived by other facts.
In the first place, these cells are very closely similar to the cells
of the follicular epithelium; like them they are bounded by a
distinct limiting membrane; the contents of both consist of proto-
plasmic strands and numerous highly refractive particles similar to
the yolk-particles ; the nucleus is identical in shape and size ; and
the behaviour of both to the staining reagent is precisely the same.
This series of facts would, however, be hardly regarded as proof that
these cells have originated from the’ follicular epithelium; it might
be supposed that the cells have arisen within the ovum, and that
some of them have migrated to the periphery to form the follicle, as
has been stated by various observers to be the case in certain other
ova (see p. 276); but the immense vascular development round
the follicular epithelium that has been already mentioned seems to
indicate that the main activity is centered in these latter cells; and
this fact, coupled with the additional fact that in certain instances
there were masses of migrating cells evidently in course of being
budded off (Plate XXVIII. figs. 5,6) from the follicular epithelium,
seems to indicate that the second supposition as to the origin of these
cells is correct, viz. that they are formed by the proliferation of the
follicular cells and migrate into the interior of the ovary.
The migration of these cells also explains the absence of a limiting
membrane to the ovum. A “formed” membrane, however thin,
would evidently prevent such a migration.
It appears to me possible to make another statement as a deduction
from the facts just detailed: that the follicular epithelium-cells
secrete the yolk which is conveyed to the interior of the ovum by
1886. | OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 283
means of the proliferating follicular cells. I do not mean to assert
that these ova do not also form yolk endogenously, as I have observed
in other cases (Plate XXVIII. fig. 2); but the similarity between the
contents of the follicular cells and their derivatives which migrate
into the interior of the ovum, on the one hand, with the yolk-spherules
of the ovum, on the other hand, coupled with the fact of the subse-
quent disintegration and disappearance of the immigrated cells, seems
to me to necessitate the conclusion that at least part of the yolk is
so formed.
Unfortunately I am quite unable to record any observations as to
the earlier stages of these ova; they may be a stage intercalated
between Stages 3 and 4, as already suggested. In favour of this
supposition are the following facts :—(1) that for the most part these
ova are intermediate in size between the presumed earlier and later
stages ; (2) that there is no proof of their independent origin ; (3) the
unlikelihood (?) of there being two kinds of ova with a different
process of growth.
Against suchasupposition I may adduce the following arguments:—
(1) the absence of any transitional stages between these ova and the
presumed younger stages; (2) the disappearance of the vitelline
membrane during this stage and its subsequent reappearance, or at
least the appearance of a similar membrane.
Whatever may be the origin of these ova, they come ultimately to
resemble in every particular the ordinary mature ova. I have
fortunately succeeded in obtaining sections of an ovum considerably
larger than that just described, which presented the following
characters :—The follicular epithelium was considerably reduced in
importance, as was also the accompanying network of blood-capil-
laries. Between the follicular epithelium and the ovum was a
distinct membrane excessively thin ; there were hardly any traces
left of the immigrating follicular cells present in such great numbers
in the earlier stages; I noted perhaps one or two in as many
sections.
It is interesting to observe that if these ova, characterized by
the formation of the yolk from the follicular cells, are really different
from the other ova, they are in certain respects more Amphibian
like than the other ova; not in the immigration of follicular cells,
but in the late appearance of a single thin membrane shutting off
the ovum from the follicular epithelium with which it was previously
in contact. Gdtte, in his ‘ Entwickelungsgeschichte der Unke,’ makes
the following statement (p. 16):—‘* Ferner kann man bei der
Anwendung des Wassers nachweisen dass der Follikelinhalt noch
unmittelbar die Zellen beriihrt, dass aber die Grenze zwischen beiden
Theilen eine sehr scharfe ist und sie durchaus nicht continuirlich
zusammenhiingen.” It is only later that a membrane surrounding
the ovum and separating it from the follicular cells appears.
Similarly Lwakawa’s observations upon Triton’ show that in the
young stages the follicular cells are in contact with the body of the
ovum. In more mature ova a membrane comes to surround the
* Quart. Journ. Mier. Sei. vol, xxii. p. 270.
19*
284 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [ May 4,
body of the ovum; this membrane does not appear until after the
yolk has begun to be formed.
Leaving the question as to the origin of these ova undecided for
the present, the penetration of the follicular epithelium into the
interior of the ovum and the formation of yolk by the follicular cells
are in my opinion strongly supported by the facts that I have been
able to bring forward. I will now compare these facts with similar
observations on other ova.
A migration of follicular cells into the cvum has been recorded by
several writers, but other writers have thrown doubts upon the
accuracy of these observations.
In Elasmobranchs and Amphibia nothing of the kind has been
recorded ; Balfour, in studying the ovarian ova of Scyl/ium, particularly
directed his attention to this point, but was unable to find any
trace whatsoever of cells such as have been described by His in the
Teleostean ovum; he suggests indeed that His may have
mistaken the white yolk-spherules for such cells; the resemblance
of white yolk-spherules to cells is not a little striking, and may easily
have led to mistakes.
With regard to the Teleosteans, however, there is some variety of
opinion as to this point. His’ has described a migration of the
follicular cells through the pores of the zona radiata into the interior
of the ovum; but Brock (/oc. cit. p. 558) doubts the truth of this
observation, not merely because he did not himself succeed in seeing
any such migration, but because it appeared to him inexplicable
that if there were so general an immigration the follicular epithelium
should yet maintain its continuity.
The most recent writer on the subject whose memoir.is known
to me is Owsjannikow*. This author describes in detail a
number of facts relative to the structure of the Teleostean ovum
which are often somewhat difficult to understand. With regard to
the supposed immigration of cells (leucocytes) into the interior of the
ovum, believed by His to occur, this author states that it has
not been observed by him, and that further the necessity for such a
process of nutrition does not exist, since nutritive material is supplied
to the ovum through the processes of the follicular cells, which are so
universally admitted to pass through the egg-membrane. At the
same time Owsjannikow describes in Osmerus and Acerina a peculiar
condition of the yolk, also referred to by His, but denied by others,
which in a certain degree is similar to the condition which I have
described in the present paper in Lepidosiren. The yolk-bodies
(‘ Dotter-Kugeln ”) contained in many cases nuclei often difficult to
show and needing most complicated processes for their demonstra-
tion; in these structures, which the author calls cells, the oil-drops
take their origin. Without additional investigations it does not
seem to me permissible to regard these bodies as true cells ; their
appearance in Owsjannikow’s figures (pl. ii. figs. 22, 23) is very
1 « Hierstock der Knochenfische,’ p. 22, &e.
2 “Studien tiber das Ei, hauptsachlich bei Knochenfischen,” Mém. d. l’Acad,
d. St. Pétersh. t. xxiii. no. 4.
1886. | OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 285
much like that of the white yolk-spheres of Sauropsida. In any
case these bodies are not supposed to have an extrinsic origin, but
to arise within the ovum. On the other hand, a penetration of
follicular cells through the micropyle (oc. cit. pl. i. fig. 6) appears
really to occur in many osseous fish and to be comparable to the proli-
feration into the ovum of the follicular cells in Lepidosiren.
Kolessnikow’ confirms the accuracy of His’s results as to the
entrance of leucocytes into the ovum, but does not think this
process to have much functional importance.
In Mammals a number of observations have been published which
tend to show that there is a migration of cells, which is evi-
dently comparable to the facts which I have detailed above in
Lepidosiren. Lindgren? has described such a migration of follicular
cells, and figures an ovum which is half filled with unaltered follicular
cells. Von Sehlen* and H. Virchow * have confirmed the accuracy
of Lindgren’s observations. More recently Schater® has described a
remarkable series of changes in the Rabbit’s ovum which do not
altogether tend to the same conclusion. In young ova, which are
as yet surrounded by a follicle consisting of only a single layer of
cells, peculiar cells make their appearance in the peripheral regions,
and ultimately form a single layer of cells which surround the ovum,
lying beneath the follicular layer. Schafer believes that these cells
are not derived from the follicular layer, but they originate in the
ovum. He compares very justly his own observations with those
of Kuppfer on Ascidia canina. Kuppfer® had shown that cells appear
in the interior of the ovum and range themselves round its periphery.
Kuppfer, however, believed that these cells originate in the ovum
itself, and are not, as Kowalevsky supposed, a product of the follicular
epithelium. His statements therefore are in complete accord with
those of Scliifer; while Lindgren, von Sehlen, and H. Virchow
describe a process in the maturation of the mammalian ovum
which is more comparable to that described by Kowalevsky in the
case of the Ascidians. ‘The latest writer on the mammalian ovum,
Mr. Heape, did not find any such migration of follicular cells, and
concludes that the observations put on record by Lindgren, von
Sehlen, and Virchow are based upon abnormal processes. It is to
be noted, however, that the type studied by Heape’ (Mole) was not
studied by any one of these naturalists, and this fact may possibly
account for the discrepancies in their statements. In the latest
edition of Quain’s ‘Anatomy’ it is suggested that the entrance of
follicular cells into the ovum described by Lindgren, von Sehlen,
and H. Virchow may be an abnormal process and not a regular
1 Archiv f. mikr. Anat. vol. xv. (1878) p. 399.
2 Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys. 1877.
3 Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys. 1882.
4 Arch. f. mikr. Anat. Bd. xxiv. (1884).
5 Proc. Roy. Soe. vol. xxx. (1880) p. 243.
® Arch. f. mikr. Anat. Bd. viii. See also the papers of many others (Sabatier,
Roule, Fol) on the Ascidian ovum, and the facts referred to in footnote on
p. 276, supra. These have been lately summed up in Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,
June 188¢, by Mr. Arthur Thomson.
_ 7 Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., Feb. 1886.
286 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4,
occurrence. I would suggest myself that this migration of follicular
cells in the Mammalia is a record of what occurred in their Dipnoan
ancestors’, where the migration of follicular cells into the interior of
the ovum was an important process in connection with the formation
of yolk.
it is, however, among the Invertebrata that the most striking
resemblances to the immigration of follicular cells in Lepidosiren are
to be found, and more particularly in the Cephalopoda.
Some remarkable facts with respect to the nutrition of the ova of
Sepia have been discovered by Lankester, which are analogous to the
facts recorded by myself in Lepidosiren. In Sepia” the ova are
surrounded by a single layer of follicular cells which are supplied
externally with an abundant vascular network. The epithelial
layer becomes folded in a complicated fashion, and the folds project
into the interior of the ovum (Joc. cit. pl. 12. fig. 23); the cells
of the epithelium take on a character resembling that of the goblet-
cells, and pour out their contents into the ovum ; moreover the cells
also proliferate and pass off inte the interior of the ovary (oc. cit.
pl. 12. fig. 25), becoming gradually absorbed.
Kowalevsky * has described a proliferation of the follicular cells of
Ascidians which migrate into the interior of the ovum, and eventually
form (loc. cit. pl. 10. figs. 2-4) a complete layer round it, so that
the follicle comes to be two layers deep; the outer layer, which is
made up of very much larger cells, represents the original follicular
epithelium, while the inner layer consists of very much smaller cells.
In many of the lower Invertebrata the ovum is largely nourished
at the expense of the surrounding cells. In the Platyhelminthes a
peculiar organ, the vitellarium, elaborates yolk-particles which are
subsequently absorbed by the ovum ; analogous processes take place
in many Insects. In all these cases the ovum retains the capacity,
inherited from its Protozoan ancestor, of feeding by the intussus-
ception of solid particles.
All these facts seem to me to be directly comparable to what has
been described above in Lepidosiren. The secretion of yolk by the
follicular cells in the Platyhelminth and the absorption of this yolk
by the ovum only differs in degree from the proliferation of the
follicular cells in Sepia and Lepidosiren and their subsequent
absorption by the ovum.
I may say a few words with regard to the special fact that the
yolk is largely elaborated with follicular cells and conveyed to the
ovum by the proliferation of these cells and their subsequent disinte-
gration in the interior of the ovum. Such a formation of yolk in
the Vertebrate ovum has not been put beyond a doubt; indeed most
observations on the subject seem to show that the yolk is generally
1 T imagine that few will dispute Prof. Huxley’s opinion that the Mammalia
in the course of their evolution have passed through a Dipnoid stage (see
P. Z.8. 1880, p. 661).
* «On the Developmental History of Mollusca,” Phil. Trans. 1875, p. 43.
* “ Weitere Studien iiber d. Entwickelung d. Ascidien,” Archiv f. mikr, Anat.
Bd. vii. (1871) p. 101.
1886. ] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 287
formed in the interior of the ovum itself and has not an extrinsic
origin.
Kolessnikow ’, however, concludes his paper on the Teleostean
and Amphibian ovum with the statement that the yolk is chiefly a
product of the follicular epithelium, which behaves in this respect
like a gland. Apart from this fact, the follicular cells do, however,
play an important part in supplying the ovum with nutriment in
most Vertebrata; but this is not in the form of yolk, which is sub-
sequently elaborated in the ovum itself. In Elasmobranchs Balfour
has noted? that certain of the cells become larger than the others,
and apparently communicate within the substance of the ovum
into which they pour their contents. Heape* has described some-
thing very similar in the ovarian ova of the Mole, as also have
Lindgren*, von Sehlen®, and Virchow®. The part which the
enlarged follicular cells of Elasmobranchs play in the nutrition of
the ovum is not the direct formation of yolk. Balfour has shown
that the yolk originates within the protoplasm of the ovum, and is
not transferred thither from the follicular cells. The reasons for this
statemeut are :—(1) that the yolk-spherules first of all appear in the
deeper portions of the yolk and not in the more superficial layers,
as they would naturally do if they were passed into the interior of
the ovum ; (2) that there is no trace of yolk-particles in the follicular
cells themselves.
Iwakawa’s observations on the yolk in the egg of Triton lead to a
similar conclusion. Gétte states that in Bombinator the yolk-
spherules first make their appearance in the peripheral layers of the
ovum, but is inclined to think that they are formed within the
substance of the ovum, and that they are not extrinsic in origin.
Brock (loc. cit. p. 560) quotes and confirms Gegenbaur’ to the
effect that the yolk-spherules in Teleosteans originate by the fusion
of minute yolk-particles, and that this formation takes place in the
peripheral layers of the ovum; only exceptionally was the neigh-
bourhood of the germinal vesicle the seat of yolk-formation. In
Mammalia, according to Balfour the yolk is formed in the peripheral
layer of the ovum.
Lepidosiren therefore appears to be remarkable in that the yolk
is often formed in the follicular cells and transferred thence to the
ovum. Seeing that this is the rule in many of the lower Inver-
tebrata, the occurrence of this method of yolk-formation in Lepido-
siren would appear to be the retention of an ancestral character.
1 Loe. cit.
2 Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci. 1878.
3 Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci. Feb. 1886.
+ Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys., Anat. Abtheil. 1877.
5 Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys., Anat. Abtheil. 1882.
® Arch. f. mikr. Anat. vol. xxiv. (1884).
7 “Ueber den Bau und die Entwickelung der Wirbelthiereier mit partieller
Dottertheilung,” Miller’s Arch. 1861, p. 405. Gegenbaur describes (p. 524)
a peculiar fatty degeneration of the follicular cells which serves to loosen them
from the ovum when the latter is ready for extrusion. Possibly this is
to be referred to a trace of yolk-formation comparable to that described
in this paper.
288 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4,
V. Postembryonic Origin of Ova.
This section has been added after the rest of the paper was in
type; it deals with the results of some further observations which
tend to confirm the supposition hinted at above, that the ovary of
Lepidosiren contains ova of two kinds which have a different mode
of development.
It should have been mentioned that the general surface of the
ovary is, for the most part, devoid of any germinal epithelium, a
condition which is often met with in adult ovaries ; in places, how-
ever, the germinal epithelium is very conspicuously present and in
a condition of active multiplication. These patches of germinal
epithelium are only occasional, as has also been noticed by Speugel’
in the case of the Frog’s ovary; I have only succeeded in discovering
them after this paper was communicated to the Society. I have
been able, however, to insert a figure into Plate XXVIII. (fig. 7),
which illustrates the fact that the germinal epithelium has not
entirely disappeared in the mature ovary.
In every case that I observed, the germinal epithelium, where it
was left, was in a state of very active cell-division ; the cells on the
surface of the ovary were closely crowded together, and had given
rise to a mass of cells three or four deep, surrounding a cavity partly
filled by another mass of cells of a somewhat different appearance.
The central mass of cells was invariably connected at one side only
with the surrounding sphere, as shown in the figure (Plate XXVIII.
fig. 7), and, at this point, its cells gradually alter in appearance
until they become indistinguishable from those of the surrounding
hollow sphere, which is the future follicular epithelium. The in-
vesting mass of cells (f) is connected by a pedicle with the germinal
epithelium (e) on the outside of the ovary, and is clearly formed by a
proliferation and inward growth of its cells. The arrangement of
these, as shown in the figure, gives a strong impression of motion; the
cells look as if they had been arrested in the act of rapid proliferation
inwards. The cells of the germinal epithelium, both those on the
surface of the ovary and those which form the investing mass of the
central cells, are small, but with large, deeply-stained nuclei. On
the other hand the cells which occupy the interior of the sphere are
much larger, and of a somewhat irregular, angular contour, and often
containing more than one nucleus. As already stated, these cells pass
by gradations into the follicular mass at one side only, but this may
be due to shrinkage. On the outside of the central mass of cells,
and forming generally a complete peripheral layer round them, is an
amorphous mass (x) deeply stained by the reagent; here and there
nuclei, with or without some surrounding protoplasm, were imbedded
in this amorphous mass, which thus has the appearance of being
formed by the fusion of the peripheral layer of the central cells. I
have no observations to offer as to the origin of the central mass of
cells; but their position and attachment to the peripheral layer, more
particularly at one point, would seem to suggest that they arise, like
' Semper’s ‘ Arbeiten,’ Bd. ii.
1886. ] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 289
the peripheral cells, from the germinal epithelium, but that they are
first invaginated and subsequently surrounded by the peripheral
layer.
"ia a later stage the formation of yolk has commenced, and the
cells of the central mass are in places separated from each other by
aggregations of yolk-particles, though for the most part the cells
remain closely adherent ; these latter, however, contain yolk-particles
ia their interior, and the follicular cells, which still form two or three
layers, are also filled with yolk, The later stages have been already
referred to (p. 283).
It is clear, therefore, that in Lepidosiren there are two kinds of
ova; those which arise in the way just described may possibly be
confined to the postembryonic period.
The mass of central cells with the surrounding follicular layers is
clearly comparable to the “ Ureiernester,”’ described by Balfour and
others, in many Vertebrates, e.g. Elasmobranchs. But although
there is this general similarity between the ovary of Lepidosiren and
that of Scyllium, there is evidently a very great difference in detail.
In the Elasmobranch-ovary the nest of primitive germinal cells is
imbedded in a mass which consists of the general undifferentiated
cells of the germinal epithelium ; there is no definite follicular layer
at this period. The protoplasm of the primitive germinal cells
fuse together, and the nuclei multiply ; some of the nuclei dege-
nerate, while others undergo further development, and are eventually
separated off from the rest, together with a certain amount of proto-
plasm, to form ova; the degenerating nuclei are absorbed and aid in
the nutrition of the ova. When the ovum is formed, some of the
undifferentiated germinal cells range themselves round it and form
the follicular layer. A nest gives rise to a variable number of ova.
The yolk is formed much later.
In Lepidosiren the nest is imbedded in a mass of cells which are
definitely marked off from the surrounding cells of the ovary, and
can be recognized as the future follicular epithelium ; the protoplasm
of at least some of the primitive germinal cells fuse together, and
the nuclei appear also to multiply, if not the cells themselves in
many cases; some of the nuclei degenerate (show a paler colour
under the influence of borax carmine) and become irregular in shape ;
the formation of yolk commences extraordinarily early (as compared
with the Elasmobranch) in the mass resulting from the fusion of the
peripheral cells, in the remaining cells, and in the follicular layers ;
the nest gives rise to but a single ovum.
It seems to me impossible to deny that the whole structure (Plate
XXVIII. fig. 7), which I have compared to the ‘nest’ of the
Elasmobranch ovary, eventually becomes a single ovum ; the question
that must first be answered is, does the ovum in this case represent
a single cell or is it produced by the fusion of a number of cells?
The only answer to this question that the facts at my disposal enable
me to give is that ¢hese ova are formed by a coalescence of a number
of cells out of the nest, the remainder serving as pabulum. ‘This
opinion is so far confirmatory of Gotte’s observations on the deve-
290 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE | May 4,
lopment of Bombinator’; but there are certain facts adduced by
Gétte which require to be recorded in Lepidosiren before my opinion
can be expressed without hesitation. G6tte observed a fusion of
the nuclei as well as of the protoplasm of the primitive germinal cells ;
I have not been able to detect any such fusion in Lepidosiren;
on the other hand it is difficult to interpret my results so as to
regard these ova as equivalent in each case to a single cell. As
already mentioned, the series of ova between the earliest stage where
a mass of follicular cells contained a nest of primitive germinal cells,
and the latest stage when the ovum was surrounded by a single
layer of follicular cells and separated from them by a delicate mem-
brane, is fairly complete ; there seems to be no doubt that somehow
or other the numerous primitive germinal cells of the nest result in
the formation of one ovum. There were no signs of the separation
of any of these cells to form a number of different ova, as Balfour
has described in Scyllium; none of the central cells became larger
than the rest, and the follicular epithelium, which was specialized as
such in the earliest stage observed, showed no breaks in its continuity
at any time; if the ovum really represents one of the primitive
germinal cells, the rest serving as pabulum, it is remarkable to find
that this cell shows no difference in size or structure from the rest
as development proceeds.
The appearance of a fusion of some of the cells, which strongly sup-
ports my view of the case, is illustrated in Plate XXVIII. fig. 7, 7; the
homogeneous mass depicted in that figure contains a few nuclei, and
occasionally a certain amount of the cell-protoplasm still unaltered
centrally, but peripherally shading off into the supposed protoplasmic
mass. It might perhaps be supposed that this peripheral darkly-
staining mass is really due to the coagulation of some fluid substance ;
but in that case the appearance of nuclei, without any cell-protoplasm
in its interior, would have to be explained, and more particularly the
presence of yolk-particles which seem to be formed by its meta-
morphosis.
For the present I am unable to say any more about the develop-
ment and maturation of these ova; the most important matter that
requires further investigation is the mode of origin of the germinal
vesicle; but there are obviously other points that remain to be dis-
covered before the whole history of these ova can be cleared up.
It might be supposed that the facts described in this section do
away with the necessity of any immigration of follicular cells; the
yolk has been shown to originate largely in the primitive germinal
cells, and many of the free cells remaining in the interior of the ovum
during later stages are no doubt derived directly from the primitive
germinal cells. In the earlier stages the follicular cells, although
forming a distinct layer, are not individually very different from the
central cells of the nest; hence their proliferation and migration
inwards is not surprising. It has been already mentioned that the
yolk commences to be formed very early in the follicular cells as
well as in the central cells, so that the former evidently takes a
1 * Entwickelungsgeschichte der Unke.’
1886. ] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 291
large share in the building up of the ovum; in later stages, but
before the follicular cells have dwindled down to a single layer, there
is a considerable proliferation and migration inwards of these cells
(Plate XXVIII. figs. 5, 6); finally, when the ovum is surrounded by
only a single layer of follicular cells, there is still here and there a
proliferation of these cells.
VI. Résumé.
The observations recorded in the present paper may be briefly
summed up as follows.
The ovum is in the earliest stages observed composed of a mass of
deeply staining granular protoplasm ; it contains a germinal vesicle
limited by a distinct membrane, inside of which is a peripheral layer
of germinal spots; the ovum is separated from the surrounding
follicular epithelium by a thin structureless membrane. The follicular
epithelium is composed of a single layer of cells, each with a large
deeply staining nucleus, which retains the same character through-
out the whole development of the ovum. In the second stage the
protoplasm of the ovum is arranged in a reticulate fashion; the
germinal vesicle is not defined by a limiting membrane ; within the
vitelline membrane, which is still delicate and structureless, is a well-
defined zona radiata with closely arranged vertical pores.
In the third stage the external vitelline membrane is much thicker
and shows a radial striation, the pores being further apart than
those of the external zona radiata; the latter is commencing to
disappear. The formation of yolk is in active progress and takes
place within the ovum, though not necessarily in its peripheral
layers.
In the more mature ova the yolk occupies the whole extent of the
ovum ; occasionally a peripheral layer is to be distinguished from a
central mass; the vitelline membrane alone is present, and is
excessively thin and apparently homogeneous, with no trace of radial
striation. The germinal vesicle has undergone certain changes,
chiefly in the centripetal movement of the germinal spots.
A single section frequently contained ova of all the above mentioned
stages ; besides these there were present in the ovary a vast number
of ova which undergo a different development; in size these ova
were generally larger than those of Stages 2 and 3. The follicular
epithelium of the ova is composed of a single layer of large, more or
less columnar cells filled with granules exactly like the yolk-particles ;
these cells proliferate and migrate into the interior of the ovum ;
eventually they disappear: the yolk of these ova appears to be, at
least in a great measure, formed by these cells, whose contents are
round granules quite indistinguishable from the yolk. The follicular
epithelium rests directly upon the ovum and is separated from it by
no membrane. The earlier stages of these ova seem to indicate that
they are formed by the fusion of a number of germinal cells.
At a later stage these ova were indistinguishable from other
mature ova; the follicular epithelium decreases in importance, and
a delicate membrane is formed between it and the ovum.
292 MR. J. T. CUNNINGHAM ON THE [May 4,
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Puate XXVIII.
Explanation of lettering: f, follicular epithelium; v.m, vitelline membrane ;
zr, zona radiata; g.v, germinal vesicle; b.v, blood-vessels ; g.c, germinal
cells; e, superficial germinal epithelium ; ¢, cells in interior of ovum; ¥,
yolk-masses.
Fig. 1. Ovum of Lepidosiren (Protopterus) before commencing formation of
olk.
- reo of Lepidosiren (Protopterus), to show the commencing formation
of yolk.
. Ovum, with cells in interior.
. Nearly mature ovum, to show differentiation of yolk into a peripheral
and central portion and modification of germinal vesicle.
6. Two ova, belonging to the same series as fig. 3, to show the proli-
ferating follicular cells.
. Early stage in development of ovum, represented in figs. 3, 5, 6, to
show the central mass of germinal cells which, at 2, have com-
menced to fuse, and the invaginated mass of cells which form the
follicular layer: 0, immature oyum belonging to series represented
in figs. 1, 2, 4.
to
co
oo
?
=~]
Puate XXIX.
Fig. 1. Germinal vesicle of ovum (Plate XXVIII. fig. 4), more highly mag-
nified, to show its specialization into an outer and inner layer:
m, germinal spots.
2. A portion of ovum (Plate XXVIII. fig. 1), more highly magnified.
3, Germinal vesicle of same ovum, highly magnified, superficial view :
n, germinal spots.
4. The same, in section; lettering as before.
5. Portion of ovum a little more mature than that shown in Plate
XXVIII. fig. 2.
6. Nearly mature oyum.
7. Less mature ovum of same series as last, to show the follicular epithe-
lium resting directly upon the contents of the ovum; y, yolk-
particles in follicular cells.
8. Very young ovum.
9-20. Cells from interior of ovum (Plate XXVIII. fig. 3), showing
various conditions of division and degeneration: y', yolk-particles
in interior of cell; 7, their nucleus; y, yolk of oyum.
3. On the Mode of Attachment of the Ovum of Osmerus
eperlanus. By J. T. Cunninenam, B.A., F.R.S.E.,
Fellow of University College, Oxford, and Superin-
tendent of the Scottish Marine Station. (Communicated
by Mr. F, E. Bepparp.)
[Received April 20, 1886.]
(Plate XXX.)
In several works on Ichthyology and Pisciculture it is stated that
the ovum of the Smelt is adhesive. The mode of attachment is
described as differing from that which occurs in the Herring-ovum in
the following manner :—In the Herring-ovum the whole of the outer
surface of the egg-membrane at the moment of deposition is gluti-
nous, aud the ovum becomes attached at any part of the surface
P. Z.5.1886.Pl. XXVIII.
ee
- -
- a
oe
ed
“
-"t
. ree
-.
West.Newman & Co imp.
Ova of Protopterus.
West, Newman i Co imp.
©
a
18&6.] OVUM OF OSMERUS EPERLANUS. 293
which comes into contact with a solid object. The ovum of the
Smelt is not fixed by the surface of the egg-membrane, but sus-
pended by a short filament, the distal end of which alone adheres.
No detailed account seems to have been given of the nature and
development of the suspending filament. Alex. Agassiz ignores
altogether the assertions which have been published concerning the
attacliment of the Smelt-ovum. In his beautiful memoir on Pelagic
Teleostean Ova, he describes a certain well-characterized pelagic
ovum, and identifies it as that of Osmerus mordax, Gill. The ovum
in question, or one exactly similar, has been described by Victor
Hensen in the ‘ Vierte Bericht der Commission zur Untersuchung der
Deutschen Meere.’ The most conspicuous charactcristic of this ovum,
a feature which is unique among the Teleostean ova hitherto described,
is the segregation of the yolk into polyhedral masses. Agassiz refers
to this character as the segmentation of the yolk, as if he considered
the ovum to be holoblastic; but in all probability the subdivision of
the yolk in this case is similar in nature to the more usual subdivi-
sion into yolk-spherules, and the polyhedral masses are not cells or
segmentation-spheres. The same ovum was taken by myself in the
Firth of Forth in June 1884, and formed the subject of a short
communication which I made to the Royal Society of Edinburgh.
If it be true that the ova of Osmerus eperlanus are, during develop-
ment, fixed to solid objects, it is in the highest degree improbable that
the ova of Osmerus mordax are pelagic ; and as the adhesive nature
of the eggs of the British Smelt is beyond all question, the correct
identification of the peculiar pelagic ovum studied by Hensen,
myself, and Agassiz is a task for the future. The latest examination
of the egg of Osmerus eperlanus, before my own work, was made by
Owsjannikow’, whose results appeared only last year. Owsjannikow
describes the condition of the ovum when taken from the parent a
short time before complete maturity has been reached. He makes
no mention of the attached condition of the deposited ovum, nor of
the adaptation of the structure of the ripening ovum to the future
process of adhesion.
My interest in the ovum of Osmerus having been strongly
excited by the confusion concerning it, indicated by the literature
thus summarized, I obtained some living specimens of the fish
from the neighbourhood of Alloa, in the Forth, and conveyed
them to my aquarium. I also attempted to fertilize. some ova
artificially. This experiment was made at the riverside with the
fish just taken from the seine. As the weather was very cold and
the water very muddy, little could be made out concerning the ova
at the time of the experiment. It was seen that very few of the
ova became attached to the stones on which they were allowed to
fall. The greater number sank to the bottom of the water, and
remained quite free ; they became opaque white shortly after expul-
sion from the fish; at first they are of a translucent yellow
colour. On examining them next day in the laboratory, I found they
1 “Studien iiber das Hi, hauptsachlich der Knochenfische,” Mémoires de l’Aca-
démie Impériale de St. Pétersbourg, 1885.
294 ON THE OVUM OF OSMERUS EPERLANUS. [May 4,
had not been fertilized and were all dead. But they all possessed
a kind of membranous appendage, and there were two or three which
were suspended from the surface of the stones by means of this
membrane, the distal end of which had become attached at the
moment of extrusion. In the free eggs no power of adhesion any
longer existed. It was obvious enough that the membranous appen-
dage was the so-called suspensory filament mentioned in the existing
literature. But the word filament is a very inappropriate term.
The membrane is flexible, and in the form of a hollow truncated
cone, the sides of which are thrown into irregular folds; the narrow
end of the cone is continuous with the envelope of the egg; the
attachment between the enveloping and the suspensory membrane
thus forms a ring on the surface of the former. Examination of the
eggs in this condition does not afford evidence of the origin of the
suspensory membrane. All that could be seen was that the suspen-
sory membrane was dotted all over with pores of considerable size,
and that the enveloping membrane was perforated everywhere by
finer pores more closely crowded. The enveloping membrane is
thus a zona radiata.
Examination of the eggs freshly pressed from the female gave the
complete explanation of all the facts. These eggs were nearly, and
some of them quite, mature. They are enclosed in a thick zona
radiata, which is differentiated into two layers, the outer of which
is somewhat thinner than the internal. In the zona radiata
externa the pores are larger and farther apart than in the interna.
But the important fact, which I believe no one has previously
observed, is that the external zona separates very readily from the
internal, and, rupturing at one portion of the ovum, peels off, becom-
ing turned inside out in the process, and, remaining attached over a
small cireular area, forms the suspensory membrane which I have
already described. Slight pressure and rolling of the eggs by means
of a cover-glass was sufficient to cause the rupture of the external
zona, and the two membranes were examined in all stages of separa-
tion. Owsjannikow has described the presence of the two layers of
the zona radiata in the ovum of Osmerus, and his description agrees
with mine; but the eggs he examined were less mature than those
I had to deal with, and it is this fact which prevented him discovering
the curious function which the external zona performs. Owsjanni-
kow has also described the micropyle in the unripe ova he studied.
I was unable to detect the micropyle, but I am inclined to think it
exists in the centre of the area over which the suspensory membrane
is attached.
A comparison between the adhesive ova of Osmerus and other
adhesive ova can now easily be made. In all adhesive ova the
exterior surface of the zona radiata is glutinous ; it adheres to solid
objects, and, setting hard after attachment, securely fixes the eggs to
one another and to surrounding solids. In some adhesive eggs the
external layer of the zona is different in structure from the inner.
In the Herring-ovum there is no distinct differentiation into two
layers ; in Perca fluviatilis, as described by Owsjannikow, there aie
J.T.C. del.
Parker & Coward lith
Ovum of Osmerus.
P. 2. 5.1886. PL. Xxx.
West, Newman & Co. imp.
1886.] MR. ROSSET ON THE FAUNA ETC. OF THE MALDIVES. 295
two layers, the external of which has pores, which are larger and
less numerous than those of the inner layer. The egg adheres by
the surface of the external layer, but no separation of the two layers
takes place. In Osmerus eperlanus the same differentiation occurs,
and the external layer, after becoming attached by one point or
other, detaches itself from the inner layer except at one circular
area, thus forming a membrane by which the ovum is suspended
from its attachment.
It remains to be mentioned that in the unripe ova, which are
forcibly expressed from the parent, there is a delicate structureless
membrane external to the zona radiata. This is doubtless derived
from the ovary; it is perhaps the connective-tissue layer of the
follicle, which becomes reduced in thickness as the egg attains its
mature size ; it is certain that the perfectly ripe ovum is enveloped
only in its double zona radiata.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXX.
Fig. 1. Nearly ripe ovum of Osmerus eperlanus, taken from female, and
examined in fresh condition. a. Thin membrane derived from the
ovary, not present in the naturally deposited mature ovum. 2.7.
Zona radiata; its division into two layers is not shown. g.v. Germi-
nal vesicle. (Zeiss A, Oc. 2.)
Outline of attached ovum of Osmerus. s.m. The suspensory membrane
formed by the zona radiata externa. 2.7.27. The zona radiata interna.
(Zeiss A, Oc. 2.)
. The membranes of an almost mature ovum of Osmerus, as seen in the
fresh state after rupture of the zona radiata externa by pressure of
the cover-glass. z.7.2.. Zona radiata interna. z27.e. Zona radiata
externa. (Zeiss A, Oc. 2.)
4. The zona radiata of egg of Osmerus, as seen in fresh condition in optical
section, in process of separation of the two layers. z.7.¢., 2.7.7., as
before. (Zeiss E, Oc. 2.)
i)
id)
May 18, 1886.
Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair.
Mr. C. W. Rosset exhibited and made remarks on a series of
photographs taken during a recent visit to the Maldive Islands, and
gave the following account of his collections in these islands :—
“On my return from an eighteen months’ stay among the Veddas
of Ceylon, I undertook a journey to the Maldives, in October 1885,
in the course of which I passed seventy-five days on the Malé Atol.
The principal object of my journey was to make a complete Ethno-
graphical collection, as also to take a series of photographs of the
people, objects and places of interest, and so on, and obtain full
particulars about habits and customs, manufactures, trade, &e. I
was also able to make a zoological collection.
“I was not able to carry out my original plan, as the Sultan
absolutely refused to allow me to quit Malé Atol, so that I was
unable to visit the southern islands of the group. It will therefore
296 MR. P. CROWLEY ON PUP FROM NATAL. [May 18,
be necessary for me to revisit the islands, when I shall commence at
the southernmost Atoll, and hope to gradually work my way north.
I hope to leave next September on my second journey. The Ethno-
graphical collection which I was able to bring back is now exhibited
in the Ceylon Court of the Colonial and Indian Exhibition, and this
has taken up so much of my time that I have so far been unable to
classify and arrange my zoological specimens. A short paper
descriptive of my stay on MAlé Atoll will shortly be read before the
Royal Geographical Society.
“The zoology of the Maldives is not of importance so far as animals
are concerned. ‘ Domestic animals have been imported from India ;
and there are at present bullocks, cows, sheep, and goats on the
islands ; the first named, however, are few in number, and all belong
to the Sultan; but the last are reared by the Maldivians, and there
are about five hundred of them on Malé Atoll. There are a few cats,
and former writers on the Maldives mention the presence of the
Mongoose; but I saw none on Malé Atoll, and all the natives with
whom I came in contact told me they had never seen any. Flying-
foxes are numerous and very destructive, but their ravages are
eclipsed by those of the cocoa-nut rats, who destroy thousands of
nuts yearly. I found a kind of musk-rat, with black-and-white fur
and a pointed tail, in large numbers.
**T brought with me a large number of lizards, ground-snakes,
beetles, butterflies, fish, sea-animals, aud corals, of which I am only
able to show a small number to-night.
“The fauna of the Maldives, z. e. of the Northern Atolls, is very
similar to that of India and Ceylon; I have been given to understand,
on the other hand, that on the Southern Atolls it resembles that of
Mauritius, the Seychelles, and Madagascar. Birds and butterflies
are only seen at certain seasons; the north-east monsoon brings
these from India and Ceylon, which are then to be found on most
islands of the Northern Atolls, whilst during the south-west monsoon
species from Mauritius &c. are brought to the Southern Atolls.
“The Maldive Islands are nearly all of coral-formation. I found
several pieces of lava and pumice-stone on the sea-shore ; but these
evidently came from Java at the time of the great eruption and
earthquake there, as the natives assured me they had only been seen
for the last two or three years.”
Mr. Philip Crowley, F.Z.S., exhibited some pupze of Nocturnal
Lepidoptera from Natal, and made the following observations : —
“Some few months since, when Mr. Thomson exhibited some large
specimens of Saturniide hatched in the Gardens from pup received
from South Africa, I asked if any one present could tell me whether
these species were subterranean in their pupa state, and I could get no
satisfactory answer ; one or two said they believed they spun up in
the leaves of the food-plant. My Natal correspondeut was therefore
asked to send me some cocoons. I received his reply some six weeks
since, and a consignment of pupze on Monday the 18th, some of which
I now exhibit. In_ his letter he says:—‘ The larve of all our big
1886. ] ON RHIPIDORNIS GULIELMI-TERTII. 297
Moths burrow into the soil to a depth of 2 or 3 inches, and there they
remain, some for six months, some for ten. The way in which I
manage is this: first I search in due season for the caterpillars, which
having found I remove to bushes and trees as near my residence as
possible. Ithen watch them carefully day by day, until I consider
them large enough to remove into my breeding-cages, all of which
have at least six inches of good soil at the bottom. When full-fed
they burrow, as I have said before, and exactly six weeks after the
disappearance of the last one, Idig up all the pup and lay them care-
fully side by side upon moss which is from time to time moistened.’
“I may add I received last year pupz of the following species from
this source, all of which hatched out well with the exception of six or
eight :—
Cyanissa maia.
Bunea caffraria.
Antherea tyrrhea.
menippe.
wahlbergit.
Cirina forda.
“The pupz which I now exhibit will, I think, by their general
appearance, bear out the statement of my correspondent.”
pp y p
Mr. Joseph Whitaker, F.Z.S., exhibited a specimen of Wilson’s
Phalarope, Steganopus wilsoni (Sabine), believed to have been shot
some years ago at Sutton Ambion, near Market Bosworth in
Leicestershire. Mr. Whitaker had found the bird stuffed ina case of
local species of birds which had belonged toa Mr. Richard Bradfield,
who stated that he shot the specimen in question on a small pond,
into which the manure ran from his farm-yard, and the breast of the
bird showed a stain which might have been so produced. The owner
was quite unaware of the rarity of the species, looking upon it merely
as a curiosity ; and unless there should have been some accidental
exchange at the bird-stuffer’s, the evidence as to its genuineness
seemed entitled to credence.
The following papers were read :—
1. On a fourth Male Specimen of King William the Third’s
Paradise-bird. By A. B. Meyer, M.D., Director Royal
Zoological Museum of Dresden, C.M.Z.S., &e.
[Received April 28, 1886.]
In the year 1875 I described and figured (Mitth. Zool. Mus.
Dresden, i. p. 3, pl. i.) Rhipidornis gulielmi-tertii, after a male
and female specimen forwarded to me by my friend the late S. C.
S. W. van Musschenbroek from Ternate, and a short time after-
wards Gould figured a second male specimen (‘Birds of New
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XX. 20
298 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18,
Guinea,’ pt. ii. pl. 2, 1876), which belonged to the Museum of
Warsaw.
Since then only one specimen has been obtained (see Proc. Zool.
Soe. 1883, p. 252), which is now in the British Museum, but nothing
trustworthy has been made out as to the supposed habitat of the
species— Waigiou (cf. Salvadori, Orn. Pap. ii. p. 646, 1851).
Quite recently I have procured for the Dresden Museum a male
example of this rare species, therefore the fourth, offered by a
merchant from Amsterdam together with other Papuan birds.
This specimen resembles exactly those figured by Gould and my-
self, but its origin is quite as obscure as that of the other speci-
mens. The accompanying birds being apparently of species found
in New Guinea, and not in Waigiou, perhaps Beccari’s supposition
(Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. vil. p. 710, 1875), that this Paradise-bird
occurs on N.W. New Guinea and Salawati, may be right.
As it is of importance to know where type specimens are preserved,
Ladd the history of those of Rhipidornis gulielmi-tertti described
by myself. Having kept them in the Dresden Museum since
the year 1875, I one day in the year 1877 received a telegram from
van Musschenbroek, who had returned home in 1876, telling me
that he wished to show the birds to King William III. I sent the
specimens to him, and never saw them again. They remained in
the hands of the king, and we never succeeded im recovering
these types for science, though supported by the late Prof. Schlegel
of Leyden; but after van Musschenbroek’s death in the year 1883,
the King of the Netherlands delivered the specimens to the Museum
of the Zoological Society (Natura artis magistra) of Amsterdam,
where they probably will remain.
2. Descriptions of some new or little-known Earthworms,
together with an Account of the Variations in Structure
exhibited by Perionyx excavatus, E.P. By Frank E,
Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., Prosector to the Society.
[Received May 18, 1886.]
ConTENTs.
. Note on Pericheia indica, Horst, p. 298.
. Pericheta horsti, n. sp., p. 800.
. A new Species of Ludrilus, p. 302.
. Additional note on Microcheta rappii, p. 306.
. Remarks on the Variation of Pertonyx excavatus, p. 308.
Oy Co ho
1. Notre on Peritcuzra inpica, Horst.
Pericheta, sp., Horst, Nederl. Arch. f. Zool. Bd. iv. 1879.
Megascolex indicus, Horst, Notes from Leyden Museum, vol. v.
p- 186.
With the exception of Lumbricus and other forms affined to it,
which ought perhaps to be regarded as subgenera (Allolobophora
1886. | LITTLE-K NOWN EARTHWORMS. 299
Dendrobena, &c.), there have been described more species of Pericheta
than of any othergenus. Rather more than thirty have been named,
but several of these, as Dr. Horst’ has pointed out, are merely
synonyms, while a large number have evidently been too imperfectly
characterized to admit of recognition. In the majority of cases the
number of the spermathecze and the absence or presence of variously
formed diverticula have proved useful as specific characters ; but
species have been distinguished on other grounds which happen to
agree in the number and form of the spermathecee. The presence
of genital papillae is almost universal in the genus Pericheta, and
these are placed either in the neighbourhood of the spermathecz or
of the reproductive apertures ; this character serves to differentiate
P. indica from P. affinis, which otherwise agree pretty closely in
structure. I have had the opportunity of examining a number of
specimens of both these species as well as of an apparently new
species which is closely allied to both. A few notes therefore, which
will perhaps serve more clearly to define these species, may be worth
adding to what is known about them.
Of Pericheta indica I have received about halfa dozen specimens
from New Caledonia though the kindness of Mr. E. L. Layard, C.M.G.
The specimens were of varying size, the largest individuals reaching
a length of some 6 inches. Their colour-(in alcohol) was a very
dark brown, with an indistinct whitish line in the middle of each
segment, marking the insertion of the sete. The latter are
remarkable for the fact that one or more on either side of the ventral
median line are very much larger than the rest: this fact has already
been noted by Horst (Nederl. Arch. &c. Joc. cit.), and a similar
variation in the size of the sete occurs in Perrier’s species P. luzonica
and P. biserialis*. The two last-mentioned Perichete have up to the
present been but briefly described ; but the description is sufficient
to show that they cannot be confounded with P. indica. P. biserialis
has only two pairs of spermathece and several pairs of genital
papillee in the segments following the 18th, while there are four pairs
of spermathecze in P. indica. In P. luzonica the clitellum occupies
four segments. Dr. Horst mentions two pairs of genital papille
placed respectively upon segments 7 and 8; in one of my specimens
there were three pairs, the third pair being upon segment 6.
Another important variation is in the number of segments which
compose the clitellum: in most of the individuals where the clitellum
was developed, it was found to occupy segments 14—16 inclusive, as
described by Horst for this species and as commonly found in the
genus. In one specimen, however, the clitellum was a segment
short, being developed only upon the 14th and 15th rings; the
clitellum was fully developed upon these segments and sharply
defined, as it usually is in this genus. It is of some importance to
note this fact, since a species of Pericheta, P. bicincta, has been
characterized mainly on account of the restriction of the clitellum
to two segments.
' Notes from the Leyden Museum, vol. v. p. 186.
? Comptes Rendus, t. Ixxxi. (1875) p. 2044.
20*
300 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18,
The individual in question agreed in every other respect with
P. indica, and the difference in the number of segments constituting
the clitellum appears to me rather as an indication that this structure
is subject to some variation in the same species than a mark of
specific distinctness. With regard to the dorsal pores, they are
present in my specimens in all the segments following the clitellum,
as stated by Horst; I find, however, that the posterior border of
the clitellum is not only marked by a dorsal pore, but the anterior
border also, and that there is yet another pore in front of this ; this
latter appears to be the first.
In all other respects my specimens agreed with Horst’s description
of Perichaeta indica, and I believe them to be identical. . I need not
describe the organs of the body severally, as I was unable to detect any
points of difference.
2. PeRICH£ZTA HORSTI, N. sp.
In a collection of Earthworms sent to me from Manila by my
friend Mr. H. E. Barwell were a considerable number of specimens
of a Pericheta which I regard as of a new species. I dedicate it to
Dr. Horst, whose work in this department of Zoology is well known.
It is a small species, the largest individuals measuring only about 2
inches in length.
The external characters afforded by the genital papillz serve to
distinguish the species; although the value of these characters is
well known, it is often impossible to make use of them, as the genital
papillee are not always present to the full number even in worms
which are in other respects sexually mature. Out of seven or eight
individuals which I have examined and dissected, one or two had very
many more genital papillee than the rest ; in the absence of evidence
to the contrary, I regard these specimens as being in this respect fully
adult. The genital papilla are placed in the neighbourhood of the
male generative pores as in P. affinis; but instead of there being
only a single pair to each segment, there are three distinct papille
placed at equal distances from each other and within the circle of
setee. These are present on the two segments which precede the
eighteenth and on the four segments which follow it; on the
eighteenth segment there is naturally only the median papilla
present, the genital orifices themselves occupying the position of the
outer papille.
In Pericheta biserialis and in P. juliani, according to Perrier’,
there is some resemblance in the disposition of the genital papillae
to the condition which is characteristic of the present species; in
both of the former there are a pair of genital papillee corresponding
in position to the male reproductive pores and occupying a variable
number of segments following the 18th. I have myself had the
opportunity of examining a number of specimens of a Pericheta
from the Philippine Islands, which I refer to the former species from
the fact that the ventral setze are separated by a considerable interval
and are of considerably greater size than the remainder, and that
1 Perrier, Comptes Rendus, loc. cit.
1886. ] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTA WORMS. 301
there are three or four pairs of genital papillee, one to each of a
corresponding number of segments following the 18th. There was,
however, no indication of an additional median papilla on each of
the segments as in P. horsti, nor does Perrier mention anything of
the kind.
The clitellum is not, as is so generally the case, restricted to three
segments ; but, at least in one specimen, extended from segment 14 to
17 inclusive; on the 17th segment, however, it was only developed
on the dorsal region of the body,
The orifice of the oviducts occupies the usual position on the
ventral median line of the 14th segment’. The spermathecal
orifices are between the 7th and 8th and Sth and 9th segments.
The sete are continuous all round the body and are everywhere
of uniform size.
With regard to internal structure, there are one or two features in
which this species is peculiar.
In the first place, the spermathecee are separated from each other
by very stout mesenteries, which are also found between segments 8—
7, 7-6, 6-5; in front of the fifth segment the mesenteries are more
or less indistinguishable, forming a mass of muscles which bind the
pharynx to the parietes ; behind the 9th segment the mesenteries
are comparatively thin and delicate. The gizzard is situated in the
Sth segment, that which contains the anterior pair of spermathece ;
it does not, as isso commonly the case (e. g. in P. affinis) occupy two
segments, the intermediate mesentery having disappeared. The
spermathecz consist of an oval or sometimes cylindrical pouch
communicating with the exterior by a narrow duct, to which is
attached a short diverticulum of much the same shape as the pouch.
The diverticulum appears never to lie in a different segment from the
spermatheca.
The ovaries and oviducts were very distinct, and appear to occupy
the normal position.
The vasa deferentia open on to the exterior in common with the
duct of a compact prostate.
The testes are to the number of two pairs and in the usual position.
The cesophagus widens into the intestine at about the 20th segment ;
1 The extension of the clitellum over four segments, combined with the
regularity and uniform size of the setee, makes it difficult, in the absence of
additional information, to distinguish this species from P. ceru/ea, BE. P.; it is
stated, however, that in P. cerulea the female generative orifices are paired.
Nevertheless this latter difference is not perhaps of very fundamental value; it
must at any rate be discounted by my own observations with regard to Megascolex
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Oct. 1883), where the female pore issometimes single and
sometimes double. Pericheta taitensis of Grube (Reise der Novara, Anneliden,
p. 36, pl. iv. fig. 2) is a very doubtful species, agreeing with P. horsti in having
only two pairs of spermathec situated in the 8th and 9th segments. It may
possibly be identical with it. I may take this opportunity of remarking that
several other species described by Grube (MB. Akad. Berlin, 1877, p. 558) are
in need of revision. Lumbricus kerguelarum appears to me from his description
to be undoubtedly referable to the genus Acanthodrilus, and perhaps to Lan-
kester’s species 4. kerguelenensis; L. tongaensis is certainly not a Lumbricus,
and perhaps belongs to the same genus as the last.
302 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18,
about five or six segments from its commencement, the intestine
undergoes a remarkable change in its structure; in three or four
segments the walls of the intestine are greatly thickened, but these
specially thickened regions are separated by intervals where the
intestinal walls have preserved their normal delicacy of structure ;
these intervals are on either side of the septa. These appearances,
which recall the moniliform structure of the cesophagus in Monili-
gaster, can hardly have been brought about by the effects of the
alcohol in which the specimens were preserved. There were no
czeca present, unless these local thickenings represent the ceca
morphologically ; in other Perichete the cca generally contrast
with the intestine by their greater thickness.
On several of the anterior mesenteries were bunches of glandular
tubules similar to those found in other Perichete, and which may
represent the nephridia.
The foregoing brief description is, I think, enough to distinguish
this species from any that is at all sufficiently known.
3. A new Species or Evpri.us (Eudrilus boyeri).
Among some Earthworms kindly sent to me from New Caledonia
by Mr. Layard were about a dozen individuals which I refer to
Perrier’s genus Eudrilus ‘. This genus is already known to inhabit
South America and the West Indies, but has not been recorded from
anywhere else. I am inclined myself to suspect that the New-
Caledonian specimens may have been accidently imported, and may
not be indigenous to that island. I name the species after M. Boyer
of New Caledonia, who collected the specimens for Mr. Layard. At
the same time I am not convinced that the species really is new. It
appears to differ from all the three species described by Perrier
in the long coiled oviduct, and in the termination of the vasa
deferentia at the middle of the prostate gland. With regard to the
first mentioned point of difference, I have elsewhere * expressed the
opinion that M. Perrier has mistaken the relation of the ovary to
the spermatheca. The oviduct in my specimens so unmistakably
corresponds to what Perrier has described as a diverticulum of the
spermatheca, that I cannot but think that they are really identical
even if the species are distinct. M. Perrier did not make use of the
method of section-cutting, which is so infinitely better than dissection
for deciding an anatomical relation like that of the ovary and its
duct. Still the difference between my species and his in respect of
the vasa deferentia makes me hesitate in asserting that his conclusions
are mistaken. With regard to the vasa deferentia, M. Perrier states
that in his species they open directly into the bursa copulatrix, and
not indirectly by way of the prostate gland as in Hudrilus boyeri.
With M. Perrier’s figure before me it appeared to me that in one
instance, at any rate, Hudrilus boyeri agreed with Hudrilus decipiens ;
but in two or three other specimens which I dissected the vasa
1 Nouy. Arch. d. Muséum, t. viii. (1872) p. 71.
2 Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinb. (forthcoming paper); Zool. Anzeig. Bd. ix. (1886)
p- 342,
1886. ] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS. 303
deferentia, although passing over the bursa copulatrix, did not open
into it but into the prostate gland, as I have indicated in the drawing
(fig. 1). The anterior section of the vasa deferentia (v.d) as far as the
bursa copulatrix was very conspicuous, owing to the white colour of the
tubes (white from the contained spermatozoa): the distal region of
the vasa deferentia was far less conspicuous, and I mistook them at
first for a mere ligament uniting the prostate with the surface of the
Generative organs of Hudrilus,
a, glandular appendix; 4, bursa copulatrix; v.d, vasa deferentia ;
pr, prostate.
bursa copulatrix ; a more careful examination has shown that the
supposed ligament is really a continuation of the vasa deferentia.
These tubes, although lying upon the bursa, are in no way adherent to
it, and can be readily lifted up with a dissecting-needle ; they are
then seen to be continuous with the prostate (pr.).
304 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18,
In all the species described by Perrier there appears to be but a
single vasa deferens on either side of the body, which opens directly
into the bursa copulatrix and not, as in my species, into the prostatic
glands. The single vas deferens of either side is figured by Perrier
(loc. cit. pl. il. fig. 26). In all the specimens of Eudrilus boyeri
dissected by me there were unmistakably two vasa deferentia on
each side of the body, which after came to be separated by a.
considerable interval, owing perhaps to the contraction of the body-
walls, though more usually lying side by side and in close juxta-
position. The only other genus in which there are two vasa
deferentia on each side of the body is Acanthodrilus, and this is in
correspondence with the two generative orifices of each side ; where
there is only a single pair of male generative pores, the vasa deferentia
become fused directly behind the posterior funnel and pass down the
body as a single tube. In Microcheta, however, Benham’ has
described the two vasa deferentia of each side continuing separate
for several segments, though they ultimately become fused some way
in front of the male generative pore.
The condition of the vasa deferentia in Eudrilus boyeri forms
another intermediate term in the series which connects Acanthodrilus
with Lumbricus; in Acanthodrilus the two vasa deferentia are
separate throughout their whole extent and their external apertures
are each furnished with a prostate gland’. In Ludrilus boyert
there is only a single generative opening, but the vasa deferentia
temain distinct. In Microcheta, where there is also a single male
generative pore, the vasa deferentia of each side are partially fused.
Finally, in Lumbricus and other genera the vasa deferentia unite
immediately behind the posterior internal funnel.
The nephridia of this species are well developed, and open in every
case in front of the dorsal sete. The organs themselves are
remarkable for the very large muscular duct.
The alimentary tract presents certain features of interest.
The cesophagus is furnished with three pairs of thick-walled
whitish-coloured glands disposed in pairs in consecutive segments,
viz. 11, 12, and 13; the posterior pair was smaller than the two
anterior pairs. These glands appeared to have a lamellar structure,
and the interior was filled with irregularly-shaped calcareous masses :
there seems to me to be no doubt that these structures correspond to
the calcigerous glands of Zuméricus. Along the intestine are
another series of glands, about 40-50 pairs, commencing in the
90th segment. There is a single pair of these glands to each
segment, which become larger towards the middle of the series, and
1 Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci. vol. xxvi.
2 In a species of Pericheta recently described by myself (Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist. 1886, xvii. p. 89) there are two prostates oneither side, whose apertures are,
however, situated in the same segment, and not in different segments as in
Acanthodrilus, The condition of the specimen was such that I could not detect
the connection of these with the vasa deferentia, It seems very possible that
each prostate may correspond to a single vas deferens, in which case the male
generative organs of this worm will be in certain respects intermediate between
those of Acanthodrilus and Eudrilus boyeri.
1886. ] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS. ‘ 305
diminish in size towards either extreme. These glands are situated
on the dorsal wall of the intestine, close to and on either side of the
dorsal vessel ; each is supplied with a rich plexus of blood-vessels
derived from the most anterior of the two vessels which arise from
the dorsal trunk in each segment.
These glands are probably of the same nature as those described
by myself in a similar position in Megascolex' and Typhaus*, and by
Dr. Horst® in Acanthodrilus.
The female reproductive organs I have already described ; they
are quite unique in that the ovary is directly continuous with its
efferent duct, which opens on to the exterior in common with the
Fig. 2.
Generative organs of Eudrilus, with bursa copulatrix laid open.
p, penial process ; c, pad-like process connected with glandular appendix.
Other lettering as in fig. 1,
spermatheca. The male reproductive organs are also remarkable ;
they have been described by M. Perrier in all the three species of
the genus ; my own dissections do not altogether bear out his state-
ments, but of course the differences may be specific; they are hardly
individual, inasmuch as three or four specimens agreed perfectly.
In most cases there were three pairs of vesiculee seminales, situa-
ted in segments 10, 11, 12; with these are connected a pair of vasa
! Trans. Roy. Soe. Edinb. vol. xxx. pt. ii. p. 493.
2 Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1883, xii. p. 222.
3 Notes from Leyden Museum, vol. vi. p. 103.
306 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18,
deferentia on each side, which were invariably extremely conspicuous ;
the two vasa deferentia of each side remained perfectly distinct, and
could readily be traced as far as the prostatic gland, into which they
open. The latter structure is a tubular organ of a nacreous appear-
ance, lying behind the generative orifice, and oceupying some five
or six segments ; it communicates with a large rounded pouch-like
structure (figs. 1, 2, 6), which overlies the generative pores on either
side, by anarrow duct. The prostatic gland is constricted at about the
middle of its extent, and it is at this point that the vasa deferentia
open into it. M. Perrier has accurately figured the appearance
presented by the ‘ bursa copulatrix’ when its upper wall has been
removed (loc. cit. pl. ii. figs. 27, 28). I find that the duct of the
prostatic gland is continuous with the curved penis (woodcut fig. 2),
while the rounded pad (¢) which lies behind the penis receives the
duct of a peculiar glandular body (a), which is either horseshoe-
shaped as in fig. 2 or Y-shaped as in fig. 1. This glandular appendix
has been referred to by Perrier, who did not, however, succeed in
making out its relations with the bursa copulatrix; neither has
M. Perrier figured or described the termination of the prostatic
duct in the penis.
4. Appirionat Notre on Microcuara rApri, F. i. B.
Since my paper on the structure of this Worm was communicated
to the Society, Mr. Benham has published a careful and detailed
account of its anatomy.
The description of the female generative apparatus which Mr.
Benham gives’ agrees in the main with my own description, which I
have left unaltered in the paper. A structure which [ identified
with the oviduct—a pair of ciliated funnels on the posterior wall of
segment 12—has appeared to Mr. Benham not to be really an ovi-
duct but to be related to a glandular structure on the anterior
septum of segment 12, possibly serving as the excretory duct of
its products. On the other hand, the structure described by myself
as an ovary, lying in the segment behind that which contains the
presumed oviduct (Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. xii. pt. 3, pl. xv. fig. 4, 0),
is also identified as such by Mr. Benham.
I am now inclined to think that both Mr. Benham and myself
were wrong in that identification, and that the supposed ovary
really corresponds to what has been termed by Bergh* the recepta-
culum ovorum. In the first place, Mr. Benham remarks that the
ova which completely filled this supposed ovary exhibited no grada-
tion in size among themselves such as is to be seen in the ova of Lum-
bricus ; in the second place, I have observed this structure in another
example of the worm, recently received at the Gardens from the
Rev. G. H. R. Fisk, where it was entirely devoid of ova. Icuta
careful series of sections through the ‘ovary’ and oviduct, and could
* Quart. Journ, Mier. Sci. 1886, p. 279, pl. xvi. figs. 7, 8, 14.
* Zool. Anzeiger, no. 220, p. 232,
1886.] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS. 307
find no traces whatever of ova in the former body, and its walls were
comparatively thick and composed of muscular or perhaps connec-
tive-tissue fibres. These two series of facts are very decidedly
opposed to the view that this body is really the ovary, and I have
no doubt whatever that it corresponds to the receptaculum ovorum.
In Lumbricus the receptaculum ovorum was correctly described by
Hering, as Bergh has pointed out. More recently the structure
has been figured by Dr. Horst!, who also quotes Hering’s observa-
tions. I have myself observed an evidently similar structure attached
to the oviduct of Acanthodrilus dissimilis. Dr. Bergh describes the
origin of these bodies as being similar to that of the receptacula
seminis ; they arise on the anterior wall of segment 13, and are at
first independent of the oviducal funnels but subsequently unite
with them. In Microcheta these receptacula ovorum appear
therefore more completely to retain their primitive position. It was
obvious, however, from my sections that there was a communication
through the mesentery between the receptacula and the oviduct.
The identification of the supposed ovaries with the receptacula
ovorum confirms so far the accuracy of my own determination of the
oviducal funnel. I am bound to say, however, thata most searching
examination of my sections failed to bring to light any traces of the
oviducal canal. I see that Mr. Benham has also failed to detect
any counection between the funnel and the exterior. Assuming, at
least for the present, that the supposed ovary is nothing more than a
receptaculum ovorum, the true ovary remains to be identified. This
I believe to be a glandular-looking body in segment 12, noted
by Mr. Benham but overlooked by myself at the time when my
paper was written. Mr. Benham describes and figures (oc. cit.
pl. xvi. fig. 8) this gland as consisting of a “ mass of rounded cells
arranged in a band which is bent upon itself several times, the folds
being close to one another.” It is attached to the anterior septum
of somite 12. In the specimen of this worm more recently dissected
by myself, I have found a structure which must correspond to that
described by Mr. Benham, though it occupies a slightly different
position and is somewhat different in structure. This gland in my
specimen was elongated and composed of a mass of rounded in-
different cells ; the anterior end of the gland was wider than the
posterior extremity, which tapered gradually, and was attached to
the anterior mesentery of segment 12; the main part of the gland
lay along the ventral body-wall close to the nerve-cord.
The reasons which lead me to suppose that this cellular mass
represents an ovary in a state of functional inactivity are—first,
that it oceupies the right position; secondly, that it corresponds
exactly in structure to certain glandular bodies in Acanthodrilus
dissimilis’, in which I have observed the occasional development of
ova,
1 Tijdschr. d. Nederl. Dierk. Vereen. Deel iii. afl. i. p. 28.
2 P,Z.S. 1885, p. 828, pl. lii. fig. 9.
308 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18,
5. REMARKS ON THE VARIATION OF PERIONYX EXCAVATUS,
E. Perrier.
Hardly anything is at present known with respect to the varia-
tions in structure which may occur in a given species of Earthworm ;
and in order clearly to define the limits of different species it is
evidently a matter of some importance to ascertain how far variation
may take place. The description of by far the majority of exotic
forms of Lumbricidz has depended upon the dissection of a very
few examples, so that many of these descriptions must be qualified
by admitting the possibility that they relate only to what may be
termed for convenience’ sake the normal conditions of structure.
Such a criticism, however, can only be applied to those instances in
which a species or genus has been created for the reception of a
single individual, which may show well-marked divergencies in
structure from its immediate allies ; if a number of individuals agree
to differ from a second series of individuals in certain well-marked
characters, it would be obviously necessary to separate the two
groups either generically or specifically as the case demands.
The Lumbricidz are a group which exhibit a most remarkable
variability in internal structure, more especially of the generative
system ; in accordance with this variability they have been divided
into a considerable number of species and genera. It might well be
expected that this group, which is apparently universally distributed
and is at present no doubt as abundant, or even more abundant’, in
individuals as well as in species as it ever was, is still in course of
differentiation into new forms; any accidental variation may be the
first term of a series which will ultimately lead to the formation of a
new species.
I have had the opportunity of examining, through the kindness ot
my friend Mr. Herbert Barwell, rather more than 400 individuals
of a Philippine Earthworm belonging to the genus Perzonyz ; this
worm exhibits a number of variations which appear to me to be
really variations, and not marks of specific distinctness. The reasons
for this belief will be stated after the facts have been detailed.
The Earthworm in question appears to be identical in every respect
with Perionyx excavatus: it differs in no point from M. Perrier’s”
description of that species. I need hardly therefore describe in
detail its specific characters, as it would be merely repeating what
Perrier has already said; it will be necessary, however, briefly to
indicate the main features of its organization in order to render
clear what follows.
The setz are disposed in a continuous row round the middle
ofeach segment ; they are not dispesed upon a ridgeas in Pericheta,
1 There seems to be a certain relation between the abundance of Earthworms
and the cultivation of the soil; this fact is noted in a short article on Earth-
worms in the ‘ Field’ of March 27, 1886. My friend Mr. James Cavan informs
me that in California fishermen know well that if worms are required for bait
they must be sought for in cultivated land.
* Nouy. Arch. d. Mus. t. viii. (1872) p. 126.
1886. } LITTLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS. 309
and this character serves to distinguish the genus from Pericheta
in addition to those mentioned by Perrier.
Between the 7th and 8th and the 8th and 9th segments are the
orifices of the spermathecee, which lie in the 8th and 9th segments
respectively ; the orifices are near to the ventral median line. On
the 12th segment anterior to the circle of setz is the single median
aperture of the oviducts.
On the 18th segment are the paired apertures of the vasa de-
ferentia, which lie close together upon two slightly raised papille*
situated in an oval depressed area (see fig. 5, p. 310).
Among rather more than 400 individuals I observed the following
varieties :—
(1) The spermathecze were situated in segments 7 and 8; the
female generative pore was upon segment 11; the male generative
pores upon segment 16. ‘The clitellum occupied segments 12-15
inclusive (fig. 3).
(2) The female generative pores were two, one upon each of the
two segments 13 and 14; they were unpaired and median ; the male
generative pores occupied the normal position upon segment 18.
(3) The spermathece were normal, viz. two pairsin 8 and 9. The
female generative pores were paired as in the last variety, and occupied
the same segments (viz. 13 and 14); the male pores were upon
segment 17. The clitellum extended from segments 13-17.
(4) The female generative pores occupy segments 15 and 16; the
male pores are upon segment 20.
(5) Of this variety there were two examples. In one the
spermathece are normal, in segments 8 and 9. In both the feinale
pores are paired, but situated close to each other on the 14th segment ;
the male pores occupy the normal position upon the 18th segment.
In one specimen the clitellum extended from 13-17.
(6) The spermathece are present to the number of two pairs, but
are situated in segments 6 and 7 ; the single female generative pore
is upon segment 10. There are apparently three pairs of male
generative pores upon segments 14, 15, and 16; only the two first
pairs were furnished with prostate glands ; the hinder pair therefore
are probably to be compared to genital papillee (fig. 4).
(7) The female pores are upon segments 15 and 16; the male
pores ocenpy the normal position upon segment 18.
(8) The female pores are upon segments 14 and 15; the male
pores upon segment 18.
(9) In this variety there are three pairs of spermathece, occupying
1 Ina description of a new species of Periunya (P. macintoshii, Ann. &
Mag. Nat. Hist. 1883, xii. p. 217) I have described the openings of the vasa de-
ferentia as differing from those of P. excavatus in being placed in an area which
is not depressed below the level of the surreunding integument. I find by an
examination of a large series of P. excavatus that this supposed specific dis-
tinction is probably due to the immaturity of the single specimen of P. macin-
toshii; in immature examples of P. excavatus the male genital appertures are
precisely as I have described them in P. macintoshii. The latter species,
however, seems to me to be distinct on account of the structure of the prostate
glands and the thickened mesenteries of segments 6-9.
310 MR. F. E, BEDDARD ON NEW OR {May 18,
segments 7, 8, and 9. The female pore is single and upon segment
14; the male pores are upon segment 17.
(10) There are four pairs of spermathecze occupying segments 8,
9,10, and 11. The oviducal pores are two, upon segments 15 and
16. The male generative pores are uponsegment19. The clitellum
extends from segments 15-18 inclusive (fig. 6).
(11) There are three pairs of spermathecz in segments 6, 7, and 8.
The female generative pores are upon segments 13 and 14; the
male generative pores are upon segment 16.
(12) Of this variety I noted two specimens. The female and the
male pores were perfectly normal, but the 18th and 19th segments
were ouly separated from each other on the right side of the body ;
on the left side they were fused.
(13) There were also two specimens of this variety. The female
pores were upon segments 14 and 15; the male pores occupied the
normal position upon segment 18.
Fig. 3. Fig. 4. Fig.'5. Fig. 6.
~
|||) a} Seales Lea |=] S| ee | 20| sole |= [eafre ||
Figs. 3, 4, 6. Varieties of Perionya excavatus. Fig. 5. Normal individual.
(14) There were two pairs of spermathece, occupying the ordinary
position in segments 8 and 9. The female generative pores were
upon segments 15 and 17; the male pores upon segment 21.
Segments 11, 12, and 18, 19 were only divided from each other on
the left side of the bady. Viewed from the right side, the female pores
were upon segments 14 and 15, the male pores upon segment 18.
(15) The female generative pores were upon segments 15 and 16 ;
the male pores upon segment 18.
These different varieties may be tabulated as follows:—
1886. ] LIITLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS. 311
Spermathece. | 2 pores.| d pores.| Clitellum.
INOTDUGE™. «025... 8,9 14 18 14-17
Wiis mbt ect 7,8 ee 16 12-15
Set en ered ee 13, 14 18
ee 8,9 15, 14 17 13-17
ee SS ee el ayy aa. 15, 16 20
» 9 (2) 8.9 14, 14 18 13-17
oy OMS 4. ee 6,7 10 14, 15
ORT: 7, 8, 9, 10 15, 16 18
ELS il ae tGoAD Uf Waa ice sine 14, 15 18
ome ante 7,8,9 14 17
kOe rece 8, 9, 10, 11 15, 16 19 15-18
vey AU eis 6, 7,8 13, 14 16
» 12 (2) 8, 9 (right) ; 9, 10 (left) 14 18
» 18(2) ..| 8,9 (right); 9,10 (left) | 14, 15 18
fe eee eee 8,9 15,17 21
fy me ware | ll aes Fee 15, 16 18
In considering a series of variations like the present, it is necessary
in the first place to discriminate between what are really variations
and what are specific characters. I have stated at the commencement
of this paper my belief that the anatomical differences between the
individuals described here are variations, and not marks of specific
difference. This opinion is based upon the following facts :—Firs¢,
the exact correspondence in colour, size, and all anatomical charac-
ters, except those liable to variation, between the different individuals.
It may, perhaps, be objected that it is begging the question to
assume that it is precisely those characters which are liable to
variation in this “ species ” that are unimportant as marks of specific
difference ; especially when it is remembered that these differences
mainly concern the genital system, which is well known to exhibit
constant and regular variation, serving as a basis of classification. It is
indeed perfectly true that this isthe case ; but then the variations in
the genital system are constantly accompanied by equally regular,
though perhaps inconspicuous, variations in other characters ; so that
a naturalist acquainted with this group could probably easily
determine any species known to him by external characters only. It
is not meant to iniply by this statement that external characters
are sufficient to decide the systematic position of an Earthworm, but
merely to emphasize the fact that when, after dissection, the relations
of internal structure to external form are known, the latter charac-
ters will serve as a guide to recognize the species.
Secondly, the fact that the supposed variations are never represented
by many specimens. Out of some 430 individuals I have recorded 15
variations, 12 of which are exhibited in as many specimens, while 3
are represented by two specimens apiece. The importance of
this argument is in exact proportion to the number of specimens
examined ; in the present instance it appears to me to be fairly
sound.
Thirdly, Earthworms are known to vary somewhat in structure,
312 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18,
though there has never, to my knowledge, been described so great a
number of variations as I have been able to record in the present
communication. Dr. Horst’ has recorded a variation in the form
of the spermathecee of Pericheta indica and in the ceca of
Pericheta musica, and Perrier* in the spermatheex of Pericheta
affinis.
Fourthly, and lastly, the probability, suggested above, of the
occurrence of variations must not be left out of sight.
Assuming it to be proved that an actual variation does occur in
the present species, it will be necessary in the next place to eliminate
those variations that are mere monstrosities, and that can hardly be
considered to have any importance. Such are the occasional doubling
of segments on one side of the body, as the variations Nos. 4, 12, and
14; these are comparable to such monstrosities among Vertebrata
as two-headed lambs, calves with five limbs, and so forth, which are
not in any sense reversions to an ancestral type, but are owing to
some accidental cause, such as defective or excessive nutrition. On
the other hand, the remaining variations are to my mind of some
importance. These will now be considered in some detail.
It must be noted first of all that the variations occur in the
generative system, and it is precisely the modifications of this system
which have enabled systematists to classify the group.
These variations affect all the parts of the generative system—the
clitellum, the ovaries and their ducts, the spermathecze, and the male
organs.
I will commence with the clitellum. This organ and the relations
which it bears to the male generative apertures has enabled M.
Perrier to classify the whole group, after a fashion which is in the
main satisfactory, though open to objections in certain cases. I have
elsewhere urged that, in so far as it separates the Anticlitellians, 7. e.
Ivmbricus and its allies, from the remaining genera of Earthworms,
M. Perrier’s system is by no means artificial, but bears out other
anatomical differences. To distinguish the Intra- and Postclitellians
from each other is not so easy a task: in the first place, we have genera
like Megascolex, whose affinities are clearly with Pericheta, and which
yet possess Intraclitellian generative apertures ; in the second place,
we find that within the limits of a single genus, i. e. Acanthodrilus,
the male generative orifices vary in position, and may be either intra-
or post-clitellian.
If the relations of the clitellum to the male generative apertures be
used for classificatory purposes, it appears to me necessary somewhat
to alter Perrier’s definition, and to divide Earthworins into two
groups, according as to whether the clitellum is placed far forward,
and commences in front of the male generative orifices, or whether
it is placed further back and commences behind the male generative
orifices.
That there is really a connection between the clitellum and the
1 Notes from the Leyden Museum, vol. v. p. 182.
? Nouvelles Arch. &e. loc. cit. p. 106. These facts are of course liable to the
same criticism as my own.
1886. ] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS. 313
generative orifices is certainly shown by the series of variations in
Perionyx described in the present paper. When the male generative
pores, as in var. no. I, are placed very far forward, the clitellum also
moves forward; on the other hand, when the male generative pores
are situated further back, e. g. in segment 19, the clitellum likewise
changes its position and occupies segments 15-18.
In both these instances it will be noted that the relations of the
male pore to the clitellum remain the same, although both struc-
tures have shifted their position; in both cases, as in the normal
condition, the male generative pore occupies the first segment after
the clitellum. This fact would at first sight appear to be a strong
argument in favour of Perrier’s scheme of classification; but in the
first place the clitellum extends in var. No. | on to the left half of
segment 16, and in the second place one variety (No. 3) was
distinctly ‘ intraclitellian,’ through the shifting forward of the
generative pores on to the 17th segment.
Ovaries and Oviducts—I have been able to prove by dissection
that the presence of two pairs of oviducts in consecutive segments is
areality ; the two oviducts of each side were quite obvious and were
each furnished with their own ovary. Moreoverin var. No. 11 there
was an additional (third) ovary in segment 11, on the right-hand side.
In var. No. 10 I also noted three pairs of ovaries.
The occasional occurrence of more than a single pair of ovaries in
this Earthworm lends additional support to my identification in
Acanthodrilus of certain glandular structures with rudimentary
ovaries, and also to Prof. Lankester’s description in Chetogaster of
two pairs of ovaries, which has been recently doubted by Vejdovsky'*.
In the present instance there can be no doubt of the presence
occasionally of two or three pairs of ovaries, since they were extremely
conspicuous on account of their large size, and contained abundant
mature ova.
In two varieties (No. 5) there were only a single pair of ovaries
present, but with separate openings on to the exterior. I have
already in the present paper (p. 301, note) referred to the fact that this
variation also occurs in Megascolex.
Spermathece.—The number and position of the spermathece have
been so constantly made use of as a systematic character, that it is
well to emphasize their variations in the present species. They vary
from two to four pairs, and may be placed in any of segments 6-11.
In most cases they get to be placed further forward when the male
generative pores shift their positions forward, but this relation is by
no means constant. The occasional symmetry of these organs (e. g.
in var. No. 12 and 13) cannot be a matter of any importance ; it was
only observed in two of the four specimens.
Male Generative Pores.—The position of these pores varies from
segment 14-21, but they were invariably behind the female generative
pores; there was particular relation between the positions of the
male and female pores, except that the latter were always in front of
the former.
é * System u. Morph. d. Oligochexten, p. 145.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.— 1886, No. XXI, 21
314 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON WILD GOATS. [May 18,
The variation in position of these apertures is of importance, because
certain genera (e. g. Urocheta, Eudrilus, Rhinodrilus) are charac-
terized by the different position of the male pores, which are almost
always (Pericheta, Perionyx, Megascolex, Anteus, and Microcheta)
upon the 18th segment. In one instance (No. 6) there were two pairs
of male generative orifices on following segments (14, 15), and on
segment 16 a pair of orifices which appear to be papillze, since they
are not furnished with the prostates of the anterior orifices. The
presence of two pairs of male orifices, each with their own prostate,
is of importance, since a genus (Acanthodrilus) is mainly distinguished
on account of this very peculiarity. The normal individuals of
Perionyx excavatus have no genital papille, which are so charac-
teristic of many species of Pericheta ; in the variety just mentioned,
as well as in No. 8, there were a pair of similar papille.
Nephridia.—In one instance I observed an alternation in the
position of the nephridial pores, confined, however, to a single pore,
which was placed considerably nearer to the dorsal median line than
the pores on the preceding and ensuing segments.
In conclusion I would again point out that the variations recorded
in this paper mainly affect the generative system, which is known to
exhibit such characteristic differences in various genera and species.
I have not noticed any prominent variations in other organs.
.
3. Remarks on the various Species of Wild Goats. By
P. L. Scuarer, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the
Soeiety.
[Received May 17, 1886.]
(Plates XXXI. & XXXII.)
The male Sinaitie Ibex which we received as a present from
Mrs. Laing in December 1884" has now become a fine animal, As
the first of the species that has reached the Society’s Gardens, I
have thought that a portrait of it would not be inappropriate to the
Society’s ‘ Proceedings ;’ and I have accordingly had the accom-
panying sketch (Plate XXXII.) prepared by Mr. Smit, which will
give a good idea of the original.
The animal stands about 31 inches high, and is generally of a dark
rusty brown colour, with black dorsal stripe aud limbs, the latter
being white on tie inner sides and on the knees.
I take this opportunity of offering a few remarks on the known
species of Wild Goats and their distribution. I will mention them
in geographical order, commencing with the westernmost species, and
proceeding eastwards, alluding especially to those of which we have
received living specimens.
1 See P.Z.S. 1885, p. 2.
IXXX Id 988LS Z¢
P'VOILIVNIS Wua¥o
H APL EBS ch
IXXX Id 9881l SZ
1886.] MR. P. L. SCLATER ON WILD GOATS. 315
1. CAPRA PYRENAICA.
Capra pyrenaica, Schinz, Neue Denkschr. d. allg. Schweiz. Ges.
Nat. ii. p. 9, t. il., ili. (1838).
Capra hispanica, Schimper, Compt. Rend. xxvi. p. 318 (1848).
The Spanish Ibex is now well known to occur not only in the
Pyrenees but, under a slightly altered phase, in Central Spain and
in the higher ranges of Andalusia and Portugal. It is curious that
it is more nearly allied to the Caucasian Ibex than to the Ibex of
the Alps.
The only specimens of this species we have yet received alive are
those presented by Major Howard Irby in 1868 and 1869'. They
were obtained in the Sierra Hermosura, north of Marbella, in the
proviace of Malaga.
2. Capra 1Bex, Linn.
Capra ibex, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. p. 95.
So far as I know the Steinbok, or Bouquetin, is confined to the
Alps of Switzerland, Savoy, and Tyrol, where it is now become
nearly extinct, except in one or two places in which it has been
specially cared for and artificially preserved for sporting purposes.
Whether the pair of this species presented to us by the late King of
Italy in 1862 were really perfectly pure was, I have always thought, a
little doubtful ; at all events it is well known that the Alpine
Ibex breeds freely with the Domestic Goat, and I have seen many
such hybrids.
3. Capra £GAGRuUS, Gm.” (Plate XXX1.)
The Wild Goat, which was so abundant over the Grecian Archi-
pelago in the time of Homer, seems now only to exist in Crete and
some of the smaller Cyclades’.
It appears, however, to be found throughout the mountains of
Asia Minor and Persia, and to extend into Sind and Baluchistan’.
There can be no question, I suppose, that the Domestic Goat is a
derivative principally of this species, but with a probable mixture of
other species in different localities. Mr. T. B. Sandwith, H.B.M.
Consul for Crete, has sent us several examples of Wild Goats which
must be referred to this species.
Mr. Smit’s drawing (Plate XX XI.) represents a fine male of this
animal, presented by Mr. Sandwith in March 1884.
4. Capra CAucasica’.
Capra caucasica, Gild. Act. Petrop. 1779, pt. 2, p. 273 (1783).
Aigoceros ammon, Pallas, Zoograph. i. p. 229.
* See ‘List of Vertebrate Animals, ed. 8, p. 153.
* For synonymy, see Blanford, J. A. S. B. xliy. pt. ii. p. 15.
* Antimelos and Joura. See Erhard, ‘ Fauna der Cykladen’ (Leipzig, 1858),
p- 32, where this species is described as Afgoceros pictus.
* Blanford, ‘Eastern Persia,’ vol. ii. p. 89.
° The specimens called Capra caucasica in the British Museum belong either
to Capra egagrus or to a closely allied species, with the horns compressed and
angular in front.
21*
316 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON WILD GOATS. [May 18,
goceros pallasi, Bouill. Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Mose. xiv. p. 908,
t. xi. (1841).
This species is restricted to the Caucasian range. _ I have never
seen living examples of it, but there are two fine stuffed male speci-
mens in the British Museum which are labelled yoceros pallasi.
It is a very distinct form, of a generally dark brown colour, with the
thick horns curving backwards and outwards, the tips finally turning
upwards and inwards. It seems to be most nearly allied to Capra
pyrenaica.
5. Capra stnaitica. (Plate XXXII.)
Capra nubiana, Geoffr. St.-Hil. et Cuv. Mamm. vii. t. 397 (1825).
Capra sinaitica, Hempr. et Ehr. Symb. Phys. Zool. i. t. xviii.
(1828).
es arabica, Riipp. Neue Wirbelth. p..17 (1835).
Aigoceros beden, Wagner, Schreb. Saugeth. v. p. 1303 (1836).
Capra beden, Tristram, Fauna of Palestine, p. 6, pl. ii.
The Sinaitic Ibex is stated upon the best authority to be found
only in the mountains of Upper Egypt and in the ranges of the
Sinaitic Peninsula aad Palestine’. It would be therefore perhaps
better to drop the name nudiana, under which it was first described
by F. Cuvier, and to employ instead ‘ sinaitica”’ cf Hemprich and
Ehrenberg. These authors give Gebel Garab as one of its exact
localities in Egypt, and Riippell states most positively that it does
not occur south of 24° N. latitude in that country.
Our specimen was, I believe, procured at Suakim, on the western
coast of the Red Sea, and was, no doubt, brought from the moun-
tains lying to the north of that port.
The Sinaitic Ibex belongs strictly to the same group as C. ibex
and C. sibirica, but has the horns rather more compressed and
strongly knotted in front.
6. CAPRA WALIE.
Capra walie, Riipp. Neve Wirbelta., Saugeth. i. p. 16, t. vi.
This, it appears to me, is a very well-marked species, both as
regards the shape of its horns and the curious bony protuberance in
the middle of the forehead, pointed out by Ruppell, by whom it was
discovered in the highest ranges of Abyssinia. I am not aware that
any specimens of. this animal have been obtained except those of
Rippell, which are in the Senckenberg Museum at Frankfort.
7. CAPRA SIBIRICA.
Ibex alpium sibiricarum, Pallas, Spicil. Zool. xi. p. 31, t. iii.
Capra sibirica, Meyer, Zool: Ann. i. p. 397 (1794); Jerdon,
Mamm. Ind. p. 292; Kinloch, Large Game Shooting, i. p. 145
(1885).
Capra himalayana, Schinz, Mamm. ii. p. 463 (1845).
It seems to be now generally agreed that the Ibex of the Altai
1 Hempr. et Ehr. Synib. Phys, /.s.¢.; Rupp. Neue Wirbelth. i. p. 17; Tris-
tram, Fauna of Palestine, p. 6.
ot a
1886.] MR. P. L, SCLATER ON WILD GOATS. 317
Mountains and the Ibex of the Himalayas (which is found through-
out that range from Cashmere to Nepaul) should be referred to one
species; but I am not aware that any one has made an exact com-
parison of specimens from these two localities. The animal certainly
belongs to the same group as the Ibex of the Alps and that of the
Sinaitic peninsula. We have never yet succeeded in obtaining living
examples of it.
In Siberia, Radde tells us, this Ibex is found only in the Altai
and Sagan Mountains.
8. CAPRA FALCONERI.
Aigoceros falconeri, Wagn. Miinch. Gel. Auz. ix. p. 430 (1839),
Capra megaceros, Hatton, Calcutta Journ. N. H. il. p. 535, pl. xx.
(1842); Sclater and Wolf, Zool. Sketches, ser. ii. pl. xx.
Capra falconeri, Hiigel, Kaschmir u. d. Reich. d. Siek, iv. p. 579
(1848); Blanford, J.A.S.B. xliv. pt. i. p. 17 (1875).
The Markhoor, although regarded by Blyth (at one time) and
by Gray altogether as merely a variety of the Domestic Goat, is now
universally recognized as a most distinet species, distinguished at
once by its long massive spirally-twisted horns, which readily sepa-
rate it from every other known member of the genus.
It is not found in the Himalayas proper, but extends from the
Pir-panjal range, south of Cashmere, into Afghanistan and Gilgit
on the one side, and the Sulemani range on the other. Colonel
Kinloch, the most recent writer on the larger game of India, states
that four well-marked varieties of the Markhoor are easily recog-
nizable. To two of these—in one of which the horns have a more
open spiral (Capra megaceros), and in the other a closer spiral
(Capra jerdoni)—he assigns distinct specific names*. The living
specimens we have received have belonged, I believe, to the latter
variety. A pair of this species, presented by Major Pollock in 1866,
bred for several years in the Gardens; but we are now, I regret to
say, without any representative of this fine animal.
9. CAPRA JEMLANICA.
Capra jemlanica, Ham.-Smith, Griff. An. King. iv. p. 308.
Capra jemlaica, Sclater and Wolf, Zool. Sketch. ser. i. pl. xxv.
This species and the following have been separated from the true
Goats by Dr. Gray as having ‘‘a moist naked muffle.’ But this is,
I think, a question of degree, as there is certainly a small moist
muffle, although not so well developed, present in some species
of true Capra, for example in Capra sinaitica. These forms, how-
ever, differ from the Goats in their short, thick, and much com-
pressed horns.
The “ Tahr,” as this species is usually called by Iudian sportsmen,
is found on suitable ground along the whole range of the Himalayas,
from Cashmere to Bootan.
We received our first specimen of this fine and most distinct
species in 1852, from Capt. Townley Parker. It was a male, and
* Kinloch, ‘ Large Game Shooting,’ 1885, pp. 136, 142.
318 THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. [June],
lived many years in the Society’s Gardens, where its portrait was
taken by Mr. Wolf. In 1880 the Prince of Wales presented us
with two female examples, mother and young, the latter of which
is still living, and has paired with a male of the same species pre-
sented to us by Colonel Kinloch in 1883.
I am happy to be able to add that there is every appearance
of the female Tahr being likely to increase her species in a short
time.
10. CapRA HYLOCRIUS.
Kemas hylocrius, Ogilby, P. Z.S. 1837, p. 81.
Capra (Ibex) warryato, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H. x. p. 267
(1842).
The “ Neilgherry Ibex,” as this Goat is usually called by Indian
sportsmen, has never, so far as I know, been imported alive into
Europe. Although I have received many letters promising living
specimens for the Society, these animals have always died in India
after a short period spent in captivity.
Although the horns of this species differ somewhat materially from
those of Capra jemlanica in having the external angle in front much
rounded off, I believe the two animals to be nearly allied.
This species is found only in the Neilgherries, Anamallays, and
other adjoining ranges of Southern India.
June 1, 1886.
Dr. A. Giinther, F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair.
The Secretary made the following report on the additions to the
Society’s Menagerie during May 1886 :—
The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of May was 190, of which 123 were by
presentation, 31 by purchase, 18 by birth, 4 received in exchange,
and 14 received on deposit. The total number of departures during
the same period, by death and removals, was 139.
The most noticeable additions during the month were :—
1. An Orange-thighed Falcon (Falco fusec-cerulescens), presented
by Captain W. M. F. Castle, R.N., May 5th, and stated to have
been obtained in Chili. This is the first example of this elegant
species which has been obtained by the Society.
2. Five Senegal Parrots (Pwocephalus senegalus), presented by
R. B. Sheridan, Esq., May 5th. Four of these are young birds
bred in a large aviary at Frampton Court, Dorchester, under the
management and care of the late Mrs. Sheridan. This is of interest,
as these Parrots are rarely known to breed in captivity.
Dr. Giinther, F.R.S., exhibited a specimen of a small fish of the genus
Fierasfer imbedded in a Pearl-Oyster, and made the following
remarks :—
1856.] DR. GUNTHER ON A FIERASFER IN A PEARL-OYSTER. 319
The specimen, which is represented in the accompanying woodcut
of the natural size, has been in my possession for many years. It
is an old shell of Margarita margaritifera, in which there is im-
bedded, behind the impression of the attractor muscle, a perfect
individual of a fish belonging to the genus Fierasfer. The fish is
covered by a thin layer of pearl-substance, through which not only
the general outlines of the body but even the eye and the mouth can
be seen. ‘The parasitic habits of Fierasfer are well known, and
Putnam describes, in the ‘ Proceedings of the Boston Society of
Natural History,’ vol. xvi. 1874, p. 344, a species, Micrasfer dubius,
which is found on both coasts of Central America, but inhabits
Holothurians on the Atlantic, and Pearl-Oysters on the Pacific side ;
and he further mentions, in a footnate, an example belonging to the
320 ON ZOOLOGICAL SPECIMENS IN ROTTERDAM, ETC. [June l,
Museum of Comparative Zoology at Cambridge, in which also a
Fierasfer has been imbedded in the substance of the shell. In this
case, as well as in ours, the fish, instead of introducing itself into
the cavity between the two halves of the mantle, penetrated between
the mantle and the shell, causing irritation to the mollusk, which
the latter resented by immediately secreting the substance with which
the intruder is now covered. It isremarkable’to note that the secre-
tion must have taken place in a very short time, at any rate before
the fish could be destroyed by decomposition.
Mr. Sclater made some remarks on the most interesting objects
noticed in the Zoological Gardens of Rotterdam, Amsterdam, Cologne,
Antwerp, and Ghent, which he had lately visited.
In Rotterdam a pair of Bar-headed Geese (Anser indicus) had
nested and the female was sitting; and a pair of Black-footed Pen-
guins (Spheniscus demersus) had twice laid eggs. Mr. Sclater had
never known either of these species breed 5 “captivity before, but
believed that the former had bred at Antwerp. Specimens of a
Leucopternis (sp. inc.), Epimachus albus, and Carpophaga goliath
were seen in the aviaries.
In Amsterdam the series of Cranes, Herons, and Storks were,
as usual, very complete and the specimens in fine condition, particu-
larly those of Ardea sumatrana and A. herodias. The Spoonbill
was breeding in one of the aviaries. Other rare birds noticed were
examples of Conurus luciani, Alauda tatarica, and Cacalua gymnopis.
At Cologne a fine young male Burchell’s Zebra, born in the
Gardens 19 months ago, had been much admired, and would, it was
hoped, be secured for the Society’s Gardens.
The Gardens at Autwerp were in their usual excellent condition
and very fully stocked. The flock of Barbary Sheep (Ovis trage-
laphus) and herds of Lamas, Guanacos, Alpacas, and Vicunas were
much admired. Amongst other noticeable objects were a pair of
Isabelline Antelopes (Cervicapra tsabellina), three young examples
of Casuarius uniappendiculatus, and several specimens of Ara
glauca, one of which had been obtained for the Society’s collection.
At the small but well-kept Garden of the Société Royale d’ Histoire
Naturelle at Ghent was observed a fine male example of the Ostrich
of Somali-land (Struthio molybdophanes), distinguishable when alive
by its naked bluish skin, and the large red plaque in front of the
tarsus.
A letter was read from Mr. J. M. Cornély, of Tours, C.M.Z.S.,
stating that his pair of Michie’s Deer (Elaphodus michianus) had
bred, and that a young one had been born on the 15th May. ‘The
young one was stated to be nearly of the same colour as the mother,
showing only a few indistinct spots.
The following papers were read :—
1886.] ON THE TRACHEA AND SYRINX IN CERTAIN BIRDS. 321
1. Notes on the Convoluted Trachea of aCurassow (Nothocrax
urumutum), and on the Syrinx in certain Storks. By
Frank E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., Prosector to the
Society.
[Received June 1, 1886.]
My predecessor in the office of Prosector to this Society, Mr. W.
A. Forbes, has summed up all the facts that are known with respect to
the convoluted trachea of Birds in a communication published in the
‘Proceedings’ for 1882(p.347)'. The present note is a supplement to
that paper, and deals with the couvolute! trachea of the male Notho-
erax urumutum. Among the Cracide it is the rule fur the males to
have a convoluted trachea, while it is very unusual for the female to
resemble the male in this respect ; in every case when present the
trachea makes a single loop on the right side of the carina sterni—
sometimes very short, as in Crax globicera; sometimes of great
length, as in Pauxis galeata, where the loop bends up on the right
side of the carina, terminating near to its upper margin. In
Nothocrax urumutum the male has a trachea which makes a single
loop extending to the end of the carina sterni, as shown in the
accompanying drawing (fig. 1, p. 322); the female, as Mr. Forbes
has already pointed out, has a simple trachea.
On a Peculiarity in the Syrinx of Xenorhynchus and Abdimia.
The Order Herodiones appears to be separable into two very
distinct families—the Ardeidz and the Ciconiidz, which differ from
each other in certain anatomical peculiarities ; thus the ambiens is
always absent in the former, and generally, though not always,
present in the latter; the pectoral muscle is separable into two
distinct portions in the Storks, while in the Herons it is only incom-
pletely separated by a tendinous band. Another well-marked differ-
ence is to be found in the structure of the syrinx.
In the Storks* there are no intrinsie muscles; the lowest rings of
the trachea are very slender and cartilaginous, often incomplete ;
and the occasional presence of an upwardly projecting bony piece
from the lateral portions of the last three tracheal rings gives to the
syrinx an appearance not at all unlike that of the Tracheophonine
Passeres. The bronchi are particularly long, “the bifurcation of the
trachea occurring at, or even a little above, the superior aperture of
the thorax ’’*®; the membrane which unites the two bronchi—which
was termed by Garrod the bronchidesmus '—is complete in the Storks,
that is to say, it commences from the very point where the bronchi
diverge ; the rings which make up the bronchi themselves are quite
continuous, as in the Cathartidee, Ostrich, &e.
1 Forbes’s Collected Papers, p. 338.
? Garrod’s Collected Papers, p. 669.
3 Loe, cit. p. 284. * Loe. cit. p, 479.
322 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [June 1,
Trachea of Nothocrax urumutum, ¢.
1886.} TRACHEA AND SYRINX IN CERTAIN BIRDS. 323
In the Ardeidz, on the other hand (including the Herons, Bitterns,
and Seopus, which to this extent is a Heron’), the syrinx has what
may perhaps be called a more typical form. The bronchi are short,
and the rings which compose them are only half-rings, and are com-
pleted on the inner side by membrane; there is a pair of intrinsic
muscles arising beneath the sterno-tracheal muscles and inserted
on to the first bronchial semiring ; the bronchidesmus only commences
at about the level of the fourth or fifth bronchial semiring ; anteriorly,
therefore, there is a free communication between the upper and lower
surface of the bronchi: the first two bronchial rings are more or less
ossified and closely connected with each other and with the preceding
tracheal rings; the latter undergo no modifications such as those
which exist in the Storks, but are of uniform thickness, closely
Syrinux of Ahdimia sphenorhyncha.
applied and often ossified. The foregoing account does not of course
pretend to be a detailed description of the syrinx in the two families,
but it is sufficient to indicate the main differences and to serve as a
basis for comparison of them with tbe syrinx of Xenorhyncius sene-
galensis and of Abdimia sphenorhyncha, which are in some respects
intermediate between the two types.
In Xenorhynchus there is a transition to the Ardeine syrinx in
that the upper rings of both bronchi are incomplete and are (fig. 3)
closed by membrane on the inner side.
It appears therefore that the syrinx of Xenorhynchus agrees with
that of other Storks in the peculiar arrangement of the lowermost
' See F. E. Beddard, “ A Contribution to the Anatomy of Scopus umbretta,”
P. Z.S. 1884, p. 543.
324 ON THE TRACHEA AND SYRINX IN CERTAIN BIRDS. [June I,
part of the trachea, while the presence of a membranous wall com-
pleting internally the upper bronchial half-rings recalls the Ardeine
syrinx. Mycteria americana has a syrinx which is again intérmediate
between that of Xenorhynchus and the typical Sturks; the bronchial
Fig. 3,
Syrinx of Xenorhynchus senegalensis.
rings are complete internally as in the latter, but the rings, instead
of being of uniform width, are considerably narrower on the inner
side of the bronchus, which therefore becomes largely membranous.
Abdimia sphenorhyncha (fig. 2) is another Stork which presents even
a closer resemblance to the Herons in the form of its syrinx ; the mem-
branous inner wall of the bronchi is more largely developed than in
Xenorhynchus, indeed quite as much as in the Ardeide; but there
1286. | ON DRAGONFLIES FROM N.W. INDIA. 325
are no intrinsic muscles, and the bronchidesmus is complete as in
other Storks.
In no other Stork that I have had the opportunity of examining
does the syrinx depart from the type of structure characteristic of
the Ciconice as in the two above-mentioned genera.
Prof. Garrod basalready mentioned that Abdimia and Xenorhynchus
also approach the Herons in the absence of the ambiens muscle ; I
have been able to confirm Garrod’s statement that this muscle is
absent in Abdimia by the dissection of two specimens.
2. On a small Collection of Dragonflies from Murree and
Campbellpore (N.W. India), received from Major J. W.
Yerbury, R.A. By W. F. Kirsy, Assistant in Zoolo-
gical Department, British Museum.
[Received May 17, 1886.]
(Plate XX XIII.)
In acollection of insects recently received by the British Museum
from Major Yerbury, which he had formed at Murree, Campbell-
pore, and other neighbouring localities in N.W. India, between the
months of August and November 1885, were a considerable number
of Dragonflies in good preservation. ‘They were numbered from 1
to 15; but a few were not ticketed. In some cases more than one
species bore the same number, while in others the sexes of a species
bore different numbers. Allowing for this, the actual number of
species exemplified in the collection proved to be 19, four of which
appear to be new to science. Among these 19 species, the most
interesting are, first, the European Sympetrum fonscolombei, De
Selys, which has not been previously recorded from India, so far as
I know; and, secondly, a new species of Micromerus resembling the
common M. lineatus, Burm., but really forming a new section in
the genus.
LIBELLULIDZ&.
LIBELLULINA,
1. PANTALA FLAVESEENS, Fabr.
(No number or locality.)
2. PALPOPLEURA SEXMACULATA, Fabr. (no: 11);
Hassan Abdal and Campbellpore, Oct. 14 and Nov. 14, 1885
(3 2):
3. Lerruemis sabina, Dru. (no. 8).
Hassan Abdal and Campbellpore, Oct. 14 and 28, 1885.
Two males. One bears a memorandum, “lavender abdomen” ;
but there is now no gloss over the black ground-colour.
326 MR. W. F.. KIRBY ON DRAGONFLIES [June I,
4. SYMPETRUM FONSCOLOMBET, De Selys (no. 1).
Murree, over water, Sept. 5 (d).
Undistinguishable from European examples. Major Yerbury
remarks, “ ¢ (7) dull crimson; @ (?) yellowish”; but the only 2
specimens of Sympetrum in the collection are unlabelled, and appear
to belong to an undescribed species.
_ 5. SyMPETRUM SUBPRUINOSUM, sp. n. (Plate XX XIII. fig. 7.)
Exp. al. 60-62 millim.; long. corp. 20-21 millim.
Face olive-green, shading into dull orange above; underparts
varied with yellow ; occiput with black and yellow markings, nearly
as in S. fonscolombei; thorax dull olive-green above, and black
(more or less pruinose) below; pleuree with two wide bright yellow
bands, beneath the front bra is a round yellow spot, beneath the
second one or two, and behind, on each side of the median line, two
more subtriangular yellow spots, coalescing in one specimen. _Abdo-
men black beneath and-at the sides, and yellowish tawny above; the
first six or seven segments are marked behind with a series of black
lines, gradually coalescing with the more extended black markings
on the hinder segments ; “below these the markings on the first three
segments are paler yellow, and there is sometimes an additional
yellow spot on each side on the under surface of the first segment ;
the median crest is also narrowly black, expanding into spots on the
two penultimate segments ; upper appendages black, rather pointed ;
lower appendage convex, hairy. Legs black; tibize sometimes
lined with yellow. Wings with black reticulation, very slightly
yellow at the base; membranule white; 7 antecubital and 6 post-
cubital nervures on the fore wings; pterostigma reddish brown,
between black nervures, 3 millim. in length.
Three females, without locality or date of capture.
The black neuration, unusuaily dark legs, and the pattern of the
thorax are quite sufficient to separate this species at a glance from
S. fonscolombei, De Selys, and striolata, Charp.
6. ORTHETRUM HYALINUM, sp. n. (nos. 6,7). (Plate XX XIII.
figs. 5, 6.)
Exp. al. 55 millim.; long. corp. 33-35 millim.
Male. Head pale straw-yellow, shading into greenish above;
occiput yellow, with three black spots on each side ; thorax and
abdomen pulverulent blue, with a yellow spot at base of abdomen ;
in less adult specimens the thorax is marked nearly as in the female
(vide infra), but darker ; legs striped with black, yellow, and reddish ;
wings clear hyaline beyond the basal membranes ; membranule long
and narrow, white edged with black ; 11-12 antecubital and 8 post-
cubital nervures; pterostigma narrowly yellow, bordered by black
nervures ; upper appendages moderate, smooth, curving downwards,
and recurved and pointed at the tip; lower appendage curved
upwards, about two thirds as long as the others; appendages of the
second segment prominent, hairy, with the anterior lobe sloping
backwards.
1886. ] FROM N.W. INDIA. 327
Female. Head yellow, the upper part greener ; occiput obscurely
spotted ; thorax reddish brown, with two yellow lateral stripes edged
externally with black, and two yellow pleural stripes edged in front
by the black sutural lines; legs varied with black, yellow, and red-
dish ; between the wings runs a row of yellow markings similar to
those found in many female Lidel/uline ; abdomen dull reddish
tawny, with black lateral carinze and a black dorsal stripe, com-
mencing on the second segment and narrowed at all the sutures.
Wings nearly as in the male ; one specimen has thirteen antecubital
nervures,
Campbellpore, Nov. 14(¢ 92); Murree (2), no date; upper
slope of Nian Jani, above Kalabagh, about 9U00 ft., Sept. 16 (2).
Allied to the European O. ce@rulescens, Fabr., and O. ramburii,
De Selys.
7. ORTHETRUM TRIANGULARE, De Selys (nos. 3 and 4).
Murree, Aug. 10 and 16 (3), Aug. 16 and 18 ( 2).
The male much resembles the inky-black O. carnaticum, Fabr.,
which we have from Nepal. The females differ considerably in the
intensity of colouring of the thorax and abdomen. As in some allied
species, the particoloured eyes are remarkable in both sexes, the
upper portion being reddish and the lower parts dark brown.
8. OrRTHETRUM NEGLECTUM, Ramb. (no. 3).
Hassan Abdal and Campbellpore, Oct. 14(3 Q) and Nov. 14
(2).
The female is very similar to that of O. triangulare, but it is
lighter in colour; the wings are clear hyaline (rarely the case in
P. triungulare); and the pleure are uniform yellowish, with a small
black ocellus on the mesopleura.
9. TrirHemMis aurorA, Burm. (Plate XXXIII. fig. 3.)
A somewhat undercoloured male, without date or locality.
The species, which I take to be 7. aurora, has only 10-11 ante-
cubital and 6—8 posteubital nervures on the fore wings, placed rather
widely apart. Like the next species it occurs both in India and
Ceylon, but seems to be rarer. We have no specimens from the
Philippines, the locality given by Burmeister.
10. TRITHEMIS INTERMEDIA, Ramb. (no. 13). (Plate XX XIII.
fig. 4.)
Hassan Abdal, Oct. 14 (3).
May be distinguished from 7’. aurora by the more numerous and
crowded nervures—14-15 antecubital and 8-9 posteubital; the
markings of the thorax beneath resemble those of JZ. rubrinervis,
De Selys.
11. TrrrHemis restiva, Ramb. (no. 12).
Hassan Abdal, Oct. 14 ( ¢.); Campbellpore, Nov. 14 (¢).
328 MR. W. F. KIRBY ON DRAGONFLIES [June 1,
12. CRocoTHEMIS RETICULATA, sp. n.(no. 13). (Plate XX XIII.
figs. 8, 9.)
Campbellpore, Nov. 21 (3). ry
Exp. al. 5°8 millim.; long. corp. 36 millim.
Head red, lower mouth-parts yellowish ; occiput reddish yellow,
obscurely spotted; thorax and abdomen ochreous-yellow (perhaps
reddish when living); thorax with a hexagonal figure bisected by the
median line ; and from the three angles on each side, formed by the
boundary lines, run similar narrow black lines, which are crossed by
the narrow black sutural lines; abdomen with obscure blackish
submarginal lines on its hinder portion; appendages moderate,
recurved, and rather acutely pointed; legs black and ochreous ;
wings hyaline, slightly yellow at the base ; neuration inclining to
reddish ; pterostigma rather large, reddish, edged with black lines ;
11-12 antecubitals, 10 subcubitals.
Allied to C. sorov, Ramb. A somewhat similar reticulation is
indistinctly visible in some females of Orthetrum triangulare.
13. CrocorHEemis soror, Ramb. (nos. 5, 13).
Murree, Aug. 18 (¢ 2); Campbellpore, Nov. 14 (¢ 2).
The Indian form of C. erythrea, Brullé.
CoRDULIINE. ,
14. Macrom1a moore!, De Selys (no, 10). (Plate XXXIII.
fig. 2.)
Chittar, Oct. 9 (3).
This species is remarkably similar to the N.-American I. cingu-
lata, Ramb.
AisCHNUN.
15. ANAX IMMACULIFRONS, Ramb. (no. 10).°
Campbellpore, Nov. 21, 1885 ( 3).
AGRIONID&.
CALOPTERYGINA.
16. NevUROBASis CHINENSIS, Linn. (no. 9).
Hassan Abdal. Taken over running water, Nov. 14, 1883
(3 2).
17. MicROMERUS OBSCURUS, sp. n. (no. 14). (Plate XXXIII.
fig. 1.)
Hassan Abdal, Nov. 14 (¢).
Exp. al. 36 millim.; long. corp. 19 millim.
Resembles M. lineatus, Burm., but will form a new section in the
genus, as there is neither pterostigma nor dark apical spot on the
fore wings.
Head black, behind much varied with dull yellow ; upper part of
the eyes marked within with two large pale spots on each side, the
Mintern Bros imp
Mand Horman-Fisher del et lith
INDIA..
FROM N.W.
DRAGON FLIES
1886. ] FROM N.W. INDIA. 329
hindermost yellower and more distinct; between the hindermost
pair runs a yellow stripe, nearly divided into three; between the
front pair runs a series of four spots, of which the middle pair are
the smallest and placed most forward; in front of these are two
more yellow spots, edged with black ; the rest of the head is yellow,
except the edges of the nasus; a Y-shaped mark running from
between the two last-mentioned pair of yellow spots, and a short
stripe running forward from their outer edges; prothorax black in
front, with a triangle of three yellow spots in the middle, and yellow
at the sides, beneath, and behind; mesothorax black above, with a
V-spot and two yellow longitudinal lines; sides yellow, with two
black sutural stripes, the upper one divided in front by:a brighter
yellow spot; abdomen dull reddish brown, the sutures darker,
preceded by a yellow median spot, edged in front by two short dark
lines ; anal appendages rather large, approximating, those of the second
segment somewhat less prominent than in M. lineatus ; legs yellowish,
darker above. ’
Wings hyaline, yellowish towards the base; five antecubital ner-
vures, the first two interstitial on all the wings; hind wings with a
yellow rhomboidal pterostigma, surmounting about 24 cells; the
extreme base black.
It isnot unlikely that in more brightly coloured or better pre-
served specimens the back of the abdomen may be marked with
yellow, nearly as in M. lineatus.
AGRIONIN&.
18. MeGavesres Masor, De Selys (no. 2).
dg. Captured at Murree, over water, Aug. 7, 1885.
Q. At Kali Pani, Sept. 22, 1885.
19. IscHNURA SENEGALENSIS, Ramb. (no. 15).
Hassan Abdal and Campbellpore, Oct. 14.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXII,
Fig. 1. Micromerus obscurus, sp. n., p. 328.
2, Macromia moorei, De Selys, p. 328.
Trithemis aurora, Burm., var., p. 327.
—— intermedia, Ramb., p. 327.
Orthetrum hyalinum, sp. n., p. 326,
Sympetrum subpruinosum, sp. n., p. 326.
Crocothemis reticulata, sp. n., p. 328.
——, side view.
POI ME ow
Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1886, No. XXII. 92
330 ON THE NESTING OF CALLICHTHYS LITTORALIS. [June 29,
June 29, 1886.
Osbert Salvin, Esq., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair.
The Secretary exhibited, on behalf of Mr. John Brazier, of Sydney,
N.S.W., C.M.Z.S., a series of 55 eggs of the Pacific Porphyrio
(Porphyrio vitiensis), and read a note forwarded by Mr. Brazier
showing the extraordinary fecundity of the individual of this species
which had laid them.
The bird in question was obtained at Maré, Loyalty Islands, in
May 1873, and had been kept in captivity in Sydney until December
1882, when she was accidentally killed by poison. She had laid
eggs as follows :—
1876. June—December ............ ne: Oe EO
VS/ 7 Une LeCeMbDer ay ates cha -steiace © citieie creer eee
S798): <)ime—December- 4/2 ee Se ee Oe es
1879. January, February, and May—December...... 83
1880. January, and March—December ............ 93
1881. January, February, and April-December .... 101
1882. January, February, and April—October ...... 66
‘Poulin "years. 20) Soe ee BON
The Secretary read the following letter, addressed to._him by
Captain J. A. M. Vipan, F.Z.S., on the nesting of a South-American
Siluroid fish (Callichthys littoralis*) in this couatry :—
“ Stibbington Hall, Wansford.
June 25th, 1886.
“ Dear Dr. ScLATER,
«Two Cascaduras (Callichthys littoralis), from Trinidad, that I have
in my aquarium, commenced making a nest on June 6th; but that,
and the one they made on June 9th, they soon pulled to pieces. On
the night of the 11th they began a new ene; it consisted of pieces of
Valisneria, all the leaves of the Nymphea that were growing in the
tank, which they bit off close to the roots of the plants, and a great
quantity of river-moss (Fontinalis antipyretica), each piece being two
or three times the size of the fish, so that they must have had hard
work to bring them to the surface. They worked these materials
together by some mucous substance until the outside was hard, the
whole being under a quarter of an inch thick ; they next buoyed up the
structure with a quantity of mucous foam until it was raised three and
a half inches above the water. The whole nest was nine inches Jong
and seven inches wide, and somewhat resembled a finger-glass turned
upside down on the top of the water, with the interior filled with froth.
The fish kept swimming close under it all the time on their backs
and filling it with foam. When finished, on the 12th, the female
‘ Giinther, Cat. Fishes, v. p. 227; Sclater, P. Z.S. 1885, p. 717.
1886.] MR. BOURNE ON THE FAUNA OF DIEGO GARCIA. 331
shed her spawn between her ventral fins, which were clasped
tight together, and, when full, swam to the nest, and, turning on her
back, deposited the spawn in it; this occurred several times, the male
cach time putting the spawn in its proper place and covering it with
froth. As soon as the female had dropped all her spawn the male
took entire possession of the nest and would not let his mate go
anywhere near it, and treated her so badly that I had to place her
in another tank to save her life. Unfortunately the spawn was not
good, only a few eggs hatching, and the young fishes dying soon
afterwards.
“T have bred great quantities of the little Callichthys punctatus
from the Amazons, but they never made the slightest attempt at
making a nest, always depositing their spawn all over the tank,
and even on the floating thermometer kept in it.
“Yours faithfully,
TAM: Vreaw.”
The following papers were read :—
1. General Observations on the Fauna of Diego Garcia,
Chages Group. By Guiiperr C. Bourne, B.A., New
College, Oxford.
[Received May 15, 1886.]
Diego Garcia is the southernmost atoll of the Chagos group in
the Indian Ocean, lying in S. lat. 7° 13’, and E. long. 72° 23’. It
is of irregular shape, 13 miles long and 6 miles wide, consisting of
a strip of land of an average breadth of a third of a mile, which
nearly encircles the lagoon. The opening lies to the N.W., and is
divided by three small islets into four channels, the largest of which is
more than a mile wide, and deep enough to allow the largest ships
to enter the lagoon. The formation is wholly of coral, aud the land
consists in different localities of sand, accumulated coral-boulders, and
sand-rock or shingle-rock. It nowhere rises toa greater height
than the waves have been able to accumulate fragments of coral,
except in some places, where sand-dunes have been piled up by the
wind to a height of 25 or 30 ft. above high-water level. As is usual
in coral-formations, a reef some 60 yards broad encircles the shores ;
this reef is nearly flat, is composed of a compact finely stratified
coral-limestone, and is just left bare at the very lowest spring-
tides. Growing coral is only found on the outer edge of the reef,
but in some parts the Aleyonarian Heliopore and Tubipore are
found in large numbers on its surface. Many Holothurians,
Echinids, Ophiurids, and Sponges are to be found on the flat surface
of the reef between the tide-marks, and large Tridacne are imbedded
in it, showing the brilliant edges of their mantles above the rock.
The naturalist who wades over the reef at low water will be abun-
dantly rewarded in his search for Mollusca of all kinds, chiefly of
the genera Cassis, Oliva, Turbo, Nerita, Aporrhais, Aplysia, and
pis
332 MR. BOURNE ON THE FAUNA OF DIEGO GARCIA. [June 29,
Peronia; and, by searching among the holes in the reef-rock, tolerably
large specimens of Octopus may be found. Small Scaroids and File-
fishes of great beauty swim rapidly away from the approach of the
observer, and Murznoids of various sizes, chiefly of the genus
Ophichthys, are to be found lurking under the scattered boulders of
the reef. A small species of Periophthalmus is very abundant, but is
very difficult to capture, even in the pools which have been left by
the retreating tide, for it escapes by leaping from pool to pool with
great agility. This species of Periophthalmus appears to differ in
habit from the Pacific species, in that its paired fins are not so well
adapted for progression on land; it leaves the water but rarely, and
is unable to sustain life in the air for a longer period than half an
hour. The boulders at the edge of the sea are occupied by swarms
of crabs of the genus Grapsus ; and the strip of dazzling white sand
that borders the shore is often covered with small white or grey
crabs of the genus Ocypus.
The outer edge of the land is always composed of a heap of coral-
boulders, many of them of considerable size, which have been heaped
up by the waves. This heap of boulders forms a sort of rampart all
round the outer edge of the island, which slopes down to the lower-
lying land, raised only two or three feet above the level of the lagoon
at high tide. The whole island is densely covered with vegetation,
the bushes known by the native names of ‘‘ Manioc”’ (Scevola
kenigit), “ Velouté” (Tourneforlia argentea), and “ Bois de feu”
(Guettarda speciosa) forming impenetrable thickets near the shores.
The central and interior parts of the strip of land are covered with
cocoa-nut palms, beneath which, from the continual decay of the
fallen leaves, a rich peaty mould has become established. The im-
ported animals of the island are donkeys, hogs, fowls, and rats; the
last-uamed swarm on the main island and do great destruction
among the cocoa-nuts, but, curiously enough, they have not yet
found their way to the islets in the mouth of the lagoon. Cattle
do not thrive, but sheep have been imported and appear to do well
on the herbage which covers the more open spaces ; the first con-
signment was unfortunately destroyed by the donkeys, to whom
sheep were utter strangers.
When I arrived at Diego Garcia on September 15th, 1885, Terns
were breeding in countless numbers on some of the less frequented
parts of the island. The dark grey Terns build rough nests, com-
posed of a heap of sticks and leaves piled up in the forks of trees and
bushes ; in each of these a single egg is laid, on which the female sits.
The black-and-white Terns lay a single egg on the bare ground, which
is apparently hatched by the heat of the sun, for I never saw one of
these birds sitting. But it was difficult to make observations, for the
negroes soon took all the eggs, and wantonly destroyed hundreds
of the birds, which couid easily be knocked down with a stick as
they flew screaming round one’s head. As soon as the breeding-
season was over, the number of Terns diminished very considerably ;
it seems that they assemble in these remote islands for breeding, and
fly off to continents and larger islands for the remainder of the year.
1886.] MR. BOURNE ON THE FAUNA OF DIEGO GARCIA. 333
Gannets and Frigate-birds breed at the southern end of the island ;
and although they are well known to be enemies on the wing, the
Frigate-bird pursuing the Gannets and compelling them to disgorge
the fish they have caught, yet they nest close together without
molesting one another. ‘The Gannets were hatching out on my
arrival, but the Frigate-birds did not breed during my stay. The
snow-white Tern, Gygis candida, breeds in considerable numbers ;
the peculiar situation in which this bird lays its egg has been de-
scribed by Mr. Forbes in his recent work (‘ Wanderings of a
Naturalist in the Malav Archipelago’), and I have nothing to add
to his account. Although Whimbrels, small Plovers, Herons, and
Sandpipers are numerous on the island, they do not appear to breed
there. I was assured by the negroes that their eggs were never
found ; and M. Spurs, a former resident on the island and a natura-
list of no mean order, tried during a stay of fifteen years to obtain
the eggs or young of these birds, but without success.
There are no indigenous Mammalia or Amphibia. A species of
Gecko (Platydactylus mauritanicus?) is common, and a Mud-Tortoise
is abundant in some of the marshy pools. The former of these
reptiles has probably come across in ships from Mauritius; but I
eannotaccount for the presence of the latter, which is unlikely to
have been brought over as a pet, for it is abundantly provided with
stink-glands and emits a most unpleasant odour; it cannot have
been brought over to serve any useful purpose, nor is it likely to
have been accidentally imported. Yet, unless it was brought over
by man, it is difficult to imagine how this animal can have found
its way over the sea to so distant a spot as Diego Garcia. The
insect life is not varied; huge cockroaches, mosquitoes, flies, and
ants swarm everywhere and are a great pest. I found a few nests
of Termites or White Ants in decayed cocoa-nut stems, but they
are rare. Of Orthoptera there are two species of Locusta, one of
Acridium, a Forficula, and a Gryllotalpa. Of Lepidoptera I found
three species of Nocturnal and one of Diurnal Moths, and I noticed
a few individuals of Vanessa bolini, and oue individual of (none.
Three species of Aischna were abundant in the marshes. Of
Coleoptera I only found four species. Of Myriapods I found a
Scolopendra, a luminous species of Geophilus, and an Iulus.
The most remarkable inhabitants of the land are the Crabs.
Hundreds of Land-Crabs of the genus Gecarcinus are to be found
in any part of the island, and are a great annoyance to the inhabi-
tants, for they do great destruction in gardens, and prevent the
cultivation of the potato or vegetables. There are several species
of these crabs, one of which attains to a large size and gives
a formidable nip with its large claws ; it is so conscious of its power
that it attacks any person who is walking through the grass in
which it lurks, and is able to give the naked foot of a negroa
severe wound. Large Hermit-Crabs of the genus Cenobita are
found, some of them hiding their abdomens in broken cocoa-nut
shells in lieu of the shells of mollusks, there being but few of the
latter that are large enough. The close relative of these Canobite,
334. MR. BOURNE ON THE FAUNA OF DIEGO GARCIA. [June 29,
Birgus latro, is also found and attains to a great size. I was never
able to watch a Birgus opening a cocoa-nut, though I several times
shut one up in a tub with a cocoa-nut for the purpose, but they
will not feed in captivity. Being nocturnal in their habits, these
animals are difficult to observe ; the account of them given by the
negroes agrees in all respects with that of Forbes in the work above
quoted. Many people have doubted that these ‘‘crabs” are able
to climb palm-trees ; but I have seen them do so myself, and I have
also seen one mount the slender stem of a “ Bois de feu”? till it
arrived at a projecting branch, along which it then proceeded to
climb, clinging underneath it like a sloth. Birgus, however, does
not mount the palms in order to rob them of the cocoa-nuts, but to
obtain shelter among the thick tuft of leaves at the summit.
The large lagoon of Diego Garcia affords an excellent harbour, in
spite of the coral patches which rise to the surface in many places,
the courses for ships having been carefully buoyed out. The lagoon
abounds with fish, which are all eaten; the most common sorts
caught by hook and line are the well-known Surgeon Fishes,
‘*Vielles” (Wovacula), and some species of Percoids, Large Hammer-
headed Sharks (Zygena malleus) are found in some parts of the
harbour, and specimens of the common Blue Shark (Carcharias
glaucus) are very common. On one occasion we captured twenty-
three young specimens of this species in a single haul of the net.
The climate is very damp and oppressive; the thermometer
rarely exceeds 86° F. by day, or falls below 78° F. at night; but
although the heat is not excessive, the heavy moisture-laden atmo-
sphere is very trying to European constitutions.
An incredible amount of rain fell during my four months’ stay on
the island ; it was only during the last three weeks of my visit that
we had anything like fine brilliant weather. On such days the
bright green foliage illuminated by the tropical sun, the dazzling
white sand bordering the lagoon, and the clear blue or, in the shal-
lower parts, green waters of the lagoon afford a striking picture of
peculiar beauty which is well worth seeing.
I have to express my thanks to the authorities of the Orient
Steam Navigation Company, who faciliated my voyage in every way,
and kindly permitted me to reside at their coaling-station during a
large part of my visit; and to M. Jules Leconte, the kind and hos-
pitable manager of the oil-stations on the main island, whose guest I
was for a long time, and who spared no trouble in assisting me in
my researches,
1886.] MR. H. SAUNDERS ON BIRDS FROM DIEGO GARCIA. = 335
2. On the Birds obtained by Mr. G.C. Bourne on the Island
of Diego Garcia, Chagos Group. By Howarp SaunpDeErs,
F.L.S., F.Z.S., &e.
[Received June 14, 1886.]
I have had much pleasure in examining the small collection of birds
obtained by Mr. Bourne on his visit, described in the preceding paper,
to this little-known island or group of islets. As will be seen by
the following list, the species are but few in number, and some of
them are of either a pelagic or a regularly migratory nature ;
the general character of the avifauna is, however, Indian rather
than Ethiopian, with the exception of one (doubtless introduced)
Madagascar bird.
Mr. Bourne’s remarks are added in square brackets.
1. FoupIaA MADAGASCARIENSIs (Linn.). ‘* Cardinal.”
This species was no doubt introduced from Mauritius.
(No. 4. ¢. Eye brown. Sept. 30th, 1885. One specimen in
spirits.
Ernie, They were building during my stay, but though I
examined several nests I never found an egg. The negroes said that
they could find me the eggs, but never did. The nest, loosely
constructed of grass, is dome-shaped, with a circular entrance at the
side. |
2. Freeata aquiva (Linn.). “ Frigate.”
[No. 2. ¢. Sept. 29th, 1885. Eye dark brown. Naked skin
on the throat lavender-coloured.
Common, and may often be seen chasing Terns and Boobies till
they make them disgorge their fish, as described by Mr. H. O.
Forbes in his recent work. I have never seen Frigate-birds fishing
for themselves ; they are said to do so sometimes, but very rarely.
Their flight is magnificent ; [ have seen one wheeling round and
round in circles for at least five minutes without once flapping its
wings, during which time it must have covered a mile of ground. }
A bird in immature plumage, passing into the adult stage. A
very similar example in this state is described in P. Z. S. 1880, p. 63.
3. Suxa prscaTor (Linn.).
[No. 15. ¢ adult. Common at the south end of the island. }
4. ARDEA COROMANDA (Bodd.). ‘‘ Macaque blanc.”
[No. 11. 3. Eye lemon-yellow. Skin at base of beak yellow.
Very rare on these islands, and appears only during the N.W.
monsoons. It is supposed to come over from the Maldives. |
This specimen presents some difficulty, as it is in winter plumage,
but I think it is the Indian species and not the African Ardea
bubulcus. The latter is found in Madagascar, and is believed to
breed there in September, so that the African species would be in
336 MR. H. SAUNDERS ON BIRDS FROM DIEGO GARCIA. [June 29,
nuptial dress at the date of Mr. Bourne’s visit, whereas this example
is not so.
5. Buroripes JAvANICA (Horsf.). “ Macaque.”
[No. 1. ¢. Sept. 22nd, 1885. Eye light golden-yellow. Skin
at base of beak yellow.
No. 10. 2. East islet, 28th October, 1885.
These birds are common, and may be seen any evening standing
by the rock-pools, or on the beach at low water, on the look-out for
fish. They are rather shy, and when alarmed fly off with a shrill
cry like kac-kae kac-kac kac.]
6. Trinca suBpARQquata (Guldenst.).
[No. 14. ¢. Eye black.
Tolerably common, frequenting spots where slimy mud is left bare
at low water. |
7. NumeNtus pH2£opus (Linn.). ‘ Corbijeu.”’
[No. 13. g. Eye black.
Common, but very shy and difficult to approach. I only got one
shot during my stay.]
8. STREPSILAS INTERPRES (Linn.). ‘‘ Alouette-de-Mer.”
[No. 6. 9. October 22nd, 1885. Eye dark brown.
Common on soft marshy ground. They usually fly in flocks of
twenty to thirty. ]
9. DRoMAS ARDEOLA.
[No. 12. g. Eye black.
Common along the outer shores and in marshy places. Wary
and difficult to approach. |
The fact that the Crab-Plover breeds in burrows and lays a single
white egg, similar to that of a Shearwater, has been known for some
years. (See P. Z.S. 1881, p. 259.)
10. STERNA BERNSTEINI, Schlegel. ‘* Goeland.”’
[No. 9. g. October 9th, 1885. Eye black. Not common. }
An immature specimen of this very rare Tern, the adult breeding-
dress of which is still unknown. It is nearly of the size of Sterna
bergit, from which it may be distinguished by the very light colour
of the mantle and by the white tail-coverts. We have yet to learn
whether the adult in nuptial dress has a white frontal band at the
base of the bill, as in S. bergti, or whether the black of the forehead
comes down to the bill as in most other Terns. The present species is
known from Halmaheira on the one side, and the Rodriguez waters
on the other, and that is about all that can be said. The type from
the first-named locality is in the Leyden Museum; there are two
examples from Round Island and Ile de la Baleine, near Mauritius,
in the collection of Messrs. A. and E, Newton ; two more from the
island of Rodriguez are in the British Museunt of Natural History ;
the present is the sixth example I have examined.
1886.] THE INTERVERTEBRAL DISK OF THE AXIS IN MAN. 337
1], SreRNA MELANAUCHEN, Temm.
[No. 8. dg. October 9th, 1885. Eye black.
Common. I have seen this bird pursued by the Noddy Tern,
just as they themselves are pursued by the Frigate-bird. |
It would be interesting to know if this species breeds in Diego
Garcia, because, if so, the locality would be the furthest S.W. as yet
recorded.
12. SreRNA FULIGINOSA, Linn.
[No. 7. 2. October 8th, 1885. Eye black. Very common.
These birds were laying when I arrived on Sept. 15, and single
eggs were scattered on the bare ground. The negroes soon took
all the eggs, and I could not make observations on the breeding. }
13. Gye1s cANDIDA (Gm.).
[No. 3. gd. Sept. 25th, 1885.
Very common, perching in the cocoa-nut trees, and laying a single
egg in the axils of the leaves, as described by Darwin in his ‘ Journal
of Researches.’ |
14. Anous stoxipvus (Linn.).
[No. 5. 2. October 2nd, 1885. Eye black.
Common on the island. It constructs a large rough nest of a
heap of sticks and leaves, in the fork of a tree or bush, and on this
it lays one egg, upon which it sits. |
[A bird called by the inhabitants the “Mangeur des Poules” was
said to visit the island frequently during the N.W. monsoons, but
I never saw one. Perhaps it may be Tinnunculus punctatus, which
goes by the same name in Mauritius; but if so it is not easy to see
why it should visit Diego Garcia only in the N.W. monsoons.
** Fouquets”’ are abundant on the Ile des Vaches marines at
Peros Bauhos, and are said to have been seen on the Ile des Oiseaux,
Diego Garcia, but I never saw one. From the descriptions given me
they seem to be a species of burrowing Petrel. |
3. On the Intervertebral Disk between the Odontoid Process
and the Centrum of the Axis in Man. By J. Buanp
Surron, F.R.C.S., Lecturer on Comparative Anatomy,
Middlesex Hospital Medical School.
[Received May 29, 1886.]
There are few bones in the human skeleton which can boast a
more extensive literature than the atlas and axis. Indeed so many
investigations have been made concerning their nature, and so much
has been written regarding the morphology of the first two vertebra,
that most anatomists have abandoned them for more fertile regions
of the skeleton. Yet, in spite of this attention, a new fact in con-
nection with the axis has recently been disclosed by Prof. Cunningham
338 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON THE INTERVERTEBRAL [June 29,
in a paper published in the ‘ Journal of Anatomy and Physiology’ for
January of the present year. The object of this paper was to draw
attention to the circumstance that if a section be carried vertically
through the long axis of the second vertebra in an adult there will
be found in the majority of cases a small strip of cartilage oceupying
the position indicated in the drawing (fig. 1).
Prof. Cunningham states that whilst engaged in an investigation
into the curves of the spinal column in Man and the Apes he made
mesial sections of a large number of frozen human spines. His
Fig. 1.
A vertical section through the body of the axis to show the lenticular-shaped
piece of cartilage, c.
attention was attracted to a small lenticular-shaped plate of cartilage,
which seemed in almost every case to be interposed between the os
odontoideum and the body of the axis vertebra; on all sides it was
surrounded by bone, so that it could only be brought into view by
means of sections.
The observations were made on eighteen axis vertebra, but three
were eliminated on account of difficulty in ascertaining the age
of the subjects. The fifteen remaining specimens were divided into
three groups according to their age.
The first group comprised six axes, two from females and four from
males, varying in age from twenty-four to fifty. In all the cartilage
was present, measuring 4 mm. in length and 2 mm. in thickness.
The second set comprised three specimens from females, varying
in age from fifty to sixty years. The cartilage was present, and of
the same dimensions as in the younger bones in the previous set.
The third group consisted of six examples, two males and four
females, the limits of age being from sixty to seventy. In four of
the axes the lenticular disk was present, and measured in length
3 mm. and in width 1} mm. In the two oldest examples the disk
was absent.
The cartilage in the youngest specimen, a girl aged twenty-four
years, was found to be of the hyaline type, with evidence in some of
the sections of a sluggish ossific process around the margin; but
remains of the notochord could not be detected.
18865. | DISK OF THE AXIS IN MAN. 339
On becoming acquainted with these observations of Prof. Cun-
ningham, I lost no time in testing the statements by independent
observation, and am able to confirm them in every particular.
As in so many other instances, it is not remarkable that this piece
of cartilage should exist, but that it has remained so long undetected.
My intention in bringing the subject under the notice of the
Society is not merely to confirm Cunningham’s statement, but to
show that the presence of this piece of cartilage, in the midst of the
axis, merely harmonizes with the condition of things found in situa-
tions where other vertebrae normally fuse together, as for example
in the sacrum.
Before discussing the question it will be desirable to briefly review
the chief facts connected with the development of the axis.
A diagram of the axis yertebra to show the various nuclei. The dotted portions
represent cartilage. s, the suspensory ligament, marking the former
position of the notochord; ¢, e, epiphyses.
In common with the majority of the vertebrae, the axis ossifics
from three primary centres—one for the centrum, and two lateral
for the laminze and processes.
Subsequently two nuclei appear for the odontoid process, arranged
side by side as represented in fig. 2. After birth these centres fuse,
and an additional nucleus, detected by Prof. Humphry, is deposited
for the tip of the odontoid process, usually visible about the second
year. Finally two epiphysial plates appear to complete the ossi-
fication of the true centrum of the axis, as shown in the figure. As
growth proceeds the various nuclei fuse, the cartilage becomes re-
placed by bone, except the piece referred to at the commencement
of the paper, and the growth of the bone is complete. The band of
fibrous tissue passing from the summit of the odontoid process
represents the thickened sheath of the notochord, and is known as
the suspensory ligament.
Turning our attention to the sacrum, we shall find in that bone an
explanation of the persistence of the piece of cartilage which remains
unossified in the axis. The sacrum in man is composed of five fused
vertebree. The body of each of the segments has its centre for the
340 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON THE INTERVERTEBRAL [June 29,
body and two additional centres for the epiphysial plates, as in other
regions of the spine. When the segments of the sacrum commence
to ankylose, the adjacent epiphysial plates fuse with each other
before they join the bodies of the vertebree to which they belong.
This fusion of epiphyses is of a deceptive character, for it does not
occur throughout the whole width of these bony menisci, but only
around their circumferences. Hence if a section be carried through
the sacrum, a piece of cartilage may be detected situated in a central
cavity, the boundaries of which are constituted by the epiphysial
plates; this piece of cartilage persists long after the various seg-
ments of the sacrum have, from all external evidence, become
Fig. 3.
A section through the human sacrum, showing the epiphysial plates uniting
with each other peripherally before fusing with their centra.
firmly united. This remarkable arrangement of the epiphysial plates
is represented in fig. 3.
It is quite possible that this mode of fusion is applicable to the
cervical vertebrze of Whales; for an examination of this region of the
column in a young Porpoise shows well-marked indications of
peripheral union of the epiphysial plates, whilst they are still
separate from the bodies of the vertebrae to which they respectively
belong. My attention was first drawn to this question when
examining the sacral vertebree of a young skeleton of the Great
Anteater, Myrmecophaga jubata. After the skeleton had been
macerated, the sacrum broke up into its component elements, the
epiphysial plates separated from the vertebra, but the contiguous
plates were firmly united in pairs.
So far as my observations on other mammals have extended, this
mode of fusion appears to be general.
There are other points in the axis which demand some notice. 1
was unaware, until reading Prof. Cunningham’s paper, that any
1886. ] _DISK OF THE AXIS IN MAN. 341
modern anatomist doubted the existence of two lateral nuclei for the
main portion of the odontoid process; but if any one examine the
axis of a human feetus at the eighth month of intra-uterine life, he will
have all doubts as to the duplicity of this centre removed (see fig. 2).
Another matter of considerable interest is the existence or non-
existence of an epiphysial plate for the upper surface of the ¢rue
centrum of the axis. Cunningham considers it to be absent; but it
is certainly present, and may be detected in section of the axis at the
time the epiphysial plates make their appearance in other parts of
the spine. In Cunningham’s paper reference is made to Macalister’s
observation that the two epiphysial plates are present in the axis
vertebra of Balenoptera rostrata, and that it can be detected in some
eases in Man. Prof. Humphry has described and figured the upper
plate in a Rabbit.
On the other hand, Prof. Flower’ figures the axis of a man with
Fig. 4.
Axis vertebra of a young Seal in section, showing the epiphysial plates
of the true centrum of the axis, ¢, ¢.
these plates present, as though it were an accepted fact, but describes
the upper one as being represented by irregular ossifications.
In order to test this pot I have secured the axis vertebra from
many young animals. Asa result of the investigation, I find two
epiphysial plates for the axis present in the following :—
Primates.... Man. Spider-Monkey, Aéeles paniscus; Bonnet-
Monkey, Macacus sinicus.
Ungulata .. Horse. Axis Deer. Giraffe. Sheep.
Carnivora .. The Leopard. The Domestic Cat. Seal.
Other anatomists have reported it in :—
Ungulata .. Foetal Horse ( Macalister’).
Cetacea .... Balenoptera rostrata ( Macalister’).
Rodentia.... Rabbit (Humphry °*).
1 © Osteology of the Mammalia.’
2 Journal of Anat. and Physiology, vol. iii, p. 54; and Phil. Trans. 1868.
3 «The Human Skeleton,’ p. 129.
342 THE INTERVERTEBRAL DISK OF THE AXIS IN MAN. [June 29,
As the upper epiphysis of the axis exists in forms so widely dif-
ferent as a Cat and a Whale, or a Monkey and a Horse, there can be
very little doubt that it is a very general condition which has been
overlooked simply because it has not been sought.
The reason why I have been able to give an account of the axis in
the specimens enumerated in the preceding list is explained by the
fact that for some time past I have been collecting immature axes
for another purpose ; thus, having a goodly stock, I utilized them
for the purpose of this paper.
As a matter of convenience the following list of probable dates in
the appearance of the individual nuclei of the axis is appended :—
Centres for laminze, 8th week.
Centres for body, 12th to 16th week.
Nuclei for os odontoideum, 5th month.
Centre for tip of odontoid process, 2nd year.
Epiphysial plates, about 16th year.
By the twentieth year all parts of the bone are consolidated,
except the lenticular portion between the axis and the odontoid
process.
The interest of the question centres itself around the additional
evidence afforded to the view that the odontoid process is the body
of the atlas united with the axis, as was hinted by Cuvier, but first
clearly made out by the admirable researches of Rathke’, and
subsequently confirmed by many competent observers.
P.S. (July 30th, 1886).—In the discussion which followed the
reading of this paper, Mr. J. W. Hulke drew attention to the im-
portance of the above observations in so far as they independently
confirmed Prof. Albrecht’s recent view expressed in a paper entitled,
“Uber die Wirbelkérperepiphysen und Wirbelkérpergelenke zwischen
dem Epistropheus, Atlas und Occipitale der Saugethiere.” (See
‘Die Comptes Rendus der achten Sitzung des internationalen medi-
cinischen Kongresses, Kopenhagen,’ 1884.)
At the time my paper was read I was ignorant of Albrecht’s re-
search in this particular direction. However, a careful perusal of
the paper in question convinces me that the epiphysis in the midst
of the axis really represents, as Albrecht insists, two epiphyses, viz.,
that belonging to the cranial end of the axis and that appertaining
to the caudal end of the atlas (odontoid process). Regarding the
“centroidal ’? masses more observations are required, and the subject
is one of great interest.
«Entwickelung der Schildkroten.’
1886.] ON RHOPALOCERA FROM THE SOLOMON ISLANDS. 343
4, Note on an Ectoparasite of the Menobranch.
By Prof. R. Ramsay Wricut, F.Z.S.
[Received June 24, 1886.]
The specimens of Menobranchus recently brought by me from
Toronto and presented to the Society’s Collection were infested
by an ectoparasitic Trematode, Sphyranuria osleri, mihi, which I
first described in the ‘ Proceedings of the Canadian Institute,’
Toronto, 1878. The preserved specimens on which I founded my
description enabled me to determine the zoological position of this
parasite, which turned out to be an interesting form intermediate
between Gyrodactylus and Polystomum ; but I was obliged to postpone
any closer investigation into its anatomy till I had access to fresh
specimens. I have recently had abundant opportunity of securing
these, and I propose shortly to publish elsewhere the results of my
studies.
In view of the interest attaching to a certain parallelism between
the phylogeny of the Polystomide and that of their hosts, I take the
present opportunity of referring to the desirability of examining any
Urodela which may die in the Reptile House, in case of possible
additions to this interesting family of Trematoda.
5. Descriptions of some new Species of Rhopalocera from
the Solomon Islands. By Grervase F. Maruew, Staff-
Paymaster Royal Navy, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &c.
[Received June 11, 1886.]
(Plate XXXIV.)
During nearly a four years’ Commission on the Australian Station,
H.M.S. ‘Espiégle’? was employed for a greater part of her time
among the islands of the Western Pacific, and, upon two occasions,
paid brief visits to the Solomon Islands. _ It is to be regretted that
she did not prolong her stay at this charming group, for, from the
little seen of them, they appeared to be, entomologically speaking, a
perfect paradise, being clothed from water’s edge to mountain’s peak
with the most luxuriant and varied tropical vegetation.
But a serious drawback to collecting was the hostility and
treachery of the natives. At many places they were cannibals, and
extreme caution had to be exercised when landing—indeed at some
places collecting was quite out of the question, as it would have been
almost certain death to have ventured into the forest alone. When
the natives have had more intercourse with white men it is to be
hoped that they will become more civilized, and discontinue their, at
present, unpleasant customs. Now they look upon all white men
344 MR. G. F. MATHEW ON NEW [June 29,
as their natural enemies, though it is a well-known fact that this
state of feeling has to a great extent been created by the white men
themselves, who have committed the gravest excesses, and often
deliberate murders, while engaged in obtaining recruits for the labour
vessels. Until this abominable traffic is abolished it would be unsafe
to land at any of the larger islands, except under the escort of a strong
and well-armed party. The natives are extremely revengeful, and
recollect and treasure up an injury. Their notion of justice is blood
for blood, a head for a head, so that in several instances in which
white men have been murdered the innocent have suffered for the
guilty.
The first place we called at was Ugi, one of the smallest and
easternmost islands of the group. Here, fortunately, the natives
were all friendly, and an English trader (Mr. Stephens) had resided
there for several years, being employed as an agent buying and
collecting “copra”’ for some Sydney firm. There is also a small
depot for coal at this island, and our men-of-war occasionally call,’
and no labour traffic is permitted, so that the natives at this island
were beginning to trust white men.
Ugi is about twenty miles in circumference, for the most part hilly,
and covered with dense forest. In the immediate vicinity of the
villages there are small clearings where yams, taro (Caladium
esculentum), and a little sugar is cultivated. Cocoa-nut palms grow
all over the island, but especially near the beach, where, in some
places, their waving crests form a graceful fringe. Bread-fruit trees
are also plentiful near the villages.
We anchored just off Mr. Stephens’s hut, at the back of which
there was about a couple of acres of ground which had been cleared
a year before, but which, at the time of our visit, was overgrown with
a dense mass of weeds. Here Butterflies were numerous, especially
Danais archippus and a species of Precis allied to P. ida, Hypolimnas
bolina, H. alimena, &c. A very interesting case of mimicry occurred
here. A dark-brown Euplea with broad white outer margins
(EB. brenchleyi, Butl.), and Danais insolata, Butl., with markings
almost identical, were fairly plentiful ; but, to add to the confusion
of things, a Hypolimnas, which on the wing might have been mistaken
for either, was flying with them! Which mimicked which it was
difficult to say, or the reason of the mimicry, as all three genera are
avoided by birds both in the larva and perfect states. .
We remained at Ugi for three days, one of which was devoted to
an expedition across the island to a large village on the other side.
We breakfasted early and landed at 7 o’clock—a party of five of us,
some being armed. On the beach we found a couple of natives,
whom we had engaged the previous evening, waiting to show us the
way. After leaving Mr. Stephens’s hut the trail led through the
dense forest, and was so narrow that we were seldom able to walk
more than one abreast. Everything at this early hour was reeking
with moisture, and in some places the trees were so thick overhead
that the path below was enshrouded in gloom. At first no Butter-
flies were seen, but as the sun gained strength the heavy dew
1886.] RHOPALOCERA FROM THE SOLOMON ISLANDS. 345
disappeared, and a few were noticed flying high among the branches
and quite out of reach. This was very tantalizing, and we must
have walked nearly two miles before the first was captured. This was
Drusilla phorcas, Westw., a low-flying but most conspicuous black-
and-white species. Species of Danais and Euplea were the next to
appear ; and then, whenever we passed any open spots, Lycenidee
of various kinds became rather numerous; but altogether Butterflies
could not be called abundant in this shady forest. A great many
more were seen than captured, for every now and then a large Papilio
dashed across the path, and was lost in the forest before one had time
to make a stroke at it. Overhead cockatoos and parrots were
screaming, and pigeons and doves cooing among the branches ; but
the trees were so lofty, and the leaves so thick, that it was almost
impossible to see them, and only one of the latter was obtained.
Upon nearing the village, about noon, our guides set up a great
shouting to apprise the inhabitants of our approach, and upon
entering it we were surrounded by a crowd of naked savages, who
seemed to be very pleased to seeus. We walked through the village
and examined the various huts, which were very well constructed, and
were much better built than those we had previously met with at the
New Hebrides. After seeing all there was to be seen, we sat down
in the shade of one of the huts and discussed our lunch, the natives
boiling our solitary pigeon and some yams which they gave us, and
very good they were.
After lunch [ strolled about the clearings near the village, followed
by a crowd of natives, who were much interested in my proceedings,
and soon began to take an active part in the sport, and it was
amusing to see them running madly after Butterflies with small
bushes in their hands, with which they made frantic efforts to knock
them down. Of course they very often succeeded, for they were
extremely nimble, and then the broken fragments were brought to
me in triumph, and I had to pretend to be much pleased. Butter-
flies were fairly numerous in these clearings, and I captured among
others several of the fine Papilio erskinei described further on. After
the others had had an hour's rest, we started back and got on board
again about six o’clock, pretty tired with our day’s excursion, for in
some places it was most fatiguing, especially up-hill, where the path
frequently took us over slippery soap-stones, which made walking
very difficult and unpleasant.
We left Ugi the following day, and after stopping for a few hours
off Tesemboko in the island of Guadaleanar, proceeded to the Duke
of York Islands.
Our next visit to the Solomon Islands was in September 1883,
when we stayed for three days in Blanche Harbour, Treasury Island,
at the entrance of the Bougainville Straits. The harbour is a very
beautiful one, being almost landlocked by other small islands, all of
which are hilly and densely wooded. Unfortunately it rained
nearly the whole time we were there ; but during the intervals of fine
weather, when I was able to get on shore, I could not go very far, as
I was only just recovering from a severe attack of fever, and was too
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXIII. 23
346 MR. G. F. MATHEW ON NEW [June 29,
weak for much exertion. My hunting-ground was therefore confined
to a slope on the hillside at the back of the native village, which
had recently been cleared for yam-planting. Here Butterflies were
more numerous than at Ugi; and if the weather had been more
favourable, and I had been able to get about more, I believe I should
have taken a large number. As it was I secured examples of several
new species, Papilio bridget being among them. The most plentiful
were a Precis near P. ada, but very differeut ‘to the Ugi form,
Hypolimnas alimena, very fine, and several species of Zuplea. Danais
archippus was not seen at all in this place, although it was so common
at Ugi; perhaps its migration had not yet extended so far in a north-
westerly direction.
From the little I have seen of the Solomon Islands, I feel quite
convinced that when they are properly worked they will yield a large
number of new and interesting Rhopalocera, and I hope on a future
occasion to be able to describe some more new species.
ARGYRONYMPHA, 0D. gen.
Head moderately large, hairy between the eyes; eyes rather
prominent, smooth ; antenne long, slender, extending to beyond two
thirds of costa, with a long, gradually-thickened club: palpi
conspicuous, pea-green, porrect, ascendant, clothed outwardly at their
base with fine short white hairs, the hairs less numerous towards the
tip and dark grey; tip black, finely pointed: thorax rather short:
abdomen almost as long as hind wings, slender, pinched in at base,
and with a brush-like tuft of hairs at base of genital organs in male.
Fore wings rather long and narrow in male, broader in female ; costa
moderately arched, convex at base; apex somewhat acute in male,
truncated in female; hind margin entire, oblique; inner margin
straight, hairy to beyond the middle; anal angle slightly obtuse ;
nervures of fore wings dilated at base ; cell narrow, rather long; first
subcostal nervule emitted just before end of cell; discocellular
nervules pointing outwards ; median nervure and first discocellular
nervule forming a moderately acute angle. Hind wings: costa
elbowed at base, very slightly concave at one third, and rounded off
at apex ; hind margin very moderately sinuate ; inner margin slightly
grooved. First pair of legs imperfect, rather pubescent, pale green ;
second and third pairs long, slender, smooth.
This interesting genus does not appear to come very near any yet
described, but bears some relationship to Hypocysta, Westw., and
Nissanga, Moore.
These beautiful little Butterflies were local in their habits and of
retiring disposition, frequenting shady spots in the dense forest.
When disturbed, they flew but a short distance and settled upon the
leaf of some low shrub, always on its upper surface. They were
rather restless, and generally walked several times round the margin
of the leaf, and then flitted off to the next. While so engaged their
wings were kept erect, and the bright metallic spots and stripes made
them very conspicuous.
1886.] RHOPALOCERA FROM THE SOLOMON ISLANDS. 347
ARGYRONYMPHA UGIENSIS, n. sp. (Plate XXXIV. fig. 3.)
Male and female.— Upperside orange-red : primaries with a black
marginal border extending on costa from end of cell to rather beyond
middle of inner margin ; border very broad at apex, constricted and
narrowest at second median nervule, widening out again at first
median nervule : secondaries, costablackish brown, base and margins
broadly clouded with dusky, and with some indistinct dusky markings
across disk ; a black and rather indistinct submarginal line widening
out between subcostal nervules into a linear-shaped blotch ; all the
nervures dusky. Underside: primaries orange-red, not quite so
bright as upperside ; a submarginal silvery stripe bordered outwardly
by a narrow very dark fuscous line; a short oblique silver stripe
extends from inner margin near hinder angle to halfway between
first and second median nervules, and with its apex almost touching
the submarginal stripe: secondaries, basal half greyish ochreous,
thickly irrorated with minute black dots; an oblique reddish-brown
stripe from near costa crosses the wing, and encloses upper part of
cell and terminates near anal angle; this is bordered outwardly by a
curved or double crescent-shaped silvery band, which is again
bordered by a pale ochreous-yellow band ; a narrow submarginal line
of silver bordered outwardly by reddish ochreous, and inwardly, from
submedian nervure to discoidai nervule, by reddish brown ; between
the discoidal nervule and first subcostal nervule there are four jet-
black and somewhat square-shaped spots, with their bases resting on
the submarginal line ; between first and second subcostal nervules
are two additional black spots, above the others, the space between
them, which is ochreous, forming a complete St. George’s Cross, and
the whole inwardly bordered by a silvery band; between submedian
nervure and two median nervules a silvery horseshoe-mark bordered
outwardly and inwardly by reddish brown; all the wings margined
by a line of dark reddish brown. The silvery markings have
opalescent tints in various lights.
Exp. 42 millim.
Hab. Ugi, Solomon Islands.
ARGYRONYMPHA PULCHRA, n. sp. (Plate XXXIV. fig. 4.)
Male and female.—Upperside dark brown; basal third of fore
wings reddish brown. Underside: primaries, basal portion, including
cell and a little beyond on costa and inner margin, grey, thickly
irrorated with minute black dots ; a silvery submarginal band from
rather before apex on costa to hinder angle, where it forms an elbow
and turns back and runs parallel to itself as far as third median
nervule, this is bordered inwardly by dark chestnut ; a pale yellowish
stripe from near apex to first median nervule, its lower half between
the silver bands ; beyond this to grey part of wing a broad band of
chestnut : secondaries, basal part, including half of cell to near anal
angle, grey, thickly irrorated with minute black dots ; beyond this a
band of chestnut from inner margin two thirds across wing towards
anal angle ; this is bc rdered outwardly by an elbowed stripe of silver
23*
348 MR. G. F. MATHEW ON NEW [June 29,
which is continued round by anal angle, forming a submarginal
stripe, to apex, whence it forms a curve as far as discoidal
nervure; a silver A-shaped mark between second median and
discoidal nervule, the bases nearly resting on submarginal stripe; a
subcrescent-shaped silver stripe near anal angle divided by first
inedian nervule ; four small square black confluent spots just above
submarginal stripe, between discoidal and second subcostal nervules ;
above these, two ochreous lunules bordered above, as far as outer
edge of silvery curved band, by a large black irregularly-shaped
blotch ; space between arms of A-shaped mark, and inner edge of
submarginal stripe between second median nervule and submedian
nervure, deep chestnut ; a large black lunular spot between first
and secend median nervules, its inner edge touching the subcrescent-
shaped silver stripe. Thorax reddish brown; some bluish-green
hairs on collar and between eyes; eyes dark reddish brown, bright
red when the insect is alive.
Exp. 39 millim.
Hab. Treasury Island, Solomon Islands.
PAPILIO XENOPHILUS, N. sp.
Male.—Upperside dark brown : primaries—a_ straw-coloured
transverse marginal band slightly curved inwards towards the apex,
Straight on the outer edge and nearly parallel with hind margin,
rather clouded on inner edge; nervures crossing band dark brown
and clouded at their edges: secondaries tailed, scolloped ; a straw-
coloured transverse and somewhat outwardly dentated band from
costa, near apex, to inner margin just above anal spot; anal spot
indistinct, composed above of blue and below of pinkish-yellow atoms ;
indentations whitish. (nderside: primaries, same as above but
band paler: secondaries, no band, but instead-a series of seven
whitish-yellow spots, the three near anal angle and one at apex near
costa small and indistinct, the other three large and oblong-oval ;
beyond these spots patches of bluish atoms; a marginal row of
indistinct orange-yellow spots, above each of which is a cloudy
pyriform blotch; an orange-yellow spot at anal angle, bordered
above by a few blue atoms.
Exp. 110 millim.
Hab. Ugi, Solomon Islands.
This species comes near P. capaneus, Westw., but differs in
having the bands right across the wings, and in the markings of the
underside.
PAPILIO ERSKINEI, n. sp. (Plate XXXIV. fig. 1.)
Male.—Upperside greenish black : primaries with a marginal band
of eight large creamy-yellow spots curved inwards at the apex,
extending from subcostal to submedian nervure, and with indications
of another spot between submedian nervure and inner margin, and a
short dash of the same colour between the subcostal nervure and
costa, and just above the subcostal spot ; base of cell dusted with a
the ox
1886. | RHOPALOCERA FROM THE SOLOMON ISLANDS. 349
few minute yellowish atoms: secondaries not tailed, margins
scolloped ; a broad transverse outwardly-sinuated greenish creamy-
white fascia, its inner margin touching, but not extending into,
discoidal cell; a conspicuous orange-red oval spot at anal angle.
Underside black: primaries with four white apical spots, and a
whitish streak at base of cell: secondaries with a row of seven
orange-red marginal spots, the one at anal angle being much the
largest, and above these a series of six lunules composed of pale-
bluish atoms; indentations pale yellowish.
Exp. 144 millim.
Hab. Ugi, Solomon Islands.
This fine Butterfly belongs to the Hrectheus group. It was
tolerably common at Ugi in June 1883, but difficult to catch on
account of its powerful flight, and its habit of keeping in the thick
forest, where it could not be easily followed. I saw several of what
I believe were the females of this insect; they were much larger
than the males, of a dark brown, and with more white across the
wings.
I have named this species in honour of Admiral James E. Erskine,
who commanded the Australian Squadron at the time I was on the
Station.
PaPILio BRIDGE, n. sp. (Plate XXXIV. fig. 2.)
Male.—Upperside deep black, appearing greenish black in certain
lights: primaries, a marginal band of eight somewhat square-shaped
pale greenish-white spots curved inwards at the apex, the apical
spots being small and indistinct ; base of cell and apex dusted with
a few whitish atoms: secondaries not tailed, scolloped; a broad
transverse outwardly-dentated pale greenish-white fascia, its inner
margin enclosing lower part of cell, and its upper portion running
between costa and subcostal nervure nearly to base. Underside
black : primaries, subcostal nervure inwardly bordered by a narrow
whitish streak from base to near middle of cell; a few whitish
atoms at apex: secondaries, a marginal row of seven pale pinkish-
orange spots, the three nearest the apex small and obscure, the one
at anal angle large and nearly square-shaped; above these a row of
seven ill-defined lunules of pale-bluish atoms, the one at apex nearly
obsolete ; indentations conspicuous, white, crescent-shaped.
Exp. 118 millim.
Hab. Treasury Island, Solomon Islands.
This is another fine species, and also belongs to the Hrectheus
group. It was not uncommon, but, like P. ershinei, frequented the
thick forest and was difficult to capture. I only obtained one, a
very perfect example. I saw a larger insect, of a dark brownish-
black hue and with larger spots and fascia, which was probably the
female of this.
I have named this species in honour of Captain Cyprian A. G.
Bridge, who commanded H.M. ship ‘ Espiégle’ during her long and
interesting Commission of nearly four years, a great portion of which
time was spent among the islands of the Western Pacific.
350 MR. R. B. SHARPE ON BIRDS FROM PERAK. [June 29,
PAPILIO HICETAON, 0. Sp.
Male.—Upperside deep olive-brown : primaries, an oblique row of
nine spots from apex to inner margin, the spot contiguous to inner
margin greenish yellow, the remainder paler ; a submarginal row of
five small pale-yellow spots between subcostal, discoidal, and first
and second median neryules ; two small spots outside upper end of
cell, and another larger spot beyond, near the apex; the cell contains
six spots and streaks, at the base a long oblique streak pointing
towards the apex, next a minute perpendicular dash, this is followed
by two narrow subcrescent-shaped spots near subcostal nervure, and
at end of cell two spots, the upper irregular in shape, the lower oval,
all these spots yellow with the exception of basal streak which is
pale green: secondaries, basal half light brown, dotted with golden-
brown atoms, the rest deep velvety brown, the nervules paler; a
small suboval and slightly raised patch of scales at upper end of cell ;
inner margin and base thickly clothed with fine golden-brown hairs.
Underside: primaries, same as above, but spots paler, and row of
submarginal spots extends to inner margin ; a small crimson streak
at base: secondaries, a large aud somewhat square-shaped pale-
green spot at base, bisected by subcostal nervure and bordered
outwardly by black and crimson ; an opalescent lunule with dusky
pupil at upper end of cell; a discal band of dusky lunules, bordered
below with some metallic-blue atoms, the lunule at anal angle edged
above with crimson atoms ; apex with marginal patches of opalescent
atoms; fringes reddish.
The primaries are narrow, and the costa is much arched.
Exp. 100 millim.
Hab. Ugi, Solomon Islands.
Near P. browni, but quite distinct.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIV.
Fig. 1. Papilio erskine, 2, p. 348.
2. bridget, 2, p. 349.
3. Argyronympha ugiensis, 3, p. 347.
4. pulchra, 2, p. 847.
6. Notes on some Birds from Perak. By R. Bowpitur
Suarrg, F.LS., F.Z.8., &c., Zoological Department,
British Museum.
[Received June 15, 1886.]
Thanks to the exertions of Mr. Davison, who explored the western
side of the Malayan peninsula, we have a tolerably complete list of
the birds of this portion of the Indian Region, and a list of his
collections has been given by Mr. Hume (‘Stray Feathers,’ 1879,
pp- 37, 151). The series of Malayan birds in the Hume Collection,
now in the British Museum, is an extremely valuable one, and it is
W Purkiss lith
NEW BUTTERFLIES FROM THE SOLOMON ISLANDS
1886. } MR. R. B. SHARPE ON BIRDS FROM PERAK. 351
to be regretted that Mr. Davison was never able, through political
obstacles, to reach the mountains on the eastern side of the peninsula
and explore the high ridge or ‘‘ backbone ”’ which runs down its
entire length. Considerable speculation has been excited respecting
the fauna of these Malayan mountains, because all the collections
hitherto made in Malacca have proved that, as regards the birds,
there are very few species which are not common to Borneo, Sumatra,
and the Malayan peninsula. Sumatra, however, has always enjoyed
a certain distinction from possessing at least one genus, Psilopogon,
peculiar to itself; and, again, in the mountains several Himalayan
genera have been found with species identical with, or only slightly
differing from, those which occur in the Eastern Himalayas and
extend down the mountains of Tenasserim. Many Malayan species
range into the southern portions of the last-named province; but
as Tegards the Himalayan genera, such as Niltava, Liothrix,
Pnoepyga, Sibia, &c., all traces of them are lost after leaving
Tenasserim until they turn up again in Sumatra.
Many prognostications have been made that when the mountains
of the Malayan peninsula were explored, the above-named genera
and many others common to the mountains of Tenasserim and
Sumatra would be found to extend along the eastern side of Malacca ;
but of this the first actual proof has been furnished by Mr. L. Wray,
who has sent a small parcel of birds from the mountains of Perak to
the British Museum. Although so few in number, the revelations
which they disclose are of the greatest value, for they show that in
Perak, at least, and probably throughout the mountain-range, there
is a curious mixture of Himalayan and high-Sumatran forms.
Thus the Psilopogon, hitherto supposed to be a peculiar Sumatran
genus, is accompanied by Rhinocichla mitrata (Ianthocincla mitrata,
auct.), another species hitherto believed to be confined to Sumatra ;
and the Siéia is also the Sumatran S. simillima, and not S. picata.
The affinities of the Perak species being therefore so markedly
Sumatran, it is not a little surprising to find that the Jesia is
MW. argentauris of the Himalayas, and not M. laurine of Sumatra
as one would have expected.
The following is a list of the specimens sent by Mr. Wray, who
informs us that they were mostly obtained at an elevation of 3000
feet, and that his native collector, after an experience of 30 years’
work, had not met with some of the species before.
Fam. Muscicarip&.
Nixrava GRANpIs, Hodgs.; Sharpe, Cat. B. iv. p. 404.
“No. 11. Male. Irides red; legs and feet nearly black ; beak black.
The female is brown, with a blue spot on each shoulder and a patch
of ash under neck; head blackish and slightly glossed with blue.
Specimens obtained at 4000 feet.”
Compared with males from Sikhim and Tenasserim in the Hume
Collection, and apparently identical in every respect.
352 MR. R. B. SHARPE ON BIRDS FROM PERAK. [June 29,
RurnocicuHta MiTRATA (S. Miill.); Sharpe, Cat. B. vil. p. 452.
Tanthocinela mitrata, Bp. Consp. i. p. 371.
“No. 12. Males. Irides brown; beak orange; legs yellow ; skin
under eye pure white. Common above 3000 feet.”
Two specimens sent, identical with others in the Museum from
Sumatra, to which island the species has hitherto been supposed to
be confined.
Fam. TimELIIDz.
HyprocicHLA RUFICAPILLA (Temm.); Sharpe, Cat. B. vii.
p- 319.
Henicurus ruficapillus, Temm. PI. Col. i. pl. 534.
“No. 17. Female. Irides brown ; legs nearly white ; beak black ;
Rocky streams in the jungle on the hills.”
Agrees with the females of this species as described by Messrs.
Hume and Davison.
SrB1A sIMILLIMA (Salvad.); Sharpe, Cat. B. vol. vii. p. 402.
Heterophasia simillima, Salvad. Ann. Mus. Civic. Genov. xiv.
p. 232.
“No. 13. Female. Iris brown; beak black; legs plumbeous.
Flies about among the tops of trees in parties of from 20 to 30.
Above 3000 feet.”
The two specimens sent agree precisely with a Sumatran example
in the British Museum collected by Mr. Carl Bock.
MesIA ARGENTAURIS, Hodgs. ; Sharpe, Cat. B. vii. p. 642.
«No. 10. Female. Iris brown; feet and beak of same colour
as throat of female. Male bird has red under tail-coverts; throat
orange. From the hills of Perak over 3000 feet. Flies about in
small parties of 10 or 12.”
The female sent is absolutely identical with Himalayan specimens,
and the note given by Mr. Wray as to the colouring of the male
also suits the Himalayan bird and does not agree with the Sumatran
M. laurine, Salvad. (Aun. Mus. Civ. Gen. xiv. p. 231), which is the
species one would have expected to find along with Stbia simallima.
Fam. CaPiTONIDz.
PsILOPOGON PYROLO PHUS, S. Miill. ; Marshall, Monogr. Capit.
p- 133, pl. 53.
‘No. 14. Male and female. Iris brown; legs dull green; bare
skin under eye green. On the hills over 3000 feet.”
This species has only been recorded from Sumatra up to the
present time.
Fam. ALCEDINID&.
CARCINEUTES PULCHELLUS (Horsf.) ; Sharpe, Monogr. Alced.
p- 251, pl. 96.
“No. 16. Male. Irides white; bare skin under eye pale brown ;
1886.] MR. SHARPE ON BIRDS IN THE HUME COLLECTION. 353
beak crimson-red. Had just caught and partly eaten a large
spider.”’
Fam. TROGONID.
Harpactes puvauceut, Temm.; Gould, Monogr. Trogon. 2nd
ed. pl. 40.
“No. 15. Male. Irides brown; bill pure cobalt-blue. Hills up
to about 2000 feet.”
7. Notes on Specimens in the Hume Collection of Birds.
By R. Bowpter Suarez, F.L.S. &e.
[Received June 18, 1886. ]
(Continued from p. 97.)
ConTENTs,
No. 2. On some Rose-Finches, p. 353.
No. 3. On Lalage melanothoraz, p. 354.
No. 4. On some Flycatchers of the Genus Siphia, p. 354.
No. 2. On some Rose-Finches.
In 1881 Colonel Biddulph (Ibis, 1881, p. 156, pl. vi.) noticed
the differences between the large Rose-Finches of Yarkand and
those of the Gilgit district, in which he had been resident for
some time, and named the former bird Propasser rhodometopus.
Having lately had occasion to examine the series of Rose-Finches in
the Hume Collection, I was able to discriminate the P. rhodometopus
of Biddulph as distinct from P. rhodochlamys of Indian authors, from
the Himalayas. The two species are very nearly allied, but the
Yarkand bird has silvery pointed feathers on the forehead, which
the Himalayan bird has not.
At the same time Colonel Biddulph has, I believe, fallen into an
error in his identification of the true P. rhodochlamys of Brandt,
which was described from the Altai Mountains, and appears to me
to be identical with the Yarkand bird, but net with P. rhodochlamys
(so-called) from the Himalayas.
Brandt in his original description (Bull. Phys.-Math. Acad. Sci.
St. Pétersb. 1843, p. 363) distinctly says ‘‘ Penne frontales,
verticis, gutturis &c. acuminate ;”’ and this seems to point undoubt-
edly to the species afterwards called P. rhodometopus by Biddulph.
Consequently the Himalayan species must require a separate desig-
nation, which is forthcoming in Propasser grandis (Blyth, J. A. 8.
Beng. xviii. p. 810).
Mr. Seebohm has lent me specimens of Carpodacus rubicillus
from the Caucasus, and on comparing them with examples of so-
ealled ©. rubdicillus from Turkestan and Yarkand, which have the
back almost entirely uniform, and narrow black shaft-streaks on the
under tail-coverts, I find that the two species are not identical.
354 ON BIRDS IN THE HUME COLLECTION. [June 29,
Both races are figured by Gould in the ‘ Birds of Asia,’ but, like
other ornithologists, he considered the differences between them to
be of insufficient specific value. They are, however, so well marked
that I propose the name of Carpodacus severtzovi for the Central-
Asian bird, and Mr. Seebohm agrees with me that it ought to have
a different name from that of the Caucasus form (C. rubicillus of
Gildenstiidt).
No. 3. On Lalage melanothorax, Sharpe.
In registering and arranging the splendid series of Campophagidee
in the Hume Collection, I naturally looked out for additional
specimens of the fine Lalage which I described in 1879, from
Madras, naming it Lalage melanothorax (Cat. B. iv. p. 91).
Not finding any additional specimens in the Hume Collection, I
had another look at the type in the British Museum, and at once
recognized that it must be an artefact! The body is that of Lalage
sykesi, but the head and neck are those of Buchanga atra. That I
should not have noticed this before is as surprising as the fact that
I have shown the specimen to many ornithological friends, most of
them intimately acquainted with the two species above mentioned,
and that none of us have detected the fraud. On re-examining the
specimen, as I have done many times before, it is impossible to detect
where the birds have been joined together. Lalage melanothorax,
however, is a name to be suppressed.
No. 4. On some Flycatchers of the Genus Siphia.
Seven specimens of Siphia olivacea (Hume) are in the Hume
Collection, and I find that I had rightly identified the species in the
‘Catalogue of Birds,’ vol. iv. p. 458.
Cyornis albo-olivacea, Hume, Str. F. 1877, p. 488, is Setaria
pectoralis, Salvad. Ucc. Born. p. 233, and Rhinomyias pectoralis of
my ‘Catalogue,’ vol. iv. p. 368.
Cyornis poliogenys, Brooks, Str. F. 1878, p. 469, seems to be a
good species, and is closely allied to S. olivacea (Hume), but has a
grey head and face, and is orange-rufous on the breast, the throat
also being washed with the same colour and not white as in C.
olivacea. This species will have the following synonymy :—
SIPHIA POLIOGENYS.
Cyornis poliogenys, Brooks, Str. F. 1879, p. 469.
Siphia cacharensis, Madarasz, Zeitschr. ges. Orn. i. p. 52, Taf. 1.
fig. 2 (1884). 7
Hab. Sikhim Terai (W. E. Brooks) ; Bhootan Dooars (Mandelli) ;
Dibrughur, Assam (J. R. Cripps) ; Shillong; Cachar (4. O. Hume) ;
Manipur (4. O. Hume) ; Tippera.
The plate of Siphia cacharensis does not agree with the description.
The latter, however, is very good, and leaves no doubt as to the
identity of the species.
1886. | ON LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 355
8. On Lepidoptera collected by Major Yerbury in Western
India. By Artuur G. Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.
[Received June 25, 1886.]
(Plate XXXV.)
Major Yerbury has recently presented to the Museum a fine series
of Lepidoptera collected by himself at Campbellpore ; along with the
specimens he has forwarded numerous notes of considerable interest ;
therefore it is the more desirable that an account of the collection
should be published. Unfortunately some of the specimens were
pinned, and amongst these were several specimens of Caligula simla ;
the usual result naturally followed—the abdomen of one of these
large Saturniids broke off, and not only more or less damaged the
other specimens of this species, but made such havoc amongst some
of the smaller Moths as to render their identification hopeless.
Major Yerbury has sent the following notes on the various loca-
lities mentioned by him :—
“ Campbellpore. A military station about 40 miles from Rawal
Pindee. Height above sea-level, 1200 ft.; situated on a cultivated
sandy plain. The river Haro flows past the cantonment at a
distance of about 2 miles to the southward and eastward ; the
country across the river is very much broken up by water-courses
and with rocky spurs running down to the river.
“* Attock. A military station to the N.W. of Campbellpore and
12 miles off ; situated among barren hills on the banks of the Indus.
* Khairabad. Railway-station across the Indus, opposite Attock ;
barren hills all round.
“ Lawrencepore. An abandoned military station 9 miles from
Campbellpore, on the banks of the Haro.
“Chittar Pahar. A range of hills running east and west; the
nearest point to Campbellpore about 7 miles across Haro. The
highest peak of this range is about 3600 ft., but Kala Dilli, Lum-
bahdun, and other places mentioned are probably only from 1500 to
1800 feet above sea-level. Limestone, thickly covered with vegeta-
tion to the north; barren, with scattered bushes of baubul and jin-
netta, on the south side.
* Thundiani, Hill-station near Abbottabad (8700 feet ?).
“Kala Pani. Stage between Thundiani and Abbottabad (6000
feet ?).
“ Bugnoter. First stage from Abbottabad on the Abbottabad and
Murree road (6000 feet ?).
* Murree and Rawal Pindee road.— 7’7ret, 5000 feet ?, first stage
from Murree ; Chittar, 3000 feet?; Barracoo, 2500 feet, second
stage ; Rawal Pindee, 1800 feet ?
** Dewal, 6000 feet ; first stage on Murree and Cashmere road.
“ Hassan Abdal, 1600 feet? ; midway between Rawal Pindee and
Campbellpore.
356 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
‘* Nisan Jani. Mountain near Kalabagh, Abbottabad and Murree
road; highest point nearly 10,000 feet.”
The collection contains examples of 178 species, many of them
represented by a fair series of specimens, mostly identified for the
collector (but frequently erroneously) by Mr. de Nicéville. Six of the
Butterflies and nineteen of the Moths are described as new, and several
other species probably new to science, but in bad condition, are indi-
cated in order to show that there is still much to be done in that. part
of India by any one who will take the trouble to collect Lepidoptera.
NyYMPHALID2&.
EuPL@In&.
1. LIMNAS CHRYSIPPUS.
Papilio chrysippus, Linneeus, Syst. Nat. 1758, p. 471.
3, Campbellpore, 19th and 26th July, 1885; Q, 20th June
and 26th July, 1885; Dewal near Murree, 24th August.
One of the females has a tawny subapical patch beyond the white
band on primaries, exhibiting a slight tendency to modification in
the direction of L. Alugii.
1a. LIMNAS ALCIPPOIDES.
Limnas alcippoides, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 238, pl. xxxi. fig. 1.
Q, Campbellpore, 17th and 21st June and 18th July, 1885.
The specimens of this form obtained by Major Yerbury tend
to confirm my expressed opinion that it is a reversional sport of
L. chrysippus ; the three specimens differ as follows :—
a. Primaries as in LZ. alcippus; secondaries with the veins,
internal area, and centre of median interspaces snow- white.
6. Primaries as in L. chrysippus; secondaries with the veins,
internal area, and centre of median interspaces whitish.
c. Primaries as in L. chrysippus ; secondaries above pale, below
white.
Major Yerbury says of L. chrysippus :—‘ Very common, May,
June, July, October, November, December. Caterpillar common
in July, feeds on Calotropis gigantea; agrees with the description
given in ‘ The Butterflies of India,’ and appears to be the same as
that reared at Aden, where it fed on either this or some closely
allied plant.” Of L. alcippoides he says :—‘‘ Some eight specimens
taken in all during May and June 1835; varies greatly in the
amount of white on the hind wing.”
2. LiMNAS KLUGII.
Limnas klugii, Butler, P. Z.S. 1885, p. 758. n. 2.
Euplea dorippus, var., Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 48. fig. 5.
Q, Campbellpore, 11th June, 1885.
‘‘ Not so common as ZL, alcippoides; only four specimens taken
during May and 2nd to 11th June, 1885. All these specimens have
curious leprous-like spots on their wings.’—J. WW. Y.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 357
I am surprised to find that this species extends so far to the east
as Campbellpore; that it is rare (where J. chrysippus is common)
is only natural, if this is the limit of its range eastward from Afghan-
istan. I cannot agree at all with Col. Swinhoe’s statement that
typical L. dorippus is variable ; I never saw a doubtful specimen.
SATYRINZE.
3. AULOCERA SARASWATI.
Satyrus saraswati, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 445, pl. 14.
figs. 3, 4 (1848).
2, Dewal, 26th August; ¢ 9, Murree, 5th September, 1885.
“Common at Murreein August. Some of those obtained towards
Thundiani, though under this number (42) were noted by De
Nicéville as A padma.’—J. W. Y.
The four examples sent to us by Major Yerbury are all typical
A. saraswati. A. padma is so perfectly distinct from that species,
that Mr. de Nicéville can hardly have mistaken one for the other ;
at the same time I cannot include it without proof.
4. AULOCERA SWABA.
Satyrus swaha, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 444, pl. 14.
figs. 1, 2 (1848).
3, Murree, 8th and 28th August and 8th September; Atabul,
9000 feet, 16th September ; Thundiani, 24th September.
“«Common at Murree in August and September; found higher
up the hill than A. saraswati.’—J. W. Y.
The six specimens received are all males.
5. HiprarcuiaA PARISATIS.
Satyrus parisatis, Kollar, Denkschr. Akad. Wien, math.-nat.
Cl. i. p. 52. n. 7 (1850).
3 9, road between Bugnoter and Abbottabad, 4000-5000 feet,
20th September; 9, between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th
September, 1885.
**Common between Bugnoter and Abbottabad ; also on the lower
slopes of Thundiani ; seen near Tret, 8th October, 1885.” —J. W. ¥.
6. Leruer pyrra.
Debis dyrta, Felder, Reise der Nov., Lep. p. 497. n. 860 (1867).
3, Bugnoter, 19th September, about 4000 to 5000 feet ; between
Bugnoter and Abbottabad, 20th September; Kala Pani, about 5000
feet, on 24th; Tret, 8th October, 1885. ©, between Murree and
Tret, on same day.
“« Two specimens taken at Dewal, 26th August ; afterwards found
commonly below Bugnoter, 20th September, and between Abbottabad
and Kala Pani.” —J. W. Y.
The specimens sent are all males excepting one dwarfed example.
358 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
7. AMECERA SCHAKRA.
Satyrus schakra, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 446, pl. 15.
figs. 3, 4 (1848).
3 2, Murree, 4th, 5th, and 11th August, and 7th September ;
3, between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th September, 1885.
“Very common in August and September. Found all along the
hill as far as Thundiani, and as low as Tret and Bugnoter ; probably
not above 5000 feet.’-—J. W. ¥.
8. CALLEREBIA ANNADA.
Erebia annada, Moore, Cat. Lep: E.I. Co. Mus. i. p. 226. n. 475
(1857).
3 2, between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th September, 1885.
‘Not uncommon about Kala Pani; here its habits appeared
different from those of Callerebia in general, as it was flying about
over stones and low bushes, not affecting the shade ; near Tret (8th
October), however, it affected the shade much like C. nirmala and
C. daksha.’—J. W. Y.
It is an interesting fact that Major Yerbury sends the above
species under the name of “ C. hybrida;” because his identifications
are, to a great extent, derived from Mr. de Nicéville. A short time
since I was severely taken to task for having described CO. hybrida
as a species (not that I ever did so, for I distinctly stated my opinion
that it was a hybrid and an inconstant one); now if the gentleman
who attacked me obtained his identification from the same source, it
is clear that what he considered a very bad species is C. annada.
Who shall decide this point ?
9. CALLEREBIA NIRMALA.
Erebia nirmala, Moore, P. Z. S. 1865, p. 501. n. 91.
3 2, Murree, 6th, 9th, and 12th August, 1885.
** Callerebia daksha and nirmala. These two species appear to
me to merge into one another. They were common at Murree in
shady places in August 1885.”—J. W. Y.
Major Yerbury sends seven specimens, some of them rather worn,
but all perfectly typical C. nirmala; whether the female has been
identified for him as C. daksha or whether he actually possesses the
latter species, I cannot say; but I am much inclined to accept the
first as the more probable explanation of his note. I should be glad
to obtain specimens of C. daksha for our collection, as we only have
one male labelled by Mr. Moore and received from him in 1877;
from this one specimen it is impossible to decide how far the differ-
ential characters of the species can be relied upon ; if constant, they
are amply sufficient to distinguish it from C. nirmala.
10. YerHiMA ORDINATA.
Ypthima ordinata, Butler, P. Z.S. 1880, p. 148, pl. xv. fig. 3.
3 @, between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th September, 1885.
9, between Murree and Tret, 1st October.
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 359
“Common on the 25th September about Kala Pani and on the
road between Abbottabad and Bugnoter.’—J. W. ¥.
The incorrect identification of Y. avanta has been given to Major
Yerbury for this species ; though common in India, it is a very rare
species in European collections, as also is Y. avanta—a smaller
Butterfly, more nearly resembling Y. newboldi in form, the under
surface of its wings ash-grey, densely striated with brown and
distinctly crossed by olive-brown bands ; the ocelli of the secondaries
small, oval, and with large silver pupils.
The four (unfortunately rather worn) specimens in the present
collection, though they differ from one another in minor details,
correspond in all their principal features with my type of Y. ordinata.
1]. YprHIMA NAREDA.
Satyrus nareda, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iy. 2, p. 451 (1848).
3, Dewal, 26th August, 1885.
‘Common at Murree in August.”—J. W. Y.
12. YprHIMA SAKRA.
Ypthima sakra, Moore, Cat. Lep. E.I. Co. Mus. i. p. 286. n. 508
(1857); Hewitson, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. ii. pl. 18. fig. 18 (1865).
3, Murree, 12th September ; Thundiani, 24th September, 1885.
** Ypthima nikea. Wewal, 26th August. Not uncommon about
Murree and towards Thundiani, end of August and beginning of
September. The form Y. sakra (differing in having no intervening
yellow bands to the ocelli) was also obtained.’—J. W. Y.
The true Y. ntk@a is unknown to me, but Mr. Moore describes
it as having the ‘‘ underside grey,” whereas in this species (Y. sakra)
it is distinctly yellow ; he also says that the apical ocelliof the hind
wings are “joined together, though having a yellow band between
them,” the only part of this description which is to me unintelligible,
but to which Major Yerbury evidently refers as the distinctive
character between the two named forms. In the Hewitson cabinet
there is a series of five YF. sakra, the smallest specimen, labelled
“nikea, M.,”’ differing in having the two apical ocelli separate though
enclosed in an 8-shaped yellow zone: though the under surface is
still yellow instead of grey, this may be the typical Y. nikea; if so,
it is connected with Y. sakra, of Marshall and De Nicéville, by one
of the two specimens now sent, in which the ocelli, though not
absolutely confluent, touch one another upon the vein as in Hewit-
son’s figure. Hewitson’s type of Y. sakra, therefore, is clearly one of
these intermediate specimens.
NyYMPHALIN.
13. HypoLimMNas MISIPPUS.
Papilio misippus, Linneeus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 264 (1764).
3, Campbellpore, 9th November, 1885.
“Flew to light at night during R. A. Mess.’ “Rare: only four
specimens in all taken—3 ¢ and 19. November and December.’’—
J.W.Y.
369 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
14. SEPHISA DICHROA.
Limenitis dichroa, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 429, pl. 8.
figs. 1, 2 (1848).
2, Muree, 11th August, 1885.
“ Not common ; some half-dozen specimens, nearly all damaged,
taken at Murree (th and 11th August), all on the trunk of the
same tree—a species of willow. Two or three seen on the wing:
the flight appears to be particularly rapid.’—J. W. Y.
15. ATHYMA OPALINA.
Limenitis opalina, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 427 (1848).
3, Murree, 5th and 12th August; 92, Ist October, 1885.
‘“‘ Fairly common at Murree in August.”—J. W. Y¥.
16. NEpris MAHENDRA.
Neptis mahendra, Moore, P. Z.S. 1872, p. 560, pl. 32. fig. 3.
3, Murree, 13th August; 2 , 8th September, 1885.
“Common at Murree, August and September ; seen as far as
Thundiani.”—J. W. Y.
The following species was sent under the same number and name
(N. mahendra), but is perfectly distinct both in pattern and color-
ation, being more nearly allied to NV. nandina of Darjiling and
Nepal, which it apparently represents in Western India.
17. NEPTIS YERBURII, Sp. n.
3. Wingsabove of the size, form, and general aspect of N. mahendra,
but the discoidal streak and spot beyond it as in N. duryodana,
which it also resembles in having a pale irregular line across the
primaries between the discal and submarginal spots, and a pale sub-
marginal line on the secondaries. It differs from both species in
having a complete submarginal series of white spots on the primaries,
and a pale line through the centre of the black belt on the secon-
daries ; further, it differs from N. mahendra in the greater obliquity
of the subapical discal spots of the primaries: on the under surface
the markings are very different, corresponding in almost all respects
with those of NV. nandina ; the brown colouring, however, is olivaceous
instead of rufous, and the brown belt across the secondaries does not
taper towards the costa as in the Darjiling insect. Expanse of wings
54 millim.
Murree, 16th August, 1885.
As we possess Moore's types of N. nandina, and as this species
is certainly confounded with others in at least one large collection,
it may be useful to point out that it is more closely allied to NV. soma
(the types of which we also have in the Museum) than to any other
named species ; in fact it differs from the latter only in its broader
and yellower whitish bands and larger spots (of the same colour);
the ground-colour below is a shade darker, but of a similar rufous
hue. It is a larger, longer-winged species than NV. yerburii, has
narrower bands and spots on the upper surface, and these markings
are of a sordid yellowish tint instead of being snow-white.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 361
18. VANESSA CHARONIA.
Papilio charonia, Drury, Ill. Ex. Ent. i. pl. 15. figs. 1, 2 (1773).
Murree, 22nd August and 10th September ; Dewal, 26th August.
“Common at Murree in August and September ; found along this
hill as far as Thundiani, also at Dewal.
“This butterfly is fond of pitching on the trunks of trees, par-
ticularly of the ilex when the tree has been wounded and the sap
is exuding. I have taken several in company with Pyrameis indica
and a large greenish beetle (Cetonia, sp.?) while thus engaged.’’—
SI WX.
19. VANESSA KASCHMIRENSIS.
Vanessa kaschmirensis, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 442,
pl. 11. figs. 3, 4 (1848).
3 2, Mir Jani above Kalabagh, about 9000 feet, 16th September ;
3, Thundiani, 23rd September, 1885.
* Rare in Murree, ten specimens taken endof August; very common
at the top of Thundiani, 23rd to 24th September.””—J. W. F.
Major Yerbury sent us two perfect specimens and one much broken;
in their fresh condition I hardly recognized them as conspecific with
the dingy series of very old specimens in the Museum, and I much
regret that our good friend did not send as longa series of this
species as of Libythea lepita.
20. JUNONIA ALMANA.
Papilio almana, Linneeus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 272 (1764).
Hassan Abdal, 14th October; Campbellpore, 17th November,
1885. :
** A few in October and November near Campbellpore.”—J. W. Y.
21. JUNONIA SWINHOEI.
Junonia swinhoei, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Oct. 1885,
p. 308.
g,Campbellpore, July; ¢ 2, Murree, 5th August, 1885.
“The commonest Butterfly in Campbellpore ; found in May,
June, July, October, November, and December. Probably the
commonest fly on the Murree hills in August and September.”’—
J.W.Y.
22. PyRAMEIS INDICA.
Papilio atalanta indica, Herbst, Natur. Schmett. vii. pl. 180.
figs. 1, 2.(1794).
Murree, 16th and 26th August and 10th September, 1885.
“ Fairly common all over the hills in August and September.” —
Ys
23. ARGYNNIS NIPHE.
Papilio niphe, Linnzus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 785. n. 208 (1767).
3 2, Campbellpore, 23rd May; ¢, Murree, 10th September,
1885.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXIV. 24
362 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
“Common (at Campbellpore) May and June; at Murree in
August.”—J. W. Y.
24. ARGYNNIS KAMALA.
Argynnis kamala, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 156.
n. 324 (1857).
Q@, Thundiani, 23rd September, 1885.
«A few at Murree and along the slope of Thundiani in Sep-
tember.”—J. W. Y.
25. ARGYNNIS ISSA.
Argynnis issea, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 156. n. 3238
(1857).
Murree, 5th, 23rd, and 28th August, 3rd September ; melanistic
var., lst October, 1885.
«« Argynnis lathonia apud de Nicéville ; Argynnis issea apud Swin-
hoe. Common at Murree, August and September, and found along
the hills as far as Thundiani.’”—J. W. Y.
No lepidoptcrist familiar with A. lathonia of Europe could fail to
note the differences which exist between this form and the European
one: it is, of course, a local representative of A. lathonia as every
species of butterfly is of some other, so far as I have been able to
ascertain, but it never really corresponds with European specimens.
26. ATELLA PHALANTA.
Papilio phalanta, Drury, Ill. Ex. Ent. 1. pl. 21. figs. 1, 2 (1773).
6, Hassan Abdal, 14th October, 1885.
27. MELITHA PERSEA.
Melitea persea, Kollar, Denksch. Akad. Wien, math.-nat. Cl. i.
p. 52. n. 6 (1850).
Campbellpore, Khairabad side near Attock Bridge, 1st November,
1885.
“‘ Melitea robertsii apud de Nicéville ; M. didyma apud Swinhoe.
Not uncommon.”’—J. W. Y.
This species may readily be distinguished from M. rodertsii, apart
from other characters, by the black markings on the basal two thirds
of secondaries, which do not exist in the Candahar species. After
comparing it with our series of thirty-four M. didyma and fifteen
M. trivia, I have not the least hesitation in supporting Mr. Kirby’s
opinion that it is much more nearly allied to the latter than to the
former species.
The two specimens sent by Major Yerbury, though not absolutely
agreeing with any of our nine typical examples of M. persea, differ
only in characters which the series before me proves to be variable,
the principal of these characters being the ill-defined submarginal
spots on the upper surface of the secondaries and the less perfect
row on the under surface of the primaries ; uo two specimens, how-
ever, absolutely correspond in these points.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 363
28. CyrEsTIS GANESCHA.
Amathusia ganescha (part.), Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 430,
pl. 7. figs. 3, 4 (1848).
3, Murree, 9th August, 1885.
“Rare, only three specimens taken ; probably not more than four
specimens seen in all.”’—J. W. Y¥.
Kollar apparently regarded C. thyodamas as the other sex of this
species, and in this error he has been largely followed. If it proves
to be a seasonal form or dimorphic representative of that species, it
will indicate a similar condition of things as probably existing
between C. lutea and C. nivea of Java, which differ precisely in the
same way, although in a more marked degree.
C. thyodamas is a white species compared with CO. ganescha ; the
apical area of its primaries is always suffused with blackish, which
has the effect of a quadrate apical patch ; this character does not
appear in Kollar’s figure, which is evidently taken from what I (on
that account) regard as typical C. ganescha—the more or less
yellow-tinted form ; but in the description—‘‘ Vor dem Aussenrande
ist das Feld ausserhalb der fiinften Linie mehr oder weniger schwarz
getriibt ’’—it is evident that both types are included; and the remark,
“between male and female I find no other difference than that in
the latter the marking is more lively and intense,” shows that
CO. thyodamas was supposed to be the female, whereas this sex seems
to be very much rarer than the male in either of the Indian forms.
ERYCINID.
LiBYTHEINZ.
29. LisYTHEA LEPITA.
Libythea lepita, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 240. n. 519
(1857).
3 2, 2nd, 12th, 16th, and 23rd August, and 8th September, 1885;
9 , Lumbahdun, 27th November.
3 var. (without hatchet-like termination to discoidal streak),
Thundiani, 24th September.
“Common at Murree in August and September. Only two
specimens of this Butterfly were taken in the neighbourhood of
Campbellpore—one near Lawrencepore 22nd November, and one at
Lumbahdun in the Chittar Pahar, 27th November.”—J. W. I.
Major Yerbury appears to think that L. myrrha exists in bis series
of this species; the latter, however, is easily recognized by the un-
broken tawny stripe on the primaries, intersected by the median
vein and its two first branches, and by the larger, entirely tawny, sub-
apical spots ; the direction of the tawny stripe on the secondaries
differs a little, and it is longer and not zigzag along its outer edge.
No lepidopterist possessing examples of the two species could possibly
confound them.
24*
364 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
NEMEOBIINE.
30. TaAxILA EUGENES.
Dodona eugenes, Bates, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool. ix. p. 371 (1867).
@, Murree, 10th September, 1885; Thundiani, low down near
Kala Pani, 24th September.
“ Dodona dipea: uncommon, a few at Murree in August, and
two or three below Thundiani in September.”"—J. W. Y.
Although Hewitson, in his collection, associated three examples
of 7. eugenes with his type of 7. dipaa, the two species are so well
marked that there ought to be no difficulty in distinguishing them.
Though rare, 7’. eugenes iscommon compared with T. dipea : it differs
most prominently in the pattern of the under surface of the secon-
daries; these wings in 7. dipoa are of a dingy grey-brown colour,
and the bands across it are very narrow and of a creamy yellowish
tint ; the short band between the cell and the apex is bounded
internally by three dark brown angular spots, and the anal lobe has
no tail; in fact, strictly speaking, it is a Dodona, whereas 7’. eugenes
is a Tavila’.
31. TaxILa DURGA.
Melitea durga, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 441, pl. 13.
figs. 3, 4 (1848).
3 &,Murree, 18th, 22nd, and23rd August; Dewal, 26th August ;
Bugnoter, 20th September, 1885.
“Common at Murree in August and September ; found along the
hills to Thundiani ; also at Dewal.”’—J. W. Y.
LYCEHZNID&.
32. PancHata? DoDONA.
Amblypodia dodonea, Moore, Cat. Lep. E.I. Co. Mus. p. 43.
n. 65, pl. la. fig. 8 (1857).
6, Thundiani, 23rd September, 1885.
This species in Mr. Kirby’s Catalogue is indicated as female of
the following; in our series are both sexes of each species, which are
totally different. Major Yerbury’s note refers to both.
33. PANCHALA? RAMA.
Thecla rama, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 412, pl. 4. figs. 1, 2
(1848).
, Dewal near Murree, 26th August, 1885.
1 Practically, however, the two genera are synonymous, as, in spite of Seudder’s
oversight of the following important facts, I shall now show :—In Doubleday’s
List the following species stand under the then undescribed genus Tawxila—
T. fatua, egeon, erato, cesennia, fylla, drupadi, orphna, esther, echerius, tantalus,
neophron. This genus was adopted and described by Westwood in the ‘ Genera
of Diurnal Lepidoptera,’ the three italicized species being figured in the same
order as above; and 7’. orphna (under which name two species are confounded
on the plate) is not figured as a Tawila at all, though placed with that genus in
the letterpress ; it, moreover, stands last in Mr. Westwood’s notes on the genus;
yet Mr. Kirby admits this species alone into the genus Zaxila, whilst Scudder
oe ee only TZ. drupadi, an insect in no way brought prominently forward as
typical.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 365
“*Common at Dewal, a few seen near Murree, and several on the
lower slopes of Thundiani (P.dodonea ?); two taken 24th September.
Prefers ilex trees ; scarcely ever seen on any other tree.”—J. W. Y.
34. PoLYOMMATUS BZ&TICUS.
Papilio beticus, Linneus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 789. n. 226 (1767).
3, Campbellpore, 29th October, 1885.
“Common, May, June, and July.”—J. W. Y.
35. CATOCHRYSOPS CNEJUS.
Hesperia enejus, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 430 (1798).
3 2, Campbellpore, 31st May, 15th July, and 27th October ;
3, Murree, 5th August.
This and the following are mixed up; one of them being identi-
fied for Major Yerbury as C. strabo, an insect to which they are by
no means nearly allied.
36. CATOCHRYSOPS HAPALINA.
Oatochrysops hapalina, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 148, pl. 24. figs.
3, Campbellpore, 27th October; 2, 21st November, 1885.
**Comn on on baubul bushes in October.”—J. W. Y.
The female was numbered as possibly Zzera putli; but as it
was unset, the difference between the two was not so easily seen as
might be supposed from the mounted specimens.
37. CATOCHRYSOPS ELLA.
Catochrysops ella, Butler, P. Z. 8S. 1881, p. 606. n. 17.
9, Campbellpore, 21st November, 1885.
One beautiful specimen, confounded with the preceding, from
which, however, its brighter colouring above and smoky grey under
surface at once distinguish it.
38. EvrerEs DIPORA.
LIycena dipora, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 506. n. 108, pl. 31.
fig. 8.
2, Murree, 20th August, 1885.
“ Catochrysops patala? 2, rare.’—J. W.Y.
I cannot understand how any lepidopterist can have given to
Major Yerbury an identification so wide of the mark as the above ;
the very colouring of the under surface at once points out to what
group of Lyceenide the species belongs, apart from all structural
distinctions.
39. AZANUS ZENA.
Lycena zena, Moore, P. Z, 8. 1865, p. 505. n. 107, pl. 31. fig. 9.
3 2, Campbellpore, 17th and 21st November, 1885.
**Common on baubul bushes in October.”—J. W. F.
366 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON {June 29
40. AZANUS URANUS, sp.n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 1.)
3. Allied to A. zena, but differing from all specimens in the
Museum series, or that of Mr. Moore’s collection, in the much
brighter and more uniform lilac colour of the upper surface’, in the
brighter blue at the base, the browner tint of the under surface, on .
which the white-edged markings are consequently less well defined,
and in the obsolete character of the black spots, which are either
reduced to minute points or wholly absent. Expanse of wings
21-22 millim.
Hassan Abdal, 13th October; Campbellpore, 17th and 29th No-
vember, 1885.
41. AZANUS UBALDUS.
Lycena ubaldus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 390. figs. L, M (1782).
Q@, near Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 15th November, 1885.
This species was unidentified, and specimens of A. uranus indi-
cated as A. ubaldus, whilst others of the same species were simply
recorded as ‘“‘ Lycena sp.”
42. TARUCUS NARA.
Lycena nara, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 421 (1848).
3, Campbellpore, June; id.? (worn), 17th November, 1885.
“ Tarucus theophrastus, very common May and June; it is pro-
bable that 7’. nara was also among some of the captures placed under
this number.”—J. W.Y.
T. theophrastus is an African species; the Butterflies so named
by Col. Swinhoe probably represent two or more new species, of which
the following is one :—
43. TARUCUS EXTRICATUS, sp.n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 2.)
Paler than 7. nara above, varying in size even more than 7’. dal-
kanica; readily distinguished on the under surface by the much
greater regularity of the markings, those of the primaries being
arranged nearly as in 7’. theophrastus (i. e. the central stripe is often
unbroken, the subcostal spot beyond sometimes confluent with it so
as to form a F-shaped marking; the dashes beyond the central
stripe placed transversely and always confluent instead of forming
an interrupted <-shaped character); the markings of the secondaries
vary in colour from rust-red to black, but correspond in character
with those of Z. nara. Expanse of wings, ¢ 15-25 millim.,
Q 28-30 millim.
3d, Campbellpore, 31st May, 1885.
We have two females of this species from Kurrachee, collected by
Col. Swinhoe, and a male collected by Sir John Hearsay at Landoor ;
thirteen other specimens also representing the 7. theophrastus of
Indian lists, but apparently belonging to another unnamed form,
are in our collection.
In A. zena it is chiefly confined to the centre of the wings, and has almost
the appearance of a brand,
1886. | LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 367
44, CYANIRIS VARDHANA.
Polyommatus vardhana, Moore, P.Z.S. 1874, p. 572, pl. 66.
fig. 5.
3 2, Murree, 28th August, 3rd and 8th September, 1885.
«Not uncommon at Murree at the end of August ; was for a long
time passed over as C. celestina.”’—J. W. Y¥.
C. vardhana is rather a rare species in collections.
45. CYANIRIS KOLLARI.
Lycena kollari, Westwood, Gen. Diurn. Lep. p. 491. n. 69 (1852).
Lycena ceelestina, Kollar (nec Eversm.), Higel’s Kaschm. iv. 2,
p. 423 (1848).
3 2, Murree, 12th August; 9, 28th December, 1885.
“Very common, August and September.’—J. W. Y.
This species being new to the Museum collection, I cannot
question the identification, more especially as Kollar’s description
would do just as well for half a dozen other species; at the same
time Kollar’s name having been already used by Eversmann, cannot
possibly be admitted. C. kollari is more like typical C. pseudar-
giolus than any other species known to me; but is smaller ; it should
probably stand next to C. levettii in collections.
46. ZizERA DILUTA.
3. Lycena diluta, Felder, Reise der Nov., Lep. ii. p. 280. n. 353,
pl. 35. figs. 12, 13.
9, Campbellpore, 17th June and 23rd July; ¢, 9th October ;
9, Murree, 2nd, 5th, and 6th August, and 20th September.
“ Zizera maha, De N., diluta, Swinh. Common at Murree in
August and September.” —J. W. Y.
In spite of Felder’s very poor figure of the upper surface, I have
neyer seen any other than this species that could be identified with
Z, diluta; it has hardly a feature in common with Z. maha, which
is much nearer to Z. chandala. The specimens of this species were
all females, with the exception of two worn ones, and one of these
was labelled as probably a Moth; the females stand under the
numbers 7, 72, 12 a, and 527.
47. ZizERA KARSANDRA.
Polyommatus karsandra, Moore, P.Z.S. 1865, p. 505. n. 106,
pl. 31. fig. 7.
3 @, Campbellpore, 21st May and June; 9, Murree, Ist Oc-
tober, 1885.
“ Zizera maha and Z. sangra apud de Nicéville; Z. decreta and
karsana apud Swinhoe: very common in the grass and_lucerne-
fields in May and June; though many of them differed, still they all
seemed linked to one another, and I put them all under one
number.”—J. W. ¥. }
Major Yerbury was perfectly correct in so doing; 1 find only males
368 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
and females perfectly normal in colouring, size, pattern, and every-
thing ; amongt those sent to me are no Z. maha, sangra, or decreta.
The name ‘“‘karsana” is probably meant for karsandra, to which
species the whole series belongs.
48, CUPIDO ARIANA.
Polyommatus ariana, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 504. n. 103, pl. 31.
fig. 2.
3 2, Murree, 8th to 11th August, and 3rd September, 1885.
Major Yerbury says that he caught this and the following species
flying together at Murree in August.
49, CUPIDO NAZIRA.
Polyommatus nazira, Moore, P. Z.8. 1865, p. 504. n. 102, pl. 31.
fig. 4.
3, Murree, 5th and 11th August, 1885.
50. PLEBEIUS TROCHILUS.
Lycena trochilus, Freyer, Neuere Beitrage, v. pl. 440. fig. 1
(1840).
3 2, near Attock, Khairabad side, 8th November, 1885.
These are the first Indian examples that I have seen of this
species.
“Common in stony nullahs near Attock Bridge.’—J. W. Y.
51. PLEBEIUS PUTLI.
Lycena putli, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 422 (1848).
do. Campbellpore, 18th October and 14th November, 1885.
«*Common in October and November.” —J. W. Y.
52. CHRYSOPHANUS TIMEUS.
Papilio timeus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. pl. 186. figs. E, F (1779).
3, Campbellpore, 4th June; Murree, 9th and 11th August and
24th September, 1885. :
The Campbellpore specimen was numbered “527” (referring to
Zizera maha); doubtless an oversight. Major Yerbury says that
the species is “common at Murree and along the hills to Thundiani
in August and September.”’ C. ¢timeus has been identified for him
as “ C.phleas”’; it appears, however, to be a tolerably constant form,
so far as I can judge from our present series; on the upper surface
it much resembles C. stygianus of Kandahar, but the darker colour
and red band on the under surface of the secondaries at once
separate it.
53. ILERDA TAMU.
Polyommatus tamu, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 417, pl. 5.
figs. 7, 8 (1848).
3 2, Murree, 11th, 12th, and 14th August, and 3rd September,
1885.
Common, according to Major Yerbury, but certainly not so in
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 369
European collections ; it has been named J. coruscans for him, but
is not even nearly allied to that species, of which we possess the
types. Kollar’s figure is not good, having been taken from a worn
and broken specimen, but the identity of the species is settled by
the “ sky-blue gloss” of the basal half of the wings’; as a matter
of fact the colour is ultramarine, but a little inaccuracy in colouring
is perhaps admissible in the description of a rubbed insect. Kollar
says, ‘‘ We possess only a single example of this beautiful species,
and it has suffered severely in transport, so that in fact only the
wings are preserved,”’ and from the description we find that the hind
wings, at least, are ‘‘ badly rubbed.”
54. ILERDA SENA.
Polyommatus sena, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 415, pl. 5.
figs. 3, 4 (1848).
3, Dewal and Murree, 8th, 16th, and 30th August; Bugnoter,
20th September, 1885.
“Rather rare at Murree, very common on the lower slopes of
Thundiani, and as low as Tret and .Bugnoter, probably not above
5000 feet.’—J. W. Y.
55. SPINDASIS HYPARGYROS, sp.n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 3.)
Allied to S. acamas and S. epargyros. Larger; the male differing
from both in the whitish costal area of primaries and both sexes
differing in the darker bands on all the wings; on the under surface
the wings are chalky white instead of cream-colour, all the markings
are darker and edged with black; the submarginal band of the
secondaries is not angulated as in S. acamas and the secondaries
themselves are longer. LExpanse of wings, ¢ 36 millim., 2 35-38
millim.
3 2, Campbellpore, 19th, 20th, 25th, 26th, and 28th July, 1885.
This is the representative of S. acamas in N.W. India; Col.
Swinhoe obtained it at Kurrachee and Chaman; Major Yerbury
says thatitiscommon*. At the time when I identified it as S. acamas
we did not possess that species, and I supposed that the differences
which existed in Klug’s figures were due to inaccuracy of delineation.
The Zeller collection has, however, now put us in possession of
specimens of the true S. acamas aud the allied S. eparygros, and Iam
able to see at a glance that here we have a series of those constant
local races which constitute the only existing species in the Order
Lepidoptera, but which, for that very reason, are always as thorns
\ Jn J, coruscans the colour is shining metallic emerald-green.
? Another allied species occurs at Suakim ; it has recently been presented
to the Museum collection by Surgeon Mandest. It may be called S. bellatrix.
This species is smaller than S. acamas, is bright tawny above, with a black
marginal stripe and white fringe ; the primaries show dusky indications of the
ordinary markings upon the costal half; there is also a whitish spot in the
cell anda white subapical costal spot ; wings below chalky white, with pale
sandy-brownish markings edged with black and enclosing the usual silver
streaks and spots; all the bands are a little wider than in S. acamas, the central
band of primaries is abbreviated; the subapical band of secondaries more
angular and the submarginal band interrupted, Expanse of wings 30 millim.
370 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
in the sides of those who believe that the species of Butterflies are
widely distinct.
56. RAPALA NISSA.
Thecla nissa, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 412, pl. 4. figs. 3, 4
(1848).
3 9, Murree, 16th, 18th, and 25th August, 1885.
<¢Common at Murree.”—J. W. Y.
Rare in European collections.
57. DreupORYX EPIJARBAS.
Dipsas epijarbas, Moore, Cat. Lep. E.I. Co. Mus. i. p. 32. n. 30
(1857).
3 2, Murree, 11th, 12th, and 22nd August, 1885.
“ Common at Murree.”’—J. W. Y.
PAPILIONIDS&.
PrerRiInz&.
58. CoLIAS EDUSINA.
Colias edusina, Felder, Wien. ent. Mon. iv. p. 100. n. 55 (1860).
3 2, Murree, 2nd, 5th, 11th, 14th, and 18th August; ¢,
Campbellpore, 30th May and 17th November; 2, Chittar Pahar,
1500 feet.
‘* Common at Murree up to October; found all along the hills
at Campbellpore, common May and June ; fairly common October,
November, and beginning of December.’—J. W. Y.
This is the normal western type of C. fieldii; the latter is
represented by a species near to C’. aurorina, which, though found in
the west, extends as far eastward as Assam ; whether the two forms
are distinct or not can only be decided by breeding. Of course the
present form is generally called C. fieldit in Indian collections ; ; but
if it be that species, it should stand as var. edusina.
59. CoLIAS ERATE.
Colias erate, var. 2 pallida, Staudinger, Cat. Lep. eur. Faun. p. 3.
n. 54 (1861).
3, Murree, 16th August; Dewal, 26th August ; ¢ 2, Campbell-
pore, 29th October, 20th and 21st November, 1885.
One male of typical C. erate was obtained at Murree on the same
day as the male of var. pallida ; Major Yerbury says that it does
not appear to be so common at Murree as the latter; a second
fragmentary male from Campbellpore was also sent with specimens
of C. pallida. Both Col. Swinhoe and Mr. de Nicéville seem to have
wrongly identified the form, though, as C. sareptensis was mixed up
with it, I may be mistaken in the case of the former gentleman:
Major Yerbury, however, quotes the Tages as ‘‘ Colias hyale apud
de Nicéville, C. sareptensis apud Swinhoe”’ ; he says that at Murree
it is not common. He further remarks as follows :—* When first I
arrived in Campbellpore and began to collect, I had no setting-
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 371
boards ; so I placed all my captures in envelopes and consequently
put all the pale clouded-yellows under one number; it was only
when my attention was drawn to it, that I discovered that I had two
species under the same number. I then went through all the pale
forms I had, but only succeeded in finding three specimens of
C. erate ; so I presume this species is the rarer of the two. I have
taken it in May, June, and November.’’
60. CoLIAs SAREPTENSIS.
Colias hyale, var. sareptensis, Staudinger, Cat. Lep. eur. Faun.
p. 5. n.48 (1871).
3, Campbellpore, 14th November; 9, Murree, 12th August,
1885.
This form again seems to be rare as compared with ©. pallida, so
that not only does my original suggestion that the latter was a hybrid
between C. erate and OC. sareptensis seem to be probable, but also
that the intermediate form thus produced is supplanting both the
parent stocks. :
61. TeRtAs FIMBRIATA (var. 2).
Terias fimbriata, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soe. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 323,
n. 16 (1867).
3 @, Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 15th November, 1885.
* Terias esiope apud de Nicéville, T. fimbriata apud Swinhoe ;
common in October and November.” —J. W. Y.
This species only differs from typical 7. fimbriata in the little
pronounced subapical brown dash or stria on the under surface of
the primaries ; and as, in some species, this marking certainly does
vary in intensity, it is safer to regard the Campbellpore form as a
variety, at any rate until we have proof that the difference of pattern
is locally constant.
The following was placed by Major Yerbury under the same
number, but with a note of interrogation.
62. TERIAS IRREGULARIS.
Terias irregularis, Moore, P. Z.8. 1882, p. 253.
3 2, Campbellpore, 9th November, 1885; 13th January, 1886.
63. TeRtas suUAVA.
Terias suava, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 670. n. 28 (1836).
3, Campbellpore, 17th June, 1885.
“ Terias rotundularis (!), a few in June and July.”—J. W. Y.
64. TERIAS PURREEFA.
Terias purreea, Moore, P. Z.8. 1882, p. 252.
3, Attock Bridge, 8th November; 9, Campbellpore, 11th
November ; Hassan Abdal, 13th October, 1885.
The Campbellpore specimens were mixed up with 7. fimbriata,
372 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON {June 29,
and probably represent the 7. esiope of De Nicéville. Major Yerbury
says of it, “ Terias rotundularis not uncommon at Murree and along
the hills to Thundiani in September. 7. e@siope apud Swinhoe.”
I think there must be a slight error in the above note, for
Col. Swinhoe knows 7. purreea quite well; at the same time he may
have labelled the insect in haste. TZ. e@siope is not known from
India.
65. TERIAS HECABE.
Papilio hecabe, Linneus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 249 (1764).
2 , between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th September, 1885.
With this is a male, taken at Bugnoter on the 20th September,
and which I think must be a very abnormal specimen of the same
species. It wants the black border, and therefore, on the upper
surface, resembles 7. excavata; certainly, with only one example
before me, I do not feel justified in separating it.
66. TeRIAS EXCAVATA.
Terias excavata, Moore, P. Z.S. 1882, p. 252.
3, Campbellpore, 9th November; 92, Chuttar, 9th October,
1885.
This species was mixed up with 7. purreea and T. fimbriata.
67. TeERIAS VAGANS.
Terias vagans, Wallace, P. Z.S. 1866, p. 357. n. 10.
2, Chuttar, 9th October, 1885.
We previously only possessed males of this species; it has been
incorrectly named 7’. leta for Major Yerbury; he says that it is
rare, two specimens having been taken at Chuttar on the Murree
and Rawal Pindee road. Terias leta is a species in which the
apical area of the primaries and whole of secondaries on the under
surface are of a bright rusty-reddish colour ; in the male of 7’. vagens
they are lemon-yellow, and in the female of a sericeous creamy-
whitish tiut; in 7. jegeri they are flesh-tinted in both sexes.
68. TERACOLUS PROTRACTUS.
Teracolus protractus, Butler, P. Z.S. 1876, p. 137, n. 37.
6 2, Chittar Pahar, Lumbahdun, 2000 feet; 28th November,
1885.
The specimens of this species are not perfectly typical, the
colouring of the under surface being of a nearly yellow tint instead
of flesh-pink ; the third black spot of the primaries, in the male
specimens, is expanded so as to reach the inner margin, as in the form
from Beloochistan and Kutch ; but the female has three isolated spots
as in the type form.
“A single specimen, Campbellpore, 29th June, 1885; found
commonly in the Chittar Pahar near Lumbahdun, Kala Dilli, &e., at
the end of November and beginning of December.”—J. W. Y.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 373
69. TERACOLUS FAUSTINUS.
Idmais faustina, Felder, Reise der Nov., Lep. ii. p. 190.
3 2, Campbellpore, 17th and 21st November, 13th December ;
and Chittar Pahar, Lumbahdun, 2000 feet, 28th November, 1885.
With a series of each species before one, it is easy to distinguish
this from the Turco-Persian 7’. fausta ; it differs in its superior size
and more heavily marked primaries on the upperside (which, as
Felder says, more nearly resembles the female of 7. fausta than the
male), the much more dusky bases to the wings, blackish body,
greyish costa to primaries and interno-basal area to secondaries,
altogether duller and darker coloration below, the secondaries being
flesh-tinted on basal two fifths and irrorated with grey atoms
throughout, the conspicuous clay-coloured spots across the disk, and
the white instead of pale sulphur colour of the ventral surface of the
abdomen.
70. 'TERACOLUS FARRINUS.
Teracolus farrinus, Butler, P. Z.S. 1876, p. 159. n. 112, pl. 7.
fig. 2 (1876).
, between Tret and Barracoo, Murree and Rawal Pindee road,
9th October; Attock Bridge, 8th November ; Campbellpore, 14th
November, 1885.
This was identified for Major Yerbury as “ 7’. etrida?” -
71. TERACOLUS BIMBURA.
Teracolus biméura, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1876, p. 161. n. 117, pl. 7.
figs. 3, 4,
Q, Campbellpore, 27th October ; near Attock Bridge, Khairabad
side, 8th November; ¢, Chittar Pahar, Lumbahdun, 2000 feet,
28th November, 1885.
This and the following are confounded together and labelled
doubtfully as Teracolus etridu. Major Yerbury says of them :—
“Common in June, July, October, and November. There seem
to be Butterflies corresponding to the following species under this
number, viz. :—purus, etrida, pernotatus, and bimbura ; but I should
be doubtful whether, here at any rate, they do not all belong to
T. etrida. I have taken these small orange-tips at Hassan Abdal ;
(single specimen), on the road between Murree and Rawal Pindee
near Barracoo (single specimen), near Attock Bridge, Khairabad side
(a few), in the Chittar Pahar between Choi and Lumbahdun (very
common), neighbourhood of Campbellpore (common).”
Taking specimens in so many localities, it is not surprising that
three species should be obtained ; as to their being all one, that isa
question only to be decided by most careful breeding; they differ
far more than our three British White Butterflies Ganoris brassicae,
rape, and napi, yet there is not the slightest doubt of the distinctness
of the latter.
374 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
72. TERACOLUS PURUS.
Teracolus purus, Butler, P. Z.S. 1876, p. 160. n. 113, pl. 7.
figs. 14, 15 (1876).
3, Campbellpore, 26th June and 17th July, 1885.
It is interesting to note that whereas this species was obtained in
June and July, 7. farrinus and 7. bimbura were caught in October
and November ; at the same time we have a specimen of 7. farrinus
taken by Col. Swinhoe in July ; so that they cannot be regarded as
seasonal forms, as seems to be the favourite plan now-a-days with many
allied species. The brown colouring of the underside in T. bimbura
sufficiently distinguishes it from any of its allies to prevent confusion.
73. [xIaAs PYGMA.
Izias pygmea, Moore, P. Z.S. 1882, p. 254, pl. xii. fig. 1.
3 2, Campbellpore, 17th November and 13th December; 92,
Chittar Pahar, 1500 feet, 1st December, 1885.
“ Txias, n. sp. allied to dharmsale, apud Swinhoe. This Izias is
not uncommon near Campbellpore in November; almost all the
males taken were caught in this neighbourhood ; whilst at Kala
Dilli in the Chittar Pahar the females were very common and there
were no males. The females were, almost without exception, taken
on the same plant (Croton sp.?), a plant with spikes of white labiate
flowers and broadish dark green leaves. I have taken this species
near Campbellpore in the bed of the Haro ; near Attock Bridge,
Khairabad side, two females ; and at Kala Dilli in the Chittar Pahar,
all females, very common.”—J. W. Y.
The type of this species, from Kangra, is a dwarfed male ; a similar
one is sent to us by Major Yerbury ; the regular size of the species,
however, for both sexes is about 59 millim., so that I. pygme@a isa
misnomer. The species is allied to J. moulmeinensis, but differs in
the broad inner black border to the orange belt of the male and the
bright sulphur-yellow of the female; the absence of the heavy black
bordering to the secondaries removes it from the neighbourhood of
I. dharmsale.
74, BELENOIS AURIGINEA, Sp. 1.
Q. Allied to B. taprobana, but differing in the whiter colour of
the primaries on both surfaces, the almost total absence of the grey
basal suffusion on these wings, the more oblique and rather narrower
discocellular patch, the narrower external border divided by six
indistinct pale spots, the abrupt narrowing of this border (so as to
leave only a greyish border on the interno-median area); the
secondaries, which are either cream-coloured or ochreous, have a
much narrower border with zigzag inner edge and enclose four spots
of the ground-colour, the grey veins are similar, but the discocellular
vein is only partly blackened and the subapical bar uniting the
subcostal branches is represented only by greyish scales; on the
under surface the whole disk of primaries is white, and the black and
brown markings are all much narrower than in B. taprodana, but
4
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 375
the basal and apical areas of primaries and the whole surface of the
secondaries are bright ochreous, only a little paler than in that
species. Expanse of wings 56 millim.
2, Campbellpore, 29th and 30th May, 1885. i
It is evident that this form is regarded by collectors in India as
the spring brood of B. mesentina ; but, so far as I have been able
to ascertain, this is not an ascertained fact, whilst the existence of a
species representing it in Ceylon is strong evidence to the contrary.
Though apparently commoner in the North-west Provinces, this
form does occur in the East ; the male, though very like B. mesentina
on the upper surface, has the apical area of the primaries and whole
surface of secondaries on the underside of a deep cream-colour more
or less tinged with chrome-yellow.
75. BELENOIS LORDACA.
Pieris lordaca, Walker, Entomologist, v. p. 48.
$, Campbellpore, 11th June; 2, Chittar Pahar, 2000 to 3000
feet, 28th November, 1885.
This is the common form of India, of which it is possible that
B. mesentina may be a variety ; the latter, however, differs on the
under surface in the great breadth of the brown veins on the apical
area of primaries and the whole of secondaries.
«Common in May, June, and July, and again in October and
November ; a few to be seen in December : the spring brood is much
the darkest. The caterpillar feeds on a caper with dark red
blossom (Capparis horrida’?).”—J. W. Y.
It is a significant fact that the only male sent to us in this
collection should not belong to the dark form supposed to be the
spring brood.
76. SYNCHLOE DAPLIDICE.
Papilio daplidice, Linnzeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 760. n. 77 (1767).
Campbellpore, 11th and 12th June and 11th July, 1885.
77. GANORIS AJAKA.
Pieris ajaka, Moore, P.Z.S. 1865, p. 490. n. 21, pl. 31. fig. 16.
S$ 2, Murree, 23rd August and 3rd September, 1885.
Rather less strongly marked than usual.
“* Mancipium ajaka common at Murree in August under the
shade of trees.”—J. W. Y.
78. GANORIS GLICIRIA.
Papilio gliciria, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. pl. 171. figs. E, F (1779).
@, Campbellpore, 9th June and 14th November; ¢ 2, Murree,
15th and 25th August.
** Fairly common, May and June; common, October and Novem-
ber.’"—J. W. Y.
The name of Mancipium canidium has been given to Major
Yerbury for this species. Now the name Maneipium was first
employed by Hiibner in his ‘Tentamen,’ the publication of which
376 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
is extremely doubtful, and the genus (in any case) was not described
in that list of names; if adopted, it should be used in the Stephen-
sian sense (i. e. either for daplidice,or cardamines), and Westwood’s
action would fix the type as cardamines. Secondly, the identification
of Papilio canidia is doubtful, and would probably apply to two
or three species with equal accuracy, and therefore I prefer to give
this species the name applied to it by Cramer.
79. GANORIS NIPALENSIS.
Pieris brassice, var. nipalensis, Gray, Lep. Ins. Nepal, pl. 6.
figs. 1 & 3 (1846).
3, Campbellpore, 22nd and 29th May and 12th June, 1885.
**Common in May, June, July, October, November, December.
The cabbages in my garden are covered at the present time (11th
January, 1886) with the caterpillars of some white butterfly’, and
there are some half-dozen chrysalides on the walls of the bungalow;
they all probably belong to this species.”
80. EvcHLo# LucriLua, sp. nov. (Plate XXXV. fig. 4.)
Allied to #. charlonia of Algeria, from which, however, the
following characters readily distinguish it :—Wings above gamboge-
iustead of lemon-yellow; the discocellular black patch broader,
regular, and quadrate; the apical area browner, and, instead of
forming a triangular patch, widely excavated and diffused on its
inner edge and truncated at its inferior extremity ; the yellow streak
across it much as in &. charlonia: under surface differing, at a
glance, in the absence of the apical grey-green patch of primaries,
the yellow instead of grey-green secondaries, the larger pale costal
spots, the better marked grey-edged white discocellular spot, and
the absence of the pale spots on the median interspaces. Expanse
of wings 35 millim.
Campbellpore, 27th May, 1885.
“ Anthocaris charlonia : rare, only three specimens taken—the
first on the 21st May, the second on the 23rd, and the third
on the 27th.
‘© Nos. 1 and 2 were found on the same plant of Stachys parvifiora,
No. 3 taken on the wing about a mile away.”—J. W. Y.
I can only suppose that the name A. charlonia was given by
Mr. de Nicéville ; yet it would seem strange that a gentleman who
claims to be almost an arbiter in questions relating to geographical
distribution, should unhesitatingly give the name of an Algerian
insect to a species obtained in North-western India.
PaPILIONINZ.
81. PaprLio CLOANTHUS.
Papilio cloanthus, Westwood, Arc. Ent. i. pl. 11. fig. 2 (1841).
Murree, 10th September, 1885 (very ragged).
‘Black: dorsal line white or yellow, spiral line yellow; yellowish-green
irregular A-shaped patches speckled with black running up into the black from
the spiral lines, but never reaching the dorsal lines ; length about two inches.”
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 377
“Rare: only three specimens taken, end of August and beginning
of September.”—J. W. Y.
82. PapILio ERITHONIUS.
Papilio erithonius, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 232. figs. A, B (1782).
Campbellpore, 18th October, 1885.
*‘ A few in June and July ; common in October and November.”
—J.W.Y.
The single example sent in the present collection belongs to a
rather rare sport of the species, in which the usual orange spots on
the under surface are replaced by greyish testaceous spots.
83. PAprmLio ASIATICUS.
Papilio machaon, var. asiatica, Ménétriés, Cat. Mus. Petr., Lep. i.
p- 70 (1855).
Campbellpore, 9th July ; Murree, Ist October, 1885.
‘* A few at Campbellpore in June and July; common at Murree
in August ; found commonly on the lower slopes of Thundiani in
September 1885.”—J. W. ¥.
84. PapILio ARCTURUS.
Papilio arcturus, Westwood, Ann. Nat. Hist. ix. p- 37 (1842).
3, Murree, 13th August, 1885.
Major Yerbury sends this and the following under the same
number, which accounts for the different identifications received by
him from Mr. de Nicéville and Col. Swinhoe.
85. PApILio POLYCTOR.
Papilio polyctor, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 205. n. 18
(1836).
2, between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th September, 1885.
Respecting these two species Major Yerbury says :—“ Fairly
common at Murree in August; a few seen along the hills as far as
Thundiani in September.” It would therefore appear that P.
polyctor is a month later than P. arcturus ; only the single specimen
of the former sent to us is much worn and must have been quite a
month on the wing.
HeESPERIIDS.
86. PARNARA MANGALA.
Hesperia mangala, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 792.
Murree, 8th and 10th September ; Thundiani, 24th September ;
Hassan Abdal, 13th October, 1885.
Major Yerbury has received the names of P. bada and P. beavani
for this species, and he says:—‘* There are two ‘skippers’ under
this number: both species were common at Murree in August and
September.” Neither of these species is represented amongst the
five examples in this collection, all of which are quite typical
P. mangala, the row of spots on the secondaries being larger and
Proc. Zoou. Soc.— 1886, No. XXV. 25
378 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
more nearly in line than in either of the above-named species.
Whether with a large series it will be possible to unite the three
forms remains to be seen; so far they hold their own as tolerably
constant types. P. mangala always has the lowest spot on the
primaries larger and more quadrate than in the other two.
87. GEGENES KARSANA.
Hesperia karsana, Moore, P. Z. 8S. 1874, p. 576, pl. 67. fig. 6.
3, Campbellpore, 21st July, 1885.
“ A few in June and July ; common in October and November.”
—J.W.Y. As, however, the following is placed under the same
number, the later dates probably refer exclusively to it.
88. GEGENES NOSTRODAMUS.
Hesperia nostrodamus, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. ii. 1, p. 328. n. 246
(1793).
3, Campbellpore, 29th October ; near Attock Bridge, Khairabad
side, 15th November, 1885.
The two males now sent are the first Indian examples of G. nos-
trodamus that I have seen; it is a tolerably common species in
Southern Europe, whereas G. karsana appears to be confined to
India.
89. PyRGUS EVANIDUs.
Pyrgus evanidus, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. v.
p. 223.
dg, Campbellpore, 31st May, 1885.
*“Uncommon ; a fewseen in June (three specimens taken).”—
J, We.
SPHINGID4.
90. HEMARIS SAUNDERSII.
Sesia saundersii, Walker, Lep. Het. viii. p. 83. n. 7 (1856).
3, Murree, October 1885.
“« Not uncommon in August and September.” —J. W. Y.
This is rather a rare species in European collections: only oue of
our few specimens is in good condition.
91. MACROGLOSSA STELLATARUM.
Sphinx stellatarum, Linneeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 803. n. 27
(1766).
Murree in September.
“ Not uncommon in August and September.” —J. W. F.
92. RHOPALOPSYCHE NYCTERIS.
Macroglossa nycteris, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 458,
p.l9. fir. 5.
Murree in September ; Campbellpore, 20th November, 1885.
“Common in August and September.”—J. W. ¥.
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 379
93. CHH#ROCAMPA ALECTO.
Sphinx alecto, Linnzeus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 357 (1764).
2, Murree in August.
‘One specimen taken.”—J. W. Y.
94. CHmROCAMPA CELERIO.
Sphinz celerio, Linnzeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 800 (1766).
S 2. Campbellpore in May.
95. DEILEPHILA LIVORNICA.
Sphinx livornica, Esper, Ausl. Schmett. ii. pp. 87, 196, pl. 8.
fig. 4 (1785).
3 2, Campbellpore in May.
96. NEPHILA HESPERA.
Sphinz hespera, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 546. n. 33 (1775).
do, Campbellpore, 18th November, 1885.
Var. MORPHEUS.
Sphinx morpheus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. p. 84, pl. 149. fig. D
(1779).
2, Campbellpore, 18th November, 1885.
The differences between these two varieties were supposed at one
time to be characteristic of the sexes; but this is not the case, as
both sexes occur with and without the silver spots.
97. PROTOPARCE ORIENTALIS.
Protoparce orientalis, Butler, Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. x. p. 609.
n. 21, pl. xei. figs. 16, 17 (1875).
2, Campbellpore, August 1885.
LEUCANIID.
98. LEUCANIA EXTRANEA.
Leucania extranea, Guénée, Noct. i. p. 77. n. 104.
Q, Campbellpore.
99. LeuCANIA COLLECTA.
Leucania collecta, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. ix. p. 105. n. 63
(1856).
Campbellpore, July 1885.
CARADRINID&,
100. CARADRINA SABULOSA.
Caradrina sabulosa, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8.1884, p. 516. n. 23, pl. xvii.
fig. 6.
Campbellpore, 5th, 10th, 28th, and 30th July, 1885.
Seven examples were forwarded by Major Yerbury, exhibiting a
considerable amount of variation ; as a rule they are much better
defined in all their markings than in Col. Swinhoe’s figure.
obs
880 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29»
XYLOPHASIIDZ.
101. PRopENIA CARADRINOIDES.
Laphygma? caradrinoides, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. ix. p. 190.
n. 8 (1856).
2, Campbellpore, 27th July, 1885.
The single specimen sent appears to belong to this species, but
has been so much knocked about on the journey from Campbellpore
as to be only just recognizable: it is quite unfit to put imto the
collection.
Nocruip2.
102, AGROTIS AVERSA.
Agrotis aversa, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. x. p. 345. n. 92 (1856).
Agrotis certificata, Walker, 7. c. Suppl. vol. ii. p. 697 (1865).
Caradrina triturata?, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. x. p. 295. n. 30
(1856).
3, Murree, 9th August, 1885.
As indicated by the name given to them, Walker’s types of
Caradrina triturata are so much frayed as to be practically unidenti-
fiable ; what is left of them, however, indicates close affinity to, if
not identity with, dgrotis aversa.
103. AGROTIS ARISTIFERA.
Agrotis aristifera, Guénée, Noct. i. p. 266. n. 426 (1852).
3, Campbellpore, 30th July, 1885.
104. AGROTIS SUFFUSA.
Phalena-Noctua suffusa, Gmelin, ed. Syst. Nat. i. 5, p. 2541.
n. 1028.
9, Kalabagh, 17th September, 1885.
105. OcHROPLEURA TRIANGULARIS.
Ochropleura triangularis, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1867, p. 55.
Murree, 9th August, 1885.
ACONTIIDA.
106. BANKIA OPELLA.
Acontia opella, Swinhoe, P. Z.S. 1885, p. 456. n. 68, pl. xxvii.
fig. 16.
Campbellpore, 6th July, 1885.
107. XANTHODES INNOCENS.
Xanthodes innocens, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xv. p. 1752 (1858).
Campbellpore, 28th July, 1885.
Nearly allied to X. graellsii of Europe, but with the curved lon-
gitudinal brown stripe on the primaries narrower and greyer; the
primaries themselves are also somewhat paler.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 381
EuURHIPIDS.
108. PENICILLARIA EXCITANS, sp. n.
Allied to P. geyeri ; of the same size, form, and general pattern,
but the whole of the whity-brown markings of primaries and basal
two thirds of secondaries altered to snow-white ; the testaceous areas
replaced by brick-red and the dull brown by pale ash-grey ; the
collar snow-white excepting at the base, the prothorax edged with
white, the thorax reddish, the abdomen greyish towards the base;
the under surface white, with black and grey markings instead of
pale brown with darker brown markings. Expanse of wings 42
millim.
Bugnoter, September 19th, 1885.
TOXOCAMPID&.
109. PLecorrerA REFLEXA.
Plecoptera reflexa, Guénée, Noct. ii. p. 431. n. 1303.
Trigonodes? gammoides, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xv. p. 1833
(1858).
Poaphila? simplex, Walker, 1. c. p. 1840 (1858).
Campbellpore, 26th and 30th July, 1885.
110. ToxocAMPA ORIENTALIS, sp. 0.
Allied to 7. lilacina of Japan ; of the same colours and pattern on
the upper surface, but considerably larger and with the fringe of
secondaries paler: on the under surface the entire external third
excepting the fringe is much darker ; the costa of primaries from
the middle is ochraceous, and the basal:two thirds of the secondaries
brownish white, with a distinct black discocellular spot and an
arched dusky stripe across the disk. Expanse of wings 47 millim.
Murree, 7th August, 1885.
POLYDESMID&.
111. PANDESMA QUENAVADI.
Pandesma quenavadi, Guénée, Noct. ii. p. 438. n. 1310.
Campbellpore, 30th June, 6th, 7th, and 25th July, 1885.
The specimen last enumerated is unusually dwarfed and dark,
but does not appear to differ in any other respect from ordinary
examples ; it is a little rubbed, and consequently the black markings
are partly obliterated, which may account for its being differently
numbered by Major Yerbury.
HoMoprerRIpD2&.
112. ALAMIS UMBRINA.
Alamis umbrina, Guénée, Noct. iii. p. 4. n. 1321.
Var. Alamis albicincta, Guénée, 1. c. n. 1322.
Campbellpore, 29th June and 30th July, 1885.
382 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON {June 29,
113. Homoprera VILIs.
Homoptera vilis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het., Suppl. iii. p. 889 (1865).
Campbellpore, 27th July, 1885.
The single specimen of this species forwarded by Major Yerbury
was much damaged in transit.
OPHIUSIDE.
114, ACH#ZA MELICERTE.
Phalena-Noctua melicerte, Drury, Tl, Ex. Ent. i. p. 46, pl. 23.
fig. 1.
Campbellpore, 27th July, 1885.
Also much damaged.
115. OPHIUSA ALBIVITTA.
Ophiusa albivitta, Guénée, Noct. ii. p. 271. n. 1707.
Campbellpore, July 1885.
A good deal rubbed.
116. GRAMMODES STOLIDA.
Noctua stolida, Fabricius, Sp. Ins. ii. p. 218. n. 54.
3, Campbellpore, 23rd July, 1885.
EUCLIDIID2.
117. TRIGONODES HYPPASIA.
Phalena-Noctua hyppasia, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. p. 99, pl. 250.
fig. E (1782).
Trigonodes compar, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xiv. p. 1451. n. 9
(1857).
Campbellpore, November 1885.
HyPrenipD2&.
118. HyPENA TATORHINA?
Hypena tatorhina, Butler, Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. iii. p. 60, pl. lv.
fig. 13 (1879).
6, Kala Pani, 24th September, 1885.
One worn and ‘broken specimen, apparently of this species.
119. Ruyncuina, sp. n.?
Two examples, both broken and therefore unfit for description.
Murree, 9th August; Bugnoter, 19th September, 1885.
This species somewhat resembles “ Hypena antiqualis.”
PYRALID2&,
120. AGLOSSA PINGUINALIS.
Phalena-Pyralis pinguinalis, Linneus, Fauna Suecica, p. 1320.
Murree, 15th August, 1885.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 383
121. SuRATTHA ALBIPENNISs, sp. ni.
Allied to S. invectalis of Ceylon, but the primaries of a more
uniformly pale sandy-brown tint, the belt beyond the middle being
only flecked with black and white like the interno-basal area, the
outer border of this belt also less abruptly angulated ; the external
area grey, irrorated with white and with a marginal series of black-
tipped fusiform white spots; secondaries white instead of whity
brown ; abdomen also paler ; under surface paler. Expanse of wings
22 millim.
3, Campellpore, 30th July, 1885.
The genus Surattha was also described by Walker under the
names Pindicitora and Calarina; the types belong to one species
only.
122. Pyrauis ELacHIA?
Pyralis elachia, Butler, Ul. Typ. Lep. Het. iii. p. 70, pl. lviii.
fig. 3 (1879).
Campbellpore, July ; Murree, August 1885.
Two worn examples belonging apparently to this species; they
chiefly differ from the type in their slightly darker secondaries.
123. Pyratis inconerua. (Plate XXXV. fig. 5.)
Allied to P. glaucinalis and P. yokohame; of the same size as the
latter, but in pattern much nearer to P. nannodes ; from the latter
it only differs in its superior size and the almost perfectly straight,
instead of irregular, whitish stripes across the primaries; from
P. glaucinalis and P. yokohame it differs in the much greater width
between these stripes in addition to their greater regularity: the
colouring in all four species is very similar. Expanse of wings
27 millim.
Kala Pani, 24th September, 1885.
HERCYNID2.
124. APORODES MELEAGRISALIS.
Herbula meleagrisalis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xvii. p. 324. n. 11
(1857).
Campbellpore, 7th July, 1885.
ASOPIID&.
125. SAMEA YERBURII, sp.n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 6.)
Allied to S. magna of Japan; of the same colours, but with
whitish-centred discocellular lunules, the whitish patches quite
differently arranged and not forming bands: primaries with two
patches—the first small and oblong, in the middle of the cell, the
second transverse quinquefid, between the end of the cell and the
dusky discal line, the latter unequally bisinuate, not sharply angulated
as in S. magna, less defined and with a pale (not whitish) external
edging ; veins whitish towards the outer margin; fringe with a
384 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
brown-spotted whitish basal line: secondaries with a small white
spot in the cell close to the terminal or discocellular lunule ; a large
irregular quadrifid patch beyond the cell and bounded by the discal
stripe, which is similar in character to that of the primaries, the
projecting part of this stripe (its anterior half) being bounded by
five white lunules; fringe with a white basal line: body of the same
golden-glossed smoky-grey tint as the wings, the abdomen with
whitish edges to the segments: wings below paler than above,
silvery, the secondaries almost white. Expanse of wings 37 millim.
Murree, 7th and 9th August, 1885.
126. HyMENIA FASCIALIs.
Phalena-Pyralis fascialis, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 398. fig. O
(1782).
Bugnoter, 19th September, 1875.
BorTipipDs&.
127. MrecyNa RUSTICALIS.
Pyralis rusticalis, Hiibner, Pyral. p. 26. n. 3, pl. 18. fig. 121.
Campbellpore, 5th July, 1885.
SCOPARIID&.
128. STENOPTERYX HYBRIDALIS.
Pyralis hybridalis, Hiibner, Pyral. p. 29. n. 20, pl. 17. fig. 114.
Murree, 2nd August, 1885.
129, ScopuLa VINCTALIS.
Scopula vinctalis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het., Suppl. iv. p. 1476
(1865).
Campbellpore, July 1885.
An unusually dark specimen of this widely distributed species.
130. Dosara C@LATALIS.
Dosara celatalis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xix. p. 829. n. 1
(1859).
Campbellpore, November 1885.
Does not differ from Ceylonese specimens.
151. Up8a Fora.is.
Scopula fotalis, Swinhoe, P. Z. S. 1885, p. 875. n. 165, pl. lvii.
fig. 9.
Campbellpore, 30th July, 1885.
CHALCOSIID&.
132. AGALOPE BASALIS.
Agalope basalis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. ii. p. 438. n. 1 (1854).
3, 8th September, 1885.
“*Common in September.”—J. IV. Y.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 385
Major Yerbury sent three males of this species ; it is perfectly
constant in all its characters, and therefore readily separable from the
two north-eastern forms.
ZYGEUNIDA.
133. ZyGHZNA CASCHMIRENSIS.
Zygena caschmirensis, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. p. 459. n. 1,
pl. 19. fig. 6.
Murree, 9th August, 1885.
“Common in September.” —J. W. Y.
ARCTIIDE.
134. TuHyrGorina, sp. n.?
One worn specimen, too much injured for description, but appa-
rently new to science.
Murree, 9th August, 1885.
This species should be common, and, even if not, it is so conspi-
cuous an insect that the only wonder is that it should not exist
either in the collections of the British Museum or of Mr. F. Moore ;
of course it might have been passed by under the impression that it
was some common Spzlosoma or Aloa.
LITHOSIID&.
135. DEIOPEIA THYTER.
Deiopeia thyter, Butler, Trans. Ent. Soc. London, 1877, p. 361.
n. 253.
Campbellpore, 5th July, 1885.
‘ Common in May, June, and July.”"—J. W. Y.
LIpaRiID&.
136. ARTAXA ANGULIGERA, Sp. 1.
Primaries above pale ochreous, crossed beyond the middle by a
tolerably broad belt of dark-brown scales crossed by yellow veins,
and with a rather acute angle on its outer edge within the second
median interspace ; a few scales of the same colour near the base
and others in spots on the external border: secondaries much paler
than primaries, quite white towards costa: body ochreous; antennz
white, with grey pectinations ; under surface wholly whitish.
Expanse of wings 25 millim.
Murree, 9th August, 1885.
137. ARTAXA SCINTILLANS.
Somena scintillans, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. vii. p. 1734 (1855).
3 2 (in coiti), Murree, 12th August, 1885.
The female obtained by Major Yerbury differs from the male
considerably—a most unusual thing in this genus. The colouring
and pattern more nearly resemble those of A. limbata; from the
latter it principally differs in its smaller size and uniformly paler
386 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
tint, the abdomen grey instead of blackish, and the marginal spots of
the primaries smaller.
138. CH#ROTRICHE VITELLINA.
Liparis vitellina, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 471. 0.4
(1848).
Euproctis gamma, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. vii. p. 1731 (1855).
Artaxa princeps, Walker, 1. c. Suppl. i. p. 331 (1865).
Murree, 7th and 9th August, 1885.
139. PorTHESIA XANTHORRH ZA.
Liparis xanthorrhea, Kollar in Higel’s Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 470
(1842).
do 2, Campbellpore, 24th June, 1885.
140. PorTHETRIA OBFUSCATA.
3 . Lymantria obfuscata, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het., Suppl. ii. p. 367
(1865).
3 2, Sth to 11th August, 1885.
The female (which is a cripple) was sent to me, along with its
eges, some time ago; it nearly resembles the female of P. japonica
excepting that it is smaller. Some of the eggs were hatched about
the beginning of May and, by my advice, were placed upon young
hawthorn ; upon this and upon cak they have since lived, but their
growth has, so far, been very slow; at the present time (June 5th)
they are in their second moult and measure 11 millim, in length.
Dorsal surface slate-grey, with a central series of seven spots com-
mencing on the fourth segment, the fifth of these spots ochreous,
the others red; the spots are connected by a slender longitudinal
pale line and are bounded on each side by black spots; the subdorsal
line is slender and whitish; the sides and ventral surface ash-grey ;
a lateral series of testaceous tubercles crowned with radiating bristles
and connected by a very slender blackish line; tubercles of the
second and two last segments very prominent and terminating in
very long bristles; legs testaceous ; head dark testaceous, the eyes
bounded internally by two large fusiform black spots.
LASIOCAMPID2.
141. TRABALA VISHNOU.
Gastropacha vishnou, Lefebvre, Zool. Journ. iii. p. 207.
3 2, Murree, 3rd September, 1885.
“Cocoons very common all along the hills from Murree to
Thundiani, August and beginning of September. The males all came
out early in September, the females later; the latter appear to
remain on their cocoons, as several were taken thus late in September.
Cocoon and chrysalis sent.”—J. W. ¥.
The cocoon of Z. vishnou, which bears some resemblance to a
quaint bearded face, is too well known to be worth redescribing
here,
a =
1886. } LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 387
142. CuILeNa sIMItis ?
Chilena similis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. v. p. 1071. n. 1 (1855).
3 2, Campbellpore, from cocoon, July 1885.
The pair forwarded to me are very large for this species, but, so far
as can be judged from the much rubbed and frayed specimens, there
appears to be no difference of pattern.
143. Mrecasoma VENUSTUM.
2. Megasoma venustum, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. vi. p. 1449.
n. 6 (1855).
2, Campbellpore, 20th July, 1885.
MusTIuiip#.
144. Mustru1a coLumBaris, sp.n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 7.)
Pale sandy greyish brown ; primaries crossed by two dark greyish
lines, the inner one very irregularly sinuated, commencing in a
brown costal streak, the second regular, oblique, from inner margin
to apex; a brown patch at second third of costa and one or two
diffused spots on outer border ; a black spot at end of cell: secon-
daries with one irregularly angulated line beyond the middle ; costal
area whitish ; external area dusky ; a black dot at end of cell: head
white: under surface uniform pale sandy brown, reddish towards
outer margin, a single straight grey line across the wings. Expanse
of wings 61 millim.
Murree, 13th August, 1885.
145. CALIGULA SIMLA.
Saturnia simla, Westwood, Cat. Orient. Ent. p- 41, pl. 20. fig. 1.
Murree, August 1885.
One specimen is labelled as “ from chrysalis said to have come
from the snows, Cashmere.” All the specimens arrived in a more
or less shattered condition.
NoTroponrTipa2.
146. IcHTHYURA CUPREATA, sp. n.
Brownish or dust-grey ; primaries darker than secondaries and
varied with irregular bands of pale reddish cupreous ; the wings
crossed by whitish lines forming in large irregular characters the
letters VB (left-hand wing); a submarginal series of unequal dust-
grey spots is left between the cupreous bands on the disk ; secon-
daries pale towards the base, the costa white; thorax dark grey-
brown : under surface pale and without markings. Expanse of wings
28 millim.
Campbellpore, 26th July, 1885.
DREPANULID&.
147, ARGYRIA CINEREA, sp.n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 8.)
Pale dove-grey ; primaries darker in the centre; all the wings
388 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
with a large rounded testaceous central patch edged with dark grey
and flecked with black, whitish, and metallic silver scales; submarginal
and marginal leaden-grey lines, with a series of spots of the same
colour between them ; under surface wholly greyish white. Expanse
of wings 33 millim.
Campbellpore, 5th July, 1885.
Quite unique in the genus.
URAPTERYGID.
148. URAPTERYX YERBURII, Sp. n.
Nearest to U. clara! of the N.E. Himalayas, but differing in the
more widely separated and greyer bands across the primaries, the
more numerous grey striations on the wings, the paler fringes, the
red-centred grey spot in the precaudal angle of the secondaries, and
the narrower tail to these wings ; the abdomen is white (as it probably
is in fresh specimens of U. clara). Expanse of wings 56 millim.
Murree, 2nd October, 1885.
ENNOMID.
149. RumIA MIMULINA, sp. n.
Nearly allied to 2. crategaria of Europe, with almost the same
pattern and coloration, but usually larger and always with the
chocolate-coloured markings, especially the subapical costal spot of
primaries, considerably broader; the form of the so-called “‘reniform ’”
spot also differs somewhat. Expanse of wings 40—43 millim.
Murree, 8th and 12th September, 1885.
This species so singularly resembles the European insect that
until I had examined a considerable number of specimens of the
latter, and thus completely satisfied myself that no variety approach-
ing the Indian insect ever occurred in R&R. crateyaria, I was
tempted to regard the two specimens sent home by Major Yerbury
as sports of the latter species: on looking over Mr. Moore’s collec-
tion, I found a third example of the Indian species, above which (but
separated by a label) was placed, for purposes of comparison, a
specimen of the European species.
OxyDIID&.
150. Pyrinta? PH@NICO-TENIATA.
Aspilates phenico-teniata, Kollar in Hiigel’s Kaschm. iv. 2,
p- 487 (1842).
Murree, 7th August, 1885.
This species is new to the collection ; it corresponds so closely with
Kollar’s description that I have very little doubt as to the correctness
of my identification.
151. HyperRYTHRA PHANTASMA.
Hyperythra phantasma, Butler, P. Z.S. 1881, p. 614. n. 62.
Campbellpore, 11th November, 1885.
1 Til. Typ. Lep. Het. vi. pl. exiii. fig. 6.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 389
This species, when fresh, is decidedly greenish, and therefore con-
trasts strongly with the allied H. swinhoei, recently captured speci-
mens of which are decidedly reddish.
BoaRMIID&.
152. BosrMIA ITERATA, Sp. nD.
Near to B. repandaria of Europe, the basal area of the wings
more or less suffused with grey, all the markings much more strongly
defined excepting the pale submarginal stripe, which is indistinct and
less perfectly dentate-sinuate; the first and second black lines on
the secondaries are also twice the width apart; the under surface is
greyish white instead of sandy buff, and the primaries are strongly
clouded with blackish. Expanse of wings 41 to 47 millim.
Murree, 24th and 28th August, 4th September; Kala Pani,
24th September, 1855.
Boarmia iterata is a common, though unnamed, Indian species ;
it is allied to B. pleniferata, but more nearly to the European insect.
153. Gnornos? OBTECTARIA.
Gnophos obtectaria, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het., Suppl. v. p. 1597
{1866); Butler, Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. vi. p- 66, pl. exvi. fig. 8 (1886).
3, Murree, 8th September, 1885.
This species should be separated from Gnophos,.as the antenne of
the male are distinctly bipectinated ; it may perhaps prove to belong
to one of the many allied genera already characterized in this
family. Only one worn specimen was sent by Major Yerbury.
154. GNopuos? P&RLITA, sp. n.
Allied to G. obtectaria: granite-grey, all the ordinary markings on
the upper surface indistinct, centre of the wings slightly paler than
the remainder of the surface, so as to give the appearance of a dif-
fused band, this in the primaries is partly bounded by an abbreviated
zigzag blackish line, and on the secondaries by a series of blackish
dots on the veins; there is also a blackish spot at the end of each
discoidal cell; the external border is slightly ash-coloured, with a
faintly indicated paler zigzag inner edging, the fringe is traversed at
the base and in the middle by slender pale lines, and the abdominal
fringe is white: below pure white, the wings with black discocellular
spots and a broad blackish external border; fringe spotted with
white; legs greyish above. Expanse of wings 48 millim.
Kala Pani, 24th September, 1885.
There is a series of this obscure-looking species in Mr. Moore’s
collection.
155. GNOPHOS DISPUNCTATA.
Gnophos dispunctata, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxi. p. 469. n. 28
(1869).
Murree, 4th September, 1885.
“A single specimen, sitting with open wings on a rock,”’—
J. WY.
390 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
156. GNOPHOsS VITREATA.
Scotosia vitreata, Moore, P. Z.S. 1867, p. 656.
3, Kala Pani, 24th September, 1885.
The single specimen obtained is greener than those in Mr, Moore’s
collection, but does not otherwise differ.
GEOMETRID.
157. Jopis DETRACTA.
Geometra detracta, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxii. p. 521. n. 27
(1861).
Campbellpore, 30th July, 1885.
158. THALASSODES OPALINA.
Thalassodes opalina, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5,
vol. vi. p. 214. n. 38 (1880); Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. vi. p. 70, pl.
exvil. fig. 9 (1886).
Murree, 6th September, 1885.
Ip xID&.
159. Ipxa ornata (local form I. deliciosaria, WIk.).
Phalena ornata, Scopoli, Ent. Carn. p. 219. n. 545.
Murree, 3lst August, 1885.
The markings are a little blacker than in the typical European
form.
An example of a second species, of this or an allied genus, was
found at Murree on 28th August, but as there is only one much
broken example I can do nothing with it; it is numbered 29.
MAcARIID&.
160. Macaria SUFFLATA.
Macaria suffata, Guénée, Phal. ii. p. 88. n. 1059, pl. 17. fig. 8
(1857).
Barracoo, near Rawal Pindee, 9th October, 1885.
New to the Museum collection ; the description by M. Guénée is
much better than his figure, which is decidedly unsatisfactory. The
* Tephrina incessaria” of Walker is a species of the same group, as
also is the ‘* Hpione brongusaria”’ of the same author.
161. NADAGARA GRISEA.
Nadagara grisea, Butler, P.Z.S. 1883, p. 172. n. 140.
Murree, 7th September, 1885.
FIpONIID2.
162. SreRRHA SACRARIA.
Phalena-Geometra sacraria, Linneus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 863.
n. 220.
Murree, 8th, 1]th, and 12th August; Campbellpore, 30th
October, 1885.
1886. | LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 391
163. PHyLETIS HERBICOLENS, var.
Delocharis herbicolens, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 173. n. 141.
2, Murree, 6th September, 1885.
Differs from the type in its pale greenish-grey, instead of pinky-
white tint, with the bands more distinctly green instead of brown.
It is allied to P. stlonaria, and the variation here described seems to
be the prevalent type of colouring in the males of this genus.
164. PHyLETIS INCONSPICUA, Sp. n.
3. Evidently allied to P. meonaria., Brownish grey ; the primaries
crossed at basal third by an indistinct brown line, beyond the
cell by a brown-edged band, and at the outer margin by a border of
the same width as the band: secondaries with the costal area and
base pale buff, a brown discal line parallel to outer margin and
a slender blackish marginal line; all the wings with black dis-
cocellular dots; fringes plum-coloured at base and testaceous at the
tips: thorax grey, antennz and abdomen testaceous: wings below
pale buff suffused with rose-red, crossed beyond the middle by a
darker, slightly arched line; fringes grey at base, pink at tips; a
black discocellular dot in all the wings; primaries with greyish dis-
coidal area: body below pale buff tinted with pink. Expanse of wings
32 millim.
Murree, 30th August, 1885.
The relative number of lines across the wings differs wholly from
that of P. meonaria, but the colouring seems very similar.
Ep1 FIDONIA, gen. nov.
Allied to Fidonia (F. concordaria’); differing in its more slender
body, less hairy palpi, more slender and less hairy legs, acute sub-
faleate primaries, the much longer discoidal cells in all the wings, and
in the less angular discocellulars of the secondaries.
1 F. concordaria is a yellow-winged species similar to those of New Zealand.
Mr. Meyrick, whose study of the Geometrina appears to have commenced with
a Catalogue of the New-Zealand species, has proposed for some of these yellow-
winged species the generic name Panthea, a name used five times previously in
Zoology. In his opinion the supposed new genus is nearly allied to Larentia,
whereas the whole structure of the body is totally dissimilar: the form and neu-
ration of the wings bear no near relationship to those of Larentia; in the latter
genus the wings are delicate, thinly scaled, much elongated, the veins lying close
together, the cells prolonged towards the median vein, the second and third
median branches and the radial of secondaries equidistant at their origins,
whereas in the New-Zealand /%donie the radial is halfway between the median
and subcostal veins. These points should be considered in conjunction with
the different structure of the antenns, palpi, legs, and, in fact, whole body,
which, however, Mr. Meyrick considers beneath his notice, basing his classifica-
tion solely upon neuration, which he indeed believes to have been modified to suit
the altered shape of the wings; yet, with singular inconsistency, he states that
“the shape of the wing, often employed by superficial observers, is not of the
least value, being purely specific.”
392 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29,
165. EprrrponIA SIGNATA, sp. n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 9.)
Chocolate-brown ; costa and discoidal area of primaries and centre
of secondaries more or less suffused with ochraceous, the costal area of
the latter wings, excepting at apex, widely bright ochreous; wings
striated throughout with black, the primaries crossed in the middle
by two well-separated blackish stripes, angulated towards costal
margin; an oblique snow-white subcostal spot near apex; secon-
daries with a double blackish line from centre of abdominal margin
to discoidal cell: body greyish: wings below bright ochreous with
broad dark-brown tapering apical borders and a number of scattered
black striations; primaries with a discal abbreviated band com-
mencing below the white subapical spot; two central black
lines; secondaries with an ill-defined central black line; pectus
whitish, venter ochraceous. Expanse of wings 29 millim.
Murree, 2nd, 9th, and 28th August, 1885.
ZERENID&.
166. ABRAXAS FUSCESCENS, sp. n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 10.)
Primaries whity brown, speckled and mottled with blackish ; base
of costa ochreous ; two widely separated divergent bands of spots,
formed by blackish mottling, limiting the central area; a spot of a
similar character on the costa just beyond the middle, an oblique
oval spot at the end of the cell, and a spot immediately beyond
the outer band at centre of second median interspace: secondaries
sericeous creamy white, sparsely speckled with dark grey ; a spot at
the end of the cell and a slightly sinuous discal series of the same
colour: head, collar, and tegule ochreous spotted with black,
remainder of body cream-coloured with dorsal black spots: pri-
maries below paler than above, the costa slightly ochraceous ; body
below yellowish cream-coloured, the venter with four series of black
spots. Expanse of wings 48 millim.
Kalabagh, 16th September, 1885.
167. ABRAXAS VIRGINALIS, sp. n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 11.)
Wings above pure white; base of primaries ochreous, dotted with
black and bounded by an irregular series of brownish dots; an im-
perfect band at basal fourth and the costa mottled with pale silver-
grey ; an annulus of the same colour closing the cell ; two contiguous
sinuous series of annular silver-grey spots across the disk, the inner
series with black-dotted ochreous centres; an ochreous streak partly
connecting the two series between the third median branch and the
inner margin; three larger grey spots and a number of scattered
annular dots beyond the discal series; six ocelloid marginal spots
extending into the fringe: secondaries almost exactly as in d. pan-
taria ; body paler than in the latter species : under surface of wings
more strongly marked than above, but without the ochreous tinting.
Expanse of wings 44 millim.
Murree, 13th August, 1885.
1885. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 393
LARENTIID&.’
168. MeLanrHia RESTITOTA.
Melanippe restitutata (sic), Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxv. p. 1297
(1862).
Campbellpore, July ; Murree, 2nd August, 1885.
The Melanthia gratulata of Walker, from Vancouver, is Packard’s
Rheumaptera brunneicillata.
169. Scorosia DUBIOSATA.
Scotosia dubiosata, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxv. p. 1352... 21
(1862).
Murree, 8th September; Bugnoter, 19th September, 1885.
* Not uncommon.’’—J. W. ¥.
170. ScorostA VENIMACULATA.
Scotosia venimaculata, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1867, p. 637.
Thundiani, 24th September, 1885.
The single specimen sent is of a greyish-brown tint, with a pale
golden or bronze gloss ; it shows no trace of the rosy suffusion com-
monly seen on the wings of Darjiling specimens’; all the markings
are, however, identical, and it is possible that the absence of the
reddish colouring may be due to fading or to individual variation.
171. CrpARIA PERPULCHRA, Sp. 0.
Allied to C. aurata and C. aliena; nearest to the former, but dif-
fering in the dark-grey instead of copper-brown basal area of the
primaries, the much more irregular band following it, owing to the
different form of the dark postmedian belt; the latter (which is
blackish grey instead of brown) commences transversely instead of
obliquely, is deeply bisinuated, and forms an angle at the median vein,
it is wider than in C. aurata as far as the second median branch, and
its anterior edge, instead of being narrowly incised on the lower
radial interspace, is cleft so as to form a wide >-shaped incision ;
the external border is much less rufous and the pale markings upon
it are paler and of twice the width; the secondaries are almost white
instead of pale.grey-brown ; the series of silver spots on the under
surface of the secondaries is wanting. Expanse of wings 29 millim.
Murree, 8th August, 1885.
This species in coloration more nearly resembles C. corylata than
either of the two others of the same group.
172. CipARIA JAMEZA?
Cidaria jameza, Butler, Aun. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. i.
p- 452 (1878); Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. iii. p. 58, pl. lv. fig. 9 (1879).
Murree, 20th August, 1885.
The single worn specimen in the collection is rather larger than
Japanese examples, but I can discover no other difference.
1 The collection contains a Lupithecia, but it is too much worn for identi-
fication.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXVI. 26
394 ON LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. [June 29,
173. CrpARIA ALBIGIRATA ¢
Cidaria albigirata, Kollar in Hiigel’s Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 489
(1848).
Murree, 12th August, 1885.
This agrees tolerably closely with Kollar’s description, but his
statement that it belongs to the neighbourhood of Cidaria prunata
and suffumata is misleading, if this be his species, since it is closely
allied to the European C. picata, and decidedly more closely than to
either of the above-mentioned insects; it occurs also in Afghan-
istan.
174. PHIBALAPTERYX, sp. n. ?
A single specimen, much faded, worn, and without any antennee or
palpi, apparently of a new species.
Bugnoter, 19th September, 1885.
CRAMBID&.
175. JARTHEZA CHRYSOGRAPHELLA.
Chilo chrysographellus, Kollar in Hiigel’s Kaschm. iv. p. 494
(1848).
Campbellpore, 30th July, 1885.
176. APURIMA XANTHOGASTRELLA.
Apurima wanthogastrella, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxvil. p. 194.
n. 1 (1863).
Campbellpore, 28th July, 1885.
TORTRICIDE.
177. CERACE TETRAONIS, sp. 0.
Primaries above black, regularly dotted with pale yellow; costal
border crossed by numerous short yellow striz ; a longitudinal sub-
costal bright red stripe from base to outer margin: secondaries with
the discoidal cell and costal area nearly to apex bright orange ochre-
ous, remainder of the wing black; five black costal spots; an
ochreous apical spot ; abdominal third of wing spotted all over with
ochreous: body blackish, head and collar spotted with yellow,
abdomen with ochreous margins to the segments: primaries below
without yellow dotting, the red stripe replaced by an ochreous patch
fillmg the discoidal cell and a spot on outer margin; the yellow
colouring on the secondaries paler than above, otherwise similar ;
body below whitish. Expanse of wings 28 millim.
Murree, 28th August, 1885.
Allied to C. onustana of Nepal.
CHOREUTIDE.
178. TEGNA HYBLZELLA.
Tegna hybleella, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het., Suppl. v. p. 1810
(1866).
Campbellpore, 20th July, 1885.
a
P.Z.S *l@66s,E) Ay
Maud Horman-Fisher del etlith Mintern Bros . amp}
NEW LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA.
1886. ] ON BIRDS FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. - 395
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXV.
Fig. 1, Azanus uranus, p. 366.
. Tarucus extricatus, p. 366.
Spindasis hypargyros, p. 369.
Euchloé lucilla, p. 376.
. Pyralis incongrua, p. 383.
. Samea yerburii, p. 383.
. Mustilia columbaris, p. 387.
. Argyria cinerea, p. 387.
. Epifidonia signata, p. 3‘)2.
10. Abraxas fuscescens, p. 392.
virginalis, p. 392.
COD “IS: crip OY dO
9. List of a Collection of Birds from the Province of Tara-
pac, Northern Chili. By P. L. Scuarer, M.A., Ph.D.,
F.R.S., Secretary to the Society.
[Received June 25, 1886.]
(Plate XXXVI.)
Mr. H. Berkeley James, F.Z.S., has placed in my hands for
determination a collection of bird-skins made for him by Carlos
Rahmer, of the National Museum, Santiago, in the province of Tara-
paca, formerly in Peru, but now, I believe, annexed to Chili. The
collection, which was made in January and February last, contains
150 skins referable to 53 species, amongst which a new Flamingo,
as I shall presently point out, is of special interest.
The nearest. fauna to Terapacd that has received much attention
is that of the Desert of Atacama just to the south, which was
explored in 1853-4 by Dr. R. A. Philippi, of Santiago’. Prof.
Philippi’s list of birds contains 33 species, only 11 or 12 of which
are identical with those in the present collection.
But our leading authority on the Birds of Peru, of which Republic
the district of Tarapaca until lately formed part, is Taczanowski’s
‘Ornithologie du Pérou.’ I have, therefore, referred throughout to
this most useful work except in the case of the following seven
species, which are not included by Taczanowski, and are therefore
additions to his avifauna, namely :—ASycalis aureiventris, Upucer-
thia ruficauda, Synallaxis modesta, Bolborhynchus orbignesius, Pheeni-
copterus jamest, Fulica leucoptera, and Atgialitis occidentalis, Of
these seven, one ( Bolborhynchus orbignesius) was hitherto only known
from Bolivia; two, so far as is yet ascertained, are peculiar to
Tarapaca (namely Pheenicopterus jamesi and Aigialitis occidentalis),
and the remaining four are Chilian species not hitherto recorded so
far north.
' The species in the present collection from Tarapacd which have
not yet been met with in Chili are 20 in number, namely :— Zurdus
1 ©Reise durch die Wiiste Atacama,’ &e. vy. Dr. R. A. Philippi: Halle, 1860.
26*
396 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON BIRDS [June 29,
chiguanco, Phrygilus plebeius, Chrysomitris atrata, Sycalis uropygi-
alis, Muscisaxicola albifrons, Centrites oreas, Cinclodes bifasciatus,
Bolborhynchus orbignesius, Phoenicopterus andinus, P. jamesi, Me-
triopelia aymara, Chamepelia cruziana, Gymnopelia erythrothoraz,
Gallinula galeata, Fulica gigantea, F. ardesiaca, Vanellus resplen-
dens, Aigialitis occidentalis, Recurvirostra andina, and Tinamotis
pentlandi.
VICINITY or TARAPACA
CHILI
Approximate altitudes shewnurteet, thurs 4,009
English Miles
05 2 30 40 50 To
72°
2°
The sketch now exhibited (fig. 1) will show most of the different
places in which the collection was formed.
1. Turpus cH1GuANCco, d’Orb. et Lafr.
Turdus chiguanco, Seebohm, Cat. Birds B. M. v. p. 225; Sel.
et Salv. P.Z. S. 1867, p. 984 (Islay).
Merula chiguanco, Tacz. Orn. Per. ii. p. 494.
Sibaya. One 9: iris brown; feet and beak vellow.
Obtained by Whitely near Islay, Peru, in 1867.
1886. ] FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. 397
2. ANTHUS, sp, inc.
Sacaya. One <¢: iris brown; feet brown; beak dark horn-
colour.
A young bird, nearest to A. furcatus, d’Orb. et Lafr. (Tacz. Orn.
Pér. 1. p. 459).
3. ATTICORA CYANOLEUCA ( Vieill.).
Atticora cyanoleuca, Sharpe, Cat. Birds B. M. x. p. 186; Tacz.
Orn. Pér. i. p. 244.
Huasco. One @ : iris brown; legs brown; feet black.
4, Puryerius arriceps (d’Orb. et Lafr.).
Emberiza atriceps, d’Orb. et Lafr. Syn. Av. i. p. 76.
Phrygilus atriceps, Tacz. Orn. Pér. ui. p. 34.
Sacaya and Lalcalhuay.
5. PHRYGILUS UNICOLOR (d’Orb. et Lafr.).
Emberiza unicolor, d’Orb. et Lafr. Syn. Av. i. p. 79.
Phrygilus unicolor, Scl. et Salv. Nomencel. p. 31.
Phrygilus rusticus, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iil. p. 38.
Huasco. One 4G : iris dark brown.
6. ParyeGitus pLeBetvus, Tsch.
Phrygilus plebeius, Scl. et Salv. Nomencl. p. 31; Taez. Orn.
Pér. iii. p. 39.
Huasco, Sitana, and Lalcalbuay.
7. PuRyGILus FRUTICETI (Kittl.).
Phrygilus fruticeti, Scl. et Salv. Nomencl. p. 31; Tacz. Orn.
Pér. iit. p. 37.
Sibaya. One ¢: iris dark brown; feet yellowish.
8. Curysomitris aTrata (d’Orb. et Lafr.).
Chrysomitus atrata, Scl. et Salv. Nomencl. p. 34; Taez. Orn.
Pér. iii. p.'53.
Huasco and Sacaya. Iris very dark brown.
9. Sycauis uropyGiALis (d’Orb. et Lafr.).
Sycalis uropygialis, Scl. Ibis, 1872, p. 47; Tacz. Orn. Per, iii.
p. 58.
Huasco and Sitana. Three examples, ¢ et 2 : sexes alike.
10. Sycants AUREIVENTRIS, Ph. et Landb.
as
Sycalis aureiventris, Scl. Ibis, 1872, p. 47, pl. iii.
Chumisa. One Q : iris dark brown.
11. Muscrsaxicoxa ALBIFrrons (Tsch.).
Muscisaxicola albifrons, Tacz. Orn. Peér. ii. p. 209.
Sacaya. One Q : iris dark brown; feet and beak black.
398 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON BIRDS [June 29,
12. MuscrsaxICOLA RUFIVERTEX; d’Orb. et Lafr.
Muscisaxicola rufivertex, Tacz. Orn. Pér. ii. p. 216.
Huasco. <¢ et 2: iris bright brown ; bill and feet black.
13. CENTRITES OREAS, Sel. et Salv.
Centrites oreas, Tacz. Orn. Pér. il. p. 222.
Sacaya. One ¢: iris very dark brown ; feet and beak black.
14. Grosirra cunrcuLanta (Vieill.).
Geositta cunicularia juninensis, Tacz. Orn. Pér. ii. p. 93.
Sacaya and Sitana. 6 et 9, alike: iris dark brown ; feet black ;
beak horn-colour.
15. UpucertTHia RUFICAUDA (Meyen).
Ochetorhynchus ruficaudus, Scl. P. Z.S. 1867, p. 324.
Upucerthia ruficauda, Scl. et Salv. Nomencl. p. 62; id. P. Z.8.
1879, p. 619.
Lalealhuay. ¢: iris brown; feet and beak black.
16. CINCLODES BIFASCIATUS.
Cinclodes bifasciatus, Scl. P. Z.S. 1858, p. 448 ; Tacz. Orn. Per.
il. p. 3.
Upucerthia atacamensis, Phil. Reise d. d. Wiiste Atacaina, p. 161,
t. ili.
Chumisa, Sacaya, and Sibaya. Males: iris dark brown; feet and
beak black.
17. Crnctopes Fuscus (Vieill.).
Cinclodes fuscus, Scl. et Salv. P. Z. 8. 1867, p. 985.
Cinclodes rivularis, Tacz. Orn. Pér, ii. p. 112.
Chumisa, Cueva negra, and Sacaya. Iris brown ; feet black.
18, LeprastHENURA £GITHALOIDES (Kittl.).
Leptasthenura egithaloides, Tacz. Orn. Pér. ii. p. 120.
Huasco. Iris dark brown.
19. SyNALLAXIS MODESTA, Eyton.
Synallaxis modesta, Scl. P. Z. 8. 1874, p. 23.
Sacaya and Sitana. Two ¢ et 9: iris dark brown.
20. OREOTROCHILUS LEUCOPLEURUS, Gould.
Oreotrochilus leucopleurus, Tacz. Orn. Per. ii. p. 278; Gould,
Mon. Troch. i. pl. 71.
Chumisa and Lalealhuay. Two females, with nest and eggs.
The nest consists of an oblong mass of grey and brown wool
(apparently Llama’s), with a few bits of moss intermixed. It is
pointed at the lower extremity. In a shallow open depression are
two white pyriform eggs ; they measure about 0°7 by 0°45 inch.
1886. ] FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. 399
21. BoLBORHYNCHUS ORBIGNESIUS.
Myicpsitta orbignesia, Bp. Rev. et Mag. de Zool. 1854, p. 151.
Bolborhynchus orbignesius, Scl. et Salv. P. Z.S. 1879, p. 635.
Bolborhynchus @ orbigni, Finsch, Papag. ii. p. 129.
Lalealhuay. Males and females: sexes alike; iris dark brown.
These specimens agree with Bolivian skins of this little-known
species.
22. BuTEo ERYTHRONOTUs (King).
Buteo erythronotus, Tacz. Orn. Pér. i. p. 115.
Lalcalhuay. @ : iris brown; feet yellow.
23. MILVAGO MEGALOPTERUS (Meyen).
Milvago megalopterus, Tacz. Orn. Pér. i. p. 101.
Sitana. d: iris brown; feet yellow.
24. ARDEA CANDIDISSIMA (Gm.).
Ardea candidissima, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 393.
Sitana. d : iris yellow; feet black.
25. PH@NICOPTERUS ANDINUS, Philippi.
Phenicopterus andinus, Philippi, Reise d. d. Wiiste Atacama,
p- 164, tt. iv., v.; Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 423.
Huasco. Two females, in full plumage. “ Iris very dark brown ;
feet whitish yellow ; beak, fore part black, hind part whitish yellow ;
between the nostrils brick-red ; lowest hinder part of lower mandible
and a small spot before the eyes violet.”
An egg is of a uniform chalky white, with irregular adherent
chalky layers, as in some Cormorants’ eggs. It measures 3°6 by
2:1 inches, and is only slightly more pointed at the small end.
26. PuHa@NICOPTERUS JAMESI, sp. nov. (Plate XXXVI.)
Ph. albus, capite colloque superiore et alis extus roseo indutis ;
cervicis undique, dorsi superioris et pectoris plumarum apicibus
cum scapularibus et secundariis externis elongatis et subalaribus
sanguineo-rosaceis ; remigibus nigerrimis ; subalaribus longis
sanguineis; pedibus rubris; rostri basi flava, apice nigra;
loris nudis in pelle carneis; digito postico nullo: long. tota
circ. 36°0, ale 16°0, caud@e 6°5, tarsi 8°0.
Hab. in Andibus, prov. Tarapacensis.
Obs. A Ph. andino cui pedibus tridactylis affinis, forma et pictura
rostri, scapularibus et secundariis productis, et pedibus rubris sané
diversus.
An adult male in full dress and a male and female not in full
dress of this new species of three-toed Flamingo were obtained
by Rahmer at Sitana, at a height of about 12,000 feet, at the foot
of the Voleano Tsluga. In a letter announcing this discovery, Mr.
Rahmer has proposed to call the species ‘ jamesi,” a name which I
adopt with great pleasure.
400 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON BIRDS [June 29;
There can be no question. about the distinctness of this species
from P. andinus. Besides the differences specified above, the confor-
mation of the bill is of itself sufficient to render Ph. jamesi distinct
in all ages. As will be seen by the sketches now exhibited (figs. 2
Fig. 2. Bill of Ph. andinus.
Fig. 3. Bill of Ph. jamesi.
and 3), the bill is much shorter and smaller in PA. jamesi, the
naked space at the lores wider and differently shaped, and the upper
mandible is much narrower. The very different disposition of the
colours will be likewise seen from the figures. In P. jamesi the
terminal black portion is much smaller, and is succeeded by an
P28. 1886. PL. XXXVI.
J.&Keulemans lth .
PHENICOPTERUS JAMESI .
1886. ] FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. 401
orange-yellow which occupies the whole basal portion, while the
narrow rim at the front, the lores, and the naked skin round the eye
are red, in life (according to Rahmer) “ carmine.” . There is besides
a red spot terminating the yellow at the front of the upper mandible.
In P. andinus the black terminal portion is much more extended ;
this is succeeded by a pale or “ whitish yellow” base ; and the part
between the nostrils is “ brick-red.”” The lower part of the gonys
next to the feathering and the narrow naked lores are in the skin of
a flesh-colour, in life ‘* violet.”’
In P. jamesi the legs are red, in life ‘‘ carmine ;” in P. andinus
** whitish yellow.”
In P. jamesi, as will be seen in the figure (Plate XXXVI.), the
external secondaries are elongated into filiform plumes, which extend,
when the wing is closed, as much as two inches beyond the
primaries, and scapularies are similarly lengthened. Both these
sets of plumes are of abright rosy red. This is also apparent in the
two younger specimens of P. jamesi, but nothing of the sort appears
to take place in P. andinus.
27. BERNICLA MELANOPTERA (Eyton).
Bernicla melanoptera, Tacz. Orn. Pér- iii. p. 467.
Sacaya. One adult and two nestlings: iris dark brown with a
white rim; feet carmine.
28. ANAS CRISTATA, Gm.
Anas cristata, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 473.
Sitana, Sacaya, and Huasco. Examples of both sexes: “iris
orange.” A series of eight eggs are of the usual colour of Ducks’
eggs, a pale fulvous white ; they measure about 2°6 by 1:7 inch.
29. QUERQUEDULA CYANOPTERA (Vieill.).
Querquedula cyanoptera, Tacz. Orn. Peér. iii. p. 475.
Sitana and Sacaya. Examples of both sexes; iris orange.
30. QUERQUEDULA OXyYPTERA (Meyen).
Querquedula oxyptera, Scl. et Salv. P. Z.S. 1876, p. 385 ; Tacz.
Orn. Peér. iii. p. 477.
Sitana, Sacaya, Huasco, and Lalealhuay. Males and females:
iris dark brown. Ten eggs of this Duck accompany the skins ; they
are duller and smaller than those of Anas cristata, and measure about
2°3 by 1°5 inch,
31. QuERQUEDULA PUNA (Tsch.).
Querquedula puna, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 478; Sel. et Salv, Ex.
Orn, pl. xcix.
Sitana and Sacaya. Examples of both sexes: ‘‘iris brown.”
Five eggs are larger and more pointed than those of Q. owyptera
and of a pale fulvous white. They measure about 2°3 by 1:75 inch.
402 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON BIRDS (June 29,
32. DariLa spinicauDA (Vieill.).
Dafila spinicauda, Tacz. Orn. Pér. ii. p. 481.
Sitana. A pair: “iris brown.”
33. METRIOPELIA MELANOPTERA (Gm.).
Metriopelia melanoptera, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 239.
Lalcalhuay. A o: “iris dark blue; feet black.”
34. MerriopeLia AYMARA (d’Orb.).
Metriopelia aymara, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 240.
Huasco and Sitana. Examples of both sexes: iris black or very
dark brown ; feet flesh-coloured.
35. MeLopetia MELOoDA (Tsch.).
Melopelia meloda, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 241.
Pica. A single specimen: “iris brown; feet carmine; beak
black.”
36. CHAM#PELIA CRUZIANA (d’Orb.).
Chamepelia cruziana, Tacz. Orn. Per. ili. p. 248.
Pica. Examples of both sexes: ‘‘iris dark red, with white rim ;
feet brick-red.”’
37. GYMNOPELIA ERYTHROTHORAX (Meyen).
Gymnopelia erythrothorax, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 249.
Sibaya. A young male: “‘ris light blue ; feet flesh-colour; naked
skin round the eye orange.”
38. GALLINULA GALEATA (Licht.).
Gallinula galeata, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 327.
Sitana. A single skin: “iris brown.”
39. Furica cicantea, Eyd. et Soul.
Fulica gigantea, Tacz. Orn. Peér. iii. p. 329.
Cueva negra near Sacaya. Four examples, all females: “‘iris red-
brown ; feet dark brickdust-red ; bill red-brown, with the ridge and
point white, and a spot on each side yellow.”
Two eggs of this species are of the usual character of this group :
they are of a pale stone-colour, sparingly spotted and speckled with
two shades of reddish grey, and measure about 2°8 by 18 inch.
40. Fuxica ArpeEsrAca, Tsch.
Fulica ardesiaca, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 328; Scl. et Salv. Ex.
Orn. pl. lvii.
Huasco. Examples of both sexes, alike: ‘iris brown-red ; feet
yellowish green ; joints and edges of toes greyish; bill with the
ridge and borders of mandible white, the point yellowish green, and
a spot near nostrils yellow ; blaze chocolate.”
1886.] FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. 403
41. Furica teucoptera, Vieill.
Fulica leucoptera, Scl. et Salv. Ex. Orn. p. 119, pl. Ix.
Fulica chloropoides, Landb. Wiegm. Arch. 1862, pt. i. p. 218.
Fulica stricklandi, Hart). J. f. O. 1853, Extrah. p. 86.
Huasco. One @: “iris red-brown; feet and bill yellowish
green ; ridge of bill white ; spot near nostrils yellow; spot above
the beak chocolate.”
42. VANELLUS RESPLENDENS (Tsch.).
Vanellus resplendens, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 336.
Sitana and Sacaya. Three males, two females; sexes alike: iris
carmine ; beak and feet carmine ; point of beak black.
Neither Tschudi nor Taczanowski appear to have noted that there
is no hind toe in this species.
43. ANGIALITIS OCCIDENTALIS, Cab.
Aigialitis occidentalis, Cab. J. f. O. 1872, p. 158, et 1885, pl. vi.
fig. 1 (head).
Sitana, Huasco, and Cueva negra. Examples of both sexes:
“iris brown ; feet black.”
Mr. Seebohm has kindly determined these specimens, and sends
me the subjoined remarks :—
«* Although Cabanis gives no locality, nor mentions the colour of
the legs and feet, there can be no doubt that his name refers to this
species. He says it is a larger bird than 4. nivosus, but like it has
white lores. He also refers to the rusty hind head and neck.
“Tt appears to be the South-American representative of 4. rufi-
capillus, which inhabits the coasts of Australia, Tasmania, and
occasionally New Zealand.”
44. OrEOPHILUS RUFICOLLIS (Wagl.).
Oreophilus ruficollis, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 347.
Lalealhuay. One ¢: iris dark brown; bill black; feet
carmine.
45. THINOCORUS ORBIGNYANUS, Less.
Thinocorus orbignyanus, Tacz. Orn. Per. iil. p. 281.
Sacaya. Examples of both sexes: iris brown ; bill horn-colour ;
feet yellow.
Three eggs are much pointed, and call to mind those of the
Gralle: they are of a shining buffy white, finely speckled with
greater and lesser black and blackish specks, and measure about
1-5 by 1-1.
46. PHEGorNIS MITCHELL, Fraser.
Leptopus mitchelli, Fraser, P. Z. 8S. 1844, p. 157.
Phegornis mitchelli, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 372.
Sitana. One ¢: “iris dark brown, almost black; feet yel-
lowish ; beak black.’’
404 ON BIRDS FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. [June 29,
A scarce bird, originally described from Chili, where Philippi
says it is found on the high Cordillera of the Central Provinces *.
The same naturalist also obtained it near Rio Frio in the desert of
Atacama (Reise d. d. Wiiste Atacama, p. 163). Jelski met with
it on the Lake of Junin, Central Peru.
47, RecurVIROSTRA ANDINA, Ph. et Landb Wiegm. Arch. 1863,
pt. i. p. 131; Harting, Ibis, 1874, p. 257, pl. ix.
Three examples of this scarce bird from Huasco. “Iris orange
with a yellow rim ; legs bluish grey ; beak black.”
48. TrRINGA MACULATA, Vieill.
Tringa maculata, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iti. p. 356.
Huasco. “Iris light brown.”
49. TRINGA BarIRDI (Coues).
Tringa bairdi, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 359.
Huasco, Sacaya, and Cueva negra. “ Iris dark brown.”
50. GAMBETTA MELANOLEUCA (Vieill.).
Totanus melanoleucus, Tacz. Orn. Per. iii. p. 365.
Sitana.
51. GAMBETTA FLAVIPES (Gm.).
Totanus flavipes, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 367.
Sacaya.
52. Larus SERRANUS, Tsch.
Larus serranus, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 452.
Huasco, Sitani, and Cuevanegra. Examples of both sexes: “iris
dark brown; bill and feet dark brown-red.”
53. TINAMOTIS PENTLANDI, Vig.
Tinamotis pentlandi, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 310.
Huasco. One ¢: ‘‘iris chocolate; legs whitish greenish ; feet
black.”’
? “Cat. Ay. Chilenas,” in Anales de la Univers. de Chile, tom. xxxi. p. 272.
1886. ] ON THE COLUMELLA OF ICHTHYOSAURUS. 405
10. Note on the Presence of a Columella (Epipterygoid) in
the Skull of Ichthyosaurus. By A. Smrra Woopwarp,
F.G.S., of the British Museum (Natural History).
(Communicated by Professor Frowrr, LL.D., F.R.S.,
President.)
[Received June 3, 1886.]
In the skulls of fossil Reptiles and Amphibia it so rarely happens
that the bones on the inner side of the temporal fossa, and those
between the orbits, are well exposed to view, that even in some of
the most familiar genera very little has yet been ascertained regarding
the special characters of any of these ossifications. In so conspicuous
a form as Ichthyosaurus, for example, there appears to be no published
reference to these structures beyond the brief statements of Profs.
Huxley, Cope, and Sir Richard Owen, and even these do not afford
any very definite information. Prof. Huxley determined’ the
presence of a distinct pro-otic, and the doubtful absence of ali- and
orbito-sphenoids ; Prof. Cope gives* a diagrammatic outline of the
“ columella” ; while Sir Richard Owen appears to have been less
successful in his researches, having met with nothing but unsatisfac-.
tory indications of small ‘‘alisphenoids” (? pro-otics), and especially
remarking that there is “ no trace or sign of the Lacertian columellar
bone”’’. ;
In making the latter statement, the distinguished paleontologist
just mentioned evidently overlooked Prof. Cope’s previous researches
upon the osteology of the Ichthyosaurian skull; and having lately
discovered that there is no foundation for the assertion in the British
Museum specimens, that formed the basis of Sir Richard Owen’s
monograph, I venture to offer a few remarks upon the subject, by
way of pointing out the mistake. A detailed description of the
interesting bone in question may also be acceptable, since Prof.
Cope’s materials appear to have been less complete and satisfactory
than those now afforded by the fossils from the English Jurassic.
The first specimen of interest in this connection is a small slab of
Lias from Lyme Regis, exhibiting a number of dislocated cranial
bones, which Mr. William Davies long ago recognized as belonging
to Ichthyosaurus, but which do not appear, hitherto, to have been
submitted to so careful a study as their admirable state of preserva-
tion renders desirable. In the middle of the fossil, the basioccipital,
basisphenoid, and presphenoid are arranged in irregular series, with
their upper aspect exposed ; in front are the remains of the supra-
occipital and parietals ; and on either side are scattered a number of
1 'T. H. Huxley, ‘ Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals,’ 1871, p. 211.
2 B. D. Cope, “ On the Cranium of the Ichthyopterygia,” Proc. Amer. Assoc.
Adv. Sci. vol. xix. (1870), pp 200-203. (For this reference I am indebted to
the kindness of Mr. J. W. Hulke, F.R.S.)
3 R. Owen, “ Fossil Reptilia of the Liassic Formations.—IIT.” (Mon. Pal,
Soc. 1881), p. 96; also, ‘ History of British Fossil Reptiles, vol. ii. (1884),
p. 54.
406 MR. A. SMITH WOODWARD ON THE [June 29,
other cranial elements in a more or less well-preserved state. Among
the latter are two long bones with expanded extremities, lying
lengthwise, one on either side of the basi- and presphenoids; and
the form and situation of these elements, considered in connection
with the evidence of other specimens presently to be noticed, can
leave no doubt that they are the homologues of the columella
(epipterygoid, Parker) found in Lacertilia, Khynchocephalia, Ano-
modontia, Dinosauria*, and Chelonia. ‘The bone on the right shows
a side view, while that on the left is seen either from behind or
before, and although both are fractured to a certain extent, their
boundaries are readily distinguishable.
The right columella is 0°045 metre in total length, and is shown
of the natural size in fig. 1*(p. 407). The upper end exhibits a tri-
angular expansion, which, before fracture, must have measured about
0-016 metre in greatest breadth ; and the long terminal upper border
thus produced has a gently arched contour. Immediately below the
expanded portion the bone becomes much constricted, having a
diameter of only 0°003 metre, and at the distance of 0°019 metre
from the lower extremity it commences again to widen, but here in
am unsymmetrical manner. From the upper expansion downwards
the anterior edge is nearly straight, but at the point just mentioned
the hinder edge rapidly curves backwards, until the bone attains a
maximum breadth of 0°012 metre, when the border once more
descends almost vertically for some distance, and finally curves to the
front. The lower end, however, has evidently been much crushed,
like the remainder of the bone, and perhaps does not give an exact
idea of its original shape.
The left columella, presenting only an anterior (or hinder) view,
does not add any further details to the foregoing description ; but
this side of the fossil is of especial interest, since, as pointed out to
me by Mr. G. B. Howes, there appears to be some indication of a
downwardly-directed process of the parietal to meet the columella,
such as exists in the living Cyclodus*. There is no indication of
the fusion of the upper end of the bone with the parietal (or
? “squamosal”’), such as Prof. Cope describes (/. ce. p. 204) in
the American form.
In a skeleton of Jchthyosaurus from the collection of the late Prof.
Tennant (No. R 44 of the B.M. Register), the postorbital and
adjoining bones are so far removed and displaced as to permit an
admirable view of the lower end of the right columella, which is
uncrushed, and still in contact with the pterygoid immediately
behind the orbit. This is shown of the natural size in fig. 2. Its
front edge is almost vertical, but curves slightly forwards near the
lower termination, and there is a sharp anterior outer ridge along
the whole length of the bone. The expanded portion exhibits a
1 See O. C. Marsh, “ Restoration of Brontosawrus,” Amer. Journ. Scix(3)
vol, xxvi. p. 83; ‘On the Diplodocide,” zbid. (3) xxvii. p. 163; “The Order
Theropoda,” tom. cit. p. 332.
? The drawings have been made by Mr. W. H. Hill.
3 T. H. Huxley, ‘ Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals,’ p. 189, fig. 69.
1886.] COLUMELLA OF I[CHTHYOSAURUS. 407
long inferior border, decidedly marked off from a short posterior
border, but the precise nature of its original articulation is unfortu-
nately not apparent. The pterygoid seems to have slipped some-
what from its natural position.
Fig. I. Fig. 2.
Fig. 1. Right columella of Zchthyosawrus, much crushed ; inner side view.
[B.M., No. 2000. 40 * .]
Fig. 2. Lower portion of right columella of Jchthyosaurus; outer side view :
pi, pterygoid ; 0, crushed bones in orbit. [B.M., No. R 44.]
Fig. 3. Lower portion of left columella of Ichthyosaurus intermedius; inner
side view. [B.M., No. 2000. 15.]
Fig. 4. Left columella of Hatteria punctata; outer side view: pt, pterygoid ;
gu, quadrate.
The fragmentary skull of Zchthyosaurus’ figured by Hawkins in
his ‘ Book of the Great Sea-Dragons,’ pl. 19. fig. 1, also exhibits
the lower two thirds of the left columella, and this is interesting as
* This specimen has been identified with Z, intermedius, Conyb., by Sir
Richard Owen, and bears his MS8, label,
408 ON THE COLUMELLA OF ICHTHYOSAURUS. [June 29,
displaying an uncrushed inner view: the bone, however, though well
shown in Mr. O’Neill’s drawing, is not specially marked, and it is
therefore advisable to append a separate sketch, such as is given in
the woodcut, fig. 3 (p. 407). The general outline is similar to that
of the examples already described, but the additional characters of
the inner aspect are well worthy of note. In the constricted portion
of the bone, the shaft is compressed to form a sharp ridge, which
terminates in an abrupt prominence at the point where the lower
expansion commences, and beneath this the broad surface is divided
into two distinct, apparently articular, facettes. The upper and
hinder division (a) is slightly hollowed and somewhat triangular in
shape ; while the lower facette (4) is more elongated, and is separated
from the first in its anterior portion by being more deeply impressed
in the bone.
Among the crushed cranial bones, immediately behind the sclerotic
plates, in another specimen of JeAthyosaurus in the National Collec-
tion the culumella is also distinctly visible; but this does not supply
any additional facts of importance.
On comparing the bone under consideration with its homologue
among recent Reptiles, none is found to exhibit a more striking
similarity than that of Hatteria (fig. 4, p. 407). As Dr. Ginther has
pointed out’, the columella in this genus is particularly remarkable
for the great expansion of its extremities ; and it is also peculiar from
the fact that the lower end articulates not only with the pterygoid,
but also with an inward extension of the quadrate. Moreover, so
far as can be ascertained from a complete skull, the columella
appears to show some signs of contracting this articulation by an
overlapping of the two bones in a vertical plane; and the upper end
is connected with cartilage, and not directly in contact with the
parietal above.
Unfortunately at present it is only possible to compare the form
of the element in each of these types. In none of the fossil Ichthyo-
saurs 1 have examined are the precise relations of the bone very
distinct. As already stated, however, the first fossil is remarkably
suggestive of a direct articulation of the upper end of thecolumella with
a downward process of the parietal ; and the originals of figs. 2 and 3
exhibit so close a resemblance to the corresponding parts in Hatleria,
that there is also strong evidence of the lower articulation being
double. But it ought to be remarked that in Ichthyosaurus no
inwardly directed extension of the quadrate has hitherto been
observed *, and the discovery of more satisfactory specimens must yet
be awaited before it is possible to arrive at any definite conclusion.
1 A. Giinther, “Contribution to the Anatomy of Hatteria (Rhynchocephalus,
Owen),” Phil. Trans. 1867, p. 599, pl. xxvi. figs. 3, 4.
* Hi. G. Seeley, “ Similitudes of the Bones in the Enaliosauria,” Journ. Linn.
Soe. (Zoology) vol. xii. (1876), p. 309.
1886.] ON NEW HETEROCERA FROM TROPICAL AFRICA. 409
11. Descriptions of some new Species of Heterocera from
Tropical Africa. By Hersert Drvce, F.L.S., F.R.G.S.,
F.Z.S.
[Received June 16, 1886.]
(Plates XXXVII. & XXXVIII.)
SATURNIIDS.
ATTACUS ALBIDUS, sp. n. (Plate XX XVII. fig. 1.)
3. The primaries very similar to A. ploetzi, but the white band
is closer to the outer margin, four round white spots between the
apex and the anal angle. Secondaries pure white excepting the outer
margin, which is narrowly bordered with reddish brown, with black
and fawn-coloured lunular markings as in A. ploetzi; the vitreous
spot long, narrowly edged with black, bordered on the inner side
with yellow. The underside the same as above. Head and thorax
reddish brown, a wide white band at the base of the thorax, the
abdomen brown banded with white; antenne and legs pale yellowish
brown. The female the same as the male, but slightly more reddish
in colour, and with all the vitreous spots considerably larger.
Expanse, ¢ 7 inches, 2 63 inches.
Hab. West Africa, Cameroon Mountains. Mus. Druce.
This very fine species comes into the group containing A. vacuna,
Westw., A. ploetzi, Weymer, from both of which it is at once distin-
guished by the pure white secondaries.
ANTHERHA DOLABELLA, sp. n. (Plate XXXVIII. fig. 2, ¢.)
3. Primaries chrome-yellow, crossed by three irregular black
bands, beyond which, along the outer margin, are a series of dusky
patches, the base of the wing shaded with pink. Secondaries bright
pink, broadly bordered with chrome-yellow, from the apex to the
anal angle with several indistinct dusky black patches; nearest the
anal angle a wide black band, dividing the two colours, crossing from
near the apex to the inner margin; a large round deep yellow
ocellus with a wide black border, on the outer edge of the black is a
ring of bluish-fawn colour ; in the centre of the ocellus is a very small
vitreous spot. Head and thorax and upperside of abdomen bright
pink, the underside of abdomen chrome-yellow banded with black ;
tegulee chrome-yellow ; antennz black; legs black and yellow.
Expanse 44 inches.
Hab. East Central Africa. Mus. Druce.
This very beautiful species is quite unlike any other known to me.
Buna pyGELa, n. sp, (Plate XXXVIII. fig. 1, ¢.)
3. Primaries uniform pale pinkish brown, darkest along the
costal margin; the outer and inner margin narrowly edged with
pink ; underside as above, but shaded with dark yellow from the
base to about the middle; a small black spot at the end of the
Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1886, No. XXVII. 27.
410 ON NEW HETEROCERA FROM TROPICAL AFRICA. [June 29,
cell. Secondaries dark orange-yellow, bordered from the apex to the
anal angle and thence along the inner margin to the base with
bright pink; a large central round fawn-coloured ocellus broadly
edged with black. The underside uniform pale pinkish brown.
Head and thorax orange-yellow ; collar and underside of the thorax
pure white ; a wide pink band at the base of the thorax. Abdomen,
upperside orange-yellow, underside pale pinkish brown; the anus
pink ; antennz brown, deeply pectinated ; legs pale brown. Expanse
33 inches.
Hab. East Africa, Matebele Country. Mus. Druce.
This species is allied to B. pygmea, Maassen, from which it is
at once distinguished by not having the black band across the pri-
maries and the absence of the white dot at the end of the cell,
and difference in the colour of the antenne.
LASIOCAMPIDE.
STIBOLEPIS SYLVIA, sp. nN.
Primaries silvery white, brownish black along the costal margin,
the apex, and outer margin; the veins from the cell to the onter
margin dusky. Secondaries silvery white, with the apex and outer
margin narrowly edged with brownish black ; the veins a short way
up from the margin dusky. . Underside as above, excepting that the
primaries have less black at the apex. Head and thorax yellowish
white. Abdomen dark yellow; antenne black; legs yellow.
Expanse 27 inches.
Hab. West Africa, Cameroons (Thompson). Mus. Druce.
This beautiful species is allied to Stibolepis nivea, Butler, from
which it is at once distinguished by its smaller size and entire
absence of the black marginal band of that species.
CHRYSOPOLOMA ROSEA, sp.n. (Plate XXXVIII. fig. 3.)
Primaries fawn-colour, shaded with pink along the inner margin,
crossed beyond the middle by a row of brownish-red spots. Secon-
daries pale yellow, the fringe pinkish. The head, thorax, and
abdomen pale yellowish-fawn colour ; legs brownish black ; antenne
black. Expanse 1? inch.
Hab. Fast Africa, Delagoa Bay. Mus. Druce.
This pretty little species is allied to Chrysopoloma obtusa, Walker,
also from East A{rica.
CHRYSOPOLOMA CITRINA, Sp.n. (Plate XXXVIII. fig. 4.)
Primaries pale yellow, crossed about the middle, from the costal
to the inner margin, by a band of very small brown spots, beyond
which is a second band, extending from the apex to the inner margin ;
the second band is very much wider, and near the inner margin
it has several whitish spots; a submarginal row of minute dots
extending from the apex to the anal angle. Secondaries pale yellow,
with a central and submarginal row of small brown spots. The
fringe of both primaries and secondaries pale yellow; the underside
uyly sstyand Af
LVek : oe
JVi
P.Z.5.1886 Pl. XXAVITI
Hanhart imp
W.Purkrss. lith
1. BUNAEA PYGELA. 2 ANTHEREA DOLABELLA.
3 CHRYSOPOLOMA ROSEA. 4CHRYSOPOLOMA CITRINA®
1886.] BATRACHIANS IN THE NATURAL-HISTORY MUSEUM. 4/1
uniform pale yellow. Head, thorax, and abdomen yellow; legs
yellow, banded with brown. Expanse 1{ inch.
Hab. West Africa, Old Calabar. Mus. Druce.
In form this species resembles C. rudis, Walker, but in colour and
markings it is very distinct.
LECHENOPTERYX FULVIA, Sp. 0.
Primaries pinkish brown, crossed near the outer margin from near
the apex to the inner margin by a_ black line, bordered on the
inner side with yellow ; a small white dot edged with black at the
end of the cell; secondaries pinkish brown, with the same coloured
line extending from the apex to the inner margin close to the anal
angle. Underside much paler than above, and the black lines not
edged with yellow. Head, thorax, and abdomen pinkish brown ;
antennee brown; legs darker brown. Expanse 13 inch.
Hab, East Africa; Zanzibar. Magila (Craven). Mus. Druce.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Puare XXXVII.
Fig. 1. Attacus albidus, sp.n., 3, p. £09.
Prats XXXVIII.
Hig. 1. Bunea pygela, sp.n., 3, p. 409.
2. Antherea dolabella, sp.n., 3, p. 409.
3. Chrysopoloma rosea, sp. u., p. 410.
4. citrina, sp.n., p. 410.
12. First Report on Additions to the Batrachian Collection
in the Natural-History Museum. By G. A. Bov-
LENGER.
[Received June 28, 1886.]
(Plate XXXIX.)
The following is a list of all the species of Batrachians added to
the National Collection since the publication of the last edition of
the Catalogue (1882). ‘To such names as are not mentioned in that
work, reference to the original description is appended ; an asterisk
indicates that the type specimen is in the collection. ‘The list is
followed by the descriptions of a few new species.
ECAUDATA.
*1. Ceratobatrachus guentheri, Blgr. P. Z.8. 1884, p. 212.—
Solomon Islands (Guppy).
*2. Rana bufoniformis, Blgr. |.c. p. 210.—Solomons (Guppy).
*3. Rana sternosiynata, Murray, Ann. N. H. (5) 1885, xvi.
p- 120. —Sind (Murray).
*4. Rana guppyi, Bigr. 1. c. p. 211—Solomons (Guppy).
*5. Rana opisthodon, Blgr. 1. c. p. 211.—Solomons (Guppy).
6, Rana septentrionalis, Baird.—Canada (Lataste).
412 MR. G. A. BOULENGER ON BATRACHIANS [June 29,
*7. Rana forreri, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xi. p. 343.—
Presidio, W. Mexico (Forrer).
*8. Rana macrocnemis, Blgr. P. Z.S. 1885, p. 22.—Brusa
(v. Maltzan).
9. Rana iberica, Blgr.—Serra de Gerez, Portugal (Gadow).
10. Rana latastii, Blgr.—Various localities in North Italy
(Camerano and de Betta).
*11. Rana martensi, Blgr., infra.— Yedo (v. Martens).
*12. Rana pustulosa, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xi. p. 343.—
Ventanas, W. Mexico (forrer).
13. Rana nicobariensis, Stol.—Nias (Sandemann).
*14, Rana masonii, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1884, xiii. p. 397,—
Batavia (Mason).
*15. Rana macropus, Blgr., infra.—Loo Choo Islands ( Carpenter).
16. Rana ulcerosa, Bttg.—Nossi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.).
17. Rana granulata, Bttg—Nosi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.).
18. Rana buergeri, Schleg—Japan (Anderson).
19. Rhacophorus dispar, Bttg.—Nossi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.).
*20. Rhacophorus lateralis, Blgr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1883, xu.
p- 162.—Malabar (Beddome).
*21. Ivalus asper, Blgr., infra—Larut, Perak (Wray).
*22. Cornufer guppyi, Bigr. P. Z.S. 1884, p. 211.—Solomons
(Guppy).
*23. Cornufer solomonis, Blgr. 1. c. p. 212.—Solomons (Guppy).
*24, Rappia burtonii, Blgr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1883, xii. p. 163.—
Gold Coast (Burton and Cameron).
25. Nyctizalus margaritifer, Blgr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1882, x.
p- 35.—Willis Mountains, Java (v. Huegel).
*26. Prostherapis femoralis, Blgr. P.Z.S. 1883, p. 635.—
Yurimaguas (Hahnel).
27. Mantella ebenaui, Bttg.—Nossi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.).
*28. Dendrobates reticulatus, Blgr. |. c. p. 635.—Yurimaguas
(Hahnel).
*29, Dendrobates fantasticus, Blgr. |. c. p. 636.—Yurimaguas
(Hahnel).
*30. Dendrobates hahnelii, Blgr. 1. c. p. 636.—Yurimaguas
(Hahnel).
*31. Hypopachus oxyrrhinus, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xii.
p. 344.—Presidio (Forrer).
*32. Microhyla fissipes, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1884, xiii.
p- 397.—Taiwanfoo, Formosa.
33. Rhombophryne testudo, Bttg.— Nossi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.).
34. Cophyla phyllodactyla, Bitg.—Nossi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.).
35. Pseudis mantidactyla, Cope-—Rio Grande do Sul (v. Ihering).
Montevideo (Paris Mus.). KR. de la Plata (Gairdner).
*36. Phyllobates trilineatus, Blgr. P. Z.S. 1883, p. 636.—Yuri-
maguas (Hahzel).
37. Hylodes brocchii, Blgr. in Brocchi, Miss. Se. Mex., Batr.
p- 60.—Vera Paz (Salvin).
38. Hylodes augusti, Brocchi.—Ventanas ( Forrer).
1886.]
#39.
. Paludicola gracilis, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xi. p. 17.—
IN THE NATURAL-HISTORY MUSEUM. 413
Hylodes vertebralis, Blgr., infra.—Intac, Ecuador ( Buckley).
Rio Grande do Sul (v. Ihering). Uruguay.
. Paludicola falcipes, Hens.—R. Grande do Sul (v. Ihering).
. Paludicola olfersii, Martens, Nomencl. Rept. Mus. Berol.
p- 40.—Brazil (Berlin Museum).
. Leptodactylus discodactylus, Blgr. P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 637.—
Yurimaguas (Hahnel).
. Leptodactylus gracilis, D. & B—Rio Grande do Sul (».
Ihering).
. Leptodactylus rhodomystaz, Blgr. 1. ec. p. 637.—Yurimaguas
(Hahnel).
. Leptodactylus diptyx, Bttg. Zeitschr. f. Naturw. 1885, lviii.
p- 244.—Paraguay.
. Limnodynastes olivaceus, De Vis, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8S. W.
1884, ix. p. 66.—Queensland (Ling Roth).
. Eupemphizx nattereri, Stdchr.—Paraguay.
. Bufo mexicanus, Brocchi.—Ciudad (Forrer).
. Bufo andersonii, Blgr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1883, xii. p. 163.—
Ajmere and Muscat (Blanford). Tatta, Sind.
. Bufo formosus, Blgr. P.Z.S. 1883, p. 140.—Yokohama
(‘ Challenger ’).
. Bufo punctatus, B. & G.—La Paz, Cal. (Smithson. Inst.).
. Hyla nasica, Cope—Rio Grande do Sul (wv. Ihering).
Soriano, Uruguay (Havers). Paraguay.
. Hyla glandulosa, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) xii. 1883, p. 164.—
Guatemala (Godman).
. Hyla macrops, Blgr. |. c. p. 164.—Treasury Island, Solo-
mons (Guppy).
. Hyla thesaurensis, Ptrs.—Treasury Island (Guppy).
. Hyla stoufferi, Cope.—Guatemala (Godman).
. Pternohyla fodiens, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1882, x. p. 326.—
Presidio (Forrer).
. Phyllomedusa iheringii, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1885, xvi.
p- 88.—Rio Grande do Sul (v. Thering).
. Phyllomedusa perlata, Blgr. P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 638.—Yurima-
guas (Hahnel).
. Triprion spatulatus, Gthr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1882, x.
p- 279.—Presidio (Forrer).
. Scaphiopus couchii, Baird.—Presidio (Forrer).
. Megalophrys longipes, Bigr. P. Z.S. 1885, p. 850.——Perak
(Wray).
CauDATA.
*1. Hynobius lichenatus, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xii.
p- 165.—Awomori, Japan (Lewis).
*2. Geomolge fischeri, Blgr., infra—Manchuria (Fischer).
3. Plethodon croceater, Cope.—San Diego, Cal. (Forrer).
*4. Spelerpes peruvianus, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xii. p. 165.
—Moyobamba, Peru (Rof).
414 MR. G. A. BOULENGER ON BATRACHIANS — [June 29,
Apopa.
*1. Epicrionops bicolor, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xi. p. 202.—
Intac, Ecuador (Buckley).
*2. Cecilia buckleyi, Blgr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1884, xiii. p. 398.—
Intae (Buchley).
3. Dermophis thomensis, Bocage—S. Thomé (Berlin Mus.).
*4,. Oryptopsophis multiplicatus, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xii.
p- 166.—Seychelles (Giinther).
5. Gymnopis unicolor, A. Dum.—Cayenne (Bavay).
*6. Scolecomorphus kirkii, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xi.
p. 48.—Near Lake Tanganyika (Kirk).
7. Chthonerpeton indistinctum, R. & L.—Porto Alegre (Berlin
Mus.).
RANA MARTENSI, Sp. n.
Allied to R. temporaria. Vomerine teeth in two rather oblique
oval groups, extending posteriurly beyond the line of the choanze.
Head about as long as broad, very similar to that of R. agilis ;
nostril equally distant from the eye and the end of the snout;
iuterorbital space narrower than the upper eyelids; tympanum
rather large, its diameter equalling about two thirds that of the eye,
from which it is separated by a space equal to about half its
diameter. The first finger extends beyond the second. ‘The tibio-
tarsal articulation reaches the eye or the nostril; tibia shorter than
the fore limb. Inner metatarsal tubercle rather strong, blunt, oval ;
outer tubercle absent, or scarcely marked ; subarticular tubercles of
fingers and toes moderate ; toes two-thirds webbed. Skin smooth ;
lateral fold rather narrow, moderately prominent. Coloration very
similar to that of R. agilis, save that the whitish streak bordering
the temporal spot inferiorly does not extend forwards beyond the
eye. Male with internal vocal sacs.
Yedo; several specimens (4410, 4411) in the Berlin Museum,
one of which was obtained for the British Museum. Collected by
Dr. E. von Martens (cf. Preuss. Exped. n. Ost-Asien, Zool. i.
p. 111).
RANA MACROPUS.
Ivalus japonicus, Hallow. Proc. Ac. Philad. 1860, p. 501.
Vomerine teeth in two rather indistinct oblique series between the
choanze, widely separated in the middle. Snout obtuse, as long as
the diameter of the orbit; nostril nearer the end of the snout than
the eye; canthus rostralis well marked, curved; loreal region con-
cave; eye large ; interorbital space narrower than the upper eyelid ;
tympanum very distinct, measuring not quite half the diameter of
the eye. Fingers moderate, slightly depressed, first shorter than
second; toes moderate, three-fourths webbed; tips of fingers and
toes dilated into well-developed disks, which are much smaller than
the tympanum ; subarticular tubercles moderate ; a single, oval, inner
metatarsal tubercle ; no tarsal fold. When the fore limb is stretched
1886.] IN THE NATURAL-HISTORY MUSEUM, 415
forwards, the femoro-tibial articulation reaches the shoulder and the
tibio-tarsal far beyond the end of the snout; tibia as long as the
fore limb. Upper surfaces with small warts intermixed with elon-
gate fold-like ones, which form an )(-shaped figure on the scapular
region; a strong fold from eye to shoulder. ‘Dark brown above,
with darker marblings and regular cross bars on the limbs; lips with
a series of dark brown spots ; lower surfaces white.
From snout to vent 34 millim.
A single (half-grown ?) specimen was obtained at Oho Sima, Loo
Choo Islands, and presented to the Museum by Lieut. Alfred
Carpenter, R.N., of H.M.S. ‘ Magpi:.’
IXALUs ASPER, sp.n. (Plate XXXIX. fig. 1.)
Snout rounded, as long as the diameter of the orbit; canthus
rostralis very feebly marked; loreal region concave; nostril nearer
the tip of the snout than the eye; interorbital space broader than
the upper eyelid; tympanum very distinct, nearly as large as the
eye. Fingers free, toes three-fourths webbed ; disks well deve-
loped; subarticular tubercles weak ; a small inner netaancel tubercle.
The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches nearly the tip of the snout.
Upper parts rough with small conical warts ; belly granular, throat
perfectly smooth. Blackish above and below; the warts of the
upper surfaces appearing as white dots; belly marbled with
white; flanks, lower surface of limbs, and hinder side of thighs
with irregular white network. Male without vocal sac.
From snout to vent 35 millim.
Two specimens, male and female, presented by L. Wray, Esq. ;
caught breeding in the water on Hill Garden, Larut, Perak, at an
altitude of 3300 feet.
HyLopes VERTEBRALIS, Sp. Nn.
Tongue oval, entire. Vomerine teeth in two oblique groups con-
siderably behind the choanz. Snout rounded or subacuminate, as
long as the greatest orbital diameter; canthus rostralis distinct ;
nostril nearer the tip of the snout than the eye; fronto-parietals a
little concave, their edges slightly prominent, their width equalling
once and one third that of the upper eyelid; tympanum distinct,
two fifths the diameter of the eye. Fingers moderate, first shorter
than second ; toes moderate, quite free, fringed; disks quite as large
as the tympanum; subarticular tubercles moderate; two metatarsal
tubercles. The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the eye. Back
smooth, sides with small warts; belly granular. Blackish brown
above; one specimen with a whitish vertebral band; lower surfaces
yellow, brown-speckled ; groin and sides of thighs with dark-brown
network.
From snout to vent 38 millim.
Two female specimens, from Intac, Ecuador; collected by Mr.
Buckley.
Distinguished from H. buchkleyi by a less stout habit, larger
digital expansions, and narrower fronto-parietals.
416 BATRACHIANS IN THE NATURAL-HISTORY MUSEUM. [June 29,
GEOMOLGE, g. n.
Tongue large, subcircular, free on the sides. Palatine teeth in
two arched, slizhtly angular series, separated by a narrow interspace.
Toes five. Tail cylindrical at the base, compressed at the end.
Intermediate between Onychodactylus and Ranidens in the pala-
tine dentition; distinguished, besides, from the former by the
absence of claws, from the latter by the shape of the tail, which
indicates a land animal.
GEOMOLGE FISCHER], sp.n. (Plate XXXIX. fig. 2.)
Physiognomy that of Onychodactylus japonicus. Head small,
longer than broad, broader than the neck; snout rounded; eyes
large, prominent; no labial lobes. Body cylindrical, four al a half
or five times the length of the head. Limbs in every respect
similar to those of Onychodactylus japonicus, save the absence of
claws; the male likewise with tibio-tarsal dilatation. Tail longer
than head and body, cylindrical in its anterior half, becoming
gradually compressed and keeled towards the end, which is obtusely
pointed. Anal opening subcruciform, as in Onychodactylus. Skin
smooth; fourteen or fifteen costal grooves; paratoids and gular fold
as in Onychodactylus. Brown above, with blackish variegations,
most crowded on the sides, which also bear some whitish spots; lower
surfaces brownish white.
ohhic oe
millim. millim.
Wotablenctlas, © if Misc ahs saree ce LOO —
From snout to vent .............. 70 80
Head . Eta Tah Pais red. Syston inher meme 14
Wither hamden st: ees Aue 93 10
Poreclimb: stk es. Soe he eee a 20
ind ims? Seco A ot nee ee 22
Tale Mk ne arte a tole tet ee 8 hee —!
Two specimens from Chaborowska, on the River Ussuri, Man-
churia, collected by Hr. Dorries, of Hamburg; they were obtained
for the British Museum through Dr. J. G. Fischer, in honour of
whom the new species is named.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIX.
Fig.1. Jzalus asper, wpper view.
la. , lower view.
2. Geomolge fischeri, 3:
2a. —, side view of head.
26, —— ——., open mouth.
1 Tail injured.
PS
PZ.S. 1886. Pl. XXXIX
FW Frohawk del et Lith. Nintern Bros. unp
1. XALUS ASPER . 2. GEOMOLGE FISCHERI.
1886.] THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONSTO THE MENAGERIE. 417
November 16, 1886,
Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair.
The Secretary read the following reports on the additions made
to the Society’s Menagerie during the months of June, July, August,
September, and October, 1886 :—
The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of June was 226, of which 24 were by birth,
129 by presentation, 52 by purchase, and 21 were received on
_ deposit. The total number of departures during the same period
by death and removals was 120.
The following are of special interest :—
1. A Glaucous Macaw (dra glauca), purchased of the Zoological
Gardens, Antwerp, June 3rd.
Of this near ally of Lear’s Macaw’ we have not previously
possessed a living specimen. The present species is of nearly the
same size and general coloration as A. leari, but is at once distin-
guishable by the glaucous blue of the body.
2. Two young Tcheli Monkeys (Macacus tcheliensis), presented
by Dr. S. W. Bushell, C.M.Z.S., of Pekin, June 17th, obtained from
the mountains near the “ Jung-ling,” or Eastern Mausoleum of the
reigning dynasty of China, which is situated some 70 miles east
of Pekin. The animals are covered with a thick fur, which fits
them to endure the bitterly cold winter of this part of Northern
China, where the thermometer frequently goes below zero of
Fahrenheit. We are also indebted to Dr. Bushell for former
examples of this Monkey.
3. A Bald Ouakari (Brachyurus calous), 3 , purchased 12th June,
of a dealer in Liverpool, new to the Society’s collection.
Of the curious Monkeys of the genus Brachyurus, on which our
late Prosector, Mr. Forbes, wrote an excellent paper in 1880 (see
P. Z. 8. 1880, p. 627), we have already had specimens of B.
melanocephalus and B. rubicundus, and we have now for the first
time an example of the perhaps still more curious B. calvus, which,
according to Castlenau, is confined to the forests on the north bank
of the Amazons, between the rivers Putumayo and Japura.
The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the
month of July were 166 in number ; of these 82 were acquired by
presentation, 44 by purchase, 33 by birth, and 6 were received on
deposit. One young Pheasant, received during the month, was
bred from some eggs laid in the Society’s Gardens and sent into
the country to be hatched. The total number of departures during
the same period by death and removals was 105.
Among the additions may be specially noticed two rare American
Parrots—a Lear’s Macaw (Ara leari) and a Lineolated Parrakeet
(Bolborhynchus lineolatus), acquired by purchase.
1 See P. Z. 8. 1879, p. 551
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXVIII. 28
418 DR. LUTKEN ON CHIROPODOMYS PENICILLATUS. [Noy. 16
The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of August was 98; of these 50 were
acquired by presentation, 14 by purchase, 15 by birth, 6 were
received on deposit, and 5 in exchange. Eight Elliot’s Pheasants,
received during the month, were bred from some eggs laid in the
Society’s Gardens and sent into the country to be hatched. The
total number of departures during the same period by death and
removals was 104.
The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of September was 80; of these 42 were
acquired by presentation, 4 by purchase, 2 by exchange, 19 were bred
in the Gardens, and 13 were received on deposit. The total number
of departures during the same period by death and removals was 84.
The following are of special interest :—
A Spot- ringed Snake (Liophis pecilogyrus) from Brazil, presented
by Edgell Hunt, Esq., September 9th, new to the collection.
Two Elegant Galidias (Galidia elegans) from Madagascar, pre-
sented by Burt C. Miiller, Esq., September 16th.
The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of October was 77, of which 11 were by
birth, 45 by presentation, 5 by purchase, 6 by exchange, and 10 were
received on deposit. The total number of departures during the
same period by death and removals was 112.
An extract was read from a letter addressed to the President by
Dr. Emin Bey, dated Wadilai, Eastern Equatorial Africa, Jan. Ist,
1886.
After speaking of the skull of a Chimpanzee and of some skins
and skeletons of other Mammals and Birds obtained in Monbottu,
which he proposed to send to the Society, Dr. Emin Bey continued
as follows :-—
“Tt may be interesting for you to hear that an anthropoid Ape
exists in Uganda and Unyoro. I cannot say whether it is identical
with the Monbottu Chimpanzee or not. While staying in these
countries the negroes told me much about this animal, and in a
MS. map which I forwarded to Dr. Petermann I fixed its northern
limit at 2° N. lat. Now I hear that this Ape is frequent in the
thick forests near Ugoma, and I hasten to beg my friend King
Kabrega for some specimens.”
A letter was read addressed to the Secretary by Dr. Chr. Liitken,
of Copenhagen, F.M.Z.S.
Referring to Mr. O. Thomas’s statement (P. Z.S. 1886, p. 78)
that Chiropodomys penicillatus was a rare animal in Museums and
that its distribuuon was not certainly known, Dr. Liitken announced
tae i ee ee ee
1886.] PROF, FLOWER ON A SPECIMEN OF ARMADILLO. 419
that the Museum of Copenhagen had received in 1878 a specimen
of this mammal in spirit from Buitenzorg, Java, forwarded by the
late Mr. Kébke, Danish Consul at Batavia, and that he has been
infermed by Mr. H. Winge that several specimens of it from the
same locality were in the Museo Civico of Genoa.
A letter was read from Dr. A. B. Meyer, C.M.Z.S., communi-
cating the following remarks by Mr. K. G. Henke on a specimen
of a hybrid Grouse, in the Dresden Museum, referred to by Dr.
Collett in a previous communication :—
* Dr. Collett has declared (supra, p. 225, note) a hybrid which
I have figured, ‘ Zeitschrift fiir die gesammte Ornithologie,’ 1885,
p- 47, pl. iii., ‘to be clearly only a partial albino of Tetrao tetrir
fem.,’ but without giving his reasons for this opinion.
“TJ will not discuss the question now, whether Zetrao tetrix or
Lagopus albus was the father of this specimen, as it is treated and
refigured, not as a single example of its kind, but together with
others, similar and varying, in Dr. Meyer’s forthcoming work
‘ Unser Auer-,Birk- und Rackelwild,’ which will be illustrated by 15
coloured folio plates. I only wish to remark here, that Dr.
Collett’s view of the said specimen does not appear to be correct, as
supposing it really were a partial albino, a strong partial melanism
would still be present, to account for the many black patches
and markings, of which there is no trace in the female Tetrao tetrix
—a coincidence which no one will admit, and which never has been
observed. Besides, the albino of Tetrao tetriz, fem., has no such
regular markings as the specimen in question.
‘IT therefore cannot agree with Dr. Collett, but am convinced that he
is mistaken in declaring the Dresden specimen to be a partial albino.”
Prof. Flower exhibited a specimen of an Armadillo, now belonging
to the Museum of the Scarborough Philosophical Society, but the
origin of which unfortunately appeared to be unknown. It was evi-
dently a member of the genus Tatusia, and closely allied to the common
T. novemeincta or T. peba, from which it differed mainly in having the
whole of the carapace covered with a thick coating of light brown,
fine, but rather stiff hair, about an inch and a half in length. The
same kind of hair grew on the cheeks, the proximal portion of the
limbs, and (though less abundantly and shorter) on the whole under
surface of the body. The cephalic shield, the snout, the hands and
feet, and the tail (except quite at the base) were bare. The covering
of the hair of the back and sides was so thick as completely to conceal
the carapace, except near the antero-inferior margin of the scapular
region; but the usual scutes and bands were seen to be present on
separating the hair, which only grew from the intervals between
them. The length of the head was 33, of the body 84, and
of the tail 83 inches. Unfortunately nearly the whole of the skull
had been removed, but some of the anterior teeth which remained
in the jaws were of very small size and appeared to indicate that
the animal was young.
28*
420 MR. BLANFORD ON PARADOXURUS JERDONI. [Nov. 16,
There was little doubt of the specific identity of the specimen with
that belonging to the Vienna Museum, described by Fitzinger under
the name of Cryptophractus pilosus*, and also with two specimens
from Guyaquil in the Lima Museum, described and figured by
Burmeister as Praopus hirsutus*, if, as was probably the case, the
smaller size of the present specimen could be attributed to its not
being full-grown. So far as Prof. Flower knew, these were the only
published indications of the existence of this somewhat remarkable
species, or at all events very distinct variety, of Armadillo, of which
no specimen existed in our National collection.
Prof. Bell exhibited and made remarks upon an object (apparently
of the nature of an amulet) supposed to have been made from some
portion of the skin of a mammal. It had been obtained from the
natives at Moreton Bay, and sent to Kew, being supposed to be of
vegetable origin.
Mr. Seebohm exhibited a skin of the Lesser White-fronted Goose,
Anser albifrons minutus (Anser erythropus, Linn. Syst. Nat. i.
p- 197), which had been shot on the 16th of September last near Holy
Island, on the coast of Northumberland, by Mr. Alfred Crawhall
Chapman, of Sunderland. It was the first recorded example of the
small form of the White-fronted Goose which had been obtained on
the coasts of our islands, and it was especially interesting as being a
young bird in first plumage. It proved to be a female on dissection,
and bore a remarkable resemblance to the young in first plumage of
the dark-bellied or typical form of the Brent Goose, Anser brenta ;
but its much greater expanse of wing (4 feet) and its large legs
and feet, which were yellow-ochre in colour when first shot, precluded
the possibility of confounding it with that species. Its very small
bill, quite as small as that of the Brent Goose, showed it to be a small
example of the small form of the White-fronted Goose, but in so
young a bird the white forehead had not yet appeared.
Mr. W. T. Blanford exhibited a stuffed skin, the first perfect
specimen he had seen, of Paradowxurus jerdoni, described and figured
in the Society’s Proceedings for 1885 (pp. 613, 802, pl. xlix.). For
this specimen, which was killed at Kateri (Kartary) on the Nilgiri
hills, Mr. Blanford was indebted to Mr. G. F. Hampson, of Dun-
sandle, Ootacamund, who had identified the species from the descrip-
tion, and had confirmed the suggestion already made by Mr. Blanford,
l.c. p. 618, that this species inhabits the Nilgiri hills as well as the
Animalé range.
The following papers were read :—
1 Tageblatt, Nr. 32; Versamml. deutsch. Naturf. u. Aerzte, 1856, Nr. 6,
8. 123. I am only acquainted with this reference through Fitzinger’s subsequent
paper, “Die natiirliche Familie der Giirtelthiere (Dasypoder),” in Sitz. der k.
Akad. der Wissensch., Band Ixiy, 1 Abth. (1871).
? Abhandl. naturf. Gesell. Halle, B. vi. p. 147 (1861).
1886.] COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW 421
1. On the Lepidoptera of Mhow, in Central India.
By Colonel C. Swinuos, F.L.S., F.Z.S.
[Received June 3, 1886.]
(Plates XL. & XLI.)
I collected Lepidoptera at Mhow from September 1881 until
August 1882, with the assistance of a trained native, whose captures
were daily recorded. My military. duties kept me well employed, and
as I also collected birds and took notes on them during the whole of
this period, the results of which have since appeared in ‘ The Ibis,’ I
had not much time to give to the study of Lepidoptera ; and therefore
this paper only professes to contain a list of Lepidoptera taken in
Mhow and its immediate neighbourhood for a year, with the addition
of a few taken by my subordinates at the sub-stations of Neemuch
and Assirghur.
I am indebted to Lord Walsingham for working out the specimens
of Tortricidze and Tineina.
Types of all the new species mentioned in this paper have been
presented by me, as usual, to the British Museum.
I. RHOPALOCERA.
NyYyMPHALID&
EuPL@IN&.
1. TrRUMALA LIMNIACE.
Pap. limniace, Cramer, Pap. Exot. i. pl. 59. f. D, E (1775).
Common from September to July.
2. SALATURA GENUTIA.
Pap. genutia, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 206. f. C, D (1779).
Common from September to July.
3. LiMNAS CHRYSIPPUS.
Pap. chrysippus, Linn. Syst. Nat. p. 471 (1758).
Common everywhere from September to Marci.
4, LIMNAS ALCIPPOIDES.
Limnas alcippoides, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 238, pl. 31. f. 1.
I took one example of this variety at Mhow in June 1882, and
one at Panghur near Neemuch in November 1884.
5. CRASTIA CORE.
Pap. core, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 266. f. E, F (1780).
March and June. Very plentiful in March ; only one example
taken in June,
422 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
SATYRINZE.
6., MELANITIS LEDA.
Pap. leda, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 773 (1767).
June, July ; September and October.
7. MELANITIS ISMENE.
Pap. ismene, Cramer, Pap. Exot. i. pl. 26. f. A, B (1775).
Common during the cold weather from the latter end of October
to the beginning of March. I took, however, one example in June
1882.
8. CALYSISME PERSEUS.
Pap. perseus, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 488 (1775).
October and April. Only one example taken in the latter month ;
it was fairly common in October 1881.
9. CALYSISME DRUSIA.
Pap. drusia, Cramer, Pap. Exot. i. pl. 84. f. C, D (1779).
I found one example of this variety of C. mineus, Linn., in a col-
lection of Butterflies taken at Mhow in 1881 by Major Yerbury,
R.A. It is smaller and paler than the types in the British Museum,
but is otherwise identical.
Cramer’s type came from China, but I have typical examples in
my collection from the. Kangra valley and from Darjiling.
10. YpruHiIMA INICA.
Ypthima inica, Hewitson, Trans. Ent. Soe. ser. 3, vol. ii. p. 285
(1865).
Mhow, December; Depalpore, November.
This is said to be an African insect, but the examples taken as_
above are identical with Hewitson’s type.
11. YpTHIMA ALKIBIE, N. sp.
Upperside dark brown, with the ocelli as in Y. intca, but the
general coloration is darker and brighter. Underside pale whitish
brown, thickly covered with short delicate pale reddish-brown strige,
which are uniformly disposed, but paler on the costa and margins of
the fore wings in most specimens, and both wings with a marginal
brown line and submarginal brown, slightly sinuated fascia ; the ocelli
as in Y. inica, but one or other of the three minute ocelli on the
hind wings is often more or less obsolete. Hind wings with three
pale reddish-brown speckled zigzag bands, and can easily be distin-
guished from Y. inica because the inner discal band curves outwardly,
whereas in the type of Y inica this band curves inwards.
Expanse of wings 1;4,—1%; inch.
Mhow, November to March, very plentiful ; Depalpore, January
and February.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 423
12. YpTHIMA MAHRATTA,
Ypthima mahratta, Moore, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, vol. liii. pt. 2,
no. i. p. 1 (1884).
Mhow, July and November; Neemuch, September to November.
13. YPTHIMA ALEMOLA.
Ypthima alemola, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 127.
April to July.
14. YeTHIMA DEDALEA, 0. sp.
Allied to Y. ariaspa, Moore.
Upperside dark brown, with the ocelli as in Y. inica, the one on
the hind wing being minute, but with a clear ring of yellow round it.
Underside pale grey, marginal lines brown ; both wings covered with
short brown strigze, uniformly disposed, with a submarginal whitish
fascia, bordered on the outer side by an incomplete brown, slightly
zigzag line; pupils of the ocelli pale blue, metallic; fore wing with
one subapical large ocellus, bi-pupilled: hind wing with three light
distinct ocelli—one large (slightly smaller than the one on the fore
wing), subapical, placed well inside the wing, almost in the disk, and
with its upper part overlapping the second subcostal nervule; one a
little smaller, in the interspace between the second and third median
nervules ; and a third, the smallest, is duplex at the anal angle ; these
ocelli are very curious: commencing with the largest one near the
apex of the fore wings, they are gradually smaller, and the three first
are in a perfectly straight line, the mimute duplex one at the anal
angle being at an obtuse angle inwards; all the ocelli have broad
uniform yellow rings with brown borders, and the duplicate ocellus
at the anal angle is distinctly divided with yellow, but not cut
between by the brown ring, which borders the outer yellow only,
making it a complete duplex ocellus.
Expanse of wings 1,2; inch.
Mhovw, June 1882.
15. YPTHIMA RARA.
Ypthima rara, Butler, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 145, pl. xxiv. f. 1,
May to November, very plentiful; Neemuch, November.
16. YprHiMa COMPLEXIvA, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 2, 2.)
Shape, colour, and markings above identical with Y. rara. The
underside is, however, quite different, colour pale greyish, covered
with dark chocolate-brown strigze, and with an indistinct incomplete
submarginal zigzag line, more distinct in parts of the hind wings:
fore wings with a large subapical ocellus, bi-pupilled, with a deep
yellow ring, bordered with brown, pupils bright blue metallic, and
with another smaller blind ocellus just below it, also with a yellow ring
round it: hind wings with three black, very minute spots where
the ocelli should be placed, as in FY. inica.
Expanse of wings 1,5; inch.
Depalpore, November.
424 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
17. LETHE NEELGHERRIENSIS.
Satyrus (Cyllo) neelgherriensis, Guérin, Delessert’s Voy. dans
Inde, pt. ii, p. 74, pl. 21. f. 1, 1 @ (1843).
March, April, and May.
ACREINZ.
18. TELCHINIA VIOLZ.
Pap. viola, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 460 (1775).
Mhow, September (Yerbury).
NYMPHALIN&.
19. ATELLA PHALANTA.
Pap. phalanta, Drury, Ill. Ex. Ent. i. pl. 21. f. 1, 2 (1773).
Common, September to July.
20. PYRAMEIS CARDUI.
Pap. cardui, Linn. Faun. Suec. p. 276 (1761).
Common from September to December.
21. JUNONIA LEMONIAS.
Pap. lemonias, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 277 (1764).
Common from September to July.
228 JUNONIA HIERTE.
Pap. hierte, Fabr. Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 424 (1798).
Common from September to July.
23. JUNONIA ORYTHIA.
Pap. orythia, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 278 (1764).
Common from September to July.
24. JUNONIA ASTERIE.
Pap. asterie, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 769 (1767).
Common from September to November.
25. JUNONIA ALMANA.
Pap. almana, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 272 (1764).
October, January, and March.
26. HyPpANIS POLINICE.
Pap. polinice, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 375. f. G, H (1782).
October to December.
27. HypaANIs SIMPLEX.
Hypanis simplex, Butler, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 146, pl. 24. f. 8.
Mhow, June, July, and October; Depalpore, January ; Assir-
ghur, September.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 42
or
28. HypoLIMNAS BOLINA.
Pap. bolina, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 295 (1764).
Mhow, July. Neemuch, November; Assirghur, October.
29. HypoLimMNas AVIA.
Pap. avia, Fab. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 111 (1793).
Mhow, September and October ; Neemuch, September to Novem-
ber, in great plenty.
This is merely the large form of the preceding.
30. HyPoLIMNAS MISIPPUS.
Pap. misippus, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 264 (1764).
September to February.
The females all mimic L. chrysippus.
31. NEPTIS EURYMENE.
Neptis eurymene, Butler, P. Z. 8S. 1883, p. 145, pl. 24. f. 5.
February to April.
32. SYMPHZEDRA NAIS.
Pap. nais, Forst. Nov. Spec. Ins. p. 73 (1771).
Pap. thyelia, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 142 (1793).
Common from October to July.
33. CHARAXES FABIUS.
Pap. fabius, Fabr. Spec. Ins. ii. p. 12 (1781).
June and October.
34, CHARAXES AGRARIUS, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 3, 3.)
Allied to C. athamus, Drury, and C. hamasta, Moore. Smaller
than either ; nearest to the latter, but differs in having both wings
with the discal transverse band one-fourth narrower in width, the
subapical spot on the fore wing is small, whereas in C. Aamasta this
spot is a lengthened square, and in the male there are two smaller
upper apical spots. On the hind wing the submarginal white spots
are prominent, but there is no outer marginal row of ochreous
lunules.
Expanse of wings 2 3,-2.5, inches.
Mhow, October ; Assirghur, October.
LYCHZNID2.
35. POLYOMMATUS B2ETICUS.
Pap. beticus, Linn. Syst. Nat. ii. p. 789 (1766).
September to February.
36. CATOCHRYSOPS STRABO.
Hesperia strabo, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 287 (1793).
Lyc. kandarpa, Horsf. Cat. Lep. E. I. C. vol. i. p. 82 (1829).
Common from September to July.
426 COU. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
37. CATOCHRYSOPS CNEJUS.
Hesperia enejus, Faby. Ent. Syst. v. Suppl. p. 430 (1798).
July to October.
38. CATOCHRYSOPS PATALA.
Lycena patala, Kollar, Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 418 (1848).
October to February. Very plentiful in October.
39. CATOCHRYSOPS HAPALINA.
Catochrysops hapalina, Butler, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 148, pl. 24.
f 2.33;
December and January.
40. CaTocHRYSOPS ELLA.
Catochrysops ella, Butler, P. Z. S. 1881, p. 606.
September to November.
41. JAMIDES BOCHUS.
Pap. bochus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 391. f. C, D (1782).
September to November.
42. ZizERA MAHA.
Lycena maha, Kollar, Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 422 (1848).
Mhow, April, May, and June; Manpore, June.
43. Z1ZERA CHANDALA.
( Polyommatus chandala, Moore, P.Z.S. 1865, p. 504, pl. 31.
pe :
November, February, April, and May.
Mr. Moore, in P. Z. S. 1882, p. 245, has put this ’species as a
synonym to the preceding one. This I think isamistake. He had,
if I recollect rightly, only two examples, both males, in his collection.
They were quite common at Mhow; and I found no difficulty in
recognizing them, they are much paler blue than Z. maha. The
females are the same colour as the males, instead of brown ‘like
Z. maha, and the underside in both sexes has very faint spots onf{the
hind wings, each spot having a whitish ring round it.
44, ZizERA KARSANDRA.
Polyommatus karsandra, Moore, P. Z.S. 1865, p. 505, pl. 31.
fanz
October to May.
This insect is very variable in colour; the type is brown. Irre-
spective of sex, the colour varies from blue to dark brown. I have
many examples from Quetta, Metazai, Sukkur, Karachi, the Punjaub,
Central India, the Deccan, and also from Aden, of many shades of
colour, quite impossible to separate.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 427
45. Z1zERA DICRETA.
Zizera dicreta, Butler, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 150.
October to May.
46. ZIzERA PYGMA.
Lycena pygmea, Snellen, Tijd. voor Ent. xix. pl. 7. f. 3 (1876).
September to December.
47. ZIzERA SANGRA.
Polyommatus sangra, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1857, p. 772, pl. 41. f. 8.
Lycena indica, Murray, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1874, p. 525.
October to February.
Varies much in size in different localities. I have four definite
uniform sizes taken in four different parts of India ; some are slightly
paler than others, but otherwise all are identical. The uniform
manner in which almost all the different Indian species of Zizera
are marked on the wings below is very curious. Z. pygme@a has
markings peculiar to itself, but all the others mentioned in this paper
have the spots below arranged in almost exactly the same manner,
Z. sangra differing from the others merely in the abseuce of the spot
inside the cell.
48. NACADUBA ARDATES.
Lycena ardates, Moore, P. ZS. 1874, p. 574, pl. 67. f. 1.
November.
49, EVERES PARRHASIUS.
Hesperia parrhasius, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 289 (1793).
February and March.
50. CHILADES PUTLI.
Lycena putli, Kollar, Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 422 (1848).
September to December.
51. CHILADES VARUNANA.
Polyommatus varunana, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 772, pl. 41.
6.
May, September, October, November, and December.
52. CHILADES LAIUS.
Pap. laius, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 319. f. D, E (1782).
November and December.
53. TARUCUS PLINIUS.
Hesperia plinius, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii.1, p. 284 (1793).
September to July.
54. TaRucus NARA.
Lycena nara, Kollar, Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 421 (1848).
September to July.
4128 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
55. TARUCUS THEOPHRASTUS.
Hesperia theophrastus, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 281 (1793).
September to July.
56. AZANUS UBALDUS.
Papilio ubaldus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 390. f. L, M
(1782).
January, April, and May.
57. AZANUS ZENA.
Lycena zena, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 505, pl. 31. f. 9.
September, October, and November.
58. APHNXUS ELIMA.
Aphneus elima, Moore, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xx.
p. 51 (1877).
March.
59. APHNZEUS ICTIS.
Aphneus ictis, Hewitson, Ill. D. L. p. 61, pl. 25. f. 8, 9 (1865).
November to July.
60. APHNZUS BRACTEATUS.
Aphneus bracteatus, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 147, pl. 24.
fe HOS.
October to June.
61. APHN&ZUS ZSTIVUS, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 1.)
Upperside pale reddish grey, with the bands on the underside
showing faintly through the wings; marginal line brown, fringe
silvery white: hind wings with two brown spots on the anal angle
on a slightly reddish ground. Underside pale yellowish cream-
colour, bands pale reddish brown with metallic marks: fore wings
with two short bands before the middle which do not go below the
cell ; a median band broken in the middle, followed by a costal spot
like a figure of 8, followed by two more larger spots, one touching
the costa and the other below it like a figure of 8 broken off in the
middle ; then a submarginal and a marginal band, marginal line
dark brown: hind wing with an inner median and discal band, and
with a submarginal and marginal band like those on the fore wings ;
marginal line brown, and some brown marks on the abdominal
margin. All the bands on both wings are margined with dark
brown on both sides, and have a peculiar zigzag appearance in con-
sequence of the zigzag formation of their borders.
Expanse of wings 154; inch.
Mhovw, May.
62. VIRACHOLA ISOCRATES.
Hesperia isocrates, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 266 (1793).
February, April, and November.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 429
63. BasPpA MELAMPUS.
Pap. melampus, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 362. f. G, H (1782).
September to June.
64. NrLasERA APELLA, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 4, ¢.)
Allied to N. amantes, Hewitson.
Upperside of a brighter and paler blue, but similar to A. amantes
in the deep costal band on the fore wings of the male, which is absent
in the female, and in the far deeper costal band of the hind wings
and marginal band of both wings. The underside is, however, quite
different, the ground-colour being of a uniform pale brownish grey
with an ochreous tinge, this tinge showing quite distinctly on the
brown portions of the fore wings, the costal portion and much of the
hind wing being silvery grey. Fore wings with one small spot in the
cell near the base, and a larger one also within the cell, a little
forward of its centre, the upper portions of both touching the sub-
costal vein ; another spot, square and larger at the end of the cell,
and a smaller one below this in the angle of the first median inter-
space, and below this is a spot elongated into a band running along
the interspace for more than half its length below the first median
branch, and half filling up that portion of the interno-median inter-
space; there is also a discal row of six confluent spots from the
costa, commencing with a small one and getting gradually larger
and ending on the first median branch at the end of the band; all
the spots brown, surrounded with yellowish white, the white borders
being clearest round the two spots in the cell and the two outside it.
Hind wing with four or five brown spots near the base, a central
whirl of spots of the same colour, disconnected, and irregular like a
zigzag band, a discal whorl of similar spots but paler, and the space
on each side filled in with other bands of spots so pale as to be only
here and therevisible. Marginsof both wings brown, diffused inwardly;
a black spot at the anal angle, and a white silvery streak on the
margin running from this spot to the first median branch, and
clouded with dark brown atoms. Tails black, tips white.
Expanse of wings 2,), inches.
Mhow, March.
65. TasyuRIA JEHANA.
Tajuria jehana, Moore, P. Z.S. 1883, p- 529, pl. 49. f. 7.
September.
PAPILIONIDG.
PIERINZE.
66. TeriAs L&ETA.
Terias leta, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. i. p. 174 (1836).
September to July. The commonest Butterfly in Mhow.
430 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
67. TERIAS DRONA.
Terias drona, Horsfield, Cat. Lep. E.I.C. p. 137, pl. 1. f. 13
(1829).
September, October, and November. =
68. TERIAS VENATA.
Terias venata, Moore, Cat. Lep. E.1.C. i. p. 65, pl. 2. f. 2
(1857).
June, July, September, and October.
69. TERIAS RUBELLA.
Terias rubella, Wall. Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 323
(1867).
October to April. In great numbers.
70. TeRIAS HECABE.
Pap. hecabe, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 249 (1764).
February, July, and September.
71. TERIAS HECABEOIDES.
Terias hecabeoides, Mén. Cat. Mus. Petr., Lép. i. p. 85, pl. 2.
f. 2 (1855).
September, October, and November.
72. TERIAS ZSIOPE.
Terias esiope, Mén. Cat. Mus. Petr., Lép. i. p. 85, pl. 2. f. 3
(1835).
October.
73. TERIAS EXCAVATA.
Terias eacavata, Moore, P. Z.S. 1882, p. 252.
September to December. Very plentiful in December.
74. TERIAS PURREEA.
Terias purreea, Moore, P. Z.8. 1882, p. 252.
November to May.
75. TERIAS ASPHODELUS.
Terias asphodelus, Butler, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 151, pl. 24. £13
December to April.
76. TERIAS NARCISSUS.
Terias narcissus, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 151.
December to February.
77. BELENOIS MESENTINA.
Pap. mesentina, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 270. f. A, B (1782).
Common all the year round.
This is a very variable species ; some of the males are deep yellow
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 431
on the secondaries below, and many of both sexes vary much in the
depth of the markings above, they also vary much in size. I have
a female from Neemuch with the apical portion entirely black, and
both males and females identical with and not separable from a pair
in my collection taken by Major Yerbury in copuld at Haithalkim
in Arabia, and identical with Walker’s type in the British Museum
of B. lordaca from Damascus. Mr. Butler (P. Z. 8S. 1884, p. 492)
says the males sent him by Major Yerbury from Huswah and
Haithalkim are smaller than the Damascus type; but I have males
both large and small from these localities, and a pair from the
Punjaub quite as large as the Damascus insect, the male being a
typical B. lordaca and the female only slightly paler in its marginal
black borders.
78. HupHINA PHRYNE.
Papilio phryne, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 473 (1775).
September, October, and November.
79. HuPHINA ZEUXIPPE.
Pap. zeuxippe, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 362. f. E, F (1782).
April, May, and June.
80. HupHINA CASSIDA.
Pap. Danaus cassida, Faby. Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 427. n. 595, 596
(1798).
November to May.
81. GANORIS RAP.
Papilio rape, Linn. Faun. Suec. p. 270 (1761).
I took a worn female of this species in a garden at Mhow on the
6th of June, 1882, which I have still in my collection ; it is out of
place in this list, but as I took it there myself I record it; its
chrysalis might have come from England with somebody’s baggage.
82. APPIAS LIBYTHEA.
Pap. libythea, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 471 (1775).
June.
83. APPIAS ARES.
Appias ares, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 138.
January.
84. Deias EUCHARIS.
Pap. eucharis, Drury, Il. Exot. Ent. ii. pl. 10. f. 5, 6 (1773).
Common from September to July.
85. NEPHERONIA GAEA.
Nepheronia gaea, Felder, Reise Nov., Lep. ii. p. 130 (1865).
February and April. .
432 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE Nov. 16,
86. CATOPSILIA PYRANTHEs
Pap. pyranthe, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 245 (1764).
Common all the year round.
87. CATOPSILIA PHILIPPINA.
Pap. philippina, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 361. f. C, D (1782).
September to April.
88. CATOPSILIA CROCALE.
Pap. crocale, Cram. Pap. Exot. i. pl. 55. f. C, D (1779).
July.
89. CATOPSILIA CATILLA.
Pap. catilla, Cram. Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 229. f. D, E (1782).
Common from September to April.
90, IxIAS MERIDIONALIS.
Ivias meridionalis, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 140, pl..9. f. 5, 2.
May to August.
91. IxIAS DEPALPURA.
Ivias depalpura, Butler, P.Z.S. 1883, p. 153, pl. 24. f. 6, 7.
Depalpore lakes, November, December, and January.
92. Ix1As KAUSALA.
Iwvias kausala, Moore, Aun. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xx.
p- 49 (1877).
Depalpore lakes, November, December, and January.
Very plentiful. All the females taken were albinos; the type
female in Mr. Moore’s collection is primrose-coloured, and I have a
primrose female taken with a male (identical with Mr. Moore’s
type) in the Western Jumna canal.
93. TERACOLUS PERNOTATUS.
Teracolus pernotatus, Butler, P. Z.S. 1876, p. 159, pl. 7. f. 1.
Mhow, September ; Neemuch, September.
94. TERACOLUS BIMBURA.
Teracolus bimbura, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1876, p. 161, pl. 7. f. 3, 4.
January.
This Zeracolus (which was originally named from specimens taken
at Bimbur in Cashmir) is the most widely spread of all the genus.
I have it from many parts of India,
PAPILIONINE.
95. OpHEIDES ERITHONIUS.
Pap. erithonius, Cram. Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 232. f. A, B (1782).
Common from September to March.
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 433
96. LArRTIAS PAMMON.
Pap. pammon, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 189 (1764).
2. Pap. polytes, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 186 (1764).
Common from September to March. The females taken were all
of M. diphilus form.
97. MENELAIDES DIPHILUS.
Pap. diphilus, Esper, Ausl. Schmett. pl. 40 B. f. 1 (1785-98).
Common from September to March.
HESPERIDS&.
98. Pyreus GALBA.
Hesperia galba, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 352 (1793).
July, October, and December.
99. PLESIONEURA INDRANI.
Plesioneura indrani, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 789.
September.
100. TexicoTa avuGtas.
Pap. augias, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 794 (1767).
Common from September to July.
101. PADRAONA MSA.
Pamphila mesa, Moore, P. Z. S. 1865, p- 509, pl. 30. f. 9.
February to May.
102. PARNARA BEVANI.
Hesperia bevani, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1878, p. 688.
July.
103. CHAPRA AGNA.
Hesperia agna, Moore, P. Z.S. 1865, p- 791.
July.
104. CHapra MATHIAs.
Hesperia mathias, Fabr. Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 433 (1798).
December to April.
105. Suastus GREMIUS.
Hesperia gremius, Faby., Butler, Cat. Fabr. Lep. B. M. p. 271
Boul. fy 2 «
Hesperia divodasa, Moore, Cat. Lep. Mus. E.I. C. i. p. 255.
Mhow, May, November, and December, scarce ; Depalpore,
January, one taken ; Neemuch, September to November, common.
’
106. IsoTEINON NILGIRIANA.
Lsoteinon nilgiriana, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 533.
March.
Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1886, No. XXIX. 29
434 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
107. TARACTOCERA SAGARA.
Pamphila sagara, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 792.
April to July.
108. IsmENE ALEXIS.
Papilio alexis, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 533 (1775).
July.
109. BADAMIA EXCLAMATIONIS.
Pap. exclamationis, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 530 (1775).
Q. Pap. ladon, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 284. f. C (1782).
June and July.
II. HETEROCERA.
SPHINGID&.
1. CEPHONODES HYLAS.
Sphinz hylas, Linn. Mantissa, i. p. 539 (1771).
September and December.
2. MACROGLOSSA GYRANS.
Macroglossa gyrans, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. viti. 91 (1856).
July, September, and November. Common in September and in
great plenty in November.
3. MACROGLOSSA BELIS.
Sphinx belis, Cram. Pap. Exot. i. p. 147, pl. 94. f. C (1779).
June, September, and November. In great plenty in November.
4, LopHuRA HYAS.
Lophura hyas, Walker, viii. 107 (1856).
November.
5. CH#ROCAMPA ALECTO.
Sphine alecto, Linn. Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 357 (1764).
March and September.
6. CH#ROCAMPA THYELIA.
Sphing thyelia, Linn. Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 360 (1764).
Common from September to November.
7. CHHZROCAMPA CELERIO.
Sphinz celerio, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 800 (1766).
Common from September to December.
8. CH&HROCAMPA OLDENLANDIZ.
Sphina oldenlandie, Fabry. Sp. Ins. ii. p. 148 (1781).
July and September.
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 435
9. DeILEPHILA LIVORNICA.
Sphinx livornica, Esper, Ausl. Schmett. ii. pp. 87, 196, pl. 8. f. 4
(1785).
June.
10. DAPHNIS NERII.
Sphinz nerii, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 798 (1766).
September, October, and November.
11. PotypTicHUs DENTATUS.
Sphinx dentata, Cram. Pap. Exot. ii. p. 42, pl. 125. f. G (1779).
October.
12. LrvcoPHLEBIA BICOLOR.
Leucophlebia bicolor, Butler, P. Z. S. 1875, p. 16, pl. 2. f. 5.
June and July.
13. BASIANA CERVINA.
Basiana cervina, Walker, viii. 237 (1856).
August (Forsayeth).
14. ACHERONTIA STYX.
Acherontia styx, Westwood, Cab. Orient. Ent. p. 88, pl. 42. f. 3
(1847).
September.
15. ACHERONTIA MORTA.
Acherontia morta, Hiibner, Verz. bek. Schmett. p. 140 (1816).
February and September.
16. PROTOPARCE ORIENTALIS.
Protoparce orientalis, Butler, Tr. Z.S. 1877, vol. ix. part 10,
p- 609.
June, July, and September.
17. NEPHELE HESPERA.
Sphinx hespera, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 546 (1775).
Common from September to June. Very plentiful in November.
Hawk-Moths were in extraordinary abundance in September 1881
in Mhow. A large thorny tree in my garden remained in full
blossom for the greater part of that month, and I spent many
evenings sitting under it watching these moths. About half an
hour before sunset a few Cephonodes hylas would come, to be followed
in a short time by Macroglossa belis and M. gyrans; then would fly
by with a rush a single Nephele hespera. He would circle round
and fly away, and a minute afterwards thousands of these insects
would take possession of the tree. The solitary one always came first,
apparently to see that all was safe, then flew away and a multitude of
29
436 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
them would come, and the Macroglossa aud Cephonodes would dis-
appear. In about half an hour the Nephele would vanish as suddenly
as they came, just about the time it was getting dark; and from then
till nine or ten o’clock Cherocampa thyelia, C. celerio, Daphnis
nerii, and Protoparce orientalis would be hovering about the flowers,
and by ten o’clock the tree would be deserted, and it would remain
deserted until just before daybreak, when it always again had a
crowd of visitors. They invariably came and went in the same order.
I never found any on the tree during the middle of the night.
SYNTOMIDZ.
18. ErEssA CONFINIS.
Syntomis confinis, Walker, vii. 1592 (1856).
April and October.
I never saw this insect on the wing; I usually found them lying
dead in the early morning in the verandah of my house.
19. SYNTOMIS CYSSEA.
Sphinz cysseus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. 124, pl. 355. f. B.
January to March ; June, September, and November.
Flying in swarms over the flowering poppy-fields in February.
AGARISTIDZ.
20. EUSEMIA AFFLICTA.
Eusemia afflicta, Butler, Ent. M. M. xii. p. 118 (1875).
June.
LiTHOSIID2.
21. ARGINA CRIBRARIA.
Argina cribraria, Clerck, Icones, pl. 54. f. 4.
September and October.
22. ARGINA NOTATA.
Argina notata, Butler, Traus. Ent. Soc. 1877, part iv. Dec.
p. 365. n. 270.
September.
23. ARGINA ASTREA,
Phalena astrea, Drury, Ill. Exot. Ins. ii, pl. vi. f. 3.
September, October, and November.
24. DEIOPEIA PULCHELLA.
Tinea pulchella, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 884. no. 349.
September to March.
25. DEIOPEIA LOTRIX.
Phalena lotriz, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. 20, pl. 109. f. E.
September to March.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 437
26. AUMENE TENEBROSA.
Aimene tenebrosa, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1878, p. 34.
May and June.
27. LACIDES FICUS.
Noctua ficus, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. p. 27. no. 62.
September and October.
ARCTIID.
28. ALOPE RICINI.
Bombyx ricini, Fabr. Ent. Syst. ili. 1, p. 473 (1793).
Alope ocellifera, Walker, iii. 620 (1856).
August (Forsayeth).
29. CREATONOTUS INTERRUPTUS.
Phalena interrupta, Linn. Syst. Nat. Phal. 116.
September.
30. MicrosSEMYRA PALLIDA.
Microsemyra pallida, Butler, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 155.
October.
31. ALOA PUNCTISTRIGA.
Spilosoma punctistriga, Walker, iii. 676 (1855).
June and September.
32. ALOA EMITTENS.
Creatonotus emittens, Walker, iii. 638 (1855).
June.
33. ALOA SANGUINOLENTA.
Bombyx sanguinolenta, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii, 1, p. 473 (1793).
September (Forsayeth).
LipaRID&.
34, PERINA BASALIS.
Perina basalis, Walker, iv. 966 (1855).
September and October.
35. CHARNIDAS TESTACEA.
Cycnia testacea, Waker, iii. 683 (1855).
October, December, and March.
36. EuUpROCTIS LUNATA.
Euproctis lunata, Walker, iv. 837 (1855).
September.
Both sexes vary much in colour from deep chrome-yellow to pure
creamy white.
438 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
37. PoRTHESIA MARGINALIS.
Euproctis marginalis, Walker, vii. 1731 (1865).
June, September, and November.
38. ENOME DETERSA.
Lymantria detersa, Walker, xxxii. 365 (1865).
September to February.
39. ENOME INCERTA.
Lymantria incerta, Walker, iv. 880 (1855).
September, December, and February.
40. LyMANTRIA OBSOLETA.
Lymantria obsoleta, Walker, iv. 880 (1855).
September, November, December, and April.
41. OLENE FUSIFORMIS.
Nioda fusiformis, Walker, v. 1070 (1855).
September (Forsayeth).
42, PsALIs SECURIS.
Psalis securis, Hiibner, Samml. exot. Schmett. iii. 9, 146. f. 291,
292.
August (Forsayeth).
43, CHILENA STRIGULA.
Lasiocampa strigula, Walker, xxxii. 563 (1865).
September (Forsayeth).
NotToDONTID2.
44, CETOLA DENTATA.
Cetola dentata, Walker, v. 1016 (1855).
July and September.
45. ANTHEUA DISCALIS.
Antheua discalis, Walker, iti. 767 (1855).
Mhow (Yerbdury).
46. BrreTa GALBANA, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 5.)
3 2. Thorax, fore wings, and antenne yellowish cream-colour ;
head reddish brown, a stripe of the same colour down the centre of
the thorax. Fore wingssparsely irrorated with black atoms, except in
the centre, where they cluster together, forming a slight shade ; three
rows of black dots—first just before the middle, consisting of two
dots, one on the median vein, and the other close to the hinder
margin ; the second discal, one on each nervule; the third marginal,
minute but very distinct, one on the extremity of each nervule.
Hind wings and abdomen pure white; underside pure white.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 439
an spots on the female are generally smaller than those on the
male.
Expanse of wings 15%, inch.
June and July.
47. DaBaRITA ICTERICA, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 8.)
Head, thorax, antenne, and fore wings pale reddish yellow, top of
head and collar whitish ; fore wings with two outwardly oblique, thin,
yellowish, slightly sinuous lines, rather close together, the first just
before the middle, the second beyond the middle; the basal half of
the wing the darkest, caused by numerous latitudinal brick-dust
coloured minute regular lines or strigule, diffuse and terminating
between the two lines. Abdomen pale dirty straw-colour ; hind wings
white, semidiaphanous ; underside white, shining.
Expanse of wings 1,4, inch.
June.
48. IcHTHYURA RESTITURA.
Ichthyura restitura, Walker, xxxii. 433 (1865).
October.
49. OR#SIA EMARGINATA.
Noctua emarginata, Fabr. Ent. Syst. ii. 2, p. 240.
October. :
LIMACODID.
50. MirEsA ALBIPUNCTA.
Nyssia albipuncta, Herr.-Schiff. Lep. Exot. Sp. Ser. i. f. 179.
October.
51. CANDYBA PUNCTATA.
Candyba punctata, Walker, vii. 1761 (1856).
Belgorea subnotata, Walker, xxxii. 497 (1865).
June.
Walker’s type of C. punctata is said to have come from Central
Brazil, but the types of the above two species are identical.
52. NATADA BASALIS.
Natada basalis, Walker, v. 1110 (1855).
June and July.
53, PARASA LEPIDA.
Phalena-Noctua lepida, Cram. Pap. Exot. ii. p. 50, pl. 130. f. E
(1779).
September.
54. APHENDALA TRIPARTITA.
Aphendala tripartita, Moore, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1884, p. 376.
June and July.
440 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
55. Susica CosMIANA, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 9, 92.)
Allied to S. fraterna, Moore. pale reddish ochreous; 2 grey-
ish ochreous, covered with silvery minute speckles, with the head
and collar whitish. o¢ 2 with a minute spot at end of cell, more
than two thirds of the wing from the base suffused with reddish,
bounded by a reddish line curving outwardly from the costa near
the apex, stopping short before the outer third of the hinder margin.
Hind wings paler, reddish grey in the ¢, greyish ochreous in the 9.
Underside in both sexes pale shining reddish ochreous.
Expanse of wings ;%; inch.
October to February.
BomBycipD&.
56. TRILOCHA VARIANS.
Naprepa varians, Walker, v. 1153 (1855).
October and December.
LASIOCAMPIDZ.
57. TARAGAMA GANESA.
3. Bombyx ganesa, Lefebvre, Zool. Journ. iii. p. 211 (1827).
@. Bombyw siva, Lefebvre, /. c. p. 210.
August (Yerbury).
58. TRISULA VARIEGATA.
Trisula variegata, Moore, Cat. Lep. E.I. C. ii. p.420jpl. 12 a. f. 1
(1858-9).
September.
59. TRABALA VISHNU.
2. Gastropacha vishnu, Lefebvre, Zool. Journ. iii. p. 207 (1827).
3. Amydona prasina, Walker, vi. 1417 (1855).
September (Forsayeth).
60. LeBeDA BUDDHA.
3. Bombyx buddha, Lefebvre, Zool. Journ. ii. p. 209 (1827).
2. Bombyx brahma, Lefebvre, l. ¢. p. 208.
August (Forsayeth).
61. EuprerOTE IGNAVUS, n.sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 1,3.)
Allied to H. mutans, Walker.
Male of a soft yellowish-fawn colour, the internal bands being
much more deeply bent inwards towards the costa than in 2. mutans ;
the insect is also much smaller and of altogether a different colour ; the
bands on the hind wings are very distinct and, except at the base,
are identical with those on the fore wings, which is not the case
with #. mutans. Antennee, head, thorax, and all the bands and
markings rufous-brown ; marginal border of both wings outside the
outer double straight band much paler than the rest of the wings.
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 441
Basal third of the hind wings clothed with long pale hairs. Under-
side clear greyish yellow, with the bands and marks as above but
paler.
Female of a uniform rufous-brown, coloured somewhat similarly
to ¢ E. undata, Blanchard. Bands dark rufous-brown, placed as in
the male but much straighter, less toothed and hardly at all bent in
towards the costa, and the brown spots outside the outer straight
band of the fore wings are wanting in the female; antenne, head, and
body dark rufous-brown. Underside pale rufous ; markings as above
but much paler.
Expanse of wings, 63,5, 2 4 inches.
June.
DREPANULIDZ.
62. ARGYRIS EXTRUSATA.
Ephyra extrusata, Walker, xxii. 637 (1861).
October.
SATURNIID&.
63. ANTHERZA NEBULOSA.
Anthered nebulosa, Hutton, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, 1869, p. 16.
Common in the jungles below Assirghur from August to October.
Cossip&.
64. PHRAGMATACIA MINOR.
Phragmatecia minor, Moore, Desc. Lep. Col. Atkinson, part i.
p- 87.
June.
65. BRACHYLIA ACRONYCTOIDES. .
Brachylia acronyctoides, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1879, p. 411, pl. 34. f. 4.
June.
NocrTueEs.
LEUCANID&.
66. LEUCANIA EXTRANEA.
Leucania extranea, Guénée, Noct. i. 77, 104.
April.
67. LEUCANIA AUREOLA.
Leucania aureola, Walker, ix. 108.
September, in great numbers for about a fortnight.
68. LeucANIA INFERENS.
Leucania inferens, Walker, ix. 105.
Mr. Butler identified some Moths I sent him in 1882, taken in
September 1881, as this species. 1 therefore enter it in this list, but
I have no Mhow examples in my collection now, neither have I any
note in my diary of Lepidoptera of having taken this insect in Mhow.
4492 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
69. LeucaNnta Byssina,n, sp. (Plate XL. fig. 6.)
Antenne, head, thorax, and fore wings pale greyish white, very
slightly tinged with ochreous. Fore wings shining, irrorated with
black atoms, a black spot at the end of the cell, another before the
middle in the interno-median area, a discal row of black points
curving outwardly, deeply bent in towards the costa, and a marginal
row of black points. Fringe long, same colour as the wing.
Abdomen, hind wings above, and the entire surface below pure
shining white.
Expanse of wings 1-14, inch,
June.
70. AXYLIA FURTIVA.
Axylia furtiva, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 448.
September.
HELIOTHIDZ.
71. ALARIA LANCEOLATA.
Alaria lanceolata, Walker, xxxiii. 767.
September.
72. PRADATTA BIVITTA.
Leucania bivitta, Walker, ix. 108.
September. The above two species were together in great
numbers in September 1881 for about a week.
73. PRADATTA BEATRIX. (Plate XLI. fig. 5.)
Pradatta beatriz, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1881, p. 365.
Antenne, head, thorax, and fore wings bright rosy pink.
Fore wings with a cream-coloured stripe from base to outer margin,
passing through the whole length of the cell. Abdomen and hind
wings silvery white, the latter in some specimens stained here and
there with rosy. Underside silvery white, brownish towards the
basal centre of the fore wings, and stained with rosy grey here and
there on both wings.
Expanse of wings 1 inch.
September.
74. HELIOTHIS ARMIGERA.
Noctua armigera, Hiibner, Noct. pl. 79. f. 370.
October, November, and December.
75. HeLioTHIs RUBESCENS.
Thalpophila rubescens, Walker, xv. 1681.
December.
76. HELIOTHIS PELTIGERA.
Noctua peltigera, Wien. Verz. 89. 2.
June and December.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 443
77. HELIOTHIS SUCCINEA.
Heliothis succinea, Moore, P. Z. 8S. 1881, p. 362.
November.
78. ADISURA LEUCANOIDES.
Adisura leucanoides, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1881, p. 368.
October.
79. ANTHAEXCIA SWINHOEI.
Anthecia swinhoei, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 162.
Assirghur, October.
GLOTTULID.
80. GLOTTULA DOMINICA.
Phalena-Noctua dominica, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. p. 238, pl. 399.
iH:
August (Forsayeth).
CyMATOPHORIDA.
.81. RisoBa OBSTRUCTA.
Risoba obstructa, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1881, p. 328.
July.
APAMIID&.
82. PRODENIA RETINA.
Neuria retina, Frivaldsky, Herr.-Schiiff. Eur. Schmett. ii. 292,
Noct. pl. 29. f. 145.
October.
83. LAPHYGMA EXIGUA.
Noctua exigua, Hiibner, Samml. Eur. Schmett., Noct. f. 362.
February and March.
84. ILATTIA CEPHUSALIS.
Ilattia cephusalis, Walker, xvi. 209.
September and October.
85. MAMESTRA DOLOROSA.
Mamestra dolorosa, Walker, xxxii. 667.
October and November.
86. PrRIGIA SERVA.
Celeena serva, Walker, xv. 1689.
October.
87. PERIGIA CENTRALIS.
Perigia centralis, Walker, xi. 734.
June.
444 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
NocrTuip.
88. AGROTIS SEGETUM.
Phalena-Noctua segetum, Gmel. ed. Syst. Nat. i. 5, p. 2539. 1018.
January to April.
89. AGROTIS SUFFUSA.
Phalena-Noctua suffusa, Gmel. ed. Syst. Nat. i. 5, p. 2541. 1028.
February.
90. AGROTIS ARISTIFERA.
Agrotis aristifera, Guénée, Noct. i. 266, 426.
April, June, November, and December.
91. AGROTIS LASSA, 0. Sp-
Allied to 4. repulsa. Antenne, head, thorax, and fore wings
dark brownish fawn-colour. Fore wings of the male very narrow ;
fore wings of both sexes with some brown marks, like strigulee here
and there ; on the male the usual stigmata are not visible; on the
female the orbicular is represented by a black ring, and the claviform
and reniform are both visible, but obscure and black ; and the latter
is like a small smudged figure of 8. Hind wings white, semi-
hyaline, with the costa and outer border tinged with fawn-colour.
Abdomen grey, with the segments marked out with some white hairs.
Underside paler, with the thorax, abdomen, and fore and hind wings
streaked with silvery-white speckles.
Expanse of wings 13 inch.
March and April.
HADENID&.
92. RADINACRA VARIANA, D. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 10.)
_ Antennze, head, thorax, and fore wings brownish fawn-colour.
Fore wings with the lines sinuous, dark brown, one subbasal
extending only halfway down from the costa, another before the
middle, and one submarginal ; all these complete and bending slightly
outwardly ; three yellowish dots on the costa near the apex; the
third line runs through the reniform stigma, which is hardly visible,
the orbicular is indicated by a faint white spot. Abdomen greyish
brown. Hind wings and underside pale brownish grey. Both wings
above and below shining, almost gilded.
Expanse of wings 1 inch.
September.
XYLOPHASIDA.
93. SPODOPTERA CILIUM.
Spodoptera cilium, Guénée, Noct. i. 156. 249.
March and October.
94, SPODOPTERA INFECTA.
Prodenia infecta, Walker, ix. 196,
October.
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 445
ERASTRIID HX.
95. LEPTOSIA QUINARIA,
Leptosia quinaria, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1881, p. 371.
April.
ACONTIIDE.
96. ACONTIA SIGNIFERA.
Acontia signifera, Walker, xii. 793.
September.
97. ACONTIA NIGRIPALPIS.
Acontia nigripalpis, Walker, xxxv. 1965.
Assirghur, October.
98. ACONTIA BADIA, b. sp.
Of a uniform pale reddish fawn-colour. Fore wing with whitish
lines, thin, sinuous—one antemedian, one postmedian, one sub-
marginal, and one marginal; a dark brown central band, stopping
short of the costa, and expanding outwardly towards the apex, in
some specimens overlapping the second line, in others having this
line as its outer border for some distance upwards from the hinder
margin ; the inner border of this band is upright, bent inwardly on
the centre and well defined, and within this band is a deep black
reniform mark, and another black mark beyond. Hind wings
slightly darker towards the border, and rather more grey-coloured
than the ground-colour of the fore wings. Underside: fore wings
greyish brown, with the costa and hinder margin broadly pinkish
yellow ; hind wings pale ochreous grey.
Expanse of wings 38; inch.
October.
99. ACONTIA CROCATA.
Acontia crocata, Guénée, Noct. ii. 218, 989.
October.
100. ACONTIA INDA.
Acontia inda, Felder, Reise Nov. iv. pl. 108. fig. 23.
June.
101. ACONTIA QUADRIPARTITA.
Acontia quadripartita, Walker, xxxiii. 786.
June.
102. ACONTIA EXCISA.
Acontia excisa, Walker, MS., Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 455.
September.
103. PHOoTHEDES VEPRECULA.
Phothedes veprecula, Swinhoe, P. Z. S. 1885, p. 456.
June, September, and October.
446 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
104.. PHOTHEDES FRAUSA, N. Sp.
Yellowish cream-colour. Fore wings diffused with pinkish, costa
broadly grey; an indistinct silvery sinuous inner line, which in some
specimens is disconnected and in some is wanting ; a similar out-
ward line from the outer two thirds of the hinder margin up to the
apex ; this line in many specimens runs in a brownish-grey shade, and
there are streaks and marks of this colour on the costa, on the
hinder margin towards the base, and marginal marks ; fringe also of
same colour. Hind wings in some examples slightly grey towards
the outer border, in others pure pale yellowish cream-colour, paler
than the ground-colour of the fore wings. Underside of the same
colour but paler, more whitish, shining, and quite unmarked.
Expanse of wings 74; inch.
July.
Quite common for a few days. A somewhat variable-looking
insect, because the colours and markings are much stronger in some
than in others, the ground-colour in some females being almost pure
pinkish.
105. HiccopA HERBARIA, 0. sp.
Upperside, body, and wings white. Fore wings sparsely irrorated
with reddish-brown dots and atoms, some marks of the same colour
on the costa and outer margin, a sinuous line within a diffused band,
from the outer two thirds of the hinder margin to the apex ; a square
blackish large spot in the disk within this band; fringe white,
marked with black marks. Hind wings with the outer half shaded
with pale reddish brown ; fringe pure white. Underside whitish,
shaded with grey, darkest on the costa. Palpi black, last joint very
minute and pure white ; fore tarsi black with white bands.
Expanse of wings ;§; inch.
June and July.
106. TARACHE Nivosa, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 14.)
Head and thorax snow-white ; antenne and thorax reddish grey,
the latter marked with pure white within the segmants, may be
altogether white in freshly emerged specimens. Fore wings reddish
slate-colour, in some specimens pale brown-pink, a deep snow-white
band extending along four fifths of the costa, filling nearly the whole
basal area with the dark colour of the wings, forming an elbow
upwards in the centre part of the band; a reddish indistinct line
crossing the band at the basal third, just before the elbow, a spot at
the base within the band, also the orbicular and reniform spots all of
the general colour of the wing, clear and distinct ; the dark part of
the wing has white marks showing through here and there, and a
brownish elbow parallel with the stigmata, giving the appearance of
three spots in a longitudinal row ; marginal marks white; fringe white.
Hind wings in some specimens white with greyish borders, in others
of a uniform pale slaty grey ; fringe white. Underside pale grey,
unmarked.
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 447
Expanse of wings 35, inch.
June and September.
A well-marked and pretty little insect.
ANTHOPHILID.
107. THALPOCHARES ROSEANA.
Thalpochares roseana, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1881, p. 370.
April and May.
108. THALPOCHARES RIVULA.
Thalpochares rivula, Moore, Desc. Lep. eol. Atkinson, ii. p. 140
(1882).
March.
109. AGROPHILA SULPHURALIS.
Phalena-Pyralis sulphuralis, Bergestr. Ins. Suec. 1. 16.
October.
110. ANTHOPHILA INNUBILA, Nl. Sp.
Upperside of a uniform shining cream-colour, the fore wings
rather darker than the hind wings, and tinged with ochreous,
especially on the costa. Fore wings sparsely covered with silvery-
white freckles, and with a whitish line which extends upwards from
the centre of the hinder margin towards the apex and then angles
inwards, meeting the costa at the outer two thirds; there is also a
faint indication of a similar inner line parallel to this just inside the
middle. Eyes black ; antenne ochreous. Underside paler than the
upperside, shining, unmarked.
Expanse of wings 58; inch.
June.
111. EuBLEMMA AMABILIS.
Eublemma amabilis, Moore, Lep. Ceylon, iit. p. 54.
June.
PLusipa&.
112. PLustIa VERTICILLATA.
Plusia verticillata, Guénée, Noct. ii. 344. 1168.
September.
113. PLUSIA EXTRAHENS.
Plusia extrahens, Walker, xii. 929.
June and October.
114. Prusra c1IRCUMFLEXA.
Phalena-Noctua circumflexa, Linn. Syst. Nat. 125.
April.
448 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE (Noy. 16,
115, PLusta ORICHALCEA.
Noctua orichalcea, Fabr. Sp. Ins. ii. 227. 92.
October (Forsayeth).
HYBLAID&,
116. Hyspuaa PUERA.
Phalena-Noctua puera, Cram. Pap. Exot. ii. 10, pl. 103. f. D, E.
Mhow (Verdury).
GONOPTERIDZ.
117. CosMOPHILA XANTHINDYMA.
3. Cosmophila wanthindyma, Boisd. Faun. Ent. Mad. Bourb. et
Maur., Lép. p. 94, pl. 13. f. 7 (1833).
Q . Cosmophila indica, Guénée, Noct. ii. 396. 1256 (1852).
July, September, and October ; in great numbers in September.
PoLYDESMIDZ.
118. PANDESMA QUENAVADI.
Pandesma quenavadi, Guénée, Noct. ii. 438. 1310.
May, July, and September.
119. PoLypESMA BOARMOIDES.
Polydesma boarmoides, Guénée, Noct. ii. 441. 1314.
June.
120. PotyDESMA BREVIPALPIS.
Alamis brevipalpis, Waliser, xiii. 1051.
June and July.
121. BAMRA ACRONYCTOIDES.
Bamra acronyctoides, Moore, Desc. Lep. col. Atkinson, ii. p. 160
(1882).
Mhow (Yerdury).
HomortreRiD#.
122. HoMoPpTERA VETUSTA.
Homoptera vetusta, Walker, xxxiii. 875.
June, July, and October.
123. ALAMIS UMBRINA.
Alamis umbrina, Guénée, Noct. iii. 4. 132.
July and October.
124. ALAMIS CONTINUA.
Alamis continua, Walker, xxxiii. 877.
September (Forsayeth).
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 449
125. GrRPA FRATERNA.
Girpa fraterna, Moore, Lep. Ceylon, iii. p. 94 (1884).
September and October.
126. GrrPA INANGULATA.
Hulodes inangulata, Guénée, Noct. iii. 210. 1612.
Remigia optativa, Walker, xiv. 1510.
Remigia optatura, Walker, xv. 1848.
September and October.
HypoGRAMMID&.
127. SELEPA CELTIS.
Selepa celtis, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. C. ii. p. 353, pl. ix. a. f. 9.
October (Forsayeth).
128. SELEPA OCCULTA.
Selepa occulta, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 461.
June.
129, SELEPA CURVIFERELLA.
Subrita? curviferella, Walker, xxxv. 1745.
September (Forsayeth).
CaTEPHID.
130. EryGIA APICALIS.
Erygia apicalis, Guénée, Noct. iii. 50. 1381.
November.
131. BRIARDA BOLINOIDES.
Briarda bolinoides, Walker, xv. 1802.
July.
132. ANOPHIA OLIVESCENS.
Anophia olivescens, Guénée, Noct. iii. 48. 1379.
June.
OMMATOPHORID.
133. PATULA MACROPS.
Phalena-Noctua macrops, Linn. Syst. Nat. ii. 225.
June and September.
134. ENroMOGRAMMA TORSA.
Entomogramma torsa, Guénée, Noct. iii. 204. 1605.
October.
135. Hom#A CLATHRUM.
Homea clathrum, Walker, xiv. 1334.
July.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXX. 30
450 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
Hypopryrip&.
136. SprIRAMIA HELICINA.
Speiredonia helicina, Hiibner, Samml. exot. Schmett. iii. 14. 219.
f, 437, 438.
March, June, July, and September.
OPHIDERID&.
137. ARGADESA MATERNA.
Phalena-Noctua materna, Linn. Syst. Nat. ii. 840. 17.
July.
138. OTHREIS FULLONICA.
Phalena-Noctua fullonica, Linn. Syst. Nat. ii. 812. 16.
July.
OPHIUSID.
139. OpHIODES SEPARANS.
Ophiodes separans, Walker, xiv. 1357.
September (Forsayeth).
140. OpHIODES TRIPHENOIDES.
Ophiodes triphenoides, Walker, xiv. 1358.
Mhow (Yerbury).
141. SPHINGOMORPHA CHLOREA.
Phalena chlorea, Cram. Pap. Exot. ii. p. 12, pl. 104. f. C.
September and November.
142, ACH#HA MELICERTE.
Phalena-Noctua melicerte, Drury, Ins. i. p. 46, pl. 23. f. 1.
July to November.
143. ERCHEIA DIVERSIPENNIS.
Ercheia diversipennis, Walker, xiii. 1108.
September (Forsayeth).
144, OpHIUSA ALBIVITTA.
Ophiusa albivitta, Guénée, Noct. ili. 271. 1707.
July.
145. OpHrusA JOVIANA.
Phalena-Noctua joviana, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. p. 237, pl. 399.
f. B
Depalpore, November.
146. OOpHIUSA ARCTOTENIA.
Ophiusa arctotenia, Guénée, Noct. iii. p- 272 (1852).
Mhow ( Yerdury).
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 451
147. GRAMMODES AMMONIA.
Phalena ammonia, Cram. Pap. Exot. iii. p. 98, pl. 250. f. D.
July and September.
EvUcLipIIDz.
148. TRIGONODES HIPPASIA.
; ara hippasia, Cram. Pap. Exot. iii. p. 99, pl. 250.
September, October, aud November.
149. ACANTHOLIPES AFFINIS.
Docela affinis, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. v.
p- 225 (1880).
Mhow, October ; Assirghur, October.
150. ACANTHOLIPES ACERVALIS, 0. sp.
3. Cream-colour, sparsely irrorated with brown atoms ; head and
collar pure white. Fore wings with a black dot in the cell and one or
two in a line beyond it, a short grey longitudinal streak from the
end of the cell to the outer border, some short grey streaks on the
border, made by the interspaces near the border being nearly filled
up with grey color, a black dot near the external angle (this is not
present in all specimens); hinder margin grey. Hind wings ochreous
grey towards the outer border. Underside white, fore wings suffused
with purplish grey, darkest along the costa. Mhow, October.
1504. ANTHOPHILA PULCHRA, D. sp.
Q. Allied to A. purpurina. Cream-colour; head and collar pure
white. Fore wings with the costa and outer half suffused with
purplish grey, gradually darkening towards the outer border, where
there is a white streak running from the apex halfway down the
outer margin, and then making a short streak inwards. Hind wings
dark grey. Underside similar to the male, the purple on the fore
wings rather darker.
Expanse of wings 5%; inch.
Mhow, November.
REMIGIUDZ.
151. ReMIGIA FRUGALIS.
Noctua frugalis, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 2. 138.
Common from July to December.
152. REMIGIA ARCHESIA.
Phalena-Noctua archesia, Cram. Pap. Exot. iii. p. 145, pl. 273.
f. F, G
July, September, and October.
PoAPHILIDA.
153. PoaAPHILA HAMIFERA.
Poaphila hamifera, Walker, xxxiii. 992.
July.
30*
452 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
THERMESIIDZ.
154. AZAzIA RUBRICANS.
Ophiusa rubricans, Boisd. Faun. Lép. Mad. p. 106. 11, pl. 16. f. 1.
September.
155. MeEsTLETA BACCALIX, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 7.)
Pale pinkish cream-colonr. Fore wings irrorated with pinkish-
brown atoms; with four equidistant parallel whitish oblique lines—
subbasal, antemedian, median, and postmedian ; each line nearly
straight from hinder margin till near the costa, where it abruptly
bends inwards to the costa; each line margined with pinkish brown
on its inner side; outer border darker than the rest of the wing,
with a whitish subapical line running inwards from the costa for a
short distance ; fringe pinkish brown with white tips. Hind wings
paler than the fore wings, pale pinkish brown towards the outer
margin; fringe pinkish grey, with white tips. Underside whitish ;
legs marked with pinkish brown ; body dark brown-pink ; fore wings
suffused with pinkish brown towards the apex ; fringe of both wings
as on the upperside.
Expanse of wings 35, inch.
December.
Foci.uip2.
156. HinGuLa UNICOLORIS, 0. sp.
Dark brown ; antenne articulated with white, tips of the palpi
white ; head white on the inside of the eyes; wings saturated with
pinkish ; fore wings with some black marks on the costa, a black
streak at the end of the cell; both wings with black points on the
outer margin, and with two irregular, very indistinct black lines
across the wings difficult to distinguish. Underside slightly paler
than the upperside, in one specimen quite unmarked, in another
with faint traces of outer and submarginal lines.
Expanse of wings 1 inch.
February and September.
PLaTYDID&.
157. EpispARIS SIGNATA.
Episparis signata, Walker, xxxili. 1032.
July.
HyPENID&.
158. RaYNCHINA PERVULGALIS.
s eR pervulgalis, Swinhoe, P. Z.S. 1885, p. 471, pl. 28.
May and September.
159, RHYNCHINA XYLINA, 0. sp.
Palpi, head, and collar white, speckled with grey, the palpi in
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 453
some specimens mostly grey ; antenne grey, articulated with white,
ciliated in the male, filiform in the female; thorax and fore wings
dark grey speckled with white; an antemedian upright sinuous
double white line, a median, outwardly oblique, sinuous double white
line sharply bent inwards to the costa, round the reniform stigma,
which is white and prominent; there is also an orbicular spot of the
same colour, smaller and less prominent, some white marks on the
costa near the apex, and a submarginal and a marginal brown line
with white points. Hind wings and underside pale grey, unmarked ;
abdomen grey with white segmental lines; male with a prominent
grey anal tuft.
This little insect varies much in the shade of its general coloration,
some specimens being reddish grey, and in many the white pre-
dominates.
Expanse of wings ;3,—,5, inch.
June and July ; common in the cotton-fields.
160. HypENA ABDUCALIS.
Hypena abducalis, Walker, xvi. 67.
Common in July.
This species is very variable ; some are strongly marked like the
type, others have merely a whitish curved line on the fore wings
from the tip to the base, with a few streaks, and the general colour
of the wing is pale and quite different to the type.
HERMINIIDZ.
161. NopARIA EXTERNALIS.
Nodaria externalis, Guénée, Delt. et Pyral. 64.78.
October.
162. APPHADANA MISERA.
Apphadana misera, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 166.
Mhow, October; Assirghur, October.
163. SPADIX VEGETUS.
Spadix vegetus, Swinhoe, P. Z. S. 1885, p. 475, pl. 28. f. 14.
June and September.
164. ByTURNA DIGRAMMA.
Bocana digramma, Walker, xxxiv. 1170.
September and October.
165. LABANDA PAMPHOSALIS.
Bocana pamphosalis, Walker, xix. 887.
October.
454 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
GEOMETRITES.
ENNOMIIDZ.
166. HypERYTHRA SWINHOEI.
Hyperythra swinhoei, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5,
vol. v. p. 223 (1880).
Mhow, February ; Ajnot, November.
167. CHIZALA DECIPIENS.
Chizala decipiens, Walker, xx. 263.
March.
BoaRMIID&.
168. HypocHROMA DISPENSATA.
Hypochroma dispensata, Walker, xxi. 435.
March.
169. BoARMIA CORNARIA.
Boarmia cornaria, Guénée, Phal. i. 254. 390.
February and October.
170. PETELIA MEDARDARIA.
Petelia medardaria, Herr.-Schiff. Exot. Schm. pl. 94. f. 534.
July.
AMPHIDASID.
171. BuzuRa PANTERINARIA.
Amphidasis panterinaria, Bremer und Grey, Beitr. zur Schmett.-
Fauna des nérdlichen China’s, p. 21. 107.
June.
GEOMETRIDZ.
172. NEMORIA CARNIFRONS.
Nemoria carnifrons, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 169.
September and October.
173. NEMORIA FREQUENS.
Nemoria frequens, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1881, p. 616.
Mhow, March, April, and November ; Ajnot, November.
174. TIMANDRA DIATOMARIA.
Timandra diatomaria, Walker, xxvi. 1616.
September, October, and November.
EpHyRIDaz.
175. EpHYRA CLEORARIA.
Acidalia cleoraria, Walker, xxiii. 792.
Mhow, February to June, also in October ; Depalpore, November
and December.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 455
176. EpHyRA INEXACTA.
Epione inexacta, Walker, xxvi. 1497.
October.
IDHIDZ.
177. Ip#A ADDICTARIA.
Acidalia addictaria, Walker, xxii. 749.
October.
178. ID#A PATULARIA.
Acidalia patularia, Walker, xxxv. 1633.
Delapore, November.
179. Ip#A REMOTATA.
Acidalia remotata, Walker, xxii. 748.
Depalpore, November.
180. Ip#A ABSCONDITARIA.
Acidalia absconditaria, Walker, xxiii. 757.
October, November, and December.
181. Ip#a WALKERI.
Idea walkeri, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 170.
Acidalia extimaria, Walker, xxiii. 794.
October and January.
182. Ip#a NEGATARIA.
Acidalia negataria, Walker, xxiii. 751.
Mhow, December ; Depalpore, November.
183. Ipa#a CHOTARIA.
Idea chotaria, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 858, pl. 57. f. 14.
April and June.
184. Hyria BILINEATA.
Hyria bilineata, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 170.
Assirghur, October.
CABERIDZ.
185. STEGANIA UVIDULA.
Stegania uvidula, Swinhoe, P. Z.S. 1885, p. 860.
July.
MACARIID.
186. Macaria ELEONORA.
Phalena eleonora, Cram. Pap. Exot. iii. p. 172, pl. 288. f. E, F, G.
July.
456 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
187. MACARIA HEBESATA.
Macaria hebesata, Walker, xxiii. 931.
September.
188. MacaRiA ZEBRINA.
Tephrina zebrina, Butler, P. Z.S, 1883, p. 171.
March, April, and May.
189. MAcARIA ARENARIA.
Tephrina arenaria, Swinhoe, P. Z.S. 1884, p. 527, pl. 48. f. 13.
December. ‘
190. MaAcaRIA LITHINA.
Tiphrina lithina, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 171.
March and October.
I believe these to be females of M. zebrina, though at first
sight they do not look like it, having no median bands; but I have
never taken a male, and the female of the allied species, M. strenuata,
Walker, is often also without bands and is hardly distinguishable
from M, lithina.
191. MacarIA PEREMPTARIA.
Macaria peremptaria, Walker, xxiii. 929.
October.
192. MacarRiIA GRANITALIS.
Tephrina granitalis, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 171.
September.
FIpONIIDz.
193. STERRAA SACRARIA. :
Phalena-Geometra sacraria, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 863. 220.
February, May, and June.
194, STrERRHA PAULULA, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 7.)
White; eyes black; thorax and fore wings irrorated with ochreous
atoms ; fore wings with a reddish-ochreous dot at the end of the cell,
and with two obligue outer lines of the same colour close together,
from the outer two thirds of the hinder margin, where they are
separate, opening out in their centre and meeting at the apex; abdo-
men and hind wings pure white. Underside white ; fore wings pale
ochreous towards the costa.
Expanse of wings 58; inch.
May.
LaRENTIID&.
195. LycAUGES DEMISSUS, N. Sp.
Eyes black; top of head pure white; antennz, body, and wings
cream-colour, both wings irrorated with brown atoms, which are
1886. | LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 457
densely packed in places, forming bands along the costa and on all
the borders of both wings. Fore wings with an oblique central band
of the same colour (also irrorated with darker atoms) from the
centre of the hinder margin to the apex; a row of brown dots between
this band and the outer margin, the dots being connected together
with a line of pale atoms; a brown dot at the end of the cell and
sometimes one or two more in a row inwards; fringe white, densely
irrorated with brown atoms, making it clearly interlined. Hind
wings with a brown dot at the end of the cell, with a central band of
the same colour as that in the fore wings, the band being curved
inwardly to the costa; an outward row of dots connected together
by brownish atoms, and a marginal row of dots; fringe as in fore
wings ; in some specimens the outer line of atoms in both wings is
double, with the dot on the inside line. Underside like the upperside,
but darker and duller.
Expanse of wings ;®; inch.
February to June; common.
196. NapAGARA GRISEA.
Nadagara grisea, Butler, P.Z. 8. 1883, p. 172.
May.
PYRALES,
PyRALIDE.
197. PYRALIS LUCILLALIS.
Pyralis lucillalis, Walker, xvii. 268.
April and September.
198. PyRALIS UBERALIS.
Pyralis uberalis, Swinhoe, P. Z. S. 1884, p. 523, pl. 48. f. 10.
May.
199. CLEDEOBIA HYPOTIALIS.
Cledeobia hypotialis, Swinhoe, P. Z.S. 1885, p. 866.
June, September, and October ; in great plenty in June.
ENNYCHIIDZ.
200. PyrausTA STULTALIS.
Botys stultalis, Walker, xviii. 669.
June and September.
201. RHODARIA JUNCTURALIS.
Rhodaria juncturalis, Walker, xxxiv. 1283.
September.
ASOPIID,
202. HyMeEnNtIA FASCIALIS.
cgi Alain fascialis, Cram, Pap. Exot. iv. p. 236, pl. 398.
June, July, and September.
458 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
203. CoproBaSis OPISALIS.
Desmia opisalis, Walker, xvii. 346.
July and September.
204. CoproBASIS ZNEALIS.
Coptobasis enealis, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 867.
July.
205. SAMEA INSCITALIS.
Aidiodes inscitalis, Walker, xxxiv. 1297.
September.
206. LrvcINoDEs AUXIALIS, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 12.)
Head and thorax reddish brown, covered with white marks; abdo-
men pure pearl-white, with pale reddish-brown bands in the jast four
segments. Fore wings pure pearl-white, with a broad reddish-brown
band at the base, and another on the outer border, diffused inwardly,
and filling up the outer third of the wing ; a white line at the base,
and another submarginal, both sinuous, and showing distinctly on
the brown bands, which are also covered with white marks as on the
thorax; there are also some pale reddish marks on the costa in
the central portion of the wing. Hind wings white, semihyaline,
with a discal waved line and an interrupted marginal band diffused
inwardly ; both pale reddish brown; fringe of both wings white.
Underside white, with the bands and marks pale, showing through
the wings.
Expanse of wings ;4,—;5, inch.
April.
HyDROCAMPIDZ.
207. PARAPONYX AFFINIALIS.
Paraponyz affnialis, Guénée, Delt. et Pyral. 270. 259.
October, November, January, March, April, and June; very
plentiful.
HERCYNIDE.
208. HerBuLa MELEAGRISALIS.
Herbula meleagrisalis, Walker, xvii. 324.
April.
SPILOMELIDZ.
209. SALBIA PEKSPICUALIS.
Zebronia perspicualis, Walker, xxxiv. 1347.
October.
210. ZEBRONIA AUROLINEATUS.
Zebronia aurolineatus, Walker, xvii. 478.
Assirghur, October.
1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 459
211. ZEBRONIA GRAPHICALIS, 0. Sp.
Allied to Z. obrinusalis, Walker.
Ochreous ; fore wings with a black dot at the end of the cell and
three black dots on the costa—one basal, one before and another
beyond the middle, exactly as in Z. aurolinealis and Z, plutusalis.
Both fore and hind wings crossed by five dark ochreous, slightly
sinuous bands; marginal line dark ochreous ; fringe long, with pale
tips. Underside paler ; wings unmarked, except a deep black spot
at the end of the cell of the fore wings ; all the legs with black knees ;
fore tarsi with three black bands.
Expanse of wings ;°,—1 inch.
February, March, and July.
MARGARODID&.
212. PyGosPILA TYRESALIS.
Phalena-Pyralis tyres, Pap. Exot. iii. p. 124, pl. 263. f. C.
Pygospila tyresalis, Guénée, Delt. et Pyral. 312. 340.
Mhow (Yerbury).
213. PHAKELLURA INDICA.
Eudioptis indica, Saunders, Zool. ix. 3070.
September, October, and November.
214. GLYPHODES FESSALIS, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 13.)
Palpi unusually long, much longer than the breadth of the head ;
antenn, palpi, head, thorax, and abdomen pure white ; a reddish
band on each side of the collar, joining a similar band on the costa
of the fore wings ; outer border of fore wings with a band of the
same colour—in some specimens purplish, margined inwardly with
a brown line. Hind wings white, semihyaline, with an outer border
slightly paler than that on the fore wings, and which becomes gra-
dually attenuated to the anal angle; fringe of both wings white.
Underside white, shining, with the bands faintly showing through.
Expanse of wings 35; inch.
April and May.
215. EvcLasTa DEFAMATALIS.
Tlurgia defamatalis, Walker, xviii. 544.
November.
BortipiDz.
216. Borys AUREA.
Botys aurea, Butler, Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. iii. p. 76, pl. 59. f. 11
(1879).
October.
217. Borys INCOLORALIS.
Botys incoloralis, Guénée, Delt. et Pyral. 332. 369.
October.
460 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
218. Borys OBSTRUSALIs.
Botys obstrusalis, Walker, xviii. 663.
July, September, October, and November.
219. Borys NEOCLESALIS.
Botys neoclesalis, Walker, xviti. 635.
June.
220. Borys MOLUSALIS.
Botys molusalis, Walker, xix. 1409.
August (Forsayeth).
221. EBULEA CATALAUNALIS.
Botys catalaunalis, Duponchel, Lép. de France, viii. p. 330.
pl. 232. f. 8.
September, October, and November.
222. ScoPULA DAMASTESALIS.
Scopula damastesalis, Walker, xix. 1013.
July and September.
223. ScopULA VINCTALIS.
Scopula vinctalis, Walker, xxxiv. 1476.
July.
224. SCOPULA STRENUALIS.
Botys strenualis, Walker, xxxiv. 1409.
August (Forsayeth).
STENIIDA.
225. DIASEMIA GEOMETRALIS.
Lepyrodes geometralis, Guénée, Delt. et Pyral. 278. 271.
Assirghur, October.
PHYCIDE.
226. NEPHOPTERYX SUFFUSCALIS, 0. sp.
Cinereous brown; whitish, shining, beneath; palpi stout, pubescent,
curving upwards, not rising higher than the vertex, third joint lan-
ceolate, short, not one third of the length of the second; antenne
rather stout, brown marked with white ; top of head whitish ; palpi,
thorax, and fore wings cinereous brown, some silvery-white atoms on
thorax and on the fore wings near the base ; reniform stigma repre-
sented by a whitish spot ; four sinuous incomplete black lines across
the fore wings—basal, antemedian, postmedian, and submarginal ;
marginal points black ; fringe long, greyish brown ; hind wings pale
whitish cinereous.
Expanse of wings 33; inch.
March and April.
1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 461
227. Homa@mosoMA GRATELLA.
Homeosoma gratella, Walker, xxvii. 26.
February and April.
CRAMBID.
228. SCH@NOBIUS BISIGNATUS.
Schenobius bisignatus, Zeller, MS. (col. B.M.), P. Z.8. 1885,
p- 878.
June and July.
229. CHILO AURIFUSELLUS.
Crambus aurifusellus, Walker, xxxv. 1756.
June and July.
230. CHILO INTERRUPTELLUS.
Chilo interruptellus, Moore, P. Z.S. 1872, p. 581, pl. 34. f. 5.
June.
231. CHILO ORTELLUS, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 3.)
White ; palpi fawn-colour, porrect, about as long as the breadth
of the head, second joiut with large white tufts above, third acutely
conical, as long as the second ; antennze white, stout, pectinated in
the male, branches reddish, short; top of head pure white; thorax
grey, with a black central stripe and a white band on each side;
abdomen pure white. Wings white; fore wings with the upper
portions suffused with yellowish-fawn colour, and with a broad
black longitudinal central stripe from base to outer margin, atten-
uated at both ends; marginal points black, and a few black atoms
distributed over the surface of the wing: hind wings pure white,
unmarked. Underside white, with the stripe and marginal points
on the fore wings showing through the wings, and in the male with
the costal portions and outer border of the fore wings and costa of
hind wings suffused with ey reddish grey.
Expanse of wings, d 15%, 2 1;4 inch.
June and July.
232. CHARLTONA KALA.
Charltona kala, Swinhoe, P. Z.S. fabs s p. 879, pl. 57. f. 4, 3.
June and July.
233. JARTHEZA CHRYSOGRAPHELLA.
Chilo chrysographella, Kollar, Hiigel’s Kasch. p. 494 (1848).
February to April, June and October.
234. JARTHEZA CASSIMELLA, bn. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 4 g,
fig. 6 2.)
Allied to J. aylinella.
Pale yellowish fawn-colour ; labial palpi porrect, stout, longer than
462 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
the breadth of the head, last joint minute ; maxillary palpi half the
length of the labial palpi. Antennze of the male pectinated,
branches very short; of the female filiform, with short bristles,
colour grey. Top of head and thorax chestnut-brown, latter with
a white band on each side; abdomen grey, with white segmental
lines.
Fore wings yellowish fawn-colour, with two dark brown, diffuse,
incomplete longitudinal stripes, one running a short distance out of
the centre of the cell towards the outer border, the other from the
base on the submedian vein for about two thirds of the length of the
wing, each stripe containing a glistening silver-white streak ; a sub-
marginal narrow semidentate brown band and black lunular small
spots on the veins close to, but not touching, the outer margin ;
fringe grey, with a brown line in its centre. Hind wings smoky
grey, unmarked; fringe white. Underside whitish, shining; fore
wings suffused with grey; legs fawn-colour, brown on their inner
sides ; tarsi with brown bands.
Expanse of wings, ¢ 13%, 2 17%5 inch.
June and July ; common.
235. CRAMBUS PARTELLUS.
Crambus partellus, Swinhoe, P. Z.8. 1885, p. 879.
October.
236. CRAMBUS MULTIVAGELLUS, 0. sp.
White ; antennz thin; labial palpi slender, as long as the breadth
of the head ; maxillary palpi one third of the length of the labial
palpi; abdomen extending a little beyond the hind wings; fore
wings acute, rather narrow, outer border oblique, costa slightly
convex ; wings and body above and below pure white, shining, un-
marked.
Expanse of wings 7%; inch.
June, July, and September.
237. UROLA INCLARALIS.
Crambus inclaralis, Walker, xxxvii. 166.
June and July.
238. EROMENE BELLA.
Eromene bella, Hiibner, Tin. f, 69.
April and June.
239. SURATTHA INVECTALIS.
Surattha invectalis, Walker, xxvii. 76.
June.
240. Hypotia ALLALIs, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 2.)
White ; fore wings with the costal line and basal third very pale
reddish cinereous, an oblique broad pale reddish-brown band beyond
1886. | LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 463
the middle, on the inner margin of which is the reniform stigma,
brownish, rather large, lunular; marginal line reddish brown, this
line runs round the apex on to the costa and round the hinder
angle a little way on the hinder margin; some faint, very pale,
reddish marks on the outer third of the wing. Hind wings white,
marginal line reddish brown ; fringe on both wings interlined—white,
pale reddish brown, and white. Antenne, palpi, and body pure
white; a thin brown band on the abdomen near the base, in some
specimens like a fine line. Underside white, with the costal portion
of the fore wings suffused with reddish.
Expanse of wings ;/; inch.
Mhow, June.
NYCTEOLID&.
941. EARIAS FRONDOSANA.
Earias frondosana, Walker, xxvii. 204.
Assirghur, October.
242. EaARIAS TRISTRIGOSA.
Earias tristrigosa, Butler, P. Z.S. 1881, p. 614.
April.
243. EARIAS SPEIPLENA.
Aphusia speiplena, Walker, xii. 770.
October and December.
TORTRICID.
244, PHyCoDES HIRUNDINICORNIS.
Phycodes hirundinicornis, Guénée, Noct. ii. 389. 1249.
Tegna hybleella, Walker, xxxv. 1810.
April and September.
245. DicHRORAMPHA SUBSEQUANA.
Tortrix subsequana, Haworth; Stephens ; Wood, figs 1021.
June and October.
TINEID.
246. ALAVONA BARBARELLA.
Alavona barbarella, Walker, xxviii. 515.
May and June, in great numbers.
247. ALAVONA COSSUSELLA.
Alavona cossusella, Walker, xxxv. 1816.
June and July, in great numbers in the former month.
464 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16,
248. ALAVONA INDECORELLA ?
Alavona indecorella, Walker, xxvili. 515.
June.
Four male specimens, all more or less rubbed ; they are in size and
appearance more like Walker’s type of the above than of any other
insect in this genus, but they cannot safely be determined as iden-
tical with this species.
249. ALAVONA MINOR, Walsingham, n. sp. (Plate XLI. figs.
10, 11, 3 2.)
Palpi dull ochreous, shaded with brownish beneath ; head
ochreous ; antennez cinereous; thorax brownish. Fore wings pale
whitish fawn, shaded at the base of the costal margin with brownish,
a series of brown spots around the apical and outer portions of the
costal margins; between these and the end of the cell, in brightly
marked specimens, is a second series of similar spots parallel to the
apical margin, but turning outward to the anal angle at their lower
end; a brownish spot is situated at the upper angle of the cell,
another on the outer third of the fold. The markings in this species
appear to be frequently almost obsolete, but the marginal spots are
nearly always distinguishable. Hind wings slightly paler than the
fore wings; abdomen tinged with brownish. Male, expanse 24
millim.
The female has no markings, so far as can be judged froma single
specimen in poor condition, but is much smaller than the female of
Alavona cossusella, Walker. Female, expanse 26 millim.
June and July, common.
250. TINEA SUBOCHRACEELLA, Walsingham, n.sp. (Plate XLI.
fig. 9.)
Head tufted, bright yellowish ochreous ; labial palpi ochreous,
faintly tinged with greyish, short and drooping, not thickly clothed ;
maxillary palpi as long as the labials. Fore wings shining ochreous,
faintly tinged at the base of the costa and about the fringes and
apex of the wings with purplish grey. Hind wings greyish ochreous,
with a slight coppery tinge ; abdomen and legs pale ochreous.
Expanse 13 millim.
April.
A single specimen, received from the Rev. J. H. Hocking, from
Dharmsala, by Lord Walsingham, measures 15 millim. in the
expanse of the fore wings.
Two others of my Mhow specimens Lord Walsingham says are
apparently not distinct from this species, although one of them
is slightly larger in size (expanse 17 millim.), and is almost entirely
devoid of the greyish tinge of the fore wings.
The insect has much the appearance of Myrmecocela ochraceella,
Tgstr., but differs in the form of the labial palpi.
L’S. 1886. PL XL.
4
P.
Hanhart imp
IAN LEPIDOPTERA
TAT TVT
LIND
P.Z.S. 1886.P1. XLT.
W Purkiss lith
NEW INDIAN LEPIDOPTERA .
1886.]
LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW.
251. HapsIFERA DEVIELLA.
Drosica deviella, Walker, xxviii. 520.
January, June, and July.
252. SETOMORPHA TINEOIDEs, Walsingham, n. sp.
fig. 8.)
Palpi pale greyish above, tinged with fuscous beneath; antennse
greyish fuscous ; thorax and fore wings spotted and mottled with ill-
defined patches of brownish fuscous scales, these are very numerous
across the middle of the wing and form a series of spots around the
costal, apical, and a portion of dorsal margins.
with a faint purplish tinge ; abdomen greyish fuscous.
Expanse of wings 14 millim.
April, May, and June.
CRYPTOLECHIIDA.
253. DEPRESSARIA SWINHOEI.
Depressaria swinhoei, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 174.
October.
cS
0a
mt
SOMAID OB Oboe
za
oe
SONIDO Oo LOR
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Puats XL.
. Aphneus estivus, n. sp., p. 428.
. Ypthima complexiva, 2, n. sp., p. 423.
. Charaxes agrarius, 3, 0. sp., p. 425.
. Nilasera apella, $, n. sp., p. 429.
. Bireta galbana, nu. sp., p. 438.
Leucania byssina, n. sp., p. 442.
Mestleta baccalix, nu. sp., p. 452.
Dabarita icterica, n. sp., p. 439.
. Susica cosmiana, 2, n. sp., p. 440.
. Radinacra variana, n. sp., p. 444.
Prats XLI,
. Eupterote ignavus, 3, 0. 8p., p- 440.
. Hypotia allalis, n. sp., p. 462.
. Chilo ortellus, G, u. sp., p. 461.
. Jartheza cassimella, G, 0. sp., p. 461.
Pradatta beatrix, n. sp., p. 442.
. Jartheza cassimella, 9, p. 461.
. Sterrha paulula, n. sp., p. 456.
. Setomorpha tineoides, n. sp., p. 465.
. Tinea subochraceella, nu. sp., p. 464.
. Alavona minor, 3, nu. sp., p. 464.
» @; p. 464.
. Leucinodes auxialis, n. sp., p. 458.
. Glyphodes fessalis, n. sp., p. 459.
. Tarache nivosa, n. sp., p. 446.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXXI. 31
(Plate XLI.
Hind wings greyish,
466 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON Nov. 16,
2. Contributions to the Anatomy of Geococcyx californianus.
By R. W. Suurept, C.M.Z.8.
[Received June 28, 1886.]
(Plates XLII.-XLV.)
The investigations I am enabled to record in the present paper
have been made possible through the kindness of Mr. W. F.
Peacock, of Marysville, California.
This gentleman on the 23rd of July, 1885, came into possession of
a fine male Geococcyx, which had been captured for him alive by a
man who had run the specimen down on horseback. Mr. Peacock,
having been informed by me that I only desired the skeleton of the
species, killed and eviscerated it, and filled the abdominal cavity with
powdered charcoal and pyroligneous acid, which preparation brought
it safely into my hands after three days’ travel during the most
sultry weather.
Upon receiving it I at once consigned it to a vessel containing
strong alcohol; so that, at this date (May 1886), the specimen is
before me in excellent condition.
Owing to the fact, however, that it has been eviscerated, I am
unable upon the present occasion to say anything about those organs
which are situated in the thorax and abdomen, and will confine
myself principally to examinations of the muscles of the limbs, the
carotids, the trachea (if it be not injured), and the pterylosis.
It will be remembered by those who are familiar with my work
that I have already published a full account of the skeleton of
Geococcyx elsewhere *, and to that paper the present memvir may be
considered a second instalment. ;
Just now I am far removed by many thousand miles from the
libraries and museums, and in a country where such American forms
as might with profit be compared with our present subject do not
occur. I have by me, however, an excellent field library, consisting
of many of the standard anatomical works, including the collected
“*Scientific Papers’? of Garrod and Forbes. Neither of the last-
named anatomists have anything to say about our Ground-Cuckoo,
and I am inclined to think that neither of those untiring workers in
avian morphology ever came into possession of such material.
Further, so far as my memory serves me, no one has yet paid any
special attention to the structure of Geococcys« californianus. This
being the case, I have reason to hope that my present contributions
will not come amiss.
Garrod’s investigations upon the anatomy of the Cuculide
demonstrated the fact that both of the carotid arteries are present in
.these birds (Coll. Scientif. Papers, p. 169). His statement to this
effect is based upon his having examined the following species :—
1 Journ. of Anat. and Physiology, Lond. vol. xx. pt. 2, Jan. 1886, pp. 244—
266, pls. vii., viii., and ix.
atid anette
IS8b. | GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 467
Cuculus canorus,
Cacomantis sepulcralis,
Chrysococcy2 sp.,
Centropus senegalensis,
Guira piririgua,
Pheenicophaes sp.
The same authority finds the accessory femoro-caudal muscle
present in :—
Oentropus senegalensis,
Centropus phasianus,
Guira piririgua,
Pheenicophaes sp.,
and absent in the following species :—
Cuculus canorus,
Chrysococcy& sp.,
Cacomantis sepulcralis.
Of this latter peculiarity Mr. Garrod said, “ Amongst the Cuculide,
the Ground-Cuckoos (Centropus, Guira, Phenicophaes) differ from
Cuculus and its allies in having the accessory femoro-caudal developed,
whilst it is absent in the latter, their respective formulz being AB.
XY., and A. XY. This peculiarity, when added to those in the
pterylosis, justifies the division of the family into two subfamilies,
which may be termed the Centropodinz and the Cuculinz ” (oe. cit.
- 210).
i According to this author, the ambiens muscle also being present in
the Cuculidee it throws this group into the subclass named by him
the Homalogonate ; and Mr. Garrod brings forward his very interest-
ing researches upon the plantar tendons in birds to still further
support his classification of this particular group. The arrangement
of these tendons I will again reter to further on.
Cuculidee have the czeca also present and possess a nude oil-gland.
To briefly recapitulate, then, the above and a few other structural
characters of this group brought to light by this talented investigator,
we find that the Cuculide are homalogonatous birds with two
carotids ; with the sciatic artery the main one in the leg (except
Centropus) ; Ciconine, as regards the presence of the expansor
secundariorum muscle (see Garrod’s Coll. Scientif. Papers, pp. 323-
29); and finally, as I say, have a uude oil-gland and the ceca.
Forbes examined specimens of Geococcyx affinis, and showed some
interesting points in regard to the bursa Fabricii, which in the Cucu-
lide he says “presents a very characteristic shape, the peduncle
being long and thin, and the extremity club-shaped, giving the whole
somewhat the appearance of a shortened and clumsy antenna of a
butterfly. It disappears completely in adult birds” (Forbes’s Coll.
Scientif. Papers, p. 11). This author, on the page of the work
quoted, presents us with a figure of the cloaca and bursa of Geococcyx
affinis.
31*
468 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16,
At the present time, the American Ornithologists’ Union place the
Cuckoos of this country in an order Coceyges, having three sub-
orders, the Cuculi, the Trogones, and the Aleyones, our genus
Geococcyx falling into the first under the subfamily Coccygine, there
being one other associated with it, the genus Coccyzus. :
Not long ago I showed some of the peculiarities of the coloration
and extent of the naked skin-tracts upon the head of this bird’; I
regret to say, however, that I have not at hand an account of the
pterylosis of the Cuculidz, so on the present occasion I must content
myself with an accurate description of that feature in Geococcyx
californianus, and leave the comparisons to be made by others who
may be more fortunate in this respect.
Of the Pterylosis of Geecoccyx.
So carefully have I drawn the two views of our subject, which are
presented in Plate XLII., showing the pterylee and their exact limits
and extent, that a few words will suffice to complete the description.
It will be seen that the “capital area” is quite complete, being
broken only by the naked and coloured skin-tracts about the eye
and on the back of the head. These latter vermilion-tinted skin
areas are divided in the median line behind by a very narrow pteryla,
which is directly continuous with the posterior middle strip of an
equal width, and which terminates at the root of the neck, where it
is somewhat abruptly lost in a central, sparsely scattered tract, just
anterior to the spinal pterylosis. This posterior cervical strip is
continuous above with the capital area. Upon the anterior cervical
region we find the tract quite broad above, where it is continuous with
the feather-tracts of the gular space; but as we proceed down the
front of the neck this tract bifurcates at about halfway between the
trunk and the throat, each separate strip thus formed being extended
on either side to a point opposite a clavicular head, where it merges
into the “ ventral” and ‘‘ humeral tracts.”
A “ humeral tract ” is but faintly marked in our Ground-Cuckoo ;
and it is seen to pass, on the posterior aspect of the brachium, from
the shoulder toward the elbow, but is gradually lost before it arrives
at the latter point (Plate XLII. fig. 1).
The “ventral tracts ’’ are very broad anteriorly, and are bounded
mesially by curved lines, which overlie the clavicular limbs. These
tracts, on either side, also bifureate as we proceed in the direction of
the abdomen. The outer strip grows gradually narrower, and makes
a graceful curve round under the arm-pit, below which it abruptly
terminates. The mesial strip formed by the bifurcation of the
ventral tract is long and narrow, being gently convex outwards for
its entire length. The distal extremities of these strips become
extremely slender as they converge towards the vent, around which
they pass to merge with each other behind this. opening, and with
the feather-tract covering the underside of the coccygeal protu-
berance (Plate XLII. fig. 2).
1 This, 1885, pp. 286-288, pl. vii.
1886. | GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 469
The spinal pterylosis is represented by two broad, longitudinal
tracts well separated from each other in the middle line by a naked-
skin area overlying the vertebral column. These spinal pteryle
gradually converge towards each other as they approach the pelvic
region, over which they merge into one feather-space, which becomes
pointed behind and terminates just in front of the nude oil-
gland.
The upperside of the coccygeal protuberance is also sparsely
feathered, being divided from a more generously covered area below
by the line of horizontally arranged pits for the quill-butts of the
rectrices of the tail. An exceedingly narrow tract, on either side,
springs from the posterior margin of the outer bifurcation of the
ventral tract just below the arm-pit, to run longitudinally down the
side, in front of the thigh, to become lost before it arrives at the
margin of the vent. This strip seems to be composed simply of a
double row of feathers, and might appropriately be termed the
lateral tract.
The patagium of the arm is very thinly feathered anteriorly,
while its dorsal aspect is quite completely covered ; the remainder of
the pterylosis of the pectoral limb presents us with nothing of a
peculiar nature. The posterior marginal- boundary of this “ alar
tract”’ is, as usual, terminated by the row of quill-butts of the
primary feathers of the wing.
Passing now to the crural region, we find a posterior limb but
sparsely feathered, while a conspicuous ‘‘ femoral tract’ extends
obliquely across the dorsal aspect of the thigh, and rapidly narrow-
ing, runs along the pubic line, finally merging into the “ caudal
tract.’
Geococcyx shows its best-marked apteria in front, in the mesial
space between the inner strips of the ventral tracts, and laterally to
the outer side of the spinal pterylosis, where, indeed, for a con-
siderable space no feathers may be said to occur at all. A well-
marked dorso-longitudinal naked area is also to be seen. In this
Ground-Cuckoo we notice a membrane, stretching between the
thigh and leg, which corresponds to the patagial fold of the pectoral
limb, and fully as well-developed.
Before closing this part of our subject it is of interest to observe
the general form of Geococcyx, which, now that its feathers have
been removed, can be studied to the best advantage. It will be seen
how perfectly its figure has come to assume a shape best adapted to
the peculiar requirements of the bird. Its pelvic limbs are large,
muscular, and consequently powerful, while the pectoral ones are
decidedly less so, though by no means weak or inefficient. The
body-form of this prince of avian racers is what almost might be
called “clipper built,” so admirably fashioned is it to the needs and
ends of a rapid running bird of the size of our subject.
With these few remarks upon the external organization and
appearance of Geococcye we will now close this part of our discussion,
and pass to the consideration of some of the features presented in
the structure of the remainder of its economy.
470 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16,
On the Mode of Insertion of the Patagial Muscles
of the Pectoral Limb.
Having considerable faith in the value in classification of the
arrangement of the insertional extremities of the tendon of the ¢ensor
patagii brevis muscle, and the forms of the patagial muscles gene-
rally, as single characters, it was with no little interest that I
carefully removed with my scalpel the integuments over this region,
for the first time in my experience in Geococcyx. The late Mr.
Garrod’s excellent work in this direction is now familiar to all
ornithologists ; but on this occasion I refrained from consulting any
of the accurate drawings he has left us illustrating these parts in
many groups of birds until I had actually completed my dissection,
and my drawing of it, which is shown in Plate XLIII. fig. 2. I then
opened his “‘ Collected Scientific Papers” and proceeded to compare
my figure with his numerous illustrations of the same dissection
among other birds.
Being familiar with the arrangement of this tendon in a great
many North-American birds from my own labours, I was confident
that the condition of things in Geococcy« californianus was a marked
departure from anything I had previously met; nor did I expect
to find anything in Garrod’s illustrations that would prove to
be exactly like it. But in this last hope I was very agreeably
disappointed, for I find that it corresponds almost exactly with the
state of affairs found by this talented anatomist to be present in
certain Galbulidee. To satisfy one’s self of this fact it is but necessary
to compare my figure with the Jacamar dissected by Mr. Garrod,
as shown in his work (plate 23. fig. 1, tendon of tensor patagit
brevis in Urogalba paradisea), and the striking resemblance will be
at once appreciated. He has simply cleared his tendon more
completely of its investing fascia than I have, and still further
separated its several slips; while in my figure of Geococcyx the
tendon is shown as it presents itself immediately after turning back
the integuments, or, in other words, exactly in situ. The liberty
taken by Mr. Garrod to still further show these slips and their exact
insertions is perfectly permissible, and often resorted to for the
purpose named.
It will be seen that after the tendon of the tensor patagii brevis
arrives over the proximal third of the belly of the extensor metacarpi
radialis longior muscle in Geococcyx it trifurcates, one slip passing
downwards to become inserted immediately below and on the outer
aspect of the ewtensor carpi ulnaris muscle; the shortest slip at
once attaches itself to the ewtensor metacarpi radialis longior, while
the longest division of all passes with the last-named muscle to
become inserted with it upon the outer condyle of the humerus.
As for the muscular portion of these patagial muscles above in
this Ground-Cuckoo, I have represented them with the arm turned
somewhat differently than the position Mr. Garrod was wont to give
it. It will be seen, however, that the bulk of this muscular portion
in oe as in Urogalba, belongs to the tensor patagii brevis
muscle,
1886. | GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 471
It is still further interesting to compare the arrangement of these
tendons in Geococcyx with the similar structures as they were found
to exist by Mr. Garrod in Upupa epops and Cuculus canorus, both
of which are figured upon the same plate alluded to above. We at
once observe that our subject differs considerably in these particulars
not only from the Hoopoe, but still more from the Cuckoo. Indeed,
so far as Upupa is concerned, it simply lacks the long slip going to
the humeral condyle in order to make the arrangement of the
insertional extremities of the tensor patagii brevis agree with the
corresponding arrangement as found in my specimen of Geococcyw.
So far as this one character is concerned, then, it points to the
fact that a certain affinity exists connecting our Geococcyx with the
Galbulide. ji
Fig. 1. Fig. 2.
Fig. 1. Muscles at the outer side of the elbow of the right wing of Caprimulgus
europeus.
Fig. 2. The same of the left wing of Steatornis. (Both figures after Garrod.)
tpb, tensor patagii brevis; ecr, extensor carpi radialis (extensor meta-
carpi radialis longior of the present writer); 0, biceps; d, deltoid ;
¢, triceps ; 2, humerus.
Further, the marked difference in this particular between Geo-
coccyx and Cuculus canorus is not to be overlooked.
Now, strange to say, there is still another (and what we must
believe to be a widely separated) group of birds that possesses an
arrangement of the insertional extremity of the tensor patagii brevis
very much as we find it in our present subject. ‘These are no
others than the Caprimulgi.
I reproduce (figs. 1 & 2) Prof. Garrod’s figures of these parts in
Steatornis and Caprimulgus europeus, the better to show this simi-
larity. It will be seen in these Caprimulgine birds, however, that
the lowest slip merges with the fascia to the outer side of the ulna,
while in my specimen of Geococeyw it goes to the extensor carpi
ulnaris muscle.
Garrod pointed out another character of some value, which he
472 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16,
discovered during his dissections of the arms of birds ; this was the
presence or absence of the expansor secundariorum muscle (Coll.
Sci. Papers, p. 323). As this delicate muscle and its tendon is
well developed in the Storks, he, for convenience sake, termed it
the Ciconine character. He found the Cuculidze to be Ciconine
birds so far as this structure was concerned, but I find after a very
careful search in both pectoral limbs of my specimen of Geococcyx
that this character is missing in it. This, then, constitutes another
difference between Geococcyx and the Cuculide.
Of the Pectoral Muscles.
All three of the pectoral muscles are present in this bird, and all
conspicuously developed, although the pectoralis tertius is consider-
ably larger in comparison than is usually the case. Their muscular
fibres are remarkable for their fine texture and compactness, both of
which qualities, added to their pale colour, lend to these structures
a very delicate appearance.
Nothing of a peculiar nature seems to distinguish either the
pectoralis major or secundus, as they both arise and are inserted ina
manner common to the majority of the class.
On the other hand, the pectoralis tertius, although inserted as
we usually find it in birds, has no sternal origin, but arises from the
externo-anterior aspect of the sternal extremity of the coracoid, as
well as from the side of the shaft of the same bone.
Recent dissections of mine, performed upon various species of the
Corvidee, go to show that in them this muscle has quite an extensive
origin upon the sternum, and its bulk sinks into insignificance when
compared with the size of the great pectoral as it exists in all of the
species of this latter group which I have examined.
On the Myology of the Pelvic Limb in Geococcyx.
Quite recently I have completed a very extensive chapter on the
muscles of birds, and the MS. of this piece of work, with the
nearly one hundred woodcuts that illustrate it, are at hand at the
present writing. So with the bird now before us I will, without
further explanation, adopt the myological nomenclature which I
have proposed in my MS., without discussion of such points as
wherein I may differ in homologies or terms with other authorities.
Such differences, and I trust they may be few and well sustained,
must be left for decision until such time as the work referred to
appears in type.
It is my aim here to enter quite extensively into the description of
the muscles of the pelvic limb of Geococeyx, as they offer us many
points of interest.
We find the sartorius muscle (Plate XLIV. fig. 1, 8) powerfully
developed in Geococcyx, as are the majority of the muscles of the
thigh in this bird. It arises, semitendinous, from the crest of the
neural spine of the last vertebra of the dorsal region of the spine, from
the summit of the anterior portion of the crista of the sacrum, and from
the adjacent surface of the superior aspect of the ilium on the cor-
1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 473
responding side. The fibres, forming an oblong and rather thick
muscle, pass downwards and backwards to the region in front of the
knee. Here it becomes inserted by a special slip of fascia that is
thrown off and merges with the general fascia surrounding the knee-
joint ; and, secondly, by a more carneous insertion into the inner half
of the superior rim of the cnemial crest of the tibia and the continuous
inner margin of the summit of that bone.
The sartorius bounds anteriorly the superficial group of muscles
of the thigh; consequently its anterior border is free. Its posterior
border above unites quite intimately with the overlapping gluteus
primus muscle ; while this border below is sharp and free, although
here, too, the gluteus also overlaps it, and a delicate connective tissue
binds them together.
The gluteus primus (Plate XLIV. fig. 1, g/.pr) constitutes that
great and rather complex muscle which makes up the central fleshy
portion of the outer aspect of the thigh. It arises by a strong fascia
from the summit of the coossified neural spines of the anterior sacral
vertebrae, and by carneous fibres from the outer rim and under
surface of the whorl-like, overarching portion of the ilium behind ;
and finally from the contiguous portion of the pelvis over the anti-
trochanter, between these anterior and posterior origins. In front
the muscle consists first of a strong layer of semitendinous fascia,
which closely overlies the gluteus medius muscle beneath it, and
overlaps the sartorius anteriorly. The posterior origin and mid-
division become rapidly carneous and more massive as we proceed
in the direction of the caudal extremity of the body. So that,
where we find it arising from beneath the overarching part of the
ilium behind, the muscle fills about one fourth of the convexity there
formed, the semitendinosus filling the remainder of this curious cavity.
The fibres of the strong, semitendinous, muscular sheet springing
from these several origins, or rather along this continuous line of
origin, now pass, converging as they do so, towards the anterior
aspect of the knee-joint. The semitendinous portion anteriorly be-
comes fleshy as it arrives along the outer pelvic margin, with which
it is quite intimately connected. The hinder division of the muscle
remains thick and carneous until it comes to the Knee-joint. Here
all the fibres again become tendinous and fascia-like, and, uniting
with a similar structure contributed by the evtensor femoris lying
beneath it, the combined sheath thus formed surrounding the well-
developed patella, closely invests the front and sides of the knee-
joint, and is finally inserted all round the anterior and externo-
lateral borders of the summit of the tibia.
The most superficial muscles of the leg are the gastrocnemius and
the peroneus longus.
As we would naturally expect, the gastrocnemius muscle (Plate
XLIV. fig. 1, y) in Geococcyx is wonderfully well-developed. All
three of its heads are strongly defined, and the fleshy belly of the
muscle is massive and thick.
Its ewternal head arises, curiously enough, by two perfectly distinct
tendinous slips. One of these, a strong, flat tendon, comes off from
474 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16,
the outer surface of the external condyle of the femur, while the
second slip, also strong but somewhat more rounded, arises from the
back of the external femoral condyle, just above the trochlear surface.
Between these two tendons of the external head of the gastrocnemius
we find the loop for the diceps and the tendon of that musele itself,
the loop being quite intimately attached to the free edge of the outer
tendon. Below the loop, these tendons merge with each other and
terminate in the commencing fibres that compose the external head
of the gastrocnemius proper.
The internal head of the gastrocnemius, or what is really the
middle head in birds, is quite median in position, and is represented
merely by a long, narrow, muscular slip that arises by a delicate,
though strong, cord-like, tendon from the middle of the intercondyloid
notch of the femur.
The tibial head of the muscle under consideration is massive in
its dimensions when compared with the divisions of origin of the
gastrocnemius already described. It arises fleshy from an extensive
surface on the inner aspect of the head of the tibia as high up as
the marginal boundary of its summit; and from the muscular fascia
surrounding certain of the deep thigh-muscles, which are inserted
into the distal end of the femur, and consequently are adjacent to
the posterior aspect of the head of the tibia.
At a point about opposite the junction of the upper and middle
third of the shaft of the tibia the internal and tibial heads of the
gastrocnemius merge with each other, while between their free edges
above passes the exceedingly delicate tendon of the semimembranosus
muscle.
All of the fibres of this complicated origin of the gastrocnemius
muscle now converge and pass directly down the back of the leg of
the bird. They also merge with each other in such a manner that,
were we to examine the muscle at about the middle third of the leg,
we would find it composed of two well-defined bellies, rather thin,
nearly of equal size, united somewhat firmly by an intervening fascia,
and each being convex on their superficial aspect and the reverse on
their under sides, which concavity accurately moulds itself to the
deeper layer of muscles of the leg, which the gastrocnemius com-
pletely covers.
At the lower fourth of the tibial shaft the fibres terminate in a
broad, flat, and glistening tendon, which passes flat-wise over the
shallow and longitudinal groove of the ¢ibial cartilage, at which
point the tendon is considerably thickened. Next, crossing the
tibio-tarsal joint, it becomes internally attached to the hinder surface
of the hypotarsus of the metatarsal bone, below which protuberance
it finally merges into the deeper layer of the podothecal sheath con-
fining the flexor tendons.
The peroneus longus (Plate XLIV. fig. 1, p.l) arises from the
entire free margin of the cnemial crest in front of the head of the
tibia, and by somewhat specialized, though delicate, tendons, one each
from the apices of the pro- and ectocnemial processes of the same part
of the bone. These latter tendons pass down on the under surface
—-
1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 475
of the muscle, which latter must be cut across and reflected in order to
discover them. From this origin the peroneus longus as a rather thick,
coneavo-convex muscle passes down in front of the leg, its outer edge
dipping down for attachment between the tibialis anticus muscle,
which it almost completely covers, and the flexors to its outer side ;
its inner edge is free and thin, and overlaps the gastrocnemius.
Low down on the outer side of the tibial shaft the fibres of the
peroneus longus have converged to terminate in a small narrow tendon,
This tendon, just above the condyles of the tibia, bifurcates, the short
slip of the bifurcation going to the fascia covering the block of
cartilage (which I have termed the tibial cartilage) at the back of
the tibio-tarsal joint for attachment, while the longer slip passes
across the articulation to the bundle of tendons at the back of the
tarso-metatarsus to merge with one of the special flexors.
Removing this superficial layer of muscles of the pelvic limb and
turning our attention once more to the thigh, the following ones are
presented to our view for examination :—
The gluteus medius muscle (Plate XLIV. fig. 2, gl.m) is found
to be strong and tendinous. It, as in all of the birds that I have
examined, fills the concavity of the preacetabular portion of the
pelvis, and here in Geococcy# extends laterally much beyond the bone,
as this bird has a very narrow pelvis anteriorly, while it demands
the use of a powerful set of gluteal muscles.
The gluteus medius arises by a strong, flat tendon from the superior
surface of the outer moiety of the anterior iliac margin, by a dense
fascia from the entire line bounding the preacetabular concavity,
and finally by fleshy fibres from the upperside of the ilium itself.
The fibres of the roundish muscle thus formed converge as they pass
to the caput femoris, and, just before arriving at the bone, they
terminate in a dense flat tendon, which, passing over a bursa, is
inserted at a point on the antero-external aspect of the femoral
trochanter.
The gluteus minimus (Plate XLIV. fig. 2, g/.min) is a very much
smaller muscle than the gluteus medius, and is found immediately
beneath it to its outer side. In form it is oblong, and fully three
times as long as wide. It arises from the outer superior surface
of the fore part of the ilium, and passing obliquely downwards
and backwards as a flat narrow band of fibres, it becomes inserted
by semitendinous ones on the outer aspect of the upper third of the
femur, just below the trochanter. This muscle may also ride over
a small bursa, just before it arrives at its insertion.
The extensor femoris is readily divisible at its lower half into two
parts, the bulkier anterior one representing the erureus (Plate XLIV.
fig. 2, c), and the posterior division the vastus externus (Plate XLIV.
fig. 2, V.£).
As awhole, this powerful extensor of the leg upon the thigh
arises from the antero-external aspect of nearly the entire length of
the shaft of the femur, and from a portion of the trochanter at its
summit. At about its lower fourth it terminates in a broad tendinous
expansion, which, as has already been described, is amply reinforced
by other insertional portions of the superficial muscles of the thigh.
476 DR. R, W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16,
The patella is found encased in front in this great tendinous sheath
of the knee-joint, and below the apex of this sesamoid we find the
enveloped track of the tendon of the ambiens muscles, as it passes
round in front of the femoro-tibial articulation. The combined
tendon of the extensor femoris is finally inserted into the cnemial
crest of the tibial and the lateral boundaries of the summit of that
bone. Some of the superficial muscles on the outer side of the leg
are so extended as to take a certain amount of their origin from this
great tendinous expansion.
In Plate XLIV. fig. 2 I have very thoroughly divided these two sub-
divisions of the extensor femoris, in order to show their relative size,
as well as their relation to each other and the surrounding structures.
The biceps flexor cruris (Plate XLIV. fig. 1; fig. 2, Bz) arises by
carneous fibres upon quite an extensive portion of the under surface of
the over-curled part of the ilium behind the acetabulum, and by along
tendinous slip which comes off from the free anterior margin of this
part of the ilium. ‘The fibres converge as they pass downwards, and
unite to form a somewhat flattened muscle. Opposite the head of the
tibia, the biceps terminates in a round tendon, of cord-like dimen-
sions, which passes through a special loop to make its way between
some of the muscles at the back of the leg, to become inserted on the
tubercle intended for it on the outer side of the superior moiety of
the shaft of the fibula. The loop of the diceps (Plate XLV. fig. 1,7)
is flat and fashioned like a delicate tendinous ribbon. Its upper end
arises from the side of the shaft of the femur above the external
condyle, while the lower end comes off from this protuberance just
below the insertion of the outer slip of the external head of the
gastrocnemius muscle. A branch of the sciatic nerve also passes
through this loop in company with the tendon of the biceps.
The semitendinosus (Plate XLIV. figs. 1, 2, St; Plate XLV. fig. 1,
St) isa marvellously well-developed muscle in this form, as is also its
accessory head. Its origin fills about three fourths of the nether
cavity formed by the posterior overarching portion of the ilium,
under which it arises.
Posteriorly, the fibres forming its free margin are so arranged as
to create a rounded border; the lower end of its are terminating
about opposite the post-pubis of the pelvis. From this origin the
fibres of the semitendinosus pass downwards and forwards as a great,
though somewhat compressed muscle. When within rather more
than a centimetre’s length of the shaft of the femur, they terminate
in an oblique tendinous raphe, which latter forms the bounding-line
between this muscle and the next.
The accessory semitendinosus (Plate XLV. fig. 1, a.s.¢) is com-
posed of coarser fibres than the muscle just described. It springs
from a longitudinal line occupying the distal half of the shaft of
the femur, and from the upper surface of the hinder aspect of the
external condyle of that bone. The fibres pass backwards and a
little upwards to become inserted into the tendinous raphe just
alluded to.
The lower extremity of this tendinous raphe terminates, in
Geococeyx, in a thin, flat, and delicate tendon, which continues down-
1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 477
wards and forwards to the inner surface of the head of the tibia,
where it becomes inserted, the point of insertion being found above
that of the semimembranosus muscle, the insertional tendon of which
overlaps it.
The semimembranosus (Plate XLIV. figs. 1,2; Plate XLV. fig. 1,
Sm) in Geococcyz, though thoroughly developed, is rather a slender
and thin muscle, markedly so when we compare it with the massive
semitendinosus which overlies it.
It arises from the outer surface of the ischium, for its posterior
two thirds, on a line situated a few millimetres above the lower free
edge of that element of the pelvis. The fibres gradually converge
as they pass downwards and forwards, to terminate in a very delicate
and thin ribbon-like tendon, which, passing between the broad tibial
head of the gastrocnemius and the proximal extremity of the shaft of
the tibia, becomes finally thereupon inserted on its internal surface.
The hinder margin of the semimembranosus is free, while its border
anteriorly is juxtaposed to the posterior edge of the adductors.
In the bird before us the ambiens muscle (Plate XLV. fig. 1, amb)
is conspicuously developed.
It arises from the apex of the prominent prepubic spine of the
pelvis, and the fibres passing directly down to the inner side of the
femur, and parallel with that bone, form a strong fusiform muscle.
As it approaches the patella it terminates in a small flattened tendon,
which, piercing the fascial envelop of the knee-joint below the
inferior apex of that sesamoid, passes round the joint, to become
finally lost to the outer side and opposite the summit of the tibia,
where some of its tendinous fibres merge with the fibres of origin of
the flexor perforatus digitorum, or, at least, with one of its divisions.
The améiens is overlaid by the sartorius muscle, and in the figure
is brought into view only through the aid of a small dissecting-hook
and chain, which pull it forwards in order that it may be better seen.
The femoro-caudal muscle and the accessory femoro-caudal are
both present and fully developed.
The femoro-caudal (Plate XLY. fig. 1, f.c) arises, tendinous, from
the lower posterior border of the pygostyle. It soon becomes fleshy
and as a narrow, muscular ribbon passes through the tissues over-
lying the lateral group of caudal muscles proper. Opposite the
posterior border of the pelvis it expands to form a prettily-shaped
and compressed spindle, closely covering the obturator externus
muscle and the side of that bone. As it nears the femur it again
contracts, receives the fibres of its accessory head, and is finally
inserted upon the femoral shaft, at the posterior aspect of its prox-
imal third.
The accessory femoro-caudal (Plate XLV. fig. 1, afc) arises be-
neath the overarching part of the postacetabular portion of the ilium,
just behind the acetabulum and beyond. Its fibres pass obliquely
downwards and forwards to join with those of the JSemoro-caudal,
and to become inserted with them into the upper part of the femur
as already described.
The obturator ewternus (Plate XLV. fig. 1, 0.e) arises from the
outer surface of the ischium above the “obturator space,” the
478 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16,
muscle being thin and closely pressed to the pelvis. The fibres
converge as they near the femur and terminate in a strong, flat
tendon which becomes inserted on the outer aspect of the trochanter
of that bone, which insertion is slightly overlapped by the tendon
of the gluteus medius muscle.
The adductors arise from the infero-external margin of the
ischium, between the anterior edge of the semimembranosus and the
obturator foramen.
The adductor longus (Plate XLV. fig. 1, a./) is the more anterior
of the two and consequently arises the higher on the pelvis, and
comes off in front of the adductor magnus, which it largely overlaps.
Its fibres pass obliquely to the posterior aspect of the shaft of the
femur, down which they become inserted as far as its middle, along
the linea aspera, a line which is well marked in our subject.
The adductor magnus (Plate XLV. fig. 1, a.m), like the one just
described, is also a broad ribbon-like muscle, arising from the ischium
between the semimembranosus and a middle point on the underside of
the adductor longus, close up to its semitendinous origin. Anteriorly
its margin is free, while posteriorly it is juxtaposed to the anterior
border of the semimembranosus. Passing parallel with those of the
other adductor, its fibres are inserted into the distal moiety of the
linea aspera of the femoral shaft, down to the intercondyloid notch
of that bone, where this muscle makes a very substantial insertion.
Removing all the muscles of the thigh thus far described, we find
that in this region we have the following ones remaining. They are
shown in my drawing (Plate XLV. fig. 2), together with a few as
yet undescribed muscles of the leg.
A very important muscle is the obturator internus (Plate XLY.
fig. 2, 0.2), and in Geococcyx it exists as we find it in the majority
of the class. Prof. Garrod laid some stress on the point whether
this muscle arose from a triangular or an oval area. Here it arises
from a decidedly oval one, and as usual this is from the mesial sur-
faces of the ischium and the post-pubic element of the pelvis. Its
tendon emerges from the obturator foramen, and overlapping the
gemellus muscle, passes to the outer aspect of the upper part of the
trochanter of the femur, where it is inserted.
The gemellus (Plate XLV. fig. 2, ge) is a short, thick, carneous
muscle, which arises about the outer rim of the obturator foramen of
the pelvis. Its fibres passing obliquely upwards and forwards are in-
serted with the tendon of the obturator internus muscle on the tro-
chanter of the femur. This bird also has a few of the fibres of its
gemellus muscle inserted into the tendon of the obturator externus
muscle, at least I found this to be the case in the specimen before me.
We find the vastus internus (Plate XLV. fig. 2, v.i) to be a strong,
fusiform muscle, that is only fully discovered after we have removed
the ambiens and the adductors. It lies on the postero-internal aspect
of the shaft of the femur, arising from the linea aspera nearly as high
up as the head of that bone, and increasing in bulk as it descends,
still making attachment to the linea aspera, it only becomes free
just above the condyles. At this point it terminates in a flat tendon,
which, crossing the articulation of the knee, becomes inserted into the
—
1886.] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 479
front part of the inner marginal rim of the summit of the tibia. This
muscle constitutes a powerful auxillary to the action of the extensor
femoris, and it appears to be quite a constant one in the class Aves.
The description of the vastus internus completes our account of the
musculature of the thigh. A brief recapitulation of them shows us
that Geococcyx possesses in this region all of the muscles that we
usually find there in birds.
The entire group including the amdiens, the femoro-caudal, the
accessory femoro-caudal, the semitendinosus, the accessory semi-
tendinosus, and the semimembranosus, so ably introduced into taxonomy
by Garrod, are all present and wonderfully well developed. Then
we have all three g/wtei represented, with an ample evfensor femoris,
and its auxiliary the vastus internus, a handsome biceps flewor
cruris, with its interesting pulley at the back of the knee. Next,
the two obturators and the gemellus; and finally two powerful
adductors, the magnus and longus.
We may now once more direct our attention to the leg, and
investigate the muscles there found in its second layer.
First among these stands the tibialis anticus (Plate XLIV. figs. 1,
2, tib.ant). This interesting muscle arises, as most commonly
among birds, by two very distinct heads. The under and at the
same time the smaller one of these comes off by a tendon from a
little pit that is found on the anterior aspect of the external condyle
of the femur ; the second or larger portion of the muscle completely
covers over the first, except of course its tendon, which extends
further up. This latter head arises from a line extending all round
within the cnemial crest and the pro- and ectocnemial ridges of the
tibia. The fibres of the two heads extend directly down in front of
the tibial shaft, at the lower third of which they gradually merge
with each other, and finally terminate in a strong tendon, which,
passing through the oblique fibrous loop, or bridge rather, at the
front and lower end of the tibia, pass across the tibio-tarsal joint, to
become inserted on the anterior surface of the upper third of the
tarso-metatarsus bone, just below its head.
The soleus (Plate XLV. fig. 2, so), found at the back of the leg,
is another well-developed muscle of this layer in Geococcyz californi-
anus. It arises from behind the tibia, on its inner side, and just
below the marginal rim of its summit. The fibres at once form a
little flat muscle, rather longer in shape than the fish from which it
derives its name, and soon terminate at the lower or tail-end in a
tendon. This tendon, long and narrow, passes directly down the
postero-internal aspect of the leg to become inserted into the dense
fascia covering the tibial cartilage at its supero-internal angle.
Great care and patience are necessary in the study of the arrange-
ment and distribution of the tendons of the flexors and extensors in
the leg and foot of a bird, and to this rule Geococcyx by no means
forms any exception.
In describing these I will present them in the order that they most
conveniently came under my hand after the removal of the muscles
alluded to in the foregoing paragraphs.
480 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16,
After we have cut away the ¢ibialis anticus, we find another, and
only one other, muscle occupying the anterior aspect of the tibia.
This is the extensor longus digitorum.
The extensor longus digitorum (Plate XLY. fig. 1, e./.d) arises
from the anterior aspect of the in-half of the tibial shaft as high up
as the ¢idialis anticus muscle, which covers it; it also arises from a
tense fascia which comes off from the lower free edge of the pro-
cnemial crest of the tibia; and finally from a longitudinal line ex-
tending obliquely down the front of the shaft of the tibia to its
lower third. This obliquity finally brings the tendon in which the
extensor longus digitorum terminates to the middle line.
Just above the condyles of the tibia, it here passes through the
little bony bridge ; emerging from which it crosses the ankle-joint in
front, then passes down the anterior aspect of the tarso-metatarsus
bone, overlying the short extensor. At the upper end of this last-
named bone, and over the ankle-joint, this tendon is firmly bound
down by a fibrous fascia. In some birds we know a special bony
span exists for it on the upper part of the tarso-metatarsus, as in
certain Owls. When the tendon of this muscle arrives at the
anterior aspect of the trochlew of the distal end of the tarso-meta-
tarsus, it expands and bifurcates. The tendinous expansion becomes
more or less attached to the underlying tissues, while each bifur-
cation passes one over the second, and the other over the third toe,
for their entire lengths, to become inserted into the upper points of
their ungual phalanges.
Now from the side of the tendon that goes to the third toe
another slip is differentiated off in a very peculiar manner, owing to
the reversion of the toe in question. For it not only passes over the
top length for insertion of this fourth digit, as in the case of the
others, but its slip also splits off to make a separate insertion at the
extremity of the basal phalanx of the third digit. I have had the
opportunity of dissecting three feet, with the view of studying this
point, and I find it to obtain in all of them.
The extensor brevis digitorum (Plate XLV. fig. 1, e.6.d). Thisisa
muscle I find that, in common with many other authors, I have de-
scribed in my MSS. as the extensor hallucis brevis, from the fact that
its tendon goes to the hallux alone. But here, so extraordinary is its
development, that no such term would be either adequate or appro-
priate.
Even here the short extensor of the hallux has a certain amount
of individualization, though it is not fully differentiated from the
other part of this extensor brevis. It, however, is not attached
more than halfway down the anterior aspect of the shaft of the
tarso-metatarsus, at which point it terminates in a delicate thread-
like tendon; this passes directly over the upper border of the
accessory metatarsal, and along the top of the basal joint of the
hallux, to become inserted in the usual manner in the base of the
claw-joiat. Now the remainder of the ewtensor brevis digitorum is
attached down the shaft of the tarso-metatarsus, as far as the distal
trochlez ; the outer portion of it developing a tendon about halfway
down, which is concealed by the carneous fibres which overlie it.
nie Y
1886.] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 481
This tendon passes round beneath the trochlea for the fourth toe
and is really inserted on the underside of the basal joint of this
digit at its proximal extremity ; so that in the case of this toe it
seems as though it would act almost as a flewor. With the second
and third toes, however, the carneous fibres of the muscle under
consideration are continued all the way to the trochleze, where they
terminate, in either case, in a strong, flat tendon, which passing over
the joint is inserted on the upperside of the proximal extremity of
the basal joint. Here, of course, the muscle acts (in the case of
the second and third toes) as an auxiliary to the long extensor.
Not a little room is here open to us for speculation as to how the
tendon of this short extensor in the case of this fourth toe exactly
came to assume its present point for insertion, as the digit gradually
and finally became permanently reversed. Indeed, the high develop-
ment of this short extensor in Geococcyw over the vast majority
of the class is, too, an interesting fact; and did the reversion of
the digit precede or follow the muscular development? No doubt
the completeness of the latter, and its perfection for an avian type,
has come about as a demand on the part of the habits of the bird
itself and its marvellous fleetness of foot.
The tibialis posticus (Plate XLV. fig. 1, ¢ib. post) is a very slender
muscle in Geococcyz, but closely resembles the same muscle as I have
found it in all other birds which I have examined for their myology.
My reasons for terming it the ¢idialis posticus are fully given in my
MSS. and will appear in due time. It seems to be one of the peronei
of the senior Edwards.
As in a number of the Passeres, we find it here to arise from the
antero-lateral aspect of the shaft of the fibula below the tubercle for
the insertion of the biceps flewor cruris, from the interosseous
membrane between the leg-bones, from the contiguous surface of
the shaft of the tibia, and, finally, from the fascia separating it from
the deep flexors of the leg. The fibres pass directly down the outer
side of the tibia as a long, slender, fusiform muscle. At the lower
fourth of the shaft of this bone they terminate in a small tendon,
which, passing in front of the external malleolus, crosses the ankle-
joint to become inserted into the supero-external rim of the summit
of the tarso-metatarsus.
The flewor perforatus indicis secundus pedis (Plate XLIV. fig. 2,
J p,) is even a better developed muscle than I found it to be among
typical Corvidee, some of which I have recently dissected, and it is
fully as well individualized.
It arises from the fascia at the outer side of the knee-joint, and
from the contiguous surface of the external condyle of the femur.
Here it receives the anastomosing fibres of the extremity of the
tendon of the ambiens.
The muscle is fusiform in shape and accurately moulded on the
flexor it covers at its side. Its tendon in descending the leg is
thin and ribbon-like. At the ankle it passes through the tibial
cartilage, and crossing the joint goes through, with the second tier
of tendons, the cartilaginous cap on the back of the hypotarsus of
the tarso-metatarsus. Passing down behind this latter bone, and
Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1886, No. XXXII. 32
482 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Noyv. 16,
through the annular ligament in the sole of the foot, it proceeds to
the underside of the second toe, beneath the second phalanx of
which it expands to form a tubular sheath for the passage of the
deep flexor, while at the same time it becomes attached to the side
of this joint of the toe in question.
The carneous portion of this muscle in the leg is to the outer side
of the loop for the biceps flewor cruris, and, owing to the fact that
it varies in form and size in different birds, it is as well to bear this
in mind.
The flexor perforatus medius secundus pedis (Plate XLIV. fig. 2,
F.p,), a8 in all of the birds I have examined, is one of the best
developed perforated tendons at the back of the leg. Its fascia of
origin merges with the enveloping fascia about the knee-joint, while it
also arises by a strong tendon, common to it and the flewor perforatus
indicis secundus pedis, from the external aspect of the outer condyle
of the femur.
Finally, it is attached more or less by carneous fibres down the
shafts of the leg-bones to a point below their middle, or rather the
middle of the leg. Below this the muscle terminates in a strong
tendon, which, taking an oblique course through the tibial cartilage,
passes as usual over the ankle-joint, through the hypotarsus, and
down the back of the tarso-metatarsus.
In the foot it perforates the more superficial flexor of the basal
phalanx of the outermost of the two anterior toes, then the turn
bifureates over the prebasal joint to allow the deep flexor to pass
through, these bifurcations becoming the insertions of this muscle,
and they are attached to the sides of the shaft of the second joint of
the toe alluded to, or the external one of the two in front.
The flewor perforatus annularis primus pedis (Plate XLIV. fig. 2,
J-p.@) in this bird seems to have acquired a more central position
on the back of the leg than in many others that I have dissected,
and, moreover, its tendon, as will be seen from the figure, is quite
superficial.
It arises from between the condyles of the femur by a slight
semitendinous slip, and from the side of the flexor longus hallucis.
The muscle itself is somewhat of a fusiform outline and rather flat ;
it lies to the inner side of the loop for the biceps. About one third
the way down the back of the leg it terminates in a small though
very long tendon, which, passing quite superficially through the tibial
cartilage and over the ankle-joint and hypotarsus, runs in common with
the other flexors down the back of the tarso-metatarsus, turns to the
rear in the sole of the foot to become inserted on the underside of
the distal end of the basal phalanx of the reversed digit. In the
specimen before me this insertion is to the outer side of the deep
flexor, and the tendon is not slit for its passage. Nothing could be
more engaging than the examination of these reversed tendons in
the sole of the foot of this Ground-Cuckoo, for the greatest nicety
in accommodation has been accomplished as they have gradually
come to assume their present position. No doubt some of the
departures observed from the more common arrangement of them
are due to the reversion of the digit in question.
Strong, fibrous bands are so disposed in this plantar region as to
1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 483
admirably hold the several groups of flexor tendons in place, and at
the same time they act as pulleys for their guidance and afford
correct application of the force intended to flex the toes.
The flexor longus hallucis (Plate XLIV. figs. 2, fil; Plate
XLV. figs. 1, 2, £1.) has two separate heads, the one coming off
from the outer side of the external condyle of the femur, and the
other, far more fleshy, arising from the posterior aspect of the same
bone between the condyles. Above this muscle is overlapped by
the more superficial flexors, while in turn it has beneath it the
flexor perforans digitorum profundus. About halfway down the
leg it gives way to a strong tendon, which, passing deep in the
tibial cartilage, crosses the ankle-joint to pass through the outer
canal of the osseous portion of the hypotarsus of the tarso-metatarsus.
Down the back of the shaft of this latter bone the tendon exhibits a
disposition to develop an osseous rod in its continuity, but this does
not actually occur in my specimen. It lies in this region just above
the tendon of the deep flexor, and, immediately above the sole,
makes a fibrous connection with it of some extent, This fibrous
“vinculum”’ is in no way oblique as it is described by Garrod for
many birds, but passes directly from one tendon to the other for
about 8 millimetres, and were it not known that it as a rule passes
obliquely from the flewor longus hallucis, it would be quite impossible
here to designate which tendon was responsible for the connection.
In the foot the long tendon of the Aad/ux passes in the usual way
to become inserted on the tubercle at the underside of the proximal
end of the ungual phalanx,
As its name indicates, our next muscle, the flexor perforatus
indicis primus pedis (Plate XLV. fig. 1, f,), has its tendon attached
to the nether side of the basal phalanx of the index digit, and
consequently aids in bending that toe.
Above, as a flat, long muscle, it comes off by a thin tendon from
the external surface of the outer femoral condyle, arising with the
flewor perforatus medius secundus pedis.
We also have in Geococcyx an unusually large flexor perforatus
medius primus pedis (Plate XLIV. fig. 2, f,), which here arises by
two slips, an outer tendinous one, from the external condyle of the
femur, which has a common origin with other muscles there arising
and is intimately connected with the dense fascia about the front of
the knee-joint ; while the second slip arises from between the femoral
condyles, in common with other flexorsthat come off from that point.
The two heads are quite independent, but merge with each other
before they terminate in their common tendon at the lower third of
the tibial shaft.
It passes through the tibial cartilage, overlaid by, but in close
company with, the far more diminutive and narrower tendon of the
flexor perforatus annularis primus pedis.
When it arrives under the basal phalanx of the median toe, the
outer one of the anterior pair, it bifureates to allow the other two
flexor tendons to pass, while the slips thus formed become attached
to the sides of the shaft of this joint close to its distal head.
32*
484 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16,
It will at once be seen that Geococcyx. californianus, in common
with the vast majority of birds, has no special tendon devoted to the
flexing of the second or prebasal phalanx of the fourth toe (here the
reversed one). Provision is made for this in various ways in different
birds. Here, in the subject before us, a special slip is thrown off
for attachment from the deep flexor tendon as it passes over the
prebasal joint in question, which slip virtually fulfils the function
of a flexor perforatus annularis secundus pedis, did such a muscle
with an independent tendon exist.
The flexor perforans digitorum profundus (Plate XLV. fig. 2,
S-p-p). This muscle is deep to all the flexors, and is situated directly
on the posterior aspect of the tibia and fibula. It arises by two
heads, one from the upper part of the tibia immediately below the
overhanging rim of its summit, and the other, smaller, from the back
of the head of the fibula. In the Corvide there is a well-developed
third head, which comes off from above the fibular notch of the outer
condyle of the femur, and in these birds, too, there is no fibular head
to this muscle, but two tibial ones instead. Geococcyx agrees
however, with most birds in having this muscle attached nearly the
whole length of the posterior aspect of the shaft of the tibia by lightly
attached carneous fibres.
About a centimetre about the tibial cartilage it terminates in a
strong subcompressed tendon, which, passing beneath the cartilage
referred to, crosses the ankle-joint in front of all the other flexor
tendons, and then passes through the inner of the two longitudinal
perforations of the hypotarsal apophysis of the tarso-metatarsus.
Down the posterior aspect of the shaft of this bone the tendon still
maintains its anterior position and exhibits a predisposition to
ossify. But this does not actually take place in the specimen before
me. Above the distal trochlee, it makes the fibrous connection
with the tendon of the flexor longus hallucis already described.
This band is shown in the figure. Once within the limits of the post-
trochlear space, the tendon of this muscle behaves in a manner
common to most birds—that is, it quadrifureates, and each branch
takes a course close up to the joints on their plantar aspects, and
running through the slits in the perforated tendons pass in each
case to the ends of the toes, where they become attached or in-
serted upon the infero-proximal tubercles of the unequal phalanges.
The one passing along under the fourth digit sends up a slip which
is attached to the underside of the shaft of the prebasal joint, thus
making good the deficiency here of what is represented in the other
toes by an independent tendon.
The tibial head of this muscle at its origin is directly covered by
the soleus, while in the aperture existing between the two heads we
can discern the popliteus.
These flexor muscles, and others on both the front and rear of
this limb, are moulded upon each other in a manner that can only be
justly appreciated by a personal examination. In some the con-
nections are quite feeble, the intervening tissue being easily separable,
while in others the intimacy is very close, and great care is
1886.] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 485
demanded on the part of the investigator to see that the separation
is made along the proper divisions.
I am convinced from my studies that a greater difference is to be
found among the various muscles of birds than we have ever ac-
credited them with, and this fact leads me to believe that the day
will come when these differences can be called into play in taxon-
omy with excellent effect. Perhaps if the myology of the leg is
examined as carefully as Prof. Garrod examined the muscles of the
thigh in this class, fully as many interesting and valuable distinctions
will come to light.
The popliteus (Plate XLV. fig. 2, popl) is quite well developed in
Geococcyz, where it is seen to arise from an oblique line on the back
of the tibial shaft below the head of the bone, and the fibres
converging to pass upwards and outwards are inserted by a short
tendon into the corresponding aspect of the head of the fibular, close
to the superior fibres of insertion of the flexor perforans digitorum
profundus. When engaged upon my dissections of the Corvide,
recently I ascertained that this muscle was absent at least in the
American forms of the group. This was also the case with the two
peculiar muscles next to be described.
The flezor brevis hallucis (Plate XLV. fig. 2, 7.6.2) is an exceed-
ingly interesting little muscle, and one that it has not been my good
fortune to have seen in birds before, as I have just said, nor can I find
at band any description of it for this class by any previous anatomist.
It arises from the side and the lower margin of the inner aspect
of the hypotarsus of the tarso-metatarsus, and from some of the
shaft of this bone immediately below. The fibres converge to
terminate in a small tendon, which, passing down the postero-inter-
nal aspect of the shaft, goes to the inner side of the basal joint of
the hallux, about which it winds to finally become inserted on its
underside, at the proximal extremity of this joint, just a little beyond
its articulation with the tarso-metatarsal trochlea.
Thus it will be seen that this little muscle is entirely devoted to
assist in flexing the hallux. Its mesial fibres meet those of the
muscle next to be described, down the mid-longitudinal line of the
shaft of the bone which gives it origin.
Equally engaging with the last is another still smaller muscle,
the ewtensor brevis annularis (Plate XLV. fig. 2, #.6), on the
opposite side of the same bone. Here we find its origin is much the
same as for the flexor brevis hallucis, coming off from the external
aspect of the hypotarsus and the shaft below. It soon terminates in
an extremely delicate little tendon, which, passing directly down to
the fourth or reversed toe, becomes inserted on the supero-inner
aspect of the basal phalanx of this digit.
By its contraction it will act as a direct extensor of this toe, a
requirement no doubt made necessary through the feeble manner in
which this digit is now served by the slip which goes to it from the
common extensor of these phalanges.
This tendon of the short extensor gets its leverage by the fascia
which circularly binds down all the tendons of the flexors and
486 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16,
extensors, just above the sole on the one side, and which passes
above the distal trochlez on the other.
As we pass the muscles we have described for this limb in review,
it will at once be recognized that the list is unusually complete.
All the ordinary muscles of the thigh are present as found in birds,
and all highly developed. In the leg marked specialization and
organization are everywhere evident, while exceptional muscles are
here, too, fully represented.
This complexity by no means diminishes as we proceed towards
the foot, for the arrangement of the tendons as they course down
the tarso-metatarsus and the special musculature of this division of
the limb is manifestly indicative of high organization.
Finally, we have the complex insertional extremities of the intri-
cate system above laid before us in the foot ; and the most exquisite
examples of adaptation, compactness, and final requirements are to
be seen throughout the structure on every hand.
Notes on the Arterial System.
Fortunately the evisceration that had been performed upon my
specimen before it came into my hands has not injured the heart and
great vessels. So by a careful dissection I am enabled to state that
there are two carotids in Geococcyx californianus, and that their
arrangement and the method of their branching at the base of the
heart is normal. In other words, the bird in this respect is to be
included with the Aves bicarotidine normales, as defined by Garrod.
I would remark, however, that the carotids come off from the
imnominates at points considerably further removed from the heart
than that anatomist depicts them in his diagram of this condition.
The branching is the same, however, and no doubt Mr. Garrod’s
figures were intended to illustrate this point above all others, to
which end they serve an excellent purpose.
Turning to the arterial system in the pelvic limb, I find that the
main artery of the leg is the sciatic. This agrees with the vast
majority of birds, and, so far as I am aware, it is only in Centropus
phasianus among the Cuculide that the rare condition of the
femoral artery being the main one obtains.
Of the Bursa Fabricii.
As I said at the beginning of this memoir, Forbes has already
called our attention to the peculiarity of form of this structure in
the young of Geococcyx affinis (P.Z.S8. 1877, p. 312), and says
that it completely disappears in the adult. I can verify this state-
ment so far as the specimen before me is concerned, for in it this
bursa is not present, while the region otherwise is characterized as
we find it in the adults of the Centropodine.
The Trachea. (Plate XLIII. figs. 3 and 4.)
For the entire length of this subcylindrical tube, the osseous rings
which compose it fail to meet in the longitudinal median line
posteriorly.
1886.] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 487
The interval thus formed, which is not very great, is occupied by
a thin membrane which is continuous with the internal tympaniform
membrane of the lower larynx. As to shape, the trachea diminishes
in calibre gradually from above downwards, and nowhere in its con-
tinuity does it present any enlargements or dilatations.
This does not apply exactly to the bronchial bifurcations, for each
one of them shows a disposition to swell just before arriving at the
contracted parts of these tubes, where they impinge upon the lung-
tissue.
We may reckon either of these bifurcations as being partially sur-
rounded by 13 semirings. Of course in this bird, as I say, the
entire trachea may be regarded as having only semirings, but had
the usual number of these united behind, there would still have
remained the 13 semirings to each bronchial tube. An osseous
pessulus is not present in Geococcyx, and the internal tympaniform
membrane is quite extensive. There does not even seem to be any
thickening of this membrane in our subject where this bony little
bridge is located in those birds where it exists.
As to its myology, the lower larynx is exceedingly simple in
arrangement and meagrely supplied. Viewing the inferior part of the
trachea and the bronchial tubes from in front, we can see but one
pair of muscles, and these are the delicate sterno-tracheales. They
are attached on either side to the last five tracheal rings (fig. 3,
Plate XLIII.) ; the insertion seemingly consisting of two slips, the
inferior one being attached to the lowermost of the five rings.
These muscular slips soon merge with each other; and the muscle
itself stretches across in the usual manner, for attachment to the
inner surface of the costal process of the sternum.
From a near view we discover another pair of muscles ; these are
the tracheo-laterales (fig. 4, Plate XLIII.). They here extend the
whole length of the tracheal tube, on its postero-lateral aspect, rather
than fairly on its sides, as in the majority of birds. On either side they
are carried down clear to the last bronchial semiring for attachment,
a. e. not reckoning the aforesaid few semideveloped rings which we
find at the terminal extremities of these bronchial bifurcations.
This position of the tracheo-lateralis muscle is just the reverse of
what Garrod found in such a bird as Opisthocomus (Scientif. Mem.,
p- 466, fig. 1) ; for, according to this authority, these muscles may be
seen in the Hoatzin on an anterior view, and, moreover, in it they
pass down in front of the sterno-trachealis.
Garrod made many excellent examinations of the thoracic extremity
of the trachea in the Gallinz, and among the representatives of this
group an extraordinary variety of forms of this part of the bird’s
economy was discovered (P. Z.S. 1879, p. 354). As the paper I
refer to is profusely illustrated by drawings of the g!linaceous
trachea, I have been enabled to compare them with the corresponding
parts as I found them to exist in Geocoecyx. But of all the types
given, I fail to find a single one that in any way resembles the
subject before us.
This is the less to be looked for, however, when we come to
488 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16,
consider how greatly the Gallinee differ among themselves in this
part of their structure. So whatever affinities Geococcyw may have
with this group, it is not evident in the form assumed by its trachea
nor in the musculature of the lower larynx.
Of the Tongue.
My memoir upon the skeleton of this bird contains an illustration
of the hyoid arches as they are found in it (Journ. of Anat., Jan.
1886, pl. viii. fig. 8), and here it will be of interest to show the
form of the tongue itself.
It will be seen from the figure of this organ (Plate XLIII. fig. 1)
that its tip is rounded, and that its anterior moiety is ensheathed in
a horny theea of a jet-black colour; the posterior half, however, is
soft and fleshy, with its lateral margins fringed with delicate fleshy
spines of a pure white colour and directed backwards.
From above downwards it is somewhat compressed, while its form
as a whole is that of an isosceles triangle the base of which is rather
less than one third of a side, and which exhibits a deep angular
notch.
The lateral margins of the superior larynx are smooth and sharp,
while its hinder edge supports a spine-like fringe, very similar to
the one found on the borders of the posterior moiety of the tongue.
Immediately back of this we observe the large and capacious
entrance to the gullet, a feature which I have also included in my
illustration of the parts under consideration.
The delicate, backward-extending limbs of the hyoidean apparatus
curve up but very slightly behind the cranium in this Ground-
Cuckoo.
Of the Ossiculum lacrymo-palatinum.
Careful search was made for this ossicle in my specimen of
Geococcyx, both orbits being included in the examination, but I am
confident that no such bone is found in it. This bonelet was first
described by Brandt, and is best seen in certain Albatrosses, and I
have elsewhere described its location and appearance in Diomedea
brachyura.
According to Forbes, ‘it also occurs in forms so different from
these as the Musophagide, many Cuculide, Chunga and Cariama,
as well as in some Laridz and Alcide, so that its presence is obviously
of no particular taxonomic value” (Coll. Mem. p. 415).
It was this account of its occurrence in certain Cuculide that
incited me to search for it in our present subject, but, as I have said,
it does not possess it.
In birds where it exists it is represented, when thoroughly
ossified, by a delicate styliform bar connecting the descending limb
of the lacrymal bone with the upper surface of the palatine.
Conclusions.
By the aid of the researches of Garrod and Forbes into the
1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 489
structure of the Cuculidz and allied forms, together with the facts
brought to light in the present article, we can arrange in a tabular
form a number of the anatomical similarities and differences existing
among Geococcyx californianus and the groups with which it is
more or less nearly related; so that we may gain some idea as to
its probable position in the system, at least as correctly as our present
knowledge of its morphology seems to indicate.
The group {S| slsls ce i Tendo
n 5 : wi 43 ch pal
or types & $ % B g 8 zg 4 : Oil of tensor
Erey |r ey ot Wa & 2 ro} : os gland. .* .
compared, alS|slElg 2 = x 3 patagii brevis,
<q | |< 0 |< <) Ono &e,
Geococcyx cali-|+-\|+|+}+|/+) — 2 norm. | Oval. ?| Not tufted.) Differs from
fornianus. Cuculus,
Cuculide ...... +}+]+/+]+) peculiar. 2 Triang. |+] Not tufted.) Lacks the
humeral slip.
Opisthocomus |+\+|+|-+|+ ? 2 Triang. |+] Tufted.
Galline ......... yl] +I+ ae 2 Triang. |+| Tufted.
Corvide......... SS ee ee ne ae \ Oval. |-++-| Not tufted.
As [ have already said, in the opinion of the American Ornithologists’
Union, so far as it is expressed in their published Code and Check-
List, the genera Geococcyx and Coccyzus are contained in the one and
same subfamily Coccyeinm. Now a careful examination of the
structure of the subject of this memoir undoubtedly demonstrates,
beyond cavil, that its anatomical characters are essentially very
different from the corresponding ones as we find them in the true
Cuckoos. Taking into consideration the weight which we are
obliged to attach to important morphological differences in Aves, I
can only remark here that these differences are certainly super-
generic; in other words, they clearly point to the correctness of
Garrod’s suggestions, who proposed that the Cuculide should form
two SuBFAMILIEs, the Centropodine and the Cuculine—the first
to contain the Ground-Cuckoos, and the latter the true Cuckoos.
The studies of the structure of the forms in question demonstrate
that this change in classification is a sound one and should be
adopted.
The classification of the family of North-American Cuckoos would
then be :—
Family CUCULIDA.
Subfamily CroropHaGin2. (Anis.)
Genus CROTOPHAGA.
Species: OC. ani.
C. sulcirostris.
490 DR. SHUFELDT ON GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. [Nov. 16,
Subfamily Centropopinz. (Ground-Cuckoos.)
Genus Grococcyx.
Species: G. californianus.
Subfamily Cucutinaz. (True Cuckoos.)
Genus Coccyzus.
Species: C. minor.
C. americanus.
C. erythrophthalmus.
It is hardly necessary to add, from what we know of the osteology
of these subfamilies, that this classification will be strongly supported
by a comparison of that part of the anatomy of the several forms.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Puatre XLII.
Fig. 1. Pterylosis of Geococcyx californianus, ventral aspect.
2. » : a dorsal aspect.
Prats XLII.
Fig. 1. Tongue, upper larynx, and entrance to esophagus of Geococcyx cali-
fornianus, seen from above. (Life-size, and drawn by the author
from the specimen.)
2. Mode of insertion of patagial muscles.
3. Lower larynx, dorsal aspect.
4. Lower larynx, ventral aspect.
Prats XLIV.
Lettering of this and following Plate.
glpr, gluteus primus; gl.m, gluteus medius; g/min, gluteus minimus; St,
semitendinosus; a.s.t, accessory semitendinosus; Cr, crureus; V.£,
vastus externus; v.2, vastus internus; 2, biceps flexor cruris; /, ten-
dinous loop of biceps; amb, ambiens; Sm, semimembranosus; S, sar-
torius; @./, adductor longus; a.m, adductor magnus; fic, femoro-
caudal; afc, accessory femoro-caudal; o0.c, obturator externus; 0.i,
obturator internus ; ge, gemellus; p./, peroneus longus; 7id.anz, tibialis
anticus ; 7¢zb.post, tibialis posticus; g, gastrocnemius; so, soleus; popl,
popliteus ; ¢./.d, extensor longus digitorum ; fp,, flexor perforatus indicis
secundus pedis; f-po, flexor perforatus medius secundus pedis; f,, flexor
perforatus indicis primus pedis; f,, flexor perforatus medius primus
pedis ; /.2.A, flexor longus hallucis; (0.2, flexor brevis hallucis; f:p.a,
flexor perforatus annularis primus pedis ; f-p.p, flexor perforans digitorum
profundus; #0, extensor brevis annularis; e¢.b.d, extensor brevis
digitorum.
Fig. 1. The outer aspect of the right pelvic limb of Geococcyx californianus ;
the integuments have been removed, and the drawing is designed
to show the superficial muscles of the part. Life size, by the author
from his own dissections.
2. Outer view of the right pelvic limb of Geococeyx californianus, the
superficial muscles removed and the next layer being exposed.
Life size, by the author from his own dissections. The limb is drawn
in a different position from what it is in fig. 1, which will account
a the shortening of some of the muscles and their change of
orm,
eyuey SANVINGOITTVI XAIV00079 30 AWOLWNY
a TNS fp
Hanhart imp
SCYX CALIFORNIANUS.
OCO(
OF GE
hr
een “SONVINYOAITVD XAD900039 dO AWOLYNY
4A gS“
‘asod':
750 GAs
-
t
\
ae ‘
1
—
'
4
i 2
=
e
>)
‘ nde
wo
\ _-
a
dunt qrequey “SANVINYOATTVI XADI00039 40 ANOLYNY
SI tise c
1886. | MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. 491
Prats XLY.
Fig. 1. Outer aspect of the right pelvic limb of Geococeyx californianus showing
the third layer of deep muscles, with a dissecting-chain pulling
the ambiens into view. Life size, by the author from his own dis-
sections.
2. Outer aspect of pelvis and right pelvic limb of Geococcyx californianus.
Designed to show the deep muscles of the region, and the bones
have been slightly rotated from their normal positions in order to
bring them into view. «a. Vinculum between deep flexor and flexor
longus hallucis. Drawn by the author from his own dissections.
3. Description of three Species of Scelidotherium.
By R. Lyprexxer, B.A., F.G.S., F.Z.8., &e.
[Received September 20, 1886.]
(Plates XLVI.-XLIX.)
In the ‘ Zoology of the Voyage of the Beagle,’ published in
1840, Prof. Sir Richard Owen founded the genus Scelidotherium on
the evidence of a considerable portion of the skeleton of a large
megatherioid Edentate found by Darwin in the Pleistocene of Bahia
Blanca, in Patagonia, and applied the specific name of Jepto-
cephalum. In the following year and in 1842, Lund published in
the volumes of the Copenhagen Academy descriptions and figures
of more or less imperfect remains of various allied animals from the
Brazilian caves, all of which were eventually referred either to
Owen’s genus or to the new genus Platyonyx, no less than seven
new specific names being applied to these specimens. In 1850
the late Prof. P. Gervais published, in the results of Castelnau’s
Voyage (‘ Mammiféres fossiles de Amérique méridionale’), a de-
scription and figure of a skull from Buenos Ayres which he referred
to the type species of Scelidotherium, and also of a second one from
Tarija in Bolivia, which he did not name specifically but thought
might be anew species. In 1857 Sir Richard Owen published a
second memoir in the ‘Philosophical Transactions,’ in which he
described and figured two skulls brought over in 1854 by Bravard
from the Pleistocene of the Argentine Republic, both of which he
referred to the type species. An important notice of the group
was contributed by Dr. H. Burmeister, of Buenos Ayres, in his
‘Description Physique de la République Argentine’ ' (1879), where
he described a skeleton which he likewise referred to the type
species, and also gave reasons for adopting Lund’s genus Platyonyx
for some of the allied forms. In 1880 Messrs. H. Gervais and
Ameghino, in a memoir published under the title of ‘ Mammiféres
fossiles de ’Amérique méridionale,’ gave a synopsis of all the
previously named species of Scelidotherium and Platyonyx, and
applied the new specific name of S. tarijense to the above-mentioned
skull from Bolivia, figured by P. Gervais; and also founded a second
* Vol. i. part iii, pp. 322-345, pl. xiv. There is no copy of the Atlas in any
of the London libraries,
492 MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. [Nov. 16,
new species, for which they proposed the name of S. capellini, on the
evidence of a lower jaw from the Pleistocene of Buenos Ayres. In
1881 Dr. Burmeister published in the Monatsb. k. preuss. Ak. Wiss.
(pp. 374-380) a description with figures of the manus, pes, and
knee-joint of a skeleton of Scelidotherium from the Pleistocene of
the Argentine Republic, which was referred to S. leptocephalum.
In 1885 Dr. Fischer’ described a skeleton lately acquired by the
Paris Museum of Natural History, which he refers to S. leptoce-
phalum ; while in 1886 Sefior Ameghino* has applied the new name
of Scelidotherium? bellulum to a single tooth from Parana. Finally
it may be observed that the so-called Scelidotherium ankilosopum,
Bravard’, is the same as Mylodon (Grypotherium) darwini, Owen.
Other memoirs of minor import, which need not be quoted here, have
also been published.
It will be seen from the above that no less than eleven specific
names have been applied to animals of this group ; six of which are
included by Messrs. Gervais and Ameghino, in the memoir cited, in
Scelidotherium, while four are referred to Platyonyx, the eleventh
being of later date. Among the seven included under the former
genus, there is no difficulty in regard to accepting the typical S. lep-
tocephalum and S. tarijense ; S. capellini, however, as being founded
on a specimen which has not yet been figured, must be regarded
merely as a nominal species ; while S. minutum, Lund, is apparently
founded upon immature specimens, and S. dellulum upon a single
unfigured tooth. With regard to S. buchklandi and S. oweni of
Lund, the type specimens are so imperfect that they do not appear
to me to afford characters of sufficient importance to enable other
specimens to be identified with them; and I have therefore been
compelled to ignore these names when considering the affinities
of the specimens described below. Of the four so-called species
ranged by Messrs. Gervais and Ameghino under Platyonyz, the only
one that can be regarded as satisfactory is P. brongniarti, which is
founded on a nearly complete skull. P. euvieri is founded on a
fragment of a mandible which does not afford more satisfactory
characters than the one on which S. buchlandi is founded; while
P. blainvillei and P. agassizi have been named on still more
unsatisfactory evidence, and must certainly therefore be regarded as
not of more than nominal value.
The object of the present communication is, first, to show that
one of the specimens figured by Sir Richard Owen in the memoir
in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions,’ already cited, does not belong
to S. leptocephalum, which also leads to the conclusion that the
specimen described by Dr. Burmeister in his second memoir under
the same name is likewise distinct ; and, secondly, to describe a skull
belonging to a series of specimens, from the Pleistocene of Chili,
recently acquired by the British Museum. In the course of this
paper it will be shown that there appears no reason for the retention
1 Comptes Rendus, vol. ci. p. 1291 (1885).
2 Bol. Ac, Nac. Cordoba, vol. ix. p. 184 (1886).
3 In P. Gervais’s ‘Zool. et Pal. Générales,’ sér. i. p. 1382 (1867-69).
1886. ] MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. 493
of the so-called genus Platyonyx, which is either founded on a
misidentification, or on characters which cannot be regarded as of
more than specific value.
With these few words of introduction, the descriptive portion of
the memoir may be commenced.
SCELIDOTHERIUM LEPTOCEPHALU M, Owen.
The type species is represented in English collections by the
imperfect type skeleton from Patagonia preserved in the Museum of
the Royal College of Surgeons, and by two imperfect skeletons
collected by Bravard in the Argentine Republic and preserved in
the British Museum. The skull from the latter country, figured by
P. Gervais in the ‘Mammiféres fossiles de Amérique méridionale ’
(Castelnau’s Voyage), pl. xi. fig. 1, apparently also belongs to this
species.
eThe type cranium is considerably damaged, but the two British-
Museum erania (Nos. 37308 and 32995), taken together, exhibit
nearly all the important features ; the second of these specimens is
figured from the lateral aspect by Sir R. Owen in the ‘ Philosophical
Transactions’ for 1857, pl. viil. fig. 1. In Plate XLVI. of the
present memoir I have figured the former specimen, the occiput being
restored from No. 32995. In the figured specimen the greater
portion of the nasals is preserved, and its more important characters
are as follows :—
The facial profile is strongly curved, and presents a well-marked
frontal protuberance behind the orbit ; the cranium is of moderate
width, and the nasals of great relative length, being when complete
at least equal to one half the total length of the frontal aspect of the
cranium. In correlation with the elongated nasals the facial portion
of the maxilla is lengthened, and a large portion of it appears on the
frontal aspect. The lachrymal is not very promineut, and the
aperture of its canal looks directly outwards. The anterior border
of the zygomatic process of the maxilla is inclined backwards ; the
fronto-parietal ridges are widely separated, and the interdental portion
of the palate is not excessively narrow.
The mandible associated with the figured cranium has an elongated
symphysis, the portion in advance of the teeth being nearly twice
the length of the whole dental series, and the superior border of the
anterior portion of the ramus nearly straight.
The more important measurements of the figured skull are as
follows :—
Length of broken nasals ............ 0°270
Length of facial part of maxilla ...... 0°170
Width of the two occipital condyles.... 0°108
Length from condyle to last tooth .... "242
Length of dental series; . ..06. 000.00 0113
Length of mandibular symphysis .... 0°156
Interval between hinder border of sym-
physis and last tooth.. ........... 0°350
Interval between do, and first tooth.... 0°050
494 MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. [ Nov. 16,
The only other part of the skeleton to which I wish to call
attention is the astragalus, and I have accordingly figured the type
specimen in Plate XLIX. fig. 3. It will be seen from this figure that
the external trochlear ridge for articulation with the tibia is not
prominent, and scarcely projects above the level of the internal
tuberosity. The astragalus (B.M. No. 37476) associated with the
cranium No. 37308 exhibits precisely similar features, although it
is of somewhat larger dimensions. This type of astragalus is very
widely different from that of Megatherium (in which the external
trochlear ridge is extremely prominent), and apparently indicates
that the eversion of the foot was not so great as in that genus.
ScELIDOTHERIUM BRAVARDI, 0. Sp.
This species is founded on an imperfect skeleton in the British
Museum, brought by Bravard from the Argentine Republic, which
presents features clearly showing that it cannot belong to the type
species, to which it has hitherto been referred. The cranium (B.M.
No. 37626), which lacks the whole of the dentition and the greater
portion of the nasals, has been figured by Sir R. Owen in the ‘ Philo-
sophical Transactions’ for 1857, pl. viii. fig. 2, from the palatal
aspect *, and referred to the type species ; an upper view is given in
Plate XLVII. of the present memoir. It is extremely unfortunate
that the nasals are wanting ; but from the structure of the adjacent
bones it can be shown that these bones were certainly much shorter
than in S. leptocephalum, since in the first place the superior border
of the facial portion of the maxilla forms a much shorter curve than
in the latter, while if the nasals were of the same length as in that
species they would have projected far in advance of the premaxille.
That the nasals were of a shorter type is also evident from a com-
parison of the figure with that of S. chiliense (Plate XLVIII.), when
it will be seen that the facial portion of the maxilla is not dissimilar
in the two species. The whole cranium is, moreover, relatively
narrower than in S. leptocephalum, and the frontal profile is quite
straight ; while only a narrow moiety of the facial portion of the
maxilla appears on the frontal aspect ; and the lachrymal is charac-
terized by its extreme prominence, and the partially upward direction
of the aperture of its canal. The anterior border of the zygomatic
process of the maxilla is nearly vertical, while the fronto-parietal
ridges are closely approximated, and the interdental portion of the
palate (as is well shown in Sir R. Owen’s figure) is of excessive
narrowness. It will also be seen from the following table of dimen-
sions that while the width of the occipital condyles is smaller than
in S. leptocephalum, the interval between the condyles and the last
tooth is considerably greater, which indicates a great difference in
the relative proportions of the two crania. The premaxille are well
developed.
In the mandible * associated with the cranium, while the length of
1 The teeth have been introduced on one side in this figure.
2 This specimen is figured by Owen, op. eit. pl. viii. figs. 4, 5, with the teeth
restored ; and apparently in pl. ix. figs. 2, 3, the specimen represented in fig. 2
being erroneously described as belonging to the upper jaw.
1886. ] MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. 495
the symphysis is greater than in S. leptocephalum, the interval
between the hinder border of the symphysis and the first tooth is
very considerably less. The superior border of that portion of the
mandible in advance of the teeth is moreover inclined strongly
upwards.
The following dimensions may be compared with those of S.
leptocephalum :—
Length of facial part of maxilla (about) ....-.--- 0°135
Width of the two occipital condyles .........+.. 0°095
Length from condyle to last tooth...........+.- 0°258
Length of upper dental series ........-..++--: 0°105
Length of mandibular symphysis ............+: 0°175
Interval between hinder border of symphysis and
BENNER, Fe wade BST bios io ryel har ney g SEE PHE DS 0°350
Interval between do. and first tooth ...........- 0°032
I will now direct attention to the astragalus. Unfortunately the
one specimen of this bone, associated with the cranium, is imperfect,
although sufficient remains to show that it differs from the corre-
sponding bone of the type species by the great prominence of the
external trochlear ridge, which projects far above the level of the
internal tuberosity. In Plate XLIX. fig. 4, there is represented an
astragalus from a cavern in Brazil, which, although of larger size
than Bravard’s specimen, agrees precisely in structure, and either
belongs to a male of the present form or to an allied species ; and I
think a comparison of this figure with that of the astragalus of
8. leptocephalum will leave no doubt as to the specific distinctness
of the two forms. This astragalus agrees precisely with the corre-
sponding bone of a hind foot belonging to a perfect skeleton figured
by Dr. Burmeister in the Monatsb. k. preuss. Ak. Wiss. for 1881,
plate facing p. 380, fig. 2, and referred (on the authority of Sir R.
Owen’s figure of the cranium of the present form) to a large male
of S. leptocephalum. A tibia from Brazil, associated with the
figured astragalus, presents a structure of its distal surface modified
to accord with this peculiar articulation, which is different from that
of the tibia of S. leptocephalum ; and there are equally well-marked
differences in some of the other bones of the present form to which
I shall allude on another occasion.
Whether or no the larger bones mentioned above belong to male
individuals of the same species as the cranium, I think sufficient
evidence has been adduced to show that both the form to which
the latter and that to which the former belonged are specifically
distinct from S. leptocephalum.
Confining, however, attention to Bravard’s specimen, it is quite
evident that this form is distinct both from S. tarijense (in which
the mandible is of quite a different type) and S. (Platyonyx) brong-
niarti (in which the nasals are very short and the premaxille
aborted) ; and since it appears impossible to identify it with either
of the ill-defined Brazilian forms mentioned above to which specific
names have been assigned, I propose that it should be known as
496 MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. __[Nov. 16,
S. bravardi. Should, however, any of my fellow workers be able to
identify it with either of such forms, I shall be only too happy
to relegate this name to the rank of a synonym.
The structure of the astragalus of S. bravardi (as Dr. Burmeister
remarks in his description of the larger form which I provisionally
associate) approximates very strongly to that of Megatherium,
although wanting the articular cup for the navicular ; and it is there-
fore probable that the hind foot of this species was more everted
than in S. leptocephalum. ‘The shorter nasals of the present species
also diverge less widely from the Megatherium type than do those of
the last-named species, and this character is still more developed in
the following form.
ScELIDOTHERIUM CHILIENSE, Nl. Sp.
The form to which I propose to apply the above name is repre-
sented by a series of specimens purchased during the present year
by the British Museum, from a gentleman residing at Lima, which
were obtained from the Pleistocene of Tamarugal, in the district of
Tarapaca in Chili’. The specimens comprise three more or less
imperfect crania, the anterior portion of a mandible, and a consider-
able number of vertebree and limb-bones. All that I have to say in
regard to the limb-bones is, that the astragalus is intermediate in
structure between that of S. leptocephalum and that of S. bravardi,
and that the humerus has a well-defined entepicondylar foramen.
The least imperfect of the three crania is represented in Plate
XLVIII., and shows nearly the whole of the nasals. The most
striking feature of this cranium is the extreme shortness and breadth
of the latter bones—their length not exceeding one third of the total
length of the cranium—while the mandibular symphysis is also
equally short, as will be seen by the following measurements. That
this form is totally distinct from S. leptocephalum is self-evident. It
appears more nearly allied to S. dravardi, with which it agrees in the
prominence of the lachrymal, the narrowness of that portion of the
maxilla appearing on the frontal aspect, the straight facial profile,
and the narrowness of the interdental portion of the palate; but
differs by its greater width, by the still shorter facial portion, by the
probable abortion (as will be shown below) of the premaxille, and
by the shorter anterior portion and symphysis of the mandible.
The mandible is quite unlike that of S. tarijense*, in which the
symphysial part is bent upwards very suddenly, nearly the whole of
it being above the level of the dental alveoli. The nasals of that
species are also much longer than those of the present form.
With the skull of the so-called Platyonyx brongniarti from Brazil,
figured by Lund in the K. Danske Vid. Selsk. Skr. vol. ix. pl.
XXvill., the present specimens agree very closely in general characters ;
but in addition to being of superior size, the cranium is relatively
narrower, and lacks the marked expansion behind the nasals, while
1 See map, supra, p. 396.
* T refer to this species a left mandibular ramus from Brazil in the British
Museum (No. 18649 a),
1886. ] MR, R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM, 497
the nasals themselves are more pointed posteriorly and wider
anteriorly, the width of the anterior expansion being greater than
that at the frontal expansion, while the reverse condition obtains in
S. brongniarti. The resemblance between the two crania is, how-
ever, sufficiently close to render it probable that the two forms were
closely allied, and that the premaxille of the present form were
cing aborted. The dimensions of the present form are as
ollows :—
Length of the facial portion of maxilla.......... 0°122
Width of the two occipital condyles ............ 0-099
Length from condyles to last tooth ............ 0'238
Length of upper dental series.................. 0:093
Length of mandibular symphysis .............. 0°124
Interval between hinder border of symphysis and
BISCLUOGH, , o'er runes Sh eee ee 0°012
Since the present form is decidedly distinct from all the species
mentioned above, and since I cannot identify it with either of the
other ill-defined forms referred to Scelidotherium and Platyonyx,I can
only adopt the course followed in the case of the preceding species ;
and I accordingly propose to designate this form as Scelidotherium
chiliense, since I shall immediately show that the genus Platyonyex
ought to be merged.in Scelidotherium.
Platyonyz is stated by Lund (and his view is followed by Dr.
Burmeister’) to be distinguished from Scelidotherium by the absence
of an entepicondylar foramen to the humerus, and by the more
flattened phalangeals; while, according to Messrs. H. Gervais and
Ameghino’*, the crochet of the last lower tooth is more prominent.
Sir R. Owen*, who unites the two genera, is of opinion that the
limb-bones referred by Lund to Platyonyx really belong to Glyptodon.
I have no means of deciding which of these two views is correct ;
but the close general resemblance in the structure of the nasals of
Scelidotherium chiliense to those of the so-called Platyonyx brong-
niarti leads me to conclude that whether the humerus of the latter
was, or was not, provided with an entepicondylar foramen, the species
is not entitled to generic distinction from Scelidotherium, the
alleged differences in the structure of the phalangeals and of the last
lower tooth being characters which are certainly not more than
specific ones.
Taking the three species, S. leptocephalum, 8. bravardi, and S.
chiliense together, it will be seen that they form a sequence as
here placed in regard to the length of the nasals—S. chiliense
(together with S. drongniarti) being the least, and S. leptocephalum
the most removed from the type of cranium obtaining in Mega-
therium.
Affinities of the Genus.
In conclusion, I may observe that Scelidotherium appears to be a
* Monatsb. k. preuss. Ak. Wiss, 1881, pp. 374-380.
* ‘Mammiféres fossiles de l’ Amérique méridionale,’ p. 151 (1880).
* Memoir on the Mylodon, p. 170, note.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXXIII. 33
498 MR. R. LYPEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. _ [Nov. 16,
genus occupying in some respects an intermediate position between
Megatherium and Mylodon, but also showing evidence of a still
more widely extended affinity. The dentition is decidedly nearest
to that of Mylodon, while the hind foot approximates to that of
Megatherium. The crania of species like S. chiliense and S.
bravardi are those least removed from the Megatherium type, and
it is these species which come nearest to that genus in the structure
of the astragalus. All those forms in which the pes is known
exhibit the anchylosis of the first and second phalangeals of the third
digit, and the large claw of the same, which are such characteristic
features of the type genus of the family. The peculiar Mylodon
darwini (generically separated by Reinhardt under the name of
Grypotherium) is the form by which Scelidotherium is connected by
cranial characters with Mylodon ; and the connection is so close that
it becomes somewhat difficult to give a clear differential diagnosis.
In its extremely elongated facial region and peculiar astragalus, S.
leptocephalum is the species departing most widely from the Mega-
therium type, and it is probable, from the structure of the last-named
bone, that in this animal the pes was not everted as it is in Mega-
therium. In both its peculiar features S. leptocephalum makes such
a very marked approach to the J/yrmecophagide, that it is quite
easy to imagine how that family may have taken origin from some
member of the Megatheriide ; while the remarkable resemblance in
dental characters existing between those members of the genus
Mylodon which have been separated by some writers under the
names of Pseudolestodon and Lestodon and the Bradypodide
suggests that the modern arboreai Sloths may also originally have
sprung from some early member of the same great family of Ground-
Sloths.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Puate XLVI.
Scelidotherium leptocephalum, Owen. Frontal aspect of the cranium; from the
Argentine Republic. British Museum, No. 37308. The occiput has been
restored from another specimen. 4. Ja, lachrymal; za, nasal; mz,
maxilla.
Pruate XLYII.
Scelidotherium bravardi, Lydekker. Frontal aspect of the imperfect cranium ;
from the Argentine Republic. British Museum, No. 37626. 4. Letters as
in Plate XLVI.
Prater XLVILII.
Scelidotherium chiliense, Lydekker. Frontal aspect of the cranium, British
Museum, No. M. 2819. 4. Letters as in Plate XLVI.
Puatze XLIX, ©
Fig. 1. Scelidotherium bravardi, Lydekker, The mandible associated with the
cranium figured in Plate XLVII. British Museum, No. 37649. 3.
2. Scelidotherium chiliense, Lydekker. The anterior part of the mandible;
from Chili. British Museum. No. M. 2821. 3.
3. Scelidotherium leptocephalum, Owen. The left astragalus; from Pata-
gonia. Mus. Roy. Coll. Surgeons, No. 3520. 4. a, external trochlear
ridge for tibia ; 4, internal tuberosity.
4. (?) Scelidotherium bravardi, Lydekker. The left astragalus; from
Brazil. British Museum, No. 186204, 43. Letters as in fig. 3.
Fi iit
© dio, WOOO. FL ALY
La
v3. Smib ith. Hanhart imp.
SCELIDOTHERIUM LEPTOCEPHALUM.
is
. Ra 4229
: ) f he
: — Ve Sea's
= oan |
——- - > 14
<
. '
: ~
\ v
wl
1m
art
int
|
J. Smit lith
P.Z.S. 1886.P1. XLVI.
Hanhart imp
SCELIDOTHERIUM CHILIENSE
l
2
3
4
»)
‘od
NN
SCELIDOTHERIUM BRAVARDI
CHILIENSE .
LEPTOCEPHALUM.
BRAVARDI
Hanhart ump
a2
1886.] | ON TWO EUROPEAN SPECIES OF BOMBINATOR. 499
4. On two European Species of Bombinator.
By G. A. Boutencnr, F.Z.8.
[Received September 28, 1886. ]
(Plate L.)
Two distinct forms of Bombinator occur in Germany. The fact
has been known to me for many years, having, when a boy, been
struck by the very different appearance of specimens obtained by me
at Dresden as compared with the familiar form from Belgium and the
Rhine. But it was only during a recent journey to Germany that I
was enabled, by examining a larger material, to form a decisive
opinion that the two forms are entitled to rank as species.
German authors, so far as can be gathered from their publications,
have never seized upon the distinction, although individual variations
have caused a var. brevipes (Blasius), Koch, to be established.
Possibly Fitzinger was the first to separate the two forms correctly
by distinguishing a Bombinator pachypus, from the mountains of
Italy, from the true B. igneus of Laurenti. However, perhaps
through misrepresentation of Fitzinger’s views, nothing but confu-
sion was added by Bonaparte, who, as is well known, introduced
that author’s MS. name into nomenclature’. The result of my
search into the synonymy of Bombinator is that Linnzus’s name
Rana bombina and Laurenti’s Bufo igneus apply respectively to the
two species now under consideration. ‘The words of Linnzeus (Faun.
Suec. 2nd ed. p. 101, 1761), ‘* abdomine luteo nigro maculato,” and
those of Laurenti (Syn. Rept. p. 29, 1768) “infra albido-cerulescens,
punctatus maculis lete miniatis,” seem to settle the point ; and if, as
I have reason to believe, the paler-bellied Frog occurs in Sweden and
the brighter one in Austria, “‘ in paludibus Danubialibus,”’ it is settled
- beyond doubt. Although Résel, as pree-Linnean and polynomialist,
has no claim in matters of nomenclature, it is well to say that his,
the first scientific, account of Bombinator refers to the form which I now
name B. bombinus. It must also be added that B. pachypus and
B. brevipes are undoubtedly to be regarded as synonyms of B. bom-
binus, and that the sacrum and coccyx figured by Gené (Syn. Rept.
Sard.) as that of B. igneus, and which has lately been the subject of
some discussion, is clearly that of a Pelobates.
I may now pass on to the distinctive characters of the two species.
1. Bomprnator Bomsinus, L. (Plate L. fig. 1.)
Habit stouter, snout rather shorter, digits thicker, warts stronger
and more crowded than in B. igneus. The length of the leg or
crus equals or exceeds the distance between the inner metatarsal
tubercle and the extremity of the fourth toe. Male with black
nuptial exerescences under the second and third toes, sometimes also
_ | Bonaparte’s figure was evidently not executed from life, and therefore no
importance is to be attached to the coloration attributed to his B. pachypus,
a
500 ON TWO EUROPEAN SPECIES OF BOMBINATOR. [Nov. 16,
under the fourth ; without gular pouches, the submaxillary (mylo-
hyoid) muscle being undivided. Upper surfaces without or with
very indistinct dark spots. Young with a pair of roundish light
spots or a light transverse band between the shoulders and another
on the middle of the body; these spots often more or less easily
distinguishable in the adult. Lower surfaces varying from sulphur-
yellow to orange, with irregular blackish or bluish-grey spots or
marblings ; the yellow colour usually predominates, and the blackish
markings may even be entirely absent. Tips of fingers and toes
yellow. Young very pale yellow inferiorly, with bluish-grey spots.
Hab. I have myself collected this species in Belgium, where it is
very abundant in the province of Namur, and occurs also near
Tournay and Liége, in France near Bordeaux, in Rhenish Prussia,
and in the Tyrol near Salzburg, where it is found in great abun-
dance. 1 have at present before me living specimens from near
Frankfort on the Main, kindly given to me by Dr. Boettger. Mr.
W. Wolterstorff writes to me from Halle that this species is, in
Germany, restricted to more hilly districts; he obtained it at
‘Tiefenort, near Kisenach, near Weismain and Muggendorf, between
Bamberg and Baireuth, and round the Starberger See, near Munich.
I have examined spirit-specimens from the following localities :—
Hanover (Brit. Mus.), Goslar, Harz (Brit. and Berlin Mus.), Geneva
(Brussels Mus.), Hungary (Brussels Mus.), Brostenii, Moldavia
(Brussels Mus.), and Dalmatia (Brussels Mus.). For several speci-
meus from San Romedio, S. Tyrol, and Marcellise, prov. Verona,
I am indebted to the kindness of M. de Betta, and for two from
Florence to Prof. Giglioli.
2. Bomprinator 1GneEvs, Laur. (Plate L. fig. 2.)
The length of the leg is less than the distance between the inner
metatarsal tubercle and the extremity of the fourth toe. No nuptial
excrescences on the toes. In the male, the submaxillary muscle is
divided into an anterior and a posterior portion, with a pouch on
each side between the two ; this vocal pouch does not communicate
with the mouth through any opening, but the skin of the floor of
the mouth is loose and plicate, aud capable of distention during the
inflation of the sides of the throat. Greyish or olive above, with
distinct symmetrical blackish or bottle-green spots ; sometimes the
whole or part of the upper surfaces washed with green; usually a
pair of pale green roundish spots between the shoulders. Lower
surfaces bluish black with white dots and briglit orange or vermilion
insular spots ; tips of fingers and toes black. Young coloured like
the adult.
Hab. This species is common near Berlin, whence I obtained
numerous specimens during a recent stay in that city. I also got it
at Dresden, and I received some years ago specimens from Brostenii,
Moldavia, together with B. dombinus ; these specimens are in the
Brussels Museum, where I have recently compared them with the
Berlin examples. Dr. Boettger received it from near Bitterfeld.
Mr. Wolterstorff, who was so kind as to send me specimens from
25 IS
Nei LUT
jeam
ao)
1886. ] ON THE ANATOMY OF THE TROCHILI, ETC. 501
Magdeburg, informs me that it is only found in the plain and never
occurs in company with B. bombinus, which, however, may inhabit
the same districts, but only at a certain altitude, as is, for instance,
the case in Thuringia.
Dimensions.
B. bombinus. B. igneus,
SS SS
aoe. fe ae
millim, millim. millim, millim,
From snout to vent.. 46 46 46 42
ead eer as ee et 14 14 13
Width of head...... 15 15 15 11
Hore: limb!,..........-« 23 20 21 20
Eimaimb! ...... a0. 8o 51 52 48
hibias. Sec ete LG i) 14 13
Foot, from inner meta-
tarsal tubercle .... 15 14 16 15*5
EXPLANATION OF PLATE L.
Fig. 1. Bombinator bombinus.
igneus.
a. Adult female, upper view.
6, Adult female, lower view.
e. Young, upper view.
d. Young, lower view.
e. Breeding male, lower view of foot.
f. Breeding male, musculature of the throat.
5. Additional Notes upon the Anatomy of the Trochili, Capri-
mulgi, and Cypselide. By R. W. Suurstpt, M.D. &e.
[Received July 9, 1886.]
To the meeting of this Society on December 1, 1885 *, I com-
municated a paper on the “ Comparative Osteology of the Trochilidz,
Caprimulgide, and Cypselidze,” wherein I ventured to bring forward
certain anatomical facts in support of Professor Huxley’s expressed
opinions upon the probable relations of the Humming-birds, Swallows,
Swifts, and Nightjars (P. Z.S. 1867, p. 415).
Although it does not in any way alter the general comparisons I
made in my first contribution to this subject, nor my conclusions,
et I find an unfortunate error has crept into the drawings of one
of the Plates in the paper in question (plate lIxi. fig. 3). How
this happened it would be impossible for me to say at the present
time, but the humerus of Zrochilus alexandri in this figure is the
right one, and not the left as stated in the text. It is quite possible
that the extraordinary position of the pneumatic foramen in this
bone, taken in connection with its diminutive size, or confusing the
pair after the skeleton had been disarticulated for the purpose of
studying the details, may have had something to do with the mistake,
1 See P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 886.
502 DR. R. W.SHUFELDT ON THE ANATOMY OF THE [Nov. 16,
Fig. 2. Fig. A. rs Fig. 6 x
Fig. 1. Anconal aspect of left humerus of Tuchycineta thalassina. X 3.
Fig. 2. Palmar aspect of the bone shown in fig. 1. x 3.
Fig. 3. Anconal aspect of the left humerus of Micropus melanoleucus. X 4.
(This was the Panyptila saxatilis of my first paper, but I have now
adopted the nomenclature of the A. O. U. for this White-throated
Rock-Swift.)
Fig, 4. Palmar aspect of the bone shown in fig. 3. x 4.
Fig. 5. Anconal aspect of the left humerus of Trochilus alexandri. x 8.
Fig. 6. Palmar aspect of the bone shown in fig. 5. x 8.
By “anconal” I mean that side of the bone which is next to the body of the
bird, and the reverse of this is the ‘‘palmar” aspect. All these figures are
drawn from:the specimens by the author, and p.f. calls attention to the
pneumatic fo sa.
1886. | TROCHILI, CAPRIMULGI, AND CYPSELIDE. 503
Be this as it may, the oversight has been kindly pointed out to me
by Mr. F. A. Lucas, the osteologist of the United States National
Museum, and it devolves upon me to set the matter right.
The only changes it demands in the text of my article is, that on
p- 908, in describing the humerus of T’rochilus, the sentence reading
“but the radial crest is represented by a strong and gracefully
curved hook”’ should state, instead of the “radial crest,” the udaar
tuberosity. Again, in the description of this figure on p. 915, it
should say the vight humerus instead of the left; and here as else-
where in the paper take into consideration the changes that result
therefrom.
Nowas a correct comparison of these bones is of such high import-
ance, and as I fully intend to carry my comparisons of the structure
of these groups still further, I have redrawn, increasing in size and
presenting two views, the humeri of the forms under discussion, and
offer these drawings here as illustrations to the present article.
From an examination of figures 1 and 2, it must be evident, to any
one familiar with the ordinary form of the avian humerus, that in
the Swallow the bone departs to some extent from the more common
Shape it wears among the Passeres. The principal departure,
however, consists in a marked shortening of the shaft, and perhaps
a comparatively more conspicuous radial crest. The bone is likewise
non-pneumatic. This also we find to be the case in the Swift, where,
too, the radial crest is drawn out into an upturned hook, and the
ulnar tuberosity is simply drawn out further and consequently more
hook-like.
Now turning to the Humming-bird (figs. 5 and 6), we find a
humerus that, so far as my knowledge extends, has not its counter-
part among living birds. In the first place, the extraordinary position
of its pneumatic fossa, being on the radial side of the bone, is an
exception to every general definition of a bird’s humerus that the
writer has ever met with. Of the peculiar method of insertion of
the pectoralis major muscle in this bird I shall have something to
say in a future contribution. As will be seen from the figures,
the ulnar tuberosity is a prominent decurved process, and one of the
most striking features of this curiously twisted bone. It would be
superfluous on my part to point out in the figures the manifest
differences existing between the humerus of this Hummer and the
Swift; they are even greater than I thought them to be, before I
made the oversight above quoted. In addition to its general form,
the humerus is highly pneumatic in Zrochilus, which, as I have said,
is not the case among the Cypselide, these latter agreeing with the
Swallows in this particular in having non-pneumatie humeri.
504 ON ANTELOPES FROM SOMALI-LAND. [Nov. 16,
6. On two Species of Antelopes from Somali-Land. By P.
L. Scuater, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the
Society.
[Received September 20, 1886.]
(Plate LI.)
In Mr. E. Lort Phillips’s ‘‘ Notes on the Antelopes of Somali-Land”
(P. Z.S. 1885, p. 930) is mentioned a Gazelle under the name of
“ Flabby-nosed Gazelle,” the single specimen of which, in deter-
mining Mr. Lort Phillips’s species, I reserved for future examination.
I was in hopes of being able to have the bones removed from the
head of the single specimen obtained, in order to ascertain whether
there is not some peculiarity in the frontal and nasal bones to
accompany the extraordinary developinent of the nose in this
animal. Not having been able to obtain the necessary facilities for
this purpose (which, seeing that the specimen is unique and has
been excellently mounted, was not much to be wondered at), I will
content myself with again exhibiting the head of this remarkable
Antelope (Plate LI.), and remarking that I think there can be
no question of its belonging to an undescribed species, which I
propose to call Gazella naso. Gazella naso, as its name implies, is
sufficiently distinguishable from all other known members of the
genus by having the extremity of the snout above the nasal openings
developed into a large flabby wrinkled mass, which is scantily covered
by short hairs of a grey colour. Above this elevated mass the face
is crossed by a broad black bar. Above that again the centre of
the forehead and space between the horns is covered by dense fur of
a chestnut-red colour. This chestnut-red forehead is bordered on
each side by two broad white longitudinal stripes, which extend from
the base of the horns down to the nostrils. This longitudinal
stripe is again bordered above the eye on the inside to below the eye
on the outside by an indistinct blackish stripe. The tear-pits below
the eye seem to be particularly large and well developed. The rest
of the fur of the head and neck is of the sandy colour usual in most
species of this genus. The ears, which are long and rather narrow,
are of a greyish colour. In the size and shape of its horns G. naso
does not differ materially from other species of the group allied to
G. dorcas. The length of the horns in the present specimen, from
the base to the tip, is about 93 inches; the breadth of the skull
between the eyes is 1*7 inch; the length from the occiput to the end
of the nose about 8 inches; the length of the ear is 6 inches.
As regards the Neotragus, of which specimens were obtained by
Mr. Phillips and were likewise left undetermined in the same com-
munication (see P. Z.S. 1885, p. 932), I have now compared the
skull and the skin brought by Mr. Phillips with specimens in the
British Museum. As regards the skin there is such variation in
the coloration of the fur of Neotragus that I do not think much
reliance can be placed on the somewhat abnormal appearance of this
_ -
1886.] ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE OVUM IN DIPNOI. 505
example, which is nearly paralleled by other specimens in the
National Collection. ‘The skull, however, is characterized by the
excessive reduction of the nasal bones, which is carried to a much
greater extreme than in the typical specimen of Neotragus kirkii,
Giinther (P. Z. S. 1880, p. 20). There are also other points of
difference when the skulls are compared together.
But as Neotragus kirkii is from nearly the same country, I think
it would be hardly justifiable to name a second Neotragus from
Somali-Land without a better series of materials to base it upon. I
will therefore content myself with calling attention to their diver-
gencies, and, as Mr. Phillips has empowered me so to do, with
depositing his specimens in the British Museum to await further
inquiries.
From the discoveries made by Mr. Hagenbeck’s collector, Herr
Menges’, and Messrs. James and Lort Phillips, it is quite evident
that there is yet much interesting work to be done among the
Mammalia in Somali-Land, and I trust that we shall soon receive
additional specimens and further information concerning this inter-
esting animal.
December 7, 1886.
Prof. Flower, LL.D., V.P.R.S., President, in the Chair.
Prof, Bell exhibited and made some remarks on a specimen of
Tenia fana, the smallest known human parasite, which had lately
been obtained for the Museum of King’s College.
The following papers were read :—
1. Observations on the Development and Structure of the
Ovum in the Dipnoi. By Frank H. Bepparp, M.A.,
F.R.S.E., Prosector to the Society, and Lecturer on
Biology at Guy’s Hospital.
[Received December 3, 1886.]
(Plates LII.—LIV.)
The present paper is the continuation of a research into the
structure of the ovary in Protopterus, the main results of which have
already appeared in the last number of the ‘ Proceedings.’ Besides
being able to give a more complete account of the ovarian ova in Pro-
topterus, I am also able to supplement this account with some few
notes respecting the structures to be observed in the ovary of Cera-
todus. ‘The opportunity of studying Ceratodus 1 owe to the kindness
of Prof. Lankester and Prof. G. B. Howes. ‘The material was taken
* Cf. Sclater, P. Z. 8. 1884, p. 538; Noack, Zool. Gart. xxvi. p. 172 et xxvii,
p- 39; Kohl, Ann. d. k. k, naturhist. Hofmuseums, i. p. 75 (1886).
ow}
506 MR. F. E, BEDDARD ON THE DEVELOPMENT AND [Dee. 7,
from fishes which had been preserved entire in alcohol, and was
unfortunately not in a very first-rate condition for microscopical
investigation. I have been able, however, to make out the
important fact that there is an essential similarity in the structure
of the ovarian ova in both forms, and that in Ceratodus, as in
Protopterus, there are, besides the ova, certain other structures
resembling ova in many particulars which have a different mode
of development. The discovery of this fact in Ceratodus renders it
practically impossible to suppose that the remarkable processes in
the development of the germinal cells of Protopterus, described and
figured by myself in this and my last paper, are in any way abnor-
mal; it had occurred to me before that there might be something
abnormal.
It cost me a great deal of labour, in the way of cutting sections,
to ascertain that there was an actual resemblance between Ceratodus
and Protopterus. In my specimen of Protopterus I found it quite
impossible to make a section of the ovary anywhere without dis-
covering ova of both kinds in nearly equal abundance ; in Ceratodus,
on the other hand (and this statement applies to two specimens), ova
of the second kind were extremely rare; I have cut literally hundreds
of sections without coming across any evidence of the existence of two
kinds of ova. This may be a real difference between the two genera,
or may depend upon the season of the year at which the specimens
were captured. In every case, however, the ovaries contained
numerous mature ova, though the number of these latter was very
much less than that of the immature ova.
On the other hand, it is possible that there is really a difference in
this respect between Protopterus and Ceratodus, which show other
important anatomical differences.
I have already contributed to the ‘Zoologischer Anzeiger’ (No. 236)
a brief note of the principal facts contained in this paper.
I have but little to add to my former paper on the structure of
the ordinary ova of Protopterus.
In my last paper I drew attention to the curious specialization of
the yolk in the adult ova; in fig. 4 of plate xxviii. of that paper is
illustrated an adult ovum which shows a differentiation of the yolk
into two distinct layers, which are less distinguishable by their
coloration or arrangement of yolk-particles than by the very definite
break which separates them. ‘he outer layer of yolk forms a com-
paratively thin envelope, the greater portion of the ovum being
occupied by the central mass of yolk.
Van Bambeke’ has recently noted and figured a similar condition
of the ripe ovum in Godius niger and other fishes, and Pfliiger had
previously referred to the same phenomenon in Mammalia. Ac-
cording to Van Bambeke, the distinction between the two zones
occasionally disappears under the influence of reagents. Van Bam-
beke speaks of the line of division which separates the two zones as
not being a membrane, but merely a condensation of the egg-
protoplasm. With this opinion I fully agree: in the first place, the
1 Arch. d. Biol. t. iv. (1885).
1886. ] STRUCTURE OF THE OVUM IN THE DIPNOI. 507
division of the ovum itself into two zones by a definite membrane
would seem to be an absurdity; in the second place, no membrane
was evident in preparations where the ovum was broken. It might be
expected that when the ovum was broken in cutting, the membrane,
being presumably of a different hardness to the egg-protoplasm,
would project from the cut surface ; in no instance, however, did the
broken surface show any indication anywhere of a membrane.
The line of division between the two yolk-zones presented the
appearance in my preparations of an absolute break ; the protoplasm
was perfectly transparent, and, being unaffected by the staining-
reagent, was invisible.
I did not notice this differentiation of the yolk in all the large ova
visible in my sections. In some ova, which were full of yolk, and of
equal size with those just referred to, there was no trace of any such
specialization into a peripheral and central zone; in these cases the
yolk was uniform throughout. Such ova were to be found not only
in the same ovary, but in the same section with the ova which dis-
played a differentiation of the yolk. This circumstance renders it
improbable that the effect of reagents has caused the yolk to acquire
a uniform appearance.
A comparison of the two kinds of ova has led me to the conclusion
that the ova in which there is a specialization of the yolk are nearly
mature, while those in which the yolk is uniform are degenerating ova.
Another matter relates to the structure of ege-membranes and
their homologies, where I have to make a correction.
In my former paper I have referred to the presence in compara-
tively young ova of a vertically striate membrane lying within the
vitelline membrane (loc. cit. p. 273, pl. xxviii. fig. 1, 2.7; pl. xxix.
fig. 2, 2.7). This, it now appears to me, is not the equivalent of the
inner of the two membranes which surround the Teleostean ovum’.
The early disappearance of this membrane and its general structure
granular and with no distinct line of separation from the subjacent
egg-protoplasm) were against such an interpretation ; I now identify
it with more confidence with a specialized layer of the egg-protoplasm
described by Brock in Alburnus lucidus, Salmo fario, and Perca
fluviatilis, and by Owsiannikow in Acerina vulgaris. Brock has
figured this layer (the ‘‘ Zonoidschicht”’ of His, the “helle Rand-
schicht”’ of Gegenbaur) in Alburnus lucidus (Morph. Jahrb. Band iv.
pl. xxviii. fig. 12, fg.), where it is more complicated than in Lepido-
siren and consists of two layers—an inner homogeneous and an outer
vertically striate layer.
ConTENTS OF THE OvARyY OF PROTOPTERUS.
The following is a detailed account of the structure and develop-
ment of certain bodies in the ovary which have already been partly
described in my former paper; they are nearly as numerous as the
ordinary ova.
1 Of.J. T. Cunningham, “ On the Mode of Attachment of the Ovum of Osmerus
perlanus,” P.Z.S. 1886, pt. iii. p. 292, pl. xxx. fig. 4, z.7.i, and other memoirs.
508 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE DEVELOPMENT AND [Dec. 7,
Stage 1.—The earliest stage of these bodies is represented in
fig. 1; its different constituents are figured, highly magnified, in
figs. 5, 14—20.
The whole structure is situated near to the surface of the ovary,
with which indeed it is still in continuity ; the germinal epithelium
(ge), which is apparently not everywhere present as an external layer
in the adult ovary, is here conspicuous by its presence; it forms a
mass of cells, the nuclei of which are so large and so closely pressed
together that I have found it impossible to detect any cell-outlines
(see fig. 1). These thickly clustered groups of epithelial cells seem to
correspond to the “epithelial islands ” of many writers (see Iwakawa,
G.J.M.S. 1882, p. 266). The nuclei of these cells are deeply stained
by borax carmine, and for the most part rounded or oval in contour,
though frequently (perhaps owing to the hardening-reagent) some-
what angular. The staining-fluid is not evenly taken up by the
whole nucleus, but a peripheral layer, sometimes confined to one pole
of the nucleus, is very deeply stained, the central regions being compa-
ratively pale.
The germinal epithelium is immediately continuous with a mass
of cells which form a hollow sphere, partly occupied by a plug of
cells of a somewhat different appearance ; the spherical mass of cells
is quite close to the surface and connected with the germinal
epithelium by a very short neck, which is as wide as the area occupied
by the patch of germinal epithelium.
The peripheral mass of cells is already differentiated into two
distinct layers, which are distinguishable from each other by the
characters of the component cells and more particularly of their
nuclei.
The outermost layer is of course the one that is in contact with
the germinal epithelium ; the outlines of its cells are not very visible
in my preparations: between the nuclei of the cells is a fibrous
substance moderately stained by borax carmine; this appears to
me to be the slightly altered protoplasm of the germinal cells
themselves, and not to be an inroad of connective-tissue stroma-cells.
The germinal cells bear, however, a very striking resemblance to
connective-tissue cells.
Balfour has figured (Q. J. M.S. 1878, pl. xvii. fig. 10) and described
(p. 390) a condition of the Elasmobranch ovary which is so far very
similar to that which I have just described, and which gives me
greater confidence in stating that the cells displayed in fig. 1, fé, of
Plate LII. are really germinal and not stroma-cells.
He says (p. 391) :—‘*The surface of the ovarian region .. . is
covered by a distinct ... pseado-epithelium ... The cells of the
pseudo-epithelium have one peculiarity very unlike that of ordinary
epithelial cells. Their inner extremities are prolonged into fibrous
processes which enter the subjacent tissue, and, bending nearly
parallel to the surface of the ovary, assist in forming the tunic
spoken of above. This peculiarity of the pseudo-epithelial cells
seems to indicate that they do not essentially differ from cells which
have the character of undoubted connective-tissue cells, and renders
1886. ] STRUCTURE OF THE OVUM IN THE DIPNOI. 509
it possible that the greater part of the tunic, which has apparently
the structure of ordinary connective tissue, is in reality derived from
the original germinal epithelium, a view which tallies with the fact
that in some instances the cells of the tunic appear as if about to
assist in forming the follicular epithelium of some of the developing
ova.”
The nuclei of the peripheral layer of cells are much like those of
the proliferating germinal epithelium, though not quite so darkly
stained—perhaps for mechanical reasons. Their shape varies con-
siderably, some being rounded and some more fusiform; but these
two extremes are united by numerous intermediate conditions. For
the most part the nuclei have taken up the staining-fluid unequally ;
a patch at one extreme of the nucleus is more darkly coloured, and from
this radiate slender threads towards the opposite extreme of the
nucleus ; the interstitial part of the nucleus is stained of a pale pink.
The different forms of these nuclei are represented in fig. 5. The
differential staining of the nucleus undoubtedly corresponds to the
differentiation of its substance ; and the star-like form of the darkly
staining part suggests a connection with the phenomena of nuclear
division ; but I have not observed any cases in which the ceatres of
the star-like bodies in two adjacent nuclei were opposed; in every
instance the darkly stained extremity of the nucleus was directed
away from the germinal epithelium and along the axis of the layer
of cells; this uniformity in the nuclei gives them the appearance of
being in rapid motion, of being as it were swept along by a current
round the periphery of the sphere of cells.
Here and there the continuity of the layer of cells is interrupted
by blood-vessels (4.2), usually of small dimensions, which are the fore-
runners of the richly developed vascular supply of these same bodies
in later stages of development. The appearance of blood-vessels was
more common on that side furthest from the germinal layer than on
that nearest to it.
Towards the opposite extremity of the sphere of cells, ¢. e. that
furthest removed from the outside of the ovary, the character of the
nuclei of the peripheral layer of cells becomes changed. In this
region the nuclei have lost the peculiar arrangement of the nuclear
substance and-present the appearance of ordinary nuclei (fig. 5a) ;
that is to say, they are oval bodies with finely granular contents and
here and there round, darkly stained particles which are disseminated
throughout the nucleus.
Within the peripheral layer of cells is another layer of cells which
becomes ultimately comparable to a follicular epithelium, Even in
this early stage of development it is for the most part distinguishable
from the outer layer of cells; the distinction is not only in the
character of the cells and their nuclei, but in an absolute line of
demarcation which separates the two layers; this consists (fig. 1, x)
of a narrow band of structureless substance, which bears the closest
possible resemblance to a substance produced by the fusion of some
of the central cells of the sphere, and which will be described shortly,
It is possibly formed by a metamorphosis of the peripheral layer of
510 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE DEVELOPMENT AND [ Dec. 7,
the follicular cells, but serves at any rate to determine accurately the
boundary line between the follicular layer proper and the mass of
peripheral cells which ultimately bear a resemblance to the secondary
follicle layer. This limiting band of structureless substance is only
met with on that side of the cell-mass towards the outside of the
ovary ; elsewhere the cells of the follicular epithelium are perfectly
continuous with the cells of the peripheral layer.
The nature of the cells of the follicular layer also differs from that of
the more peripherally placed cells. The cells themselves are rather
larger and irregularly rounded in form ; there is no trace of the con-
nective-tissue-like structure described above, in the case of the extra-
follicular cells. The cell-contents are clear and for the most part
hardly affected by the staining-agent, which has coloured their nuclei
deeply ; the part of the cell-protoplasm that is coloured is tinged very
faintly and shows a reticulate arrangement. The nuclei of the folli-
cular cells differ for the most part from those of the extra-follicular
layer by being rounded and even in shape, and all closely similar in
size; they are deeply stained, and show a tendency to the same
reticulate arrangement of the nuclear substance that has already been
mentioned in the extra-follicular cells.
The character of this follicular layer is much the same through-
out, only differing in places by the more or less crowded condition
of the nuclei, indicating a more or less active multiplication of the
cells. On that side of the cellular mass which is furthest from the
outside of the ovary, the follicular layer comes into closer relations
with the extra-follicular epithelial layer, though still recognizable.
The character of the cells and of the nuclei which make up the extra-
follicular coat of cells alters, and every transitional condition is met
with between these cells and the cells of the follicular epithelium.
This seems to indicate that the follicular layer is formed as a
differentiation of the mass of invaginated germiual cells.
The whole body is thus surrounded by three distinct and inde-
pendent layers—(1) the single layer of large follicular cells; (2) a
vascular layer, to which reference has already been made and which is
extremely developed ; (3) an outermost cellular layer, consisting of
flattened cells with nuclei elongated in the direction of the cireum-
ference of the ovum; this layer, like the follicular layer, is only one
cell thick.
For the most part this outer layer has been neglected by writers,
or else has been confused with the true follicular layer. Balfour,
however, has recognized it in the Elasmobranch ovum* and has
proposed to call it the ‘‘ secondary follicle-layer.’ Owsiannikow
figures this layer in the ovum of the Perch*; in the explanation of
the figure it is called the follicular layer, while the true follicular cells
are termed the “granulosa”’ ; in the text of his paper, however,
the term endothelium is constantly used for this layer, which is
stated to be made up of several rows of cells in many fishes.
Concerning the origin of this layer Balfour expresses with hesitation
1 Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci. vol. xviii. (1878), p. 405, pl. xix. fig. 29, fe’.
2 Mém. Acad. Sci. St. Pétershourg, t. xxxiii. (1885) no. 4, pl. 1. fig. 4, a.
1885. | STRUCTURE OF THE OVUM IN THE DIPNOI. 511
the opinion that it may be derived from the germinal epithelium.
Owsiannikow suggests three possibilities either it originates from
cells which have made their way out of the blood-vessels (!), or from
cells of the subgerminal tissue (stroma ?), or, finally, they may be
derived from the germinal layer. The latter alternative is adopted
by Owsiannikow on certain evidence, which he does not, however,
regard as conclusive. The outermost follicular layer of Lepidosiren
I have already (p. 509) shown without doubt to be derived from
the germinal epithelium; I shall therefore adopt the name of
secondary follicular epithelium for this capsule, which indicates that
its origin is similar to that of the true follicular epithelium, which
may be briefly termed the follicular epithelium.
The two layers that have just been described form a hollow sphere
enclosing a central cavity, which is partly occupied by a mass of
cells. It is very possible that in the fresh condition the central
mass of cells occupies the whole of the space available, but this
is not the case in my preparation. A large portion of the central
cavity, particularly on the side turned towards the exterior of
the ovary, is quite empty, and no structures intervene between
the central mass of cells and the follicular layer. On the opposite
side, however, the central mass is in close contact for a con-
siderable area with the follicular cells, this area exactly corre-
sponding with the transitional area between the follicular and external
layers. These facts would suggest that the central cells are derived
from the proliferation of the follicular cells and ultimately of the
extra-follicular cells, as these two latter have been shown to be
perfectly continuous, the proliferation taking place in a certain
limited area only. In this case the apparent cavity which separates
the central cells from the follicular on one side will be an indication
(exaggerated by the action of the preservative reagent) that there is
here no real connection between the central and peripheral layers,
though they may be in actual contact in the fresh state.
A number of the central cells are displayed in figs. 14—20 of Plate
LIII.; they are more or less irregular in shape, rounded, and of
different sizes; the staining-reagent has hardly affected the cell-
protoplasm, but has deeply stained the nucleus. The cell-protoplasm
is arranged in a reticulate fashion, and closely resembles that of the
follicular cells. Some of the cells contain two or more nuclei, which
seems to show that the cells themselves are in a condition of multi-
plication. The most remarkable fact about the nuclei of the central
plug of cells is their great inequality in size: some of the variations
are exhibited in those figures ; the variation is all the more remarkable
as it does not occur in the follicular layer, the nuclei of whose cells
are of quite a uniform size. There is almost every gradation in size
between the smallest and largest nuclei, a fact which perhaps indicates
that the smaller ones are the result of nuclear division. The largest
nuclei rather excel in size those of the follicular epithelium. There
is a similar difference of size in the peripberal layer of cells,
particularly obvious at those points where the peripheral layer is in
1 Loe, cit. p. 30.
BZ MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE DEVELOPMENT AND [Dec. 7,
contact with the interior mass of cells, the follicular layer being at
such points indistinguishable.
It is possible that the difference of size in the nuclei corresponds
to a distinction between “ primitive ova” and “ germinal cells”? such
as has been described by Semper, Balfour, and so many writers in
other Vertebrata ; in this case the larger nuclei will be the primitive
ova. This suggestion must be of course only regarded as such; I
have no real evidence to offer except the different size of the nuclei.
In very many instances a degeneration of the nuclei could be
observed. This takes place in several ways, some of which may be
stages in the same series. Some of the nuclei (figs. 14,17) remain
of the same size and shape as the normal nuclei, but show a much
paler colour and fewer nucleoli ; in one instance (fig. 15) I observed a
commencing disintegration of the nucleus, the substance of which
appeared to be in a condition of solution at one point where it passed
gradually into the substance of the cell, the limiting membrane of
the nucleus being here invisible. In other cases (figs. 19, 20) the
nuclei are as darkly stained as the normal nuclei or even rather more
so, but instead of presenting a uniform oval contour, the nucleus was
variously contorted and irregular in shape.
The centre of the mass, however, is not entirely occupied by cells
like those that have just been described. There is a certain amount
of an amorphous substance (fig. 1, p), well stained with the borax
carmine, which lies in patches between some of the central cells, and
particularly on the outside, in the space which separates them from
the follicular layer. This substance is of an homogeneous appear-
ance, though lighter in colour in some regions than in others ; it is
rather more abundantly developed in the stage next to be described
than in the present (cf. fig. 9, Plate LIII.). This substance encloses
patches of cells, or sometimes single cells; occasionally the proto-
plasm of the cells has undergone a certain change at the periphery,
where it gradually passes into the homogeneous mass surrounding
it ; frequently scattered nuclei are to be found imbedded in it, and a
comparison of these nuclei with those of the central cells shows
them to be identical. The general appearance of the homogeneous
substance suggests a coagulated fluid, and it is very like the liquor
folliculi of the Mammalian ovum coagulated by alcohol; but this
substance cannot be excreted by the central cells or by the follicular
cells, because it contains numerous traces of them in the shape of
free nuclei with or without a certain amount of partially altered
protoplasm attached. These facts rather indicate that the sub-
stance in question is produced by the alteration and fusion into a
semifluid mass of some of the central cells. This mode of formation
is, however, not opposed to a comparison with the Mammalian
liquor folliculi, which has been asserted by some to have a similar
origin ; the great difference is that this semifluid substance has the
power of forming yolk, as will be seen after the description of the
later stages.
There are other bodies which seem to be referable to the stage just
described, though differing in certain structural particulars as well as
in their smaller size.
1886. ] STRUCTURE OF THE OVUM IN THE DIPNOI. 513
These, like the last, are connected with the germinal epithelium,
covering the outside of the ovary, by a pedicle of epithelial cells,
which is nearly of the same width as the whole structure and its
follicle. The germinal epithelium is in a condition of very active
multiplication, the nuclei being very closely crowded together.
The layers of cells which surround the central mass cannot be
differentiated ; they present the appearance of a mass of cells con-
tinuous with the germinal epithelium and forming a layer of cells
three or four deep ; only here and there (fig. 10, 5/) were traces of the
irruption of the stroma in the shape of small blood-capillaries. The
cells which constitute this peripheral layer are precisely similar in
their character to the cells which form the outermost of the peripheral
layers in Stage I.
In two instances belonging to this stage, which I have been able to
study, the homogeneous darkly-staining mass produced by the
solution and fusion (?) of the protoplasm of the central cells was
much more in amount than in the last described stage. Fig. 11
of Plate LIII. represents the central mass of cells, which are seen to
be divided up into partly or entirely isolated clumps by the formation
of this homogeneous mass, which contains also free nuclei (fig. 11, 2).
In the third case the condition of the central cells, so far as this
fused mass of protoplasmic material is concerned, was much the same
as in Stage I.
On the whole these facts appear to indicate that the bodies belong
to a somewhat earlier stage than those just described and shown in
fig. 1 of Plate LII. Their small size, the undifferentiated condition
of the peripheral layers, as well as the very small amount of stroma
(blood-vessels) between the cells of these layers, appear to me to
point to this conclusion. On the other hand, the greater amount of
change in the central cells, z. e. the inereased amount of the deeply-
staining fluid substance between isolated clumps of cells, is against
such a supposition, as it is evidently a further development of a
process which has only just commenced in the developing structure
which J have last described. This latter reason is perhaps not a very
powerful argument, because it may easily be supposed that the pro-
duction of the semifluid protoplasmic substance may be hastened or
retarded ; the same may be said with regard to the specialization of
the follicular layers, only that a specialization in the instances observe!
by myself goes together with increase of size of the whole body.
Accordingly I am inclined to believe that the bodies displayed in
fig. 9 of Plate LIII. belong to a younger stage than those illustrated
in fig. 1 of Plate LIL.
Stage 11.—The different layers composing the foliicle are more
differentiated, and each individual layer is now quite recognizable,
Commencing from the outside, we have the secondary follicular layer,
between which and the follicular layer proper is a well differentiated
vascular layer, which is easily to be made out through the whole
circumference ; the blood-vessels are filled with blood, and appear
as round, elliptical, or elongated according to the angle of the
section. The follicular layer has the appearance of being only
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXXIV. 34
514 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE DEVELOPMENT AND [ Dec. 7,
one cell thick, but the nuclei of its constituent cells are so crowded
together that it is not easy to be certain upon this point. The-
outlines of the follicular cells are in many places plainly visible, and
irregular processes (Plate LIII. fig. 6) project from these cells toward
the interior of the mass. This may very well be owing to the
shrinking of the central mass of cells, and the consequent breaking
away of its connection with the peripheral epithelium. A comparison
of the complete series of sections through the developing ovum (the
section fig. 6 is towards the middle of the series) shows that,
whether or not there is a connection between the entire periphery of
the central cells and the follicular epithelium, there certainly is such
a connection throughout a limited area lying on that side of the ovum
which is nearest the external surface of the ovary, a little above (or
below) the pedicle which unites the germinal epithelium with the
ovum. In this region the nuclei were more abundant and crowded
together than in the central cells of the mass, and were of uniform
size and rounded form ; in fact they show an exact similarity to the
nuclei of the follicular epithelium, which in this stage, as already
mentioned, forms a distinct layer. The mass of cells which connects
the follicular layer with the central cells is therefore closely similar
to the follicular layer, and has the appearance of a proliferation and
growth inwards of that layer. The central cells, as in the previous
stage, have nuclei of varying size ; some are long and oval, and others
shorter and more spherical ; the latter resemble in every particular
the nuclei of the surrounding follicular layer.
A characteristic feature of this stage is the commencing formation
of yolk, which is visible here and there (figs. 27-31) in the cells of the
central mass, and in the form of droplets of homogeneous appearance
and varying size. ‘This formation of yolk is not confined to the
central cells, but is recognizable also in the cells which make up the
follicular layer.
Here and there among the central cells are homogeneous masses,
evidently the same as those referred to in the description of Stage I.
as a probable resultant of the breaking-down and fusion of certain of
the central cells. These masses were, however, much less developed
than in the earlier stage.
This stage is evidently, from the facts above narrated, in a further
condition of development than that which I have termed Stage I. ;
this is also shown in the gradually-advancing separation of the peri-
pheral layers from the germinal epithelium of the ovary.
In the earlier stage the pedicle which unites the epithelial layers
with the germinal epithelium on the surface of the ovary is not only
very thick, but composed almost entirely of germinal epithelial cells
in a state of active multiplication. The stroma of the ovary had
barely penetrated into this mass of invaginated germinal cells.
In Stage II. the body is just as near to the surface of the ovary,
and there is a shallow depression on the surface of the ovary corre-
sponding in position to the centre of the pedicle of attachment, which
would appear to be the remains of the invagination of the germinal
epithelium. The activity of the germinal epithelium has, however,
1886.] STRUCTURE OF THE OVUM IN THE DIPNOI. 515
greatly diminished ; it forms only a single layer of cells, and the
pedicle which connects the body with it is almost entirely composed
of stroma-ingrowths, which form for the most part a very lax net-
work of fibres and cells, though denser in the middle, and sur-
rounding a slender cord of germinal cells, the sole remnant of the
former epithelial pedicle.
In a somewhat more advanced stage there is an identical structure
with that just described as regards the specialization of the peri-
pheral layers and the mass of central cells; the formation of yolk
has, however, gone on much faster, and the follicular cells, as well as
most of the cells of the central mass, are crammed with variously
sized yolk-spherules.
Here and there, especially in the periphery of the central cells, are
irregularly shaped masses of yolk-spherules (fig. 24, a), among which
are occasionally discernible nuclei like those of the surrounding cells.
A comparison of Plate LIV. fig. 24 with Plate LITT. fig. 11 will show
how very similar in size and extent these irregular patches of yolk
are to the patches of amorphous deeply staining protoplasm in the
earlier stage; and I cannot but think that they are these same
patches of protoplasm produced by the fusion of some of the central
cells which have commenced to form yolk-particles on their own
account.
Other preparations, again, seem to indicate that the fusion of
certain of the central cells either does not take place at all, or takes
place after the formation of the yolk. I have a nearly complete
series of sections through an ovum in which the yolk has already
commenced to be formed; the cells of the follicular epithelium are
full of yolk-particles, as are also the central cells. The latter form
a compact mass of cells containing abundant yolk-particles, but
without any definite patches of yolk lying between the cells, such as
could be compared to the patches of protoplasm formed by a fusion
of cells. In many sections, however, of this series it happened that
the central mass of cells had dropped out, so that I cannot make any
positive statements about the point of discussion raised. This par-
ticular instance showed very plainly indeed the connection of the
mass of central cells with the follicular epithelium ; the area of con-
nection was very limited, as has been already mentioned in other
cases.
The central cells are united with the follicular epithelium by a
bridge of tissue which has every appearance of being an outgrowth
of the latter; the nuclei are round and pressed close together as if
in a condition of active multiplication ; they pass without avy break
into the follicular epithelium, from the cells of which they cannot,
indeed, be distinguished, and gradually on the other side into the
mass of central cells. The cells of the latter have the ordinary
characters that have been already described. I noticed a very large
number of peculiar cells, several of which are illustrated in fig. 4 ;
similar cells are not absent in other cases, but I never have seen
them so numerous as in the present case. These cells are easily
to be distinguished from the germinal cells among which they lie
34*
516 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE DEVELOPMENT AND [Dec. 7,
by their smaller size, by their very deeply stained protoplasm, and
by the fact that they nearly always contain a large number (3-5) of
small nuclei close together. I have not yet succeeded in detecting
these cells in the follicular layers, but I am nevertheless inclined to
think that they are migratory leucocytes. I am at a loss, however,
to account for the almost universal division of their nuclei into four
or five.
The presence of leucocytes in almost all the tissues and glands
of the body is so well known that I need not give any detailed
references ; the presence of these cells is not, however, to be con-
founded with the migration of follicular cells. If, however, the
identification of the follicular epithelium with a layer of immigrated
leucocytes be right, there can be no distiuction between the two pro-
cesses. The observations recorded in this paper, however, plainly
show that in Protopterus at least there can be no possible confusion
between follicular cells and lymphoid corpuscles, which is contra-
dicted by so many other developmental facts. Unless it can be
shown that lymphoid cells may arise from the direct metamorphosis
of germinal epithelial cells it is quite absurd, in the present case at
any rate, to allow any homology between follicular cells and im-
migrated white lymph-corpuscles.
Stege 111.—In this stage (figured diagrammatically in fig. 3, plate
xxviii. of my former paper) the follicular epithelium is undivided
from the ovum by any trace of membrane; the celis of which it is
composed have dwindled down to a single layer ; their diameter bears
a very small proportion to that of the enclosed mass of yolk, which
has enormously increased in size. The cells of the follicular epithe-
lium are still filled with yolk-spherules presenting no differences
from the yolk-spherules which make up the substance of the con-
tained mass. Their nuclei are conspicuous and round in shape. The
follicular cells appear to continue to take a share in the nutrition of
the body from the fact that they are large and well developed, and
that the interstices of the protoplasmic network are largely filled with
yolk-spherules: occasionally (e. y. figs. 7, 8, a) the nuclei of the folli-
cular cells showed signs of degeneration ; this is probably preliminary
to the evacuation of the cell-contents into the interior. Here and
there the follicular cells appeared to be proliferating, the budded-off
cells moving into the interior ; two such instances are shown in figs.
7, 8. It is of course a difficult matter to decide how far the appear-
ances shown in the two figures cited are due to the proliferation and
migration inwards of the follicular cells; they might be explained,
by reference to earlier stages, as central cells which have still re-
mained in contact with the follicular layer, only that they occur on
all sides, and it has already (p. 511) been stated that the central cells
are only in contact with the peripheral for a limited area. On the
other hand, a careful comparison of the example from which fig. &
is taken with another in pretty much the same stage of development,
only younger, as evinced by its smaller size, reveals the important
fact that the larger contains, in any given section, a larger number of
cells in its interior than the smaller. The larger was rather more
1886. ] STRUCTURE OF THE OVUM IN THE DIPNOL. 517
than twice the size of the smaller body selected for comparison ; the
number of cells in the interior was in correspondence with their
difference in size. ‘The larger had an average of 64 cells disseminated
through the yolk in any given section, the smaller 42; hence the
proportion between the two is as 3: 2.
I am inclined to lay all the more stress on the mathematical
statement of the case, as it allows extremely wide limits for possible
errors of computation.
On the hypothesis that none of the cells contained in the yolk
during later stages are derived from the migration inwards of follicu-
lar cells, it is obviously necessary to assume that they are all produced
by the division of the central cells, or by certain of these cells which
have persisted without division. It is true that the nuclei of the
central cells in the earlier stages do multiply, but it is equally certain
that others degenerate and disappear; and it seems to me that more
undergo the latter than the former change; and I find that in the
stage referred to above the smaller body contains considerably fewer
cells in any given transverse section than in Stage I. It would then
be expected that the larger bodies would contain fewer and fewer
cells in their interior. I have, however, just stated that the result
of my calculations’ in this respect has been in the direction of proving
an increased number of cells in the more mature bodies. Now,
assuming that I have made so large an error as 3 of the total
number of cells in the larger, the two would still contain an equal
number of cells disseminated through the yolk. But on the hypo-
thesis there ought to be a very considerably less number of cells in
the larger body. It is clear therefore that this hypothesis cannot
be maintained ; and as there is no ground for assuming any third
origin of the cells, it seems most probable that they have been
largely derived from the proliferation of the follicular layer.
Among those which I have included in this same stage are many
that are probably, owing to their smaller size, younger than others
which are larger. I have not, however, thought it worth while to
separate these into two distinct stages, since they are both charac-
terized by the extraordinary activity of the follicular epithelium, and
by the presence of masses of yolk in the interior of the follicle, in
which are imbedded namercus cells, themselves filled with yolk-
spherules. As a general rule the smaller bodies belonging to this
stage can be distinguished from the larger by the more crowded
follicular celis; these are smaller, placed closer together, and not.
confined to a single layer in the smaller, and therefore less mature,
specimens ; in the larger bodies these cells have increased in size,
the nuclei are not so crowded together, and the cells form but a
single layer. This condition can hardly have been arrived at by the
mere mevhanical growth in size of the whole body, which would tend
to stretch, and therefore to reduce to a single layer of cells, the
follicular epithelium ; the cells themselyes must either have dege-~
nerated, evacuating their contents into the interior, or must have
1 T have also calculated the number of cells contained in the interior of two
other pairs of ova belonging to this stage, and of about the same relative size.
518 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE DEVELOPMENT AND [ Dec. 7°
migrated into the interior ; the principal evidence is in favour of the
latter supposition.
The central mass itself is, as already stated, mainly occupied by a
mass of yolk-spherules; these are deeply stained by the colouring-
reagent. Among the mass of yolk-spherules are numerous cells
which are more scattered in later stages; many of them are in
course of degeneration, as evinced by the characters of the nuclei.
In my former paper I have figured (/oc. cit. pl. xxix. figs. 9-20) a
number of such cells, and need not refer to the matter again here.
In no case could I observe the faintest trace of a germinal vesicle,
nor does any one of the cells found in the interior of the body show
any preponderance in size, or difference of any kind from the rest.
The vascular layer is highly developed in this stage, in accord with
the rapid growth of the follicular cells.
Outside the vascular layer is the secondary follicle-layer, which
has much dwindled in importance, and has a still closer resemblance
to stroma than it had in the earlier stages.
CONTENTS OF THE OvARy OF CERATODUS.
The ovary of Ceratodus, like that of Protopterus, contaius,
besides the ordinary ova which follow a normal course of develop-
ment, other remarkable structures similar to those of Protopterus.
The normal kind of ova, which are by far the most abundant, repre-
sent a single cell, and agree in most details of structure with the ova
of Amphibia and the corresponding ova in Protopterus. The mature
ova are filled with rounded yolk-spherules approximately of equal
size, and entirely unstained by prolonged immersion in borax
carmine ; the periphery of the ovum is occupied by a delicate layer
of egg-protoplasm in which pigment-granules are imbedded ; the
egg is covered by only a single membrane, which is moderately thick
with radial pores; the follicular epithelium is a single layer of
flattened cells, of which the nuclei alone are obvious in my preparations.
Some ova belonging to this stage are figured by Ayers in his
paper. In rather younger ova there is a ball of protoplasm in
the centre surrounding the germinal vesicle, and not yet invaded
by the formation of yolk; the germinal vesicle has a peripheral row
of germinal spots as in Protopterus. The formation of the yolk
appears also to be on the whole very similar to the process described
in Protopterus. Aggregations of yolk-granules make their appear-
ance throughout the ovum, but do not seem to be confined at first
to the peripheral layers. In the younger stages the yolk-particles
are deeply stained by borax carmine, but not in the adult ova.
I have already stated in the remarks introductory to this paper
that, as regards my specimens, Ceratodus differs from Protopterus in
the extreme rarity of those bodies which are apparently formed by a
fusion of a number of distinct cells. So very rare are these structures
that after a diligent search I only succeeded in discovering a single
ease which could be in all probability referred to Stage I. in the
developmental history of Protopterus (see p. 508). Certain other
1886.] | STRUCTURE OF THE OVUM IN THE DIPNOI. 519
problematical structures will be described in this portion of my paper,
although they do not appear to belong to the same series as that
which I shall now describe.
The body (fig. 25) is decidedly smaller than in Protopterus; it
corresponds, however, very nearly to the stage illustrated in fig. 9 of
Plate LIII., and which is fully described on p. 513, where the slight
differences which it presents from other individuals belonging to
Stage I. are pointed out. The correspondence is in structure as
well as in size.
The body is placed at some little distance from the external
surface of the ovary, but is connected with the germinal epithelium
of the surface of the ovary by a slender pedicle of cells; it con-
sists, like the corresponding structure of Protopterus, of a hollow
sphere of cells which enclose a central mass ; the peripheral and
central cells are also more or less independent. The peripheral
layer of cells forms a continuous whole, but a closer examination
shows it to be made up of two layers which are occasionally very
distinctly separable from each other. The outermost layer appears
to have originated from the germinal epithelium; its nuclei are
large, rounded, or oval, and closely pressed together; the cells
themselves, which contain these nuclei, have for the most part a
stroma-like appearance (see p. 508). Within this layer, which is
often several cells thick, is a layer of blood-vessels ensheathed in a
mass of tissue of a fibrous retiform character, the fibres (fig. 25, a)
for the most part forming a layer running parallel with the cireum-
ference of the ovum, with interspersed nuclei; this tissue, from its
general appearance and from its intimate connection with the blood-
cavities (fig. 25, 41), is probably derived, like the blood-vessels, from
ingrowths of stroma. The nuclei of this presumed stroma-layer are
on the whole more elongated in form than those of the outer layer ;
the blood-vessels were gorged with blood.
The central mass of cells is probably during life in contact with the
peripheral layers, but it appeared to be for the greater part at least
quite distinct from it, there being no transition between its cells and
those of the peripheral layers. The central cells appear to be closely
similar in structure to the corresponding cells in Protopterus; the
protoplasm of the cell is reticulate with large spaces left between
the individual strands which form the network; the nucleus is of
moderate size, round or oval in shape. Here and there (figs. 25, 26,
f.e) some of the central cells were disposed in a row, one cell thick,
round the periphery, closely applied to the innermost (stroma) layer
of the peripheral layers. This is possibly to be compared to the
true follicle-layer in Protopterus.
Although, as I have already stated, the material at my disposal
in the case of Ceratodus was not well preserved, certain portions of
the ovary were in a better condition than others, and, generally
speaking, it was quite possible to make out the relations of the
different parts of the organ, both the stroma and contained ova, as
well as occasionally the germinal epithelium on the outside; the
minutiee of structure of the different cells were disguised by the inferior
520 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE DEVELOPMENT AND [Dec. 7,
state of preservation, but in most cases the nuclei were very well
preserved indeed, showing the rounded or oval form and the granular
contents. This will not apply to the germinal vesicle of the ova,
which were usually rather altered, showing, however, the peripheral
layer of germinal spots. It does not seem likely, therefore, that the
structure just described has been so altered as to render its identi-
fication impossible.
As already said, the evidence of the existence in Ceratodus of
the structure formed by a fusion of cells depends upon only one
case, which is an early stage corresponding to that of Protopterus
figured on Plate LIII. fig. 9. This is the only example that
I have succeeded in finding after a careful examination of many
hundred sections. Besides these, my sections of the ovary contain a
few peculiar structures, displayed in figs. 3, 21-23, which are cer-
tainly not referable to the same series as the last, and concerning
the nature and homologies of which I am in great doubt. The
material at my disposal was not sufficiently well preserved to enable
me to speak with certainty as to every detail of structure; and I only
succeeded in finding a very few of the bodies in question, so that the
following account is necessarily meagre.
In fig. 3 of Plate LII. is represented what I believe to be the
earliest stage: it consists of a spherical mass of cells bounded
externally by an apparently structureless membrane, which separates
them from the surrounding ovarian stroma (a); the cells are mainly
disposed round the periphery of the sphere, the centre of which 1s
largely oceupied by spaces in which there is no trace of any fluid ;
the cells are small and rounded, with a large spherical or oval nucleus ;
the nucleus, but not the cell-protoplasm, is deeply stained by the
reagent used (borax carmine). The cells are exactly similar to the
germinal cells so far as I could see; and the conditions I shall
describe in the next stage lead me to infer that they are derived
from the germinal epithelium.
The second stage differs from that just described in being still
continuous with the germinal epithelium; this fact would seem to
point to its being an earlier stage than that just described, were it not
for another difference in its structure. The body consists, like the
last stage, of a mass of cells, but in the interior is a patch of gra-
nular substance, which shows a different reaction to the staining-
fluid. It is bardiy at all affected by the borax carmine and has a
yellowish tinge. This central mass encloses here and there a few of
the more peripherally-placed cells.
Of the next two stages, displayed in figs. 21-23, I am uncertain
which ought to be regarded as the earlier.
In both the mass of ceils has dwindled down to a single layer of
peripherally-placed cells (6), which, as before, are separated from the
stroma of the ovary by a conspicuous and apparently structureless
membrane. In the centre of the cells is a spherical or oval mass of
a substance somewhat granular in appearance, which is not separated
from the peripheral layer of cells by any membrane, but only by
shrinkage. This mass (figs. 2] and 22) is of a yellowish tint, hardly
1886. ] STRUCTURE OF THE OVUM IN THE DIPNOI. 524
affected by the borax carmine, and is throughout of a similar struc-
ture; there is no structure resembling a nucleus to be seen. This
central mass is clearly a further development of the condition
described in the second stage.
In one example, displayed in fig. 23, there is a difference from the
condition just described in the presence of a few cells imbedded in
the central mass, but clearly distinguishable from it by the nuclei
being deeply stained. The cell-protoplasm was, however, hardly
distinguishable from the surrounding mass. In the other example
(fig. 21) the central mass contained no such cells.
With the exception that it possesses no nucleus, this structure
resembles very closely Platner’s figure of the Gasteropod ovum ', which
contains a number of cells (‘‘ Nahrzellen’’) within its substance,
derived from similar cells lying around the ovum.
The first two stages described are about equal in size; the latter
two are also about equal to each other, but considerably larger
(twice the size) of the former. The comparison of sizes quite
supports my identification of the latter two as the later stages in
development ; and there can be no doubt, I think, that they all
belong to the same series.
These structures obviously bear a certain resemblance to the multi-
cellular bodies in this fish and in Protopterus; and if I had not
succeeded in finding in Ceratodus another structure undoubtedly
corresponding to the multicellular body of Protopterus, I should have
certainly regarded the structures at present under discussion as the
representatives of the latter.
The principal difference appears to be the non-formation of any
secondary follicle-layer, the absence of any special vascular supply,
and the fact that yolk is not formed in the early stages. With
regard, however, to the apparent absence of the extra-follicular layer,
it must be remembered that the close resemblance of the layer to a
layer of stroma-cells has already been dwelt upon (p.508). It seems
to me very possible that the structure just described is formed by
the fusion of the protoplasm of the centrally-placed cells, the nuclei
themselves gradually disappearing.
An examination of better material must, however, settle the
question.
General Conclusions, und Comparison of Ova with those of
other Vertebrates and Invertebrates.
The general conclusions to be drawn from the facts, in so far as
they refer to the Dipnoi, have been partly summed up in the résumé
at the end of my former paper on this subject. It may be taken as
a proved fact that the ovary in the Dipnoi contains two kinds of
struetures developed from the germinal epithelium. The first kind
is an ovum, the equivalent of a single cell, and is similar in all
essentials to the cvum in the Amphibia. The second structure,
which is very commonly met with in Protopterus and but rarely in
1 “Zur Bildung d. Geschlechtsproducten bei den Pulmonaten,” Arch. f. mikr,
Anat. Bd. xxvi. (1886) p. 599.
522 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE DEVELOPMENT AND [Deec. 7,
Ceratodus, is the resultant of a large number of cells the protoplasm
of some of which undergoes certain changes and forms a more or
less fluid mass with the original nuclei suspended in it ; this mass
appears around and between the rest of the cells, which are destined
for its nutrition. The whole structure is surrounded by a definite
follicular layer, which also shares in its nutrition by the formation of
olk in its cells and their proliferation inwards. These bodies are
surrounded by cellular layers which correspond exactly to the layers
which surround the ova of other vertebrates; the difference is that
instead of there being a single cell which grows at the expense of the
rest, the interior of the mass is formed by numerous cells, all equi-
valent.
The bodies may be distinguished as multicellular or plasmodial
from the ordinary unicellular ova. The share which the follicular
epithelium takes in the nutrition of the ovum, I have discussed in
detail in my former paper and need not refer to it again here, except
to remark that the elaboration of food-material in the follicular layer
and its absorption by the ovum has of course no relation whatever
to my view that the ovum is a cell-complex. Certain writers have
adduced arguments of this kind as a disproof of the unicellular nature
of the ovum, which to my mind have no force.
On the other hand, the developmental facts with respect to the
cells within the follicle appear to me to be difficult to interpret
otherwise than on the assumption that the ovum has the value of
more than a single cell.
It is true that I have been unable to detect any earlier stages than
the one figured on Plate LII. fig. 1; but the intermediate stages
between that and the mature ovum are fairly complete. The dis-
covery of the earlier stages is of great importance; it would decide
among others the very important question whether the central mass
of cells is, or is not, derived from primitive ova recognizabie as such
in the germinal epithelium, and whether or not the central mass of
cells is formed by the migration inwards of a number of these cells
or by the repeated division of one. But, whatever may be the
answer to these questions, I have, I think, proved that the ovum is
formed out of this central mass of cells. Some of these cells are
apparently used as pabulum, but others fuse together into a mass
of semifluid substance, which bears a very close resemblance to the
liquor folliculi of the mammalian follicle. The resemblance is still
more striking if we accept Waldeyer’s statements that the liquor
folliculi is produced by a direct metamorphosis of the follicular cells,
their nuclei remaining, as in the case of Protopterus, suspended in
it. This substance, however, in Profopterus has not a mere passive
function, serving, as in the mammal, to aid in the expulsion of the
ripe ovum, possibly also in its nutrition ; it retains the activity of the
cells from which it is derived and secretes yolk ; it must therefore
be looked upon rather as a plasmodium of these cells than a product
of their degeneration, although its deep staining with borax carmine,
as opposed to the very light staining of the remaining cells, indicates
some chemical change. Furthermore, there is no evidence of any
1886. ] STRUCTURE OF THE OVUM IN THE DIPNOI. 523
oue of the cells, which compose the central mass of the follicle,
acquiring a predominance in size over its neighbours or being differ-
entiated in any other way.
The fact of there being two kinds of ova with a different mode of
development is not new to the Vertebrata. In my former paper I
have compared the follicle and its contents in Protopterus to the
‘*egg-nest” of Elasmobranchs, the points of difference being perhaps
on the whole greater than the points of resemblance. But, since
the formation of “ egg-nests” is so general among the Vertebrata,
it seems to me that there is probably some genetic connection
between these structures and the “egg-nest”’ of Protopterus. It
has been shown that in Mammals, Elasmobranchs, and Reptiles
the permanent ova are formed in two ways:—either (1) by the
direct development of one of the primitive ova, which surrounds itself
with a follicular layer derived from the ordinary undifferentiated
germinal cells; (2) a number of primitive ova coalesce together to form
anest ; their nuclei multiply, and some atrophy, serving as pabulum
for a limited number which subsequently separate off, accompanied
by some of the undifferentiated germinal cells, to form as many ova.
These two modes of development are not regarded by Balfour as
morphologically very different ; the latter mode of development has
been brought about to secure the adequate nourishment of a certain
number of cells which form the permanent ova.
Balfour’s* observations certainly do not show any morphological
difference between the ova produced in these two different ways; in
both cases the ovum is the equivalent of a single cell; but the
physiological difference is considerable.
I have referred above (p. 512) to the presence of two kinds of cells
among the central cells, distinguishable by the characters of their
nuclei; in some the nucleus was rather larger and more oval in form
than in others, where it was smaller and rounder, and, in fact, exactly
like the nucleus of a follicular cell. It is possible that the cells with
larger nuclei correspond to primitive ova and the smaller to the
ordinary germinal cells ; in this case the resemblance of the central
mass of cells to the egg-nest of the Elasmobranch will be dimin-
ished ; against this supposition is the fact that there are nuclei of
intermediate size, but these may have been produced by a recent
division of some of the other nuclei.
Judging from analogy, however, it is probable that some of the
cells of the germinal epithelium are specialized into primitive ova from
undifferentiated germinal cells, although in patches of germinal epi-
thelium covering the ovary I failed to detect any such specialization
in the nuclei.
The important facts to be borne in mind in comparing the ege-
nest of the Elasmobranchwith that of the Dipnoi® appear to me to be
the early formation of the complicated follicular layers in the latter and
the early commencement of yolk-secretion. The germinal cells being
1 Balfour, loc. cit.
? It is important to remember that the formation of ‘‘nests” is not confined
in Elasmobranchs to the embryonic period (see Balfour, loc. cit, p. 415).
.
524 MR. F. E, BEDDARD ON THE DEVELOPMENT AND [ Dec. 7,
filled with yolk-particles at the expeuse of their protoplasm must
tend to lose their activity for movement, their energy being spent in
the elaboration of yolk; again, the thick layer of cells surrounding
the central cells would prevent any of the central cells from leaving
the interior of the follicle; the result of further growth would
therefore necessarily lead either to the development of a number of
distinct ova remaining permanently within the follicle, or to the
excessive development of one of the cells, which would ultimately
form the ovum, or, finally, to the formation of a single ovum
out of the whole mass of cells. There are no facts which point to
the truth of either of the first two alternatives, while all the facts
at my disposal appear to prove the third alternative ; accordingly
the temporary fusion of the primitive ova in the Elasmobranch nest
and the degeneration of some of them becomes permanent in the
Dipnoi, the ovum being the equivalent of a whole “nest.” Both Pale-
ontology and Anatomy point to the great age of the Dipnoi, which
may therefore easily be supposed to have retained ancient characters
in the structure of the ova, as they undoubtedly have in the structure
of the genital ducts. It is more generally believed that the Elasmo-
branchs are ata still lower level of organization; if, however, as
Mr. Howes has pointed out to me, the Chimeroids are the
ancestors both of Elasmobranchs and Dipnoi, it may as easily be
supposed that the egg-nest of the former has been derived from the
egg-nest of the Dipnoi, as that the converse process has taken place.
In this case the temporary fusion of primitive ova in the Sharks
and Rays is a reminiscence of their permanent fusion in Protopterus
and Ceratodus. It does not seem to me possible at present to say
which of these views is correct; nor indeed can any comparison at
all of the two structures have any great weight until the structure
of the ovary has been thorovghly examined in such types as
Chimera and some of the more primitive Sharks.
On the whole it appears to me possible to regard these remarkable
structures in the Dipnoi as corresponding to the egg-nests of other
Vertebrates ; but the apparent absence of any protoplasm in the
yolk-mass renders it extremely unlikely that the structure develops
into an embryo’; on the other hand it is often very difficult, in an
ovum full of yoik, to distinguish the protoplasmic matrix; it is
probable, however, that these structures do not undergo any further
1 TI observed several ova undergoing degeneration—in one case belonging
to the type discussed here. The follicular epithelium was in a condition
of active degeneration, the cells becoming detached and passing into the inte-
rior of the ovum. (This process is not to be confounded with the nutrition
of the ovum by the follicular cells recorded in this paper and in my last; in
the latter case the follicular cells are large, crammed with yolk-particles,
and remain a continuous layer; in the degenerating ovum the follicular cells
have decreased in size, contain little yolk, and great gaps are left by the disap-
pearance of the cells.) The yolk has also undergone great changes, the yolk-
spherules exhibit a vacuolated appearance and are of more irregular size, as if
a number had become conyerted into fat-drops and had run together; the
amount of yolk also was less, and the ovum in consequence was collapsed and
of irregular shape ; at several points the walls of the ovum were altogether in-
distinguishable. The way in which the oyum degenerates does not in fact
1886. | STRUCTURE OF THE OVUM IN THE DIPNOI. 525
changes, though the degeneration of a few out of an immense number
(see footnote) is hardly proof of this. IfI were in a position to deny
the presence of a germinal vesicle, the absence of this essential element
in the ovum would be evidence of some force in the same direction.
On the other hand, the energy showed by the central cells and the
cells of the follicular epithelium would be entirely thrown away in
this case ; and it is very difficult to imagine the continuance of such
a wasteful process in the ovary—the organ chiefly concerned with
the preservation of the race’.
A formation of ova in the Vertebrata by a fusion of cells has been
stated to exist, but has been subsequently denied.
Goette’s observations on the formation of the ovum in Bomdi-
nator”, referred to in my former paper, have been explained away by
Nussbaum *, who considers that the polynuclear condition described
by Goette is the result of the proliferation of the nucleus of a
primitive germinal ceil, and is not produced by the approximation
of the nuclei of a number of distinct cells which subsequently are
fused.
The observations of v. Siebold* are of interest in relation to this
question.
In Apus the ova are formed in spherical acini which containa number
of cells of which one grows at the expense of the rest. This cell
finally comes to occupy the whole of the interior of its acinus, the
remaining cells dwindling indefinitely ; the nucleus disappears, and
yolk-formation sets in. When the cell has been, for the most part, con-
verted into yolk it moves down the duct which connects the acinus with
one of the branching tubes of the ovary, and there fuses with one or more
cells which have been produced in other acini by a similar course of
development. The fused mass becomes surrounded by a membrane,
and is the ovum. In my preliminary notice in the ‘ Zoologischer
Anzeiger’ I have referred to the observations of v. Siebold, and
differ very widely from a description (Arch. fiir mikr. Anat. 1886) of the
degenerating ovum of the trout.
I may also take this opportunity of referring to an ovum of Ceratodus in a
similar condition of degeneration. I erroneously mentioned this ovum (Zool.
Anzeig. No. 236) as a nearly fully mature ovum belonging to the multicellular
or plasmodial type; it may very likely belong to this type, but the appear-
ances which it presents are indicative of degeneration, and not of maturation.
The follicular epithelium is not separated by any membrane from the contents
cf the ovum (fig. 2); its cells in a few cases are loaded with brown pigment, and
many of them haye migrated into the ovum, the contents of which have been
largely absorbed, probably by these cells; in consequence of this the ovum is
collapsed.
I have noticed a similar state of affairsin the ovary of a newt (Molge waltiii),
which I purpose to describe on some future occasion.
1 Tt has been suggested to me, in conversation, by Prof. Lankester that
these structures may serve as food for the embryos, being deposited along with
the ova, or that they may be reservoirs of nutritive material aiding in the
growth of the intra-ovarian ova. Wither of these suggestions appears to me
to be extremely plausible.
? Arch. f. mikr. Anat. Bd. xviii.
* Entwickelungsgeschichte der Unke.
* Beitrige zur Parthenogenese der Arthropoden. Leipsic, 1871.
526 MR. F. E, BEDDARD ON THE OVUMIN bienor. ([Deec. 7,
erroneously stated that there had been no confirmation or refutation
of the truth of his discoveries; I find, however, that I have un-
wittingly ignored the contents of a paper by H. Ludwig’, in which
there are described a series of important investigations of the ovary
of Apus. Ludwig finds that there is nothing abnormal in the
formation of the ova, and that a number of them do not coalesce as
stated by v. Siebold; at least there is no real fusion of the ova, only
an accidental running together of the contents of several acini due
to ruptures. Ludwig’s account is so circumstantial, that there can
be no reasonable doubt that the ova of Apus are not formed by the
concrescence of several cells. The only other instance that I am
acquainted with in which the ovum has been stated to arise from
the fusion of a number of cells is in the Rotifer Lacinularia.
A curiously similar mode of development of the ovum has been
recorded by Huxley in Lacinularia. A number of cells of the
ovary become compacted together, enclosed in a common mem-
brane, and break away to form an ovum, which is, according to
Huxley , never fertilized but develops parthenogenetically. It is
true that the statement about the non-fertilization of these ova has
been questioned by a later observer’, but much weight must obvi-
ously be given to the observations of the discoverer of the formation
of the ‘ winter ova’ in Lacinularia. The mode of origin of these
ova is closely parallel to that which I have described above in
Protopterus and Ceratodus. The ovary in the Rotifer consists of a
mass of cells, some of which develop into ova, and all of which are
comparable of course to the germinal cells in the ovary of the
Vertebrate. The fusion of a number of these to form a single ovum
is therefore clearly analogous to the fusion of a number of germinal
cells in Protopterus and Ceratodus.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Puate LIT.
Fig. 1. Multicellular body in ovary of Protopterus, Stage I. g.e, germinal
epithelium on surface of ovary; /-¢, follicular epithelium; fe’, se-
condary follicle-layer ; 0/, blood-vessels ; c, central cells; », nuclei
of central cells; p, mass formed by the fusion of the cell-protoplasm
of central cells.
. A portion of an adult ovum of Ceratodus in which the egg-membranes
have disappeared prior to degeneration of ovum. a, stroma-layer ;
Fé, follicular layer; y, yolk-spherules.
. Nest of germinal cells in ovary of Ceratodus. a, nucleus of stronia-
cell; 4, follicular layer; d, central cells.
. Lymph-ceils (?) from multicellular body of Protopterus.
. Nuclei of germinal cells from secondary follicle-layer of body, illus-
trated in fig. 1. a, a nucleus from one of the same cells on the side
of the body opposite to the area of invagination.
Prats LITI.
Fig. 6. Transverse section through a portion of outer surface of multicellular
bo
oOo, jet)
' Arbeit. a. d. Zool.-zoot. Inst. Wiirzburg, Bd. i.
2 See Cohn, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Bd, vii. (1856).
P. Z.S. 1866: Pl. Ulla
FEB. del: J. Smit ith.
|
STRUCTURE OF OVUM IN THE DIPNOI .
P.Z.S. 1886. Pl. La
fo)
{ OO.0.04 ogo? a
az ee 0 0 £e
a 6 alee y oe ng
fa'@! Ge 444 Ps
EO
Cae
2
FEB. del, J. Smit th. Hanharb
STRUCTURE OF OVUM IN THE DIPNOL.
P78. 1886. PL-LIV.
FEB del. J. Smit lith
STRUCTURE OF OVUM IN THE DIPNOI.
1886. | ON SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 527
body (Plate LIT. fig. 1) in a later stage. Lettering as in last
plate.
Fig. 7, 8. Orranees sections through a portion of outer surface of multicel-
lular body in a later stage. a, degenerating nuclei ; other lettering
as before.
9. Multicellular body from.ovum of Protopterus, differing from that
illustrated in fig. 1 mainly by the absence of follicular layer.
Lettering as before.
10. Portion of secondary follicular layer at point marked with an arrow
in preceding figure; more highly magnified.
11. Central mass of a body belonging to same stage as that figured in fig. 9,
to show the mass (p) formed by the breaking down of the central
cells (c), the nuclei of which (7) are here and there imbedded in it.
12. One of central cells (Plate LII. fig. 1,c) with a large number of
nuclei.
13. Three central cells from Stage I. (fig. 1, 4), to show difference in
nuclei.
14-20. Central cells very much enlarged from Plate LIT. fig. 1, to show
the different stages in degeneration of nuclei.
21. Nest of germinal cells in ovary of Ceratodus at a later stage than that
in Plate LII. fig. 3. Lettering as in that figure.
Puate LIV.
Fig. 22. A portion of body represented in Plate LIIT. fig. 21, more highly
magnified. Lettering as in fig. 21.
23. Nest of germinal cells in ovary of Ceratodus at a stage near to that
represented in figs. 21 and 22. Lettering as in those figures.
24, Portion of multicellular body in ovary of Protopterus, to show masses
of yolk (a), apparently corresponding to areas occupied by fused
masses of protoplasm in earlier stages (p in figs. 1, 9, and 11).
25. Multicellular body of Ceratodus at a stage corresponding to that of
Protopterus, illustrated in fig. 1. a, fibrous tissue of stroma-layer ;
other lettering as in fig. 1.
26. A portion of central cells of multicellular body of Ceratodus, more
highly magnified. Lettering as in fig. 1.
27-31. Central cells of multicellular body of Protopterus at an early stage,
to show commencing yolk.
32, 33. Central cells of ditto, to show disintegrating nucleus,
2. On the Anatomy and Systematic Position of the Liassic
Selachian, Sqgualoraja polyspondyla, Agassiz. By A.
Smith Woopwarp, F.G.S., of the British Museum
(Natural History).
[Received October 18, 1886.]
(Plate LV.)
’SuMMARY OF Previous RESEARCHES.
The prolific fish-beds of the Liassic formation have yielded so
much valuable material during recent years, that it is now possible
to considerably supplement the original anatomical memoirs of
Agassiz, Egerton, and the other pioneers in early Mesozoic ichthy-
ology. Many specific types that were at first only known from very
528 MR. A. S. WOODWARD ON [ Dec. 7,
imperfect fragments are already represented by remains as complete
as can be expected in a fossil state; and such remains being now
forthcoming in the case of the remarkable Selachian, Squaloraja
polyspondyla, it is proposed once more to bring this interesting
form before the notice of zoologists.
The first scientific account of the genus and species under consi-
deration was communicated by Dr. H. Riley to the Geological
Society in 1833, and subsequently published, with one slight modi-
fication, in that Society’s ‘Transactions’*. A fine specimen in
the Bristol Museum, displaying the head and vertebral column, with
obscure fragments of the appendicular skeleton, formed the subject
of this memoir, and notwithstanding the author’s limited means of
comparison, he rightly recognized its affinities both with the true
Sharks and the Rays, and expressed the circumstance in its generic
name. Riley, however, misinterpreted the snout and rostral spine,
regarding these as jaws, and originally suggesting the specific name
of dolichognatha in allusion to their elongated shape; but Agassiz
pointed out to him the error in time for correction in an appended
note (J, c. p. 85), and the distinguished author of the ‘ Poissons
Fossiles’ again figured and described the specimen in one of the
later parts of his third volume*. Agassiz, indeed, was already
acquainted with portions of the vertebral column and dermal
tubercles of the fish, and had enumerated these in his preliminary
manuscript notes under the name of Spinacorhinus polyspondylus ;
but Riley’s prior description necessitated the adoption of the generic
title Squaloraja, though his withdrawal of ‘ dolichognatha’ allowed
the Agassizian specific name to be retained.
But although Agassiz’s extensive acquaintance with the Selachian
order enabled him to throw further light upon the Liassic genus,
and point out its remarkable resemblances to the Pristiophoridze, he
still failed to comprehend the precise nature of the curious snout,
and it was left to Mr. William Davies, of the British Museum, with
still more materials at his disposal, to offer a complete explanation.
Tn an important paper in the ‘Geclogical Magazine’ for April 1872°,
he pointed out that the uppermost rostral prolongation was a true
spine, homologous with the frontal spine of the male Chimeroid
Ischyodus orthorhinus, then made known by Sir Philip Egerton ;
and he further demonstrated the absence of the appendage in some
individuals, which were naturally regarded as females. Davies,
moreover, added some notes on the vertebral column, and Hasse has
more recently * published an account of the structure of the vertebrae
‘in great detail.
1H. Riley, “On the Saualoraja,” Trans. Geol. Soc. [2] vol. v. 1833, pp. 83-
88, pl. iv.
2 L. Agassiz, ‘Recherches sur les Poissons Fossiles, vol. iii. p, 379, pls. 42,
43.
3 W. Davies, ‘On the Rostral Prolongations of Sgualoraja polyspondyla,
Ag.,” Geol. Mag. vol. ix. (1872) pp. 145-150, pl. iv.
4 0. Hasse, “ Einige seltene palaontologische Funde,” Palwontographiea,
yol. xxxi. (1885) p. 4, pl. i. figs. 2, 3.
1886. ] SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 529
New SPECIMENS.
Up to the present time, therefore, there is no very precise infor-
mation in regard to the structural features of Squaloraja beyond the
descriptions of dermal appendages, the snout, and the vertebral
column. But the British Museum again furnishes materials for an
addition to our knowledge (thanks, especially, to a recent purchase
from Mrs. Dollin of Lyme Regis, and the acquisition of the Egerton
and Enniskillen collections), and it is upon the national fossils that
the present contribution is based. All the specimens are from the
well-known Lower Lias of Lyme Regis, Dorsetshire ; and, adding
Roman numerals for convenience of future reference, they may be
briefly enumerated as follows :—
I. The nearly complete skeleton of a male, wanting only a small
portion of the caudal region, and shown of the natural size in Plate
LV. fig. 1. This specimen exhibits the dorsal aspect, and is parti-
cularly interesting on account of the preservation of the limbs and
limb-girdles, which have not hitherto been so well displayed. The
cranial cartilages are not remarkably distinct, and the dentition is
only feebly indicated ; but the form and proportions of the snout and
rostral spine are very satisfactorily shown, and the vertebral column,
except anteriorly, is in a comparatively good state of preservation.
(Brit. Mus. no. p 2276.)
II. Portions of the vertebral column and the crushed cranium of
an old individual, probably female. (Egerton Collection, Brit. Mus.
no. P 2079.)
III. Portion of the skeleton of a young female, viewed from the
ventral aspect. There are only obscure remains of the cranial
cartilages, but the snout and dentition are beautifully exhibited.
The caudal region is also well preserved, but all traces of the
abdomen have been removed and destroyed. (Enniskillen Collection,
Brit. Mus. no. p 3184.)
IV. A fine skull of a male individual, seen from above, and
exhibiting the form of the head, dentition, and rostral spine. (Brit.
Mus. no. 47402.)
V. A detached rostral spine, somewhat smaller and less robust
than that figured by Davies (/. c. fig. 3), but equally curved, the
broadened base of insertion wanting. (Enniskillen Collection, Brit,
Mus. no. p 3186.)
VI. A complete, much-curved rostral spine, exhibiting only the
superior aspect. (Enniskillen Collection, Brit. Mus. no. p 3187.)
VII. The anterior two thirds of a rostral spine, probably belong-
ing to an animal even larger than no. II. (Enniskillen Collection,
Brit. Mus. no. p 4574.)
VIII. An extraordinarily slender and acuminate small rostral
spine, seen from the dorsal aspect. (Egerton Collection, Brit. Mus.
no. Pp 2081.)
The specimens numbered I. to IV. are almost certainly referable
to the already named species, S. polyspondyla, Ag., and owe their
slight variability to differences in age, as indicated by the condition
Proc. Zoor. Soc.— 1886, No. XXXV. 35
530 MR. A. 8. WOODWARD ON [Dec. 7,
of the vertebral column. But the detached spines would appear to
afford evidence of two or more forms as yet unrecognized, and the
small example, no. VIII., is particularly distinct. It is very possible,
indeed, that when more specimens of the genus are available for
study, the characters of the rostral appendage will enter promi-
nently into the diagnosis of each species; but I only venture, on
present evidence, to distinguish the possessor of the small spine no.
VIII. (Plate LV. fig. 6), and this may be appropriately designated
by the name of S. ¢enuispina. The fossil in question is separated
from its homologue in the known species by its much more slender
and acuminate shape, and possibly, though not certainly, by the
slight concavity of the proximal half of its upper surface.
During the investigation of these fossils I have had the privilege
of discussing the subject with several zoological and paleontological
friends, to whom I am indebted for some valuable suggestions noted
in the following pages. I desire especially to return thanks to Prof.
W. K. Parker, F.R.S., for much kind assistance in regard to the
skull; to Mr. G. B. Howes, for a continuance of the help so freely
given on previous occasions ; to Mr. G. A. Boulenger, for the facili-
ties afforded in the study of the recent Seiachians under his care ;
and to my senior colleague, Mr. William Davies, to whose earlier
work reference is so frequently made in the sequel.
ANATOMICAL DESCRIPTION.
External Form.—Commencing the description with a brief notice
of the general external form of Sgualoraja, attention may be first
directed to the beautiful specimen no. I., represented in Plate LV.
fig. 1. As the shape of the head had already led Agassiz and Davies
to suspect, the proportions are found to be very similar to those of
the living Pristiophorus. Assuming that about three centimetres
are missing from the tail of the specimen, the snout will have
occupied one quarter of the entire length of the animal. The body
must have been but slightly compressed from above downwards, and
the pectoral fins were undoubtedly free, having no connection with
the head; the shoulder-girdle, however, is placed relatively nearer
to the chondrocranium than is the case either in Pristiophorus or
Pristis, though appearances are not improbably deceptive, owing to
crushing during fossilization. It is impossible, of course, to deter-
mine whether the gill-openings were ventral or lateral, and scarcely
any traces of the branchial arches have been preserved. The
pectoral fins, as usual, are much larger than the ventrals, and the
tail is long and slender, without spine, as admirably shown in no. ILI.
(fig. 7). Unfortunately, all sure indications of dorsal and caudal
fins are wanting, thongh it is scarcely likely that these appendages
were absent in the living fish.
Dermal Structures*.—In regard to the integument and its appen-
dages, the new fossils afford some interesting additional information.
No less than eight rostral spines are now available for study ; and
? The dentition will be more conyeniently treated in a later section, p. 534,
1886.] SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 531
the specimens numbered I. and III. reveal a few hitherto unnoted
facts concerning the arrangement of the small prickly tubercles.
As already indicated in Davies’s large figure, but still more satis-
factorily shown in our Plate LV. fig. 1, a series of the tubercles with
especially long recurved hooklets is arranged along either edge of
the prenasal (intertrabecular) cartilage ; and these two rows are
precisely parallelled in the snout of certain living species of Rhino-
batus (e.g. R. granulatus). But immediately at the base of the
rostrum, where the cartilage is particularly firm and expanded into
two lateral elevations (Davies, fig. 2), the tubercles become densely
clustered in a manner not observable in the existing form ; and this
arrangement is in intimate relation with the overlying spine. The
disposition of the tubercles along the trunk, evenif originally regular,
is now no longer evident, and none but scattered examples are to be
seen ; but the slender tail was provided on each side with a longi-
tudinal row of comparatively large recurved hooklets, upon inconspi-
cuous bases, as is very well shownin the female, no. III. (fig. 7). A
small tuft of these dermal structures also occurs at the extremity of
each clasper in no. I. (fig. 1, 24), aud there are distinct indications
of a patch of very minute prickles upon the membranous portion of
the (right) ventral fin in the same specimen.
In regard to the rostral spine, Davies’s figures and descriptions
leave little to be added. The conclusion as to its absence in certain
individuals (females) is confirmed in an interesting manner by the
fossil no. I1I., which has been so ‘‘ developed’’ on the dorsal aspect
that there cannot remain the slightest doubt upon the subject. But
a new specimen, from the Enniskillen Collection (no. V. fig. 5), still
further demonstrates its prehensile character in the individuals that
possess it ; for a number of blunt conical tubercles, without radiated
bases, are clustered together upon its inferior aspect (A) to oppose
the group of more slender hooklets already described at the base of
the snout. When well preserved (as in no. I.), the surface of the
spine exhibits the reticulate impressions of the vessels in a once
enveloping integument *; and on each side there is a marked longi-
tudinal groove (fig. 5, g), which gradually disappears on approaching
the distal extremity.
The peculiar form of the spine is also worthy of note, more parti-
cularly as it is repeated in two other cartilaginous fishes whose
remains have been found in the same geological formation ; it differs
but little from that of the rostral appendage in the chimeroid
Ischyodus*, and is still more similar to another Liassic spine which
there is some reason for suspecting may belong to the remarkable
Prognathodus*. ‘The peculiar shape, indeed, taken together with
1 Mr. Boulenger has kindly helped me to determine that the corresponding
appendage in the living Chimera monstrosa is likewise covered with skin.
* Sir P. Egerton, “ On a new Chimzroid Fish from the Lias of Lyme Regis
(Ischyodus orthorhinus, 3 ),’ Quart. Journ. Geol, Soe. vol. xxvii. 1871, pp. 275-
278, pl. xiii.
3 Sir P. Egerton, “ Prognathodus Giintheri (Egerton), a new Genus of Fossil
Fish from the Lias of Lyme Regis,” Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxviii. 1872,
pp. 233-237.
35*
532 MR. A S. WOODWARD ON [Dec. 7,
the fact of its occurrence in more than a single type, leads to an
interesting speculation, suggested to me by Professor Parker. Com-
pared with the distinct anterior intertrabecular cartilage, which forms
the axis of the rostrum in such primitive fishes as the glutinous
Hags (Myzine)*, scarcely the slightest difference in form can be
noted; and it seems not unlikely that we are here concerned with
an admirable illustration of the principle, that the contours of super-
ficial structures appended to the cranium are frequently determined,
in the main, by the shape of the fundamental cartilages to which
they are attached. The fossils, of course, do not permit a determi-
nation of the complete form of the intertrabecular cartilage in any
of these types, or of its primitive distinctness ; but the slight glimpses
that can be obtained are rather favourable than otherwise to such a
conclusion.
Of the skin itself in Sgualoraja, only indefinite patches remain,
and no small shagreen granules appear to have been developed in it ;
but the sharp lateral edge, both of the rostral and caudal regions, is
strengthened by a series ‘of minute calcified rings (fig. 1, d), evidently
quite similar to those stiffening the boundaries of the snout in the
living Pristiophoride.
Cranium and Mandibular and Hyoid Arches.—Nearly all the large
fossils under consideration reveal facts of more or less interest in
regard to the structure of the skull; nos. I., 11., and IV., with
Riley and Davies’s specimens, present the dorsal aspect, while no. III.
and the fragment shown in Davies’s plate, fig. 4, afford some parti-
eulars as to the conformation of the ventral surface.
The palato-trabecular region (figs. 1, 2, pa.tr) extends far
forwards in its present crushed condition, and from the centre is
produced the long narrow intertrabecular cartilage (i.¢7) forming
the axis of the snout. From each anterior outer angle of this region
there also arises a more slender forwardly directed cartilage (pr. pa),
which gradually tapers to an incurved point, as admirably shown in
the left side of no. LV. (fig. 2). This prolongation evidently served
to stiffen the edge of the base of the snout, exactly as its well-deve-
loped homologue in the living Pristiophorus; and there can be
little doubt that it:represents a definite prepalatine element, such
as has not hitherto been recognized in the skulls of the Selachian
order. Its form is almost identical with that of the corresponding
cartilage in the Myxinoids, as will be at once seen on referring to
Prof. Parker’s beautiful figures of Mywine and Bdellostoma®; in
these fishes, indeed, the process serves a similar purpose, being like-
wise placed to strengthen the sides of the rostrum.
Immediately behind the origin of the prepalatine “ horns,” the
lateral boundary of the palato-trabecular region gradually curves
inwards for some distance, and then as slowly outwards again until
it forms a well-marked antorbital prominence ; but the olfactory
capsules, in their fossilized state, are totally unrecognizable, though
1 W. K. Parker, ‘‘On the Skeleton of the Marsipobranch Fishes.—Part I.
The Myxinoids,” Phil. Trans. 1883, pl. x. fig. 2.
2 W. K. Parker, loc. cit, pl. x, figs. 1-3 and pl. xvii. figs. 1-3.
1886.] SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 533
the two excavations at the base of the rostrum in the fragment
shown in Davies’s fig. 4 evidently testify to their normal proportions
and situation. Ina line with the prominence is fixed the base of
the rostral spine (7.s), quite at the hinder extremity of the ethmoi-
dal tract ; and still more posteriorly, the chondrocranium begins to
exhibit considerable lateral compression, though finally widening to
a slightly broader occiput.
Extending backwards from the antorbital process, the slender
postpalatine cartilage (pé.pa) is preserved in most specimens
(especially in no. IV. fig. 2), but there is some uncertainty as to
whether it formed a distinct element. It tapers slightly to its distal
end, and the crushing during fossilization has usually imparted to
it the deceptive appearance of connection with the hyomandibular.
No postorbital process can be observed, and the circumstances of
preservation are probably accountable for the absence of any trace
of a fontanelle in the cranial reof; but there is an interesting
V-shaped protuberance (a.v) close to the hinder extremity, evi-
dently representing a fold round the hollow into which opened the
aqueductus vestibuli (or ductus endolymphaticus) of each auditory sac.
On the ventral aspect, the parachordal, or “ investing mass”
(fig. 3, iv.m), is produced posteriorly into a pair of occipital
condyles (oc.c), as already noted by Riley; and there is a well-
marked median ridge (x), obviously due to the remains of the
primitive notochordal sheath. A median foramen (c.f) is also some-
what conspicuous, and, if not the result of accident during fossiliza-
tion, is evidently the passage for the united internal carotid arteries
proceeding to the pituitary body’.
Of the mandibular and hyoid arches, the hyomandibular cartilage
(figs. 1, 2, hm) is the only portion satisfactorily preserved. In its
crushed condition it is seen to extend from each side of the occiput,
curving outwards and forwards, and gradually tapering to the distal
extremity. In shape it approximates to that of most “ Batoidei,”’
being twice as broad proximaily as distally, and its apparent eonti-
nuity with the cranial roof is probably due to the process of fossili-
zation. Not a trace of the pterygo-quadrate and mandibular
cartilages appears exposed to view; but the arrangement of the
dental plates in the specimen no. III. (fig. 3, ¢) shows that the two
rami of the jaw met at the symphysis in a comparatively acute angle,
and were not placed in the same straight line, as is the case in so
many living Rays.
But the most remarkable feature to be noticed in the skull of
Squalorga is preseuted in the two pairs of transversely elongated
appendages, with reflected ends, arising from beneath the narrow
part of the palato-trabecular region. These curions structures are
not well shown in our fig. 1 (cé.a, ci.6), but can be studied in their
entirety in the large specimens figured by Riley and Davies. The
most anterior (ci.a) is the larger, and is completely displayed on
both sides of the last-named fossil ; its total length is equal to three
times the width of the skull at the position where it emerges,
* See T. J. Parker, ‘ Zootomy,’ 1884, p. 62, fig. 20.
534 MR. A. 8. WOODWARD ON [ Dec. 7,
and for two thirds of its extent it is directed outwards and ex-
hibits only very slight tapering; the distal third rapidly diminishes
to a pointed extremity and is fixed at right angles to the rest in a
backward direction. The hinder appendage (ci.4) measures only
two thirds the length of the first, and is about half as broad; it
likewise has an outward and posterior trend, but (in its fossilized
state) is much more gradually arched.
The relatively great size of these appendages renders them some-
what difficult of interpretation, and it is scarcely possible to decide
whether they consist of true cartilage or are merely dermal in cha-
racter. In position they correspond very closely with the hinder
labials of many living Selachians, and also with the supposed homo-
logous rods that form the axes of the oral barbels in Myxinoids’.
But in the latter group these appended “ feelers”? never seem to
extend outwards to a length much exceeding half the breadth of the
head; and the largest cirri with which I am acquainted in the Sel-
achians are scarcely longer than the rami of the jaws. It seems
likely, however, that the structures in Sgwaloraja are the gigantic
representatives of the latter, which are elongated outgrowths of the
cartilages of the nasal valves*.
There is no evidence of anterior labials in the specimens of Squa-
loraja already known.
Dentition.—The dentition of Sgualoraja is very remarkable and
has not hitherto been correctly noted. Some indications are to be
observed in specimens I. and II., but the teeth are beautifully dis-
played both in III. and IV.; moreover, the parts in these two
instances are practically identical, showing that there were no vari-
ations according to sex, as is the case among certain living Selachians
(e.g. Raja). The dentition of both jaws is preserved in no. III.
(figs. 3, 4), but only that of the right side of the mandible affords a
good view of the grinding-surface. Each ramus bears only a single
dental plate, sharply marked off in front from its fellow of the oppo-
site side, and exhibiting towards the symphysis a gently tumid
prominence. For the anterior two thirds of its length the plate is
of nearly uniform breadth, but in the last third the outer border
gradually trends inwards, producing a more or less pointed posterior
extremity. And the efficiency of the grinding-surface is increased
by a series of parallel longitudinal ridges or folds of the enamel, which
are distinctly worn down towards the outer functional border. Eleven
of these rugee can be counted on no. III. (fig. 4), while fourteen or
fifteen are visible in no. IV ; but, except on the wrder surface of the
plate in no. II., there are no traces of any sutures between them, and
even in this specimen the evidence is somewhat obscure. It
appears, however, that there were feebly marked longitudinal divi-
sions corresponding to the several rugee, and that these became
accentuated at the outer edge, allowing of the shedding of the worn-
out portions as growth proceeded.
1 W. K. Parker, loc. cit. pp. 385, 399, pls. x., xvii. figs, 1-3.
2 The “ Nasenfliigelknorpel” of Miller; see O.Gegenbaur, ‘Das Kopfskelet
der Selachier,’ pp. 97-111, pls. xvi., xvii.
1886. ] SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 535
Vertebral Column.—In the subject of fig. 1 the vertebral column
is beautifully shown beyond the shoulder-girdle, though somewhat
imperfect in front. As already described by previous writers, the
vertebree (fig. 8) are merely slender, concentrically marked rings, of
the truly “‘ tectospondylic ’’* type, and in the space just mentioned
no less than 340 can be counted; in the abdominal region, sixteen
of these occupy the length of a centimetre, while in the tail the
proportions are so slightly different that only one more ring is com-
prised within the same distance. The obscure portion in front of
the pectoral girdle measures one and a half centimetres in length,
probably representing about 24 vertebre ; and if three centimetres
are missing from the end of the tail*, this loss will indicate an
additional 48. The total number is thus found to be approximately
400, as estimated by Davies in the large specimen described in 1872.
In the more aged individuals (e. g., no. [I.) the vertebral rings
are more robust than those of the apparently yonng (e. g., no. III.) ;
and it is remarkable that in no example is there any trace of the
fusion of the elements in the region of the neck.
But it is not necessary to add a detailed account of the structure
of the vertebra themselves, for they have already been carefully
examined and described by no less an authority than Professor Carl
Hasse, of Breslau®. As the result of his researches in this direction,
the latter anatomist concludes that in Squaloraja ‘‘ we have to do
with an ancestral form of the now living Pristidee, a form which, in
its development, appears to have advanced beyond the existing Pris-
tiophoridze, and also beyond the oldest Rhinobatidz,”’ which be has
deseribed from the upper Oolite of Bavaria.
The vertebral arches were not of sufficient consistency to leave the
slightest trace in the fossil state.
Appendicular Skeleton.—In the subject of fig. 1, as already
remarked, the pectoral fins are sufficiently well preserved to exhibit
their complete severance from the cephalic region and their corre-
spondence in general character to those of the living Pristiophorus.
But the remains of the supporting girdle are much less perfect and
satisfactory, and the other known specimens do not appear to throw
any further light upon the subject. There can be little doubt, how-
ever, that the “‘ girdle’ was complete, as in the Rays proper, and the
well-defined cartilage (s.sc) on the right is evidently the character-
istic suprascapula. A faint trace of the posterior boundary of the
transverse coracoid bar (cor) is also shown on the same side.
The proximal cartilages of the fin are only two in number, and
well preserved on both sides of the fossil, though most completely
displayed on the left. The preaxial element (pms) is elongated in
a transverse direction, and appears of almost uniform breadth, though
its exact shape is evidently destroyed by crushing ; it is relatively
small, having only about one quarter the size of the postaxial ele-
1 ©. Hasse, ‘Das natiirliche System der Elasmobranchier,’ allgemeiner
Theil (1879), p. 44.
? The caudal region of the fossil is not completely shown in fig. |.
°C. Hasse, “ Hinige seltene palaontologische Funde,” Paleontographica,
vol. xxxi. (1885) p. 4, pl. i. figs. 2, 3.
536 MR. A. S. WOODWARD ON [ Dec. 7,
ment. The latter (mtp) is triangular in form, and elongated antero-
posteriorly ; the foremost border abuts against the hinder edge of
the preaxial cartilage, which it equals in transverse extent ; and the
inner border curves gradually outwards and backwards to meet the
nearly straight external boundary ata posterior apex. Judging from
the analogy of living Selachians with fins of a similar type, the
posterior of these cartilages may be regarded as the metapterygium ;
while the anterior element may represent the coalesced pro- and
mesopterygium (as in Pristiophorus'), or it may be wholly meso-
pterygial, with a minute, indistinguishable propterygium at its
proximal angle (as in Heptanchus and Hexanchus*).
Beyond the basal cartilages are arranged the cartilaginous rays of
of the fin (7). These are somewhat obscured both in front and
behind by remains of the integument, and it is uncertain whether
the first attached to the preaxial element is stouter than the remainder;
twenty rays, however, can still be counted on the right side, and
there are traces of sixteen on the left; the foremost thirteen are
directed almost transversely or outwards, while the following have a
more marked backward inclination.
The pelvic girdle and its appendages are rather more satisfactorily
displayed than the pectoral structures just described. Anteriorly,
on each side, the cartilage is prolonged into a remarkably strong
prepubic process (p.pb), the base of which occupies one fourth of
the entire breadth of the girdle; but the forward extent of the
prominence is not determinable, owing to imperfect preservation.
Posteriorly, on each side, is a long slender iliac process (2), especially
well seen on the left, and slightly directed outwards ; itis much less
robust than the prepubic, and appears of almost uniform breadth
throughout ; in length it equals twice the width of the transverse
pubic cartilage (pub). Arising immediately within the point of
union of the pubic and iliac regions is the basal cartilage (5.8) of
the pelvic fin, which exhibits no sutural divisions, and (this specimen
being a male) is prolonged backwards into a powerful clasper (cl).
It curves gradually inwards throughout the whole of its rayed portion,
and is of almost uniform breadth. On passing into the claspers,
the cartilage becomes more calcified, and perhaps slightly broader.
The inner edge is straight, but the outer edge exhibits a gentle
sigmoid curve, which results in the widening of the rounded terminal
extremity ; and at the end of each clasper (especially the left) a
smal] tuft of dermal hooklets (A/) is preserved. The fin-rays (7),
which appear to be completely shown on the right, are altogether
twelve in number, and the length of the supporting cartilage is
scarcely more than one half of that of the appended clasper. There
is no distinct evidence of one or more preaxial rays attached to the
girdle itself, and the foremost exhibited is no longer than the
remainder.
1 St. G. Mivart, “ Fins of Elasmobranchs,” Trans. Zool Soc. yol. x. p. 403,
pl. Ixxviii. fig.1.
* C. Gegenbaur, “Schultergiirtel der Wirbelthiere, und Brustflosse der Fische,”
Untersuch. yergl. Anat. Wirb. 18665, pl. ix, figs. 1, 2. .
1886. } SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 637
AFFINITIES AND Sysrematic Position.
Proceeding, lastly, to a consideration of the systematic position of
Squaloraja, it will be observed that the new fossils here described
enable us to arrive at a much more definite conclusion than it has
hitherto been possible to formulate. Agassiz has pointed out the
affinities of the genus with the Pristiophoridw; Davies has further
indicated some resemblances to the Rhinobatide, and been led, by
his discovery of the rostral spine, to speculate at least as to its
family distinctness ; while Ginther! has likewise refrained from
more than a suggestion that it is nearly allied to the first-named
group.
That the animal is a true Selachian, there cannot be the slightest
doubt ; nor does it require more than a superficial glance to recognize
its resemblance both to the Sharks proper and the Rays. But (as
already mentioned by Davies) the possession of a prehensile rostral
spine by the male distinguishes Sgualoraja from all known members
of the order, recent or fossil, and suggests affinities with the Chi-
meeroids* ; while the enormous size of the barbels or cirri seems to
have no parallel, at least among living forms. The dentition, too,
is evidently unique, so far as our present knowledge extends, and
the marked character of the symphysis is a feature of peculiar
interest.
Comparing the genus in other points with the various recognized
families upon the “‘ borderland ” of the two sections of the Selachii,
reference may first be made to the Rhinide.
Though agreeing with this group in the very slight depression of
the body, it is readily distinguished by the elongation of the snout
and the inferior position of the mouth; and the anterior border of
the pectoral fin is much less produced forwards, owing to the relatively
smaller size of the propterygium.
To the oft-mentioned Pristiophoride, Squaloraja bears a remark-
able resemblance, both in the structure of the snout and the general
form of the body; but there are no traces of teeth on either
boundary of the rostrum ; and if the peculiar dental armature of
the jaw may be quoted asa family character, this, too, will exclude
the genus from the present group.
From the family of Pristide, the Liassic form is still further
separated by the characters of the head and its anterior prolongation,
though agreeing tolerably well in the shape of the trunk and fins.
There are also certain features that prevent its reference to the
Rhinobatide. The structure of the pectoral fin in this family is quite
distinct from that of the fossil, the propterygial element being pro-
longed far towards the head, so that in some cases it is connected by
skin with the cephalic region.
Its distinctness from other families is too obvious to require any
special mention, and Sgualoraja is thus excluded from all recognized
divisions of the order. It may even represent a hitherto unknown
' A. Giinther, ‘Study of Fishes’ (1880), p. 835.
2 We regard the Chimeroidei as a distinct order, follow ing Professor Huxley,
Proe. Zool. Soc. 1876, p. 57.
538 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON A NEW PARROT. [ Dec. 7,
suborder, but I venture at least to suggest that the genus may be
regarded as the type of a new family ; and utilizing, as far as
possible, the structural features that commonly enter into the
diagnoses of zoologists who study living forms, it may be provisionally
defined as follows.
Order SELACHII.
Suborder TEcrosPoNnDYLI.
Family SQuALORAIID.
Body scarcely depressed, elongate. Head produced into along flat
rostrum, without lateral teeth. Males with a prehensile spine on the
upper part of the snout. Dentition sharply divided at the symphysis.
Pectoral fins with smail propterygium, free.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE LY.
Fig. 1. Skeleton of Squaloraja polyspondyla (male), dorsal aspect. [No. I.]
a.v, situation of auditory openings ; 6.5, basipterygium of pelvic fin ;
ci (a and b), cirri; cl, clasper ; cor, coracoid; d, edge of skin ; h&,
dermal hooklets; Am, hyomandibular; 2/, iliac process; itr, inter-
trabecular rostrum; mfp, metapterygium ; oc.c, occipital condyle ;
p-pb, prepubic process ; pa.tr, palato-trabecular region ; pms, preaxial
basal cartilage of pectoral fin; p7.pa, prepalatine process; pt.pa,
postpalatine (antorbital) process; pub, pubic cartilage; 7, cartila-
ginous fin-rays; 7.s, rostral spine ; s.sc, suprascapula; 7, dentition ;
v, vertebral column.
2. Skull of ditto (male), dorsal aspect. [No.IV.] Refs. as above.
8, Skull of ditto (young female), ventral aspect. [No. III] c¢.f, carotid
foramen (?); zv.m, investing mass ; ”, notochordal sheath.
4, Dental plate of right mandibular ramus of ditto, twice nat. size.
[\No. 1IT.]
5. Rostral spine of Sgualoraja, sp., side view. [No. V.] 4, hooklets; g,
lateral groove. :
6. Rostral spine of Squaloraja tenuispina, dorsal view. [No. VIII.]
7. Tail of Sgualoraja polyspondyla (young female). [No. Hl]
8. Section of vertebra of ditto. [No. I1.]
All the specimens are from the Lower Lias of Lyme Regis, and preserved in
the British Museum. With the exception of fig. 4, the drawings are of the
natural size.
3. On an apparently new Parrot of the Genus Conurus
living in the Society’s Gardens. By P. L. Scuatmr,
M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Society.
[Received October 29, 1886.]
(Plate LVI.)
On the 29th of April last we purchased of Mr. Cross, of Liverpool,
an example of a Parrot of the genus Conwrus, which seems to be
different from every other species of the genus yet described. The
bird, which is still living in the Parrot-house, is at once distinguish-
able from its congeners by its red throat and collar, whence I
propose to call it
pupa :
J. Smit del et lith. : :
P7Z.5. 1666. PI
aR IeGL Fa es ia
J? Smit lith Hanhart imp
CONURUS RUBRITORQUIS
‘ a Be eee oe
+ oF Js ee 5 Cer
4 day”
1886.] MR. OGILBY ON AN UNDESCRIBED PIMELEPTERUS. 539
CoNURUS RUBRITORQUIS, sp. nov. (Plate LVI.)
Green: white of throat and collar only slightly apparent ; at the
back of the neck bright red; eye-region naked ; billand feet whitish.
Whole length 11°5 inches, wing 5:0, tail 4°7.
Hab. South America or West Indies.
Obs. About the size of C. enops, but distinguished by its red
throat and green under wing-coverts.
4. On an undescribed Pimelepterus from Port Jackson. By
J. Doucias Oeitzy, Department of Fishes, Aust. Mus.
Sydney. (Communicated by F. Day, C.LE., F.Z.S.).
[Received November 1, 1886.]
PIMELEPTERUS MERIDIONALIS, Sp. Nov.
Bev. 1. 10-2. A. 3/10. V. t/a. Po i7.. C. U7, Te late
57-59. L. tr. 10/19. Cee. pyl. ca. 460. Vert. 11/15.
Length of bead from 4°85 to 5:15, of caudal fin from 4°66 to
5°00, of pectoral fins from 7:00 to 7:20, height of body from 3-00
to 3°20 in the total length. Eyes: diameter from 4°00 to 4°50 in the
length of the head, from 1°60 to 1°75 in that of the snout, and from
2°00 to 2°30 in the convex interorbital space. Body oblong, com-
pressed ; a transverse rounded protuberance in front of the eyes.
Cleft of mouth small and transverse; upper jaw rather the longer ;
the maxilla reaches to below the anterior margin of the orbit. Pre-,
sub-, and interopercles entire. Teeth: a single row of strong
curved conical teeth in each jaw, the horizontal portion of which is
of equal length with the vertical; behind these rows are narrow
bands of similar but much smaller teeth, which probably are
intended to finally replace the outer row; vomer, palatines, and
tongue densely crowded with minute teeth’. ins: dorsal spines
of moderate strength, increasing in length to the seventh, which is
about one half the length of the head, and much longer than the
rays of the dorsal, though only equal to the first anal ray. Pectorals
rounded, rather longer than the ventrals, and from two thirds to
three fourths the length of the head. Third anal spine longest and
strongest; caudal emarginate. Scales feebly ctenoid, extending
in front of the eyes; much smaller on the head; 18 between the
bases of the ventrals and the lateral line, and 8 between that and the
base of the sixth dorsal spine; those below the lateral line larger
than those above it. Pseudobranchie well developed. Gill-rakers
20. Colours dull brownish grey, with a silvery shade below; upper
part of head darkest ; all the fins dark. Irides a mixture of orange
and silver.
1 In connection with the dentition of Pimelepterus, I may mention that
Girella tricuspidata has a small patch of palatine teeth. Dr. Giinther (Cat. i.
p. 427) states that ‘“‘in one species there is a short series of palatine teeth,” but
e omits mentioning which species possesses this series.
540 MR. G. A. BOULENGER ON [Dec. 7,
The examples from which this species is described measure
respectively 25°10, 26°10, and 28°30 inches, and were all taken in
Port Jackson, where this species is locally known as the “Drummer” ’.
I have never seen a small specimen of this fish.
Breeding: ouly one, the largest of my specimens, showed any
signs of breeding ; this was a male with the milt but little developed ;
all three were taken during the month of August.
As food: not held in any estimation, and commanding no sale in
the market, nevertheless it is, in my opinion, quite equal to the other
herbivorous Sparoids.
Habits: in these it is a true rock-fish, dwelling in the crevices
and indentations of our rocky shores, where it finds abundant food
and shelter; it is not given to roaming, and is only taken by the
trammel, one end of which is attached to the shore, against which
the mesh must actually lie, or else the fish would assuredly pass
inside, whence it happens that this species is almost always caught
within a few feet of the shore.
Note.—From Dr. Ramsay’s MS. notes on Australian Fishes, I
find that, so far back as 1881, he noticed these differences with regard
to the dentition, but never published any communication thereon.
5. On the South-African Tortoises allied to Testudo
geometrica. By G. A. BouLencrER.
[Received November 2, 1886. ]
(Plates LVII. & LVIII.)
Upon the suggestion of the Rev. Mr. Fisk, of Cape Town, who
has enriched the Society’s Menagerie with so many interesting
Reptiles, I have undertaken a reexamination of the South-African
Tortoises allied to Testudo geometrica, and am able to distinguish
as many as seven well-marked species, of which the diagnoses follow.
The specimens named 7. ¢rimeni, after the Director of the South-
African Museum, and 7’, fiski, were lately exhibited in the Society’s
Gardens, and were unrepresented in the Natural History Museum.
That named 7’. smithi, after the author of the ‘Illustrations of
South-African Zoology,’ is established on a specimen erroneously
referred by Gray to 7. verreauaii. The true 7’. verreaucii being still
unrepresented in our collections, its diagnosis is compiled from Smith’s
description and figure.
1 Tt shares the name with Girella elevata, Macleay, and Pachymetopon grande,
Giinth. In the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for November 1886,
Dr. Giinther described Pimelepterus, sydneyanus, nu. sp., from Port Jackson, and
suggested that Pachymetopon grande (Cat. Austr. Fish. i. p. 106) may be Pime-
lepterus fuscus, Lacépéde, and that Pachymetopon squamosum, Macleay and
Alleyne (Proc. Linn. N.S. Wales, i. p. 275, pl. ix. f. 1), may be Pimelepterus
cinerascens, Forsk,, or P. tahmel, Rippell.
1886. ] SOUTH-AFRICAN TORTOISES. 541
1. Testupo Geometrica, L.
Beak strongly hooked. No large tubercle on the hinder side of
the thigh.
Lateral marginal plates not forming an angle with the costals.
Nuchal longer than broad. Suture between the gulars longer than
that between the anals; suture between the humerals as long as that
between the femorals, and much longer than that between the
pectorals.
Carapace black, with yellow areolze from which yellow rays radiate ;
eight or twelve yellow rays on the vertebrals, nine to twelve on the
costals, two to four on the marginals. Plastron brown and yellow,
the two colours forming more or less ill-defined rays.
Common in the Cape Peninsula.
2. Testupo TENTORIA, Bell.
Beak strongly hooked. An enlarged tubercle on the hinder side
of the thigh.
Lateral marginals usually not forming an angle with the costals.
Nuchal minute. Suture between the gulars as long as, or shorter
than, that between the anals; suture between the humerals longer
than that between the pectorals or the femorals.
Carapace black, the centre of the areolz with a small yellow or
orange spot, from which narrow rays of the same colour radiate ;
eight to twelve rays on the vertebral, twelve to fourteen on the
costals, three or four on the marginals. Plastron brown in the
middle (inner half of abdominal plates), yellow on the sides.
Common at Beaufort West.
3. TESTUDO TRIMENT, sp. n. (Plate LVII.)
Beak very feebly hooked. No enlarged tubercle on the hinder
side of the thighs.
Lateral marginals forming an angle with the costals, a convex
border with a well-marked longitudinal groove. Nuchal minute.
Suture between the gulars as long as, or shorter than, that between
the anals ; suture between the humerals not, or but little, longer than
that between the pectorals or the femorals.
Carapace black, with broad yellow or orange rays radiating from
a smali spot on the areolee; five or six rays on the vertebral plates,
and four to eight on the costals; a yellow spot or streak at the
junction of two plates; one or two rays on each marginal. Plastron
dark brown in the centre, with yellow rays, yellow on the sides.
Length of carapace of adult 105 millim.
Mouth of the Orange River.
4, TESTUDO VERREAUXI, Smith.
Beak very feebly hooked. No enlarged tubercle on the hinder
side of the thighs.
Lateral marginals forming an angle with the costals. Nuchal well
developed, a little longer than broad. Suture between the gulars as
long as that between the anals; suture between the humerals much
longer than that between the pectorals or the femorals.
542. MR. BOULENGER ON SOUTH-AFRICAN ToRToIsES. [ Dec. 7,
Carapace dark brown, each dorsal and costal plate with four or
five yellow rays proceeding from the yellow areole. Plastron yellow,
dark brown in the middle.
Near the sources of the Orange River.
5. TESTUDO SMITHI, sp. n.
Beak feebly hooked. A large tubercle on the hinder side of the
thighs.
Lateral marginals not forming an angle with the costals. Nuchal
longer than broad. Suture between the gulars nearly as long as that
between the anals; suture between the humerals much longer than
that between the pectorals or the femorals.
Carapace dark brown, with radiating, narrow, yellow, black-edzed
rays, meeting in the centre of the areole; plastron yellow, with
dark brown rays, the brown predominating in the middle.
Length of carapace of adult 115 millim.
A single specimen, with the mere indication “S. Africa.”
6. Testupo FIsKI, sp.n. (Plate LVIII.)
Beak feebly hooked. A large tubercle on the hinder side of the
thigh.
Taieha} marginals not forming an angle with the costals. Nuchals
small, equilateral. Suture between the gulars shorter than that
between the anals; suture between the humerals much longer
than that between the pectorals or the femorals.
Carapace with brownish-yellow and black rays of nearly equal
width, radiating from the yellow areole; six black rays on each
vertebral and costal plate, and two on each marginal ; the anterior
and posterior pair of black rays on the costal and vertebral plates
meeting their fellows form three series of ocelli. Plastron dirty
yellow, brown in the middle.
Length of carapace of adult 75 millim.
A single male specimen, from De Aar, not far from Hopetown,
was presented alive to the Zoological Society by Mr. Fisk.
7. TESTUDO SEMISERRATA, Smith.
Beak strongly hooked. A large tubercle on the hinder side of the
thighs.
i ated marginals not forming an angle with the costals; anterior
and posterior marginals forming a strongly serrated edge. Nuchal
longer than broad. Suture between the gulars as long as, or longer
than, that between the anals; suture between the humerals much
longer than that between the pectorals or the femorals.
Carapace with brownish-yellow and dark brown or black radiating
rays, usually of nearly equal width, six to ten in number on the ver-
tebral and costal plates. Plastron yellowish, with dark brown rays.
Carapace of adult 115 millim.
Common in the districts between Latakoo and the Tropic of
Capricorn.
= NUNN
Omit del et hth
cS
J
J. Smit del et lith. Mintern Bros. imp
TESTUDO FISKI.
4 ’ hi
i t r ’ , s
1886.] ON THE SKULL OF THE CHAMELEONS. 543
6. Remarks on Prof. W. K. Parker’s paper on the Skull
of the Chameleons. By G. A, BouLencER.
[Received November 25, 1886.]
I wish to call attention to what I believe to be a serious error
in Prof. Parker’s paper on the Skull of the Chameleons, printed
in the last volume of the Society’s ‘Transactions’ (vol. xi. p. 77,
1881). The adult skulls of two species are described and figured,
viz. that of Chameleo vulgaris (pl. xvi.) and that of C. pumilus
(pl. xix.); but, through some error, the skull of a newly born C.
pumilus is represented (pl. xv.) as that of the common species; and
as the facts derived from this wrongly-identified species are the basis
of the author’s arguments, his conclusions receive, in some points
at least, a severe shock from this discovery. Any one will, I
think, on comparing the figures, recognize the mistake now that
attention is drawn to it, and it is incomprehensible that, although
Prof. Parker’s paper has often been quoted during the five years
which have elapsed since its publication, it should not have been
noticed before. No wonder the author states that he knows “ of
no skull whatever in which the roof-bones undergo so great a
transformation as in this (C. vulgaris)” or that he should be struck
by the resemblance of the adult C. pumilus to the young
C. vulgaris, regarding the one as representing a sort of arrested
development of the other. I have besides no doubt that he is
wrong in his interpretation of the three bones forming the roof of
the casque. As recently suggested by Baur, the critical bone ‘ pa-
rietal,”” Parker, should be regarded as the supratemporal, and the
‘*interparietal,” Parker, as the parietal. That the three bones are
perfectly distinct in the young C. pumilus is well shown on pl. xv.
fig. 3, and it is not surprising that the sutures should have dis-
appeared on a skull in which the ossification is so expanded, roofing
over, as it does, the supratempora! fossee, and studded with tubercles,
as is the case in the adult C. pumilus. The statement that the skull
of the latter species is less aberrant than that of the common one is
therefore incorrect.
Should further proofs be required, beyond the inspection of Prof.
Parker’s own plates, to establish my identification of the species
figured, I might add that the separation of the pre- from the post-
frontal is a character of C. pumilus, and that the specimen, received
from Mr. Moore, of Liverpool, was no doubt one of a brood, in the
possession of Lady Cust, which was born alive in November 1868,
and on which Mr. Moore reported at the time (cf. Proc. Lit. &
Phys. Soc. Liverp. xxiii. p. 49). Now, it is well known that
C. vulgaris is oviparous, and the fact that C. pumilus is ovovivi-
parous was recorded as early as 1825 (cf. Kaup, Isis, 1825,
p- 992).
544 MR. O. THOMAS ON LAGORCHESTES FAscraTus. [ Dec. 7,
7. On the Wallaby commonly known as Lagorchestes
fasciatus. By Otprietrp Tomas, Natural History
Museum.
[Received November 3, 1886.]
(Plate LIX.)
One of the earliest known of all the Australian Marsupials was
the beautiful little banded Wallaby which was discovered in 1804
on the islands in Shark’s Bay, Western Australia, by Péron and
Lesueur, during their famous voyage round the world, and described
by them in 1807 under the name of “ Kangurus fusciatus’’’.
This species was included by all the earlier writers, with the rest
of the Macropodida, in the single genus then recognized, whether
called Kangurus, Macropus, or Halmaturus. In 1842, however, it
was placed by Gould, on the authority of the typical specimens in
the Paris Museum, in Gray’s genus Bettongia, although in the same
year he described two other specimens of it as ‘‘ Lagorchestes
albipilis,” thus referring them to the genus made by him just pre-
viously for the true Hare-wallabies, of which Lagorchestes leporoides
is the type.
Gould’s two mistakes in referring Péron and Lesueur’s species to
the Hypsiprymnine genus Beétongia, and in separating ‘‘ L. albipilis”
from it, were corrected by Waterhouse in his excellent general work
on the Marsupials, where the species was described * under the name
of Macropus (Lagorchestes) fasciatus*—an identification accepted
by Gould in his ‘Mammals of Australia,’ where the species is
figured as Lagorchestes fasciatus, by which name it has since been
generally known.
The teeth, as well as the external characters, of L. fasciatus were
described and figured by Waterhouse, and their differences from
those of the true Hare-wallabies noted; but he does not seem to
have at all appreciated the importance of these differences, which
appear to me to be so great as to compel me, 80 years after the first
description of the species, to form a new and special genus for its
reception. -This genus I propose to call Lagostrophus*.
The differences in dentition between Lagorchestes and Lagostro-
phus are not of the trivial and unimportant nature of those charac-
teristic of most of the other genera of this very homogeneous family,
but are of a kind to show that Lagostrophus fasciatus must have
not only different food, but even a different manner of eating it to
any of the other members of the subfamily Macropodine.
On examining the incisors of any of the ordinary Kangaroos and
Wallabies (Plate LIX. figs. 8, 9, and 12), we find that the whole set
form a widely open curve, and that the sizes and proportions of the
1 Voy. Terres Austr. i. p. 114, Atl. pl. xxvii.
2 Vol. i. p. 87 (1846).
3 Nat. Hist. Mamm. i. p. 87 (1846).
4 Nays, a Hare, and orpogos, a band or belt.
1886.] | MR.O THOMAS ON LAGORCHESTES FASCIATUS, 545
individual teeth are more or less as follows :—i’ is the largest of the
three, boldly curved forwards, and descending below the level of the
other two, its tip sharp and gauge-shaped; i° andi’ are both much
smaller than i', very narrow transversely, and provided with sharp
cutting-edges ; of the two, i° is nearly invariably the larger. On
. placing the mandible iv position, the large scalpriform lower incisors
fit in naturally between the upper ones, not biting vertically upon
their edges, but only upon the palate between them (fig. 9). The
lower incisors themselves are very uniform in shape, and always
provided with sharp cutting-edges along their inner margins (see the
section fig. 10), the animals being able, owing to the looseness of the
symphysial joint, to separate and approximate these cutting-edges’,
and thus to utilize them as a pair of scissors with which to snip off
leaves or grass,
Turning, on the other hand, to Lagostrophus fasciatus, we find a
very different state of things. First, the two series of upper
incisors are close together, meeting at a sharp angle in front and
diverging but little behind (fig. 2). Then as to the size of the
teeth, i’, instead of being the largest, is the smallest of the three,
at least in cross section, and even vertically it is but little longer
than the others (figs. 2 and 6); in shape it is conical, scarcely curved
forwards, and with a blunt, rounded or flattened tip. I? and i° are
each longer antero-posteriorly than i* and, when looked at externally,
have much the same appearance as those of Lagorchestes, except
that i is longer than i*, while in Lagorchestes and in nearly all
other Kangaroos the reverse in this case. But when looked at from
below (fig. 2), there appears a very remarkable difference ; instead
of being narrow and sharp-edged, they are broad and flat-topped,
and are evidently not formed for cutting in the true sense at all.
The palatal surtace of i forms an even oblong, its breadth slightly
more than half its length ; while the flatness of i° is only modified
by a broad shallow groove running along its centre, and terminating
at its postero-external corner, where it forms a notch on the outer
edge of the tooth evidently homologous with that found in a similar
position in the other Wallabies.
Trying now the same experiment as before of placing the lower
jaw in position, we see at once what a difference the contraction of
the incisor series must make in the manner of using them; for the
lower incisors, instead of dropping down between the upper ones,
come flat upon the top of them, so that there can only be a grinding-
and not a cutting-action between the upper and lower teeth,
An examination of the lower jaw of L. fasciatus seems to show
that this species, and this alone of the Macropodine, is without the
power of using the two rami independently, as the junction between
them, instead of being loose and narrow, is broad, close, and firm,
the vertical height at the symphysis being so great in proportion to
the size of the jaw as to produce a distinct rounded prominence on
1 See Murie and Bartlett, P. Z.S. 1866, p. 28.
Proc. Zoon. Soc,—1886, No. XXXVI. 36
546 MR. O. THOMAS ON LAGORCHESTES FAsciatus. [Dee. 7,
its lower side corresponding to the chin, no trace of such a prominence
being present in any of the other genera.
Tal natural correlation to this structure of the jaw, the lower
incisors themselves have not the sharp inwardly projecting edges
characteristic of those of the other Kangaroos, and are merely
approximated to each other by their flat inner surfaces; the trans-
verse sections of the incisors of the two forms (figs. 4 and 10) show
this difference better than any description.
The incisors and symphysis thus indicating a difference in the
motion and use of the mandible, we should naturally expect an
appreciable change in the shape of those parts of it by which it is
attached and moved, and we therefore find, first, that the coronoid
process possesses the very unusual character of having its anterior
edge slightly concave in its upper half, all other Kangaroos having
iis part evenly convex ; and, secondly, the condyle, Instead &
having its length and breadth much about equal, is very much
broader than long, and is provided with a broad, flat, supplementary
internal process (compare figs. 5 and 11).
Canines, present in Lagorchestes, are, as in the majority of the
Macropodide, wholly absent in Lagostrophus.
The two premolars of Lagostrophus, i. e. the smaller anterior deci-
duous one, pm’ of the typical dentition, and the larger permanent one,
or pm* (fig. 7), are both broad and flattened, their posterior decidedly
greater than their anterior diameters, with well-developed internal
edges, and with four or five shallow vertical grooves on their external
surfaces. The premolars therefore correspond with the incisors in
being broader and more flattened than is usual ; but the difference, at
least in comparison with certain of the broader-toothed species, such as
Macropus brachyurus, Quoy and Gaim., or Lagorchestes conspicillatus,
Gould, is by no means so striking as in the case of the incisors.
The molars appear to be precisely similar to those of Lagorchestes
and the other smaller members of the Macropodine.
The general shape of the skull (fig. 1) presents nothing very
remarkable, except that, owing to the approximation of the two
incisor series to each other, the premaxillee bearing them are very
much narrower transversely than usual, and therefore give a peculiar
slender and pointed appearance to the muzzle.
With regard to the external characters, we have first to note that
the rhinarium, notwithstanding the statements of Gould and Water-
house, is really practically naked, as in the Wallabies, and is not
hairy as in Lagorchestes*. The hair, in fact, only grows down the
centre of the nose to the level of the superior internal angle of the
nostrils, leaving the whole of the front of the nasal septum bare.
The hind feet, instead of being short-haired as in Lagorchestes,
are covered with long bristly hairs, very much as in Petrogale,
these hairs nearly entirely covering up the narrow naked sole, and
hiding the short, but strong and conical, central hind claws.
? Even in Lagorchestes the hairiness is very variable, L. conspicillatus having
a yery much less hairy muzzle than L. /eporotdes, the type of the genus.
%
Giaud Horman-Fisher del et lich
Mintern Bros. ump
LAGOSTROPHUS FASCIATUS, FIGS.
- o
le
1|_—¥
LAGORCHESTES .LEPOROIDES, IGS. 8-12.
1886.] MR. 0. THOMAS ON LAGORCHESTES FASCIATUS. 547
Finally, so far as regards colour, the transverse banding of the
lower back presents a style of coloration quite unique in this family,
and, beyond the Macropodide, only found among Marsupials in Thy-
lacinus and Myrmecobius, in which, however, it is far more prom-
inent than in the Banded Wallaby.
The last point for consideration is the systematic position of
Lagostrophus among the other genera of the family, and I have
therefore compared its characters with those of the sections and
groups into which Prof. Garrod, in his classical paper on Dorcopsis *,
has divided the subfamily Macropodine. ‘This comparison shows
that the differential characters of Lagostrophus are of distinctly
greater systematic importance than are those separating Prof. Garrod’s
Section I. from Section IT., as these appear to be by no means so
persistent or invariable as that author supposed. I cannot therefore
consider Lagostrophus, as a group, less than equal in value to all the
other genera of the subfamily combined, so that the following is the
arrangement that I would propose to substitute for Prof. Garrod’s :—
Family MACROPODIDA.
Subfamily Macroropinz.
Section I.
A. Genera Macropus, Petrogale, Onychogale, Lagorchestes.
B. Genera Dendrolagus and Dorcopsis.
Section II. Genus Lagostrophus.
Subfamily HypstpRYMNIN2.
Section I. Genera Hypsiprymnus, Bettongia, depyprymnus,
Subfamily HyesipRyMNODONTINE.
Section I. Genus Hypsiprymnodon.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE LIX.
Lagostrophus fasciatus, upper view of skull.
, palatal view of upper incisor teeth. le W<
—— ——,, palatal view of upper incisor teeth, with the lower jaw in
position.
—— ——, outline of transverse section of the two lower incisors.
, right condyle of lower jaw.
, side view of upper and lower incisors.
, palatal view of ee and lower incisors.
. Lagorchestes leporoides, as in fig. 2.
, as in fig. 3.
, as in fig. 4.
, as in fig, 5.
——.,, as in fig. 6.
Fig. 1 is of the natural size; all the others are magnified three times.
Fig.
POATD OR Coho es
11. ——-
1 p, Z.8. 1875, p. 58.
548 PROF. R. COLLETT ON PHASCOLOGALE VIRGINIE. [ Dec. 7,
8. On Phascologale virginia, a rare Pouched Mouse from
Northern Queensland. By Rosert Cottett, C.M.Z.S.
[Received December 2, 1886.]
(Plate LX.)
PHASCOLOGALE VIRGINIZ, De Tarragon, 1847. (Plate LX.)
Phascologale virginia, De Tarr. Revue Zool. 1847, p. 177.
Diagn. Skull with strong sagittal and occipital crests, and
distinct processus postorbitales. Incisors almost equal; upper
canine very long. First premolar very small; third the largest.
Ossa palatina with foramina; pars ner ion scarcely inflated
behind the bulle.
Ears large, almost naked; tail as long as the body and head,
scantily clothed with adpr essed hairs.
Hind feet slender, hallux very short; sole of metatarsus naked in
the middle line ; tubereulated callosities at the base of the toes.
Colour blackish, grizzled with silvery white ; head reddish grey,
with a black stripe from nose to between the ears, and trace of
another on the side of the snout. Below greyish ; feet pale red, tail
reddish grey with black tips‘.
Measurements, taken from the stuffed specimen :—
millim.
Length of body (with head) .......... about 125
Length of tail........ sie kee ee ae e 120
From tip .erenout to .¢ar 005. 5 dy oie kiasiy: ss ee re
Height of ear, exterior margin.............. 20°5
Height of ear, interior margin........ S's faba pf
Sole of hind foot (with claw) .............. 33
Fur rather short, not woolly; each hair bluish grey at the base,
the outer third white with black tip, some hairs entirely black.
Feet slender; point of hallux not nearly reaching to the base of
the toes.
Skull, The skull is strongly built, with high sagittal and occipital
crests, and a distinct processus postorbitalis ; the dentition is, how-
ever, comparatively weak.
millim
Lprigtl sot See iat fic ego mt immnie = papel + sows (ele
Breadth across arcus zygomaticus i cetaaris =) cane rade 19
Peicht...2: Ghee eae Ysa ae Wace paral e
Shortest breadth between orbits .. Sto] Mt tees
Breadth before the commencement of a. zygomaticus. 12
Length of tooth-series in upper jaw.............- 15
Length of tooth-series in lower jaw.............. 13
Dentition :—I. 4; C.;; P. 3; M. 4 (46).
1 The colour of the tail and snout is rather indistinct, the hairs being very
much worn,
<a
dua
PONT UTA UYN
ld Y8SI
“9:
“WINTOYMTIA
ATVOOTOOSVHd
1 Pp yogi
4 i ‘
Pe oF ie ;
. sae? 4
4 y
. m f
ls ¥ .
= < i ‘
A > » ¥
= as i OS pia
ay ie ‘ =
. 1
s
: :
7
j
p. ‘
.
5s
£
‘ .
.
'
*
: ‘
F
. oath
1886.] THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 549
In the upper jaw the first incisor is short, and almost imper-
ceptibly larger than the other incisors. Canine long and curved.
The premolars form an almost unbroken series with the canine and
first molar. First premolar very small, scarcely higher than fourth
incisor; second a little larger; third premolar the largest, the
middle cusp being as high as the molars. The molars are rather
feeble, with relatively low crowns and blunt cusps; last molar very
narrow.
In the lower jaw the canine is a little shorter than that in the
upper. Fourth molar only alittle smaller than third. Incisors and
premolars as in upper jaw.
Compared with Ph. minima the brain-case is higher, but narrower,
and the arcus zygomaticus longer. Ph. apicalis has larger bulle
ossee, but shorter foramina incisiva; the third premolar in that
species is almost rudimentary, and the second premolar larger than
the two other premolars together. In both these species the crests
on the brain-case are scarcely developed, and the postorbital pro-
cesses wanting.
Hab. Herbert Vale, Northern Queensland ; one specimen, a full-
grown male, collected by Dr. Lumholtz, January 1883, is preserved
in the Zoological Museum at Christiana.
The specimen was dug out from a hole in the ground, and its
habits seemed not to be arboreal’.
Christiania, 15th November, 1886.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE LX.
Fig. 1. Phascologale virginia, natural size.
2. Skull, natural size.
3. Canines and premolars, three times natural size.
December 21, 1886.
Prof. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair.
The Secretary read the following report on the additions to the
Society’s Menagerie during the month of November 1886 :—
‘Che tctal number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena-
gerie during the month of November was 166, of which 64 were by
presentation, 22 by purchase, 16 by birth, 4 were received in ex-
change, and 60 on deposit. The total number of departures during
the same period, by death and removals, was 107.
1 My friend, Mr. Oldfield Thomas, informs me, on the authority of M. Huet,
of Paris, that the original type of this species, the locality of which was un-
known, appears to have been lost; and as the animal has been overlooked ever
since its first description, I have thought it worth while to figure and redescribe
it from the beautiful specimen obtained in Queensland by Dr. Lumholtz.
550 MR. H. SAUNDERS ON A HYBRID DUCK. [ Dec. 21,
Mr. Howard Saunders, F.Z.S., exhibited on behalf of Mr. R. J.
Howard, of Blackburn, a specimen of a hybrid between the Tufted
Duck (Fuligula cristata) and the Pochard (#. ferina), bred in
Lancashire; and read the following extract from a letter addressed
to him by Mr. Howard on the subject, dated Fern Bank, Blackburn,
Oct. 28th, 1886 :—
“7 have forwarded for your acceptance a hybrid between the
Pochard and the Tufted Duck, knowing that an authenticated
specimen will be of interest ; for I suppose I must take it for granted
that the bird referred to by you in the 4th edition of ‘ Yarrell’
(vol. iv. p. 433) as ‘apparently a hybrid between the Tufted Duck
and Pochard’ is the only one known to you.
*¢ A pinioned pair of Pochards first bred at Woodfold Park in 1882,
since which date several broods have been annually reared there
(‘ Yarrell,’ vol. iv. p. 414). I found the Tufted Ducks nesting on
the same reservoirs in July 1884, some of the young birds being sub-
sequently captured, pinioned and turned down again (ibid. p. 431);
the first recorded instance of the breeding of the Tufted Duck in
Lancashire. The birds of both species leave the reservoirs during
the severe weather of winter.
“On the 9th of May last, I saw a male Pochard apparently paired
with a pinioned female Tufted Duck. On the 23rd of the same
month two male and one female Tufted Ducks appeared ; the male
Pochard would not allow the male Tufted Ducks near the pinioned
female, but drove them off if they approached within 30 or 40 yards.
Soon after this all the drakes left, and I saw little of the ducks until
the 20th June, when both appeared on the water; the full-winged
female Tufted Duck with a brood of 9, the pinioned one with 10
young hybrids.
“From the first I could easily distinguish the pure-bred young
from the hybrids: the upper parts of the former being uniform
umber-brown, whilst the latter had the cheeks and throat buff. As
the birds began to feather, I noticed that the hybrids were bulkier,
the general appearance being more that of the Pochard than of the
Tufted Duck ; the head, neck, and upper surface were of a much
lighter and warmer brown, the feathers about the base of the upper
mandible rather lighter-coloured than the rest of the head, but not
showing a distinct patch as in the Tufted Duck. We caught two
hybrids on the 30th July, and put them on the reservoir in the
Blackburn Corporation Park ; and on the 2nd August I sent two, in
the name of Mr. Thwaites (to whom I am indebted for permission
to deal with the birds as I wish), to the Zoological Society’s Gardens.
Their description is as follows, the sex being uncertain :—Length
15°5 and 15 in.; bill dark blue, almost black, 1-6 in. in length, and
a trifle more dilated towards the point than in the pure Tufted
Duck ; irides yellowish brown ; legs and toes blue, darkest at joints,
webs black. Two of the young Tufted Ducks, male and female,
caught on the 3lst July: length 14°5 and 14 in.; bill black, 1*5 in.
in length ; irides dull yellow; legs and toes as in the above hybrids.
“The bird which I sent you was shot on the 19th August, beg
1886. ] MR. J. B) SUTTON ON ATAVISM. 5oL
then strong on the wing, and proved, on dissection, to be a male.
Those which I put on the reservoirs in our Corporation Park do not
appear to have changed i in plumage ; there is not as yet the slightest
sign of a crest.’
The above rare hybrid has since been presented to the British
Museum of Natural History.
The following papers were read :—
1. On Atavism. A Critical and Analytical Study. By
J. Buanp Surton, F.R.C.S., Lecturer on Comparative
Anatomy, Middlesex Hospital, Erasmus Wilson Lecturer
on Pathology, Royal College of Surgeons.
[Received October 22, 1886.]
In aninteresting paper entitled “ Critical Remarks on Polydactyly
as Atavism,’’ Gegenbaur enters into a masterly discussion of this
confessedly difficult subject, and, in the course of summing-up, he
ventures to divide atavistic phenomena into two groups—PaL«£o-
GENETIC and NEOGENETIC.
Atavism he defines as “‘a re-appearance of a more primitive
organization, or a reversion (Riickschlag) to a primary state.” To
choose an example :—the occasional presence of an os centrale in the
adult human carpus is a reversion to a condition very prevalent in
the lower Mammalia. We know that a cartilaginous representative
of this ossicle is easy of detection in the embryo; but Atavism does
not consist in the existence of a latent germ, but in its becoming
perfected and further developed.
In this case the atavistic part exists, by law of inheritance, in the
early embryo as a germ which normally disappears, but in some
cases becomes further developed. This is Gegenbaur’s Palzogenetic
Atavism. If the abnormal part (using the term abnormal in its most
literal sense) is not found as a germ in the embryo, the reversion is
“* Neogenetic.””
My object is to show that all examples of atavism belong to the
Palzeogenetic group and that Neogenetic Atavism has no existence.
The question of polydactyly I do not intend to discuss, but shall
select the foot of the Horse, as Gegenbaur has done, to serve as
illustrations of the principle, and thence extend the view broadly.
The descent of the modern Horse from five-toed ancestors is
beyond all question. That the animal of to-day walks on an
enlarged third digit with a rudimentary digit on each side in the
manus and pes is accepted doctrine. The comparative recent ances-
tors of the Horse were tridactyle. Gegenbaur states that Hensel’s*
? Morph. Jabrbuch. Bd. vi. 8. 584-596, A translation by Drs. Garson and
Gadow is given in ‘ Journal of An: atomy and Physiology,’ vol. xvi. p. 615.
2 “Ueber Hipparion mediterraneum.” Abk. k. Akad. d. Wissensch. z.
Berlin, 1861, S. 66.
552 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON ATAVISM. [ Dec. 21,
investigations point to the probability that the finger typically
attached in Hipparion to the medial styloid bone was the last to
abort. It is certainly noteworthy that in the majority of cases of
polydactyly occurring in Horses it is this digit which reappears most
frequently.
In the Teratological Gallery in the Museum of the College of
Surgeons several specimens of Horses’ feet are shown with a well-
developed second digit. Cheauveau figures * a specimen preserved in
the Veterinary Museum at Lyons; but the most complete case of its
kind is that figured and described in Prof. Marsh’s paper* “On
Polydactyle Horses, Recent and Extinct.” In this instance the
inner digit was present on the four feet. Besides giving an in-
teresting account of extra digits noticed by early writers, this eminent
paleontologist tells us that the more frequent occurrences of extra
digits on the manus is precisely what a study of fossil forms of equine
mammals would lead us to anticipate.
These cases support the view as Gegenbaur points out, that the
atavistic parts do not belong to forms palzeontologically remote or
systematically far distant.
In the Spider-Monkey the thumb is normally absent, or repre-
sented merely by a nodule of cartilage or fibrous tissue. Yet on
one occasion J dissected an Ateles paniscus which had on each hand
a perfectly developed thumb. This condition is not very uncommon.
If the parts be dissected in normal specimens, the thumb is repre-
sented by a band of cartilage and fibrous tissue attached to the
trapezium. The illustrations which have been used were selected
merely to give a clear notion of genuine Atavism—the palogenetic
form. The question of polydactyly is in some instances susceptible
of another explanation, which I do not propose to speak of in this
paper.
Atavism in relation with the Prostate.
Leaving the skeleton, attention wiil now be invited to a re-
markable instance of Atavism presented by the prostate. In struc-
ture and intrinsic relations this organ presents some exceptional
features. It is best regarded as a capsule composed of fibrous and
unstriped muscular tissue, mixed with tubular glands, surrounding
a recess known as the utriculus masculinus. The utriculus separates
the termination of the confluent ducts of the vesiculze seminales and
vasa deferentia, whilst it is tunnelled near its anterior aspect by the
commencement of the urethra. The glands of the prostate are best
considered as tubular alveoli which unite into a smaller number of
excretory ducts (about twenty) opening in two depressions of the
urethra known as the prostatic sinuses. The tubules are lined by
columnar epithelium.
The central recess before mentioned has been named the sinus
} «Anatomie Comparée.’
2 American Journal of Science and Art, yol. xvii., June 1879.
7]?
1886. } MR. J. B. SUTTON ON ATAVISM. 553
pocularis, utriculus, or uterus masculinus. Usually it is nearly half
an inch long, and opens by a narrow slit in the middle of the caput
gallinaginis. It is lined by mucous membrane continuous with that
of the urethra, and covered by stratified epithelium. Some small
tubular glands open on the free surface of the mucous membrane.
This utriculus is of great interest morphologically, as it represents
in the male a persistent portion of the confluent segment of the
Miillerian ducts. Weber regarded it as corresponding with the
uterus, but Leuckart showed that a part of it must be looked upon
as representing the vagina.
My observations induce me to regard the prostate as a suppressed
uterus, the fibro-muscular tissue representing the matricial walls, the
follicles correspond to the utricular glands, and the utriculus is
identical with the cervix uteri and that portion of the vagina
immediately adjacent.
The evidence in support of this view will now be put before the
reader. In order to render every detail in clear light, we must refer
briefly to the fundamental structures concerned in forming a func-
tional uterus.
In the Lizard, in common with the majority of the Sauropsida,
the ova are conveyed to the exterior by two muscular tubes lined
with mucous membrane, known as oviducts. The eggs, when they
escape from the ovaries, are received by the dilated end of the
oviduct, known as the infundibulum, and quickly passed onwards ;
they receive at the commencement of the journey a coating of albumen.
Pushed on by the contortions of the tube, they arrive at the third
or uterine portion. Here they receive a coating of calcareous matter
known as the shell, and are then ready for expulsion. In these
oviducts, with their mucous membranes and glands, we have the
fundamental condition of the ducts which in the human embryo
conspire to form the uterus with its Fallopian tubes and vagina.
In order to clearly describe the manner in which the Fallopian
tubes, uterus, and vagina are formed from the Miillerian ducts of
opposite sides, each duct may be conceived as made up of three
parts :-—
The upper third becomes the Fallopian tube; the funnel-shaped
and usually fimbriated extremity communicates with the peritoneal
cavity. The middle portions of the ducts fuse together, and form the
fundus, body, and neck of the uterus, whilst the lower thirds of the
Miillerian ducts form a vagina. Such is the commonest arrange-
ment.
On comparing the parts of this compound organ with the Lizard’s
oviduct, it becomes evident that the infundibulum and albumen
segment in the bird represent the Mammalian Fallopian tube, the
second or uterine portion corresponding with the uterus and vagina
of Eutheria.
On tracing the homologies closer, we find that the portion ot
the bird’s oviduct concerned in secreting albumen corresponds with
that portion of the Miillerian duct which forms the fundus and body
of .the uterus; and the utricular glands, which are coucerned in
554 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON ATAVISM. [Dec. 21,
secreting a thick, viscid, albuminous material, are simply modifica-
tions of the simple recesses found in the bird’s oviduct. The third,
or uterine section of the oviduct, corresponds to the cervix of the
uterus and the vagina. To this we shall return. In the male of
the higher mammals, theMiillerian ducts by their fusion give rise to
the utriculus. This cavity is formed by that portion of the ducts
which in the female constitute the cervix uteri and upper segment
of the vagina.
Excellent confirmatory evidence of this view is afforded by a rare
malformation to which the prostate is liable. Instead of the
Miillerian ducts disappearing after the posterior portions have fused
to form the utriculus, a segment of each may persist, so as to give
rise to a bicornuate utriculus, in fact a miniature uterus. In rarer
instances a Miillerian duct may persist through its entire length.
Such a case has been described by Dr. Ord*. There is good reason
to believe that some examples described as double ureters were of
this nature.
If the human prostate be examined by cutting it into slices in the
direction of the urethra, at any age after puberty, but much more
easily at fifty years, small brownish or black bodies, usually of the size
of poppy-seeds, will be detected. These bodies, familiar as prostatic
concretions, are, as a rule, very much smaller in young subjects, in
whom it is often necessary to scrape the cut section of the lateral
lobes of the prostate, and submit the juice to microscopic examina-
tion in order to detect them. Before puberty they are practically
absent ; in old age they may attain the dimensions of split peas.
In number they may vary from twenty to two thousand; in size
from z757 of an inch to that of a cherry-stone ; in colour bright red,
brown, or even black. In consistency they may be soft, hard, or
even brittle. Chemically they contain organic matter, about one
half, the rest being made up of phosphate and a small quantity of
carbonate of lime.
For a careful and detailed account of prostatic concretions, the
student should consult an excellent paper by Sir Henry Thompson,
entitled, ‘‘ Some observations on the Anatomy and Pathology of the
Adult Prostate ”’ °*.
In the preceding pages an endeavour has been made to prove that
the cervix of the uterus and contiguous portion of the vagina
correspond to the shell-forming segment of the bird’s oviduct. The
prostate and utriculus correspond to the uterine cervix and upper
part of the vagina, therefore they are homolegous with the shell-
forming segment of the bird’s oviduct.
The shell of an egg consists of animal matter impregnated with
salts of lime, and is due to the activity of the glands in the third
section of the oviduct. Prostatic concretions are due to the activity
of the glands lodged in the prostate. The inference is clear that
prostatic concretions and egg-shells agree structurally and chemically,
and are produced by homologous organs. ‘Thus man has in his
1 Medico-Chir. Trans, vol. lxiii. p. 11.
2 Medico-Chir. Trans. vol. x]. p. 78 (1857).
heh
1886. | MR. J. B. SUTTON ON ATAVISM. 555
prostate an unimpeachable witness of an ancestry with the feathered
tribe, low down among the oviparous reptiles.
Let me now proceed to show how very little information we possess
concerning latent germs which may be present in the embryo. For
example, the discovery of the germ of an os centrale in the carpus of
man was certainly startling. Yet its existence might have been
anticipated from what we know of the variations in the number of
the carpal ossicles in the adult. Atavism drew the attention of
anatomists to a secondary astragalus in the human tarsus, and Barde-
leben succeeded in detecting the germ. (This has been questioned by
Baur, but his objections are inconclusive.) We must now consider
some cases of a different character.
Atavism in relation to Secondary Sexual characters.
As Darwin points out}, two distinct elements are included under
the term “inheritance ’’—the transmission and the development of
characters. The distinction is a most important one, especially in
its bearing on the question of Atavism, that the two conditions will be
illustrated by concrete examples.
In most species of the Deer tribe it is the rule for the male alone
to possess antlers, yet it is a well attested circumstance that under
certain diseased conditions of the sexual organs, especially atrophy or
degeneration of the ovaries, rudimentary horns which are never shed
appear in the female.
This shows us that although the female is in possession of the
secondary sexual organs in virtue of transmission, yet they remain
latent as a rule, and only become developed under extraordinary
circumstances. The same holds good for those cases of hens who
for years lay eggs, yet eventually cease to do so, put on one side the
plumage proper to their sex, and adopt more or less completely the
plumage of the cock.
These examples open up the subject of secondary sexual charac-
ters. The question of primitive hermaphroditism has been already
discussed in a preceding paper, and an attempt was made to show
that, for a brief period at least, the embryo presents sexual parts
common to the male and female, so that for a time it is absolutely
impossible to determine the sex. What is true of the embryo applies
equally to animals normally hermaphrodite: no distinctive charac-
ters are displayed externally. Also in cases of hermaphroditism
occurring in animals normally bisexual, the secondary sexual charac-
ters are intermediate to those of the functional male and female. It
is therefore fairly evident that the female, though she differs from the
male in the non-development of secondary sexual characters, yet
possesses them in a latent condition; or, to put the matter briefly,
they are transmitted, but not developed.
‘This raises two questions, each of equal importance :—(1) How are
these characters transmitted? (2) What hinders their development?
It seems to me that the second of these questions is the one with
which we are chiefly concerned here, and that the non- development of
1 «Descent of Man,’ 2nd ed. p. 227.
556 MR. J. B. SUTION ON ATAVISM. [ Dee. 21,
secondary sexual characters can be explained on the principle known
as the “ Correlation of Organs.”
In order, however, to render this explanation tenable, it will be
absolutely necessary to prove, as far as possible, that the germs of
secondary sexual organs, which only manifest themselves occasionally
in the females of dimorphic forms, are really inherited ; and, if the
female is furnished with the germs of these structures, to show by
what method they are transmitted. It is to this somewhat intricate
part of the question that we niust now direct our attention.
If a careful analysis be made of those structures which constitute
secondary sexual characters, we shall find that they are almost entirely
developed in connection with the integument. The majority—
whether they be horns, bristles, spurs, or teeth, for attack or defence ;
or exuberance of hair, feathers, wattles, combs, &c., for esthetic
purposes,—the integument and the immediately subjacent tissues are
responsible for them.
In the earliest embryos of most mammals we distinguish at a
very early stage two layers of cells, known as the epiblast and hypo-
blast. In most of the Metazoa a new layer is interposed known as
the mesoblast ; this originates in part from the epi- and in part from
the hypoblast. It is the epiblast and the portion of mesoblast
immediately adjacent that furnishes secondary sexual organs. From
whence is the epiblast derived ?
-. We know new that the essential act of impregnation consists in
the union of a spermatozoon with an ovum; the head of the
spermatozoon constitutes the male pronucleus, the germinal area the
female pronucleus. After the pronuclei have united segmentation
begins, and the formation of the fundamental layers is quickly brought
about. ‘There are good grounds for believing that the initial streak
indicating the commencement of segmentation really marks the line
of fusion between male and female pronuclei.
If we measure the size of the head of a functional spermatozoon,
it will be found equal to ,),5 of an inch, whereas the germinal
area of the ovum equals =, of an inch. It is a very significant fact
that the segments which give rise to the epiblast are smaller than
those which furnish the hypoblast and mesoblast; to this there are
very few exceptions. This is exactly what might be expected, the
halves of a globe z=; of an inch in diameter would certainly be
smaller than the halves of a sphere one twelfth the size.
The facts at our disposal seem to point to the conclusion that the
epiblast is chiefly derived from the male element, while the female
pronucleus is responsible chiefly for the hypo- and greater portion of
the mesoblast.
If this be true, the transmission of characters peculiar to the male
is not so obscure as many have supposed.
We must now inquire howit is, that if the female possesses all the
secondary sexual characters of the male in a latent manner, what is
it that prevents them manifesting themselves.
When differentiation of sexes occurs in animals previously
hermaphrodite, it involves either the loss of certain characters on the
1886. ] MR. J. B. SUTTON ON ATAVISM. 557
part of the female, or the acquisition of new characters by the male,
or at any rate increased functional importance of certain organs
possessed, when in the state of hermaphroditism, by all the forms.
By natural selection the male would acquire (or, if already in his
possession in a functional condition, they would become more
developed) means for seizing and retaining the female, such as the
claspers of sharks, the callous pads of frogs, &c. Paternal duty
requires the male to protect the young and defend the females from
harm; hence horns, teeth (as in the musk-ox), spurs, tusks, &e.
become more developed in him.
The duties of the female require her not only to furnish the
material out of which the young are to be formed, but in many cases
she is required to provide them with nutrition long after they enter
the world. The material which the female thus provides is of the
very kind necessary, in many instances, to build up such structures
as horns, tusks, teeth, and the like. Further, this material is
required by the female at the corresponding period of life in which
they become developed in the male, viz. on the advent of puberty.
We may state with certainty that a distinct correlation exists
between the generative organs of the female and the development of
the secondary sexual male characters. The more developed and
functional the female reproductive organs become, the less likely is
she to manifest the secondary characters of the male. It may be
argued, that in some cases the female simulates the male, as in the
few examples of female Deer possessing horns. Quite true; but so
long as the female is engaged in the duties of reproduction, these
secondary characters are never developed to the same extent asin the
functional male. It must also be borne in mind, that in cases where
sterile females, or those which have ceased to bear young, put on
external male characters, they rarely attain such proportions or
beauty as in the male; for in the males the general excitement
produced upon the system by sexual passion has a most powerful
stimulant effect upon the growth and development of these structures,
which is wanting inthe female. So that in her attempts to emulate
the male she succeeds to a certain degree, but rarely, if ever, attains
to so good a condition.
Hunter has recorded some experiments which have a bearing on
this matter :—
**j wished also to ascertain if the parts peculiar to the male could
grow on the female, and if the parts of a female, on the contrary,
would grow on a male.
** Although I had formerly transplanted the testicles of a cock into
the abdomen of a hen, and they had sometimes taken root there, but
not frequently, and then had never come to perfection, yet the
experiment could not, from this cause, answer fully the intended
purpose ; there is, I believe, a natural reason to believe it could not,
and the experiment was therefore disregarded. I took the spur
from the leg of a young cock, and placed it in the situation of the
spur in the leg of a hen-chicken ; it took root, the chicken grew to
a hen, but at first no spur grew, while the spur that was left on the
558 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [ Dec. 21,
other leg of the cock grew as usual. This experiment I have
repeated several times in the same manner, with the same effects,
which led me to conceive that the spur of a cock would not grow
upon a hen, and that they were, therefore, to be considered as distinet
animals, having very distinct powers. In order to ascertain this, I
took the spurs of hen chickens and placed them on the legs of young
cocks. I found that those which took root grew nearly as fast, and
to as large a size as the natural spur on the other leg, which
appeared to be a contradiction to my other experiments. Upon
another examination of my hens, however, I found that the spurs had
grown considerably, although they had taken several years to do it ;
for I found that the same quantity of growth in the spur of a cock,
while on the cock, during one year, was as much as that of the cock’s
spur on the hen in the course of three or four years, or as three
or four to one; whereas the growth of the hen’s spur on the cock
was to that of the proper spur of the hen as two to one.”
When a female animal belonging to a dimorphic species assumes
male characters, it is truly an example of Atavism, or development
of transmitted characters normally latent.
This part of the matter has been dwelt upon at some length for
the following important reason. If we regard the epiblast and
the structures developed therefrom as representing the chief cha-
racters derived from the male parent, it opens up a field of interesting
inquiry in clinical medicine and pathology regarding hereditary
diseases, and it demonstrates clearly enough that we have little
knowledge concerning the germs of organs which may be latent in
an animal; therefore Neogenetic Atavism is, at its best, exceedingly
questionable. To assume that such a form of Atavism exists, is to
believe in the sudden development of new characters: this is totally
opposed to the fundamental principles of Evolution.
The question is one of great importance to the pathologist,
inasmuch as there is very great probability that many aberrations of
organs and tissues are atavistic in their nature.
2. On the Systematic Position and Classification of Sponges.
By R. v. Lenpenrerp, Ph.D., F.L.S., Assistant in the
Biological Laboratory of University College, London.
[Received December 20, 1886.]
I. Introductory Remarks, p. 558.
IL. Nomenclature of Spicules, p. 559.
III. The Systematic Position of Sponges, p. 564.
IV. The Classification of Sponges, p. 570.
V. Key to the Recent Families of Sponges, p. 589.
VI. Appendix. List of Publications, p. 592.
I. InrRopuctrory Remarks.
Our knowledge of the development and structure of Sponges is of
such recent date that we have hardly had time to utilize it for
systematic purposes till now.
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 559
Whilst the anatomical and embryological work of recent authors,
particularly of F. E. Schulze and his pupils, has made us acquainted
with the structure of Sponges in a satisfactory manner, our know-
ledge of species, which was formerly practically confined to those
from the Mediterranean and the Atlantic, has been greatly extended
by the collections made during the voyages of the ‘Alert’ and
‘Challenger’ in all parts of the world, and by my own labours in
the Australian seas.
I think, therefore, that the time has now arrived to endeavour to
establish a classification of Sponges, and to discuss the position
which the Sponges, as a group, occupy in the scale of Nature.
In an Appendix to this paper a nearly complete list of publications
on Sponges is given. It has been made by interpolating old, new,
and omitted papers in D’Arcy Thomson’s (1495) list of 551 papers,
the references in which have been verified. I must express my
thanks to Mrs. v. Lendenfeld and to Mr. A. Dendy for their share in
this work, and also to Mr. Ridley for his kindness in allowing us
to use his most valuable MS. notes on this subject.
In the section on the systematic position of Sponges, the principal
views held on the subject are discussed, and reasons are given for
considering the Sponges as the first Phylum of the Grade Ccelentera,
which arrangement has been adopted in this paper.
The main classification of the Orders is the result of my own anato-
mical work, and has been arrived at independently of other authors.
It affords me much pleasure to state that this classification is, in the
main, similar to that established by Vosmaer (1550), although we
have arrived at our results in different ways, and our diagnoses
differ accordingly.
To that section of this paper which deals with the arrangement of
the Families and Subfamilies, and the enumeration of the principal
Genera, Mr. A. Dendy has contributed the portions relating to the
Suborders Clavulina and Halichondrina with the exception of the
Tethyde and Chalininee. The portions relating tothe Hexactinellida
and Tetractinellida are compiled from the recent papers of Schulze
(1369), Sollas (1458), Vosmaer (1550), and Zittel (1639). The
remainder is based on my own MS. notes.
II. NoMENCLATURE OF THE SPICULES.
Various terms for the spicules found in Sponges have been used
by different authors. In consequence of this a certain confusion
has arisen with regard to the meaning of the terms employed.
Vosmaer (1550) made a chivalrous attempt to establish a satisfactory
Nomenclature, which, however, has unfortunately not been accepted
by recent authors on Sponges except myself, so that it only added
to the already existing confusion,
Recently Sollas, Ridley, and Dendy have established a new nomen-
clature for Monaxonid spicules, which I have agreed to adopt, and
which has been used by them and myself. I do not think it perfect,
but I am certainly not in a position to replace it by anything better,
and therefore adopt and explain it in this paper. Schulze’s nomen-
560 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
clature of Hexactinellid spicules is here, of course, accepted en bloc,
and his terms will be defined below. Sollas (1453) has used a
number of terms in his preliminary report which I do not under-
stand and which presumably nobody else understands either. It is,
therefore, much to be regretted that the greater part of them are
unexplained. In consequence of this I will, for the present, abstain
from attempting to compile a nomenclature of Tetraxonid spicules
pending the publication of Sollas’s full report, in which, we may
hope, he will explain his new terms.
The spicules of Sponges are, as a rule, of such shape that they
appear as more or less modified geometrical figures with definite axes.
The axes are always represented by a non-skeletal rod (the so-called
axial canal), round which the silica or lime is precipitated in con-
centric layers. There may be one such axis, or there may be more
than one.
Hickel (627) drew attention to this crystalline regularity of
sponge-spicules, which has been of great importance in studying the
skeletal elements of Sponges.
We can divide the sponge-spicules, as we do the Sponges, into the two
groups Calcarea and Silicea, according to their chemical composition,
Within each group we distinguish series of forms according to the
number and position of the axes. ‘The validity of this classification
is proved by the correlation of these different kinds of spicules with
other organs in the Sponges.
The following are the different kinds of spicules :—
I. Group Sprcuta CaLcaRrEa.
Composed chiefly of carbonate of lime.
1. Monaxonia.
With one straight or curved axis, rod-shaped.
2. Triazxonia.
With three distinct axes which may lie in one plane or not.
When one of the rays of this tri-act spicule becomes rudimentary,
Diaxonia can theoretically be produced. It is, however, advantageous
to consider the Diaxon spicules as part of the Triaxonia. The
calcareous triaxon spicules have only three rays—triact.
3. Tetravonia.
With four axes and four rays—tetract. The points form the
corners of a triangular pyramid. Generally three axes, or rays, are
equivalent (tangential), and one (radial) is differentiated, longer or °
shorter than the others.
II. Group Sercuna Srxicea.
Composed chiefly of silica.
1. Anawonia.
Without definite axes and with numerous rays—polyact.
To this group belongs one kind of spicule only, namely the stellate
and its derivatives.
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 561
The following six forms can be distinguished :—
A. Regularia.
The rays radiating from one point.
1. Oxyaster.
With long, slender, pointed rays (e. g. Stelletta). = st, Vosmaer.
2. Euaster.
With stout, pointed, conic rays (e. g. Chondrilla). =gl. st, Vosmaer.
3. Spheraster.
The rays coalesce to form a solid ball (e.g. Geodia).=gl, Vosmaer.
B. Irregularia.
The centre extends to form a line which may be curved, circular,
ring-shaped, or spiral.
4. Spiraster.
A stout spiral with thick spines attached (e.g. Raphyrus). = sé’,
Vosmaer. When spines terminal, Amphiaster.
5. Corona.
A spined ring (e.g. Suberocorona) (°).
6. Spirula.
A spiral without spines ia g. Spiretta).
These anaxon spicules never form part of the supporting skeleton,
but are invariably flesh-spicules (Microsclera).
2. Monaxonia.
With one straight or curved axis, sometimes with lamellar out-
growths.
A. Supporting Spicules (Megasclera).
1. Strongylus.
A cylindrical rod rounded at each end (e. I: Uruguaga). = tr’,
Vosmaer.
2. Owystrongylus.
A cylindrical rod abruptly pointed at each end (e. g. Pachychalina).
3. Oxyus.
A gradually pointed, spindle-shaped spicule (e.g. Spongilla).
= ac, ac, and ac’, Vosmaer. Diact, F. E. Schulze.
4. Tylotus.
A cylindrical rod with a knob at each end (e. g. Crella). = tr™,
Vosmaer.
5. Tylostylus.
A cylindrical rod more or less pointed at one end and knobbed at
the other (e. g. Suberites). = tr° ac, Vosmaer. Without knob, Stylus.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXXVII. 37
562 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
B. Flesh-Spicules (Microsclera).
6. Towius.
Curved in the centre, the two ends in a straight line, thus __ (e.g.
Toxochalina).=f\, Vosmaer. When in bundles, 7owodragmata.
7. Sigmata.
S-shaped, curved irregularly, not expanded in one plane (e. g. Gel-
liodes).= ~, Vosmaer. When in bundles, Sigmadragmata.
8. Isochele.
Curved spicules with flat expanded ends extending in the surface of
a rotation ellipsoid ; both ends equal (e.g. Desmacidonide). =anc’,
Vosmaer. Anchorates, auctorum.
9. Anisochele.
Curved spicules with flat expanded ends extending in the surface
of a rotation ellipsoid ; ends unequal (e. g. Desmacidonide). =anc,
anc, Vosmaer, Anchorates, auctorum.
10. Diankistra.
A rod with a hook at each end, divided by a remarkable incision
(e. g. Vomerula).=- J Vosmaer. Bundles of hair-like spicules,
Trichodragmata.
3. Triazonia.
Spicules with three axes and six rays and their derivatives. (For
details compare F. E. Schulze’s preliminary report.)
1. Oxyhevact.
With six pointed rays, the ends of which form the corners of a
double square pyramid. The rays represent the crystalline axes.
2. Owypentact.
One ray rudimentary, representing the axes of a simple square
pyramid.
3. Oxytetract.
Two rays rudimentary, representing the edges of a square pyramid.
4. Oxydiact.
Four rays rudimentary, only two rays lying in one straight line
remain.
5. Hezaster.
A star with six, generally equal rays :—
a. Oxyhexaster. Rays pointed.
b. Discohexaster. Rays terminated by disks.
c. Floricome. Rays terminated by a bunch of curved branches.
4, Graphiohexaster. Rays much curved.
Plumicome. ays terminated with a number of plumose
branches.
6. Pinnule.
A star with five or six rays. One of them is particularly highly
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 563
developed and branched or covered with disks or scales. The oppo-
site ray smooth or absent. The other four equal (tangential).
7. Scopule.
Fork- or broom-shaped spicules consisting of a long shaft traversed
by an axial rod, to the distal end of which some, generally four,
slender anaxial rods are attached.
8. Amphidise.
A rod with an umbrella-shaped disk at each end.
9. Uncinate.
A rod with recurved hooks throughout its entire length.
10. Clavule.
A rod pointed at one end and bearing a knob or disk at the other.
4. Tetraxonia.
With four axes radiating from one point. The ends of the
spicules lie in the corners of a square pyramid and their derivatives.
A. Tetractina.
With four rays.
B. Triactina.
With three rays.
C. Diactina.
With two rays.
D. Monactina.
With one ray.
For the reasons given above, I shall abstain from describing the
Tetraxonian spicules in detail. I will, however, mention the terms
for spicules employed by Sollas in his preliminary report (1453).
These, alphabetically arranged, are the following :—
Acerate (Monaxon). Globate (Scleraster).
Acerella (Monaxon ?), Globules (?).
Amphiaster (?). Hispidating Acerate (Monaxonia),
Amphiastrella (Spirastrella ?). xOne-pronged (unicellate) Forks.
xAmphitetrad. xPorrectate Forks.
Anchors. Pyenaster (?).
Anthaster (?). Radical Anchors,
Arculus (?). Sigmella (?).
Bifurcated Forks, #xSomal Anchor.
Calthrops (?). Somatic Anchor.
Candelabra. Spinispirule (Spirastrella).
Chiaster (?). Spirule (Spirulz).
Cylindrical spicules (Monaxonia ?). Stellate (?).
Echinella (?). xTetrad.
Ecta.ter (?). xTriona.
Erdaster (?). Trichite Acerates (Monaxonia),
*Forls. *Trichite Forks.
«Forks with trifurcate arms. xTrifid Forks.
*Fusiform Acerates (Monaxonia). *xTwo-pronged (dicellate) Forks,
The names marked * presumedly apply to Tetraxon spicules. The
others probably belong to different groups.
37*
564 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Deec. 21,
These pages will give a key to the terms of spicules used below.
There are, however, a number of other terms which require
explanation.
The spicules are divided generally into two distinct groups :—
(1) Those which together form the supporting skeleton of the
sponge: these are called Supporting spicules or Megasclera.
(2) Those which lie scattered in the ground-substance and which
differ from the former in shape: these are called Flesh-spicules or
Microsclera (Tension-spicules of Bowerbank). 4
F. E. Schulze (1369) uses particular terms for spicules according
to their position, which have been adopted in this paper so far as
the Hexactinellids are concerned.
These are alphabetically the following :—
Autodermalia. Spicules on the outer surface with free projecting
and with centripetal (immersed) differentiated rays.
Autogastralia, Spicules on the gastral surface with free pro-
jecting and with centrifugal (immersed) differentiated rays.
Basalia. Spicules of the root-tuft.
Comitalia. Spicules accompanying the fibres.
Epidermalia. Spicules on the outer surface with free projecting
differentiated ray only.
Epigastralia. Spicules on the gastral surface with free projecting
differentiated ray only.
Hypodermalia. Spicules of the outer surface with immersed
radial ray only.—Pentact.
Hypogastralia. Spicules of the gastral surface with immersed
radial ray only.—Pentact.
Marginalia, Spicules forming a collar round the osculum.
Parenchymalia. Spicules in the interior.
Pleuralia. Spicules forming a fur.
Principalia, Spicules of the main skeleton.
Ill. Tur Systematic Posirion or SPONGEs.
The opinions of different authors on this subject diverge con-
siderably. I shall attempt to reconcile them in the following pages
and to prove the correctness of the result at which I have arrived.
Aristotle first pointed out that the Sponges were not plants—a fact
which seems clear enough now, but which was doubted and combated
by most authors of the dismally ignorant middle ages. This we
admit as proved. I agree with Hackel in dividing the organic world
into the three groups—Plants, Protista, and Animals. Among the
Protista there are a great majority of forms showing affinities either
to animals or to plants, so that it is not unusual to split up the
Protista and divide its members among the two other old estab-
lished groups. For the sake of simplicity I adopt this course
here.
The Animal Kingdom, in this wider sense, including the animal
Protista, is naturally to be divided into Protozoa and Metazoa, of
~
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES, 565
which the former consist of similar and equal, undifferentiated, cells,
which often remain isolated throughout life, whilst the latter pass
through a unicellular stage of short duration only, and consist,
when adult, of a number of different cells. There is a vast dif-
ference between these two groups: the Protozoa are isocellular,
whilst the Metazoa are heterocellular. The Sponges are developed
in the same way as all other Metazoa and pass through the same
well-known embryonic stages—the Morula, Blastula, &c. They
consist, when adult, of a great number of differentiated cells. There
are flat epithelial cells all over the outer surface and on the canal-
wall; there are collar-cells round the ciliated chambers. There
are gland-cells for different purposes, muscular and nervous cells
besides ordinary tissue and ameeboid cells in the Mesoglcea or
ground-substance, in which also the ova and spermatozoa are
developed. It is therefore quite clear that the Sponges are not Pro-
tozoa, but Metuzoa, and are, in fact, not similar to Protozoa in any
way.
The Metazoa are naturally divided into two Groups or Grades—
the Ceelentera, with a simple undivided body-cavity, all the parts
of which are in direct connection with one another; and the Ceelo-
mata, which have two distinct and entirely separated body-cavities—a
gastral cavity and a ccelom or perigastric cavity. The Sponges
certainly have a simple and continuous body-cavity and no trace of
a ccelom, so that they must be regarded as Ccelentera.
Long before Hertwig established the ccelom theory, Leuckart
had already perceived this important fact, and placed the Sponges
among the Ceelentera accordingly.
Although nobody has ever attempted to regard the Sponges as
Ccelomata, there has been great opposition, principally among English
authors, to Leuckart’s opinion. I dismiss the arguments of those
who, like James Clark (284-294), Carter (166), and Saville Kent
(772), regard the Sponges as Protozoa, on the ground that their idea
of Protozoa does not harmonize with the generally adopted meaning of
the term, for if it did, they could not, as logical thinkers, count the
Sponges among them. Their idea of Protozoa comprises the whole
Animal Kingdom, because they draw no distinction between isocellular
and heterocellular organisms, and of course all Metazoa are, if this
distinction be omitted, colonies of unicellular Protozoa. F. E.
Schulze (1361) has taken the unnecessary trouble to refute Saville
Kent’s (772) statements in detail, and to show that the latter had
been guilty not only of levity in the philosophical treatment of his
work, but also of recording incorrect observations.
Some very excellent men, particularly Balfour (17), Biitschli (138),
and Sollas (1440), are inclined to consider the Sponges as a separate
group equal in value to our groups Metazoa and Protozoa. This
arrangement was arrived at without regard to the division of the
Metazoa into Ccelentera and Ccelomata. They contrast the sub-
kingdom Porifera (Parazoa, Sollas) with the subkingdom Metazoa as
a whole. With all respect to the most important opinion of Balfour,
I still do not see that there is any justification for the establishment of
566 DR. Rs VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
a special Subkingdom for the Sponges. They are evidently Metazoa,
and no doubt Ceelentera in the sense given above, namely the Grade
Ceelentera as opposed to the Grade Ccelomata.
I think therefore that the Sponges form part of the Grade
Ccelentera, and I do not believe that any one will raise any objection
to this statement.
Now, however, we have to approach a much more difficult task,
and that is, to ascertain what position the Sponges occupy within
the Grade Ceelentera.
In this Grade we must place, besides the Sponges, one very well-
defined group of animals (the Jellyfish, Hydroids, Corals, and Cteno-
phora) which is not connected with other animals by any inter-
mediate form. There can be no doubt of the comparatively close
affinity of all these, and the sharp distinction between them and the
Sponges. In a like manner the Sponges are an exceedingly well
circumscribed group, without any transitions in any direction to
other animals. The Grade Ceelentera comprises, therefore, two
well-defined groups :—(1) the Mesodermalia (910) or Sponges ; and
(2) the Epithelaria (910) or Nematopbora (Lankester), Cnidaria
(Claus), Telifera (Marshall), as they are variously termed.
A. In the Mesodermalia the archenteron communicates with the
outer water by numerous small pores through which the water-
current enters; and by one or a few larger pores termed oscula or
vents, through which the water is expelled. It consists here of a
branching canal-system.
In the Epithelaria there is no branching canal-system. The anus
and mouth are not distinguished, and the mouth or mouths are
equivalent to all the openings of the canal-system of sponges. Only
exceptionally two different kinds of pores are met with, as in certain
Actiniz with terminally open tentacles; but there is no regular
current of water through these pores.
_ B. The gastrula of the Mesodermalia is generally produced by
invagination.
The gastrula of the Epithelaria, on the other hand, is generally
the result of delamination.
C. The Mesodermalia have no movable appendages wherewith
to catch their prey.
The Epithelaria have such appendages.
D. The Mesodermalia are not armed with cnidoblasts or their
homologues.
The Epithelaria are defended by cnidoblasts or their homologues.
Although these differences are important, yet the principal dis-
tinction between these two groups, to which I drew attention at the
Me meeting of the British Association (Meeting 1886), is the fol-
owing :-—
E. The Mesodermalia have invariably simple ectodermal and
entodermal epithelia, the cells of which are always flat pavement-
cells, and never converted into muscular, glandular, sexual, or sensi-
tive elements. The muscular, connective, slime-producing glandular,
skeleton-producing glandular, sexual, sensitive, ganglionic and amee-
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES, 567
boid cells met with in the Sponges are invariably modified cells of the
mesogleea. This is particularly striking and important in the case of
the muscular and sensitive elements.
The Epithelaria, on the other hand, have a mesoglea the cells of
which remain more or less amceboid and are not differentiated to any
extent. The muscular, glandular, sexual, sensitive, ganglionic and
defensive nettle-cells are produced in the epithelia, they sink below
the outer cell-layer with advancing development and lie on the sur-
face of the mesoglcea or supporting lamella.
By a process of folding and subsequent coalescing of the fold-
margins, bundles of muscular cells may become immersed in the
mesogloea, and so form a mesodermal structure, which, however,
must be considered a secondary mesoderm, as compared to the
primary mesoderm represented by the mesogloea and its cells. But
they are invariably produced first from the epithelia and immersed
afterwards, and always retain their epithelial character in clothing
the walls of tubular cavities in the mesoglcea. Single muscular cells
are never surrounded on all sides by the mesoglcea. Solid bundles
of muscular cells do not occur. Exceptionally nettle-cells (Cram-
bessa) may be found in the mesoglcea, which is also here and there
traversed by nerve-fibres (Cycloneurous Meduse).
From a common sac-shaped ancestral form with simple ectoderm,
simple entoderm, and undifferentiated cells in the intervening meso-
gloea, representing the type of the Ccelentera, both Mesodermalia
and Epithelaria have been developed. In the case of the Mesodermalia
the cells of the mesogloea became differentiated, and produced the
organs, whilst the epithelia remained simple. In the case of the
Epithelaria the cells of the mesogloea remained unchanged and the
organs were produced by the epithelia. I regard this as the
principal difference dividing the two groups, and have therefore
established the term Epithelaria in contradistinction to Mesoder-
malia (J. c.).
Having thus described the points of distinction, it remains that
we should ascertain their phylogenetic value. There are only two
alternatives with regard to the value we may attach to the Sponges
as.a group.
Either we must assume that within the Grade Ccelentera the
Phylum Mesodermalia and the Phylum Epithelaria should be distin-
guished ; or we may say that there is only one phylunin the Grade
Ceelentera, namely the Phylum Ccelentera, and that this should
be divided into the two Subphyla Mesodermalia and Epithelaria. It is
evident that it comes much to the same thing. In this matter I
adopt F. E. Schulze’s opinion (1369), and consider the Sponges a
separate phylum.
The result of this critical examination is given in the accompanying
tabular view.
If we express this arrangement in the usual manner, we have :-—
DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
568
‘VHOHAONTLD SS¥IQ “G "WSAAUNOHAXOY S8UIQ) “F ‘VIUVINILOY 8SefO ‘g ‘WSNCINOUGATY SSV[Q *Z "WIONOdG S8U[Q
| | |
‘stig AJUD *plosn poy ‘prodAjog ‘ssvtQ ATU ‘ssviQ A[UO
Cg ee a |
*DIONIVYT SLY ‘Dyjoonydy Seley *T
‘agyjaoeyd UIEAL ‘e[poowgd quoyyt A
‘yuoHdoNaLD dnory °z ‘wshdaWwodATog dnowy *T
*SJ8U[qoprue ynoy}IA
pue smo.t-oyppud yr AQ. ‘sysv[qopruo 414 prodéjog
‘VITYNudaosayy wnsyg “Tt
“erpoyyidy otf} FO s[peo “ea Sosa, OY} FO S[T99
viody podoyaaop suvs19 wo pedopesop suRsIQ
a
“VLVINOTDO 9PBD VURINATWDD P&H T
“JOUTJSIP SOT}TATO
nec fee [eaqsey “Aqravo-Spoq eydunis WAI AA
VOZOLOUd Wopsuryqng ‘T
FOV Te0010}0 77 “ae [N][A00sy
ries SPECS aaeh YT iy soe
"VITVIAINY ™opsuryy
‘VINVIGHLIagy wnysgg -Z
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES, 569
Kingdom ANIMALIA.
I. Subkingdom PROTOZOA.
Animals which are either unicellular, or, if multicellular, isocellular,
without archenteron.
II, Subkingdom METAZOA.
Multicellular, heterocellular animals with archenteron.
I. Grade CHXLENTERA.
Metazoa with simple body-cavity.
i. Phylum MesopERMALIA.
Ceelentera with branching canal-system, and organs developed
from cells of the mesoglcea or primary mesoderm. No movable
appendages.
1. Class SPONGIA.
With the characters of the phylum.
i. Phylum EprrHEvARIA.
Ceelentera with czecal canal-system. The organs are developed
from cells of the epithelia. With movable appendages.
1. Group PotyromeEpus2&.
Polypoid Epithelaria with cnidoblasts.
i. Series Aphacelle.
Polypomedusze without entodermal phacellee.
2. Class HYDROMEDUSA.
Aphacelle of polypoid and medusoid character. Meduse
eycloneur,
ii. Series Phacellote.
Polypomedusze with entodermal phacelle.
3. Class ACTINIARIA.
Polypoid Phacellotz with funnel and septa.
4, Class SCYPHOMEDUSA.
Medusoid Phacellote developed direct or from a Scyphostoma by
strobilation. Toponeur,
II. Group Crenornora.
Epithelaria with paddle-rows without enidoblasts. Centroneur.
5. Class CTENOPHORA.
With the characters of the group.
II. Grade COAALOMATA.
Metazoa with distinct gastral and ccelomic cavities.
570 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE sysTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
IV. Tue CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES.
Having thus ascertained the systematic position of the Sponges as
a group, we now approach the second part of our work.
Every one will agree that no satisfactory classificatory system of
Sponges exists at present. Spongologists are in the habit of approach-
ing this subject with great caution, I may say with diffidence.
It is a remarkable fact that the leading spongologist of the day,
my esteemed teacher Prof. F. E. Schulze, in Berlin, has not attempted
to work out a classificatory system of Sponges, whilst others have
made some desultory efforts in that direction. It is self-evident
that the systems established by Bowerbank, O. Schmidt, Gray, and
others, which date from a time when virtually nothing was known
. about Sponges, have now become obsolete. The most successful
attempt at establishing a system of Sponges is doubtless that of
Vosmaer (1550), who, however, approaches his task with great
diffidence ; everywhere we meet in his work with ‘ preliminary ”
classifications. Some geologists, principally Zittel (1635) and Sollas
(1455), have classified the Sponges in a rather high-handed manner,
establishing subclasses, orders, &c., without regard to details like
families and genera. Zittel particularly attached too much importance
to the fossil Sponges.
In the groups themselves more satisfactory detail work has recently
been done. F. E. Schulze (1369) has worked out the Hexactinellids
of the ‘ Challenger’ with results which are as valuable and useful
as the material at his disposal was abundant and interesting. Zittel
(1626-1629) has in a satisfactory manner dealt witb the fossil
Sponges belonging to the same group. The Lithistids and Tetractinel-
lids, both fossil and recent, have been carefully investigated by Zittel
(1639) and Sollas (1453). 1 (888) have, with the aid of the works
of Hackel (627-629) and Poléjaeff (1179) at my disposal, established
a system of Calcareous Sponges based on my investigations of the
rich Australian Sponge-fauna, which appears fairly satisfactory.
The Monactinellids have been carefully studied by Vosmaer (1545),
Ridley (1261), and Ridley and Dendy (1265-1266), and I have
myself devoted much labour to their investigation, and have made
(870) an attempt at classifying them, which, however, was unsuc-
cessful. The Australian Fauna is exceedingly rich in Monactinellids,
and my collection, of over 300 species, has enabled me to work
out the classification of some of the groups in detail.
No attempt has hitherto been made to classify the Horny Sponges
excepting one, contained in a short paper of Vosmaer (1552),
establishing five groups, in accordance with the views previously
expressed by myself (868), and based on the result of the researches
into the structure of horny sponges by F. E. Schulze (1345, 1348,
1349, 1351) and myself (868). The Australian marine fauna is ex-
ceedingly rich in horny sponges, so that I have been enabled to
work out their relationsbips in detail.
If we review the Sponges as a whole, we shall be struck with
the great fundamental difference between the Calcareous and all
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 571
the other Sponges. Grant (526) was the first to point this out,
and he accordingly divided the Sponges into Calcarea and Non-
Calearea. Vosmaer (1550) agrees in this point with Grant and uses
his terms. I have also (888) adopted the same view. In this
paper I intend to alter the term Non-Calearea, which is misleading,
inasmuch as it might be interpreted as meaning that the group so
named consisted of very heterogeneous elements, coinciding with each
other only in one, and that a negative character. This is not the case.
I divide the Classis Spongize accordingly into two Subclasses, I. Cal-
carea, and ITI. Silicea.
The point of distinction between these two Subclasses is, that all
the Calcarea have a skeleton composed of spicules consisting chiefly
of carbonate of lime. All the other Sponges, which I comprise
under the heading Silicea, either have a skeleton composed of sili-
ceous spicules or have been derived phylogenetically from siliceous
Sponges, and have only recently lost their spicules or replaced them
with a horny support. O. Schmidt (1305) and also myself (870)
were inclined to think that some of the siliceous Sponges had
descended from horny ones. I have, howey er, since abandoned this
view (901), and consider that the opposite direction of develop-
ment, which Vosmaer (1558) advocates, is the correct one.
We have accordingly :—
Classis SPONGLAS.
Skeleton composed chiefly of Skeleton originally composed
carbonate of lime. of siliceous spicules.
I. Subclassis CaucarEa. II. Subclassis Srzicea.
As mentioned above, in the critical introduction to this chapter, I
have nothing to add to my system of Calcareous Sponges (888)
published some time ago, and I adopt it unchanged in this paper.
The Calcarea are a very much smaller group than the Silicea. In
this Subclass we only distinguish one Order, the Calcispongiz
(Blainville); whilst the Silicea must be divided into several Orders,
and it is here that we meet with the greatest difficulty in ascertaining
the true relationship of the different forms. There are no transitions
between the two subclasses. In examining the structure of a great
number of Sponges belonging to this second group, the subclass
Silicea, I found that they can be arranged in three Groups, which
will appear as Orders in my system. These are the Hexactinellida,
the Chondrospongi, and the Cornacuspongiz. These groups are
fairly distinct, and transitional forms connecting them are rare. The
Sponges of these Orders are descended from siliceous Sponges, and
show the same tendency of development within each group.
In the Hexactinellida we invariably meet with a skeleton composed
of triaxial spicules; these are often attached to each other by a
siliceous cement which greatly strengthens the structure.
All authors agree that the Hexactinellida form a well-defined
group. The remaining Silicea, however, are a very mixed lot, and
before Vosmaer, no satisfactory arrangement of them had been arrived
572 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Deec. 21,
at. The one I propose in this paper, which is similar to that of
Vosmaer, is certainly very far from being as perfect as I would like
to make it; but I think that at all events it is much more likely to
express the relationship of Sponges in a correct manner than any
other existing arrangement.
The subclass Silicea minus the order Hexactinellida comprises the
Sponges with a skeleton composed of tetraxial spicules (the Tetrac-
tinellida and Lithistide of Marshall and other authors), the Sponges
with monaxial spicules (the Monactinellida of Zittel and other
authors), the Sponges with a horny skeleton and without spicules in
the supporting skeleton (the Ceraospongiz or Keratosa of many
authors), and, finally, the Sponges without any supporting skeleton
at all (the Myxospongize of Hiickel).
At first sight all these forms appear connected with each other in
every direction by transitional forms to such an extent that it seems
hopeless to bring order into this chaotic mass. A careful investi-
gation of many forms shows that all the familiar groups Tetracti-
nellida, Lithistidse, Monactinellida, Ceraospongiee, and Myxospongiz
run into each other at every point. If one, however, for years
endeavours to find some constancy in the varying characters of any
chaotic mass of this kind, he at last generally arrives at an idea which
seems clear enough when once grasped. And then one only wonders
how it was that it had not been conceived a long time ago. So it
was also in this case. I found that all these Sponges could be very
naturally divided into ¢wo Orders—the above-mentioned Chondro-
spongie and Cornacuspongie, the first of which comprises the
Lithistids, Tetractinellida, and portions of the Monactinellida, together
with most Myxospongie ; whilst the second contains all the Cerao-
spongiz, and the remainder of the Monactinellids and Myxo-
spongiz.
We find that the ground-substance, the mesodermal intercellular
substance or Mesogleea, as it is variously termed, is more or less hard
and cartilage-like in the Chondrospongiz, and that in these the spi-
cules remain isolated. The spicules are either tetraxon or tylostyles,
less frequently styles. The monaxon spicules are monact, thereby
indicating their closer affinity with the tetraxon spicules. The
necessary toughness is given to these Sponges not by a cementing of
the spicules, but by a hardening of the ground-substance. In some
the spicules disappear altogether, as in Oscarella, which is an aske-
letous form of Plakina, and in Chondrosia, which is an askeletous
sponge belonging to the Tethya group.
In the Cornacuspongiz, on tbe other hand, there is no tendency
towards a hardening of the ground-substance discernible. The
ground-substance remains soft and gelatinous, and the necessary
toughness is given to the sponge by the formation of a substance not
found in other Sponges, which cements the spicules together. This
substance is chemically and physically comparable to silk or horn,
and is known as Spongin.
The spongin may become very voluminous and the spicules
scarce and small. ‘They may finally disappear altogether, and then
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 573
we have Ceraospongiz before us. Transitional forms between the
Cornacuspongie with supporting spicules cemented by spongin, and
Cornacuspongiz without spicules in their fibres (horny sponges),
are not unfrequent.
One whole subfamily, the Chalininee, comprising nearly 300 species,
is composed of such transitional forms. The supporting spicules met
with in the Cornacuspongiz are invariably monaxon without a
swelling at one end. Besides these more or less rod-shaped sup-
porting spicules, we also find in some of the Sponges belonging
to this group so-called flesh-spicules—small, irregular curved or
complicated elements scattered throughout the Mesoglcea. These
occur associated with spicules in the fibrous supporting skeleton
and also in those forms which have no spicules in their horny
supporting skeleton. To this group also the genera Halisarca and
Bayalus belong, which have no skeleton at all, and appear as
askeletous forms of the Aplysillide type. The term Cornacuspongize
was established by Vosmaer (1550), and used by him in a very similar
sense to that in which it is used here. The group Chondrospongie,
on the other hand, is in the sense given above a new one; it nearly
coincides with Vosmaer’s group Spiculispongiz (1550). In a former
paper (889) I had retained the group Myxospongiee, for the sake of
convenience, preliminarily only, and agreeing at the time with Sollas
(1440) that it was unnatural. The manner in which I have distri-
buted the members of the Myxospongiz among other groups is in
accordance with the view expressed by F. E. Schulze in a letter.
We have accordingly to divide the subclass Silicea into three
groups in the following manner :—
Subclassis SIZICHA, Lendenfeld.
Mesoglcea soft ; support- Mesogleea hard ; tough- Mesoglcea soft ; support-
ingskeleton oftenstrength- | nessachieved by the hard- | ing skeleton strengthened
ened withsiliceouscement. | ening of the ground-sub- | by spongin cement; or
Spicules triaxon. stance. Spicules tetraxon, | exclusively formed of
monaxon, anaxon, or ab- spongin, with or without
sent; generally corticate. | foreign bodies. Spicules
monaxon, or absent.
2. Ordo HEXACTI- 3. Ordo CHONDRO- 4, Ordo CORNACU-
NELLIDA, SPONGLA, SPONGLE,
O. Schmidt. Lendenfeld. V osmaer.
Expressed in the usual manner, the class Spongize would be
accordingly divided into four Orders in the following manner :—
Classis SPONGIZ, auctorum.
Ceelentera with branching canal-system, without movable appen-
dages ; the organs of which are developed from cells of the mesoglea.
With simple epithelia.
I. Subclassis CALCAREA, Grant.
Spongiz with a skeleton composed of spicules which consist
chiefly of carbonate of lime.
074 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dee. 21,
1. Ordo CALCISPONGIA, Blainville.
The oaly Order, with the characters of the Subclassis.
II. Subclassis S7ZJCEA, Lendenfeld.
Spongiz with a skeleton composed of siliceous spicules and their
descendants with horny aspiculous skeleton and askeletous forms.
2. Ordo HEXACTINELLIDA, O. Schmidt.
Silicea with soft mesogloea. Supporting skeleton often strengthened
with siliceous cement. Spicules triaxon.
3. Ordo CHONDROSPONGIA, Lendenfeld.
Silicea in which the toughness is achieved by the mesoglea or
mesodermal ground-substance becoming cartilaginous, whilst the
spicules remain isolated. Spicules tetraxon, monaxon (tylostylus),
or absent ; generally corticate.
4. Ordo CORNACUSPONGIA, Vosmaer.
Silicea with soft mesoglcea or mesodermal ground-substance; the
supporting skeleton, composed of bundles of monaxonid not tylostyle
spicules, is strengthened by spongin, which cements the spicules.
These may disappear altogether, and the skeleton is then composed of
spongin with or without foreign bodies. The skeleton rarely dis-
appears altogether.
Having thus divided the Class Spongize into four Orders, we may
preceed to the further division of the Orders into Families.
I. Ordo CALCISPONGIA, Blainville.
This Order has been divided by Hickel (627-629) into the well-
known three families Ascones, Leucones, and Sycones, with seven
genera in each. Poléjaeff (1179) has divided the group into two
Suborders and replaced Hickel’s genera by the older and wider
genera of Grant and others. I (888) have tried to combine Hiickel’s
and Poléjaeff’s classifications, and have added three new families to
the existing ones.
I have retained Poléjaeff’s terms for the two Suborders, but have
altered their meaning. In some Calcareous Sponges the whole of
the entoderm consists of collar-cells. There are no entodermal
pavement-cells in these forms. These constitute my first Suborder
Homoceela. In others the collar-cells are found in the ciliated
chambers only, while the central gastral cavity is clothed with
entodermal pavement-cells. I combine these forms in the Suborder
Heteroceela.
To the Homoceela belong besides Hiackel’s Asconidz, my families
Homodermide and Leucopside. I acknowledge Hickel’s seven
genera of the Asconide.
In the Heteroceela, Hickel’s families Leuconide and Syconidz
seep with Carter’s Teichonidee and my family Sylleibide are
placed.
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 579
II. Ordo HEXACTINELLIDA, O. Schmidt.
Schulze (1369) divides the living Hexactinellida into the two
Suborders Lyssacina and Dictyonina of Zittel. In the first, the
spicules remain isolated or coalesce secondarily in an irregular
manner ; in the second, the main spicules coalesce to begin with in
a very regular manner, so as to form a continuous scaffolding. In
the first suborder Lyssacina, the families Euplectellide, Gray,
Asconematide, F. E. Schulze, Rossellide, F. E. Schulze, and
Hyalonematidee, Gray, are placed. The second suborder, Dictyonina,
comprises the families Farreide, Gray, Euretide, F. E. Schulze,
Melittionide, Zittel, Coscinoporide, Zittel, and Meandrospongide,
Zittel. To these the fossil families Ventriculitidee, Staurodermide,
Callodictyonidze, Cceloptychide, Receptaculitide, and Monakidee
must be added.
In the classificatory scheme below, Schulze’s diagnoses are
translated.
III. Ordo CHONDROSPONGLA, Lendenfeld.
As mentioned above, this Order coincides nearly with Vosmaer’s
(1550) order Spiculispongie. I divide it into the two groups,
Tetraxonia and Monaxonia. The former comprises the Sponges
with tetraxon spicules, Tetractinellids and Lithistids ; and the latter
those forms which haye monaxon spicules, or which have no spicules
at all.
Sollas (1453) divides the Tetraxonia into two groups :—Choristida,
Sollas, without lithistid sclerites; and Lithistida, Zittel, with
lithistid sclerites. In the first group the families Plakinide,
Pachastrellide, Corticide, Tetillidee, Theneide, Stellettidee, and
Geodine are distinguished.
Vosmaer (1550) divides the Lithistidse, in accordance with Zittel
(1639) and O. Schmidt (1306, 1322), into the families Rhizomori-
nidew, Megamorinide, Anomacladinide, Tetracladinide.
The Monaxonia comprise the families Suberitide, Spirastrellidee,
Tethyde, and Chondroside. The Clavulina and portion of the
Oligosilicina of Vosmaer.
IV. Ordo CORNACUSPONGLE.
I divide the Cornacuspongiz into the two suborders Halichondrina
with, and Ceraospongize without, proper spicules in the supporting
skeleton.
The Halichondrina comprise the three families Homorhaphide,
Heterorhaphide, and Desmacidonide of Ridley and Dendy (1265,
1266).
The Ceraospongie are divided by me into two groups—Macro-
camerze with large, and Microcamere with small, ciliated chambers.
To the former belong the families Aplysillidee and Spongelide, and
to the latter the Spongidee, Aplysinide, and Hircinide.
After this general view of the Classification of Sponges, I shall
proceed to give a “system”? of Sponges down to subfamilies,
mentioning the principal genera in each group.
576 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
Classis SPONGIAS, auctorum.
Ccelenterata with branching canal-system, the organs of which
are developed from cells of the mesoglcea or primary mesoderm.
With simple epithelia, with entodermal collar-cells, and without
movable appendages and enidoblasts.
I. Subclassis CALCAREA, Grant.
Sponges with a skeleton composed of calcareous spicules.
I. Ordo CALCISPONGILA, Blainville.
The only order, with the characters of the subclass.
1. Subordo Homoca@ a, Poldjaeff, emend.
The entodermal epithelium consists exclusively of collar-cells.
1. Familia Asconip#, Hickel.
Simple sac-shaped gastral cavity with smooth surface.
Leucosolenia, Poléjaeff, Ascetta, Ascissa, Ascilla, Ascaltis, Ascor-
tis, Asculmis, Ascandra, Hackel.
2. Familia HomopERMID#, Lendenfeld.
The gastral cavity forms cecal outgrowths, which resemble the
tubes of Syconidee.
Ascaltis canariensis, Hiickel, Ascaltis lamarckii, Hickel, and
Homoderma sycandra, Lendenfeld.
3. Familia LEucorsip#, Lendenfeld.
A colony of Ascon-persons which are imbedded in the thick
mesogloea. There are narrow inhalant pores and wider exhalant
ones. The latter lead into a pseudogaster.
Leucopsis, Lendenfeld, and some species of Psewdonardorus-forms
11. Subordo HeTEROCGLA, Poléjaeff, emend.
The entodermal epithelium is differentiated into collar-cells,
which are found in the walls of the ciliated chambers only, and into
flat pavement-cells, which clothe the walls of the exkalaut canals and
gastral cavity.
4. Familia Syconip&, Hiickel.
With regular, radially disposed cylindrical ciliated chambers, which
open direct into the sac-shaped gastral cavity.
1. Subfamilia Syconine, Lendenfeld.
The unbranched ciliated chambers remain isolated in their distal
part.
Sycon, Poléjaeff, the subgenera of Hickel’s Syconide which ter-
minate with the syllable ‘‘aga.” I divide this subfamily according
to Hickel’s scheme into the seven genera Sycetta, Sycissa, Sycilla,
Sycaltis, Sycortis, Syculmis, and Sycandra.
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 577
2. Subfamilia Uteine, Lendenfeld.
With simple unbranched ciliated chambers, the distal’ends of which
are imbedded in a continuous cortex. Grantessu, Lendenfeld, Ute,
Poléjaeff, and Amphoriscus, Poléjaeff, and those subgenera of the
Syconide in Hiackel’s system which terminate with the syllable
“usa.”
3. Subfamilia Granting, Lendenfeld.
With branched ciliated chambers.
Grantia, Heteropegma, and Anamiwilla, Poléjaeff.
5. Familia SyLLErBip#, Lendenfeld.
With complicated exhalant canals, leading from the cylindrical
ciliated chambers into the gastral cavity.
1. Subfamilia Vosmaerine, Lendenfeld.
The ciliated chambers are radially situated, and form a regularly
cylindrical zone. They are connected with the gastral cavity by a
network of anastomosing exhalant canals.
Vosmaeria, Lendenfeld, and Leucetta, Poléjaeff.
2. Subfamilia Polejne, Lendenfeld.
The ciliated chambers form a much-folded layer. The exhalant
canals are wide, and do not anastomose to form a reticulation.
The genera Polejna, Lendenfeld, and Leucilla, Poléjaeff, consti-
tute this group.
6. Familia Leuconip#, Hiickel.
Heteroccela with ramified canal-system and spherical ciliated
chambers.
Leucetta, Leucissa, Leucaltis, Leucortis, Leuculmis, and Leu-
candra, Hickel, Leuconia, auctorum, and Leuconia and Pericharaz,
Poléjaeff.
7. Familia TercHonip2, Carter.
Heterocceela without gastral cavity. The inhalant pores are
situated on the one, and the exhalant on the other side of the
lamellar sponge ; with spherical ciliated chambers.
Teichonella, Carter, and Hilhardia, Poléjaeff.
II. Subclassis SIZICEA, nov.
Sponges with a skeleton composed of siliceous spicules and their
derivatives ; possessing a horny skeleton or no skeleton at all, but
never supported by calcareous spicules.
Comprises the Non-Calcarea of Grant and other authors.
1. Ordo HEXACTINELLIDA, O. Schmidt.
Silicea with triaxon spicules and soft mesoglea. Strengthened by
siliceous cement, generally joining the spicules.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXXVIII. 38
578 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SysTEMATIC [Dec. 21
1. Subordo Lyssacina, Zittel.
The spicules remain isolated or are subsequently cemented
together irregularly.
i. Tribus Hewasterophora, F. E. Schulze.
Hexaster always found in the mesogloea; chambers distinct,
thimble-shaped.
1. Familia EUPLECTELLID#, F. E. Schulze.
Thin-walled tubes or sacs with sword-shaped hexact hypodermalia,
the centripetal rays of which are the longest.
1. Subfamilia Huplectelline, F. E. Schulze.
Tubular, with terminal sieve-plates. The wall regularly perfo-
rated. To the centrifugal ray of each hypodermal a floricome is
attached.
Euplectella, Owen, and Regadrella, O. Schmidt.
2. Subfamilia Holascine, F. E. Schulze.
Tubular, wall without perforations, without superficial flori-
comes.
Holascus and Malacosaccus of F. E, Schulze.
3. Subfamilia Taegerine, F. EK. Schulze.
Tubular or sac-shaped, wall irregularly perforated. Principalia
partially cemented, forming an irregular network. To the distal ray
of each hypodermal sword-shaped hexact a floricome is attached.
Taegeria and Walteria of F, E. Schulze.
2. Familia AScoNnEMATID#, F. E. Schulze.
Pentact or hexact pinnule in the dermal and gastral surfaces.
Hypodermalia and hypogastralia pentact. Discohexaster in the
interior.
1. Subfamilia Asconematine, F. E. Schulze.
Sessile, sac-shaped, or tubular, with thin soft wall.
Asconema, Say. Kent, and Aulascus, F. E. Schulze.
2. Subfamilia Sympagelline, O. Schmidt.
Pedunculate, cup-shaped. Principalia hexact and diact. Disco-
hexaster in the interior.
Sympagella, O. Schmidt, Polyrhabdus, F. E. Schulze, and Bala-
nites, F. E. Schulze.
3. Subfamilia Caulophacine, F. E. Schulze.
Mushroom-shaped, with long cylindrical hollow peduncle.
Caulophacus and Trachycaulus of F. KE. Schulze.
1886. | POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 579
3. Familia Rossetuips, F. E. Schulze.
The dermalia have no centripetal ray.
Lanuginella, O. Schmidt ; Polylophus, F. E. Schulze ; Rossella,
Carter ; Acanthascus, Bathydorus, Rhabdocalyptus, Crateromorpha,
Aulochone, Caulocalyx, and Aulocalyx, F. E. Schulze.
ii. Tribus Amphidiscophora, F, E. Schulze.
Amphidiscs in the limiting membranes. Hexaster absent in the
interior. A basal tuft is always present. The ciliated chambers
appear as somewhat irregular sac-shaped extensions of the membrana
reticularis.
4, Familia HyALONEMATIDA, Gray.
Numerous pentact pinnule in the dermal and gastral surfaces.
1. Subfamilia Hyalonematine, F. E. Schulze.
Calyculate, with a well defined oscula-area on the upper surface.
Hyalonema, Gray ; Stylocalyz, F. E. Schulze; Pheronema, Leidy ;
and Poliopogon, Wyville Thomson.
2. Subfamilia Semperelline, F. E. Schulze.
Without gastral cavity and terminal oscula-area, with root-tuft.
Semperella, Gray.
To this Subordo the fossil families Receptaculitidee and Monakidee
belong.
u. Subordo Dictyonina, Zittel.
The parenchymal hexacts early coalesce in a regular manner, so
as to form a firm skeleton.
i. Tribus Uncinataria, F. E. Schulze.
With uncinates.
i. Subtribus Clavularia, F. E. Schulze.
With radially situated clavule.
1. Familia Farreipa#, F. E. Schulze.
The skeleton forms a single layer; from the joining points conical
extensions arise, in a direction vertical to the surface of the network.
Farrea, Bowerbank.
2. Subtribus Scopularia, F. E. Schulze.
With radially situated scopulz.
2. Familia Euretipa, F. E. Schulze.
Branched and anastomosing tubes. The skeleton-net forms several
layers.
Eurete, Carter ; Periphragella, Marshall; and Lefroyella, Wyville
Thomson.
38*
580 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
3. Familia MEeLiTTIONnIp#, Zittel.
Forms branched tubes or calyculate structures. Skeleton honey-
combed. Cavities traversed by the reticular membrane. The
gastral skeleton without scopulz.
Aphrocallistes, Gray.
4. Familia Coscinoporip&, Zittel.
The wall of the calyculate or expanded sponge is traversed by
funnel-shaped straight canals, which open alternately on the one or
the other surface. Covered only by the perforated limiting mem-
brane.
Chonelasma, F. E. Schulze ; and the fossil genera Leptophragma,
Zittel, Guettardia, Michelin, and Coscinopora, Goldfuss.
5. Familia Treropictyipa&, F. E. Schulze.
With irregular inhalant and exhalant canals, which do not traverse
the body transversely, but pass the dense dictyonal skeleton obliquely
or longitudinally.
Tretodictyum, F. E. Schulze; Euriplegma, F. E. Schulze ; Cyr-
taulon, F. E. Schulze; Fieldingia, Sav. Kent; and Sclerathamnus,
Marshall.
ii. Tribus Inermia, F. E. Schulze.
Without uncinates and scopulz.
6. Familia MranpRosPoncGip4, Zittel.
The body consists of winding tubes of uniform width. The in-
terstices of the tubes form a vestibule space.
Dactylocalyx, Stutchbury ; Scleroplegma, O. Schmidt ; Margari-
tella, O. Schmidt ; Myliusia, Gray ; and Aulocystis, F. E. Schulze ;
and the fossil genera :—Placoscyphia, Reuss; Tremabolites, Zittel ;
Etheridgia, Tate; Cystispongia, Roemer; Toulminia, Zittel; and
Camerospongia, d’Orb.
To this Subordo belong the fossil families Ventriculitide, Stauro-
dermidz, Callodictyonidee, and Cceloptychide.
II. Ordo CHONDROSPONGIA, nov.
Silicea in which the toughness is caused by the mesogloea or
mesodermal ground-substance becoming cartilaginous, whilst the
spicules remain isolated. Spicules tetraxon, monaxon (tylostylus or
stylus), or absent. With spherical ciliated chambers. Sponge gene-
rally corticate.
Comprises the Spiculispongiz of Vosmaer, with the exception of
the genus Halisarca, Vosmaer.
1. Subordo TeTRAxXONIA, Vosmaer.
With tetraxon spicules.
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES, 581
1. Group Liraistrpa, Zittel.
Body stony, with a central gastral cavity or numerous vertical
tubes. Spicules more or less clearly tetraxon, often branched.
Besides these, sometimes monaxon spicules and flesh-spicules. The
skeleton-spicules are interwoven so as to form a dense skeleton.
1. Familia Ru1zoMoRINID«&, Zittel.
Spicules irregularly branched ; form irregular fibres, or are loosely
interwoven. Forked anchors always present.
Arabescula, Carter; Corallistes, Schmidt ; Heterophymia, Pomel ;
Seliscothon, Zittel ; MacAndrewia, Gray ; Azorica, Carter; Leioder-
matium, Schmidt ; and the fossil genera :—Cnemidiastrum, Coral-
lidium, Hyalotragos, Pyrgochonia, Discostroma, Leiodorella, Episto-
mella, Platychonia, Bolidium, Astrobolia, and Chonella of Zittel;
Plococonia, Pomel ; Chenendopora, Lamouroux ; Verruculina, Zittel ;
Amphithelion, Zittel; Stychophyma, Pomel; Allomera, Pomel ;
Pleuromera, Pomel; Perimera, Pomel; Meta, Pomel; WMarisca,
Pomel ; Pomelia, Zittel; Jereica, Zittel ; Calocorypha, Zittel; Scy-
talia, Zittel; Stachyspongia, Zittel; Pachinion, Zittel. ©
2. Familia ANOMOCLADINID, Zittel.
Spicules rod-shaped with terminal tufts of branches. The approxi-
mating ends of the spicules coalesce and form knots. In this way a
regular triaxial network is formed.
Vetulina, Schmidt; and the fossil genera Mastosia, Cylindrophyma,
Melonella, and Protachilleum, Zittel, and Paleomanon and Astylo-
spongia, Roemer.
3. Familia TETRACLADINIDA, Zittel.
Spicules tetractinellid with terminal branches.
Theonella, Gray ; Rhacodiscula, Zittel ; Discodermia, Bocage ; Ka-
liapsis, Bowerbank ; Collectella, Schmidt ; Collinella, Schmidt; and
the fossil genera :—Aulocopium, Oswald; Phymatella, Aulaxinia,
Callopegma, and Trachysycon, Zittel ; Siphonia, Parkinson; Halli-
rhoa, Jerea, Lamouroux; Marginospongia, d’Orbigny ; Nelumbia,
Pomel; Polyjerea, Fromentel; Astrocladia, Zittel ; Bolospongia,
Hinde ; Thecosiphonia, Zittel; Calymmatina, Zittel; Turonia, Mi-
chelin ; Kalpinella, Thamnospongia, and Pholidocladia, Hinde; Ra-
gadinia, Zittel; Plinthosella, Zittel ; Spongodiscus, Zittel ; Phyma-
plectia, Hinde; Rhopalospongia, Hinde.
To this Subordo also the fossil family Megamorinidz belongs.
11. Group CHorisTIDaA, Sollas.
With tetraxon spicules of regular shape.
i. Tribus Tetradina, Sollas.
The chief spicules are tetract, with equal rays and candelabras.
i. Subtribus Microcamera, nov.
With small chambers.
582 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
4. Familia Corticip, Vosmaer.
With candelabras.
Oorticium, Schmidt, and Thrombus, Sollas.
5. Familia PACHASTRELLID#, Sollas.
With simple tetracts, irregularly scattered.
Pachastrella, Schmidt, Battersbya, Bowerbank, and Dercitus,
Gray.
li. Subtribus Wacrocamere, nov.
With large chambers.
6. Familia PLaKxinip#, F. E. Schulze.
With scattered diact, triact, and tetract spicules.
Plakina, Plakinastrella, and Plakortis, F. E. Schulze, and Eupalaz,
Sollas.
7, Familia OscARELLIDH, Lendenfeld.
Without spicules.
Oscarella, Vosmaer.
ii. Tribus T'rz anina, Sollas.
The centres of the tetraxon spicules with one differentiated ray
lie in the surface, in which the equal rays extend tangentially.
8. Familia Grop1p4, Sollas.
A cortex of globate spicules. Chambers small, with small outlets.
Erylus, Gray ; Caminus, Schmidt ; Cydonium, Miiller ; Synops,
Vosmaer ; Isops, Sollas; Geodia, Lamarck ; and Geodissa, Lenden-
feld.
9. Familia STELLETTIDs#, Sollas.
With stellate flesh-spicules usually in the cortex.
1. Subfamilia Psammasterina, Sollas.
With stellates and spined rods.
Psammastra, Sollas.
2. Subfamilia Stryphnina, Sollas.
With stellates and amphiastrellee.
Stryphnus, Sollas.
3. Subfamilia Sanidasterina, Sollas.
With stellate and sanidaster (?) spicules.
Tribrachium, Weltner, and Tethyopsis, Stewart.
4, Subfamilia Stellettina, Sollas.
With two kinds of stellate flesh-spicules.
Antrastra, Dragmastra, Sollas ; Stellettc, Schmidt.
5. Subfamilia Homasterina, Sollas.
With one kind of stellate flesh-spicules.
Myriastra, Solias ; Asterella, Sollas; Pilochrata, Sollas.
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 583
10. Familia THEenerpas, Sollas.
With large outlets to the ciliated chambers, and spirastrellid
spicules.
Thenea, Gray (Tisiphonia, Wyville Thomson, Dorvillia, Sav. Kent,
Wyville-Thomsonia, Wright); Normania, Vulcanella, and Chara-
cella, Sollas.
11. Familia TetT1Lu1p#, Sollas.
With flesh-spicules which are hamate, spiral, or rod-shaped.
Spiretta, Lendenfeld; Tetilla, Schmidt; Craniella, Schmidt ;
Chrotella, Sollas ; Papirula, Schmidt ; Thalassomora, Lendenfeld.
12. Familia TETHYOPSILLID&, nov.
Spherical sponges supported by dense masses of large radial
monaxonid spicules. A few tetraxonid grapnels are inserted in the
surface.
Tethyopsilla, Lendenfeld, and Protoleia, Dendy and Ridley.
11. Subordo MonaxoniDa.
11. Group CLavuLina, Vosmaer, emend.
With monaxonid spicules or without supporting skeleton.
Supporting spicules tylostyle, usually radially situated. (Includes
the Pseudotetraxonia, Vosmaer.)
1. Familia TerHyp®, Vosmaer.
More or less spherical sponges, with regular subdermal cavities
between the thick distally extending radial bundles of spicules.
1. Subfamilia Tethyne, nov.
With stellate flesh-spicules.
Tethya, Lamarck; Tuberella, Keller (Tethiophena, Schmidt) ;
Tethiosphera, Lendenfeld ; Mastigophora, Lendenfeld ; T'halasso-
dactylus, Lendenfeld.
2. Subfamilia Tethiopsammine, nov.
With a sand cortex.
Tethiopsamma, Lendenfeld, MS.
3. Subfamilia Tethyorhaphine, nov.
With rod-shaped flesh-spicules, without stellates.
Tethyorhaphis, Lendenfeld.
4. Subfamilia Tethyamatine, nov.
With hamate flesh-spicules (sigmata) without stellates.
Tethyamata, Lendenfeld,
584 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SysTeMaTIC [Dec. 21,
2. Familia SoLLASELLID#&, Lendenfeld.
Digitate forms with radiating spicule-bundles, and distinct ecto-
and endochone.
Sollasella, Lendenfeld.
3. Familia SprrastRELLID#, Ridley and Dendy.
With spirastrellid flesh-spicules.
Spirastrella, Ridley ; Raphyrus, Bowerbank ; Papillina, Schmidt;
~ Cheirella, Lendenfeld ; Awos, Gray ; and Coletrar. ona, Lendenfeld.
Coincides with the family Gheirciides Lendenfeld.
4. Familia SUBERAMATIDA, nov.
With hamate flesh-spicules (sigmata).
Suberamata, Lendenfeld.
5. Familia SuBeRITIDZ, Vosmaer, emend.
Without flesh-spicules.
Suberitella, Lendenfeld ; Suberites, Nardo ; Suberopetros, Lenden-
feld ; Plectodendron, Lendenfeld ; Polymastia, Bowerbank ; T'richo-
stemma, M. Sars; Tentortum, Vosmaer (Thecaphora, O. Schmidt) ;
Stylocordyle, Wyv. Thomson ; Quasillina, Norman; Cliona,
Grant; and Poterion, Schlegel.
Iv. Subordo OL1GosiLicina, Lendenfeld.
Without supporting skeleton. Flesh-spicules, when present,
anaxon polyactinellid. Chambers small, with narrow outlet.
1. Familia CoonpRILLID&, Lendenfeld.
With polyactinellid flesh-spicules. Comprises the genus Chon-
drilla, O. Schmidt.
2. Familia CoonpRosip#, Lendenfeld.
Without flesh-spicules. Comprises the genus Chondrosia, Nardo.
III. Ordo CORNACUSPONGIA, Vosmaer, emend.
Silicea with soft mesogloea, or mesodermal ground-substance.
The supporting skeleton is composed of bundles of monaxonids,
which are never tylostyle spicules. The skeleton is strengthened
by spongin, which cements the spicules. These may disappear
altogether, and the skeleton is then composed of spongin, with
or without foreign bodies. Exceptionally, also, this horny skeleton
disappears. The ciliated chambers have large outlets.
1. Subordo HALICHONDRIN‘A, Vosmaer.
With siliceous spicules in the supporting skeleton.
1. Familia SPonGILLIDA, Carter.
Freshwater sponges with gemmule.
Spongilla, Lamarck ; Ephydatia, Lamouroux; Tubella, Carter ;
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 585
Uruguaya, Carter ; Parmula, Carter ; Meyenia, Bowerbank ; Heée-
romeyenia, Potts; Lubomirskya, Dybovsky; Lessepsia, Keller ;
Potamolepis, Marshall.
2. Familia Homoruaruips, Ridley and Dendy.
Megasclera oxea or strongyla ; no differentiated microsclera except
toxia. Marine sponges without gemmule.
1. Subfamilia Renierine, auct.
Spicules never completely enveloped in horny fibre.
Halichondria, Fleming ; Petrosia, Vosmaer, =Schmidtia Balsamo
Crivelli; Reniera, Nardo.
2. Subfamilia Chalinine, Ridley and Dendy.
A considerable amount of spongin present, forming distinct horny
fibres, in which spicules are contained.
1. Group Chalinorhaphine, Lendenfeld.
With abundant gigantic spicules axially situated.
Chalinorhaphis, Lendenfeld.
2. Group Hoplochalinine, Lendenfeld.
With abundant gigantic spicules obliquely situated, and protruding
beyond the fibre-surface.
Hoplochalina, Lendenfeld.
3. Group Cacochalining, Lendenfeld.
Irregular forms with slender spicules.
Cacochalina, Schmidt; Cladochalina, Lendenfeld ; Chalinopora,
Lendenfeld ; Chalinella, Lendenfeld ; Chalinopsis, Schmidt.
4. Group Pachychalinine, Lendenfeld.
Irregular, digitate, lamellar forms with stout spicules, oxystron-
lus.
Chalinissa, Leudenfeld ; Pachychalina, Schmidt; and Ceraochalina,
Lendenfeld.
5. Group Plakochalining, Lendenfeld.
Frondose, lamellar forms with stout spicules.
Plakochalina, Euplakella, and Antherochalina, Lendenfeld ; Cribro-
chalina, Schmidt ; Tragosia, Gray ; Platychalina, Ehlers.
6. Group Siphonochalinine, Lendenfeld.
Tubular, pseudogaster with stout spicules.
Spinosella,Vosmaer ; Siphonochalina, Schmidt ; Tuba, Duchassaing
and Michelotti; ASclerochalina, Ridley; Towxochalina, Ridley ;
Phylosiphonia, Lendenfeld; Tubulodigitus, Carter; Patulascula,
Carter ; and Siphonella, Lendenfeld.
7. Group Arenochalinine, Lendenfeld.
With spicules in the connecting and sand in the main fibres.
Arenochalina, Lendenfeld.
586 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
8. Group Zuchalinine, Lendenfeld.
Slender, regularly digitate forms with a fine-meshed network and
slender spicules.
Chalina, auctorum, and Dactylochalina, Euchalina, Euchalinopsis,
and Chalinodendron, Lendenfeld.
3. Familia HETERORHAPHID#, Ridley and Dendy.
Megasclera of various forms; microsclera commonly present, but
never chele. Marine sponges, without gemmule.
1. Subfamilia Phlaodictyine, Carter.
Sponge divisible into body and fistule, with a strong spicular
rind. Megasclera oxea or strongyla; microsclera (when present)
sigmata.
Rhizochalina, Schmidt ; Oceanapia, Norman.
2. Subfamilia Gelliine, Ridley and Dendy.
Megasclera oxea or strongyla. Microsclera always present, viz.
sigmata. No rind or fistule.
Gellius, Gray ; Gelliodes, Ridley.
3. Subfamilia Tedaniine, Ridley and Dendy.
Megasclera of two forms: monactinal, styli, forming the main
skeleton ; and diactinal, tylota. Microsclera long, hair-like trichites.
Tedania, Gray ; Trachytedania, Ridley.
4, Subfamilia Desmacelline, Ridley and Dendy.
Megasclera styli to tylostyli. Microsclera sigmata or toxia, or
both.
Desmacella, Schmidt.
5. Subfamilia Hamacanthine, Ridley and Dendy.
Megasclera oxea or styli; microsclera diankistra, to which others
may be added.
Hamacantha, Gray ; Vomerula, Schmidt.
4, Familia DesmMactpon1p&, Vosmaer, auct.
Megasclera of various forms. Microsclera chele, to which others
may be added.
1, Subfamilia Esperelline, Ridley and Dendy.
Fibre not echinated by laterally projecting spicules.
Esperia, Nardo; Esperella, Vosmaer ; Esperiopsis, Carter; Cla-
dorhiza, Sarvs; Awoniderma, Ridley and Dendy; Chondrocladia,
Wyv. Thomson; Desmacidon, Bowerbank ; Homeodictya, Artemi-
sina, Vosmaer; Phelloderma, Ridley and Dendy ; Sideroderma, Ridley
and Dendy ; Iophon, Gray ; Amphilectus, Vosmaer ; Melonanchora,
Carter; Guitarra, Carter,
1886. | POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 587
2. Subfamilia Ectyonine, Ridley and Dendy.
Fibre echinated by laterally projecting spicules.
Myzilla, Schmidt ; Clathria, Schmidt; Rhaphidophlus, Eblers ;
Plumohalichondria, Carter ; Acarnus, Gray ; Echinoclathria, Carter ;
Clathrissa, Lendenfeld; Thalassodendron, Lendenfeld; Cerao-
spina, Lendenfeld.
5. Familia AXINELLIDs#, auct.
With large subdermal cavities. Skeleton non-reticulate, consist-
ing of ascending axes of fibre, from which arise subsidiary fibres
radiating to the surface pervading the subdermal cavity. Fibres
plumose. Megasclera chiefly styli, to which oxea and strongyla
may be added. Microsclera rarely present, never chele.
Dendropsis, Ridley and Dendy; Thrinacophora, Ridley; Hyme-
niacidon, Bowerbank ; Phakellia, Bowerbank; Ciocalypta, Bower-
bank ; Acanthella, Schmidt ; Awinella, Schmidt ; Raspailia, Nardo ;
Spirophora, Lendenfeld.
11. Suborder K ERATOSA, Bowerbank, emend.
Silicea with a supporting skeleton composed of spongin; fibre
with or without foreign bodies, but always without proper spicules.
Flesh-spicules may be present. Exceptionally, there is no skeleton
at all.
i. Tribus Microcamere, Lendenfeld.
With small spherical ciliated chambers and opaque ground-
substance.
1. Familia Sponeip2, F. E. Schulze.
With narrow axial thread in the horny fibres, and without fila-
ments.
1. Subfamilia Aulenine, Lendenfeld.
Reticulate sponges with vestibules, without flesh-spicules.
Halme, Aphroditella, Halmopsis, and Aulena, Lendenfeld ; Psam-
maclema, Marshall.
2. Subfamilia Chalinopsilline, Lendenfeld.
When dry of light yellow colour, digitate, lamellar, more or less
flower-shaped, imitating very closely Chalinine, from which they
appear only recently to have developed. Without flesh-spicules,
with smooth surface.
Chalinopsilla and Antheroplax, Lendenfeld ; Dactylia, Carter.
3. Subfamilia Spongine, Lendenfeld.
Massive, when dry dark brown, with conulated or granulated
surface. Vestibules, when present, belong’exclusively to the inhalant
system. Without flesh-spicules,
Euspongia, Brown ; Cacospongia, Schmidt ; Hinpospongia, F. E.
588 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
Schulze; Coscinoderma, Carter; Spongodendron, Lendenfeld; and
many of the species of the genus Spongia, auctorum.
4. Subfamilia Spongissine, Lendenfeld.
With flesh-spicules.
Spongissa, Lendenfeld, MS.
2. Familia ApLystnip&, Lendenfeld.
The skeleton is composed of spongin-tubes, the walls of which are
thinner than the diameter of the lumen, which is filled with pith.
1. Subfamilia Aplysinine.
Without flesh-spicules.
Luffaria, Duchassaing and Michelotti; Aplysina, Nardo; Luffa-
rella, Lendenfeld, MS.; Dendrospongia, Hyatt.
2. Subfamilia Aplysissine, Lendenfeld.
With flesh-spicules.
Aplysissa, Lendenfeld, MS.
3. Familia Hircinrp#, Lendenfeld.
With narrow axial canal in the fibres, and filaments in the ground-
substance.
1. Subfamilia Hircinine, Lendenfeld.
Without proper spicules.
Hircinia, Nardo ; Hircinopsis, Nodosina, Aphrotriche, and Sty-
phlos, Lendenfeld, MS.; Stematonemia, Bowerbank ; Filifera, Lie-
berkiihn ; Sarcatragus, Schmidt ; and Polytherses, Duchassaing and
Michelotti.
2. Subfamilia Hircinissing, Lendenfeld.
With proper spicules.
1. Group Chalinocinia, nov.
With proper spicules in the conuecting fibres.
Chalinocinia, Lendenfeld.
2. Group Hircinissa, nov.
Without proper spicules in the fibres ; with flesh-spicules.
Hircinissa, Lendenfeld, MS.
ii. Tribus Macrocamere, Lendenfeld.
With large sac-shaped ciliated chambers, and soft, transparent
ground-substance.
4. Familia SponceLip, Lendenfeld.
The horny fibres contain slender axial thread and form a
reticulated skeleton.
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 589
1. Subfamilia Spongeline, Lendenfeld.
Without flesh-spicules. The skeleton consists of distinct horny
fibre containing a varying amount of foreign matter.
Spongelia, Nardo; Dysidea, Johnston; and Reteplax, Lenden-
feld, MS.
2. Subfamilia Psammine, nov.
The skeleton consists of foreign bodies cemented by spongin,
which, however, is not distinctly visible; without flesh-spicules.
Psammapemma, Marshall; Psammella, Lendenfeld, MS.; and
Holopsamma, Carter.
3. Subfamilia Spongelissine, Lendenfeld.
The skeleton is composed of distinct horny fibres containing
foreign bodies. With flesh-spicules.
Dysideissa, Lendenfeld, MS.
4. Subfamilia Psammopessine, nov.
The skeleton consists of cemented foreign bodies without distinct
horny fibres. With flesh-spicules.
Psammopessa, Lendenfeld, MS.; Phoriospongia, Marshall; and
Haastia, Lendenfeld, MS.
5. Familia ApLysiLLip#,. Lendenfeld.
The skeleton consists of spongin-tubes ramified in a dendritic
fashion and filled with pith.
1. Subfamilia Aplysilline, Lendenfeld.
Cells are found in the pith of the fibres only.
Darwinella, Fritz Miller ; Aplysilla, F. E. Schulze ; Verongia,
Bowerbank ; and Dendrilla, Lendenfeld.
2. Subfamilia Ianthelline, nov.
Cells are found in the spongin-sheath of the fibre.
Tanthella, Gray.
6. Familia Hauisarcipa, Vosmaer.
Without skeleton.
Halisarca, Schmidt, and Bajalus, Lendenfeld.
V. Key To THe Recent FaAMI.ies OF SPONGES.
0. Skeleton calcareOus ....5.ccxccessensisexsesossessees ilF
* [No calcareous skeleton .........0.000ssessceoeesseree (2.)
Entoderm consists exclusively of collar-cells ... 3.
1. 4 Entoderm consists of collar- and pavement-
Ae CELIA Foeaedomocnescana deve. stueaeseesmerdeeseneesca ss (4.)
Mesoderm thin, gastral cavity irregular ...... 1, Ascontdae.
3. 4 Mesoderm thin, radial cylindrical chambers... 2, Homodermide.
Mesoderm thick, irregular chambers ............ 3. Leucopside.
590
(4.) With cylindrical chambers
*? | With spherical chambers ...........sssecosseeseeees
{css radial, opening direct into gastral
Fees ee ree eee eaeseneereae
cavity
Chambers opening into exhalant canals which
lead into the gastral cavity
( Exhalants lead into oscular tubes
Renee nema anew meee eee meet eee ee teen es eeeeee
5
Exhalants open direct on one side of the lamel-
lar sponge; inhalant pores on the other
side exclusively
(6)
Sete eee e tees er renters e eee eeeennene
DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 2],
4. Syconide.
5, Sylleibide.
6. Leuconide.
7. Teichonide.
With hexact spicules and thimble-shaped
2 Chambers J sas aeacks eke cetaueeegensencem ders tee Ue
(4) Without hexact spicules, with sac-shaped or
P i
spherical chambers) <.....idc-senesco.es1eeceeves (8.)
The spicules remain isolated or partly coalesce
7 afterwards irregularly ............coesesseeeeceee 9.
* ) The supporting spicules early coalesce in a
regular Dictyonid manner ..............0se006- (10.)
9 Hexaster in the interior .............sccesseeseeeee UF
: | No hexasters, but amphidises ..............0.cc00- (12.)
( Hypodermalia hexact sword-shaped, with centri-
1 petal radial ray longest; no pinnule......... 8. Luplectellide.
Pinnulz in the gastral and dermal surfaces... 9. Asconematide.
Dermalia without centripetal ray; no pinnule 10. Rossellide.
(12.) ‘With numerous pinnulee ..............02-cseeeeeees 11. Hyalonematide,
10.) Whith imneinates!;: ces cacsctascevasensvetetusteceuesaas 13.
(10-) | Without uncinates ....s.s-scssssseseseserseseseeer (14.)
13 With radially situated clavule ...............04. 12. Farreide.
* | With radially situated scopulee ...........-.06. 15.
( Branched and anastomosing tubes ; the skeleton-
| net forms several layers ............se0esescees 13. Euretide.
Branching tubular or calyculate, honeycombed ;
cavities traversed by reticular membrane ... 14. Melittionide.
15. 4 Oalyculate or expanded, traversed transversely
| by funnel-shaped canals opening alternately
on one or other surface ...........-...s0seeeee- 15. Coscinoporide.
Canals irregular, traversing the dense dictyonal
| skeleton obliquely or longitudinally ......... 16. Tetrodictyide.
(14.) Meandrically winding tubes ................06.6 17. Meandrospongide.
With cartilaginous ground-substance and sphe-
vical chambers. Spicules polyact, tetract,
lithistid, tylostylote, or stylote, never ce-
mented with spongin. Askeletous forms
with spherical chambers .................:00000- 16.
(8.) 4 With soft ground-substance, spherical or sac-
shaped chambers, Spicules monaxon, never
tylostylote, cemented with spongin. Or ske-
leton composed of horny fibre without proper
spicules. Askeletous forms with sac-shaped
chambers
Senter reese ee Come reece eres eererteeeneren
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES.
With lithistid irregular tetraxon spicules ...... 18.
(With tetraxon spicules of irregular shape ;
askeletous forms with large chambers, which
16 have large outlets ............sscsecrecesseeerevees (19.)
* ') With monaxon tylostylote spicules .......--.....- (20.)
Without supporting spicules; flesh-spicules
| when present polyact, with small chambers
\ which have narrow outlets ..........ceeeeeeeee (21.)
Spicules quite irregular ...........seesceseeeeerees 18. Rhizomorinide.
Spicules rod-shaped, with terminal tufts of
branches
wee eee eee ewer e ee ee rata ee nesses eae eeeeee
Spicules tetractin, with terminal branches......
19. Anomocladinide.
20. Tetracladinide.
ANd candelabras ......:c.s.cecsessoncecscssoessvers
There are large tetract spicules with three
equal rays lying tangentially in or beyond the
surface, and one difterentiated, radial ray ..
With small inconspicuous ciliated pe
with small outlets
With large conspicuous ciliated chambers with
Wide OWGLSEA. ae ccvecbcctcscnsecncodeescenssrsevdenae
With candelabra
With simple tetracts
(19.)
bo
to
bo
=
22.
(23.)
2.
(25.)
. Corticide.
2. Pachastrellide.
seas eeeee
With scattered tetracts, triacts, diacts
(25.) ) Without spicules
{ The spicules are chiefly tetracts with equal rays
Tetracts with differentiated large centripetal
ray and large tangential rays numerous ......
Tetracts with differentiated large centripetal
ray rare, with small tangential rays
26 { Withispherastons'\..-55¢42sce-ccewasana cect -uesses eh:
“* | Without spherasters
(23.)
( Flesh-spicules euaster and oxyaster
28. } Flesh-spicules spirastrella ...........ccscseeeeeeee
Flesh-spicules spirula and sigmata
seen e ree eeneeee
(27.) Without flesh-spicules
Peewee eee eet a rene aeeeneee
bundles divide the regular subdermal cavities
into ectochonz or vestibules at the entrance
of the inhalant canals
Peer errr r eee e reer e errr ress
(
|
Om) at
{canals
eRe eCEUe ECOSOC OCOCOOeCe CSE e eee eee e errr rer)
With spirastrellid flesh-spicules
29. 4 With sigmate flesh-spicules
Without flesh-spicules
Sete we rene ene ennee
A Ree meee eee eee eweeee
eee e ewww en eneee
With polyact flesh-spicules
Gl) { Without flesh-spicules
eee eee eee Cec eee rere rere res
23. Plakinide.
24. Oscarellide.
26.
(27.)
. Geodide.
28.
. Stellettide.
27. Theneide.
28. Tetillide.
Tethyopsillide.
The widened distal ends of the radial spicule-
. Lethyde.
. Sollasellide.
29.
. Sptrastrellide,
. Suberamatide.
Suberitide.
35. Chondrillide.
36. Chondroside.,
591
592 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SysTEMATIC [Dee. 21,
With proper spicules in the supporting skeleton. 30.
(17.), Without proper spicules in the supporting
BKGLStOR: Macatee ee cscce len sotont tee (31.)
With uniformly distributed skeleton - reticu-
lation and not very large subdermal cavities. 32.
30. The skeleton consists of a dense axial reticu-
lation and isolated fibres extending from this
to thesurface. Between these very extensive
( subdermal cavities are situated .............4. (33.)
With gemmulz ; living in fresh water ......... 37. Spongillide.
82. { Withees BOMATIUID oo 5005, Soeeecediaveusentadeseeeee 34.
Without flesh-spicules : fibres of the supporting
skeleton not spined ............ssssecseesseesneee 38. Homorhaphide.
34. { Flesh-spicules sigmata or spiral ; no chele...... 39. Heterorhaphide.
Flesh-spicules chele; when absent, fibres of
| supporting skeleton HPUWIOU pecwarces se soe cnecoet 40, Desmacidonide.
(33.)7 Nop chelie cies: Ae aie ee See 41, Avinellide.
With small spherical chambers and opaque
(31.) Pround-sapstance .2.....c--.se.cse- ocd sene-eosee== 35.
‘/ | With large sac-shaped chambers and trans-
parent ground-substance ............:s.seeeeees (36.)
35 Without filaments in the ground-substance ... 37.
: { with filaments in the ground-substance......... 38.
37 Skeleton-fibres with thin axial canal ............ 42. Spongide. 4
Skeleton-fibres tubular, with thick pith ..,...... 43. Aplysinide.
(88.) Skeleton-fibre with thin axial canal ............ 44, Hircinide
Skeleton-fibres with thin axial canal ; reticulate 45. Spongelida.
(36.) 4 Skeleton-fibrestubular with thick pith; dendritic 46. Aplysillide.
INoiskeleionte.s2-sc.scssacoseas .0> sarenehies.eeecee eee 47. Halisarcide.
APPENDIX.
LIST OF PUBLICATIONS RELATING TO THE SPONGES.
(Explanations of the Abbreviations used are appended.)
1. #lianus, Claudius. [epi Zowyv. Liber 8, Cap. 16.
2. see Alexander, (On Hexactinellids.) Bull. Mus, C. Z. 1868, p. 367
(1868).
3. Aldrovandi, U. De reliquis animalibus exanguibus nempe de Mollibus,
Crustaceis, Testaceis et Zoophytis libri quatuor. Bononia, 1606. Fol.
(2nd ed. 1618; 8rd ed. 1623; 4th ed. 1642.) (1606-1642. )
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 593
4. Allman, G.J. A new Order of Hydrozoa. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xiv.
p- 237 (1874).
[5.] ——. A new Order of Hydrozoa. Nature, vol. x. p. 251 (1874).
6. ——. A new Order of Hydrozoa. Tr. L. S. vol. i. p. 61 (1875).
7. Andrews, W. On Irish Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. i. pp. 807,
308 (1868).
8. Aristoteles. [epi Gwwy icropias. Liber 1, cap. 1; Liber 5, cap. 16;
Liber 8, cap. 1.
9. ——. Tlepi Zowy pogdiwy. Liber 4, Cap. 5.
10. Audouin, J. V., et Milne-Edwards. Résumé des recherches sur les
animaux sans vertébres, faites aux iles Chausey. Ann. Sci. Nat. tom. xy.
p. 5 (1828).
Recherches pour servir a l'histoire naturelle du Littoral de
la France, ou recueil de mémoires sur l’anatomie, la physiologie, la
classification et les mceurs des animaux de nos cétes. ‘J'om.1. Paris
(1832).
12. Austin, T. Note on Mr. Bowerbank’s paper on the genus Dunstervillia
(Bwk.), with remarks on the Ischadites kinigii, the Tentaculites, and the
Conularia. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 1, vol. xv. p. 406 (1845).
11.
13. Badeck, T. Red flints in the Chalk. Nature, vol. xxv. p. 529 (1882).
14. Baier, J. J. Oryctographia Norica, sive rerum fossilium et ad minerals
regnum pertinentium in territorio Norimbergensi ejusque vicinia obser-
vatarum succincta descriptio. (1708.)
15. Monumenta rerum petrif. Norimberge (1757).
16. Baird, S. F, American Sponges. United States Commission of Fish and
Fisheries. Part 1. (1873.)
17. Balfour, F. M. The Morphology and Systematic Position of the
Spongida. J. R, Micr. Sci. n,s. yol. xix. pp. 103-109 (1879).
. Sur la morpholoyie et la position systématique des Eponges, (Extr.)
Arch. Z, Expér. tom. viii. pp, 5-8 (1880).
[18.]
19. Treatise on Comparative Embryology, vol. i. p. 18 (1880).
20. ——. On the structure and homologies of the germinal layers of the
Embryo. @. J. Mier. Sci. vol. xx. p. 247 (1880).
21. ——. Larval Forms. Q. J. Micr. Sci. vol. xx. p. 381 (1880),
22. Balsamo-Crivelli,G. Memoria di aleuni Spongiari del golfo di Napoli.
Atti Soc. Ital. yol. v. pp. 284-3802 (1863).
Di aleuni organi speciali osservati in una Spugna. Wendic. Ist.
Lomb. vol. iii. pp. 883-336 (1866).
24. Barrois, C. Spongiaires des sables d’Ostricourt et observations sur la
phylogénie des Eponges. Ann. Soc. Géol. Nord, p. 71 (1875).
25. ——. Recherches sur le Terrain crétacé supérieur de ]’Angleterre et de
YIrlande. (1876.)
26. ——. Mémoire sur l’Embryologie de quelques Eponges de la Manche
(Sycandra, Halisarca, Verongia, Isodictya, Desmacidon), Ann. Sci. Nat,
sér. 6, tom. ili. (1876).
[27.] . Embryologie de quelques Eporges dela Manche. (Extr,) J. Anat,
Phys. tom. xii. pp. 656-661 (1876).
. On the development of Sponges. (Abstr.) Monthl. Mier. J. vol.
xvi. pp. 254-256 (1876).
Embryologie de quelques Eponges de la Manche. (Extr.) Budi.
Sciént. du dép. du Nord, tom. viii. pp. 151-155 (1877).
30. ——. Sur les Dictyospongide des Psammites des Chondroz. Ann. Soe.
Géol. Nord, tom, xi. p. 80 (1883),
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXXIX. 39
23.
[28.]
[29.]
594 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
- Bauhin, J. Hist. fontis Bollensis. Montisbelgardi (1598).
2. Bauhin, J., et Cherler, J. H. Hist. plant. Ebroduni (1651).
3. Bauhin, K. Pinax Theatri Botanici. Basilex, Helvet. (1623).
. Bell, T. Remarks on the animal nature of Sponges. Zool. Journ.
vol. i. p. 202 (1824).
5. Bellamy, J.C. Natural History of South Devon. London (1840).
. Belon, A, De aquatilibus. Liber ii. Parisiis (1553).
. Beltremieux. Faune du département de la Charente-Inférieur. (1860.)
. Beneaume. Spongia fluviatilis fragilis et piscem olens. Mém. Acad. Sci,
Paris, p. 231 (1814).
J. Beneden, E. Van. Die Cclenteraten-Natur der Spongien. Ber. Vers.
Nat. Hannover, p. 263 (1864).
. Benett, E. Catalogue of the organic remains of the county of Wilts.
Warminster (1831).
. Bennett, George. On the Euplectella aspergillum, Owen, or “ Venus’s
Flower-Basket.” Proc. R. Soc. Tasm. pp. 59-65 (1875).
. Bertolini, A. Rariorum Italix plantarum dec. 3 accedit specim. zoophyt.
Portus Lune. Piss (1810).
Sopra alcuni paradox nat. (Spongitarii) nel golfo della Spezia.
Modena (1832).
. Bianchi, G. De conchis minus notis. Ed.ii. Rome (1760).
. Bianconi, G.G. Sopra alcuni Zoofiti descriti sotto i nomi di Cliona
celata, ete. Nuovi Ann. Sci. Nat. vol. vi. p. 455 (1841).
. Bigsby, J. J. Thesaurus Siluricus. London (1868).
. ——. Thesaurus Devonico-Carboniferus. London (1878).
. Billings, E. Paleozoic fossils. Geol. Surv. Canada, Fasc. i. 1-5. Mon-
treal (1861-1865).
On some new or little-known Fossils from the Silurian and Devonian
Rocks of Ontario. Canadian Nat. and Geol. n.s. vol. vii. (1875).
. Blainville, M.H.D.de. Planches. ii. Partie, Zoologie, Vers et Zoo-
phytes. Dictionnaire Sci. Nat., Paris et Strasbourg (1816-1839).
._—. Eponges. Dictionnaire Sci. Nat. tom. xy. p. 93 (1819).
. ——. Zoophytes. Dictionnaire Sci. Nat. tom. |x. p. 1 (1830).
. —--—. Manuel d’Actinologie et de Zoophytologie. Paris (1834-1837).
. Barboza du Bocage, J. V. Note sur la découverte d’un Zoophbyte de
la famille Hyalocheetides sur la cote du Portugal. P. Z. 8.1864, pp. 265-
269 (1864).
.—. Sur habitat du Hyalonema lusitanicum. P. Z. S. 1865, pp. 662-
663 (1865).
. On Hyalonema lusitanicwm. Ann, M,N. H. ser. 3, vol, xx. pp. 123-
127 (1867).
. Notes on Hyalonema boreale and a new Genus of Sponges. Ann.
M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. ii. pp. 36-38 (1868).
Eponges siliceuses nouvelles de Portugal et de Vile St. Jago: Podo-
spongia lovenii, Reniera(?) grayi, Discodermia polydiscus, Latrunculia
ceratera. J. Sci. Lisb, tom. li, pp. 159-161 (1870).
. Sur existence de la Holtenia carpenteri, Wyville Thomson, dans les
cétes du Portugal. J. Sci. Lisb. tom. iii. pp. 69-70 (1870).
. Boerhave, H. Index alter. plant. hort. Lugd. Batay. (1720).
- Bosc, L. A. G. Histoire Naturelle des Vers. Paris, tom. iii. (1802).
2. ——. Histoire Naturelle des Vers. Paris, tom. iii. 2nd. edit. (1827).
. Bourguet, L., et Cortier, P. ‘Traité des pétrefactions. Paris (1742).
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 595
64, Bowerbank, J.S. On the Keratose or Horny Sponge of commerce. Mier.
J. vol. i. pp. 8-11 (1841).
65. ——. Descriptions of three species of Sponge containing some new forms
of organization. Mier. J. vol. i. pp. 161-162 (1841).
66. Observations on a Keratose Sponge from Australia. Ann. M. Ny. H.
ser. 1, vol. vii. p. 129 (1841).
[67.] Sur les Kératoses ou Eponges cornées du commerce. (Trad.) L’Jn-
stitut, tom. ix. no. 582, p. 137 (1841).
68. On the spongeous origin of Mossagates and other siliceous bodies.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 1, vol. x. p. 9 (1842).
69. ——. On the spongeous origin of Mossagates and other siliceous bodies.
Ann, M. N. H. ser. 1, vol. x. p. 84 (1842).
70. ——. On the Keratose or Horny Sponges of commerce. Tr, 2. Micr.
Soc. vol. i. pp. 32-39 (1844).
71. On three species of Sponge, containing some new forms of organi-
zation. Tr. R. Micr. Soc. vol. i. pp. 63-76 (1844),
72. Description of a new genus of Calcareous Sponges (Dunstervillia).
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 1, vol. xv. pp. 297-300 (1845).
73. ——. Observations on the Spongiade. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 1, vol. xvi.
p. 400 (1845).
74. ——. On the Ciliary Action in Spongiade. Tr. R. Mier. Soc. vol. ili.
p- 187 (1852).
75. ——. Further Report on the Vitality of Sponges. Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1857,
pp. 121-125 (1857).
76. are ete the Vital Powers of the Spongiade. Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1857, p. 438
57).
77. ——. On the Anatomy and Physiology of the Spongiade. P. R. Soc.
vol. viii. p. 573 (1857).
On the Anatomy and Physiology of the Spongiade. Ann, M. N. H.
ser. 2, vol. xx. p. 298 (1857).
(79.] ——. Sur les forces vitales des Spongiadées. (Trad.) L’Jnsti¢ut, tom,
xxy. no. 1208, p. 63 (1857).
[80.] ——. Seconde rapport sur la vitalité des Spongiadées. (Trad.), L’Jn-
stitut, tom. xxvi. no. 1266, p. 121 (1858).
81. ——. On the Anatomyand Physiology of the Spongiade. PartI. Phil.
Tr. vol. exlviii. p. 279 (1858).
82. Further Report on the Vitality of Sponges. J. R. Micr. Soc, yol. vi.
pp. 78-79 (1858).
83. ——. On the Organization of, Grantia ciliata, Tr. R. Micr. Soc. n. 8, vol. vil«
pp- 79-84 (1859),
84. Ra “oe the fibre in Keratose Sponges. Q. J. Micr. Sci. vol. viii. p. 187
860).
85. On the Anatomy and Physiology of the Spongiade. II. P. R. Soe.
vol. xi. pp. 872-375 (1862).
86. On the Anatomy and Physiology of the Spongiade. II. Phil.
Tr. vol. clii. pp. 747-836 (1862).
87. On the Anatomy and Physiology of the Spongiade. Part III.
Phil. Tr, vol. cli. p. 1087 (1862).
88. ——. On the Anatomy and Physiology of the Spongiadw. P. R. Soc,
vol. xii. pp. 146-148 (1863).
89. This En Monograph of the Spongillide. P. R. Soc. yol. xii. pp. 440-472
(1863).
90. ——. A Monograph of the British Spongiade. (Ray Society.) Vol. I.
(1864).
39*
596 DR«R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
91. Bowerbank, J.S. Description of two American Sponges (Zethea his-
pida, Spongilla dawsonii). Can. Nat. n. 8. vol. i. pp. 304-307 (1864).
92. ——. A Monograph of the British Spongiadz. (Ray Society.) Vol. II.
(1866.)
On Hyalonema mirabilis, in reply to Dr. Gray. Ann. Ve NAA
93. :
ser. 8, vol. xviii. pp. 397-401 (1866).
94. Two Sponges new to Science—Halichondria couchi, Microciona fron-
dosa. Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1867, pp. 285-286 (1867).
95. ——. On Hyalonema mirabile. P. Z. S. 1867, pp. 18-34 (1867).
96. ——. Additional observations on Hyalonema mirabile. P.Z. S. 1867,
pp. 350-351 (1867).
97. ——. On Aleyoncellum (Euplectella) speciosum, Quoy and Gaimard.
P. Z. 8. 1867, pp. 351-859 (1867).
98. ——. On Hyalonema lusitanicum. P. Z. 8. 1867, pp. 901-907 (1868).
99. ——. Observations on Dr. Gray’s “ Notes on the Arrangement of Sponges,
with the Description of some New Genera.” P. Z. S. 1868, pp. 118-
137 (1868).
100. ——. A Monograph of the Siliceo-fibrous Sponges. Part I. P. Z. S.
1869, pp. 66-100 (1869).
101. ——. A Monograph of the Siliceo-fibrous Sponges. Part II. P.Z.S.
1869, pp. 823-351 (1869).
102. ——. On Dr. Gray’s Genus Theonella (Dactylocalyx). P.Z.S. 1869,
pp. 389, 390 (1869).
103. ——. On the generic name Alcyoncellum, and in reply to Dr, Gray’s
“« Observations on Sponges and on their Arrangement and Nomenclature.”
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. iii. pp. 84-87 (1869).
104. ——. Observations on Mr. Carter’s paper ‘‘On two new Sponges from the
Antarctic Sea, &e.” Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. x. pp. 58-61 (1872).
105. ——. Contributions to a general History of the Spongiade. Part I.
; P. Z. 8. 1872, pp. 115-129 (1872).
106. ——. Contributions to a general History of the Spongiade. Part II.
P. Z. 8. 1872, pp. 196-202 (1872).
107. ——. Contributions toa general History of the Spongiade. Part III.
P. Z. 8. 1872, pp. 626-684 (1872).
Reply to Dr. J. E. Gray’s Observations on certain Species of
Sponges described in the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society’ for
1878. Ann. M,N. H. ser. 4, vol. xii. pp. 488-491 (1873).
109. ——. Contributions to a general History of the Spongiade. Part IV.
P. Z. 8. 1873, pp. 8-25 (1878).
110 Report on a Collection of Sponges found at Ceylon by E. W. H.
Holdsworth, Esq. P. Z. 8S. 1873, pp. 25-82 (1873).
111 Contributions to a general History of the Spongiade. Part V.
P. Z. 8. 1873, pp. 819-333 (1873).
112. ——. Contributions to a general History of the Spongiade. Part VI.
P. Z. 8. 1874, pp. 298-305 (1874).
113. ——. A Monograph of the British Spongiadex. (Ray Society.) Vol. IIT.
(1874).
114. ——. -A Monograph of the Siliceo-fibrous Sponges. Part III. P. Z. 8.
1875, pp. 272-281 (1875).
115, ——. Contributions to a general History of the Spongiade. Part VII.
P. Z. 8. 1875, pp. 281-296 (1875).
116. . A Monograph of the Siliceo-fibrous Sponges. Part IV. P. Z. 8.
1875, pp. 503-509 (1875).
117. A Monograph of the Siliceo-fibrous Sponges. Part V. P. Z. 8.
1875, pp. 558-565 (1875).
——_
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 597
118. Bowerbank, J. S. Further observations on Alcyoncellum speciosum,
Quoy et Gaimard, and Hyalonema mirabilis, Gray, P. Z. S. 1875, pp.
607-610 (1875).
119. ——. A Monograph of the Siliceo-fibrous Sponges. Part VI. P. Z. 8,
1876, pp. 535-540 (1876).
120. ——. Contributions toa general History of the Spongiade. Part VIII.
P. Z. 8. 1876, pp. 768-775 (1876).
121. Description of five new Species of Sponges discovered by A. B.
Meyer on the Philippine Islands and New Guinea. (Opus posthum.)
P, Z. 8. 1877, pp. 456-464 (1877).
122. A Monograph of the British Spongiadx, by the late Dr. Bower-
bank ; edited, with additions, by the Rev. A. M. Norman. (Ray Society.)
Vol. IV. (1882).
123. Brandt, J. F. Extrait d’un mémoire: de noya polyporum familia
aoe nomine designanda. Bull. Ac. Pétersb. vol. xvi. p. 65
(1850).
124. ——. Symbole ad polypos Hyalochztidium spectantes, Petropoli (1859).
125. Brandt, K. Ueber das Zusammenleben von Thieren und Algen. Ver.
Phys. Ges. Berlin, no. 5, p. 22 (1881).
126. ——. Ueber die morphologische und physiologische Bedeutung des Chlo-
rophylls bei Thieren. Arch, Anat. Phys. p. 125 (1882).
127. ——. Ueber die morphologis-he und physiologische Bedeutung des Chlo-
rophylls bei Thieren. 2. Artikel. MT. 2. Stat. Neap. Bd, iv. pp. 191-
302 (1883). ‘
128. Braun, H.G. Lethxa Geognostica. 2nded. Stuttgart (1834-38),
129. ——. Lethxa Geognostica. 3rded. Stuttgart (1846-56).
130. ——. Index Palxontologicus. 1 Abth. Stuttgart (1848).
131. ——. Index Paleontologicus. 2 Abth. Stuttgart (1849),
Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen des Thierreichs. I. Amorphozoa.
Leipzig (1859).
133. Braun, M. Ueber die Geschlechts verhiiltnisse bei Halisarca lobularis,
O.Schm. Zool. Anz. vol. iv. pp. 232-234 (1881).
134, Brotherus. Spongilla. Meddel. af. Soc. pro Fauna et Flora Fennica,
vol. ii. p. 168 (1878).
135. Bruder, K. Zur Kenntniss der Juraablagerung von Sternberg bei
Zeidler in Bohmen. SB. Ak. Wien, 1881, p. 47 (1881).
136. ao W. On the Paramandra. Tr. Geol. Soc. vol. ix. p. 412
(1817).
137. Burg, van der. Beschrijving van een exemplar Euplectella aspergillum.
ase Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch Indié, vol. xxxi. pp. 473-475
138. Biitschli, O. Ueber die Stellung der Spongien. Z. wiss, Zool. Bd. xxx.
p- 221 (1878).
Bemerkungen zur Gastratheorie. Morph. Jahrb. Bd. 9, pp. 416-
427 (1884).
[{140.] ——. Remarks on the Gastrea Theory. (Transl.) Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol. xiii. pp. 873-383 (1884).
141. Buxbaum, J.C. Nova Plantarum genera. Comm. Acad. Petropol. ii.
p- 343 (1729).
139.
142. Capellini, Dr., und Dr. Pagenstecher. Mikroscopische Untersuch-
ungen iiber den innern Bau einiger fossilen Schwimme. Z. wiss. Zool,
Bd. x. pp. 364-372 (1860)
143, Carpenter, Dr. On Hexactinellids. Ann, M. N, H. ser. 4, vol. ii. p. 820
(1868).
598 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SysTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
144. Carpenter, Dr., and Wyville Thomson. On Hexactinellids, Ann,
M., N. H. ser. 4, vo). iv. p. 120 (1869).
145. ——. On Hexactinellids. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 281 (1869).
146. ——, Jeffreys, and W. Thomson. Report on the Dredging Expedi-
tion of the ‘Porcupine. P. R. Soc. vol. xviii. pp. 397-492 (1869).
147. Report on the Dredging Expedition of the ‘Porcupine. P. R.
Soc. vol. xix. pp. 146-221 (1870).
[148.] —— and W. Thomson. Sur Eponges. Arch, Sci. Nat.tom. xli. pp. 81—-
83 (1870).
149, Carter, H. J. Notes on the Species, Structure, and Animality of the
Freshwater Sponges in the tanks of Bombay. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2,
vol. i. pp. 303-311 (1848).
150, ——. A descriptive account of the Freshwater Sponges (Genus Spon-
gilla) in the Island of Bombay, with Observations on their Structure and
Development. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2, vol. iv. pp. 81-100 (1849).
151. . A descriptive account of the Freshwater Sponges (Genus Spongilla)
in the Island of Bombay, with Observations on their Structure and
Development. J. Bombay Branch R. Asiatic Soe. vol. iii. p. 29 (1849).
152. ——. Zoosperms in Spongilla. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2, vol. xiv. pp. 834—
336 (1854).
158. On the Ultimate Structure of Spongilla, and Additional Notes on
Freshwater Infusoria. Ann. M. N. H, ser. 2, vol. xx. pp. 21-41 (1857).
154. On a Variety of Spongilla meyeni from the River Exe, Devonshire,
Ann, M.N. H. sev. 4, vol. i. p. 247 (1868).
155. -—. Description of a Siliceous Sand-Sponge found on the south-east
coast of Arabia. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. iii. p. 151 (1869).
156. Calcareous Sponges (Central Canal in Spicules). Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 4, vol. iii. p. 466 (1869).
157, Descriptive account of four Subspherous Sponges, Arabian and
British, with general observations. Ann, M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 1
(1869).
158. ——. On Grayella cyathophora, a new genus and species of Sponge.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 189 (1869).
159. ——. Note on the Sponges Grayella, Osculina, and Cliona. Ann. M. N.
H. ser. 4, vol. v. p. 73-83 (1870).
On Haliphysema ramulosa, Bowerbank, and the Sponge-spicules of
Polytrema. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. v. pp. 389-392 (1870).
161. ——. On two new species of Subsphxrous Sponges. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 4, vol. vi. p. 176 (1870).
160.
162. On the Ultimate Structure of Marine Sponges. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 4, vol. vi. pp. 829-342 (1870).
163. A descriptive account of three Pachytragous Sponges growing on
the rocks of the South Coast of Devon (Dercitus, Stelletta). Ann. M. N,
HH, ser. 4, vol. vii. pp. 1-15 (1871).
164. On Fossil Sponge-spicules of the Greensand compared with those
of existing Species. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. vii. pp. 112-141 (1871).
165. On two undescribed Sponges (Ectyon, Acarnus) and two Esperiade
from the West Indies; also on the Nomenclature of the Calcisponge,
Clathrina, Gray. Ann, M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. vii. pp. 268-283 (1871).
166. ——. Discovery of the Animal of the Spongiadz confirmed, Ann. M.
NN. H. ser. 4, vol. vii. p. 445 (1871).
167. ——. A description of two new Calcispongie (Trichogypsia, Leuconia),
to which is added confirmation of Prof. James-Clark’s Discovery of
the True Form of the Sponge-cell (Animal), and an Account of the
Polype-like Pore-area of Cliona coralloides contrasted with Prof. E,
hie. ele
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES, 599
Hiickel’s View on the Relationship of the Sponges to the Corals, Ann,
M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. viii. pp. 1-28 (1871).
168. Carter, H. J. Description and Illustration of a new Species of Tethya,
with observations on the Nomenclature of the Tethyade. Ann. M,N. H.
ser. 4, vol. viii. pp. 99-106 (1871).
169. . Parasites of the Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. viii. pp. 330-
332 (1871).
170. Additional information on the structure of Tethya dactyloidea,
Cart. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. ix. pp. 82-84 (1872).
171. ——-. On two new Sponges from the Antarctic Sea, and on a new Species
of Tethya from Shetland (Zethya antarctica, Rossella antarctica): to-
gether with observations on the Reproduction of Sponges, commencing
from Zygosis of the Sponge-animal. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, yol. ix.
pp. 409-436 (1872).
172. . Proposed name for the Sponge-animal, viz. “‘ Spongozoon” ; also on
the origin of Thread-cells in the Spongiade. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4,
vol. x. pp. 43-51 (1872).
173. ——. Description, with illustrations, of a new species of Aplystna from
the N.W. coast of Spain. dun. M,N. H. ser. 4, vol. x. pp. 101-110
(1872).
174. ——. Description of two new Sponges from the Philippine Islands
(Meyenia, Crateromorpha). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. x. pp. 110-114
(1872).
175. . Answer to Dr. Bowerbank’s ‘‘Obseryations on Mr. Carter’s Paper
&c.,” in the last number of the ‘ Annals.’ Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. x.
pp- 141-142 (1872).
176. Description of Labaria hemispherica, Gray, a new species of
Hexactinellid Sponge, with observations on it and the Sarco-hexacti-
nellid Sponges generally. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xi. pp. 275-286
(1873).
177. ——. Points of distinction between the Spongide and the Foraminifera,
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xi. pp. 351-356 (1873).
178. On two new species of Gumminee (Corticium abyssi, Chondrilla
australiensis), with special and general observations. dun. M. N. H.
ser. 4, vol. xii. pp. 17-30 (1878).
179. On the Hexactinellide and Lithistide generally, and particularly
on the Aphrocallistide, Aulodictyon, and Farree, together with Facts
elicited from their Deciduous Structures, and Descriptions respectively
of three new Species (I.). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xii. pp. 849-373
(1873).
180. ——. On the Hexactinellide and Lithistide generally, and particularly
on the Aphrocallistide, Aulodictyon, and Farree, together with Facts
elicited from their Deciduous Structures, aud Descriptions respectively
of three new Species (II.). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xii. pp. 487-472
(1878).
181. ——. On the Spongozoa of Halisarca Dujardinii. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4,
vol. xii. pp. 315-316 (1874).
182, ——. On Halisarca lobularis, Schmidt, off the south coast of Devon
with observaions on the Relationship of the Sponges to the Ascidians
and Hints for Microscopy. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xiii. pp. 433-
440 (1874).
183. ——. On Microciona. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xiv. p. 45 (1874).
184. On the Nature of the Seed-like Body of Spongilla ; on the Origin
or Mother-cell of the Spicule ; and on the presence of Spermatozoa in
the Sponges. Ann. M. NV. H. ser. 4, vol. xiv. pp. 97-111 (1874).
185. Descriptions and Figures of Deep-sea Sponges and their Spicules
from the Atlantic Ocean, dredged up on board H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine,’
600 DR, R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SysTeEMATIC [Dec. 21,
chiefly in 1869; with Figures and Descriptions of some remarkable
Spicules from the Agulhas Shoals and Colon, Panama. I. Ann, M,N. H.
ser. 4, xiv. pp. 207-222 (1874).
186. Carter, H. J. Descriptions and Figures of Deep-sea Sponges and their
Spicules from the Atlantic Ocean, dredged up on board H.MLS. ‘ Poreu-
pine,’ chiefly in 1869; with Figures and Descriptions of some remarkable
Spicules from the Agulhas Shoals and Colon, Panama. IL. Ann. M.
N. H. ser. xiv. pp. 245-257 (1874).
Development of the Marine Sponges from the earliest recognizable
appearance of the Ovum to the perfected Individual. I. Ann, M..N. H,
ser. 4, vol. xiv. pp. 321-337 (1874).
Development of the Marine Sponges from the earliest recognizable
appearance of the Ovum to the perfected Individual. II. Ann, M.N.H.
ser. 4, vol. xiv. pp. 389-406 (1874).
Further instances of the Sponge-spicule in its Mother-cell. Ann.
M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xiv. pp. 456-458 (1874).
190. ——. On the Genus Rossella (a Hexactinellid Sponge), with the Descrip-
tions of three new Species. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xy. pp, 113-122
(1875).
191. ——. Notes Introductory to the Study and Classification of the Spongida.
I. Anatomy and Physiology. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xvi. pp. 1-41
(1875).
Notes Introductory to the Study and Classification of the Spongida.
TI. Proposed Classification of the Spongida (I.). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4,
vol. xvi. pp. 126-145 (1875).
Notes Intreductory to the Study and Classification of the Spongida.
II. Proposed Classification (II.). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xvi. pp.
177-200 (1875).
Descriptions and Figures of Deep-sea Sponges and their Spicules
from the North Atlantic Ocean, dredged up on board H.M.S. ‘ Porcu-
pine” Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xviii. pp. 226-240 (1876).
. Description and Figures of Deep-sea Sponges and their Spicules
from the North-Atlantic Ocean, dredged up on board H.M.S. ‘ Poreu-
pine.” Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xviii. pp. 807-324 (1876).
196, ——. Descriptions and Figures of Deep-sea Sponges and their Spicules
from the North-Atlantic Ocean, dredged up on board H.M.S. ‘ Porcu-
pine’ Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xviii. pp. 388-410 (1876).
187.
188.
189.
192.
193.
194.
195.
197. Descriptions and Figures of Deep-sea Sponges and their Spicules
from the North- Atlantic Ocean, dredged up on board H.M.S. ‘ Poreu-
pine” Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xviii. pp. 458-473 (1876).
198. On two Vitreo-hexactinellid Sponges (Hurete farreopsis, n. sp., and
Myliusia grayi, Bk.). Ann, M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xix. pp. 121-131 (1877).
199. ——. Description of Mauricea. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xix. p. 174
(1877).
200. Note on the “ Tubulations Sableuses” of the étage Bruxellien in the
environs of Brussels. Ann. M. NV. H. ser. 4, vol. xix. pp. 382-393 (1877).
201. Arctie and Antarctic Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xx.
pp. 38-43 (1877).
202. ——. Ona Fossil species of Sarco-hexactinellid Sponge allied to Hya-
lonema. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xx. pp. 176-178 (1877).
203. ——. Mr. James Thomson’s Fossil Sponges from the Carboniferous
System of the South-west of Scotland. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. i.
pp. 128-143 (1878).
204. ——. Position of the Sponge-spicule in the Spongida ; and Postscript on
the identity of Sguamulina scopula with the Sponges. Ann. M. N. A.
ser. 5, vol. i. pp. 170-174 (1878).
ee
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 601
205. Carter, H. J. Emendatory Description of Purisiphonia clarkei, Bk., a
hexactinellid fossil Sponge from N.W. Australia, Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol. i. pp. 376-879 (1878).
On Calcareous Hexactinellid Structures in the Devonian Limestone,
large fossil Hydrozoic Coralla from the Chalk, and further observations
on the replacement of Silex by Calcite. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. i.
pp- 412-419 (1878).
On Teichonia, a new Family of Calcareous Sponges, with descrip -
tions of two species. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. ii. pp. 85-40 (1878).
. Parasites of the Spongida. Ann, M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. ii. pp. 157-
172 (1878).
209. ——. Note on Tethya muricata, Bowerbank. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol. ii. pp. 174-177 (1878).
210. On Holastrella, a Fossil Sponge of the Carboniferous era, and on
Hemiastrella, a new species of recent Sponge. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol. ili. pp. 141-150 (1879).
211, Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 5, vol. iii. pp. 284-304 (1879).
212. Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 5, vol. iii. pp. 343-360 (1879).
215. . On the Nutritive and Reproductive Processes of Sponges. Ann. M.
N. H. ser. 5, vol. iv. pp. 374-386 (1879).
214 . Note on the so-called “ Farringdon (Coral-Rag) Sponges” (Calci-
spongie, Zittel). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. iv. pp. 431-437 (1879).
215, On a new species of excavating Sponge (Alectona millari), and on a
new species of Rhaphidotheca (R. affinis). J. R. Micr. Soe. vol. ii.
pp- 448-449 (1879).
216. ——. Spongide from Kerguelen’s Island. Phil. Trans. yol. elxviii.
pp. 286-288 (1879).
217. . Ona new genus of Foraminifera; and Spiculation of an unknown
Sponge. Zr, R. Mier. Soc. vol. ii. pp. 500-502 (1879).
218. Report on Specimens dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar and
presented to the Liverpool Free Museum by Capt. W. H. Cawne Warren.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. vi. p. 35 (1880).
219. On Fossil Sponge-spicules from the Carboniferous strata of Ben
Bulben, near Sligo. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. vi. pp. 209-214 (1880).
[220.] ——. Report on Sponges dredged in the Gulf of Manaar. (Abstr.)
P. Liverp. Soc. vol, xxxiy. p. 273 (1880).
. List of fourteen Species of Sponges dredged at Falmouth. Tr.
Birmingham Soe. vol. 1880, p. 59 (1880).
222, ——, and W.S.M. D’Urban. On the Zoology of the Barents Sea.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. vi. p. 253 (1880).
221.
223. Sponges. Including list of Sponges dredged by the Birmingham
Natural History and Microscopical Society, Falmouth Excursion, 1879;
depth 15-20 fathoms. Midland Naturalist, p. 190 (1880).
224. History and Classification of the known species of Spongilla. Ann.
M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. vii. pp. 77-107 (1881).
225. ——. On Spongilla cinerea. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. vii. pp. 263, 264
(1881).
226. ——. Supplementary Report on the Specimens dredged up from the Gulf
of Manaar, together with others from the Sea in the vicinity of the Bass
Rocks and from Bass’s Straits respectively, presented to the Liverpool
Free Museum by Capt. H. Cawne Warren. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. vii.
p. 361 (1881).
Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida.—Order II.
Ceratina, Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, yol. viii. pp. 101-112 (1881).
602 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
228. Carter, H.J. On the Development of the Fibre in the Spongida, Ann.
M.N. Z. ser. 5, vol. viii. pp. 112-120 (1881),
229, ——. On Spongiophaga in Spongilla, Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. viii.
p. 222 (1881).
230, Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida.—Order I. Car-
nosa. Ann. M.N. H. ser. 5, vol. viii. pp. 241-259 (1881).
231. waaay Spongiophaga pottsi. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. viii. p. 354
1881).
232, Addendum to our Knowledge of the Carnosa, Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
yol. viii. p. 450 (1881).
233. Some Sponges from the West Indies and Acapulco, in the Liverpool
Free Museum, described, with general and classificatory remarks, Ann.
M.N. H. ser. 5, vol. ix. pp. 260-301 (1882).
234, Some Sponges from the West Indies and Acapulco, in the Liverpool
Free Museum, described, with general and classificatory remarks. Ann.
M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. ix. pp. 346-369 (1882).
235. Form and Nature of the Cirrous Appendages on the Statoblast of
Carterella latitenta, Potts, &c., originally designated Spongiophaga pottst.
Ann. M.N. H. ser. 5, vol. ix. pp. 390-396 (1882).
[285.] ——. Form and Nature of the Cirrous Appendages on the Statoblast of
Carterella latitenta, Potts, &c., originally designated Spongiophaga pottsi.
(Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc. vol. ii. p. 350 (1882).
237. ——. New Sponges, observations on old ones, and a proposed new group
(Phleodictyina). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. x. pp. 106-125 (1882).
Spermatozoa, Polygonal Cell-structure, and the Green Colour in
Spongilla, together with a new species. Ann. M, N. H. ser. 5, vol. x.
pp. 362-372 (1882).
Further observations on the so-called “‘ Farringdon Sponges” (Cal-
cispongie, Zittel), followed by a description of an existing species of a like
kind (Leucetta clathrata,n.sp.). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xi. pp. 20-87
(1883).
. Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida.—Pachytragida.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xi. pp. 344-369 (1883).
A new genus of Sponges (Monanchora clathrata). Ann. M. N. H,
ser. 5, vol. xi. pp. 369-370 (1883).
On the Microscopic Structure of thin slices of Fossil Calcispongiz.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xii. pp. 26-80 (1888).
On the Presence of Starch-Granules in the Ovum of the Marine
Sponges, and on the Ovigerous Layer of Suberites domuncula, Nardo.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xii. pp. 80-36 (1883).
Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 5, Vol. xii. pp. 308-329 (1883).
Spicules of Spongilla in the Diluvium of the Altmthl Valley, Ba-
varia. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xii. pp. 329-333 (1883).
246. ——. Remarks on Dr. Vejdovsky’s Paper [vide infra]. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 5, vol. xiii. p. 99 (1884).
238.
239.
247. Generic Characters of the Sponges described in Mr. Carter’s
“ Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida,” Ann. M. N. H.
ser, 5, vol. xii. p, 308 (1883). Ann. M. N. H. ser, 5, vol. xiii. pp. 129-
130 (1884).
248, —-. On Grantia ciliata, var. spinispiculum. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol, xiii. pp. 153-163 (1884).
249. The Branched and Unbranched Forms of the Freshwater Sponges
considered generally. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xiii. pp. 269-273
(1884).
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 603
250. Carter, H. J. Note on the assumed relationship of Parkeria to Stro-
matopora, and on a microscopic section of Stromatopora mamillata, Fr.
Schmidt. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xiii. pp. 353-356 (1884).
Catalogue of the Marine Sponges collected by Mr. Jos. Willcox
on the West Coast of Florida. P. dc. Philad. 1884, pp. 202-209 (1884).
252. ——. On the Spongia coriacea of Montagu = Leucosolenia coriacea,
Bwk., together with a new Variety of Leucosolenia lacunosa, Bwk.,
elucidating the Spicular Structure of some of the Fossil Calcispongie ;
followed by Illustrations of the Pin-like Spicules on Verticillites helvetica,
De Loriol. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xiv. p. 17 (1884).
251.
253. - Note on Spongilla fragilis, Leidy, and a new Species of Spongilla
[mackayi| from Nova Scotia. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 18-20
(1885).
254, Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of Port Phillip
Heads, South Australia. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 107-117
(1885).
255. ——. Mode of Circulation in the Spongida. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv.
pp. 117-122 (1885).
New Sponges from South Australia. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soe.
ser, 2, vol. vy. p. 465 (1885).
Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of Port Phillip
Heads, South Australia. dan. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 196-222
(1885).
258, ——. Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of Port Phillip
Heads, South Australia. Ann. M, N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 801-821
(1885).
[259.] ——. Circulationin Spongida. (Abstr.) J. R Micr. Soc. ser. 2, vol. vy.
pp. 816-817 (1885).
260. ——. Report on a Collection of Marine Sponges from Japan, made by
Dr. J. Anderson, F.R.S. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 887-406 (1885).
[256.]
257.
261. . Ona variety of the Freshwater Sponge, Meyenia fluviatilis, Ann.
M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 453-456 (1885).
262. . Ona variety of the Freshwater Sponge Meyenia fluviatilis, from
Florida. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xvi. pp. 179-181 (1885).
263. Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of Port Phillip
Heads, South Australia. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xvi. pp. 277-294
(1885).
264. ——. Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of Port Phillip
Heads, South Australia, dan. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xvi. pp. 847-368
(1885).
Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of Port Phillip
Heads, South Australia. Ann. M,N. H. ser. 5, vol. xvii. pp. 40-53 (1886).
Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of Port Phillip
Heads, South Australia. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xvii. pp. 112-127
(1886).
Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of Port Phillip
Heads, South Australia. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xvii. pp. 431-441
(1886). t
Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of Port Phillip
_ Heads, South Australia. Ann. M, N. H. ser. 5, vol. xvii. pp. 502-516
(1886).
Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of Port Phillip
Heads, South Australia. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xviii. pp. 34-55
(1886).
270. ——. Descriptions of Sponges from the neighbourhood of Port Phillip
Heads, South Australia. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xviii. pp. 126-149
(1886).
265.
267.
268.
269.
604 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
[271.] Carter, H. J. Description of Sponges from South Australia. (Abstr.)
J. R. Mier. Soc. vol. vi. p. 811.
272. Supplement to the Descriptions of Mr. J. Bracebridge Wilson’s Aus-
tralian Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xviii. pp. 271-290 (1886).
273 Supplement to the Descriptions of Mr. J. Bracebridge Wilson's
Australian Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xviii. pp. 369-379 (1886).
274 Supplement to the Descriptions of Mr. J. Bracebridge Wilson’s
Australian Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xviii. pp. 445-466 (1886).
275, Cavolini, T. Memorie per servir a la storia de Polipi marini. Napoli
(1785).
276. ——. Memorie postume per cura di Societa de la Chiaje. Benvenuto
(1853).
277. Charlesworth, E. On the Mineral Condition and general Affinities of
the Chalk at Flamborough and Bridlington. Proc. Yorkshire Phil.
Soc. (1848).
278. Chiaje, S. delle. Memorie sulla storia e anatomia degli animali senza
yertebre. Vol. iii. Napoli (1828).
279. ——. Memorie sulla storia e anatomia degli animali senza vertebre.
Vol. iv. Napoli (1829).
280. ——. Memorie sulla storia e anatomia degli animali senza vertebre.
Vol. iii. Napoli (1843).
981. Chilton, C. A New Zealand Freshwater Sponge. New Z. J. Sci. vol. i.
pp. 883-384 (1883).
282. Chimmo, W. Natural History of the Huplectella aspergillwm from the
Philippine Islands. London (1878).
283. Choffat, Paul. Note sur la distribution des bancs de Spongiaires 4 Spi-
cules siliceux Gans la chaine du Jura et sur le parallélisme de I Ar-
govien. Bull. Soc. Géol. sér. 3, tom. xiii, 1885, pp. 834-841 (1886).
284. Clark, H. James. Conclusive Proofs of the Animality of the Ciliate
Sponges, and of their affinities with the Infusoria Flagellata. Am. J.
Sci. ser. 2, vol. xviii. pp. 320-325 (1866).
285. Conclusive Proofs of the Animality of the Ciliate Sponges, and of
their affinities with the Infusoria Flagellata. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 3,
vol. xix. pp. 13-18 (1867).
286. On the Spongie Ciliate as Infusoria Flagellata ; or observations
on the Structure, Animality, and Relationship of Lewcosolenia botryoides,
Bowerbank. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. i. pp. 183-142 (1868),
287. ——. On the Spongie Ciliatz as Infusoria Flagellata; or observations
on the Structure, Animality, and Relationship of Leucosolenia botryoides,
Bowerbank. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. i. pp. 188-215 (1868).
288 On the Spongiz Ciliatz as Infusoria Flagellata ; or observations
on the Structure, Animality, and Relationship of Leucosolenia botryoides,
Bowerbank. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. i. 250-264 (1868).
289 On the Nature of Sponges. P. Bost. Soc. vol. xi. pp. 16-17 (1868).
290. ——. On the Spongie Ciliate as Infusoria Flagellata; or observations
on the Structure, Animality, and Relationship of Lewcosolenia botryoides,
Bowerbank. Mem. Bost. Soc. yol. i. pp. 805-340 (1869).
291. ——. Note on the Infusoria Flagellata and the Spongiz Ciliate. Am.
J. Sci. ser. 3, vol. i. p. 113 (1871).
292. ——. Note on the Infusoria Flagellata and the Spongi Ciliate. Ann.
M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. vii. p. 247 (1871).
293. ——. The American Spongilla, a craspedote, flagellate Infusorian. Am.
J. Sci. ser. 3, vol. ii. pp. 426-436 (1871).
Note on the Infusoria Flagellata and the Spongiz Ciliate. Am. J.
Sci. ser. 3, vol. ii. p. 426 (1872).
1885. | POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 605
309.
310.
311.
312,
313.
314.
315.
. Clark, H. James. The American Spongilla, a craspedote, flagellate
Infusorian. Monthl. Micr. J. vol. vii. pp. 104-114 (1872).
The American Spongilla, a craspedote, flagellate Infusorian.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. ix. pp. 71-82 (1872).
. Claus, C. Die Celenteraten-Natur der Spongien. Ber, Vers. Nat.
Hannover, 1864, p. 263 (1864).
Ueber Euplectella aspergillum, R. Owen. Hin Beitrag zur Natur-
geschichte der Kieselschwamme. Marburg (1868).
. ——. Grundziige d. Zoologie. 4th ed. Bd. i. p. 208 (1882).
. Cohn, F. Ueber das Vorkommen von Kieselschwammnadeln in einem
dichten grauen Kalkstein. JB. Schles. Ges. Bd. xlviii. pp. 63-64
(1870).
. Conrad, D. A. Observation on the Silurian and Devonian Systems of
the United States, cae descriptions of new Organic Remains. J. Ae.
Philad. vol. viii. p. 228 (1842).
2. Cooke, M.C. On Kent’s Manualof the Infusoria &. Grevillea, vol. ix.
pp. 41-43 (1880).
. Costa, A. Rapporto preliminare e sommario sulle ricerche zoologiche
fatte in Sardegna durante la primavera del 1882. Rendic. Accad. Se.
Napoli, anno xxi. p. 189 (1882).
. Costa, O. G. Fauna del Regno di Napoli, Polypi, a poliparia flessibili,
Tethya. (1843.)
. Couch, R. Q. Observations on the Sponges of Cornwall. Rep. R. Poly-
techn. Soc. Cornwall for 1842, p. 41 (1842).
. Coues, E., and Yarrow, H. C. Notes on the Natural History of
Fort Macon, N. C., and vicinity. P. Ac. Philad. 1878, p. 297 (1878).
- Courtiller, A. Eponges fossiles des sables du terrain erétacé supé-
rieur des enyirons de Saumur [étage sénonien de d’Orbigny]. Angers
(1862).
Eponges fossiles des sables du terrain erétacé supérieur des en-
virons de Saumur (étage sénonien de d’Orbigny). Zxtr. des Annales de
la Soc. Linnéenne de Maine-et-Loire, vol. iv. (1868).
Eponges fossiles des sables du terrain crétacé supérieur des en-
virons de Saumur (étage sénonien de d’Orbigny) suivies des nullipores 4
squelette silicieux de l’étage sénonien. 2¢ édition, revue et augmentée.
Paris (1874).
Croockewit, J. H. Zamenskelling yan Spons. Scheik. Onderzoek.
Labor. Vol. ii. p. 1. Utrecht (1843).
Cubitt, A. Dorvillia agariciformis. Monthl. Micr. J. vol. v. (1878).
Cunningham, R.O. On Sponges. P. Belf. Soc. 1878-80, pp. 208-
209 (1880).
Cunnington, W. Ona peculiarity in the structure of one of the fossil
Sponges of the Chalk, Choanites konigi, Mant. ep. Brit. Assoc. 1848,
pt. 2, p. 67 (1848).
Cuvier, G. L.C. F. D. Régne Animal. Vol. iv. (1817).
——. Reégne Animal. 3¢ édition par Milne-Edwards, Blanchard et de
-Quatrefages. Zoophytes. Paris (1849).
[816.] Czerniavski, W. The littoral Sponges of the Black and Caspian
317.
3)8.
Seas. (Russ.) (Preliminary report). Bul. Mose. vol. liii. pt. 2, pp. 875-
397 (1878).
elk Littorales Marium Pontici et Caspii. Bull. Mose. vol,
liv. pt. 2, pp. 88-128 (1879).
lat Littorales Marium Pontici et Caspii. Bull. Mosc. vol.
liv. pt. 2, pp. 228-320 (1879).
606 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
319. Dames. Ueber Spongien von Gotland. Bd. 1874, p. 613 (1874).
320. D’Archiac, Le V. Descriptions des fossiles recueillis par M. Thorent,
dans les couches 4 Nummulines des environs de Bayonne. Mém. Soc.
Géol. France, sér. 2, tom. ii. (1846).
321. Davey, E. C. The Sponge-Gravel beds at Coxwell, near Farringdon.
Tr. Newbury District Field Club, vol. ii. (1874).
. The Sponge-Grayel beds at Coxwell, near Farringdon. (Abstr.)
Geol. Mag. vol. i. p. 228 (1874).
323. Dawson, George M. On some Canadian Species of Spongilla. Can.
Nat. n.s. vol. viii. pp. 1-5 (1878).
324. Dawson, J.W. Note on the structure of a specimen of Uphantenia
from the Collection of the American Museum of Natural History.
Am. J. Sci. yol. xxii. pp. 182-183 (1881).
Note on the structure of a specimen of Uphantenia from the Col-
lection of the American Museum of Natural History. Ann. M. N. .
ser. 5, vol, viii. pp. 237-238 (1881).
326. Defrance. Verticillistes. Dictionnaire Sci. Nat. tom. lviii. (1829).
327. Dendy and Ridley (see also Rivtny and Denpy). On Protoleia sollasi,
a new genus and species of Monaxonid Sponges allied to Polymastia.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xviii. pp. 152-159 (1886).
[828.] ——. New Monaxonid Sponge (Profoleia sollasii). (Abstr.) J. R.
Micr. Soc. vol. vi. p. 1001 (1886).
329. Desor, E. Two new Sponges (Spongia arceolata and sulphurea). P. Bost.
Soc. vol. ili. p. 67 (1848).
330. Dewalque, G. Un spongiaire nouveau du systéme Hifelien (Astreo-
spongium meniscoides). Bull. Acad. Belg. sér. 2, vol. xxxiv. pp. 23-26
(1872).
831. Dewalque, G. Prodromus d’une description géologique de la Belgique.
Sec. éd. conf. ala prém. Bruxelles (1880).
332. Dezallier @’Argenville, A. Oryctologie, Paris (1755).
333. Dezs6, Béla. Die Histologie und Sprossenentwickelung der Tethyen,
besonders der Tethya lyncurium, Lbk. Arch. mikr, Anat. Bd. xvi.
pp. 626-651 (1878).
325.
334, Die Histologie und Sprossenentwickelung der Tethyen, beson-
ders der Tethya lyncurium, Lbk. Arch. mikr. Anat. Bd. xvii. pp. 151-
164 (1879).
335. A Magyar tengerpart Szivacsfaunija. I. Koslemeny, Ectezezesck
a Természettudomayok, Koy. x. Kot. xiii. Szam, 1880.
336. Dioscorides, P. [epi dAns iazpixijs. Liber v. cap. 135, 187, 162.
3387. Dixon, T. The Geology and Fossils of the Cretaceous Formation of
Sussex. (1850.)
838. Dobie, W. M. Note on the observation of Cilia in Grantia. P. Med.
Soc. Edinburgh, 1852, pp. 127-129 (1852).
339. Note on the observation of Cilia in Grantia. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 2, vol. x. p. 317 (1852).
340. Second Notice on the observation of Cilia in Grantia. Ann. Anat.
and Physiol. (Goodsir), 1852, No. 2, p. 129 (1852).
341. Déderlein, L. Studien an japanischen Lithistiden. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd.
xl. pp. 62-104 (1884).
. Ueber Lithistiden aus Japan. Ber. Vers. Nat. pp. 110-112
(1884).
Faunistische Studien in Japan, Enoshima, und die Sagami-Bai.
Arch. f, Nat. (2) xlix. p. 102 (1884).
344. Donati, V. Della storia naturale marina dell’ Adriatico. Venezia
(1750).
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 607
345. D’Orbigny, A. Prodréme de Paléontologie stratigraphique universelle
des animaux mollusques et rayonnés. (1849-1850.) Compare Orsicyy,
no. 1121-i123.
346. ——. Cours élémentaire de Paléontologie et de Géologie stratigraphique.
(1849-1852.) Compare Orsreny, no. 1124-1126,
347. Duchassaing, P., et G. Michelotti. Spongiaires de la Mer Caraibe.
Haarlem (1864).
348. . Revue des Zoophytes et des Spongiaires des Antilles. Paris (1870).
349. Dufour, T. Notice sur un champignon parasit des Eponges. Bull. Soc.
Vaudoise Se. Nat. vol. xviii. p. 144 (1882).
350. Dujardin, F._ Observations sur les Eponges et en particulier sur la
Spongille ou Eponge d'eau douce. Ann. Sci. Nat. sér. 2, tom. x. pp. 5-
13 (1838).
351. ——. Observations sur les Eponges. C. R. tom. vi. p. 676 (1838).
852. ——. Observations sur les Eponges. L’ Institut, tom. vi. no. 229,
p. 157 (1838).
[853.] ——. Observations sur les Eponges. Soc. Philom. Extr. Proc.-verb.
p- 81 (1838).
354. ——. Histoire naturelle des Zouphytes Infusoires, pp. 305,306. Paris
(1841-1842).
355. Duncan, P. Martin. On some Spheroidal Lithistid Spongida from the
Upper Silurian Formation of New Brunswick. Ann, M. N. H ser. 5,
vol. iv. pp. 84-92 (1879).
356. . On a Parasitic Sponge of the Order Calcarea (Mobiusispongia
parasitica). J. R. Micr. Soc. vol. iii. pp. 877-383 (1880).
357. On some Remarkable Enlargements of the Axial Canals of Sponge-
Spicules, and their Causes, J. R. Micr. Soc. ser. 2, vol. i. pp. 557-872
(1881).
358. ——. On a Lithistid Sponge, and on a form of <Aphrocallistes from the
Deep Sea off the Coast of Spain. J. Z. S. vol. xv. pp. 320-328 (1881).
359. ——. Descriptions of two species of Dirrhopalum. J. L. S. vol. xv.
pp- 487-492 (1881).
. On a Radiolarian and some Microspongida from considerable
depths in the Atlantic Ocean. J. R. Mier, Soc. n.s. vol. i. p. 173
(1881),
361. ——. Onan Organism which penetrates and excayates Siliceous Sponge-
spicules (Spongiophagus carteri). Ann. M,N. H. vol. ser. 5, viii. p. 120
(1881).
On the Genus Hindia and its Species. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5
vol. xviii. pp. 226-228 (1886).
363. Dunikowsky, Emil v. Die Spongien, Radiolarien und Foraminiferen
der unterliassischen Schichten vom Schafberg bei Salzburg. Denk.
Ak. Wien, Bd. xlv. pp. 163-194 (1882).
364. ——. Die Pharetronen aus dem Cenoman yon Essen, und die syste-
matische Stellung der Pharetronen. Pal. Bd. xxix. pp. 281-324 (1883).
365. D’Urban. The Zoology of the Barents-Sea. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol.
vi. pp. 253-276 (1880). Compare Carrer and D’Ursay, no. 222.
366. Dutour, E. F. Observations sur une éponge de mer. Mém. Acad.
Sci. Paris for 1766, p. 39 (1769).
367. Dutrochet, R. J. H. Observations sur la Spongilla ramosa, Lam.
(Ephydatia lacustris). Ann. Sci. Nat, tom. xv. pp. 205-218 (1828).
368. ——. Observation sur la Spongilla ramosa, Lam. (Ephydatia lacustris).
Féruss, Bull. Sc. Nat. tom. xvii. p. 156 (1829).
. Observation sur la Spongilla ran.osa, Lam, (Ephydatia lacustris).
Isis, p. 370 (1830).
360.
[369.]
608 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
370. Dutrochet, R. J. H. Observations sur la Spongilla ramosa, Lam.
Mémoires pour servir 4 l’histologie, anatomie et physiologie des Végétaux
et des Animaux, tom. i. p. 430 (1837).
371. Duvernoy, G.L. Note sur une espéce d’Eponge qui se loge dans la
Coquille de l’huitre a pied-de-cheval ( Ostrea hippopus, Lam.), en creusant
de canaux des d’épaisser des valves de cette coquille (Spongia terebrans).
C. R. tom, ix. pp. 683-686 (1840).
372. ——. Note additionelle sur les Eponges perforantes. ©. R. tom. ix.
pp. 1021-1028 (1840).
373. Dybowsky, VW. Ueber die Spongillen der Ostseeprovinzen. SB. Ges.
Dorp. 104te Sitzung, pp. 517-533, Nov. (1877).
374. ——. Ueber die Spongillen des Ostseeprovinzen. Beitr. balt. Wochens.
1878, pp. 10-12 (1878).
375. ——. Mittheilungen itber Spongien. I. Zool. Anz. Bd. i. pp. 30-82
(1878).
376. ——. Mittheilungen iiber Spongien. II. Zool. Anz. Bd. i. pp. 53-54
(1878).
377 Studien tiber die Spongien des russischen Reiches, mit besonderer
Beriicksichtigung der Spongien-Fauna des Baikal-Sees. Mém. Ae.
Pétersh. sér. 7, tom. xxvii. No. 6 (1880).
378 Einige Bemerkungen iiber die Veranderlichkeit der Form und
Gestalt von Lubomirskia baicalensis und iber ihre Verbreitung im Allge-
meinen. Bull. Ac. Pétersh. tom. xxvii. (1880).
379. Einige Bemerkungen iiber die Verinderlichkeit der Form und
Gestalt von Lubomirskia variabilis und iiber die Verbreitung der Baikal-
Schwimme im Allgemeinen. Mél. Biol. Pétersb. vol. ix. pp. 41-47
(1881).
880. ——. Studien iiber die Siisswasser-Schwimme des russischen Reiches.
Mém. Acad. Pétersh. sér. 7, tom. xxx. part 10 (1882).
Studien iiber die Siisswasser-Schwamme des russischen Reiches.
(Abstr.) J. R. Micr, Soc. ser. 2, yol. iii. pp. 878-879 (1888).
[381.]
382. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntniss des Siisswasser-Schwammes Dosilia
stepanowii. Zool. Anz. Bd. vii. pp. 476-480 (1884).
[883.] Some remarks upon the variability in form of Lubomirskia batca-
lensis, and upon the Distribution of the Baical Sponges in general.
(Transl.) With PS. by H. J. Carter. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xiv.
pp. 29-34 (1884).
[884.] ——. Notes on the South-Russian Spongillide. (Transl.) Ann. M.N.
H. ser. 5, vol. xiv. p. 58 (1884).
Contribution to the Knowledge of the Freshwater Sponge Do-
silia stepanowii. (Tyansl.) Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, yol. xiv. pp. 60-63
(1884).
[385.]
[886.] Contribution to the Knowledge of the Freshwater Sponge Lo-
silia stepanowii. (Transl.) Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xiv. pp. 249-254
(1884).
. 887. . (On acollection of Sponges from the Sea of Ochotsk.) Wszechs-
wiat, tom. iii. 1884, p. 175.
.. Notiz iiber die aus Siid-Russland stammenden Spongillen. SB.
Ges. Dorp. Ba. vii. pp. 507-515 (1884).
389. ——. Samjetka o bodjagasch juschnoi Rossii. Arb. Nat. Ges. Univ.
Chorkow, Bd. xvii. p. 289 (1884).
390. Mittheilungen iiber einen neuen Fundort des Schwammes Ludo-
mirskia baicalensis. SB. Ges. Dorp. Ba. vii. p. 44 (1885).
. 391. Monographie der Spongilla sibirica. SB. Ges. Dorp. Bad. vii.
pp. 64-75 (1889).
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 609
392. Dybowsky, W. Monographie der Spongilla sibirica. SB, Ges. Dorp.
Bd. vii. pp. 137-139 (1885).
393. ——. Mittheilungen iiber die aus dem Flusse Niemen Stammende T7ocho-
spongilla erinaceus. SB. Ges, Dorp. Bd. vii. pp. 295-298 (1886).
394. Eick, H. Ueber die Formationen des bunten Sandsteins und des Muschel-
kalks in Oberschlesien und ihre Versteinerungen. (1865.)
395. Eckhel, Geo. v. Der Badeschwamm in Riicksicht auf die Art seiner
Gewinnung, die geographische Verbreitung und locale Variation. Triest
(1873).
[396. ] Le spugne da bagno in riguardo al modo di raccoglierle e alla loro
propagazione geografica e varieta locale. (Transl.) Trieste (1874).
397. ——. Nuove communicazioni sopra le Spugne. Bull. Soc. Adriat. p. 100
(1875).
398. Ehlers, EB. Die Esper’schen Spongien in den zoologischen Sammlungen
d. k.Universitat. Univ. Progr. Erlangen (1870).
399. ——. Aulorhipis elegans, eine neue Spongienform. Z. wiss, Zool. Bd. xxi.
pp. 540-567 (1871).
400. ——-.. Aulorhipis elegans. SB. Soc. Erlang. Ba. iii. (1871).
401.
Aulorhipis elegans, 1 new form of Sponge, with notes on a few
points on the Organization of Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. vii.
pp. 302-303 (1881).
402. Ehrenberg, C. G. Ueber die geformten unkristallinischen Kieseltheile
yon Pflanzen, besonders iiber Spongilla erinaceus. SB. Ak. Berlin, 1846
p. 96 (1846).
403. ——. Ueber eine neue einflussreiche Anwendung des polarisierten Lichtes,
SB. Ak. Berlin, 1848, p. 238 (1848).
404. . Ueber eine neue einflussreiche Anwendung des polarisierten Lichtes.
SB. Ak, Berlin, 1848, p. 473.
405, ——. Weitere Mittheilungen itber Anwendung chromatischen, polari-
sierten Lichtes. SB. Ak. Berlin, 1849, p. 55 (1849).
406. ——. Mikrogeologie. Leipzig (1854).
407. ——. Mikrogeologie. Fortsetzung. Lieferung 1. Leipzig (1856),
408. ——. Beitrag zur Beurtheilung der Gattung Hyalonema ete. MB, Ak.
Berl, 1860, p. 178 (1860).
409. ——. Ueber die neueren die japanische Glaspflanze als Spongia betref-
fenden Ansichten, und Erlauterungen der Synonyme zu Hrn. Bower-
bank’s Spongolithen-Tabellen. MB. Ak. Berl. 1861, pp. 448-452
(1862).
410. . Ueber die nicht natiirliche Gestaltung der Glaspflanze, Hyalo-
nema sieboldii, Gray. SB. Ak. Berlin, 1863, pp. 300-305 (1863).
411, ——. Ueber Hyalonema lusitanicum. MB. Ak. Berl. 1866, pp. 823-
837 (1866).
412, ——. Ueber Hyalonema lusitanicwm. MB. Ak. Berl. 1867, pp. 300-307
(1867).
413. ——. Ueber Hyalonema lusitanicum, MB, Ak. Berl, 1867, pp. 310-3817
(1867).
414. Weitere Entwickelung des Hyalonema lusitanicwm und der
Spongiaceen. MB. Ak, Berl. 1867, pp. 843-857 (1867).
415. . On Hyalonema lusitanicum, and on the Animal or Vegetable
Nature of Sponges. Ann. M. WN. H. ser. 3, vol. xix. pp. 419-427 (1867).
416. ——. Mikrogeologische Studien. Abh. Ak. Berl. 1872, p. 131 (1872).
417. ——. Mikrogeologische Studien. Abh, Ak. Berl. 1875, p. 1 (1875).
418. Hichwald, E. de. Lethzxa Rossica. Vol. i, (1860).
Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1886, No. XL. 40
610 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
419, Eimer, T. Nesselzellen und Saamen bei Seeschwammen. Arch, mikr.
Anat. Bd. vii. pp. 281-284 (1872).
[420.] ——. ‘Thread-cells and Spermatozoa in Marine Sponges. (Abstr.)
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. x. pp. 306-309 (1872).
421. Sur cellules utricules et Spermatozoa dans les Eponges marines.
Arch. Sci. Nat. tom. x. (xliv.) p. 350 (1872).
422. Untersuchungen an Seeschwimmen. Z. ges. Natwrw. Bad. vi.
pp. 202-205 (1872).
423, Ellis, John. Essay towards a Natural History of the Corallines and
other Marine Productions of a like kind, commonly found on the Coasts
of Great Britain and Ireland. P. 78. (1755.)
424, ——. On the Nature and Formation of Sponges. Phil. Tr. vol. ly. p. 280
(1765).
425. ——, and Solander. Natural History of many curious and uncommon
Zoophytes, collected from various parts of the Globe. (1786.)
[426.] ——. On the Nature and Formation of Sponges. (Abstr.) Zool.
Journ. vol. i. 1824, p. 285 (1825).
427, Esper, EB. J. C. Oryctographiz Erlangensis specimina quedam, im-
primis Spongiarum petrificatarum. Nova Acta Natur. Curios. vol. viii.
pp. 194-204 (1791).
428, ——. Die Pflanzenthiere. Theil II. Nirnberg (1791-1794).
429, ——. Fortsetzung der Pflanzenthiere. TheilI. Nirnberg (1794-1797).
430, ——. Fortsetzung der Pflanzenthiere. Theil II. Nirnberg (1798-1806).
431. ——. Die Pflanzenthiere. Theil III. Ninberg (1805-1830).
432. Etallon, A. Etudes Paléontologiques sur le Haut-Jura. Mém. Soc.
Juras. @émul. Départ. du Doubs (1858).
433 . Sur la Classification des Spongiaires du Haut-Jura, et leur distri-
bution dans les étages. Actes Soc. Juras. d’émul. Porrentruy (1860).
434 , et Thurmann, J. Lethea bruntruthana. Neue Denkschriften
der schweizerischen Gesell. Bd. xix. (1862).
435. Lethea bruntruthana. Neue Denkschriften der schweizer-
ischen Gesell. Bd, xx. p. 357 (1863).
436. Etheridge, R., Jun. Further localities for Acanthospongia Smithit.
Geol. Mag. dec. 2, vol. iii. p. 576 (1876).
437. ——. Paleontological Notes. (Hyalonema, &e.) Geol. Mag. dec. 2,
vol. v. pp. 117-119 (1878).
,and H. A. Nicholson. On the Genus Palgacis, and the Species
occurring in British Carboniferous Rocks (Sponge?). Ann. M, N. H.
ser. 5, vol. 1, pp. 206-227 (1878).
439. Ewald. Ueber ein neues Celoptychium aus der obern Senonen Kreide
yon Halden in Westphalen. SS. nat. Fr. p. 38 (1878).
440. Faber, G. L. Sponge Fisheries of the Adriatic, in ‘ The Fisheries of the
Adriatic.’ London, 1883, p. 96 (1888).
441, Fabricius, O. Fauna Grenlandica. Hafnie et Lipsie (1780).
442. Ferry, de. Note sur les Crustacées et les Spongitaires de la base de
létage Bathonien des environs de Macon. Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie
(Caen), tom. ix. pp. 365-375 (1866).
443, Fisher, O. On the Phosphatie Nodules of the Cretaceous Rocks of Oam-
bridgeshire (Porospongia). Phil. Mag. vol. xliy. p. 543 (1872).
444, ——. Onthe Phosphatic Nodules of the Cretaceous Rocks of Oam-
bridgeshire (Porospongia). J. G. Soc. vol. xxix. pp. 52-63 (1873).
445, Fischer, P. Recherches sur les éponges perforantes fossiles (Cliona).
Arch, nouv, Mus. vol. iv. pp. 117-170 (1868).
1886.] {POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 611
446. Fischer, P. Sur la présence, dans les mers actuels, d’un type de Sar-
codaires des terrains secondaires (Dendrina), J. de Zool, tom. iv. pp.
530-533 (1875).
. Sur la présence, dans les mers actuel, d’un type de Sarcodaires
des terrains secondaires (Dendrina). C. R. tom, lxxxi. pp. 1131-1133
(1875).
448. Fischer Waldheim, G.de. Oryctographie du Gouvernement de
Moscou, p. 178. (1873.)
449, ——. Observations sur le genre de Polypier Celoptychium de Goldfuss.
Bull, Mose. tom. xvii. p. 276 (1844),
450. Fitton, W.H. Onsome of the strata between the Chalk and the Oxford
Oolite. Zr. Geol. Soc. vol. iv. p. 103 (1836).
451. Fleming, T. Philosophy of Zoology. Vol. ii. Edinburgh (1822).
452, —-. History of British Animals. Edinburgh (1828).
453. Flemming, W. Ueber Janthella, Gray. Verh. phys.-med. Gesell,
Wiirzb. n. 8. vol, ii. p. 1 (1871).
[454.] ——. Ueber Janthella, Gray, (Ausz.) Z. ges, Naturw. vol. iv. p. 206
(1871).
447,
455. Forel, F. A. Matériaux pour servir 4 l'étude de la faune profonde du
Lac Leman. (Spongilla lacustris, p. 204.) Geneva (1876).
456. Frantisek, P. Dodatky ku faune ceskych hub Sladkovodnich. [Oon-
tribution to the Bohemian freshwater Sponge-fauna.] SB. bdhm.
Ges. 1886, p. 147. (In Bohemian, with German réswmé.) (1886.)
[457.] ——. Sponges of Bohemia. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soe. ser. 2, vol, vi.
p- 629 (1886).
458. Franzius, W. Historia animalium ..... Opera Cypriani. Lipsie et
Francofurti (1688).
459. Freistedt, R. Om en fossil Spongia. (fv, Vet.-Ak. Fork, xli. p. 55
(1884).
460. ——. Bidrag till konnedamer am de vid Sveriges nestra kust befvande
Spongie. ih, Sv, Ak, Handl. vol. xxi. no. 9, pp. 1-56 (1885).
461. Fromentel, E. de. ‘Introduction a l’étude des éponges fossiles. Mém.
Soc. Linnéene Normandie, tom. xi. p. 1 (1860).
462, . Catalogue raisonné des Spongitaires de l’étage Néocomien. Buld,
Soc. de Sci, de 0 Yonne, vol. xiv. p. 355 (1861).
Polypiers Corallines des environs de Gray. Mém, Soc, Linnéene
Normandie, vol. xiy. (1864).
464. Fuchs, Th. Welche Ablagerungen haben wir als Tiefseebildungen zu
betrachten? Jahrb. Mineral. 1882, p. 487 (1888).
465. Fullagar, J. Note on the Development of Spongilla, Monthl. Mier. J,
vol. xviii. p. 45 (1877).
——. Note on the Development of the Spicules of Spongilla fluviatilis,
Sct. Gos. (1877).
467. ——. On Freshwater Sponges. Sez. Gos. vol. xvi. p. 8 (1880).
468. ——. On Freshwater Sponges. Sez. Gos, vol. xvi. p. 11 (1880).
469. ——. On Freshwater Sponges. Sci, Gos. vol. xvi. p. 64 (1880).
470. ——. The Freshwater Sponge. Sci. Gos, No. 181, pp. 3-5 (1882).
471. ——. Development of Freshwater Sponges. Sci. Gos. No. 185, pp. 111-
112 (1882).
472, Funck, N. Notice sur ’Huplectella aspergillum, R. Owen. Ann. Soe,
Mal, Belg. vol. iii. pp. 12-14 (1868).
473, ——. Sur l’Huplectella, Publications de l'Institut Royale de Luxem-
hits Section des Sciences Naturelles et Mathématiques, tom, x. p. 266
(1871).
40*
612 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [ Dec. 21,
-474. Ganin, M, Zur Entwickelung der Spongiila fluviatilis. Zool, Anz. tom. i.
pp. 195-199 (1878).
Contributions to our knowledge of the Structure and Development
of Sponges. (Russian.) Warsaw (1879).
476. Geddes, P. On the Nature and Function of the “ Yellow-Cells” of Ra-
diolarians and Ceelenterates. P. R. Soc. Edinburgh, pp. 378-396 (1882).
On the Nature and Function of the “ Yellow-Cells” of Radio-
larians and Ceelenterates. (Abstr.) Amer, J. Sc. yol. xxiii. pp. 328-
329 (1882).
[478.] ——. Sur la Nature et Fonction des Cellules jaunes des Radiolaires et
Ceelenterates. (Extr.) Arch. Z. Expér. vol. x. p. 28 (1882).
[479.] ——. On the Nature and Function of the “ Yellow-Cells ” of Radiola-
rians and Ceelenterates. (Absir.) J. R. Mier. Soc. vol. ii. p. 244 (1882).
Ueber die gelben Zellen der Radiolarien und Ocelenteraten.
(Auszug.) Naturf. Bd, xv. p. 94 (1882).
481. Geinitz, H. B. Die Versteinerungen von Kieslingswalda. 1843.
475.
(477.]
[480.]
482. . Zwei Arten von Spongillopsis; S. dyadica, S. carbonica. Neues
Jahrb. Mineral. Geol. 1864, pp. 517-519 (1864).
483. ——. Ueber fossile Seeschwamme. SB. Dresden, pp. 88-90 (1871).
484. ——. Das Elbthalgebirge in Sachsen. 1 Theil. i. Die Seeschwamme
des unteren Quaders. Pal. Bd. xx. p. 1 (1871).
485. Das Elbthalgebirge in Sachsen. 2 Theil. i. Seeschwamme des
mittleren und oberen Quaders. Pad. (1872).
486. Geoffroy, C. J. Analyse chimicale de l’éponge de la moyenne espéce.
Hist. et Mém. Acad. Paris, 1706, p. 507 (1707).
487. Gerarde, J. The Herball. Ed.2 by J. Johnson. London (1633).
488 Gervais, P. Lettre sur les Eponges d’eau douce. C. R. 1835, pp. 260-
262 (1835).
489. ——. Sur les Eponges d’eau douce. L’ Institut, iii. no. 129, p. 396 (1835).
490, ——. Neue Untersuchungen iiber die Spongillen. Fror. Notizen, Bd. xlvii.
pp. 55-56 (1835).
-491. Gesner, C. Historia Animalium. Lib. 1V. Tiguri (1558).
492. ——. Icones animalium aquatilium. Tiguri (1560).
493. Giard, M. Sur le rapport des Eponges 4 des Anthozoa. Arch. z.
Expér. tom. 1. pp. iv—v.
494. ——~. Sur la Nature des Eponges. Arch. z. Expér. tom. i. pp. lxy-Ixvii.
495, ——. Deux ennemis de l’ostreiculture. Bull. Scient. tom. iv. no. 2, p. 70
(1881).
496. Gibson, R. J. Harvey. On a new Species of Sycandra [aspera].
. First Keport upon the Fauna of Liverpool Bay, pp. 864-367. London
(1886).
497. Giebel. Referat ittber Flemmings “ Janthella.” Z. ges. Naturw. n. F.
Bd. iy. p. 380 (1871).
498. Ginanni, G. Opere postume. Venezia. Tom.I. (1755.)
499. Godet, P. Sur une éponge des iles Philippines (Huplectella aspergillum).
Buil. Soc. Sci. Neuchatel, tom. ix. pp. 178-182 (1878).
50U. Goette, A. Ueber die Entwicklung der Spongillen. Zool, Anz. Bd. vii.
_ p. 676 (1884).
501. ee Ueber die Entwicklung der Spongillen. Zool. Anz. Bd. vii. p. 703
(0884).
502. ——. Ueber die Entwicklung der Spongillen. Zool. Anz. Bd. viii. pp.
377-380 (1885).
. On the Development of the Spongille. (Transl.) Ann, M,N. Z.
[503.]
ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 73-75 (1885).
1886. | POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 613
[504.] Goette, A. Development of Spongilla. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soe.
vol. v. p. 254-255 (1885).
Development of Spongilla. (Abstr.) J. R. Micr. Soc. ser. 2,
vol. v. p. 817 (1885).
506. ——. Nachtragliche Bemerkungen zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der
Schwamme. Zovl. Anz. Bd. ix. p. 292 (1886).
507. ——. Untersuchungen zur Entwicklungsgeschichte von Spongilla fluvi-
atilis. Untersuch. z. Entwicklungsgeschichte der Thiere. 3Hft. (1886.)
[508.] ——. Relationship of Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc. vol. vi.
pp- 809-810 (1886).
509. Goldfuss, G. A. Petrefacta Germanica. Unter Mitwirkung des
Grafen Georg zu Miinster. Bd. I. Heft 1. Diisseldorf (1826).
[505.]
510. Petrefacta Germanica. Unter Mitwirkung des Grafen Georg zu
Minster. Bd. I. Heft 2. Diisseldorf (1829).
511. ——. Petrefacta Germanica. Unter Mitwirkung des Grafen Georg zu
Miinster. Bd. I. Heft 3. Diisseldorf (1831).
512. ——. Petrefacta Germanica. Unter Mitwirkung des Grafen Georg zu
Minster. Bd. I. Heft 4. Diisseldorf (1833).
513. ——. Petrefacta Germanica. Unter Mitwirkung des Grafen Georg zu
Minster. 2 Auflage. Leipzig (1862).
514. Gosse, P. H. Naturalist’s Rambles on the Devonshire Coast, pp, 234-
239 (1853).
515. ——. Manual of British Marine Zoology, pp. 1-6 (1855).
516. Graeffe, Ed. Uebersicht der Seethierfauna des Golfes von Triest, nebst
Notizen tiber Vorkommen, Lebensweise, Erscheinungs- und Fortpflanz-
ungszeit der einzelnen Arten. II. Cclenteraten: Spongiarie. 4rd. z.
Inst. Wien, Ba. iv. pp. 818-821 (1882).
. The Marine Fauna of the Gulf of Triest. (Abstr.) J. R. Micr.
Soe. vol. ii. p. 350 (1883).
518. Grant, R. E. Observations and Experiments on the Structure and
Function of the Sponge. Hdinb, Phil. Journ. vol. xiii. p. 94 (1825).
[517.]
519. ——. Observations and Experiments on the Structure and Function of
the Sponge. Edinb. Phil. Jowrn. vol. xiii. p. 843 (1825).
520. ——. Observations and Experiments on the Structure and Function of
the Sponge. Kdinb. Phil. Journ, vol. xiv. p. 118 (1826),
521. ——. On the Structure and Nature of Spongilla friabilis. Edinb. Phil.
Journ. vol, xiv. p. 183 (1826).
522. . On the Structure and Nature of Spongilla friabilis, Edinb. Phil.
Journ. vol. xiv. p. 270 (1826).
523. . Observations and Experiments on the Structure and Function of
the Sponge. Edinb. Phil. Journ. vol. xiv. p. 336 (1826).
524. . Notice of a new Zoophyte from the Frith of Forth. Edinb. New
Phil. Journ. vol. i. p. 78 (1826).
525. Observations on the Spontaneous Motion of the Ova of ..... -
Spongia panicea, papillaris, cristata, tomentosa. Edinb. New Phil,
Journ. vol. i. p. 150 (1826). :
526. . Remarks on the Structure of some Calcareous Sponges. Edinb,
New Phil. Journ, vol. i. p. 166 (1826).
527. Observations on the Structure of some Siliceous Sponges. Edinb,
New Phil. Journ. vol. i. p. 841 (1826).
(528. ] Sur V’organization et les fonctions de l’Eponges. Féruss, Bull.
Sc. Nat. tom. ix. p. 376 (1826).
[529.] ——. Note sur le Clione celata, nouveau genre de Zoophyte trouyé
dans le Firth du Forth prés d'Edinbourgh. Ann. Sci. Nat. tom. x,
p. 162 (1827).
614 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SysTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
[530.] Grant, R. EB. Sur la Structure de quelques Eponges a axes calcaires.
Féruss. Bull. Sc. Nat. tom. xii. p. 187 (1827).
[531.] ——. De la Structure et dela Nature de la Spongilla friabilis. Feéruss.
Bull. Sc. Nat. tom. xii. p. 189 (1827).
532. ——. Observations and Experiments on the Structure and Functions of
the Sponge. Edinb, New Phil. Journ. vol. ii. p. 121 (1827).
533. ——. Notice of two new species of British Sponges (Spongia san-
guinea and Spongia cinerea), Edinburgh New Phil. Journ, vol. ii.
p. 203 (1827).
[534.] —— Observations et Expériments sur la Structure et les Fonctions des
Eponges. Ann. Sc. Nat. tom. xi. p. 150 (1827).
Note sur le Clione celata, nouveau genre de Zoophyte, trouvé
dans le Firth du Forth prés d’Edinbourgh. Féruss. Bull. Sc. Nat. tom.
xiii, p. 263 (1828).
[536.] . Ueber die Struktur and Funktionen der Schwamme. sis,
p. 1236 (1882),
[537.] ——. Ueber Clione celata. Isis, p. 918 (1834).
538. ——. Outlines of Comparative Anatomy. London (1835-1841).
539, ——. ‘Tabular view of the Primary Divisions of the Animal Kingdom,
London (1861).
540. Grave, —. Sur le tissu sarcodique de l’éponge. C. R. tom. Ixiii. pp.
54-55 (1866).
541. Ties ees le tissu sarcodique de l’éponge. Ann. Sei. Nat. tom. vi. p. 50
(1866).
542, Gray, J.B. On the Situation and Rank of Sponges in the Scale of Nature
and on their internal structure. Zool. Jowrn. vol.i. p. 46 (1824).
[535.]
543, ——. On the Chemical Composition of Sponges. Ann. of Philos. n. s.
vol, ix. p. 481 (1825).
544, ——. Onthe Coral mown asthe Glass-Plant. P. Z. S. 1835, p. 63 (1835).
545. ——. List of the Specimens of British Animals. Brit. Mus. Part 2.
Sponges. London (1848).
546. aes he the Genus Hyalonema. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2, vol. vi. p. 807
547. Description of Aphroceras, a new Genus of Calcareous Spongiadee
from Hongkong. P. Z. S. 1858, p. 113 (1858).
548, ——. On Aphrocallistes, a new Genus of Spongiade from Malacca. P.
Z. 8, 1858, pp. 114, 115 (1858).
Description of Aphroceras, a new Genus of Calcareous Spongiadee
from Hongkong. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 3, vol. ti. p. 83 (1858).
550. --—. On Aphrocallistes, a new Genus of Spongiad from Malacca. Ann.
M. N. #. ser. 3, vol. ii. p. 224 (1858).
549.
551. Description of a new Genus of Sponge (Xenospongia) from Torres
Straits. P. Z. 8S. 1858, pp. 229-2380 (1858).
552. Description of a new Genus of Sponge (Xenospongia) from Torres
Straits. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 3, vol. ii. p. 869 (1858).
553. . Description of MacAndrewia and Myliusia, two new forms of
Sponges. P. Z. S. 1859, pp. 357-361.
554, Description of MacAndrewia and Myliusia, two new forms of
Sponges. Ann. M, N. H. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 495 (1860).
555. Notes on Pustularia rosea, Gray, and Hyalonema. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 3, vol. xiii. p. 111 (1864).
556. Note on the Glassrope, Hyalonema sieboldit. Ann. N. M. H. ser. 3,
vol, xviii. pp. 287-296 (1866).
557. ——. Notes on Dr. Bowerbank’s Paper on Hyalonema. Ann. M. N. H.
ser, 3, Vol, xviii. pp. 485-487 (1866).
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 615
558, Gray, J. EB. Venus's Flower-basket (Hwplectella speciosa), Ann, M,N,
H. ser. 3, vol. xviii. pp. 487-490 (1866).
559. ——. Venus’s Flower-basket (Huplectella). Pop. Sct. Review, vol. vi,
pp. 239-247 (1867).
560. ——. Further observations on Venus’s Flower-basket (Huplectella spe-
ciosa). Ann. M. N, H. ser, 3, vol. xix. pp. 44-45 (1867).
561. ——. Additional Notes on Euplectella speciosa. Ann. M. N. H, ser. 8,
vol. xix. pp. 138-140 (1867).
562. ——. Notes on Hyalonema lusitanicwm, and on the Genus in general.
P. Z. 8. 1867, pp. 117-125 (1867).
563. On Placospongia, a new Generic Form of Spongiade in the
British Museum. P. Z. 8. 1867, pp. 127-129 (1867).
564. Notes on the Arrangement of Sponges, with the Description of
some new Genera. P. Z, S. 1867, pp. 492-558 (1867).
565.
Observations on Dr, Bowerbank’s Paper on Hyalonema lusitanicum.
P, Z. 8. 1867, pp. 1001-1003 (1867).
566, ——. On Dr. Bowerbank’s ‘Observations on Dr. Gray’s ‘ Notes on the
Arrangement of Sponges, &e.’” P. Z. 8. 1868, pp. 582-533 (1868).
567, ——. Note on Theonella, a new Genus of Ooralloid Sponges from
Formosa. P. Z. 8. 1868, pp. 565-566 (1868).
568. ——. Notes on the Ceratellide, a family of Keratose Sponges. P. Z. 8.
1868, pp, 575-579 (1868).
569. ——. Note on Xylospongia cookit, a new Genus of Palmated Sponges in
the collection of the British Museum. P. Z. 8, 1868, p. 637 (1868).
570. ——. Observations on Sponges and on their Arrangement and Nomen-
clature. Ann, M. WN. H. ser. 4, vol. i. pp. 161-173 (1868).
571. ——. On the peculiar Structure and Function of the Spicules of Hyalo-
nema. Ann. M, N. H. ser. 4, vol. i. pp. 292-295 (1868),
572. ——. Note on Hyalonema boreale, Lovén, Ann, M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. i.
p. 484 (1868).
573. ——. Note on a new Japanese Coral (Isis gregorii), and on Hyalonema,
Ann, M,N. H. ser. 4, vol. ii. p. 264 (1868).
574. ——. On a new Free Form of Hyalonema sieboldii, and its manner of
Growth. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. ii. pp. 264-276 (1868).
575. . On Tetilla euplocamus and Hyalonema boreale. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 4, vol. ii. p. 319 (1868).
576. Note on Hyalonema schultzei, Semper. Ann. M. N. H, ser. 4,
vol, ii. pp. 373-378 (1868).
577. ——. On the name Alcyoncellum. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. ii, pp. 890-
391 (1868).
578. ——. Note on Janthella, a new genus of Keratose Sponges, P, Z. 9.
1869, pp. 49-51 (1869).
579. ——. On the Manner of Growth of Hyalonema. Ann. M, N. H. ser. 4,
yol. iii. pp. 192-196 (1869).
580. ——. Note on a new Genus of Sponge from West Australia (Echino-
tient, australis=Aaos cliftoni), Ann. M. N, H. ser. 4, vol. vi. p. 272
(1870).
581. ——. Notes on Anchoring Sponges (Pheronema, Holtenia). Ann. M. N.
H, ser, 4, vol. vi. pp. 8309-312 (1870).
582, ——. Note ona new Genus of Sponge from West Australia. -dan. M.
NV. H. ser, 4, vol. vi. p. 346 (1870).
583. ——. Note on Spongia linteiformis and 8. lycopodium, Esper, Ann, M,
N. H, ser. 4, vol. viii. p. 142 (1871).
584, ——. On the Animal of the Glassrope, Ann, M. N, H. ser. 4, vol. ix,
pp. 824-325 (1872).
616 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
585. Gray, J. E. Notes on the Classification of the Sponges. Ann. M. N.
H. ser. 4, vol. ix. pp. 442-462 (1872).
586. ——. Notice of a new Netted Bponge te from the Philippines.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. x. p. 76 (1872).
587. . List of Echinoderms collected by Robert M‘Andrew, Esq., F.R.S., in
the Gulf of Suez in the Red Sea. (Sponge, p. 124.) Ann. M. N.d.
ser. 4, vol. x. pp. 115-128 (1872).
588. ——. Ona new Genus of Hexaradiate and other Sponges discovered in
the Philippine Islands by Dr. A. B. Meyer (Crateromorpha). Ann. M,
N. H. ser. 4, vol. x. pp. 1384-139 (1872).
589, . On the Animal of the Glassrope.—On the Name Tethya and its
Varieties of Spelling. dan. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. x. p. 152 (1872).
590. - On two new Free Sponges from Singapore (Psetalia, Labaria).
Ann. M,N. H. ser. 4, vol. xi. pp. 234, 235 (1878).
591 . Notes on the Siliceous Spicules of Sponges, and on their Division
into Types. Ann. M, N. H. ser. 4, vol. xii. pp. 203-217 (1878).
592 . Natal Sponges (Leuconia, Ciocalypta). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4,
vol. xii. p. 264 (1878).
593. ——. On the Genus Oceanapia, Norman (Rhizochalina of Oscar Schmidt).
Ann, M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xii. p. 266 (1873).
594, ——. A i from Ceylon. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xii. pp. 266, 267
(1878
595. ——. ce the Arrangement of Sponges. dan. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xiii.
pp- 284-290 (1874).
596. . Note on A. B. Meyer’s paper on: Note on the Habitat of Psetalia
globulosaand Labaria hemispherica, Gray. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, yol. xiii.
p- 188 (1874).
597. ——. On Hyalonema cebuense. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. «vi. pp. 76-78
(1875).
598. Gray, S. T. Natural Arrangement of British Plants. (1821.)
599. Greene, J. R. Manual of the Protozoa. Pp. 30-43. (1859.)
600. Grimm, BE. 0. Kaspiiskoe moreiego fauna. Tetrad 1l-ja. Trudi Aralo-
Kasp. exped. (Description of some Sponges discovered during his Aral
and Oaspian Researches.) Pp. 80-84. (1876. )
601. ——. Kaspiiskoe more i ego fauna. Tetrad 2-ja. Trudi Aralo-Kasp.
exped. (Description of oe Sponges discovered during his Aral and
Caspian Researches.) (1877.)
602. Grote, Remarks on the Spongiads of Cuba, and gee of new
species. Ann. Lycewm N. H. New Y. vol. viii. pp. 195-
603. Grube, A. E. Ausflug nach Triest und dem Quaint | ee (1861).
604. ——. Die Insel Lussin und ihre Meeresfauna. Breslau (1864).
605. ——. Mittheilungen tiber St. Malo und Roskoff, p. 58. Breslau (1870).
606. —— Ueber Spongien von Roscoff und St. Malo. <Adbh, schles, Ges. fir
1869-1872, pp. 182-144 (1872).
607. ——. Ueber Spongia baikalensis, JB. schles. Ges. p. 36 (1873.)
608. ——. Ueber Spongien. JB. schles, Ges. Bd. xvii. p. 45.
609. Gambel, C. W. Spongien-Nadeln im Flysch. Verh, geol. Reichsanst.
: Wien, 1880, pp. 218-215 (1880).
610. Guettard, J. E. Mémoires sur quelques core foss. Hist. et Mém.
Acad. Paris, 1751, p. 2389. (1755.)
611. ——. Nouvelle collection de Mémoirdasimn diffétentis parties dela physique
2 de histoire naturelle des Sciences et des Arts. Tom. ii, Paris (1768).
612. ——. Nouvelle collection de Mémoires sur différentes parties de la phy-
sique de V’histoire naturelle des Sciences et des Arts. Tom. tii, Paris
(1774).
1886.| | POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OP SPONGES. 617
613. Guettard, J.E. Nouvelle collection de Mémoires sur différentes parties
de la physique de l’histoire naturelle des Sciences et des Arts. Tom. iy.
Paris (1778).
614. ——. Nouvellecollection de Mémoires sur differentes parties de la physique
de lhistoire naturelle des Scienceset des Arts. Tom. y. Paris (1783).
615. Guillaume, —. Notice sur les éponges du lac de Neuchatel. Bul.
Soc. Sci. Nat. de Neuchdtel, tom. vi. pp. 405-411 (1864).
616. Gunner, J. E. Om adskillige Sdesnampe. Nors. Vid. Selsk. Skrifter,
vol, iv. p. 74 (1768).
[617.] ——. Von verschiedenen Seeschwimmen, Deutsche Uebersetzung,
Schrift. Dronthh. Ges. Bd. iv. p. 65 (1770).
618. Hadlaw, H. The Hyalonema mirabilis. Tr. R. Asiatic Soc. Japan,
1872-1873, pp. 10-19 (1874).
619. Haeckel, E. Die Generelle Morphologie der Organismen, Band2. Jena
(1866).
620. ——. Ueber den Organismus der Schwamme und ihre Verwandtschaft
mit den Korallen. Jen. Z. Nat. Bd. vy. pp. 207-254 (1869).
[621.] ——. On the Organization of Sponges, and their Relationship to the
Corals. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, Bd. v. pp. 1-138 (1870).
[622.] ——. The Organization of Sponges and their Relation to the Corals.
(Transl.) Ann, M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. v. pp. 107-120 (1870).
623, —---. Prodromus eines Systems der Kalkschwamme. Jen. Z. Nat. Bd.v.
pp. 236-254 (1870).
[624.] ——. Prodromus of a System of the Caleareous Sponges. Ann, M. NV.
H. ser. 4, vol. vy. pp. 176-191 (1870).
625. ——. Ueber die sexuelle Fortpflanzung und des natiirliche System der
Schwamme. Jen. Z. Nat. Bd. vi. pp. 641-651 (1871).
626. ——. Prodromus eines Systems der Kalkschwamme. Z. ges. Naturw.
Bd. vi. pp. 507-515 (1872).
627. ——. Die Kalkschwimme. Eine Monographie. Berlin (1872). Band i.
Biologie der Kalkschwamme (Calcispongien oder Grantien). (1872.)
628. Die Kalkschwamme. Hine Monographie. Band ii. System der
Kalkschwimme. Berlin (1872).
629. re Die Kalkschwimme. Eine Monographie. Band iii, Atlas. Berlin
(1872).
[630.] ——. On the Affinities of Sponges. (Abstr.) @. J. Micr. Sc. vol. xii.
p. 409 (1872).
631. ——. Die auf der Pommeraniafahrt nach Arendal gefangenen Calci-
pone Ber. Com. wiss. Unters. deutsch. Meere Kiel, Bd. i. p. 149
(1873).
[632.] ——. On the Calcispongis, their Position in the Animal Kingdom, and
their Relation to the Theory of Descendence. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4,
vol. xi. pp. 241-262 (1878).
[633.] ——. On the Calcispongie, their Positionin the Animal Kingdom, and
their Relation to the Theory of Descendence. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4,
vol, xi. pp. 421-431 (1873).
634, ——. Kalk- und Gallertspongien. Die zweite Deutsche Nordpol. Fahrt, ii,
p. 434, Leipzig (1874).
635. ——. Die Gastrea-Theorie. Jen. Z. Nat. Band viii. p. 1 (1874),
636. ——. Die Gastrula und die Eifurchung der Thiere. Jen. Z. Nat. Ba,
ix. p. 402 (1875).
[637.] Die Gastrea-Theorie. Biologische Studien, ii. (1877).
[638.] ——. Die Gastrula und die Hifurchung der Thiere. Béologische Stu-
dien, ii, (1877).
618 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [ Dec. 21,
639. Haeckel, E. Die Physemarien (Haliphysema und Gastrophysema),
Gastrxaden der Gegenwart. Jen. Z. Nat. Bd. xi. pp. 1-54 (1877).
[640.] On Physemaria &e. Nature, vol. xiv. p. 685 (1877).
641. Hagenow, F. Monographie der Riigenschen Kreide-Versteinerungen.
Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol. (1839-40).
642. Hahn, O. Die Meteoriten (Chondrite) und ihre Organismen. Tiibingen
(41880).
648. Hall, J. Observations upon the Genera Uphantenia and Dictyophyton.
16th Annual Rep. State Cabinet Nat. Hist. New York (1868).
644. ——. Note on the occurrence of Astylospongia in the Lower Helder-
berg Rocks. 16th Annual Rep. State Cabinet Nat. Hist. New York,
pp. 69-70 (1863).
645 Descriptions of the Fossil Reticulate Sponges constituting the
Family Dictyospongide. Report of the New York Scientific Museum,
1884, pp. 465-481 (1884).
646 On the Fossil Reticulate Sponges constituting the Family Dictyo-
spongide. Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1884, pp. 725-726 (1884).
647. Hancock, A. On the Excavating Powers of certain Sponges belonging
to the genus CZiona, with descriptions of several new species and an allied
generic form. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2, vol. iii. p. 321 (1849) .4
648. ——. Note on the Excavating Sponges; with descriptions of four new
Species (Cliona). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 3, vol. xix. pp. 229-242 (1867).
649. ——. Notes on the Excavating Sponges; with descriptions of four new
Species (Cliona). Tr. Tynes. N. Club, n. ser. vol. i. pp. 8337-353 (1867).
650. Hanow, M. C. Erlauterungen der Merkwiirdigkeiten der Natur. 1.
Danzig (1737).
651. mts)” G.A. Spongiada. The Norwegian North Allantic Expedition,
5).
652. Hardwicke, T. Description of a Zoophyte, commonly found about the
Coast of Singapore Island (Spongia patera). Asiatic Researches, vol. xiv.
p. 180 (1822).
[653.] (1806) Sur la Spongia patera, Féruss, Bull. Soc. Nat. tom. viii. p. 165
2
654. Harting, P. Bijdrage tot de kennis der mikroskopische fauna en flora
van de Banda-Zee. Verh.d. K. Akad. Wetensch. vol.x. p. 1 (1865).
655. ——. Mémoire sur le genre Poterion. Naturh. Verh. Utrecht, vol. ii. p. 2
(1870).
656. Harmer, S. F. Ona method for the Silver-staining of Marine Objects.
MT. z. Stat. Neap. 1884, p.445 (1884).
657. Haswell, W.A. On Australian Freshwater Sponges. Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.S. W. vol. vii. pp. 208-210 (1882).
[658.] ——. On Australian Freshwater Sponges. (Abstr.) Nature, vol. xxvii.
p- 91 (1882).
659. Hatchett, C. Chemical Experiments of Zoophytes. Phil. Tr. 1880,
p. 827 (1880).
660. Heider, A. v. Die Gattung Cladocora. SB. Ak. Wien, Bd. Ixxxiy,
p. 634 (1882).
661. Heider, K. Zur Metamorphose der Oscarella lobularis. Arb. Z. Inst.
Wien, Bd. vi. Heft 2, pp. 175-236 (1886).
[662.] ——. Metamorphoses of Oscarellalobularis. (Abstr.) J. R. Micr. Soc.
vol. vi. pp. 807-809 (1886).
663. Herklots, J. A., et W. Marshall. Notice sur deux espéces nouvelles
déponges de la famille des Lophospongie (Hyalothauma ludekingi,
Gas ludekingi). Arch. Néerl. (Haarlem), vol. iii. pp. 485-488
1 i -
1886. | POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 619
664.
665.
666.
667.
668.
669.
670.
671.
672.
673.
Hicks, H. Onthe Ancient Rocks of the St. David’s Promontory and their
fossil contents; with descriptions of new species. J. G. Soc. vol. xxvii.
(1871). :
Higgin, T. On the Structure of the Skeleton of Huplectella aspergillum.
Ann. M,N. H. ser. 4, vol. xiii. pp. 44-48 (1874).
On two Hexactinellid Sponges from the Philippine Islands in the
Liverpool Free Museum. With Remarks by H. J.Carter. Ann. M,N.
H. ser. 4, vol. xv. pp. 377-389 (1875).
. On a new Sponge of the Genus Luffaria, from Yucatan, in the
Liverpool Free Museum. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xvi. pp. 223-228
(1875).
Description of some Sponges obtained during a Cruise of the
Steam-yacht ‘Argo’ in the Oaribbean and neighbouring Seas (Hig-
ginsia, n. gen., &e.). Ann. M,N. H. ser. 4, vol. xiv. pp. 291-292 (1877).
——. Sponges, their anatomy, physiology, and classification. Proc. Lit.
Liverpool, yol. xxix. p. 193 C1875).
—. ‘‘Porifera.” First Report upon the Fauna of Liverpool Bay,
pp. 72-94. London (1886).
Hilgendorf, F. Ueber Spongilla fluviatilis, Lbk., var. japonica. SB,
nat. Fr, 1882, p. 26 (1882).
. On two Freshwater Sponges (Spongilla nitens, Oarter, and
S. béhmii, sp. nov.) collected by Dr. R. Bohm in the River Ugalla,
near Lake Tanganyika. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xii. pp. 120-123
(1883).
—. Siisswasserschwimme aus Oentralafrica gesammelt von Dr. R.
Bohm im Ugalla Fluss beim Tanganyika-See. SB. nat. Fr. 1888,
pp. 87-90 (1883).
. Hinde, George Jennings. Fossil Sponge-spicules from the Upper
Chalk, found in the interior of a single flint-stone from Horstead in
Norfolk. Miinchen (1880).
675 Notes on Fossil Calcispongiz, with descriptions of new species.
Ann. M,N, H. ser. 5, vol. x. pp. 185-206 (1882).
676. ——. Catalogue of Fossil Sponges in the Geological Department of
the British Museum (Nat. Hist.); with Descriptions of new and little-
known Species (1883).
677. ——. Fossil Calcisponges from the Well-boring at Richmond, Surrey.
J. G. Soc. vol. xl. pp. 778-783 (1884).
678 On the Structure and Affinities of the Family of the Receptaculites,
including therein the genera Jschadites, Murch. (Tetragonis, Hichw.),
Spherospongia, Pengelly, Acontactionia, g.n., and Receptaculites, Defr.
J. G. Soc. vol. xl. pp. 795-849 (1884).
679. ——. On Beds of Sponge-remains in the Lower and Upper Greensand of
the South of England. Phil. Tr. 1885, p. 403 (1885).
680. ——. Sponge-spicules from the Deposits of St. Erth. J. G. Soc. vol. xlii.
p. 214 (1886).
681. Hisinger, W. Anteckningar i physik och Geognosi. H. vy. 1831.
Stockholm (1831).
682. ——. Anteckningar i physik och Geognosi. H. vi. 1837. Stockholm
(1837).
683. ——. Lethzea Suecica. Holmie (1837).
684. Hogg, J. Observations on Spongilla fluviatilis. P. Linn. Soe. vol. i.
p- 8 (1839).
685. ——. Observations. on Spongilla fluviatilis. P. Linn. Soe, vol. i. p. 86
(1839).
686.
——.. Observations on Spongilla fluviatilis. P. Linn. Soe, vol. i. p. 226
(1840).
620 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
687. Hogg, J. On the Action of Light upon the Colour of the River-Sponge.
Charlesworth Mag. N. H. vol. iv. p. 259 (1840).
Observations on Spongilla fluviatilis, and further observations,
with some remarks on the nature of the Spongie marine. Tr. L. Soe.
vol. xviii. p. 343 (1841).
689. ——. Observations on Spongilla fluviatilis, and further observations,
with some remarks on the nature of the Spongie marine. Tr. Linn, Soe.
vol. xviii. p. 368 (1841).
On the Action of Light upon the Colour of the River-Sponge.
(Abstr.) Phil. Tr. 1848, p. 72 (1843).
688.
[690.]
(691.] . Auszug aus den Beobachtungen iiber Spongilla fluviatilis. Isis,
1843, p. 444 (1843).
692. ——. Further notice on Spongilla fluviatilis. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2,
vol. vii. p. 790 (1851).
693. ——. On Nardo’s Classification of the Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2,
vol. vii. p. 190 (1851).
694. Remarks on the Horny Sponges, with proposed Division of the
Order Spongii. Ann. M. N. H.ser. 2, vol. viii. p. 3 (1852).
[695.] Ts the Freshwater Sponge (Spongilla) an Animal? Pop. Sci.
Review, vol. vii. pp. 134-141 (1868).
696. Holdsworth, E. W. H. Note on the Occurrence of Xencspongia
patelliformis, Gray, on the Coast of Ceylon. P. Z. S. 1873, pp. 82-33
(1873).
697. Holl, Harvey B. Notes on Fossil Sponges. Geol. Mag. vol. ix. pp. 809-
315 (1872).
698. ——. Notes on Fossil Sponges. (ol. Mag. vol. ix. pp. 343-352 (1872).
699. ——. The Epitheca in Fossil Sponges. Monthi. Mier. J. vol. viii. pp.
141-142 (1872).
700. Hudleston, W. H. On the Middle Secondary Rocks of Yorkshire.
P. Geol. Assoc. yo). v. pj. 443-494 (1878).
701. Hughes, T. McKenny. On the so-called Spongia paradoxica. J. G.
Soc. vol. xl. p. 273 (1884).
[702.] ——. On the so-called Spongia paradoxica, 8. Woodw., from the Red
and White Chalk of Hunstanton. (Abstr.) dan. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol. xiii. p. 298 (1884).
703. Hughes, W.R. Notes on the Development of a Deep-sea Sponge ( Hali-
chondria). Rep. Brit, Assoc. 1865, pp. 86-87 (1868).
704. Huxley, T. H. Zoological Notes and Observations.—2. On Tethya.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2, vol. vii. p. 370 (1851).
705. Zoological Notes and Observations on Thalassicolla. Ann. M,N, H.
ser. 2, vol. viii. p. 483 (1851).
706. Manual of the Anatomy of the Invertebrate Animals, p. 110
(1877).
707. Hyatt, A. Remarks on the Beatricee, a new division of Mollusca. Am.
Journ. Sci. (2) vol. xxxix. pp. 261-266 (1865).
708. Revision of the North-American Porifersee, with Remarks upon
Foreign Species.—-Part I. Mem. Bost. Soc. vol. ii. pp. 1-10 (1875).
(709. ] Hollow-fibred Horny Sponges. (Abstr) P. Bost. Soc. vol. xvi.
pp. 204-205 (1875).
710. ——. Revision of the North-American Porifere.—Part II. Mem.
Bost, Soe. vol. ii. pp. 481-554 (1877).
The Embryology of Sponges. P. Bost. Soc. vol. xix. pp. 12-17
(1878).
712, ——. On a new Species of Sponge (Aplysina pedicellata).. P. Ae.
Philad. 1878, pp. 163, 164 (1879).
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES, 621
713. Hyatt, A. Guides for Science-teaching.—No. 3. Commercial and other
Sponges. Boston, U.S. (1879).
714. . On Classification of Sponges. Mem. Bost. Soc. vol. ii. pp. 11-84
1881).
715. ——. The Boring Sponge: Does it excavate the burrows in which it is
found? Am. Micr. J. vol. iii. p. 81 (1882).
[716.] The Boring Sponge: Does it excavate the burrows in which it is
found? (Abstr.) J. R. Mier, Soc, vol. ii, p. 216 (1882).
717. Imperato, F. Dell’ historia naturale. Libri 27. Napoli (1599).
718. Jameson, R. Catalogue of the Animals of the Class Vermes found in the
Frith of Forth. Mem. Wern. Soe, vol. ii. p. 556. (1811.)
719, Jardin,—. (On Secretion of a Violet Juice by Sponges). Mém. Soc. Imp.
Set. Nat. Cherbourg, vol. vi. p. 199 (1859).
720, Johnson, J. Yate. Description of anew Siliceous Sponge from the coast
of Madeira (Dactylocalyx bowerbankii). P.Z, S. 1863, pp. 257-259
(1863).
721. ——. Description of a new Siliceous Sponge from the Coast of Madeira
(Dactyloculyx bowerbankit). Ann. M,N. H. ser. 3, vol. xiii. p. 257 (1864),
722. Johnston, G. A Descriptive Catalogue of the Recent Zoophytes of
North Durham. 77. North. Durh, vol. ii. p. 239 (1832).
7 Spongia suberea. Loudon’s Mag. N. H. vol. vii. p. 491 (1884).
724. ——. Natural History of British Zoophytes. Mag. Zool. Bot. vol. i.
p. 64 (1836).
725. ——. Natural History of British Zoophytes. Mag. Zool. Bot. vol. i.
p. 225 (1836).
726. ——. Natural History of British Zoophytes. Mag. Zool. Bot. vol. i.
p. 440 (1837).
727. ——. List of five Sponges found on the North-Durham Ooast, 77.
North. Durh, p. 269 (18838).
728. ——. History of British Zoophytes. Edinburgh, 1838.
729. ——. History of British Sponges and Lithophytes. Edinburgh, 1842,
730. ——. Description of a new British Sponge (Halichondria macularis).
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 1, vol. xviii. p. 475 (1846).
731. ——. Description of a new British Sponge (Halichondria macularis).
Tr. Berwick N. H. Club, vol. ii. p. 196 (1849).
732. Johnston, J. Hist. natur. de Hxanguibusaquat. Libri4. Francoforti
(1650).
733. ——. Theatrum univers. omnium anim. cura Rysch. Amstelod. (1718).
734. Jones, T. Rymer. General Outline of the Animal Kingdom.—Part I.
London (1838).
735, ——. Article “ Porifera,” Todd's Cyclop. Anat. vol. iv. p. 64 (1847).
736. . General Outline of the Animal Kingdom.—Part I. 4th ed,
London (1871).
737. Joseph, G. Ueber einen Grottenschwamm (Spongilla stygia, n. sp.).
59 Jahresbericht Schles, Geselisch. f. vaterl. Cultur, p. 253 (1882).
738. Jourdan, BE. Sur les Zoanthaires du Golfe de Marseille. Ann. Sci. Nat.
tom. x. pp. 1-154 (1881).
(739.] ——. On Zoantharia of the Gulf of Marseilles. J. R. Micr. Soc. vol. i.
pp- 55-62 (1881).
740. Julien, Alexis A. On two Varieties of Sponge-spicules. Amer. Journ.
Sei. ser, 2, vol. xl. pp. 379-383 (1865).
622 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SysTematic [Dec. 21,
741, Jussieu, B.de. Hxamen de quelques productions marines, Hist, ef Mém.
Acad. Paris, 1742, p. 290 (1745).
742. Kaijser,E. Beitriige zur Paliontologie und Geologie der Argentinischen
Republik.—II. Palaontologischer Theil. Pal. Sup. 3 (1876).
743. Keeping, W. The Fossils and Palzontological Affinities of the Neoco-
mian Deposits of Upmore and Brickhill. (1883.)
744. Keller, C. On Three Layers in Sponges. Verh. naturf. Gesell. Ziirich,
1875, p. 68 (1876).
Untersuchungen iiber die Anatomie und Entwickelungsgeschichte
einiger Spongien d. Mittelmeeres. Hin Beitrag zur Losung der Spon-
gienfrage. 39 pp. Basel (1876).
746. ——. Ueber den Bau von Reniera semitubulosa,O. 8. Ein Beitrag zur
Anatomie der Kieselschwamme. Z. wiss. Zool, Bd. xxx. pp. 563-586
(1878).
747. ——. Ueber Spermabildung bei Spongilla. Zool. Anz. Bd. i. pp. 314-
315 (1878).
748. ——. Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Chalineen. Zool, Anz. Bd. ii.
pp. 802-303 (1879).
749. ——. Studien iiber Organisation und Entwickelung der Chalineen.
Z. wiss. Zool, Bd. xxxiii. pp. 317-349 (1880).
750. ——. Neue Cclenteraten aus dem Golf von Neapel. Arch. mikr. Anat.
Bd. xviii. p. 271 (1880).
745.
751. On the Systematic Position of Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol. v. p. 268 (1880).
752. Die Fauna im Suez-Canal und die Diffusion der mediterranischen
und erythraischen Thierwelt. Eine thiergeographische Untersuchung.
WV. Denksch. schweiz. naturf. Gesellsch. Bd. xxviii. Abth. 3 (1882).
[753.] ——. The Fauna of the Suez Canal &e, Nature, vol. xxvi. p. 42.
754. Kent, W. Saville. On the Hewactinellide, or Hexradiate Spiculed
Siliceous Sponges taken in the ‘ Norna’ Expedition off the Coast of Spain
and Portugal. With Description of New Species, and Revision of the
Order. Monthl. Mier. J. vol. iv. pp. 241-252 (1870).
755, ——. On a new Anchoring Sponge, Dorvillia agariciformis. Monthl.
Mier, J. vol. iv. pp. 293-295 (1870).
756. ——. Notice of a new Vitreous Sponge, Pheronema (Holtenia) grayi.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, yol. v. pp. 182-186 (1870).
757. ——. Hackel on the Relationship of the Sponges to the Corals. Ann.
M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. vy. pp. 204-218 (1870).
758. On two new Siliceous Sponges taken in the late Dredging-Expedi-
tion of the yacht ‘Norna’ off the Ooast of Spain and Portugal (Rhka-
phidotheca, Fieldingia). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. vi. pp. 217-224
(1870).
759. ——. Prof. Hackel and Mr. E. Ray Lankester on the Affinities of the
Sponges. Ann. M, N. H, ser, 4, vol. vi. pp. 250-255 (1870).
760. ——. Note on Dorvillia agariciformis. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. vii.
pp. 37, 88 (1871).
761. ——, Ona new Genus of Sponges from North Australia (Caulospongia).
P. Z. 8, 1871, pp. 615-616 (1871).
762, ——. Note on Tethya muricata, Bowerbank, and Dorvillia agariciformis
Kent. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. x. pp. 209-212 (1872).
Note on Zittel’s Studies on Fossil Sponges—I. dan. M,N. H.
ser. 4, vol. xx. pp. 446-447 (1877).
—. Note on Haliphysema, Ann. M,N. H. ser. 4, vol. xx. p. 448
(1877).
763.
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 623
765. Kent, W. Saville. A new Field for the Microscope. Pop. Sci.
Review, n. s. vol. ii. p. 113 (1878).
766. ——. Observations upon Prof. Ernst Haeckel’s Group of the “ Physe-
maria,” and on the Affinity of the Sponges, Anz, M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. i.
pp. 1-17 (1878).
767. ——. Notes on the Embryology of Sponges, Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol, ii, pp. 139-157 (1878).
768. ——. The Foraminiferal nature of Haliphysema twmanowiezit. Ann.
M. N. H, ser. 5, vol. ii. p. 68 (1878).
(769.] ——. Etudes sur les Physémaires. (Extr.) Arch. Z. expér. tom. viii.
pp. viii-x (1879-80).
[770.] ——. Sur l’embryogénie des éponges. (Extr.) Arch. Z. expér. tom. viii.
pp. xxix—xxxi (1879-80).
771. A Manual of the Infusoria; including a description of all known
Flagellate, Ciliate, and Tentaculiferous Protozoa, British and Foreign,
and an account of the Organization and Aflinities of the Sponges.
London (1880-82).
(772.] ——. A Manual of the Infusoria, &. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc.
vol. i. p. 288 (1881).
(773.] ——. A Manual of the Infusoria, &. (Abstr.) J. R. Micr, Soc.
vol. ii. pp. 615-616 (1881).
[774] . A Manual of the Infusoria, &e. (Abstr.) J. BR. Mier. Soc.
vol. ii. pp. 638-639 (1881).
[775.] ——. A Manual of the Infusoria, &c. (Notice.) Natwre, vol. xxiii.
p- 264 (1881).
(776.] ——. A Manual of the Infusoria, &e. (Abstr.) @. J Mier, Sei.
yol, xxi. pp. 377-378 (1881).
777. Kiesow, J. Ueber silurische und deyonische Geschiebe Westpreussens.
Schr. Ges. Danz. ser. 2, Bd. vi. pp. 205-800 (1881).
778. Klebs,G. Ueber Symbiose und ungleichartige Organismen. Biol. Cen-
traldl. Bd. ii. pp. 288-299. ‘i
779, Klemm, E. Ueber alte und neue Ramispongien und andere verwandte
Schwammformen aus der Geislinger Gegend. JH. Ver. N. Wiirtt.
Bd. xxxix. pp. 243-308 (1883).
780. Klipstein, A. N. Beitrige zur geologischen Kenntniss der dstlichen
Alpen (1843).
781. Klostermann. Ueber Hexactinelliden. Arch. mikr. Anat. Bd, xi.
pp. 286-291.
782. Knorr, G. W., et Walch, J. E. M. Recueil des monumens des Cata-
strophes que le Globe de la Terre a essuiées, contenant des Pétrifications
dessinées, grayées et enluminées d’aprés les originaux. (1775.)
783. Koch, G.von. Zur Anatomie von Halisarca Dujardini. Morph, Jahrb.
Ba. ii. p. 83 (1876).
784. Koehler, R. Remarques sur le genre Caminus, et sur une éponge voisine
du Caminus osculosus, Grube. Bibl. Haut. Etud, tom. xxix. (1885).
785. ——. Sur le faune littoral des Isles Anglo-Normans. Ann. Sci. Nat.
sér, 6, tom. xx. p. 62 (1886).
On the Littorai Fauna of the Anglo-Norman Islands. Ann. M,
NV. H, ser. 5, vol. xviii. p. 229 (1886).
Contributions to the Study of the Littoral Fauna of the Anglo-
Norman Islands. Ann. M. NV. H. ser. 5, vol. xviii. p. 290 (1886).
[788.] ——. Contributions to the Study of the Littoral Fauna of the Anglo-
Norman Islands. Ann, M. N. H. ser. 5, vol, xviii. p. 851 (1886).
789. Kolliker, A.v. Ueber den Bau der Spongien, Wiireb, naturw. Zeitschr,
vol. v, p. xiv (1868). :
(786.]
(787.]
624 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC /Dec. 21,
790. Kolliker, A. v. Icones Histiologice oder Atlas der vergleichenden
Gewebelehre. I. Der feinere Bau der Protozoen. Leipzig (1864).
791. Konig, C. Icones fossilium sectiles (1820).
792. Koerte, F. F. E. Utrum Spongie officinalis tela fibrosa animali an
vegetabili sit Natura. Berolini (1848).
793. Kostytscheff, A., undO. Marggrof. Ueber diechemische Zusammen-
setzung der in dem Apatitsandstein der russischen Kreideformation
yorkommenden versteinerten Schwamme. Journ. prakt. Chem. Bad. ev.
pp. 63-64 (1868).
794. ——. Ueber die chemische Zusammensetzung der in dem Apatitsandstein
der russischen Kreideformation vorkommenden yersteinerten Schwamme.
Bull. Ac. Pétersb. vol. xiii. col. 19, 20 (1869).
795. Krapelin, K. Zur Biologie und Fauna der Siisswasserbryozoén. Zool.
Anz. Bad. vii. pp. 319-321 (1884).
796. Kriegel, A. Diss. de Spong. apud ycieres usu. Resp. J. G. Heenischius.
Lipsiz (173+).
797. Krukenberg, C.F. W. Ueber die Enzymbildung in den Geweben etc.,
der Evertebraten. Unters. Phys. Instit. Heidelberg, Bd. ii. p. 338 (1878).
798. ——. Tetronerythrin in Schwammen. Centraldl. med. Wiss. no. 40
(1879).
799, ——. Verdauung der Spongien. Vergl. phys. Studien Heidelberg, 1879,
pp. 64-75 (1879).
800. ——. Vergleichende-physiologische Studien an den Kiisten der Adria.
1, Heidelberg, October (1879).
801. ——. Vergleichend-physiologische Studien an den Kiisten der Adria.
2. Heidelberg (1880).
802. . Die Floridine der Renieren. Vergl. phys. Studien, 2te Reihe, 3te
Abth. pp. 36-40 (1882).
803. ——. Ueber die melanotischen Verfarbungen der Uranidine. Vergl.
phys. Studien, 2te Reihe, 3te Abth. pp. 41-56 (1882).
804. ——. Die Lipochrome der Spongien. Vergl. phys. Studien, 2te Reihe,
3te Abth. pp. 108-115 (1882).
805. ——. Vergleichend-physiologische Vortrage. II. Grundziige einer ver-
gleichenden Physiologie der Verdauung, iii., iv. (1882).
806. Kusta, J. Spongilla jordanensis bei Radonitz. Verh. z.-b. Ges. Wien,
Bd. xxix. (1879).
807. Kustermann, H. AHyalonema sieboldii. Arch. mikr, Anat, Bd. xi.
pp. 286-291 (1874).
808. Lacaze-Duthiers, H. de. Sur la nature des Eponges. Arch. Z. expér.
tom. i. pp. lxv—lxvii (1872).
809. Lakschewitz, P. Ueber die Kalkschwamme Menoreas. SB. Ges. Dorpat,
Band vii. pp. 836-341 (1886).
810. . Ueber die Kalkschwamme Menorcas. Zool. Jahrb. Bd. i. pp. 297-
310 (1886).
[811.] On the Oalcareous Sponges of Minorca. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol. xvii. pp. 536-539 (1886).
812. Lamarck, J. B. P. A. de. Systéme des animaux sans yertébres. Paris,
An 9 (1801).
13. ——. Sur les polypiers empatés, Eponges. Ann. d. Mus. tom. xx. p. 294
(1813).
14. ——. Sur les polypiers empatés, Eponges. Ann. d. Mus. tom. xx. p. 370
(1813).
15. ——. Sur les polypiers empatés, Eponges. Ann.d. Mus. tom. 3x. p. 432
(1813)
mee Pah.
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 625
816. Lamarck, J.B.P.A. Histoire des Animaux sans Vertébres. Tom. II.
Paris (1816).
Sur les polypiers empatés. Mém. d. Mus. tom. i. p. 69 (1829).
818. ——. Sur les polypiers empatés. Mém. d. Mus. tom. i. p. 162 (1825).
819. ——. Sur les polypiers empatés. Mém. d. Mus. tom. i. p. 331 (1825).
——. Histoire des Animaux sans Vertébres. Ed. 2, par Deshayes et
Milne-Edwards. Tom. II. Paris (1835).
821. Lamirol, E. Sur l’acclimatation des éponges. Budl. Soc. Acclim. tom.
viii. p. 327 (1861).
Rapport sur I’acclimatation des éponges de Syrie, ete. Bull. Soc.
Acclim. tom. ix. p. 641 (1862).
823. -——. Second rapport sur I’acclimatation des éponges de Syrie, ete.
Bull. Soc. Acclim. tom. x. p. 8 (1868).
324. Lamouroux, J. O. F. Histoire des polypiers coralliaires flexibles vul-
gairement nommées Zoophytes. Caen (1816).
825. Exposition méthodique des genres des Polypiers. Paris (1821).
(826.] ——. Corallina. (Transl.) London (1824).
27. ——. Eponges. Encyclop. méth. tom. ii. p. 327 (1824).
828. Lampe, W. villa japonica, eine neue Tetractinellidenform mit radi-
arem Bau. Arch. f. Nat. 52 Thg. 1 Hft. pp. 1-18 (1886).
. New Tetractinellid Sponge with Radial Structure ( Ze¢il/a japonica).
(Abstr.) J. . Mier. Soc. vol. vi. pp. 1000-1001 (1886).
830. Lankester, E.R. Professor Hickel and Mr. Kent on the Zoological
Affinities of the Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. vi. pp. 80-93
(1870).
831. ——. Note: The Mode of Occurrence of Chlorophyll in Spongilla.
Q. J. Micr. Sci. new ser. vol. xiv. pp. 400, 401 (1874).
[829.]
832. On the Granular Condition of the Chlorophyll in Spongilla.
Nature, vol. xviii. pp. 307-308 (1878).
833 The Structure of Haliphysema tumanowiczii. Q. J. Mier. Sci.
new ser, vol. xix. pp. 473-484 (1879).
834, ——. On the Chlorophyll-corpuscles and Amyloid Deposits of Spon-
gilla and Hydra, Q. J. Mier. Sci. new ser. vol. xxil. pp. 229-254
(1882).
835. ——. On the Chlorophyll-corpuscles and Amyloid Deposits of Spongilla
and Hydra. Nature, vol. xxvi. p. 70 (1882).
836. ——. ‘The Chlorophyll-corpuscles in Hydra. Nature, vol. xxvii. pp. 87-
88 (1882).
[837.] ——._ On the Chlorophyll-corpuscles and Amyloid Deposits of Spongilla
and Hydra. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc. vol. ii. pp. 322-342 (1882).
838. ——. Dredging in the Norwegian Fjords, Natwre, vol. xxvi. pp. 478-
479 (1882).
839. Laube, Gustav C. Die Fauna der Schichten von St. Cassian. 1 Abth.
Spongitarien, Corallen, Echiniden, und Crinoiden. Denk. Ak. Wien
(1865).
840. Laurent, P. Recherches sur la Spongille fluviatile. C. 2. tom. vii.
p. 617 (1838).
841, ——. Recherches sur la nature de la Spongilla fluviatilis. Ann. frang.
et étrang. @ Anat. tom. ii. p. 316 (1838).
842. ——. Sur les Spongilles, et spécialement sur leur mode de reproduction.
C. R. tom, xi. p. 478 (1840).
843. ——. Sur les Spongilles, et spécialement sur leur mode de reproduction,
C. R. tom. xi. p. 693 (1840).
844. ——. Etudes des masses spongillaires. C. R. tom. xi. p. 1048 (1810).
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XLI, 4]
626 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
845, Laurent, P. Sur les Spongilles, et spécialement sur leur mode de repro-
duction. C. F. tom. xi. p. 1051 (1840).
846. ——. Nature de la Spongilla fluviatilis sur le corps reproducteurs
de la Spongille. Soc. Philom. Paris, Proc.-verb. 1840, pp. 69-74 (1840).
847 . Sur la nature de la Spongilla fluviatilis. L’ Institut, tom. viii.
no. 310, p. 223 (1840).
848. . Sur la nature de la Spongilla fluviatilis. L’ Institut, tom. viii.
no, 341, p. 231 (1840).
849, ——. Sur la nature de la Spongilla fluviatilis. L’Institut, tom. viii.
no. 342, p. 240 (1840).
850. ——. Sur les embryones ciliées et libre de Spongille. L’Jnstitur,
tom. ix. no. 394, p. 242 (1841).
851 . Sur les embryones ciliées et libre de Spongille. Soc. Philom. Paris,
Proc.-verb. (1841) pp. 73-74 (1841).
852 Zoophytologie de Voyage de ‘la Bonite’ en 1827. Nouvelles
recherches sur l’Hydre et la Spongille (1844).
853. -——. Sur les corps reproducteurs des Eponges (Spongia usitatissima).
Soc. Philom. Paris, Proc.-verb. (1848) p. 40 (1848).
854 . Sur les corps reproducteurs des Eponges (Spongia usitatissima).
LD’ Institut, tom. xvi. p. 160 (1848).
855. Leceq, Henri. Observations sur une grande espéce de Spongille de lac
Payin. C. &. tom. 1. pp. 1116-1165 (1860).
856. ——. Observations sur les corps reproducteurs et sur retard d’agrégation
d’un grande espéce de Spongille de lac Pavin (Puy-de-Déme). C. 2.
tom. l. p. 1165 (1860).
857. Observation sur le degrée d’animalité et sur les espace de Spon-
gille et particuliérement sur la grande espéce du lace Pavin. C. R.
tom. li. p. 5 (1860).
858. ——. Observation sur le degrée d’animalité et sur les espéce de Spon-
gille et particuliérement sur le grande espéce du Lac Payin. C. R.
tom. li. p. 9 (1860).
859. ——. Observations sur une grande espéce de Spongille du lac Payin.
20 pp. Clermont (1862).
860. Lee, J. EB. Notice of undescribed Zoophytes from the Yorkshire Chalk.
Mag. N. H. new ser. vol. iii. (1839).
861. Leeuwenhoek, A. van. Microscopical Observations. Phil. Tr.
vol, xxiv. p. 1158 (1706),
862. Leidy, J. On Cliona. P. Ac. Philad. vol. viii. p. 162 (1856).
865. ——. On a boring Sponge (Cliona). Am. Journ. Sci. ser. 2, vol. xxiii.
pp. 281-282 (1857).
864. ——. Description of a new species of Sponge (Pheronemaanne). P. Ae.
Philad, 1868, pp. 9-11 (18€8).
865. ——. Remarks on some curious Sponges (Hyalonema, Euplectella, Phero-
nema). Am. Nat. vol. iv. pp. 17-22 (1871).
866. ——, Remarks on Sponges. P. Ac, Philad. 1874, p. 144 (1874).
867. Lendenfeld, R.v. Das Hornfaserwachsthum der Aplysinide. Zool.
Anz. Bd. vy. pp. 634-636 (1882).
868. . Ueber Coelenteraten der Siidsee. II. Mitth. Neue Aplysinide. Z.
wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxviii. pp. 234-313 (1883).
[869.] 583) New Aplysinide. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soe, ser. 2, vol. iii p. 519
1883).
870. ——. Das System der Monactinellide. Zool. Anz. Bd. vii. pp. 201-206
(1884).
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 627
(S71.] Lendenfeld, R.v. The System of the Monactinellids. (Transl.)
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xiv. pp. 65-69 (1884).
[872.] The System of the Monactinellids, (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc.
ser. 2, vol. iv. p. 394 (1884). .
873. . A Monograph of the Australian Sponges.—1. Introduction.
P. Linn. Soc. N. 8. W. vol. ix. pp. 121-154 (1884).
874. ——. A Monograph of the Australian Sponges.— 2. Morphology and
Physiology. P. Linn. Soc. N. 8. W. vol. ix. pp. 310-346 (1884).
875. -—. The Digestion of Sponges effected by the Ectoderm or Entoderm.
P. Linn. Soc. N. 8S. W. vol. ix. pp. 484-488 (1884).
[876.] . The Digestion of Sponges effected by the Ectoderm or Entoderm.
(Abstr.) J. R. Micr. Soc. vol. v. pp. 74-75 (1885).
877. ——. Das Nervensystem der Spongien. Zool. Anz. Bd. viii. pp. 47-50
(1885).
878. ——. On the occurrence of Flesh-spicules in Sponges. P. Linn. Soc.
NV. S. W. vol. ix. pp. 493-494 (1885).
879. Notes on the Fibres of certain Australian Hircinide. P. Linn.
Soc. NV. S. W. vol. ix. pp. 641-642 (1885).
[880.] A Monograph of the Australian Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier.
Soc. vol. v. p. 76 (1885).
[881.] The Neryous System of Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier, Soc.
ser. 2, vol. v. pp. 253-254 (1885).
{882.] . A Nervous System in Sponges. (Abstr.) dm. Nat. vol. xix.
p- 611 (1885).
[883.] Notes on the Fibres of certain Hircinide. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier.
Soc. vol. v. p. 254 (1885).
884. ——. The Homoceela of Australia and the new Family Homodermide.
P. Linn. Soe. N. 8. W. vol. ix. pp. 896-907 (1885).
885. ——. The Histology and Nervous System of Calcareous Sponges. P.
Linn. Soc. N. 8. W, vol. ix. pp. 977-983 (1885).
886. ——. A Monograph of the Australian Sponges.—Part 3. The Calci-
spongie. P. Linn. Soc, N.S. W. vol. ix. pp. 1083-1150 (1885).
[887.] ——. Histology and Nervous System of Caleareous Sponges. (Abstr.)
J. R. Mier. Soc. ser, 2, vol. v. p. 1011 (1885).
888. ——. Die Verwandtschafts verhiltnisse der Kalkschwamme. Zool. Anz.
Bad. viii. pp. 211-215 (1885).
889. ——. A Monograph of the Australian Sponges.—Part 4. The Myxo-
spongie. P. Linn. Soc. N.S. W. vol. x. pp. 3-22 (1885).
890. ——. Das Nervensystem der Spongien, Berichtigung und Erginzung.
Zool. Anz. Bd. viii. p. 448 (1885).
891. ——. Zur Histologie der Spongien. Zool. Anz. Bd. viii. pp. 466-469
(1885).
892. ——. Zur Histologie der Spongien. Zool. Anz. Bd. viii. pp. 483-486
(1885).
893. ——. Die Verwandtschaftsverhiltnisse der Myxospongien. Zool. Anz.
Bd. viii. pp. 510-515 (1885).
894. ——. The Phoriospongie. P. Linn. Soc. N. 8. W. vol. x. pp. 81-84
(1885).
Notes on Australian Sponges recently described by Carter. P. Linn.
Soc. N. 8. W. vol. x. pp. 151-156 (1885).
. A Monograph of the Australian Sponges.—Part 5. The Aulenine.
P. Linn. Soc. N. & W. vol. x. pp. 283-325 (1885).
897. ——. Addendum to the Monograph of the Australian Sponges. P. Linn,
Soc, N.S. W. vol. x. pp. 475-476 (1885).
41*
895.
896.
628 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SysTemaTic [ Dec. 21,
898. Lendenfeld, R.v. A Monograph of the Australian Sponges.—Part 6.
The genus Euspongiz. P. Linn. Soc. N. 8, W. vol. x. pp. 481-553
(1885).
899. ——. Notes on the Australian Sponges recently described by Carter.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xvi. pp. 20-25 (1885).
Beitrag zur Kenntniss des Nerven- und Muskelsystems der Horn-
schwimme. SB. Ak. Berlin, 1885, pp. 1015-1020 (1885).
901. ——. Studies on Sponges.—I. The vestibule of Dendrilla cavernosa, n. sp.
Il. On Raphyrus hixonii, 2 new gigantic Sponge from Port Jackson.
Til. On Halme tingens, a Sponge with a remarkable colouring-power.
IV. On two cases of Mimicry in Sponges. P. Linn. Soe. N. S. W.
vol. x. pp. 557-974 (1886).
900.
902. An Alga forming a Pseudomorph of a Siliceous Sponge (Dactylo-
chalina australis). P. Linn. Soc. N. 8. W. vol. x. pp. 726-728 (1886).
903. Second Addendum to the Monograph of the Australian Sponges.
P. Linn. Soc. N. 8. W. vol. x. pp. 845-850 (1886).
904. ——. Australian Homocela and the Homodermide. (Abstr.) J. R.
Micr. Soc. ser. 2, vol. vi. p. 82 (1886).
On a Sponge destructive of the Oyster Culture in the Clarence
river. P. Linn. Soc. N. S. W. vol. x. pp. 826-329 (1886).
[906.] —--. Contributions towards the Knowledge of the Nervous and
Muscular Systems of the Horny Sponges. (Transl.) Ann. M,N. H. ser. 5,
vol. xvii. p. 372 (1886).
Nervous and Muscular Systems of Horny Sponges. (Abstr.) J.
R. Mier. Soc. ser. 2, vol. vi. p. 457 (1886).
Sponge destructive of Oysters (Chalinula coxii). (Abstr.) J. R.
Mier. Soc. ser. 2, vol. vi. p. 458 (1886).
{909.] ——. Australian Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc. ser. 2, vol. vi.
pp. 458-459 (1886).
910. ——. Die Siisswasser Coelenteraten Australiens. Zool. Jahrb. Bad. ii.
pp. 87-108 (1886).
911. The Nervous System of Sponges. Rep. Brit. Assoc. for 1886.
[912.] ——. Muscle and Nerve in Sponges. (Abstr.) Aim. Mier. J. vol. vii.
pp. 205-206 (1886).
{913.] Gissé) Mimicry in Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc. vol. vi. p. 811
( 3
$05.
(907.]
[908.]
[914.] An Alga forming a Pseudomorph of a Sponge (Dactylochalina
australis). (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc. vol. vi. p. 812 (1886).
Vestibule of Dendrilla cavernosa. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc.
vol. vi. p. 810 (1886).
[916.] -—. Gigantic Sponge (Raphyrus hivonii). (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc.
vol. vi. pp. 810-811 (1886). 1
917. Lenz, H. Die wirbellosen Thiere der Travemiindung Bucht, 4. Ber.
Com. wiss. Unters. deutsch. Meere Kiel, fir die Jahre 1877-81, ii. pp. 169-
180 (1877-81).
918. Lereboullet, A. Sur une espéce d’Eponge perforante qui occupe l’épais-
seur des valves de l’huitre comestible (Spongia terebrans, Duy.). L Institut,
tom. ix. p. 137 (1841).
919. Leuckart, R. Jahresberichte tiber die Fortschritte auf dem Gebiete
der niederen Thiere. Arch. f. Nat. 1854, pt. 2 (1854).
920. Leymerie, M. A. Sur le terrain cretacé du Département de 1’Aube.
Mém. Soc, Géol. France (1842).
21. Lhwyd, E. Lithophylacii Britann. ichnogr. Londini (1699),
22. Lichtenstein. Ueber die Badeschwimme. Jnzellig.-Bl. zur Al. Lit.
Zeit, no, 140 (1795).
[915.]
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 629
23. Lichtenstein. Ueber die Badeschwimme. Lichtenberg-Voigt’s Magaz.
Ba. xi. 2, pp. 17-19 (1798).
924. Lieberkiihn, N. Beitriige zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Spongillen.
Arch, Anat. Phys. 1856, p. 1 (1856).
925. ——. Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Spongillen. (Nachtrag.) Arch.
Anat. Phys. 1856, p. 399 (1856).
926. ——. Beitriige zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Spongillen. Arch. Anat.
Phys, 1856, pp. 496-514 (1856).
927. ——. On the Development of the Freshwater Sponges. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 2, vol. xvii. 1856, p. 405 (1856).
Contribution to the History and Development of the Spongille.
Q. J. Micr. Sci. yol. y. p. 212 (1857).
929. ——. Zusitze zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Spongillen. Arch. Anat.
Phys. 1857, p. 876 (1857).
930. ——. RBeitrige zur Anatomie der Spongien. Arch. Anat. Phys. 1857,
p- 876 (1857).
931. ——. Neue Beitrige zur Anatomie der Spongien. Arch. Anat. Phys.
1859, p. 353 (1859).
932. ——. Neue Beitrige zur Anatomie der Spongien. Arch. Anat. Phys.
1859, p. 515 (1859).
. Ueber Bewegungserscheinungen bei den Schwimmen. Arch.
Anat. Phys. 1863, pp. 717-729 (1863).
(954.] ——. On Motile Phenomena in Sponges. (Trausl.) Q. J. Mier. Sei.
n.s. vol. iv. pp. 189-193 (1864).
933.
935. ——. Observations sur les phénoménes de mouvement chez les éponges.
Ann. Sei. Nat. vol. ii. pp. 247-250 (1864).
936. ——. Beitrage zur Anatomie der Kalkspongien. Arch. Anat. Phys.
1865, pp. 782-748 (1865).
937. -——. Ueber das contractile Gewebe der Spongien. Arch. Anat. Phys.
1867, pp. 74-86 (1867).
[938.] ——. On the Contractile Tissue of Sponges. (Transl.) Ann. M. N.H.
ser. 4, vol. vi. p. 497 (1870).
939. ——-. Ueber Bewegungserscheinungen der Zellen yon Rhizopoden, Spon-
gillen, ete. Schrift. Gesell. Bef. Naturwissens. Marburg, Bd. ix.
(1870).
940. Linck, G. Zwei neue Spongiengattungen (Didymosphera und Polyrhizo-
phora). Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol. 1888, pp. 59-62 (1883).
941. Link, H. F. Ueber Pflanzenthiere ete. Avh. Ak. Berlin, 1830, p. 109
(1880).
942, Linne, C. v. Systema Nature. Hd.1. Lugd. Batay. (1735).
943. ——. Flora Lapponica. Amsteleedami (1737).
944. ——. Hortus Cliffort. Amsteledami (1787).
945. ——. Flora Suecica. Stoekholmiz (1745).
946. ——. Species Plant., 1. Holmiz (1753).
947. ——. Systema Nature. Ed.10. Vol. i. Holmis (1758),
948. ——. Systema Nature. Ed.10. Vol. ii. Holmiz (1759).
949. ——. Systema Nature. Ed.12. Vol.i. Holmiz (1767).
950. ——. Systema Nature, Ed.12. Vol. ii. Holmis (1767).
951. ——. Systema Nature. Ed. 13, curante Gmelin. Vol. i. pars 6.
Lipsiz (1789).
952. Lockwood,S. Heteromeyenia ryderi, a Freshwater Sponge. J. N. York:
Micr. Soc. vol. i. pp. 87-40 (1885).
953. Lorenz, J. R. Physikalische Verhaltnisse und Vertheilung. der Orga-
nismen im Quarnerischen Golfe. Wien (1863).
630 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [ Dec. 21,
954. Loretz, H. LHinige Petrefacten des alpinen Trias aus den Siidalpen.
Z. geol. Ges. Bd. xxvii. (1875).
955. Loriol, P.de. Descriptions des animaux invertébrés fossiles contenue
dans |’étage Néocomien moyen du Mont Saléve. (1861.)
956. ——. Monographie des Couches de étage Valangien des Carriérs
fen) (Vaud), Matériaux pour la Paléontologie Suisse, par Pictet.
957. ——, et Gillieron, V. Monographie paléontologique et stratigraphique
de l’étage urgonien inférieur du Lauderon (Canton de Neuchatel). Mém.
Soc. Helvetique Sci. Nat. tom. xxiii, (1869).
958. Lortet, —. . Quelques points de V’organisation des éponges fibreuses de
sis) (Extr.) Assoc. frang. Vav. sei. (Nantes), tom. iv. pp. 815-890
40).
959. Loven, S. Om en marklig i Nordsjén lefyande art af Spongia. Ofv. Ak.
Fork. p. 105 (4868).
{960.] ——. Ueber eine merkwiirdige in der Nordsee lebende Art Spongia
(Hyalonema boreale). (UWebers.) Arch. f. Nat. yol. xxxiv. pp. 82-101
(1868).
(961.] ——. Ona remarkable Sponge from the North Sea (Hyalonema boreale).
(Transl.) Ann, M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. ii. pp. 81-91 (1868).
962. ——. Observations sur une éponge remarquable de la mer du Nord
(Hyalonema boreale). C. R. tom. xvi. pp. 1265-1267 (1868).
963. Ludwig, Chrstn. Friedr. Praes., et Aug. Tuercteg. Uhle, Auctor,
Diss. pharmacol.-med. de Spongia marina. Lipsiz, literis Staritz, £
(1819).
964. Liitken, C, Catalogue of Spongozoa, in ‘Manual of Nat. Hist. ete. of
Greenland,’ edited by Prof. T. Rymer Jones, p. 190. London (1875).
965. MacAndrew. List of Marine Animals of the British Coast. (1860.)
966. M‘Coy, F., and Griffiths, R. A Synopsis of the Silurian Fossils of
Ireland. (1846.)
967. ——. On some new Mesozoic Radiata. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2, vol. ii.
p- 897 (1848).
968. ——. Systematic description of the British Paleozoic Fossils of the
Geological Museum of the University of Cambridge. (1855.)
969. ——. Prodromus of the Pulzontology of Victoria. Decade V. (1880.),
970. M‘Intosh, W.C. On the Invertebrate Marine Fauna of St. Andrews.
I. Sponges. Anw. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xiii. pp. 140-145 (1874).
971. ——. On the Marine Invertebrates and Fishes of St. Andrews. (1875.)
972 . On Budding in the Syllidian Annelids, chiefly with references to a
branched form procured by H.M.S8. ‘Challenger.’ Rep. Brit. Assoc., 49th
Meeting, pp. 872-3875 (1879).
973. Mackie, S.J. Illustrated Catalogue of British Fossil Sponges. Part I.
London (1866).
974. Miantell, G. A. Tho Fossils of the South Downs, or Illustrations of
the Geology of Sussex. London (1822).
975. ——. The Wonders of Geology. London (1848).
976. ——. Medals of Creation. Vol. i. London (1854).
977. ——. ‘The Wonders of Geology. Ed. 7. London (1857-58).
978. Manzoni, A.,e G.Mazzetti. Le spugne fossili di Montese. Arti Soe.
Toscana sci. nat. vol. iv. pp. 57-66 (1879).
979. ——. Spugne silicee della Molassa miocenica del Bolognese. <A?ti Soc.
Toscana sct. nat. vol. vy. pp. 173-176 (1881).
980, ——. La struttura mieroscopica delle spugne silicee del Miocene medio
della Provincia di Bologna e di Modena. 1882. Bologna (1882).
1886. | POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 631
981. Marchi, Pietro. Spugne e coralli. Milano, 1871. Scienza del popolo,
ser. 2, vol. ii. (1871).
982. Marenzeller, E.v. Die Celenteraten, Echinodermen und Wiirmer der
k,-k. oester.-ungar. Nordpol-Expedition. Denk, Ak. Wien, Bd. xxxv.
p- 807 (1878).
983, ——. Die Aufzucht des Badeschwammes aus Theilstiicken. Verh. z.-b.
Wien, Bd. xxviii. pp. 687-694 (1878).
[984.] ——. Propagation of Sponges by Cuttings. (Transl.) Report U. 8.
Fish. Comm. 1879, pp. 771-777 (1879).
[985.] . Propagation of Sponge by Cuttings. Am. Nat. xvii. p. 200 (1883).
986. ——. Poriferen, Anthozoen, Ctenophoren und Wiirmer von Jan Meyen.
Gesammelt von Dr, F. Fischer. Die Internationale Polarforschung, 1882-
83. Die dsterreich. Polarstation Jan Meyen. Beobachtungs-Ergebnisse,
Ba. ili. Zool. pp. 9-24 (1886).
987. Margo,T. Die Classification des Thierreiches. Math. nat. Ber. Ungarn,
Bd. i. pp. 284-260 (1883).
. The Classification of the Animal Kingdom. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
yol. xiii. pp. 313-334 (1884).
989. Marsh, O.C. Notice of a new genus of Fossil Sponges from the Lower
Silurian (Brachiospongia). Am. J. Sct. ser. 2, vol. xliv. p. 88 (1867).
990. Marshall, W. Untersuchungen iiber Hexactinelliden. Z. wiss. Z.
Bd. xxv. Supplem. pp. 142-243 (1875).
991. ——. Ideen tiber die Verwandschaftsyerhaltnisse der Hexactinelliden.
Z. wiss. Z. Bd. xxvii. pp. 114-136 (1876).
[988.]
992. ——. Spongiologische Mittheilungen. Ber. Vers. Nat. Miinchen, p. 187
(1878). (Huplectella, Ceratodendron, n. g.)
993 , und A,B. Meyer. Ueber einige neue und wenig bekannte Philip-
pinische Hewactinelliden. MT. Mus. Dresden, Bd. ii. p. 261 (1879).
994 Untersuchungen iiber Dysideiden und Phoriospongien. Z. wiss. Z.
Bd. xxxv. pp. 88-129 (1880).
995. ——. Die Ontogenie von Reniera jiligrana,O.Schm. Z. wiss.. Z. Bd.
xxxvii. pp. 221-246 (1882).
996. ——. Die Ontogenie von Reniera filigrana. Biol. Centraibl. Bd. iii.
pp: 72-74 (1883).
[997] ——. The Development of Rendera filigrana. J. R. Micr. Soc. vol. ii.
p. 798 (1883).
998. ——. Hinige vorlaufige Bemerkungen iiber die Gemmule der Siisswasser-
schwimme. Zool. Anz. Bd. vi. pp. 630-634 (1883).
999. ——. Linige vorliufige Bemerkungen tiber die Gemmulz der Siisswasser-
schwimme, Zool. Anz. Bd. vi. pp. 648-652 (1883).
1000. ——. Ueber einige neue von Herrn Pechuél-Loesche aus dem Congo
gesammelte Kieselschwamme. (Potamolepis,n.g.) Jen. Z. Nat. Bd. xvi.
pp- 553-577 (1883).
1001. ——. New Siliceous Sponges from the Congo. Jen. Z, Nat. Bd. xvi.
p. 553 (1884).
[1002.] ——. New Siliceous Sponges from the Congo. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier,
Soc. ser. 2, vol. iv. p. 66.
. Agilardielia radiata, eine neve Tetractinellidenform mit radiarem
Bau. Abh. Ak. Berl, (1884).
Vorlaufige Bemerkungen iiber die Fortpflanzungsverhbaltnisse von
Spongilla lacustris, SB. Ges. Leipzig, 1884, pp. 22-29 (1884).
Preliminary remarks on the Gemmules of the Freshwater
Sponges. (Transl.) Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xiii. pp. 163-171 (1884).
{1006. | Reproduction of Spongilla lacustris, (ADS8tr.) J. R. Mier, Soc,
ser, 2, vol. vy. pp. 1011-1113 (1885).
1008.
1004.
[1005.]
632 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
1007. Marshall, W. Bemerkungen iiber die Ceelenteraten Natur der Spon-
gien. Jen. Z. Nat. Bd. xviii. pp. 868-880 (1885).
Ceelenterate Nature of Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc.
ser. 2, vol. y. p. 816 (1885).
[1009.] Remarks on the Ceelenterate Nature of Sponges. (Transl.)
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xvi. pp. 90-100 (1885).
[1008.]
1010. ,and Herklotz. On Hexactinellids. Arch. Néer/, vol. iii. pp. 423-
458.
1011. Marsigli, C. F. Storia del mare. Venezia (1711).
1012. ——. Histoire physique de la mer. Amsterdam (1725).
1013. Martens, Eduard v. On Hexaetinellids. Berl. Monats. 1861,
p- 450 (1861).
Ueber einige ostasiatische Siisswasserthiere. IV. Hin Siisswasser-
schwamm aus Borneo. Arch. f. Nat. Bd. xxxiy. pp. 61-64 (1868).
1015. Martens, J. M.v. Reise nach Venedig. 11. Ulm (1824).
1016. Martin-Wismar, K. Untersuchungen iiber die Organisation von
Astylospongia, Ferd. Roem., und Bemerkungen iiber die Natur der Wall-
steine, Meyn. Arch. Ver. Mecklenb. Bd. xxxi. pp. 1-32, 1878.
Niederlindische und nordwestdeutsche Sedimentiirgeschiebe, ihre
Uebereinstimmung, gemeinschaftliche Herkunft und Petrefacten. (S¢lwri-
spongia, n. g.) Leiden, 1878.
1018. Matyasowsky, J.v. Hin fossiler Spongit aus dem Karpathensand-
steine yon Kis-Lipnik im Sdéroser Comitate (Glenodictyum carpathicum).
Természetrajzi fisetck, vol. ii. pt. 4 (1878).
Hin fossiler Spongit aus dem Karpathensandsteine yon Kis-Lipnik
im Saroser Comitate (Glenodictyum carpathicum). Verh. geol. Reichsans.
Wien, 1878, p. 405 (1878).
1020. Mayer, Paul. Wagnerella borealis. Zool. Anz. Ba. ii. pp. 3857-358
1014.
1017.
1019.
(1879).
1021. ——. Noch einmal Wagnerella borealis. Zool. Anz. Bd. iv. pp. 592-593
(1881).
1022. Mayor, Pere. Recherches sur l’organisation des éponges. C. R. e¢
Mém. Soc. Biologie, tom. i. p. 153 (1849).
4023. Meek and Worthen. Palontology of Illinois. Vol. iii. p. 419 (1868).
1024. Merat, F.V., ect A. T.de Lens. Dictionnaire uniyerselle de mathémae
thique médicine. Tom. vi. Paris (1834).
1025. Mereschkowsky, C.S. Preliminary Report on the Sponges of the
White Sea. (Russian.) St. Petersburg (1878).
1026. . On Wagnerella, a new genus of Sponge nearly allied to the Physe-
maria of Ernst Haeckel. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. i. pp. 70-77 (1878).
1027. Etudes sur les éponges de la Mer Blanche. Mém. Ac. Pétersb.
sér. 7, tom. xxvi, (1879).
1028. ——. Reproduction des éponges par bourgeonnement extérieur. Arch.
Z. expér. tom. viii. pp. 417-432 (1879-80).
[1029.] ——. External gemmation in the Spongids. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc.
vol. iii. p. 970 (1881).
1030. ——. Ncte on Wagnereila borealis, a Protozoan. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol. viii. p. 288 (1881).
Nouvelles recherches sur la zconerythrine et autres pigments
animaux. Dull. Soc. Zool. Fr. tom. viii. p. 81 (1883).
1032. Metschnikoff, Elias. Beitrage. zur Morphologie der Spongien. Z.
wiss. Zool. Bd. xxvii. pp. 275-286 (1866).
1033. ——. Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Kalkschwamme. Z. wiss. Zool.
Bad. sxiy. pp. 1-14 (1874).
ae
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 633
1034, Metschnikoff, Elias. On the Development of the Calcispongie.
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xvi. pp. 41-48 (1875).
Contributions 4 la morphologie des Spongiaires. (Trad.) Arch.
Z. expér. tom. y. pp. 357-868 (1876).
Researches on Sponges. (Russian.) Mém. Soc. nouv. Russ. vol. iy.
[1035.]
1036. :
(1878).
1037. Spongiologische Studien. I. Entwickelungsgeschichte der Hali-
sarca dujardinit. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxii. pp. 349-558 (1879).
Spongiologische Studien. II. Anatomisches iiber Ascetten. Z.
wiss. Zool. Bd, xxxii. pp. 358-362 (1879).
- Spongiologische Studien. IIT. Entwickelungsgeschichtliches iiber
die Kalkschwimme. Z, wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxii. pp. 862-371 (1879).
Spongiologische Studien. IV. Ueber die Nahrungsaufnahme bei
Spongien. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxii. pp. 371-374 (1879).
- Zur Lehre iiber die intracellulire Verdauung niederer Thiere.
Zool. Anz. Bd. y. pp. 310-316 (1882).
1042, Meyen, F. J. F. _Beitrige zur Kenntniss unseres Siisswasser-
Schwammes (Spongilla lacustris). Arch. Anat. Phys, 1889, p. 83 (1839).
1043. Meyer, A.B. Note on the Habitat of Psetalia globulosa and Labaria
hemispherica, Gray. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xiii. pp. 66, 67 (1874).
1044. —-. On Hyalonema cebuense, with a note by Mr. Higgin, Ann.
M. N, H. ser. 4, vol. xvi. p.'76 (1875).
' 1045, Meyn, T. Silurische Schwiimme und deren eigenthiimliche Verbreitung,
ein Beitrag zur Kunde der Geschiebe. Z. geol. Ges. Bd. xxv. pp. 41-58
(1878).
1046. Michelin, H. Iconographie zoophytologique. Paris (1840-47),
1047. - Note sur différentes espéces du genre Vioa (Spongiaires). Revue
zool. 1846, p. 56 (1846).
1048. Miklucho-Maclay,N. de. Beitrige zur Kenntniss der Spongien. TI.
Ueber Guancha blanca, einen neuen Kalkschwamm. Jen. Z. Nad. Bd. iv.
pp. 221-240 (1868).
1049. ——. Ueber einige Schwimme des nérdlichen stillen Oceans und des
Eismeeres, welche im zoologischen Museum der kaiserlichen Akademie
der Wissenschaften in St. Petersburg aufgestellt sind. Ein Beitrag zur
Morphologie und Verbreitung der Spongien. Mém. Ac. Pétersh. sér. (A
tom. xy. (1870).
Bemerkungen zur Schwammfauna des Weissen Meeres, und des
Arktischen Oceans. Bull. Ac. Pétersb. tom. xv. col, 203-205 (1871).
1051. Miller, S. A. Description of two new genera and eight new species of
Fossils from the Hudson River group, with remarks upon others. J.
Cincinnati Soe. Nat. Hist. vol. vy. pp. 10-20 (1882).
1052. Mills, H. Freshwater Sponges. Am. Mier. J. vol. v. pp. 125-132
(1880).
[1053.] ——. Les éponges d’eau douce. (Extr.) J. Microgr. tom. iy. p- 285
(1880).
OO
1038.
1039.
1040.
1041.
1050.
Les éponges d’eau douce. (Extr.) J. Microgr. tom. vy. p. 265
[1054. ]
(1881
55. ——. A variety of Spongilla &e. Am. Mier. J. yol. yi. pp. 30-31
).
(1881
-_ Notes on the Spongille of Buffalo. Bull. Buff. Nat. Club, vol. iy.
pp- 57-60 (1882).
Serial Arrangement of Birotulate Spicules in Statoblasts of Ame-
rican Sponges. Am. Micr. J. 1884, p. 41.
1058. Milne-Edwards and J. Haime. Cuvier Régne Animal. Edition
Masson, Zoophytes, pl. 95. (1850.)
1056.
1057.
DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
. Milne-Edwards and J. Haime. Monogreph of the British Fossil
Corals. Part 1. London (1850).
Compte-rendu sommaire d’une exploration zoologique, faite dans
PAtlantique, 4 bord du navire “le Travailleur.” C. 2. tom. xci. p. 260
(1880).
Compte-rendu sommaire d’une exploration zoologique, faite dans
Méditerranée, 4 bord du navire de l'état “le Travailleur.” C. R.
tom. xciii. pp. 876-882 (1881).
Compte-rendu sommaire d’une exploration zoologique, faite dans
PAtlantique, 4 bord du navire “le Trayailleur.” GC. &. tom. xciii.
pp. 931-936 (1881).
. Minot, C.S. A Sketch of Comparative Anatomy. IV. The Embry-
ology of Sponges. .dm. Nat. vol. xiv. pp. 479-485 (1880).
. Mobius, K. Die wirbellosen Thiere der Ostsee, p. 148. Bericht tiber
die Expedition zur physikalisch-chemischen und biologischen Unter-
suchung der Ostsee, Sommer 1871, auf dem Aviso-Dempfer Pommerania.
Kiel (1873).
. Beitrage zur Meeresfauna der Insel Mauritius und der Seychellen
Foraminifera. (1880.)
. Montagu, G. An Essay on Sponges, with the descriptions of all the
Species which have been discovered on the Coast of Great Britain. Mem.
Wern. Nat. Hist. Soc, vol. ii. no. 1, p. 67 (1818)
. Moore, C. On Abnormal Conditions of Secondary Deposits con-
nected with the Somersetshire and South-Wales Coal-basin. Descriptions
of Species. J. G. Soe. vol. xxiii. p. 533 (1867).
. Australian Mesozoic Geology and Paleontology. J. G. See.
vol. xxvi. (1870).
. Moore, T. J. On the Habitat of the Regadera (Watering-pot) or
Venus’s Flower-pot (Huplectella aspergillum, Owen). Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 4, vol. iii. pp. 196-199 (1869).
. Morris, J. Paleontological Notes. Ann. MW. N. H. ser. 2, vol. viil.
(1851).
Catalogue of British Fossils. 2nd ed. London (1854).
. Moseley, H. N. On the Colouring Matters of various Animals, and
especially of Deep-sea Forms, dredged by H.M.S. ‘Challenger. J. R.
Mier. Soc. n. 8. vol. xvii. pp. 1-23 (1877).
. Moulins, C.des. Questions obscures relatives 4 l’Hydractinia echi-
nata, Flem., et 4 lV’ Aleyonium domuncula, Lam., tous deux logeurs de
Pagures. Sec. 2, Alcyonium domuncula. Act. Soc. Lin. Bordeaux,
tom. xxviii. p. 842 (1872).
. Muller, Fritz. Ueber Darwinella aurea, emen Schwamm mit stern-
formigen Hornnadeln. <Arch. mikr. Anat. Bd. i. pp. 344-353
(1865).
. Muller, O.F. Zoologie Danice. Icones. Fase. 1. Hafnise (1777).
. ——. Zoologia Danica. Vol. i. Hafnize et Lipsiz (1779).
. ——. Zoologia Danica. Vol.i. 2nded. Hafniz (1788).
. —. Zoologia Danica, Vol.ii. 2nded. Hafnis (1789).
. —~-. Zoologia Danica. Vol. iii. 2nded. Hafnise (1796).
. ——. Zoologis Danice Prodromus. Hafnis (1854).
. Munster, Graf, und Wissmann. Beitrage zur Geognosie und
Petrefactenkunde des siidéstlichen Tirols, vorziiglich der Schichten yon
St. Cassian. (1841.)
. Munier-Chalmas, E. Barroisia, n. g. des Eponges. Bull. Soc. Géol.
ser. 3, tom. x. p. 425 (1882).
. Murchison, R. J. Silurian System. London (1839).
. —. Silurian System. 5th ed. London (1872).
Laie i
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 635
1085. Murie, J. On Steere’s Sponge, a new Genus of the Hexactinellid Group
of the Spongida (Dendrospongia steerti). Tr, L, Soc. ser. 2, Zool. vol. i.
pp. 219-234 (1877).
1086. Nardo, G. D. Auszug aus einem neuen System du Spongiarien. Jsis,
1833, p. 519 (1833).
1087. ——. Ueber die Spongien und niachst verwandten Thiergattungen. Jsis,
1833, p. 519 (1838).
1088. ——. De Spongiis. sis, p. 714 (18384).
1089. ——. Ueber die Spongien und Asterica, Oken. Isis, 1834, p. 724 (1834),
1090. Memoria sopra un nuoyo genere di Spugne, Vioa. Ann. regno
Lomb, Venet. vol. ix. p- 221 (18389).
. Observat. anatom. sopra l’animale marino detto rognone di mare.
Atti Ist, Venet. vol. vi. p. 267 (1847).
1092. Nassonow, Nic. Ueber die aushdhlende Kraft, und zum feineren
Bau der Clione. (Vorlauf. Mittheil.) Zool. Anz. Bd. iv. pp. 459-460
(1881).
1093. ——. Zur Biologie und Anatomie der Clione, Z. wiss. Zool, Bd. xxxix.
pp. 295-808 (1883).
1094. Nathorst, A.G. Om aftryk af Medusor i Sveriges Kambriska Lager.
Kgl. Svenska Vidensk. Akad. Handlingar, Bd. xix (1882).
1095. Neumayr, M. Ueber den alterthiimlichen Charakter der Tiefseefauna.
Neues Jahrb, Mineral. Geol. Bd. i. pp. 122-131 (1882).
Ueber den alterthiimlichen Charakter der Tiefseefauna, (Aus-
zug.) Humboldt, Bd. i. p. 228.
[1097.] Ueber den alterthiimlichen Charakter der Tiefseefauna. (Aus-
zug.) Kosmos, Bd. vi. pp. 124-126.
[1098.] ——. Ueber den alterthiimlichen Charakter der Tiefseefauna. (Aus-
zug.) Naturforscher, Bd. xv. pp. 162-164.
1099. Nicholson, H. A. On the affinities of the genus Stromatopora, with
descriptions of two new species. Ann, M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xiii. pp. 4-14
1091.
[1096.]
(1874).
1100. ——, and R. Etheridge. On Paleacis. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. iii.
p. 206 (1878).
1101. ——. Report on the Paleontology of the Province of Ontario, p. 11
(1879).
1102, ——. Manual of Palzxontology.
1103. Nieremberg, J. E. Historia nature. Antverpix (1635).
1104. Noll, F. C. Hinige Beobachtungen im Seewasser-Zimmeraquarium,
Reniera, &e. Zool. Anz. Bad. ii. pp. 402-405 (1879).
1105. ——. LEinige Beobachtungen im Seewasser-Zimmeraquarium. eniera,
&e. Zool. Anz. Bd. ii. p. 455 (1879).
1106. ——. Spongilla glomerata. Zool. Anz. Bd. ii. pp. 682-684 (1879).
Eau de Javelle als Mittel zum Entfernen des Weichtheile
ee Ae act Praparaten. Zool. Anz. Bd. v. pp. 528-5380
(1882),
1108. Norman, A. M. Shetland Final Dredging Report. Part 2. Rep.
Brit. Assoc. 1868, p. 827 (1868).
1109. ——. Shetland Final Dredging Report. Part 2. Rep. Brit. Assoc.
1868, pp. 841-342 (1868).
Notes on a few Hebridean Sponges, and on a new Desmacidon
from Jersey. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. iii. pp, 296-300 (1869).
Submarine-Cable Fauna. Ann. M. N. H. ser, 4, vol. xv. p. 176
1107.
1110.
sort,
(1875).
636
1112.
=a
1114.
1115.
1116.
1117.
1118.
1119.
1120.
1121.
1122.
1123.
112%,
1125.
1126.
1127.
1128.
1129.
1130.
1131.
1182.
1133.
1154.
1135.
1136.
1137.
1138.
1139.
1140.
1141.
DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dee. 21,
Norman, A. N. Note to the genus Haliphysema, with Description of
several Forms apparently allied to it. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. 1. p. 424
(1878).
——. On the genus Haliphysema, with Descriptions of several Forms
apparently allied to it. Ann. M. NV. H.ser. 5, vol. ii. pp. 264-284 (1878).
Note on Sponges dredged off the Coast of Norway. J. of Conch.
vol. ii. p. 11 (1879).
. Notes on the French Exploring Voyage of ‘Le Travailleur’ in
the Bay of Biscay. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. vi. pp. 480-486 (1880).
——. Notes on the French Exploring Voyage of ‘ Le Trayailleur’ in
the Bay of Biseay. Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1880, p. 587 (1880).
Nozeman, C. Over di imlandische zoetwater Spongii. Haarlem
(1788).
Oken,L. Lehrbuch der Naturgeschichte. 3 Band: Zoologie 1. Jena,
(1817).
——. Ueber Spongia fluviatilis. Isis, 1818, p. 1274 (1818).
Olivi, G. Zoologia Adriatica. Bassono (1792).
Orbigny, A. D. d@’. Cours élémentaire de Paléontologie. Tom. i.
part 1. Paris (1849).
Prodromus de Paléontologie. Tom.i. Paris (1849).
——. Prodromus de Paléontologie. Tom. ii. Paris (1850).
——. Cours élémentaire de Paléontologie. Tom. i. part 2. Paris (1850).
——. Cours élémentaire de Paléontologie. Tom. ii. part 1. Paris (1851).
——. Cours élémentaire de Paléontologie. Tom. ii. part 2. Paris (1852).
Oswald, F. Ueber die Petrefacten von Sadewitz. Uebers. Arb. schles.
Ges. Breslau, 1846, p. 56 (1847).
Owen, R. Ona new Genus and Species of Sponge (Euplectella asper-
gillum). P. Z. S. 1841, p. 3 (1841).
—. Ona new Genus and Species of Sponge (Euplectella aspergillwm).
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 1, vol. viii. p. 222 (1842).
——. Description of a new Genus and Species of Sponge (Euplectella
aspergillum, O.). Tr. Z. 8. vol. iii. p. 203 (1849).
——. Description of a new Species of Euplectella (E. cucumer, O.).
Tr. L. Soc. vol. xxii. p. 117 (1857).
Palxontology, or a systematic summary of extinct animals and
their geological relations.
Pagenstecher, H.A. Zur Kenntniss der Schwimme. Verh. naturh.
Ver. Heidelb. Bd. vi. pp. 1-66 (1871).
Lehrbuch der Zoologie. (1875.)
Pallas, P.S. Elenchus zoophytorum. Hage-Comit. (1766.)
. Reise durch yerschiedene Provinzen des Russischen Reichs.
Band i. Petersburg (1771).
——. Reise durch verschiedene Provinzen des Russischen Reichs.
Band. iii. Petersburg (1776).
Charakteristik der Thierpflanzen. Pp. 229-236. (1787.)
Parfitt, E. On the Marine and Freshwater Sponges of Devonshire.
Tr. Devon, Assoc. yol. ii. pp. 443-462 (1868).
Fossil Sponge-spicules in the Greensand of Haldon and Black-
down. Zr. Devon. Assoc, vol. iv. pp. 138-144 (1871).
——. Mode in which Cliona burrows. Monthl. Mier. J. vol. vii.
pp. 123-125 (1872).
1886.
1142.
1143.
1144,
1145.
1146.
1147.
1148.
1149.
1150.
] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 637
Parfitt, E. Does Cliona burrow? Monthl. Mier. J. vol. vii. pp. 186-
188 (1872).
——. On Haliphysema. Zool. Anz. Bd. ii. pp. 88-90 (1879).
On the Structure of Haliphysema tumanowiczii. Ann. M, N. H.
ser. 5, vol. ii. pp. 88-90 (1878).
Parkinson, James. Organic remains of a former World. Vol. il.
London (1808).
——. Outlines of Oryctology. London (1822).
Parkinson, John. Theatrum botanicum. London (1640).
Paterson, R. On Sponges. Pop. Sci. Review, vol. iv. pp. 802-310
(1865).
Pavesi, Pietro. Di una Spugna d’ acqua dolee nuova per I’ Italia
(Spongilla lacustris). Rendic. Ist. Lomb. ser. 2, vol. xiv. part 6, p. 6
(1881).
Payer, Julius. Oesterreichische Nordpol-Expedition. (1875.)
[1151.] ——. Austrian Polar Expedition. (Transl.) Vol. ii. p. 93. (1876.)
1152.
1153.
1154.
1155.
1156.
1157.
1158.
1159.
1160.
1161.
1162.
1163.
1164,
1165.
1166.
1167.
1168.
1169.
1170.
Perty, Max. Ueber Spongien. M7. Ges. Bern, 1870, pp. xix-xxv (1870).
Petiver, J. Petrigraphia americana. Londini (1712).
Petr, Frant. Spongilla fragilis, Leidy, in Bohemia. (Bohemian with
German Résumé.) SB. b6hm. Ges. Bd. xii. pp. 99-111 (1885).
Peyssonel, J. A. Account of a MS. treatise, int. “ Traité du Corail
ete.” Phil. Tr. vol. xlvii. p. 445 (1752).
——. New observations upon the Worms that form Sponges. Phil. Tr.
vol. 50. p. 590 (1758).
Phillips, J. Illustr. of the Geology of Yorkshire. Part 1. York (1829).
——. Illustration of the Geology of Yorkshire. Ed. 2, part1. Tondon
(1835).
——. Illustration of the Geology of Yorkshire. Ed. 2, part 2. London
(1836).
——. Geology of Oxford and the Valley of the Thames. (1871.)
Pictet, F.T. Traité élémentaire de Paléontologie, ou histoire natu-
relle des animaux fossiles considérés dans leur rapport zoologique et
géologique. Tom.iy. (1846.)
Traité de Paléontologie. Ed. 2, vol. vi. Paris (1857).
Pillet, M. L., et Fromentel, M. E. de. Descriptions géologiques et
paléontologiques de la Colline de Lémene sur Chambéry. (1875.)
Plancus, J. Ariminensis de conchis minus notis. Liber. Venetiis
(1789).
Plinius secundus, C. Historie naturalis. Libri 37.
Plot, R. The Natural History of Oxfordshire. Oxford (1677).
Plukenet, L. Phytographia. Pars 2. Londini (1691).
——. Phytographia. Pars 4. Londini (1696).
——. Almagestum. Londini (1696).
Pocta, P. Hinige Bemerkungen iiber das Gitterskelet der fossilen Hex-
actinelliden. SB. béhm. Ges. Bd. xi. (1883).
.——. Beitrige zur Kenntniss der eae der Bohmischen Kreide-
bh.
formation.—Pt. 1. Hexactinellide. <A
pp. 1-15 (1884).
bihm. Ges. ser. 6, Bd. xii.
2. ——. Ueber Spongiennadeln des Briisauer Sandsteins. SB. bohm. Ges.
Ba. xii, pp. 243-245 (1885).
. ——. Beitriige zur Kenntniss der Spongien der Béhmischen Kreide-
formation. Theil 2. Lithistide. Ads. bohm. Ges. ser. 6, Bd. xii. No. 9
(1885).
638 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
1174. Pocta, P. Le développement des Eponges fossiles. Arch. Slav. Biol.
tom. i. fase. 1, pp. 23-25 (1886).
1175. ——. Ueber einige Spongien aus dem Dogger des Fiinfkirchner Gebirges.
JB. kin. ungar. geolog. Anstalt. Budapest, Kilian (1886).
[1176.] Poléjaeff, N.de. Ueber das Sperma und die Spermatogenese bet
Sycandra raphanus (Haeckel). Anzeiger der kaiserlichen Akademie der
Wissenschaften Wien, Bd. 1882, pp. 237-238 (1882).
. Ueber das Sperma und die Spermatogenese bei Sycandra raphanus,
Haeck, SB. Ak. Wien, Bd. lxxxvi. pp. 276-298 (1882).
[1178.] Ueber das Sperma und die Spermatogenese bei Sycandra
raphanus. (Ausz.) Biol. Centralbl. pp. 180-181 (1882).
1179. ——. Report on the Scientifie Results of the Voyage of H.MS.
‘Challenger’ Calcarea. (1884.)
1180. . Report on the Scientific Results of the Voyage of H.M.S.
‘Challenger.’ Keratosa. (1884.)
1181. Poleschajew, K. N. On the Structure and Classification of Horny
Sponges. [Russian.] Arb. Petersh. Ges. Bd. xvi. Heft 1, p. 17 (1886).
1182. Pomel, A. Paléontologie de la Province d’Oran. Spongiaires. Oran
(1872).
1183. Pontoppidan, BE. Norges natuurl. historie. I. Kjébenhayn (1752).
1184. ——. Natural History of Norway. London (1755).
1185. Portis, A. OnSponges. Mem. Ace. Tor. ser. 2, vol. xxxiv. p.71 (1883).
1186. Potts, E. Some new genera of Freshwater Sponges. P. Ac. Philad.
p. 149 (1880).
1187. ——. Some new genera of Freshwater Sponges. P. Ac. Philad. p. 176
(1880).
1188. ——. Freshwater Sponges of Fairmont Park. P. Ac. Philad. 1880,
pp- 330-331 (1880).
1189. ——. Some new genera of Freshwater Sponges. P. dc. Philad. 1880,
p- 356 (1880).
1177.
1190. ——. Some new genera of Freshwater Sponges. P. Ac. Philad. 1881,
pp- 149, 150 (1881).
1191. ——. The genus Carterella vs. Spongiophaga pottsi. P. Ac. Philad.
1881, pp. 460-463 (1881).
[1192.] . New genera and forms of Freshwater Sponges. (Abstr.) Ann.
M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. viii. pp. 887-389 (1881).
The genus Carterella ys. Spongiophaga pottsi. Ann. M. N. H.
ser 5, vol. ix. pp. 380-333 (1881).
Freshwater Sponges of Fairmont Park. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier.
Soc. vol. i. pp. 613-614 (1881).
1195. (sia) Three more Freshwater Sponges. P. Ac. Philad. 1882, pp. 12-14
1196. (1882 , Three more Freshwater Sponges. J. R. Micr. Soc. vol. ii. p. 351
1197. ——. Sponges from the neighbourhood of Boston. P. Ac. Philad. 1882,
pp. 69-70 (1882).
{1198.] ——. Sponges from the neighbourhood of Boston. (Abstr.) J. R.
Mier. Soc. vol. ii. pp. 515-516 (1882).
. Three more Freshwater Sponges. Ann. M. N. ZH. ser. 5, vol. ix.
pp. 474-476 (1882).
Sponges from the neighbourhood of Boston. Ann. M. N. HF.
ser. 5, vol. x. pp. 72-75 (1882).
{1201.] . Three more Freshwater Sponges. (Abstr.) Nature, vol. xxvi.
p- 48 (1882).
1193.
[1194]
1199.
1200.
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 639
1202. Potts, BE. Our Freshwater Sponges. Am. Nat. vol. xvii. pp. 1293-
1296 (1883).
1203. ——. Freshwater Sponges; what, where, when, and who wants them.
Bull, U. 8S. Fish, Comm. vol. iii. pp. 889-391 (1888).
Freshwater Sponges as improbable causes of the pollution of
river-water. P. Ac. Philad. 1884, p. 28 (1884).
1204.
1205. . Some modifications observed in the form of Sponge-spicules. P.
Ac. Philad. 1884, pp. 184-185 (1884).
1206. On the wide distribution of some American Sponges. P. dc.
Philad. 1884, pp. 215-217 (1884).
{1207.] ——. Freshwater Sponges as improbable causes of the pollution of
river-water. (Abstr.) dan. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xiii. p. 486 (1884).
A new Freshwater Sponge from Nova Scotia (Heteromeyenia
pictonensis). P. Ac. Philad. 1885, pp. 28-29 (1885).
On the wide distribution of some American Freshwater Sponges.
Ann, M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 20-22 (1885).
[1210.] ——. Modification in the form of Sponge-spicules. (Abstr.) J. R.
Mier, Soe. yol. v. pp. 75-76 (1885).
On the wide distribution of some American Sponges. (Abstr.)
J. R. Mier. Soc. vol. v. p. 76 (1885).
A new Freshwater Sponge from Nova Scotia (Heteromeyenia
pictonensis). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 425-426 (1885).
1208.
1209.
[1211.]
1212.
1213. A Freshwater Sponge from Mexico (Meyenia mexicana). Am.
Naé. vol. xix. pp. 810-811 (1885).
[1214.] New Freshwater Sponge (Heteromeyenia pictonensis). (Abstr.)
J. R. Micr. Soc. ser. 2, vol. y. p. 817 (1885).
1215. ——. Freshwater Sponges from Mexico. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1885,
p- 587 (1885).
Freshwater Sponges from Mexico. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xvii.
p. 170 (1886).
1217. ——. Freshwater Sponges from Newfoundland; a new Species. Ann,
M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xviii. p. 248 (1886).
[1218.] ——. Freshwater Sponges from Mexico. (Abstr.) J. R. Micr. Soc.
vol, vi. p. 82 (1886),
. Freshwater Sponges from Newfoundland. LP. Ac. Philad. 1886,
pp. 227-280 (1886).
1220. Pourtales, de. Report on the dredging operations of the U.S. Coast
Survey. Bull. Mus. C. Z. vol. v. pp. 201-211 (1879).
1221. Price, F.G.H. On the beds between the Gault and Upper Chalk
near Folkestone. J. G, Soc. vol. xxxiii. p. 431 (1877).
1222. Priest, B. W. On the Natural History and Histology of Sponges.
J. Quek. Club, vol. vi. pp. 229-238 (1881).
1223. ——. Further Remarks on the Histology of Sponges. J. Quek. Club,
vol. vi. pp. 269-271 (1881).
1224. ——. On an undescribed species of Sponge of the genus Polymastia
(P. biclavata). J. Quek. Club, vol. vi. pp. 802-3804 (1881).
1225. ——. On Statoblasts of the Freshwater Sponges. J. Quek. Club, vol. i.
pp. 173-181 (1883).
1226. ——. Statoblasts of the Freshwater Sponges. dm. Micr. J. vol. iy.
pp. 208-213 (1884).
1227. ——. On the Hexactinellide. J. Quek. Club, ser. 2, vol. ii. p. 8 (1884).
1228. Pusch, G: G. Palen’s Paleontologie, p. 6 (1837).
1216.
1219.
1229 Quenstedt,F.A. Das Flotzgebirge Wiirttembergs. Titbingen (1843).
640 DR. R. VON LENPENFE£LD ON THE SysTeMATIC [Deec. 21,
1230. Quenstedt, F. A. Handbuch der Petrefacktenkunde. (1852.)
1231. ——. Der Jura. Tiibingen (1855-1857).
1282. ——. Der Jura (1858).
1233 Petrefactenkunde Deutschlands. 1 Abth. Bd. v. Schwamme.
Leipzig (1877-1878).
1234 Quoy, J. R.C., et P. Gaimard. Voyage autour du Monde sur les
corvettes l’Uranie et la Physicienne. Zoologie. Paris (1824).
1235. ,——. Zoologie de l’Astrolabe. Tom. IV. Paris (1833).
1236. Raspail, F. V. Analyse physiologique du Spongilla friabilis. Féruss.
Bull, Se. Nat. tom. xiii. p. 170 (1828).
Anatomie microscopique des Spongilles. Expériences de chimie
microscopique. Mém. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris, p. 204 (1828).
Anatomie microscopique des Spongilles. Expériences de chimie
microscopique, Mém. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris, p. 246 (1828).
1239. Rathbun, Richard. List of Marine Invertebrates; Porifera. Pr.
U. S. Nat. Mus, vol. iv. pp. 303-807 (1881).
List of Marine Invertebrates; Porifera. Sm. Mise. Contrib.
vol. xvii. (1882).
. The Porifera (Useful Aquat. Anim. U.S.), in The Fisheries and
Fish Industr. U. 8. Sect. i. p. 843.
1242. Sponge Culture in Florida. Science, ii. p. 213 (1883).
1243, Rauff, H. Ueber die Gattung Hindia, Dunc. Sitzungsb. Niederrhein.
Ges. Bonn (1886).
On the Genus Hindia, Dune, (Transl.) Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol. xviii. pp. 169-179 (1886).
1245. Ray, T. Hist. plant. Tom.I. Londini (1686).
1246. ——. Synopsis meth. stirp. Britann. Londini (1690).
1247, ——. Hist. plant. Tom. II. Londini (1693).
1248, ——. Hist. plant. Tom. III. Londini (1704).
1249. Reneaume, M.L. Spongia fluviatilis, ramosa, fragilis, ete. Hist. et
Mém. Acad. Paris, p. 231 (1714).
1250. Rennes, A.J.M. Des Eponges. Classification, préparation, commerce.
24 pp. Paris (1868).
1251. Retzer, W. Die deutschen Siisswasserschwimme. Tiibingen, 1883.
1252. Reuss, A. E. Die Versteinerungen der boéhmischen Kreideformation.
2 Abth. Stuttgart (1846).
. Die Bryozoen, Anthozoen und Spongiarien des braunen Jura yon
Balin bei Krakau. Denk. Ak. Wien, Bd. xxiy. (1867).
1254. ——. Oberoligocine Korallen aus Ungarn. 1870. SB. Ak. Wien
(1870).
1255. Rice, H. ¥. Sponges. J. New York Mier. Soc. vol. i. pp. 116-122
(1885).
1256, Ridley, Stuart O. On two cases of incorporation by Sponges of Spi-
cules foreign to them. J. L. S. vol. xv. pp. 149-151 (1880).
1257, ——. On the genus Plocamia, Schmidt (Dirrhopalum), and on some
other Sponges of the Order Echinonemata. J. L. S. vol. xv. pp. 476-487,
493-497 (1881).
. Spongida collected during the Expedition of H.MS. ‘ Alert’ in
the Straits of Magellan and on the Coast of Patagonia. P. Z. S, 1881,
pp. 107-187 (1881).
1259. ——. Polyzoa, Celenterata, and Sponges of Franz-Joseph Land. Ann,
M. N. H. ser 5, vol. vii. pp. 442-457 (1881).
1241.
[1244]
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 641
1260,
1261.
1262,
1263.
1264.
1265,
1266.
1267.
1268.
1269.
1270.
1271.
1272.
1273.
1274.
1275.
1276.
1277.
1278.
1279.
1280.
1281.
1282.
1283,
1284,
1285.
Ridley, Stuart O. Notes on Zoophytes and Sponges collected by Mr.
isos on the East Coast of Scotland. J. Z. 8. vol. xviii. pp. 106-108
1884).
——. Notes on Sponges, with description of a new species (Chladochalina
diffusa). Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xiv. pp. 183-187 (1884).
——. Spongiida. Report on the Zoological Collections made in the
Indo-Pacific Ocean during the Voyage of H.M.S. ‘Alert,’ 1881-82,
pp. 366 and 582. London (1884).
‘Monaxonida,” Preliminary Notice. Voyage of H.MLS. ‘ Chal-
lenger,’ Narrative of the Cruise, vol. i. part 2, pp. 569 (1885).
,and Dendy, A. On Proteleia sollasii, a new genus and species
of monaxonid Sponge allied to Polymastia. Ann. M. N. 1. ser. 5, yol.
xviii. pp. 152-159 (1886). Compare no. 327.
—, . Preliminary Report on the Monaxonida collected by H.M.S.
‘Challenger.’ Ann. M,N. H. ser. 5, vol. xviii. pp. 325-351 (1886).
== . Preliminary Report on the Monaxonida collected by H.M.S,
‘Challenger. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xviii. pp. 470-493 (1886).
Ringenberg, E. N.S. New Fossils from the Four Groups of the
Niagara Period of Western New York. P. dc. Philad. 1884, p. 144
(1884).
Risso, A. Hist. natur. des prince. product. de l'Europe mérid. et princip.
de celles des envir. de Nice, ete. Vol. V. Paris ct Strasbourg (1827).
Riviere, Em. Faune des Invertébrés des Grottes de Mentax en Italie.
C. R. tom. ciii. p. 94.
Roemer, C. F. Die Versteinerungen des norddeutschen Oolithenge-
birges. Hin Nachtrag. (1839.)
. Die Versteinerungen des norddeutschen Kreidegebirges. Liefe-
rungI. Hannover-(1840).
Die Versteinerungen des norddeutschen Kreidegebirges. Liefe-
rungII. Hannover (1841).
—. Ueber eine neue Gattung Blumenbachium, Konig, und mehrere
unzweifelhafte Spongien in Obersilurischen Kalkschichten der Grafschaft
Decatur im Staate Tennessee in Nordamerika. (1848.)
Die silurische Fauna des westlichen Tennessee. Breslau (1860).
—. Die fossile Fauna der silurischen Diluvialgeschiebe von Sadewitz.
Breslau (1861). 5
. Die Spongitarien des norddeutschen Kreidegebirges. IV. Pal.
vol. xiii. Cassel (1864).
—. Geologie von Oberschlesien. (1870.)
. Lethxa Geognostica. 1 part. Lethxa Paleozoica. Atlas. Stutt-
gart (1876-1880).
Rondelet, G. Fibri de Piscibus marinis. Lugduni (1553),
Universe aquatilium Historie. Lugduni (1555),
Rose, C. B. On the Anatomy of the Ventriculites of Mantell. Mag.
N. H., vol. ii. p. 332 (1829).
Rosen, F. Ueber die Natur der Stromatoporen und iiber die Erhal-
tung der Hornfaser der Spongien im fossilen Zustand. Dorpat (1867).
Rumph, G.E. D’Amboinsche Rariteitkamer. Tom. yi. Amstelodami
(1705).
Rutot, A. Note surla découverte de deux Spongiaires de l’étage Brux-
ellienne. Ann. Soc. mal. Belg. tom. ix. p.75 (1874).
Ryder, J. A. On the destructive nature of the Boring Sponge, with
observations on its gemmules or eggs. Amer. Nat. vol. xili. pp. 279-283
(1879).
Proc. Zooxu. Soc.— 1886, No. XLII. 42
642 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SysTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
1286. Ryder, J. A. On Camarophysema, a new type of Sponge. Proc. U.
S. Nat. Mus. vol. iii. p. 269 (1880).
. On Camarophysema a new type of Sponge. Sm. Misc. Contrib.
vol. xxii. (1882).
1288. Salter, J. W. Memoirs of the Geological Survey of Great Britain.
Geology of the neighbourhood of Edinburgh. (1861.)
On some new fossils from the Lingula Flags of Wales: Proto-
spongia fenestrata and Theca corrugata. J. G. Soc. vol. xx. p. 238
(1864).
1290. Sars,G.O. On the Deep-sea Fauna of the Norwegian coast. Vidensk.-
Selsk, Forhandl. 1868, p. 250 (1868).
1291. ——. On some Remarkable Forms of Animal Life from the Great
Depths of the Norwegian coast. I. Polyzoa, Conchifera, Cephalopoda,
Annelida, Anthozoa, Spongie. Partly from posthumous manuscripts of
the late M. Sars. Christiana (1872). University-Program (1872).
1292. Savini, J.C. Description de l’Egypt. Iconographie. Paris (1810).
1293. Schaffner. TEinige Bemerkungen iiber Spongiila fluviatilis. Verh.
Ver. Rheinl. Jahr. Ba. xii. p. 29 (1855).
1294. Scheuchzer, J. J. Specimen lithogr. Helvet. Tiguri (1702).
1295. ——. Helvetie hist. natur. Theil 3. Ziirich (1718).
1296. Schlossberger, J. E. Ueber die Unterscheidung des Fibroins von
der Substanz des Badeschwammes. Ber. Vers. Nat. 34, p. 164 (1855).
1297. Schluter, Clemens. Ueber die Spongitarien-Banke der unteren
Mukronaten und oberen Quadraten-Schichten, und iiber Lepidospongia
rugosa insbesondere. SB. Niederrhein. Ges. Bonn, 1870, pp. 1389-141
(1870).
1298. ——. Ueber die Spongitarien-Banke der oberen Quadraten und unteren
Mukronatenschichten des Miinsterlandes. Bonn (1872).
1299. Schmidt, Oscar. Die Spongien des adriatischen Meeres. Leipzig
(1862).
Supplement der Spongien des adriatischen Meeres, enthaltend
die Histiologie und systematische Erganzungen. Leipzig (1864).
Zweites Supplement der Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres.
Enthaltend die Vergleichung der adriatischen und britischen Spongien-
gattungen. Leipzig (1866).
Vorlaufiger Bericht iiber die Untersuchung der Bowerbank’schen
Spongien. SB. Ak. Wien, Ba. liii. pp. 147-151 (1866).
. Spongiologische Mittheilungen. M. Schultze’s Archiv, Bd. iii.
pp- 390-392 (1867).
Die Spongien der Kiiste yon Algier. Mit Nachtragen zu den
Spongien des adriatischen Meeres. [Drittes Supplement.] Leipzig
(1868).
1305.
. Vorlaufige Mittheilungen iiber die Spongien der gronlandischen
Kiiste. IT. Ver. Steierm. Bd. ii. pp. 89-97 (1869).
. Grundziige einer Spongien-Fauna des atlantischen Gebietes.
Leipzig, 1870.
. Das natiirliche System der Spongien. MT. Ver. Steierm. Bad. ii.
pp. 261-269 (1870).
[1308. ] . Grundziige einer Spongien-Fauna des atlantischen Gebietes.
(Ausz.) Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol. 1871, pp. 216-218 (1871).
Das natiirliche System derSpongien. Z. ges. Naturw. Bd. xxxviii.
pp. 155-157 (1871).
Ueber die Entwickelung der Kieselkorper bei Spongien. Z. ges.
Naturw. Bd. xl. p. 314 (1872).
1306.
1307.
1309.
1310,
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 643
1311. Schmidt, Oscar. Die auf der Pommeraniafahrt nach Arendal gefang-
enen Silicispongie. Jahresber. d. Commiss. zur wiss, Untersuchung. d.
deutschen Meere Kiel, Bd. i. pp. 147, 148 (1873).
Die zweite deutsche Nordpolfahrt in 1869, 1870. Spongien,
p. 429. Leipzig (1874).
1313. ——. Zoologische Ergebnisse der Nordseefahrt vom 21, Juli bis9. Sep-
tember, 1872. Spongien, p.115. Berlin (1875).
1314. ——. Spongien. Ber. Comm. wiss Unters, deutsch. Meere, ii. and iii.
pp. 115-120 (1875).
[1815.] ——. Spongien. (Ausz.) Z. ges. Naturw. Bd. xii. pp. 173-181
(1875).
1312.
1316.
. Zur Orientirung iiber die Entwickelung der Spongien. Z. wiss.
Zool, Bd. xxy. Supplem. 2, pp. 127-141 (1875).
1317. ——. Nochmals die Gastrula der Kalkschwimme. Arch. mikr. Anat.
Bd. xii. pp. 551-556 (1876).
. Das Larvenstadium yon Ascetta primordialis und Ascetta clathrus.
Arch. mikr. Anat. Bd. xiv. pp. 249-268 (1877).
. Die Fibrillen der Spongiengattung Fil¢fera, Lkhn. Z. wiss. Zool,
Bd. xxx. pp. 661, 662 (1878).
1320. ——. Artikel Spongien in Brehm’s Thierleben. (1878.)
1321. ——. Die Entodermbildung bei den Asconen durch Wanderzellen,
Ber. Vers. Nat. 50, Miinchen, p. 173 (1878).
. Die Spongien des Meerbusen yon Mexico und des Caraibischen
Meeres. 1 Hft. Jena (1879).
. Die Fortsetzung meiner ‘‘Spongien des Meerbusen yon Mexico.”
Zool. Anz. Bd. ii. pp. 879-380 (1879).
. Die Spongien des Meerbusen von Mexico und des Caraibischen
Meeres. 2 (Schluss-) Heft. Jena (1880).
Die Absonderung und die Auslese im Kampfe ums Dasein.
Kosmos, Bd. iv. pp. 329-333 (1880).
. Zusatz zu “Neue Ceelenteraten des Golfes von Neapel” von C.
Keller. Arch. mikr, Anat. vol. xviii. p. 280 (1880).
Entstehung neuer Arten durch Verfall und Schwund ilterer
Merkmale. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xlii. pp. 639-647 (1885).
1828. Schroter,J.S. Beschreibung einer neuen Spongie des siissen Wassers
(Spongia canalium). Der Naturforscher, Bd. xxiii. p. 149 (1788). j
1329. Schuffner, Oscar. Beschreibung einiger neuer Kalkschwimme, Jen,
Z. Nat. Ba. xi. pp. 403-433 (1877).
1330. Schultze, Max. Ueber eine merkwiirdige Spongie (Hyalonema). SB.
rheinl. westf. naturw. Gesell. Bd, xvii. pp. 67-69 (1860).
Sur l’éponge Hyalonema. C. R. tom. 50, pp. 792-793 (1860).
. Ueber die Japanische Glassfaden-Spongie. SB. rheinl. weséf.
naturw. Gesell. Bd. xvii. p. 85 (1860).
Die Hyalonemen. Bonn (1860).
. Ueber einen Schwamm mit Nadeln aus Hornsubstanz. Verh,
Ver. Rheinl. 1865, p.7.
; . Ueber Hyalonema. Arch. mikr, Anat. Bd. iii. pp. 206-214
(1867).
[1336.] ——. On Hyalonema, Ann. M. N. H. ser, 3, vol. xix. pp. 153-160
(1867).
1818.
1319.
1322.
1323.
1324.
1325,
1326.
335
1337. ——. Ueber Poterion neptuni. SB. niederrhein. Ges. Bonn, Bad. xxviii.
pp. 15-16 (1871). ;
Hinige ausgezeichnete Exemplare yon Schwimmen. SB. nieder-
rhein. Ges. Bonn, Bd, xxx. pp. 65-67 (1873).
42*
1338.
644 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [ Dec. 21,
1339. Schulze, F. E. Ueber den Bau und die Entwickelung von Sycandra
raphanus, Haeckel. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxv. Supplem. pp. 247-280 (1875).
. Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte yon Sycandra. Z. wiss. Zool.
Bad. xxvii. pp. 486, 487 (1876).
1341. ——. Untersuchungen iiber den Bau und die Entwickelung der Spongien.
II. Die Gattung Halisarca. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxviii. pp. 1-48 (1877).
Spongicola fistularis, em in Spongien wohnendes Hydrozoon.
Arch. mikr. Anat. 1877, p. 795 (1877).
. Untersuchungen iiber den Bau und die Entwickelung der Spon-
gien. III. Die Familie der Chondroside. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxix.
pp. 87-122 (1877).
. Recherches sur l’organisation et le développement des Spongiaires,
genre Halisarca. (Abstr.) Arch. Z. expér. tom. vi. pp. i-vi (1877).
1340.
1342.
1343.
[1344.]
1345. Untersuchungen iiber den Bau und die Entwickelung der Spon-
gien. IV. Die Familie der Aplysinide. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxx.
pp. 379-420 (1878).
1546. Untersuchungen iiber den Bau und die Entwickelung der Spon-
gien. V. Die Metamorphose yon Sycandra raphanus. Z. wiss. Zool,
Bd. xxxi. pp. 261-296 (1878).
[1847.] -——. Recherches sur I'anatomie et le développement des éponges ; les
métamorphoses de Sycandra raphanus. (Abstr.) Arch. Z. expér. tom. vil.
pp. xxi-xxv (1878).
1348. Untersuchungen tiber den Bau und die Entwickelung der Spon-
gien. VI. Die Gattung Spongelia. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxii. pp. 117-
157 (1878).
1349. ——. Untersuchungen iiber den Bau und die Entwickelung der Spon-
gien. VII. Die Familie der Spongide. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxii.
pp- 593-660 (1879).
1350. ——. Ueber die Bildung freischwebender Brutknospen bei einer
Spongie, Halisarca lobularis. Zool. Anz. Bd. ii. pp. 636-641 (1879).
Untersuchungen iiber den Bau und die Entwickelung der Spon-
gien. VIII. Die Gattung Hircinia, Nardo, und Oligoceras, n. g.
wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxiii. pp. 1-38 (1879).
1352, ——. Untersuchungen iiber den Bau und die Entwickelung der Spon-
gien. IX. Die Plakiniden. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxiy. pp. 407-451 (1880).
[1353.] On the Structure and Arrangement of the Soft Parts in EZuplec-
tella aspergillum. T. R. Soc. Edinb, vol. xxix. p. 661 (1880).
[1354.] . Sur la structure et la disposition des parties molles de I’ HLuplec-
tella aspergillum. (Abstr.) Arch. Z. expér, tom. ix. Notes p. xxvii (1881).
Untersuchungen iiber den Bau und die Entwickelung der Spon-
gien. X. Corticiuwm candelabrum, O.Schmidt. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxy.
pp. 410-430 (1881).
. Ueber den Badeschwamm. MT. Ver. Steierm. 1881, pp. xlviii-
lui (1881).
1357. ——. Report on the Sponges. P. R. Soc. Edinburgh, vol. xi. (1882).
(In Tizard and J. Murray’s exploration of the Faroe Channel during the
summer of 1880 &c.)
1358. ——. Ueber radiare Symmetrie bei Spongien. Ber. Vers. Nat. Hisenach,
p. 199 (1882).
1359. (882) Ueber radiare Symmetrie bei Spongien. Zool. Anz. 1882, p. 582
82).
1360. ——. Der Badeschwamm. (ll. d. Monatshefte, 1852, pp. 188-210
1351.
1355.
13861. ——. Ueber das Verwandischaftsverhiltnisse der Spongien zu den
Choanoflagellaten. SB, Ak, Berlin, 1885, pp. 179-191 (1885).
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 645
[1362.] Schulze, F.E. Sur la rapport des Eponges avec le Choanoflagellate.
(Abstr.) Arch. Z. expér. sér. 2, tom. iii. pp. xliv—xlvi (1885).
[1363.] ——. The relationship of Sponges to the Choanoflagellate. (Transl.)
Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 365-377 (1885).
Lebende Krusten von Oscarella lobudaris, O. S., var. cerulea aus
Triest mit in der Bildung begriffenen und bereits abgestossenen Brut-
kapseln. SB. nat. Fr. 1885, pp. 183-185 (1885).
The Hexactinellidz. Narrative of the Voyage of H.M.S. ‘ Chal-
lenger,’ vol. i. pp. 437-451 (1885).
Relationship of Sponges to Choanoflagellata, (Abstr.) J. R.
Micr. Soc. ser. 2, vol. v. pp. 657-658 (1885).
Relationship between Sponges and Choanoflagellata. (Abstr)
J. R. Micr. Soc. ser. 2, vol. vi. pp. 455-456 (1886).
[1368.] Oscarella lobularis, var. cerulea. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc. ser.
2, vol. vi. p. 497 (1886).
. Ueber den Bau und das System der Hexactinelliden. Adh. Ah.
Berl. (1886).
1370. Schweigger, A. F. Beobachtungen auf naturhistorischen Reisen.
Berlin (1819).
. Handbuch der Naturgeschichte skeletloser ungegliedeter Thiere.
Leipzig (1820).
1372. Seba, A. Locupletissimi rerum Naturalium Thesauri accurata descripta.
Amstelodami: 4 vols. (1754-1765).
1373. Seely, H. M. A new genus of Chazy Sponges, Strephochetus. Am. J.
Sci. ser. 3, vol. xxx. p. 355 (1885).
. The Genus Strephochetus; Distribution and Species. Am. J. Sct.
ser. 3, vol. xxxii. p. 31 (1886).
1375. Seguenza, G. Le formaz. terziarie nella provincia di Regs. (Calabria).
Atti Ac. Rom. (1880).
1376. Selenka, Emil. Ueber einige neue Schwimme ausder Siidsee. Z. wiss,
Zool. Bd. xvii. pp. 565-571 (1867).
. Ueber einen Kieselschwamm yon achtstrahligem Bau, und iiber
Entwickelung der Schwammknospen. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxiii. pp. 467—
476 (1879).
1878. Semper, C. Einige Worte iiber Euplectella aspergillum, Owen, und
seine Bewohner. Arch. f. Nat. Bd. xxxiii. pp. 84-89 (1867).
[1379.] . A few words on Huplectella aspergillum, Owen, and its Inhabi-
tants. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. ii. pp. 26-30 (1868).
. On Hyalonema schultzei and on Eurete. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4,
vol. ii. pp. 372, 373 (1868).
Einige neue Kieselschwimme der Philippinen ; Hyalonema
schultzei, n. sp., und Eurete,n. g. Wiirzburg. Verhandl. Bd. i. pp. xxix,
xxx (1869).
1382. Shaler, N.S. On the occurrence of the genus Beatricea in Kentucky,
Am. Nat. vol, xi. p. 628 (1877).
1383. Sharpe, D. On the age of the fossiliferous sands and gravels of Far-
ringdon and its neighbourhood. J. G. Soc. vol. x. p. 176 (1854).
1384. Sicard, Adien. Etudes pratiques sur les madrépores et des éponges,
présentées a la société de statistique de Marseille pendant l’année 1870.
Marseille (1871).
Etudes pratiques sur la vitalité des jeunes éponges et leur crois-
sance. Paris (1871).
1386. Simanowitch, S. Beitrige zur Kenntniss der Bryozoen des Essener
Griinsandes. Verh. naturw. Vereins, 3 Folge, Bd. viii.
1364.
1365.
[1366.]
[1367.]
1369.
1371.
1374.
1377.
1380.
1381.
1385.
646
1387.
1388.
1389.
1390.
1391.
1392.
1393.
1394.
1395.
1396.
1397.
1398.
1399.
1400.
1401.
1402.
1403.
1404,
1405.
1406.
1407.
+1408.
1409.
1410.
1411.
1412,
-1418.
1414,
DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [ Dec. 2],
Sinzow, J. On Calcareous Sponges from the Government of Saratow
(Russian). (Zapiski) New Russian Nat. Hist. Soc. vol. vi. pp. 1-40
(1879).
Slack, H. J. Venus’s Flower-basket. Intellectual Observer, vol. xi.
pp. 161-166 (1867).
—. The Nature of Sponges. Pop. Sci. Review, yol. xi. pp. 167-176
(1872).
Sloane, H. Catal. Plant. Jamaic. Londini (1696).
—. Voyage to the islands Madera ete. Vol.i. London (1707).
Smith, J. Toulmin. On the formation of the flints of the Upper
Chalk. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 1, vol. xix. p. 1 (1847).
On the Ventriculids of the Chalk. Ann. M. N. H. vol. xx. p. 73
(1847).
——. On the Ventriculide of the Chalk. Ann. M. N. H. vol. xx. p. 176
(1847).
—. Olassification. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2, vol.
i. p. 36 (1848).
—. Classification. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2, vol. i.
is
re
. 203 (1848).
Yop yo W ne}
—. Classification. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 2, vol. 279 (1848).
——. Classification. Ann. M. NV. H. ser. 2, vol. i. p. 352 (1848).
Smith, G. J., and Harger, O. Report on the Dredgings in the region
of St. George’s Banks. Tr. Connecticut Ac. Sci. vol. iii. p. 55 (1874).
Smith, W. Strata identified by Organized Fossils. (1816.)
Solger, B. Ueber einige der anatomischen Untersuchung zugingliche
Lebensverscheinungen der Spongien. Biol. Centralbl. Bd. iii. pp. 227-
235 (1883).
] ——. Vital Manifestations of Sponges. (Abstr.) dm. Nat. xviii.
pp. 635-636 (1884).
Sollas, W. J. On the Ventriculitz of the Cambridge Upper Green-
sand. J. G, Soc. vol. xxix. pp. 63-76 (1873).
. On the Coprolites of the Upper Greensand Formation and on
Flints. J. G. Soc. vol. xxix. pp. 76-81 (1873).
On the Foraminifera and Sponges of the Cambridge Upper
Greensand. Geol. Mag. vol. x. pp. 268-274 (1873).
——. On the Ventriculite Sponges. Dixon's Geology of Sussex, pp. 448-
455 (1875).
On a new Hexactinellid Sponge (Zubrochus clausus). Geol. Mag.
dee. ii. vol. iii. pp. 398-408 (1876).
On the Foraminifera and Sponges of the Cambridge Upper
Greensand. P. Cambridge Phil. Soc. vol. ii. pp. 229-300 (1876).
On Stawronema, a new Genus of Fossil Hexactinellid Sponges,
with a description of its two Species, 8. carteri and S. lobata. Ann. M.
NV. H. ser. 4, vol. xix. pp. 1-26 (1877).
——-. On the Changes produced in the Siliceous Skeletons of certain
Sponges by the action of caustic potash. Ann, M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xx.
pp. 285-300 (1877).
On Pharetrospongia strahani, Sollas, a fossil Holorhaphidote
Sponge from the Cambridge “ Coprolite” bed. J. G. Soc. vol. xxxiii.
pp. 242-255 (1877).
On the Structure and Affinities of the genus Siphonia. J. G,
Soc, vol. xxxiii. pp. 790-834 (1877).
On two new and remarkable species of Cliona. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 5, vol. i. pp. 54-67 (1878).
On the Structure and Affinities of the genus Catagma, Ann. M,
N. H, ser. 5, vol. ii. pp. 353-364 (1878).
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 647
1415, Sollas, W. J. On Plectronella papillosa, a new genus and species of
Echinonematous Sponge. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. iii. pp. 17-28 (1879).
1416. ——.. Note on the Structure and Affinities of the genus Catagma. Ann.
M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. iii. pp. 169-170 (1879).
1417, -——. On Pharetronema zingiberis, a new genus and species of Renierid
Sponge. Ann, M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. iii. pp. 404-407 (1879).
1418, —~—. On Plocamia plena, a new genus and species of Echinonematous
Sponge. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. iv. pp. 44-53 (1879).
Observations on Dactylocalyx pumiceus (Stutchbury), with a
description of a new variety, Dactylocalyx stutchburyi. J. R. Mier.
Soc, vol. ii. pp. 122-133 (1879).
. On the replacement of Siliceous Skeletons by Carbonate of Lime.
/ Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1879, vol. xlix. p. 350 (1879).
[1421.] . Onthe replacement of Siliceous Skeletons by Carbonate of Lime.
(Abstr.) J. BR. Mier. Soc. vol. iii. p. 282 (1880).
1422. ——. On the Structure and Life-history of a Sponge. P. Bristol Nat.
Soc. new series, vol. iii. pp. 20-37 (1880).
The Sponge-fauna of Norway; a Report on the Rev. A. M.
Norman’s Collection of Sponges from the Norwegian Coast. Ann. M.
NV. H. ser. 5, vol. vy. pp. 180-145 (1880).
The Sponge-fauna of Norway; a Report on the Rev. A. M.
Norman’s Collection of Sponges from the Norwegian Coast. dun. M.
NV. H. ser. 5, vol. v. pp. 241-259 (1880).
The Sponge-fauna of Norway; a Report on the Rey. A. M.
Norman’s Collection of Sponges from the Norwegian Coast. Ann. M.
NV. H. ser. 5, vol. v. pp. 396-409 (1880). :
1426. ——. On Flint Nodules from the Trimmingham Chalk. Ann. M. N.
H, ser. 5, vol. vi. pp. 384-397 (1880).
. On Flint Nodules from the Trimmingham Chalk. Ann, M,N.
H., ser. 5, vol. vi. pp. 487-461 (1880).
: . On Sponge-spicules from the Chalk of Trimmingham, Norfolk.
Rep. Brit. Assoc, pp. 586-587 (1880).
1429. ——. On the Structure and Affinities of the genus Protospongia (Salter).
J. G, Soe. vol. xxxv. pp. 362-366 (1880).
On Astroconia granti, a new Lyssakine Hexactinellid from the
Silurian Formation of Canada. J. G. Soc. vol. xxxvii. pp. 254-260 (1881).
On Astroconia granti,a new Lyssakine Hexactinellid from the
Silurian Formation of Canada. J. G. Soc. vol. xxxvii. p. 480 (1881).
Note on the occurrence of Sponge-spicules in Chert from the
Carboniferous Limestone of Ireland. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. vii.
pp. 141-148 (1881).
The Sponge-fauna of Norway; a Report on the Rey. A. M.
Norman’s Collection of Sponges from the Norwegian Coast. Azn. M,
NV. H. ser. 5, vol. ix. pp. 141-166 (1882).
1434. ——. The Sponge-fauna of Norway; a Report on the Rev. A. M.
Norman’s Collection of Sponges from the Norwegian Coast. Ann. M.
NV. H. ser. 5, vol. ix. pp. 426-453 (1882).
1435, ——. Sponges. Cassell’s Natural History, vol. vi. pp. 312-331 (1882).
Description of Fossil Sponges from the Inferior Oolite and on
some from the Great Oolite. J. G. Soc. vol. xxix. pp. 541-543 (1888).
1487. ——. The Estuaries of the Severn and its Tributaries. An inquiry into
the nature and origin of Tidal Sediments and Alluvial Flats. J. G. Soc.
vol. xxix. pp. 611-626 (1883).
1488. ——. On the origin of Freshwater Faunas. A study in Evolution.
’ Tr, R. Dublin Soc. vol. iii. pp. 87-118 (1884).
1419.
1420.
1423.
1424.
1425.
648 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [ Dec. 21,
[1439.] Sollas, W.J. On the origin of Freshwater Faunas. A study in
Evolution. (Abstr.) P. R. Dublin Soc. 1884, pp. 238-240 (1884).
On the Development of Halisarca lobularis. Q. J. Mier. Sct.
vol. xxiy. pp. 603-621 (1884).
[1441.] ——. On the Development of Halisarca lobularis. (Abstr.) J. R.
Mier. Soc. vol. y. p. 73 (1884).
[1442.] ——. Le développement de Halisarca lobularis. (Extr.) Arch. Zool.
expér. sér. 2, tom. iii. Notes, pp. xxvi-xxvili (1884).
On the Physical Characters of Calcareous and Siliceous Sponge-
spicules and other structures. P. Bristol Nat. Soc. n. 8. vol. iy. pp. 874-
392.
1440.
1443.
1444,
. On a Hexactinellid Sponge from the Gault and a Lithistid from
the Lias of England. P. R. Dublin Soc. Nat. Hist. n. s. vol. iv.
pp. 443-446.
. On Vetulina stalactites, O. S., and the Skeleton of the Anomocla-
dina. P. R. Irish Ac. ser. 2, vol. iv. pp. 486-492 (1885).
[1446.] On Vetulina stalactites, O. S., and the Skeleton of the Anomo-
cladina. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soe. ser. 2, vol. v. p. 464 (1885).
Note on the Structure of the Skeleton in the Anomocladina.
Ann. M, N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 286-238 (1885).
1448. ——. A Classification of the Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xvi.
p- 395 (1885).
[1449.] ——. Structure of the Skeleton in the Anomocladina. (Abstr.) J. R.
Micr. Soc. ser. 2, vol. vy. p. 465 (1885).
1450. —--. The Tetractinellida. Narrative of the voyage of H.M.S. ‘ Chal-
lenger,’ vol. i. pp. 450-452 (1885).
Sponge-spicules. P.R. Dublin Soc. yol. ivy. pp. 874-392 (1885).
. Sponge-spicules. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc. ser. 2, vol. vi. pp.
628-629 (1886).
1453, —--. Preliminary account of the Tetractinellid’ Sponges dredged by
H.M.S. ‘Challenger,’ 1872-76.— Part I. The Choristida. P. R. Dublin
Soc. vol. v. p. 177 (1886).
Note on the Artificial Deposition of Crystals of Calcite on Spicules
of a Calcisponge. P.&. Dublin Soc. vol. y, p. 73 (1886).
A Classification of the Sponges. P. R. Dublin Soc. vol. vy. p. 112
1445.
1447.
1451.
[1452.]
1454.
455.
(1886).
[1456.] . A Classification of Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R. Micr. Soc. ser. 2,
vol. vi. p. 630 (1886).
. Letter on Dr. Heider’s paper on Oscarella lobularis. Zool. Anz.
Bd. ix. pp. 518-519 (1886).
1458. Sorby, H.C. On the Chromatological Relations of Spongilla fluvia-
tilis. Q. J. Mier. Sci. new ser. vol. xv. pp. 47-52 (1875).
1459. Sowerby, J. British Miscellany. Vol. i. London (1804-1806).
1460. Descriptive Notes respecting the Shells figured in plates 11-23 in
Dr. Fitton’s Strata below the Chalk. Tr. Geol. Soc, ser. 2, vol. iy.
p. 335 (1836).
1461. Seagiee. Ueber Fibroin beiSpongien. Ann. Chemie Physik, tom. iii.
(1860).
1462. Stebbing, T. R. R. On Parasites of Sponges. Ann. M. N. & ser. 5,
vol. ii. p. 427 (1878).
1463. Steinmann, F. Systematische Stellung der Pharetronen. Neues
Jahrb. Mineral, Geol. Bd. i. p. 79 (1883).
. Pharetronen-Studien. Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol, Ba. ii. pp.
139-191 (1884).
1457.
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 649
1465.
1466.
1467.
1468.
1469.
1470.
1471.
1472.
1473.
1474.
1475.
1476.
1477.
1478.
1479.
1480.
1481.
1482.
1483.
1484.
1485.
1486.
1487.
1488.
1489.
Steinmann, F. Mikroskopische Thierreste aus dem deutschen Kohlen-
kalk. Z. geol. Ges. Bd. xxxii. pp. 894-400 (1881).
Stewart, C. Elements of the Natural History of the Animal Kingdom.
Edinburgh (1817).
Stewart, C. On a new Sponge, Tethyopsis columnifer, J. R. Micr.
Soc. n. s. vol. x. pp. 281-282 (1870).
. On the Histology of Grantia compressa. J. R. Mier. Soc, vol. i.
p- 560 (1882).
—. Nerve-cells in Grantia. Bell’s ‘ Zoology,’ p. 114 (1886).
Stimpson, William. Notes on the “Glass Coral” of Japan (Hyalo-
nema mirabilis). Am. J. Sc. ser. 2, vol. xxxv. pp. 458-459 (1863).
Strange, John. An account of some very perfect and uncommon
specimens of Spongiz from the coast of Italy. Phil. Tr. vol. lx. p. 179
(1770).
Strickland, H. E. On the mode of growth of Halichondria suberea,
Rep. Brit. Assoc, (1853).
Studer. Ueber Westafrikanische Thiere. SB. nat. Fr. 1878, pp. 137-
138 (1878).
—. Spongien von Kerguelen. Arch. f. Nat. Bd. xlv. p. 119 (1879).
—. Beitrage zur Meeresfauna West-Africas. Zool. Anz. Bd. v.
pp. 333-336 (1882).
——. Beitrage zur Meeresfauna West-Africas. Zool. Anz. Bd. v.
pp. 351-356 (1882).
Stutchbury, S. Description of a new Sponge from Barbadoes, Dac-
tylocalyx pumicea. P, Z. S. 1841, p. 86 (1841).
. Description of a new Sponge from Barbadoes. Ann. M. N. He
vol. ix. p. 504 (1842).
Suess, EB. Ueber fossile Hexactinelliden. Verk. z.-b. Wien, Bd. xii.
p- 85 (1862).
. On the existence of Hyalonema in a Fossil State. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 3, vol. xviii. pp. 404-405 (1866).
Tate, R. On the correlation of the Cretaceous Formations of the North-
east of Ireland. J. G. Soc. vol. xxi. (1865).
Templer, R. B. Hyalonema. Land and Water, 1871, p. 219 (1871).
Templeton, J. and R. Catalogue of Irish Rayed Animals. Mag. Nat.
Hist. vol. ix. p. 466 (1836).
Thomson, C. Wyville. On the “Glass-rope,” Hyalonema (H. sie-
boldi). Intellectual Observer, vol. xi. pp. 81-94 (1867).
. On the “ Vitreous” Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. i.
pp. 114-182 (1868).
On Holtenia, a Genus of Vitreous Sponges. Monthl. Micr. J.
vol. ii. pp. 107-109 (1869).
——. On the Depths of the Sea. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 112
(1869)
—. On Holtenia, a Genus of Vitreous Sponges. P. R. Soe. vol. xviii.
p. 284 (1869).
——. On Holtenia, a Genus of Vitreous Sponges. Phil. Tr. vol. clix.
pp. 701-720 (1869).
[1490.] ——. On Holtenia, a Genus of Vitreous Sponges. (Abstr.) Ann,
1491.
1492.
1493.
M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 284 (1869).
——. The Depths of the Sea. London (1878).
-—. On Hexactinellids. Natwre, vol. viii. p. 29 (1873).
——. On Hexactinellids. Nature, vol. viii. p. 248 (1873).
650 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
1494. Thomson, C. Wyville. The Voyage of the ‘Challenger.’ The At-
lantic. London: 2 vols. (1877).
1495. Thompson, D’Arcy. Bibliography of Protozoa, Celenterata, Worms.
; (1883.)
1496. Thoulet, T. Sur les Spicules siliceux des éponges vivants. C. R.
: tom. xcviii. pp. 1000-1001 (1884).
[1497.] Siliceous Spicules of Sponges. (Abstr.) Am. J. Sei. (3)
vol. xxviii. p. 76.
On Siliceous Spicules of Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc.
ser, 2, vol. iv. p. 757 (1884).
1499. Thurmann, J., et Etallon. Lethza Brunthrutana, ou études palé-
ontologiques et stratigraphiques sur le Jura Bernois, et eu particulier
les environs de Brentini. Nouveaux Mém. de la S. helvétique Sc. Nat.
1859.
1500. Tilesius, W.G. Zwei verschiedene Species Spongia villosa und ocellata
in einem Rohrenschwamme vereinigt. Voigt’s Magazin, Bad. vi. p. 277
(1803).
1501. Tournefort, J. P. Institutiones rei herb, Vol.i. Parisiis (1700).
1502, Trautschold, H. Paliontologischer Nachtrag zu der Abhandlung
des Firsten P. Krapotkin iiber die geognostischen Verhialtnisse des Kreises
Meschtschowsk im Gouvernement Kaluga (Siderospongia sirenis). Bull.
Mosc. tom. xlii. pt. 2, pp. 230-233 (1869).
‘1503. ——. Die Kreidefossilien Russlands (Capulispongia, Porospongia, Che-
tetes, Placuntarion). Bull. Mosc. vol. lii. pp. 332-349 (1877).
. Ueber Camerospongia auerbachi, Hichw. Z. geol. Ges. Bd. xxx.
pp. 225-228 (1878).
‘1505. Trost, G. Description d’un nouveau genre de fossil. Mém. Soc. Géol.
France, tom. iii. (1838).
1506. Turgot, E. F. Mémoire instructif sur diverses curiosités d'histoire
naturelle. Paris et Lyon (1758).
‘1507. Turpin, P. J. F. Rapport sur une note de M. F. Dujardin, relative a
Yanimalité des Spongilles. C. FR. tom. vii. p. 556 (1838).
1508. Turton, W. General System of Nature. Vol. iv. London (1806).
1509. ——. British Fauna. Swansea (1807).
1498.
1510. Uljanin, V. Materialy dlia fanny Izernago moria Iswjestia estest,
Moskwa, vol. ix. part 1, p. 83 (1872).
1511. Vahl, M. Bescribelse afen ny Sde-svamp. Shrivten Naturhist. Selsk.
: Bd. ii. Heft. 2, 1793, p. 51 (1793).
1512. Vaillant, Léon. Note sur la vitalité d’une éponge de la famille des
Corticates, la Tethya lyncurium, Lamarck. OC. R. tom. lxviii. pp. 86-88
(1869).
1513.
Note sur la vitalité d'une éponge de la famille des Corticates, la
Tethya lyneurium, Lamarck. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. iii. p. 172
; (1869).
1514.
. Note sur la disposition des pores ou orifices afférents dans la
; Cliona celata, Grant. C. R. tom. lxx. pp. 41-48 (1870).
1515. ——. Note sur la disposition des pores ou orifices afférents dans la
Cliona celata, Grant. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. v. pp. 146-148
(1870).
1516. Valenciennes, A. Note sur les Spongiaires (#/ythia) envoyés des
C1860)" VAltigne, par M. Albert Gaudry. C. &. tom. li. p. 579
( \
‘
1886.) POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 651
1517. Vasseur, G. Reproduction asexuelle de la Leucosolenia botryoides
(Ascandra variabilis, Haeckel). Arch. Z. expér. tom, viii. pp. 59-66
(1879-80).
1518. Vejdovsky, Fr. Revisio Faune Bohemicx. Pars1. Die Siisswasser-
schwamme Bohmens. Abh. kgl. Ges. Wiss. Bd. xii. Prag (1883).
Prispevky k. znamostem of honbich sladkoyodnich. (Contribu-
tions to our Knowledge of Freshwater Sponges.) (Bohemian.) SB.
bohm. Ges. 1883, pp. 19-31 (1883).
Contributions to the Knowledge of the Freshwater Sponges,
with Remarks by H. J. Carter. (Transl.) Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5,
vol. xiii. p. 96 (1884).
1521. ——. Bemerkungen iiber einige Siisswasserschwimme Béhmens. SB.
bohm. Ges. 1884, p. 55 (1884).
[1522.] . Freshwater Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R. Micr. Soc. ser. 2, vol. iv.
pp. 242-243 (1884).
1523. ——. Beobachtungen iiber Siisswasserschwimme. SB. ihm. Ges. 1884,
pp. 167-172 (1885).
[1524.] ——. Observations on some Freshwater Sponges. (Transl.) Ann.
M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. xv. pp. 18-18 (1885).
[1525.] Observations on some Freshwater Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R.
‘ Mier. Soe. vol. v. p. 255 (1885).
Observations on Freshwater Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier.
Soe, vol. vi. p. 257 (1886).
. Hiniges iiber “ Spongilla glomerata, N.” Zool. Anz. Bd. ix.
pp- 715-715 (1886).
1528. Verrill, A. E. Invertebrate Animals of Vineyard Sound. Rep. U. 8.
Fish. Comm. vol. i. 1871-72, pp. 740-745 (1871-72).
1519.
[1520.]
[1526.]
1527.
1529, . Report on the Condition of the Sea-Fisheries on the South Coast
of New England in 1871 and 1872. Washington (1873).
1530. ——. Calcareous Sponges. Proc. Amer, Assoc. 1873, pp. 292-293 (1873).
1531. ——. Exploration of Casco Bay by the U.S. Fish Commission in 1873.
P. Amer, Assoc. pp. 340-395 (1878).
1532. On new Sponges from New England. Am. J. Sci. vol. vii. p. 501
(1874).
1533. ——. Note on Borings of a Sponge in Italian Marble (Cliona). Am. J.
Sci. ser. 3, vol. xvi. p. 406 (1878).
. Preliminary Check-list of the Marine Invertebrata of the Atlantic
Coast from Cape Cod to the Gulf of St. Lawrence. P. U.S. Nat. Mus.
(1879).
1535. ——. Recent Additions to the Marine Invertebrata of the North-eastern
Coast of America &c.—Porifera. P. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 1879, p. 204 (1879).
Notice of Recent Additions to the Marine Invertebrata of the
North-eastern Coast of America, with descriptions of new Genera and
Species and critical remarks on others. P. U.S. Nat. Mus. p. 165 (1880).
1537. Vogt, ©. Lehrbuch der Geologie. 2 vols. (1866).
1534,
1536.
1538. ——. Sur les prétendus Organismes des Météorites, C. R. tom. xciii,
1881, pp. 1166-1168 (1881).
[1539.] ——. Sur les prétendus Organismes des Météorites. (Abstr.) J. R.
Micr. Soc. vol. ii. pp. 176-178 (1882).
1540, Volkmann, G. A. Silesia subterranea, Leipzig, 1720.
1541. Vosmaer, G.C. J. The Sponges of the Leyden Museum.—I. The
Family of the Desmacidinz. Notes Leyd. Mus. vol. ii. pp. 99-164 (1880).
Aanteckeningen over Leucandra aspera, H. Bijdrage tot de
kennis der Kalksponzen. Leiden (1880).
1542,
652 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
[1543.] Vosmaer, G. C. J. Aanteckeningen over Leucandra aspera. (Aus-
zug.) Tijdschr. Nederl. Dierk. Vereen. vol. vy. p. 144 (1880).
1544. . ine spongiologische Bibliographie. Zool. Anz. Bd. iii. p. 478
(1880).
1545. . Versuch einer spongiologischen Stenografie. Tijdschr. Nederl.
Dierk. Vereen. vol. y. (1881).
1546. Ueber die Fortpflanzungsverhiltnisse der Spongien. Biol, Cen-
tralbl. Bd. i. p. 103 (1881-82).
1547. . Report on the Sponges dredged up in the Arctic Sea by the
‘Willem Barents’ in the years 1878 and 1879. Niederl. Arch. Zool,
Suppl. i. 58 pp. (1881-82).
1548. . Voorloopig berigt omtrent het onderzoek aan de nederl. werk-
tafel in het Zool. Stat. te Napels. Nederl. Staatscourant. (1881.)
1549. . Porifera. Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen des Thierreichs, Bd. ii.
(1882-1886).
1550. (Poléjaeff, N.) Ueber das Sperma und die Spermatogenese bei
Sycandra raphanus, H. Biol. Centralbl. Bd. iii. pp. 180-181 (1883).
1551 . Studies on Sponges. I. On Veline gracilis, MT. z. Stat. Neapel,
Bd. iv. pp. 437-447 (1883).
1552. ——. Referate itber v. Lendenfeld’s Aplysinide. Biol. Centralbl.
Bd. iii. p. 695 (1883).
1553. ——. Ueber Nassanow’s Clione. Biol. Centralbl. p. 768 (1883).
1554. ——. Ueber Vejdovsky’s Siisswasserschwiamme. D. Litt. Zeit. p. 1776
(1883).
1555. Ueber seine und Poléjaeff’s Untersuchungen iiber Kalksehwimme.
Biol. Centralbl. Ba. iv. pp. 341-244 (1884).
[1556.] ——. On a new genus-of Sponges (Velinea), (Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc,
ser. 2, vol. iv. p. 243 (1884).
1557. Studies on Sponges, IT.-IV.—II. On the supposed difference
between Leucandra crambessa, H., and aspera (O.8.), H. III. On
Haeckel’s entogastrie Septa. IV. On the Relation between certain
Monactinellidze and Ceraospongie. MT. z. Stat. Neap. Bd. v. pp. 483-
493 (1884).
1558. ——. Something about Scudder’s ‘Nomenclator Zoologicus,’ Zool. Anz.
Bad. viii. pp. 216-218 (1885).
1559. ——. The Sponges of the ‘Willem Barents’ Expedition of 1880 and
1881. Bijdr. Dierk. vol. xii. (1885).
[1560.] Sponges of the ‘ Willem Barents’ Expedition. (Abstr.) J. R.
Mier, Soc. ser. 2, vol. v. p. 1013 (1885).
[1561.] Studies on Sponges. (Abstr.) J. R. Mier, Soe. vol. v. p. 75
(1885).
1562. . Einige neuere Arbeiten iiber Schwamme. Refer. in Biol.
Centralbl. Bd. vi. p. 181 (1886).
1563. Hinige neuere Arbeiten iiber Schwamme. Biol. Centrailbl, Bad. vi.
pp. 193-201 (1886).
1564. Wallace, Samuel J. On the “Geodes” of the Keokuk Formation
and the Genus Biopalla, with some new Species. Am, J. Sci. ser. 3,
vol. xv. pp. 366-370 (1878).
1565. Walcott, C.D. Cyathophycus. Trans, Albany Instit. vol. x. (1879).
1566. -——. On the nature of Cyathophycus. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. viii.
p- 459 (1881).
1567. ——. On the nature of Cyathophycus, Am. J. Sct, ser. 3, vol. xxii,
pp. 894-395 (1881).
.
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 653
1568. Waller, J. G. On the so-called boring or burrowing Sponge, Cliona
celata, Grant. J. Quek. Club, vol. ii. pp. 269-277 (1871).
1569. . Observations on the Freshwater Sponges. J. Quek. Club, vol. iii.
pp. 42-48 (1872).
1570. . On a new British Sponge of the Genus Microciona. Monthl.
Mier, J. vol. xviii. p. 261 (1872).
1571. . On a new British Sponge of the Genus Microciona. J. Quek. Club,
vol. v. pp. 1-5 (1878).
1572. ——. On Variation in Spongilla fluviatilis. J. Quek. Club, vol. v.
pp. 53-62 (1878).
1573. ——. On an Undeseribed British Sponge of the Genus Raphiodesma,
Bwk. (2. minima). J. Quek. Micr. Club, vol. vi. pp. 97-104 (1880).
1574. ——. On Clone celata.—Does the Sponge make the Burrow? J. Quek.
Club, vol. vi. pp. 251-268 (1881).
[1575.] On a newly-discovered British Sponge (Hymeraphia forceps).
(Abstr.) J. R. Mier. Soc. ser. 2, vol. iii. p. 668 (1883).
. On a newly-discovered British Sponge (Hymeraphia forceps). J.
Quek. Club, ser. 2, vol. i. pp. 216-223 (1884).
1577. Wallich, G. On Sponges. Pop. Sci. Rev. vol. ii. pp. 374-878 (1878).
1578. ——. A Contribution to the Physical History of Flint. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 5, vol. y. p. 183 (1880).
1579. ——. A Contribution to the Physical History of the Cretaceous Flints.
J. G. Soe. vol. xxxvii. p. 60 (1880).
1580. ——. On Siliceous Sponge-growth in the Cretaceous Ocean. Ann,
M. N. #. ser. 5, vol. vii. pp. 261-263 (1881). -
1581. Wartman, B. Vondem Fischbrod. Naturf. vol. xxi. (1785).
1582. ——. Vondem Fischbrod. Naturf. vol. xxii. (1787).
1583. Weber, M. Verslag over de zodlogische onderzoekingen gedurende de
vierde reis der ‘ Willem Barents.’ Verslagen 4, tucht W. Barents, pp.
101-140 (1881).
1584. Webster, T. On some new varieties of Fossil Aleyonia. Trans. Geol.
Soc. vol. ii. pp. 877-387 (1814).
1585. Weinland, D.T. Ueber die in Meteoriten entdeckten Thierreste.
Esslingen (1882).
1586. Weltner, Wilh. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Spongien. (Inaug.
Diss.) Freiburg, 1882.
1587. Wetherell, W. T. Note on a new Species of Clionites. Ann.
M,N. H. ser. 2, vol. x. (1852).
1588. White, C. A. The enemies and parasites of the Oyster, past and
present. Science, vol. iii. p. 618 (1884).
1589. Whiteaves. On Deep-Sea Sponges. Am. J. Sci. vol. vii. p. 211.
1590. Whitfield, R. P. Observations on the Structure of Dictyophyton and
its affinities with certain Sponges. dm. J. Sci. ser. 3, vol. xxii. pp. 58-55
(188i).
1591. -——. On the nature of Dictyophyton; with a Note by J. W. Dawson.
Am. J. Sci. ser. 3, yol. xxii. pp. 182, 183 (1881),
1592. ——. Observations on the Structure of Dictyophyton and its affinities
with certain Sponges. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 5, vol. viii. pp. 167, 168
(1881).
1593. ——. On the nature of Dictyophyton. Ann, M. N. . ser. 5, vol. viii.
p. 287 (1881).
Remarks on Dictyophyton, and descriptions of new species of
allied forms from the Keokuk Beds, at Crawfordsville, Ind. Amer, Mus.
Nat. Hist, Bull, no. 1, pp. 10-20 (1882).
1576.
1594.
654
DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
1595. Wierzejski, A. O razwoja pakéw gabek slodkowodnych europejskich
tudziez o gat. Spongilla Pras Leidy (S. sibirica, Dyb.). (On the
development of the gemmules of European Freshwater Sponges.) Rozpr.
i Spraw. Akad. umiej. af Krakowie, tom. xii. p. 239 (1884).
1596. ——. Ogabkach lodnowodhych ‘galicygskich. (Freshwater Sponges
of Galicia.) Spraw. korn. fizyogr. Akad. umiej. Krakowie, tom. xix.
(1885).
1597. Le développement des gemmules des éponges d’eau douce d’Eu-
rope. Arch, Slav. Biol. t. i. fase. 1, pp. 26-47 (1886).
[1598.] ——. Les Epongesd’eau douce de Galicie. (Abstr.) Arch. Slav. Biol.
vol. ii. pp. 37-40.
1599, Williamson, W. C. The Common Freshwater Sponge (Spongilla
Jluviatilis). Pop. Sci. Review, vol. vii. pp. 1-9 (1868).
1600. Willemoes-Suhm, R.v. Biologische Beobachtungen iiber niedere
Meeresthiere. II. Ueber einen jungen Kalkschwamm. Z. wiss. Zool.
Bd. xxi. p. 382 (1871).
1601. Briefe yon der ‘ Challenger’ Expedition. Z. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxv.
pp- xxv—xxvi (1875).
1602. Wizesniowski, A. (Systematic position of Sponges according to
1603.
1604.
1605.
1606.
1607.
1608.
1609.
1610.
1611.
1612.
1613.
1614.
1615.
1616.
1617.
1618,
1619.
Marshall.) Wszechswiat, tom. iv. p. 563 (1885).
Woodward, S. Outline of the Geology of Norfolk. (1833.)
Wotton, E. De differentiis animalium. Libri 10. Parisiis, 1552.
Wright, E. P. Note on Hyalonema, Gray. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4,
vol. ii. p. 320 (1868).
——. Notes on Deep-sea Dredging off the Coast of Portugal. Ann.
M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. ii. p. 423 (1868).
. Notes on Irish Sponges.—I. A List of the Species. Proc. Roy.
Irish Acad. vol. x. pp. 221-228 (1870).
Notes on Sponges.—l. On Hyalonema mirabilis, Gray. 2. On
Aphrocallistes bocagei, sp.nov. 3. On a new Genus and Species of
Deep-sea Sponge (Wyvillethomsonia wallichii). @. J. Micr. Sci. n. s.
vol. x. pp. 1-9 (1870).
—. On Hexactinellids. @.J. Micr. Sci.n.s. vol. xvii. pp. 1-4 (1870).
——. On Hexactinellids. @.J. Micr. Sci. n.s. vol. xvii. pp. 8-9 (1870).
Report on the Structure and Mode of Life of Hyalonema lusi-
tanica, Bocage. Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. n.s. vol. i. pp. 549-552, 1873
(1875).
——. On Kallispongia. Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. n. s. vol. ii. pp. 113-116
(1876).
. Onanew Genus and Species of Sponge (Kallispongia archeri).
Proc, Roy, Irish Acad. n. 8, vol. ii. pp. 754-756, 1876 (1877).
On Siliceous Sponges. Q. J. Mier, Sci. vol. xxiv. p. 370 (1877).
—. On a new Genus and Species of Sponge (Alemo seychellensis)
with supposed heteromorphic zooids. 7. R. Irish Ac. yol. xxviii.
pp- 13-20 (1881).
Wright, J. A List of the Cretaceous Microzoa of the North of Ireland.
Belfast Nat. Hist. Field-Club Report (1873-74).
Young J., Armstrong, J., and Robertson, J. Catalogue of the
Western Scottish Fossils. (1876.)
,and Young, J. Ona Carboniferous Hyalonema and other Sponges
from Ayrshire. Ann. M. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xx. pp. 425-483 (1877).
. On the occurrence of a Freshwater Sponge in the Purbeck Lime-
tere (Spongilla purbeckensis). Geol. Mag. dee. ii. vol. vy. pp. 220-221
).
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 655
1620. Zarecuznaga, S. Sprawozt. Komfissyogr. II. (1878.)
1621. Zittel, K. A. Aus der Urzeit. 2 vols.
1622. Ueber Celoptychium. in Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Organi-
sation fossiler Spongien. Abh, bayer, Ak. vol. xii. pt. 8, pp. 1-80 (1876).
[1623.] ——. Ueber Cwloptychium. (Auszug.) Jahrb. Mineral. vol. xliy.
pp. 578-579 (1876).
1624. ——. Untersuchungen fossiler Hexactinelliden. Mittheilung an Prof.
H. B. Geinitz. Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol. 1876, p. 286 (1876).
1625. ——. Untersuchungen iiber fossile Spongien. Z. geol. Ges. Bd. xxviii.
p- 631 (1876).
1626. —. Studien iiber fossile Spongien. I. Hewactinellide. Abh. bayer.
Ak, yol. xiii pt. 1, pp. 1-64 (1877).
Studies on Fossil Sponges. 1. Hexactinellide. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 4, vol. xx. pp. 257-273 (1877).
1628. ——. Studies on Fossil Sponges. I. Hewactinellide. Ann. M. N. d.
ser. 4, yol. xx. pp. 405-424 (1877).
Studies on Fossil Sponges. I. Hewactinellide. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 4, vol. xx. pp. 501-517 (1877).
Ueber Untersuchung der Spongien. Mittheilungen an Prof.
H. B. Geinitz. Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol. 1877, p. 77 (1877)
1631. ——. Beitrige zur Systematik der fossilen Spongien. Neues Jahrb.
Mineral. Geol, (1877).
1632. Studien iiber fossile Spongien. Jahrb. Mineral. p. 837 (1877).
1633. ——. Studien iiber fossile Spongien. Jahrb. Mineral. p. 705 (1877).
1634. ——. Ueber Untersuchung der Spongien. Mittheilungen an Prof.
H. B. Geinitz. Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol. 1877, p. 709 (1877).
1627.
1629.
1630.
1635. . ‘Zur Stammesgeschichte der Spongien. Festschrift zum Jubi-
leum des Prof. von Siebold. 20 pp. Miinchen (1878). ;
1636. Beitrage zur Systematik der fossilen Spongien. II. Lithistide,
Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol. 1878, pp. 561-618 (1878).
1637. ——. Handbuch der Palaontologie. 1 Band. Miinchen (1879).
1638. Ueber Jura Spongien. Mittheilungen an Prof. H. B. Geinitz.
Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol. (1878). :
1639. ——. Studien iiber fossile Spongien. II. Lithistide. Abh. bayer. Ak.
vol. xiii. pt. 1, pp. 65-154 (1878).
1640. Studies on Fossil Sponges. II. Lithistide. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 5, vol. ii. pp. 113-185 (1878).
1641. Studies on Fossil Sponges. II. Lithistide. Ann. M. N. H,
ser. 5, vol. ii. pp. 235-248 (1878).
1642. . Studies on Fossil Sponges. II. Lithistide. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 5, vol. ii. pp. 324-341 (1878).
1643. Studies on Fossil Sponges. II. Lithistide. Ann. M. N. H..
ser. 5, vol. ii. pp. 385-394 (1878). ;
1644. . Studies on Fossil Sponges. II. Lithistide. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 5, vol. ii. pp. 467-482 (1878).
1645. . Studien iiber fossile Spongien. III. Monactinellide, Tetrac-
iw und Caleispongie. Abh. bayer. Ak. vol. xiii. pt. 2, pp. 1-48
(1879).
1646. Studies on Fossil Sponges. ILI. Monactinellide; IV. Tetracti-
nellide ; V. Calcispongie. Ann. M. N. H, ser. 5, vol. iii. pp. 304-313
(1879).
1647. ——. Beitrage zur Systematik der fossilen Spongien. Neues Jahrb,
Mineral, Geol, 1879, pp. 1-40 (1879).
656 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
1648. Zittel, K. A. Studies on Fossil Sponges. V. Calcispongie. Ann. M.
NV. H. ser. 5, vol. iii. pp. 364-379 (1879).
Studies on Fossil Sponges. V. Calcispongie. Ann, M. N. H.
ser. 5, vol. iv. pp. 61-73 (1879).
Studies on Fossil Sponges. V. Caleispongie. Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 5, vol. iv. pp. 120-185 (1879).
. Notizen iiber fossile Spongien. Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol.
1882, pp. 203-204. (1882).
1652. ——. Ueber Astylospongide und Anomociadina. Jahrb. Mineral, 1884,
ii. pp. 75-80.
[1653.] ——. On Astylospongia and Anomocladina. (Transl.) Ann. M. N. H.
ser. 5, vol. xiv. pp. 271-276 (1884).
1654. Zoholka, C. Ueber Jsoraphinia texta, Reem. sp., und Scytalia pertusa,
Reuss, sp., aus der Umgebung von Raudnitz an der Elbe, Bohmen.
SB, Ak, Wien, Bd. iv. pp. 647-652 (1886).
1649.
1650.
1651.
LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE
LIST OF PUBLICATIONS.
Abh. Ak, Berl.—Abhandlungen der kéniglichen preussischen Akademie der
Wissenschaften zu Berlin.
Abh. bayer. Ak.—Abhandlungen der mathematisch-physikalischen Classe der k
bayerischen Akademie der Wissenschaften. (Miinchen.)
Abh. kgl. Ges. Wiss. Prag—Abhandlungen der kéniglichen Gesellschaft der
Wissenschaften zu Prag.
Actes Soc. Jura. d Emul. Porren.—Actes de la Société Jurassienne d’Emulation.
(Porrentruy.)
Act. Soc. Lin. Bordeaux.—Actes de la Société Linnéenne de Bordeaux.
Am. J. Sci.—American Journal of Science and Art. (New Haven.)
Am. Mier. J—American Monthly Microscopical Journal. (New York.)
Am. Nat.—American Naturalist.
Ann. Chemie Physik.—Annales de Chemie et Physique.
Ann. du Mus.—aAnnales du Muséum d’histoire Naturelle de Paris.
Ann. Lyceum N. H. New York.—Annals of the Lyceum of Natural History of
New York.
Ann. M. N. H.—Annals and Magazine of Natural History. (London.)
Ann. of Philos——Annals of Philosophy, or Magazine of Chemistry, Mineralogy,
&c. (London.)
Ann. regno Lomb.-Venet.—Annali di Scienze regno Lombardo-Venetiana.
Ann. Sci. Nat.—Annales des Sciences Naturelles. (Paris.)
Ann. Soc. géol, Nord.—Annales de la Société géologique du Nord. (Lille.)
Ann. Soc. mal. Belg.—Annales de la Société malacologique de Belgique.
(Brussels.)
Annual Rep. State Cabinet Nat. Hist. New York.—Annual Report of the
Regents University of New York on the condition of the State Cabinet.
(New York.)
Arb. nat. Ges. Univ. Charkow.—Arbeiten der naturforschenden Gesellschaft
der Universitat Charkow. (Charkow.)
Arb. Petersb. Ges.—Arbeiten der St. Petersburger naturforschenden Gesellschaft.
Arb, z. Inst. Wien.—Arbeiten aus dem zoologischen Institute der Universitat
Wien. (Vienna.)
Arch, Anat. Phys.—Archiy fiir Anatomie und Physiologie. (Liepzig.)
Arch. f, Nat.—Archiy fiir Naturgeschichte. (Berlin &c.)
Arch, mikr, Anat.—Archiy fir mikroskopische Anatomie, (Bonn.)
1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 657
Arch. Néerl.—Archives Néerlandaises des Sciences exactes et naturelles. (The
Hague.)
Arch, nouv. Mus.—Archives nouvelles du Muséum. (Paris.)
Arch, Sci. Nat—Archives des Sciences Naturelles. (Paris.)
Arch. Slav. Biol— Archives Slaves de Biologie.
Arch. Ver. Mecklenburg.—Archiy des Vereins der Freunde der Naturgeschichte
in Mecklenburg. (Neu Brandenburg.)
Arch, Z. expér—Archives de Zoologie expérimentale et générale. (Paris.)
Scie: ae Av. Sci.—Association frangais pour Vavancement des Sciences.
aris.
Atti Ac. Rom.—Atti della R. Accademia delle Scienze. (Rome).
Atti Ist. Venet.—Atti dell’ I. R. Istituto Veneto di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti.
(Venice.)
Atti Soc. Ital.—Atti della Societa Italiana di Scienze naturali. (Modena &c.)
Atti Soc. Tosc.—Atti della Societa Toscana di Scienze naturali, residente in Pisa.
Beitr. balt. Wochens.— Beitrage zur baltischen Wochenschrift.
Belfast Nat. Hist. Field-Club Report.—Reports of the Belfast Natural-History
Field-Club.
Ber. Com. wiss. Unters. deutsch. Meere, Kiel.—Bericht der Commission zur
Untersuchung der deutschen Meere. (Kiel.)
Ber. Vers. Nat.—Anmitlicher Bericht deutscher Naturforscher und Arzte.
Berl. Monatsh —Berliner Monatshefte.
Bibl. Hautes Etud.—Bibliothéque de l’école des Hautes Etudes. (Paris.)
Bih, Sv. Ak. Handl.—Bihang till Kongl. Syenska Vetenskaps-Akademiens
Handlingar. (Stockholm.)
Bijdr, Dierk.—Bijdragen tot de Dierkunde. (Amsterdam.)
Biol. Centralbl.—Biologisches Centralblatt. (Erlangen.)
Brit. Mus.—British Museum Catalogue. (London.)
Bull, Ac, Belg.—Bulletin de YAcadémie Royale des Sciences de Belgique.
(Brussels. )
Bull, Ac, Pétersb—Bulletin de la classe physico-mathématique de l’Académie
Impériale des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg.
Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist—Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural
History. (New York.)
Bull. Buff. Nat. Club— Bulletin of the Buffalo Naturalists’ Club. (Buffalo, N. Y.)
Bull. Mose.—Bulletin de la Société Impériale des Naturalistes de Moscou.
Bull. Mus. C. Z—Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology. (Cam-
- bridge, U.S.A.)
Bull, Scient—Bulletin Scientifique du département du Nord.
Bull. Soc, Acclim.—Bulletin de la Société d’Acclimatation. (Paris.)
Bull. Soe. Adriat—Bulletin de la Société Adriatique.
Bull. Soc. Linn, Normandie Bulletin de 1a Société Linnéenne de Normandie.
(Caen.)
Bull. Soc. Géol.—Bulletin de la Société géologique de France. (Paris.)
Bull, Soe, Vaudoise.—Bull. de la Société Vaudoise.
Bull. Soc. Sct. Nat. Neuchdtel—Bulletin de la Société des Sciences Naturelles.
(Neuchatel. ) :
Bull. Soc, Zool. Fr.—Bulletin de la Société Zoologique de France. (Paris.)
Canadian Nat. and Geol.—Canadian Naturalist and Geologist.
Can, Nat—Oanadian Naturalist.
Centralbl. med. Wiss—Oentralblatt fiir die medicinischen Wissenschaften.
Berlin.
osha “iad Petropol.—Commentarii Academix Scientiarum Imperialis Petro-
politans. Académie Impériale des Sciences. (Petersburg.)
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XLIII.
658 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [ Dec. 21,
C, R.—Comptes rendus des Séances hebdomadaires de I’Académie des Sciences.
(Paris.)
C. R. Soc. Biol.—Comptes rendus des Séances et Mémoires de la Société de
Biologie. (Paris.)
Denk. Ak, Wien.—Denkschriften der k. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu
Wien. (Vienna.)
Dictionnaires Sci. Nat.—Dictionnaires des Sciences Naturelles, (Paris.)
D. Litt. Zeit.—Deutsche Litteratur Zeitung. 5
Edinb. New Phil. Journ—Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal. (Edin-
burgh.)
Edinb. Phil. Journ —Edinburgh Philosophical Journal. (Edinburgh.)
Encyclop, méth—Encyclopédie méthodique des sciences. (Paris.)
Féruss, Bull. Se. Nat—Bulletin des Sciences Naturelles et de Géologie publié
par M. le Baron de Férussac. (Paris.)
Fror, Notizen.—Notizen aus dem Gebeite der Natur- und Heilkunde (Froriep).
(Erfurt.)
Geol. Mag.—Geological Magazine. (London.)
Geol. Surv. Canada,—Geological Survey of Canada.
Gr. Arch. mikr. Anat.—Grenacher’s Archiy fiir mikroskopisch Anatomie.
Hist. Berw. Nat. Club.—Berwickshire Naturalists’ Olub.
Hist. et Mém. Acad. Paris.—Histoires et Mémoires de Il’ Académie des Sciences.
(Paris.)
Ill. d. Monatshefte.—I\ustrierte deutsche Monatshefte.
J. Ac. Philad.—Journal of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia.
Jahrb. Mineral—Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, Geoguosie, Geologie, &c. (Stutt-
gart.)
J. Bombay Branch R., Asiatic Soc.—SJournal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal
Asiatic Society.
JB. schles. Ges.—Jahresberichte des schlesischen Gesellschaft fiir vaterlan-
dische Oultur. (Breslau.)
JB. schlesw. Gesell_Sahresbericht der naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft in
Schleswig.
J. Chim. expérim.—Journal de la Chimie expérimentale.
J. Cincinnati Soc. Nat. Hist—Journal of the Cincinnati Society of Natural
History.
J. d. Zool.—Journal de Zoologie. (Paris.)
Jen. Z. Nat_—Jenaische Zeitschrift fiir Naturwissenschaften, herausgegeben yon
der medicinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena.
J. G. Soc.—Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society. (London.)
JH. Ver. Wiirtt—Jahreshefte des Vereins fiir vaterlindische Naturkunde in
Wirttemburg. (Stuttgart.)
J. Anat. Phys.—Journal de I’ Anatomie et de la Physiologie. (Paris.)
J. L. S.—Journal of the Linnean Society (Zoology). (London.)
J. Microgr.—Journal de Micrographie. (Paris.)
J. N. York Mier. Soc.—Journal of the New York Microscopical Society.
J. of Conch.—Journal of Conchology.
J. prakt. Chem.—Journal fiir praktische Chemie. (Leipzig.)
J. Quek. Club.—Journal of the Quekett Microscopical Club. (London. )
J. R. Mier, Soc.—Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society. (London.)
J. Sci. Lish—Jornal de Sciencias da Academia de Lisboa. (Lisbon.)
Kgl. Svenska Vetensk.-Akad. Handlingar.—Kongliga Svenska Vetenskaps-
Aakademiens Handlingar. (Stockholm.)
LD’ Institut.—LTnstitut de France.
Mag. N. H—Magazine of Natural History (Charlesworth). (London.)
Mag, Zool. Bot.—Magazine of Zoology and Botany. (London.)
1886. | POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 659
Manual of Nat. Hist. §c. of Greenland —Manual of the Natural History of
Greenland,
Math,-nat. Ber. Ungarn.—Berichte des Ungarischen mathematisch-naturwis-
senschaftlichen Gesellschaft.
MB. Ak. Berl.—Monatsberichte der k. preussischen Akademie der Wissen-
schaften zu Berlin.
Meddel.af Soc. pro Fauna et Flora Fennica—Meddelingen af Societat pro Fauna
et Flora Fennica.
Mél, Biol. Pétersb.—Mélanges Biologiques tirés du Bulletin de la classe
physico-mathématique de l’Académie Imp. des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg.
Mém. Ac. Pétersb,—Mémoires de | Académie impériale des Sciences de St.
Pétersbourg.
Mém, Acad, Sci. Paris—Mémoires de |’ Académie des Sciences, (Paris.)
Mem. Acc. Tor—Memorie della Reale Accademia delle Scienze. (Turin.)
Mem. Bost. Soc.—Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural History.
Mém. d. Mus.—Mémoires du Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle. (Paris.)
Mém. Soc. Géol. France.—Mémoires de la Société Géologique de France.
Mém. Soc. Helvétique Sci. Nat—Mémoires de la Société Helvétique des Sciences
Naturelles. (Lausanne.)
Mém. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris.—Mémoires de la Société des Sciences Naturelles de
France. (Paris.)
Mém. Soc. Imp. Sci. Nat. Cherbouwrg.—Mémoires de la Société des Sciences
Naturelles. (Cherbourg.)
Mém. Soc. Jura. @ Emul. Départ. du Doubs —Mémoires de la Société Jurassienne
d’Emulation Département du Doubs.
Mém. Soc. nowy, fuss —Mémoires de la Société nouyelle de la Russie.
Mem. Wern. Soc.—Memoirs of the Wernerian Natural-History Society.
(Edinburgh.)
Micr, J—The Microscopical Journal and Structural Record. (London.)
Monthl. Micr, J—Monthly Microscopical Journal. (London.)
Morph. Jahrb.—Morphologisches Jahrbuch: eine Zeitschrift fiir Anatomie und
Entwickelungsgeschichte. (Leipzig.)
MT, Ges, Bern.—Mittheilungen der naturforschenden Gesellschaft in Bern.
MT. JB. geol. Anst. Budapest.—Mittheilungen aus dem Jahrbuche der kéniglich-
ungarischen geologischen Anstalt. Budapest.
MT. Mus. Dresden.—Mittheilungen aus dem k. zoologischen Museum zu
Dresden.
MT. Ver, Steterm.—Mittheilungen des naturwissenschaftlichen Vereins fiir
Steiermark. (Graz.)
MT. z. Stat, Neap.—Mittheilungen der zoologischen Station in Neapel. (Leipzig.)
Naturf—Naturforscher.
Naturk. Verh, Utrecht—Natuurkundige Verhandelingen Provinciaal Utregtsch
Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen. (Utrecht.)
Natwurk. Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch Indié.—Natuurkundig Tijdschrift voor
Nederlandsch Indié. (Batavia.)
Nederl. Staatscourant.—Nederlandsch Staatscourant.
Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol—Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, Geologie und
Petrefaktenkunde. (Heidelberg, Stuttgart, &c.)
New Russian Nat. Hist.—Transactions of the New Russian Society of Natural
History. (Russian.)
New Z. J. Sci.—The New Zealand Journal of Sciences. (Dunedin.)
Niederl. Arch. Zool.—Niederlandisches Archiv fiir Zoologie. (Haarlem.)
Nors. Vid. Selsk. Skrifter—Kongliga Norske Videnskabers Selskabs Skrifter.
(Trondjem.)
Notes Leyd. Mus,—Notes from the Royal Zoological Museum of the Netherlands
at Leyden.
43*
660 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE sysTEMATIC [Dec. 21,
Nouveaux Mém. de la 8. Helvétique Sc. Nat.—Nouveaux Mémoires de la Société
Helvétique des Sciences Naturelles. (Lausanne.)
Nova Acta natur. curios.—Nova Acta naturz curiosorum.
Nuovi Ann. Sci. nat—Nuoyi Annali delle Scienze naturali Bologna.
Ofv. Vet.-Ak. Forh.—Ofversigt af Kongl. Vetenskaps-Akademiens Férhandlingar.
(Stockholm. )
P. Ac. Philad.—Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia.
Pal.—Paleontographica.
P. Am. Assoc.—Proceedings of the American Association.
P. Bells Soc.—Proceedings of the Belfast Natural History and Philosophical
ociety.
P. Bost. Soc.—Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History.
P. Bristol Nat. Soc.—Proceedings of the Bristol Natural History Society.
P. Cambridge Phil. Soc.—Proceedings of the Cambridge Philosophical Society.
P. Geol. Assoc.—Proceedings of the Geologists’ Association.
Phil. Mag.—Philosophical Magazine. (London.)
Phil. Tr.—Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society. (London.)
Pop. Sci. Review.—Popular Science Review.
P. Linn. Soc.—Proceedings of the Linnean Society of London.
P, Linn. Soc. N. S. W.—Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales.
(Sydney.)
P. Liverp. Soc.—Proceedings of the Literary and Philosophical Society and
Natural History Society of Liverpool.
P. Med. Soc. Edinburgh.—Proceedings of the Medical Society of Edinburgh.
P. R. Irish Ac.—Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy. (Dublin.)
Proc. Lit. Liverpool.—Proceedings of the Literary and Philosophical Society of
Liverpool,
Proc. Yorkshire Phil, Soc.—Proceedings of the Yorkshire Philosophical Society.
(York.)
P, R. Soc.— Proceedings of the Royal Society. (London.)
P. R. Soc. Edinburgh.—Proceedings of the Royal Society of Edinburgh.
P. R. Soc. Tasm.—Papers and Proceedings and Reports of the Royal Society of
Tasmania.
PUES: we Mus.—Proceedings of the United States National Museum. (Wash-
ington.
P, Z. S.—Proceedings of the Zoological Society. (London.)
Q. J. Mier. Sci.—Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, (London.)
Rendic. Accad. Sc. Napoli.mRendiconti della R. Accademia delle Scienze di
Napoli. (Naples.)
Rendic. Ist. Lomb. —Rendiconti del R. Istituto Lombardo di Scienze. (Milan.)
Rep. Brit. Assoc—Reports of the British Association for the Advancement
of Science.
Rep. R. Polytechnical Soc. Cornwall.—Reports of the Royal Polytechnical
Society of Cornwall.
Rep. U.S. Fish Comm.—Report of the Commissioner, United States Commis-
sion of Fish and Fisheries. (Washington.)
Revue Zool.—Revue Zoologique. (Paris.)
Rozpr. i Spraw. Akad. umieg.af Krakowie— Proceedings of the Oracow Academy.
SB. Ak. Berlin.—Sitaungsberichte der kéniglich-preussischen Akademie der
Wissenschaften zu Berlin.
SB. Ak. Wien.—Sitzungsberichte der mathematisch-naturwissenschaftliche
Classe der k. Akademie der Wissenschaften. (Vienna.)
SB. bihm. Ges. —Sitazungsberichte der k, bohmischen Gesellschaft der Wissen-
schaften. (Prague.)
1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 661
SB, i der naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft Isis in
resden,
SB, Ges. Dorp,—Sitzungsberichte der Dorpater Naturforscher Gesellschaft.
(Dorpat.)
SB. Ges. Leipzig.—Sitaungsberichte der kéniglich sichsischen Gesellschaft der
Wissenschaften. (Leipzig.)
SB. A a pa der Gesellschaft naturforschender Freunde zu
erlin,
SB. niederrhein. Ges.—Sitzungsberichte des niederrheinischen Gesellschaft fir
Natur- und Heilkunde. (Bonn.)
SB. Soc, Erlangen.—Sitaungsberichte der physikalisch-medicinischen Societit
zu Erlangen.
Schrift. Dronth, Ges—Schriften der Drontheimer Gesellschaft.
Schrift. Gesell. Bef. Naturwissens, Marburg.—Schriften der Gesellschaft zur
Beférderung der Naturwissenschaften in Marburg.
Schr, Ges. Danz.—Schriften der naturforschenden Gesellschaft zu Danzig.
Sez. Gos—Science Gossip.
Skrifter Naturhist. Selsk.—Det Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskabs
Skrifter. (Copenhagen.)
Sm. Misc. Coll—Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, (Washington.)
Sm. Misc. Contrib—Smithsonian Miscellaneous Contributions to Knowledge.
(Washington.)
Soc. Philom. Paris—Rapports Généraux des Travaux de la Société Philoma-
tique. (Paris.)
Tijdschr, Nederl. Dierk. Vereen.—Tijdschrift der Nederlandsche Dierkundige
Vereeniging. (Leiden.)
Todd's Cyclop. Anat.—Todd’s Cyclopxdia of Anatomy.
L. R. Irish Ac.—Transactions of the Royal Irish Academy. (Dublin.)
Tr. Albany Inst—Transactions of the Albany Institute.
Tr. Birmingham Soc.—Transactions of the Birmingham Society.
Tr, Connecticut Ac. Sci.—Transactions of the Connecticut Academy of Science.
Tr, Devon. Assoc.—Report and Transactions of the Devonshire Association for
the Advancement of Science, &e. (Plymouth.)
Tr. Geol. Soc.—Transactions of the Geological Society of London.
Tr. L, S—Transactions of the Linnean Society of London.
flip. paint District Field-Club,—Transactions of the Newbury District Field-
lub.
Tr, new Russian N. H. Soc.-—Transactions (Trapiski) of the new Russian Natural
History Society.
Tr. North. Durh.—Natural History Transactions of Northumberland and Dur-
ham. (Newcastle-on-Tyne.)
Tr. R. Asiatic Soc. Japan.—Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society. Japan
Branch.
Tr. R. Dublin Soc._—Transactions of the Royal Society of Dublin.
Tr. R. Mier, Soc.—Transactions of the Royal Microscopical Society of
London,
Tr. R. Soc. Edinb.—Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh,
Tr. Tynes. N. Club,—Transactions of the Tyneside Naturalists’ Field-Olub.
(Newcastle-upon-Tyne.)
Tr. Z. S—Transactions of the Zoological Society of London.
Uebers. Arb. schles. Ges. Breslau.—Uebersicht der Arbeiten und Verhandlungen
des schlesischen naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft in Breslau.
Unters. Phys. Inst. Heidelb —Untersuchungen aus dem physiologischen Institut
der Universitat Heidelberg.
Vergl. phys. Studien.—Vergleichend physiologische Studien.
Verh, d. Akad, Wetensch.—Verhandelingen der Akademie van Wetenschappen,
662 DR. A, G. BOURNE ON INDIAN EARTHWORMS. [ Dec. 21,
Verh. geol. Reichsans.—Verhandlungen der k.-k. geologischen Reichsanstalt.
(Vienna.)
Verh. naturf, Gesell. Ziirich—V erhandlungen der naturforschenden Gesellschaft
in Ziirich.
Verh. naturh, Ver. Heidelb.—Verhandlungen des naturhistorisch-medicinischen
Vereins zu Heidelberg.
Verh. naturh. Ver. Rheinl.—Verhandlungen des naturhistorischen Vereins der
preussischen Rheinlande und Westfalens. (Bonn.)
bik A Ges. Berlin.—Verhandlungen der physikalischen Gesellschaft zu
erlin.
Verh. phys.-med. Gesell. Wiirzb.—V erhandlungen der physikalisch-medicinischen
Geselischaft in Wirzburg.
Verh. z.-b. Wien—Verhandlungen der zoologisch-botanischen Gesellschaft in
Wien. (Vienna.)
Wirzb. naturw. Zeitschr.—W irzburger naturwissenschaftliche Zeitschrift.
Z. geol. Ges.—Zeitschrift der deutschen geologischen Gesellschaft. (Berlin.)
Z. ges. Naturw.—Zeitschrift fiir die gesammten Naturwissenschaften. (Berlin.)
Zool, Anz.—Zoologischer Anzeiger. (Leipzig.)
Zool. Jahrb.—Zoologische Jahrbiicher. Zeitschrift fiir Systematik, Geographie
und Biologie der Thiere. (Jena.)
Zool. Journ,—The Zoological Journal. (London.)
Z. wiss, Zool_—Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. (Leipzig.)
3. On Indian Earthworms.—Part I. Preliminary Notice of
Earthworms from the Nilgiris and Shevaroys. By
Aurrep Gisss Bourne, D.Sc. (Lond.), F.L.S., Fell.
Univ. Coll. Lond., Fell. Madras Univ., Professor of
Biology in the Presidency College, Madras. (Communi-
cated by Prof. Ray Lanxester, F.Z.S.)
[Received November 16, 1886.]
When I commenced to find out what Earthworms were to be
found here for the purposes of class-study, I was totally unprepared
for the immense variety of forms which seem to occur in the country.
I have at present examined a very few localities only, and as every
locality yields new forms and I have already found more than twenty
different species, all of which were hitherto unknown, the field may be
pronounced to be fairly extensive.
I came across very few worms in my garden in Madras during
the hot weather, but then I made no special search for them; those
I did find belonged to the genus Pericheta, but seemed to be
new species (I have since determined that they are new); I have
found up to the present at least three species of Pericheta in Madras
town, but have reserved them for subsequent description.
In May I went up to the Nilgiris for some weeks, and there I
found numerous forms, and these always differed in different
localities. In October I spent about a week on the Shevaroy Hills,
and found in that short time five different forms, all markedly differ-
ing from those from the Nilgiris.
1886.] DR. A. G. BOURNE ON INDIAN EARTHWORMS. 663
I regret that in some cases I was unable to render my observations
complete, owing to want of sufficient material. It seems, however,
desirable to publish this preliminary note even though it is in some
cases incomplete, as more thorough investigations in any particular
locality may be considerably delayed. The greater number of forms
belong to the genera Pericheta and Moniligaster, and for the
present I deal with these only. I have found, in addition to these,
two species of Lumbricus at great elevations at Ootacamund and
Coonoor. One of these presents a clitellum extending over somites
XXVil.—xxxiv., and the other over somites xxx.-xxxiv. [refrain from
naming these until I can characterize them more fully. I have also
some worms belonging to other genera, but with the scanty literature
to which I have access 1 cannot say whether they are new genera
or not.
Had it not been for Mr. Benham’s! most useful résumé of known
Earthworms, I should have been able to do far less than I have done.
Where I have given measurements or counted the somites I have
chosen the largest individual I could find.
PERICHZATID.
The Perichetide are characterized by the fact that each somite
bears numerous sete arranged in a more or less complete ring.
The genera which are at present included in the group are :—
Pericheta, Schm.; Megascolew, Temp. (Pleurocheta, Bedd.); Peri-
onyx, E.P.; and Rhodopis, Kinb.
pra genera are at present distinguished one from the others,
thus:—
Pericheta presents a clitellum in somites xiv., xv., and xvi., a pair
of laterally-placed male pores in somite xvill., and very numerous
equidistant sete.
Megascolex presents 100 sete arranged in a ring, but with a dorsal
break.
Perionyx presents a clitellum in somites xiii., xiv., xv., xvi., and
xvii., a pair of male pores placed in a median pit in somite xviii.,
and 30 equidistant sete.
Rhodopis presents a clitellum in somites xii. and xiil., a pair of
male pores between somites xiv. and xv., and 50 to 60 equidistant
sete.
Now let us consider these characters in relation to the worms
described below. Among these we find that there are numerous
intermediate conditions, in respect to the arrangement of the setze,
between an almost equidistant series and a series presenting consider-
able dorsal and ventral gaps*. Secondly, in one form there are two
pairs of male pores (P. stuart). Lastly, with regard to the extent of
the clitellum, in the form which I have referred to Perrier’s genus
Perionyz it extends over three somites instead of five, while among the
1 Quart. Journ. Microse. Sci. vol. xxvi. n. s.
2 By the terms yentral and dorsal gaps I mean the space between the two
most ventral and dorsal sets respectively. An ordinary gap is the space between
any other two contiguous set,
664 DR. A. G. BOURNE ON INDIAN EARTHWORMS. [Dec. 2],
numerous forms which I have called Pericheta it extends n many
forms (as in P. armata, Bedd.) over four somites, and in one form
over five somites instead of three.
So, as they stand, these generic distinctions seem to me to be of
little value. I am, however, inclined to hope that a careful anato-
mical study in the fresh state of the large variety of forms which I
have already discovered (I have, moreover, every reason to believe
that the field is as yet by no means exhausted’) will enable me to
group these very interesting forms in a more rational manner. I do
not think that the classification suggested by Benham? will turn out
to be a very natural one. I refrain, however, from making any
suggestions myself in this preliminary note, as I expect that the
natural classification will have to be based upon the result of very
careful examination of a very large number of fresh forms. I shall
doubtless be able ere long to go to Ceylon, Burmah, Java, and other
places, and compare fresh specimens of the forms which have been
described from these regions with my Indian species.
I have in the present note spoken of all the forms as Peri-
cheta, with the exception of Perionyx saltans, although I believe
that the differences have in many cases a full generic value. A
glance at my tabular statement (p. 665) will show what great differ-
ences exist,
PERICHETA LAWSONI, Sp. 0.
The clitellum extends over somites xiv., xv., xvi., and xvii., but
is very slightly marked. Even in adult specimens it requires careful
examination to detect any external difference between these somites
and the ordinary somites of the body. There is, however, no
doubt as to its existence and extent in either this or the following
species, P. bivaginata.
The male pores are placed on somite xviii. There are no
papille. The oviducts open separately, although very near the
median line, in somite xiv. There are two pairs of spermathece ;
these are placed in somites viii. and ix. The spermathecal pores
open between somites vii. and viii., and viii. and ix., respectively. I
have found no nephridia. The gizzard is situated in somite x.
Intestinal czeca are present in somite xxvi. and run forward to somite
Xxiil.
There are from 30-35 sete in each somite, which are arranged so
as to leave small gaps in the median, dorsal, and ventral line. The
ventral gap is equivalent to about two ordinary gaps, and the dorsal
gap to about three ordinary gaps. The sete are present on the
clitellar somites and are arranged as in the other somites. No
modified genital setee were observed.
Length 250 millim., cireumference 7 mm. ; number of somites 119.
Hab. Ootacamund, Nilgiris, at an elevation of about 7000 feet.
_ | In the one week which I recently spent in the Salem and Yercaud district,
= will be seen that I discovered three new species of Pericheta, besides other
orms.
* Quart. Journ, Microsc. Sci. vol. xxvi. n.s. p. 225.
DR. A. G. BOURNE ON INDIAN EARTHWORMS. 665
1886.]
CuaracTers oF THE Species or Pericheta anv Perionyx HERE DESCRIBED.
Fe-
male
pore.
Male
pores.
Clitellar
Species. Somites.
Pericheta law- |xiv., xv., xvi.,|xviii. ; no| xiv.,
soni. xvii., very] papille. |paired.
slightly
marked.
xiv.,
P. bivaginata...|xiv., xv., xvi. xviii.
i paired.
xvil., very
slightly
marked,
P. gracilis ....,.\xiv., xv., Xvi.,| xviii., in| xiv.,
xvil., xviii. |clitellum.|paired.
P. stuarti ......| Xiv., XV., XVi. |xvii., xix.,| xiv.,
four in | single.
number.
P. burliarensis |xiy., xy., xvi.,| xviii. | xiv.,
xvii. single.
P. hulikalensis \xiv., xv., xvi.) xviii. | xiv.,
xvil. single,
P. mirdbilis ...| xiv., xv., xvi. | xviii. | xiv.,
single.
P. salettensis ...|\xiv., xv., xvi.,] xviii. | xiv.,
xvii. single.
Perionyx sal- | xiy., xv., Xvi. | xviii., in| xiy.,
tans. median | single.
pit.
Position
of Sperma-
thecee.
viii., Ix.
Vii., Vili., ix.)With two mi-|At
Viii., ix. (?)
vii., viii.
Vii., viii.
Vi., Vii.,
Viii., ix.
vii., Viii.,
Set
cs) a oe
Character | Oopu- | 3 | Intes- [3 &=
of Sperma- gee SS | tinal E ag Arr rpchepine
thecee. sete, | O | ceca. |F a @ ee
|
? Not seen.| x. | xxvi. |30-35|Present on
clitellum ;
small dorsal
and ventral
gaps.
least; vi. | Absent.| 56 |Present on
nute appen-| three | clitellum ;
dices. pairs small dorsal
in xviii. and ventral
gaps.
Not seen. |Not seen. vii.? ? ? |Present on
clitellum ;
large dorsal
and ventral
gaps.
Frill at base. |Special | x. | 4 pairs,| 52 |Present on
sete in about clitellum ;
Vili. xxiii. to small gaps.
Xxxvi.
With a long/Special | x. | xxvi. |88-40|Absent on
small ap-| sets in) clitellum ;
pendix. vii. & ventral gaps
in viil. unequal.
With long} Absent. ? [I think 42 |Present on
thin appen- present’ clitellum ;
dix. in Xxvi. large gaps.
With —_long|No obser-| x. |xxvi. 39 |No gaps.
pouch-like | vation.)
appendix.
Two small ap-|Absent. | vi. [No obser-| ? ?
pendices, vation.
Two small ap-|Absent. | ? |No obser-| 45-54 Present on
pendices. vation. clitellum ;
Apert. near no gaps.
median line.
—$——$_—_—_—_—_—_—_—
Number of
tes.
Length and
soml
|
119
162
111
123
112
61
cir-
cumference.
Habitat.
Nilgiris (Oota-
camund and
Naduvatam).
Salem.
Nilgiris (Nadu-
vatam).
Shevaroys
(Salem and
Yercaud),
Nilgiris
lar).
(Bur-
Nilgiris (Huli-
kal-drug).
Nilgiris (Nadu-
vatam),
Salem.
Nilgiris (Oota-
camund, Na-
duvatam).
Elevation.
6000
666 DR. A. G. BOURNE ON INDIAN EARTHWORMS. [Dec. 21,
PERICHETA BIVAGINATA, Sp. nl.
This species resembles P. /awsoni in the condition of the clitellum
and in having separate oviducal pores.
The clitellum extends over somites xiv., xv., xvi., and xvii., but is
very slightly marked.
The male pores are placed on somite xvili., they are inconspicuous ;
there are no papillz, although special penial setze are present.
The oviducts open separately, very near together, in somite xiv.,
ventrad of the ventral sete.
There are three pairs of spermathece ; these are placed in somites vii.,
viij., and ix. The spermathecal pores open between somites vi. and
vii., vii. and viii., viii. and ix., respectively. Each spermatheca pos-
sesses a pair of small diverticula at its base. Nephridia are present in
most somites, if not all, and are very large and present rosettes of
tubules in certain anterior somites, I think in v., vii., and ix. The
nephridiopores I have not observed.
The gizzard is situated in somite vi. Intestinal czeca are absent.
There are about 56 sete in each somite, which are arranged so as
to leave small dorsal and ventral gaps, as in P. lawsoni. The setze
are also present on the clitellar somites.
There are a pair of small sacs in somite xviii. containing long, thin,
curved, ornamented sete, as in P. armata, Beddard*. Lach sac
contains at least 3 sete.
Length 140 millim., circumference 8 mm.; number of somites
162.
Hab. Salem (about 1000 ft.), in wet ground.
PERICHETA (PLEUROCHZTA ?) GRACILIS, sp. n.
The clitellum extends over somites xXiv., XV., XVi., XVIl., and xviii.,
and is very well marked.
The male pores are placed in xviii. ; there are no papille.
The oviducts open separately, very near together, in somite xiv.
I think that there are two pairs of spermathecz in somites viii.
and ix., respectively, but am a little doubtful about it.
The gizzard seemed to be in somite vii., but possibly this is a
mistake for vi.
There are two pairs of groups of small nephridia opening on the
posterior edges of somites vii. and vili., respectively, a little nearer
the ventral line than the spermathecal pores, which occur between
somites vii. and viii., and viii. and ix., respectively. I have not
ascertained the number of sete per somite, but there are large
dorsal and ventral gaps.
I have found no specially modified genital setz.
Length 400 millim., circumference 8 mm. ; number of somites 332.
Hab. Naduvatam, at an elevation of about 6000 feet, in very wet
ground,
I only obtained a single specimen of this very interesting worm,
for which I shall make a special search on a future occasion.
1 Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Oct. 1883, p. 217.
1886.] DR. A. G. BOURNE ON INDIAN EARTHWORMS. 667
PERICHETA STUARTI, Sp. 0.
The clitellum extends over somites xiv., xv., and xvi.; it is very
well marked.
There are two pairs of male pores in somites xvii. and xix., respec-
tively ; these are all four placed upon a whitish, slightly depressed
patch, which thus extends over the greater portion of somite xvii., the
whole of somite xviii. and the greater portion of somite xix.
Connected with each of these pores is a large coiled prostatic gland,
which extends backwards in each case through some 8 or 9 somites.
There is a single median oviducal pore in the anterior portion of
somite xiv.
There are two pairs of spermathecee, situated in somites vii. and
viii., respectively. They do not possess any appendages, but
present a sort of frilled appearance around the base.
The gizzard is situated in somite x.
In somites xxiii._xxvi. (?) there are four pairs of special diverticula
on the dorso-lateral portions of the intestine.
I have not observed any nephridia.
There are about 52 setze in each somite arranged with small
dorsal and ventral gaps; sete are present on the clitellum.
There are no special seta in somite xviii., but in the anterior
portion of somite viii. (¢. e. between the anterior and posterior pair
of spermathecze) there are two groups of large modified setze. Where
these project on the surface, there is a papilla which in some speci-
mens becomes very well marked.
Length 148 millim., cireumference 15 mm.; number of somites 111.
Hab. Yercaud, at an elevation of about 5000 feet, and also down
the ghaut as low as Salem (1000 ft.). I have specimens from
Salem.
This is an exceedingly common worm in this region. It occurs in
dry ground, and often under large stones.
PERICHETA BURLIARENSIS, Sp. nD.
The clitellum extends over somites xiv., xv., Xvi., and xvii., and
is well marked.
The male pores are situated in somite xviii. ; segments Xix., Xx.,
xxi., and xxii. bear papillee (apertures ?).
The oviducts open in somite xiv. by a single median pore.
The spermathecee are placed in somites vi., vii., vili., and ix. ; they
present a single appendage. I am unable at present to say anything
about nephridia.
The gizzard is situated in somite x. There are a single pair of
intestinal czeca in somite xxvi., reaching forwards to somite xxiv.
There are 38 to 40 setee per somite. Setze are entirely absent from
the clitellum. I find no special setee in somite xviii., but there are two
pairs of groups of enlarged setee in somites vii. and viii., respectively.
There is a large ventral gap, especially in the somites immediately
following the male pores, where the most ventrally placed setee are
larger than the others.
668 DR. A. G. BOURNE ON INDIAN EARTHWORMS. [Dec. 21
Length 100 millim., circumference 9 mm. ; number of somites 123.
Hab. Burliar, 2000-3000 ft.
PERICHATA HULIKALENSIS, Sp. nN.
The clitellum extends over somites xiv., xv., xvi., and xvil., and
is well marked.
The male pores are situated in somite xviii., and are rather near
together, and placed upon slight papille.
The oviducts open by a single median pore in somite xiv.
The spermathece are placed in somites vii. and viil.; they present
a single filiform appendage.
No nephridia were observed.
I believe intestinal diverticula are present in the usual position.
There are about 42 sete per somite. The ventral gap is equal to
4 ordinary gaps, and the dorsal gap to 7 ordinary gaps. Sete are
present on the clitellum.
No special setze were observed.
Length 200 millim., circumference 9 mm. ; number of somites 209.
Hab. Hulikal-drug, Nilgiris. Elevation about 6000 ft.
PERICHETA MIRABILIS, sp, 0.
The clitellum extends over somites xiv., xv., and xvi., and is well
marked.
The male pores are widely separated, and situated on low papille
in somite Xviii.
The oviducts open by a median pore in somite xiv.
The spermathece are situated in somites vi., vii., vill., and ix.; they
present a single appendage. They open, as is usually the case, exactly
between the somite in which they lie and the preceding somite.
The gizzard is situated in somite x.
Intestinal czeca are present in somite xxvi., and run forwards.
Nephridia seem to be present in certain anterior somites only, as
in P. gracilis.
There are four pairs of groups of small nephridia in the posterior
portions of somites v., vi., vil., and vill., respectively, and these open
on minute circular papille which are placed in diamond-shaped
depressions lying in the posterior portion of the somites, in which
the nephridial groups lie, and just ventrad of the nephridiopore
which lies between each of the somites and the succeeding somite.
There are further two pairs of groups of nephridia lying in somites
vii. and viii., respectively, and opening on similar papille placed
ventrad of those above described, and just anterior to the seta-ring
in each somite. The further details with regard to this remarkable
arrangement I hope to work out on a future occasion. I may
mention here that I at first mistook these nephridiopore-bearing
papillee for the pores of the spermathecz, and it is quite possible
that previous observers have done the same thing in other species of
Pericheta. It needs the most careful and repeated observation to make
out the exact arrangement. There 39 sete per somite, with no gap
either dorsally or ventrally. It is always possible, however, to re-
cognize the median ventral or dorsal lines, as both ventral and dorsal
1886.] DR. A. G. BOURNE ON INDIAN EARTHWORMS. 669
setee point forwards and away from the middle line, while the lateral
setee point straight forwards. I lay no stress on this arrangement
at present ; it may be caused by my method of flattening out the
body-wall after a median dorsal incision. I have no observations
with regard to penial sete.
Length 130 millim., circumference 8 mm.; number of somites
about 114.
Hab. Naduvatam, Nilgiris. Found along with P. gracilis.
I hope to make some special observations at a later period with
regard to the distribution of these worms, but I may point out now
that the only two species presenting this remarkable arrangement of
nephridia, while differing in almost all other essentials, were found
together.
PERICHETA SALETTENSIS, Sp. Nl.
The clitellum extends over somites xiv., xv., xvi., and xvii., and
is well marked.
The male pores are situated on somite xvili., without much ridge
around them.
The oviducts open by a median pore in somite xiv.
The spermathecee lie in somites vii., vili., and ix.; they present a
pair of small appendages.
The gizzard is situated in somite vi.
I have no observation regarding intestinal czeca.
The nephridia occur in, at any rate, most of the somites ; they are
very large and present rosettes of tubules in certain anterior somites.
The setee present a dorsal gap equal to about three ordinary gaps,
and a ventral gap equal to about five ordinary gaps. There seem
to be no modified penial setz.
Length 70 millim., circumference 9 mm. ; number of somites 112.
Hab. Salem, elevation about 1000 feet, in wet ground together
with P. bivaginata ; I only found two specimens.
PERIONYX SALTANS, Sp. n.
The clitellum extends over somites xiv., xv., and xvi. In the
hitherto known species of Perionyx, P. excavatus, E. P.', and P.
macintoshii, Bedd.’, the clitellum extends over somites Xiii., Xiv., xv.,
xvi., and xvii.
The male pores are situated on papille in a median pit in somite
xviii.
The oviducts open by a single median pore in somite xiv.
There are three pairs of spermathecze ; these are placed in somites
vi., vii., and viii. The spermathecal pores are placed between somites
vi., and vii., vii. and viii., vill. and ix. This is an unusual arrange-
ment, the spermatheca generally opens between the somite in which
it lies and the somite in front, Each spermatheca presents two
minute appendices. The spermathecal pores are placed very near
the median line; in all the Pericheta species they are very lateral
in position.
1 Nouv. Arch. d. Muséum, t. viii. 1872, p. 126.
2 Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist., Oct. 1883, p. 217.
670 DR. A. G. BOURNE ON INDIAN EARTHWORMS. [ Dec. 21,
The nephridia are small and present a unique arrangement. The
nephridiopores are all placed on the anterior edge of a somite. They
are placed in two rows on each side, an inner and an outer row.
The inner row is about in a line with the 11th sete. Counting
from the median ventral line, the outer row is about in a line with the
17th setze, while the spermathecal pores are in a line with the 4th sete.
In somite iv. there is a single nephridiopore on the left-hand side,
in somite y. there is a single pore on the right-hand side, in somite
vi. there is a single pore on the left-hand side; these three pores all
belong to the inner rows. In somite vii. I found no pore. The
remaining somites each present two pores. In somites viil., x., xil.,
xiv., &c. the pore on the right side belongs to the outer row, and the
pore on the left side to the inner row. In somites ix., Xi., xill., xv.,
&c. the reverse arrangement obtains, viz., the left-hand pore belongs
to the outer row and the right-hand pore to the inner row.
In too many cases we do not, unfortunately, know the position of
the nephridiopore: I have not access out here to the description of
Plutellus}, but the nephridiopores are there said to alternate in
position ; with this exception the arrangement is unique and bears a
most interesting relation to the theory that the spermathece are
modified nephridia. It will be noted that the distances between the
outer and inner rows of nephridiopores, between the inner row of
nephridiopores and the row of spermathecal pores, and, lastly,
between the rows of spermathecal pores, are almost exactly equal, and
the pores have exactly similar positions in the somite.
I have made no observations on the alimentary canal.
There are 45-54 setz in each somite arranged in an almost con-
tinuous ring.
Seta are present on the clitellum. No modified genital sete were
observed.
Length 60 millim., circumference 6 mm. ; number of somites 61.
Hab. Ootacamund ; Naduvatam, Nilgiris. Elevation about 6500-
7500 feet.
It is a very strong little worm, and the name refers to its power
of leaping into the air when touched.
MOoNILIGASTRIDZ.
The huge worm which is mentioned in Darwin’s book as occurring
on the Nilgiris turned out to be a Moniligaster, a form then known
from Perrier’s description of a single specimen which he called
M. deshayesii. 1 have since received information that Mr. Beddard
has described another species from Ceylon as M. barwelli”.
I found, in addition to the large worm, four smaller species of
Moniligaster on the Nilgiris, and two others on the Shevaroys or
rather at Salem, at the foot of the ghaut.
I have thus recognized seven species altogether, but it is exceed-
ingly difficult to characterize these accurately until we know their
general organization better, so that I regard the following very scanty
descriptions as preliminary.
1 Arch. de Zool. Exp. t. ii. (1873).
2 Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Feb. 1886, p. 940.
1886.] DR. A. G. BOURNE ON INDIAN EARTHWORMS. 671
Moniligaster has been described as being devoid of any clitellum.
In, at any rate, one of my species the clitellum is, however, very
well marked, so that this cannot be taken as a generic character.
The genus is, however, sufficiently characterized by the four pores
situated in pairs between somites vii. and vili., and x. and xi.,
respectively, by the peculiar arrangement of the generative organs,
and by the monilated gizzard. It is often exceedingly difficult to
determine the exact position of the gizzard, and I believe that its
position may vary by a somite in different individuals of the same
species; still there is no doubt that in some cases it will serve as a
specific character—e. g. M. sapphirinaotdes and M. robustus, which
resemble one another in most respects, differ markedly in the position
of the gizzard.
There is a great difference in size among the species; M. grandis
is quite as large as Microcheta rappi, while M. minutus is one of
the smallest of Earthworms.
MONILIGASTER GRANDIS, sp: 1.
There is no trace of clitellum.
The distance between the ventral seta rows is greater than that
between the ventral rows and the lateral rows.
The gizzard extends through somites xvii.—xxi. inclusive.
The septa between v.—vi., vl.—vii., Vil.—viii., and vili.ix. are very
strong and thick,
The septum between ix. and x. is absent.
I obtained this worm in May and June. In May, before the
rains, I only found it deep down: I have made coolies dig pits as
much as 9-10 feet deep before coming upon a single worm, although
their burrows were quite obvious; then one would suddenly come
upon a specimen lying in a hollow which seemed to exactly fit its
body, all rolled up together in a mass nearly the size of one’s fist,
and upon the surface of the body, crawling about in the mucous,
were young individuals which in one instance were less than half an
inch long, but from larger specimens I easily determined them to be
young Moniligasters. 1 expect that there is something very inter-
esting about this, and probably it is connected with the absence of
clitellum and consequently of cocoons, but it seemed to be too late
in the year to make any further observations.
In June at Naduvatam, after there had been some rain, I found these
worms quite near the surface, even in some cases crawling about, but
I never then found young ones. I never found these worms at a lower
elevation than 6500 feet ; at Coonoor, which is just below that alti-
tude, and much warmer than Ootacamund, I could not find a single
specimen.
MOoNILIGASTER UNIQUUS, Sp. 0.
So called because for some time I had only a single specimen, but
I subsequently found a few others.
There is no clitellum.
The gizzard occupies somites xv.—xix.
The ventral seta rows are very near together, there is less distance
672 DR. A. G. BOURNE ON INDIAN EARTHWORMS. [Dec. 21.
between them than between a ventral row and the lateral row of the
same side.
It is a small weak-looking worm.
I found specimens at Ootacamund and at Naduvatam.
MoNILIGASTER SAPPHIRINAOIDES, Sp. N.
This worm presents a well-marked clitellum extending over somites
X., Xl., Xli., and xiii.
The gizzard occupies somites xvii.—xxi.
This is a very strong active worm, rather larger than a big English
Lumbricus agricola, and presents most exquisite iridescent colours,
among which a metallic bluish-green is the most marked.
I found it in immense numbers in some very wet black mud
under turf near the Pykarah Waterfalls, at, I believe, an elevation
of about 6000 feet. When placed in spirit it becomes olive-green
in colour, while the clitellum becomes almost pinkish.
MoNILIGASTER ROBUSTUS, Sp. Ne
The gizzard occupies somites x1.—xv.
This worm is easily recognized by its very pointed posterior
extremity, just the anal somites being bright pink, while the rest of
the worm is dull in colour. In other respects it resembles M. sap-
phirinaoides.
I found a few specimens only, crawling across a path on a drench-
ing day, on top of one of the hills at Ootacamund.
MoNILIGASTER PAPILLATUS, Sp. 0.
This species is characterized by long tubular papillee in connection
with the pores between somites x. and xi.
The gizzard occupies somites xvi.—xx.
I found this at Ootacamund and Coonoor.
This is a much longer worm than any of the other species, with the
exception of M. grandis.
MoNILIGASTER RUBER, Sp. Nn.
The gizzard seemed to occupy only somites xiii. and xiv. In
somites x., xi., and xii. there were soft-walled swellings of the intes-
tine looking like gizzard, only not muscular. The worm had a thin
body-wall, and the organs showing through give it a blood-red
appearance. It is a small worm about 100 millim. long.
I obtained only a single specimen from Salem.
MoNILIGASTER MINUTUS, Sp. n.
The gizzard occupies somites xii., xili., and xiv.
This is a small worm resembling Perionyx saltans in appearance,
but not very active. The ovaries, or at any rate sacs containing ripe
ova, occupy somites xii.—xv. at least.
I found numerous specimens in wet ground at Salem.
When 1 have determined more accurately the structure of the
generative organs in this genus, this species will probably prove an
interesting one.
APPENDIX.
LIST OF ADDITIONS TO THE SOCIETY’S MENAGERIE
Jan.
DURING THE YEAR
1886.
1. 1 Caracal (Felis caracal), 8. Kalahari Desert, 8. Africa. Pre-
sented by the Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 PuffAdder (Vipera arietans). Uitenhage, 8. Africa. Pre-
sented by the Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.8.
1 African Cobra (aia hae). Little Namaqualand. Presented
by the Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
3 Horned Vipers (Vipera cornuta). Little Namaqualand, Pre-
sented by the Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Hygian Snake eh hygie). Presented by the Rey. G. H.
Kt. Fisk, C.M.Z.8.
1 Smooth-bellied Snake (Homalosoma lutrix). Cape Town.
Presented by the Rev. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
2 Rhomb-marked Snakes (Psammophylax rhombeatus). Wor-
cester. Presented by the Rey. G. H. R, Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
2 Hoary Snakes (Coronella cana). Little Namaqualand. Pre-
sented by the Rev. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Crossed Snake (Psammophis crucifer), Presented by the Rey.
G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Many-marked Snake (Rhagerrhis multimaculata). Presented
by the Rey. G. H. R, Fisk, C.M.Z.8. See P.Z.S, 1886,
. 124,
12 Huails (Coturmx communis). Presented by Capt. M. P,
Webster.
1 Ring-necked Parrakeet (Paleornis torquatus). Presented by
Miss Shackthwaite.
. 1 Greater Spotted Woodpecker (Dendrocopus major). Derby-
shire. Presented by Mr. A. 8. Hutchinson.
. 1 Grey Ichneumon (Herpestes griseus), §. Presented by Capt.
J. Cutting.
1 Yellow-crowned Troupial (Jeterus chrysocephalus). Pur-
chased.
. 1 Grey Squirrel (black var.) (Sevwrus cinereus). Presented by
Mrs. C. Neck.
1 Golden Eagle (Aguila chrysaetus). Presented by H. V. Knox,
E
sq.
1 Bronze-winged Pigeon (Phaps chalcoptera). Presented by A,
F. Spry, Esq.
Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XLIV. 44
674
Jan,
9.
Lith
15.
14,
15,
16.
19,
20.
21.
23
26.
27.
28
29
APPENDIX.
1 Lesser White-nosed Monkey (Cercopithecus petaurista), 3.
Presented by T. Risely Griffith, Esq.
1 White-thighed Colobus (Colobus vallerosus). Purchased.
1 Moustache Monkey (Cercopithecus cephus). Purchased.
1 Hocheur Monkey (Cercopithecus nictitans), Purchased.
8 Grass-green Tree-Snakes (Dryophis prasina). Born in the
Menagerie. See P.Z.S. 1886, p. 124.
1 Song-Thrush (Turdus musicus). British Isles. Deposited.
1 Bonnet-Monkey (Macacus sinicus), ¢. Presented by Messrs.
Phillips Bros.
4 Cirl Buntings (Emberiza cirlus), 3 ¢, 19. British Isles.
Purchased.
2 Pied Wagtails (Motacilla lugubris). Purchased.
1 White-throated Capuchin (Cebus hypoleucus), Q. Deposited.
1 Northern Mocking-bird (Mimus polyglottus). Presented by
F. Green, Esq.
1 Jackal Buzzard (Buteo jacal). Presented by the Rev. C. W.
H, Reynolds.
1 Jay (Garrulus glandarius). Presented by HE, R. Collins, Esq.
1 Vervet Monkey (Cercopithecus lalandii), $. Presented by
Mrs. Sinclair.
1 Ring-tailed Coati (Naswa rufa), g. Presented by C, E.
Dashwood, Esq.
1 Vulpine Phalanger (Phalangista vulpina), ¢. Born in the
Menagerie.
3 Hoary Snakes (Coronella cana). Constantia, S. Africa. Pre-
sented by the Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Hybrid Macaque Monkey (between Macacus cynomolgus and
Cercopithecus, sp. inc.). Ascension. Presented by Vitele
de Michele, Esq.
1 Common Otter (Lutra vulgaris). Received in Exchange.
1 Bearded Lizard (Amphibolurus barbatus), Purchased.
il edit sed (Passer montanus). Presented by Mr. T. E.
unn,
1 Mealy Redpoll (Linota linaria). Presented by Mr. T. E.
unn,
3 Starlings (Stwnus vulgaris). Presented by Mr. T. E. Gunn.
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 3. Deposited.
2 White-billed Parakeets ( Tanygnathus albirostris), Purchased.
2 Stump-tailed Lizards (Trachydosaurus rugosus). Received in
Exchange.
1 Great Cyclodus (Cyclodus gigas). Received in Exchange.
1 Diamond Snake (Morelia spilotes). Received in Exchange.
4 Moorhens (Gallinula chloropus). Presented by Mr. T. E.
Gunn.
1 Chacma Baboon (Cynocephalus porcarius), ¢. Presented by
Lieut.-Gen. G. W. A. Higginson, C.B
1 Malbrouck Monkey (Cercopithecus cynosurus), 2. Presented
by Lieut-Gen. G. W. A. Higginson, C.B.
1 Rhesus Monkey (Mucacus rhesus), Q. Presented by Mrs. J.
J. Buchanan.
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 3. Presented by
Mr, H. M. Sherratt.
1 Hygian Snake (Zlaps hygie). Presented by the Rev. G. H.
R. Fisk, C.MLZ.S.
1 Hoary Snake (Coronella cana). Presented by the Rey. G. H.
R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S,
—
Jan. 29.
30
Feb. 2.
13.
15.
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 675
1 Crossed Snake (Psammophis crucifer). Presented by the Rev,
G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z8.
1 Horned Viper (Vipera cornuta). Presented by the Rev. G,
H. R. Fisk, C.M.ZS.
. 3 Gold Pheasants (Thaumalea picta), 3g. Presented by A,
Heywood, Hsq., F.Z.S.
1 Common Badger (Meles taxus), g. Presented by the Hon,
Walter de Rothschild.
2 Reed-Buntings (Hmberiza scheniclus), Purchased.
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 3. Presented by
Mrs. Corbet.
1 Great Kangaroo (Macropus giganteus). Born in the Mena-
erie.
2 ‘Alb patues (Alhigator mississippiensis), Presented by Mr. F,
J. Dawe.
. 1 Malbrouck Monkey (Cercopithecus eynosurus), 9. Deposited,
2 Black-headed Lemurs (Lemur brunneus), 2 3. Purchased.
1 Indian Otter (Lutra nair), 3. Ceylon. Presented by Capt.
J. C. Withers.
2 Maholi Galagos (Galago mahol). Presented by Mrs. Max
Michaelis.
. 1 Red-bellied Waxbill (2strelda rubriventris). Presented by
Mrs. S. Johnson, F.Z.S.
1 Anaconda (Exmectes murinus). Deposited.
1 Common Boa (Boa constrictor). Deposited.
1 Ring-tailed Coati (Nasua rufa), 3. Presented by J. H. N.
Theed, Esq., Lt. R.N.
. 1 Pennant’s Broadtail (Platycercus pennanti), Presented by H.
Stacy Marks, Esq., R.A., F.Z.S.
3 Japanese Goldfish. Presented by Capt. H. Weighell.
. 1 Kittiwake (Rissa tridactyla), Purchased.
1 Common Gull (Larus canus). Purchased.
1 Black-headed Gull (Larus ridibundus). Purchased.
5 Adorned Ceratophrys (Ceratophrys ornata). Presented by
Dr, Frederick C. Strutt. See P. Z. 5S. 1886, p. 137.
1 Common Chameleon (Chameleon vulgaris). Presented by C.
Kershaw, Esq.
1 Bonnet-Monkey (Dacacus sinicus), 2. Presented by Miss
Douglas.
1 Chacma Baboon (Cynocephalus porcarius), 9. Presented by
Mr. F. Radcliffe.
2 Feline Douroucoulis (Nyctipithecus vociferans). Purchased.
2 Lion Marmosets (Midas rosalia), Purchased.
1 Razor-billed Curassow (Mitua tuberosa). Purchased.
1 Mantled Buzzard (Leucopternis palliata). Purchased. See
P.Z. 8. 1886, p. 137.
1 Raccoon (Procyon lotor), Purchased.
. 1 Orange-winged Amazon (Chrysotis amazonica). Presented by
Mr. G. F. Richards.
. 1 Collared Fruit-Bat (Cynonycteris collaris). Born in the
Menagerie.
. 1 Ring-tailed Ooati (Naswa rufa), Q. Presented by Miss A,
Pagella.
. 1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 2. Deposited.
. 6 Tuatera Lizards (Sphenodon oe Presented by the
Hon. Sir Julius Vogel, K.C
44*
676
Feb. 24.
Mar,
Or
bo bo
15
15.
16,
1%,
APPENDIX.
6 Tuatera Lizards (Sphenodon punctatus). Deposited.
9 Tuatera Lizards (Sphenodon punctatus). Presented by Dr. J.
von Haast, C.M.Z.S.
2 Yucatan Blue Jays ( Cyanocitta yucatanica),22. Purchased.
. 1 Red Kangaroo (Macropus rufus), Q. Born in the Menagerie.
6. 8 Viscachas (Lagostomus trichodactylus). Presented by E. Vere
Dashwood, Esq.
1 Canadian Porcupine (Zrithizon dorsatus), ¢. Received in
Exchange. ‘
4 American Hares (Lepus americanus). Presented by F. J.
Thompson, Esq.
2 Great Barbets (Megalema virens). Purchased.
. 1 Canada Goose (Bernicla canadensis). Presented by J. E.
Kelsall, Esq.
. 1 Rough-billed Pelican (Pelecanus trachyrhynchus). Purchased.
See P. Z.S. 1886, p. 176.
1 Hutchin’s Goose (Bernicla hutchinsi). Purchased.
1 Serval (Felis serval), . Lamoo, Hast Africa, Presented
by F. J. Jackson, Esq.
1 White-tailed Ichneumon (Herpestes albicauda). Lamoo, East
Africa. Presented by F. J. Jackson, Esq. See P.Z.S.
1886, p. 176.
. 1 Patas Monkey (Cercopithecus patas), 2. Presented by Master
Eric Blind.
1 Toque Monkey (Macacus pileatus). Presented by C. Brown,
Es
1 Blue-and-Yeliow Macaw (Ara ararauna). Presented by
Lieut. W. H. Duffin, K. O. Reet.
. 1 Lion Marmoset (Midas rosalia). Presented by Percy Bewick
Bewick, Esq.
1 Black-backed Jackal (Canis mesomelas), 2. Presented by
Mrs. E. Thomas.
. 1 Green Monkey (Cercopithecus callitrichus),3. Presented by
Mrs. Dunn.
1 Talapoin Monkey (Cercopithecus talapoin), 2. Received in
Exchange.
. 1 Grey Ichneumon (Herpestes griseus). Presented by W. A.
12,
Roofe, Esq.
1 White-crowned Mangabey (Cercocebus ethiops),?. Presented
by N. King, Esq.
1 Grey Ichneumon (Herpestes griseus),?2. Presented by T. W.
Proger, Esq.
1 Demoiselle Crane (Grus virgo). Presented by T. W. Proger,
sq. :
1 Common Gull (Larus canus). Purchased.
2 Changeable Lizards (Calotes versicolor). Deposited.
3 Gleadow’s Geckos (Hemidactylus gleadovii). Deposited.
2 Cocteau’s Geckos (Hemidactylus coctet). Deposited.
3 Long-fronted Gerbilles (Gerbillus longifrons). Born in the
Menagerie.
1 Green-billed Toucan (Rhamphastos dicolorus). Purchased.
1 Thunder-fish (Misgwrnus fossilis). Presented by Alban Doran,
Esq., F.R.C.S.
1 Ground-Loach (Cobitis tenia). Presented by Alban Doran,
Esq., F.R.C.S.
1 Bay Autelope (Cephalophus dorsalis), §. Purchased.
Mar. 18,
19.
20.
21,
22,
23.
24,
25.
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 677
1 Thick-necked Tree-Boa (Epicrates cenchris). Purchased.
1 Sun-Bittern (Lurypyga helias), Purchased.
1 Yellow-lored Amazon (Chrysotis xantholora). Purchased.
2 Tasmanian Wolves ( Thylacinus cynocephalus), 3 2. Deposited.
2 Red Kangaroos (Macropus rufus),3 9. Deposited.
1 Great Kangaroo (Macropus giganteus). Deposited.
1 Yellow-footed Rock-Kangaroo (Petrogale xanthopus). De-
osited.,
2 Hairy-nosed Wombats (Phascolomys latifrons), ¢ 2. De-=
osited.
2 Vulpine Phalangers (Phalangista vulpina, white var.). De-
epost
2 King Parrakeets (Aprosmictus scapulatus), 2 g. Deposited.
1 Bauer’s Broadtail (Platycercus zonarius). Deposited.
2 Swainson’s Lorikeets (Trichoglossus swainsonr). Deposited.
1 Roseate Cockatoo (Cacatua roseicapilla). Deposited.
2 Azara’s Opossums (Didelphys azare), $ 2. Rosario, La Plata,
Presented by Capt. G. W. Freeman,
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), $. Presented by L.
H. G. Morgan, Esq.
3 Striated Finches (Munia striata). Presented by L. B, Lewis,
Esq.
1 Nutmeg-Finch (Munia punctularia). Presented by L. B.
Lewis, Esq.
2 Black-headed Finches (Munia malacea). Presented by L. B.
Lewis, Esq.
1 Ring-tailed Lemur (Zemur catta), 3. Presented by Alfred
Best, Esq.
1 Thunder-fish (Misgurnus fossilis), Presented by Alban Doran,
Esq., F.R.C.S.
1 Umbre-fish (Umbra krameri). Presented by Alban Doran,
Esq., F.R.C.S.
1 Bonnet-Monkey (Macacus sinicus), @. Presented by Dr. E.
Woakes.
1 Sharp-nosed Crocodile (Crocodilus acutus). Deposited.
2 Common Boas (Boa constrictor). Presented by Daniel Nicols,
Esq.
1 West-African Python (Python seb@). Presented by Daniel
Nicols, Esq.
1 Mountain rae (Nestor notabilis). Presented by James
Ellis, Esq., F.S.A., Scot.
1 White-fronted Lemur (Lemur albifrons). Born in the Mena-
gerie.
4 Leopard Tortoises (Testudo pardalis), Presented by the Rev.
G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.8.
2 Geometric Tortoises ( Testudo geometrica). Presented by the
Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Tent Tortoise (Testudo tentoria). Presented by the Rev. G.
H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.8.
11 Angulated Tortoises (Chersina angulata). Presented by the
Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Areolated Tortoise (Homopus areolatus). Presented by the
Rev. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
2 Infernal Snakes (Boodon infernalis). Robben Island, S. Africa.
Presented by the Rev. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Robben-Island Snake (Coronella phocarum). Robben Island,
S. Africa. Presented by the Rey, G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.8.
678
Mar, 26,
27.
29.
30.
31.
10.
APPENDIX.
2 Golden Plovers (Charadrius pluvialis). Purchased.
2 Umbre-fish (Umbra krameri). Presented by Messrs. Paul & Co.
3 Wheatears (Saxicola enanthe). Purchased.
1 Kingfisher (Alcedo ispida). Presented by Cuthbert Johnson,
Esq.
i Raseats Cockatoo (Cacuta roseicapilla). Deposited.
1 Black Lemur (Zemw macaco). Born in the Menagerie.
17 Tuatera Lizards (Sphenodon punctatus). Deposited.
1 Dingo (Canis dingo). Deposited.
1 Domestic Sheep (Ovis aries), ¢. Presented by Hugh J.
Tweedy, Esq.
. 1 White-fronted Capuchin (Cebus albifrons), $. Presented by
Mr. Mathew.
1 Axis Deer (Cervus avis), 3. Born in the Menagerie.
. 1 Ring-tailed Coati (Nasua rufa). Presented by Miss Agnes
Thomson.
2 Sonnerat’s Jungle-fowl (Gallus sonnerati), 3 9. Deposited.
2 White-eared Scops Owls (Scops leucotis). Purchased.
. 2 Cambayan Turtle-Doves ( Tutur senegalensis),3 9. Presented
by Mons. J. M. Cornély, O.M.Z.8.
2 Geoffroy’s Doves (Peristera geoffroti),3 9. Received in Ex-
change.
2 Blood-breasted Pigeons (Phloganas cruentata),§ 2. Received
in Exchange.
1 Chinese Mynah (Aeridotheres cristatellus). Presented by T.
Douglas Murray, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Red-and-Black Lizard ( Ctenosaura erythromelas). Purchased.
See P. Z. 8. 1886, p. 266.
. 1 Crested Poreupine (Hystrix cristata). Presented by Miss 0.8.
Simpson.
1 Herring-Gull (Larus argentatus). Presented by Capt. H. J.
Alexander.
. 1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 29. Presented by
Mrs. Carter.
1 Black-eared Marmoset (Hapale penicillata). Presented by A.
Evershed, Esq.
2 Three-toed Sloths (Bradypus tridactylus). Presented by Capt.
icks.
1 Burchell’s Zebra (Equus burchelli), $. Deposited.
. 1 Eland (Oreas canna), $. Born in the Menagerie.
1 Lesser Koodoo (Strepsiceros imberbis), 3. Somali Land.
Received in Exchange. See P. Z.S. 1886, p. 266.
. 1 Crested Porcupine (Hystrix cristata), Presented by the Rey.
G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Black-backed Jackal (Canis mesomelas). Presented by Capt.
John Hewat, C.M.Z.S. 5
1 Indian Antelope (Antilope cervicapra). Presented by Capt.
J. C. Robinson.
. 2 Black-footed Penguins (Spheniscus demersus). Purchased.
2 Globose Curassows (Crax globicera),2 2. Deposited.
2 Black-backed Jackals (Canis mesomelas). Born in the Mena-
gerie.
1 Ceylonese Hanging-Parrakeet (Loriculus asiaticus). Presented
by C. W. Rosset, Esq.
1 Ruddy Sheldrake (Tadorna casarca), 9. Received in Ex-
change.
Apr. 12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Wee
19:
23.
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 679
1 Great Kangaroo (Macropus giganteus), 3. Purchased.
1 Eroded Cinixys (Cinixys erosa). Purchased.
1 Merrem’s Snake (Liophis merremi). Purchased.
1 Axis Deer (Cervus avis), 6. Born in the Menagerie.
1 Greater Sulphur-crested Cockatoo (Cacatua galerita). Pre-
sented by W. Woods, Esq.
1 Greater Sulphur-crested Cockatoo (Cacatua galerita). Pre-
sented by the Lord Braybrooke, F.Z.S,
1 Barnard’s Parrakeet (Platycercus barnardi). Presented by the
Lord Braybrooke, F.Z.S.
6 Field-Frogs (Rana arvalis). Presented by G. A. Boulenger,
Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Scarlet Ibis (Zudocimus ruber). Deposited.
2 Bronze-winged Pigeons (Phaps chalcoptera), § 2. Received
in Exchange.
1 Pudu Deer (Pudua humilis), §. Chili. Presented by Harry
Berkeley James, Esq., F.Z.S.
5 Chilian Sea-Eagles ( Geranoaétus melanoleucus). Chili. Pre-
sented by Harry Berkeley James, Esq., F.Z.S.
2 Barn-Owls (Strix flammea). Presented by Harry Berkeley
James, Esq., F.Z.8.
2 Black-chinned Siskins (Chrysomitris barbata). Presented by
Harry Berkeley James, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Diuca Finch (Diwea grisea). Presented by Harry Berkeley
James, Esq., F.Z.S.
2 Auriculated Doves (Zenarda auriculata). Presented by Harry
Berkeley James, Esq., F.Z.S.
5 Capoeira Partridges (Odontophorus dentatus). Presented by
arry Berkeley James, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Antarctic Skua (Stercorarius antarcticus). Presented by
Harry Berkeley James, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 White-tailed Buzzard (Buteo albicaudatus). Presented by
Harry Berkeley James, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 King Vulture (Gypagus papa). Deposited.
2 Capoeira Partridges ( Odontophorus dentatus), $ 2. Deposited.
4 Californian Quails (Callipepla californica), 3 6,19. Depo-
sited.
1 Pale-headed Tree-Boa (Epicrates angulifer). Hayti. Pre-
sented by Miss Maysie Hunt.
. 1 Rose-crested Cockatoo (Cacatwa moluccensis). Deposited.
21.
1 Garnett’s Galago (Galago garnetti). Presented by the Rey.
W. C. Porter.
1 Grey Ichneumon (Herpestes griseus), 9. Presented by James
B. Bevington, Esq.
1 Ogilby’s Rat-Kangaroo (Hypsiprimnus ogilbyt), 2. Purchased.
. 1 Common Badger (Meles tavus). Presented by E. Gully, Esq.
2 Poé Honey-eaters (Prosthemadera nove-zealandie), Deposited.
1 Poé Honey-eater (Prosthemadera nove-zelandie). Presented
by Dr, W. L. Buller, F.R.S., C.M.Z.S.
3 Australian Gannets (Sula serrator). Deposited.
2 Australian Gannets (Sula serrator), Presented by Dr. W. L.
Buller, F.R.S., C.M.Z.S.
1 Huia Bird (Heterolocha gouldi). Deposited.
2 Collared Fruit-Bats (Cynonycteris collaris), Born in the
Menagerie.
1 Kestrel (Tinnunculus alaudarius), Presented by G, Bateson-
de-Yarburgh, Esq.
APPENDIX.
. 1 Robben-Island Snake (Coronella phocarum). Presented by
the Rev. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.ZS,
24, 6 Barbary Turtle-Doves (Turtur risorius), Presented by R.
30.
May 1
Seyd, Esq., F.Z.8.
. 20 Palmated Newts (Molge palmata). Epping Forest. Pre-
sented by G. A. Boulenger, Esq., F.Z.S.
. 1 Pudu Deer (Pudua humilis), 2. Purchased,
2 Short-eared Owls (Asto brachyotus). Purchased.
1 Magellanic Hagle-Owl (Bubo magellanicus). Purchased.
1 Hairy-eared Rhinoceros (Rhinoceros lasiotis), g. Received
in Exchange. See P. Z. 8. 1886, p. 266.
1 Asiatic Wild Ass (Equus onager), $. Deposited.
. 1 Ludio Monkey (Cercopithecus ludio), 2. Purchased.
A Collection of Sea-Anemones, &c. Presented by W. L.
Sclater, Esq., F.Z.S.
. 1 Common Squirrel (Sciwrus vulgaris), g. Deposited.
3 Red-crested Finches (Coryphosphingus cristatus). Purchased.
2 Rosy-faced Love- birds (Agapornis roseicollis), Purchased.
1 Shining Parrakeet (Pyrrhulopsts splendens), Purchased.
1 Red-collared Conure (Conurus rubritorquis). Purchased.
See P. Z. S. 1886, p. 538, pl. lvi.
1 Vinaceous Amazon (Chrysotis vinacea), Purchased.
2 Punjab Wild Sheep ( Ovis cycloceros). Received in Exchange.
2 Military Macaws (Ara militaris). Presented by C. Clifton,
Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Redant Vellnw Macaw (Ara chloroptera). Presented by C.
Clifton, Esq., F.Z.S.
2 Ring-Doves ( Columba palumbus). Presented by Lord Arthur
Russell, F.Z.S.
1 Green Lizard (Lacerta viridis). Presented by Alban Doran,
Esq., F.R.C.S.
1 Jay (Garrulus glandarius). Presented by R. Humphreys, Esq.
. 2 Ring-tailed Lemurs (Lemur catta), 3 2. Deposited.
1 Redstart (Ruticilla phenicurus), $. Purchased.
2 Spanish Terrapins ( Clemmys leprosa, jr.). Presented by Alban
Doran, Esq., F.R.C.S.
1 Spotted Salamander (Salamandra maculosa). Presented by
Alban Doran, Esq., F.R.C.S.
6 Young Axolotls (Stredon mevicanus). Presented by Alban
Doran, Esq., F.R.C.S.
1 Fire-bellied Toad (Bombinator igneus). Presented by Alban
Doran, Esq., F.R.C.S.
2 Edible Frogs (Rana esculenta). Presented by Alban Doran,
Esq., F.R.C.S.
. 1 Brazilian Tree-Porcupine (Sphingurus prehensilis). Presented
by J. E, Wolfe, Esq.
2 Sloth-Bears (Melursus ursinus), ¢ 9. Presented by H. Main-
waring, Esq.
1 Naked-necked Iguana (Iguana delicatissima). Presented by
D. Morris, Esq. .
7 European Tree-Frogs (Hyla arborea). Presented by Thompson
Hudson, Esq.
4, 1 West-Indian Agouti (Dasyprocta cristata). Presented by Dr.
A. Boon, F.R.C.S.
1 Dark-backed Squirrel (Sciwrus atrodorsalis). Burmah. Pre-
sented by C. Crofton Black, Esq.
May 4,
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 681
1 Californian Quail (Callipepla californica), 3. Presented by
Miss Hodge.
1 Herring-Gull (Larus argentatus). Presented by Miss Hodge.
1 Common Viper (Vipera berus). Presented by Mrs. Mowatt.
3 Long-fronted Gerbilles (Gerbillus longifrons). Born in the
Menagerie.
. 4 Long-fronted Gerbilles (Gerbdillus longifrons). Born in the
Menagerie.
1 Orange-thighed Falcon (Falco fusco-cerulescens). Presented
by R. J. Jones, Esq. See P. Z. S. 1886, p. 318.
. 1 Two-banded Monitor (Varanus salvator). Presented by Mr.
Carl Hagenbeck.
1 Changeable Lizard (Calotes versicolor). Presented by Mr.
Carl Hagenbeck.
1 Long-snouted Snake (Passerita mycterizans). Presented by
Mr. Carl Hagenbeck.
1 Painted Tree-Snake (Dendrophis picta), Presented by Mr.
Carl Hagenbeck.
2 Rat-Snakes (Ptyas mucosa). Presented by Mr. Carl Hagen-
beck.
1 Indian Cobra (Nata tripudians), Presented by Mr. Carl
Hagenbeck.
. 1 Purple-faced Monkey (Semmnopithecus leucoprymnus),2. Pre-
sented by Mrs. Larkins.
2 Kestrels (Tinnunculus alaudarius). Presented by J. S. Mal-
colm, Esq.
1 Common Toad (Bufo vulgaris). Presented by Alban Doran,
Esq., F.R.C.S.
1 Green Toad (Bufo viridis), Presented by Alban Doran, Esq.,
F.R.C.S.
1 Common Viper (Vipera berus). Presented by Mrs. Mowatt.
. 5 Senegal Parrots ( Pawocephalus senegalus). Presented by R. B.
Sheridan, Esq. See P. Z. 8. 1886, p. 318.
1 Wedge-tailed Hagle (Aguila audax). Presented by R. B.
Colvin, Esq.
2 Greek Tortoises (Testudo greca), Presented by Admiral
Mellersh.
. 1 Hog-Deer (Cervus porcinus), Born in the Menagerie.
1 Small Hill-Mynah ( Gracula religiosa). Deposited.
. 4 Chilian Pintail (Dajila spinicauda). Bred in the Gardens.
1 Indian Coucal (Centropus rwfipennis). Purchased.
1 African Tantalus (Pseudotantalus ibis). Purchased.
. 2 Shaw’s Gerbilles (Gerbillus shawi), 6 2. Presented by W.
R. Ogilvie Grant, Esq.
1 Green Lizard (Lacerta viridis). Deposited.
. 2 Black-backed Jackals (Canis mesomelas), ¢ Q. Presented by
Fredk. Mosenthal, Esq.
1 Ring-tailed Coati(Nasua rufa). Presented by Mr.T.P. Lymn,
. 1 Spotted Eagle-Owl (Bubo maculosus). Purchased.
1 Indian Rat-Snake (Ptyas mucosa). Deposited.
4 Black-tailed Godwits (Limosa egocephala). Purchased.
. 2 Grey Parrots (Psittacus erithacus). Deposited.
. 1 Broad-breasted Chelymys ( Chelymys latisternum). Presented
by the Rey. Albert Popham.
. 1 Eland (Oreas canna), $. Born in the Menagerie.
1 Condor (Sarcorhamphus gryphus). Presented by R J. Jones,
Esq.
682
May 17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
26.
27.
APPENDIX.
3 Speckled ante (Clemmys guttata). Presented by S. Gar-
man, Esq., C.M.Z.S.
7 Painted Terrapins (Clemmys picta). Presented by S. Garman,
Esq., C.M.Z.S.
1 Sculptured Terrapin (Clemmys insculpta). Presented by S.
Garman, Esq., C.M.Z.S.
11 Striped Snakes (Tropidonotus sirtalis). Presented by 8. Gar-
man, Esq., C.M.Z.S.
3 Ribbon Snakes (Tropidonotus saurita). Presented by S. Gar-
man, Esq., C.M.Z.8.
7 Dekay’s Snakes (Ichnognathus dekayi). Presented by 8S. Gar-
man, Esq., O.M.Z.S.
4 Grass-Snakes (Cyclophis vernalis). Presented by S. Garman,
Esq., C.M.Z.S.
1 Rhesus Monkey (Macacus rhesus), $. Presented by Capt.
Boyle.
4 Beritele Geese (Bernicla leucopsis), 2 $,22. Received in
Exchange.
2 Squirrel Monkeys (Chrysothria sciurea), ¢ 2. Presented by
George Liddell, Esq., R.N.
3 Spanish Terrapins (Clemmys leprosa). Presented by Cuthbert
Johnson, Esq.
3 Tessellated Snakes (Tropidonotus tessellatus). Purchased.
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 3. Deposited.
1 Gayal (Bibos frontalis), 2. Born in the Menagerie.
2 Wild Ducks (Anas boscas), $ 2. Presented by G. Edson,
Esq.
1 Garnier Viper (Vipera berus). Presented by Percy E.
Coombe, Esq.
2 Lion Marmosets (Midas rosalia). Purchased.
1 Spotted Cavy (Celogenys paca). Purchased.
2 Ariel Toucans (Rhamphastos ariel). Purchased.
1 Crested Curassow (Craz alector), Purchased.
2 Zenaida Doves (Zenaida amabilis ?). Purchased.
1 Natterer’s Hawk (Asturina natterert). Purchased.
2 Ruffs (Machetes pugnax),2 9. Purchased.
2 Spotted Hyznas (Hyena crocuta), § 2. Purchased.
1 African Wild Ass (Equus teniopus), ¢. Born in the Mena-
eerie.
1 Pig-tailed Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 2. Presented by
Mrs, F. E. A. Prince.
. 1 Japanese Deer (Cervus sika), $. Born in the Menagerie.
4 Menobranchs (Menobranchus lateralis). Presented by Prof.
Ramsay Wright, F.Z.S.
1 Quail ( Coturnix communis), 6. Presented by Kenneth Law-
son, Esq.
q
. 1 Ring-tailed Lemur (Lemur catta), $. Presented by Angus
Ogilvy, Esq.
1 Smooth Snake (Coronella levis). Purchased.
1 Tessellated Snake (Tropidonotus tessellatus). Purchased.
1 Black-faced Spider-Monkey (Ateles ater), 9. Deposited.
1 Rook (Corvus frugilegus). Presented by H. J. Peckover, Esq.
1 ee Viper (Vipera berus). Presented by W.H. B. Pain,
sq.
2 Spotted Hyznas (Hyena crocuta),$ 9. Purchased.
2 Side-striped Jackals (Canis lateralis),$ 9. Purchased.
1 Griffon Vulture (Gyps fulvus), Purchased.
May 27
29.
31,
June 2.
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 683
. 1 Crab-eating Raccoon (Procyon cancrivorus), 3. Deposited.
1 Loggerhead Turtle (Thalassochelys caouana). Presented by
Lieut. R. G. Fraser, R.N.
1 Indian Cobra (Naia tripudians). Presented by Messrs. H.
Thwaites and V. A. Julius.
1 Indian Cobra (Naia tripudians). Presented by Stanley A.
Julius, Esq.
2 Black-tailed Parrakeets (Polytelis melanura). Presented by
James Thomson, Esq.
2 Triangular-spotted Pigeons (Columba guinea). Bred in the
Gardens.
1 Nisnas Monkey (Cercopithecus pyrrhonotus),Q. Presented by
the Rey. W. MacGregor.
1 Golden Eagle (Aquila chrysaetus). Finland. Presented by
Walter Holdsworth, Esq.
6 Long-eared Owls (Asio otus). Norfolk. Presented by George
B, Burnand, Esq.
3 Rufis (Machetes pugnax), 3 Q. Deposited.
1 Japanese Deer (Cervus sika),$. Born in the Menagerie.
6 Black-footed Penguins (Spheniscus demersus) Presented by
Capt. John Hewat.
4 Siamese Blue Pies (Urocissa magnirostris). Presented by J.
M. Cook, Esq., F.Z.S.
2 Small Hill-Mynahs (Gracula religiosa), Presented by J. M.
Cook, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Rufous-necked Weaver-bird (Hyphantornis textor). Pre-
sented by J. M. Cook, Esq., F.Z.8.
. 1 Wapiti Deer (Cervus canadensis), 2. Born in the Mena-
gerie.
1 Glaucous Macaw (Ara glauca). Purchased. See P. ZS.
1886, p. 417.
4 Crested Pigeons (Ocyphaps lophotes), 2 3,2 9. Purchased.
4 Amherst Pheasants (Zhawmalea amherstie),2 6,29. Pur-
chased.
2 Great American Egrets (Ardea egretta). Purchased.
2 Strickland’s Coots (Fulica leucoptera). La Plata. Purchased.
1 Azara’s Agouti (Dasyproctaazare). Purchased.
. 1 Common Badger (Meles taxus), g. Presented by C. A. Ross,
E
sq.
1 Madan Monkey (Cercopithecus cynosurus), 2. Deposited.
2 Lapwings (Vanellus vulgaris). Purchased.
. 1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), g. Presented by
Mr, J. Coston.
1 Rook (Corvus frugilegus). Purchased.
4 Indian Tree-Ducks (Dendrocygna javanica). Purchased.
. 3 American Charr (Salmo frontinalis). Presented by F. J.
Stevenson, Esq.
. 1 Common Genet (Genetta vulgaris), Presented by J. Church
Dixon, Esq.
1 Herring-Gull (Larus argentatus). Presented by C. A. Mar-
riott, Esq.
2 Black-billed Tree-Ducks (Dendrocygna arborea). Bahama
Islands. Presented by Mrs. E. Blake.
1 Violaceous Night-Heron (Nycticorax violaceus). Bahama
Islands. Presented by Mrs. H, Blake.
684
APPENDIX.
June 7. 1 Brazilian Cormorant (Phalacrocorax brasilianus. Bahama
10.
11.
12.
Islands. Presented by Mrs. E. Blake.
1 Fugitive Snake (Dromicus fugitivus). Bahama Islands. Pre-
sented by Mrs. E. Blake.
4 Lineated Chalcis (Chaledes lineatus). Presented by J. C.
Warburg, Esq.
. 1 Orang-outang (Simia satyrus), 2. Presented by H. H.
Riccard, Esq.
1 White-handed Gibbon (Hylobates lar). Deposited.
1 White-handed Gibbon (Hylobates lar). Presented by Dudley
Hervey, Esq.
1 Binturong (Aretictis bunturong), 6. Presented by Dudley
Hervey, Esq.
-] White-whiskered Paradoxure (Paradorurus leucomystax).
Presented by Dudley Hervey, Esq.
2 Viscachas (Logostomus trichodactylus), Q. Purchased.
2 Crossed Vipers (Craspedocephalus alternatus). Purchased.
2 Mexican Guans (Penelope purpurascens). Presented by E. A.
Clowes, Esq.
. 1 South-American Flamingo (Pheenicopterus ignipalliatus). Pur-
chased.
1 Harnessed Antelope (Tragelaphus scriptus), 9. Purchased.
1 Porose Crocodile ( Crocodilus porosus). Purchased.
10 Adorned Ceratophrys (Ceratophrys ornata). Deposited.
1 Burrhel Wild Sheep (Ovis burrhel), $. Born in the Mena-
gerie.
2 Lineated Kaleeges (Huplocamus lineatus), ¢ 2. Purchased.
1 Roseate Spoonbill (Platalea ajaja). Purchased.
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 3. Presented by
Miss Grace Balfour.
1 Indian Civet (Viverricula malaccensis), §. Presented by
Capt. Archibald Douglas, R.N
1 Common Squirrel (Sciwrus vulgaris). Purchased,
7 ne Vipers (Vipera berus). Presented by Walter Blacker,
uSq.
2 Dominican Tree-Frogs (Hyla dominicensis), Jamaica, Pre-
sented by J. J. Lister, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Green Monkey (Cercopithecus callitrichus), g. Presented by
Duncan Armstrong, Esq.
1 Bald Ouakari (Brachyurus calvus),$. Purchased. See P. Z.S.
1886, p. 417.
2 Balearic Cranes (Balearica pavonina). Purchased.
1 Song-Thrush (Twrdus musicus). Presented by Master J.
Locke Lathom.
1 Blackbird (Turdus merula). Presented by Master J. Locke
Lathom.
. 1 Puma (Felis concolor). Deposited.
1 Garden’s Night Heron (Nycticorax gardeni). St. Kitt’s, W.
Indies. Presented by Dr. A. Boon, F.R.C.S.
. 1 Binturong (Aretictis binturong). Presented by Capt. R. Hay.
. 1 Bonnet-Monkey (Macacus sinicus), g. Presented by Mrs.
Geo. Willing.
1 Balearic Crane (Balearica pavonina). Purchased.
. 1 Japanese Deer (Cervus sika), 2. Born in the Menagerie.
. 2 Tcheli Monkeys (Macacus tcheliensis), § Q. Jung-ling Moun-
tains, near Pekin. Presented by Dr. S, W. Bushell, C.M.ZS8,
See P.Z.8. 1886, p. 417.
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE, 685
June 17. 1 Tovey Eagle (Aguila nevioides). Cyprus. Presented by
ol, E.
18,
19,
20,
21.
22.
28
L. Fraser.
1 Spiny-tailed Mastigure (Uromastix acanthinurus). Presented
by A. Lasenby Liberty, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Argus Gecko (Spherodactylus argus), Bahamas. Presented
by Mrs. E. Blake.
1 Tarantula Spider (Mygale, sp. inc.). Bahamas, Presented
by Mrs. E. Blake.
1 Egyptian Goose (Chenalopex egyptiaca), 9. Presented by
the Rev. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Robben-Island Snake (Coronella phocarum), Presented by
the Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Hoary Snake (Coronella cana). Presented by the Rey. G. H.
R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Infernal Snake (Boodon infernalis), Presented by the Rev.
G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Rhomb-marked Snake (Psammophylax rhombeatus). Pre-
sented by the Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
8 Geometric Tortoises (Testudo geometrica). Presented by the
Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S,
1 Leopard Tortoise (Testudo pardalis), Presented by the Rey.
G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.8.
3 Areolated Tortoises (Homopus areolatus). Presented by the
Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Horned Viper (Vipera cornuta). Presented by the Rev. G.
H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Wild Swine (Sus serofa), 2. Presented by John Brooks,
Esq.
4 Sparrow-Hawks (Accipiter nisus, jr.). Presented by J. Row-
land Ward, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Peruvian Thicknee (Gdicnemus superciliaris). Deposited.
1 Tuatera Lizard (Sphenodon punctatus). Presented by Capt.
R. Sutherland.
1 Common Viper (Vipera berus), Presented by W. H. B.
Pain, Esq.
2 White-backed Piping-Crows (Gymmnorhina leuconota). De-
posited.
A Collection of Marine Fishes. Purchased.
1 Crowned Horned Lizard (Phrynosoma coronatum). Pre-
sented by 8. Upton Robins, Esq.
12 Madarin Ducks (42 galericulata). Bred in the Gardens.
1 Chilian Pintail (Dajila spinicauda). Bred in the Gardens.
1 Red-crested Pochard (Fudigula rujina). Bred in the Gardens,
1 Martinique Gallinule (Jonornis martinicus). Presented by W.
J. Rae, Esq.
4 Aldrovandi’s Skinks (Plestiodon auratus). Presented by the
Hon. Walter de Rothschild.
1 Rhesus Monkey (Macacus rhesus), g. Presented by Mr. G.
Ballantyne.
12 Black-tailed Godwits (Zimosa egocephala). Purchased.
1 Thar (Capra jemlaica), 2. Born in the Menagerie.
1 Geometric Tortoise (Testudo geometrica). Presented by the
Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Angulated Tortoise (Chersina angulata). Presented by the
Key. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S,
1 Fisk’s Tortoise (Testudo fiski). Presented by the Rev. G. H.
R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S. See P. Z.S. 1886, p. 542, pl. lviii.
686
June23.
24,
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
APPENDIX.
2 Areolated Tortoises (Homopus areolatus, jr.). Presented by
the Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 ee Gecko (Pachydactylus ocellatus). Presented by the
v. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.ZS.
i Spotted Gecko (Pachydactylus maculatus). Presented by the
Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Dwarf Chameleon ( Chameleon pumilus). Presented by the
Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
2 Three-streaked Euprepes (Euprepes trivittatus). Presented by
the Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
4 Sepiform Lizards (Pleur ‘ostrichus sepiformis). Presented by
the Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M.Z.S.
1 Spotted Slow-worm (Acontias, meleagris). Presented by the
Rey. G. H. R. Fisk, C.M
1 Bie fs pepe bipes). ee by the Rey. G. H. R. Fisk,
C.N
1 Piemy Ate (Poreula salvania). Born in the Menagerie.
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus). Presented by Mrs.
S. M. Grove-Grady.
1 Banded Ichneumon (Herpestes fasciatus). Presented by G.
F. Simpson, Esq.
2 Rutis (Machetes pugnax). Deposited.
1 Larger Hill-Mynah (Gracula intermedia). Presented by Miss
Maud Bendall.
1 Common Viper (Vipera berus). Deposited.
1 Sand-Lizard (Lacerta agilis). Presented by Master Stanley S.
Flower.
2 Egyptian Geese (Chenalopex egyptiaca), Presented by Col.
Harris Burland.
1 Silver-backed Fox (Canis chama), 2. Purchased.
2 Freshwater Fishes. Presented by Alban Doran, Esq., F.R.C.S.
8 Bitterlings (Rhodeus amarus). Presented by Alban Doran,
Esq., F. “R.C.S.
1 Chima anzee (Anthropopithecus troglodytes), 2. Deposited.
1 Grey Squirrel (Scirus cinereus), 9. Deposited.
1 Greater White-crested Cockatoo (Cacatua cristata). De-
posited.
1 Bronze-winged Pigeon (Phaps chalcoptera). Bred in the
Gardens.
2 Violaceous Night-Herons (Nycticorax violaceus). St. Kitts.
Presented by Dr. A. Boon, F.R.C.S., C.M.ZS.
A Collection of Freshwater Fishes. Presented by Messrs, Paul
& Co.
1 Prairie-Wolf (Canis latrans). Winnipeg. Presented by
Gerald F. Talbot, Esq.
2 Mule Deer (Cariacus macrotis), 2 9. Born in the Monagene.
2 Glass Snakes (Pseudopus pallasi). Purchased.
30, 1 Yak (Poéphagus grunniens). Born in the Menagerie,
July 2.
1 Stein-bok Antelope (Neotragus tragulus), Presented by W.
J. Robertson, Esq.
1 Quail (Coturnis communis). Presented by Mrs. M. A. Moore,
6 Teen aed Sousliks (Spermophilus decemlineatus). Pur-
chased.
5 American Flying-Squirrels (Seiwropterus volucella). Purchased.
1 Mocassin Snake ( Tropidonotus fasciatus). Purchased.
1 American Milk-Snake (Coluber eximius), Purchased.
July 2.
a
10.
12,
13.
14,
15.
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 687
1 Bonnet-Monkey (Macacus sinicus). Presented by Albert
Thorne, Esq.
1 Mona Monkey (Cercopithecus mona). Deposited.
. 1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus). Presented by Mr.
8. R. Hicks.
1 Common Fox (Canis vulpes). Presented by A. Browning
Priestley, Esq.
1 Brown Bear ( Ursus arctos), Presented by Capt. Asher Smith.
» 4 Long-fronted Gerbilles (Gerbillus longifrons). Born in the
Menagerie.
» 1 Squirrel-Monkey (Chrysothrix sciurea), 3. Presented by
Madame G. Sangiorgi.
1 Bennett's Wallaby (Halmaturus bennett’), 2. Bred in the
Gardens.
1 Vulpine Phalanger (Phalangista vulpina), 3. Bred in the
Gardens.
3 Canadian Beavers (Castor canadensis). Bred in the Gardens.
2 Golden Eagles (Aguila chrysaétus). Deposited.
1 Common Cormorant (Phalacrocoraaz carbo). Presented by O.
Moulton Barrett, Esq.
1 Lined Finch (Spermophila lineola), 8. Deposited.
1 Lineolated Parrakeet (Bolborhynchus lineolatus). Purchased.
See P. Z.S. 1886, p, 417.
1 Lear’s Macaw (Ara lear). Purchased. See P.Z.S. 1886,
417
2 Ghatrichies (Struthio camelus), § Q. Purchased.
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 2. Presented by
My. D. Evans.
1 Lesser Redpoll (Linota rufescens). Presented by Mr. C. H.
Liveing.
1 Brambling (Fringilla montifringilla). Presented by Mr. ©. H.
Liveing.
1 Rhesus Monkey (Macacus rhesus), 9. Presented by Capt,
Pitman.
1 Rhesus Monkey (Macacus rhesus), 9. Presented by F. W.
Steward, Esq.
1 Ring-tailed Lemur (Lemur catta), Q. Presented by Mrs.
Collcutt.
6 Prairie-Marmots (Cynomys ludovicianus), 3 g, 8 9. Pre-
sented by F. J. Thompson, Esq.
2 Peba Armadillos (Yatusta peba). Presented by Mr. J.
Clements.
1 Bronze-winged Pigeon (Phaps chalcoptera). Bred in the
Gardens.
1 Barred-shouldered Dove (Geopelia humeralis). Bred in the
Gardens.
2 Sarus Cranes (Girus antiyone). Purchased.
1 Common Rhea (thea americana), g. Presented by J. W.
Bell, Esq.
2 Common Foxes (Canis vulpes), 3 2. Russia, Presented by
Harrison Cripps, Esq., F.R.C.S.
2 Long-fronted Gerbilles (Gerbillus longifrons). Born in the
Gardens.
4 Red-bellied Squirrels (Sciwrus variegatus). Trinidad. Pre-
scnted by R. J. Lechmere Guppy, Esq.
1 Elliot’s Pheasant (Phastanus eloti), Hatched from eggs laid
in the Society’s Gardens.
688
July 15.
20.
22.
23,
24.
26,
27.
28,
APPENDIX.
1 Greater Black-backed Gull (Larus marius). Presented by
H. Stevens, Esq.
24 Sand-Lizards (Lacerta agilis), Presented by Mr. Sherard
Schaefer.
1 Slow-worm (Anguis fragilis). Presented by Mr. Sherard
Schaefer.
1 Common Snake (Tropidonotus natrix). Presented by Mr.
Sherard Schaefer.
8 European Tree-Frogs (Hyla arborea). Purchased.
1 eyeliner Cynictis (Cynictis penicillata), §. Presented by
R. A. Fairclough, Esq.
5 Suricates (Suricata tetradactyla), 2 3,3 Q. Presented by R.
A. Fairclough, Esq.
2 Triangular-spotted Pigeons (Columba guinea), Presented by
R. A. Fairclough, Esq.
3 Vinaceous Turtle-Doves ( Turtur vinaceus). Presented by R.
Fairclough, Esq.
2 Cape Turtle-Doves (Turtur capicola). Presented by R. A.
Fairclough, Esq. :
3 Lions (Felis leo), 1 3,2 2. Purchased.
5 Forster’s Milvagos (Milvago australis). Falkland Islands.
Presented by Mr. James Moore.
2 Common Toads (Bufo vulgaris), Presented by Mrs. F. Walker.
1 Grey Squirrel (Sciwrus cinereus, var.). Purchased.
3 Hudson's Bay Squirrels (Sczwrus hudsonius). Purchased.
1 Mink (Putorius vison). Purchased.
1 Virginian Eagle-Owl (Bubo virginianus). Purchased,
2 Red Foxes ( Canis fulvus), $ 2. Presented by Messrs. Ensor,
Weber, & Co.
1 White-throated Capuchin (Cebus hypoleucus). Presented by
Madame Sangiorgi.
1 Masked Paradoxure (Paradoxwrus larvatus). Hongkong.
Presented by J. Orange, Esq.
2 Mule Deer (Cariacus macrotis), §. Born in the Mena-
erie.
1 Kine Vulture (Gypagus papa). British Guiana. Presented
by N. Atkinson, Esq.
1 Tawny Owl (Syrniwm aluco), Presented by Master C. G.
Gregory.
2 Grey Parrots (Psittacus erithacus}. Deposited.
1 Vociferous Sea-Eagle (Haliaetus vocifer). Purchased.
1 Short-eared Owl (Asto brachyotus). Purchased.
2 Blanding’s Terrapin (Clemmys blandingi). Purchased.
2 Indian River-Snakes (Tropidonotus quincunciatus). Pur-
chased.
1 Hyacinthine Macaw (Ara hyacinthina). Purchased.
1 Masked Weavyer-bird (Hyphantornis personatus), ¢. Pur-
chased.
2 Triangular-spotted Pigeons (Columba guinea). Bred in the
Gardens.
1 Geoftroy’s Dove (Peristera geoffroyi). Bred in the Gardens.
1 Blue-faced Amazon (Chrysotis estiva). Presented by Mrs. J.
Fletcher.
4 Exilim Teal ( Querguedula brasiliensis), Bred in the Gar-
ens.
5 Slender Ducks (Anas gibberifrons). Bred in the Gardens.
2 Chilian Pintail (Dajila spinicauda). Bred in the Gardens.
Aug. 1.
10.
11.
12.
13,
14,
16.
ifr
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE, 689
. 2 Common Wild Ducks (Anas boschas). Bred in the Gardens.
9. 12-bred Wapiti Deer, ¢ (between male hybrid Cervus luehdorfi
and C. canadensis and female C. canadensis). Bred in the
Gardens.
1 Himalayan Monaul (Lophophorus impeyanus). Bred in the
Gardens.
. 1 Aldrovandi’s Skink (Plestiodon auratus). Presented by R.
M. J. Teil, Esq.
1 Malbrouck Monkey (Cercopithecus cynosurus). Presented by
Mrs. Barrington.
. 1 Common Fox (Canis vulpes), §. Presented by Mr. J. W,
Morgan.
. 1 Spotted Ichneumon (Herpestes nepalensis). Presented by
Herbert W. Brown, Esq.
1 Bronze-spotted Dove (Chalcopelia chalcospilos), Bred in the
Gardens.
1 Common Viper (Vipera berus), Presented by Gerald Waller,
Esq., F.Z.S
. 1 Common Polecat (Mustela putorius). Presented by Wm.
Buckley, Esq.
2 Hybrid Tufted Ducks (between Fidigula cristata and Fuligula
ferina). Presented by — Thwaites, Esq.
4 Florida Tortoises (Testudo polyphemus). Presented by Hugh
Bellas, Esq.
. 1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 3. Deposited.
1 Bandicoot-Rat (Mus bandicota), Born in the Menagerie,
1 Red-crested Cardinal (Paroaria cucullata). Presented by W.
E. Ayerst, Esq.
. 1 Brown-coated Conure (Conwrus eruginosus). Deposited.
1 Roseate Cockatoo (Cacatua roseicapilla). Deposited.
. 8 Elliot’s Pheasants (Phasianus ellioti). Hatched from eggs
laid in the Society’s Gardens. See P. Z. 8S. 1886, p. 418.
2 Derbian Screamers (Chauna derbiana). Presented by Capt.
H. E. Rigaud.
2 Slowworms (Anguis fragilis). Presented by A. Mead, Esq.
1 Black Vole (black var.) (Arvicola pratensis). Presented by
G. T. Rope, Esq.
1 Alpine Marmot (Arctomys marmotta). Presented by Lionel
H. Hanbury, Esq., F.Z.S.
2 Tawny Owls jabra aluco). Presented by Lionel H.
Hanbury, F.Z.8.
3 Long-fronted Gerbilles (Gerbillus longifrons). Born in the
Menagerie.
1 Golden-crowned Conure (Conurus aureus), Deposited.
1 Arabian Baboon (Cynocephalus hamadryas), 2. Presented
y ©. Palgrave, Esq., F.Z.8. ;
1 Peregrine Falcon (Falco peregrinus). Presented by J. H.
Ward, Esq.
1 Javan Loris (Wycticebus javanicus). Java. Presented by Dr.
F, H. Bauer, C.M.Z.S.
2 Well’s Doves (Engyptila wellsi), Grenada, W.I. Presented
by Septimus Wells, Esq.
2 Ring-tailed Coatis (Naswa rufa). Born in the Menagerie,
1 Barn-Owl (Strix flammea). Presented by Sir Henry Tyler.
6 Ribbon-Snakes (Tropidonotus saurita). Born in the Mena-
gerie.
Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1886, No. XLV. 45
690
Aug. 18.
19,
20,
21
23,
24.
APPENDIX.
2 Great Eagle-Owls (Bubo maximus). Presented by the Vis-
count Hill.
8 Yellow-headed Conures (Conurus jendaya). Presented by C.
Rudge, Esq.
1 Raven (Corvus corax). Presented by Mrs, Tatham.
1 Common Viper (Vipera berus). Presented by R. B, Spalding,
Esq.
4 Ruscon’s Newts (Molge rusconi). Sardinia, Presented by
Prof. H. H. Giglioli, C.M.Z.S.
1 Egyptian Gazelle (Gazella dorcas). Presented by Capt.
Robbins.
3 Black-eared Marmosets (Hapale penicillata). Purchased.
1 Feline Douroucouli (Wyctipithecus vociferans). Purchased.
2 Yarrell’s Curassows (Crax carunculata),2 $. Purchased.
2 Magpie Tanagers (Cissopis leveriana). Purchased.
2 Ariel Toucans (Rhamphastos ariel). Purchased.
2 Laughing Gulls (Larus atricilla). Purchased.
1 White-faced Tree-Duck (Dendrocygna viduata). Purchased.
2 Common Boas (Boa constrictor). Presented by T. H. Church,
Esq.
1 Martians Gallinule (Jonornis martinicus). Presented by
Mr, J. M. Booker.
3 Aldrovandi’s Skinks (Plestiodon auratus). Received in Ex-
change.
2 Common Slowworms (Angus fragilis). Received in Ex-
change.
1 White-throated Capuchin (Cebus hypoleucus). Presented by
H. A. Blake, Esq.
1 Ring-tailed Coati (Wasua rufa). Deposited.
1 Globose Curassow (Crax globicera), 9. Deposited.
2 Dominican Kestrels (Tinnunculus dominicensis). St. Kitt’s,
W.I. Presented by Dr. A. Boon, F.R.C.S.
2 Green Bitterns (Butorides virescens), St. Kitt’s, W. 1. Pre-
sented by Dr. A Boon, F.R.C.S.
1 Leopard (Felis pardus). Born in the Menagerie,
1 Clouded Iguana (Cyclura carinata). Bahama Islands. Pre-
sented by H. A. Blake, Esq.
1 Mississippi Alligator (Alligator mississippiensis). Presented
by Miss Janet D. White.
. 1 Common Gannet (Sula bassana). Presented by Mx. F, C.
Hatfield.
. 1 Raven (Corvus corax), Presented by Mrs. Robert Garland.
1 Black-necked Swan (Cygnus nigricollis), 9. Purchased.
1 Argus Pheasant (Argus giganteus). Bred in the Gardens.
1 Lanner Falcon (Falco lanarius). Deposited.
2 Common Vipers (Vipera berus), Presented by W. Robertson,
Esq.
1 Common Viper ( Vipera berus). Presented by W. H. B. Pain,
Esq.
2 Hawfinches (Coccothraustes vulgaris). Presented by W.
Struth, Esq.
2 Common Marmosets (Hapale jacchus). Deposited.
1 ai Fallow Deer (Dama mesopotamica). Born in
the Menagerie.
4 Long-fronted Gerbilles (Gerbillus longifrons). Born in the
Menagerie.
Sept. 3.
Lit
12.
13.
14,
15.
16.
17.
18.
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 691
1 Common Mole (Talpa europea). Presented by Mr. J.
Scatcherd.
3 Indian Crocodiles (Crocodilus palustris). Deposited.
. 5 American Milk-Snakes ( Coluber eximius). Born in the Mena-
gerie.
. 9 Red-headed Finches (Amadina erythrocephala), $ 2. Presented
by H. B. James, Esq.
2 Sattron Finches (Sycalis flaveola), 3 Q. Presented by H. B.
James, Esq.
1 Leadbeater’s Cockatoo (Cacatua leadbeateri), Presented by
J. Davis, Esq.
1 Roseate Cockatoo (Cacatua roscicapilla). Presented by G. H.
Hawtayne, Esq., C.M.Z.S.
1 Smooth Snake (Coronella levis). Presented by W. H. B,
Pain, Esq.
q
. 1 West-African Python (Python sebe). Presented by Major A.
Morton Festing.
1 Leonine Monkey (Macacus leoninus), g. Deposited.
. 1 Spring-bok (Gazella euchore), §. Presented by Capt. John
ewat, C.M.Z.S.
2 Crested Pigeons (Ocyphaps lophotes). Bred in the Gardens.
1 Geoffroy’s Dove (Peristera geoffroyi). Bred in the Gardens.
1 Spot-ringed Snake (Liophis pecilogyrus). Rio de Janeiro,
Brazil. Presented by Edgell Hunt, Esq. See P. Z.S. 1886,
. 418,
2 Thia oin Monkeys (Cercopithecus talapoin). Presented by R.
E. Dennett, Esq.
1 Herring-Gull (Larus argentatus), Presented by E. Penton,
Ksq., jun., F.Z.8.
1 Malbrouck Monkey (Cercopithecus cynosurus), Q. Presented
by the Rey. H. KX. Moolenaar.
1 Bateleur Eagle (Helotarsus ecaudatus). Lamoo, East Africa.
Presented by Dr. W. Somerville.
1 Common Crowned Pigeon (Gouwra coronata). Bred in the
Gardens.
2 Auriculated Doves (Zenaida auriculata). Bred in the Gardens.
1 Black-backed Jackal (Canis mesomelas),Q. Presented by A.
T. Marsh, Esq.
1 Moorish Tortoise (Testudo mawritanica), Presented by A. T.
Marsh, Esq.
1 Common Otter (Lutra vulgaris), $. Deposited.
2 Ariel Toucans (Rhamphastos ariel). Purchased.
1 Algerian Skink (Plestiodon algeriensis). Deposited.
2 Black Rats (Mus rattus). Sark, Channel Islands. Presented
by W. F. Collins, Esq.
1 Wild Duck (Azas boschas), 3. Presented by Kenneth Lawson,
Esq.
2 Hlecant Galidias (Galidia elegans). Presented by Burt C,
Miiller, Esq. See P. Z.S. 1886, p. 418.
1 Rhesus Monkey (Macacus rhesus), . Presented by Mr,
Thomas Harris.
1 Common Stoat (Mustela erminea). Purchased.
2 Viscachas (Lagostomus trichodactylus). Born in the Menagerie,
1 Common Marmoset (Hapale jacchus). Deposited.
2 Black-eared Marmosets (Hapale penicillata). Deposited.
1 Common Barn-Owl (Strix flammea). Presented by Mrs. E.
Holloway.
45*
692
Sept. 20.
Oct.
21.
22.
30.
12.
APPENDIX.
1 Lesser White-nosed Monkey (Cercopithecus petaurista), 3.
Purchased.
2 Golden Eagles (Aguila chrysaétus). Isle of Mull, Argyllshire,
Scotland. Presented by His Grace the Duke of Argyll, K.G.,
FE.Z8.
1 Anaconda (Eunectes murinus). Deposited.
1 Rhesus Monkey (Macacus rhesus), ¢. Presented by Mrs.
Faullmer.
1 Stock-Dove (Columba enas). Presented by Chas. Whymper,
Esq., F.Z.5.
3. 1 Spotted Hyzna (Hyena crocuta). Born in the Menagerie.
1 Barred Dove (Geopelia striata). Presented by F. W. Green,
Esq.
1 Maned Goose (Bernicla jubata), §. Received in Exchange.
28. 2 Moorhens (Gallinula chloropus). Presented by Lord Moreton,
F.Z.5.
1 Hairy-rumped Agouti (Dasyprocta pyrmnolopha). Presented
by Mrs. Otto Fell.
1 Common Hedgehog (Zrinaceus ewropeus). Presented by
Madame Tina Mazzoni.
1 Horned Viper ( Vipera cornuta). Presented by C. P. Pillans,
E
Sq.
1 Malbrouck Monkey (Cercopithecus cynosurus), ¢. Presented
by Lionel R. Crawshay, Esq.
1 Rough Fox (Canis rudis),$. Presented by Capt. J. Smith.
. 1 Mona Monkey (Cercopithecus mona), 2. Niger River, West
Africa. Presented by W. P. Hewby, Esq.
. 1 Yellow-footed Rock-Kangaroo (Petrogale xanthopus), 2.
’
Presented by Mr. George Langhorne, s.s. ‘ Rome.
. 1 Brown Capuchin (Cebus fatuellus),2. Presented by Messrs,
Kiihner, Hendschel, & Co.
1 Common Chameleon (Chameleon vulgaris), Presented by
Charles T. Port, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Common Squirrel (Sczwrus vulgaris). Presented by Miss
Gertrude Hudson.
. 1 Porto-Rico Pigeon (Columba corensis). Bred in the Gardens.
1 Triangular-spotted Pigeon (Columba guinea). Bred in the
Gardens.
1 Common Viper (Vipera berus). Presented by W. H. B. Pain,
Esq.
. 1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus),2. Presented by the
Countess de Geloes.
2 Lanner Falcons (Falco lanarius), Presented by the Baron
d’Eprémesnil.
1 Blue-and-Yellow Macaw (4ra araruana). Presented by
Mrs. George Quish.
1 Boe (Sula bassana). Presented by J. H. Gurney, Esq.,
E.ZS.
1 Common Chameleon (Chameleon vulgaris). Presented by T.
H. Carlton Levick, Esq.
1 Rhesus Monkey (Macacus rhesus), 3. Presented by T. L.
Brewer, Esq.
1 Yellow-grey Squirrel (Sciwus griseoflavus),3. Received in
Exchange.
2 Grey Seals (Halicherus grypus). Isle of Canna, N.B. Pre-
sented by R. Thom, Esq.
a
Oct. 12.
13.
14,
16,
18.
19.
20.
21.
22,
23.
25.
26,
27.
28.
29.
Nov. 2.
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 693
1 Goshawk (Astur palumbarius). Presented by the Baron.
d’Eprémesnil.
2 Black-footed Penguins (Spheniscus demersus). Received in
Exchange.
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 3. Deposited.
1 Golden Plover (Charadrius pluvialis). Presented by Mr. G.
Smith.
1 Bonnet-Monkey (Macacus sinicus), S. Presented by Mrs,
Samuel art
10 Common Vipers (Vipera berus). Presented by C. F,
MNiven, Esq.
1 Common Squirrel (Sciwrus vulgaris). Presented by Miss F.
Westrup.
1 Varying Hare (Lepus variabilis), Presented by T. West
Carnie, Esq.
1 Common Seal (Phoca vitulina), 2. Presented by Mr. H.
Overton.
1 Vulpine Phalanger (Phalangista vulpina), $. Born in the
Menagerie.
1 Quail (Coturnix communis). Presented by Dr. A. Giinther,
E.Z.8
1 Asiatic Quail (Perdicula asiatica). Presented by Dr. A.
Giinther, F.Z.S.
1 Common Cormorant (Phalacrocorax carbo). Deposited.
6 Mute Swans (Cygnus olor). Deposited.
1 Pig-tailed Monkey (Macacus nemestrinus), g. Deposited.
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 3. Presented by
Mrs. H. Reader.
1 Crested Porcupine (Hystriz cristata), 2. Presented by Mrs.
. Dunn.
1 Canadian Beaver (Castor canadensis), 2. Presented by the
Earl of Carnarvon. ?
1 Green Monkey (Cercopithecus callitrichus), $. Presented by
J. W. Bacon, Esq.
1 Green Monkey (Cercopithecus callitrichus), 2. Presented by
G. D. W. Ingham, Esq.
1 Virginian Fox (Canis virginianus), N. America. Received
in Exchange.
1 Scarlet Ibis (Eudocimus ruber). Received in Exchange.
1 Common Boa (Boa constrictor). Received in Exchange.
8 Long-fronted Gerbilles (Gerbillus longifrons). Born in the
Menagerie.
4 Common Hedgehogs (Erinaceus europeus). Presented by W.
Walkinshaw, Esq.
1 Aldrovandi’s Skink (Plestiodon auratus). Deposited.
1 African Buzzard (Buteo desertorum). Mogador, N. Africa.
Presented by P. L. Forwood, Esq.
1 Rusty-spotted Cat (Felis rubiginosa), 2. Purchased.
2 Diuca Finches (Diuca grisea). Received in Exchange.
1 Bonnet-Monkey (Macacus sinicus), 2. Presented by Miss
Edith Prowse.
2 Wood-Larks (Alauda arborea). Purchased.
1 Ring-necked Parrakeet (Paleornis torquatus), 2. Presented
by W. 8S. Bradshaw, Esq.
1 Rhesus Monkey (Macacus rhesus), 9. Presented by Col. J.
M. MeNeile,
694
Noy. 2,
4,
APPENDIX.
1 Rhesus Monkey (Macacus rhesus), 29, Presented by Mrs. E.
White.
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 3. Deposited.
1 Bactrian Camel (Camelus bactrianus), 3. Deposited.
2 Eleonora Falcons (Falco eleonore). Deposited.
1 Hog-nosed Snake (Heterodon platyrhinos). Presented by Miss
Catherine C. Hopley.
4 Copper-head Snakes (Cenchris contortriz). Presented by W.
A. Conklin, Esq., C.M.Z.S.
2 Common Rattlesnakes (Crotalus durissus), Presented by W.
A. Conklin, Esq., C.M.Z.S.
1 Hog-nosed Snake (Heterodon platyrhinos). Presented by W.
A. Conklin, Esq., C.M.Z.S.
5. 1 Rose-crested Cockatoo (Cacatua moluccensis). Presented by
15.
15
16.
Miss Townshend Wilson.
2 Mantchurian Crossoptilons (Crossoptilon mantchuricum), 3 2.
Purchased.
2 Bar-tailed Pheasants (Phasianus reevesi), 6 9. Purchased.
12 Barbary Turtle-Doves (Twtur risorius). Presented by E. L.
Armbrecht, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Fire-bellied Toad (Bombinator igneus). Presented by G. A.
Boulenger, Esq., F.Z.S.
4 Ring-Doves (Columba palumbus). Bred in the Gardens.
10 Barbary Turtle-Doves (Turtur risorius). Bred in the Gardens.
3 Testaceous Snakes (Piyas testaceus). Michigan, U.S.A. Pur-
chased.
1 Ocelot (Felis pardalis). Deposited.
1 Bactrian Camel (Camelus bactrianus), 9. Deposited.
. 1 Vinaceous Turtle-Dove (Zurtur vinaceus). Bred in the
Gardens.
. 1 Woodcock (Scolopax rusticula), Purchased.
2 White-backed Piping-Crows (Gymmnorhina leuconota). Depo-
sited.
2 Goshawks (Astur palumbarius). Presented by the Baron
d’Eprémesnil.
1 Patas Monkey (Cercopithecus patas), 8. Presented by Mr.
Thomas Bailey.
1 Hobby (Falco subbuteo). Captured in the Indian Ocean,
Presented by Dr. R. Mead.
1 Yellow Baboon (Cynocephalus babouin), 2. Presented by
Capt. Henderson Smith, R.N.
1 Bengal Vulture (Gyps bengalensis). Received in Exchange.
2 Sing-Sing Antelopes (Cobus sing-sing), ¢ 2. Received in
Exchange.
2 Java Sparrows (Padda oryzivora). Presented by Mrs. Conrad
Pile.
4 St.-Helena Seed-eaters (Crithagra butyracea), Presented by
Mrs, Conrad Pile.
1 Line-tailed Souslik (Spermophilus grammurus). California.
Presented by B. F. Russell, Esq.
3 Magpie Tanagers (Cissopis leveriana). Purchased.
2 Red Crested Cardinals (Paroaria cucullata). Purchased.
1 Red Ground-Dove (Geotrygon montana). Purchased.
1 Yarrell’s Curassow (Craa’ carunculata), §. Purchased.
1 Crested Curassow (Crax alector), Purchased.
1 Patas Monkey (Cercopithecus patas), 9. Presented by Capt.
T. W. Robinson.
Noy. 16,
17,
19,
20.
22.
25,
24,
25.
26,
29,
380.
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 695
1 Puma (Felis concolor), §. Gran Chaco, Argentine Republic.
Presented by Alfred Grenfell, Esq., F.Z.S,
2 Roseate Cockatoos (Cacatua roseicapilla). Deposited,
10 Cockateels (Calopsitta nove-hollandie). Deposited.
2 everened Parrakeets (Aprosmictus erythropterus). Depo-
sited,
+ See eens Lorikeets (Trichoglossus nove-hollandie), Depo-
sited.
5 Chestnut-eared Finches (Amadina castanotis). Deposited.
1 Nutmeg-bird (Menia punctularia), Deposited.
2 Eastern Turtle-Doves (Turtur meena). Deposited.
1 Malayan Bear (Ursus malayanus), 2. Presented by Miss
A. Stewart-Savile.
4 Chukar Partridges (Caccabis chukar), 23,29. Persia,
Presented by Dr. J. Huntley.
1 Gazelle (Gazella dorcas), §. Presented by Edw. J. Hough,
Esq.
3 Chestnut-eared Finches (Amadina castanotis). Deposited,
4 Roseate Cockatoos (Cacatwa roseicapilla). Deposited.
7 Cockateels (Calopsitta nove-hollandie). Deposited.
2 Swainson’s Lorikeets ( Trichoglossus nove-hollandia). Depo-
sited,
2 Peaceful Doves (Geopelia tranquilla). Deposited.
2 Hawfinches ( Coccothraustes vulgaris). Purchased.
1 Common Toad (Bufo vulgaris?). Presented by E. N.
Wroughton, Esq.
2 Gambel’s Partridges (Callipepla gambelli), $2. Presented
by W. A. Conklin, Esq., C.M.Z.S.
2 Mute Swans (Cygnus olor). Presented by Lady Siemens.
1 Common Peafowl (Pavo eristatus), g. Presented by Lady
Siemens,
1 Common Guillemot (Lomvia troile). Presented by J. H.
Gurney, Esq., F.Z.S.
5 Great Eagle-Owls (Bubo maximus). Presented by Philip
Crowley, Esq., F.Z.S.
1 Malabar Green Bulbul (Phyllornis aurifrons). Received in
Exchange.
1 Small-footed Hedgehog (Erinaceus micropus). Madras. Pre-
sented by H. R. P. Carter, Esq.
2 Bullfinches (Pyrrhula europea), 2 3. Purchased.
5 Great Titmice (Parus major), Purchased.
4 Blue Titmice (Parus ceruleus). Purchased.
1 Grey Parrot (Psittacus erithacus). Presented by Mrs, Green-
wood.
1 Red-and-Yellow Macaw (Ara chloroptera). Presented by Mrs.
Arthur Daunt.
1 Bonnet-Monkey (Macacus sinicus), $. Presented by Miss
G. M. Fisher.
1 Beisa Antelope (Oryza beisa), 3. Purchased.
1 Red Kangaroo (Macropus rufus), 9. Born in the Mena-
erie.
1 Poi Honey-eater (Prosthemadera nove-zealandiea). Presented
by Capt. B. J. Barlow, s.s. ‘ Tainui.’
1 Blue-fronted Amazon (Chrysotis estiva). Presented by Miss
Joachim.
2 Tuatera Lizards (Sphenodon punctatus), Presented by Dr. E,
B, Parfitt,
10,
11,
13
14,
15,
16.
18.
APPENDIX.
. 2 Macaque Monkeys (Macacus cynomolgus), 6 2. Presented by
the Countess Dowager of Lonsdale. :
1 Domestic Sheep (Ovis aries, var.). Presented by Sir Albert
Kaye Rollitt, F.Z.S.
. 1 Tail-banded Snake (Elaphis teniurus). Purchased.
1 Rude Fox (Canis rudis). Purchased. }
1 Mona Monkey (Cercopithecus mona),?. Presented by Miss
Bashall.
yell pptliat pe Mouse (Sminthus vagus). Tatra Mountain, Hun-
gary. Presented by Dr. A. Wrzesniowsh.
. 1 Cerastes Viper (Vipera cerastes). Presented by J. H. Leech,
Esq., F.Z.S.
. 1 Spanish Terrapin (Clemmys leprosa). Presented by Miss Eden.
. 18 Brown Newts (Spelerpes fuscus). Presented by Prof. H. H.
Giglioli, C.M.Z.S.
2 Carolina Doves (Zenaidura carolinensis). Received in Ex-
change.
1 Allied Saltator (Saltator similis). Received in Exchange.
2 Moorish Geckos (Tarentola mauritanica). Presented by J. C.
Warburg, Esq.
2 Shore-Larks ( Otocorys alpestris). Purchased.
1 Sclater’s Curassow (Crax sclateri), 2. Presented by Rear-
Admiral Fairfax, R.N., F.Z.S.
1 Razor-billed Curassow (Mitua tuberosa), Presented by Rear-
Admiral Fairfax, R.N., F.Z.S.
1 Lesser Razor-billed Curassow (Mitua tomentosa). Presented
by Rear-Admiral Fairfax, R.N., F.Z.8.
2 Peruvian Thicknees (Gdicnemus superciliaris). Received in
Exchange.
1 Common Zebra (Hquus zebra), 6. Purchased. See P.Z.8.
Bale
3
1 Macaque Monkey (Macacus cynomolgus), 2. Deposited.
1 Red-handed Tamarin (Midas rufimanus). Presented by Mrs.
Chapman.
1 Maugé’s Dasyure (Dasyurus maug@i). Presented by Mr. R.
J. Hamilton.
2 Common Peafowls (Pavo cristatus), ¢ 2. Presented by R.
Hunter, Esq.
4 Heroes geile (Larus argentatus). Presented by Capt. 8. T.
argent.
1 Isabelline Bear (Ursus zsabellinus), §. Deposited.
2 Colles Paccaries (Dicotyles tajagw). Presented by Thos.
ell, Esq.
2 ali Crows (Corvus splendens). Presented by Lord Lilford,
1 Yarrell’s Curassow (Crax carunculata), 2. Presented by the
Rey. Wm. Bramley Moore.
1 Razor-billed Curassow (Mitua tuberosa). Presented by the
Rev. Wm. Bramley Moore.
1 Lesser Razor-billed Curassow (Mitua tomentosa). Presented
by the Rey. Wm. Bramley Moore.
1 Red-billed Tree-Duck (Dendrocygna autumnalis), Presented
by the Rey. Wm. Bramley Moore.
2 White-faced Tree-Ducks (Dendrocygna viduata). Presented
by the Rey. Wm. Bramley Moore.
6 Spectacled Salamanders (Salamandrina perspicillata), Pre-
sented by Prof. H. H. Giglioli, C.M.Z.S.
Dec. 21.
Pp)
24,
25.
28.
30.
ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE, 697
10 Moorish Geckos (Tarentola mauritanica). South of France.
Presented by J. C. Warburg, Esq.
3 Zebus (Bos indicus). Deposited nes H.R.H. the Prince of
Wales, K.G.
1 Short-eared Owl (Asio brachyotus). Presented by the Rey.
H. D. Astley, F.Z.8.
1 Many-zoned Hawk re polyzonus). Mogador. Pre-
sented by Lord Lilford, F.Z.S.
1 Red-throated Diver (Colymbus septentrionalis). Presented by
Lord Lilford, F.Z.S.
1 Swainson’s Harrier (Circus macrurus). Deposited.
1 Indian Rhinoceros (Rhinoceros unicornis), §. India. Pre-
sented by H.H. the Maharajah of Cooch Behar. See P.Z.S.
1887, p. 1.
1 Tiger (Felis tigris), §. Received in Exchange.
1 Yellow-footed Rock-Kangaroo (Petrogale sxanthopus), 3.
Born in the Menagerie.
2 Green Lizards (Lacerta viridis), Presented by R. M. J. Teil,
Esq.
1 Slowworm (Anguis fragilis). Presented by R. J. M. Teil, Esq,
Abdimia
sphenorhyncha, 328,
324.
Abraxas
Ffuscescens, 392, 395.
virginalis, 392, 395.
Acanthodrilus
angulatus, 169, 170.
capensis, 170, 172.
dissimilis, 169,170, 307.
kergquelenensis, 301.
layardi, 175.
multiporus, 170, 171,
4,
17
nove-zelandie, 169,
170.
obtusus, 169, 170, 172,
175
ungulatus, 173,174,175.
verticillatus, 169, 175.
Acantholipes
acervalis, 451.
affinis, 451.
Acanthomunna, gen. nov.,
102.
vulgaris, 507.
Achzea
melicerte, 382, 450.
Acherontia
morta, 435.
styx, 435.
Acidalia
absconditaria, 455.
addictaria, 455.
cleoraria, 454.
extimaria, 455.
negataria, 455.
patularia, 455.
remotata, 455.
Acontia
badia, 445.
crocata, 445.
INDEX,
nigripalpis, 445.
opella, 380.
quadripartita, 445.
signifera, 445.
Acrzea
andromacha, 81.
Actias
luna, 2.
selene, 2, 4.
Adisura
leucanoides, 443.
/fidiodes
inscitalis, 458.
Aigialitis
nivosus, 403.
occidentalis, 395, 396,
13,
403.
ruficapillus, 403.
/goceros
ammon, 315,
beden, 316.
falconeri, 317.
pallasi, 316,
pictus, 315.
Egotheles
nove-hollandie, 149.
/®mene
tenebrosa, 437.
Agalope
basalis, 384.
Aglossa
pinguinalis, 382.
Agrophila
sulphurialis, 447.
Agrotis
aristifera, 380, 444.
aversa, 380.
certificata, 380.
lassa, 444.
repulsa, 444.
segetum, 444,
Agrotis
suffusa, 380, 444.
Alamis
albicincta, 381.
brevipalpis, 448.
continua, 448.
umbrina, 381, 448.
Alaria
lanceolata, 442.
Alauda
arvensis, 187.
tatarica, 320.
Alayona
barbarella, 463.
cossusella, 463, 464.
indecorella, 464.
minor, 464, 465.
Alburnus
lucidus, 507.
Al
oa
emittens, 437.
punetistriga, 437.
sanguinolenta, 437.
ona
bairdit, 83.
diaphana, 83.
karua, 83.
mascula, 83.
pulchella, 83.
Alope d
ocellifera, 437.
ricini, 437.
Amathusia
ganescha, 363.
Amblypodia
dodonea, 364.
Ambulyx
eos, 269, 270, 271.
lycidas, 271.
tithonus, 270, 271.
Amecera
panterinaria, 454,
700
Amphithopsis
cerulea, 5.
Amydona
prasina, 440.
Anas
albifrons minutus,
420.
cristata, 401,
Anax
immaculifrons, 328.
Anceus
bathybius, 119.
gigas, 120, 121.
latidens, 120.
tuberculosus, 120.
Anidrytus
bipunctatus, 159.
humilis, 160.
liquefactus, 160.
quadripunctatus, 159.
Anophia
olivescens, 449.
Anous
stolidus, 337.
Anser
brenta, 420.
erythropus, 420.
indicus, 320.
Anthecia
swinhoei, 443.
Antherza
therea, 2.
dolabella, 409, 411.
menippe, 297.
mylitta, 2, 4.
nebulosa, 441.
tyrrhea, 2, 3, 297.
wahklbergii, 297.
Antheua
discalis, 438.
Anthocaris
charlonia, 376.
euphene, 122,
—, var. androgyne,
122
Anthophila
innubila, 447.
pulchra, 451.
purpurina, 451.
thus
sp., 397.
fieun 397.
Anuropus, gen,
branchiatus, 97, 114.
Aphendala
tripartita, 439.
Aphnzeus
estivus, 428, 465.
bracteatus, 428,
elima, 428.
noy.,
INDEX.
Aphnaeus
ictis, 428.
Aphusia
speiplena, 463.
Aplysissa, gen. noy., 588.
Aporia
crategi, 2, 80, 81.
hippia, 2, 3, 80, 81.
Aporodes
meleagrisalis, 383.
Apphadana
misera, 453.
Appias
ares, 431.
libythea, 431.
Apseudes
antarctica, 114.
Apurina
aanthogastrella, 394.
Ara
glauca, 320, 417.
leari, 417.
Arcella
dentata, 87.
Arctia
caja, 3.
Arctogale
leucotis, 73.
Arcturus
abyssicola, 111.
anna, 107, 109, 111,
112.
brunneus, 108.
cornutus, 108.
Surcatus, 121.
glacialis, 111.
myops, 106.
oculatus, 112.
purpureus, 109, 111,
spinifrons, 109,
spinosus, 110.
studeri, 111.
bubuleus, 335.
candidissima, 899.
coromanda, 835.
herodias, 320.
sumatrana, 320.
Argadesa
mateina, 450.
Argina
astrea, 436.
cribraria, 436.
notata, 436.
Argynnis
iss@a, 362.
kamala, 362.
lathonia, 362.
niphe, 361.
Argyria
cmered, 387, 395,
Argyris
extrusata, 441.
Argyronympha
mn
pule me, SAT, 350.
ugiensis, 347, 350.
Artaxa
anguligera, 385.
ae 385.
princeps, 386.
seintillans, 385.
Artemia
proxima, 83.
Arvicola
amphibius, 77.
cidia
canina, 285,
Aspilates
phenico-teniata, 388.
Asteroides
calycularis, 136.
Astrurus, gen. noy., 99.
crucicauda, 100.
Ateles
paniscus, 341.
Atella
phalanta, 362, 424.
Atherura
macrura, 71.
Athyma
apie, 360.
Atretia
brazieri, 182, 183,
184.
gnomon, 182, 183.
Attacus
albidus, 409, 411.
aes 2, 4.
nthia, 2.
paren: 2, 4.
ploetzt, 409,
ricini, 2.
roylei, 4.
Atticora
eyanoleuca, 397.
Aulocera
padua, 357.
saraswati, 357.
swaha, 357.
lia
Surtiva, 442.
anus
ubaldus, 366, 428.
wranus, 366, 395.
zena, 365, 366, 428.
Azazia
rubricans, 452.
Badamia
exclamationis, 434,
Balznophilus
unisetus, 255, 256, 257.
Balenoptera
borealis, 82, 243, 244,
245, 246, 252, 255,
256, 259, 263, 264,
265.
laticeps, 244.
musculus, 245, 246,
248, 251, 252, 253,
259, 263, 265.
rostrata, 244, 246, 248,
252, 253, 264, 341.
sibbaldi, 244, 245, 246,
248, 249, 252, 253,
256, 258, 259, 263,
265.
Balanoglossus
sarniensis, 154,
Bamra
acronyctoides, 448.
Bankia
cervina, 435.
aspa
melampus, 429,
Belenois
auriginea, 374.
lordaca, 875, 431.
mesentina, 375, 430,
taprobana, 374.
Belgorxa
subnotata, 439.
Belideus
breviceps, 215, 216.
Bernicla
melanoptera, 401.
Bipalium
diana, 167.
kewense, 166, 168, 205.
Bireta
galbana, 438, 465.
Birgus
latro, 384.
Boarmia
cornaria, 454.
iterata, 389.
pleniferata, 389.
repandaria, 389.
Bocana
pamphosalis, 458.
Bolborhynchus
dorbignyi, 399.
lineolatus, 417.
orbignesius, 395, 396,
399,
Bombinator
bom/inus,
501.
brevipes, 499.
igneus, 499, 50, 501.
pachypus, 499.
499, 500,
INDEX.
Bombyx
brahma, 440.
buddha, 440.
ganesa, 440.
quercus, 3.
ricint, 437.
sanguinolenta, 437.
siva, 440.
Bonasa
bonasia, 237.
Botys
aurea, 459.
incoloralis, 459.
molusalis, 460.
neoclesalis, 460.
obtusalis, 460.
stultalis, 457.
Brachylia
acronyctoides, 441.
Brachyurus
calvus, 417.
melanocephalus, 417.
rubicundus, 417.
Bradypus
cuculliger, 163.
Briarda
bolinoides, 449.
Bubo
blakistoni, 125.
andersoni, 413.
formosus, £13.
igneus, 499.
mexicanus, 413.
punctatus, 413,
Buna
pygela, 409, 411.
pygmea, 410.
Bunea
caffraria, 2, 297.
Buteo
erythronotus, 399,
Butorides
javanica, 336.
Buzura
panterinaria, 454.
Byblis
kallarthrus, 4.
Byturna
digramma, 453.
Cacatua
gymnopis, 320.
Cacomantis
sepuleralis, 467.
Calanus
Jinmarchicus, 259, 261,
€
a, 200.
701
Caligula
simla, 355, 387.
Callerebia
annada, 358.
daksha, 358.
hybrida, 358.
nirmala, 358.
Callichthys
littoralis, 330.
punctatus, 331.
Callimorpha
hera, 3.
Calliope
fluviatilis, 6.
Calopsitta
nove-hollandie,
211.
Calysisme
drusia, 422.
mineus, 422.
perseus, 422,
Candona
lutea, 84, 92, 938.
stanleyana, 84, 89.
tenuis, 84, 92, 93.
Candyba
punetata, 439.
Canis
aureus, 56.
Capra
egagrus, 315.
arabica, 316.
beden, 316.
caucasica, 315,
Ffalconeri, 317.
himalayana, 316.
hispanica, 315.
hylocrius, 318.
tbex, 315, 816.
jemlanica, 317, 318.
Jerdoni, 317.
megaceros, 317.
nubiana, 316.
pyrenaica, 315, 316.
stbirica, 316.
sinaitica, 316, 317.
walie, 316.
(Ibex) warryato, 318.
Caprimulgus
europeus, 188, 471.
Caradrina
Jfabulosa, 379.
triturata, 380.
Carcharius
glaucus, 334.
Carcineutes
pulchellus, 352.
Carpococcyx
Puasa 196.
Oarpodacus
rubicillus, 353, 354.
190,
702
Oarpodacus
severtzofi, 354.
Carpophaga
julia, 320.
Casuarius
uniappendiculatus,
145, 320.
Catocala
fraxini, 3.
Catochrysops
enejus, 365, 426.
ella, 365, 426.
hapalina, 365, 426.
patula, 365, 426.
strabo, 365, 425.
Catopsilia
catilla, 432.
crocale, 432.
philippina, 432.
pyranthe, 432.
Cebus
azare, 2\6.
Celcena
serva, 443.
Centrites
oreas, 396, 398.
Centropus
phasianus, 467, 486.
senegalensis, 467.
Cephonodes
hylas, 434, 435.
Cerace
onustana, 394.
tetraonis, 594.
Ceratobatrachus
guentheri, 411.
Ceratodus
forsteri, 219.
Ceratophrys
ornata, 137.
Ceryicapra
tsabellina, 320.
Cervulus
crinifrons, 267.
lacrymans, 267.
Octola
dentata, 438.
Cheerocampa
alecto, 379, 434.
celeris, 379, 434.
maculator, 269.
meschleri, 269.
oldenlandie, 434.
thyelia, 434, 436.
Cherotriche
vitellina, 386.
Chalocinia, group noy.,
588.
Chamzleon
pumilus, 543.
vulgaris, 543.
INDEX.
Chameepelia
cruziana, 896, 402.
Chapra
agna, 433.
mathias, 438.
Charadrius
Fulvus, 79.
Charaxes
agrarius, 425, 465.
athamus, 425.
hamata, 425.
Charltona
kala, 461.
Charnidas
testacea, 437.
chavaria, 178, 179,
180, 181, 196.
derbiana, 178, 181.
nigricollis, 196.
Chelonia
villica, 8.
Chenalopex
egyptiaca, 2.
Chilades
laius, 427.
putli, 427.
varunanda, 427.
Chilena
similis, 387.
strigula, 438.
Chilo
aurifusellus, 461.
chrysographellus, 394.
interruptellus, 461.
ortellus, 461, 465.
Chimera
monstrosa, 531.
Chiropodomys
gliroides, 78.
penicillatus, 78, 418.
Chizala
decipiens, 454.
Chlamydoselachus
anguineus, 219.
Chlamydotheca
australis, 84, 91,
93
Cholcepus
didactylus, 163.
Chondryspongiz, ord.
noy., 580.
Chrysomitris
atrata, 396, 397.
Chrysophanus
chryseis, 80.
dido, 80.
hippothoe, 80,
phleas, 368.
stygianus, 368.
timeus, 368.
Chrysoploma
citrina, 410, 411.
obtusa, 410.
rosea, 410, 411.
rudis, 411
Chthonerpeton
indistinctum, 414.
Chydorus
angustus, 83.
leonardi, 83.
Cidaria
albigirata, 394.
aliena, 393.
aurata, 393.
corylata, 393.
jameza, 393.
perpulchra, 393.
picata, 394.
prunata, 394.
suffumata, 394.
Cinclodes
bifasciatus, 396,
98
398.
fuscus, 398.
rivularis, 398.
Cirida
forda, 2, 297.
Cledeobia
hypotialis, 457.
Clostera
anachoreta, 3.
Coccothraustes
coccothraustes, 96, 97.
humi, 97.
japonicus, 97.
vulgaris, 96.
Coecyzus
americanus, 490.
erythrophthalmus, 490.
minor, 490.
Ceecilia
buckleyt, 414.
Colias
aurorina, 370.
edusina, 370.
erata, 370, 371.
—, var. pallida, 370.
fieldit, 370.
hyale, 370.
-—, var. sareptensis,
37l.
pallida, 370, 371.
sareptensis, 370, 371.
Columba
guinea, 193, 195.
Conurus
enops, 599.
luciana, 320.
ruritorques, 539,
Cophyla
phyllodactyla, 412.
Oopsychus
amenus, 123, 124.
mindanensis, 123, 124.
musicus, 123.
niger, 123, 124.
saularis, 123, 124.
seychellarum, 123, 124.
Coptobasis
enealis, 458.
opisalis, 458.
Ooronella
multimaculata, 124.
Oornufer
guppyi, 412.
solomonis, 412.
Cosmophila
indica, 448.
xanthindyma, 448.
Crambus
aurifusellus, 461.
multwagellus, 462.
partellus, 462.
Orastia
core, 421.
Crax
globicera, 321.
Creatonotus
emittens, 437.
interruptus, 437.
Crocidura
murina, 73.
Crocothemis
erythred, 328.
reticulata, 328, 529.
soror, 328.
Crossarchus
fasciatus, 56.
Crotophaga
ani, 489.
sulcirostris, 489.
Oryptophractus
pilosus, 420.
Oryptopora
ee 182.
Oryptopsophis
multiplicatus, 414.
Ctenosaura hi X
thromelas, 241,
"566.
Cuculus
canorus, 196, 467,
471.
Cupido
ariana, 368.
nazira, 368.
Cyaniris
celestina, 367.
levettii, 367.
pseudargiolus, 367.
rollari, 367.
vardhana, 367.
INDEX,
Oyanissa
maia, 297.
Cyclops
australis, 83.
Jimmarchicus, 261.
Cyenia
testacea, 437.
Cymodocea
abyssorum, 114.
Cymones
cowant, 158, 168.
helopioides, 158, 163.
sharpi, 157, 158,
163.
Cynzlurus
Jubatus, 1.
Cynopterus
marginatus, 73.
Cyornis
albo-olivacea, 354.
poliogenys, 354.
Cy pridopsis
pare 84, 91, 93.
minna, 84, 91, 98.
Cypris
Taine 84.
brasiliensis, 90.
candonoides, 84.
carinata, 84.
clarkii, 84.
Sretensis, 89.
incongruens, 89.
lateraria, 84.
minna, 84, 91.
mytiloides, 84, 89,
93.
prasina, 89.
scottit, 84.
stanleyana, 84, 89,
93.
stobarti, 84.
sydneia, 84.
tatei, 84, 89, 93.
varrovillia, 84.
viridula, 84, 88, 89,
93.
Cypselus
oe 187
Cyrestis
ganescha, 363.
lutea, 363.
nived, 363.
thyodamas, 363.
Dabarita
icterica, 439, 465.
afila,
acuta, 80.
bahamensis, 80.
modesta, 79.
spinicauda, 80, 402.
7038
Damalis
senegalensis, 176.
Danais
archippus, 344, 346.
insolata, 344.
plexippus, 154.
Daphnia
carinata, 83.
elizabethe, 83.
honorata, 83.
mucronata, 83.
nerit, 435, 436.
Dapsifera
deviella, 465.
Dasypus
sexcinctus, 163.
Debis
dyrta, 357.
Deilephila
euphorbie, 3.
livornica, 379,
435.
Deiopeia
lotriz, 436.
pulchella, 436.
thyter, 385.
Delias
eucharis, 431.
| Delocharis
herbicolens, 391.
Dendrobates
fantasticus, 412.
hahnelii, 412.
reticulatus, 412.
Depressaria
swinkoei, 465.
Dermophis
thomensis, 414.
Desmia
opisalis, 458.
Deudoryx
epijarbas, 370.
Diaptomus
cookii, 88.
maria, 83.
pollux, 83.
uxorius, 83.
Diasemia
geometralis, 460.
Dichrorampha
subsequana, 463.
Dicranura
vinula, 3.
Dipsas
epijarbas, 370.
Dipthera
ludifica, 3.
Dissura
maguart, 200.
Docela
affinis, 451.
704
Dodona
dipea, 364.
eugenes, 364.
Doritis
apollinus, 8.
Dosara
celatalis, 384.
Dromas
ardeola, 336.
Drosica
deviella, 465.
Drusilla
phorcas, 345.
Dryophis
prasina, 124.
Dunhevedia
crassa, 83.
podagra, 83.
Dysideissa, gen. nov.,
589.
Dysopes
cestoni, 94.
Earias
frondosana, 463.
speiplena, 463.
tristrigosa, 463.
Ebulea
catalaunalis, 460.
Echinorhynchus
brevicollis, 256, 259.
porrigens, 256.
proteus, 259.
puber, 258, 259.
Elaphodus
michianus, 267, 268,
320.
Elephas
indicus, 176.
Emberiza
atriceps, 397.
wnicolor, 397.
Encymon
angulatus, 158.
Endoccelus
orbicularis, 163.
Endromis
versicolor, 3.
Enome
detersa, 438.
incerta, 438.
Entomogramma
torsa, 449.
Ephyra
cleoraria, 454.
extrusata, 441.
inexacta, 455.
Epicrionops
bicolor, 414,
Epifidonia
signata, 392, 395.
INDEX,
Epimachus
albus, 320.
Epione
brongusaria, 390.
inexacta, 455.
Episparis
signata, 452.
Epopterus
eganus, 160, 163.
ephippiger, 160, 161,
16
oO:
lineoguttatus, 161, 163.
Ercheia
diversipennis, 450.
Erebia
annada, 358.
Hressa
confinis, 436.
Eromene
bella, 462.
Erygia
apenas, 449.
Estheria
birchii, 83.
lutraria, 84, 85.
packardt, 84, 85, 86.
Eublemma
amabilis, 447.
Euchelia
jacobee, 3.
Euchloe
cardamines, 2.
charlonia, 376.
lucilla, 376, 395.
Huclasta
defamatalis, 459.
Eudioptis
indica, 459.
Eudrilus
boyeri, 302, 304.
decipiens, 302.
Eulimnadia
rivolensis, 84, 86,
87
Eupemphix
tae, 413.
Euphausia
inermis, 259, 268.
Euplocamus
swinhoti, 193.
Euplea
brenchleyi, 344.
dorippus, 356.
Euproctis
gamma, 386.
lunata, 437.
marginalis, 438,
Eupterote
ignavus, 440, 465.
mutans, 440,
undata, 441.
Euryades
corethrus, 11.
duponcheli, 11.
Eurycercus
cookii, 83.
cunninghami, 83.
spinosa, 83.
Eurycope
intermedia, 122.
Eusemia
afflicta, 436.
Eustomias
obscurus, 142.
Eyeres
dipora, 365.
parrhasius, 427.
Falco
fusco-cerulescens, 318.
Felis
chaus, 55.
leopardus, var. melano-
tica, 204.
ornata, 55.
tigris, 2.
torquata, 55."
wneia, 1.
Fidonia
concordaria, 891.
Fierasfer
dubius, 319.
Foudia
madagascariensis, 335.
Fregata
aquila, 335,
ulica
ardesiaca, 396, 402.
chloropoides, 403.
gigantea, 396, 402.
leucoptera, 395, 408.
stricklandi, 403.
Fuligula
cristata, 550.
Galeopithecus
volans, 73.
Galidia
elegans, 418.
Gallinago
celestis, 197.
Gallinula
galeata, 396, 402.
Gambetta
flavipes, 404.
melanoleuca, 404.
Ganoris
ajaka, 375.
brassice, 878.
gliciria, 375.
napi, 373.
nipalensis, 376.
Ganoris
rape, 373, 431.
Gastropacha
vishnou, 386, 440.
Gazella
dorcas, 504.
naso, HOA.
subgutturosa, 2.
Gegenes
karsana, 378.
nostrodamus, 378.
Geococcyx
affinis, 467.
californianus,
490,
Geometra
detracta, 390.
Geomolge
Jischeri, 413, 416.
Geositta
cunicularia, 398.
— juninensis, 398.
Girella
tricuspidata, 539.
Girpa
Sraterna, 449.
inangulata, 449.
Glottula
dominica, 445.
Glyphodes
Fessalis, 459, 465.
Glyptonotus
megalurus, 121.
Gnophos
dispunctata, 389.
obtectaria, 389.
perlita, 389.
vitreata, 390.
Gobius
niger, 506.
Golunda
ellioti, 63, 64.
Grammodes
ammonia, 451.
stolida, 382,
Guira :
piririgua, 467.
S
oe iia, 330, 307.
Gymnopelia
erythrothorax, 396,
402.
Gymnopis
TU naeelar: 414.
Gymnura
raflesi, 67.
Gynanisa
maia, 2, 3.
466,
Haastia, gen. noy., 589.
INDEX.
Harpactes
duvauceli, 353.
Hatteria
punctata, 407,
Helictis
moschata, 59.
nepalensis, 59.
orientalis, 59.
personata, 59,
Heliothis
armigera, 442.
peltigera, 442,
rubescens, 442,
succinea, 443.
Hemaris
marginalis, 3.
saundersii, 378.
Hemigale
hardwickei, 73.
Hemileuca
maid, 3.
Henicurus
ruficapillus, 352.
Hepialis
humuli, 123.
Herbula
meleagrisalis, 383, 458.
Herpestes
albicauda, 176.
auropunctatus, 56, 58,
59.
— birmanicus, 58.
griseus, 56.
persicus, 5G.
Hesperia
agna, 433.
bevani, 435.
enejus, 865, 426.
divodasa, 433.
gulba, 433.
gremius, 433.
tsocrates, 428.
karsana, 378.
mangala, 377, 378.
mathias, 433.
nostrodamus, 378.
parrhasius, 427.
plinius, 427.
strabo, 425.
theophrastus, 423.
Heterophasia
simillima, 352.
Hieccoda
herbaria, 446.
Hingula
unicoloris, 452.
Hipparchia
parisatis, 357.
Hircinissa, group nov.,
588.
Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1886, No. XLVI.
Hirundo
gutturalis, 268.
rustica, 187, 268.
savignyt. 268.
Homer
clathrum, 449.
Homeeosoma
gratella, 461.
Homoptera
vetusta, 448.
vilis, 3382.
Hulodes
inangulata, £49.
Huphina
cassida, 431.
phryne, 431.
zeuxippe, 431.
Hyena
striata, 56.
Hyblaa
puera, 448.
Hybodus
dubrisiensis, 218, 220,
222, 223, 224.
Hydrocichla
ruficapilla, 352.
Hyla
glandulosa, 413.
macrops, 413.
nasica, 413,
staufferi, 413.
thesaurensis, 413.
Hylobates
lar, 66.
Teuciscus, 212.
Hylodes
angusti, 412.
brocchii, 412.
buckleyi, 415.
vertebralis, 413, 415.
Hymenia
fascialis, 384, 457.
Hynobius
lichenatus, 413.
Hypanis
polinice, 424.
simplex, 424.
Hypena
abducalis, 453.
antiqualis, 382.
tatorhina, 382.
Hyperythra
phantasma, 388.
swinhoei, 389, 454.
Hypochera
io, 2.
Hypochroma
ispensata, 454.
) Hypolimnas
alimena, 344, 346.
46
706
Hypolimnas
avia, 425.
bolina, 844, 425.
misippus, 359, 42d.
‘ypopachus
Leia 412.
Hypotia
allalis, 462, 465.
Hyria
bilineata, 455.
Hystrix
leucura, 57.
Tanthellinsz, subfam.
noy., 589.
Tanthocinela
mitrata, 351, 352.
Ibex
alpium sibiricarum,
316.
Tchneumon
griseus, 56.
Tchthyosaurus
intermedius, 407.
Tehthyura
cupreata, 387.
restitura, 439.
Idea
addictaria, 455.
deliciosaria, 390.
ornata, 390.
patularia, 455.
Ideena
absconditaria, 455.
chotaria, 455.
negataria, 459.
remotata, 455.
walkeri, 455.
Idmais
faustina, 373.
Iguana
tuberculata, 164.
Tlattia
cephusalis, 443.
Tlerda
coruscans, 369.
sena, 369.
tamu, 368.
liurgia
defamatalis, 459.
Tolonthe, nov. gen., 104.
accathonotus, 104.
techuosoma
Le TToides, 99.
bacillus, 98, 99.
bispinosum, 98, 99.
quadrispinon 98,
9,
Tachnura
senegalensis, 329.
INDEX.
Ischyodus
orthorhinus, 528, 531.
Ismene
alexis, 434.
Tsoteinon
nilgiriana, 433.
Txalus
asper, 412, 435, 416.
japonicus, 414,
Ixias
depalpura, 432.
dharmsale, 374.
kausala, 482.
meridionalis, 432.
moulmeinensis, 374.
pygmed, 374.
Jamides
bochus, 426.
Janira
abyssicola, 105.
tristani, 105.
Jartheza
cassimella, 461, 465.
Se i ada 394,
61.
xylinella, 461.
Jodis
detracta, 390.
Jceropsis
marionis, 105.
Junonia
alana, 361, 424.
asterie, 424.
hierte, 42-4.
lemonias, 424.
orythia, 424.
swinhoei, 361.
Kangurus
fasciatus, £44,
Kemas
hylocrius, 318.
Labanda
pamphosalis, 453.
Lacerta
muralis, 164.
viridis, 164.
Lacides
ficus, 487.
Laerti:s
pammon, 433.
Lagopotetrix
dicksonit, 236.
lagopoides, 234.
Lagopus
albus, 224, 225, 227,
228, 229, 231, 233,
234, 235, 236, 237,
239, 240, 419.
Lagopus
mutus, 233, 236, 237,
238.
scoticus, 236, 238.
tetrici-albus, 236.
tetrici-scoticus, 236.
Lagorchestes
albipilis, 544.
conspicillatus, 546.
fasciatus, 544-547.
leporoides, 544, 546,
547.
Lagostropus, gen. nov.,
544
fasciatus, 544, 547.
Lalage
melanothorax, 358, 354.
sykesi, 304.
Laphygma
caradrinoides, 380.
exigua, 443.
Larus
eburneus, 137.
rossi, 82.
sabini, 82.
serranus, 404.
Lasiocampa
quereifolia, 3.
strigula, 438.
Lebeda
buddha, 440.
Lechenopteryx
fulvia, 411.
Leiopus, gen. nov., 116.
leptodactylus, 116.
Lepidurus
angasit, 83, 88.
compressus, 83.
kirki, 83.
viridis, 83, 87, 88.
viridulus, 83, 84, 87,
88.
Leptasthenura
egithaloides, 398.
Lepthemis
sabina, 325.
Leptodactylus
diptyx, 413.
discodactylus, 413.
gracilis, 418.
rhodomystax, 413.
Leptognathia
australis, 118.
longiremis, 118.
Leptopus
mitchelli, 403.
Leptosia.
quinaria, 445.
Lepus
ruficaudatus, 57.
Lepyrodes
geometralis, 460.
Lethe
dyrta, 357.
neelgherriensis, 424.
Leucania
aureola, 441.
bivitta, 442.
byssina, 442, 465.
collecta, 379.
extranea, 379, 441.
inferens, 441.
Leucinodes
auaxialis, 458, 465.
Leuconza
crategi, 80.
crategoides, 80.
Leucophlebia
bicolor, 435.
Leucopternis
palliata, 137.
Leucosarcia
picata, 195.
Libythea
lepita, 361, 363.
myrrha, 3638.
Limenitis
dichroa, 360.
disippus, 2, 3.
opalina, 860.
tatei, 84, 87.
Limnadia
antillarun, 87.
sordida, 83.
stanleyana, 83.
Limnas
alcippoides, 356, 421.
chrysippus, 356, 357,
421
dorippus, 357.
Alugii, 356.
Limnodynastes
olivaceus, 418.
Linnetis
macleayana, 83.
Linophryne
lucifer, 138, 148.
Liophis
pecilogyrus, 418.
Liparis
chrysorrhea, 3,
vitellina, 386.
xanthorrhea, 386.
Lophophorus
impeyanus, 193.
Lophura
ia 434.
sae gen. nov.,
INDEX,
| Lumbricus
agricola, 672.
kerquelarum, 301.
tongaensis, 301.
Lycxna
alexis, 128.
ardates, 427.
celestina, 367.
corydon, 2.
diluta, 367.
dipora, 369.
indica, 427.
kandarpa, 425.
kollari, 367.
maha, 426.
nara, 366, 427.
patala, 426.
putli, 368, 427.
pygmed, 427.
trochilus, 368.
ubaldus, 366.
zend, 365, 428.
Lycauges
demissus, 456.
Lymantria
detersa, 488.
incerta, 438.
obfuscata, 386.
obsoleta, 438.
Macacus
cyclopis, 207.
cynomolgus, 66.
sinicus, 207, 208,
341.
tcheliensis, 417.
Macaria
arenaria, 456.
eleonora, 455.
granitalis, 456.
hebesata, 456.
lithnia, 456.
peremptaria, 456.
sufflata, 390.
zebrina, 456.
Macrocamerex, — subtrib.
noyv., 582.
Macroglossa
belis, 434, 455.
gyrans, 434, 435.
nycteris, 378.
stellatarum, 3878.
Macromia
cingulata, 328.
mooret, 328, 529.
Macropus
brachyurus, 546.
(Lagorchestes) fascia-
tus, O44.
Macrothrix
spinosa, 83.
Macrotoma
heros, 267.
Mamestra
dolorosa, 443.
Mancipium
ajaka, 375.
canidium, 375.
Manis
javanica, 72.
Mantella
ebenaut, 412.
Margarita
margaritifera, 319.
Mecyna
rusticalis, 384.
Megalestes
major, 329.
Megalophrys
longipes, 413.
Megaptera
boops, 245.
Megascolex
indicus, 298.
Megasoma
venustum, 387.
Melanippe
restitutata, 393.
Melanitis
ismene, 422.
leda, 422.
Melanocetus
Johnsonii, 143.
Melanthia
gratulata, 393.
restituta, 393.
Meleagrina
margaritifera, 176.
Melitza
cinocia, 2.
didyma, 362.
durga, 364.
persea, 362.
robertsii, 362.
trivia, 362.
Mellivora
indica, 56.
Melopelia
meloda, 402.
Menelaides
diphilus, 433.
Merula
chiguanco, 396.
Mesia
argentauris, 3091,
352.
laurine, 351, 352.
Mestleta
baccalie, 452, 465.
Metriopelia
aymara, 396, 402.
melanoptera, 402.
07
708
Microcamerex, subtrib.
noy., 581.
Microcheta
minuta, 671, 672.
rappit, 298, 506, 671.
Microhyla
Jissipes, 412.
Micromerus
lineatus, 325, 828,
329.
obscurus, 328, 329.
Micropus
melanoleucus, 502.
Microsemyra
pallida, 487.
Milvago
megalopterus, 399.
Miniopterus
schreibersi, 94.
Miresa
albipuncta, 439.
Moina
lemne, 83.
macleayti, 83.
Molge
waltlii, 525.
Moloch
horridus, 164.
Moniligaster
barwelli, 670.
deshayesii, 670,
grandis, 671, 672.
papillata, 672.
robusta, 671, 672.
ruber, 672.
sapphirinaoides, 671,
672.
uniqua, 671.
Monitor
gouldii, 164.
Monoculus
Jinmarchicus, 261.
Munna
maculata, 98.
pallida, 98.
Mus
alexandrinus, 57.
badius, 65.
berdmorei, 62.
blanfordi, 63.
bowersi, 62.
cervicolor, 65.
confucianus, 63.
cunicularis, 65.
erythrotis, 64.
germaini, 62.
gliroides, 78.
humei, 63, 64.
peguensis, 78.
rattus rufescens, 57, 62.
71.
INDEX.
Mus
robustulus, 62,71.
Muscisaxicola
albifrons, 396, 397.
rufivertexr, 398.
| Mustela
flavigula, 67.
pennanti, 125.
Mustilia
columharis, 387, 395.
americana, 324.
Mygale
fasciata, 4.
Myiopsitta
aienasie; 399.
Mylodon
(Grypotherium) dar-
win, 492, 498.
Myopterus
daubentoni, 94.
| Myrmecocela
ochraceella, 464.
Myrmecophaga
Jubata, 340.
Nacaduba
ardates, 427.
Nadagara
grisea, 390, 457.
Nandinia
binotata, 209.
Naprepa
varians, 440.
Natada
basalis, 439.
Neasellus
kerquelenensis, 101.
Nemoria
carnifrons, 454,
Frequens, 454.
Neotanais, gen. noy,,
Tale
americanus, 118.
Neotragus
kirkii, 505.
Nephele
hespera, 439,
Nepheronia
gaea, 431.
Nephila
hespera, 379.
Nephopteryx
sufuccalis, 460.
Neptis
duryodana, 360.
eurymene, 425.
mahendra, 360.
nandina, 360.
yerburii, 360.
Nesokia
bandicote, 56.
Nesokia
hardwickei, 56.
Neuria
retina, 443.
Neurobasis
chinensis, 328.
Newnhamia
Senestrata, 92.
gulielmi, 84.
(Notodromas) fene-
strata, 84.
Nilasera,
amantes, 429.
apella, 429, 465.
Niltava
grandis, 351.
Nioda
fusiformis, 438.
Noctua
armigera, 442.
emarginata, 439.
ewigua, 443.
Jicus, 487.
Sragilis, 451.
orichalcea, 448.
peltigera, 442.
stolida, 382.
Nodaria
externalis, 453.
Nothocrax
urumutum, 3821, 322.
Notodonta
ziczac, 3.
Notodromas
fuscatus, 84, 92, 93.
monachus, 92.
Numenius
pheopus, 336.
Nycticebus
tardigradus, 73.
Nyctidromus
albicollis, 149.
Nyctinomus
cestoni, 94.
Nyctixalus
margaritifer, 412.
Nyssia
albipuncta, 439.
Ochetorhynchus
ruficaudus, 398.
Ovhropleura
triangularis, 380.
Odonestris
potatoria, 123.
Olene
Susiformis, 438.
Onychodactylus
japonicus, 416,
Opheides
erithonius, 482.
Ophiodes
separans, 450.
triphenoides, 450.
Ophiusa
albivitta, 382, 450.
arctotenia, 450.
Jjoviana, 450.
rubricans, 452.
Oresia
emarginata, 439.
Oreophilus
rujicollis, 403.
Oreotrochilus
leucopleurus, 398.
Orthetrum
cerulescens, 327.
carnaticum, 327.
hyalinum, 326, 329.
neglectum, 327.
ramburii, 327.
triangulare, 327, 328.
Osmerus
eperlanus, 292, 293,
295, 507.
mordax, 293.
Othreis
fullonica, 450.
Oyis
brookei, 206.
hodgsoni, 205, 206.
tragelaphus, 320.
vignei, 205, 206.
Pachymetopon
grande, 540.
squamosum, 540.
Padraona
mesa, 433.
Palpopleura
sexmaculata, 328,
Paludicola
falcipes, 413.
gracilis, 413.
olfersit, 413.
Pamphila
mesa, 433.
sagara, 434.
Panchala
dodonea, 364, 365.
rama, 304
Pandesma
quenavadi, 381, 448.
Panomza
cingdensis, 162, 165.
pardalina, 162.
Pantala
Slavescens, 325.
Papilio
alexanor, 2, 3.
alewis, 434.
almana, 361, 424.
INDEX,
Papilio
arcturus, 377.
asiaticus, 377.
asterias, 2, 3.
asterie, 424.
ataianta, 361.
augias, 438.
avia, 425.
beticus, 365, 425.
bochus, 426.
bolina, 425.
bridaei, 346, 349,
350.
canidia, 376.
capaneus, 348.
cardui, 424.
catilla, 482.
charonia, 361.
chrysippus, 396, 421.
cloanthus, 376.
core, 421.
crocale, 432.
daplidice, 375.
diphilus, 483.
drusia, 422.
erithonius, 377, 432.
erskinei, 345, 348, 349,
350.
eucharis, 431.
exclamationis, 484.
genutia, 421,
gliciria, 375.
hecabe, 372, 430.
hicetaon, 350.
hierte, 424.
ismene, 422.
ladon, 484.
laius, 427.
leda, 422.
lemonias, 424.
libythea, 431.
limniace, 421.
machaon, 2, 3.
—, var. asiatica, 377.
melampus, 429.
mesentina, 480.
misippus, 359, 425.
nais, 425.
niphe, 361.
orythia, 424.
pammon, 433.
perseus, 422.
phalanta, 362, 424.
philippina, 432.
phryne, 431.
podalirius, 2, 3.
polinice, 424.
polyctor, 48, 377.
polytes, 433.
pyranthe, 432.
rape, 431.
Papilio
thyelia, 425.
timens, 368.
ubaldus, 428.
viole, 424.
wenophilus, 348.
zeuxippe, 431.
(Danaus) cassida,
431,
Paradisornis
rudolphi, 125.
Paradoxurus
fasciatus, 67.
hermaphroditus, 67,
73.
jerdoni, 420.
musanga, 67,
niger, 59.
Paraponyx
affinialis, 458.
Parasa
lepida, 439.
Paratanais
bathybrotis, 119.
dimorphus, 119.
Parmacella
valenciennesi, 137.
Parnara
bada, 377.
bevani, 877, 4838.
mangala, 377.
Parnassius
acco, 15, 16, 18, 35, 36,
43, 53.
actius, 15, 16, 18, 28,
29, 30, 31, 32, 37,39,
41, 42.
—, var. discobolus,
16, 18, 21, 29:
—, var. himalay-
ensis, 16, 18, 30,
36, 37.
—, var. rhodius, 16,
18, 36, 37.
apollo, 2, 8, 9, 10, t1,
12, 15, 18, 19, 20, 21,
22, 23, 24, 25, 27, 29,
30, 38, 34, 36, 45, 46,
52.
—, var. hesebolus, 16,
I
8.
apollonius, 16, 18, 34.
baldur, 50.
bremeri, 15, 16, 18, 83,
53.
—, var. graeseri, 33, 34.
cesar, 29, 41.
charltonius, 7, 15, 16,
19, 35, 41, 42, 43,
53
citrinarius, 19, 47, 48.
710
Parnassius
clarius, 16, 19, 29, 39,
41, 49, 50, 51, 52, |
53.
clodius, 16, 19, 47, 49,
50, 51.
—, var. menetriest,
19}
corybas, 18, 26, 29,
32.
—, var. discobolus,
29,
davidis, 16, 18, 33.
delius, 9, 12, 16, 18, 22,
23, 24, 26, 27, 28, 29,
31, 32, 38, 52, 53.
—, var. behrii, 28.
—, var. corybas, 16, 18, /
23.
—, var. hermodur, 16,
18, 23, 24.
—, var. intermedius,
16, 18, 25, 24.
—, var. smintheus, 16,
18, 23, 24.
delphius, 12, 16, 19, 29, |
39, 40, 41.
—, var. infernalis, 39,
40.
—, var. namagana,
39, 40.
—, var. staudingeri,
dentatus, 51.
discobolus, 25, 28, 29,
30, 32, 33, 87, 42.
epaphus, 18, 36.
—, var. sikkimensis,
36.
eversmanni, 15, 16, 19,
48, 49, 50, 53.
—, var. felderi, 16,
19.
—, var, thor, 16, 19.
felderi, 48, 49.
glacialis, 16, 19, 47,
48,
hardwickei, 9, 16, 19,
35, 37, 38, 39, 43,
5.
—, var. charino, 38.
hesebolus, 22, 29, 30.
himalayensis, 28, 29.
honrathki, 16, 18, 32, 33.
imperator, 7, 15, 16,
19, 42, 43, 53.
Jacquemonti, 9, 15, 16,
18, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32,
36, 37, 38, 43, 53.
—, var. sikkimensis,
16, 18.
INDEX.
Parnassius
melanophia, 47.
menetriesti, 50.
mnemosyne, 8,9, 11, 12,
15, 16, 19, 24, 25, 29,
33, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49,
51, 53.
—, var. zmmaculata,
46.
—, var. nubilosus, 19,
44.
—, var. stubhendorfi,
16, 19.
muzaffir, 42.
nicconicoleus, 48.
nigricans, 30.
nomion, 15, 16, 18, 26,
27, 28, 30, 33, 54.
—, var. minor, 18.
nordmanni, 16, 19,
DZ.
—, var. minima, 52.
phebus, 23.
rabdia, 48.
rhodius, 28, 29.
rikuchina, 48.
romanovi, 29, 41, 42.
sayt, 23.
sedakovii, 23, 26.
sikkimensis, 35, 36, 37,
38.
simo, 16, 18, 85, 37,
43
smintheus, 26, 27, 30,
51, 53.
—, var. hermodus,
25.
—, var. sayi, 27.
staudinger?, 29, 39, 40,
41, 53.
stoliczkanus, 16, 19, 39,
40, 41, 53.
stubbendorfi, 46, 47, 48.
tenedius, 15, 16, 19, 42,
43, 53.
thor, 48, 49.
venusi, 28.
virgo, 28.
wosnesenskit, 48, 49.
Patula
macrops, 449.
Pauxis
galeata, 321.
Pavo
cristatus, 194.
nigripennis, 194.
Pelecanus
trachyrhynchus, 176.
Penicillaria
excitans, 381.
geyert, 381.
Perca
flaviatilis, 294, 507.
Perichzta
affinis, 298, 300, 301,
312.
armata, 666.
bicincta, 299.
biserialis, 299, 300.
bivaginata, 664, 665,
666, 669.
burliarensis, 665, 667.
cerulea, 801.
gracilis, 665, 666,
669.
horsti, 298, 300, 301.
hulikalensis, 665, 668.
indica, 171, 298, 299,
300, 312.
Jjuliani, 300.
lawsoni, 664, 665, 666.
luzonica, 299.
mirabilis, 665, 668.
musica, 312.
salettensis, 665, 669.
stuarti, 665, 667.
taitensis, 3801.
(Pleurocheta) gracilis,
666.
Perigia
centralis, 443.
serva, 448.
Perina
basalis, 437.
Perionyx
excavatus, 298, 308,
309, 310, 669.
macintoshit, 309, 669.
saltans, 664, 665, 669,
672.
stuarti, 663.
Peristera
geoffroii, 195.
Pernis
apivorus, 202.
Petelia
medardaria, 454.
Phakellura
indica, 459.
Phalzna
ammonia, 451.
astrea, 436.
chlorea, 450.
eleonora, 455.
interrupta, 437.
lotrix, 436.
ornata, 390.
Phalena-Geometra
sacraria, 390, 456.
Phalena-Noctua
archesia, 451.
circumflexa, 477.
Phalena-Noctua
dominica, 443.
fullonica, 450.
hippasia, 451.
hyppasia, 382.
Joviana, 450.
lepida, 439.
macrops, 449.
materna, 450.
melicerta, 382.
melicerte, 450.
puera, 448.
segetum, 444.
suffusa, 380, 444.
Phalzna-Pyralis
fascialis, 384, 457.
pinguinalis, 382.
sulphuralis, 447.
tyres, 459.
Phascogale
apicalis, 549.
minimus, S49.
virginia, 548.
Phasianus
colchicus, 81.
reevesi, 193.
Phegornis
mitchelli, 403.
Pherusa
cerulea, 5.
Phibalapteryx
sp., 394.
Philampelus
cos, 269.
Phcenicopterus
andinus, 396, 399, 400,
401.
Jamesi, 395, 396, 399,
400, 401.
Phragmatecia
ee 441.
Phrygilus
Sana, 397.
Sruticeti, 397.
plebeius, 396, 397.
rusticus, 397.
unicolor, 397.
Phycodes
hirundinicornis, 463.
Phyletis
herbicolens, 391.
inconspicua, 391.
meonaria, 391.
silonaria, 391.
Phyllobates
trilineatus, 412.
Phyllomedusa
theringit, 413.
perlata, 413.
Phyllorhina
bicolor, 73.
INDEX.
Phyllorhina
diadema, 73.
Pieris
ajaka, 375.
brassice, var. nipalen-
sis, 376.
hippia, 80.
lordaca, 375.
Pimelepterus
cinerascens, D40.
Suscus, 540.
meridionalis, 539.
sydneyanus, 540.
tahmel, 540.
Pinnotheres
latreillei, 177.
ohesa, 177.
orientalis, \77.
pisum, 177.
Pithecia
satanas, 211.
Platalea
leucorodia, 179.
Platydactylus
mauritanicus, 339.
Platyonyx
agassizi, 492.
blainvillei, 492.
brongniarti, 492, 496,
407.
cuvieri, 492.
Plebeius
putli, 368.
trochilus, 368.
Plecoptera
reflera, 381.
Plecotus
awuritus, 94, 95.
Plesioneura
indrani, 433.
Plethodon
croceater, 413.
Pleurogonium
albidum, 101, 102.
minutum, 102.
serratum, 102.
Plusia
cireumflexa, 447.
extrahens, 447.
orichalcea, 448.
verticillata, 447.
Poaphila
hamifera, 451.
simplex, 381.
Podargus
cuvieri, 188.
Peeocephalus
senegalus, 318.
Polydesma
boarmoides, 448.
brevipalpis, 448.
711
Polyommatus
ariana, 368.
beticus, 365, 425.
chandala, 426.
karsandra, 367, 426.
nazira, 368.
sangra, 427.
sena, 369.
tamu, 368.
vardhana, 367.
varunana, 427.
Polyplectron
chinguis, 193.
Polyptichus
dentatus, 435.
Porphyrio
vitiensis, 330.
Porthesia
marginalis, 438.
wanthorrhea, 336.
Porthetria
Japonica, 386.
obfuscata, 386.
Pradatta
beatrix, 442, 465.
bivitta, 442.
Praopus
hirsutus, 420.
Precis
ada, 346.
ida, 344.
Prionodon
maculosus, 65, 66.
Prodenia
caradrinoides, 380.
infecta, 444.
retina, 443.
Prognathodus
gintheri, 531.
Propasser
grandis, 353.
rhodochlamys, 353.
rhodometopus, 353.
Prostherapis
Semoralis, 412.
Prothedes
frausa, 446.
veprecula, 445.
Protoparce
abadonna, 271.
distans, 271.
orientalis, 379, 435,
436.
Psalis
securis, 438.
Psammapessa, gen. nov.
589.
Psammella, gen. noyv.,
589.
Psamminex, subfam. nov.,
589.
712
Psammopessine, subfam.
noy., 589.
Pseudis
mantidactyla, 412.
Psilopogon
pyrolophus, 352.
Pternohyla
fodiens, 413.
Pterocles
alchata, 195.
arenarius, 195.
Pteromys
cinerascens, 67.
melanotis, 73.
nitidus, '73, 74.
petaurista, 67.
tephromelas, 74.
Pteropus
edulis, 67, 73.
medius, 59, 67.
Putorius
nudipes, 73.
Pygospila
tyresalis, 459.
Pyralis
elachia, 383.
glaucinalis, 383.
hybridalis, 384.
incongrua, 383,
395.
lucillalis, 457.
nannodes, 383.
rusticalis, 384.
uberalis, 457.
yokohamne, 383.
Pyrameis
cardui, 424.
indica, 361.
Pyrausta
stultalis, 457.
Pyrgus
evanidus, 378.
galba, 433.
Pyrinia
phenico-teniata, 388.
Querquedula
cyanoptera, 401.
oxyptera, 401.
pund, 401,
Radinacra
variana, 444, 465.
Rana
agilis, 414.
arvalis, 242, 248.
bombina, 499.
buergert, 412.
bufoniformis, 411.
esculenta, 242.
INDEX.
Rana
JSorreri, 412.
granulata, 412.
guppyi, 411.
iberica, 242, 412.
latastii, 412.
macrocnemis, 412.
macropus, 412, 414.
martensi, 412, 414.
masoni, 412.
nicobariensis, 412.
opisthodon, 411.
pustulosa, 412.
septentrionalis, 411.
sternosignata, 411.
temporaria, 242, 243,
414.
ulcerosa, 412.
Rapala
nissa, 370.
Rappia
burtonii, 412.
Recurvirostra
andina, 396, 404.
Remigia
archesia, 451.
Srugalis, 451.
optativa, 449.
optatura, 449.
Reteplax, gen. noyv.,
589.
Rhacophorus
dispar, 412.
lateralis, 412.
Rhagerrhis
multimaculata, 124.
Rheithrodon
alstoni, 64.
Rheumaptera
brunneicillata, 393.
Rhinobatus
granulatus, 531.
Rhinoceros
bicornis, 125, 144.
lasiotis, 266.
simus, 125, 143, 144.
sumatrensis, 266.
Rhinocichla
mitrata, 351, 352.
Rhinolophus
bihastatus, 94.
blasti, 96.
eurygale, 94.
Serrum-equinun, 94.
hipposideros, 94.
trifoliatus, 67.
Rhinomiyias
pectoralis, 354.
Rhipidornis
gulielmi-ter tii,
298.
297,
Rhizomys
badius, 65, 71.
castaneus, 71.
pruinosus, 65.
Rhodaria
juncturalis, 457.
Rbhombophryne
testudo, 412.
Rhopalopsyche
nycteris, 378.
| Rhynchina
sp. n., 382,
pervulgalis, 452.
rylina, 452.
Rhynchonella
nigricans, 182.
psittacea, 182.
pyxidata, 182.
Risoba
obstructa, 448.
| Rumia
crategaria, 388.
mimulina, 388.
Sabbaria
peeroza, 48,
Salatura
genutia, 421.
Salbia
perspicualis, 458.
| Salmo
fario, 507.
| Samea
inscitalis, 458.
magna, 383.
yerburii, 383, 895.
| Samia
ceanothi, 2, 3, 4.
cecropia, 2, 3.
Saturnia
carpini, 3.
simla, 387.
Satyrus
nareda, 359.
parisatus, 357.
saraswati, 357.
schakra, 358.
swaha, 357.
' (Cyllo) neelgherriensis,
424,
Saula
nigripes, 161.
Scaphiopus
couchii, 413.
Scelidotherium
ankilosopum, 492.
bellulum, 492.
bravardi, 494, 496,
497, 498.
bucklandi, 492.
capellini, 492.
Scelidotherium
chiliense, 496, 497, 498.
leptocephalum, 491,
492, 493, 494, 495,
496, 497, 498.
minutum, 492.
oweni, 492.
peruviense, 494.
tartjense, 491, 492, 495,
496.
(Platyonyx) dbrongni-
arti, 495.
Schcenobius
bisignatus, 461.
Sciuropterus
alboniger, 59.
davisoni, 74, 75.
Jjimbriatus, 59.
horsfieldi, 75.
lepidus, 75.
pearsoni, 60, 74, 75.
sagitta, 75.
spadiveus, 75.
Sciurus
atrodorsalis, 70, 76.
badging, 76, 77, 78.
berdmorei, 71, 78.
bicolor, 67, 75.
blanfordi, 68, 69.
caniceps, 68, 69.
— concolor, 70, 76.
— griseimanus, 69.
— phayrii, 69.
— pygerythrus, 69.
— typicus, 69, 70.
chrysonotus, 70,
concolor, 69, 70.
erythreus, 61, 76.
Serrugineus germaini,
griseimanus, 68.
hippurus, 76.
indicus, 60.
inornatus, 69.
insignis, 78.
leucopus, 69.
lokriah, 61.
lokrioides, 61.
macclellandi, 61.
— barbei, 61, 71.
— swinhoei, 61.
— typicus, 61.
modestus, 69.
mouhoti, 71.
nigrovittatus, 76,77.
palmarum, 56.
pernyi, 71.
phayrii, 68, 69, 70.
plantani, 76.
prevosti, 76.
punctatissimus, 61.
INDEX.
Sciurus
pygerythrus, 68.
rufigenis, 65,71.
tenuis, 76, 78.
vittatus, '76.
(Rhinoseiurus) laticau-
datus, 78.
Scolecomorphus
kirkii, 414.
Seopula
damastesalis, 460.
fotalis, 384.
strenualis, 460.
vinectalis, 384, 460.
Scopus
umbretta, 323.
Seotosia
dubiosata, 893.
venimaculata, 393.
vitreata, 390.
Selepa
celtis, 449.
curviferclla, 449.
occulta, 449.
Semnopithecus
albocinereus, 73.
femoralis, 66, 72.
obscurus, 66.
siamensis, 72.
Sephisa
dichroa, 360.
Sesia
saundersti, 378.
Setaria
pectoralis, 354.
Setomorpha
tineoides, 465.
Sibia
picata, 351.
simillima, 351. 352.
Sigmodon
hispidus, 64.
Silicea, subel. nov., 577.
Siphia
cacharensis, 354.
olivacea, 354.
poliogenys, 354.
Smerinthus
ocellatus, 3.
populi, 3.
tilie, 3.
Somena
scintillans, 385.
Spadix
vegetus, 453.
Spathomeles
decoratus, 155.
inflatus, 154, 163.
ornatus, 155.
Speiredonia
helicina, 450.
Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1886, No. XLVII.
|
Spelerpes
eruvianus, 413.
Spheniseus
demersus, 320.
Sphingomorpha
chlorea, 450.
Sphingurus
prehensilis, 212.
Sphinx
abadonna, 271.
alecto, 379, 434.
belis, 434.
celerio, 379, 434.
eysseus, 436.
dentata, 435.
godarti, 271.
hespera, 379, 435.
hylas, 434.
ligustri, 3.
livonica, 379, 435.
morpheus, 379.
nerit, 4395.
oldenlandia, 454.
stellatarum, 378.
thyelia, 434.
Sphyranuria
osleri, 343.
Spilosoma
punetistriga, 437.
Spinacorhinus
polyspondylus, 528.
Spindasis
acamas, 369.
bellatriz, 369.
epargyros, 369.
hypargyros, 369,
3995,
Spiramia
helicina, 450.
Spodoptera
ctiliwm, 444.
infecta, 444.
Spongelissinz, subfam.
nov., 589.
Spongissa, gen. nov.,
58
Squaloraja
polyspondyla, 527,
538. ,
tenuispina, 530, 538.
Stegania
uvidula, 455.
Steganopus
wilsoni, 297.
Stenetrium
haswelli, 1038.
Stenopteryx
hybridalis, 384.
Stenotarsus
russatus, 161.
stearius, 161.
47
714
Stenotarsus
vallatus, 161, 162.
Stephanotrochus
diadema, 130, 131,
132.
discoides, 181.
moselcyanus, 128, 130,
131, 182, 136.
nobilis, 180, 131.
platypus, 130, 131.
Sterna
bergii, 336.
bernsteini, 436.
Suliginosa, 6, 337.
melanauchen, 337.
Sterrha
paulula, 456, 465.
sacraria, 390, 456.
Stibolepis
nivea, 410.
sylvia, 410.
Stictomela
chrysomeloides, 156,
157, 163.
opulenta, 156.
Strepsiceros
imberbis, 176, 266.
Strepsilas
interpres, 336.
Strix
jlammea, 179.
pratincola, 153.
Struthio
molybdophanes, 320.
Styphlos, gen. noy.,
58.
Suastus
gremius, 483.
Suberamatide, fam. nov.,
584.
Subrita
curviferella, 449.
Sula
piscator, 335,
Surattha
albipennis, 383.
invectalis, 383, 462.
Sus
niger, 217, 218.
papuensis, 217, 218.
Susica
cosmiana, 440, 465.
Sraterna, 440.
Sycalis
aureiventris, 395, 897.
uropygialis, 396, 897.
Sympetrum
Sonscolombei, 325, 326.
striolata, 326.
subpruinosum, 826,
329.
1
INDEX,
Symphedra
nais, 425.
Synallaxis
modesta, 395, 398.
Synchloé
daplidice, 375.
Synotus
“barbastellus, 94, 95.
Syntomis
conjinis, 436.
cyssea, 436.
Tachycineta
thalassina, 502.
Tadorna
rutila, 2.
Teenia
nana, 505.
Tajuria
Jehana, 429.
Talorchestia
tumida, d.
Tanais
hirsutus, 116.
Tarache
nivosd, 446, 465.
Taractoeera
sagard, 434,
Taragama
ganesa, 440,
Tarucus
balkanica, 366.
extricatus, 366,
395.
nara, 866, 427.
plinius, 427.
theophrastus, 366,
428.
Tatusia
novemeincta, 419.
peba, 419,
Taxila
dipea, 364.
drupadi, 364.
durga, 364.
eugenes, 364,
orphna, 364.
Tegna
hybleella, 463.
Telchinia
viole, 424.
Telea
polyphemus, 2.
Telicota
augias, 433.
Tephrina
arenaria, 456.
granitalis, 456.
incessarta, 890,
lithnia, 456.
zebrina, 456,
Teracolus
bimbura, 373, 374,
432.
etrida, 373.
Jarrinus, 373, 374.
Sausta, 373.
faustinus, 373.
pernotatus, 375, 432.
protractus, 372.
purus, 373, 374.
Terias
esiope, 371, 372, 480.
asphedelus, 430.
drona, 480.
excavata, 872, 450.
Jimbriata, 371, 372.
hecabe, 372, 430.
hecabeoides, 430.
hybrida, 48.
irregularis, 371.
Jegeri, 372.
leta, 872, 429.
narcissus, 430.
purreea, 371, 372,
430.
rotundularis, 371,
312.
rubella, 480.
suava, 371.
vagans, 372.
venata, 430.
Testudo
Jiskii, 540, 542.
geometrica, 540, 541.
semiserrata, 542.
smithii, 540, 542.
tentoria, 541.
trimeni, 540, 541.
verreauxit, 540, 541.
Tethiopsamma, gen. nov.,
Tethiopsamminze, sub-
fam. nov., 583.
Tethyamatine, subfam.
nov., 583.
Tethynx, subfam, nov.,
583.
Tethyopsillidee, fam. noy.,
583.
Tethyorhaphine, subfam.
noy., 083.
Tetrao
albo-tetrix hybridus,
225.
lagopides, 235.
lagopodi-tetricides, 233.
lagopoides, 233.
tetrix, 224, 225, 226,
227,. 228, 231, 232,
238, 2384, 235, 236,
238, 239, 240, 419.
Tetrao
urogalloides, 235.
urogallo-tetricides, 335.
urogallo-tetrix, 235.
urogallus, 224, 282,
233, 234, 239.
Thais
polyxena, 2.
Thalassodes
opalina, 390.
Thalpochares
rivula, 447.
roseana, 447.
Thalpophila
rubescens, 442.
Thecla
nissa, 370.
rama, 364.
Thinocorus
orbignyanus, 403.
Thyrgorina
sp. nov., 385.
Timandra
diatemaria, 454.
Tinamotis
pentlandi, 396, 404.
Tinea
pulchella, 436.
subochraceella,
465.
Tinnunculus
punctatus, 337.
Tirumala
limniace, 421.
Tortrix
subsequanda, 463.
Totanus
Jlavipes, 404.
incanus, 79.
melanoleucus, 404.
Toxocampa
lilacina, 881.
orientalis, 381.
Trabala
vishnou, 386.
vishnu, 440.
Tragulus
kanchil, 72,
napu, 71.
Trichopleon, noy. gen.,
106.
ramoswm, 106,
Trigonodes
compar, 382.
gammoides, 381.
hippasia, 451.
hyppasia, 382.
Trilocha
varians, 440,
Tringa
bairdi, 404.
464,
79.
INDEX,
Tringa
maculata, 404,
subarquata, 336.
Triprion
spatulatus, 413.
Trisula
variegata, 440.
Trithemis
aurora, 327, 329.
festiva, 327.
intermedia, 327, 329.
rubrinervis, 327.
Trochilus
alexandri, 501, 502.
Tupaia
belangeri, 59, 67.
ferrugined, 67, 73.
javanica, 73.
peguana, 67.
Turdus
chiguanco, 395, 396.
merula, 186, 187.
Turtur
auritus, 81.
Typhlapseudes, nov. gen.,
Als
nereus, 115.
Typhlotanais
brachyurus, 117.
kerguelenensis, 117.
Udea
fotalis, 384.
Upucerthia
atacamensis, 398.
ruficauda, 395, 398.
Urapteryx
clara, 388.
yerburii, 388,
Urogalba
paradisea, 470.
Trola
inclaralis, 462.
Vandeleuria
oleracea, 65.
Vanellus
resplendens, 396, 403.
Vanessa
antiopa, 2.
atalanta, 2.
bolini, 333.
charonia, 361.
kaschmirensis, 361,
levana, 2.
—, var. prorsa, 2.
Vespertilio
africanus, 96.
bechsteinti, 94, 96.
blasii, 95.
chinensis, 96.
715
Vespertilio
daubentoni, 96.
dobsoni, 96.
emarginatus, 96.
majori, 95.
murinoides, 96.
murinus, 94, 95.
mystacinus, 96.
oxygnathus, 94, 95.
Vesperugo
abramus, 59.
discolor, 96.
kuhli, 95.
—, var. albicans, 95.
—, var. pullatus,
95.
leisleri, 94, 95.
leucippe, 96.
nathusii, 96.
nattereri, 96.
noctula, 99.
pipistrellus, 95.
savit, 9).
serotinus, 94.
(Vesperus) pachypus,
59.
(—) serotinus, 95.
Virachola
isocrates, 428.
Viverra
ichneumon, 56.
mungo, 56.
Viverricula
malaccensis, 5d.
Vulpes
bengalensis, 56.
leucopus, 56.
Xanthodes
graelisiz, 380.
znnocens, 380.
Xema
sabinii, 81.
Xenorhynehus
senegalensis, 323, 324.
Ypthima
alemola, 423.
alkibie, 422.
ariaspa, 425.
avanta, 359.
complexiva, 423, 465.
dedalea, 423.
inica, 422, 423.
mahratta, 423.
nareda, 359.
newboldi, 359.
nikea, 359.
ordinata, 358, 359.
rara, 423.
sakra, 359.
716
Zebronia
aurolineatus, 458.
graphicalis, 459,
obrinusalis, 459.
perspicualis, 458.
plutusalis, 459,
INDEX.
Zizera
chandala, 367, 426.
decreta, 367, 568.
dicreta, 427.
diluta, 367.
karsandra, 367, 426,
maha, 357, 368, 425.
THE END,
Zizora
putli, 355.
pygmed, 427.
sangra, 367, 368, 427.
Zygena
caschmirensis, 885.
malleus, 334.
Printed by Taytor and Francts, Red Lion Court, Fleet Street.
WS
mE
eg
~ PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS
ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY
OF LONDON,
FOR THE YEAR
- 1886..
PART I. |
CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN
tee Ge ~ /
Yaar wis |
JUNE ist, 1886. NN
PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, ~*~. h]
SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE. |
LONDON :
MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO,
’ PATERNOSTER-ROW.
yk a. Cx
F Price Twelve Shillings. lease
[Price Twelve Shillings. | ro
ee
LIST OF CONTENTS.
PART I.—1886.
January 19, 1886.
Page
The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie in December 1885 .... a
The Secretary. Exhibition of Lepidopterous Insects bred in the Insect-house during the
PASE REABODS Fors ale ta tase a: win nkn'pileve dole siete eyetateeiege tes ole esey Oe" o maicle tats tele at ove/sl ev eerede st tate 2
Mr: A. Thomson.© Report onthe Insect-houge! ws dice wo ce’ civi o's 0/e/sie mielel aves lchelehsleelaeannte 2
Rey. T. R. R. Stebbing. Notice, and Abstract of a Memoir, on some new Amphipodous
Crustaceans from Singapore and New Zealand ..........0+..seeecescsaeceeeees 4
Dr. C. 8. Minot. Letter from, calling attention to the Elizabeth Thompson Science Fund... 6
Mr. Howard Saunders. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, an adult specimen of the Sooty
Tern (Sterna fuliginosa) caught near Bath
1. On Butterflies of the Genus Parnassius. By H. J. Euwes, F.Z.8. (PlatesI.-IV.) .... 6
2. On the Mammals presented by Allan O. Hume, Esq., O.B., to the Natural History Museum.
By Ouprieip Tuomas, F.Z.S. (Plates V. & VI.) ........c0eeceeees ate «1eiehs crated 54
3. On an apparently new Species of Duck (Dajla) from the Central Pacific. By H. B. -
SRIstRAs, O.DESH RSs. (Plate WiLL \s cccar yw cts eiausieaie cetera vic fi eaterciars eect ca ee 79
Pe
4. Note on Aporia hippia. By A. G. Burumr, F.LS., H.Z.8., &e. cece. cence ssveneeecs 80
February 2, 1886.
“s
Mr. W. B. Tegetmeier, F.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a skin of a Pheasant from
the: Persian ‘borders of Uranscaucasiay aa.sh Jess <b cneeecise .s bewe ieee ennee 81
Mr. C. A. Wright. Exhibition of a specimen of a Dove from Malta .......+....eeceueee 81
Mr. W. H. Dobie. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Sabine’s Gull (Xema
sabinii), shot at Mostyn, on the coast of Flintshire, North Wales
eee te we reer ee esae
Mr. Henry Seebohm.. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Ross’s Gull (Larus
rossi), shot near Christianshaab, in Greenland
Prof. R. Collett, C.M.Z.S. Notice of a Memoir containing an Account of the External
Characters of the Northern Fin-whale
8 0 00.00 OO ce wie oe e 06.0 BE Oviee se uw 06 6 0 ewe
CONTENTS (continued).
Page
1. Notes on Freshwater Entomostraca from South Australia. By Grorcr Srewarpson
Brapy, M.D., F.R.8., F.L.S., Professor of Natural History in the Durham College
of Science, Newcastle-upon-Tyne, (Plates VIII.-X.) ............cceescsccceoes 82
2. Contribution to a Knowledge of the South-Italian Chiroptera. By Fr. 8. Monrrcettt, D.Sc.
(Communicated by Dr. H. Woopwarp, F.R.S., F.G.S.) 0.0.0... 0c cece cece cece eeee 93
3. Notes on Specimens in the Hume Collection of Birds. By R. Bowotrr Suarre, F.L,S., &e.
Mt caithe Hawfinch from Attook > «0.7. ssveiccte'y sides Waceccteces ccevusesssca’ 96
4. Preliminary Notice of the Isopoda collected during the Voyage of H.M.S. ‘Challenger.’—
Part III. By Fravyg E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., F.Z.S., Prosector to the Society.. 97
5. On a Variety of Anthocharis eupheno, from Mogador. By J. H. Lexcn, F.ZS. ........ 122
6. On a ay Species of Bird of the Genus Copsychus. By R. G. Warviaw Rawaay, F.Z.S.,
Pareto fatten! eft royal cinreleta:eve\sTals’s-</5(ofs's) sical sip" aiaiati Ware's itl afore 7h «Wi sveusle says alee nals’ 123
February 16, 1886.
The Secretary, Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie in January 1886...... 124
Mr. Sclater. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of a newly described Paradise
EVI (EGA ASCITES PREDOLDID)) as csltveie opsisye este eeeiclend eit ee ¢ disis'e s-ed/a's ew bly ais eects 25
Mr. L. Taczanowski, C.M.Z.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a skin of an Owl (Bubo
blakistoni) from the Ussuri country on the frontiers of Corea ......0+..+-++ 0200s: 125
Mr, Edward Gerrard, Jun. Exhibition of specimens of the heads and skulls of two African
Rhinoceroses (Rhinoceros bicornis and R. simus) ......++.. {Obes oonapmep ei Oe 125
Prof. Ray Lankester. Exhibition of a drawing of a restoration of Archeopteryx .......... 125
1. Notes on a striking instance of Cranial Variation due to Age. By Oxprietp THomas, .
PONE PAL HIBLONy) NENSOUMI CE TAG CRs eiiicts ais sis0s scjccleviedlcecewesas suisesysees 125
2. On a new Madreporarian Coral of the Genus Stephanotrochus from the British Seas, with
Notes on its Anatomy. By W.L. Scrarer, B.A., F.Z.S., Assistant to the Jodrell
Professor of Zoology, University College, London. (Plates XII.-XIV.) ..-....+55 128
LIST OF PLATES.
1886.
PAARL 1:
Plate Page
if, ;
a Structure and Development of Parnassius ......++++....+++--. 6.
Ve
SVS SMa Until sas crore nina. «fences shel aoa os alec eee Ae renera oaricn ic 54
VI. Sciuropterus davisoni ......---. 21+ eee ees e eens 256 a vieaseein®
VEL.< ~-Dafila modest. ieivite cn .sie0 sia dhe ops tie aisle» « caiejs/eiaie woh n)e's\-feke 79
VII.
TX. New Australian Entomostraca ........ 00.02. .0cecccesesencrs 82
xX.
XI. Skulls of Mustela pennantii ............--.2.00.5 2 ees Peas 125
XII.
XIII. } Stephanotrochus moseleyanus ........+0....seee sere ee eee ee 128
XIV.
NOTICE.
According to present arrangements the ‘ Proceedings’ are issued in four parts,
as follows :— §
Part I. containing papers read in January and February, on June Ist.
Wie 3 * » March and April, on August Ist.
IIT. Ss a », May and June, on October Ist.
IV. ‘A Fi, » November and December, on April lst.
The price is 12s, per part for the edition with coloured, and 3s. per pe for
that with uncoloured Plates.
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS
OF THE
ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY
OF LONDON,
FOR THE YEAR
1886.
PART II.
CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN
ate +b ¥e
49
anit bon
PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY,
SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE.
LONDON :
MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO,
PATERNOSTER-ROW.
[Price Twelve Shillings. }
LIST OF CONTENTS.
PART II.—1886.
March 2, 1886.
Page
The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie in February 1886 .... 137
Mr. J. G. Millais, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, specimens of the Ivory Gull
(Larus eburneus), shot in:Seotland = (122: .siniswisiay ne erste. *itle dio.a) Sepug es Clee aa 137
Mr. T. D. Cockerell. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a living specimen of a Variety of
Parmacella valenciennesi ...+...e0erececacecesereccacers Outs» setae eee ee 137
1. On a new Pediculate Fish from the Sea off Madeira. By Rosert Cotzert, C.M.Z.S.
(Plate IOV.) -<.c's.6uci~,cnidscerscaiatenicrcies esos «alate ovstesotn alarstorasie atcie Stee nee emet 3)
2. Note on the External Characters of Rhinoceros simus. By P. L. Scuarrr, M.A., F.BS.,
Secretary. to\the!Society.; (Plate: X VE) in 4.00 c'nitewee ss ces bien -p oe ae eee 148
3. Note on the Air-sacs of the Cassowary. By Franx E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., Prosector
to, the Saclaby ©... sis.tecee uw setae wins steele dimalew’e'n siniwiatalelde an cietsahece aes 145
4. On the Syrinx and other Points in the Anatomy of the Caprimulgide. By Frank E.
BepparD, M.A., F.R.S.E., Prosector to the Society ........ oneatav caste memes 147
March 16, 1886.
Mr. F. D. Godman, F.R.S. Exbibition of a series of examples of Danais plexippus from
Varlous:localities: .. 50. sseccccce ss ie) © ale\ss:e\aie a\al= «isiaheoiswie'vicce AEC e ee Hissc oe 154
Professor Bell. Remarks upon the Species of Balanoglossus exhibited to the Society on
November J7th last year ......-..... efoleteWe aiateieta strict €.s\efnvoce = oia/ sate =) sateen - 154
1. On new Genera and Species of Endomychide. By the Rev. H. S. Gornan, F.ZS.,
HES) V(Rlate AVILES)" to's vos winic reais. i<'0 sn 010/0-0/6ia'e.6lol gre ei sie lait sistem cise ne ae 154
2. On the so-called Pelvisternum of certain Vertebrates. By R. J. Anperson, M.D., M.A.,
Professor of Natural History, Queen’s College, Galway............-..eeeeeeeeees 163
3. Note on Bipalium kewense, and the Generic Characters of Land-Planarians. By Professor
F, Jerrrey Bett, M.A., Sec.R.M.S. (Plate XVIIL.) ......0ccesscs.scaccccess 166
April 6, 1886.
The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie in March 1886 ...... 176
Mr. J. B. Martin, F.Z.S. Exhibition of a large Tusk of the Indian Elephant
Mr. Sclater. Exhibition of, and remarks -upon, the Heads and Horns of two Species of
Antelopes from Lamoo, East Africa (Strepsiceros imberbis and Damalis senegalensis) . 176
Dr. H. Woodward. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, specimens of animals commensal or
parasitic in the shell of Meleagrina margaritifera ......sceeeeeeceee viaee ae asieee 176
1. On some Points in the Anatomy of Chauna chavaria. By Frank E. Bepparp, M.A.,
F-.E.8.E., B.Z.5.; Brosector tothe Baciety (sec... jcc ccciacee cs sais + cin ee ecient as
2, On a Brachiopod of the Genus Afretia, named in MS. by the late Dr. T. Davidson. By
Miss Acnes Cranz. (Communicated by Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S.) ...... 181
3, Observations on the Disposition of the Cubital Coverts in Birds. By J. G. Goopcump,
E.Z.8., F.G.8., H.M. Geological Survey 5... ..06-cc-ccenesceecce sees aele hematite 184
4. Second Note on the Melanotic Variety of the South-African Leopard. By Dr. A.
Ginmraen, EoZ6.. noc ee neice saneaterimece ceaeet a stadettaateteree brn" eleis aretee Sees
Contents continued on page 4 of wrapper.
1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 265
as a rule a little in advance of the last third of the body. Vent
placed exactly under hindermost edge of the dorsal fin. Flippers
unusually small, measuring about +1; of the total length of the body.
Baleen black ; the bristles fine, white, and curling. The number of
plates about 330 ; their greatest length 650 millim., not including the
bristles. Jaws long, being to the total length about as | to 43.
Balenoptera musculus, Comp. 1828. Norwegian Finhval
(‘‘ Finner Whale ”).—Length 60 to 65 feet, seldom exceeding 70
feet. Form of the body very elongate ; the greatest height is to the
total length as 1 to 63 or 6#. Colour greyish slate above, also the
left lower jaw ; the whole underside, the right lower jaw, the inner
side of the flippers, and the underside of the flukes white. Dorsal
fin rather low, with almost straight margins; it is placed some-
what. forward, or very slightly in front of the last fourth of the body.
Vent placed just beneath the anterior edge of the dorsal fin.
Flippers rather small, measuring about } of the total length of the
body. Baleen with the bristles dark bluish black or slate-colour ;
_ on the right side, the first rows are white or whitish. The number
of the plates between 350 and 370; their greatest length about
950 millim., not including the bristles. Jaws of moderate length,
being to the total length as 1 to 5.
Balenoptera sibbaldi, Gray, 1847. Norwegian Blaahval (‘“ Blue
Whale ’’).—Length about 70 to 80 feet, seldom exceeding 85 feet.
Form of the body more robust than the last species, the greatest
height is to the total length as 1 to 53. Colour dark bluish grey,
with small whitish spots on the breast; the lower edge of the
flippers and their inner sides white. Dorsal fin particularly low
and small, with straight margins ; it is placed far back, close to the
commencement of the last quarter of the body. Vent placed in
front of the vertical line from the anterior edge of the dorsal fin.
Flippers large, measuring about + of the total length of the body.
Baleen with the bristles black. |The number of the plates up to 400
(according to Dr. Guldberg); their greatest length (according to Dr.
Nansen) 930 millim., not including the bristles. Jaws long, being
to the total length as 1 to 43.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
PuatTEe XXV.
Fig. 1. Side view of Balenoptera borealis, male.
2. Lower surface of ditto.
Puatse XXVI.
Fig. 1. Lower surface of Balenoptera borealis, female.
2. One of the whitish spots on the skin; enlarged.
Contents (continued).
April 20, 1886.
P
Mr. O. Salvin, F.R.S. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a mine specimen of Bipalium ne
kewense, found at Hawksfold, Sussex....--...++-.. Bis, ovis viw.e ¢ bcscvaidiae ates eee
Mr. R. A. Sterndale, F.Z.S. Extract from a letter addressed to Sir Victor Brooke, concerning
a case of hybridism between Ovis hodgsoni and O. vignei ......-...-+++++ ea istiniawe:s
1. On some Specimens of Disease from Mammals in the Society’s Gardens. By J. Brann
Surron, F.R.0.8., Erasmus Wilson Lecturer on Pathology, Royal College of Surgeons,
2
Lecturer and Assistant Surgeon tothe Middlesex Hospital .....................- 206
2. On a new Species of Wild Pig from New Guinea. By Dr. O. Finscu, C.M.Z.S. &e. .... 217
3. On the Relations of the Mandibular and Hyoid Arches in a Cretaceous Shark (Hybddus
dubrisiensis, Mackie). By A. Surra Woopwarp, F.G.S., of the British Museum
(Natural History). (Communicated by the Secretary.) (Plate XX.).............. 218
4. On the Hybrid between fagopes albus and Tetrao tetrix, By Roserr Coutert, C.M.Z.S.
(Plates XXI., XXII.) ....... sicipth t clals wintercre! otaiepetele pac eieie trol stetsteiets Visio ate eqateneten « 224
5. Description of a new Iguanoid Lizard living in the Society's Gardens. By G. A.
Boutencer, F.Z.8. (Plate XXIII.) .......... ciate tein teete eels seieeiere riper reac et
6, Remarks on Specimens of Rana arvalis exhibited in the Society’s Menagerie. By G. A.
BoutenceEr, F.Z,8. (Plate XXIV.) ........:.---- ORE RE IIA Hc ASIC ee eater
APPENDIX.
On the External Characters of ee a a (Balenoptera borealis). By Ropert
Couiett, C.M.Z.8. (Plates XXV., XXVI_.)........+2-2-2-- 00 BEER Scot oee 2s 243
LIST OF PLATES.
1886.
PAS Was
Plate Page
XY. Linophryne lucifer .......+....-+.00: afar giajensts walavn sieinlehe stats 138
XVI. Fig. 1. Head of Rhinoceros simus. Fig. 2. Head of R. bicornis 143
XVII. New Coleoptera of the Family Endomychide ........-- eelaaree kore
XVIII. Bipalium kewense, in various stages of contraction ....--...-. 166
XIX. Acanthodrilus layardi .......,.+-...-. satel etelete sf steer i Gone aks:
XX. Hybodus dubrisiensis, Mackie .,.......... cl ae ate, eayeeiaat «> 218
XXIL cir Hybria Grouse between Lagopus albus and Tetrao tetrix ...... 224
XXIII. Ctenosaura erythromelas...........cseceeeeresteceneetces . 241
XXIV. Rana arvalis........ .... Wahdln:0.6 gia8, ein Bio's ounte sic leinis piacotgs ccee 242
ae } Balanoptera borealis Re EiBee ealasaledaiefaisiatoieia’ whelsie ioichereN rate ain oles earns
TES ieee Wes 1 a ee
‘NOTICE.
According to present arrangements the ‘ Proceedings’ are issued in four parts,
as follows :—
Part I. containing papers read in January and February, on June Ist.
3 e % » March and April, on August Ist.
Iii. es a », May and June, on October Ist.
IV. 4 “7 »» November and December, on April Ist. —
The price is 12s. per part for the edition with coloured, and 3s. per part for
that with uncoloured Plates.
205
a
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS
OF THE
ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY
‘OF LONDON,
FOR THE YEAR
1886.
PART TE,
CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN
BS
-
apes
OCTOB. , 1886.
PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, |
SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE. |
LONDON: .
MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO,
PATERNOSTER-ROW. |
yy a
Si [Price Twelve Shillings.]
LIST OF CONTENTS.
PART III.—1886.
May 4, 1886.
é Page
The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie in April 1886 ........ 266
Mr. E. L. Layard. Exhibition of a rare Beetle, and of a series of Shells of the genus Bulimus 267
Mr. F. W. Styan, F.Z.S. Letter from, respecting some Chinese animals ......- siecle oOdl
1. Remarks on four rare Species of Moths of the Family Sphingide. By W. F. Kirsy, Assis-
tant in Zoological Department, British Museum (S. Kensington), (Plate XXVII.).. 269
2. Observations on the Ovarian Ovum of Lepidosiren (Protopterus). By Franx E. Bepparp,
M.A., F.RB.S.E., Prosector to the Society. (Plates XXVIII. & XXIX.) ............ 272
3. On the Mode of Attachment of the Ovum of Osmerus eperlanus. By J. T. CunnincHam,
B.A., E.R.S.E., Fellow of University College, Oxford, and Superintendent of the Scot-
tish Marine Station. (Communicated by Mr. F.E. Bepparp.) (Plate XXX.) .... 292
May 18, 1886.
Mr. C. W. Rosset. Exhibition of Photographs taken in the Maldive Islands, and remarks on
his Zoological Collections ..........-.-++ Aer aoc akg Te
Mr. Philip Crowley, F.Z.S. Exhibition of some Pupz of Nocturnal Lepidoptera from
Natal AP oot
eoreetes ry 5
eee ee ee ee
Mr. Joseph Whitaker, F.Z.S. Exhibition of a specimen of Wilson's Phalarope shot in
England «...+-.....- o stuicig/S'siala(wicomne eisinid!siwinleisioisinjee sajsiain Vive ce cssece eeseeeee
1. Ona fourth Male Specimen of King William the Third’s Paradise-bird. By A. B. Meyer,
M.D., Director Royal Zoological Museum of Dresden, C.M.ZS., Ke. ..-+-...-+0++ . 297
2. Descriptions of some new or little-known Earthworms, together with an Account of the
Variations in Structure exhibited by Perionyx excavatus, E.P. By Frank E.
Bepparp, M,A., F.R.S.E., Prosector to the Society «....+.0..-seeeeseeeee emaels co 2OR
3. Remarks on the various Species of Wild Goats. By P. L. Scuater, M.A., Ph.D., F.BS.,
Secretary to the Society. (Plates XXXI. & XXXII) ............. anes: oasis Olaam
June 1, 1886.
The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie in May 1886 ........ 318
Dr. Giinther, F.R.S. Exhibition of a specimen of a small Fish of the genus Fierasfer im-
bedded in a Pearl-Oyster.....0.scecececsccccceeseces esinwia's a i iii
Contents continued on page 3 of wrapper.
i
¢
;
Contents (continued).
Page
Mr. Sclater. Remarks on interesting animals observed during a visit to the Zoological Gar-
dens of Rotterdam, Amsterdam, Cologne, Antwerp, and Ghent..........ee....0--5 ¢ 320
Mr. J. M. Cornély, C.M.Z.S. ae from, respecting the breeding of Michie’s Deer in his
Menagerie .........-0e4- Mt Seerats atthe ojetatsiwialarare e+ ai-s'efein/hiefola, Arejare 4 iwa ona @u'eisls en a's 320
1. Notes on the Convoluted Trachea of a Curassow (Nothocrax urumutum), and on the
Syrinx in certain Storks. By Frank E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., Prosector to
the Society «+........+005- ey OPE er or Cee Medan ou meine eG a aptamer
2. On a small Collection of Dragonflies from Murree and Campbellpore (N.W. India),
received from Major J. W. Yerbury, R.A. By W. F. Kirsy, Assistant in Zoological
Department, British Museum. (Plate XXXTIT.) ........ cess ee ceeeee nese ee ens 3
June 29, 1886.
The Secretary. Exhibition, on behalf of Mr. J. Brazier, C.M.Z.S., of a series of 55 eggs laid
by a Pacific Porphyrio -.............. Sb POE: SOD OOIOn CODC: DUOO err. 330
Capt. J. A. M. Vipan, F.Z.S. Letter from, on the mode of Nesting of a South-American
Siluroid Fish (COO Tatlig/ s-UCCOT AUS) ajninie)cisicis 05010. 6 .ujs)e's.a'e vac osie e cieis'eins pieenn dine 330
1. General Observations on the Fauna of Diego Garcia, Chagos Group. By Gixperr C.
IBOURWE, W.A., Now Colleze, Oxford. <n seuss ccs cc ccects ce aucceteessassrssee 33)
2. On the Birds obtained by Mr. G. C. Bourne on the Island of Diego Garcia, chase Group.
By Howarp Saunpers, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &e. 2.0... cece cece eeeees wa se gin eale aida eae 335
3. On the Intervertebral Disk between the Odontoid Process and the Centrum of the Axis
inMan. By J. Buanp Surron, F.R.C.S., Lecturer on Comparative Anatomy, Middle-
sex Hospital Medical School ...... cishiere’avecc/s gsi sie watt siatn Grote. N's ein! s ns TROT See
4. Note on an Ectoparasite of the Menobranch. By Prof. R. Ramsay Waicut, F.Z.S. ....
5. Descriptions of some new Species of Rhopalocera from the Solomon Islands. ie GeERVASE
F, Maruew, Staff-Paymaster Royal Navy, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &. (Plate XXXIV.) ..
6. Notes on some Birds from Perak. By R. BowpieEr Suarpre, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &.. Zoological
337
343
. 343
Department, British Museum ....--....-+e00ee pala le Oe alae 5.169 «\cel else Sate et 350
7. Notes on Specimens in the Hume Collection of Birds. By R. Bowptrr Suarps, F.L.S. &e.
8. On pha ee collected by Major Yerbury in Western India. By Artuur G. Burier,
398
Rey Aang ORAL LALO! ACNKLV,)oin.oy sistance oaseaticabecuss ccssadwtueneiudan se 339
9. List of a Collection of Birds from the Province of Tarapacd, Northern Chili. By P. L.
Scuarer, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Society. (Plate XXXVI.)..........
10. Note on the Presence of a Columella (Epipterygoid) in the Skull of Jchthyosaurus. By
A. Smirn Woopwarp, F.G.S., of the British Museum (Natural History). (Communi-
cated by Professor Fiower, Lis De ERS President: )\¢sics aioe wind veiw cle anevaenevns 405
11. Descriptions of some new Species of Heterocera from Tropical Africa. By Herserr
395
Drocez, F.L.S., F.R.G.S., F.Z.8. (Plates XXXVII. & XXXVIIT.) ................ 409
12, na Report on Additions to the Batrachian Collection in the Natural History Museum.
By G. A. Bourenaczr. (Plate XXXIX.) .......ccecececersanes Hurtin bi alste siete
411
LIST OF PLATES.
1886.
PART IP:
Plate Page
ROGV LT eNew.or rare sphini pins’) tiviete <10'~ vic17 iti ctese ec jeteyerelaserarorete 269
en} Ova of Lepid deinen ices) insve%s + \easiceiapivnis.s.s.c)s0) see ae 272
XXX. Ovum of Osmerus............ aiersic- a sheave sivicaie tae are etelg 292
XXXI. Capra egagrus, ¢ 314
XXXIL Capra sitaiti@atg gage cars ot oe ss pda ee
XXXIII. Dragonflies from N.W. India ....... Bee ok areas we = 825
XXXIV. New Butterflies from the Solomon Islands ...... thee ees (3843 -
XXXY. New Lepidoptera from Western India ........ Seas cvenet 355
XXXVI. Pheenicopterus jamesi i RPE a SA et):
RAV. Attacus alpidtiss.ccictjese cs ees cole acs ciaieeeeee wre Ware te, wa AOD
- 1. Bunea pygela. 2. Anthersa dolabella ....
saga’ {3 Chrysopoloma rosea. as Chrysopoloma citrina. . ob 408
XXXIX. 1. Ixalusasper. 2. Geomolge fischeri ..........+..2000+ 411
NOTICE. ‘
According to present arrangements the ' ie are issued in four parts,
as follows :—
Part I. ae papers read in J. anuary and February, on June Ist.
II. is we” » ~ March and April, on August Ist.
III. on F. »» May and June, on October Ist.
LV egg ns wi 5, November and December, on April Ist. ~
The price is 12s, per part for the edition with coloured, and 3s. per part for
that with uncoloured Plates.
——
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS
OF THE
ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY | |
OF LONDON,
FOR THE YEAR
1886.
PART IV.
CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN
NOVEMBER ann DECEMBER.
APRIL ist, 1887.
PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY,
SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE.
LONDON:
MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO, :
PATERNOSTER-ROW.- |
aaa
LIST OF CONTENTS.
PART IV.—1886.
Page
November 16, 1886.
The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie in June, July, August,
September, and October, 1886
ee ee re |
Dr. Emin Bey. Letter from, containing remarks upon the presence of an Anthropoid Ape
in Eastern Equatorial Africa
CO em meee cere FCO we tee ne ean PH esncc cs Peet couess ose ties
Dr. Chr. Litken, F.M.Z.S8. Letter from, containing a notice of the habitat of Chiropodomys
PCNECHILAGUS: Tass Scirein' w\eis.0cs, sical ates Shale claw «idle waiectiee Taine Sete shetnTaWe ere rohan 418
Dr. A. B. Meyer, C.M.Z.8. Letter from, communicating remarks by Mr. K. G. Henke ona
specimen of Hybrid Grouse in the Dresden Museum .........-..0eeeeecesseecece 419
Prof. Flower. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a rare Species of Armadillo belonging to
the Museum of the Scarborough Philosophical Society ............... Bese Fic 419
Prof. Bell. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, an object made from some portion of the
skin of a Mammal
i i ee ee ie ir irr
Mr. Seebohm. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of the Lesser White-fronted
Goose (Anser albifrons minutus), shot near Holy Island .-......0+..00ee ee eensee 420
Mr. W. T. Blanford. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a stuffed skin of Paradoxurus
Jerdoni
1. On the Lepidoptera of Mhow, in Central India. By Col. ©. Swinnor, V.LS., RZS, _
(Blates XI; & KDE). oe ice cs we geminisn scien <3 ue wees fie si 6.0/2 9,80 s «00 neler 42
bo
. Contributions to the Anatomy of Geococeyx californianus. By R. W. Snuuvrexnt,
C.M.Z.S. (Plates XLII.-XLV.)
3. Description of three Species of Scelidotherium. By R. Lyprxxer, B.A., F.G.S., F.ZS.,
&e. (Plates XV IRR) fen) ofavetceaotetels oiciece'e cece’ « ofclc (ns orev = bicten tee nema 491
. On two European Species of Bombinator. By G. A. Bounencer, F.Z.8. (Plate L.) . B - 499
5. Additional Notes upon the Anatomy of the Trochili, Caprimulgi, and Cypselide. By R.
W: Saurenpr,’ MoD, “OMA: ) ee Save cis'oisin ian lo poi je ehaveselercie cyclerettereie ek ig nae naa ata th}
6. On two Species of Antelopes from Somali-Land. By P. L. Scuarsr, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.,
Secretary to the Society, (Plate LI.) .
Contents (continued).
December 7, 1886.
Prof. Bell. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Tenia nana ............+.4. 505
1. Observations on the Development and Structure of the Ovum in the Dipnoi. By Frayx
BE. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., Prosector to the Society, and Lecturer on Biology at
~ PEIGIAPELORDIGAL. © (ERIN TLL V.): 4. iyo cj. sls iwigin* o hagale sleiuywengelalrelpe ents de a 505
2. On the Anatomy and Systematic Position of the Liassic Selachian, Sgualoraja poly-
spondyla, Agassiz. By A. Smiru Woopwarp, F.G.S., of the British Museum (Natural
Bena cums) Am ee LALA Ll Viel ss areata. cia tvelniee) g:00)8 wiv Sia: yh a'e!cia 3,0: Setelene’s Belaumerdge@ nels eons 527
3. On an apparently new Parrot of the Genus Conwrus living in the Society’s Gardens. By
3 P. L. Sctarer, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Society. (Plate LVI.)........ 538
4, On an undescribed Pimelepterus from Port Jackson. By J. Doveras Ocriey, Department
; of Fishes, Austr. Mus. Sydney. (Communicated by F. Day, C.1.E., F.Z.S.)........ 539
a
:
5. On the South-African Tortoises allied to Testudo geometrica. By G. A, Bou.encrr.
ka | ar see Vi Nas age NW MDs) tare Sen ie Syed Stora ow: < Queso /6/< mia 5: (6.5 MINI w «:.0.3\ 6:0 mie ioe o/aigim'e vie 540
6. Remarks on Prof. W. K. Parker's paper on the Skull of the Chameleons. By G. A.
peta YESH CTs ahaocaieas erpeatet eam tian’ fer caee a RIA) oleieis elehele( Scie, a Pat's «5, ME oo giao 4 Guys ahers 543
7. On the Wallaby commonly known as Lagorchestes fasciatus. By Orprierp Tuomas,
Natural tustory Museum. | (Plate WERs)) 60. Feces o. cscs ech neo vee edesivces 544
8. On Phascologale virginia, a rare Pouched Mouse from Northern Queensland. By Rosert
Rbaavirret tie Gl Me 219.00) (ENALO IECRE) oe Ries at oe) aitie cvensews wie tieg~ suet “Heda ase a. 548
December 21, 1886.
Th The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie in November 1886 .... 549
Se Mr. Howard Saunders. Exhibition of, on behalf of Mr. R. J. Howard, and remarks upon,
4 a specimen of a hybrid between the Tufted Duck and the Pochard ................ 550
ey
1. On Atavism. A Critical and Analytical Study. By J. Buanp Surron, F.R.O.S., Lecturer
on Comparative Anatomy, Middlesex Hospital, Erasmus Wilson Lecturer on Patho-
PoPaeE Nye eOOllop er OL PUNECONS 6 \abisisre.cieisics sissies sue v ets ce caessvicls veiaesauemgae H5t
2. On the Systematic Position and Classification of Sponges. By R. v. Lenprnrrxp, Ph.D.,
fk F.LS., Assistant in the Biological Laboratory of University College, London ........ 558
Ro: o Indian Earthworms.—Part I. Preliminary Notice of Earthworms from the Nilgiris
ret and Shevaroys. By Aurrep Gisss Bourne, D.Sc. (Lond.), F.LS8., Fell. Univ. Coll.
> _ Lond., Fell. Madras Univ., Professor of Biology in the Presidency College, Madras.
ow (Communicated by Prof. Ray Lanxester, F.Z.8.) 0.0 ..0c cece cece cece ee en ee tees 662
_ Appendix : List of Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the Year 1886.......... «. 673
‘Index. RROTAV SIAC ctereye isis =) 2s Ot ORE II ee oem Laer up athintas hc ease ee 699
LIST OF PLATES.
1886.
PASE FV,
Plate Page
- XL. | New Indian Lepidopt 42}
XL f ndian Lepidoptera ......-++++++++eeeeeeerereeerses
XLIT.
Sue Anatomy of Geococcyx californianus ...........+... wweer 466
XL:
XLVI. Scelidotherium leptocephalum ....-+++++-+.+seeeceeeeeee )
XLVIT. Scelidotherium bravardi) ......6....00cce se cece ceseeee |
XLVIIT. Scelidotherium’chilense ...... 6... .dej-eeeecceceee cece . f 491
XLIX. Fig. 1. Scelidotherium bravardi. Fig.2. S.chilense. Fig. 3.
8. leptocephalum. Fig. 4. ? 8. bravardi........++..-- )
L. Fig.1. Bombinator bombinus. Fig. 2. B. igneus.......+- -.. 499
DI. Gazella maso 2. is. b. ese cee tenes cee e seen sees creet nse 504
Lil. cee
LITT. } Structure of Ovum in*the Dipnoi ....... aie ai wan bY Minhas oferore -.. 505
LIV. : e :
LV. Squaloraja-..... hg TOE Le eevee See) Saree + 527
Ha --s Conunuserubriorguis cate <a e certcreyetoran deine viclvisaele --- 538
TVD Mestuda trgmeny. ces « cstsieteten ae an spies, c efeicie ace iakatel doiaiateietas 540
DV VEE Vestn ciskie oz <laje.ecs precio avsue afekna-s wo eta iatelo atest Dein ae
LIX. Figs. 1-7. Lagostrophus fasciatus. Figs. 8-12. Teg eioe?
Isporoilest <5 ai: 25.:.-5°5 fe betes. Cemeteries Be et er
PEP een malen var panties voir oie!» vie cs ass alah oases 548
NOTICE.
According to present arrangements the ' Proceedings’ are issued in fowr parte,
as follows :—
Part I. containing papers read in January and February, on June lst.
Ee 2 ee Ceo March and April, on August Ist.
Te: z ie .. May and June, on October Ist.
IV. os , November and December, on April Ist.
The price is 12s. per part for the edition with coloured, and 3s. per part for
that with uncoloured Plates.
~
v
d
By
mo
Bit ns es
wy,
at pan fe 7 one a 7 ” , A it, ae ay
{eee aust) Cen ; 7
a
Shee
Wee Ms nN
on Aa , Nit shy
F
M
a
a
Y
st +
a
st
tes
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11